BfiHBBRmB 



IfflSB 



wBBB&mmm 



fBBBBBS&Bi 



m 



Ban 

Mb 



m 



HP 

dm 

Hfl 

UHBlffi 



i 

Bra 



m 



m 



fHHB 

HI 

Hffill 
Han 



R 































e -S- 



r^ «,' 












-V 



^ ' ^ 










St 



*p 


















































I 



























& * 



\ Qc U. 










^ ^. 






</. .^ 






^ 






c^ 5 









X ^ 



S 






^ V* . i 






v * 



uv 



? .d 5 



y- fl^JJ 



V 



















^\ 



0.^ ** o> V * 



% 






















■ 



• '%- 



■• 



cP 



































<** 



> 



" 


















J 



OLLENDORFF'S 

NEW METHOD 



OF LEARNING TO 



READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 



THE 



FRENCH LANGUAGE: 



THE LESSONS 

DIVIDED INTO SECTIONS OP A PROPER LENGTH FOR DAILY 
TASKS, AND NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS, ADDITIONS, AND 



BY V. VALUE. 



TO WHICH ARE ADDED 

VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, 
HIS GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, A NEW INDEX, 

AND SHORT MODELS OF 

COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 



NEW YORK: 
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY. 

PHILADELPHIA: 

GEO. S. APPLETON, 164 CHESTNUT ST. 

M DCCC LI. 






Entered, according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by 

D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
District of New York. 



44<>O l 2'2 



Notice. — A KEY to the Exercises of this Grammar is pub- 
lished in a separate volume. 



PREFACE. 



In undertaking to edit an improved edition of Ollendorff's French 
Grammar, I may be allowed to state my personal familiarity and 
experience with the system which I have practically taught for many 
years. However, as the Method is called a New Method; if it deserves 
that title, its active principle must differ from that of the old mode 
of tuition, and consequently any one, let him be ever so talented, 
who, without being well acquainted with its modus operandi, would 
attempt to correct, improve, or compose a work based on that princi- 
ple, would be as likely to fail, as an experienced stage-driver would 
be, if he were to endeavor to take the management of a steam or loco- 
motive engine. It is then incumbent on me to show that I am fully 
acquainted with the fundamental principle of that New Method. 

In 1832, before the publication of Ollendorff's or Manesca's System, 
I published a pamphlet entitled " Experience Consulted; or V. Value's 
System for teaching Modern Languages." At page 3 of the introduc- 
tion, is this passage : 

1 ' We will merely notice that the principle which furnishes the stu- 
dent with the means, from the first lesson, of forming his own sentences, 
or, in other words, of making an immediate and continued use of the words 
he learns, so as to speak, will appear new to the public, although it has 
here been acted upon for many years." 

At page 5, will be found : 

" Since the means ought always to be made subservient to the end 
In view, and since immediate is in direct opposition to postponed use, we 
must reverse the practice usually adopted, and consequently furnish 
the student with words susceptible of inter- combinations, instead of 
teaching him such as, not being combinable together, cannot be incor- 
porated into the same sentence, and must, of course, render his efforts 
entirely fruitless." 

This is what Ollendorff has practically carried out ; and, as I have 
long used his system, its details are perfectly familiar to me. 

The difference in the extent of the lessons cannot have escaped the 
notice of teachers and scholars who have practically used the work. 
Th« 1st, 2d, and 3d are of a proper length for one recitation, even 

(3) 



IV PREFACE. 

with an ordinary capacity ; but from the 4th they begin to assume a 
size that makes it difficult to learn one, at a single lesson. True, a 
part only of a lesson may be assigned as a task, but the teacher must 
then daily ascertain the extent of the lesson, in order to portion it 
according to the capacity of his class. With a private scholar, even 
with a private class, that may be done without much inconvenience ; 
but the case is different when applied to classes in schools, where 
more regularity and uniformity are required, and where, the scholars 
having to pass quickly from one study to another, have no time allowed 
for measuring the fractional part they ought to have for the next reci- 
tation. With the view of remedying this serious objection, the equali- 
zation of the lessons was thought expedient. 

To divide each long lesson into two, three, or four small ones, would 
in a great measure have destroyed the unity which characterizes each 
particular and successive lesson in the book. This was thought objec- 
tionable ; and hence the idea of dividing each lesson, according to its 
length, into two, three, or four sections, so as to obtain the equaliza- 
tion of the parts without destroying the unity of the whole. 

It is what has been accomplished, and which is now presented to the 
American public. 

One of the strongest proofs that can be adduced of the superiority 
of the principle here followed is that, in spite of the numerous faults, 
inaccuracies, defects, omissions, and errors with which the former book 
is teeming, scholars learn, and learn well. The half of those errors 
would destroy the reputation of any other grammar or method, was 
not the fundamental principle so self-efficient. Those defects are like 
grades on a railroad : they may partially impede the way, but the 
moving power of the engine easily overcomes them. We will notice a 
few of them. At page 24, we find : 
This or that ox. This or that hay. Ce bceuf. Ce foin. 

As the three words this or that are translated by ce alone, it is very 
natural that the student should, in the fourteenth line of the 13th 
Exercise, translate " Has the peasant this or that ox?" by " Le paysan 
a-t-il ce boeuf ?" and nothing more ; and the answer, " He has neither 
this nor that," by "II n'a ni ce," without adding anything else. 

This is one of those results that experience alone can teach and 
record ; and which no reasoning a priori could suggest. At the same 
time it shows how carefully we must weigh and analyse the expres- 
sions offered to the learner. For, in this instance, the error came not 
from any fault of his ; but solely from the combination of the three 
words this or that being carelessly translated by ce. To obviate the 
difficulty, say : this, that — ce ; this, that ox — ce boeuf. And then, when 
he comes to : this or that ox, he cannot possibly translate by ce boeuf 
alone, but he will use Ce bocuf-ci ou cclui-la, &c. Some may consider 






PREFACE. V 

this as a trifle. So it is ; but the teacher's or author's business is to 
give right directions. Below will be found a few of Ollendorff's 
defects. 1 

The e grave has purposely been placed on the e of siege, privilege, &c, 
to conform to the pronunciation ; although, from mere habit or whim, 
those words usually have an acute accent, (siege.) 

Some have found fault, because the feminine was not introduced 
before the 55th Lesson; but experience proves it to be one of the hap- 
piest innovations in the Method. 

The manner here adopted, of forming the subjunctive present from 
the third person plural of the indicative present, and of placing that 
third person plural at the head of the tense, will have a tendency to 
make the acquisition of the tense much more easy. For instance : 
Boivent, boive, boives, boive, being pronounced in the same way, may 
be considered as a single word, already known to the student, (since it 
is the third person plural of the indicative present,) and the first and 
second persons plural being similar to those of the imperfect, the pupil 
has in fact nothing new to learn. He actually knows the tense before 
he comes to it. 

A great portion of the difficulties attending the subjunctive, arise from 
the manner of presenting that mood, in the conjugations intended to teach 
French to the Americans. It is one of the most inaccurate and deficient 
parts of all grammars. From its nature, the subjunctive being subser- 

1 At page 22, we find personne and ne separated by a hyphen (-) — wrong. 

30. Porte-feuille, no directions anywhere how to form the plural of 

compound nouns of this class. 
73. What, nominative, que : it should be qu'est-ce qui? (No trifle.) 
73. Obs.B. wrong. 60. To, "with whom, for, to whose house : chez qui. 
90. Soldier in 71st Exercise, the French given only at 160. 
104. Do and Am, for all persons and tenses, should be for the present 

tense. 
112. Obs. A. "wrong, because the preposition does not belong to the se- 
cond, but to the first verb. The list there given by Ollendorff 
is transferred to the Synopsis, because the verbs not being 
introduced in the exercises, uselessly encumber the lesson. 
118, 119. Rules on the past participles, not fully explained. The word 
object, applied both to le, les, and en, show that the author was 
not aware of their difference in French. 
188, 141. How long. No explanation, so that the pupil is constantly at a 
loss. 
169. Je, me, (separated.) Wrong; they should be connected. 
183. Rule on the future and note below, wrong. 199. Obs. E. defective. 
208. oth and 6th line of Exercise : Has he already kept something from 
you ? wrongly translated by A-t-il deja gardS quelque chose de 
vous ? 
245. Obs. A. not correct. 273. Obs. A. wrong. 325. Obs. A. wrong 
389. Tl s'en faut beaucoup, a knotty poini uselessly presented to the 
student, who can already translate in several ways the ques- 
tions there asked, &c. &c 
1* 



VI PREFACE. 

vient to, or governed by an antecedent, can separately have no specific 
meaning, and ought consequently never to be used by itself. Now, as 
in grammars, the subjunctive is mostly given by itself, independently 
of the governing expression, it follows that the English translation 
attached to it, is calculated to lead into numerous errors. Let us 
select a few examples. In the verb, to have, avoir ; to know, savoir ; 
to go, aller ; the subjunctive present is in all grammars, and in Ollen- 
dorff's also, given thus: que fate, that I may have; que je sache, that 1 
may know ; que faille, that I may go; and as the English is the 
prototype of the French, the student must necessarily connect the 
idea of the French subjunctive with that I may, and with no other 
English. Hence the phrases, William says that I may have his dic- 
tionary ; She says that I may know my lesson ; He thinks that I may 
go ; having each the English that I may, which is intimately linked in 
the student's mind with the French subjunctive, must inevitably lead 
him to use that mood, and translate by, Guillaume dit que faie son 
dictionnaire ; Elle dit que je sache ma lecon; II croit que faille. And 
such translations would hardly be understood by the very authors of 
the grammars, if unconnected with the English. Now, such modes of 
expression abound in English: what an inexhaustible source of mis- 
takes ! ! But this is not all ; it is only one side of the medal ; let us 
see the reverse. The French subjunctive being connected exclusively 
with that I may, will never be thought of, when this prototype does not 
constitute a part of the English phrase: consequently, I must have; 
unless I know ; he wishes me to go ; cannot by the student be translated 
by the French subjunctive mood ; for they do not remind him of his 
English prototype, that I may, which alone can recall the idea of the 
French subjunctive. Here, then, is another source of innumerable 
errors. What a sad dilemma is then presented to the student ! Both 
the presence and the absence of his prototype mislead his steps. He 
is in an intricate labyrinth, and there is no Ariadne to furnish him 
with a clew to escape. 

The unpleasant dilemma in which the student is involved, is avoided 
by always presenting the subjunctive mood, as I do, in connexion with 
the expression by which it is governed. 

All those defects and many others have t)een rectified. The Gram- 
matical Synopsis will be found to contain many useful explanations, 
the result of experience. The Preterit, Conditionncl, Imperative, Sub- 
junctive, the Reflected Verbs, the Negations, arc new and important 
articles. It was thought preferable to transfer into the Synopsis many 
of the rules and directions given in the body of Ollendorff's work, so 
as to have under the same head everything relating to the subject it 
treats of. 

V. VALUE. 



CONTENTS. 



Preface Page iii 

System of Pronunciation . . . . ix 

Directions for using the Method ... xxiii 

Explanation of the Signs used in this book . . ... xxiv 

Lessons— 1 to 86 25-456 

Grammatical Synopsis . , ... 457 

Recueil Epistolaire . . 539 

Index ....... . . 547 

Idiomatical Expressions . . . . . .575 



Directions for using V. Value's System of French Pro- 
nunciation, by which an accurate knowledge of the sounds 
of that Language may be acquired in a few Lessons 



AFTER READING THE DEFINITION OF VOWELS. 

Teacher. — Please to pronounce the English word, add. 

Student pronounces it. 

T. — What is the sound of the letter a in that word ? 

S. gives it, if he can. If he does not give it correctly, the teacher 
does it, and tells him to dwell on the sound ; as, aaaa-d, and finally 
aaa . . . alone, so as to abstract the sound of the vowel a. When done — 

T. — This is the sound of the French letter a, marked 1 on the 1st 
column, aaa, a. 

S. repeats the prolonged sound. 

T. — Whenever you wish to ascertain the French sound, marked 1 
(one), you must recur to the English word add, and you cannot miss it. 

S. repeats the word, prolongs the sound aaa, and abstracts it, a. 

T. — The sound of a (with a circumflex accent), marked l 2 (one two, 
to show that it is the second sound of the same letter a), is found in 
the word far . .faaa-r ... a. Pronounce the word, dwell upon the vowel 
Bound, and abstract it. 

S. tries to do it. If he does not succeed, the teacher must go 
through the same process as for the a of add. When done — 

T. — In what English word do you find the French sound marked 1 
(one) ? S. gives it. 

T. — What is the sound ? S. gives it. 

T. — How is it represented ? S. — By the letter a, in add. 

T. — In what word do you find l 2 (one two) ? S. gives it. 

T. — What is the sound ? S. gives it. 

T. — How is it represented ? S. — By the letter a, with a circumflex. 

T. —What is the last sound in the word take ? 

S. tries to give it. If he cannot, the teacher will do it, and tell 
him to dwell on the sound e e e — ta-ke-e e e. This is in fact the sound 
heard at the end of every English consonant sounded. The name of 
this letter (k) is hay ; but its sound in bank, for instance, is not bankay, 
but bank e e, ending with a prolonged mute sound, which is exactly 
the sound of the French mute e. It is a very important sound with 
them ; it is marked 2 (little two), to indicate its faintness. 

The cough sound, as I have called it (marked 2), is that heard in 
the French words peu, deux. If, in coughing, both teacher and pupil 
get that sound, it will be secured ; but if they do not, then the teacher 

(9) 



X FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

must make him pronounce either deux or peu, and make him refer the 
sound to the word he pronounces best, and retain the word as a model. 

The letter u, marked 6, represents the sound heard immediately 
after s, in sweet, as it is usually pronounced by Americans. However, 
some say sooeet. With those, the teacher must devise some way to 
make them pronounce the u properly. 

The French nasal sounds are not difficult to acquire ; for the Ameri- 
cans have many words in which they give to an, in, on, un, the same 
sound as the French do ; but, in general, they end it by dwelling 
separately on the n, while the French never do. With the latter it is 
a simple or a vowel sound ; with the former, a compound one. For 
instance, the English combination in is pronounced ee-n, having 
nothing of a nasal nature at the beginning, but ending with the full 
nasal sound of n, thus presenting two distinct parts, while the French 
in has but one sound, as heard in the ain of faint, or en of pent. So 
that, to pronounce the French nasal sound properly, you must retain 
throughout the sound you begin with, and not dwell separately on 
the n. 

ON DIVIDING AND MARKING WORDS. 

There are, at pages xv, xvi, xvii, xviii, words given to be divided into 
syllables, and to be marked. When the pupil has learned as far as 
the words to be divided, (page xv, a very important one,) let him, on 
some paper or a slate, divide the first word thus : fi-ni, saying Den- 
tally, the first syllable must be fi, in order to end in a vowel sound, ana 
because the n being followed by the vowel, I must go with it; the second 
syllable is ni. The vowel sound of the first is i, like the e in be, 
marked 4, which is to be put under fi. The vowel sound of the second 
is also 4 ; so that the word divided and marked will assume this form : 
fi-ni. The second, me-ne, &c. 
4 4 2 3 

Let the pupil take but one line here at a time ; then proceed with the 
rules at xv and xvi, dividing and marking the few words they contain 
as examples, until he comes to the paragraph (page xvi) of words to 
be divided and marked, then he must take one line of them, with the 
one at page xv. When, in going through the other rules, at xvi and 
xvii, he comes to the paragraph of words (p. xvii) to be divided, let 
him take one line there also, with those at xv, xvi, &c. This gradual 
progress by line is essential ; for, the words to be divided and marked, 
although intended to exemplify the rules under particular heads, 
contain rules belonging to other sections, which the student is thus 
enabled to reach just in time to divide and mark them correctly. 

I have said, one line at a time ; but, although the progress must be 
gradual, it must vary according to the aptness of the class or scholar; 
for, in some instances, two lines will hardly be enough ; while, in 
others, three words would be too much. The teacher must be guided 
by < irGumstances. 



FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 
BY V. VALUE 



Table I. — Vowel Sounds. 

Vowels are simple sounds, which can be lengthened without any 
change in the position of the organs that produce them. 



The French 



^ther combinations. 



1 
l 2 

2 

2 
2 2 
3 

32 | 

4 
5 

S 2 
6 
7 
8 

9 



sounds 



ew* 

eu 

e (acute) 

e (grave) \ 

e (circumflex) J 

1 





u 

ou 

an, en 

in 



as 


a 


in add 


a, 


ea. 




as 


a 


in far 


ea. 






as 


e 


at end of take. 








as 


the cough sound 


f eu, 
I eu, 


ceu. 




as 


u 


in bwd f 


ceu, eu 


, oeu, 03. 


as 


a 


in gate 


rai, 


ei, (er, 


ez, final.) 


as 


e 


in get f 


lai, 


ai, ei. 




as 


e 


in be 


1, ] 


7 (i grec 


). 



as in no 

as in nor 

as in sweet 

as 00 in good 

as an in warct 

as ain in faint 



10 on as on in wont 

11 un as un in grwrat 

Table II.- 



o, au, eau, eo, eo. 
6, au, eau, eo, eo. 
u, u, (eu, in avoir.) 
ou, ou. 
am, em, en, aon. 

{im, in, aim, ain, ein, ym, 
yn (en, final.) 
om, eon. 
um, eun. 



-Two Irregular Diphthongs. 

12. oi sounds like wa in water — or (ou-|-a) (7-f-l 2 ) 01. 

13. oin sounds like uain in <\uaint — or (ou-j-in) (7+9). 

They are irregular, because in those combinations the • and the o 
change their primitive sounds. As in regular diphthongs each vowel 
retains its proper sound, they offer no difficulty 



* There is in peu, deux, heureux, v&ux, Sec, a sound of French eu, ceu, that has 
no representation in English, except the guttural sound heard in coughing ; heugh ! 
heugh! (if so spelt.) It is between the u of budge and the final e of the same 
word. In French it is not guttural, and not difficult to sound. 

t Rules will be given to determine the sound of these combinations^ 

11 



Xll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

Every French sound having a representative in an English word, it 
is evident that the mere recollection of the English word secures the 
pronunciation of the French sound, and secures it effectually ; for the 
scholar is expected to be correct in the utterance of his own language. 
(See Appendix, Note 1.) 

Table III. — French Consonants differing in Sound from the English 

14. g (with a cedilla) like s before a, o, u — sa, so, su. 

15. ch, in French words, like sh in show. 

16. gn sounds like the gn of mignonette. 

17. il, ill (when liquid), sounds like Ui, of briZZmnt. 

18. j (and g, which is always soft before e, i, and y), like z, in azure 

19. qu like k, — gu like g at the end of %. 

20. s like z, when single and between two vowels, — rose, nose. 

21. th sounds always like t alone. 

22. ti, when in English they sound like sh (as in naft'on, parent, &c), 
sound in French like the English word see. 

Table IV. — Consonant Letters. 

Consonants have no sound without the help of a vowel. Such is the 
definition; yet, in the word abstract, the b, the s, the t, and the r, &c, 
are each sounded, and sounded respectively as b in tube ; as s in base ; 
as t in rate ; and as r in glare ; or else, as if connected with the faint 
or mute French e, or e at the end of take. So that, any consonant 
sounded by itself, or at the end of a word, is supposed to be connected 
with the mute or faint e. 

Each consonant, in French, as in English, has a sound differing 
from its name. This distinction is important. Although the French 
names will be found in this table, yet the student is invited, particu- 
larly at first, to use the English names, bee, cee, dee, &c, or else the 
final sound of the English consonants, b, c, d, f, g, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, 
p, qu, r, s, t, v, x, z. 
b (bay), as in English at the end of mob. 
1 12 2 2 22 3 3 2 4 5 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 
ba, ba, be, beu, beu, be, be, bi, bo, bo, bu, bou, ban, bin, bon, bun, boi, boin. 
*c (say), hard before a, o, u, as the English k in ban&. 

ca, ca co, co, cu, cou, can, con, cun, coi, coin. 

c (say), soft, always before e, i, y, like s in so. 

ce, ceu, ceu, ce, ce, ci, cy, cin. 

c (say), hard, as k before a consonant or at the end of a word. Ac, 
cla, ere, creu, creu, cle\ cle, cti, oc, cdo, ctu, clou, cran. crin, 
cloi, cloin. 
^c (with a cedilla), only before a, o, u, like s in so, instead of k. 9a, 
9a, ce, ceu, ce, ce, ci, 90, 9U, cou, van, cin, con, 91111, <;oi, 90m. 

*c, in second and its compounds, sounds like £ hard — segon, — seeondaire, Sec 
f See Table III. 



FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. Xlll 

*ch (say, ash), like sh in show, cha, cha, che, cheu, cheu, che, che, 
chi, cho, cbu, chou, chan, chin, chon, chun — choi, choin. 

d (day), as in English at the end of lac?. Note. — When final, it sounds 
like t, if united to the following initial vowel ; as grand ami, pro- 
nounced gran tami — da, da, de, &c. 

i as in English in proof. Note. — In neuf (9) it sounds 

/(eff), j like v, if joined with the following vowel; as neuf 

ph (pay, ash), j hommes, pronounced, neu-vom — ph, does not — fa, fa, 
V^ fe, feu, &c. 

g (zhay,) hard, ax ways before a, o, u, or a consonant, like g hard in 
the English word bay — garde, fagot, figure, gloire. Note. When 
final, like k, if joined to the following vowel; as, rang honorable — 
pronounced, ran-konorable. ga, ga, go, go, gu, gou, gan, gon, 
gun— goi, goin. 

*g (zhay), always soft before e, i, y, — like z in azure — gea, gea, ge, 
geu, geu, ge, ge, gi, geo, geo, — geou, gean — gin, geon, geun — 
geoi, geoin. 

*gn (zhay, enn), like gn in mignonette. Note. — If g and n are separated, 
they sound as in English in magna, mag-na. 

*gu, like g hard. The u is usually silent. 

h (ash). This letter, at the beginning of words, is called either mute 
or aspirated ; but it is never sounded. The word aspirated usually 
leads the English student to think that the h in French must have 
the same guttural sound as in English ; but that is not the case. 
When aspirated in French the h, without being pronounced, pre- 
vents the elision or cutting off of the preceding vowel. For instance, 
the h being aspirated in the French word heros (hero), you must 
write le heros (the hero), and pronounce le ero in two words. On 
the contrary, when the h is mute, you write Vhomme (the man) and 
pronounce Vom, in one word. But in both cases the h is entirely 
silent — ha, ha, he, heu, &c. 

*f (zhee), always soft, like z in azure, joujou — ja, ja, je, jeu, &c. 

k (kah), as k in English at the end of pac& — ka, ka, ke, &c. 

eh (say, ash), when followed by a consonant, like k, as in English. 
Christ. Note. — It is usually in words of foreign origin. 

I (ell), as in English, when not liquid, as in until. La, la, le, &c. 

*l (ell mouille), liquid, always written il, ill, sounds like the lli of the 
English word briZftant. Examples : Ail, aille, paille, veille, fille, 
juillet, oeil. — Ilia, ilia, ille, illeu, illeu, ille, ille, illo, illo, illu, 
illou, illan. illan. illin, illon, illun, illoi, iiloin. 

m (emm), ) as in English, when not combined with the preceding vowel 

n (enn), /sound, as in clam, din — ma, me, mo, &c. 



* See Table 111. 



XIV FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

P (pay), as in English in pump. Note. — Silent after m, when they are 

in the same syllable, as prompt, temps. Pa, pa, &c. 
q (ku), as in English like k. 
qu (ku-u), like the English k, not the English qu, as quand, Jean ; qui, 

kee, not kwee. Do not mark qu 6, and i 4, but qui (4) ; qua, qua, 

que, queu, queu, que\ que, qui, quo, quo, qu, quou, quan, quin, 

quon, qu'un, quoi, quoin. 
r (air), as in English in roar — strongly articulated — ra, ra, re, &c. 
* (ess), hard, like s in so. 

1st. At the beginning of words, as sage. 

2d. When final and pronounced, as atlas, moeurs. 

3d. When doubled, as passer, possession. 

4th. Single and preceded by another consonant; as conserver, 
absolu, observation. Note. — Although the English s fre- 
quently sounds like a z, after the letter b, as in absolve, 
observe, &c, it does not in French; — sa, sa, se, &c. 
*s (ess), soft or like z, when single and between two vowels, as plaesant, 

rose. Note. — When final, if joined to the following vowel, it sounds 

like z ; as Us ont, eelzon,f &c. ; — asa, ase, aseu, ase, as6, asi, iso, 

iso, isu, isou, esan, esin, eson, asun, usoi, usoin. 
t (tay), as in English in fatf. — ta, ta, te^ teu, teu, &c. 
*ti (tay ee). Note. — When the ti, in English, sounds like sh, as in 

nation, patient, minutice, the French ti sounds like see in English. 

Examples : Na^'on, parent, minute, — tia, tia, tie, &c. 
*th (tay, ash), like the English initial t. Examples : Thalie, tfAeatre, 

— tha, tha, the, theu, theu, the, the, &c. 
v (vay), as in English at the end of drive — va, va, ve, veu, &c. 
w (doeble vay), as v, or as the vowel ou (7th.) 

k ks gz 

x (eeks), like k, ks, gz, s, z ; as ezcepter, extreme, exercice, Bruzelles, 

z 

(Brussels), smeme. 
z (zed), as in phiz. Examples : Zone, azur, amazone. 

DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 

This is a very important exercise, and one which should be daily 
practised for a considerable time, and now and then renewed. 

In dividing the words, attend to the combination of letters in Tables 
I., II., III. For instance, in the word hautement, the combination au, 
being at No. 5 in Table I., take them together and mark them 5 2 . In 
hua, the combination ua not being in the table, separate them into u 
and a, and mark them 6 and 1. So with oi, which being in Table VL t 



* See Table III. 

f And sometimes before m, as onthousiasme, mesmerisme. 



FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XV 

is marked 12, whilst io must be separated, because that combination 
is not in the tables. Ai, in the table ; ia, not in, &c. 

The apostrophe (') is used to connect two words into one, and takes 
the place of a vowel suppressed before another. Ueau sounds just 
like lo ; qu'avez-vous? like kahvayvoo. 

The end of ant syllable must be a vowel sound. This is an all- 
important direction. Note. A vowel sound may (as is the case with an, 
en, in, on, oin, &c.) end with a consonant letter. 

A consonant, when final or sounded by itself, is supposed to form a 
compound syllable with the mute or faint e. So chef is separated into 
che-fe ; avec into a-ve-ke ; fil into fi-le ; ver into ve-re ; porte into 
po-r-te. Hence each consonant is marked 2 from the faint e. 

m or n, mm or nn, followed by a vowel, goes with it ; if not, it goes 
with the preceding. Image separates into i-ma-ge, and not as in Eng- 
lish (im-age). Note, h after n is always null. Inherent separates into 
i-nhe-rent, (the h being mute, is null in inherent;) inhumain, becomes 
i-nhu-main ; inhumaine, i-nhu-mai-ne. 

Divide and mark : — Fini, mene, promene, amene, ananas. Homme 
becomes ho-mme ; donne, do-nne ; comme, commune, commere, connu, 
somme, pomme, adonna, ronde, campagne, enfant, son, mon, pardon, 
parfum, instrument, commun, commence, innocent, inoui, inhabit^, 
continental, inharmonieux, immobilite. 

A final consonant having no vowel connected with it, ought, from its 
definition, to be silent. It is so in French. Hence it is united to the last 
syllable, or to a monosyllable ; as, avant becomes a-vant — the final t 
being silent goes with van, so as to make vant ; four letters, although 
but three (van) are pronounced. In the French word port the four 
letters are taken, although only por are pronounced ; but porte becomes 
por-te, because the last ^causes the t to sound. 

Divide and mark: — Comment, dents, prudent, prudente, camp, 
temps, nid, pied. (4-4-3.) 

Rule. — Final consonants are silent, except c, /, I, and r preceded by 
a, i, o, u. Sac, avec, lac, vif, actif, sel, miel, fil, car, par, finir, cor, 
Leur, auteur. See Appendix, Note 2. 

RULES ON FRENCH E. 

Letters and Combinations, marked 2 {little two), and pronounced like the e at 
the end of take.* 

Any sound marked 2 (little two) is in French called mute or faint ; 
e (without accent) is mute or faint, in the following cases. 

Rule 1st. e = 2 at the end of words, as ce, de, traite, pere, donrce, 
heure. 

* This is the only vowel sound that is slighted or suppressed in French — a, #, i, 
o, u, &e., have always their full sounds. 



XVI FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

Rule 2d. e= 2 before a single consonant not final, (except the con- 
sonant x, which has usually a compound sound.) Venn, devant, 
recevoir, demande, redemande. 

Rule 3d. e= 2 before two consonants, the second of which is I, or r; 
as in replace, represente, secretement, repliant. 

Rule 4th. es= 2 at the end of words of more than one syllable, as 
Bibles,* places, dites, faites. 

Rule 5th. ent= 2 at the end of the third person plural of verbs ; as 
chanted, ils jouent, ils disaiew^. When immediately after a vowel, with- 
out any intervening consonant, they merely lengthen the preceding 
vowel sound. 

Rule 6th. 2 is placed over a consonant sounded by itself, either in 
the body or at the end of a word, for the e mute is supposed connected 
with it. Examples : pour, pou-r ; corde, co-r-de ; fil, fi-1 ; soldat, 
so-l-dat. 

Observation. — E is null, and therefore not marked, when, without 
an accent, it is before a and o, as George, nageait. It is frequently 
so in English, as George, pageant, dungeon. It is thus placed to soften 
the g. When pronounced in French, the e is accented. 

These constitute what the French call mute syllables. 

Divide and mark : — Le, me, que, tete, habite, eleve, montagne, revenu, 
revenant, devoir, repos, repose, reposant, celui, retire, retire", cede, 
cede, ace able, devant, replace, replagant, repli, replie, une, moine, 
moins, prenant, refuse, tu refuses, vie, lui, joue, jou6e, petit, petite, 
il entre, ils entrent (3d pers. pi.) montagnes, ils replacent (3d), voies, 
Aleves, ils prient (3d), ils disent (3d), poindre, mangea, mangeames, 
Georgie, col, protocol, sel, chef, il, foin, cordial, plongea, seul, parasol. 

IMPORTANT REMARK ON E MUTE. 

When e without accent is mute or faint, it invariably (we may even 
say universally) lengthens the preceding syllable. 

In French, in the following cases, it does not merely lengthen, but it 
likewise alters the sound of the preceding vowel. 

o, eti, before a mute syllable, is open and marked l 2 : male. 

e, before a mute syllable, usually takes the grave or circumflex 
accent, and is marked 3 2 or e open : pere, mere, meme. 

at, ai y ei, before a mute syllable, are marked 3 2 : aime, connaitre, 
peine. 

o, 6, au, eau, before a mute syllable, 5 2 : pgriode, cote, haute. 

ew = 2 2 , before a mute syllable: rie?/se, mttfte.f 

The same vowel sounds, viz: a, e, ai, &c, o, &o., cu, are open and 
marked in the same manner, before tico or more consonants ; as, apre, 



* See Appendix, Note 3. f See Appendix. Note 4. 



FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XVU 

ferme, paraitre, faible, autre, noble, heurte. And likewise before a 
final consonant sounded: ver, fer, air, chef, cor, parasol, leur, seul. 
Because, in both cases, the following consonant is supposed to be con- 
nected with the e mute or faint, and may be considered as forming a 
mute syllable : ve-re, fe-re, ai-re, che-fe, co-re, &c. In these two last 
situations (before two or more consonants and before a final consonant 
sounded) the e takes no accent, though marked 3 2 . 

Divide and mark : — Changea, changeames, ane, hate, diademe, bref, 
plonge, plongerent (3d), frere, nagea, nageates, 4eve, promene, prome- 
nera, supreme, rieur, rieuse, haut, haute, cote, cote, cotes, ose, relief, 
ose, saut, saute, osant, gueux, gueuse, saute, sonne, sonne, liberte, 
fameux, fameuse, faible, heureux, heureuse, espoir, aube, ode, odeur, 
preneur, preneuse, sel, mer, sec, bonheur, malheur, eleves, gloire, 
mouvoir, 6gale, e"gales, e"gout, retirent (3d), seche, sec, compagnes, 
egalera, entreprises, replantent (3d), bonnes, egalerent, mangeates, 
petites, pour, mer, noircir, George, lient (3d), jouent (3d), concounr, 
foui, fouine, neige, neigea, yoient (3d), bel, beau, belle, vendent (3d), 
vendant, content, content (3d), neigeant, plongea, replongerent (3d), 
diagonal, replient (3d), moindre. 

Letters and Combinations marked 3, and pronounced like a in gate, or 6 
(close or with acute accent.) 

Rule 1st. e (with acute accent) called e close, is marked 3. 

Rule 2d. e=B in the conjunction et (and). The t is never sounded, 
and never connected with the following initial vowel : un et un (un 6 
un) ; et enfin (e enfin). 

Rule 3d. e = 3 before cc, dd, ff t or any other double consonants not 
followed by a mute syllable : effacer, dessin, reddition, excellent, terri- 
toire, paresseux. 

Rule 4th. e=3 in ex followed by a vowel: exact, eziger. The x 
sounds then like gz, egzact, egzige. 

Rule 5th. e2 = 3 when final, or taken in combination at the end of 
words ; as avez, prenez, nez. 

Rule 6th. er=3, when final, in words of more than one syllable; 
and then the r is never sounded, as parZer, pommier.* 

Rule 7th. ai, eai, ei= 3, when not followed by a mute syllable, and 
likewise when final : Tax, aimer, to love — aimons, let us love — -je man- 
geai, I ate — peine, grieved — gai, gay. 

Divide and mark the following words : — Ete, e'-te' ; alle, a-lle ; e'carte', 
borde, chante, repete, decide, pile, peigne, et, trois et un, errant, 
erronne, ecclesiastique, efface, errata, exag^rer, effacer, exactement, 
essai, ^carter, 6cartez, effort, bouchez, bouches, exister, existez, exil, 

* See Appendix, Note 5. 
2* 



XVlll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

efFarouche, eflfarouch6, exaction, e*carte, paresseux, paresseuse, tu 
donnes, effaroucher, donnes, eifarouchez, donnez, donner, causai, et 
avec, et au, et apres, verrai, prendrai, ain6, la et ici, et avant, peinai, 
aimant, aimez, aime, neige, neigeant, neiger, mangeai, nous nageons, 
demangeaison, raison, plaisir, peignant, plein, pleine, peigne, chez, 
rendez-vous, prendrai, peindrai, effrene, effarouches. 

Letters and Combinations marked 3 2 , and pronounced like e in get, or e 
*■ (grave or open) and e. 

Rule 1st. e (with a grave accent) called e open, and also e, marked 3 2 . 

Rule 2d. e=3 2 in monosyllables ending with a consonant; as ces, 
des, est, les, Tnes, ses, tes, &c. Note. — If the consonant is c, f, I, or r, 
it sounds after the e; as, sec, se-k; chef, che-f ; sel, se-1; ver, ye-r. 

Rule 3d. e = 3 2 before two or more consonants; as, esperer, restons, 
liberte. Note. — The consonant that immediately follows the e is pro- 
nounced separately, and of course marked 2 : as esperer, e-s-pe-rer : 
restons, re-s-tons. 

Rule 4th. e=3 2 before double consonants, cc, ff, ss } rr f 11, &c, when 
the following syllable is mute : as nette, querelle, cesse, terre, richesse, 
paresse. 

Rule 5th. e=3 2 before a sounding final consonant; as avec, relief, 
miel, Oreb, hier,* respect; and in every monosyllable ending in er, as 
fer, mer. 

Rule 6th. ais, ait, aient, oient,\ aix, et=S 2 when final: as j'avais, il 
etait, ils e'taient, ils etoient, paix, objet. 

Rule 7th. e = 3 2 in ex, followed by a consonant; as extreme, experi- 
ence. Note. — The x is usually pronounced ks ; ekstreme, eksperience. 

Rule 8th. ai, eai, ei= 3 2 when followed by a mute syllable ; as aime, 
ai-je? peine, enseigne. 

Divide and mark: — Severe, scene, meme, supreme, mes, est, bref, 
sec, tel, mer, espoir, destitution, fermente, serment, telle, cette, quelle, 
piece, cachette, richesse, richesses, grief, griefs, miel, fiel, j'avais, tu 
avais, il donnait, ils portaient, elle joignait, ils jouaient (3d), fait, effet, 
elles e'taient, objet, sujet, portefaix, ils e'taient (3d), elles priaient (3d), 
venaient (3d), aime, seme', seme, aiment (3d), ils semerent (3d), peine, 
peine, peigne', peigne, secret, mene', mene, sain, saine, ancien, ancienne, 
le mien, les miens, les miennes, boulet, faite, Jeter, jette, baudet, cachet, 
met, mets, paix, expres, extravagant, extraordinaire, exposerent (3d), 
fer, ver. 



* See Appendix, Note 5. 

f oient ii the termination of the third person plural of the imperfect and condi- 
tional, old orthography. 






FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XIX 



VARIOUS EXPLANATIONS. 



e (without accent) =1, or sounds like French a in the combination 
emme. Examples : femme (pro. fam) — decemment, de-ce-mment. (3-f-l 
+8.) 

en at the end of words =9. Examples: bi-en, well; rien, nothing. 
Note. — In the words composed from Men, the combination en, although 
it may no longer be final, retains the ninth vowel sound. Examples : 
hi-en-tot, soon; bi-era-fe-sant, benevolent. 

en=9, in the termination tens, when s is the mark of the plural. 
Examples : mien, miens ; entretien, entretiens. 

en = 9, in the combinations ten, tens, tent, of the verbs tenir, to hold, 
to keep ; venir, to come, and their compounds. Examples: je vi-en- 
drai, I shall come; je tiens, I hold; elle convient, she agrees. 

en everywhere else, except in the termination ent of the third person 
plural, (see Rule 5 on e mute, page xiv.) always=8: entends, senti- 
ment, en. 

Remarks on the letter y. 

When the letter y in any word is preceded by a vowel, it .s equiva- 
lent to t, i. The first i unites with the foregoing vowel, and must be 
marked accordingly. The second i sounds separately, or unites with 
what follows. Examples : ayant, ai-i-ant ; citoyen, ci-toi-i-en ; pays, 
pai-is. 

The diaeresis (••) separatesHwo letters, which otherwise would sound 
together. Thus, in Saul, (the apostle's name,) au=5 2 ; but in the 
name of the Hebrew king Saul, with the diaeresis, a and u are sepa- 
rated, and pronounced Sa-u-1. (1, 6, 2 .) 

Of the liquid sounds, ail, eil, il, euil, 03il, ouil, ails, eils, &c. 

Note. — The sound of Hi in the English word brilliant is similar to 
the French liquid il, ill. 

When il or Us final is liquid, the preceding vowel is pronounced 
separately with its open sound, viz: a = l 2 , e—2> 2 , eu=2 2 , oe=2 2 , and 
then follows the liquid sound of il or ils= 17. Examples: ail, a-il; 
reveil, re-ve-il ; seuil, seu-il ; fenouil, fe-nou-il. Note. — azil is pro- 
nounced like euil. (2 2 , 17.) 

Those vowels, a, e, i, &c, have a long sound, because the il final is 
supposed to befolloiued by e mute. 

aill, eill, ill, euill, oeill, ouill. 

When folloiced by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel a, e, i, &c, 
sounds as it does with the final il, as explained above. Examples: 
pa-ill-e, ve-ill-e, fi-ill-e, feu-ill-e, fou-ill-e. 

When not folloiced by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is close, 



XX FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

viz: a=l, e=S, eu=2, #=2. Examples: ma-ill-et, ve-ill-er, pi-ill* 
a-ge, feu-ill-et, fou-ill-ant, oeillet, ce-ill-et. (2, 17, 3 2 .) 

cueil, gtteil, when final. 
In these combinations the u serves only to make the e and the g hard: 
the e represents the long sound of eu marked 2 2 , and the letters il have 
the liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-il, o-r-gue-il. 

ctjeill, gueill, not final. 

When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel sounds as it 
does with the final cueil, gueil, as explained above. Example: je re- 
cue-ill-e. 

When not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is short or 
close ; that is, e sounds like eu marked 2, and the letters ill have their 
usual liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-ill-ant, o-r-gue-ill-eux. 

Stress of the voice. 

The stress of the voice is placed on every vowel preceding a mute 
syllable. The faint or mute e is the only slighted sound, all the other 
vowels receive a full and distinct utterance. 

Entre ; en, distinct ; tre, faint — entreprise ; en, full ; tre, faint ; pri, 
full ; se, faint. In communication, every syllable is distinct, and the 
stress of the voice rests on the last. 



APPENDIX. 

Note 1, (page xii.) 

In this I differ totally from Mr. Charles Picot, who in his excellent 
system of pronunciation says (page 6): "The English words at, 
father, &g., are merely given as means of comparison and association, 
to enable the pupil to proceed from what he knows to what he is to 
learn, and must be dispensed with as soon as the sounds are well 
mastered." Far from discarding those words, I strongly recommend 
the scholar to retain them carefully as unerring guides. If they are 
useful at first, they must ever be so, and would it not be ungrateful 
to throw aside those that befriended us in the beginning of our career ? 
Treasure them up, therefore. 

Note 2, (page xv.) 

In French, final consonants are not generally pronounced ; for, not 
being followed by a vowel, they ought naturally to be silent. Hence 
the French words port and grand are pronounced as if written por and 



FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XXI 

gran; but the t and the d are pronounced as in English, when spelled 
in French with a final e, as porte, grande. 

The above observation will sufficiently explain why the final conso- 
nants are silent in the following 

Table, exhibiting the sixteen vowel sounds and two diphthongs, as represented 
at the end of words. 

No. 1. as, at, ats 12 at, ats. 

2 es, (in words of two syllables and more,) ent* 

2. eux, eut, oeud, ceuds, oeufs. 

2 2 . with this vowel, the next consonant sounds, as bceu/, leur, 
seuZ ; but the second consonant is silent ; leurs, soeurs, coeurs. 

3. aie, ed, eds, ee, ees, es, er, et (conjunction), ez. 

3 2 . ais, ait, et, es, ect, ets (and es in monosyllables), aient,* oient,\ 

4. id, ie, is, it, ies, ys. lent.* 

5. aud, aut, aux, op, os, ot, ots, auds, auts, eaux. 

5 2 . with this vowel, the consonant which immediately follows 
sounds. Examples : fol, Jacob, soc, cor ; but the second con- 
sonant is silent : socs, cors, mort, port. 

6. ue, ues, ut, uts, ud (and in the verb avoir, eus, eut, eue, eues), 

uent.* 

7. oue, oues, oud, ouds, oup, oups, ous, out, outs, oux. ouent* 

8. amp, amps, ant, ants, ems, emps, ent, ents, ans, ens. 

9. ins, int, ingt, ingts, ains, aint, ainc, aincs, eins, eint, eints, 

(en, ens.)% 

10. ons, ont, ond, onds, amb, ombs, ompt, one, ones. 

11. uns, urns. 

12. oie, oies, ois, oit, oid, oids, oix, oient.* 

13. oing, oins, oint, oints, oings. 

Note 3, (Page xvi.) 

The reason why es is marked 2 and pronounced like the faint e, may 
be stated as follows. 

In English, the book, the friend, my pen, &c, are expressions used in 
the singular number. Now, as the and my undergo no change in the 
plural number, should book, friend, and pen, be spelt and pronounced 
as before, there could be no distinction between the singular and the 
plural. To render that distinction sensible, an s is added to the end of 
each noun, (for the eye,) and is articulated to apprise the ear that the 
idea of plurality is intended. In French, on the contrary, the articles 
in the singular, le, la, being changed into les for the plural, mon, ma, 

* Third person plural of verbs. 

I oient, old orthography, third person plural of imperfect and conditional. 

j (en and ens) final, and in the verbs tenir, venir, and their compounds. 



XXll FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. 

into mes, &c, when those words les, mes, &c, are heard, they at once 
intimate to the ear that the plural is meant, hence the alteration of 
the noun becomes useless ; and although the s is added, (for the eye,) 
it is not pronounced, and of course final es is marked little 2 . 

Note 4, (page xvi.) 

The e mute or faint, marked little 2 , after a consonant, has the effect 
of lengthening and altering the sound of the preceding vowel or syl- 
lable, in English, as may be seen below. 

hat, on account of the faint e that follows, becomes hate ; 

met decomes mete ; bit becomes bite ; 

hop becomes hope ; tub becomes tube* 

In French the e mute always lengthens the preceding syllable, but it 
alters the vowel sound, when it is after a consonant, only in four 
instances, instead of doing it in every case, as in English. 

mal (marked 1) becomes male (marked l 2 ). 

heureux (2, 2), heureuse (2, 2 2 ); cede (3, 3), cede (3 2 , 2 ); haut (5), 
haute (5 2 , 2 ). Hence the following rule : 

Silent e lengthens the preceding syllable, and when the vowel has two 
sounds, that vowel takes the sound marked with double figures ; 2 2 , 
3 2 , 5 2 , and likewise l 2 when there is a circumflex on the a ; not other- 
wise. 

When the faint e comes immediately after a vowel, no consonant 
intervening, as ie, ue, ee, eue, &c, it lengthens that vowel without 
altering its sound. 

Note 5, (pages xvii and xviii.) 

The r is sounded only in a few words of two or more syllables. 
Amer (1, 3 2 , 2 ), bitter; cuiller, cu-i-11-e-r (6, 4, 17, 3 2 2 ), spoon; enfer, 
hell; fier, proud; hier, yesterday; hiver, winter ; magister, country 
school-master ; cancer, ether, frater, Alger, Jupiter, Lucifer, Stathouder. 



DIRECTIONS HOW TO USE THIS METHOD 



As there is now a System of Pronunciation with this Method, let the 
first ten or twelve lessons be devoted to acquiring a complete know- 
ledge of that important branch of a modern language. If that is 
thorough/y done, the teacher will have no further trouble with the 
pronunciation, for the pupils will be able to read correctly by them- 
selves. 

Each lesson now consists of one, two, three, &c, separate vocabu- 
laries, each followed by exercises, English at first, but French and 
English at the Twelfth Lesson; that is, when the student's ear begins 
to become a little familiar with French sounds. 

The first vocabulary must be read by the pupils, each taking a line 
and pronouncing aloud both the English and French, the latter being 
divided into syllables, and distinctly uttered under the direction of the 
teacher, who ought, as they proceed, to ask questions respecting the 
pronunciation. This done, the students are directed : — 1st, to learn 
for the next recitation, the English and French vocabularies, so as to 
be able to give the French when the English is mentioned, or the 
English when the French is given out ; and, 2dly, to write down the 
translation of the first exercise, to be handed to the teacher, who, 
directing them to close their books, will, while correcting the errors, 
give out the English of every question and answer, to be put in French 
by the students. 

The correction and translation ended, let the next vocabulary be 
read, or rather syllabled, slowly and distinctly, and explained by the 
teacher, if need be, and so on, the vocabularies being learned and the 
exercises translated. 

As this method is simple and gradual enough for every capacity, 
should there be pupils too young to write the translations, let them 
prepare the exercises and recite them to the teacher, who will do well 
to make them spell out a number of words at each recitation. 



(23) 



EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. 



The irregular verbs are designated by a (*) star. 
The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, placed after verbs, denote that they are regu- 
lar, and indicate the conjugation to which they respectively belong. 
Idiomatic al expressions are marked thus : f . 
The verbs taking ttre (to be) as auxiliary, are marked thus ; e . 
§ 1 to 164, refer to paragraphs in the Synopsis, (from p. 457 to 538.) 
Dir. 1, means first Direction, &c, (p. 457 to 460.) 
R. 1, means first Rule, &c, (from p. 460 to 461.) 
Obs. or Ob. 7, means Observation 7th, &c. 
24 1 , 24 2 , means 24th Vocabulary, first Section ; second Section. 
•24 3 , N. 2 ; 24th Vocabulary, Note 2. 
28 2 , Ob. 65 ; 28th Vocabulary, Observation 65th. 
§24— R. 2,^ 

§ 24 — A. 2, > mean the 2d article or rule of 24th paragraph. 
§24—2, ) 

490 — 3, means the article marked 3, at p. 490. 
Pa. or p. 419, means page 419 ; 405, 6, 7, mean 405, 406, 407. 
See Pronun. See System of Pronunciation. 



(24) 



OLLENDORFF'S 



FRENCH METHOD. 



FIRST LESSON, 1st.— Premiere Legon, Ire. 



Vocabulary. 

Have you ? 
Yes, Sir, I have. 
I. 

The. The hat. 

Have you the hat ? 
Yes, Sir, I have the hat. 
The bread. The sugar. 

The broom. The paper. 

The soap. 

My. My hat. 

Your. Your bread. 

Have you my hat ? 

Yes, Sir, I have your hat. 

Have you your bread ? 

1 have my bread. 

Which or what ? 
Which hat have you ? 
I have my hat. 
Which bread have you ? 
I have your bread. 
My exercise. 



VOCABTJLAIRE. 1 

Avez-vous ? 2 
Oui, Monsieur, j'ai. 
Je, which becomes j' before a vowel 
or silent h. (See Pronunciation.) 
Le. Le chapeau. 

Avez-vous le chapeau 1 
Oui, Monsieur, j'ai le chapeau. 
Le pain. Le sucre. 

Le balai. Le papier. 

Le savon. 

Mon. Mon chapeau. 

Votre. Votre pain. 

Avez-vous mon chapeau? 

Oui, Monsieur, j'ai votre chapeau. 

Avez-vous votre pain ? 

J'ai mon pain. 

Quel ? (before a noun.) 
Quel chapeau avez-vous ? 
J'ai mon chapeau. 
Quel pain avez-vous ? 
J'ai votre pain. 
Mon exercice. 



First Exercise. 1st. — Premier Exercice. ler. 

Which exercise have you. Sir ? I have the first exercise. — Have 
you the bread? Yes ; Sir, I have the bread. — Have you your bread? 

1 For rhe manner of teaching the lesson, see Manner of using the Method. 

2 When the verb is interrogative the French always put a hyphen (-^ be- 
tween the verb and the nominative pronoun. (Mind this in writing.) 

8 (25) ■ 



26 SECOND LESSON. 

I have my bread. — Have you the broom? I have the broom.—- 
Have you the soap ? I have the soap. — Have you your soap ? I 
have my soap. — Which soap have you ? I have your soap. — Have 
you your sugar 1 I have my sugar. — Which sugar have you ? I 
have your sugar. — Which paper have you ? I have my paper. — 
Have you my paper? I have your paper. — Which bread have 
you ? I have my bread. — Which broom have you ? I have your 
broom. — Have you your exercise % Yes, Sir, I have my exercise.— 
Which exercise have you? I have my first exercise. 1 



Daily Salutations. 
Good day, Miss. 
How do you do, Madam ? 



Salutations journalieres. 
Bon jour, Mademoiselle. 
Comment vous portez-vous, Ma- 
dame ? 
Very well, thank you. Tres-bien, merci. 

Obs. 1. Tris is always connected, by a hyphen, with the following word. 

Good evening. | Bon soir. 2 



SECOND LESSON, 2d.— Seconde Le$on, 2de. 
Vocabulary. Vocabulaire. 

'■>• : ^ .«.. '■' . . SLe, before a consonant. 

It. (Objective pronoun.) \ £ , before a vowel _ &c (Pronun .) 

I have. I have it. | J'ai. Je l'ai. 

Obs. 2. Objective pronouns are usually placed before the verb, in 
French. Instead of: I have it, the French say: I it have. Je Z'ai. 



Have you my hat ? 


Avez-vous mon chapeau ? 


Yes, Sir, 


I have it. 


Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. 


Good. 


Bad. 


Bon. 


Mauvais. 


Pretty. 


Ugly. 


Joli. 


Vilain. 


Old. 


Fine, handsome. 


Vieux. 


Beau. 


My cloth. 


My fine cloth. 


Mon drap. 


Mon beau drap. 


The salt. 


The good salt. 


Le sel. 


Le bon sel. 



1 Pupils desirous of making rapid progress may compose a great many 
phrases, in addition to those given in the exercises ; but they must pro- 
nounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make separate 
lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, as they meet with 
in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words more 
readily, when required to refer to them in writing their lessons. 

2 When no daily salutations are found in some of the lessons, the teacher 
may introduce some, or else use the preceding ones. 



SECOND LESSON. 



27 



The shoe. The old shoe. 

My wood. Your pretty wood. 

Your stocking. The ugly stocking. 
The thread. Your bad thread. 
The dog. The horse. 

Not. (See negations in Synopsis.) 

I have. I have not. 

I have not the bread. 

No, Sir. 

No, Miss. 

Have you my old hat ? 

No, Sir, I have it not. 

Which cloth have you ? 

I have the fine cloth. 

What dog have you ? 

I have my old dog. 

Of. 
The thread stocking. 



Le Soulier. 


Le vieux Soulier. 


Mon bois. 


Yotre joli bois. 


Votre bas. 


Le vilain bas. 


Lefil. 


Votre mauvais fil 


Le chien. 


Le cheval. 



Ne (before), fas {after Ine verb). 
J'ai. Je n'ai pas. (See Pron\H.) 
Je n'ai pas le pain. 
Non, Monsieur. 
Non, Mademoiselle. 
Avez-vous mon vieux chapeau ? 
Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas. 
Quel drap avez-vous ? 
J'ai le beau drap. 
Quel chien avez-vous ? 
J'ai mon vieux chien. 



De. 



Le bas de fil. 



Obs. 3. As no noun can in French, as it is in English, be used as an 
adjective to another noun : the preposition, de, is always put between the 
name of the thing and the name of the substance of which it is made, 
which latter, in French, is always placed last. 



The paper hat, [the hat of paper.] 
The gun. The velvet. 

The wooden gun, [the gun of wood.] 
The velvet shoe. 
Which gun have you ? 
I have the wooden gun. 
Which stocking have you ? 
I have my thread stocking. 
Have you my velvet shoe ? 
No, Miss, I have it not. 
Yes, Miss, I have it. 



Le chapeau de papier. 

Le fusil. Le velours. 

Le fusil de bois. 

Le Soulier de velours. 

Quel fusil avez-vous ? 

J'ai le fusil de bois. 

Quel bas avez-vous ? 

J'ai mon bas de fil. 

Avez-vous mon Soulier de velours ? 

Non, Mademoiselle, je ne l'ai pas. 

Oui, Mademoiselle, je l'ai. 



Second Exercise, 2d. — Second Exercice, 2d. 

Good day, Miss. — Good day, Sir. — Good day, Madam. — How do 
you do, Sir? Very well; thank you, Miss. — How do you do, Ma- 
dam ? Very well, Sir, thank you. — Have you my fine horse ? Yes, 
Sir, I have it. — Have you my old shoe 1 No, Miss, I have it not. — 
Which dog have you ? I have your pretty dog. — Have you my bad 
paper? No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you the good velvet cloth? 
Yes, Sir, I have it. — Have you my ugly gun? No. Sir, I have it 
not. — Which gun have you ? I have your fine gun. — Which stock- 
ing have you? I have the thread stocking. — Have you my thread 



28 



THIRD LESSON. 



stocking? I have not your thread stocking. — Have you my wooden 
gun ? No ; Sir. I have it not. — Have you the old bread ? I have 
not the old bread. — Which shoe have you? I have the fine velvet 
shoe. — Which velvet shoe ? Your velvet shoe. — Which soap have 
you? I have my old soap. — Which sugar have you? I have your 
good sugar. — Which salt have you ? I have the bad salt. — Which 
exercise have you? I have my second exercise. — Have you the 
first exercise ? No ; Madam, I have it not. — Which hat have you? 
I have my bad paper hat. — Have you my ugly wooden shoe? No, 
Sir, I have it not. — What vocabulary have you ? I have the second. 
— Have you the first ? Yes, I have it. 



THIRD LESSON, 3d.-— Troisi erne Legem, 3me. 



Vocabulary. 
Something, anything. 
Have you anything ? 
I have something. 
Nothing, not anything. 

Obs. 4. Quelque chose (something, any thing), is never used with a nega- 
tion. Not .... any thing, as well as nothing, must be translated by ne 
(before, and) rien (after the verb), and not by ne . . . .pas quelque chose. 

I have not anything. 
I have nothing. 
The wine. 
My money or silver. 
The gold. 

Le, the, becomes Z' before a vowel or silent h. 



VOCABULAIRE. 

Quelque chose. 

Avez-vous quelque chose ? 

J'ai quelque chose. 

Ne (before), rien (after the verb). 



Je n'ai rien. (Not: je n'ai pas 

quelque chose.) 
Le vin. 
Mon argent. 
L'or. (Pronun.) 



Obs. 5. 

The string. The ribbon. 

The golden ribbon. The button. 
The cofTee. The cheese. 

The coat. My coat. 

The silver candlestick. 

Are you hungry ? 
I am hungry. 
I am not hungry. 
Are you thirsty ? 
I am thirsty. 
I am not thirsty. 

Any thing or something good. 
Have you anything good I 
Nothing or not anything bad. 
I have not anything (nothing) good. 



Le cordon. 

Le ruban d'or. 

Le cafe. 

L' habit. (Pronun.) 



Le ruban. 
lie bouton. 
Le from age. 
Mon habit. 



Le chandelier d'argent. 

t Avez-vous faim ? 

t J'ai faim. 

t Je n'ai pas faim. 

t Avez-vous soif ? 

t J'ai soif. 

t Je n'ai pas soif. 

Quelque chose dt bon. 
Avez-vous quelque chose de ben? 
Ne. . . . rien de niauvais. 
.It 1 n'ai rien de bon. 



THIRD LESSON. 29 

Obs. 6. What ? is quel? before a noun, as : Quel bouton avez-vous ? but 
que t (before a verb.) 

What ? What have you ? Que ? Qu 1 avez-vous ? 

Obs. 7. Quelque chose and ne . . . . rierc require de when they are before an 
adjective ; and so does what ? Examples : 

Qu' avez-vous de bon ? 

J'ai le bon cafe. 

Avez-vous quelque chose de joli ? 



What have you good ? 
I have the good coffee. 
Have you anything pretty? 
I have nothing pretty. 
Are you sleepy ? 
I am sleepy. 
I am not sleepy. 



Je ?i'ai rien de joli. 
t Avez-vous sommeil ? 
t J'ai sommeil. 
t Je n'ai pas sommeil. 



Third Exercise, 3d. — Troisieme Exercice, 3me. 

What have you'? I have the third exercise. — Have you your 
second exercise, Miss? Yes, Sir, T have it. — Good evening, Ma- 
dam, how do you do ? Very well, Sir, thank you. Good morning, 
Miss. Good morning, Sir. — Have you my good wine 1 I have it.— 
Have you the gold ? T have it not. — Have you the money? I have 
it. — Have you the gold ribbon? No. Sir, I have it not. — Have you 
your silver candlestick ? Yes, Sir, I have it. — What have you ? I 
have the good cheese. I have my cloth coat. — Have you my silver 
button ? I have it not. — Which button have you? I have your good 
gold button. — Which string have you? I have the gold string. — 
Have you anything ? I have something. — What have you ? I have 
the good bread. I have the good sugar. — Have you anything good ? 
I have nothing good. — Have you anything handsome? I have no- 
thing handsome. I have something ugly. — What have you ugly? 
I have the ugly dog. — Have you anything pretty? I have nothing 
pretty, t have something old. — What have you old? T have the 
old cheese. — Are you hungry? I am hungry. — Are you thirsty? I 
am not thirsty. — Are you sleepy? I am not sleepy. — What have 
yon beautiful? I have your beautiful dog. — What have you bad? 
I have nothing bad. — Which paper have you? I have your good 
paper. — Have you the fine horse ? Yes, Sir, I have it. — Which shoe 
have you ? I have my old velvet shoe. — Which stocking have 
you ? 1 have got your fine thread stocking. 

Obs. 8. Always translate I have or I have got, by : J'ai. I have not or I 
have not got, by : Je n'ai pas, 1 &c. 

Salutations journalieres. — To day. Aujourd'hui. 



1 N. B. — The use of the word, got, is condemned by grammarians, but, 
as it is constantly introduced in common practice, it is perhaps expedient to 
3* 



so 



FOURTH LESSON. 



FOURTH LESSON, 4th.— Quatrieme Legon, 4me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
This , that, (with a noun.) 
This , that book. 

Of the (before a consonant). 
Of the dog. Of the tailor. 
Of the baker. Of the neighbor. 

That or the one. 
The neighbor's, or that of the neigh- 
bor. 

The baker's, or that of the baker. 

The dog's, or that of the dog. 
Or. 

Have you my book or the neigh- 
bor's ? 

I have the neighbor's. 

Have you my bread or that of the 
baker ? 

I have yours. 

I have not the baker's. 

Mine or my own. 

Of mine or of my own. 

Yours or your own. 

Of yours or of your own. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Ce (before a consonant, § 34.) 
Ce livre. 

Du (genitif) avant une consonne. 
Du chien. Du tailleur. 

Du boulanger. Du voisin. 

Celui. (§ 35.) 

Celui du voisin. 

(French way to express the possessive 

case.) 
Celui du boulanger. 
Celui du chien. 

Ou. 
Avez-vous mon livre ou celui du 

voisin ? 
J'ai celui du voisin. 
Avez-vous mon pain ou celui du 

boulanger ? 
J'ai le votre. 
Je n'ai pas celui du boulanger. 

Le mien. 
Du mien. 
Le votre. 
Du votre. 



Obs. 9. Votre, your, has no circumflex accent. Le votre, yours, has 
one. Notre, our, has no accent. Le notre, ours, has one. 
Of ours or of our own. | Du notre. 

Fourth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Quatrieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Have you that book ? No, Sir, I have it not. — Which book have 
you got? I have that of the neighbor. — Have you my bread or the 
baker's? I have not yours; I have the baker's. — Have you the 
neighbor's horse? No, Sir, I have it not. — Which horse have you 
got 1 I have that of the baker. — Have you the pretty gold string of 
my dog? I have it not. — Which string have you? I have my sil- 



insert it now and then. When entirely omitted, pupils, after learning a 
considerable time, are frequently at a loss how to translate : Have you got 
my hat ? thinking that they do not know the French of got ; while they 
would not hesitate to translate : Have you my hat ? &c. 



FOURTH LESSON. 



si 



ver string. — Have you my gold button or the tailor's ? I have not 
yours ; I have the tailor's. — Which coffee have you ? I have the 
neighbor's. — Are you sleepy ! I am not sleepy ; I am hungry. — 
Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty. — Which stocking have you? I 
have my own or mine. — Have you your thread stocking or mine ? 
I have not yours ; I have mine. — Which shoe have you ? I have 
the neighbor's wooden shoe. — What have you ? I have nothing. — 
Have you anything good ? I have nothing good. Have you any- 
thing bad ? I have not got anything bad. — Are you hungry or 
thirsty ? I am hungry. — Which exercise have you got ? I have the 
fourth. — Have you your neighbor's exercise ? No, Sir, I have got 
mine. — Have you our velvet ? I have it not. — Have you our coffee ? 
I have not ours ; I have the baker's. — Have you the neighbor's golden 
candlestick? No, Sir, I have got ours. — How do you do to-day? 
To-day ? Yes, to-day. Very well, thank you. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 

Are you warm ? 

I am warm. 

I am not warm. 

Are you cold ? 

I am not cold. 

Are you afraid ? 

I am afraid. 

I am not afraid. 

The, (before a vowel or h mute). (See 

Obs. 5, p. 28.) 
Man. Friend. 

The friend. The man. 

Of the, (before a vowel or h mute). 
Of the friend. 

That, or the one, of the friend. 
Of the man. 
That, or the one, of the man ; the 

man's. 
Of the gold or silver. 

The stick. The thimble. 

The coal. My brother. 

My brother's, or that of my brother. 
Your friend's, or that of your friend. 
Our gold thimble, or the silver one. 
The wooden one. The leather one. 
The leather. Of the leather. 



Vocabulairb. 2de Section, 
t Avez-vous chaud ? 
t J'ai chaud. 
t Je n'ai pas chaud. 
t Avez-vous froid ? 
t Je n'ai pas froid. 
t Avez-vous peur X 
t J'ai peur. 
t Je n'ai pas peur. 

L' , (avant une voyelle ou un h muet). 
(Voyez Obs. 5, p. 28.) 
Homme. Ami. 

L'ami. L'homme. 

De P , (avant une voyelle ou h muet), 
De l'ami. 
Celui de l'ami. 
De l'homme. 
Celui de l'homme. 

' De Tor ou de F argent. 

Le baton. Le de. 

Le charbon. Mon frere. 

Celui de mon frere. 

Celui de votre ami. 

Notre de d'or, ou celui d' argent. 

Celui de bois. Celui de cuir. 

Le cuir. Du cuir. 



/ 



82 



FIFTH LESSON. 



Fourth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Quatrieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

Have you ray stick, or that of ray friend ? I have that of youi 
friend. — Have you your thimble, or the tailor's? I have mine or 
my own. — Have you my brother's coat or yours? I have your 
brother's. — Have you your dog or the man's? I have the man's. — 
Have you your friend's money ? I have it not. — Are you cold ? I 
am cold. — Are you afraid? I am not afraid. — Are you warm? I am 
not warm. — Have you my coat, or the tailor's? I have the tailor's. 
— Have you my gold candlestick, or that of the neighbor ? I have 
yours. — Have you your paper or mine? I have mine. — Have you 
your cheese or the baker's ? I have my own. — Which cloth have 
you ? I have that of the tailor. — Have you the old wood of my 
brother? I have not got it.— Which soap have you got? I have 
my brother's good soap. — Have you my wooden gun or that of my 
brother ? I have yours. — Have you your friend's shoe ? Yes, Sir, 
I have the velvet shoe of my friend. — What have you pretty? I 
have my friend's pretty dog. — Have you my handsome or my ugly 
stick? I have your ugly stick. — Have you the second exercise of 
your good friend ? No; I have the third. — Which soap have you? 
I have ours. — Have you your friend's bread ? No j I have ours. — 
Have you the man's? No ; I have it not. — Have you the silver 
button ? No • I have the golden one, or that of gold.— Have you the 
first or the second section to-day ? I have the second section. 



Pretty well, well enough. 



| Assez bien. 



Obs 10, Good day, good morning, good afternoon, good evening (and 
good night, before bed-time), are expressed in French by : bon jour or bon 
soir 



FIFTH LESSON, 5th.— Cinquieme Legon, 5me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 

The merchant. 

Of the shoemaker. 

The boy. The merchant's boy. 

The pencil. The chocolate. 

The penknife. The boy's penknife. 

Have you the merchant's stick, or 

yours ? 

Neither. Nor. 

i have neither the merchant's stick 

nor mine. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Le marchand. 
Du cordonnier. 

Le gar§on. Le garcon du marchand 
Le crayon. Le chocolat. 
Le canif. Le canif du garson. 
Avez-vous le baton du marchand. 

ou le votre? 

Ne . . . ni. .... ni. 

Je n'ai ni le baton du marchand ni 

le mien. 



FIFTH LESSON. 



Have you the shoemaker's leather? ' 

Are you hungry or thirsty ? 

I am neither hungry nor thirsty. 

Are you warm or cold ? 

I am neither warm nor cold. 

Have you the bread or the wine ? 

I have neither the wine nor the bread. 

I have neither my thread nor that 

of the tailor. 
I have neither yours nor mine. 
My boy's thimble, [the thimble of . . .] 
Your brother's penknife. 
That of mine. That of ours. 

Miss Rose's velvet. 
My baker's bread, or that of yours. 



Avez-vous le cuir du cordonnier ? 

t Avez-vous faim ou soif ? 

t Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 

t Avez-vous chaud ou froid ? 

t Je n'ai ni chaud ni froid. 

Avez-vous le pain ou le vin ? 

Je n'ai ni le vin ni le pain. 

Je n'ai ni mon fil ni celui du tailleur. 

Je n'ai ni le votre ni le mien. 
Le de de mon garcon. 
Le canif de votre frere. 
Celui du mien. Celui du notre. 

Le velours de Mademoiselle Rose. 
Le pain de mon boulanger, ou celui 
du votre. 



Fifth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Cinquiemb Exercice. Ire Sec. 

How do you do to-day? Pretty well, thank you. — How are you 
this evening; Miss Charlotte? Very well, thank you. Good even- 
ing. Sir. — Are you hungry or thirsty? I am neither hungry nor 
thirsty. — Have you my shoe or the shoemaker's? I have neither 
yours nor the shoemaker's. — Have you your pencil or the boy's? I 
have neither mine nor the boy's. — Which pencil have you ? I have 
that of the merchant. — Have you my chocolate or the merchant's? 
I have neither yours nor the merchant's: I have my own. — Which 
penknife have you? I have my brother's penknife.— Have you 
Miss Rose's velvet? No ; Madam, I have it not. — Are you warm, 
or cold? T am neither warm nor cold; I am sleepy. — Are you 
afraid? I am not afraid. — What have you? I have Miss Charlotte's 
fine ribbon. — The velvet ribbon? No. the golden ribbon. — Have 
you anything. Sir? I have something. — What have you? I have 
something fine. — What have you fine? I have the shoemaker's 
fine dog. — Have you my gun or yours ? I have neither yours nor 
mine. — Which gun have you? I have my friend's. — Have you my 
velvet ribbon or my brother's? I have neither yours nor your 
brother's, but ours. — Which string have you? T have my neigh- 
bor's thread string. — Have you the book of the tailor or that of the 
boy ? I have neither the tailor's nor the boy's. 



This morning. This evening. 

Are you well, Miss Clara ? 
Not very well. 



Ce matin. Ce soir. 

tVousportez-vousbien, Mile. Clara f 
Pas tres-bien. 



34 



FIFTH LESSON. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 



Vocabulairb. 2de Section. 



i t QU' avez-vous ? 
> Je n'ai rien. 



t Avez-vous quelque chose ? 
Non, rien. 



What have you ? (ails you ?) 
What is the matter with you ? 
I have nothing ; or 
Nothing is the matter with me. 
Is anything the matter with you ? 
No. Nothing, or Not anything. 

Obs. 11. When the verb is understood, nothing, or not anything, is 
translated not by : ne . . . rien, but by : rien alone ; and no, nothing, by : 
non, rien. 

Avez-vous quelque chose de tres- 

joli? 
Non, rien. 
Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain, 

ou de vieux ? 
Non, rien. Le chale. 

Le parasol. Le parapluie. 

Le dictionnaire. Le coton. 
Le Fran$ais. Du Fran9ais. 

Le charpentier. Du charpentier. 
Le marteau. Le fer. 

Le clou. Le clou de fer. 



Have you anything very pretty ? 

No, nothing. 

Have you anything ugly, or old ? 



No, not anything. The shawl. 

The parasol. The umbrella 

The dictionary. 

The Frenchman. 

The carpenter. 

The hammer. 

The nail. 



The cotton. 
Of the Frenchman. 
Of the carpenter. 
The iron. 
The iron nail. 



The golden nail ; that of silver. 



Le clou d'or ; celui d'argent. 



Fifth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Cinquieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

Are you well this morning'? Yes, Sir 7 pretty well, thank you. — 
How do you do, Miss Clara? Not very well, Madam. — Are you 
well, Mr. Robert? Yes, Sir, this evening I am very well.— Have 
you the fifth exercise 7 ? Yes. I have it. — Have you my dictionary 
or my book ? I have neither your dictionary nor your book. — Have 
you your parasol or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine ; I have 
Clara's. — Which shawl have you? I have the neighbor's. — Have 
you the iron or the silver nail? I have neither the iron nor the sil- 
ver nail; I have the gold one. — Have you my hammer or the car- 
penter's ? I have neither yours nor the carpenter's ; I have ours. — 
Which nail have you ? 1 have the iron nail. — Which hammer 
have you? I have the wooden hammer of the carpenter. — Have 
you anything very fine ? I have something very fine. — What have 
you? This fine shawl. — Have you the Frenchman's pretty umbrella? 
No, I have not the pretty one, I have the old one. — The old um- 
brella? Yes, the old one. — Have you the cotton, or the thread stock- 
ing ? I have neither the cotton nor the thread stocking. — Have you 
the book of the Frenchman or that of the merchant? 1 have nei- 
ther the Frenchman's nor the merchant's. — Which book have you? 



SIXTH LESSON. 



35 



I have ours. — What is the matter with you ? Nothing. — Is anything 
the matter with you, Mr. Robert? No, Miss, nothing. — Are you 
afraid? No, I am not afraid. Nothing ails me. — Have you the cot- 
ton, the cloth, or the shawl ? I have neither the cotton, nor the 
cloth, nor the shawl. — What have you ? I have Webster's Dictionary. 

J'en suis bien aise. 
Et vous, Monsieur, comment vou» 
portez-vous ? 



I am glad to hear it. I am glad of it. 
A nd you, Sir, how are you ? 



SIXTH LESSON, 6th.— Sixieme Le$en, 6me. 



Vocabulary. 
The beef, or ox. 
Of the captain. 
Of the cook. 



1st Section. 
The biscuit. 
The mutton. 
The knife. 



Have I ? Have I it ? 

You have. You have got it. 

You have not. 

You have not got it. 

You have nothing, (not got anything). 

Am I afraid ? 

You are afraid. 

Am I ashamed 1 

You are not ashamed. 

Are you ashamed ? 

I am ashamed. 

Have I anything ugly ? 

You have not got anything ugly. 

What have I got ? 

What is the matter with me ? (ails me 

The fine one. The ugly one. 

Which, meaning which one ? 

Obs 12. Which is translated by : quel, with a noun, — by : lequel, with- 
out the noun. 



,} 



Vocabulaibe. Ire Section. 

Le bceuf. Le biscuit. 

Du capitaine. Le mouton. 

Du cuisinier. Le couteau. 

Ai-je ? L' ai-je ? 

Vous avez. Vous Vavez. 

Vous 7i avez pas. 

Vous ne Vavez pas. 

Vous n'avez rien, 

t Ai-je peur ? 

t Vous avez peur. 

t Ai-je honte ? 

t Vous n'avez pas honte. 

t Avez- vous honte ? 

t J'ai honte. 

Ai-je quelque chose de vilain f 

Vous n'avez rien de vilain. 

Qu' ai-je? 

Le beau. Le vilain. 

Lequel ? 



Which parasol ? Which one ? 

Am I afraid or ashamed ? 
You are neither afraid nor ashamed. 
You are neither hungry nor thirsty. 



Quel parasol ? Lequel ? 

t Ai-je peur ou honte ? 
t Vous n'avez ni peur ni honte. 
t Vous n'avez ni faim ni so if. 



Sixth Exebcise. 1st Sec. — Sixieme Exebcice. Ire Sec. 

Good evening, Miss; are you well? Very well, thank you. — I 
am glad to hear it. And you, Mr. Louis, how do you do ? Not 
very well, to-day. — Are you well, this evening, Madam 1 Pretty 
well, thank you. — I am glad of it. I have neither the baker's dog 



/ 



36 



SIXTH LESSON. 



nor that of my friend. — Are you ashamed? I am not ashamed. — 
Are you afraid or ashamed? I am neither afraid nor ashamed. — 
Have you my knife ? Which one ? The fine one. — Have you my 
beef or the cook's? I have neither yours nor the cook's. — Which 
(lequel) have you? I have that of the captain. — Have I your bis- 
cuit? You have it not. — Am I hungry or thirsty ? You are neither 
hungry nor thirsty. — Am I warm or cold? You are neither warm 
nor cold. — Am I afraid? You are not afraid. You are neither 
afraid nor ashamed. — Have I anything good? You have nothing 
good. — What have I? — You have nothing. — Which pencil have I? 
You have that of the Frenchman. — Have I your thimble or that of 
the tailor? You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. — Which 
one have I? You have your friend's. — Which umbrella have I? 
You have mine. — Have I the baker's good bread? You have it not. 
— Which dictionary have I? You have your own. — Have you my 
iron gun? I have it not. — Have I it ? You have it. — Have I your 
mutton or the cook's ? You have neither mine nor the cook's. — 
Have I your knife? You have it not. — Have you it? I have it. — 
Which biscuit have I ? You have that of the captain. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 

Am I hungry ? 

You are hungry. 

You are not hungry. 

Am I wrong ? 

You are wrong. 

You are not wrong. 

Am I right ? 

You are not right. 

You are right. 
The butter. 

The grocer. Our grocer. 

The grocer's butter or that of the 

cook. 
Have I the bv.y's penknife ? 
You have it not, (not got it.) 
Have I Miss Clara's ? 
You have neither Miss Clara's nor 

the boy's. 
Which one have I ? 
You have the grocer's. 
Have I the cook's butter ? 
You have it not. You have nothing. 
Have I anything bad or old ? 

You have neither anything bad nor 
old. (nothing.; 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

t Ai-je faim ? 

t Vous avez faim.. 

1 Vous n'avez pas faim. 

t Ai-je tort ? 

t Vous avez tort. 

t Vous n'avez pas tort. 

t Ai-je raison ? 

t Vous n'avez pas raison. 

t Vous avez raison. 
Le beurre. 

L' epicier. Notre epicier. 

Le beurre de 1' epicier ou celui du 

cuisinier. 
Ai-je le canif du garcon ? 
Vous ne l'avez pas. 
Ai-je celui de Mile. Clara ? 
Vous n'avez ni celui de Mile. Clara, 

ni celui du garcon. 
Lequel ai-je ? 

Vous avez celui de l'epicier. 
Ai-je le beurre du cuisinier ? 
Vous ne l'avez pas. Vous n'avezrien. 
Ai-je quelque chose de mauvais ou 

de veux ? 
Vous n'avez rien de mauvais ni de 
vieux. 



SEVENTH LESSON. 37 

06s. 13. You have neither anything had nor old, being a negative sen- 
tence, must not be translated by : Vous n'avez pas quelque chose de mauvais 
ni de vieux ; but by : Vous 7iavez rien de mauvais ni de vieux. 



Have you anything ugly or old ? 

I have neither anything ugly, nor 
old, nor pretty. 



Avez-vous quelque chose de vilain 

ou de vieux ? 
Je n'ai rien de vilain, ni de vieux, ni 

de joli. 



Sixth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Sixieme Exebcice. 2de Sec 

Have you the fifth vocabulary to-day ? No, Miss, I ha re the exer- 
cise. — Which one : the fifth or sixth? I have the fifth to-day. — Sir, 
have T the sixth vocabulary- this evening'? No. Miss, you have it not. 
— Which one have I? You have the fifth vocabulary, second section. 
— Which cloth have 1 ? You have the merchant's. — Have you my 
coffee or that of my boy ? I have that of your good boy. — Have you 
your shawl or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine. — What have 
you? I have my brother's good candlestick. — Am I right? You 
are right. — Am I wrong? You are not wrong. — Am 1 right or 
wrong? You are neither right nor wrong; you are afraid. You are 
not sleepy. You are neither warm nor cold. — Have I the good 
coffee or the good sugar? You have neither the good coffee nor the 
good sugar. — Have 1 anything good or bad ? You have neither any- 
thing good nor bad. — What have I? You have nothing. — What 
have I pretty ? You have my friend's pretty dog. — Which buttei 
have I ? You have that of your cook. — Have I your parasol or the 
merchant's? You have neither mine nor the merchant's. — -Which 
chocolate have you ? I have that of the Frenchman. — Which shoe 
have you ? I have the shoemaker's leather shoe. — Which one have 
I ? You have that of the old baker. — Which one have you? I have 
that of my old neighbor. — What is the matter with you ? I am 
afraid. — Have I anything? You have nothing. 



You are well, I hope ? 
I am well, perfectly well. 
I at* no very well. 



Vous vous portez bien, j'espere ? 
Je me porte bien, parfaitement bien* 
Je ne me porte pas tres-bien. 



SEVENTH LESSON, 7th.— Septieme Legon, 7me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
Who ? Has. Who has ? 
Who has the pencil-case ? 
The man has the pencil-case. 
The man has not this pencil-case. 
4 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Qui ? a. Qui a ? 
Qui a le porte-crayon ? 
L'homme a le porte-crayon. 
L'homme n'a pas ce porte-crayon. 



8EVENTH LESSON 



Who has it ? 

The farmer has it. 

The farmer has not got it. 

His or her, (always with a noun,) its. 
The chicken. His chicken. 

The chest, trunk, coffer. Her chest. 
The waistcoat, the vest. His vest. 
The ship, vessel. 
The young man. Young. 

The youth. His rice. 

He, (or it, nominative case.) 

He has, it has. He has not. 

He has got his chest. 

He has not his waistcoat. 

He has it. He has it not. 

Has he or has it ? Has he it ? 

Has he his old knife ? 

Has the farmer ? 



Qui Va ? 

Le fermier Fa. 

Le fermier ne Va pas. 

Son, (to uj ours avec un nom.) 
Le poulet. Son poulet. 

Le coffre. Son coffre. 

Le gilet. Son gilet. 

Le batiment, le vaisseau. 
Le jeune homme. Jeune. 

L' adolescent. Son riz. 

If. 

II a. II n'a pas. 

II a son coffre. 

II n'a pas son gilet. 

II F a. line Fa pas. 

A-t-il? L'a-t-ii? 

A-t-il son vieux couteau ? 

Le fermier a-t-il ? 



Obs. 14. In French, when in the third person, a noun is the nominative 
or subject of an interrogative sentence, begin the question with the noun r 
and place the pronoun, il, after the verb, as shown above. 



Notre ami a-t-il ? 

Ce jeune homme a-t-il ? 

Le chien a-t-il le mouton ? 



Has our friend got ? 

Has this young man ? 

Has the dog got the mutton ? 

06s. 15. The letter (-£-) between a and il, is inserted for the sake of 
euphony, and must be used whenever the verb ends with a vowel. 

He has neither . . . nor ... I II n'a ni . . . ni . . . 

He has neither mine nor yours. | II n'a ni le mien ni le votre. 

Seventh Exercise. 1st Sec. — Septieme Exercice, Ire Sec. 

You are well, I hope, Miss? Yes, Sir, I am perfectly well. — And 
you. Sir, how are you ? Pretty well, to-day, thank you. — I hope 
you are well, Madam? Yes, Miss, I am very well this morning. 
I am very glad to hear it. — Are you cold this morning? No, Sir, I 
am not cold. — Has the youth his chicken ? He has got it. — Who has 
my waistcoat ? The young man has it. — Has the young man his 
pretty ship? The young man has it not. — Who has it? The cap- 
tain has got it. — Has the grocer my knife or yours ? He has neither 
yours nor mine. — Which knife has he ? Which knife or penknife ? 
Which penknife ? He has ours. — Has he it? Yes, he has got it. — 
Has his brother got my gold ? He has not got it. — Have you it ? No, 
I have it not. — Who has got it? You have it. — Has the youth your 
waistcoat or mine? He has neither yours nor mine. — Which one 
has he ? He has the tailor's. — Have you his hammer or his nail ? 



SEVENTH LESSON. 



I have neither his hammer nor his nail. The carpenter has the 
hammer, his boy has the nail. — Have you his umbrella or his stick? 
I have neither his umbrella nor his stick. — What have you? Not 
anything. — Has this farmer his horse or his dog ? He has neither 
this nor that. — Have I the merchant's rice? Which merchant? 
The old one or the young one ? The young one. — You have it not; 
the old grocer has it. — Has he his coffee or my sugar? He has 
neither his coffee nor your sugar. — Has the boy his dictionary, my 
brother's, or that of the Frenchman ? He has not his dictionary nor 
your brother's ; he has the Frenchman's. — Who has my pencil-case ? 
Which pencil-case ? The gold pencil-case or the silver one ? The 
gold one. I have it. — Has the young captain the old ship of Mr. 
Henri (Henry) ? He has not Mr. Henry's old ship : he has Mr. 
Robert's good ship, the Helvetius. 



How is your friend ? 
He is not very well. 
He is better. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
What has he ? What has he got ? 
What ails him, or is the matter with 

him? 
What has the farmer ? (ails him ?) 



He has something. 
The bird. 



He has nothing. 
His bird. 



His or hers (without the noun.) its. 

My money or his or hers. 

My bag or his. (hers.) 

His bag of rice — of money. 

This servant. 

Has his servant your trunk or mine ? 

He has his own, (no noun being used.) 
He has neither ours nor jours, he 
has his own. (its own.) 

Somebody, anybody. 

Some one, any one. 
Has anybody my book ? 
Somebody (some one), has it. 
Has any one got it ? 

No one, nobody, not anybody. 

Nobody has your stick. 

No one has it. 

Is any one hungry, sleepy, or thirsty ? 



Comment se porte votre ami ? 
II ne se porte pas tres-bien. 
II se porte mieux. 

Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. 



> Qu'a-t-il? (06s. 4, p. 28.) 

Qu' a le fermier ? Le fermier 

qu'a-t-il ? 

II a quelque chose. II n'a rien. 

L'oiseau. Son oiseau. 

Le sien, (sans nom.) 

Mon argent ou le sien. 

Mon sac ou le sien. 

Son sac de riz — d' argent. 

Ce domestique. 

Son domestique a-t-il son coffre on 

le mien ? 
II a le sien. 
II n'a ni le notre ni le votre, il a le 

sien. 

Quelqu'un, (not used with a nega- 
tive.) 
Quelqu'un a-t-il mon livre ? 
Quelqu'un l'a. 
Quelqu'un 1' a-t-il ? 

Personne ne. (Nominatif.) 
Personne n'a votre baton. 
Personne ne l'a. 

Quelqu'un a-t-il faim, sommeil, ou 
soif? 



40 SEVENTH LESSON. 

Some one is warm, cold, or afraid. I Quelqu'un a chaud, froid, ou peur. 

No one is ashamed, wrong, nor right. | Personne n'a honte, tort, ni raison. 

Obs. 16. Never translate : No one, not any one, nobody, not anybody 
has, by : Quelqu'un n 1 a pas ; but by : personne n'a. 

Seventh Exercise. 2d Sec. — Septieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

You are well, I hope, this evening ? I am not very well, thank 
you. — And you, Sir, how are you ? I am better, thank you. — How 
is your brother ? He is perfectly well to-day. — How is Mr. Robert ? 
He is better. — Who has my trunk? The boy has it. — Is anyone 
thirsty ? This old servant is thirsty. — Is he hungry ? No, he is not 
hungry; he has his bread. — Has he the butter ? He has not got it. 
— What has he \ He has his cheese.— What has the youth ? He 
has the farmer's fine chicken. — Has he + he knife } No, he has it 
not; he has the pencil-case. — Is he afraid? He is not afraid. — Is 
he afraid or ashamed ? He is neither afraid nor ashamed. — Is the 
grocer right or wrong ? He is neither right nor wrong. — Have I the 
bag of rice % Yes, Sir, you have it. — Who has the farmer's rice ? 
My servant has it. — Has your servant my umbrella ? No, he has it 
not. — Has he yours? No, he has it not. — Which one has he got? 
He has neither yours nor mine. — Has he his own ? He has it. — 
What has your friend's boy ? He has my old penknife. — Has your 
baker my bird or his? He has his. — Who has mine ? The carpen- 
ter has it. — Is he warm or cold ? He is neither warm nor cold. — 
Is any one cold ? Nobody is cold. — Is anybody warm ? Nobody 
is warm. — Has anybody my chicken ? Nobody has it. — Has that 
servant your vest or mine ? He has neither mine nor yours. — 
Which one has he got ? He has his own. — Has any one my gun ? 
Which gun ? The old one, No one has it. — What has the youth ? 
He has nothing. — Have I your bag or that of your good friend ? No, 
you have the larmer's bag. — Who has Miss Clara's ? Nobody has 
it. — Who has her shawl? Which shawl? The cotton or velvet 
one ? The velvet one. I have it. — Who is afraid ? The tailor's 
boy is (afraid). — What is the matter with him ? He is afraid of 
your bad dog. — Has the farmer my money ? He has it not. — Has 
the captain got it ? He has it not. — Has he anything good ? He 
has nothing good. — What has he ugly ? He has nothing ugly. — 
Has your cook his mutton ? He has it. — Have I your bread or your 
sheese ? You have neither my bread nor my cheese. — Has any 
one my gold button? No one has it. 

Is your friend better, this morning ? Votre ami se porte-t-il mieux, ce 

matin ? 



Mr. Robert is better. 



Monsieur Robert se porte mieux. 



EIGHTH LESSON. 



41 



EIGHTH LESSON, Sih.—Huitiime Legon, 8me. 



Ire Section. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
This, that handkerchief. 
This, that ox. This, that hay. 
This, that friend. 

Obs. 17. Cet, (before a vowel or h 
mute.) 

This, that man. 
This, that inkstand. My inkstand. 

Obs. 18. Ce, meaning: this or that : Ce livre, does not offer the nice 
distinction found in English, between : this book and that book. To obtain 
the same degree of precision, the French say as follows : 



VOCABULAIRE. 

Ce mouchoir. 

Ce bceuf. Cefoin. 

Cet ami. (Cet, always before a vowel) 

Cet, (avant une voyelle ou un h 

muet). 
Cet homme. 
Cet encrier. Mon encrier. 



Ce livre-ld. 
Cet encrier -la. 



This book. That book. I Ce livre-ci. 

This inkstand. That inkstand. I Cet encrier-ci. 

Obs. 19. Mind the hyphen (-) before ci and Id. 

The sailor. This sailor. 

That tree. The tree. 

His looking-glass, (or her.) This . . . 

His (her) pocket-book or portfolio. 

The mattress. Which mattress ? 

This garden. That pistol. 

The stranger, the foreigner. Our. . . 

This or that glove. 

Have you this or that book ? 

I have this one, I have not that one. 

This one. That one. 

Obs. 20. Instead of: this or that book, the French say: This book or 
that, because, that, (a true pronoun in this case) must have an antecedent to 
agree with. {Mind the construction, and see § 35.) 



Le matelot. Ce matelot-ci. 

Cet arbre-la. L'arbre. 

Son miroir. Ce miroir-ci. 

Son porte-feuille. 

Le matelas. Quel matelas ? 

Cejardin-ci. Ce pistolet-la. 

L'etranger. Notre etranger. 

Ce gant. 

Avez-vous ce livre-ci ou celui-la ? 

J'ai celui-ci, je n'ai pas celui-la. 

Celui-ci. Celui-la. 



Have I this one or that one ? 

You have this one, you have not that 

one. 
Has the man this or that glove ? 

(Mind the French construction.) 



Ai-je celui-ci ou celui-la ? 

Vous avez celui-ci, vous n'avez pas 
celui-la. 

L' homme a-t-il ce gant-ci ou celui- 
la ? 



Eighth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Huitieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Good evening. Miss Clara, how do you do ? I am not very well, 
Sir, thank you. — And you, Sir, are you well? Pretty well, thank 
you. — I hope your brother is better. Yes, Sir, brother (mon f.) is 
better. — Which inkstand has the stranger? He has that of the 
sailor. — Has the sailor my looking-glass 1 He has it not : I have 
it. — Have you this pistol or that one ? I have this one. — Have you 
4* 



42 



EIGHTH LESSON. 



the inkstand of my neighbor or that of yours ? I have neither that 
of your neighbor nor that of mine. — Which one have you ? I have 
the stranger's. — Which glove have you got ? Which one ? Yes, 
which one. I have the sailor's. — You have the sailor's glove ? 
Yes, I have it. — Have you his mattress ? I have it not.— Which 
pocket-book has the sailor ? He has his own. — Who has my good 
handkerchief? This stranger has it. — Has he got it? Yes, he has 
it. — What has he ? He has my pretty handkerchief. — Have I Miss 
Victoria's handkerchief or pencil-case ? You have neither this nor 
that. — What have I ? You have not anything. — Who has that pis- 
tol ? The stranger's friend has it. — What has your servant ? He 
has the farmer's old tree. — Has he that grocer's old handkerchief? 
He has not that of the grocer; he has the sailor's. — Has that ox the 
hay of this horse ? No, it has its own. — Which ox has the farmer? 
He has that of our neighbor. — Have I your inkstand or his ? You 
have neither mine nor his; you have your brother's. — Has the 
foreigner my bird or his own ? He has got that of the captain. — 
Have you this tree ? I have it not. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? 
I am neither hungry nor thirsty • I am sleepy. — Has the old sailor 
this bird or that one ? He has not this; he has that. — Has our ser- 
vant this broom or that one ? He has the ugly one. — Has your cook 
this or that chicken ? He has neither this nor that ; he has his own. 
— Am I right or wrong? You are not wrong. — Who is right? No- 
body. — Have I this or that penknife ? No ; nobody has either this 
or that. 



Take a seat and sit down. 
I thank you. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
The note, the billet, the ticket. 
The garret, the attic, the granary. 
His corn, his grain, its grain. 
This copybook. That copybook. 
Big, bulky, thick, coarse, large. 
That big tree. 

Your coarse cloth — thick paper. 
But. But not. 

He has not this one, but he has that. 
He has this one, but not that one. 
I have that one, but not this one. 
Have you this or that note ? 
(Mind the construction in French.) 
I have not this one, but that one. 



Prenez un siege et asseyez-vous. 
Je vous remercie. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Le billet. 
Le grenier. 
Son grain. 

Ce cahier-ci. Ce caAier-la. 
Gros. 

Ce gros arbre-la. 
Votre gros drap — gros papier. 
Mais. Mais non. Mais non pas. 
II n'a pas celui-ci, mais il a celui-la. 
II a celui-ci, mais non celui-la. 
J'ai celui-la, mais non pas celui-ci. 
Avez-vous ce billet-ci ou celui-la ? 

(mais j'ai celui- 
Je n'ai pas celui-ci, < la. 

( mais celui-la. 



EIGHTH LESSON. 



43 



I have this one, but not that one. 

Has my friend my dog or his ? 
He has mine, but I have his. 
That or which, (relative pronoun.) 

Have I the copybook that you have ? 
(Have I the copybook you have ?) 

I have not the note which your bro- 
ther has. (the note your, &c.) 

That which, the one which. 1 

I have not that which you have. 

I have not that which he has. 

Have I the glove which you have ? 

You have not that which I have. 



• 5 1 

n-ci, < 

VI 



mais je n'ai pas celui- 
J'ai celui-ci, \ la. 

mais non celui-la. 
Mon ami a-t-il mon chien ou le sien ? 
II a le mien, mais j'ai le sien. 
Que, (never understood in French, 

as it is frequently in English.) 
Ai-je le cahier que vous avez ? 

Je n'ai pas le billet que votre frere a. 

Celui que. (§§ 35, 36.) 
Je n'ai pas celui que vous avez. 
Je n'ai pas celui qu'il a. 
Ai-je le gant que vous avez ? 
Vous n'avez pas celui que j'ai. 



Eighth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Huitieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

Good evening, Madam, you are well, I hope ? Perfectly well, 
Sir, I thank you. — I am glad to hear it. And you, Sir, how do you 
do? Not very well* but take a seat and sit down. Thank you, I 
have a seat. — Have you the corn of your granary or that of mine ? 
I have neither that of your granary nor that of mine ; but I have 
that of our merchant. — Have you the grocer's? No, I have it not. 
Who has my glove ? That servant has it. — What has this servant ? 
He has the old farmer's big tree. — Has the farmer this or that ox (mind 
the French construction.) He has neither this nor that ; but he has 
the one which the boy has not. — Which boy? The big one or the 
good one? The big one. — Have you that young horse's corn? I 
have it not; our servant has it. — Has your brother my note or his? 
He has neither yours nor his own ; but he has that of the big sailor. 
— Have you the copybook ? Which copybook ? The big copybook. 
— The big copybook ? No, I have it not ; but Charles has it. — What 
have you got ? I have my copybook, yours, his, or hers, and the 
grocer's. — Have you the chest which I have ? I have not that 
which you have. — Which handkerchief have you? I have the one 
which your brother has not. — Which inkstand has our friend's bro- 
ther ? He has that which the farmer's boy has not. — What copy- 
book have you ? I have the big one which you have not. — What 
horse has the shoemaker ? He has that which our brother's farmer 
has not. — What has the grocer ? He has the bag of rice which I 

1 Translate : the one, by celui, except when the one is in apposition to the 
other. (Less. 15.) 



44 



NINTH LESSON. 



have not. — Which waistcoat have you? I have that which my 
young friend has not got. — Are you cold or hungry ? I am neither 
cold nor hungry; but Jean (John) is afraid. — Is he afraid ? Yes, 
he is afraid of that big ox —Who is sleepy ? I am not sleepy, but 
I am thirsty. — Have you the iron or the wooden ship 1 I have 
neither this nor that \ but I have that which the big captain has not. 

T am very sorry to hear it, (or for it.) | J' en suis bien fache. 



NINTH LESSON, 9th.— Neuvieme Legon, 9me. 

Vocabulary. 1st Section. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL.— Formation du Pluriel. 
As the plural of nouns, in French, is shown by the preceding article or 
attending word, we will, in the first place, give the plural of those different 

expressions. 



Singular. 


Singulier. 


Plural for 


Pluriel pour 


Masculine. 


Masculin. 


both genders. 


les deux genres. 


The. 


Le. 


The. 


Les. 


Of the. • 


Du (for : de le.) 


Of the. 


Des (for : de les.) 



Obs. 21. Des, (contraction of: de les ; preposition and article plural,) is 
not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of: de, which, being a preposition, is 
invariable; but that of : du, (contraction of: de le, preposition and article 
singular.) 



My, of my. 


Mon, de mon. 


My, of my. 


Mes, de mes. 


Your, of your. 


Votre, de votre. 


Your, of your. 


Vos, de vos. 


His, her, of his. 


Son, de son. 


His, her, of her. 


Ses, de ses. 


Our, of our. 


Notre, de notre. 


Our, of our. 


Nos, de nos. 


Their, of their. 


Leur, de leur. 


Their, of their. 


Leurs, de leurs. 


Whi-.li ? 


Quel? 


Which ? 


Quels ? 


Whicn one ? 


Lequel ? 


Which ones ? 


Lesquels ? 


This , that. 


Ce, cet. 


These , those. 


Ces. 



General Rule for the formation of the Plural. 

The plural number, as in English, is formed by adding an s to the singu- 
lar. But, in French, this rule is not only applicable to nouns, but also to 
articles, adjectives, and pronouns. 



The books. 
Of the book. 
The sticks. 
Of the sticks. 



Les livres. 
Du livre. 
Les batons. 
Des batons. 



Of the copybooks. Des cahiers. 



The good books. Les bons livres. 
Of the books. Des livres. 
The good sticks. Les bons batons. 
The copybooks. Les cahiers. 
The pretty copy- Les jolis cahiers. 
books. 



NINTH LESSON. 



45 



The good friends. Les bons amis. 

Our pretty shawls. Nos jolis chales. 

My penknives. Mes canifs. 

Small. Petit. Petits. 

Which large fans have I ? 
You have my large fans. 
Who has the merchant's shawls? 
Nobody has his shawls, but some one 
has his pretty parasols and ribbons. 

Which ones ? The small ones. 
Have you my leather shoes ? 
I have not your leather shoes, but 
your cloth coats. 



Of the friends. Des amis. 

Of our shawls. De nos chales. 

Of his penknives. De ses canifs. 

Great, large. Grand. Grands. 

Quels grands eventails ai-je ? 
Vous avez mes grands eventails. 
Qui a les chales du marchand ? 
Personne n'a ses chales, mais 

quelqu'un a ses jolis parasols et 

ses rubans. 
Lesquels ? Les petits. 
Avez-vous mes souliers de cuir ? 
Je n'ai pas vos souliers de cuir, mais 

vos habits de drap. 



Ninth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Neuvieme Exerctce. Ire Sec. 

Good evening, Miss, I hope you are well ? Perfectly well, Sir, 
I thank you. I am glad to hear it. — How is your father 1 He is 
well, I hope. No, Sir, not very well. I am sorry to hear it. But 
take a seat and sit down. Thank you. — Have you my gloves'? 
Yes, Sir, I have your gloves. — Have you the stranger's gloves ? No, 
Sir, I have not his gloves. — Have I your looking-glasses? You 
have our looking-glasses. — What has the little sailor? He has the 
pretty parasols. — Has he my sticks or my guns? He has neither 
your sticks nor your guns. — Who has the tailor's good waistcoats ? 
Nobody has his vests ; but somebody has his silver buttons. — Has 
the Frenchman's boy our good umbrellas? He has not our good 
umbrellas, but our parasols. — Has the shoemaker the shoes of the 
strangers ? He has not their shoes. — Has he their bags ? Which 
bags ? Their leather bags. No, he has neither their shoes nor their 
leather bags ; but he has the velvet shoes of the merchants. — What 
has the captain? He has his good sailors. — Which brooms has our 
servant ? He has the brooms of our grocer. — Of the young or of 
the old grocer? Of the old one. — Has this man those large fans? 
He has not those large fans. — Has he your copybook or your friend's? 
He has neither mine nor my friend's; he has his own. Have you 
three of the exercises? Of which exercises? Of the exercises of 
V. Value. Yes, I have three of his exercises. Has your brother 
the wine which I have or that which you have? He has neither 
that which you have nor that which I have. — Which wine has he ? 
He has that of his grocer. — Have you the bag which my servant 
has? I have not the bag which your servant has. — Have you the 
chicken which nay cook has or that which the peasant has? I have 
neither that which your cook has nor that which the peasant has.— 
Ts the peasant cold or warm? He is neither cold nor warm. 



40 NINTH LESSON. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

Exceptions to the General Rule to form the Plural. 

1st Exception. — Nouns ending in s, x, or z, admit of no variation in the 
plural ; because those terminations are considered as plural ones. 



The stockings. 
The French. 
The Englishman. 
Our choice. 
The nose. 



Les bas. 
Les Francais. 
L' Anglais. 
Notre choix. 
Le nez. 



My mattresses. Mes matelas. 
Their woods, forests. Leurs bois. 
The English. Les Anglais. 

Our choices. Nos choix. 

The noses. Les nez. 



2d Exception. — Nouns ending in au, eu, and some in ou, 1 take x instead 
of s. 



The hats. 
The place. 
This fire. 
That jewel. 
The cabbages. 



Les chapeaux. 
Le lieu. 
Ce feu-ci. 
Ce bijou- la. 
Les choux. 



The birds. 
The places. 
Those fires. 
These jewels. 
Your toys. 



Les oiseaux. 
Les lieux. 
Ces feux-la. 
Ces bijoux-ci. 
Vos joujoux. 1 



3d Exception. — Nouns ending in al, 2 or ail, 3 change those terminations 
into aux. As : 

The horses. Les chevaux. I General, generals. General, generaux. 

The work, labor. Le travail. I The works, labors. Les travaux. 

Obs. 22. There are a few more exceptions in the formation of the plural 
of nouns and adjectives, which will be separately noted as they occur. 
The ships. | Les batiments or batimens. 

Obs. 23. According to some grammarians, nouns of more than one sylla- 
ble, (polysyllables,) ending in the singular in nt, drop t in the plural, but 
nouns of one syllable (monosyllables) having this ending, never do. 
The gloves. | Les gants. 



1 The other nouns ending in ou, that take x in the plural, are : le caillou, 
the pebble ; le genou, the knee; le hibou, the owl. All others that have 
this termination now follow the general rule, taking s in the plural ; as, le 
clou, the nail, plut les clous, the nails ; leverrou, the bolt, plur. les verrous, 
the bolts, &c. 

2 Of the nouns ending in al, several follow the general rule, simply taking 
s in the plural, particularly the following : le bal, the ball ; le cal, the callo- 
sity ; le pal, the pale ; le regal, the treat ; le carnaval, the carnival, &c. 

3 The nouns ending in ail, which make their plural in aux, are particularly 
the following : le bail, the lease ; le sous-bail, the under-lease ; le corail, 
the coral; I 'email, the enamel; le soupirail, the air-hole; le travail, the 
work ; le vantail, the leaf of a folding-door ; le ventail, the ventail. All 
others having this termination follow the general rule, t. e. take s in the 
plural; as, Vattirail, the train; le detail, particulars; Veventail, the fan; 
le gouvernail, the rudder : leportail, the portal ; le serail, the seraglio ; &c. 



NINTH LESSON. 



47 



The eye. 

The scissors. 



I/ceil. 

Les ciseaux. 



Which horses have you ? . 

I have the fine horses of your good 

neighbors. 
Have I his small gloves ? 
You have not his small gloves, but 

you have his large hats. 
Which gloves have I ? 
You have the pretty glomes of your 

brothers. 
Have you the large hammers of the 

carpenters ? 
I have not their large hammers, but 

their large nails. 
Has your brother my wooden guns ? 
He has not your wooden guns. 
Which ones has he ? 
Have you the Frenchmen's fine um- 
brellas ? 
I have not their fine umbrellas, but I 

have their fine sticks. 

The oxen. 

Of my gardens. 

Of your woods or forests. 

Have you the trees of my gardens ? 

I have not the trees of your gardens. 

Of my pretty gardens. 

Of my fine horses. 



Les yeux. 

Les porte-feuilles. 1 



The eyes. 

The pocket- 
books. 
Quels chevaux avez-vous ? 
J'ai les beaux chevaux de vos bona 

voisins. 
Ai-je ses petits gants? 
Vous n' avez pas ses petits gants, mais 

vous avez ses grands chapeaux. 
Quels gants ai-je ? 
Vous avez les jolis gants de vos 

freres. 
Avez-vous les grands marteaux des 

charpentiers ? 
Je n'ai pas leurs grands marteaux, 

mais j'ai leurs grands clous. 
Votre frere a-t-il mes fusils de bois ? 
II n'a pas vos fusils de bois. 
Lesquels a-t-il ? 
Avez-vous les beaux parapluies des 

Frangais ? 
Je n'ai rias leurs beaux parapluies, 

mais j'ai leurs beaux batons. 

Les bceufs. (in the plural, f silent.) 

De mes jardins. 

De vos bois. 

Avez-vous les arbres de mes jardins t 

Je n'ai pas les arbres de vos jardins. 

De mes jolis jardins. 

De mes beaux chevaux. 



Ninth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Neuvieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

Are you well. Miss Gertrude ? Yes, Sir ; I am very well, thank 
you. — And you, Sir, how do you do? Not very well, thank you, 
Miss. — Indeed! I am sorry to hear it. Take off your shawl and hat, 
and sit down. — Thank you, thank you. With pleasure, I will. — Have 
I your pretty pocket-books? You have not my pretty pocket-books. 
— Which pocket-books have I ? You have the small pocket-books 
of your friends. — Has the foreigner our good pistols'? He has not 
our good pistols, but our old sticks. — Who has our ships ? The fo- 
reigner has our ships. — Who has our fine horses? Nobody has our 
fine horses; but somebody has our fine oxen. — Has your neighbor 
the choice of those trees ? Our neighbor has not the choice of those 
trees; but the great general has it. — Who has the old jewels of Mrs. 



1 (§ 140.) For the formation of the plural of compound words. 



48 



TENTH LESSON. 



Le Noir ? Her brother has her jewels. — Has the little boy his toys 
or his birds'? He has his birds, but little John (le petit) has his play- 
things. — Has the farmer got the horses' hay^? He has not their hay, 
but their corn. — Has that tailor my fine gold buttons ? He has not 
your fine gold buttons; but our old silver strings. — Has our friend 
our big pencils ? He has not our big pencils, but he has the ugly 
dogs of the generals. — Has little John the choice of those toys'? 
No, he has not the choice of those toys ; but little Robert has it. 
— Who has the merchant's fine inkstands'? Nobody has his fine 
inkstands* but I have his large copybooks. — Who has their coarse 
handkerchiefs ? The captain's sailor has their coarse handkerchiefs. 
— Have you the grocer's coal ? No, I have it not. — Have I got it ? 
You have it not. — Who has his coal? The servants of the generals. 
— W T hat have you? I have something bad. — What have you bad? 
I have the bad chocolate. — The grocer's bad chocolate? No, the 
old sailor's. — Has your friend the small knives of our merchants? 
He has not their small knives, but their golden candlesticks. — Have 
you the big cabbages or the little ones? I have neither the big 
cabbages nor the little ones. — Which have you ? I have the farm- 
er's good cabbages. — Have you the choice of the cabbages ? No, I 
have it not; but my brother has it. — Which choice has he ? He has 
the first. — Who has the second choice ? I have it not. — What fan 
have you ? What fan have I ? Yes, what fan have you ? I have 
not yours, but mine. 

A sore throat. Mai de gorge. 

A cold. A bad cold. Un rhume. 

A headache. Mai de tete. 



Un mauvais rhume. 



TENTH LESSON, 10th, 
Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
Those. Those of the generals. 

Have you my dictionaries or those of 

the general ? 
I have not yours, I have those of the 

general. 

Those which. 
Have you the handkerchiefs which I 

have ? 
I have not those (which) you have. 
The cloak. Our cloaks. 

This seat. These seats. 

Has the tailor this gentleman 1 s 

cloak ? 



—Dixieme Legon, lOme. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Ceux. Ceux des generaux. 

Avez-vous mes dictionnaires ou ceux 

du general ? 
Je n'ai pas les votres, j'ai ceux du 

general. 

Ceux que. (§ 36.) 
Avez-vous les mouchoirs que j'ai ? 

Je n'ai pas ceux que vous avez. 
Le manteau. Nos manteaux. 

Ce siege. Ces sieges. 

Le tailleur a-t-il le manteau de ce 
Monsieur ? 



TENTH LESSON. 



49 



The gentlemen. 

Ladies. Young ladies. 

(Used when speaking to them.) 
Have you my silver knives ? 
No, I have mine. 



Les Messieurs. 
Mesdames. 



Mesdemoiselles. 



Avez-vous mes couteaux d'argent? 
Non. j'ai les miens. 



Obs. 24. As mine refers to a plural noun, it must be translated by a 
plural pronoun. Then use : les miens, which is plural, and not the singular: 
le mien. 



Mine, my own. Of mine. 
Yours, * your own. Of yours. 
His or hers (his or her own.) Of his. 
Ours, our own. Of our own. 
Theirs, their own. Of theirs. 

These substantives. Those nouns. 
The article. The articles. 

Which adjective ? Which adjectives ? 
This verb. Those verbs. 

The pronoun, — pronouns personal, 
namely, or viz : I, you, he, it, &c. 
Also. The catalogue. 



Singulier. 
Le mien. 
Le votre. 
Le sien. 
Le notre. 
Le leur. 



Pluriel. 
Les miens, des miens. 



Les votres. 
Les siens. 
Les notres. 
Les leurs. 



des votres. 
des siens. 
des notres. 
des leurs. 



Ces substantifs-ci.^Ces noms-la. 
L' article. Les articles. 

Quel adjectif? Quels adjectifs? 

Ce verbe-ci. Ces verbes-la. 

Lepronom. Les pronoms personnels, 

savoir : Je, vous, il, le, et cetera. 
Aussi. Le catalogue. 



Tenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Dixieme Exerctce. Ire Sec. 

Good day. Miss, you are well. I hope ? Very well. Sir, I thank 
you. — And you, how do you do? Not very well, this morning. 
— Indeed! I am very sorry for it. — What is the matter with yon? 
I have a bad cold and a sore throat. How is the general? (M. le 
general?) He is pretty well. — And his brother? He is pretty well 
also. — Take a seat and sit down. — Have you these or those nouns? 
I have neither these nor those nouns. — Which ones have you? I 
have those which little Robert has — namely, (savoir:) handker- 
chief, inkstand, cloak, dictionary, fan, penknife, &c. — Have you: 
the eye J Yes, I have : Vail. — Have you the plural of ceil? I have it, 
and he has got it, also. — Has Charles the catalogue of the verbs 
which you have ? He has the catalogue of those which I have and 
that of yours, also. Have you the French of : to give? I have 
it not: but I have that of, He is better, and that of the places. Have 
you the horses of the French or those of the English? I have those 
of the English, but not those of the French. — Which oxen have you ? 
I have those of the foreigners. — Have )OU the fans which I have? 
I have not those which you have, but those which your brother 
has. — Has your brother his biscuits or mine? He has his own and 
mine also. — Has he got yours or those of the young general? He 
has neither ours nor those of the young general. — Which horses has 



50 



TENTH LESSON. 



your friend's grocer ? He has those which the stranger has not.— 
Has your farmer my copybooks or theirs? He has neither ours nor 
theirs, but he has those of the captain. — Have I your vests or those 
of the tailors'? You have not theirs, you have mine. — Have 1 the 
large cloaks? No, you have not got the large cloaks. — Which ink- 
stands have I ? You have not ours, but those of our neighbors. — 
Have you the birds of the sailors ? I have not their birds, but their 
fine sticks. — Which jewels has this ugly boy % He has mine. — Have 
I my shoes or those of the shoemakers ? You have not yours, but 
theirs. — Which paper has the man ? He has ours. — Has he our 
coffee ? He has it not. — Have you our big coats, or those of the 
strangers? I have not anything. — Has your brother this or that 
lawyer? He has that one. — Have I these or those books? — You 
have not anything. 



I hope you are better ? 
Much better, at your service. 
The toothache. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. 

This word. Those words. 

Have you these words or those ? 
Have you these or those words ? 
These (plural of : this one.) 
Those (plural of : that one.) 
I have neither these nor those. 
Has he these or those ? 
He has these ; he has not those. 
You have neither these nor those. 
You have neither the one nor the 

other. 
You have neither the former nor the 

latter. 

Obs. 25. The English phrases : the former or the latter ; the one and the 
other, are generally expressed by : celui-ci, ceux-ci ; celui-la, ceux-lti ; but 
in an inverted order : celui-ci, referring to the latter or nearest object ; and 
celui-la, to the former or more distant one. 



J'espere que vous vous portezmieux* 
Beaucoup mieux, a votre service. 
Mai aux dents. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Ce mot-ci. Ces mots-la. 

£ Avez-vous ces mots-ci ou ceux-la? 

Ceux-ci. (pluriel de : celui-ci.) 
Ceux-ld. (pluriel de : celui-la.) 
Je n'ai ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. 
A-t-il ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? 
II a ceux-ci ; il n'a pas ceux-la. 

Vous n'avez ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. 



Have you my guns or yours ? 

I have neither yours nor mine. 

I have neither the former nor the 
latter. 

Have you not ? 

Have you nothing ? (not anything.) 

Nobody, (no one, not any one; (ob- 
jective.) 

You have nobody. 

What have you not ? (or not gof ?) 



Avez-vous mes fusils ou les votres ? 
les votres ni les miens. 



) Je n'ai ni 
( Je n'ai ni 



i ceux-la, ni ceux-ci. 

IV' avez-vous pas ? 
IV' avez-vous ricn ? 
Ne .... personne. (Regime.) 

Vous n' avez personne. 
Que 71 avez-vous pas t 



TENTH LESSON. 



51 



Has he ? Has he not ? 

Has he anything ? Has he nothing ? 

Has he any one ? Has he nobody ? 

What has he not ? 

Has not the man got ? 

Has not the dog got anything ? 

Have you my penknife ? 

Yes, Sir, I have got it. 

Have you not (got) my penknife ? 

No, Sir, I have it not. 

Have you not got it, Miss ? 

Yes, I have it. 



A-t-il? N'a-t-il pas ? 

A-t-il quelque chose ? N'a-t-il rien? 

A-t-il quelqu'un ? N' a-t-il personnel 

Que 7t' a-t-il pas ? 

L'homme n'a-t-il pas ? 

Le chien n'a-t-il rien ? 

Avez-vous mon canif? 

Oui, Monsieur, je l'ai. 

N'avez-vous pas mon canif? 

Non, Monsieur, je ne l'ai pas. 

Ne P avez-vous pas, Mademoiselle ? 



Si fait, je l'ai. 

Obs. 26. When the question is asked negatively, the French answer 
affirmatively by : Si fait, instead of : Oui. The negative answer remains 
as usual. 



Has he nothing ? No, nothing. 

Yes, he has something. 

Have you not your money ? 

Yes, I have it. No, I have it not. 

Has not the scholar his book ? 

Yes, he has it. 

The scholar, pupil, student. 



N'a-t-il rien ? Non, rien. 

Si fait, il a quelque chose. 

N'avez-vous pas votre argent ? 

Si fait, je l'ai. Non, je ne l'ai pas. 

Uecolier n'a-t-il pas son livre ? 

Si fait, il l'a. 

L'ecolier. 



Tenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Dixieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

I hope you are better this evening, Miss. — I thank you. I am much 
better ) but my young brother has the toothache. — I am very sorry 
for it. — How is Mr. Charles ? He is not well • he has a bad cold. — 
Has he a sore throat? No, he has not a sore throat ; but he has a 
headache. And you, Sir, are you well? I am perfectly well, thank 
you. — I am glad of it. — Has your carpenter our hammers or those 
of the scholars, our friends'? He has neither ours nor those of the 
scholars. — Which nails has he ? He has his good iron nails. — Has 
any one the fans or shawls of the English? No one has those of 
the English, but some one has those of the French. — Have you not 
my cloak? Yes (si fait), I have it. — Have you not the hats of the 
generals ? Yes, I have the generals 7 hats. — Has not the dog the 
cook's chickens? Yes, it has his chickens. — Has he not his large 
knives ? Yes, he has his large knives. — Who has his cheese ? His 
cheese? He has it. Has he got it? — Who has my old gun? The 
sailor has it. — Has not the shoemaker the student's old shoe? Yes, 
he has it. — Has not our cook the stranger's money? No, he has 
not. — Have you not got that money ? Yes, I have. (1st Direction) — 
Have I anything? Yes, you have something. — What have I? You 
have your friend's leather gloves.-— Has not big John something 
good ? Yes, he has something good. — And little Charles, what has 



52 



TENTH LESSON. 



~N 



he ? NothiDg. — What have you small ? I have Lamartine's pretty 
little bird (joli petit.) — Who has our copybooks and his? I have 
neither these nor those. — Has the generaPs boy nothing? Yes, he 
has his dictionary of French, his inkstand, his pencil, his copybooks, 
and his little brother's toys. — Have I that farmer's bags? You have 
not his bags, but his corn. — Has he your books or her shawls? He 
has neither these nor those ; but he has the old handkerchiefs. — Is 
the stranger's brother hungry ? He is not hungry, but thirsty. — Is 
your friend cold or sleepy? He is neither cold nor sleepy; but he 
is afraid. — Is he afraid of your dog ? He is not afraid. — Has not the 
young man the brooms of our servants? He has not their brooms, ^ 
but their soap. — Which pencils has he not? He has not mine. — Has 
he not large eyes? Yes, he has large eyes. — What eyes has the 
bird ? It has small eyes. 

> t Quel temps fait-il ? 

t Fait-il chaud ? II fait chaud. 

II ne fait pas chaud. 

t II fait beau (mauvais) temps. 

t II fait froid. Fait-il froid ? 

Ne fait-il pas froid ? 

Je vous souhaite le bonjour. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 



How is the weather ? 

What kind of weather is it ? 

Is it warm ? It is warm. 

It is not warm. 

It is fine (bad) weather. 

It is cold. Is it cold ? 

Is it not cold ? 

I wish (or bid) you a good morning. 

Vocabulary. 3d Section. 
Who has ? Who has not ? 

Who has something ? 
Who has nothing ? 
Who has some one ? 
Who has nobody? 
Who has not got the young bird ? 
Has he neither this nor that ? 
Has he neither these nor those ? 

The comb. These large combs. 

My glass. Their little glasses. 

Have you the glasses ? I have them. 

Them, (objective, § 43.) 

Has he my fine glasses ? 

He has them. [He them has.] 

He has them not. 

Have I got them ? (Them have I ?) 

You have thc:m. You have them noi. 

Have you them not ? (not got them 1) 

Yes, I have them. 

Has he not got it ? Yes, he has it. 

Has not the sailor got my old pistols ? 



Qui a? Qui n'a pas ? 

Qui a quelque chose ? 

Qui n'a rien ? 

Qui a quelqu'un ? 

Qui n'a personne ? 

Qui n'a pas le jeune oiseau ? 

N'a-t-il ni celui-ci ni celui-la ? 

N'a-t-il ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la ? 

Le peigne. Ces grands peignea. 
Mon verve. Leurs petits verres. 
Avez-vous les verres ? Je les ai. 
Les, (regime direct : avant le verbe.) 
A-t-il mes beaux verres ? 
II les a. ($ 51, &c.) 
II ne les a pas. 
Les ai-je ? 

Vous les avez. Vous ne les avez pas, 
Ne les avez-vous pas ? 
Si fait, je les ai. 
Ne l'a-t-il pas? Si fait, il l'a. 
Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes vieux 
pistolets ? 



TENTH LESSON. 



53 



He has them not. 

Yes, he has them. 

Has he not got them ? 

Have I it not ? Have I them not ? 

Yes, you have it. You have them. 

Have I nobody ? 

Yes, you have somebody. 

Have I nothing ugly ? 

Yes, you have something ugly. 

Have I neither your gold nor your 

silver thimble ? 
Yes, you have them. 
What have I not? 
You have not the scissors of silver. 
Am I neither hungry nor thirsty ? 
This lawyer. The minister. 

Has not this lawyer got ? 
Has our cook got nothing ? 
Has their neighbor nobody ? 
What has not the doctor got ? 
Is not the dog hungry or thirsty ? 
Is Carnot neither sleepy nor afraid ? 
Is he not right ? Yes, he is. 

Is not that minister wrong ? 
No ; that minister is right. 
Which lawyer has the stranger ? 
He has the minister's brother. 



II ne les a pas. 

Si fait, il les a. 

Ne les a-t-il pas ? 

Ne l'ai-je pas ? Ne les ai-je pas ? 

Si fait, vous l'avez — vous les avez. 

N' ai-je personne ? 

Si fait, vous avez quelqu'un. 

N' ai-je rien de viiain? 

Si fait, vous avez quelque chose de 

viiain. 
N' ai-je ni votre de d'or ni celui 

d' argent * 
Si fait, vous ies avez. 
Que n' ai-je pas ? 

Vous n' avez pas les ciseauxd' argent. 
N'ai-je ni faim ni soif ? 
Cet avocat. Le ministre. 

Cet avocat n' a-t-il pas ? 
Notre cuisinier n' a-t-il rien ? 
Leur voisin n' a-t-il personne ? 
Le medecin que n'a-t-il pas ? 
Le chien n'a-t-il pas faim ou soif? 
Carnot n'a-t-il ni sommeil ni peur ? 
N'a-t-il pas raison ? Si fait. 
Ce ministre-la n'a-t-il pas tort ? 
Non ; ce ministre-la a raison. 
Quel avocat l'etranger a-t-il ? 
II a le frere du ministre. 



Tenth Exercise. 3d Sec. — Dixieme Exercice. 3me Sec. 

Mile. Charlotte, I wish you a good morning. — How do you do? 
Thank you. Sir. I am very well, but very cold. — Is it cold? Yes. it 
is very cold. — I am sorry for it. How is your young friend? I hope 
he is better this morning. — Yes, Sir, he is better. — And how is Ma- 
dame ? Madame is perfectly well. — Mile. Anne is well, I hope? 
No, not very well. And her brother has a bad cold. — Take a seat 
and sit down. Thank you. — Is it warm to-day? No, it is not 
warm. — Have you my fine glasses? I have them. — Have you not 
the fine horses of the English? I have them not. — Who has them? 
The old minister has. (Dir. 1st.) — Which sticks have you? I have 
those of the foreigners. — Who has our small combs? My boys have 
them. — Which knives has the lawyer's servant? He has those of 
your friends. — Which (ones) has he not? He has not ours. — Have 
J not your good guns? No, you have not got them : but the old 
general has them. — What has the farmer got? He has the grocer's 
bag of rice. — Has not the pretty young man Miss Claras beautiful 
5* 



54 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



handkerchiefs'? He has them not. I have them. — Have you them? 
Yes, I have them. I have also her velvet shawl, her gold pencil- 
case, her silver inkstand, her small copybooks, her two large dic- 
tionaries of French; her fans, and the toys of her friend Anguste. — 
Who has the fine cloaks of the generals'? The minister's servant 
has them. — Has the scholar the words which you have 1 He has 
them not. — Has not the scholar got good dictionaries? Yes, he has 
good dictionaries of French. — Which playthings has the grocer's 
little boy? He has little Henry's playthings. — Have you the nouns, 
adjectives, and pronouns of the (la) ninth lesson? I have those 
of the ninth vocabulary and those of the exercises. — Has the lawyer 
or the minister the choice of the farmer's cabbages ? The lawyer 
has it. — Has he not also the choice of the grocer's cheese ? Yes, he 
has. — Who has the choice of the merchant's wine ? The minister, 
'the lawyer, or the generals? Neither the minister, the lawyer, nor 
the generals, but the grocer. — Are you not ashamed? No, I am 
not. — Is the scholar ashamed*? Yes, he is. — Is he right or wrong? 
He is not wrong, he is right. — Is not the tailor ashamed of his coats? 
Yes, he is ashamed of his coats. Who is not cold ? I am not. — 
Who has nothing ugly? Their brother's friend has nothing ugly. — 
Has the youth Anne's handkerchiefs? Which handkerchiefs? The 
small ones. — No, he has them not; but he has those of her brother. 
Who has the cook's mutton ? Nobody has it ; but the carpenter's 
dog has. (Dir. 1st.) — Has the stranger got the farmer's fine mutton ? 
He has it not. — Have you my pretty pistols or those of my brothers? 
I have neither yours nor your brothers', but my own. — Who has 
these or those nails ? Nobody has either these or those. 



I am glad to hear it. 

I am glad to see you. 

I am sorry to hear that you have the 

toothache. 
Out of doors. Pleasant, agreeable. 



Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre. 

Je suis bien aise de vous voir. 

Je suis fache d'apprendre que vous 

avez mal aux dents. 
Dehors. Agreable. 



ELEVENTH LESSON, 11th.— Onzieme Legon, lime. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
They. have. They have got. 
They have not. They have nothing. 
They have it. They have it not. 
They have them. 
They have not got them. 
The Germans. The Turks. 



VOCABULAIRE. 

lis. ont. 

lis n'ont pas. 

lis l'ont. 

lis les ont. 

lis ne les ont pas. 

Les Allemands. 



Ire Section, 
lis ont. 
lis n'ont lien, 
lis ne 1'onl pas 

Les Turcs. 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



55 



The Germans have. 

The Turks have not. 

Have they ? Have they not ? 

The Italians. The Spaniards. 

Of the Italians. Those Spaniards, t 

Have the Spaniards ? 

Have not the Italians got ? 

Have they got anything ? 

Have they nothing ? 

Have they got it ? Have they them ? 

What have they ? The fine ones. 

They have the Spaniard's fine dogs. 

What have they not ? 

They have not the general's paper. 

Article Partitive or Indefinite 

Adjective Pronoun. 
Some or any. (H, § 25.) 
Of some, of any, from some, any. 
Some or any wine. Bread. 

Some or any butter. Milk. 
Some or any books. Buttons. 
Some or any knives. Men. 
This steel. Some or any steel. 
Some or any gold. Silver. 

Some or any friends. Birds. 
Have you any wine ? I have (some 

wine). 
Has that man any cloth ? 
He has some cloth, or, He has. 
Has the scholar any copybooks ? 
He has some copybooks). 
Have they any steel ? 
The English have steel. 

No, or not any .... (before a noun.) 
I have no wine. 
He has no steel. 
You have no cloaks. 
Have they no friends ? 

Obs. 27. Mind that the noun after 
but merely de or d\ (Or, you put de 
tiou.) 

Is anything the matter with them ? 
Wnat is the matter with them ? (ails 

them ?) 
Nothing is the matter with them. 
What is the matter with the Italians ? 



Les Allemands ont. 

Les Turcs n'ont pas. 

Ont-ils ? N'ont-ils pas ? 

Les Italiens. Les Espagnols. 

Des Italiens. Ces Espagnols-la. 

Les Espagnols ont-ils? (Obs. 14, 

p. 38.) 
Les Italiens n'ont-ils pas ? 
Ont-ils quelque chose ? 
N'ont-ils rien ? 

L'ont-ils ? Les ont-ils ? 

Qu'ont-ils ? Les beaux, 

lis ont les beaux chiens de V Espagnol. 
Que n'ont-ils pas ? 
lis n'ont pas le papier du general. 

Article Partitif. 
Singulier. mas. Pluriel, m. et f 



V 



Des. 

De, (not de des.) 
Du pain. 
Du lait. 
Des boutons. 
Des hommes. 
De l'acier. 
De 1' argent. 
Des oiseaux. 
J'ai du vin. 



Du. de I 
De, (not de du.) 
Du vin. 
Du beurre. 
Des livres. 
Des couteaux. 
Cet acier. 
De l'or. 
Des amis. 
Avez-vous du vin ? 

(Ire Direction.) 
Cet homme a-t-il du drap ? 
II a du drap. 

L'ecolier a-t-il des cahiers ? 
II a des cahiers. 
Ont-ils de l'acier? 
Les Anglais ont de l'acier. 

Ne pas de (§ 26.) 

Je n'ai pas de vin. 
II n'a pas d'acier. 
Vous n'avez pas de manteaux. 
N'ont-ils pas d'amis ? 
a negation, takes, not : du, nor des , 
before the noun that follows a nega- 

t Ont-ils quelque chose ? 
t Qu'ont-ils ? 

t lis n'ont rien. 

t Qu'ont les Italiens t 



66 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



Eleventh Exercise. 1st Sec. — Onzieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Good day, Miss Amanda, I am glad to see you. You are well, I 
hope? — Very well, thank you; but my father is not well. — Indeed! 
I am sorry to hear it. — What is the matter with him 1 He has a 
bad cold. — I am sorry to hear that he has a bad cold. — Has he a 
sore throat too? No, but he has a pain in his head. — Is the general 
well? No, but he is much better. — I am glad to bear it. — Is it cold 
or warm to-day out of doors? It is neither warm nor cold; but 
pleasant. I am pleased at it. — Sit down. With pleasure. — Take 
this seat. Thank you. — Which ships have the Germans? The 
Germans have no ships. — Have the sailors our fine matti isses? They 
have them not. — Have the cooks got them? They have them. — 
Has the captain your big copybooks ? He has no copybooks. — Have 
I them ? You have them not : but 1 have. — Has the Italian the 
boys ; steel inkstand ? He has it not. — Have the Turks any steel guns ? 
They have no steel guns. — Have not the Spaniards got them? Yes, 
They have them. — Has not the Spaniard the pretty umbrellas of the 
Germans? Yes, he has them. — Has he them? Yes, indeed, he 
has them. 

Have not the two big Italians our pretty thread gloves? They 
have not. (Dir. 1st.) — Who has? The Turks have them, and they 
have also our big paper fans. — The pretty ones or the old ones ? 
The pretty ones. — Have not the tailors our cloth waistcoats or those 
of your friends? They have neither the latter nor the former; but 
they have those of the general, of the lawyer, and of little John. — 
Which coats have they? They have the velvet coats which the 
Turks have not. — Which dogs have you? I have those which no- 
body has. — Have I the handkerchiefs that nobody has? Yes, indeed, 
you have those which nobody has. — Have you not any wood ? — Yes, 
I have some wood. — Has not your small brother got some soap? 
No, he has no soap. — Have I not some mutton ? No, you have no 
mutton, but you have some birds and chickens. — Have I no beef? 
No, you have no beef. — Who has beef? Nobody has beef. — Have 
your friends any money? They have money. — Have they no milk? 
They have no milk, but they have butter. — Have I no wood ? No, 
you have no wood, but you have some coals, (sing. in. Fr.) — Have the 
old merchants any cloth ? They have no cloth, but they have cotto* 
thread, ribbons, and stockings. 



I wish you a good evening. (I bid you.) 
How have you been ? 
I have been pretty well. 
I have not been very well. 



Je vous souhaite le bonsoir. 
Comment vous etes-vous porte ? 
Je me suis assez bien porte. 
Je ne me suis pas tres-bie a port& 



ELEVENTH LESSON. 



57 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
Some or any before an adjective). 
Some or any good cheese. 
Some or any fine velvet. 
Some or any excellent wine. 
Some or any excellent coffee. 
Some or any very pretty glasses. 
Some or any large fans. 

Some or any old wine. 

Some or any excellent cabbages. 

No or not any .... 
Have you any good butter ? 
I have no good butter, but some ex- 
cellent cheese. 
Has not this man some good books ? 



He has not any good books. 

Have the young merchants pTetty 

gloves and pocket-books ? 
They have neither pretty gloves nor 

pocket-books, but fine jewels. 



The clerk. These clerks. 

Our bookseller. 
Their shoe-dealer. 
Those cloth-merchants, ^drapers.) 
The milkman — butter-man. 
This wood (coal) merchant. 
The painter. The picture. 

Some coals. 



What has the baker ? 

What have the cloth-merchants ? 
They have excellent clerks. 
Are the Americans afraid ? 
The Americans are not afraid. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
De, vnot du nor des.) $ 26.) 
De bon fromage. 
De beau velours. 
D'excellent vin. 
D' excellent cafe. 
De tres-jolis verres. 
De grands eventails. - 

Du vin vieux. 



Des choux excellents. 



De and d 1 ; 
the adjectives 
coming beiore 
the nouns. 
Repeat it bef. 
every noun. 

Du and des; 
the nouns be- 
ing before the 
adjective. 



Ne .... pas de . . . . 

Avez-vous de bon beurre ? 

Je n'ai pas de bon beurre, mais 

d'excellent fromage. 
Cet homme n'a-t-il pas de bons 

livres ? 
II n'a pas de bons livres. 
Lesjeunes marchands ont-ils de jolis 

gants et de jolis porte-feuilles ? 
lis n'ont ni de jolis gants ni de jobs 

porte-feuilles, mais de beaux 

bijoux. 

Le commis. Ces commis. 

Notre marchand de livres. 

Leur marchand de souliers. 

Ces marchands de drap. 

Le marchand de lait — de beurre. 

Ce marchand de bois — de charbon. 
j Le peintre. Le tableau. 

I Du charbon, always sing, in Fr.) 

fLe boulanger qu'a-t-il? (14 et 15 

< Obs. p. 38.1 

v Qu'a le boulanger ? 

Qu'ont les marchands de drap ? 

lis ont d'excellents commis. 
i Les Americains ont-ils peur ? 
! Les Americains n'ont pas peur. 



Eleventh Exercise. 2d Sec. — Onzieme Exercice. 2de Sec 

I wish you a good evening, Mr. Charles. — How have you been % 
I have been pretty well ; and you 7 Miss, how have you been ? I 
have not been well. I am sorry to hear it. — What kind of weather 
is it out of doors? The weather is fine enough, (pretty fineV W 



58 ELEVENTH LESSON. 

cold. — Is it very cold? Not very cold, but pleasant. — I hope, Miss 
Emilie. that you are well ? Thank you. but 1 am not well, I have a 
sore throat. — And your friend Robert, how is he to-day? He is 
better, much better. — I am very glad to hear that he is better. — 
Which exercise have the scholars to-day ? They have the eleventh, 
the tenth, and the ninth. — -Which ones has the young clerk? He 
has the fifth, first and second section. — Have the English any silver' 1 
They have no silver, but they have excellent iron. ($25.) — Has the 
grocer any good coffee ? He has no good coffee, but some excellent 
wine. — Has the bookseller no old dictionaries? Yes, he has those 
of Boyer and Chambaud. — Has he those which your brothers have? 
No, he has not those which they have. — Has the milk-man no milk? 
Yes, he has some milk. — Have the French any good gloves ? They 
have excellent gloves. — Have they no birds ? No, they have no 
birds, but they have pretty jewels. — Who has excellent chocolate % 
The Spaniards have excellent chocolate. — Have they not some fine 
horses? Yes, they have some very fine horses. — Have not the 
Germans got large dogs? Yes, they have large dogs and oxen. 1 
— Have the Americans large oxen? No, they have little oxen and 
horses. 1 — -Has your friend's brother got some pretty little fans? 
Yes, he has some pretty little fans, shawls, and ribbons. 1 — What 
has he not? He has neither my shoes, nor yours, nor theirs. — Who 
has those of the French ? They have them and ours also. — Are 
not the coal-merchants ashamed? No, but they are afraid. — Is the 
clerk, the lawyer, or the minister wrong? No, they are not wrong; 
but right. — Have the wine-merchants anything good ? No, they 
have nothing good. — Have not the Americans something beautiful? 
Yes, they have the electric telegraph, (telegraphe electrique.) — Has 
the painter any umbrellas? He has no umbrellas, but he has 
beautiful pictures. — Has he the pictures of the French, or those of 
the Italians? Who? the painter? Yes, the painter. — He has 
neither the latter nor the former. 



As usual. 

Better than usual. 

Not so well as usual. 



Comme a l'ordinaire. 
Mieux qu'a l'ordinaire. 
Pas si bien qu'a l'ordinaire. 



Is he not better ? Yes, he is a little j N'est-il pas mieux ? Si fait, ou 
better. I Pardonnez-moi, il est un peu mieux. 

Obs. 28. Pardonnez-moi, is as frequently used as: Si fait, by the 
French. (Obs. 26.) 
I present my respects to you. | J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. 

1 Repeat the article and adjective : (et de grands bceufs.) 



TWELFTH LESSON. 



59 



TWELFTH LESSON, 12\h.—Douzieme Legon, 12me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
Some of it, any of it, of it, some. 
Some or any of them, of them, some. 
Have you any wine ? 
I have some of it — of it some — I have. 
Have you any coals ? 
Have you no coals ? 
I have none, not any — I have not. 
Have you not any ? Yes, I have. 
Have you any good steel ? 
I have some good ... or I have. 
Have I good cloth and velvet ? 
You have not any good. Youhavenot 
Has the grocer any sugar and salt ? 
He has sugar, but no salt. 
He has (some). He has not (any). 
Has he good sugar and soap ? 
He has (some good). He has not. 
Have I any bread and butter ? 
Have I no bread and butter ? 
You have some bread, hut no butter. 

You have neither bread nor butter. 

You have some. You have none. 

Have you any shoes and stockings ? 

I have shoes ; I have no stockings. 

1 have (some good). 

I have not (any good). 

Has the farmer got good horses ? 

He has (some good ones). He has not. 

Has he any pretty knives and scis- 
sors ? 

Has he no small penknives ? 

Yes, he has (some small ones). He 
has not. 

Have I no gold pencil-cases ? 

Yes, you have. 

Who has any ? Who has none ? 

The clerk has some. 

The man has none. 

Who has no clerk ? 

The lawyer has none. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

* E?i, (before the verb.) (§ 4, $ 25.) 

Avez-vous du vin ? 

J'en ai. (Ire direction.) 

Avez-vous du charbon ? 

N'avez-vous pas de charbon ? (§ 26.) 

Je n'en ai pas. 

N'en avez-vous pas ? Si fait, j'en ai. 

Avez-vous de bon acier ? 

J'en ai de bon. 

Ai-je de bon drap et de bon velours I 

Vojls n'en avez pas de bon. (Ire dir.) 

L'epicier a-t-il du sucre et du sel ? 

II a du sucre ; mais pas de sel. 

II en a. II n'en a pas. 

A-t-il de bon sucre et de bon savon ? 

II en a de bon. II n'en a pas de bon. 

Ai-je du pain et du beurre ? 

N' ai-je pas de pain et de beurre ? 

Vous avez du pain, mais pas de 

beurre. 
Vous n'avez ni pain ni beurre. 
Vous en avez. Vous n'en avez pas. 
Avez-vous des souliers et des bas ? 
J'ai des souliers : je n'ai pas de bas. 
J'en ai de bons. 
Je n'en ai pas de bons. 
Le fermier a-t-il de bons chevaux ? 
II en a de bons. II n'en a pas de bons. 
A-t-il de jolis couteaux et de jolis 

ciseaux ? 
N'a-t-il pas de petits canifs ? 
II en a de petits. II n'en a pas. 

N'ai-je pas de porte-crayons d'or ? 

Si fait, vous en avez. 

Qui en a ? Qui n'en a pas ? 

Le commis en a. 

L'homme n^en a pas. 

Qui n'a pas de commis ? 

L'avocat n'en a pas. 



Twelfth Exercise. 1st bee. — Douzieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Mr. Carnot, j'espere que vous vous 
portez mieux aujourd'hui. — Merci, Madame, je me porte beaucoup 



60 TWELFTH LESSON. 

mieux. — Mais vous, M. Napoleon, comment vous etes-vous porte? 
Je ne me suis pas bien porte, comme a Pordinaire. Je suis bien 
fache de Papprendre. Asseyez-vous. Prenez ce siege. — Avez-vous 
assez chaud? Oui, je vous remercie, je n'ai pas froid. — Avez-vous 
mal de gorge ? Non, mais mal de tete. — Votre ami se porte-t-il 
mieux qu'a Pordinaire? Oui, beaucoup mieux. Je suis bien aise 
d'apprendre qu'il se porte mieux.— Fait-il froid? Non, il fait agre- 
able. — Mr. Charles, avez-vous mon petit canif ? Non, M., je ne Pai 
pas. — Qui Pa? Votre ami Jules (Julius) Pa. — Non, Jules n'a pas 
le mien, il a le votre. — Le mien? Non, je Pai. — Pardonnez-moi, 
Jules Pa. — Les Espagnols n'ont-ils pas de beaux chevaux? lis en 
ont de beaux. — Le domestique de Pavocat qu'a-t-il? II a le vieux 
chapeau du jeune Francais. — Le commis de Pepicier n'a-t il pas 
mon joli petit chien ? Non, M. il n'a pas de cbien. — Son frere ne 
Pa-t-il pas? Pardonnez-moi, il Pa. — Avez-vous peur de ce chien-ci ? 
Oui, j'en ai peur. — Avez-vous peur de celui-la? Non, je n'en ai 
pas peur. — L'adolescent n'a-t-il pas peur de ce boeuf-la ? Pardonnez- 
moi, il en a peur. 

Have you any coal? I have. (1st dir.) — Have you any wood? 
I have not. — Have you any good beef? I have (some good). — Any 
young mutton ? I have not. — Have you no good cloth? No, I have 
none. — No good paper? Yes, I have. — Have I the silver ribbon? 
No, you have it not. — Which have I ? The velvet one. — Have I 
the grocer's rice ? You have it not. — Have I any rice? You have 
(some.) — Has the lawyer any thread handkerchiefs ? He has none. 
— Who has any? Miss Rose has some very pretty ones. — Has the 
clerk any money ? He has none. — What has he ? He has not 
anything. Who? The clerk. — Has the lawyer's servant any old 
cheese ? He has some. — Have not the Spaniards the scholar's dic- 
tionary? Yes, they have it. — Have they our books? No, they 
have them not. — Who has them? Your good friend, the minister, 
has them. — Has the American any gold ? He has some. — Have 
the tailors Our vests? No, they have them not. — Have they any 
vests? They have some. — Have the French the pictures? Which 
pictures ? — Those of the young painter. — No, the French have them 
not ; but the Italians have. — What have they ? The young painter's 
pictures. — Has not the milkman some fine oxen ? Yes, he has some 
fine ones. — What leather has the shoemaker? He has some excel- 
lent. — Has the big general any jewels ? He las not any. — Who has 
playthings? The butterman's son has. 



TWELFTH LESSON. 



61 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 

The hatter. This joiner. 

The apothecary. These apothecaries. 

Have our friends any old cloaks ? 

They have some old ones;. (1st dir.) 

They have not (any old . 

Have they not (any old ones) ? 

Yes, they have tsome old ones). 

Have they good or bad books ? 

They have some good ones. 

What have they good ? 

They have good books. 

Have you any good ones also ? 

Have you no pretty ones ? 

Has the hatter any hats ? 

Has he any ugly ones ? 

Has he neither ugly nor old ones ? 

Yes, he has old ones. 

Have the joiners any hammers ? 

They have (1st dir.) and the hatters 
also. 

Have not the carpenters got some ? 

Yes, they have, and so have the doc- 
tors. 

Are the Spaniards cold ? 

No, they are not ; they have fire. 

Have the Italians any ? 

Are the Turks afraid of the Ger- 
mans ? 

No, they are not afraid of them. 

Are they not afraid of the Russians ? 

Yes, they are. (1st dir.) 

Are they neither warm, sleepy, hun- 
gry, nor thirsty ? 

No, they are neither warm, sleepy, 
hungry nor thirsty, but wrong. 

Are not the hatters ashamed of their 
velvet hats ? 

No, they are not (ashamed of them). 

The Russian's apothecary. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Le chapelier. Ce menuisier. 

L' apothicaire. Ces apothicaires. 
Nos amis ont-ils de vieux manteaux? 
lis en ont de vieux. 
lis n'en ont pas de vieux. 
N'en ont-ils pas de vieux? 
Si fait, iis en ont de vieux. 
Ont-ils de bons ou de mauvais livres ? 
lis en ont de bons, 
Qu'ont-ils de bon ? 
lis ont de bon livres. 
En avez-vous de bons aussi ? 
N'en avez-vous pas de jolis ? 
Le chapelier a-t-il des chapeaux ? 
En a-t-il de vilains ? 
N'en a-t-il ni de vilains ni de vieux ? 
Si fait, il en a de vieux. 
Les menuisiers ont-ils des marteaux? 
lis en ont, et les chapeliers aussi. 

Les charpentiers n'en ont-ils pas ? 
Si fait, ils en ont et les medecins 

aussi. 
Les Espagnols ont-ils froid ? 
Non , ils n'ont pas froid ; ils ont du feu. 
Les Italiens en ont-ils ? 
Les Turcs ont-ils peur des Alle- 

mands ? 
II n'en ont pas peur. 
N'ont-ils pas peur des Russes ? 
Si fait, ils en ont peur. 
N'ont-ils ni chaud, ni sommeil, ni 

faim, ni so if ? 
Non, ils n'ont ni chaud, ni sommeil, 

ni faim, ni soif, mais ils ont tort. 
Les chapeliers n'ont-ils pas honte de 

leurs chapeaux de velours ? 
Non, ils n'en ont pas honte. 
L' apothicaire du Russe. 



Twelfth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Douzieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

M. Lamartine, j'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. Comment vous 
portez-vous ce matin, et comment vous etes-vous porte ? Bien : et 
vous, Mr., j'espere que vous vous portez mieux aujourd'hui. Un peu 
mieux, a votre service. — Quel temps fait-il? Fait-il chaud ou froid'? 
II ne fait ni chaud ni froid. mais agreable. — Comment se porte notre 



82 TWELFTH LESSON. 

ministre? II ne se porte pas bien. — Qu 'a-t-il? II aun mauvdis 
rhume et mal de gorge. — A-t-il aussi mal aux dents'? Non, il n'a 
pas mal aux dents. — J'en suis bien aise. — Le bon commis a-t-il les 
eventails de nos marchands? II n'a pas d'eventails, mais il a leurs 
gants de cuir. — Avez-vous du grain du fermier? Oui, j'en ai. — 
Augnste a-t-il froid ou faim ? II n'a ni froid ni faim, mais il a chaud, 
— Le marchand a-t-il quelque chose de joli ? II n'a rien de joli.— 
N'a-t-il rien de beau ? — Non, il n'a rien de joli ni de beau. — Qu'ai-je ? 
Vous avez de bon chocolat. — Avez-vous le bois du menuisier? Je 
ne Pai pas ; mais j'ai son marteau. — Lequel; le grand ou le petit? 
Pai le grand. — N' avez-vous pas le petit? Si fait, ou pardonnez-moi, 
je Pai. — Pai celui que vous n'avez pas. — Quels exercices ai-je? Vous 
avez ceux de Mr. Charles, ceux de Mr. Robert, ceux de ce Mon- 
sieur-la. {gentleman) et les miens. — Avez-vous le dixieme, le onzi- 
erne, ou le douzieme? — Je n'ai pas ceux-la, mais le huitieme, et le 
neuvieme. — Lequel ont les Italiens ? lis ont le septieme. 

Has the captain any good sailors? He has some good ones.— 
Have the sailors any fine mattresses? They have not (1st dir.)— 
Have the painters any very old pictures ? No, they have no old 
pictures ; but the booksellers have. — Have not the minister and the 
lawyer got some also? This one has some, that one has none — 
Who has beautiful shawls, ribbons, and handkerchiefs ? Messrs. 
Boutilliers and Cowell have some. Has the apothecary's clerk my 
penknife or his? He has his own penknife, but not yours. — Who 
has biscuits? The young baker of our big neighbour has. — Who has 
beautiful ribbons? The French have. — Have not the carpenters 
some gold and silver nails? No, they have iron nails; but the 
joiners have gold, silver, and steel nails? What is the matter with 
their brothers? They are wrong and ashamed. — What is the mat- 
ter with the foreigners? Which? These or those? Those. — Those 
are afraid of the general's dogs. — And these ? These ? Nothing is 
the matter with them. — They are neither cold nor warm, hungry 
nor thirsty. — Have you Miss Clara's shawl and gloves ? No, I have 
them not. — Who has them ? I have some, but not hers. — Who has 
any of the grocer's rice ? The lawyer, the general, the apothecary, 
and the joiner have some of it. — Have the painters fine pictures 
and gardens ? They have. — Have not his joiner and his carpenter 
got some beautiful old wood ? The former has. but not the latter. — 
Have the hatters good and bad hats ? They have good and bad 
ones. — Who has no pocket-book ? The milk and butter men have 
none. — Have you none? I have none. — Has your little clerk got 
any? No, he has none. — Who has any? The booksellers have 
some leather ones. — Has the apothecary anything pretty? He has 



TWELFTH LESSON, 



not anything pretty, but he has something good. — Who has you* 
birds'? The farmer has them. — Has he their grain'? He has 11 
also. 



How are they at home ? 
All well — Everybody is well. 
Almost all are sick. 

Vocabulary. 3d Section. 
Fresh. 

This fresh butter. Fresh bread. 
A dry goods store. 
A journal, daily paper, gazette. 
To-day's paper, the paper of to-day. 
A or an (article indefini, § 3). 
In. into. In a or an. Of a. 
A horse. One horse. Of a horse, 
Have you a book ? I have a book. 
Have you a glass ? I have no glass. 

Obs. 29. The French use : je n'aipas 
I have one, (meaning: one of the 
things spoken of.) 

Have you a good journal ? 

I have a good journal. 

I have a good one — two good ones. 

I have two good journals. 

I have three, no, four good ones. 

Have I an eye ? You have an eye. 

You have one. You have a large 

one. 
You have two large ones. 
Has your brother a dry goods store ? 

He has a dry goods store. 

He has one. He has a small one. 

He has two. A large and a small one. 

He has two fine ones — three fine ones. 

Four — five — six — seven — eight. 

Has the scholar a paper of to-day ? 

He has not any (none). 

Have the gentlemen five good horses? 

They have six. No ; they have seven 
or eight. 

Who has a fine satin umbrella ? 

Nobody has one. Oh ! yes ; some- 
body has one. Anna has one. 

Some or any good fresh butter. 



Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? 
Tout le monde se porte bien. 
Presque tout le monde est malade. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Section 
Frais (after the noun). 
Ce beurre frais. Du pain frais 
Tin magasin le nouveautes. 
Un journal — Un papier. 
Le papier d'aujourd 'hui. 
Un. (mas. sing, before all letters.) 
Dans. Dans un. D'un. 

Un cheval. D'un cheval. 

Avez-vous un livre ? J'ai un livre. 
Avez-vous un verre ? Je n'ai pas 

de verre. 

de . . . in preference to : je7i , aipas un. 
J'en ai un, (literally : /, of them, havt 

one. The quantity placed aftei 

the verb.) 
Avez-vous un bon journal ? 
J'ai un bon journal. 
J'en ai un bon — deux bons. 
J'ai deux bons journaux. 
J'en ai trois, non, quatre bons. 
Ai-je un ceil ? Vous avez un ceil. 
Vous en avez un. Vous en avez un 

grand. 
Vous en avez deux grands. 
Votre frere a-t-il un magasin de nou- 
veautes. 
II a un magasin de nouveautes. 
II en a un. II en a un petit. 

II en a deux. Un grand et un petit. 
II en a deux beaux — trois beaux. 
Quatre — cinq — six — sept — huit. 
L' ecolier a-t-il un papier d'aujour- 

d'hui? II n' en a pas. 

Les messieurs ont-ils cinq bons che- 

vaux? Ilsenontsix. Non; 

ils enont sept ou huit. 
Qui a ur. beau parapluie de satin ? 
Perstnne n' en a. Oh ! si fait ; quel 

qu'un en a un. Anne en a un. 
De bon beurre frais, (frais, after). 



64 TWELFTH LESSON. 

Twelfth Exercise. 3d Sec. — Douzieme Exercice. 3me Sec. 

Mr. Louis, f ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Comment se porte-t-on 
chez vous? Tout le monde se porte bien, merci. Et chez vous? 
comment se porte-t-on? Presque tout le monde est malade. Ma- 
dame a mal de gorge. George a mal aux yeux. Clara a mal aux 
dents. Le petit Jean a un vilain rhume. Pai un peu mal de tete. 
En verite. tout le monde est malade. Asseyez-vous, et prenez un 
peu de cafe. Non. je vous remercie. 

Have you any fresh butter? I have some; but I \ave no fresh 
bread. — Which bread have you? I have some old baker's bread. — 
Have they any coffee? They have not. — Who has any good wine? 
The grocer has some in his store. — Has the cloth merchant any gold 
cloth? He has some silver cloth. — Have I not got good sugar? Yes, 
you have in your chest; but the farmer has not. — What has the 
clerk got? Which one? The bookseller's. That one has nothing; 
but mine has something good. — What has he good ? He has, in his 
bag, some of the good rice of the big stranger. — Have the Germans 
any fresh cheese? They have none. — Have not the English got 
any? Yes, they have some good fresh cheese. — Which words have 
the scholars? They have the words of seven lessons. — Who has 
those of the eighth? The minister, the lawyer, and Robert have 
them. — Have they also those of the ninth? No, they have them 
not. — Have you a pencil ? I have one, and a pencil-case also. — Has 
the apothecary a young clerk? He has none. — Has not the general 
a fine satin handkerchief? Yes. he has, and the sailor also. 

Has the old tailor a satin coat? He has three. — Has the captain a 
fine dog ? He has two. — Have your friends two fine horses ? They 
have four. — Has the young man a good or bad pistol? He has no 
good one. He has a bad and ugly one in his trunk (§ 18.) — Have 
you a copy-book ? I have six or eight. — Has your servant a pen- 
knife ? He has. — Have I a friend? You have an old and good 
one. You have two old ones. He has three ugly small ones. — Has 
Mr. Cowell a dry goods store? Yes, he has a fine one. — Have not 
the Germans a cloth store ? No, they have a dry goods store. — Have 
his carpenter and her joiner iron and steel nails ? They have, and 
they have also a small silver hammer. — Who has the youths' jour- 
nals? Nobody has their journals; but somebody has their fans, 
their satin vests ($ 140), velvet shoes, steel toys, cloth cloaks, and 
thread gloves. — Has the ugly Turk a young and good cook? He 
has two; one young, and one old. Have you none of his coffee? 
Yes, I have some, in my big cotton bag. 



THIRTEENTH LESSON. 



65 



THIRTEENTH LESSON, 13th.— Treizieme Legon, 13me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
How much ? How many? (bef. a noun.) 
How much satin ? How much steel ? 
How many words ? How many birds ? 

How much (of it) has he ? (no noun.) 
How many (of them) has he? 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Combien de l (avant un nom. Dir. 7.) 
Combiende satin ? Combien d'acier? 
Combien de mots ? Combien d'oi- 

seaux ? 
Combien en a-t-il ? (pas de nom.) 
Combien en a-t-il ? 



Of it, of them, being usually omitted, when there is no noun; 



06s. 30. 
eay : 

How much ? How many ? 

How many friends have you ? 
How many has he ? 
Only, but, (with a noun.) 
Only, but, (without a noun). 
Before. After. 

Only one \oi them). But two. 
1 have but one friend. 
I have but one — but two or three. 
How many horses has your brother ? 
He has but one — but two young ones. 
Much, many, a good deal of, very 

much, many, a great many, (with 

nouns.) 
Much, many, &c. (without a noun.) 
Much fresh butter (a great deal of). 
Much gold. Many words. 

Has he many cabbages ? 
He has many, — not (many). 



Have they neither much iron nor 

steel ? 
Too much. Too many, (with and 

without noun). 
Have you too many words ? 
I have (too many . I have not. (Dir. 1.) 
He has neither too much of this one 

nor of that. 
Has he many things ? He has too 

many by far (a great deal too much). 

Thirteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. 
Comment! (How!) 
mauvais mal de gorge 



Combien en (avant le verbe.) 
Combien d'amis avez-vous? 
Combien en a-t-il ? 
Ne (avant) que, (apres le verbe.) 
N'en . . . . que .... 
Avant. Apres. 

N'en . . . qu'un. N'en . . . que deux. 
Je n'ai qu'un ami. 
Je n'en ai qu'un — que deux ou trois. 
Combien de chevaux a votre frere ? 
II n'en a qu'un — que deux jeunes. 
Beaucoup de . . . . (avec les noms.) 
(Dir. 7.) 



En .... beaucoup (sans nom). 

Beaucoup de beurre frais. 

Beaucoup d'or. Beaucoup de mots 

A-t-il beaucoup de choux? 

II en a beaucoup — II n'en a pas beau- 
coup. 

N'ont-ils ni beaucoup de fer, ni 
beaucoup d'acier ? 

Trop de (avec). En .... trop (sans 
nom. 

Avez-vous trop de mots ? 

J'en ai trop. Je n'en ai pas trop. 

II n'a ni trop de celui-ci ni de celui- 
la. 

A-t-il beaucoup de choses ? II en a 
beaucoup trop. 

-Treizieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 
Vous avez mal de gorge ? Oui 5 f ai un tres- 
Avez-vous un rhume aussi ? Non, je n'ai 



pas de rhume. J'espere que votre jeune frere se porte bien. — Oui 7 

1 Cardinal numbers answer the question: Combien? How many? 
Two — Deux, &c. 
6* 



66 THIRTEENTH LESSON. 

i] se porte tres-bien. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous? Personne 
n'est malade. Mr. j'ai Phonneur de vous saluer et j'espere que 
vous vous portez mieux. — Je me porte beaucoup mieux. je vout 
remercie. Fait-il chaud? II ne fait pas froid. — Asseyez-vous, pre 
nez ce siege-ci. Non merci. — Votre cuisinier se porte-t-il mieux '* 
II se porte bien. Pen suis bien aise. 

How many friends have you ? I have two good friends. — Have 
you eight good trunks ? I have nine. — Has our servant three brooms r < 
He has only one good one. — Has the captain two fine ships? He 
has only one. — How many sailors has he? He has too many; he 
has thirteen. — How many hammers have the carpenter and joiner' 
They have many. — Have they too many ? They have not. (Dir. 1 .)— 
Have not the shoemakers many shoes? Yes, they have many, bui 
not too many. — Has not the young man an old copy-book? Yes, he 
has. — Has the clerk ten fans ? No. he has but seven ; but he has- 
ten handkerchiefs, nine inkstands, eight combs, and many pencils. — 
How much money have the Spaniards? They have not much.— 
Have they not many fine horses ? Yes, they have. — Has your neigh 
bor much coffee ? He has some. — How many bags has he ? He 
has only six or seven. — Who has too much grain? Nobody has. — 
What has he got in his hat? He has some journals. — How many 
has he? He has three or four. — Has he but three or four? No, he 
has but three or four. 

How many good generals have the Americans? They have b 
great many. — What have the Russians? They have much salt 
but not too much. — Have the farmers much fresh butter ? They have 
some old, but none fresh. — Have you brothers? I have but one.— 
What have the apothecaries got in their stores? — They have man) 
things. — Have they too many ? Yes, too many by far. — Has the drv 
goods merchant any satin, cotton and thread ? He has neither satin 
cotton, nor thread. — What has he got? He has many things. — Ha* 
he anything pretty? Yes, he has. (Dir. 1.) — Has the scholar a 
copybook ? No, he has none. Oh ! yes, he has one in his trunk.— 
What has the grocer got in this and in that bag? In this he hae 
some clothes. In that, he has cabbages, grain, and fresh cheese.— 
Has he biscuits? He has. — Is the man afraid? No, he is nc 
afraid. — Are not the generals cold and hungry? No, but they ap 
warm and thirsty. — Who is ashamed? The minister's little boy j 
ashamed. He is wrong. — Who has the electric telegraph? Th- 
Americans have it. —Has the youth any pretty sticks? He has n< 
^retty sticks, but some beautiful birds. — What chickens has ou 
cook ? He has some pretty chickens. — How many has he? He ha.- 
six. — Has the hatter any hats? He has a good many. — Has the 
joiner much wood ? He has not a great deal ; but enough. 



THIRTEENTH LESSON. 



61 



Vocabulary 2d Section. 
Have we ? We have. 

We have not. Have we not got ? 

What have we ? is the matter with us? 
We have nothing, or nothing is. &c. 
Have we it ? We have them. 
Hr.ve we anybody ? 
We have nobody, (not anybody). 
Whom ? Whom have we ? 

We have our young and old friends. 

Are we warm ? We are not cold. 

Enough. (Dir. 6.) Enough of it, of them. 
Money enough. Enough knives. 
We have enough (of it or them). 
But little, only a little, not much, not 

many, but few. (Dir. 7.) 
Who has but little money ? 
I have not much, or but little. 

Not much of it, but few of them. 

Have we not many friends ? 

We have but few. 

Have I but few ? 

You have not many. 

Has he but little ? 

The lawyers have but few. 

Who has but little ? 

Nobody has much (many). 

The merit. Some merit. 

This lawyer has great merit. 

Little — Little merit. >Dir. 7.) 

Little of it — He has little of it. 

A little .... A little of it. 

A little cloth. He has a little. 

Nine — ten — eleven — twelve. 

Courage. 

Pepper. Some vinegar. 

Thirteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Avons-nous ? Nous avons. 

Nous n' avons pas. N' avons-nous 

pas? 
Qu' avons-nous ? 
Nous n'avons rien. 
L' avons-nous ? Nous les avons. 
Avons-nous quelqu'un ? 
Nous n'avons personne. 
Qui ? Qui avons-nous ? 

Nous avons nos jeunes et iws vieux 

amis. 
Avons-nous chaud? Nous n'avons 

pas froid. 

Assez de (av. le nom.). En . . assez. 

Assez d' argent. Assez de couteaux. 

Nous en avons assez. 

JVe . . guere de, or > „„_„, i „^ w 
■*r i -, >avantlenom. 

ive . . pas beaucoup de ) 

Qui n'a guere d' argent ? 

Je n'en ai guere — Je n'en ai pas 

beaucoup. 

N'en.. guere — N'en. .pas beaucoup. 

N'avons-nous pas beaucoup d'amis \ 

Nous n'en avons guere. 

N'en ai-je guere ? 

Vous n'en avez pas beaucoup. 

N!en a-t-il guere ? 

Les avocats n'en ont guere. 

Qui n'en a guere ? 

Personne n'en a guere. 

Le merite. Du merite. 

Cet avocat a un grand merite. 

Peu de av. le n. 1 . Peu de merite. 

En .... peu — II en a peu. 

Tin peu de . . . . En . . . . un peu 

Un peu de drap. II en a un peu. 

Neuf — dix — onze — douze. 

Du cceur, (du courage). 

Du poivre. Du vinaigre. 

-Treizieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 



J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer, Mle. Sophie. Monsieur, je vous 
souhaite le bonjour — Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je vous 
remercie. Mle., je me suis tres-bien porte, comme a Pordinaire — 
Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? Chez moi? Tout le monde se 
porte bierij merci — Le menuisier se porte-t-il mieux ? II ne se porte 
pas mieux. Je suis fache de Papprendre. Qui a mal de tele che2 



OO FOURTEENTH LESSON. 

vous? Personne n*a mal de tete chez moi; mais mon frere a mal 
aux dents. 

Have we many notes? We have only a few. — How many notes 
have we ? We have only three pretty ones. — Have you fresh butter 
enough I We have not enough. — Have our boys too many ink- 
stands? They have not too many, but enough. — Has our young 
friend too much milk ? He has only a little, but enough. — Who has 
good many words? The scholars have enough, but not too many. — 
Have they many gloves? Who? The farmers or scholars ($ 15)? 
The farmers. They have not any. — Has the cook any pepper ( § 25), 
salt and vinegar? He has not enough vinegar, but he has too much 
pepper and salt. Have we much soap? We have only a little.— 
Has the merchant much cloth? He has a good deal. — Who has a 
good deal of paper? Our neighbors have. — Have these tailors 
many buttons? They have but few. — Has the painter many gar 
dens? He has not many. — How many gardens has he? He has 
but two. — Have we the Germans' knives? We have them. — Have 
we the captain's fine horses? We have them not; the general has 
them. — Have we any good and fine ($18) jewels? We have a 
good many. — What jewels have we? We have gold, silver, and 
steel jewels (§ 140). What candlesticks have our friends. They have 
the old iron ones (les vieux de fer.) Have we not Sarah's satin ribbons? 
No. we have them not. — Have we not any ribbons? Satin ribbons? 
Yes, satin ribbons? Yes, we have many, but not Sarah's. — Has the 
clerk any of the grocers chocolate, sugar, coffee, vinegar, pepper, 
salt, and biscuits (§ 140)? He has not. — Whom have you to-day? 
We have the minister of merit. — Whom has your brother? He has 
nobody. — Whom have I? The lawyer who has little merit. — Who 

has merit? Doctor (Docteur) M has much merit. — Have we 

neither gold nor silver? Yes, we have. — What have they? They 
have something fine. — Have you anything bad? Yes, and I am 
ashamed of it. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON, Uth.—Quatorzieme Legon, Ume. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
A few — Some. i§ 3.) 
A few books. A few friends. 

Have you a few esercises ? 
Some of them). A few of them). 

A few of 

They have a few of mine (some of). 

Have we not a few ? 

One or a sou. Some sous. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Quelques no de, before the noun). 
Quelques livres. Quelques amis. 
Avez-vous quelques exercices? 
En .... quelques un *. 
Quelques uns des .... 
lis en ont quelques uns des miens. 
N'en avons-nous pas quelques uns? 
Un sou. Des sous. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



Some francs. 
Half a dollar. 



Un franc. 
Un dollar. 



One or a franc .... 
A dollar. 

Obs. 31. In the United States, the French use the word 
to the ar final, its French sound. 

A one dollar note. Two dollars. 

A three, five, or ten dollar note. 

A two dollar one, or one of two dollars. 

Other. One or another. Some others. 

Another dollar. Some other dollars. 

Have we another franc ? 

Have we some other francs ? (some 

more ?) 
We have another. We have some 

more. 
No other horse .... horses (§ 26). 



Quelques francs. 
Un demi-dollar. 

dollar; giving 



I have no other horse. 

I have no other. 

Have they other horses? 

They have others. 

We have no others (§ 28). 

The arm. The foot. 

The heart. The month. 

The work. The volume. 

I have but a few dollars. 

You have but a few (of them). 

We have but a few volumes. 

They have but a few. 

He has but a few. 



Un billet d'un dollar. Deux dollars. 
Un billet de trois, de cinq ou de dix 

dollars. — Un de deux dollars. 
Autre. Un autre. D'autras ($ 26). 
Un autre dollar. D'autres dollars. 
Avons-nous un autre franc ? 
Avons-nous d'autres francs ? 

Nous en avons un autre (d autres). 



Ne . . . .pas d' autre cheval — d 1 autres 

chevaux. 
Je n'ai pas d' autre cheval. 
Je n'en ai pas d'autre. 
Ont-ils d'autres chevaux? 
lis en ont d'autres. 
Nous n'en avons pas d'autres. 
Le bras. Le pied. 

Le coeur. Le mois. 

L'ouvrage. Le volume. 

Je n'ai que quelques dollars. 
Vous n'en avez que quelques uns. 
Nous n' avons que quelques volumes, 
lis n'en ont que quelques uns. 
II n'en a que quelques uns. 



Fourteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Quatorzieme Exercice, Ire Sec. 

Have you many knives ? I have a few. — Have you many pen- 
cils? I have only a few. — Has the painter's friend many looking- 
glasses? He has only a few. — Have your boys a few sous? They 
have a few. — Have we not a few francs? Yes ; we have. (Dir. 1.) — 
How many francs have we? We have ten. — Have we but ten? 
We have but ten. — How many dollars has the Spaniard? He has 
not many, he has only five. — How many half dollars has he? He 
hasten. — Who has a ten dollar note? I have a five dollar note; 
little John has a three dollar one; the clerks have two two dollar 
notes: the doctor has one of a dollar; but nobody has a ten dollar 
one. — Who has the beautiful glasses of the Italians? We have 
them. — Have the English many ships ? They have. — Has the milk- 
man many horses ? No, he has but two. — What have the Germans ? 
They have many dollars. — How many have they? They have 
eleven. — Have we the journals of the English or those of the Ger- 



10 



FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



mans? We have those of the former, but not of the latter. — Have 
we the satin parasols of the Spaniards? We have them not. but 
the Americans have. — Has the butter man much fresh butter ? He 
has only a little, but enough. — Have the sailors the cotton mattresses 
that we have? They have not those which we have, but those 
which their captains have. — Has the Frenchman many francs? He 
has only a few, but he has enough. — Has your servant sous enough? 
He has only a few, but he has dollars enough. 

Have the Russians dollars, half dollars, francs, and so -is ? No, they 
have none. — Who has any ? The Americans have dollars and half 
dollars, and the French have francs and sous. — Have you a ten dollar 
bill in your pocket-book ? No, but I have two five dollar ones, and 
a few of one and two dollars. — How many feet have men ? They 
have two. — How many has that one ? He has but one. — How many 
has that other one ? Which one ? The big or the tall one ? The 
big one. He has two. — How many feet have horses, oxen, birds 
and chickens ? ( § 15.) Horses and oxen have four feet, but birds and 
chickens have but two. 

N. B. — Let the pupil try to compose a French exercise on the words of 
daily salutations, as none is given here. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
What day of the month is it ? 
What day of the month have we ? 
It is the first. The second. 

We have the first. The second. 
It is not the third ; it is but the 
second. 

Obs. 32. The cardinal numbers are used in French for dates, though the 
ordinal be used in English ; except : le premier, for the first of every month. 



Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. 
Quel jour du mois est-ce ? 
Quel jour du mois avons-nous? 
C'est le premier. C'est le deux. 
Nous avons le premier. Le deux. 
Ce n'est pas le trois ; ce n'est que le 

deux. 



It is the eleventh. 
We have the eleventh. 
It it not the twelfth ? 
Have we not the twelfth ? 



C'est leonze (not V onze). 
Nous avons le onze. 
N'est-ce pas le douze ? 
N'avons-nous pas le douze ? 

Obs. 33. The ordinal numbers are formed of the cardinal by adding ieme, 
(and when they end in e, this is dropped.) Premier and second are irregular, 
and used for first and second, but not in compound numbers, such as : tiventy- 
first, twenty -second ; which are not : vingt -premier, vingt-second ; but vingt 
et unieme, vingt -deuxieme. 



Which volume have you? 

I have the eleventh — the thirty-first. 



One, 
Two, 



un. 
deux. 



The first. 
The second. 



Quel volume avez-vous ? 

J'ai le onzieme — le trente et unieme. 

Singulier. PlurieL 

Le premier. Les premiers. 

Le deuxieme, le Lesdeuxiemes, les 
second. seconds. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



71 



Three, trois. 
Four, quatre. 
Five, cinq. 
Nine, neuf. 
Eleven, onze. 
Twenty, vingt. 



The third. 
The fourth. 
The fifth. 
The ninth. 
The eleventh. 
The twenty-first. 

The twenty- second. 



Thirty, trente, The thirty-first. 
Hundred, cent. The hundred and 
first. 
The last. 
These last exercises. His last dollar. 



Le troisieme. 
Le quatrieme. 
Le cinquieme. 
Le neuvieme. 
Le onzieme. 
Le vingt et uni- 

eme. 
Le vingt -deux - 

ieme. 



Les troisiemes. 
Les quatriemes. 
Les cinquiemes. 
Les neuviemes. 
Les onziemes. 
Les vingt et uni- 



emes. 
Les vingt-deux- 

iemes. 
Le trente et unieme. l 
Le cent-unieme. Les cent-uniemes. 



Le dernier. Les derniers. 

Ces derniers exercices. Son dernier 

dollar. 
Notre dernier papier ou journal. 
Le premier et le dernier jour du mois. 
C'est bon. Ce n'est pas bon. 

Est-ce son cahier? 
C'est le sien. 

Let the pupil try to compose 



Monday, April fourteenth, 1849. 



Our last paper or journal. 
The first and last day of the month. 
That is right. That's not right. 

Is this, is that, or is it his copy-book ? 
It is, this is, that is his. 

N. B. — No French exercise is given here, 
one on the words of daily salutations. 

Fourteenth Exercise, 2d Sec. — Quatorzieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

(Lundi, quatorze Avril, mil huit cent 

c quarante-neuf. 

How many exercises have we, to-day ? We hare but one. — Have 
we but one ? No, we have but one. — What day of the month is it % 
\X is the fourteenth. — Is it the fourteenth, indeed ? Yes, it is (the 
14th). — Have you the paper of to-day? To-day's paper? No; but 
the clerk has it. — Has he but one ? No, he has three. — Is this the 
iast journal ? Yes, it is. — Is not to-day the fourteenth ? No, it is 
only the thirteenth. — Indeed ! yes, indeed ! That's right. That's 
very well. — How many stockings has the merchant? He has but 
few ) but he has many shawls, gloves and ribbons. — Have you any 
other biscuits? I have no other. — How many servants has that gen- 
tleman? He has but three; but these foreigners have five. — Has 
the general much merit ? He has. — Has W. Irving's last work much 
merit? Yes, it has. — How many arms has this man? He has one. — 
How many feet has the captain? He has but one. — How many has 

1 Let the learner write the date, before his task. Ex. Lundi, seize 
Avril, mil huit cent quarante-neuf. Monday, April 16th, 1849. 

Days of the week — Jours de la Semaine — Sunday, Dimanche ; Monday, 
Lundi ; Tuesday, Mardi ; Wednesday, Mercredi ; Thursday, Je adi ; Fri- 
day, Vendredi ; Saturday, Samedi. 

For the names of the months, ($ 143.) 



72 FIFTEENTH LESSON. 

the general? He has two. — What heart has your boy? He has a 
good heart. — Have you no other servant ? Yes, I have another. — 
Has your friend no other birds? Yes, he has. — How many? He 
has six others. — Have the Spaniards and Italians many trees in their 
gardens? No ; they have but few; b~at the lawyer of merit has a 
great many in his. 

Which volume have you ? I have the first. — Have you the second 
volume of my work? I have it. — Have you the third or fourth 
exercise? I have neither the former nor the latter. — Have the 
boys the fifth or sixth volume? They have the fifth, but we 
have the sixth. — Which volume has your friend? He has the 
twenty-first. — Is not to-day the eleventh of this month ? The eleventh 
of the month? No. It is the twelfth. The twelfth! indeed !— Has 
the youth much money ? No. but he has our gold. — Who has cou- 
rage? The baker's little friend. — Have we the nails and hammers 
of the joiner, or those of the carpenter? We have neither those of 
the joiner nor of the carpenter, but those of the grocer. — Is this 
your copy-book? Yes, it is mine. — Is not this Miss Anne's velvet bon- 
net ? Yes, it is hers. — Has your clerk or mine got the good two dollar 
note? Mine has it not. — What has he? He has the five dollar 
one. — Has the minister this or that work? He has but that one. — 
Who has the other? Nobody has it. It has no merit. — Whom have 
we to-day? We have our young friends and those of the farmer. — 
Have the Russians (Jes Russes) pepper? They have but little pep- 
per, but a good deal of salt. — Have the Turks much wine ? They 
have not much wine, but a good deal of coffee. — Who has a good 
deal of milk ? The Germans have a good deal. — Have you no 
other gun ? I have no other. — Have we any other cheese ? We 
have some other. — Have I no other pistol ? You have another. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON, 15th.— Quinzieme Legon, 15me 

Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
The tome (volume). The last tome. 
Have you the first or second tome of 

my work ? 
Both, or both the one and the other. 
I have both. 

Have you their gold or silver ? 
I have neither (the one nor the ether). 
The one and the other, (plural.) 
Has your brother my gloves or his ? 
He has {both) yours and his. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Le tome. Le dernier tome. 

Avez-vous le premier ou le deuxieme 

tome de mon ouvrage ? 
L'un et V autre. 
J'ai l'unet l'autre. 
Avez-vous leur or ou leur argent ? 
Je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. 
Les uns et les autres. 
Votre frere a-t-il mes gants ou les 

siens ? II a les uns et les autres. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON. 



73 



A-t-il les leurs ou ceux des commis ? 
II n'a ni les uns ni les autres. 
N'ont-ils ni Tun ni 1' autre ? 
N'ont-ils ni les uns ni les autres? 
lis ont l'un mais non pas l'autre. 
L'Ecossais. Le Hollandais. 

LTrlandais. Le Suisse. 

Encore .affirmatif ). 
Encore du satin. Encore de l'acier. 
Encore des dollars. Encore quelquea 

francs. 
Avez-vous encore du drap ? 
J'ai encore du drap. J'en ai encore. 
A-t-il encore de l'acier? II en a 

encore. 
Ai-je encore beaucoup de choses? 
Vous en avez encore beaucoup. 
Les Hollandais ont-ils encore du poi- 

vre? 
lis n' en ont pas ; mais nous en avons. 
Avez-vous encore assez de vinaigre 

et de sucre ? 
Nous avons assez de Tun ; mais pas 

assez de l'autre. 



Has he theirs or those of the clerks? 
He has neither. (Mind Dir. 1.) 
Have they neither ? sing.) 
Have they neither ? (plur.) 
They have the one, but not the other. 
The Scotchman. The Dutchman. 
The Irishman. The Swiss. 

Still, yet, some, or any more, more. 
Any more satin. Some more steel. 
Yet some dollars. A few more francs. 

Have you any more cloth ? 

I have still some cloth. I have more. 

Has he any more steel ? He has. 

Have I yet many things ? 

You have still many (many more). 

Have the Dutch any more pepper ? 

They have not, but we have. 
Have you yet vinegar and sugar 

enough ? 
We have enough of the one, but not 

enough of the other. 

N. B. — Let the pupil compose a French Exercise. 
Fifteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Quinzieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 
Tuesday, April .... 1849. Write the date fully in French. 

Which exercises have these gentlemen to-day? We have two.— 
Which? The fourteenth and fifteenth. — Have you many words? 
No, not many. — Which volume of Cuvier's great works has your 
brother? He has the last. — Has he not the seventh, also ? He has 
it not. — How many tomes has that work? It has ten. (Dir. 1.) — 
Have you my work o. my friend's? I have both. — Has the foreigner 
my comb or your knife ? He has both. — Have the Dutch the fresh 
bread or cheese ? They have neither the one nor the other. — Have 
I your penknife or my friend's ? You have neither. — Who has them ? 
I have. — Has the Dutchman my glass or that of this scholar? He 
has neither. (Dir 1.) — Has the Irishman our horses or chests? He 
has both. — What have those Irishmen? They have some one dol- 
lar notes. — Has the Scotchman our leather shoes or cotton stockings? 
He has neither. — What has he ? He has the iron guns of the Swiss. 
— What has the Swiss got? He has the Scotchman's stick. — Have 
the Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards? They have neither. 
—Which ships have they? They have their own. 

Has our grocer any more pepper? He has some more. — Has the 
7 



74 



FIFTEENTH LESSON. 



lawyer's clerk any more half dollars'? He has some more. He has 
yet four or five. — Has he any more jewels'? He has no jewels. — 
Is the Swiss warm and hungry ? No, he is neither warm nor hun- 
gry; but the Irishman is dry and sleepy. — Who is ashamed? No 
one is ashamed, but the minister is afraid of our big dog. — Is not 
the Scotchman right? Yes, he is, and the Russian too. — Are not 
the doctor and the apothecary wrong ? No, they are not wrong. — 
Have the Irish anything old ? They have. — Who has something 
ugly 1 No one has. — Have the Americans any more salt % They 
have, and some fresh butter, too. — Have the painters anything pretty? 
No, to-day they have nothing. — Have they not one pretty fan ? Oh, 
yes! They have still one. — How many lawyers have you? We 
have a great many ; we have also many (Dir. 7) physicians, minis- 
ters, grocers, gentlemen, apothecaries, and merchants. — Has the 
youth Miss Anne's shawl? He has, and he has also her velvet 
bonnet (§ 32), her gold pencil-case, satin bag, handkerchief, and 
jewels. That's right. — Is this the last journal ? No, it is that of the 
eleventh. Very well. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

Obs. 34. More, affirmative, is encore. But with a negation, use, for : 
Not any more, no more. No longer C Ne . . .plus de, (avec un nom.) 
any — no longer any more. \ N en. . . .plus, (sans le nom.) 



I have no more fire, and he has no 

more. 
He has no more rice. He has no more. 
Have we any more fresh butter ? 
I have no more (no longer any). 
We have no more (no longer any). 
Has the wine merchant any more 

vinegar ? No, he has no longer any. 
We have no more of that good coffee. 
Have the grocers no more of it ? 
They have no more. I have no more. 
Have they no more gold nor silver? 
Yes, they have a little more. 

Not much more, not many more. 

Have you much more velvet ? (Dir. 7.) 
I have not much more. 

Has the boy many more toys ? He 
has not many more. 

One more inkstand. No more ink- 
stand. 

A few words. No more words. 



Je n'ai plus de feu, et il n'en a plua. 

II n'a plus de riz. II n'en a plus. 

Avons-nous encore du beurre frais ? 

Je n'en ai plus. 

Nous n'en avons plus. 

Le marchand de vin a-t-il encore du 

vinaigre ? Non, il n'en a plus. 
Nous n' avons plus de ce bon cafe. 
Les epiciers n'en ont-ils plus ? 
lis n'en ont plus. Je n'en ai plus. 
N'ont-ils plus ni or ni argent ? 
Si fait, ils en ont encore un pen. 

5Ne . . . plus guere de, (avec un nom.) 
N'en . . . .plus guere, (sans nom.) 
Avez-vous encore beaucoup de ve- 
lours ? Je n'en ai plus guere. 
Le gargon a-t-il encore beaucoup de 

joujoux ? II n'en a plus guere. 
Encore un encrier. Plus d' encrier. 



Encore quelques mots. Plus de mots. 
Obs. 35. Plus oV encrier — Plus de mots, which seem to signify: more ink- 



FIFTEENTH LESSON. 75 

ttand — more words, is, however, in French, 9 negative expression. As the 
verb: / have, he has, &c, is understood, so is the nc, which precedes it. 
($ 171, R. 8.) 



One more cabbage. A few mo*e. 

Have you a few more dollars ? 
I have (a few more). 



Encore un chou. Encore quelques 

uns. 
Avez-vous encore quelques dollars ? 
J'en ai encore (quelques uns). 



Have I still too many sous? , Ai-je encore trop de sous ? 



Vous n'en avez pas trop, mais asseg. 
Combien d'or a-t-il encore ? 
II en a encore un peu. 
Combien en a-t-il encore ? 
Le dernier. Les deux, les trois der- 
nier s. 
Le baton du general et ses gants. 



You have not too many, but enough. 
How much more gold has he ? 
He has a little more (yet a little). 
How much or how many more has he? 
The last. The last two, three. 

The general's stick and gloves. ($ 32, 

N.3.) 

Fifteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Qutnzieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 
Wednesday, April 1849. Mercredi, Avril, 1849. 

Have you one more exercise, Messrs. ? We have two more. — 
Which? The last two. — Has our cook much more fresh beef? He 
has not much more. — Has he many more chickens? He has not. — 
Has the farmer much more milk? He has not much more milk; 
but he has a great deal more butter. — Have the French many more 
horses? They have not many more. — Has our friend one more 
umbrella? He has no more. — Has the tailor no more buttons ? He 
has no more. — Has our carpenter no more nails? He has no more 
nails: but he has a little more wood. — Has this cook no more fire? 
Yes. he has a little more. — Have those Spaniards a few more half 
dollars? They have a few more. — Have you a few more francs? 
We have no more francs: but some more dollars. — Have the Swiss 
still vinegar enough ? They have theirs and mine. — Have they ? 
(Dir. 1.) Yes, they have. — Have we any of the grocer's sugar? 
No. we have no more. — Has the joiner wood enough? He has 
enough. — Has he the stranger's wood? He has it not. — Has he his 
iron and wooden hammers ? He has them not. — Have the sailors 
got their rice (§ 32). biscuits, beef, bread, and wine? They have 
them : but they have neither fresh butter nor cheese. 

How many ships has the little Russian ? These two. — Has he no 
more ? No, he has but two. — Is this to-day's paper ? No ; it is not. — 
Which journals has the lawyer? He has the last three. — What day 
of the month is it? It is the sixth. — How many friends have you ? 
I have but one good friend. — Has the farmer's horse too much grain ? 
He has not enough. — Has he not much money ? Yes. he has a great 
deal. — Has he much iron ? He has still much. — Have we the cotton 



76 



SIXTEENTH LESSON. 



or thread stockings of the Americans I We have neither their thread 
nor cotton stockings. — Is John cold, in the garden 1 No, he is not. — 
Are you very thirsty ? I am thirsty enough. — Is the Irishman too 
(trop) warm? Too warm'? No, indeed, he is not too warm. — Who 
is too warm? Nobody is too warm; but I am too hungry and 
sleepy. — What ails your young dog? Nothing ails him. — What ails 
those Dutchmen? They are afraid of the farmer's oxen and dog. 
(§ 32, N. 3.) — Who has my friend's book and dictionary? I have 
them not; but we have Edward's (Edouard) penknife, copy-book, 
and pencil. 



SIXTEENTH LESSON, 16th.— Seizieme Legon, 16me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
Several. 

Several (of them). 

Several men. Several children. 

Several copy-books and pencils. 

(Dir. 2.) 
The father. This child. 

A son ... A cake. Tea. 
Has this gentleman several sons ? 
He has several. 
As much, as many. 
As much ... as, as many ... as. 

As much soap as sugar. 

As many men as children. 

Have you as much gold as silver ? 

I have as much of this as of that. 

I have as much of the one as of the 

other. 
Has he as many shoes as stockings ? 
He has as many of these as of those — 

as many of the one as of the other. 
Quite (or just) as much, as many. 
Quite as much ... as, as many ... as. 

Have I quite as much velvet as satin ? 

You have (quite or just as much). 

Quite or just as much (of it). 

They have just as much of this as of 

that. 
Just as many of these as of those. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

Plusieurs, (no de before the noun.) 

En . . . plusieurs. 

Plusieurshommes.Plusieursenfants. 

Plusieurs cahiers et plusieurs cray- 
ons. 

Le pere. Cet enfant. 

Un fits. Un gateau. Du the. 

Ce Monsieur a-t-il plusieurs fils ? 

II en a plusieurs. 

Autant de, (avant un nom.) 

Autant de . . . que de . . . (avant ies 
noms.) 

Autant de savon que de sucre. 

Autant d'hommes que d'enfants. 

Avez-vous autant d'or que d'argent ? 

J'ai autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 

J'ai autant de l'un que de l'autre. 

A-t-il autant de souliers que de bas ? 
II a autant de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 
— autant des uns que des autres. 
Tout autant de . . . (avant un nom.) 
Tout autant de . . . que de (av. Ies 

noms). 
Ai-je tout autant de velours que de 

satin ? 
Vous en avez tout autant. 
En . . . tout autant. 
Us ont tout autant de celui-ci que de 

celui-la. 
Tout autant de ceux-ci que de 

ceux-la. 



SIXTEENTH LESSON. 77 

Tout autant de l'un que de 1' autre. 



Tout autant des uns que des autres. 
Tout autant du cafe de l'epicier que 
de son sucre. 



Quite as much of the one as of the 

other. 
Quite as many of the one as the other. 
Quite as much of the grocer's coffee 

as sugar. $ 32, N. 3.) 

Sixteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Seizieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 
Thursday, April 1849. Jeudi, April, 1849. 

How many exercises have we, to-day? We have but one. — ■ 
Which is it? It is this. That's right. — What have you? I have 
several horses. — Has he several coats ? He has only one. — Who 
has several looking-glasses? My brother's painter has. (Dir. 1.) — ■ 
What looking-glasses has he ? He has pretty ones. — Who has our 
good cakes ? Several boys have them. — Is this your friend's child ? 
Yes, it is (his child). — Has he several children? Yes, he has.— Is 
not this his son ? No, it is not (his son). — Have you as much coffee 
as tea ? I have. — Has this stranger a son ? He has several. — How 
many sons has he ? He has four. — How many children have the 
minister and the physician ? Have they as many, the one as the 
other ? No ; the first has four, and the last six. — Indeed ! Yes, 
indeed. That is a great many. — Have we as much old cheese as 
fresh butter? You have as much of the one as of the other. — Have 
we as many shoes as stockings? We have. (Dir. 1.) — Have I as 
much good as bad paper? You have. — How many small pistols 
have the Swiss? They have as many small ones as large ones. — 
Have you as much of your wine as of mine? I have. 

Has the ugly cook as much fresh butter as beef? He has not 
(as much of the one as of the other). Has the carpenter as many 
sticks as nails? He has just as many of these as of those. — What 
has the hatter ? He has velvet and satin hats. — Has he not as many 
of the one as of the other? Yes. he has just as many. — Who has 
my books, his pencils, your copy-books, Robert's inkstand and pen- 
knife (j 32. N. 3). and many other things? The little scholar has. — 
Have you as many biscuits as cakes ? I have not as many of these 
as of those. — Have the Dutch as many horses as the Germans? No, 
they have not as many. — What has the Irishman 1 He has another 
note. — Has your son one more pocket-book ? He has several more. 
— Have you much money? We have only a little money; but 
enough bread, beef (repeat the prep. bef. every noun), fresh butter, 
cheese, and old wine. — Has this boy as much courage as our neigh- 
bor's son ? He has just as much. — Has the youth many notes 1 He 
has. — Has the merchant cloth and velvet? (§25.) He has cloth, 
but no more velvet. (Obs. 35.) — Have the boys your farmer's ox 
and horse ? They have that one, but not this. 
7* 



78 



SIXTEENTH LESSON. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Tin ennemi, des ennemis. 
Le doigt. Le pouce. 

Plus de, (avant un nom.) 
Plus de pain. Plus d'hommes. 
Que de, (avant un nom.) 
Plus de pain que de vin. 
Plus de couteaux que de batons. 
Plus de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
Plus de l'un que de 1' autre. 
Plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 
Plus des uns que des autres. 
J'ai plus de votre sucre que du mien. 

II a plus de nos livres que des siens. 
Moins de, (avant un nom.) 
Moins de satin que de velours. 

Moins de canifs que de crayons. 

Moins de, plus de, (av. un nombre.) 

J'ai plus de trois dollars. 

II n'a pas plus de cinq francs. 

lis n'en ont pas moins de dix. 

Plus que moi, (avant un pronom.) 1 

Plus que lux. Plus que nous. 

Moins que vous. Moins qu'eux. 

Eux. Qu'eux. 

Autant que vous. Tout autant que lux. 

Autant que moi. Tout autant qu'eux. 

Tant de. Tant que cela. 

Pas tant. Pas tant que cela. 

lis ont six domestiques. 

En ont-ils tant ? Non, ils n'en ont 

pas tant que cela. Ils n'en ont que 

quatre. 

Sixteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Seizieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 

Friday, April 1849. Vendredi, Avril, 1849. 

Have you three exercises to-day, Mr. Charles ? No, Miss, I have 
not so many. — How many have you % I have got but two. — We 
have as many as you; but those young scholars have more than 
we. — Have they five or six? No, they have not so many; they 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
An enemy, enemies. 
The finger. The thumb, inch. 

More, (a comparative adverb.) 
More bread. More men. 
Than. 

More bread than wine. 
More knives than sticks. 
More of this than of that. 
More of the one than of the other. 
More of these than of those. 
More of the ones than of the others. 
I have more of your sugar than of 

mine. 
He has more of our books than of his. 
Less, fewer, not so much or many. 
Less satin than velvet (not so much . .). 
Fewer penknives than pencils. ) 

Not so many penknives as pencils. J 
Less than, more than, (bef. a number.) 
I have more than three dollars. 
He has not more than five francs. 
They have not less than ten. 
More than I, (bef. a pronoun.) 
More than he. More than we. 
Less than you. Less than they. 
They. Than they. 

As much as you. Just as many as he. 
As much as I. Quite as many as they. 
So much, so many. So much as that. 
Not so much. Not so many as that. 
They have six servants. 
Have they so many ? No, they have 

not so many as that. They have 

but four. 



1 Moi, I, instead of: Je 
Toi, thou, " tu. 



: l 



'Are used in French as no- 
minative cases, when the 
verb is understood or 



separated from the pro- (Eux, they, 
noun. (§ 38.) J 



Lui, he, instead of: il. 
ils. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 79 

have only four. Four ? That's a great deal. — Has this lawyer more 
friends than enemies ? He has more enemies than friends. — Has 
the farmer as many sheep (moutons) as oxen ? He has just as 
many. — Have you as many small guns as I ? I have just as many. — 
Has the ugly foreigner as much courage as we ? He has less than 
we. — Have our neighbors as much fresh butter as cheese? They 
have more of the latter than of the former. — Have not your sons 
as many books as copy-books ? They have not so many of these 
as of those ; they have fewer of the latter than of the former. — 
How many noses has that stranger? That small man? Yes. He 
has but one. — How many fingers has he ? He has several. — Has he 
ten ? No, he has not so many. — Has he not so many ? No, he has 
less than ten. — How many has he ? He has but eight fingers and 
two thumbs. — How many thumbs and fingers has your young scholar? 
He? (mind the last note.) (Lui?) Yes, he. He has not more than 
seven fingers and one thumb. — And I ; how many have I ? You 
have just as many as we (nous). — Very well. 

Has the minister more children than the lawyer? The minister 
has more than he, but he. the lawyer, has more than they and we. — 
How many pistols have you? I have only one; but my father has 
more than I and they. He has five. — Has he so many, indeed? 
Yes, he has just as many. — John, have you more than seven dollars? 
No, I have less than that. I have not so many. — Have my children 
as much courage as yours? Yours have more than mine. — Have I 
as much money as you? You have less than T, but more than he. — 
Have you as many books as I ? I have fewer than you. I have not 
more than nine. — Have I as many enemies as your father? You 
have fewer than he; but more than they. — Have the Russians as 
many children as we ? We have fewer than they. — Have the French 
as many ships as we ? They have fewer than we. — Have the dogs 
more feet than the horses? No, they have just as many. — Has not 
your bird two feet ? Yes, it has two. — Has not this little boy more 
arms than feet? Yes, he has two arms ; but he has only one foot. — 

What is the las* < r erb of the last exercise ? It is — What is 

the last noun of this exercise ? It is 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON, 17th.— Dix-septieme Legon, 17me. 

Vocabulary. 1st Section. | Yocaeulaire. Ire Section 

OF THE INFINITIVE.— Z>e V Injinitif. 

There are in French four Conjugations, which are distinguished by the 
termination of the Present of the Infinitive, viz : — 



80 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 



1. The first has its infinitive terminated in ER, as : parler, to speak, 

which will be the model of its regular verbs. 

2. The second in IR, its model finir, to finish, to end 

3. The third in OIR, " rece voir, to receive. 

4. The fourth in RE, " vendre, to sell. 

06s. 36. A verb, in French, is regular, when conjugated like the mode, 
of its conjugation. Irregular, of course, when not conjugated like it. Each 
verb given, hereafter, will have the number of its class. Those marked 
with an asterisk (*) are irregular. 



To buy. 


Acheter, l. 1 


To cut, cut off. 


Couper, 1. 


To choose. 


Choisir, 2. 


To build. 


Batir, 2. 


To perceive. 


Apercevoir, 3. 


To owe. 


Devoir, 3. 


To wait for 


Attendre, 4. 


To render, restore, 


Rendre, 4. 



Fear, peur. — Shame, honte. — Time, le temps. — Courage, le courage.- 
Wrong, tort. — Right, raison. — A mind, a desire, a wish, envie. 

Obs. 37. These seven words require the preposition {de, of,) after them, 
when followed by an infinitive. Example.— Are you afraid to speak ? Avez- 
vous peur de parler ? 



To work. 

Have you a mind to work ? 

I have a mind to work. 

He has not the courage to speak. 

Are you afraid to speak ? 

I am ashamed to speak. 

Have they time to wait ? 

They have neither time nor a wish 

to wait. 
To cut it, him. To cut them. 
To cut some. To cut one more. 

Has he time to cut the bread ? 
He has (time to cut it). 
Has he a mind to cut other trees ? 

He has (a mind to cut others). 
Seventeenth Exercise. 1st Sec- 
Saturday April, 1849. 



Travailler, 1. 

Avez-vous envie de travailler ? 

J'ai envie de travailler. 

U n'a pas le courage de parler. 

Avez-vous peur de parler ? 

J'ai honte de parler. 

Ont-ils le temps d' attendre? 

lis n'ont ni le temps, ni envie d'at- 

tendre. 
Le couper. Les couper. 
En couper. En couper encore un. 
A-t-il le temps de couper le pain ? 
II a le temps de le couper. 
A-t-il envie de couper d'autres ar- 

bres? 
II a envie d'en couper d'autres. 

-Dix-septieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Samedi Avril mil huit, &c. 

Have you more than one exercise this morning'? We have no 
exercise, but we have a vocabulary. — Have you not more than one 

1 Questions to be asked and answered in French, on the introduction of 
a verb. Of what conjugation is it ? De quelle conjugaison est-il ? Of the 
1st, 2d, 3d, or 4th. De la Ire, 2de, 3me, ou 4rae. — Why ? Pourquoi ? Be- 
cause it ends in : er, ir, oir, or re. Parce qu J il finit en : er, ir, oir, ou re.— ■ 
Is it regular? Est il regulier? It is. Il Vest. — Why? Pourquoi? Be- 
cause it is conjugated like the model: parler , jinir , recevoir, or vendre. — 
Parce qu'iZ est conjugue comme le modele : parler, &c. — It is not. Il n« 
Vest pas. — It is not conjugated, &c. Il n J est pas conjugue, &c. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 



81 



vocabulary ? No, we have not. (Dir. 1.) That is not much. No, that 
is not much, but it is enough. — Have you still a mind to buy my 
friend's horse and sheep? (§ 32. N. 3.) I have still a mind to buy 
them : but I have no more money. — Have you time to work % I 
have time, but no mind to work. — Has your brother time to cut 
some beef or mutton? He has. — Is he afraid to cut any? He is 
not, but he has no mind to cut any. — Has he got no knife? (§ 26.) 
Yes. he has one. — Have you time to cut some cheese \ I have. — 
Has he a desire (a mind) to cut the cabbages ? He has. but he is 
ashamed to cut them. — Is the tailor of the minister wrong to cut 
the coarse cloth? He is not wrong in cutting it. — Who has time to 
cut the trees ? What trees ? The general's big trees. The farmer 
has time to cut them. — How many trees has he time to cut? He 
has only time to cut two. — Who has time to cut more than two? 
Nobody has. — Are the little scholar and the little boy ashamed to 
speak ? They are not ashamed, but afraid to speak. 

Am I not right in buying as many cakes as they ? Yes, you are 
right in buying as many cakes as they. — Is our friend right in buying 
that ugly old horse V No, he is wrong; but we are right in buying 
this pretty little dog. — Has any one a mind to speak ? You. he, 
John, and I, have (469 ; N. 1) a mind to speak ; but we have not 
courage enough. — Have you the courage to receive those gentle- 
men ? I have the courage and the wish to receive them. — Is he 
not wrong to receive that note ? He is right to receive it. Has that 
sailor the courage to cut off the finger and thumb of this little boy? 
No. he has not : but the doctor has. — Has the cloth merchant a mind 
to chpose a few more cloaks? He has a mind to choose a few 
more, out he has no more money. — Are the carpenters ashamed to 
build a ship % They are not ashamed to build a small one ; but the 
captain is afraid to build a large one. — What are they afraid to 
build? They are afraid to build a great many things. — Is not the 
lawyer of merit wrong in receiving his young friends in his garden? 
No, he is not wrong in receiving them in his garden ; but he is not 
right in choosing those old cakes and that bad wine. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
To break. To mend, to repair. 

Casser. Of what conjugation is it ? 
Of the first. Why? 
Because it ends in : er. 
Is it regular ? Yes, it is. 
Why ? Because it is conjugated like 

the model : parler. 
To pick up. To look for, to seek. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Casser, 1. Raccommoder, 1. 

De quelle conjugaison e^t-il ? 
De la premiere. Pourquoi ? 
Parce qu'il finit en : er. 
Est-il regulier ? Oui, il Test. 
Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il est conjugu6 

comme le modele : parler. 
Ramasser, 1. Chercher, 1. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 



To buy, purchase. To buy one. 

To buy some more. To buy two. 

To buy one or two more. 

Have you a mind to buy one more 
horse ? 

I have a mind to buy two more. 

Am I not right to pick up that beau- 
tiful satin shawl ? 

Yes, but you are wrong to break that 
pretty paper fan. 

Is he afraid to mend this cloak ? 

He is not afraid to mend it. 

What have they a mind to look for ? 

They do not. wish to look for anything. 

Have those children the courage to 
wait in the garden ? 

They have (the courage). (Dir. 1.) 

Is not the young scholar wrong to 
sell his dictionary ? 

No, he is not wrong in selling it, be- 
cause it is an old dictionary. 

Has the merchant more sugar than 
the grocer ? He has not so much. 



Acheter, 1. En acheter un. 

En acheter encore. En acheter deux. 
En acheter encore un ou deux. 
Avez-vous envie d'acheter encore 

un cheval? 
J'ai envie d'en acheter encore deux. 
N'ai-je pas raison de ramasser ce 

beau chale de satin ? 
Si fait : mais vous avez tort de casser 

ce joli eventail de papier. 
A-t-il peur de raccommoder ce man- 

teau-ci ? 
II n'a pas peur de le raccommoder. 
Qu'ont-ils envie de chercher ? 
lis n'ont envie de rien chercher. 
Ces enfants ont-ils le courage d'at- 

tendre dans le jardin ? 
lis en ont le courage. 
Le jeune ecolier n'a-t-il pas tort de 

vendre son dictionnaire ? 
Non, il n'a pas tort de le vendre, par- 

ce que c'est un vieux dictionnaire. 
Le marchand a-t-il plus de sucre que 

l'epicier ? II n'en a pas tant. 



Seventeenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Dix-septieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 
Monday, May 1849. Lundi, Mai, 1849. 

Have we not the two exercises of the seventeenth lesson (de la) ? 
Yes, we have the seventeenth lesson. — How many verbs have we 
in our vocabularies? We have ten. — Have we not more than ten'? 
Is it not enough ? Yes, it is enough. — Have we any adjectives and 
nouns? We have several. — Have we not many nouns and pro- 
nouns? We have more of the last than of the first. — Has the 
young sailor any more biscuits or bread? He has biscuits, but 
(Obs. 35) no more bread. — What has the old grocer got? He has 
fresh cheese, but no more rice. — Who has fresh butter? I have 
some yet, the physician has a little more, but the lawyer and the 
minister have no more. 

What has our tailor a mind to mend ? He has a mind to mend 
our old friend's (467, N. 1) coats and vests. — Has he not a mind to 
mend our hats and theirs? No, but the hatter has a mind to mend 
them. — Has the little shoemaker time to mend our old shoes? He 
has time, but he has no mind to mend them. — Are you afraid to 
look for my horse ? I am not afraid, but I have no wish to look for 
it. — What are the carpenters right in building? They are right in 
building vessels.- — Are their children afraid to pick up some nails? 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



83 



They are not. — Have you a mind to break my jewel? I have a 
mind to pick it up, but not to break it. — Am I wrong in picking up 
your leather gloves? You are not wrong in picking them up; but 
you are wrong in cutting them. — Who has a mind to break our 
large looking-glass ? Our enemy has a mind to break it. — Has the 
lawyer more merit than the minister ? The one has no more merit 
than the other. — Has the big chicken more feet than this little bird ^ 
No, it has just as many. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON, 18th.— Dix-huitieme Legon, 18me. 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
To make, to do, to perform. 
To be willing, to wish, to will. 
Will you ? Do you wish ? 
Are you willing ? Will you have ? 
I will, am willing, wish. I will not. 
Will he ? is he willing ? does he wish ? 
He will, is willing, wishes. He will 

not. 
We will, are willing, wish, will have. 
You will, are willing, wish, will have. 
They will, are willing, wish, wu'ZZ have. 
Who will (have)? Who does not wish? 
Nobody wishes. Some one wishes. 
Do you wish to have it ? 
Does any one wish to make my fire ? 
I am willing to make it. 
1 do not wish to make it. 
Does he wish to buy your horse ? 
He wishes to buy it ; does he not i 
Is it not as I say ? Is it not so ? 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Faire,* 4. 



Vouloir,* 3. 




Voulez-vous ? 




Je veux. 


Je ne veux pas. 


Veut-il ? 




11 veut. 


11 ne veut pas. 



Nous voulons. 

Vous voulez. Vous ne voulez pas. 

lis veulent. Veulent-ils ? 

Qui veut ? Qui ne veut pas ? 

Personne ne veut. Quelqu'un veut. 

Le voulez-vous ? 

Quelqu'un veut-il faire mon feu ? 

Je veux le faire. 

Je ne veux pas le faire. 

Veut-il acheter votre cheval ? 

II veut 1' acheter ; n 1 est-ce pas ? 

+ N'est-ce pas ? (Idiom.) 

06s. 38. (Important.) This French : N'e*t-cepas? answers to any nega 
tive interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, as : 

1. You are going to write, are you not ? meaning: is it not so t 

2. You would write, would you not ? meaning : is it not so ? 

3. They wrote, did they not ? meaning : is it not so ? 

4. He has the cloth, has he not ? meaning : is it not so f 

5. We were reading, were we not ? meaning : is it not so f 

These five negative interrogations (in the same person as the five pre- 
ceding affirmations and immediately connected with them) are all translated 
in French by : n'est-ce pas ? and so are all similar ones, in all moods, tenses, 
and persons. 



84 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



Vous avez le Frangais de : to do, it 
make ? N'est-ce pas ? 

Oui, nous l'avons. C'est: faire. 

Vous avez aussi celui de : to be wil- 
ling : N'est-ce pas ? Nous l'avons 
aussi. A 

Aller,*l. Etre,* 4. 

Chez 

Etre chez l'homme. 

Aller chez I'epicier. 

Etre chez son ami. 

Aller chez leur pere. 

Aller ( c ^ ez mo * — c ^ ez * u *' 

Etre chez nous. Aller chez nous. 

Etre -chez vous. Aller chez vous. 

Eire chez eux. Aller chez eux, 

Etre chez quelqu'un. 

N'aller chez personne. 

A la maison. Aller a la maison. 

Voulez-vous attendre a la maison 1 

Chez qui? 

Chez qui voulez-vous aller ? 

Je ne veux aller chez personne. 



You have the French of: to do, to 

make ? Have you not ? 
Yes, we have it. It is : faire. 
You have also that of: to be willing : 

have you not ? We have it also. 

To go. To be. 

To, at, or in the house of 

To be at the man's house. 
To go to the grocer's. 
To be in one's friend's house. 
To go to their father's. 

rp . J my house — his house. 

To be at, to go to, our house. 

To be in, to go to, your house. 

To be at, to go to, their house. 

To be at some one's house. 

To go to no one's house. 

At home. To go home. 

Will you wait at home ? 

At, in, or to whose house ? 

To whose house do you wish to go ? 

I do not wish to go to any one's. 

Eighteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Dix-huitieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Tuesday, May 1849. Mardi, Mai, 1849. 

Have you a mind to work? Yes, I have. — What will you do? 
I wish to do an exercise. — Which ? This one. Very well. — Does 
the little son of the general wish to break that big stick? No, he 
does not wish to break it. — Are you willing to look for my son ? I 
am (willing, &c). (Dir. 1.) — What do you wish to pick up? I wish 
to pick up the shawl, hat, and gloves, of Miss Clara. — You wish to 
pick up that dollar, do you not? Yes, I wish to pick it up. — Will 
you pick up that old pencil ? No, I will not. — Do you wish to go to 
that man's house ? No, I wish to go to the ministers. — You wish to 
go to the physician's, do you not? No, I do not wish to go to the 
physician's, but to the lawyer's and grocer's. — W T ho wishes to go to 
the doctor's? Nobody wishes to go to his house. — Does our neigh- 
bor wish to buy these or those combs ? {mind the French construc- 
tion.) He wishes to buy them. — Does that farmer wish to cut your 
tree 2 He does not wish to cut mine, but his own. — Which ? The 
big tree. — What does the shoemaker wish to mend ? He wishes to 
mend our old shoes. — Does the tailor wish to mend anything? He 
wishes to mend ($ 25) waistcoats. — He wishes to mend their coats, 
does he not f He does not. — Do the Swiss wish to wait for your son 1 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



86 



They do. — What do they wish to choose ? They wish to choose 
some coarse cloth. — And their children, what do they wish to 
choose ? They wish to choose some fine handkerchiefs. — Who has 
any ? The dry goods merchants have. — Do they wish to sell them ? 
Yes, indeed ! 

Is Charles willing to wait for the lawyer's son ? No, he is not. — 
Robert will wait for him ; will he not ? He ! No, he will not. — Who 
will do it? Nobody will do it. — Are the Scotchmen willing to wait 
for the minister at your father's or at the doctor's'? They will wait 
for him neither at my father's nor at the doctor's, but at the book- 
seller's. — Am I wrong to go to the hatter's ? No. you are not wrong 
to go to his house. — At whose house is their father? He is at his 
friend's, the apothecary. — To whose house do your sons wish to 
go? They? They do not wish to go to anybody's house. — Will 
you go to my house ? I will not go to yours, but to my brother's. — 
Does not this little child wish to go to the cake shop (chez le mar- 
chand de gateaux)? Yes, indeed, he does. (Dir. 1.) — Why? Be- 
cause he has two sous, and he wishes to buy two cakes. — Will not 
your children buy some cakes, too ? No, they do not wish to buy 
any; they are not hungry. — Have you the French of: a quarter of a 
dollar? No, I have it not. Do you wish to have it? Yes, Sir. 
It is : un quart de dollar. — Have you two quarters of a dollar ? I have 
two. — How many quarters has he ? He has several quarters. — Has 
Charles his brother's pretty little stick and playthings? (467, N. 1.) 
He has his pretty little stick, but not his toys. — The general's and 
doctor's horses are hungry; are they not? No \ but the cook's birds 
and chickens (§ 140, Art. 2,) are thirsty. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
To burn. To warm. 

To tear. To put, put on. 

The broth. My linen clothes. 
Beautiful, superb. 
Will you put on this satin vest ? 
I will put it on ; it is beautiful. 

At whose house is your brother ? \ 

He is at ours, in ours. 
Is he at home ? at his house ? 
He is not at home — in his house. 
He is at or in yours. 
Who is at or in theirs ? — at mine ? 
Nobody is at theirs ; yours ; mine. 
Are you ? I am. 

Tired, fatigued. Are ycu, tired ? 
8 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section 
Briiler, 1. Chauffer, 1. 
Dechirer. Mettre*4, (17 1 , N. 1). 

Le bouillon. Mon linge, (singular.) 
Superbe. 

Voulez-vous mettre ce gilet de satin ? 
Je veux le mettre ; il est superbe. 
Chez qui est votre frere ? 
Chez qui votre frere est-il? 
II est chez nous. 

Est-il a la maison ? Est-il chez lui f 
II n'est pas a la maison — chez lui. 
II est chez vous. 
Qui est chez eux ? — chez moi ? 
Personne n'est chez eux ; vous ; moi. 
Etes-vous ? Je suis. 
Fatigue. Etes-vous fatigue ? 



86 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



Je suis fatigue. Je ne suis pas fatigue*. 
Je suis un peu fatigue — tres-fatigue. 
Est-il. II est. II n'est pas. 
Occupe. II est occupe; n'est-cepas? 
Sommes-nous? Nous nesommes pas. 
Sont-ils? lis sont. lis ne sont paa. 
Sont-ils occupes ? Oui, ils sont oc- 

cupes. ($ 137.) 
II est occupe et nous sommes fatigues. 
Boire* 4. Boire encore un peu. 
Ou ? Ou voulez-vous aller ? 
Que voulez-vous faire ? 
Votre frere que veut-il faire ? 
Votre frere est-il a la maison ? 
Les Suisses que veulent-ils boire ? 
Ils veulent boire du bouillon. 
Ils veulent boire quelque chose de 

bon. Ils ne veulent rien boire. 
Veulent-ils dechirer ce vieux papier ? 
Ils ne veulent pas le dechirer, mais 

le bruler. 
Tout. Est-ce tout ? C'est tout. 



I am tired. I am not tired. 

I am a little tired. Very tired. 
Is he ? He is. He is not. 
Busy . . . He is busy ; is he not ? 
Are we ? We are not. 
Are they ? They are. They are not. 
Are they busy ? Yes, they are. 

He is busy, and we are tired. 
To drink. To drink a little more. 
Where ? Where do you wish to go ? 
What do you wish to do ? 
What does your brother wish to do ? 
Is your father at home ? 
What will the Swiss drink ? 
They wish to drink some broth. 
They wish to drink something good. 
They do not wish to drink anything. 
Do they wish to tear this old paper ? 
They do not wish to tear, but to 

burn it. 
All. Is it, is this, is that all ? It is. 

Eighteenth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Dix-huttieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 
Wednesday, May 1849. Mercredi, Mai, 1849. 

You have the 18th exercise to-day, have you not? No, we have 
only the 18th vocabulary. — Have you but the vocabulary? Yes, 
indeed, that's all. Very well. — Miss Caroline, will you put on this 
or that hat ? I will put on neither this nor that ; but the other. — 
Which? This ugly old hat {vieux vilain) ? This ugly old hat! It 
is superb. Superb! indeed. — Will you not put your velvet shawl 
on? Yes; I will put it on, because I am cold. — Has the young 
painter any fire? He has. — Does he wish to burn anything? Yes, 
he has a mind to burn these old papers. — What will you tear? I 
will tear this coarse handkerchief. — Who is busy ? I am busy. — 
Who is tired ? I am not tired. — Who is good ? The grocer's little 
son. — Are you busy, very busy? I am very busy. — Are you not 
tired ? Yes, I am a little tired. — What does the cook wish to warm ? 
He wishes to warm our tea, and our father's coffee. — Is that all ? 
Yes, that is all. — Do you wish to warm my brother's broth and 
coffee ? I am willing to warm this, but not that. — Is the farmer wil- 
ling to put some wood in the fire ? Yes, he is. — Will they put any 
grain in the bag ? No, they do not wish to put any in the bag, but 
in the granary: that's all. 

Is not the grocer's clerk willing f;o put your rice in his bag ? Yes, he 
is willing to put it in his bag. — Am I not right in warming your broth? 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



87 



Yes, you are. — Is not the merchant wrong in tearing the satin ? Yes, 
he is. — Have we time to go in the garden ? No, we have not time. — 
What does Charles wish to tear? He does not wish to tear any- 
thing; but we andAhey (467. N. 1.) wish to (nous voulons) tear the 
cotton bags. — Is he afraid to tear your coat ? He is not; but to burn 
it. — What are you willing to put on ? I am willing to put on my 
coat, (Dir. 2,) vest, shoes, stockings, and gloves: that's all. Very 
well; that's enough. — Are you tired? I am not tired. — Who is 
tired ? My brother is tired. — Has the Spaniard a mind to buy as 
many horses as oxen ? No ; but he has a mind to buy as many 
birds as you and I. — Do you wish to drink anything? I do not. — 
How many chickens have you at home ? We have four ; that's 
all. — Where is your father ? At his friend's house. — Is the physician 
at the lawyer's ? No ; but the minister is at the lawyer's. — Do the 
strangers wish to go to the American's or to the Dutchman's? They 
wish to go neither to the American's nor to the Dutchman's ? — Where 
do they wish to go? They do not wish to go to anybody's house. — 
Where are your little friends, Robert and John ? They are at their 
father's. — That's all. — Is your friend's brother's horse sick? (§ 140, 
Art. 3.) No, it is not sick. 



NINETEENTH LESSON, 19th, 
Vocabulary. 1st Section. 
Are you going ? do you go ? 
I am going. I go. I am not going. 
Are you going to choose a book ? 
I am going to choose a book. 
I am not yet going to choose any. 
I am not going to choose anything. 
Are you going home ? I am (going 

there). 
To it, at it, in it, there, thither. 
To go thither. To be there. 

It to it, it in it, him, there, or thither. 
To take, to carry. To send. 
To take, to lead, to conduct — him 

there. 
To take you there. To take us there. 
To carry it there. To send him there. 
To commence, to begin. To proceed. 
Them, there, or thither. 
Some of it, there, or thither. 
To carry them thither. 



. — Dix-neuvieme Legon, 19me. 

Vocabulaike. Ire Section. 
Allez-vous ? 

Je vais. Je ne vais pas. 

Allez-vous choisir un livre ? 
Je vais choisir un livre. 
Je ne vais pas encore en choisir. 
Je ne vais rien choisir. 
Allez-vous chez vous? J'y vais. 

F, (avant le verbe.) (§ 47.) 
Yaller,*l. Y etre,* 4. 

L'y, (avant le verbe.) (§ 57.) 
Porter, 1. Envoyer,* 1. 

Mener, 1. L'y mener. 

Vous y mener. Nous y mener. 
L'y porter. L'y envoyer. 

Commencer, 1. Continuer, 1, 
Les y, (av. le verbe. ^ ($ 57.) 
Y en, (av. le verbe.) ($ 60.) 
Les y porter. 



88 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



Y en porter. 

Voulez-vous l'envoyer chez mon 

pere? 
Je vais 1 l'y envoy er. 
Je ne vais pas#ncore l'y envoyer. 
Obs. 39. The adverb y always stands before the verb. When there is a 
pronoun like le, it, him, les, them ; that pronoun stands immediately before 
the adverb y ; but en, some of it, stands after the y, as may be seen above. 



To carry some there or thither. 
Will you send him to my father's ? 

I am going to send him there. 

I am not yet going to send him there 



to my 
house ? 



To come. To come to it, thither 

Are you going to come 

Will you come {meaning) 

Are you coming 

I am coming (going to come) there. 

When ? To-morrow. To-morrow 

morning. 
With. With pleasure. 

At first, in the first place. Afterwards. 
What are you going to do first ? 
First, I am going to the grocer's, and 

then to the apothecary's. 
With me — with him— with them — 

nobody. 
To study. To recite. 



Venir,* 2. 



Allez-vous venir chez moi ? 



Je vais y venir. 
Quand ? Demain. 



Demain matin. 



Avec. Avec plaisir. 

D'abord. Ensuite. 

Qu' allez-vous faire d'abord ? 

D'abord, je vais chez 1'epicier, et en- 
suite chez l'apothicaire. 

Avec moi — avec lui — aveceux — avec 
personne. 

iStudier, 1. 



Reciter, 1. 

Nineteenth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Dix-neuvieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Thursday, May 1849. Jeudi, Mai, 1849. 

Have you an exercise or a vocabulary , to-day? We have both. — 
Are you going to recite the vocabulary first ? Yes, with pleasure ; 
and then the exercise : will we not ? (won't we ?) — Very well. — 
Will you begin, Mr. Charlemagne ? Yes, Sir, with pleasure. — What 

is the French of: I am going? It is — Is it right? Yes, or 

no {according to the answer). — Do you wish to go home ? I do. 
(Dir. 1.) — Does your son wish to go with you? He does. — Is your 
brother at home ? He is. — Where are you going, Mr. Charles ? I 
am going to the minister's. — Do your children wish to come with 
me ? They do not (wish to go with you). — To whose house are 
you going to send this note? I am not going to send it, but I am 
going to carry (take) it to the general's. — Will your servant take my 
note to the American's house? He has no time to take it there; 
but little Henry will take it there. — Will those children take the 
stranger to the Russian's? They will take him there. — Are you not 
going to take the painter to the physician's? No, but I am going to 
send him there. — Is the painter willing to begin that picture, to-day? 
No, he does not wish to commence it before to-morrow. — To-mor- 



When the will is not particularly referred to, use vais, instead of mux. 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



row morning? (demain matin?) Yes, to-morrow morning. — What 
are you going to study first, to-morrow morning? To study? I am 
not going to study anything. — Are you not going to study the 19th 
vocabulary ? I am going to study it to-day. 

Where will the son of my friend take the Swiss-s large dog? — He 
will not take the Swiss's large dog, but the Scotchman : s pretty little 
horse. — Where will he take him? He will take him to the cook's 
house. — When will he take him there ? This evening or to-morrow 
morning? Neither this evening nor to-morrow, but to-day. — When 
are you coming to my house ? First, this morning ■ and afterwards, 
to-morrow. — Will you proceed ? I have no time to proceed, but 
Carnot has. — Will he proceed? Yes, he will. — Will the shoemaker 
take the boy's shoes home, to their house? No. he will not, 
because he is afraid of their bad dog. — That old man is hungry and 
thirsty ; is he not ? This one is neither hungry nor thirsty, but that 
one is. — We will first go to the Englishman's, and afterwards to the 
Italian's; won't we? Yes, we will; but the Dutch will not. — Will 
your son begin Thiers's work, to-morrow ? No, because he has not 
yet got it, and because he is going to recite the last vocabulary. — 
Has he not got it yet ? No, he has not. — Have you it ? Yes, I have 
it. — When do the Germans wish to go in the farmer's garden ? To- 
morrow? No, they do not yet wish to go thither (or in it). — Is the 
doctor very busy? Yes, he is very busy and very tired, this eve- 
ning. — Are you going to put those trees in your son's garden ? I 
am ) m but not this evening, because I am too tired and too busy. — 
What is the student going to drink ? He is first going to drink some 
coffee and milk, and afterwards some wine. 

Nineteenth Vocab., 2d Sec. — Dix-neuvieme Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



Somewhere, anywhere. 

Are you going anywhere ? 

Nowhere, not anywhere (§ 151). 

I am not going anywhere (nowhere). 

To write. To write them. Some. 

To translate. To correct. 

To read. To copy. 

Will you read the last vocabulary ? 

Does he not wish to copy anything ? 

Will they translate this or that ex- 
ercise ? 

Will you not correct it ? Yes, I will. 

Is he going, does he go ? 

He goes, is going.) He is not going. 

Who is going ? Nobody goes, (is 
going. 
8* 



Quelque part, ^not used with a nega- 
tion.) Allez-vous quelque part ? 

Ne . . . nulle part. 

Je ne vais nulle part. 

Ecrire,* 4. Les ecrire. En ecrire. 

Traduire,* 4. Corriger, 1. 

Lire,* 4. Copier, 1. 

Voulez-vous lire le dernier vocabu- 
laire ? Ne veut-il rien copier ? 

Veulent-ils traduire cet exercice-ci 
ou celui-la? (§37.) 

Ne voulez-vous pas le corriger ? Si 
fait. Va-t-il? (Obs. 15.) 

II va. II ne va pas. 

Qui va ? Personne ne va. 



90 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



Is he going to read, translate, and 
write ? He is going neither to 
read, translate, nor write. 

What is he going to do ? 

He is not going to do anything. 

Is the teacher going to correct an- 
other of our exercises ? He is 
(going to do it). 

Is he coming going to come) to the 
teacher's or to the minister's? 

He is coming neither to this one's 
house nor to the other's. 

The teacher, master. French teacher. 

This professor. Our professor of 
English. 

At what o'clock ? 

At one o'clock. At two o'clock. 

Half. The or a quarter. 

At half past one. 

At a quarter past one. 

At a quarter past two. 

At a quarter to (or of, or before) three. 

At twelve, noon. Half past twelve. 

At twelve at night, or midnight. 

Less. 

Now, at present. Not now. 

Ready. 

Are we ready ? I am ready. 

Ready to. They are ready to go. 



In a quarter of an hour. 
an hour. 



Before half 



Va-t-il lire, traduire, et ecrire? 

PI ne va ni lire, ni traduire, ni ecrire. 
Que va-t-il faire ? 
II ne va rien faire. 
Le maitre va-t-il corriger un autre 
de nos exercices ? II va le faire. 

Va-t-il venir chez le maitre ou chez 

le ministre I 1 
II ne va venir ni chez Tun ni chez 

l'autre. 
Le maitre. Le maitre de Francais. 
Ce professeur. Notre professeur 

d' Anglais. 
A quelle heure ? 2 
A une heure. A deux heures. 
Demi. Le ou un quart. 

A une heure et demie. 3 
A une heure et quart (or et un quart). 
A deux heures un quart. (Mind the s.) 
A trois heures moins un quart. 
A midi. Midi et demi. 

A minuit. A minuit et un quart. 
Moins, (comparative of pen, little.) 
A present. Pas a present. 

Pret. Prets. (plur.) 

Sommes-nous prets ? Je suis pret. 
Pret a — prets a. lis sont prets a 

aller. 
Dans un quart d'heure. Avant de- 

mi-heure. 



Dix-neuviJime Exerctce. 2de Section. 

Friday, May 1849. Vendredi, Mai, 1849. 

Gentlemen, what are you going to do, to-day? Recite the voca- 
bulary, translate and correct our exercises. — Very well. Will you 

1 Va-t-il ve?iir? literally, is lie going to come? Allez-vous venir? &c, are 
awkward expressions in English, but much used in French, and philosophi- 
cally so. He is writing, is never used in English for : he is going to write. 
Why should he is coming be substituted for : he is going to come ? [Ditto 
of: Sortir, to go or come out, &-c] 

2 Heure, hour, is a feminine noun. This class of nouns will be spoken 
of hereafter. For the present, the learner has only to write them as he sees 
them written in the lessons. 

3 The adjective demie is here in the feminine gender, agreeing with the 
feminine noun heure. But when this adjective precedes the noun, it does 
not agree with it in gender and number, as : une demi-keure, half an hour. 



NINETEENTH LESSOV. 91 

begin, Sir? With much pleasure. — What is the French of: some- 
where ? It is is it not? Yes, or no (as the case may require). 

Have you the French of: is he going? Yes, we have. — What is 

it? (quel est-il ?) It is it is right; is it not? Yes, or no. — Is 

the youth going, in a quarter of an hour, to the Scotchman's or to 
the Irishman's? He is going neither to the one's nor to the other's 
house 5 but I am going to take (conduct) him to the young Dutch- 
man's. — When are you going to take him there? Now. — Is he 
ready? No, he is not yet ready. — Very well; I will wait for him. 
(Je vais.) — Do you go to the physician's this evening? No, I do 
not. — Do you go anywhere? — I go somewhere at seven o'clock. — 
Will their children go anywhere, in half an hour ? No, they will 
go nowhere, because they are tired and busy. — Do you wish to go 
anywhere ? I do not wish to go anywhere,- but my brother's friends 
have a mind to go to the Englishman's. — Where is the Englishman 
now ? He is at home. — Are his sons at home ? They are there 
now. — Are you ready to write and translate ? I am ready to trans- 
late, but not to write. I have no pencil. — Has the cook any more 
butter ? No, he has no more : but he is going to buy some.— Where 
is he going to buy any? He is going to buy some at the milk- 
man's. — Has he much? He has but little now; but he is going to 
make some this evening. — At what o'clock? At eight. 

When will you go with me to the bookseller's? At six o'clock. — 
I am busy at six o'clock. — Will you go at seven ? No, not before 
eight or half past eight. — Very well. — When are you coming (going 
to come) to my house? To-day at noon? Not at twelve, but at 
half past twelve. — With whom are you coming? With nobody. — 
[s not the student going to study first, and to recite afterwards ? Yes, 
he will (va) study first, and recite afterwards. — Is he ready to com- 
mence ? No, not yet. — Why is he not yet ready ? Because he has 
but little time, not much time. — Who is going to correct our exer- 
cises ? The old professor is. — What is the young teacher going to 
do ? He is going to put on his hat and gloves, and go to his father's. 
Will you read, translate, and copy your French Tvxth us to-day? 1 
am afraid 10 do it. — Are you ashamed also ? No, I am not ashamed ; 
I am only afraid. — Who has time and courage to copy those two 
exercises? These, or those? Those. — This little scholar has time, 
courage, and a desire to copy them. — When will the clerk go to the 
lawyer's and to the teacher's, to copy something? He will go there 
first to-day, and then to-morrow also. — Does the grocer wish to buy 
as many bags of coffee as of rice ? He is going to buy more of the 
former than of the latter. — We have biscuits; but have we enough? 
We have not too many. — How many more bags have we? We 



02 



NINETEENTH LESSON. 



have yet six. — Have we but six? Have we not eight? Yes, we 
have eight: and the baker is going to send another. — At what 
o'clock ? At a quarter to six or at a quarter to seven. — Very well 



TWENTIETH LESSON, 20th.— Vingtieme Legon, 20rae. 
Vocabulary. 1st Section. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

To, in order to, for the purpose of. \ Pour, (avant un infinitif.) 

Obs. 40. In English, all prepositions {to, excepted) are usually followed 
by the present participle, as: of coming, without having, &c. In French, 
all prepositions are followed by the infinitive mood, except en (in), which is 
followed by the present participle. {Mind this Obs. Rul. 1.) 



To see. In order to see him. 

Have you money to buy (or, for the 

purpose of buying) bread ? 
I have some to buy some. 
Are you going to your brother's to 

(in order to) see him ? 
I have no time to go there to see 

him. 
Has your servant a knife to cut the 

cheese ? 
He has none to cut it. 
To be able, (can.) 
Can you ? Are you able ? 
I can. I am able. 
I cannot. I am not able (unable). 
Can you read ? Are you able to write ? 

I can read and write. (Rul. 2.) 
I can neither read nor write. 
To sweep. To kill. 

To salt. To sweeten. 

Can I ? may I ? Vml able ? 

Obs. 41. Peux-je? Ne peux-je pas ? are not used interrogatively: say, 
therefore : Puis-je? Can I? Ne puis -je pas ? Can I not? (of which here- 
after. Lesson 28th.) 



Voir,* 3. Pour le voir. 

Avez-vous de 1' argent pour acheter 

du pain ? 
J'en ai pour en acheter. 
Allez-vous chez votre frere pour le 

voir? 
Je n'ai pas le temps d'y aller pour le 

voir. 
Votre domestique a-t-il un couteau 

pour couper le fromage ? 
II n'en a pas pour le couper. 
Pouvoir* 3. 
Pouvez-vous ? 
Je peux (ou je puis). 
Je ne peux pas (ouje ne puis). 
Pouvez-vous lire ? Pouvez-vous 

ecrire ? 
Je peux lire et ecrire (ouje puis). 
Je ne puis ni lire ni ecrire. 
Balayer, 1. Tuer, 1. 

Saler, 1. Sucrer, 1. 

Puis-je ? (never peux-je ?) 



May I or can I see that picture ? 
You can, or may. You cannot. 

Can he ? may he ? Can he not ? 
He can, or may. He is not able. 

Can we, may we ? Can we not ? 

We can, are able. We cannot. 

Can we see the vessels ? 



Puis-je voir ce tableau-la ? 
Vous pouvez. Vous ne pouvez pas. 
Peut-il ? Ne peut-il pas ? 

11 peut. II ne peut pas. 

Pouvons-nous ? Ne pouvons-nous 

pas ? 
Nous pouvons. Nousne pouvons pas. 
Pouvons-nous voir les vaisseaux ? 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 



Are we going ? Do we go ? We do. 

Do we go there ? We do. 

We are not going. We are not going 

to it. 
Are we going to kill the ox ? 
To try. 



Allons-nous ? Nous allons. 
Y allons-nous ? Nous y allons. 
Nous n' allons pas. Nous n'y allons 

pas. 
Allons-nous tuer le bceuf ? 
Essayer. 



Twentieth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Vingtieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 
Saturday, May, 1849. Samedi, Mai, 1849. 

Are we going to recite our lesson now ? Not now. Mr. V. is not 
ready. — Where is he? He is at his friend's. — Is he coming (going 
to come) ? Yes, he is coming. — Very well. — Can you translate to- 
day's exercise ? We can translate it. — At what o'clock can we com- 
mence ? We can commence in a quarter of an hour. — Can you, 
gentlemen, read and correct these exercises? We can commence, 
and you can continue (or proceed). — Can you cut the bread with the 
knives that you have ? We are going to try. — Can you mend my 
gloves ? You may mend them. We are going to look for some 
thread to mend those of the young professor. — Are you going 
to the tailor's to look for the old vests? We are not going 
there to look for them. We have neither the time nor the 
wish to do it. — Can you put those shoes on? We are going to 
try them. — Will you try our scissors? No, thank you, I have mine, 
and mine are very good (are sharp). — Can the tailor make a coat 
to-day? No, he cannot make any. — Have we glasses to drink our 
wine ? We have glasses to drink it : but have we any wine ? We 
can send the servant to buy some. — Can you drink as much coffee 
as tea? We can drink more tea than coffee, can we not? — Have 
you any sugar to sweeten the coffee ? I have some to sweeten the 
coffee, but not the tea. — Has not the young man time to see my 
brothers child ? Yes, he has time to see him. — Where is he ? He 
is in the garden. — No, not in the garden, but in the large and beau- 
tiful vessel of the big captain. 

How much money have you with 3 r ou? I have a good deal. — 
Have you a hundred dollars ? I have more than that. More than 
a hundred dollars? Why have you so much? Because I have a 
mind to buy a horse. Which one? The general's? Will he sell 
his ? He will. It is not that (which) I wish to buy ; but the farmer's 
young horse. — Are we going to take any cakes home ? We are not 
going to take any. — Can we not take some? No, we cannot. — Can- 
not the cake-merchant send them to our house? Yes, he can send 
them there in half an hour. That will do. (C'est bon.)— Will the 
Swiss send his son to the painter's? No, not to the painter's, but to 
the bookseller's. — Will he send him there now ? No, he is not going 



94 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 



to send him there now, but to-morrow. — Is not to-morrow Saturday? 
No, it is Sunday. — What day of the month is it? It is the 18th. 
The 18th, indeed ? — Who is going to read and copy the last vocabu- 
lary 1 Nobody is. — Is not Mr. Lenoir wrong in going to Mrs. Ver- 
dier's house ? Yes, he is wrong to go there ; but he will go. — Are 
you going to put on but one glove? No, because I have but one. 

Is the servant going to buy a broom to sweep the store (magasin) ? 
No, he is afraid to sweep it. — Why is he afraid to sweep it ? Be- 
cause the big dog is there (in it). — Who can sweep it? Little Robert 
can. — Has he a broom to sweep it? He has a broom to sweep it. — 
Has the cook sugar enough to sweeten the cakes? He has enough 
to sweeten them • but he has no more salt to salt the broth, nor the 
beef. — Is he not going to salt them? Yes, he is; because he is 
going to the merchant's to buy some salt to salt them. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

To, at, in. 1. To the. 2. To the. I A. 1. AT. 2. Au, aux. 

Obs. 42. A 1' is used before a vowel or silent h, in the sing. (Obs. 5.) 
Au (the contraction of: d le, § 9), is used before consonants. 
Aux (contraction of: d les, § 9), is the plural, before all letters. 



To the friend. 
To the man. 
To the captain. 
To the penknife. 
The basket. 
This carpet. 
His floor. 
My cat. 
To mine. 
To yours. 
To him, to her 
Tome. 



To the friends. 
To the men. 
To the captains. 
To the penknives. 
To the basket. 
To this carpet. 
To his floors. 
To my cat. 
To mine (plur). 
To ours (plur). 
indirect object.) 



To us. To you. To them. 

Are they able? Can they? May they? 
They can. They cannot. 

Cannot these men work ? 

What can your children do ? 

To speak to me. 

To speak to him, (to her.) 

To write to him, (to her.) To me. 

To speak to the general and to his 

friend. 
To send the grocer a dollar. ($ 51£.) 
To give, give away. To lend. 



A l'ami. 
A l'homme. 
Au capitaine. 
Au canif. 
Le panier. 
Ce tapis-ci. 
Son plancher. 
Mon chat. 
Au mien. 
Au votres. 



Aux amis. 
Aux hommes. 
Aux capitaines. 
Aux canifs. 
Au panier. 
A ce tapis-ci. 
A ses planchers. 
A mon chat. 
Aux miens. 
Aux notres. 



Lui, (regime indirect av. le verbe.) 
Me, (regime indirect av. le verbe. 

$47, &c.) 
Nous. Vous. Leur. 

Peuvent-ils ? 

lis peuvent. lis ne peuvent pas. 
Ces hommes ne peuvent-ils pas tra- 

vailler ? 
Vos enfants que peuvent-ils faire ? 
Me parler. Peuvent-ils me parler ? 
Lui parler. lis peuvent lui parler. 
Lui ecrire. M'ecrire. 

Parler au general et a son ami 

Envoyer un dollar a l'epicier. 
Donner. Preter. 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 



95 



To give you — them — us. (§45.) 

To lend a friend some money. (§ 51 i) 

Can you write to me ? 

They can write to you. 

Can the clerk speak to you ? 

He cannot speak to us now. 

Can they not write to your brother ? 

Yes, they can write to him. 



Vous donner. Leur donner. Nous 

donner. 
Preter de l'argent a un ami. 
Pouvez-vous m'ecrire ? 
lis peuvent vous ecrire. 
Le commis peut-il vous parler ? 
II ne peut pas nous parler a present. 
Ne peuvent-ils pas ecrire a votre 

frere ? 
Si fait ; ils peuvent lui ecrire. 



Twentieth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingtieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 
Monday, June 1849. Lundi, Juin, 1849. 

At what o'clock are you going to recite, to-day ? My brothers 
cannot recite before twelve o'clock. — Can they not recite at ten ? 
No, they cannot. — Will you take your big basket to my house? I 
will not take my basket there, but to the general's. — When ? Now ? 
No, I will take the basket there to-morrow. — Do your sons wish to 
take mine to the physician's'? No, they cannot take it there. — 
Why can they not? Because they have not time enough. — Is the 
farmer going to kill anything 1 He is going to kill his big ox. — Is 
he going to kill it now % Yes, he is. — Can they write to me ? They 
cannot write to you. — Can they speak to you ? They can speak to 
us. — Can they not wait for their friends? Yes, they can. — Can they 
not burn as much coal as wood ? No, they cannot burn so much of 
the former as of the latter. — Have we more friends than the Dutch ? 
We have more than they. — Has the grocer less coffee than tea ? He 
has less tea than coffee : but we have more of that than of this. — 
Who has a cat? The sailors have a cat. — Where is their cat? 
Their cat is in a small basket of wood. — Can the little servant 
sweep the carpet? He can. — Can he sweep the garret floor? Yes, 
he can do it. — Will you lend him a broom to sweep that floor? We 
cannot lend any to sweep the floor, but we can lend one to sweep the 
carpet. — Who is going to write to the merchant and to the grocer? 
The clerks can write to them. 

Is the professor of English going to write a book? Yes, he is 
going to write one. He can write a good one; can he not? Yes, 
he can. He is a man of merit. (§ 39, N. 3.) — Are we not going to 
Pratt's garden to-night? No, we are not going there to-night, but 
to-morrow, at nine or ten o'clock. — Will you give a dictionary to 
your son? Yes, I will give him a good dictionary. — Will they 
end me their horse ? They cannot lend you their horse, because 
the old minister has it. — Are we going to lend the lawyer (§ 51 4) 
anything ? We are going to lend the physician something. — Are 



96 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 



you not going to lend many things'? Yes, we are going to lend 
many things. — What are we going to lend ? We are going to lend, 
first ; handkerchiefs, shawls, and hats ; and afterwards cloaks, bags, 
and parasols, to the friends of the lawyer. — Why? Because they 
have none. You are very good. — Who is busy? The grocer and 
his clerk, the doctor and his neighbor the minister, the captain and 
his son, are busy. — Are you not busy, also 1 Yes, we are busy, but 
not very busy. — Are you ready to go to the garden of the Scotch- 
man ? I am ready to go, but Charles is not. — Why is he not ready? 
He is going to the grocer's to buy some good salt. — Is he going to 
buy much ? He is. — What does he wish to do ? He will salt the 
beef and the mutton which we have. — Cannot the servants salt 
them ? No, they cannot, or they will not. 

Vocabulary. 3d Section. 
Are they going ? Do they not go ? 
They are going, or they are. They 

go, They do not. 
To the museum. To the wharf. 



Are they going to the museum ? 

No, they are going to the wharf. 

Are the carpenters going to the ship ? 

They go there to work. 

They go neither to the wharf, nor 
the museum. 

Are they going to see anybody ? 

They are not going to see anybody. 

What are they going to do ? 

They are not going to do anything. 

Where are they going ? They go 
nowhere. 

Do they wish to send the good book 
to the man ? 

They are going to send it to him. 

When are they going to send it to 
him? 

They are going to give it to him to- 
morrow. 

Can they lend you the old diction- 
ary ? 

They can (lend it to me) on Thursday. 

Cannot your friend lend you one be- 
fore Thursday ? No, he cannot 
(lend me one) before Friday or 
Saturday. 



Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 
Vont-ils ? Ne vont-ils pas ? 

lis vont. lis ne vont pas. 



Au musee. Au quai. 

Vont-ils au musee ? 
Non, ils vont au quai. 
Les charpentiers vont-ils au bati-^ 
ment ? Ils y vont pour y travaiiler. 
Ils ne vont ni au quai, ni au musee. 

Vont-ils voir quelqu'un? 

Ils ne vont voir personne. 

Que vont-ils faire ? 

Ils ne vont rien faire. 

Oii vont-ils ? Ils ne vont nulle part. 

Veulent-ils envoyer le bon livre 

d Vhommel 
Ils vont le lui envoyer. 
Quand vont-ils le lui envoyer ? 

Ils vont le lui donner demain. 

Peuvent-ils vous prater le vieux 

dictionnaire ? 
Ils peuvent me le preter, jeudi. 
Votre ami ne peut-il pas vous en 
preter un avant jeudi ? Non, il ne 
peut pas m'en preter un avant 
vendredi ou samedi. 
For the order in which objective personal pronouns must be invariably 
connected in sentences, before the verb, ( $ 57), and with the partitive pro 
noun en ($ 59 and $ 60). 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 



97 



Are they going to give me some 

sugar? They will give you some. 
Can he lend some money to my 

brother ? Can he lend my brother 

any money? iDir. 4, § 51£.) 
He cannot lend him any. 
Will they lend us some ? 
They will not lend you any, but they 

can lend some to them. 
Are they going to give me the book ? 
They are not going to give it to you, 

but to lend it to you. 
Are you not going to send it to us ? 
I am not going to send it to you. 
Are you going to send it to them ? 
We are going to send it to them. 
Will you send the cabbages to the 

cook ? 
We will send them to him (to her). 
Who is going to give the jewels to us ? 
Our good friends are going to give 

them to us. 
Am I going to give them to them ? 
Can he not lend them to you ? 



Vont-ils me donner du sucre ? 
lis vont vous en donner. 
Peut-il preter de 1' argent a mon 
frere ? 

II ne peut pas lux en preter. 
Veulent-ils nous en preter ? 
lis ne veulent pas vous en preter, 

mais ils peuvent leur en preter. 
Vont-ils me donner le livre ? 
Ils ne vont pas vous le donner, mais 

vous le preter. 
N'allez-vous pas nous Z'envoyer ? 
Je ne vais pas vous Z'envoyer. 
Allez-vous le leur envoyer ? 
Nous allons le leur envoyer. 
Voulez-vous envoyer les choux au 

cuisinier ? 
Nous voulons les lui envoyer. 
Qui va nous donner les bijoux ? 
Nos bons amis vont nous les donner. 

Vais-je les leur donner ? 

Ne peut-il pas vous les preter ? 

Twentieth Exercise. 3d Sec. — Vingtieme Exercice. 3me Sec. 
Tuesday, June, 1849. Mardi, Juin, 1849. 

Who is going to recite to-day? We are going to recite. — Can you 
copy the vocabulary ? We cannot copy it ; we have not time to 
copy it; but we can translate it. — Will you try? With pleasure. — 
Is a le the French of: to the? No, Sir, au is the French of: to the. 
Very well, that is right. — Can you give me the French of: to the 

museum? We can give it: it is is it not? (Yes, or no, as 

the case mt;y be.) — And that of: to the baskets? — Have you that of: 
Are they going to see any one? Yes, we have. — W T hat is it? It 

is Is it right ? Yes ; or no — Who is going to the 

wharf? To which wharf? To Girard wharf (au quai Girard). Our 
merchant is going there to see his ship. — To see what? His ship. — 
Is his ship at the wharf? It is there. — Has he many sailors? He 
has more than ten. — More than what? More than ten. — How many 
has he ? He has twelve or thirteen. — Has he so many ? Yes, he has. 

Can you cut me some bread ? I can cut you some. — Have you a 
knife to cut me some? I have one. — Can you mend my gloves? 
I can mend them, but I have no wish to do it. Can the tailor make 
me a coat ? He can make you one. — Will you speak to the physi- 
cian ? I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to see me in order 
9 



9o TWENTIETH LESSON. 

to speak to me ? He wishes to see you in order to give you a dol- 
lar. — Does he wish to kill me ? He does not wish to kill you ; he 
only wishes to see you. — Does the son of our old farmer wish to 
kill an ox ? He wishes to kill two. 

Who has a mind to kill our cat? Our neighbor's bad boy has a 
mind to kill it. — How much money can you send me ? I can send 
you twenty francs. — Will you send me my carpet ? I will send it 
to you. — Will you send the shoemaker anything? (quelque chose au 
cordonnier ?) I will send him my shoes. — Will you send him your 
coats'? No ; I will send them to the tailor. — Can the tailor send me 
my cloak ? He cannot send it you. — Are your children able to write 
to me ? They are able to write to you. — Will you lend me your 
basket? I will lend it you. 

Have you a glass to drink your wine ? I have one, but I have no 
wine ; I have only tea. — Will you give me money to buy some ? I 
will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you give me that 
which you have with you? I will give it you. — Can you drink as 
much wine as milk ? I can drink as much of the one as of the 
other. — Has our neighbor any wood to make a fire? (dufeu?) He 
has some to make one, (pour en f aire,) but he has no money to buy 
bread and butter. — Are you willing to lend him some ? I am willing 
to lend him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ? I wish 
to speak to him. — Where is he? He is at. the museum. Very well, 
I am going to see him and speak to him. 

Recapitulatory Exercise. Resume. 

L'adolescent va-t-il venir aujourd'hui? V adolescent va venir 
pour nous apporter de Pacier et du fer. — Qu ; allons-nous acheter ? 
Nous n'allons rien acheter que du velours. — N'ai-je pas un bon ami 
allemand ? Vous n'avez pas d'ami allemand ; mais vous en avez 
un suisse. — Les marchands de nouveautes n ; ont-ils pas de chales, 
de rubans, de gants, de bas ; de velours, de drap ? Si fait, ils ont de 
tout cela; et c 7 est ce que nous allons acheter. — Chez qui allez-vous 
acheter tout cela? Quelque chose chez celui-ci; quelque autre 
chose, chez celui-la. — Qui va acheter des livres ? Ces deux ecoliers 
vont en acheter. — Le ministre et l'avocat ne vont-ils pas en acheter 
quelques uns aussi? Si fait; mais il ne vont pas en acheter beau- 
coup. — Chez qui vont-ils les acheter? Chez Appleton. — Le petit 
garcon de Pepicier ne va-t-il pas y acheter un joli canif de bon 
acier, un porte-crayon d'argent, un encrier de fer, du papier, et des 
crayons ? Si fait, il va y acheter tous ces articles. Non, non, pas 
tous oes articles. (Obs. 34.) II ne veut ni encrier, ni canif.—- 



TWENTIETH LESSON. 99 

A-t-il un canif et in encrier ? II a encore un encrier ; mais pas de 
canif. — Pourquoi ne veut-il pas en acheter un ? Parce qu'il a celui 
de son frere. 

Comment se porte-t-on chez le general ? Tout le monde s'y 
porte bien. Je suis bien aise de Papprendre. — Et chez le ministre ? 
Chez lui, plusieurs personnes sont malades. — Qu'a Jean ? Jean 
a mal de gorge. — Charles Fa-t-il aussi? Non ; celui-la a mal 
aux dents. — Qiront les deux petits? lis ont mal de tete. — Et 
Sophie ? Sophie n'a rien. J ; en suis bien aise. — Le ministre est-il 
malade ? Oui, comme a P ordinaire. II a un mauvais rhume. — 
Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je ne me suis pas bien porte. — 
Vous vous portez bien, a P ordinaire. n ; est-ce pas % Je me 
porte parfaitement a P ordinaire, mais pas ce matin. — II fait si 
chaud, n ; est-ce pas? Oui ; il fait Irop chaud. — Ou allez-vous? Je 
vais chez Papothicaire. chez le marchand de souliers. — Ou le 
cordonnier, n'est-ce pas ? Non pas le cordonnier, mais le marchand 
de souliers. — Est-ce tout J Non, je vais chez le marchand de charbon 
et au telegraphe electrique. Je vous souhaite beaucoup de plaisir. — 
J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. — Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Le 
Russe se porte-t-il mieux ? Oui, un peu mieux. J'espere que votre 
frere se porte bien ? Tres-bien, je vous remercie. Comment se 
porte-t-on chez lui ? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Personne ir'y 
est malade. 

Votre cuisinier a-t-il assez d'argent pour acheter du bceuf et du 
mouton? Oui, il en a assez pour acheter Pun et Pautre. — Ya-t-il 
porter autant de celui-ci que de celui-la ? II va porter plus de 
celui-la que de celui-ci. — Les matelots ont-ils des billets pour acheter 
duchocolat? lis n'ont pas de billets; mais, ils out de Por. C ; est 
assez bon, n-'est-ce pas % — En ont-ils assez pour acheter des poulets, 
du sel, du poivre, des biscuits, du beurre frais, du pain frais, du 

bceuf frais, du vin, du sucre, du the, du cafe est-ce tout? Non, 

ce n'est pas tout. — Des choux, du vieux fromage, du vinaigre, du 
grain, de la farine. — De la farine ? Quel est Panglais de cela ? 
N 7 avez-vous pas I'anglais de farine ? Non, nous ne l'avons pas. — 
Qui Pa? Personne ne Pa. — Votre domestique a un balai pour 
balayer le plancher du magasin, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il n ; en a pas. — 
Voulez-vous lui donner un quart de dollar pour en acheter un? Je 
vais lui en donner un. — Je iven ai pas. Je n'ai que des demi-dol- 
ars. N*avez-vou> pas un quart de dollar? Non, je n'en ai plus. 

Quel est P Anglais de : faire? C r e?t: to do. to iv.alcc. C'estbiea, 

c ? est cela. — De quelle conjugaison est-il ? II est de la conjii- 

gaison. — Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il (init en : . . . . Est-il regulier ? . . c . 
Pourquoi? Parce qa-il n : est pas conjugue comme le modele 



XOO TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 

(Le maitre peut faire les memes questions sur quelques autrea 
verbes, comme : Voir — porter — ecrire.)— Quel est votre dernier vo- 

cabulaire ? C 7 est le Quelle section ? La Y avez-vous 

des verbes? Oui ? nous en avons plusieurs. — Quels verbes avez- 
vous? Les avez-vous dans votre catalogue? Avez-vous des 

noms dans le vocabulaire ? Combien en avez-vous? Lesecoliers 
ont-ils des adjectifs dans le leur ? — En avez-vous dans le votre ? — 
L ? etranger en a-t-il dans le sien ? — Qu'avons-nous dans le notre ? — 
Prenez mon parapluie pour le preter a Robert. — Ou va-t-il ? II va 
sortir. — Oui. mais, ou va-t-il ? Ne va-t-il pas au musee ? A quel 
musee ? Sara, Jean, et Guillaume n'y vont-ils pas aussi ? Pouvez- 
vous sucrer mon the ? Ne veut-il pas sucrer son cafe ? — N'allez- 
vous pas mettre du sucre dans le chocolat ? Nous allons y en 
mettre. Qu 7 allez-vous mettre dans le vin? Je ne vais rien y 
mettre. — Pouvez-vous ecrire au commis ? .... a Fepicier ? . . . . aux 

etrangers?. . . .a nos amis?. . . . — Quelqu'un veut-il tuer Poiseau du 

petit enfant?. . . . . .Le cuisinier a-t-il tue les jeunes ou les vieux 

poulets ? 



TWENTY-FIRST LESSON, 21st— Fmgf et unieme Legon, 21me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

PRONOMS INTERROGATIFS. 

For things. Pour les choses. 
What ? Qu 1 est-ce qui ? 

What? Que? Qu'? Quoi? 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

For persons. Pour les personnes. 
Nominative. Who? Nominatif. Qui? 
Object direct. Whom? Regime direct, 

Qui? 
Objective, with a preposition. 

To whom ? A qui ? 

Of or from whom ? De qui ? 

With whom? {whom . . with?) Avec qui ? 

For whom ? {whom . .for ?) Pour qui ? 



Regime indirect, avec une prepo- 
sition. 

To what ? A quoi ? 

Of or from what ? De quoi ? 

With what ? (what . . with ?) Avec 
quoi ? 

For what ? (What . . for ?) Pour quoi ? 

Qui ? Who ? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without distinc- 
tion of sex ; as, who, in English. 

Que? and Quoi? What? have no plural, and always relate to things. 

Obs. 43. As direct object, use que before the verb in an interrogative 
form ; and quoi after the verb, in an affirmative form. After a preposition, 
use quoi, never que. [Mind that, all those pronouns are not relative, but 
interrogative.] 

What have they ? (^'ont-ils? I What will you say?} Que voulez- 

I What do you mean ? 5 \o\\s dircl 



TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



101 



He will say what ? 
He means what 1 



II veut dire, 



quoi { 



II va 



They have, what ? lis ont, quoi ? 

What, is he going to reply to ? A quoi 

va-t-il repondre ? 
To answer, to reply to. 

Obs. 44. Repondre, taking d before the noun, coincides with, to reply 
to, better than with to answer, which has no preposition after, and the 
scholar is invited mentally to connect repondre d with to reply to, even 
when to answer is used in the book. 



He is going to answer what \ 

repondre, d quoi ? 
Repondre, 4, (takes d before a noun.) 



To answer the man, [to reply to.) 
To answer the men, (to reply to.) 
Whom do you wish to answer ? (reply 

to?) 
I wish to answer (reply to) my brother. 
To answer (reply to) him, her. 
To answer (reply to) them. 

To answer (to reply to) the note. 
To answer (reply to) it. 
To it, to them, (usually for things.) 
To answer the notes. 
To answer them, (things.) 
To ask a question of some one, some- 
body. 
Will you ask me a question? 
I am going to ask you one. 
In French. In English. In German. 



Repondre a Phomme. 

Repondre aux hommes. 

A qui voulez-vous repondre ? 

Je veux repondre a mon frere. 

Lui repondre. (§ 47.) 

Leur repondre, (pour les personnes.) 

($ 47.) 
Repondre au billet. 

Y repondre. ($ 47.) 

Y, (generalement pour les choses.) 
Repondre aux billets. 

Y repondre, (pour les choses.) 
Faire une question (fern, noun) a 

quelqu'un. 

Voulez-vous me faire une question? 

Je vais vous en faire une. 

En Frangais. En Anglais. En Ai 
lemand. 

Pouvez-vous me repondre en Fran- 
gais ? Je crois que oui. 

A-t-il mon livre ? Je crois que oui. 



Can you answer me in French ? 

I believe so. I believe I can. 

Has he my book ? I believe he has it. ! 

Obs. 45. — Any affirmative answer after: I believe, may be expressed by: 
que oui. A negative answer, by : que non. (Dir. 6.) 

Can they speak German well? I Peuvent-ils bien parler PAllemand? 

I believe not. I believe they cannot. I Je crois que non. 

Twenty-first Exercise. 1st Sec. — Vingt et unieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 

Wednesday, June, 1849. Mercredi, Juin, 1849. 

What are we going to try to-day ? We are going to try to recite. — 
To recite what? To recite a vocabulary. — Which? This one. — Is 
it the 20th ? No. it is not the 20th, but the last. — It is the : what? 
The last, the 21st. — Very well. Will you begin ? With pleasure. — 
Will you ask us questions in French or in English? I am going to 
ask you some in English first, and in French afterwards. — We are 
ready to answer you. Are you ready, indeed? I believe we are, 
(que oui.) — Can I begin? I believe you can. — To how many notes 
can you reply (answer) this evening? I can reply to six or seven. — 
9* 



102 



TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



Can you answer so many? (a autant que cela?) I believe T can.— • 
Have you as many brothers as I ? We have just as many as 3^ou ; 
and more than they. — How many volumes of Irving : s works have 
they? They have eight. — Have they so many? Yes, indeed, and 
they are going to buy more. — How many more ? Two more, I 
believe. — Has Miss Clara as many shawls as Miss Emily (Emilie) ? 
No, Miss Clara has less of them than Miss Emily. — Have you my 
copybook? I? No, I believe not. — Has he got it? He? I believe 
not. — Who has it? I cannot tell you. — Have not those children got 
it? They? I believe not. — Are you not going to give a handsome 
fan to Miss Victoria? Yes, I am going to give her one. 

Will you write to the Italian? I will write to him. — Will your 
brother write to the English ? He will write to them, but they have 
no mind to answer him. — Will you answer your friend? I will 
answer him. — But whom will you answer? I will answer my good 
father. — Will you not answer your good friends? I will answer 
them. — Who will write to you ? The Russian wishes to write to 
me. — Will you answer him ? I will not answer him. — Who will 
write to our friends? The children of our neighbor will write to 
them. — Will they answer them ? They will answer them. To 
whom do you wish to write ? I wish to write to the Russian. — Will 
he answer you? He wishes to answer me, but he cannot. — Can the 
Spaniards answer us? They cannot answer us, but we can answer 
them. — To whom do you wish to send this note ? I will send it 
to the joiner. — From whom is this boy going to receive a hat? He 
is going to receive one from his friend, the lawyer. — For whom is 
this coat? It is for our father. — Whom are these gloves for? They 
are for our friend's clerk. With whom are your children going to the 
museum ? They are going there with the old professor. — Are they 
not also going to the wharf to see the merchant's beautiful vessel 1 
Yes, they are going there with the young teacher, the old captain, 
and the srood sailor. 



Vocabulary, 2d Section. 
The play, the theatre. The ball. 
To or at the play. To the theatres. 
To the ball. To the balls. 

The parlor, drawing-room. 
The storehouse, magazine, warehouse. 
This counting-house. 
The market. In, at, to the market. 
There, thither. To go there ; to be 

re. 
To send there. To carry it there. 



Vocabulaire, 2de Sec. 



Le theatre. 
Au theatre. 
Au bal. 
Le salon. 
Le magasin. 
Ce comptoir. 
Le marche. 



Le bal. 

Aux theatres. 

Aux bals. 

Le grand salon. 



Au marche. 



Y aller. 



Y etre. 



Y envoyer. 



L'y porter. 



TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



103 



Will they go to the theatre ? 

They wish to go there. 

Will you go there ? I will. (Dir. 1.) 

Are you going now ? I am. 

Is your cousin in the parlor ? 

He is ; or, he is there. He is not. 

My cousin. This cousin. 

Where is our cousin ? 

Do you know ? I know not {do not). 
Do you know the French of: to see? 
I do. I know it. I do know it. 
I know something. / know nothing. 
Do you know the French of: to have ? 
I do not know it. 

I will tell you (I am going to). (19 N. 1.) 
To have, to get. To have got. 
To have to. 



Veulent-ils aller au theatre ? 

lis veulent y aller. 

Voulez- vous y aller ? Je veux y aller. 

Y allez-vous a present? J'y vais. 

Votre cousin est-il dans le salon ? 

II y est. II n'y est pas. 

Mon cousin. Ce cousin. 

Oii est notre cousin? Ou notre 

cousin est-il? 
Savez-vous ? Je ne sais pas. 

Savez-vous le Francois de : to see ? 
Je le sais. 

Je sais quelque chose. Je ne sais Hen. 
Savez-vous le Fran§ais de : to havet 
Je ne le sais pas. 
Je vais vous le dire. 
Avoir. 
Avoir d. 



Obs. 46. — When avoir, to have, expresses obligation, use the preposition 
d, before the following infinitive, and repeat it with each verb. 



What have you to do ? 
I have to copy and translate that. 
I have nothing to recite, nor read. 
Have your cousins nothing to say ? 
Yes, they have something to say. 
What has John to answer (reply to) ? 

He has to answer our questions. 
Then. If, if he. If he can. 



Qu'auez-vous d faire ? 

J'ai a copier et a traduire cela. 

Je n'ai rien a reciter, ni a lire. 

Vos cousins n'ont-ils rien a dire ? 

Si fait. lis ont quelque chose a dire. 

A quoi Jean a-t-il a rdpondre ? Jean 
a a repondre a quoi ? 

II a a repondre a nos questions. 

Alors. Si, s'il. S'il peut. 
06s. 47. — The i, of si, is cut off, only when followed by il, or Us, but in 
no other case. If he has, they have ; s'il a; s'ils ont — s'il veut, &c. 
We are well. ] Nous nous portons bien. 

Twenty-first Exercise. 2d Sec. — Exerctce 21me. 2de Sec. 

Thursday, June 1849. Jeudi Juin, 1849. 

Good morning, ladies and gentlemen! I hope yon are well. 
Yes, Sir, we are well, thank you. — How is Miss Emily's cousin? 
Is he better ? I believe he is. — How is your brother's cold ? His 
cold is better, but he has the toothache. — I am sorry to hear it. — Do 
you know how the general is ? Yes, I know that he is well • but 
Captain Henry is sick. — I know it; but he is better; is he not? I 
cannot tell you. — What have we to do this evening? We have to 
recite ; as usual. — Who is going to begin? I and he. — Why not he 
and I ? Very well ; he and I, then. — I am going to ask ( faire) a 
question of the one and the other, (a Vun et a V autre.) — Will you 
answer me in French? I am going to try. — What have you got? 



104 TWENTY-FKRST LESSON. 

Nothing. — What have you to do? I have only to write. — What 
have you to write? I have to write a note — To whom? To the 
carpenter's cousin. — What have you to give him? We have to 
give him some fresh bread and butter. — Has your servant anything 
to drink ? I believe that he has to drink some tea. — Are we not 
going to drink some, too ? Yes, we are going to drink some. — At 
what o'clock? At eight. — At half past eight, you mean (vous vou- 
lez dire). — No, I mean at a quarter to nine. — Have we to send much 
rice to the cook of Mr. Girard ? s vessel ? Yes, we have to send him 
much. — Has he any? I believe that he has but little more. — Then, 
we have to send it to him to-day* have we not? Yes, indeed. — 
Who is going to take it to him ? Do you know ? Yes, I do. — Who ? 
The joiner's little boy. 

When will the lawyer go to the play? He is going only to-mor- 
row night. — When can his cousin go with him ? He cannot go to 
the play if he is going to a ball. — To which ball is he going ? To that 
of the physician. — Is he going to give a grand ball ? Yes, he is, to- 
morrow evening. — Where is your son ? I believe he is at the counting- 
room. — Where are they going to take me ? To the counting-room, 
in their warehouse. — Where are the cook and the grocer going ? If 
they are going anywhere, they are going to market. — Can I go with 
them? Yes, you may (Dir. 1), if you have nothing to do. — To 
which market are they going? To the large one. — Are the farmer 
and his cousin at market? No, they are in the shoe-store. — Can you 
come to my house to go to the wharf? I have no wish to go to your 
house first, and afterwards to the wharf: but I am ready to go to 
the wharf now. — Have you your hat, gloves, and umbrella? Um- 
brella? Is it bad weather? Yes, it is. Then, I will not go there, 
but to the museum, if you wish to go with me. — Are they going, 
too? Yes, they, also. — Very well; then we may go (y), if you are 
ready. — Is the picture of the Italian in the parlor ? Yes, it is there. 
— Is the servant g^ing to sweep the parlor? No, he cannot sweep 
it now. — Why can he not? Because I believe somebody is in the 
parlor. — Who is in it (y) ? Madam Vernet and her cousin Frede- 
rick. — Will you send them some biscuits, fresh butter, and some 
wine ? I cannot, because the servant is not at home. — If you will 
send them something, I can take it to them ; can I not? Very well 
you may, if you wish. — How many biscuits have you? I have 
only six or seven; is that enough? It is. 

Mi! Since. I Ah! Depuis. 

Since last Sunday. Depuis dimanche dernier. 

Not quite well. < Pas tout-a-fait bien. 

I am glad to see you, them, him. I Je suis bien aise de vous, les, le voir. 



TWENTY -SECOND LESSON 



105 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON, 22d. — Vingt-deuxieme Legon. 22me, 



Vocabulary. 1st Section. 

To, at, or in the corner .... corners. 

To. at, or in the hole .... holes. 

In the hole. In the holes. 

To, or at the bottom. 

In the bottom of the bag ... of this 
chest. 

At the corner of the fire ... of the 
garden. 

The office. The lawyer's office. 

This workshop. The joiner's work- 
shop. 

To, or at the end. The road. 

At the end of the road ... of the roads. 

That cousin of yours, of mine, of his, 
of theirs, &c. 

To send for. To go for, to fetch. 

To come for. To come for me. 

To send for me. To go for them. 

Whom are you going to send for ? 

I am going to send for nobody. 

At what o'clock are you coming for 

him ? (19 2 , N. 2.) 
Are you going for any one ? 
I ? No. But John is going for his 

cousin, who is in our office. 

Is not the cat in the workshop ? Yes, 

it is at the end. • 
These gentlemen are going to send 

for cakes and wine ; are they not ? 
Yes, they are going to send for some. 
Will your boy go for some fresh 

butter and vinegar for us ? 

He will not go for any for you. 

He is very kind (or good), indeed ! 
Are you not going to send for the 
doctor, for the clerk who is sick ? 

Yes, we are going to send for him. 

He will send for my brothers. 
No, he has a mind to go for them. 



Vocabulaire. ire Section. 

Au coin. Aux coins* 

Au trou. Aux trous, 

Dans le trou. Dans les trous. 
Au fond. 

Au fond du sac. Au fond de ce coffre. 

Au coin du feu. Au coin du jardin 



Le bureau. 
Cet atelier. 



Le bureau de l'avocat. 
L' atelier du menuisier. 



Au bout. Le chemin. 

Au bout du chemin . . . des chemins. 

Votre, mon, son, leur, &c, cousin-. 
($ 108.) 

Envoy er chercher. Alter chercher. 

Venir chercher. Venir me chercher, 

M'envoyer chercher. Les aller cher- 
cher. 

Qui allez-vous envoyer chercher ? 

Je nevais envoyer chercher personne. 

A quelle heure allez-vous venir le 
chercher ? 

Allez-vous chercher quelqu'un? 

Moi ? Non. Mais Jean va chercher 
son cousin, qui est dans notre bu- 
reau. 

Le chat n'est-il pas dans l'atelier? 

Si fait, il est au bout. 

Ces messieurs vont envoyer cherchei 
des gateaux et du vin, n'est-ce pas? 

Oui, ils vont en envoyer chercher. 

Votre garcon veut-il aller chercher 
du beurre frais et du vinaigre pour 
nous ? 

II ne veut pas en aller chercher pour 
vous. 

II est tres-bon, en verite ! 

N' allez-vous pas envoyer chercher le 
docteur pour le commis qui est 
malade ? 

Si fait. Nous alions T envoyer cher- 
cher. 

II veut envoyer chercher mes l'reres. 

Non, il aenvie de les aller chercher 



106 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



Will you send for more glasses, or 

have we enough ? 
I will send for more, because we 

have only three. 



Voulez-vous envoyer chercher plus 
de verres. on en avons-nous assez ? 

Je veux en envoyer chercher, parce 
que nous n'en avons que trois. 



Twenty-second Exercise. 1st Sec. — ViNGT-DEUxiEMEExEnciCE.lreSec. 
Friday, June 1849. Vendredi, June, 1849. 

All ! Mr. Robert, I am glad to see you. How have you been since 
last Monday? I have not been very well. — Ah i indeed! lam 
very sorry to hear it. — But you are well now, I hope? Not quite, 
but much better. Thank you. — How is it with you at home ? (Com- 
ment se porte-t-on chez vous ?) We are all well, at your service. — It 
is cold, is it not ? Yes, it is. — Where is Samuel going ? T am going 
to send him for something. — At what o'clock are you going to send 
him? At half past nine. — Is it not yet half past nine ? No, not 
quite. It is only a quarter past nine. Then he can wait a quarter of 
an hour. — What is he going for ? He is going to buy sugar, biscuits, 
and cheese, if we have no more. — Who is in the garden? The 
children of our friends are there. — Will you send for the physician % 
We will send for him. — Who will go for him at the joiner's work- 
shop? Little Thomas (Thomas) will go for him. — Can he do it? 
Yes, indeed. — Will you give me my broth? Will you drink some 
broth now ? I wish to drink a little. — Where is it? It is at the 
corner of the fire. I will give it to you (vais). 

Will you give little Thomas three sous to fetch some milk? Is 
that enough ? It is enough. — Where is he going to buy it ? He can 
buy it at the market. — Very well. I am going to give him three 
cents to get milk, and another to buy a cake. You are very good. 
But I have no money with me ; it is at the counting-house. — Will 
you go for it ? I am not afraid to go for it. — Will you buy my Web- 
ster's Dictionary? I cannot; I have no more money. — No more 
money (plus d') ! No, I have no more with me. — Where is your 
cat? At the bottom of the garret, in a hole. — In which hole is it? 
In its hole. — Where is that old man's dog? It is in a corner of the 
ship. Have the sailors any cats? Yes, they have. — Has not the 
servant to sweep the office and parlor? He has to sweep them. — 
Has their cook got a good fire ? He has an excellent fire, because 
he has to burn the coffee. — Has he not to make tea? He has to 
make it. — Where is our cat ? I believe it is in Miss Sophia's basket 
in the parlor. — Is not my Fleming's Dictionary in the parlor? Yes, 
it is there, and Surenne's also. 

Have you anything to do? I have something to do. — What have 
you to do? I have to mend my clothes, and go to the end of the 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



107 



road. — Why have you to go to the end of the road? I am going 
to the grocer's to buy some grain for our bird and chickens. — Is not 
the professor there with his scholars, the minister, the apothecary, 
the lawyer, and the physician ? Yes, I believe they are there. — 
Can you give me as much fresh butter as bread ? I can give you 
more of the latter than of the former. — Can that cousin of yours 
(votre) drink as much wine as coffee or tea I He cannot drink so 
much of the former as of the two latter. Have you to speak to any 
one ? I have to speak to several men, if I can see them at the end 
of the road. They are in the work-shop. Very well, 1 will go 
(19 2 , N. 1) there to say a few words to them. — Have you not to 
answer this young man's last note ? No, we have not to answer 
it. (y. Ob. 44.) 

Yesterday. Yesterday morning. 
Yesterday evening ; last evening, 

night. 
Come in, walk in, go in. For (because) 
Some (meaning, some of us, you, 

them). 



Hier. Hier matin. 

Hier soir ou hier au soir. 



Entrez. 
Quelques uns. 



Car. 



Vocabulary. 2d Section. 
Thou. Thou hast. Hast thou ? Thou 

hast not. 
Hast thou my pencil-case 1 
Thou art. Art thou ? Thou art not. 
Art thou not busy and in a hurry ? 
I am busy, but not hurried. 
Are the farmers tired ? 



VocABULAiRE. 2de Section. 
Tu. 1 Tu as. As-tu? Tun'apas. 

As-tu mon porte-crayon ? 
Tu-es. Es-tu? Tun'espas. 
N'es-tu pas occupe et presse ? 
Je suis occupe, mais non pas presse, 
Les fermiers sont-ils fatigues ? 



Obs. 48. Adjectives agree in number with the nouns or pronouns they 
qualify. If the noun or pronoun is in the plural, the adjective takes an s. 



They are not tired but busy. 

Thou wilt, thou wishest, (art willing.) 

Canst thou ? Art thou able ? Thou 

canst, &c. 
Art thou willing to make my fire ? 
I am, if I can. 
Art thou afraid ? cold or hungry ? 

I am not afraid, but I am cold and 
hungry. 



lis ne sont pas fatigues mais occupes* 
Tuveux. Veux-tu? Tu ne veux rien, 
Peux-tu ? Tu peux. Tu ne peux 

pas. 
Veux-tu faire mon feu ? 
Je veux le faire, si je peux. 
As-tu peur ? As-tu froid ? As-tu 

faim? 
Je n'ai pas peur ; mais j'ai froid et 

faim. 



1 In addressing one another the French use the second person plural, as in 
English. The second person singular, however, is employed: 1. In subr 
lime or serious style, and in poetry; 2. It is a mark of intimacy among 
friends, and is used by parents and children, brothers and sisters, husbands 
and wives, towards one another : in general it implies iarn liaiity founded 
on affection and fondness, or hatred and contempt. 



108 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



Art thou neither ashamed nor sleepy ? 

Art thou going ? Thou art not going. 

Dost thou go there ? Thou art go- 
ing. Thou art not going. 

Thou goest to the work-shop, dost 
thou not ? 

To be sure ; of course ; without doubt. 

Immediately. Soon, very soon. 

To sell something to somebody. . 

What are you going to sell the Swiss ? 

We are not going to sell him any- 
thing. 

To tell, (to say) something to some one. 

Wilt thou say a word to Thomas ? 

Yes, I will tell him one. 

To tell .... to ... (a before the noun ; 
de, before the infin.) 

Will you tell the boy to bring some 
coals ? 

I will tell him to do it. (19 2 , N. 1.) 

Thee, to thee. It to thee. Them to 
thee. 

Thy. . . . Thy thimble. Thy thim- 
bles. 

Thine. 

Some to thee, thee some. I can give 
thee some. 

In the morning, (meaning) any morn- 
ing. 

In the evening, (that is) any evening. 

Twenty-second Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingt-deuxieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 
Saturday, June, 1849. Samedi, Juin, 1849. 

Bonjour, Mr., entrez, prenez un siege et asseyez-vous. Avec 
plaisir, car je suis fatigue. — Vous n'etes pas malade, j'espere ? 
Non ; je ne suis que fatigue. — Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis 
hier matin'? Tres-bien, comme a P ordinaire. Et vous? Moi aussi. 
Quelqu'un est-il malade chez-vous? Non, personne n'est malade a 
la maison depuis dimanche dernier. — Votre cousin Favocat est-il 
tout-a-fait bien? Non, pas tout-a-fait bien; mais beaucoup mieux. 
Pen suis bien aise. 

Who is in the joiner's workshop ? The three boys are there.- 
What have they to do ? They have a great deal to do. — Can they 
do it? To be sure. — Have ney as much to do as the carpenter's or 
the baker's boys? They have just as much. — Hast thou enough to 
study? To be sure. — Hast thou too much? No, not too much, but 
enough. —Art thou going to copy thy exercise soon? I am going to 



N'as-tu ni honte ni sommeil ? 
Vas-tu ? Tu vas. Tu ne vas pas, 
Y vas-tu ? Tu y vas. Tu n'y vas 

pas. 
Tu vas a 1' atelier, n'est-ce pas ? 

Sans doute. 

Tout de suite. Bientot. 
Vendre quelque chose d quelqu'un. 
Qu'allez-vous vendre au Suisse ? 
Nous n'allons rien lui vendre. 

Dire (* 4) quelque chose d quelqu'un. 
Veux-tu dire un mot a Thomas ? 
Oui, je veux lui en dire un. 
Dire a, .... de ... (a, avant le nom ; 

de, avant l'infinitif.) 
Voulez-vous dire au gargon d'appor- 

ter du charbon ? 
Je vais lui dire de le faire. 
Te, t\ Te le. Te les. 

Ton, sing. Tes, plur. — Ton de. Te§ 

d<*s. 

Le tien. Les tiens. 

T'en. Je peux t'en donner. 

t Le matin. 

t Le soir. 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 109 

copy it immediately. — What will thy brother do first? He will first 
read, then translate, and afterwards write. — Canst thou translate 
well ? Yes, when I wish to do it. — To how many corners is John 
going? He goes only to thiee. — To how many lawyers hast thou to 
speak f I have to speak to four. — When hast thou to speak to them? 
This evening. — At what o'clock ? At a quarter to nine. — Not before ? 
1 believe not. — When canst thou go to the office of the big general ? 
I can go there only in the morning (to-morrow morning). — At what 
o'clock ? At half past seven. — When wilt thou go to the old French- 
man's? I am going to his house immediately. — Will thou not go 
first to the hatter's store, or work-shop, to choose a hat? Oh, yes, I 
have to go there first, and then to the Frenchman's. — Will thou go 
to the physician's to-morrow morning, or to-morrow evening? I will 
go in the morning, at a quarter past ten, if it is fine weather, or at a 
quarter of eight in the evening. 

Have you to write as many notes as the Englishman ? I have to 
write fewer of them than he. — Will you speak to the German? I 
will speak to him. — When will you speak to him? At present. — 
Where is he ? He is in his office, at the other end of the wood. — ■ 
Will you go to the market? I will go thither to (pour) buy some 
linen. — Do thy neighbors not wish to go to the museum and wharf? 
They cannot go there * they are fatigued, and too busy to go. (y.) — 
Hast thou the courage to go to the wood in the evening? I have 
the courage to go thither, but not in the evening. — Are your children 
able to answer my notes ? They are able to answer them. — What 
dost thou wish to say to the servant ? I wish to tell him to make 
the fire and to sweep the warehouse, our office, and the boy's gar- 
ret. — Wilt th.DU tell thy brother to sell me his horse? I will tell 
him to sell it to thee. — What do you wish to tell me? I wish to tell 
you a word. — Whom do you wish to see ? I wish to see the Scotch- 
man. — Has thou to tell him to send thee some milk? I have to tell 
him to send me some. — Will you tell your cousin to go to the gene- 
ral's in the morning, for he wishes to see him. With pleasure. — ■ 
Which book does my brother wish to sell them? He wishes to sell 
only thine and his own. — Thou hast the last exercise, hast thou not? 
Yes, I have it. — My young friend wishes to see me, does he not? 
I believe he does. — He has a mind to see thee, to tell thee something 
pretty. 

10 



110 



TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



TWENTY-THIRD LESSON, 23d.— Vingt-troisieme Legon, 23me. 

VlNGT-TROISIlilME VOCABULAIRE, lve Sec. 

To go out. To remain, to stay. | Sortir,* 2. Rester, 1. 

Obs. 49. Sortir, means to leave the place one is in, without any refe- 
rence to the place one goes to ; when the latter is mentioned, use : aller, 
and not sortir. As : 



Are you going out ? Yes, I wish to 
go out to my friend's. 

To remain, to stay at home. 

Here. There. 

Wilt thou stay here ? . . . stay there ? 

I wish to stay here. . . . there. 

Obs. 50. La, ici, require no antecedent ; y requires one. Y must be 

repeated. 

Wilt thou go to thy friends ? 

T am going there, but he is not. 

The pleasure, the favor. 

Will you be so kind as (good enough) 

to read that ? 
To do a favor. 
All, every. 

Every day. Every Sunday. 

Every morning . . . evening . . . month. 
All the velvet. All the scholars. 



Allez-vous sortir ? (going to go out.) 
(19 2 , N. 1.) Oui,je veux aZZer (not 
sortir) chez mon ami. 

Rester d la maison, (fem. noun, of 
which hereafter.) 

Ici, y. La, y. 

Veux-tu rester ici ? . . . rester la ? 

Je veux y rester. 



Veux-tu aller chez tes amis ? 
Vy vais, mais il n'y va pas. 
Le plaisir. (de avant un infinitif.) 
Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de 

lire cela ? 
Faire un plaisir. 
Sing. Tout. Plur. Tons. 
Tous les jours. Tous les dimanches. 
Tous les matins . . . soirs . . . mois. 
Tout le velours. Tous les ecoliers. 



Obs. 51. All of the velvet; all of the scholars; are frequently used in 
English, but the of must not be expressed in French. [Mind that.] 



A sore finger. A sore thumb. 

Is your little finger sore ? 

My little finger pains me. It is sore. 

Whose foot is sore ? John's is. 

Late. It is late. Is it late ? 

Is it not late ? It is not late. 

What o'clock is it? 

It is twelve o'clock, mid-day. 

Is it not a quarter past twelve? 

No ; it is but half past twelve. 

Is it not too late to go out ? 

No, it is but a quarter to six, or it 

wants only -i quarter i<> six. 
Is it hall past one ? 
Write the date of the month. 



t Mai au doigt. Mai au pouce. 

t Avez-vous mal au petit doigt? 
t J'ai mal au petit doigt. J'y ai mal. 
t Qui a mal au pied ? Jean y a mal. 
Tard. II est tard. Est-il tard ? 
N'est-il pas tard ? II n'est pas tard. 
Quelle heure est-il ? (quelle is fem. 

to agree with heure.) (19 2 , N. 2.) 
II est midi. (Never use douzeheures.) 
N'est-il pas midi et demi? 
Non, il n'est que midi et quart. 
N'est-il pas trop tard pour sortir ? 
Non, il n'est que six heures moins 

un quart. 
Est-il uuc heure et demie I (JN . 3, 19 2 .) 
Ecrivez le quantieme du mois. 



TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. HI 



Write it every day. 
The names of the months are after 
the numbers. 



Ecrivez-le tous les jours. (§ 54.) 
Les noms des mois sont apres les 
nombres. 



Twenty-third Exercise, 1st Sec. — Vingt-troisieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 
Ecrivez ici, en Frangais, le quantieme du mois. 

Ah ! Mr. Charles, I am glad to see you; come in. Take a seat. 
Take this one, and sit down. Thank you. I have one here. It is 
good enough. — How have you been since last month? Quite well ; 
and how are you all? We are pretty well now. — How is your cousin 
Samuel? He is not well. He has a bad cold, a sore throat, and the 
headache. I am sorry to hear that he is sick. — Who is in the parlor ? 
In the large parlor? No, in the little parlor. Your father, the 
minister, his young brother, yours, my cousin Louis, Madame Leblanc, 
her son, and two or three- other persons are there. — Is anybody in the 
large parlor? No,* nobody is there. — Is the clerk going to stay at 
home ? No, he is going out (going to go out) to look for steel 
knives. — Has the Turk's tailor an iron or steel thimble ? He has 
neither a thimble of iron nor of steel; he has none. Then I will 
lend him one. (19 2 , N. 1.) — One of silver? No, a steel one. — Which 
dictionary have you here ? Here, I have Surenne ; s Dictionary, French 
and English, and there, Webster's. — Art thou going to the theatre ? 
No, I am not. — Then thou art going to a ball, art thou not? No, I 
am not (going there). — Where then? To my friend's the doctor. 
Is that all? — Will you be so kind as to copy that note for me ? I 
have not time to copy it, but little Robert is going to copy it for you, 
in his cousin's office. 

Is it late? It is not late. — What o'clock is it? It is a quarter 
past twelve. — At what o'clock does the captain wish to go out? He 
wishes to go out at a quarter to eight. — What are you going to do ? 
I am going to read. — What have you to read? I have to read a 
good book. — Will you lend it to me ? I will lend it to you. — When 
will you lend it to me? I will lend it to you to-morrow, if you 
have time to come for it then, (venir le chercher.) — Have you a 
mind to go out? I have no mind to go out. — Are you willing to 
stay here, my dear (cher) friend? I cannot remain here. — Whither 
have you to go ? I have to go to the counting-house. — When will 
you go to the ball? To-night. — At what o'clock? At midnight. — 
Do you go to the Scotchman's in the evening or in the morning? 1 
go there (y) both in the evening and in the morning. — Where are 
you going to now ? I am going to the theatre. — Where is your son 
going to? He is going nowhere; he is going to stay al home to 
(pour) study his French and translate it ; for he has a sore foot. — 
Where is your brother ? He is in the parlor. — Is he not going to his 



112 



TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



counting-house ! No, he is not going there. — Is he going to stay 
here ? Yes ; he is. — Why ? Because he has a sore thumb and finger, 
and he cannot write. — Cannot his clerk write for him ? Yes, he can ; 
and brother is going to send for him to do it. — Wilt thou come for 
John at seven f With pleasure. 



Since I had the pleasure of seeing 

you, of seeing them, him. 
I have been perfectly well. 
Oh ! Will you come in and sit down ? 

I can neither go in nor sit down. 

Many thanks. 

The heat. Too warm, too hot. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. i 
Need. To have need of ... . 

To have need of it. To want it. 
To be in want of it. To have use 

for it. 
I have need of that. I want that. I 
I am in want of it. I have need of it. | 
Have you need of this knife ? 
Do you want this knife ? (in want of) 
I do not want it, (have no need for it.) 
Are we in want of these scissors ? 
I believe that you have need of them. 
Do you want them any more ? 
I do not want them any more. 
Has he need of money ? 
He has great need of it. 
He is much in want of it. 
Has the merchant need of any ? 
He does not want any. 
Who wants or has need of any ? 
Nobody wants any. 
They have need of it, of them, of 

some. 
Do John and Charles need the horses ? 
Have J. and C. need of the horses ? 
They do not want them. 
Of what ? Of what have you need ? 
I have need of all that. 
I want nothing. 
What is he in want of? 
What does he want ? 
What has he need of? 
(lie wants) nothing, that, everything. 
To be acquainted with. To know. 



Depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de 
vous voir, de les voir, de le voir. 

Je me suis parfaitement porte. 

Oh ! Voulez-vous entrer et vous 
asseoir ? 

Je ne peux ni entrer ni m'asseoir. 

Je vous rends graces. 

Le chaud. Trop chaud. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
Besoin. Avoir hesoin de . . . . 

En avoir besoin. ($ 50.) 

J'ai besoin de cela. 
J'en ai besoin. 

Avez-vous besoin de ce couteau? 

Je n'en ai pas besoin. 
Avons-nous besoin de ces ciseaux ? 
Je crois que vous en avez besoin. 
En avez-vous encore besoin ? 
Je n'en ai plus besoin. 
A-t-il besoin d'argent? 

I II en a grand besoin. 

Le marchand en a-t-il besoin ? 
II n'en a pas besoin. 
Qui en a besoin ? 
Personne n'en a besoin. 
Us en ont besoin. 

Jean et Charles ont-ils besoin des 
chevaux ? 
lis n'en ont pas besoin. 
Dequoi? De quoi avez-vous besoin ? 
J'ai besoin de tout cela. 
Je n'ai besoin de rien. 

De quoi a-t-il besoin ? (§ 95.) 

De rien. De cela. De tout. 
Connaitre,* 4. 



TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 113 

To be acquainted with Uo know) a Connaitre un homme ; quelqu'un; 

man; somebody; a good teacher. un bon maitre. 

To be acquainted with nobody. Ne connaitre personne. 

Of me, of thee, of him, of it. De moi, de toi, de lui, {en, § 47* 
Of us, of you, of them. De nous, de vous, d'eux, [en.) 

Is your father in want of me? \ Votre pere a-t-il besoin de moi ? 



He is in want of you. 

Are you in want of these books ? 

I am in want of them. 

Is he in want of my brothers ? 



II a besoin de vous. 

Avez-vous besoin de ces livres ? 

V en ai besoin. 

A-Vil besoin de mes freres ? 



He is in want of them. \ II abesoin d'eux. (pour les personnes.) 

II en a besoin. (pers. et cnoses.) 



Does he want that ? He does (want it.) 
Whom do I want ? (have I need of?) 
You want the lawyer's clerk. 

What else or what more? 



A-t-il besoin de cela ? 11 en a besoin. 

De qui ai-je besoin ? 

Vous avez besoin du commis de 

l'avocat. 
Quoi encore ? De quoi encore? 



Twenty-third Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingt-troisieme Exerctce, 2de Sec. 
Ecrivez, en Francais, le quantieme du mois. 

I am much pleased at seeing you, Miss Clara. Sit down ; take 
this seat. How do you do, this morning ? I am pretty well ; better 
than last Tuesday. — I am glad of it. How is your father? I do 
not know. Father is not here, but he is coming in two or three 
days. But you, Sir; how have you been since I had the pleasure 
of seeing you? I have been perfectly well, I thank you. — Is it 
cold or warm, out of doors'? It is warm, quite warm. — Indeed ! I 
am sorry for it. — I bid you good morning, Sir. Miss, I present my 
respects to you. Adieu ! 

Is the professor going to make us recite (nous faire reciter) im- 
mediately ? No, not before a quarter of an hour or half an hour. — 
Then, I may still study my vocabulary ; can I not ? To be sure you 
can. — But do you not know it yet? Yes, I know it pretty well: but 
not too well, (trop bien. Obs. 35.) — May I go in the parlor, to study 
there ? Can you not study here ? I can write, read, copy, and 
translate here; but I can study better in a corner of the parlor. — If 
you will stay here, I can ask you (vous faire) a few questions, and 
then you can ask me some. — Very well, I am going to stay. Will 
you begin or may I (puis-je ?) ask you the first questions? You 
may begin, if you are ready; for, I am ready to answer you. — I am 
not quite ready. I wish first to correct a word there. Now I am 
ready. You know the date of the month; do you not? I believe 
I do. And you; do you know it? To be sure. — And he; can he 
Bay it? I believe not. — Who cannot tell the date of the month? 
10* 



114 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 

Robert cannot. — I ? Yes ; I can. Is it not the 8th of May ? Yes, 
it is (or that's it). 

Are you going out? (N. 1, 19 2 .) To be sure ; have I not my hat, 
cloak, and gloves? Yes, you have. — Have you to purchase (buy) 
anything ? Yes, I have to purchase many things. What ? A large 
shawl, for Sarah- a pretty little stick, for Henry; some gloves, 
handkerchiefs, and velvet, for Charlotte. — Is that all? All! No, 
indeed ! — What else (or more) ? What more ? A great many things. 
— Have you not to buy something for our little cousin, John ? Yes, 
I have several things to get for him. First, a wooden gun and other 
toys; and afterwards some little books. — Is that all for him? To be 
sure; it is enough; is it not? Yes, indeed. — Have you a catalogue 
of those things ? No, I have none ; but, will you do me the favor 
of making one for me ? Yes, with pleasure. — Where is the paper, 
where is the pencil? The paper is here, and the pencil there. — 
Have you money enough to buy all that ? I believe so. — What can 
you lend me? A knife, if you have need of one. — A what? A 
knife. — Thank you, I have no need of a knife. — What have you 
need of? I have need of a good gun. — An iron or a steel one? A 
steel one. — Why do you want it? I want it to kill a cat, a dog, and 
some birds. — Are you in want of this picture? Which? Our good 
painter's last picture. I? No; but he wants it. — Who wants it'! 
This young man does. — How much will he give for it? I do not 
know how much. — Does your brother want money? He doe& not 
want any. — Who wants sugar? Nobody wants any. — Oh! yes: I 
want some, to sweeten my tea. — Has anybody need of pepper ^ 
Nobody has. — Has the grocer but one eye ? No, he has two ; but 
he has but one thumb. 

Always. ($ 170.) A moment, a little while. Toujours. Un moment, 
un petit moment. 



TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON, 24th.— Vingt-quatrieme Legon, 24me. 

Vocabulary. 1st Section. Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

INDICATIVE MOOD.— Indicatif. 

THE PRESENT TENSE.— Temps Present ou Present. 

For its formation see (§ 144.) That article must be carefully studied. 

Ohs. 52. The three present tenses: 1 love, I do love, I am loving, will for 

the present be expressed in French by: faime. (Mind that: am loving, are 

reading, &c, are never translated literally.) 

To love, to like, to be fond of. 1 Aimer, 1. (a, avant un infinitif.) 

T love. I do not love. I J'aime. Je n'aime pas, 



TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



115 



Does he like ? He does. (Dir. 1.) 

Does he not love ? He does not. 
Are you fond of? We are fond of). 
Dost thou love ? Thou lovest tea. 
Who loves to read ? They like to 

read. 
Do you like him ? . . . them ? 

I do (like him, them). 

I do not (like him, them). 

Not at all. I do not like him or it 

at all. 
Does he sell his horse ? He does. 
Do you sell anything ? I do not. 

Do those farmers sell cabbages ? 

They do. They do not. 

Do you finish your task ? 

\ do. I do not (finish it). 

What do the pupils finish ? 

This one finishes his exercise, those 
finish their tasks. 

Whom are you waiting for ? I ex- 
pect the boy whom he expects. 

Do you receive any notes to-night? 

Yes ; as many as they receive. 



Aime-t-il ? II aime 

N'aime-t-il pas ? II n'aime pas. 
Aimez-vous ? 
Aimes-tu ? 
Qui aime a lire ? 



Nous aimons. 
Tu aimes le the. 
lis aiment a lire. 



L' aimez-vous ? 

(* 51.) 
Je l'aime. 



Les aimez-vous? 

Je les aime. 
Je ne l'aime pas. Je ne les aime pas. 
Pas du tout. Je ne l'aime pas du 

tout. 
Vend-il son cheval ? II le vend. 
Vendez-vous quelque chose ? Je ne 

vends rien. 
Ces fermiers-la vendent-ils des 

choux ? 
lis en vendent. lis n' en vendent pas. 
Finissez-vous votre devoir 1 ? 
Je le finis. Je ne le finis pas. 

Que finissent les ecoliers ? 
Celui-ci finit son exercice, ceux-la 

finissent leurs devoirs. 
Qui attendez-vous ? J'attends le 

garcon qu'il attend. 
Recevez-vous des billets ce soir ? 
J'enrecois autant qu'ils enregoivent. 



Twenty-fourth Exercise. 1st Sec. — Vingt-quatrieme Ex. Ire Sec. 
Mettez (put) ici le quantieme du mois en Francais. 

Are you going to see Mr. Charles, to-day ? I am. — How is he 
now ? He is better, but not at all well. — How is his old cousin ? He 
is quite well. — How have you been since I had the pleasure of seeing 
you at your friend's? I have always been well, as usual. — How 
are you all at home 1 Every one is well. — Is any one sick at your 
house ? No, nobody is sick. — Is not your little boy sick % Oh ! yes; 
he is a little sick ; but not much. — Are you not coming in ? Yes, I 
am coming in (N. 1, 19 2 ), to sit down a moment. — Come in, come 
in. Take this seat. — No, thank you; I will (vais) sit here. (N. 19 1 .) 

Do you always speak French? No, we do not always speak it. 
— Why do you not always speak it? Because I do not speak it 
very well, Jules does not speak much better, and the children do 
not speak it at all. — How many exercises do the scholars copy every 
day ? They copy two ; one in the morning, the other in the eve- 
ning. At what o'clock do they copy the morning one ? They copy 
it at i past 9. — And the evening one ; do they also copy it at i past 9 ? 



116 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 

They copy it at J- past 7. — When do you correct them? I correct 
them at two or J of two. 

Do you not dine (diner) at one ? No, we dine later. — Who 
dines at one? All our neighbors do. — Why do you not dine at one 
also ? Because we like to dine later. — Do your children dine, or 
eat dinner, when you do? No, they dine before us. — Do they like 
to eat dinner before you? Yes, they do like to do it, because they 
are always hungry. — Do they like to drink tea or coffee ? They 
like to drink neither tea nor coffee, but milk. — Do you love 
your brother? I do love him. — Does your brother love you? 
He does not love me. — Dost thou love me, my good child? 
I do love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man? I do not love him. 
— Whom do you love? I love my children. — Whom do we love? 
We love our friends. — Do we like any one ? We like no one. — 
Does anybody like us? The Americans like us. — Do you want 
anything? I want nothing. — Whom is your father in want of? He 
is in want of his servant. — What do you want? I want the note. — 
Do you want this or that note? I want this one. — What do you 
wish to do with it? (en?) I wish to open it, in order to read it. — 
Does he receive as many notes as I ? He receives more of them 
than you. — What do you give me ? I do not give thee anything. — 
Do you give this book to my brother? I do give it him. — Do 
you give him a bird ? I do give him one. — To whom do you lend 
your books ? I lend them to those scholars. — Does your friend lend 
me a dollar? He lends you one. — To whom do you lend your 
clothes? (habits?) I do not lend them to anybody. 

Vocabulary. 2d Section. Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED —Le Present Continue. 
Are you fond of, do you like be gf ? | Aimez-vous le boeuf ? 

Obs. 53. As the noun beef is here used in its general sense, the French 
use, not the partitive, but the definite article, le, les, (the.) (§ 15.) 



Does he like the Prussians ? 

To eat. To arrange, to set in order. 

Do you like to eat beef? 



Aime-t-il les Prussiens ? 

Manger, 1. Arranger, ranger, 1. 

Aimez-vous a manger du bceuf ? 



Obs. 54. As the noun beef is here used to express a portion of beef, not 
all the beef, the French use the partitive, du, des, (some or any.) 



Does he like to eat cakes ? ($ 20.) 
They like to eat some. 
To eat, eating, we eat. 

To change, changing, we change. 

($ 144, R. 2.) 
To neglect, neglecting, we neglect. 



Aime-t-il a manger des gateaux? 
lis aiment a en manger. 
Manger, mangeant, nous mangeons. 
Changer, changeant, nous chan- 

geons. 
Negliger, negligsant, nous ndgli- 

geons 



TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



117 



Do you neglect your French ? 
We do not neglect it at all. 
Does he send you the bank-7iote? 
He does. (§ 144 — 3.) He does not. 
I send, thou sendest, he sends, they 

send, who sends ? What does he 

send ? 
I sweep, thou sweepest, he sweeps, 

they sweep, who sweeps ? does he 

not sweep ? 
Who sweeps the parlor carpet ? 
I do not know who sweeps it. 
Open, to open one, opening. 
I open, thou openest, he opens. 
Does he open his chest ? He does. 
Does he open his eyes ? He does. 



Neglige z-vous votre Frangais ? 
Nous ne le negligeons pas du tout. 
Vous envoie-t-il le billet cle banquet 
II me l'envoie. II ne me l'envoie pas. 
J'envoie, tu envoies, il envoie, ils 

envoient, qui envoie ? Qu'envoie-t- 

il? 
Je balaie, tu balaies, il balaie, ils 

balaient, qui balaie ? Ne balaie-t-il 

pas ? 
Qui balaie le tapis du salon ? 
Je ne sais pas qui le balaie. 
Ouvrir,* 2, en ouvrir un, ouvrant. 
J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre. 
Ouvre-t-il son coffre ? II l'ouvre. 
tOuvre-t-il les yeux ? II les ouvre. 



Obs. 55. Use the definite article, le, les, (the,) instead of the possessive, 
when the sense clearly indicates the possessor. Ses may be used, but les 
is preferable. 



To suffer. I cannot bear it, (them.) 

To put away, to put by, lay up, (put 
any article in its proper place.) 

Will you put away your hat, clothes, 
money, shoes, books, pencils, &c. 
(Dir. 2.) 

To shut, to shut up the store. 

Is the servant shutting up the office ? 

He does not now, but he is going to 
shut it in a moment (presently.) 

This soldier. Some cider. 

Has the captain more than thirty sol- 
diers ? He has less than twenty. 

Often, pretty often, (enough.) 

What does the American like ? 

He is very fond of coffee and tea. 

To dine, to eat dinner, to eat supper. 
The dinner, at dinner. The supper, 

at supper. 
Do they often change their servants ? 
We often change them. 
To change something. 



Soufirir. 

souffrir. 
Serrer, 1. 



Je ne peux pas le (les) 



Voulez-vous serrer votre chapeau, 
vos habits, votre argent, vos sou- 
liers, vos livres, vos crayons, &c. 

Fermer, 1. Fermer le magasin. 

Le domestique ferme-t-il le bureau ? 

II ne le ferme pas a present ; mais il 
va le fermer dans un moment. 

Ce soldat-ci. Du cidre. 

Le capitaine a-t-il plus de trente sol- 
dats ? II en a moins de vingt. (16 2 .) 

Souvent, assez souvent. 

Qu'aime FAmericain ? 

II aime beaucoup le cafe et le the. 
{Obs. 53.) 

Diner. Souper. 

Le diner, a diner. Le souper, a 

souper. 

Changent-ils souvent de domes 

tiques ? Nous en changeons souvent. 

Changer de quelque chose, (de.) 



Twenty-fourth Exercise. 2d Sec. — Vingt-quatrieme Ex. 2de Sec. 
Mettez ici le quantieme en Fran§ais. 
Ah! Mr. Arago. I am glad to see you. You are well. I hope. 
Tolerably well, thank you. I am glad to hear it. — Do you know where 



118 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 

Mr. Lamartine is? Yes, he is at home. Thank you, Sir. I have to 
write to him. — Well ! come in my house and sit down a little. Many 
thanks. I am not tired. I am ; as usual, in a hurry (presse), for I 

want to see Mr. Rush who is going to Liverpool at J past 10. 

Adieu, then; for you have not much time. Adieu. — It is warm, 
very warm, is it not ? No ; it is not too warm for me. — Not too warm 
for you! Then you like the heat (le chaud) ) indeed! I do. — Do 
you not like the heat? Not quite so much as you, I believe. 

Do you recite this evening at 6 or at 7 o'clock ? We recite only 
at 7, I believe. — Do you know what vocabulary we recite ! You 
recite the last one. — Which is the last one ? The ... is it not ? — 
I believe not. — Which, then? This one. — I know these two. And 
I also. — Then, I am ready to recite. And you? I also. — What are 
you looking for (or, do you seek). Miss Charlotte ? Is it your shawl 
or cloak that you seek (are looking for) ? No, Sir, I am looking foi 
my copy-book of French, to translate my exercise in it. 

What do you eat at breakfast ? We eat a little beef or mutton, 
bread and butter, &c. — Do you like beef at breakfast ? Yes, a little : 
but I like it very well (beaucoup) at dinner. — Do you like to eat it 
also at supper? I do not like it so much (tant). As for me (raoz), 
I do not like it at all. I cannot bear it. — You cannot bear it ? indeed ! 
No, indeed, I cannot. — Do you eat much cheese? We do not eat 
much; we do not like it; we cannot bear it. — Do you often change 
servants (de domestiques) ? Yes, we often change them. We change 
them every month. — Does not Julius neglect his task often ? Yes, 
he does; but we do not neglect ours. — What do you neglect? I 
believe that we do not neglect anything. (Obs. 4.) You are good 
scholars, then, if you neglect nothing. Thank you. — What are you 
going to fix or arrange ? When ? To-day. To-day ? We do not fix 
anything, but these boys set their books in order (fix). — Does your 
father send you anything? He sends me all I wish. — Does he send 
you shoes, stockings, and gloves ? No, but he sends me money to 
buy some. — How much ioes he send you ? He sends me more than 
ten dollars every month. — Is that all? Yes, and that is enough. — 
Will you be kind enough to tell Isaac to open the parlor? He is 
opening it now (l'ouvre). — Very well. Then you need not tell him 
to open it; but you may tell him to sweep it. I will. (Je vais le 
faire.) (19*, N. 1.) 

Do you cut anything? We cut some wood. — What do those mer- 
chants cut? They do not cut anything: but their clerk cuts some 
coarse cloth. — Does he not cut the fine cloth too ? No, he is afraid to 
cut it. — You mean, he is afraid to tear it, do you not? Yes, I mean, 



TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



119 



to tear it. — Does he not tear the cotton ? Yes, he tears it, and the 
coarse cloth too ; but he tears neither the velvet nor the satin. — 
When do you receive your notes? I receive them every morning 
when you receive yours. — Does our neighbor, the lawyer, receive 
his journals when we receive ours ? I do not know when he receives 
his. — What does your servant carry? He carries several things in a 
large trunk. — Does he open it? He does not. — Where is he carry- 
ing it? He is carrying it home. (Obs. 52.) — Are you waiting for 
anybody ? Yes, I am only waiting for the little Irishman . — Do you 
wait for him often? Yes, I do. — Every morning or every evening? 
Morning and evening. — Are you killing two birds? I am killing 
only one. — How many chickens does that old cook kill ? He does 
not kill any. — Who kills them, then ? The farmers kill them. — Do 
(the) farmers work as much as (the) sailors? They do. — Who works 
more ? You or your son ? We work as much the one as the other. 



Very ill. Worse. Much worse. 
Does the doctor hope yet ? Go (imper. 
To rest yourself, myself. Good-by. 

Vocabulary. 3d Section. 



Tres-mal. Plus mal. Beaucoup p. m, 
Le docteur espere-t-il encore ? Allez. 
Vousreposer,merepo. Jevoussalue 

Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 



PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED ($ 144.)— Le Prhent Continue. 
Exceptions to the general rule given in $( 144). 



This desk. The teacher's desk. 

What are your brothers doing ? 

They are doing nothing. 

Are you not doing an exercise ? 

No, we do not do one. 

What are you doing in the office ? 

We do the task we have to do. 

Do you say anything to me ? 
We tell you that they wish to eat. 

Do you say nothing ? 

No, nothing. 

That may be. 

At the corner of Walnut and 13th. 

That cannot be. 

Twenty-fourth Exercise. 3d Sec. 

Mettez ici le quantieme du mois, en Francais. 
Mr. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Pouvez-vous me dire 
comment se porte votre cousin Armand? II est tres-mal. En 
verite ! Pen suis bien fache. Est-il plus mal que hier ? Oui, il 
est beaucoup plus mal. Le docteur espere-t-il encore? Oui, il 
espere encore, parce que Armand est jeune ; mais il est tres mal. — 



Ce pupitre. Le pupitre du maitre 

Vos freres que font-ils ? 

lis ne font rien. 

Ne faites-vous pas un exercice ? 

Non, nous n'en faisons'pas. 

Que faites-vous dans le bureau ? 

Nous y faisons le devoir que nou- 

avons a faire. 
Me dites-vous quelque chose ? 
Nous vous disons qu'ils veulent 

manger. 
Ne dites-vous rien? 
Non, rien. ($ 151. A. 8.) 
Cela peut etre. 

Au coin de Walnut et de la 13me. 
Cela ne peut pas etre. 

-VlNGT-QUATRIEME Ex. 3jME See 



120 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 

Prenez un siege. Asseyez-vous. Non, je ne peux pas m'asseoir a 
present. Ne pouvez-vous pas vous asseoir un petit moment, pour 
vous reposer? Non, je ne le peux pas- car fai a aller chez Papo- 
thicaire pour acheter quelque chose. Est-ce pour Armand? Oui, 
c'est pour lui. Alors, allez ; allez. Adieu ! Je vous salue. 

Miss Emilie, what are you waiting for ? I am waiting for the 
scholars. — Are they coming, or do they come ? (Obs. 52.) I be- 
lieve they are coming. — What are they doing? Who? The shoe- 
makers. They are making shoes (§ 4). — Are the carpenters making 
a ship ? No, they are not making one. — What do they do ? They 
do something, but we do not know what. — Do you know where are 
my dictionaries ? Which? The French ones. We know where 
they are. — Will you tell us where they are? No, we will not tell 
you. You may look for them. — You are very good, indeed ! Do 
the teachers owe anything to the butter-man ? They do not owe 
him anything. — Do they not owe something to the tailors ? They 
owe them something. — How much? Not much. Not more than 
two or three dollars. — Do they owe more to the joiner? No, they 
do not owe him so much; for, they owe him nothing. — Nothing at 
all? No, nothing at all. 1 believe they owe him nothing at all. — 
I know they owe him something for their last desk. — That may be, 
(cela peut etre.) 

Do the Messrs. Cowell & Son keep a dry goods store ? Yes, they 
keep one. — Where do they keep it? They keep it at the corner of 
Chestnut and Seventh (de Chestnut et de la 7me). — What do they 
keep? They keep gloves, ribbons, satin, velvet, fine cloth, and 
many other things. — Do they receive their satin, velvet, gloves, and 
ribbons from France (France) ? No, I believe they do not receive 
them from France ) they buy them (achetent) from our merchants. 
— What do they receive from France ? They do not receive any- 
thing. — Do the French take much tea ? No, they do not take much. 
— They take more coffee than tea ; do they not? Yes, they take a 
little more. — Do they not take a great deal more of it? No. they 
do not take a great deal more ; but they take more wine than either 
tea or coffee, (que de the ou de cafe.) — What do the Italians and 
Spanish drink? They drink chocolate. — Do they not drink wine 
also ? Yes, they do. — Do you know that the general's old brother 
is very sick ? Yes, we know it; and we know also that he is better 
this morning. — We are glad to hear it. — Do you say anything to 
me? We do not say anything to you. — Do you tell them anything? 
We do not say anything to them. — Do you say anything pretty to 
your good neighbor? We tell him something pretty. — What do 
you tell him pretty ? We are not going to tell you of it, or it to you. 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



121 



You have been well. I believe it. 
At the hour. Before the hour. 
Punctual. On the way, the road, 

coming. 
I think. Dust. 

It is very dusty. 



Vous vous etes bien porte*. Je le crois. 
A l'heure. Avant l'heure. 

PonctueL En chemin. 

Je pense. De la poussiere, (femi.) 
II fait beaucoup de poussiere. 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 25th.— Vingt-cinquieme Legon, 25me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED.— Le Present Continue. 

As the rule given in ($ 144), on the formation of the plural of the present 

tense, is applicable to irregular as well as regular verbs, it remains now only 

to point out the present tense singular of a few irregular verbs, to enable 

the learner to use them in his exercises. They are the following : 



To do, to make. Doing. 
I do, thou dost, he does. 

To drink, drinking. 
I drink, thou drinkest, he drinks. 

To come, coming. 
I come, thou comest, he comes. 

To write, writing. 
I write, thou writest, he writes. 

To see, seeing. 
I see, thou seest, he sees. 

To say, tell, saying. 
I say, thou sayest, he says. 

To go out, going out. 
I go out, thou goest out, he goes out. 

To read, reading. 
I read, thou readest, he reads. 

To know, (to be acquainted 
with,) knowing. 

I know, thou knowest, he knows. 

To put on, putting on. 
I put on, thou puttest, he puts. 

To sleep, sleeping. 
I sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. 

To serve, serving. 
I serve, thou servest, he serves. 

To take, taking. 
I take, thou takest, he takes. 

To translate, translating. 
I translate, thou translatest, he trans- 
lates. 
11 



Faire,* faisant. 

Je fais, tu fais, il fait. 

Boire,* buvant. 

Je bois, tu bois, il boit. 

Venir,* venant. 

Je viens, tu viens, il vient. 

Ecrire,* ecrivant. 

J'ecris, tu ecris, il ecrit. 

Voir,* voyant. 

Je vois, tu vois, il voit. 

Dire,* disant. 

Je dis, tu dis, il dit. 

Sortir,* sortant. 

Je sors, tu sors, il sort. 

Lire,* lisant. 

Je lis, tu lis, il lit. 

Connaitre,* connaissant. 



(Je 



connais, tu connais, il connait. 

sais, tu sais, il sait. 
Mettre,* 4, mettant. 
Je mets, tu mets, il met. 
Dormir,*2, dormant. 
Je dors, tu dors, il dort. 
Servir,* 2, servant. 
Je sers, tu sers, il sert. 
Prendre,* 4, prenant. 
Je prends, tu prends, il prend. 
Traduire,* 4, traduisant. 
Je traduis, tu traduis, il traduite 



122 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 

Vingt-cinquieme Exercice. Ire Sec. 
Mettez (put) le quantieme, en Fransais, ici. 

Bonsoir, Mr. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. J'espere que vous 
vous etes bien porte depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de vous voir. 
Tres-bien, merci. Suis-je le premier ici, ce soir ? Vous etes pre- 
mier. Vous Petes assez souvent, mais pas toujours. — Je suis souvent 
trop occupe pour venir toujours a Pheure. Je le crois, car vous etes 
bien ponctuel. Oii sont les autres ecoliers? En chemin, je pense, 
car ils sont ponctuels aussi. Mais pas tant que vous. — Voulez-vous 
prendre un siege? Non, je vous remercie, pas encore. Je veux 
d'abord chercher un mot dans le dictionnaire. — Quel mot voulez- 
vous savoir? Je veux savoir le Francais de : dust. — Que voulez- 
vous dire en Francais? Je veux dire : it is dusty. Le Francais de 
it is dusty, est: il fait de la poussiere. A present, je peux vous dire: 
II fait beaucoup de poussiere. Oui ; je le sais, et la poussiere n 7 est 
pas agreable. Prenez un siege a present. Merci, je vais en pren- 
dre un. 

Dost thou see anything? I do not (see anything). — Does your 
father see our ships ? He cannot see them at all from there j but we 
see them very well from here. — How many soldiers do you see? 
We see a good many; we see more than thirty of them. — The cap- 
tain expects more soldiers, does he not ? I do not know if he expects 
any others. — Do you know the captain? No, I believe I do not 
know him ; but I know the general. — Do you also know the general's 
cousin? Who? that tall and handsome young man who comes 
often to the museum to see the pictures? Yes, that one. I do not 
know him, but I see him very often. — What do these sailors and 
soldiers drink? They drink wine and cider. — Do they drink more 
of the latter than of the former ? No, they drink more of the former 
thaA of the latter. — Do they drink wine every day ? They do ; but 
they do not drink cider every day. — Why not ? Can they not get 
some ? (en avoir ?) No, they have not money enough to buy any. — 
What do we drink? You know that we drink tea, coffee, and 
wine. — Do we not drink chocolate too ? Yes, we do. We do like 
it as much as the Italians and Spaniards. — Do we drink as much of 
it as they ? No, we do not, for they drink it in the morning, at din 
ner, and supper. — What art thou writing ? I am not writing, I am 
reading. — Who writes ? (is writing ?) The lawyer is writing. — What 
is the Prussian doing? He does nothing. Does he not study Eng- 
lish? Yes, he is studying it. — Does he not write it? He does not. 

What dost thou say ? I say nothing. I am too sleepy to say any- 
thing. — Does thy brother say anything ? He is afraid to say a word. — 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



123 



Do you say anything ? Yes ; I tell our servant to go to the book- 
seller's to bring me the last work of Cooper. — Do you like his last 
work ? Do you not like it? I say that I like it very much. — Who 
does not like it? Several gentlemen whom (que) I know. (§ 77.) — 
Do you tell me anything? T tell you something. Yes; but you do 
not tell me something pretty. — Is it not pretty? No 7 not at all. — Do 
you do (are you doing) anything for me ? We do not do anything 
for you; but those boys are (doing something for you). — What are 
they doing for me ? Do you not see it? No ? I do not see it. — Dost 
thou see my shawl or gloves? (Dir. 2.) I see neither these nor 
that. — What dost thou see ? I see nothing. — Who sees them ? Who 
sees what? My shawl and gloves. Nobody sees them. — Are they 
not here ? No ; they are not. I see but this old cotton shawl. — What 
do you say to the tailor and shoemaker? I do not tell them any 
thing. — What do our friends say to them? They tell the latter to 
mend their shoes, and the former to make them some coats and 
vests. — Have they time to do it? They have time and a wish to do 
it. — What are you doing? I am putting my gloves on. — Is he put- 
ting on his large hat? No, he puts on the old one. — Do you not put 
any sugar in your coffee ? Yes ; I put some, for I have not enough. — 
Do you not put milk in it? No, I do not. — Do you know those Ger- 
mans? I know one, but not the others. — Who is acquainted with 
this Swiss ? We know him. — Does he know us? He does. — Whom 
dost thou know? I know nobody. — Does he not know you. I 
believe he does, {que si.) 

Do I look sick ? You do (look sick) 



You look very well. On the contrary. 
You do not look well. You look 

cold, (as if you were cold.) 
Miss, how have you been? 



Vous avez 



Ai-je Pair malade ? 

Fair malade. 
Vous avez tres-bon air. Au contraire. 
Vous n'avez pas tres-bon air. Vous 

avez l'air d' avoir froid. 
Mle. comment vous etes-vous portee. 

(fern.) 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



To give something to do to some one. 

Do you give anything to the dog to 
eat ? Do you feed the dog ? 

1 give it some beef to eat. 

I give him nothing to eat. 

What do you give the scholars to 
translate ? 

I give them the 25th exercise. 

To bring. To find. 

To, at the play. 



Donner quelque chose d faire a quel- 

qu'un. 
Donnez- vous quelque chose a manger 

au chien ? 
Je lui donne du bceuf a manger. 
Je ne lui donne rien a manger. 
Que donnez-vous a traduire aux 

ecoliers ? 
Je leur donne le 25me exercice. 
Apporter, 1. Trouver, 1. 

Au spectacle. 



124 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



Our butcher. His sheep. 

What, that which, (relative pronoun, 

objective case.) 
Do you bring me what I wish ? 
I do not bring you what you want, 

(or what you wish.) 
Do you find what you look for, (or 

what you are looking for ?) 
I find what I look for. (am looking.) 
He finds not what he seeks. 
We bring what we find. 
All, or all that, all that which. 

They do not find all they look for, 

(or all that which they seek.) 
Do you mend all I do not ? (Dir. 1.) 

I mend it all. 

We eat all we have. 



Notre boucher. Son mouton. 

Ce que, (pronom relatif, regime 

direct.) ($ 89.) 
M'apportez-vous ce que je veux? 
Je ne vous apporte pas ce que voui 

voulez. 
Trouvez-vous ce que vous cherchez ? 

Je trouve ceque^e cherche. 
II ne trouve pas ce qu'il cherche. 
Nous apportons ce que nous trouvons. 
Tout ce que, (pron. rel. reg. direct.) 

(* 910 
lis ne trouvent pas tout ce qu 1 i\s 

cherchent. 
Raccommodez-vous tout ce que je 

ne raccommode pas ? 
Je le raccommode tout. 
Nous mangeons tout ce que nous 

avons. 
Au lieu de. Au lieu de lire. 



Instead of. Instead of reading. 

Obs. 56. Instead of is in English followed by the present participle, but 
in French it is followed by the infinitive, as all other prepositions, except 
en. (Rule 1st.) 



This room, apartment. 

Put yourself, (imperative.) 

Near. Near Miss Ann. Near the fire. 



Cet appartement-ci. 

Mettez-vous. 

Pres de. Pres de Mile. Anne. Pris 

du feu. 
A present que j'y pense. (§ 50.) 
Comme vous y pensez, il y pense. 
Venez,(imper.) 

voici. 
S'il vous plait. 
Finir d'etudier. 
Moi, du moins. 



Venez ici. Me 
S'il lui plaTt. 
Lui, du moins. 



Now that I think of it. 

As you think of it, he thinks of it. 

Come, (imperative.) (§ 150.) Come 

here. Here I am. 

If you please. If he pleases. 

To finish, to quit studying. 
At least I do, or I, at least. He, at least. 

Vingt-cinquieme Exercice. 2de Sec. 
Ecrivez ladateici, en Fran^ais, (the date noun fern., of which hereafter.) 
Ah ! Mr. Charles, j'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Je vois que vous 
vous portez bien. Tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., etes-vous ma- 
lade? Ai-je Voir malade? Un peu. Je suis un peu fatigue, mais 
non pas malade. J ! en suis bien aise. Vous n ; etes pas le premier, 
ce soir. Non, je vois que Mile. Clara est ici avant moi. Com- 
ment vous etes-vous portee (fem.), Mile., depuis jendi dernier. Je 
me suis tres-bien portee, merci. Je n'ai pas Pair malade, j'espere. 
Oh! non. Au contraire, vous avez tres-bon air, comme a Pordi- 
Haire. Merci, Mr. Comment est le mal de gorge du general? Son 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 125 

mal de gorge est mieux, mais non pas son rhume. Entrez, Mr, 
Lenoir. Vous avez Fair d'avoir froid. Oui, j'ai froid. Mettez-vous 
ici, pres du feu et de Mile. Clara. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Vous 
avez bon feu. Le feu est tres-agreable quand vous avez froid, n'est- 
ce pas. Mr.? Oui, Mile. II est alors tres-agreable. Vous avez 
parfaitement raison. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait tres-froid. — 
Cormaissez-vous Mr. de Genlis? J'ai le plaisir de le connaitre et de 
le voir tres-souvent. II a l'air malade, a present, n'est-ce pas? 
Mais, je crois que non. A present que j'y pense, je crois qu'il a mal 
aux dents. Cela peut etre. Si cela est, j'en suis bien fachee. Et 
moi aussi. Mr. de Genlis est un homme de merite, n'est-ce pas? Je 
le crois. 

Do you go to the play, in the evening ? I do not. — Why ? What 
have you to do ? I have to study. — Does your teacher give you any- 
thing to study in the evening ? Yes, he gives us something to do 
then. — At what o'clock do you finish studying? We finish at 9 or 
10 oclock; in a word (en un), we finish when we are tired, or 
sleepy, {when we are.) — Does he give you anything to write ? 
Yes, he always gives us (§ 170) the quarter or the half of an 
exercise to write • because he says that we know it better then. — 
Do you know it better when you write it ? To be sure. I do (moi) 
at least. — Do you copy your father's notes in the evening? We 
copy them only in the morning, and afterwards we send them 
(away). — Do the scholars write all they translate ? No, they do not. 
— Do they mend all they tear? They do not. — Do they find all 
they look for? They do. — Does the captain find all he looks for? 
No, indeed, he does not. — Who finds all he looks for? Nobody 
does. — What do they wish to find? They wish to find but their 
books. — Do they not put them away? They do not. — Who puts 
them away? Nobody does. — Where are they? You know; do 
you not ? No, not at all. — The Swiss wants something ; do you 
bring him all he wishes? I bring it to him, when I can find it. — 
Where dost thou take me to? I take thee to the museum. — Do you 
not take me to the wharf? I have neither time nor a mind to take 
you there, because it is bad weather. 

Do not the merchants put away what they do not sell? Thoy 
put away all they do not sell. — At how much does the butcher sell 
his beef? He sells it at ten cents, or sous. — Does the butcher 
wish to buy your sheep? He does. — What will he give you for 
it (en) ? He will give me two dollars and a half for it. — Is it 
enough ? I think not. — If this butcher will not give you more than 
that, I know another who can give you more. — Have our butchers 
11* 



126 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 



as many oxen as sheep ? No, they have many more of the latter 
than of the former. Do they sell as much beef as mutton ? They 
sell much beef ; but they sell only a little mutton. — What is the old 
cook looking for ? He is looking for a young chicken, which he 
does not find. Where can it be ? Who knows? — What is the Ger- 
man doing in his room? He is reading the journal and feeding his 
birds. — What does he give them to eat? (what does he feed them 
with?) He gives them but grain to eat, (feeds them with.) — What 
journals does he read ? He reads those which your cousin lends 
him. — Does not your father lend him some, too ? He has three in 
his desk, which my father lends him ; but he is not reading them 
now. 

John, come here. Here I am. — Come with me. Where? Here, 
near the fire. — Near the fire ? No, indeed ! I am warm enough 
where I am. — Take that seat. No, I am going to take this one; 
that one is too big for me. — Very well: take that little one, if you 
please. — Now that I think of it, go in that apartment to bring me 
the cake which is in my desk. — Which one of your desks ? The 
French one. I am going to bring it to you, if you please. — You are 
going to give me some; are you not? Yes, to be sure. It is to 
give you some that I tell you to bring it to me. — Have you a knife 
to cut it? I can cut you a little with my penknife. — You cannot 
cut me enough with your penknife. — Do you want so much? Yes, 
I want a great deal; you know that I like it much. Go, then, go, 
instead of speaking. — Will you go with me to the grocer's ? Here 
I am, ready to go. — Do you want a basket? Why? To put in it 
something good, w T hich you are going to buy ; are you not ? Yes, I 
am going to buy something good, but the grocer can put it in papei 
bags. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 



To play. To listen. 

Instead of listening — of playing. 
Do you play instead of studying ? 
I study instead of playing. 
That man speaks instead of listening 
Have you a sore finger ? Thumb ? 
I have a sore finger. Thumb. 

Has your brother a sore foot ? 
He has a sore eye. A sore nose. 
We have — They have sore eyes. 
The elbow. The right elbow 

The right arm. The left arm. 
The Left knee. The right one. 
The back. The dog's back. 



Jouer, 1. Itcouter (sans prepos.) 
Au lieu d'ecouter — de jouer. 
Jouez-vous au lieu d'etudier? 
J'etudie au lieu de jouer. 
Cet homme parle au lieu d'ecouter. 
tAvez-vousmal audoigt? Aupouce? 
tj'ai mal au doigt. Au pouce. 

tVotre frere a-t-il mal au pied ? 
til a mal a Poeil. Au nez. 
tNous avons — lis ont mal aux yeux. 
Le coude. Le coude droit, 

Le bras droit. Le bras gauche 

Le genou gauche. Le droit. 
Le dos. Le dos du chien. 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 



127 



Has the dog a sore back ? It has. 
Is the dog's back sore ? It is (sore). 
Is your left arm sore ? 
It is (sore). It is not. 
Whose elbow is sore ? Who has a 
sore elbow? Nobody's. Nobody. 



SLe chien a-t-il mal au dos ? 
II y a mal. 

Avez-vous mal au bras gauche ? 
J'y ai mal. Je n'y ai pas mal. 
Qui a mal au coude ? 
Personne n'y a mal. 



Are not the child's fingers sore ? ) L , enfimt a * a . t .., mal aux d(ji , 
Has not the child sore ringers ? 3 

They are — He has. 



Which of his eyes is sore ? The left. 
Is not my right eye sore ? Yes, it is, 

or your right eye is sore. 
This bed. Those beds. 

Does the servant make the bed ? 
He makes the fire instead of making 

the bed. The bedstead. 

To learn, to learn how, learning. 

I do learn, thou learnest, he learns. 

They learn. 

I learn to read, how to read. 

They learn to write, how to write. 

Do they not learn to speak French ? 

Yes, they do. 

Do Arthur and his cousin go out ? 

NeitherArthur nor his cousin does. 



II y a mal. 

A quel ceil a-t-il mal ? Au gauche. 

N'ai-je pasmal al'ceil droit? Si fait, 

vous y avez mal. 
Ce lit-ci. Ces lits-la. 

Le domestique fait-il le lit ? 
II fait le feu au lieu de faire le lit. Le 

bois de lit. 
Apprendre,* 4, apprenant, (il prend 

o, avant un infinitif.) 
J'apprends, tu apprends, il apprendL 
lis apprennent. (§ 144.) 
J'apprends a lire. 
lis apprennent a ecrire. 
N'apprennent-ils pas a parler 

Fran§ais ? Si fait, ils 1' apprennent. 
Arthur et son cousin sortent-ils ? 
Ni Arthur ni son cousin ne sortent. 



Obs. 57. Neither, connected with nominatives, is : Ni .... ni ... . ne, 
before the verb. (§ 162, R. 6.) The following verb is usually in the plural :— 



Ni cet e'colier-ci ni celui-la n'e'tu- 

dient assez. 
Le dentiste. Le sofa. 

Le charpentier raccommode-t-il le 

bois de lit ? 
Non, parce qu'il a mal au pouce. 
tA quel pouce a-t-il mal ? Au droit. 



Neither this scholar nor that one 
studies enough. 

The dentist. The sofa. 

Does the carpenter mend the bed- 
stead ? 

No, because he has a sore thumb. 

Which of his thumbs is sore ? The 
right one. 

Vingt-cinquteme Exercice. 3me Sec. 
Mettez la date ici, en Frangais. 
An ! Mr. Letourneur, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment 
se porte-t-on chez vous ? Tout le monde s 7 y porte bien. Personne 
n'est malade a la maison ; mais chez mon voisin. le ministre, tout 
le monde est malade. Qu'ont ils? L'un, a mal de gorge, un autre, 
mal de tete ; celui-ci a un rhume, celui-la mal aux dents. Alors, ils 
ne sont pas tres malades. Non, mais il fait si mauvais, qu'ils souf- 
frent beaucoup. Je suis fache d'apprendre qu'ils souffrent. Celui 
:pii a mal aux dents ne peut pas dormir. Pourquoi ne va-t-il pas 



128 TWENTY -FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 

chez le dentiste ? II a peur. En verite ! Qui est-ce ? C ; est le 
jeune Arthur. II a tort d'avoir peur. II le sait, mais il continue a 
avoir peur. Qui a le rhume ? C'est George. Prend-il quelque chose 
pour son rhume? Oui, sans doute. Qu 7 est-ce que c'est? Je ne 
sais pas quoi. 

Does your father go out ? He does not. — What does he do ? He 
writes. — Does he write a book? He does. (Dir. 1.) — When does he 
write it ? He writes it in the morning, in the evening, and when he 
has time. — He is at home now, then ? To be sure. — Do you wish 
to see him ? No, because he is too busy. — Does the Prussian go 
out ? No, neither he nor the Swiss goes out. — Why do they not go 
out? They have sore feet. — What do they do for their sore feet? 
They do something, but I cannot tell you what. — Does the shoe- 
maker bring our shoes ? He does not. — Does he drink ? Does he 
not work? He does not work, because his left knee is sore. — Has 
anybody the toothache ? Yes, this youth has it. — Is he not going to 
the dentist? No, he is not. — Is he going to send for him ? He does 
not send for him. He does not wish to have the dentist. — Has any- 
body a sore elbow? I believe so. Let me see. ($ 154.) Yes, the 
dentist has a sore elbow. ^-Which of his elbows is sore ? The right 
or his right, (le.) — Who has a sore arm ? I have. — Do you not see it ? 
No, I do not see it. — Which of your arms is sore ? The left. — Does 
the minister write now ? No, he cannot yet. — Is not his right thumb 
better? It is better, but not well. 

Do you read your pretty book ? I do not. I have a sore eye. — 
Which of your eyes is sore ? Do you not see ? My right eye is 
sore. — Let me see it. See it or look at it. (voyez-le.) — Who has sore 
eyes? The old cooks have sore eyes. — What day of the month 
is to-day ? It is the . . . — And to-morrow ? The . . . — What is the 
German doing in his room ? He is learning to read. — Does he 
not learn to write? Yes, he does. — Does your son learn to trans- 
late ? He learns to translate, and to copy French. — Does the Prus- 
sian speak instead of listening? He speaks instead of listening. — 
What does he do then ? Afterwards he goes to the farmer's to drink 
milk. — Does the dentist fix (arranger) the teeth of your son ? He 
does not. — What does he? He makes teeth for the Dutchman > 
instead of fixing my son's teeth. — Who studies instead of playing ? 
A few boys study instead of playing; but a great many play instead 
of studying. — Does our English teacher speak French to us instead 
of speaking English ? He does often. — Do the children of the Swiss 
drink wine in the morning, instead of drinking tea or coffee ? They 
drink neither wine, tea, nor coffee. 

Can you find the French of: to offer, in this small dictionary? I 



TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



(1.) 



129 



am going to look for it immediately. Very well ; take the dictionary. 
I have it. — Do you find the word in it ? No, I do not. Indeed ! Let 
me see. I see why you cannot find it. You are looking for it in the 
French instead of the English. — What is the grocer putting in that 
paper bag ? I believe he puts in it salt instead of sugar. — Is that 
salt. Sir? No, it is sugar, but it looks like (a Fair de) salt, does it 
not? Yes, it looks like it. (§ 50.) — Let me, let me, I want to say : 
Let me taste it, but I do not know the French of: to taste. Will you 
tell me, William? To be sure; it is gouter. Gouter, very well. 
Now I can say: Let me taste it. Do. (Dir. 1.) Take some and 
taste it. ( § 54.) — Is it sugar or salt ? You are right, it is sugar. Then 
we can sweeten what we eat and drink. — Do his little friends receive 
more books than copy-books ? They receive less of the former than 
of the latter. — Do you sleep in this pretty little bed ? No, I sleep 
in that large bed. — Who sleeps in this one? Sophia does. — Do the 
joiner's boys make sofas, desks, and bedsteads ? Yes, they make 
sofas, bedsteads, and desks. — Do they work as much as the boys 
of the carpenter ? They work quite as much. 



TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 26ih.—Vingt-sixieme Legon, 26me. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



Do you learn French ? Russian ? 

I do. I do not. 

The Polish. Russian. Turkish. 

Latin. Greek. Arabian, Arabic. 

Syrian, Syriac. Swedish. 

Does your son learn Latin ? 

No, he does not. 

The Pole. The Roman. The Greek. 

The Swede. The Arab. The Syrian. 

To speak French. German. 



Le 



Apprenez-vous le Frangais? 

Russe ? 
Je Tapprends. Je ne l'apprends pas. 
Le polonais. Le russe. Le turc. 
Le latin. Le grec. L'arabe. 

Le syriaque. Le suedois. 
Votre fils apprend-il le latin ? 
Non, il ne I'apprend pas. 
Le Polonais. Le Romain. Le Grec. 
Le Suedois. L'Arabe. Le Syrien. 
Parler Frangais. Parler Allemand. 

Obs. 58. After the verb, parler, the article (le) is usually omitted before: 
F angais. Anglais, &c, although it is used after all other verbs. (§ 47£.) 



Who speaks Swedish ? Not I ; but 

I am studying Polish. 
This minister reads Latin well, and 

translates Greek and Syrian. 
Are you an Englishman — English ? 



Qui parle suedois ? Pas moi ; mais 

j'etudie le polonais. 
Ce ministre lit bien le latin, et il 

traduit le grec et le syriaque. 
Etes-vous Anglais ? 



Obs. 59. Where the indefinite article is used in English to denote qualr 
lies, the French make use of no article. (§ 38, R. 2. p. 469.) 



130 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 

No, Sir, I am a Frenchman. French. | Non, Monsieur, je suis Francais. 



Is he a Turk, a Greek, or an Arab ? 

Is your cousin a minister ? He ? 

No, he is an apothecary. 

Crazy, foolish. 

Sure, certain. 

Are they sure they have it ? They are. 

To take away, pull off, throw off. 

Take away, off. 

Well, very well ! 

Are you tired and sleepy ? 



Est-il Turc, Grec, ou Arabe ? 

Votre cousin est-il ministre ? Lui * 

Non, il est apothicaire. 

Fou. (plur. s. 92.) 

Sur. {de avant un infinit.) 

Sont-ils stirs de 1' avoir ? lis en sont 

surs. 
Oter. 
Otez. 
Eh bien ! 
Etes-vous fatigue et avez-vous som- 

meil? 
Je suis fatigue et j'ai sommeil. 



I am tired and sleepy. 

Obs. 60. Change the verb when the adjective requires a different one. 

Je vous (lui, leur) suis bien oblige, 
De rien. 



I am much obliged to you, (him, them.) 
You are welcome. It is not worth 
mentioning. 

Vingt-sixieme Exerctce. Ire Sec. 
TFoubliez pas (do not forget) le quantieme en Francais. 

Quel jour du mois est-ce? C'est le.... De quel mois? Du 
mois de . . . En etes-vous sur? Oui, j 7 en suis sur. N ? est-ce 
pas aujourd'hui jeudi? Si fait, c'est jeudi. Eh! bien, le papier 
dit : jeudi le - . . . N ? ai-je pas raison ? Si fait, je crois que vous 
avez raison. Je vous remercie. Be rien. Vous etesbien bon. Je 
suis bien aise de savoir le quantieme, parce que j'ai un billet a ecrire. 
Avez-vous besoin de papier? Non, je vous suis bien oblige. J ; en 
ai, je crois ; mais je ne puis trouver raon encrier. Etes-vous sur 
qu'il n'est pas dans votre pupitre ? Je n'en suis pas tout-a-fait sur, 
mais je crois, qu ; il n'y est pas. Laissez-moi voir (§ 54) si je ne 
peux pas l'y trouver. Cherchez. (§ 150.) Eh bien! L'y trouvez- 
vous? Non, il n'estpasici. Qui peut Pavoir? Votre cousin Arthur, 
je pense. Car il ecrit son devoir dans son appartement. Puis-je 
aller le chercher? Non: s 7 il en a besoin, il peut Pavoir. Je vais 
ecrire mon billet aveo mon crayon. 

Do you go for anything? I do go for something. — What do you 
go for? I go for some cider. — Does your father send for anything? 
He sends for some wine. — Does your servant go for some bread ? 
He goes for some. — For whom does your neighbor send ? He sends 
for the physician. — Does your servant take off his coat in order to 
make the fire? He takes it off in order to make it. — Do you take 
off your gloves in order to give me money ? I do take them off in 
order to give yon some. — Do you learn Fiench? I do learn it. — 



TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 131 

Does your brother learn German ? He does learn it. — Who learns 
English? The Frenchman learns it. — Do we learn Italian? You 
do learn it. — What do the English learn ? They learn French and 
German. — Do you speak Spanish ? No. Sir, I speak Italian. — Who 
speaks Polish ? My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbors speak 
Russian ? They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you speak 
Arabic? No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you? I 
have an English knife. — What money have you there ? Is it (est~ce) 
Italian or Spanish money? It is Russian money. — Have you an 
Italian hat ? No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you a Frenchman ? 
No, I am an Englishman. — Art thou a Greek? No, I am a 
Spaniard. 

Are these men Germans? No, they are Russians. — Do the Rus- 
sians speak Polish? They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek, 
and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant ? No, he is a joiner. — Are 
these men merchants ? No, they are carpenters. — Are you a cook ? 
No, I am a baker. — Are we tailors? No, we are shoemakers. — Art 
thou crazy ? No, I am not crazy. — What is that m an ? He is a phy- 
sician. — Does the son of the painter study Greek? No, he studies 
English before Greek. He is right. — Is he going to learn Greek 
before Latin ? No, he is going to learn Latin before Greek. — Does 
the butcher kill anything to-day ? He kills oxen and sheep. — Does 
he kill some every day ? He does. — Why does he kill some ? He 
sells the beef and mutton in market. — Do you listen instead of doing 
your task ? Yes, I do, because what you say is very pretty. — Do 
they listen also ? No, they neither listen nor study, nor copy ; but 
they sleep. They do right, if they are tired and sleepy. Afterwards 
they can work setter. ( § 170.) 

Vocabulaiee. 2de Section. 



To wish. 

I wish you a good morning. 

Does he wish me a good evening ? 

He does. 

What do they wish me ? 

They wish you much pleasure. 



The forehead. 

He has a large forehead. > T , , r_ . , 

His forehead is large. ( Ob.. 55.) 1 IUle front lar § e 

He has blue eyes. His eyes are blue 

Blue. Black. Large. 

The blue ones. A black one. 

Round. Square. Long. 



Souhaiter, 1. 

t Je vous souhaite le bonjour. 

t Me souhaite- t-il le bonsoir ? 

II vous le souhaite. 

Que me souhaitent-ils ? 

lis vous souhaitent beaucoup de 

plaisir. 
Le front. 



II a Ies yeux bleus. 
Bleu. Noir. Large. 

Les bleus. Un noir. 
Rond. Carre. Long. 



132 



TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



A great, or large knife. A great man. I Un grand couteau. Un grand homme. 1 

A French book. An English penny. | Un livre Francais. Un sou Anglais. 

Obs. 61. Adjectives of nations, colors, and shapes, come after the noun. 



Un lit carre. 
Un arbre rond. 
Du velours 



A square handkerchief. A square bed. 
A round hat. A round tree. 

Russian money. Italian velvet. 

A good American sailor. 

Do the Italians make fine black satin ? 

To listen to something. 

To listen to some one, to somebody. 

Do you listen to what your teacher 

tells you? I do. 

Does he listen to what I tell him ? 
He does. He does not at all. 

Do you listen to what I tell you ? 
Do you listen to me ? I do. 

Whom do you listen to ? Nobody. 

Do you listen to my brother ? 

I do not (listen to him). 

Do you not listen to the men ? 

Yes, I do disten to them). 

The exercise. The last exercise. 

To take, to drink coffee. 

To take, to drink tea. 

Obs. 62. With the verbs, to take and to drink, (le) or (du) may be used 
indifferently, with tea, coffee, and chocolate, but not so with other verba 
and nouns. 



Un mouchoir carre 
Un chapeau rond. 
De F argent Russe. 

Italien. 
Un bon matelot Ame'ricain. 
Les Italiens font-ils de beau satin 

noir ? 
t Itcouterquelque chose, (sans prepos.) 
t Ecouter quelqu'un. 
t Ecoutez-vous ce que votre maitre 

vous dit ? Je l'ecoute. 

t Ecoute-t-il ce que je lui dis ? 
t II l'ecoute. II ne l'ecoute pas du 

tout, 
t Ecoutez-vous ce que je vous dis ? 
t M' ecoutez-vous ? Je vous ecoute. 
t Qui ecoutez-vous ? Personne. 

\$ 171, R. 8.) 
t Ecoutez-vous mon frere ? 
t Je ne V ecoute pas. 
t N'ecoutez-vous pas les hommes? 
t Si fait, je les ecoute. 
Le theme. Le dernier theme, 

t Prendre, boire du cafe ou le cafe, 
t Prendre, boire le the ou du the. 



Will you eat bread ? 

Will he take the bread ? 

Do you take (drink) tea ? 

I do. 

Do they drink tea every day ? 

They do take some every day. 

My father drinks coffee. 

The French take coffee after dinner. 

Do they take it at breakfast ? 
Does her brother take chocolate ? 



Voulez-vous manger du pain ? ^not le.) 
Veut-il prendre le pain ? (not du.) 
t Prenez-vous (buvez) du (le) the ? 
t T en prends. Je le bois. 

t Prennent-ils le the* tous les jours ? 
t lis le prennent tous les jours, 
t Mon pere prend du cafe\ 
t Les Francais boivent du cafe* apres 

dine, 
t Le prennent-ils a dejeuner ? 
t Son frere prend-il du chocolat t 



1 Un grand homme means a great man, but un homme grand a tall man. 
A similar distinction is made with respect to the word pauvre, poor, which 
expresses pitiful, or a want of intellect, when before, and indigent, when 
after the substantive. Ex. Tin pauvre homme : a sorrowful (pitiful, "miserable) 
man ; and un homme pauvre, an indigent man. 



TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 133 



t II prend le chocolat tous les matins. 
Votre theme est-il aise aujourd'hui ? 
II ir est pas tres- difficile, mais il est 
long. 



He drinks chocolate every morning. 

Is your exercise easy to-day ? 

It is not very difficult, (or it is not) a 

very difficult one, (or hard one,) but 

it is long, or it is a long one. 

ViNGT-sixii:ME Theme. 2de Sec. 
N'oubliez pas le quantieme en Fran§ais. 

Mile. Victoria, j'ai Phonneur de vous saltier, vous vous portez 
bien, n*est-ce pas'? Oui, Mr., je me porte bien, merci. Et vous, 
Mr., comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que j'ai eu le plaisir de 
vous voir au musee ? Je ne me suis pas tres-bien porte, je vous 
suis tres-oblige. Je suis fache de Papprendre. Mais vous etes 
mieux, j'espere? Oui, beaucoup mieux: je peux dire: bien a pre- 
sent. Mais, je vois M. Guillaume. II va entrer. je crois. J'espere 
que non. Pourqu oi done ? (so?) Ne Paimez-vous pas? Non, je 
ne peux pas le souffrir. Je vois qu'il n'entre pas. Pourquoi ne 
pouvez-vous pas le souffrir ? II est trop vain. N ; a-t-il pas raison 
d'etre vain? N ; est-ce pas un joli jeune homme? Si fait: mais il a 
tort d'en etre vain. — A present que j'y pense, savez-vous ou est 
votre ami, Edouard? Oui, il est a Burlington, chez un de ses cou* 
sins. Va-t-il venir ici bientot ? Je ne peux pas repondre a votre 
question ; car, je ne sais pas quand il va venir ici. 

Do you wish me anything? I wish you a good morning. — What 
does the young Prussian wish me ? He wishes you a good evening. 
— Where are the children ? They are at your father's. — Why are 
they there? To wish him much pleasure. — Has the German black 
eyes? No, he has blue eyes. — Who has black eyes? The Spa- 
niards, Italians, and Turks have black eyes. — Has not that Greek 
small feet, a large forehead, and a big nose ? Yes, he has small 
feet, a large forehead, but he has not at all a big nose. Do you 
listen to me ? I do, with much pleasure. — Does the lawyer listen 
to the minister? He does listen to him, in order to answer him, 
(reply to him.) — Are you going to listen to him ? No, I am going to 
study my exercise instead of listening to him. I do not wish to 
know what he is going to say. — Have you your cousin's note? To 
oe sure I have it. — Have you to answer it immediately? Yes, I 
have to answer it immediately. — Are you answering it now ? Yes, 
I am ; but my eyes are sore, and I cannot answer it very well. — 
Answer it (§ 150, Art. 8) for me; will you? With pleasure, if I 
can. — Tell me what I have to write. — Tell him first why I do not 
answer, and then tell him that I send him his round hat, his blue coat, 
his black satin vest, his black velvet shoes, his French fan, his 
12 



134 



TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 



Engl.sh gun. and several other articles, by (par) one of my friends, 
who goes where he is. 

Listen to what the professor says, instead of speaking. Now, I 
listen to what he says. — Is the doctor a man of merit ? Listen to 
him, and then you can say whether (if, si) he is a man of merit. 
— Do the scholars listen to their English teacher ? Those who are 
good, listen to him; the bad ones play instead of listening. — Are 
your gloves French? Yes, they are French gloves. (3. §39.) — 
Do you give me English or German paper ? I give you neither 
English (repeat papier) nor German paper; but I give you some 
fine French paper. — Do you read Spanish well? (§ 170.) I do not 
read Spanish well, but German. — What book is the soldier reading? 
He is reading a pretty French book. — Do the sailors drink tea or 
coffee, in the morning ? Some take coffee, others drink tea. — What 
do you drink, in the evening? I take tea, then. — You take coffee 
in the morning; do you not? No, I take tea in the morning, also. — 
Do you drink no coffee ? No, I do not drink it any more. — Who 
takes chocolate ? The Spaniards and Italians drink a great deal of 
it. — Do the French take it also ? They take some, but not so much 
as the others. — Do the Turks take tea, chocolate, or coffee ? They 
take neither tea nor chocolate, but they are very fond of coffee. 

Why so ? Then. t Pourquoi done ? done. 



How goes it ? 
Is it possible ? 
It is true, however. 
Is it not true ? 



(First rate.) 
It is possible. 
Is it true ? 
It is not true. 



Comment va? Celavabien,tres-bien, 
Est-il possible ? C'est possible. 
C'est vrai, cependant. Est-ce vrai ? 
N'est-eepas vrai? Ce n'est pas vrai. 



TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 27th.—Vingt-septieme Legon, 27me. 
Vocabulaibe. Ire Section. 



To show. 

I show, do show, am showing. 

He does not show. 

Dost thou show ? 

Show him the apartment. 

To show something to some one. 

To show one something. 

Do you show me your gun ? 

I do. 

What do you show the man ? 

I show him my fine clothes. 

Tobacco. Tobacco, (for smoking.) 



Montr er, 1. Faire* voir. 

Je fais voir. Je montre. 

II ne fait pas voir. II ne montre pas 

Fais-tu voir ? Montres-tu ? 
IMontrez-lui ) l'appartement. 
( Faites-lui voir} (§ 150.) 

SMontrer ) quelque chose 
Faire voir) a quelqu'un. 
Me faites-vous voir votre fusil ? 
Je vous le fais voir, (le montre.) 
Que faites-vous voir a l'homme? 
Je lui montre mes beaux habits. 
Du tabac. Du tabac a fumer. 



TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (].) 



135 



Snuff. 

To smoke. To snuff, take snuff. 

Do you smoke or take snuff? 

I neither smoke nor snuff. 

You chew ; do you not ? 

I neither smoke, snuff, nor chew. 

Is it possible ! It is wonderful ! 

To chew. Do not chew, (imperat.) 

The gardener. This valet. 

That concert. To the concert of Mr. . . 

To intend, to intend to. 

Do you also intend to go to the ball ? 

I intend to go to it, (going there.) 

To know, to know how, (bef. a verb.) 

Dost thou know? Dost thou not know? 

Does the child know ? He does not. 

To swim. Swimming. 

Do you know how to swim ? 

Can you swim ? 

Does he read ? He does not know 

how. 
A cigar. A Spanish cigar. 
To think of, [meaning, what is your 

opinion of.] What do you think 

of the weather ? 



Du tabac en poudre, (a priser.) 

Turner, 1 . Pre?idre* du tabac on priser. 

Fumez-vous ou prisez-vous ? 

Je ne fume ni ne prise. ($ 162, A. 6.) 

Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas ? 

Je ne fume, ni ne prise, ni ne chique. 

Est-il possible! C'est extraordinaire' 

Chiquer, 1. Ne chiquez pas. 

Le jardinier. Ce valet-ci. 

Ce concert-la. Au concert de M. . . . 

Compter, 1, (sans prepos.) 

Comptez-vous aussi aller au bal ? 

Je compte y aller. 

Savoir* 3. (§ 144, sans prepos.) 

Sais-tu ? Ne sais-tu pas ? 

L'enfant sait-il ? II ne sait pas. 

Nager, 1. Nageant. (§ 144, R. 2.) 

> Savez-vous nager ? 



Lit-il ? 



II ne sait pas lire. 



Un cigare. Un cigare espagnol. 

Penser, 1, de . . . . 

Que pensez-vous du temps ? 



Vingt-septieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Francais. 
Bon soir, Michel, comment vous portez-vous aujourd'hui? Je 
me porte tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., comment va? Cela va 
bien, je vous remercie. Vous voyez que je fume un cigare espa- 
gnol, en voulez-vous un? Non, je vous suis bien oblige ; mais je ne 
fume plus. Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas? Non, je ne chique pas. 
Est-il possible ! Vous ne fumez ni ne chiquez ! C ; est extraordi- 
naire ! N'est-ce pas? Oui, en verite! Mais vous prisez? Non, 



r r ous ne chiquez, ni ne fumez. ni ne 
C'est possible. Ce que je vous dis est 



je ne prise pas. Quo: ! 
prisez ? Est-il possible ! 

vrai. Mais, pourquoi est-ce extraordinaire ? Parce que tout le 
monde fume ou prise ou chique. Non pas tout-a-fait. Que pensez- 
vous du temps ? Je pense qu'il est superbe. Quoi ! Ne fait-il pas 
Urop chaud pour vous? Pour moi? Non, en verite. 

What does your father want? He wants some tobacco. — Will 
you go for some? I will go for some. — What tobacco does he want? 
He wants some snuff. — Do you want tobacco, (for smoking?) T do 
not want any; I do not smoke. — Do you show me anything? I 
enow you gold ribbons, (des rubans (Vor.) — Does your father show 



136 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 

his gun to my brother ? He does show it him. — Does he show him 
his beautiful birds? He does. — Does the Frenchman smoke? He 
does. — Do you go to the ball? I go to the theatre instead of going 
to the ball. — Does the gardener go into the garden ? He goes to the 
market instead of going into the garden. — Do you send your valet 
to the tailor? I send him to the shoemaker instead of sending him 
to the tailor. — Does your brother intend to go to the ball this eve- 
ning? He does not intend to go to the ball, but to the concert. — 
When do you intend to go to the concert? I intend to go there this 
evening. — At what o'clock ? At a quarter past ten. — Do you go for 
my son ? I do go for him. — Where is he ? He is in the counting- 
house. — Do you find the gardener whom you are looking for? — I 
do. — Do your sons find the gardeners whom they are looking for? 
They do not. 

Do your friends intend to go to the theatre ? They do. — When 
do they intend to go thither? They intend to go thither to-morrow. 
—At what o'clock ? At half past seven. — What does the merchant 
wish to sell you ? He wishes to sell me some pocket-books. — Do 
you intend to buy some ? I will not. — Dost thou know anything? 
I do not know anything. — What does your little brother know ? He 
knows how to read and to write. — Does he know French ? He does 
not. — Do you know German ? I do. — Do your brothers know Greek? 
They do not, but they intend to study it. — Do you know English ? I 
do not, but intend to learn it. — Do my children know how to read 
Italian ? They know how to read, but not (mais non) how to speak 
it. — Do you know how to swim ? I do not know how to swim, but 
how to play. — Does your son know how to make coats ? He does 
not know how to make any; he is no tailor. — Is he a merchant? 
He is not, (ne Vest pas.) — What is he ? He is a physician. 
We are well. We thank you. i Nous nous portons bien. Nous vous 

remercions. 

Vocabttlaire. 2de Section. 

To conduct, conducting. 

I conduct, thou conductest, he con* 



ducts. 
Conduct him to his U7icle' s house. 
Conduct me there also. 
I will, willingly, with pleasure. 
To extinguish, put out, extinguishing. 
Do you extinguish (put out') the fire ? 
I do not put it out. Put it out. 

He extinguishes it. Thouputtest.it out. 
To light, to kindle, to fire. 
The gas. This burner. Which 

burner ? 



Conduire* 4. Conduisant. 

Je conduis, tu conduis, il conduit. 



Conduisez'le chez son oncle. 

Conduisez-y-moi aussi (§ 58.) 

Volontiers. 

Eteindre*4, eteignant. 

Eteignez-vous le feu ? 

Je ne l'eteins pas. Eteignez-le. 

II i'eteint. Tu l'eteins. 

Allumer, 1. 

Le gaz. Co hec-ci. Quel bee? 



TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



137 



How many burners do you light ? 

A single gas burner is enough. 

Put out this burner, and light up the 

other. 
Often. As often as you. (§ 170) 
As often as I. As often as we, thou. 

Do you often go to the wharf? 
As often as he. As often as they. 
As good as he, we, they, I, thou. 
Not so often. Less often. 

Do you frequently see my uncle ? 
I do not see him so often as you. 
Not so often as I, as they. 
Oftener, more often. Often enough. 
Oftener than we, than they. 
Too often. Does he come too often ? 
I believe he comes too often. 
To count. To count in French. 

The number. The numbers. 

Do you know this number in French ? 
What number ? This, 76. 

To pronounce. 

Can you pronounce my name? 
I can try. Well, try. Value. 
Can I pronounce it? Yes, pretty 
well. 



Combien de bees allumez-vous ? 
Un seul bee de gaz est assez. 
Eteignez ce bec-ci et allumez l'autre. 

Souvent. Aussi souvent que vous. 
Aussi souvent que moi, que nous, 

que toi. 
Allez-vous souvent au quai ? 
Aussi souvent que lui, qu'eux. 
Aussi bon que lui, nous, eux, moi, toi 
Moins souvent. 

Voyez-vous souvent mon oncle ? 
Je le vois moins souvent que vous. 
Moins souvent que moi, qu'eux. 
Plus souvent. Assez souvent. 

Plus souvent que nous, qu'eux. 
Trop souvent. Vient-il trop souvent ? 
Je crois qu'il vient trop souvent. 
Compter. Compter en Francais. 1 
Le nombre. Les nombres. 
Savez-vouscenombre-cienFrancais? 
Quel nombre ? Celui-ci. ($ 38.) 
Prononcer, 1. ($ 144, R. 1.) 
tSavez-vous prononcer mon nom? 
Je puis essayer. Eh bien ! essayez. 
Puis-je le prononcer? Oui, assez 

bien. 



Vingt-septieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date ici, en Francais. 
Bon jour, Messieurs, comment vous portez-vous ? Nous nous por- 
tons bien, excepte M. le Blanc, qui n'est pas ici. Va-t-il venir? 
Non, il ne vient pas aujourd'hui. N 7 est-il pas assez bien pour venir f 
Non, il n'est pas bien du tout. Qu 7 a-t-il ? Je ne sais pas ; et le Doc- 
teur ne le sait pas mieux que moi, du moins, je le crois. Lui donne- 
t-il quelque chose a prendre 1 II lui donne quelque chose. Je suis 
bien aise, Messieurs, d'apprendre que vous vous portez bien. Nous 
vous remercions. Le theme que vous avez est-il difficile ? Moi, je 
le trouve difficile ; mais ces trois messieurs ne le trouvent pas diffi- 
cile. C'est vrai. au contraire nous le trouvons aise. Que trouvez-vous 
difficile 1 Je ne peux pas vous le dire en Francais. Vous pouvez 

1 The teacher is invited to make the pupils count in French, by the 
minute — slowly at first ; but when they pronounce the numbers well and 
regularly, let them count as fast as they can ; not for the mere satisfaction 
of knowing whether they can count 150 or 170 in a minute, but to give ease 
and readiness to their utterance. Pupils are generally fond of this exercisa 
12* 



138 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 

essayer, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, sans doute. Ehbien! essayez. Volon- 
tiers. Nous avons beaucoup de new mots. Ne savez-vous pas le 
Francais de: new? Je ne le sais pas. Ces autres messieurs le 
savent-ils? Moi, je le sais. Nous, nous ne le savons pas. Je vais 
vous le dire, c'est nouveau. Pouvez-vous Pecrire ? Moi, non — moi, 
oui — n, o, u, v, e. a. u. Comment formez-vous le pluriel ? Avec x, 
n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est vrai ; vous avez raison. 

Do you wish to drink some cider? I wish to drink some wine: 
have you got any? No, T have none, but I will send for some. — 
Has not your uncle got some excellent? Yes, he has. — Conduct 
me to his house, then. I will, or willingly. Now? No, not now, 
but very soon. — Do you know how to make tea 1 I know how to 
make it; but I cannot make coffee. — Who knows how to make 
chocolate? I * it is not difficult. — Where is your father's dentist 
going to ? He is going nowhere. He remains at home to fix the 
teeth of his uncle. — Dost thou conduct anybody? I conduct no- 
body. — And you, whom do you conduct ? I conduct my son's valet. — 
Where are you conducting him % I conduct him to the lawyer's 
office, to show him where it is. — Does your valet conduct this German 
boy ? He does. — Where to ? He conducts him into the garden to 
speak to our old German gardener. — Does your old German gardener 
snuff? No, but he smokes. — Does he work well ? Yes, he does, for 
he cannot talk (parler a) with the other servants ; and he has to work. 
Do we conduct any one ? We conduct our children. — Where are 
your children conducting their uncle ? They are conducting him to 
the museum, to show it to him. — Conduct me there also. Come 
with us. — Are they going to show him the theatre ? No, they have 
no time to show it to him to-day ; they have time only to show him 
the museum.— Can you pronounce the French of: to extinguish? 
I believe I can. Let us see, (Voyons, § 150, Art. 2.) Try. Pronounce 

it is it right? Not quite. Try it again is it better? It 

is right now. I am very glad of it, for it is a difficult word. — The 
imperative is not easy. Do you know it ? Yes, I do. — Pronounce 
it, if you please. With pleasure. — . ... is it right? Not quite. Pro- 
nounce the gn like gn, in the English word mignonette, gne 

That is better. Try it again That's right now. — Can you 

count a little in French? Not much, but I intend to learn. — Will 
you count? Willingly.— Begin. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6— No, 5—5, 6, 7, 8. 
No ; do not pronounce the h of huit, say : uit. Uit, 9, 10, 11, 12, &c. 
(Let the teacher correct, in French, the mistakes as they occur, and 
note down the number counted in a minute, whenever this exercise 
takes place.) 

Eteignez-vous le feu? Je ne Feteins pas, le cuisinier Feteint. 



TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 139 

Qui allume le feu le matin 1 Le cuisinier allume son feu, et mon 
valet allume le mien. Qui allume celui de votre oncle et de votre 
cousin ? Us n'ont pas de feu dans leurs appartements, parce qu'ils 
n'y restent pas. Ou restent-ils ? lis sont avec nous dans le salon 
quand ils sont a la maison. — Sortent-ils souvent ? Oui. tres-souvent. 
Vont-ils souvent a Fairmount? Non, pas tres-souvent. Pourquoiy 
vont-ils? Ils y vont pour voir la machine hydraulique. (the water 
works.) Vont-ils plus souvent au musee? Oui. ils y vont plus sou- 
vent. — Sortons-nous aussi souvent que nos voisins a gauche ? Nous 
sortons moins souvent qu'eux. L'epicier va-t-il aussi souvent au 
marche que mon jardinier ? Je crois qu'il y va aussi souvent. Al- 
lumez-vous le gaz tous les jours'? Oui, nous Pallumons tous les 
soirs. X quelle heure votre domestique Pallume-t-il ? A present, il 
allume le premier bee a sept heures et demie et les autres plus tard. 
A quelle heure Peteint-il'? II Peteint a dix heures et demie dans le 
salon, et dans nos appartements, nous Peteignons a onze heures ou 
a onze heures et demie. 



At the beginning (commencement) of 
the exercise. 

Unwholesome. It is unwholesome 
weather. 

Damp, humid. How goes the tooth- 
ache ? 

Since when ? It is better. Excepted. 

Much obliged. 



Au commencement du theme. 

Malsain. C'est un temps malsain. 

Humid e. Comment va le mal de 

dents? 
Depuis quand ? II va mieux. Excepte. 
Bien oblige. 



TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 28\li.—Vingt-huitieme Legon, 28me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

Obs. 63. Do and Am, when used to interrogate, in the present tense, may 
be rendered by Est-ce que; which must be used with the first person sin- 
gular, of those verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would pro- 
duce an unpleasant or a difficult sound. 1 (Dir. 8.) 



Do I wish ? Am I willing ? 

Am I able ? Can I ? 

Am I doing ? Do I do ? 
What am I doing ? 



Est-ce que je veux ? 
Est-ce que je peux? 
Est-ce que je fais ? 
Qu' est-ce que je fais ? 



1 Verbs whose first person singular forms only one syllable, as : je sens, 
I feel ; je pre?ids, I take ; je tends, I tend ; jefonds, I melt : or whose last 
syllable sounds like je, such as : je mange, I eat ; je venge, I revenge ; je 
range, I range ; je songe, I dream : and others, such as : j'unis, I unite ; je 
ve*mets, I permit ; j'offre, I offer ; &c, &c. 



140 



TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



What do I say ? 

Where am I going to ? 

To whom do I speak ? 

Am I going ? 

Am I coming ? 

You are. Are you coming ? 

Do you tell or say ? 

I do say or tell. He says. 

He does not say. What does he not 

say ? 
What do we not say ? 



Qu'est-ce que je dis ? 

Ou est-ce que je vais ? 

A qui est-ce que je parle ? 

Est-ce que je vais ? 

Est-ce que je viens ? 

Vousvenez. Est-ce que vous venez ? 

Dites-vous ? Est-ce que vous dites? 

Je dis. II dit. 

II ne dit pas. Qu'est-ce qu'il ne 

dit pas ? 
Qu'est-ce que nous ne disons pas? 



Obs. 64. Some verbs, however, ending in e mute in the first person sin- 
gular, present tense, may be used interrogatively in that person, but then 
they change e mute into e with the acute accent, followed by je. 

Do 1 speak ? \ l™ 16 '** ? { P as si hon * ue) 

( Est-ce que je parle ? 

Do I love? 4 £ime-je? 

Est-ce que j aime ? 
Connaissez-vous cet homme ? 
Je ne le connais pas du tout. 
Votre frere le connait-il ? 
II le connait beaucoup. 
Buvez-vous du cidre ? 
Je commence a boire du cidre, mais 

mon frere boit du lait. 
Commencer a, commencant. 
Je commence a l'aimer. (a av. I' inf.) 
Commence-t-il a bien etudier ? 
Je commence a avoir froid — chaud^ 
II commence a avoir honte — sommeil. 
Nous commencons a avoir faim et 

soif. ($ 144. R. 1.) 
Mai — tres-mal — plus mal — trop mal. 
Votre oncle parle-t-il bien Anglais ? 
II le parle mal. 

lis l'ecrivent bien l'un et l'autre. 
Une minute, (fern.) Dans quelques 
minutes. 

ViNGT-HUiTiisME Theme. Ire Sec. 
Ecrivez le quantieme au commencement (at the beginning) du theme. 
Que pensez-vous du temps? Nous le trouvons tr es-desagr Sable. 
II est froid et humide. Je ne le trouve pas froid ; mais tres-humide. 
C'est un temps malsain. Tres-malsain, en verite. II n 7 est pas 
bon pour ceux qui ont des rhumes. Non, et je suis fache de vous 
dire que Louis en a un tres-mauvais. Depuis quand? Depuis 
mercredi. — J'ai Phonneur de vous souhaiter le bonsoir. Comment 
va le mal de dents'? II va mieux, bien oblige. J'en suis bien aise. 



Are you acquainted with that man ? 
I am not at all acquainted with him. 
Is your brother acquainted with him ? 
He is well acquainted with him. 
Do you drink cider ? 
I begin to drink cider, but my brother 

drinks milk. 
To begin to ^commence) beginning. 
I begin to like it. 
Does he begin to study well ? 
I begin to be cold — 'to be warm — 
He begins to be ashamed — sleepy. 
We commence to be hungry and 

thirsty. 
Badly, awkwardly. ($ 170.) 
Does your uncle speak English well ? 
He speaks it badly. 
They both write it well. 
A minute. In a few minutes. 



TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON, (l.) 141 

Comment se porte-t-on chez le general ? Tout le monde s ? y porte 
bien, excepte le valet irlandais. Qu ; a-t-il? Nous ne savons pas ce 
que c'est. Est-il tres-mal? Oui, il est oblige de restex dans son lit. 
Depuis quand est-il malade ? Depuis plusieurs jours. Cependant 
le Dr. croit qu ? il est un peu mieux. Quand est-il mieux • le ma- 
tin ou le soir? II est mieux a midi et plus mal le soir. Qu ; a Henri? 
II a mal a un coude. A quel? Au droit ou au gauche ? Je crois que 
c'est au gauche ; mais je n ; en suis pas sur. 

Do I read well? You do. — Do I speak pretty well? You do. — 
Does my little brother speak French well ? He does. — How does 
he write German ? He writes it badly. — Who writes it well ? Our 
young minister does. — Does he write it as well as the Swiss dentist? 
They both write it well, very well. I do not know who writes the 
best. — Do we speak badly ? You do not. — Do I drink too much ? 
You do. — Am I able to make hats? You are not; you are not a 
hatter. — Am I able to write a note ? You are. — Am I doing my 
exercise well? You are. — What am I doing? You are doing 
exercises. — What is my brother doing ? He is doing nothing. — 
What do I say? You say nothing. — Do I begin to speak? You 
do begin to speak. — Do I begin to speak well? You do not 
begin to speak well, (a bien parler,) but to read well, {mais a bien 
lire.) — Wjiere am I going to? You are going to your friend's. — Is 
he at home ? — Do I know ? Am I able to speak as often as the son 
of our neighbor? — He is able to speak oftener than you. — Can I 
work as much as he? You cannot. — Do I read as often as you? 
You do not, but you speak oftener than I. — Do I speak as well 
(aussi bien) as you? You do not speak as well as I. — Do I go to 
your house, or do you come to mine ? You come to mine, and I 
go to yours. — When do you come to mine? Every morning, at 
half past six. 

Do you know the Russian whom I know ? I do not know the 
one you know, but I know another. — Do you drink as much cider 
as wine ? I drink less of the latter than of the former. — Does the 
Pole drink as much as the Russian? He drinks just as much. — Do 
the Germans drink as much as the Poles? The latter drink more 
than the former. — Dost thou receive anything? I do. — What dost 
thou receive? I receive some money. — Does your friend receive 
books? He does. — What do we receive ? We receive some cider. 
— Do the Poles receive tobacco ? They do. — From whom (de qui) 
do the Spaniards receive money? They receive some from the 
{dies) English, and from the (des) French. 

Comptez-vous tous les jours en Francais? Oui, nous comptons. 
N ; aimez-vous pas a compter? (Let the pupil give his or her own 



142 



TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



answer.) Combien comptez-vous dans une minute 'a minute)? Je 
compte 125. — Et vous? Moi, je ne compte pas tant. Je ne compte 
que 98. — Et vous, et votre cousin Armando Nous comptons 128 
Est-ce plus que lui? Oui ; c'est plus. Combien de plus? Trois de 
plus. (30 1 .) C 7 est vrai, vous avez raison. Et vous ? combien comp- 
tez-vous de moins qu'enx? Je compte trois de moins. Combien 
de plus que lui ? Je compte 27 de plus que lui. C ; est beaucoup, 
n ; est-ce pas ? C ? est assez. du moins. 



A degree, 32°, zero, 75°, 100°, 212o. 
Thank God. 



Un degre, 32°, zero, 75°, 100°, 212°. 
Dieu merci. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



Avant, (de, avant un infinitif.) 
Parlez-vous avant d'ecouter ? 
J'ecoute avant de repondre. 

Obs. 65. As speak and listen have you for nominative, dispense with the 
second you, and use the infinitive mood after the preposition. (Rule 3.) 



Before, (previous to.) (R. 1.) 
Do you speak before you listen ? 
I listen before I answer. 



Does he go to market before he 
breakfasts ? 

To breakfast. To eat breakfast. 

He goes (there) before he writes. 

Do you take off your stockings be- 
fore you take off your shoes ? 

To depart, set out, start ; departing. 

"When do you intend to depart ? 

I set out to-morrow for Paris. 

I depart, thou startest, he sets out. 

Do they go to see their uncle before 
they start for Charleston? They do. 

To wet, to moisten, to damp, wetting. 

Wet, damp, (adjectives.) 

Are your shoes wet? 

Yes, they are quite wet. 



Va-t-il au marche avant de dejeuner ? 

Dejeuner, 1. 

II y va avant d'ecrire. 

Otez-vous vos bas avant d'oter vos 
souliers ? 

Partir,* 2; partant. 

Quand comptez-vous partir ? 

Je pars demain pour Paris. 

Jepars, tu pars, il part. 

Vont-ils voir leur oncle avant de par- 
tir pour Charleston ? lis y vont. 

Mouiller, 1. Mouillant. 

Mouille, (sing.) Mouilles, (plur.) 

Vos souliers sont-ils mouilles ? 

Oui, ils sont tout mouilles. 

Obs. 66. Tout, quite, being an adverb is invariable, that is, does not take 
an s. 



To dry, to get to dry. 

I dry, thou driest, he dries. (§ 144, 

R. 5.) 
Dry your shoes. 

Take a seat near the fire and dry 

your shoes and feet. 
It is very warm ; very cold. 
In use. Much, commonly, greatly, 

used. 
Almost, all, always, too much. 



Secher, 1. Faire secher. 

Je seche, tu seches, il seche. 

Sechez vos souliers (better) faites 

secher, &c. 
Prenez un siege pres du feu, et faites 

secher vos souliers et vos pieds. 
II fait grand chaud ; grand froid. 
En usage. En grand usage. 

Presque, presque tout, toujours, trop. 



TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 143 

Vingt-huitieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Ecrivez le jour du mois au commencement du theme. 

Mr., nous vous souhaitons le bonjour, et nous esperons que voua 
vous portez bien. Je vous suis bien oblige, Messieurs, et je vois avec 
plaisir que vous avez Pair de vous bien porter. Nous nous portons 
bien, Dieu merci. (thank God,) mais nous avons grand chaud, (very 
warm.) Je le crois, car, il fait grand chaud. A quel degre est le 
thermometre ? Le mien est a 80° ; mais celui du voisin est a 82 J. 
Vous parlez du thermometre de Fahrenheit. iPest-ce pas'? Oui, car 
c 7 est ici le seul en grand usage. Si ce temps continue je ne peux 
pas rester ici. Ou allez-vous? A Cape May. Quand p arte z- vous ? 
Je pars mardi ou jeudi. Partez-vous seul ? Non, je pars avec mon 
cousin. Pourquoi part-il avec vous? Parce qu : il est malade. Qu*a- 
t-il ? II a peur d'avoir le tic douloureux. Le tic douloureux ! Je 
suis bien fache de Papprendre. Nous en sommes tous faches. Je 
le crois. Vos souliers sont-ils mouilles? Je crois que non. S ; ils le 
sont, je peux vous en preter d'autres, et vous pouvez faire secher les 
votres. Non, merci. Vous etes bien bon. II est 8£ heures et Louis 
n'est pas encore ici. Ce matin il n ; est pas ponctuel comme a Pordi- 
naire. Mon habit est tout mouille et mon gilet aussi. Changez les 
et faites-les secher. Ou puis -je les faire secher? Donnez-les au 
domestique pour les mettre pres du feu. Les souliers et les bas de 
ce petit enfant sont mouilles. Jean, otez-les et faites-les secher; car 
le pauvre enfant commence a avoir froid. Oui, Mile. 

Do I receive as much Spanish money as American ? You receive 
more of the latter than of the former. — Do I receive as many people 
{autant de monde) as the Doctor? You do. — Who receives more 
than he ? more than we ? The apothecary does. — From whom (de 
qui) do your children receive books? They receive some from me, 
(de moi,) and from their friends. — Do the English receive as much 
Turkish as American cotton? They receive more American than 
Turkish cotton. — Our New Orleans merchants receive more French 
than English cloth, do they not? I believe they do. — What gloves 
do we receive? We receive French gloves. — How many books 
does your neighbor lend you? He lends me three more. (30 1 .) — 
When does the foreigner intend to depart? He intends to depart 
to-day. — Depart with him, can you not? Can I not? No, indeed: 
and you know very well that I am not ready. — But you can soon 
be ready. Do you think so? (le?) To be sure I do. Does the 
Swede depart soon ? He departs in a few minutes — Does he depart 
alone ? No, he takes a valet with him, because he does not speak 
English well enough to go alone. He is right. — Dost thou set out 



144 TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 

to-morrow ? Dost thou intend to go with, me ? No, for we do not 
intend to depart before 10 days. Then I have to bid you adieu. 

Do the Clintons (Les Clinton, (§ 140, Art. 5) answer you imme- 
diately when you write to them? They usually answer me imme- 
diately, when they are not sick. Well ; write to them to know if I 
can go to their house on Saturday, and tell them to answer directly. — 
Are you not going to read the dentists' note before you answer it? 
Yes, I am reading it now. Ah! pardon me, (pardonner.) — Does 
this Irish servant of yours (votre domestique irlandais, § 108) sweep 
your apartment before he makes your bed? No, he makes the bed 
before he sweeps the room. — Dost thou drink before thou goest out? 
I do. — Do you like to go to market before you eat breakfast? I do 
not, for I am almost always sick when I do it. — Henry, put on your 
shoes and stockings. No, indeed, I intend to put on my stockings 
before I put on my shoes. — Dost thou read first and translate after- 
wards ? Yes, I do so ) but I translate the exercise first, and write it 
afterwards. You do well; that is right-— Do you go to the Pole's 
house before you breakfast ? Yes, I do. — At what o'clock do your 
children breakfast ? They breakfast at seven o'clock. — Do you take 
snuff before breakfasting ? No, but I smoke after breakfast. — Does 
your son smoke also after breakfast? He does not smoke at all, and 
I am glad of it. Does he chew or snuff? No, he does neither. 



TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, 29th.— Vingt-neuvieme Legon, 29me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 

The French have two kinds of comparison ; that of equality, formed by 
autant de before nouns, and aussi, before adjectives or adverbs, and que 
after them ; (16 1 , 27 2 .) and that of inequality, formed by plus or moins, 
before, and que after the same parts of speech. The superlative is formed 
by prefixing to the comparative, not only the definite article le, les, but any 
of those which we have called articles (§ 1), mon, mes, &c. ce, cet, ces. 

Positif. Comparatif. Superlatif. 

Grand, plus grand, le plus grand. 

Petit, plus petit, mon plus petit. 

Riches, plus riches, ces plus riches. 

Pauvres, pluspauvres, mes plus pau- 
vres. 

Savant, plus savant, le plus savant 



Positive. 


Comparative, 


Superlative. 


Great, 


greater, 


the greatest. 


Small, 


smaller, 


my smallest. 


Rich, 


richer, 


these richest. 


Poor, 


poorer, 


my poorest. 



Learned, more learned, the most 

learned. 
Quickly, quicker, the quickest. 

Often, more often, most often. 



Vite, plus vite, le plus vite. 
Souvent,plussouvent,le plus sou- 
vent. 



TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, (l.) 



145 



This book is small, that is smaller, 
and this is the smallest of all. 

This hat is large, but that is larger. 

Is your hat as large as mine ? 

It is larger than yours. 
It is not so large as yours. 
Bulky, less bulky, the least bulky. 
Fine, less fine, the least fine. 
Slowly, not so slowly, the least 

slowly. 
Good, not so good, the least good. 
Are our neighbor's children as good 

as ours ? {good is sage when applied 

to children.) 
They are better than ours. 
They are not so good as ours, they 

are the least good of all. 

Obs. 67. To express the absolute superlative, that is, the highest degree, 
without comparison, the French, like the English, use one of the adverbs, 
tres, fort, bien, very; extremement, extremely; i?ifiniment, infinitely. 

Un tres-beau sofa. De tres-beaux 
sofas. 



Ce livre-ci est petit, celui-la est plus 
petit, et celui-ci est le plus petit 
de tous. 

Ce chapeau-ci est grand, mais celui- 
la est plus grand. 

Votre chapeau est-ii aussi grand que 
le mien ? 

II est plus grand que le votre. 

II est moins grand que le votre. 

Gros, moins gros, le moins gros. 

Beau, moins beau, le moins beau. 

Lentement, moins lentement, le 
moins lentement. 

Sage, moins sage, le moins sage. 

Les enfants de notre voisin sont-ils 
aussi sages que les notres ? 

lis sont plus sages que les notres. 
lis sont moins sages que les notres, 
ce sont les moins sages de tous. 



A very fine sofa. Very fine sofas. 
A very pretty knife. Very well. 



To be used to ... . 

To be used to it. 

Why do you speak more in English 

than in French ? 
Because we are used to it. (Obs. 48.) 

What are they used to take in the 

morning and evening ? 
They are used to take coffee in the 

morning and tea in the evening. 
What am I used to ? 
He is not yet used to it. 



Tres-bien, 



Un tres-joli couteau. 
fort bien. 

Etre accoutume a . . . . 

Y etre accoutume. ($ 50.) 

Pourquoi parlez-vous plus en Anglais 
qu'en Frangais ? 

Parce que nous y sommes accou- 
tumes. 

Que sont-ils accoutumes a prendre 
le matin et le soir ? 

lis sont accoutumes a prendre du 
cafe, le matin, et du the, le soir. 

A quoi est-ce que je suis accoutume ? 

II n'y est pas encore accoutume. 

Vingt-neuvieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Mettez le quantieme du mois ici en Francais. 

Faites-nous des questions aujourd'hui, s'il vous plait. Volontiers 

Quel temps fait-il? Qui peut me repondre ? Nous pouvons tous 

vous repondre. Commencez, M. Legris. Vous voulez savoir quel 

temps il fait? Oui, M., s'il vous plait. Je vais vous le dire avec 

grand plaisir, le plus grand plaisir du monde. Dites-le done, (then.) 

13 



146 TWENTY -NINTH LESSON. (1.) 

Laissez-moi voir si j'ai le Francais de unwholesome. Oh! oui; nous 
Pavons. Alors, il fait un temps humide et malsaiii. Oui, vous 
avez raison, il fait un temps humide et malsain, depuis deux ou 
trois jours. N 7 est-ce pas extraordinaire? Si fait: c'est extraordi- 
naire^ car le temps change tres-souvent. Mais il ne fait pas froid. 
Au contraire, il fait chaud. II fait presque toujours chaud quand il 
fait humide, n 7 est-ce pas? Oui, sans doute. Ce temps humide 
n'est pas bon pour le rhume du petit Robert, qu'en pensez-vous ? 
Je pense que non, et j 7 en suis fache, car c'est un bon petit garcon- 
Comment se porte le frere du docteur? II se porte tres-bien a pre- 
sent. Et comment va le vieux cuisinier du general ? II va mal. 
II est presque toujours malade, n'est-ce pas? Oui, mais ce n'est pas 
extraordinaire, car il est tres- vieux. 

Are you taller (grand) than I? I am taller than you. — Is your 
young brother taller than you? No, but I believe that he is just as tall. 
— Is thy leather hat as bad as my father's ? It is better, but not so 
black as his. — Are the clothes (les habits) of the Italians as fine as 
those of the Irish ? They are finer, but not so good. — Who makes 
the finest gloves? The French make them. — Who makes the 
finest cloth? The French and Spanish do. — Who has the finest 
horses ? Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine, but those of our 
friends are the finest of all. — Why do the French take wine at 
breakfast ? Because they are used to it. — See, those poor children 
have neither shoes nor stockings; are they not cold? No, indeed! 
they are used to it. — Am I used to write quick or slow ? You are 
used to write slowly; but your cousin is used to write very quick. — 
Who is more learned than this old Prussian ? I do not know who 
js more learned than he. — Is the minister more learned than the 
druggist? Yes, he is more learned than the druggist; but the law- 
yer is the mo^ learned of all. — Who is the richest merchant here? 

Mr. is the richest. — Do we read more books than the Dntch? 

We read more (of them) than they, but the Prussians read (of them) 
more than we, and the Russians read the least, (le moins.) 

Hast thou a finer garden than that of our physician ? I have a 
finer one than he. — Have the Americans a finer telegraph than the 
other nations ? They have the finest of all. — Are the shawls of this 
merchant larger and finer than those of that one ? They are larger, 
but not so fine. — Have we as fine children as our neighbors? We 
have finer ones. — Is the weather as bad as yesterday? No, it is not 
so bad ; but it is warmer, and I am not sorry for it. I believe it, for 
I know that you like the heat. — Do the French speak more quickly 
than the English, Irish, Scots, and other nations? I believe not. 
Some (quelqnes uns) speak quickly, but others speak slqwly. ($ 38.) 



TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



147 



—Are your clothes as wet as mine or his ? Yours are more wet 
than mine j but his are not wet at all. — Do you depart for Washing- 
ton, soon? I start to-morrow. — Do you go alone? No, cousin 
William starts with me. — When do you set out? We set out at 3 
o'clock. — George, go for some cigars; these gentlemen want some 
to smoke. — Yes, Sir: but before going, I have to put my shoes on. 
They are wet, and they are near the fire to dry. — Which of these 
two children is the better? (sage?) The one (N. pa. 43) who studies 
is better than the one who plays. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



Adjectifs Irriguliers . 
Bon, meilleur, mon meilleur. 

Mauvais, pire, le pire. 



Irregular Adjectives. 
Good, better, my best. 

Bad, worse, the worst. 

Small, little, less, the least. 

Irregular Adverbs. 
Well, better, the best. 

Bad, worse, the worst. 

Little, less, the least. 

Much, more, the most. 

Obs. 68. We may with equal correctness say : plus mauvais, plus mal, 
plus petit, but never plus bon, plus bien, plus peu. 

Obs. 69. Never use pire immediately before a noun. Do not say: un 
pire chien ; but, un plus mauvais chien. Votre chien est _pire que celui-ci 
is correct, but: plus mauvais, is to be preferred. 



Petit, 


moindre, 


le moindre. 




Adverbes Irreguliers. 


Bien, 


mieux, 


le mieux. 


Mal, 


pis. 


le pis. 


Peu, 


moins, 


le moins. 


Beaucoup, plus, 


le plus. 



A qui ? (Pronom poss. non relatif.) 
A qui est ce chapeau-ci ? 
C'est. C'est le mien — le sien — la 
votre. (§ 104, &c.) 

C'est le dictionnaire de mon oncle. 

A qui sont ces gants de chamois ? 
Ce sont les votres, les tiens, lesleurs. 
Ce sont les manteaux des enfants. 



Whose, (to whom ?) (§ 109.) 
Whose hat is this ? 
It is. It is mine — hers — yours. 

It is my uncle's dictionary, 

It is the dictionary of my uncle. 

It is my uncle's. 

Whose kid gloves are those ? 

They are ours — thine — theirs. (§ 39.) 

They are the children's cloaks. 

Who has the best rice ? 

Whose rice is the best ? 

The grocer has it. It is the grocer's. | L'epicier Pa. C'est celui de Pepicier. 

Who has the smallest feet ? 

Whose feet are the smallest ? 

Miss C. has the smallest. 

Miss C.'s are. 

That of my father is the finest. 

Whose ribbon is the handsomer, 

yours or mine ? Yours is, (so left 

out.) 



\ Qui 



ui a le meilleur riz ? 



> Qui a les plus petits pieds ? 

Mile. C. a les plus petits. 
Ce sont ceux de Mile. C. 
Celui de mon pere est le plus beau. 
Quel ruban est le plus beau ? Le 
votre ou le mien ? Le votre 
Z'est. 

Obs. 70. So, in similar sentences, whether expressed or not, is rendered 
in French, by le or V . 



148 



TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



Does that boy read better than the 

man? 
He does so. He does not (do so). 
Is this grain better than the last ? 

It is. It is much better. 

60 the Swedes write less than the 
Poles ? 

They write less than the other na- 
tions. 

Who makes most money ? The 
baker, the butcher, or the milkman ? 

They all make a great deal. 

Is your gardener good, or a good one ? 

He is, but his cousin is not. 

Here is. Here he is or it is. 

Here is some. 

Where are the big knives ? 

Here thev are. 



Ce gar§on lit-il mieux que Phomme 1 

II le fait. II ne le fait pas. 

Ce grain-ci est-il meilleur que le 

dernier ? 
II Z'est. II est beaucoup meilleur. 
Les Suedois ecrivent-ils moins que 

les Polonais ? 
lis ecrivent moins que les autrea 

nations. 
Qui fait le plus d' argent ? Le bou- 

langer, le boucher, ou le laitier ? 
lis en font tous beaucoup. 
Votre jardinier est-il bon ? 
II Test, mais son cousin ne l'est pas. 
Void. Le voici. 

En voici. 

Ou sont les gros couteaux ? 
Les voici. 

Vingt-neuvieme Theme. 2de See. 
Ici, n'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme, en Frangais. 

Vous avez Pair d'avoir froid. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait 
grand froid. A quel degre est le thermometre ? Je n'ai pas de ther- 
mometre; je ne sais pas a quel degre il est. Mais j'ai froid, ca, 
(§ 38, N. 6,) je le sais. Comment se porte le medecin ? II se porte 
plus mal. Son rhume est-il pire? Oui, il Pest. Quelqu'un a-t-il 
mal de tete 1 Moi, je Pai un pen ; avez-vous quelque chose a me don- 
ner? Oai, j'ai quelque chose qui est tres-bon pour le mal de tete. 
Donnez-le-moi. Je Pai dansmon portefeuille. Laissez-moi le cher- 
eher. Tres-bien, cherchez-le et donnez-le-moi. Je Pai a present. 
Le voici. Prer.ez-le. Je Pai. Lisez le papier pour savoir comment 
le preparer (to prepare) et le prendre. Je vous suis bien oblige. Je 
vais le lire tout de suite pour le preparer et le prendre. Preparez-le 
bien. Je vais essayer. Est-ce difficile a preparer? Non, ce n 7 est 
pas difficile a preparer. Adieu : je vais Parranger. Adieu, adieu. 

Whose big book is this? It is mine. — Whose hat is that? It is 
my father's. — Is your baker good? (or a good one?) He is good, 
but yours is better ; and that of the Prussian is the best of all our 
bakers. — Take some pretty velvet shoes. I have very pretty ones, 
but my brother has still prettier ones than I. — From whom (de qui) 
does he receive them? He receives them from his best friend in 
Paris. — Is your wine as good as mine? Here is some; taste it. anc 
then you may know, and tell me. Is it better, or as good, or worse ? 
It is better. — Does your merchant sell good knives? He sells the 
best. — Do we not read more books than the Irish ? Yes, we read 



THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) 149 

more than they ; but the Russians read (of them) more than we. and 
the Prussians read the most. — Why do they read the most ? Because 
they wish to be the most learned. — Do the merchants sell more 
sugar than coffee ? They sell more of the latter than of the former.^ 
Does your shoemaker make as many shoes as mine? — He makes 
more of them than yours. — Can you swim as well (aussi bien) as 
my son ? I can swim better than he ? but he can speak French better 
than I. — Does he read as well as you? He reads better than I. — 
Does the son of your neighbor go to market? No, he remains at 
home : he has sore feet. — Do you learn as well as our gardener's 
son ? I learn better than he ; but he works better than I. — Whose 
gun is the finest ? Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still 
finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one finer children than 
you ? No one has finer ones. — Does your son read as often as I % 
He reads oftener than you. — Does my brother speak French as often 
as you ? He speaks and reads it as often as I. — Do I write as much 
as you? You write more than I. — Do our neighbor's children read 
German as often as we? We do not read it so often as they. — Do 
we write it as often as they? They write oftener than we. — To 
whom do they write ? They write to their friends. — Do you read 
English books ? We read French books instead of reading English 
books. 



THIRTIETH LESSON, 30th.— Trentieme Legon, 30me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



To believe, believing. 

I believe, thou believest, he believes. 

I believe that you know it. 

I believe you know nothing of it. 

To put, put on. Put, put on, (impera.) 

Do I put on your kid gloves ? 

Does he not put on ? is he not putting ? 

He puts on. He does not. 

What do you put on ? I put this on. 

Do they put on anything more ? i Mettent-ils quelque chose dc plus ? 

Obs. 71. We saw in (Obs. 7,) that : quelque chose; ne . . . .rien and quel 
require de before the following adjective ; now we add : when a noun, pro* 
noun, number, or adjective precedes an adverb or past participle, the prepo 
sition de (as a connecting link) must be put before the adverb. 
13* 



Croire,* 4, croyant. 

Je crois, tu crois, il croit. 

Je crois que vous le savez. 

Je crois que vous n'en savez rien. 

Mettre. (25 1 .) Mettez, (impera.) 

Est-ce que je mets vos gants de cha- 
mois ? 

Est-ce qu'il ne met pas ? Ne met-il 
pas? 

II met. II ne met pas. 

Que mettez-vous ? Je mets ceci. 



150 



THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



They put nothing more. 

Do you go out ? I do. 

Do you not put on your big shoes ? 

Yes, I do. I do not go out without 

putting them on when the weather 

is bad. 
Without you, me, him. them, us, thee. 
Does he go out without taking his 

umbrella and his cloak ? 
He does not go out without taking 

them. 
To rain. Does it rain ? It does. 
Is the weather cloudy ? It is (so). 
Do I go out when the weather is 

cloudy ? Neither you nor we go 

out. 
Early. Early enough. 

As early as you, as they. 
He goes out as early as we. 
Too soon, too early. 
Too little, (adv.), too small, too great. 
You speak too little, and he too much 
Together. We go out together. 
Later than you. 
I go out later than you. • 
Do you go to the play as early as I ? 

I go thither earlier than you. 

Ea'Her, (sooner.) 

Does your father go thither earlier 

than I ? 
Try to go as soon as he. 



lis ne mettent rien de plus. 
Sortez-vous? Je sors. 
Ne mettez-vous pas vos gros souliers,? 
Si fait, je les mets. Je ne sors paa 

sans les mettre quand il faLt mau- 

vais temps. 
Sans vous, moi, lui, eux, nous, toi. 
Sort-il sans prendre son parapluie et 

son manteau? (R. 1.) 
II ne sort pas sans les prendre. 

Pleuvoir* 3. Pleut-il ? II pleut. 
Le temps est-il couvert ? II Z'est. 
Est-ce que je sors quand le temps 

est couvert ? Ni vous ni nous ne 

sortons. 
De bonne heure. D' assez bonne heure. 
D'aussibo7ine heure que vous.qu'eux. 
II sort d'aussi bonne heure que nous. 
Trop tot, de trop bonne heure. 
Trop peu, trop petit, trop grand. 
Vous parlez trop peu, et lui trop. 
Ensemble. Nous sortons ensemble. 
Plus tard que vous. 
Je sors plus tard que vous. 
Allez-vousau spectacle d'aussi bonne 

heure que moi ? 
J'y vais plus tot (de meilleure heure) 

que vous. 
Plus tot, (de meilleure heure.) 
Votre pere y va-t-ii plus tot que moi, 

(de meilleure heure que moi ?) 
Essay ez J'y aller aussi tot que lui. 



Trentieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
N'oubliez pas la date ici. 
Bon jour, M., vous vous portez bien, j'espere ; mais pourquoi avez- 
vous un parapluie ? Pleut-il ? Non, il ne pleut pas encore ; mais 
le temps est couvert, tres-couvert, et quand il /'est, je ne sors pas 
sans prendre un parapluie. Vous avez raison de le faire, car il est 
tres-desagreable d'etre dehors sans parapluie, quand il pleut. Ne 
pleut-il pas a present? Si fait, je crois qu'il commence a pleuvoir. 
Oui, c'est vrai. II commence a pleuvoir, mais pas beaucoup encore. 
Moi, je suis bien aise de voir lapluie, (the rain,) car nous avonstrop 
de poussiere. C'est vrai, vous n'avez pas tort; il fait beaucoup trop 
de poussiere. N ; avez-vous pas mal aux yeux quand il fait de la 
poussiere 1 Si fait, j 7 y ai souvent mal alors. Pas moi. Comment 



THIRTIETH LESSON. (1.) 151 

se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde y est assez bien. Per- 
sonne n'est malade, excepte notre domestique. Qu'a-t-il? II a un 
gros rhume et un peu mal aux dents. — II pleut, mais il ne fait pas 
froid, n'est-ce pas ? C'est vrai, il ne fait pas froid, mais tres-humide 
et malsain. Nous le croyons comme vous. Quand il fait froid et 
humide ; mettez quelque chose de plus. Et quand il fait chaud, 
quelque chose de moins, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, c'est cela. C'est le 
plus prudent. 

Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play ? I put on 
my French coat to go. — Do you put on your kid gloves before you 
put on your big sho^s ? I put on my overshoes before I put on my 
kid gloves. — Does the lawyer put on his round hat before he puts 
on his blue coat ? He puts on his coat first, instead of putting on 
his round hat. — Is he not right in doing so ? Yes, he is. — Do you 
go out early, every morning ? Yes, we do. — Do you go out when 
your son does ? Yes, we go out together. — Early ? No, not very 
early. We breakfast first — Do you breakfast together? To be 
sure. — At what o'clock do you begin to breakfast? We begin at 
half past 6. (Do you, indeed?) En verite? Then you breakfast 
early. — Do you eat dinner early, too ? I think we dine earlier than 
you, for we dine at half past one. — Is it possible? Do you dine as 
early as that? — We dine then, when we are all at home : but if we 
wait for those who are absent, (absents,) then we dine together, and 
later. — Does your uncle write before he breakfasts ? No, he does 
not. — What does he ? He reads the paper. — Is he fond of reading 
the paper? Yes, he likes it very much. — When it is cloudy wea- 
ther, does he go out without his umbrella ? No, he always takes 
it. — Does he often go to the museum ? He does, often. — Does he 
go there oftener than your cousin ? No, they always go together. 

Do you translate your exercise early or late ? I alwaj^s 
translate it in the morning, as early as I can. — Do you translate 
it from the book or do you read it, when you recite it to your 
teacher ? We translate it instead of reading it, when we recite it 
to him. — Do you begin to like mutton? No, I cannot bear it. — 
Does your cousin like it? No, he does not; he cannot bear it. — 
But your uncle William does like it j don't he ? He ! yes, he likes 
it. — Do you eat supper early? We do not eat supper late. — At what 
o'clock do they take tea at the doctor's? They take tea quite late. 
— Later than you do? Yes, much later; but at the general's they 
take it very early. — Do the Pole and Russian go early to the con- 
cert ? Yes, they do. — Let us go earlier than they ; will you ? Will- 
ingly. Let us go before them. — At what o'clock can you be ready? 
[ can be ready at 6 or J past 6. It is soon enough; is it not? I 



THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



believe so; for the concert does not begin before 7. — Do you nol 
put on something more ? No, this is enough : I wish nothing more. 
— Do I write too much? No, but you talk (speak) too much. — Do 
I speak more than you? You do, very often, and so does your 
brother. — Do you count quick ? Yes, in English I count pretty 
fast. — No, I mean in French. — I do not count very fast in French. — 
Does he count as fast as you ? Who ? This youth ? Yes, he ; this 
youth. Do I know ? — How many do you count in a minute ? — How 
many does he count ? Try. both of you. — We are going to try to 
count as fast as we can. — Very w r ell ; try to do it. — Must we try 
anything more ? No, nothing more, now. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



Already, yet. Is it already done ? 

Do you speak already ? 

Does he start already ? (depart.) 

Not yet. No, not yet. 

I do not speak yet. 

He departs immediately. 

Do you finish your exercise already ? 

I finish it at this very moment, {time.) 

Do you give us anything to do ? 

Do I not always give you something 
to do? 

Obs. 72. We have seen, in the preceding lessons, that when two verbs 
are joined, the first sometimes requires no preposition 1 to connect itself 
with the second ; that sometimes it takes the preposition a ; 2 at others de. 3 
See lists of those verbs <'§ 156), preceded by a short explanation. 

The scholar was directed to form for himself lists of those verbs, of nouns, 
adjectives, &c, as they are presented in the vocabularies. In order to see 
how he has performed that task, I here insert the model of a dialogue on 
the subject, which teachers may modify according to circumstances. 



Deja. Est-ce deja fait ? 

Parlez-vous deja ? 

Part-il deja ? 

Ne . . . pas encore. Non, pas encore. 

Je ne parle pas encore. 

II part tout de suite. 

Finissez-vous deja votre theme ? 

Je le finis a present mtme. 

Nous donnez-vous quelque chose a 

faire ? 
Est-ce que je ne vous donne pas 

toujours quelque chose a faire ? 



Mr. Armand, have you a catalogue 
of the verbs which govern other 
verbs without a preposition ? Yes, 
Sir, I have. Which is the first verb 
on your catalogue ? It is voulez- 
vovs ? That is right. But instead 
of writing down voulez-vous ? make 
use of the infinitive. Do you know 
it ? Yes, Sir, I do. It is vouloir, 
is it not ? Yes, that is it. So, your 
first verb which governs another 



M. Armand, avez-vous un catalogue 
des verbes qui en gouvernent d'au- 
tres sans preposition ? Ou/ M-. 
j'en ai un. Quel est le premier 
verbe sur votre catalogue ? C'est 
voulez-vous? C'est bien. Mais 
au lieu d'ecrire, voulez-vous ? 
faites usage de l'infinitif. Le savez- 
vous ? Oui, M.,je le sais. C'esl 
vouloir, n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'es/ 
cela. Ainsi, votre premier verba 



W18 1 , 19 1 .) 



2 (21 2 , 253.) 



'(17 1 , 22 2 .) 



THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



153 



without a preposition is voutoir, is 
it not ? Yes, Sir, it is that. In 
what vocabulary is it ? I do not 
know, but. I have the folio, (page.) 
That will do. What is the second 
verb of your catalogue ? It is allez- 
vous ? What is its infinitive ? It 
is oiler. Very well. Make use of 
aller, instead of allez-vous ? On 
what page is it ? On the. . . . 



To hear, to understand. Hearing. 

I understand. I do not understand. 

Do you understand me ? I do. 

I understand you in part. 

I do not understand you at all. 

Is it possible ? Do you not understand 

a single word ? No, not a single 

one. 

Obs. 73. The infinitive has no preposition before it when it is used in an 
absolute sense, or as a nominative case. 



qui en gouverne un autre sans 
preposition est vouloir, n'est-ce 
pas? Oui, M., c'est cela. Dans 
quel vocabulaire est-il ? Je ne 
sais; mais j'ai le feuillet. Cela 
sujfit. Quel est le second verbe 
de votre catalogue ? C'est allez- 
vous ? Quel en est Vinjinitif? 
(§ 31.) C'est aller. Tres-bien. 
Faites usage de aller au lieu de 
allez-vous ? A quel feuillet est- 
il ? Au 

Entendre, 4. Entendant. 

T entends. Je n 1 entends pas. 

M* entendez-vous ? Je vous entends. 

Je vous entends en partie. 

Je ne vous entends pas du tout. 

Est-il possible ? N'entendez-vous 
pas un seul mot ? Non, pas un 
seul. 



To eat too much is dangerous. 

To speak too much is foolish. 

To do good to those who have offended 

us, is a commendable action. 
Sometimes. Several times. 
Never mind, no matter. 



Manger trop est danger eux. 

Parler trop est imprudent. 

Faire du bien a ceux qui nous ont 

offenses, est une action louable. 
Quelque fois. Plusieurs fois. 
W importe. 



Trentieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
N'oubliez pas le quantieme en Francois. 
Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de 
vous voir? Quelque fois bien, quelque fois mal; mais vous. com- 
ment vous etes-vous porte ? Je me suis toujours bien porte. Je le 
crois, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le pensez-vous 1 Tout le monde 
me dit que j'ai Pair malade. Moi, au contraire. je pense que vous 
avez tres-bon air. Mais, ce petit garcon-la ira pas bon air. C'est 
vrai, et je crois qu'il est un peu malade. L'etes-vous, mon petit 
ami? Oui. M., j'ai un peu mal de tete. Depuis quand? Depuis 
ce matin de bonne heure. Avant dejeuner? Oui, un peu avant. 
Entendez-vous ce que ce petit garcon dit ? Non, je ne 1 'entends pas 
bien. L'entendez-vous, vous? Oui, je l'entends parfaitement, parce 
que je suis accoutume a l'entendre. Et moi, je ne l'entends pas, 
parce que je n'y suis pas accoutume. Vous avez raison. Voyez- 
vous quelquefois le cousin du vieux general? Je le vois sou vent: 
mais savez-vous qu'il part? Pour ou? (where to?) Pour la Cali- 



154 THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 

fornie. Est-il possible? Quand part-ill Je crois qu'il est deja pret 
a partir. Dans quel batiment part-in II part dans le .... Est-ce 
un bon batiment'? Je crois que oui. N'est-ce pas le batiment de 

M. C ? Non, il n'est plus a Mr. C ; mais a M. H 

Allons le voir. Oui, allons-y. Mais, voyez do7ic 7 (see there ,) il pleut. 
N'importe. Prenons nos parapluies. Je n'aUpas le mien ici. N'im- 
porte. Nous pouvons vous en preter un. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas 
le vdtre ? Je ne le prends pas toujours quand le temps est couvert. 
Moi, au contraire, je ne sors pas sans prendre le mien quand le 
temps est couvert. Vous etes plus prudent que moi. N'importe. 
Partons. Vous faut-il un mouchoir de plus ? J'en ai un ; c'est assez. 

Is my Italian hat too large ? It is neither too large nor too small. — 
Do you speak French oftener than English? I speak the latter 
oftener than the former. — Do your uncle and cousin buy much New 
York corn ? They buy but little. — Have I enough fresh bread ? You 
have only a little, but enough. — Is it late ! Why do you believe it is 
late ? Because I begin to be sleepy, (a avoir sommeil.) You may 
be sleepy, but it is not late. — What o'clock is it ? It is only half past 
nine. — Is it too late to go to your father's? Why do you wish to go 
to my father's? I wish to return {rendre) him this French book. — 
Is it, (3, §39,) a pretty book? It is a very pretty book. Will you 
conduct me there ? Can you not find the way alone ? I believe I 
cannot in the evening. — I do not wish to go there now. Give me 
the book, I can return it to him. No; I have to return it to him 
myself. (Moi-meme, $ 4l£.) Very well. Do it, then. — Does the 
young Spaniard buy an Arabian horse ? He cannot buy one. — Why ? 
[s he poor? He is not poor; he is richer than you. Why can he 
not buy one then ? Because {no Arabian horse can be found here) he 
cannot find any Arabian horse here. — Is this Swiss as learned as that 
Pole ? He is just as learned, I believe ; but you are more learned 
than they and I. — Are you studying already? No, not yet. I am 
smoking. — Do you smoke so early ? Yes, sometimes ; when I am 
cold. 

Do you understand that gentleman ? I do. — Is he learned ? He 
is. — What is he ? A lawyer ? A minister ? An apothecary ? A mer- 
chant? Or nothing at all? I believe he is a little of everything, (un 
peu de tout.) — Is your horse worse than mine ? It is not so bad as 
yours. — Is mine worse than the Dutchman's? It is worse. It is the 
worst horse (Obs. 69) that I know, (connaisse* subjunct.) Do you 
give those men less silver than paper? (Dir. 3.) I give them more 
of the former than of the latter; for some of them cannot read, and 
they do not like the paper. — Who receives the most money? The 
English do. — Cannot your sen write a note in French ? He cannot, 



THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 155 

but he begins to read a little. — Do the Americans write more than 
we 1 They write less than we • but the Italians write the least. — 
Are they as rich as the Americans? They are less rich than they. — 
Are your birds as fine as our neighbor's 1 They are less fine • but 
never mind, ours are fine enough. Faites du bien ; do you under- 
stand that, Mr. Charles ? Is it do well ? No, Sir, that's not it, or it 
is not that. Then I do not understand it all, but in part. And you, 
Mr. Durand, do you understand it? I believe I do not understand it. 
Never mind. Who understands it ? I. What is its English ? ( $ 3 1-1.) 
Do good. That's right. I see that you understand it. I believe I do. 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. RESUME. 

L'oiseau a-t-il son grain ? Non, il ne Fa pas. Ne le lui donnez- 
vous pas tous les matins? Si fait, quand j'y pense; mais aujour- 
d'hui il n'a pas faim, il ne mange pas, parce qu'il a mal au pied. 
— Qui a le pistolet de Petranger? Personne ne Pa. — Avez-vous les 
porte-feuilles de cuir de ces deux matelots? Je n'ai que le porte- 
feuille de Fun d'eux. Je ne sais pas qui a celui de Pautre. Est-ce 
celui du grand et vieux que vous avez? Non. c'est celui du jeune 
et petit que nous avons. N'allez-vous pas le lui rendre ? Si fait, 
s'il le veut: mais il dit qu'il n'en a pas besoin. N'a-t-il plus d'ar- 
gent? Je crois que non; du moins, il n ; a plus de billets. — Le bceuf 
et le cheval ont-ils leur foin ? Oui, ils ont leur foin. Mangent-ils le 
foin que vous leur donnez? Ils le trouvent bon, car ils le mangent 
bien. Que mangent-ils encore ? Ils mangent leur grain. — Qu'a ce 
garcon? Lequel? Le bon garcon. Lui? il a toujours quelque 
chose de joli. — L'enfant du tailleur a-t-il quelque chose de vieux ou 
de vilain ? Non, il n'a rien de vieux ni de vilain ; mais il a un joli 
porte-crayon d'acier. 

Qu'avez-vous ? Rien. — Qu'a M. Carnot? II n'a rien. — Qu'a son 
frere? Qui? le frere de Carnot? Oui, son frere. II n' a rien. — Ce 
jeune homme-la a-t-il faim ? Non, il n'a pas faim, car il a du pain, 
du fromage, des biscuits, et il n'en mange pas. — Pourquoi faites- 
vouscela 7 Nous avons honte de vous. Quoi ! Vous avez honte de 
ce que je fais? Nous en avons honte, pour vous. Vous etes bien 
bon, en verite ! — Ils ont soif; avez-vous beaucoup de cafe ce soir a 
leur donner? Je n'en ai guere; mais j'en ai assez pour eux. — Que 
pensez-vous de Phabit de ce garcon-la? II a trop de boutons, n'est- 
ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison de le dire, et son gilet n'en a pas 
assez. Combien en a-t-il ? II n'en a que deux, je crois. — Le fermier 
n ; a-t-il pas de vieux chevaux ? Non, il n'en a que de jeunes. — Nous 
avons faim, avez-vous du pain a nous donner? Je n'ai pas de pain 
mais j ; ai d'excellents biscuits. — Le jeune etranger a-t-il soif? Je croip 



156 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, (l.) 

que oui, car il boit souvent ($ 170 ) II boit quoi? Un peu de kit, 
un peu de vin. 

J : ai besoin de savon ; dites-moi ou je puis en trouver de bon ? 

Vous pouvez en acheter de tres-bon chez M Ou est son 

magasin? Dans la rue Chestnut, pres de la.... Je vous re- 
m^rcie. De rien. N 7 avez-vous besoin de rien de plus! Non pas 
ce matin. — Qui a le gros et grand couteau du cuisinier? En a-t-il 
besoin pour tuer quelque chose % Je ne sais pas pourquoi il en a 
besoin • mais il le cherche. L ; avez-vous ? Savez-vous ou il peut 
le trouver! Non, je n ? en sais rien. — Le Hollandais a-t-il quelque 
chose a boire 1 Pourquoi? A-t-il soif? Oui, il a soif, et le Prussien, 
PIrlandais, et FEcossais ont soif aussi. Donnez-leur du vin, s'ils ont 
soif, et de vieux pain, s ; ils ont faim. — Ce Suisse n'a pas bon air; est-il 
malade ? Je ne sais pas, et comme il ne parle ni Anglais ni Francais 
nous ne pouvons pas parler ensemble. Qu'est-ce qu'il parle ? Suisse, 
je pense. — Quel joli oiseau Mile. Emilie a ! Qu'est-ce que c'est ? 
Je n 7 en sais pas le nom. Chante-t-il ? Parle-t-il % N'importe. S'il 
est joli, n'est-ce pas assez? C ; est beaucoup; mais s'il fait quelque 
chose de plus, c'est encore meilJeur. 

Madame Leblanc, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment se 
porte-t-on chez vous ? Tout le monde se porte bien, je vous remercie. 
Entrez; venez vous asseoir. Non, je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. 
Pourquoi done ? J'ai a aller chez notre epicier pour acheter beau- 
coup de choses. Qu'avez-vous a acheter'? Je ne peux pas vous 
dire tout, mais en voici le catalogue. Lisez-le, si vous voulez savoir 
ce qu ; il nous faut. — Voyons. D'abord : dubeurre. Quoi ! n'achetez- 
vous pas votre beurre au marche ? Si fait, mais quand nous ne 
pouvons pas y en trouver de bon, je vais chez cet epicier, ou je suis 
sure (fem.) d'en trouver de bon, d'excellent. C 7 est bon a savoir. 
Du sucre blanc, du poivre, des biscuits, du fromage, du vinaigre, du 
sel, &c, &c. C'est assez. En verite, votre catalogue est bien (very) 
long. Mais pourquoi n ; achetez-vous pas tout cela pres de chez 
vous % N'y avez-vous pas des epiciers ? Si fait, nous en avons, 
mais leurs articles ne sont pas aussi bons que ceux de celui chez 
qui je vais. 



THIRTY-FIRST LESSON, 31st.— Trente et unieme Legon, 31me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE.— Du Participe Passe. 

The Past Participle is usually placed after the auxiliaries, to have, avoir, 
and to be, etre, to form the pastor compound tenses. The past participles 
of regular verbs may be formed by changing the terminations of the infini 



THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



157 



tive, for the first conjugation into e with the acute accent, thus : parler-— 
parle ; for the second, into i, thus : jinir — -jinx ; for the third, into u, 
thus : recevoir — regu ; and for the fourth, also into u, thus : vendre — vendu. 
Examples : — 



PREMIERE CONJUGAISON. 



Inf. 




P. P. 


Inf. 




P.P. 


Aimer, 


to love, 


aime. 


Batir, 


to build, 


bdti. 


Pleurer, 


to weep, 


pleure. 


Gemir, 


to sigh, 


gemi. 


Manger, 


to eat, 


mange. 


Benir, 


to bless, 


beni. 


Commencer, 


to begin, 


commence. 


Choisir, 


to choose, 


choisi. 


TROISIEME CONJUGAISON. 


QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. 


Devoir, 


to owe, 


du. 1 


Vendre, 


to sell, 


vendu. 


Concevoir, 


to conceive 


, congu. 


Rendre, 


to render, 


rendu. 


Recevoir, 


to receive, 


regu. 


Entendre, 


to hear, 


entendu 


Apercevoir, 


to perceive 


, apergu. 


Defendre, 


to defend, 


defendu 


To be, 


been. 




Ittre* 


tie* 





SECONDE CONJUGAISON. 



Perfect Tense. 

Have you been to market ? 

I have (been there^. I have not. 

Have I been there ? You have. 

Have you been there ? Have you not ? 

Has he been there ? Has he not ? 

He has been there. He has not. 
Ever. Never. 

A bridge. To the iron bridge. 

The covered bridge. This wire bridge. 

Have you ever been at the bridge ? 

I have never been there. 

Thou hast never been there. 

He has never been there. 

You have never been there. 

Mr. Brunet, have you a catalogue of 
the verbs which govern other verbs 
with the preposition a? No, Sir, 
I have no catalogue of them. Make 
one, if you please. Write down in 
French: Verbs with the preposi- 
tion a. Have you the title now ? 
Not quite yet, Sir. — Now, I have 
it. Read it aloud, if you please. 



Parfait ou Present Compose. 
Avez-vous ete au marche ? 3 
J'y ai e'te. Je n'y ai pas ete. 

Y ai-je ete ? Vous y avez ete. 

Y avez-vous ete ? N'y avez-vous 
pas ete ? 

Y a-t-il ete ? N'y a-t-il pas ete ? 
II y a ete. Tl n'y a pas ete. 

Jamais. Ne. . .jamais. 

Tin pont. Au pont defer. 

Lepontcouvert. Ce pont defil defer. 

Avez-vous jamais ete au pont ? 

Je n'y ai jamais ete. 

Tu n'y as jamais ete. 

II n'y a jamais ete. 

Vous n'y avez jamais ete. 

M. Brunet, avez-vous un catalogue 
des verbes qui en gouvernent 
d'autres avec la preposition a? 
Non, M., je n'en ai pas de cata- 
logue. Faites-en un, s'il vous plait. 
Ecrivez en Frangais : Verbs with 
the preposition d. Avez-vous le 
titre a present ? Non pas tout- 
a-fait encore. — A present, je l'ai. 



1 It will be perceived, that in the third conjugation it is not oir, but evoir, 
which in the past participle must be changed into u. Irregulars hereafter. 

2 The pupil, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail 
to mark in his list the past participles of those verbs. 

3 Avoir He is used for went and did go. 

14 



158 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



Verbes avec la preposition a. 
That's it. Now, what is the first 
verb of that class which you have 
to set down, do you know ? Not 
yet, Sir. — You may find it if you 
look for it. Where can I find it ? 
In some of the vocabularies. I am 
going to look for it. I believe it is 
the verb to have, at the 21st vo- 
cabulary, 2d section. 



Lisez-le haut, s'il vous 
Verbes avec la preposition a. C'est 
cela. A present, quel est le pre- 
mier verbe de cette classe (fem.) 
que vous avez a ecrire ? Le savez- 
vous ? Non pas encore, M. — Voua 
pouvez le trouver, si vous le 
cherchez. Ou puis-je le trouver ? 
Dans quelques uns des vocabu- 
laires. Je vais le chercher. Je crois 
que c'est le verbe Avoir, au 21me 
vocabulaire, 2de section. 

Trente et unieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
N'oubliez pas le quantieme. 

Bon jour, Messieurs, il fait chaud, n ; est-ce pas ? Pas trop chaud. 
Pas aussi chaud qu'au commencement du mois. Vous croyez? 
Oui, je le crois, ou plutot (rather) j'en suis sur, car le thermometre 
n'est, a present qu'a 78 ou 79 degres, et au commencement du mois, 
il a ete (was up) a 81 et 82. Je n'ai rien a dire a cela, vous avez 
raison. Mais comment va ? Cela va assez bien. Se porte-t-on 
bien chez vous? Pas tout le monde. Qui est malade ? Jules a 
ete malade, mais il est mieux a present, je puis dire presque bien. 
Je l'apprends avec plaisir. Jeanne a mal au pied droit, et ne peut pas 
sortir; Victor a mal de tete depuis trois jours. Je suis bien fache 
de cela. Ne trouvez-vous pas la poussiere bien desagreable ? Si 
fait, mais corame le temps est couvert, j'espere que nous allons 
avoir de la pluie. Je Pespere aussi. Mes amis m'ont dit de vous 
presenter leurs compliments, {present their compliments to you.) Je 
leur suis tres-oblige. Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de leur pre- 
senter les miens ? Sans doute. 

Where have you been 1 I went to the market to buy some fresh 
butter. — Have you been to the ball? I have. (Dir. 1.) — Did I not 
go to the bridge with you? Yes, you did. — Hast thou been to the 
play ? No, I have not. — Has your oldest son ever been to the thea- 
tre? He has never been there, but his young brother has (been 
there). — Hast thou already been to my large store? I never was 
there, (have never been.) — Do you intend to go there ? I do. — When 
will you go? I will to-morrow, if I can. — At what o'clock? — Why 
do you wish to know? — Because I wish to be there, if you come. — 
Very well; at 12 o'clock. — Has your good uncle already been in 
my large garden ? He has not yet been there. — He intends to see 
it; does he not? I believe he does. — When can he go there? To- 
day, may be. — Have you already been to the wire bridge? No. not 
yet; but I have been to the 3overed bridge. — Have you not been to 



THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



159 



ihe other ? Is it possible ! No, I have not yet ; but I intend to go 
soon, if I have time to go. — Go there early in the morning ; that is 
the best time. — I have been somewhere early every morning. 

Has your uncle been at the lawyer's office ? Yes, he has. — Has 
he been to the wharf and museum ? He was at the former, but he 
has not yet gone to the latter. — Are you not going to take your two 
cousins there? No, they have already been there. — Have the^ 
indeed ! When did they go? They went yesterday. — Did they gc 
alone; without you? They did not go alone ; we went together. — 
How many went together ? Five or six. — Has the Italian been to 
the workshop of the joiner or that of the painter? He has been 
neither in the one nor in the other, but he has been all the day with 
the German dentist. — Is not that German or Prussian dentist in our 
parlor now? He has been there, but he is no longer (no more) 
there. — When was he (has he been) there ? This morning, early. 
— Before breakfast? Yes, before breakfast. — Has the son of our 
gardener been to market? I believe he is there now. — What does 
he intend to do there ? He intends first to sell his cabbages and 
several other things, and then to buy some chickens, corn, (Dir. 2,) 
wine, cheese, and cider. Is that all he has to buy? No, he has 
to buy several other articles ; but he is going to buy them at the 
grocer's. — What other articles is he going to buy? Tea, coffee, 
sugar, biscuits, cakes, and pepper. 

Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. 



Haye you already been at the play ? 

I have already been there, and he too. 

You have already been there, have 
you not ? I have been there seve- 
ral times. 

I have not yet been there. 

Hast thou ever been there alone ? 

I have neve* been there alone. 

Where have we never been ? 

We have never been at the bridge. 

At which bridge has he been ? 

He was (has been) at the wire one. 

We have not yet been there. 

Thou hast not yet been there. 

You have not yet been there. 

He has not yet been there. 

Have Julius and Lewis ever been at 
the museum ? (Did they ever go ?) 

They have not yet been there. 

Never mind. They may go there 
this evening or on Tuesday. 



Avez-vous deja ete au spectacle ? 
J'y ai deja ete, et lui aussi. 
Vous y avez deja ete, n'est-ce pas ? 
J'y ai deja ete plusieurs fois. 

Je n'y ai pas encore ete. 

Y as-tu jamais ete seul ? 

Je n'y ai jamais ete seul. 

Ou n'avons-nous jamais ete ? 

Nous n'avons jamais ete au pont. 

A quel pont a-t-il ete ? 

II a ete* a celui de fil de fer. 

Nous n'y avons pas encore 6t6. 

Tu n'y as pas encore ete. 

Vous n'y avez pas encore efe. 

II n'y a pas encore ete. 

Jules et Louis ont-ils jamais 6te au 

musee ? 
lis n'y ont pas encore ete. 
N'importe. lis peuvent y aller, ce 

soir ou mardi. 



160 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



Where did you go this morning ? 
I went to (have been in) the garden. 
Where has thy uncle been ? (Did he 

go?) 
He went to the store near the bridge. 
Did he go there as early as I ? 

He was there earlier than you. 



Ou avez-vous ete ce matin ? 

J'ai €te au jar din. 

Ou ton oncle a-t-il ete ? 

II a ete au magasin pres du pont. 
Y a-t-il €16 d'aussi bonne heure que 

moi ? 
II y a ete' de meilleure heure que vous. 



Obs. 74. Ete, past participle of the verb etre, to be, is in French often 
employed for alle, past participle of the verb alter, to go. We say fat 
ete au spectacle, when the meaning is, that I went to the play, and am re- 
turned from it ; and, il est alle au spectacle, that he is gone to the play, but 
is not yet returned. Accordingly it is better to say, in the first, and second 
persons sing, and plur. : Ty ax ete, I have been there ; tuy as ete, thou hast 
been there; nous y avons ete, we have been there; vous y avez ete, you 
have been there, — than, fy suis alle t tu y es alle, nous y sommes alles, vous 
y etes alles, when motion is not particularly to be expressed. 



To have, to get. Had, got. 

Have you had my book ? 

I have had it. I did get it. 

I have not had it. Have I had it ? 

You have had it. You had it not. 

Who has had it ? You had it. 

I have had it, but I have it no longer. 



Avoir* 3. eu. 1 

Avez-vous eu mon livre ? 
Je Vai eu, (not j'ai l'eu, § 52.) 
Je ne Vai pas eu. jL'az-je eu? 
Vous V avez eu. VousneZ'avezpaseu. 
Qui Va eu ? Vous Vavez eu. (Dir. 8.) 
Je l'ai eu, mais je ne l'ai plus. 



Trente et unieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Ecrivez la date en Frangais ici. 
Mile. Clara, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Comment vous etes- 
vous forth (fern.) depuis mardi dernier, jour de notre lecon? Je 
me suis tres-bien portee, je vous remercie. Je le crois, car vous avez 
tres-bon air. Comment se porte M. Jean ? Jean n'est pas bien du 
tout. Alors je pense qu'il ne va pas venir aujourd'hui. Je ne sais 
pas, car il aime beaucoup a prendre lecon. Aussi, ii apprend bien, 
car il etudie aussi bien que possible. Les autres ecoliers vont-ils 
venir ? Pourquoi pas ? II est un peu tard, n'est-ce pas ? II n'est 
que 5 heures et 3 minutes. Est-ce tout? n'est-il pas 5 heures el 
10? Non, j'ai l'heure exacte. Je crois qu'ils sont ici, a present. Oui, 
c'est vrai, les voici. J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer, Messieurs. Ah ! 
M. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. II fait chaud, n'est-ce pas? 
Je trouve qu'il fait agreable. Nous avons un air frais (cool) et agre- 
able. Mais le soleil est chaud. M'entendez-vous? Je n'entends 
pas tout. J'entends une partie. Vous entendez le mot : chaud, 
n'est-ce pas? Oui, j'entends cela. Que n'entendez-vous pas alors? 

1 Eu. This combination, throughout the verb avoir, sounds like French 
u. (See Pronun.) 



THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 161 

Un mot au commencement. Est-ce le mot: soleil, que vous n'en 
tendez pas ? Oui, c'est celui-la. Savez-vous si M. Louis l'entend . 
Je crois qu'il ne l'entend pas. Je vais vous en dire l'Anglais. C'est: 
the sun. Entendez-vous la phrase a present? Oui, parfaitement. 
Je peux vous en donner PAnglais. Faites-le, s'il vous plait. C'est: 
the sun is warm or hot. Tres-bien, c'est vrai. 

Have you a mind to write, translate, or study an exercise ? I have 
a mind to translate and write one. (Dir. 2.) — To whom do you wish 
to write a note ? I wish to write one to my son. — Does he imme- 
diately answer your notes, when you write to him ? He does. — Do 
your brothers answer (reply to) the Swiss ; s notes 1 No, they do 
not. — Do they not answer them ? No ; I tell you, no, (que non.) — 

Have your uncle and father already been at museum ? The 

former has, but not the latter. — Why did not the latter go ? Because 
he has not had time. — Has he time to go there this afternoon? — At 
what o'clock? At J past 3. — No, he has no time then; for he has 
an engagement (un engagement) at 4. — Never mind; he may go 
another day. — When does your cousin set out? He does not set out 
yet. — When, then ? He does not set out before Monday.-— Did you 
not go to the iron bridge, yesterday? Yes, we went (have been) to 
the iron bridge, near the lawyer's garden. — Is it not a beautiful 
bridge ? Yes, it is beautiful. — Do you like it as much as the wire 
bridge ? I like it quite as much. — Did you go to the play, last 
night ? I ? No, I did not go, because I never go. — Who went to the 
wharf early this morning? Thomas went there before he break- 
fasted. — Did you go there together? I did not go with him; he 
went there alone. — Why did you not go with him? Because I had 
not time to go then. — What have you had to do? I had (have had) 
to speak to the gardener. 

Has our neighbor been at the theatre as often as we? He has 
been there oftener than we. — Do our friend's brothers go to their 
counting-house too early? They go too late, sometimes. — Do they 
go as late as we ? They go later than we. — Has the clerk been as 
often as you at the dentist's, to-day ? He has been (was) there 
oftener than I. — Where do your friends Charles and Thomas re- 
main ? They remain at home, because it is very warm. — Do they 
not go out? They do not go out before i past 8 in the evening, 
Decause then it begins to be cool. — Are they sick ? No, but they 
are afraid of the heat. — Have you had my blue gloves? I have 
had them. — Have you got them now? No, I have had them, but I 
have them no longer. — When had you (have had) them ? I had 
them in the parlor, and I think they are there yet. — Go and get them 
14* 



162 



THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



for me, if you please. — Can you not go yourself? ($ 41 J.) No; dc 
you not see that I am very busy ? Very well ; I am going for them. 
— Hast thou had my old umbrella? I have not had it. — Have I had 
your English penknife ? You had it. — When had I it ? (Pai-je eu ?) 
— Had you it not yesterday, in the garden, to cut a bouquet f Oh ! 
yes: that's true. I had it then ; but now I do not know where it is. 
— Can it not be in your apartment? It may be there. — Who has 
had my Russian stick ? Nobody has had it ; you have had it your- 
self. (41*.) 



THIRTY-SECOND LESSON, 32d.—Irente-deuxieme Legon, Z2me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



Hast thou had ? Hast thou had it ? 
Thou hast (had). Thou hast not (had 

it). 
Has he had ? Has he had it ? 
He has had. He has not had it. 

Hast thou had the coat ? I have not 

had it. 
Who has had it ? The tailor has 

(had it). 
Somebody has had it. Nobody has. 
Have you had anything ? 
I have not had anything, (nothing.) 
Have we had ? We have not had. 



As-tu eu ? 
Tu as eu. 



L'as-tu eu ? 

Tu ne l'as pas eu. 



A-t-ileu? 

II a eu. 

As-tu eu l'habit ? 

eu. 
Qui Pa eu ? Le tailleur Pa eu. 



L'a-t-ilieu? 
II ne Pa pas eu. 

Je ne Pai pas 



Quelqu'unPaeu. PersonnenePaeu. 
Avez-vous eu quelque chose ? 
Je n'ai rien eu. {Obs. 4.) 
Avons-nous eu ? Nous n'avons pas 

eu. 
N' avons-nous pas eu ? Si fait, nous 

avons eu. Nous Pavons eu. 
Les enfants ont-ils eu le fusil ? 
lis Pont eu. lis ne Pont pas eu. 
Qu'ont-ils eu ? 



Have we not had ? Yes, we have had. 

We have had it. 
Have the children had the gun ? 
They have had it. They have not. 
What have they had ? 
What have you had ? 
What was the matter with you ? 
What has been the matter with him ? 
What has he had ? 
He has had a headache. 
Has anything been the matter with 

us ? What have we had ? 
Have I had anything good ? 
Have you had the books ? 

Obs. 75. The French past participle, with: avoir, to have, for auxiliary 
must agree with its direct object (§43) in number, when that object comes 
jirst, and only then. If the object is plural, the past participle takes an s. 



i Qu' avez-vous eu? 
\ Qu'a-t-il eu? 

II a eu mal de tete. 
> Qu' avons-nous eu? 

[ Ai-je eu quelque chose de bon ? 
I Avez-vous eu les livres ? 



THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



163 



I have had them. I have not had them. 
Have I had them ? You had them. 
You have not had (did not get) them. 
Has he had them ? He had them. 
Which gloves have you had ? Theirs ? 

Neither he nor I have had them. 
Have you had mine ? (obj. after.) 
Neither they nor you have had them. 
Have you had bread ? (any.) 
I have had some. I had 1 none. 
Have I had any ? You had some. 



Je les ai eus. Je ne les ai pas eus. 
Les ai-je eus ? Vous les avez eus, 
Vous ne les avez pas eus. 
Les a-t-il eus ? II les a eus. 
Quels gants avez-vous eus ? Lea 

leurs ? 
Ni lui ni moi, ne les avons eus. 
Avez-vous eu les miens? (obj. apres.) 
Ni eux ni vous, ne les avez eus. 
Avez-vous eu du pain ? 
J'en ai eu. Je n'en ai pas eu. 
En ai-je eu % Vous en avez eu. 

Obs. 76. The past participle, with avoir, never agrees with its indirect 
object, (§ 44,) even when the object comes first. Consequently, when the 
pronoun, en, which is an indirect object, is before the past participle, the 
latter does not take an s. 



You have not had any. 

Has he had any ? He had none. 

Have they had any? They have. 

(Dir. 1.) 
Who has had any ? We have (had 

some). 
What has he had ? He (has) had 

nothing. 
What did I get ? You got that. 
We had somebody. (We have had.) 
You have had nobody, (had.) 



Vous n'en avez pas eu. 

En a-t-il eu ? II n'en a pas eu. 

En ont-ils eu ? lis en ont eu. 

Qui en a eu ? Nous en avons eu. 

Qu' a-t-il eu ? II n' a rien eu. 

Qu' ai-je eu? Vous avez eu cela. 
Nous avons eu quelqu'un. 
Vous n'avez eu personne. 



Trente-deuxieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Mettez ici le quantieme du mois en Francais. 

Ah ! bon jour, M. George, comment vous etes-vous porte depuis 
que je irai eu le plaisir de vous voir? Merci, Mile., je me suis fort- 
bien porte depuis ce temps-Id, (time.) Et vous aussi, j'espere ? Moi 
aussi, merci. Mais, avez-vous ete absent? Oui, j'ai ete absent 
presque dix jours. En verite ! Ou avez-vous ete ? J'ai ete a New 
York, dans le Connecticut, et a Providence. Avez-vous eu beaucoup 
de plaisir ? Oui, beaucoup. Je suis bien aise de Tapprendre. Com- 
bien de jours avez-vous ete a New York? Je n'y ai ete que deux 
jours. — Ce n'est pas beaucoup. — Avez-vous aussi ete deux jours a 
Providence? Oui, j'y ai ete un peu plus de deux jours. Qu'en 
pensez-vous? (How do you like it?) Je Paime beaucoup. — Y con- 
naissez-vous beaucoup de monde? Oui, j J y connais des personnes 

1 Had, alone, in English, is frequently used instead of have had ; but in 
French, ai eu is used when the action is fully past. 



164 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

tres-aimables. — A present que j'y pense, votre ami Jules y a-t-il et6 
avec vous, comme a Pordinaire? Non, il n'y a pas ete. Qu'avez- 
vous eu d'agreable ? Beaucoup de choses. 

Has your brother had my wooden hammer? He has. — Has he 
had my golden, velvet, and satin ribbons ? (Dir. 2.) He has had the 
first and the second, but not the third. — Have the English had my 
beautiful ship ? They have had it. — Who has had my thread stock- 
ings ? Your servants have had them. — Have we had the iron trunk 
of our good neighbor? We have had it. — Have we had his fine 
pistol? We have not had it. — Have we had the mattresses of 
the foreigners? We have not had them. — Has the American had 
my good work? He has had it. — Has he had my silver knife ? He 
has not had it. — Has the young man had the first volume of my 
work ? He has not had the first, but [mais il a eu) the second.— 
Has he had it ? Yes, Sir, he has had it. — When has he had it ? 
He has had it this morning. — Have you had any sugar ? I have had 
some. — Have I had any good paper? You have not had any. — Has 
the cook of the Russian captain had any chickens? He has had 
some. He has had none at all. 

Has the Frenchman had good old wine? He has had some, and 
he has some yet. — Hast thou had large cakes? I have. — Has thy 
brother had any ? He has not. — Has the farmer's son had any fresh 
butter ? He has had a great deal, has he not? To be sure, he has. — 
Have the Poles had good Spanish segars and tobacco ? They have 
had some, because they are very fond of smoking and snuffing. — . 
Wha/ tobacco do they usually smoke and snuff? They usually 
smoke Turkish and Polish tobacco; but sometimes they have the 
best American and Spanish tobacco. — What have the Spaniards 
had? They have had fine merino sheep, (de beaux moutons meri- 
nos.) — Who has had courage ? The American sailors and soldiers.— 
Have the Germans had more friends than the Scotch ? They have 
had less. — Has your little son had more toys than his big cousin? 
He has had many more. — Have the Turks had more pepper than 
corn and tobacco ? They have had less of the former than of these. — 
Has the Italian painter had anything? He has had nothing at all. — 
Who has been at the garden of Carr? The garden which is near 
the covered bridge? Yes, that one. Many of our friends have. — 
What have you had to do? I have had to write notes. — Had the 
gardener's son to write notes also? He has had to work in his 
father's garden. — Have we had to work ? No, we have had to trans- 
late and copy. — Have the boys sore feet? No, they have had sore 
feet, but they are well now. — Who has had a sore nose ? The little 
Russian baker. — Has the tobacco merchant had sore eyes? Hi» 
eyes are always sore. 



THIRTY-SECOND LESSON (2.) 



165 



Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



So. So well. Not so often as ... . 

Have you been hungry or cold ? 
I have been thirsty and warm. 
Who has been right, and who wrong ? 
If John has been wrong, then Julius 

has been right. 
No, they have both been wrong. 
We have been afraid to show any. 
To take place. The ball will take 

place. 
When is the ball in honor of the 

President going to take place ? 
Does the concert take place to-day ? > 
Is the concert to come off to-day? S 
It takes place. It takes place this 

evening. 
It does not take place to-day. 
When did the grand dinner take place ? 
It took (has taken) place yesterday. 
It has not yet taken place, [had place.] 
The day before yesterday. 
Where had you a mind to go the day 

before yesterday ? To Bristol. 

How many times? Once, (or one time.) 
Twice, (two times. Thrice, (three 

times ) 
Many times, a great many times. 
Formerly. More than six times. 

Has the President a bad cold ? 

No, he has had one, but he is well 

now. I am glad to hear it. 

I thought he mas sick. 
1 thought you were in New York. 
I thought they were Prussians. 
/ thought I had your hat. 
Did you think you had it ? I did. 

Did you think you knew your lesson ? 
Did you think you knew that man ? 
I thought I did, but I see that I do 

not (know him). 
Gone. To have gone. To have gone 

there. 
Did you go to the concert of V. ? 
I went or did go. I did not go, 

He went (there.) Fie did not go (there.) 
Who has gone? Who went ? Lewis 

has. 



Si. Si Men. Ne . . > . pas si souvent 

que .... 
Avez-vous eu faim ou froid? 
J'ai eu soif et chaud. 
Qui a eu raison et qui a eu tort ? 
Si Jean a eu tort, alors Jules a eu 

raison. 
Non, ils ont Tun et l'autre eu tort. 
Nous avons eu peur d'en montrer. 
t Avoir lieu. Le bal va avoir lieu. 

t Quand le bal en honneur du Presi- 
dent va-t-il avoir lieu ? 

t Le concert a-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ? 
t II a lieu. II a lieu ce soir. 

t II n'a pas lieu aujourd'hui. 
t Quand le grand diner a-t-il eu lieu ? 
t II a eu lieu hier. 
t II n'a pas encore eu lieu. 
Avant-hier. 

Ou avez-vous eu envie d'aller avant- 
hier ? A Bristol. 
Combien defois ? Tine fois. (adv.) 
Deux fois. Trois fois. 

Bien des fois. 

Autrefois. Plus de six fois. (16 2 .) 

Le President a-t-il un mauvais 

rhume ? 
II en a eu un, mais il se porte bien a 

present. J' en suis bien aise. 
Je le croyais malade. 
Je vous croyais a New York. 
Je les croyais Prussiens. 
Je croyais avoir votre chapeau. 
Croyiez-vous V avoir ? Je le croyais 
Croyiez-vous savoir votre lecon ? 
Croyiez-vous connaitre cet homme- 

la ? Je croyais le connaitre, mais je 

vois que je ne le connais pas. 
Alle, etre alle, y etre alle. 

Etes-vous alle au concert de V. ? 
J'y ai ete. Je n'y suis pas alio. 
II y a ete. II n'y est pas alle'. 

Qui y est alle ? Louis y est alle* 



166 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

Has he had a sore arm ? He has. A-t-il eu mal au bras ? II y aeu mal 

What has been the matter with him ? Qu' a-t-il eu ? 

He had a sore elbow, and he has it II a eu mal au coude, et il y a encore 

yet. mal. 

How many children has the Presi- Combien d'enfantsle President a-t-i] 

dent had ? (eus, because the object eus 1 (eus, parce que Pobjet est 

precedes.) avant.) 

He has had three, I believe. I II en a eu trois, je crois. 

That is to say, that is, (i. e.) i C'est a dire. 

Trente-deuxieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 
Vous continuez a mettre le quantieme, n'est-ce pas ? 

Quoi, Madame ! vous etes ici? Je vous croyais a Baltimore. Py 
ai ete, M. ; mais je suis ici depuis deux jours. Est-il possible ! Et 
je n'ai pas eu le plaisir de vous voir. Je pense que vous vous por- 
tez bien, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le President a-t-il ete a Balti- 
more ? Non, il n ? y a pas ete. Ou est-il alle? II est alle a Richmond 
pour y voir ses meilleurs amis. N'a-t-il pas ete malade ? Si fait, 
il Pa ete, mais tres-peu. II a eu un rhume, n ; est-ce pas? Oui, au 
commencement du mois d'Avril • mais cela n 7 a pas ete grand 7 chose 1 
(much — expression constantly used.) Je le croyais encore malade. 
En verite ! II ne Pest plus, et nous en sommes bien aises. — N ; avez- 
vous pas eu mal de tete ? Si fait, mais cela n'a pas ete grand' chose. 
— A present, j'ai mal au pied, mais ce n'est pas grand 7 chose. — Je 
croyais avoir votre eventail, Mile. Sophie, mais je vois que vous 
Pavez. — Je Pai, mais il est a votre service. Merci. Si vous n'avez 
plus chaud, pretez-le-moi un moment, s'il vous plait. Le voici, 
prenez-le. II est joli et bon. Oh! ce n ? est pas grand' chose. Eu 
avez-vous besoin, a present? Non, je n'en ai pas encore besom, 
vous pouvez en faire usage. Votre cousin a-t-il le cheval du fer- 
mier? Non, le fermier en a eu besoin, lui-meme. (§ 41i.) 

Have the English had as much sugar as tea? They have had as 
much of the one as of the other ) but they want more sugar than 
tea. — Has the physician been cold, this evening? No, he has been 
warm. — Has he been warm enough? He says that he has been 
too warm. — Can that be ? Has the Dutchman been right or wrong ? 
He has been right or wrong. — If he has been right, he has not been 
wrong. — If he has been wrong, he has not been right. — I believe 
you are right when you say that. — To be sure. — Have I been right 

1 Pas grand'' chose, not much, no great tiling. As chose is feminine, 
grand 1 chose ought to be spelt : grande chose. But as, in pronouncing those 
words, the d is not sounded, the French use the apostrophe to show that 
the e is suppressed and the d silent. So in : grand 1 /aim, grand* soif, grand" 
mere, &c. Grand' chose is always used with a negative. 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 167 

in wnting to my brother? You have not been wrong in writing to 
him.-Have you had a sore finger? I have had a sore eye -Have 
you had anythmg good? I have had nothing bad.-Md the baU 
take place yesterday? It did not take place.l-Does it take place 
to-day? It takes place to-day._When does the ball take place* R 

ay" ftid^r^-A? V^ 6 P)ace the ** ^fore ;: s te. 
oay. it did take place.— At what o'clock did it take olac'e * T* 
took place aeulieu) at eleven o'clock.-Did yonTmlTu) to 
my brother's? I went thither.-How often have you been' L 

t^h th'r a,oL h r e id een th6re tWiCe - D ° y- o ^01^ 

you bee^tuh^re 1 ?^ h^r^eXTce °~ ^ 
Have you sometimes been at the ball ? I have often been there 

tlnfher 7 Has rT g ° ne t0 the C ° nCert ? He ha * ™«g£ 

tnither.-Has your father sometimes gone to the museum* w! 

went (a ete) there formerly.-Did he go as often as yT* £e went 

oftener than I.-Dost thou go sometimes into the small garden*! 

go there often; I go every day, two or three times.-Dofs your' old 

cook often go to the market ? He does, sometimes "twice in a day 

-Does he go there oftener than my gardener* He Z>« t T 

goes there to buy, and your gardener fo til-Hast, g t ££ 

were at Boston on' that day .- A T y ou L££Lfi£#^ 
many ttmes.-Are you hungry and thirsty in the monmtg* I \m 

you go earlier to your ^„ the ££? S^ 
French mto English as well as English into French? No, tlmy do 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON, W -Trente-troisieme Legon, 9ome 
PERFECT TEN8E.-ParfaU on Prisent Compose. 

P^Ti:IZ^y a LT t r {eCt t6nSe iS , Jn EngHsh ' ™ = *« the 
studied.) y " d * e Past P artlc 'Ple. <* 145 to be carefully 

or i£ NeV6r ,ranS ' ate the P re P osi ti°n «*. when connoted with a d„ 



168 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 



Perfect. I have studied this day. 

I have studied this month. 

Columbus has discovered 
America. 
Imperfect. I studied yesterday. 

I studied last month. 

Columbus discovered Ame- 
rica in the year 1492. 
To make, to do. Made, done. 

What have you done ? 
I have done nothing — bad. 
Has that shoemaker made my shoes ? 
He has. He has not. 

He made some. He did not make any. 
No (nominative) No man has. (§171, 

R. 6.) 
No (objective) before a noun. ($171, 

R. 5.) 
1 have done no ill or evil. 
I have been to no bridge. 
Has the tailor any of my clothes ? 
He has 7ione. None. (§171, R. 5.) 
To put, to put on. Put, put on. 
Have you put on your shoes ? 
I have (put them on). I have not. 
I have put some on. I have put none 

on. 
Did we not take off our gloves ? 
Yes. we took them off, and our vests 

also. 
Take off your coat if it is wet. 
To tell, to say. Told, said. 

Have you said the word ? the words ? I 
I have. 

Have you told me the word ? 
I have told you the word. 
I have told it to you, (or told you of if* 
That, (meaning that thing.) 
This, (meaning this thing.) 
That is the very thing. 
Has he told you that ? 
He told me this. 
What have you told them ? 
Have you told them nothing? 
We have told them neither this nor 

that. 
Have they told you anything ? 
They have told us nothing. 
To whom have they told that ? 
They have said it to nobody. 



Pai etudie aujourd'hui. 

J'ai etudie ce mois-ci. 

Colomb a decouvert l'Amerique. 

J'ai etudie' hier. 

J'ai etudie le mois dernier. 

Colomb a decouvert l'Amerique 

dans l'annee 1492. 
Faire* fait. (31 1 .) 

Qu'avez-vous fait ? 
Je n'ai rien fait — de mal. 
Ce cordonnier a-t-il fait mes souliers ? 
II les a faits. II ne les a pas faits. 
II en a fait. II n'en a pas fait. 
Aucun . . . ne (sujet.) Aucun horn me 

n'a. 
Ne... aucun (objet.) (avant un nom.) 

Je n'ai fait aucun mal. 

Je n'ai 6te a aucun pont. 

Le tailleur a-t-il aucun de mes habits? 

II n'en a aucun. N en.. . aucun. 

Mettre* Mis. (31. J ) 

Avez-vous mis vos souliers ? 

Je les ai mis. Je ne les ai pas mis. 

J 'en ai mis. Je n'en ai mis aucun. 

N'avons-nous pas ote nos gants ? 
Si fait, nous les avons otes, et nos 

gilets aussi. 
Otez votre habit s'il est mouille. 
Dire.* Dit. 

Avez-vous dit le mot ? les mots ? 
Je l'ai dit. Je les ai dits. 

M'avez-vous dit le mot ? 
Je vous ai dit le mot. 
Je vous l'ai dit. 
Cela. ($ 38, N. 4.) 
Ceci. 

C'est cela meme. 
Vous a-t-il dit cela? 
II m'a dit ceci. 
Que leur avez-vous dit ? 
Ne leur avez-vous rien dit ? 
Nous ne leur avons dit ni ceci n5 

cela. 
Vous ont-ils dit quelque chose ? 
Us ne nous ont rien dit. 
A qui ont-ils dit cela ? 
lis ne l'ont dit a personne. 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 169 

Trente-troisieme Thj&me. Ire Sec. 
Vous continuez a mettre le quantieme, n'est-ce pas ? 
Qu'avez-vous fait ce matin ? Nous avons fait notre devoir. — Quel 
devoir avez-vous fait ? Nous avons fait celui que vous nous avez 
donne a faire. L'avez-vous tous fait ? Je sais que j'ai fait le mien * 
je crois que Charles et Henri out fait les leurs, mais je ne peux pas 
vous dire si Guillaume afaitle sien. — Le tien est-il fait, Guillaume? 
Le mien ? sans doute, il est fait. Tous vos devoirs sont done faits. 
— Alors, asseyez-vous tous, et comme vous avez fait vos devoirs, 
nous pouvons commencer. M. Jules, quel est le parfait du verbe: 
donner? C'est: j'ai donne, n'est-ce pas'? C'est cela meme. Com- 
ment Pepelez-vous ? Je ne vous entends pas, M. Quoi! vous n'en- 
tendez pas : epelez-vous? Non, je ne 1' entends pas. Et toi, Guillaume, 
Pentends-tu? Moi, non plus, (I neither, or neither do I, § 162, R. 9.) 
Et vous, Messieurs, ne Pentendez-vous pas non plus ? (do you not 
understand it either?) Non, nous, non plus. — Qui Pentendici? Au 
cun de nous ne Pen tend. Quoi ! Aucun de vous ne sait P Anglais 
de : epeler ? JEpeler ? Non, aucun de nous ne le sait. Ne vous ai-je 
pas donne le Francais de : to spell ? Non, M., vous ne nous Pavez 
pas encore donne. Je croyais vous Pavoir donne P autre jour. Non, 
nous ne Pavons pas encore eu. Mais vous le savez a present, n'est- 
ce pas? Je pense que c'est le mot que vous avez dit, n'est-ce pas? 
C'est cela meme. Prononcez-le encore, si'l vous plait. Volontiers: 
J&peler. De quelle conjugaison est-il ? De la premiere, parce qu'il 
finit en er. Tres-bien, c'est cela meme. Alors quel est PAnglais 
de: Comment Pepelez-vous ? C'est: how do you spell it? C'est 
cela meme. A present; repondez a ma question: Comment epe- 
lez-vous : j'ai donne? J' (apostrophe) a, i, d, o, n, n, e, avec un accent 
aigu. Comment formez-vous le participe passe de: donner? Je 
change la terminaison, er, en e. 

Have you anything to do? I have nothing to do. — What hast 
thou done? I have done nothing. — Have I done anything? You 
have done something. — What have I done ? You have torn my 
books. — What have your children done? They have torn their 
clothes. — What have we done ? You have done nothing, but your 
brothers have burnt their copy-books. — Has the tailor already made 
your coat? He has not yet made it. — Has your shoemaker already 
made your shoes? He has already made them. — Have you some- 
times made a hat ? I have never made one. — Have our neighbors 
ei'er made books? They made ( — ont fait) some formerly. — How 
many blue coats has your tailor made? He has made twenty or 
thirty. — Has he made good or bad coats? He has made (both) good 
15 



170 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



and bad. — Has your father put on his coat? He has not yet put it 
on ; but he is going to put it on. 

Has your brother put his shoes on ? He has put them on. — Put 
on your shoes and stockings. (Dir. 2.) We are going to put on 
neither, (ni ceux-ci ni ceux4d.) — What has the physician taken 
away? He has taken away nothing. — What have you taken off? 
I have taken off my large hat. — Have your children taken off their 
gloves % They have taken them off. — When did the ball take place ? 
It took place the day before yesterday. — Who has told you that? 
My servant has told me of it. — What has your brother told you? 
He has told me nothing. — Did I tell you that ? You did not tell me 
of it. — Has he told it you? He has told it me. — Who told your 
neighbor of it ? The English have told him of it. — Have they told 
it to the French ? They have told them of it. — Who has told it to you ? 
(or you of it?) Your son has (told me of it). — Has he told it to you? 
He has told me of it. — Are you willing to tell that to your friends ? 
I am willing to tell them of it. 

VOCABULAIRE. 

Have you told it to me ? (or me of it ?) 

I have not. I did not. 

He has told it to me, (or he told me.) 



He did not tell me, (or me of it.) 

Have you told (did you tell) him that ? 

I have. I did. 

I have not. I did not (tell him so). 

What have I told you ? 

You told me that John is sick. 

You did not tell me anything. 

Did I say so to you ? (tell you that ?) 

Yes, you did. 

You did not. 

Did we say so to you ? (tell you so ?) 

You said so to us, (told us of it.) 

You did not say so to us. 

What did you tell us ? (to us ?) 

What did you tell him ? (to him ?) 

I told you that your horse has a sore 

foot. 
I told them that you are here. 
I told him but a word. 
You have told him of it. 
You told us of it. 
You did not tell them (of it). 
Did any one tell you of it? 
Somebody did. 
Nobody did, 



2de Section. 

Me l'avez-vous dit? (§ 57.) 

Je ne vous l'ai pas dit. 

II me l'a dit. 

II ne me l'a pas dit. 

Lui avez-vous dit cela ? 

Je le lui ai dit. 

Je ne le lui ai pas dit. 

Que vous ai-je dit ? 

Vousm'avez dit que Jean est malade, 

Vous ne m'avez rien dit. 

Vous 1' ai-je dit ? 

Oui, vous me l'avez dit. 

Vous ne me l'avez pas dit. 

Vous avons-nous dit cela ? 

Vous nous l'avez dit. 

Vous ne nous l'avez pas dit. 

Que nous avez-vous dit ? 

Que lui avez-vous dit ? 

Je vous ai dit que votre cheval a maj 

au pied. 
Je leur ai dit que vous etes ici. 
Je ne lui ai dit qu'un mot. 
Vous le lui avez dit. 
Vous nous l'avez dit. 
Vous ne le leur avez pas dit. 
Quelqu'un vous l'a-t-il dit ? 
Quelqu'un me l'a dit. 
Personne ne me l'a dit. 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



171 



Who told them ? 

Have you told them of it ? 

I have. I did. 

Have you told them the words they 

wish to know ? 
I did. I have (told them to them). 
He told them to me, to us. 
He has not told them to you, to thee. 
Have you spoken to the men ? 
I have spoken to them. 
To whom did you speak ? 
I spoke to no one. 



Qui le leur a dit ? 

Le leur avez-vous dit 1 

Je le leur ai dit. 

Leur avez-vous dit les mots qu'ila 

veulent savoir ? 
Je les leur ai dits. 

II me les a dits. II nous les a dits. 
II ne vous les a pas dits, \ne te les.) 
Avez-vous parle aux hommes ? 
Je leur ai parle. 
A qui avez-vous parle ? 
Je n'ai parle a. personne. 



Obs. 77. The pronoun le, which is sometimes rendered into English by 
so, and very frequently omitted, may in French relate to a substantive, an 
adjective, or even a whole sentence. It changes neither its gender nor num- 
ber when it relates to an adjective or a whole sentence. (29 2 , Obs. 70.) 



Are you the brothers of my friend ? 
We are. (We are so — we are they.) 
Are they rich ? They are not. 
Are those men learned ? 
They are. They are not. 

Are you and your friend fatigued ? 
I am not, but he says he is. 
Is he so indeed ? He says he is. 
Are our neighbors as poor as they 

say (they are) ? They are. 
I believe they are not. 
Did your brother speak yesterday ? 
I do not know. He says he did. 



Etes-vous les freres de mon ami ? 
Nous les sommes. 

Sont-ils riches ? lis ne le sont pas. 
Ces hommes sont-ils savants ? 
lis le sont. lis ne le sont pas. 
Vous et votre ami, etes-vous fatigues? 
Je ne le suis pas, mais il dit qu'il Test. 
L'est-il, en verite ? II le dit. 
Nos voisins sont-ils aussi pauvrea 

qu'ils le disent ? lis le sont. 
Je crois qu'ils ne le sont pas. 
Votre frere a-t-il parle hier ? 
Je ne le sais pas. II le dit. 



Tkente-troiseeme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Mettez la date en Frangais. 
Avez-vous parle a votre rnaitre ? Oui, je lui ai parle. Ou est-il? 
II est dans son appartement. Pourquoi n'en sort-il pas 1 II est ma- 
lade. Est-il bien (very) malade ? Non: mais il Pest trop pour 
donner des lecons aujourd'hui. Le medecin lui a-t-il donne quelque 
chose a prendre ? Oui, il lui a donne quelque chose. Que lui a-t-il 
donne ? Je ne sais pas ce qu'il lui a donne. Est-il au lit ? (in bed ?) 
Non, il n'est pas au lit, il est dans son grand fauteuil. Son fauteail ? 
Qu'est-ce que c'est? (What is that?) N ; en savez-vous pas TAnglais? 
Non, en verite. Votre maitre ne vous en a-t-il pas dit PAnglais? 
Non, je suis sur qu ; il ne me Pa jamais dit. Charles, ne vous Fa-t-il 
pas dit? Lui, non plus. — Eh! bien, je vais vous le dire. (Pest: 
arm-chair. Fauteuil: Arm-chair? Est-il possible? C ; est tres-pos- 
sible, car c'est cela meme. (Pest tout-a-fait different (different) de 
''Anglais. (Pest vrai. vous avez raison. 



172 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 

Have you spoken to my father? I have. — When did you? 1 
spoke to him the day before yesterday. — How many times have you 
spoken to the captain ? To which captain % To the French, no, no, 
I do not mean the French, but the Greek. I havs not spoken to the 
Greek captain ; I do not know a Greek one ; bu; ] have spoken to 
the American. — How many times have you spoken to him ? I spoke 
to him many times. — Have you ever spoken to his son? I have, 
often. — To which strangers has your young cousin spoken? He has 
spoken to these and to those. — To these three and those four? Yes, 
to them all, {a tous, ou a eux tous.) — Are you the brother of that 
handsome young man, (ce beau gargon, is as often used as : ce beau 
jeune homme.) — Is that other young man the minister's cousin ? That 
one or this ? That one. No, that one is not ; but this one is. — I wish 
to speak to him. Have you never done it? No, never. And I 
neither. Are your friends as busy as they say? They are (so). — 
Are the carpenters as tired as they think ? I believe they are. 

Is the valet tired because he sweeps the stores? He is. — Does he 
sweep them often ? He does it as often as he can. — Has the Pole 
money enough to buy wood or coal ? I believe he has not got any. 
Give him this three dollar note. — Is the dentist at home ? No, he 
has gone to the wire bridge. — Has your old cook gone to market? 
No, he has gone to bed instead of going to- market. — Is he ill? (ma- 
lade ?) He is not ill, but only tired. — Is he very tired? He is, 
because he made a great dinner in honor of the uncle of the French 
minister. — Who is ill? I do not know who is. I am not. — Are you 
as tall (grand) as I ? I am. — Is your son much taller than you ? He 
is. — Are these young men clerks? They are. — Are you as busy as 
your brother ? I am more so than he. — Do you know the name of 
the English minister? No, I do not. — Does Thomas know it? He 
neither. Has not Lewis told it to you ? No, he did not. — Did he 
not tell it to your uncle ? I do not know if he has told it to him. — ■ 
To whom has he told it? He has told it neither ( § 56, § 64) to him, 
nor to them, nor to you, nor to me, nor to anybody. 
Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 

Iikrire,* e'crit. (Obs. 75.) 

Quels billets avez-vous Merits ? 

J'ai ecrit ceux-ci. 

Quels mots a-t-il ecrits ? 



To write, written. 

Which notes have you written ? 
I have written these. 
Which words has he written ? 
He has written those which you see. 
To drink, drunk. 

To see, seen. 

To read, read. 

Vo be acquainted with, been ac- 
quainted with. 



II a ecrit ceux que vous voyez. 
Boire,* bu. 

Voir,* vu. 

Lire,* lu. 

Connaitre* connu. 



THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 



(3.) 



173 



Which men have you seen ? 

I have seer, those. 

Which books have you read ? 

I have read those which you have 

lent me. 
Have you been acquainted with these 

men ? I have not. 

Which ones have you known? 
Have you seen any sailors ? 
I have seen some. 
I have not seen any. 
To call, to name, (not to call at, upon.) 
To call at, upon. Call on me. 
To throw, throw away — them — some. 
Do you call me ? 
I do not call you. 



Quels hommes avez-vous vus ? 

J'ai vu ceux-la. 

Quels livres avez-vous lus ? 

J'ai lu ceux que vous m'avez pretest 

Avez-vous connu ces hommes ? Je 

ne les ai pas connus. 
Lesquels avez-vous connus ? 
Avez-vous vu des matelots ? 
J 'en ai vu. 

Je n'en ai vu aucun. (32 1 , Obs. 76.) 
Appeler,l. 

Passer, 1, chez. Passez chez moi. 
Jeter, 1. Lesjeter, enjeter. 

M'appeiez-vous ? Je vous appelle. 
Je ne vous appelle pas. 



Obs. 78. In verbs ending in eler and eter, as appeler, to call ; jeter, to 
throw ; the letter I or t is doubled in all persons or tenses where it is fol- 
lowed by e mute. 1 



Who calls me ? 

Your father calls you. 

Have you called the men ? 

I have called them. 

Do you throw your money away ? 

I do not throw it away. 

Who throws away his books ? 

Have you thrown away anything? 

I have thrown away my gloves. 

Have you thrown them away? 



Qui m'appelle ? 

Votre pere vous appelle. 

Avez-vous appele les hommes ? 

Je les ai appeles. 

Jetez-vous votre argent? 

Je ne le jette pas. 

Qui jette ses livres ? 

Avez-vous jete quelque chose? 

J'ai jete mes gants. 

Les avez-vous jetes ? 



Trente-troisieme Theme. 3me Sec. 
Vous mettez le quantieme ici, n'est-ce pas ? 
Bon jour, mon cher Monsieur, j'espere que vous vous portez bien. 
Oui, Dieu merci, je me porte parfaitement bien. J ; en suis bien aise, 
j'en suis charme. Savez-vous que nous attendons le professeur 
grec ?-— Va-t-il passer chez vous ce matin'? II va passer ici, nous 
Fattendons a 9 heures. J'en suis charme ; car. j'aigrande envie de 
le connaitre. Ne le connaissez-vous pas encore ? Non. je n'ai pas 
encore eu le plaisir de le voir. Comment Pappelez-vous? Je ne 
sais pas son vrai nom, mais je Pappelle Miaulitz. — Comment epelez- 
vous son nom? Je Pepelle M, i, a 7 u, 1, i, t, z — mais je ne sais pas 
s"il Pepelle comme cela. N'importe. s'il vous repond quand vous 
,; appelez comme-Qa. Mais, a present que j'y pense, parle-t-il Fran- 



1 Custom, however, does not observe this rule with regard to the verb 
tcheter, to buy, and its compound, racheter, to redeem, to buy again. (25 1 .) 
15* 



174 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 

cais? Sans doute. II le parle bien pourun etranger. Tl parle aussi 
.alien, allemand, et un peu Anglais. II est done savant? Oui, il 
Pest. M'est-il pas encore neuf heures? Non, pas tout-a-fait. Je 
pense que comme il est professeur, il est ponctuel. Je le pense 
aussi; et comme il est pres de l'heure, je pense qu'il vient et qu'il 
est en chemin. N'entendez-vous pas quelqu'un? (30 2 .) Si fait, 
j'entends quelqu'un. Est-ce lui ; croyez-vous? Oui. e'est lui- 
meme. (441^.) Voyez. Ah! il est bien grand. lVest-ce pas? 

What have you to tell me ? I have to tell you to call on Professor 

C . — Does he wish to see me ? He does. — What does he want 

with me? (me veut-il?) I do not know what he wants with you; 
he did not tell it to me. When? Immediately after breakfast. — 
Does he breakfast early? He finishes usually at J of 7 o'clock. — 
Which exercises has your friend written? He has written those. — 
Which men have you seen at the wharf? I have seen these. — 
Which books have your children read ? They have read those 
which you have lent them. — Have you seen these strangers or those ? 
I have neither seen these nor those.— Which strangers have you 
seen? I have seen those to whom (d qui) you have spoken. — Have 
you been acquainted with these men ? I have been acquainted with 
them. — With which boys has your brother been acquainted ? He 
has been acquainted with those of our merchant. — Have I been 
acquainted with these Frenchmen? You have not been acquainted 
with them. — Which wine has your servant drunk? He has drunk 
mine. — Have you seen my brother's pretty little cousins? I have. — 
Where have you seen them ? I have seen them at their own house, 
(chez eux.) — Have you ever seen Greeks? I have never seen any. 
(Obs. 76.) — Has your father seen any? He has sometimes seen 
some. — Do you call me ? I do call you. — Who calls your brother? 
My father calls him. — Dost thou call any one ? I call no one. — Have 
you thrown away your hat 1 I have not thrown it away. — Does your 
father throw away anything? He throws away the notes which he 
has read, if they are not important, (importants.) — Have you thrown 
away your pencils? I have not thrown them away, for I want 
them. (23 2 .) — Dost thou throw away thy book? I do not throw it 
away ; I want it to (pour) study French. — Do you translate and write 
three exercises every day ? No; I translate and write only one. but 

study ar? ? 3ad several. 



THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



175 



THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON, 34th.— Trente-quatrieme Legon, Mnie. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

PARTICIPES PASSES IRREGULIERS. 



INFINITIES. 

To extinguish, Eteindre.* 

To open, 

To conduct, 

To take, 

To believe, 

To be able, (can,) Pouvoir.* 

To know, Savoir.* 

To be willing, Vouloir.* 



Ouvrir.* 

Conduire.* 

Prendre.* 

Croire.* 



Extinguished, eteint. 

Opened, ouvert. 

Conducted, conduit. 

Taken, pris. 

Believed, cru. 
Been able, (could,) pu. 

Known, su. 

Been willing. voulu. 

NEUTER VERBS.— Verbs Neutres ou lniransitifs. 

See ($ 158, and Art. 1, &c.) and study it carefully. 
Obs. 79. Those neuter verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliary, 
itrej in French, and to have, in English, will be marked thus, e . 



To set out, Partir.* 

To go out, „ Sortir.* 

To come, Venir.* 

Has your father set out ? 

Have your friends set out ? 

They have not set out. 

When did your brothers go out ? 

They went out at ten o'clock. 

Did the men come to your father's 

and to your uncle's ? 
They did. 

Which fires have you extinguished ? 
Which storehouses have you opened, 

and which shut ? (have you.) 
Have you conducted them to the 

storehouse and to the office ? 
I have. 

Which books have you taken ? 
How many notes have you received? 
I received but one. 
The same. The same jewel. 

This secretary. This scrutoire. 
The secretary of the minister. 
Upon, on, the scrutoire (writing desk.) 



Set out, departed, parti e. 

Gone out, sorti e . 

Come, venu e . 

Votre pere est-il parti ? 

Vos amis sont-ils partis ? 

II ne sont pas partis. 

Quand vos freres sont-ils sortis ? 

lis sont sortis a dix heures. 

Les hommes sont-ils venus chez 

votre pere et chez votre oncle ? 
lis y sont venus. 
Quels feux avez-vous eteints ? 
Quels magasins avez-vous ouverts, 

et lesquels avez-vous fermes ? 
Les avez-vous conduits au magasin 

et au bureau ? 
Je les y ai conduits. 
Quels livres avez-vous pris ? 
Combien de billets avez-vous recus ? 
Je n'en ai recu qu'un. 
Le meme. Les memes. Le mime bijou. 
Ce secretaire. 

Le secretaire du ministre. 
Sur le secretaire. 
Le banc. Sur ce banc-la. 



The bench. Upon that bench. 

TRENTE-QUATRiiiME ThSme. Ire Sec. 

N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Frangais. 

Quel vilain temps nous avons, n ? est-ce pas? Oui 7 nous avons un 

^mps tres-desagreable. II pleut trop; il fait trop humide, et le 

temps est malsain. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Non, 



176 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 

Dieu merci, tout le monde se porte bien ; mais presque tous ont ete 
malades. — Qu'ont-ils eu 1 Non pas le cholera, j'espere ! Non, pas 
le cholera. Quoi done? L'un a eu le tic douloureux, Pautre mal 
aux dents ; celui-ci a eu un violent mal de tete, celui-la quelqu'au- 
tre chose, en un mot ils ont presque tous ete malades. Je suis 
charme d'apprendre qu'ils se portent bien a present. Quand avez- 
vous vn votre ami le jeune secretaire du general? Je Pai vu avant- 
hier. Comment Pappelez-vous? Je Pappelle Lucien. Lucien est 
le nom d'un des freres de Napoleon, n'est-ce pas? Oui, ce Pest. Je 
sais le nom a present. Est-il ici encore, ou est-il parti ? Parti pour 
ou? Je le croyais a Boston. Le general n'y est-il pas alle ? Non, 
le general est malade, au lit. Ne sort-il pas? Non, en verite. 
Qu'a-t-il ? Le medecin dit que e'est la goutte, (gout.) 

Where are your cousins gone to? They have gone to the bridge. — 
Have your friends left? (partis?) They have not yet left. — When 
do they set out? This evening. — Early or late ? At what o'clock? 
At half past nine. — When did the French boys come to your 
brother's? They came there the day before yesterday. — Did they 
come alone, or did their friends come also? They came also. — 
Has any one come to see us? The Swiss came. — Who came to the 
Englishman's office ? The French did. — When did you drink any 
German wine ? We never drank any. — Did you not drink some the 
day before yesterday and to-day, at the secretary's house ? Is the 
wine that we drank there German wine? To be sure it is. — Then 
German wine is very good. — Has the big servant carried my notes? 
He has. — Where did he carry them ? He carried one to the law- 
yer's office, the other to the merchant's counting-house. — Did you 
not carry a pocket-book to the captain's? Yes, I did carry there 
that which you gave me to carry. — Which papers has the gardener's 
son brought here? Did he bring any (aucun) here? Yes. he 
brought here those which you lent to his father. — Where has he put 
them ? I have not seen them. — I believe he gave them to Jacob, 
who has put them in the secretary, or under it, in the parlor. 

Which books has the clerk taken ? He has taken the one which 
you do not read, and those which you have read. — Have the 
clerks opened the stores? They have. — Which did they open? 
They opened those you have seen, under the lawyers offices. — 
When did they open them ? They did early in the morning. — Did 
they shut them last night? No, the servants did. — Do they shut 
them every night, and open them every morning? They do.— 
Why did they not open them this morning? Because they are busy 
on the vessel, at the wharf. — Did Jacob conduct the foreigners to 
the museum ? He did. — Did he not concuct them to the wire 



THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



177 



bridge also ? He did not, but he intends to conduct them there very 
soon. — Has the cook extinguished the fires? He has not yet extin- 
guished them. — Who has extinguished the parlor fire ? The Irish 
servant has. — Have you received any (aucun) bench, sofa ; and 
arm-chair? We have received some. — Has your brother received 
his? He has not received them 3 but our friends have received 
theirs 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

Upon it. The shawl is upon it. 
Under. Under the writing-desk. 
Under it, (underneath.) 
Where are my velvet and satin hats ? 

They are upon the sofa. 

Are my kid gloves on it also ? 

No, they are under. I see them. 

To learn how, learned how. 

Do you learn how to read and count ? 

I do learn how to do both. 

Have you learned how to speak ? 

I have learned how, (or it.) 

Gone. Have they gone ? 

In the stove. In it or within. 

To get or have . . . mended. Got or 

had . . . mended. 
To wash. To have . . . washed. Got 

. . . washed. 
To get . . . made, (bespeak,) have . . . 

made. 
To have . . . swept. Got . . . swept. 
To get . . . sold. Had . . . sold. 

Obs. 80. The two French verbs come together, while the English verbs 
are separated by some noun. 



(adv.) Le chale est dessus. 
Sous *prep.) Sous le secretaire. 
Dessous (adv.) 
Oii sont mes chapeaux de velours et 

de satin ? 
lis sont sur le sofa. 
Mes gants de chamois y sont-ils aussi? 
Non, ils sont dessous. Je les vois. 
Apprendre* d, appris a. 
Apprenez-vous a lire et a compter ? 
J'apprends l'un et l'autre. 
Avez-vous appris a parler ? 
Je l'ai appris. 

Alle e . Sont-ils alles ? 

Dans le poele. Dedans (adv.; 
t Faire raccommoder. Fait racco- 

mmoder. 

t Faire laver. Fait laver. 



Lave 



t Faire faire. Fait faire. 



t Faire balayer. 
t Faire vendre. 



Fait balayer. 
Fait vendre. 



To get the coat mended. 

To have it mended. 

To get them mended. 

To get some mended. 

Are you getting a coat made ? (do 

you order or bespeak a coat ?) 
I am getting one made, (I order one.) 
I have had one made. 
Has he had his handkerchief washed ? 
Hv has had it washed. 
He did not get it washed. 
I have had my shoes mended. 
I have had them mended. 
To wipe, wiped. 



t Faire raccommoder l'habit. 
t Le faire raccommoder. 
t Les faire raccommoder. 
t En faire raccommoder. 
t Faites-vous faire un habit ? 

t J' en fais faire un. 

t J'en ai fait faire un. 

t A-t-il fait laver son mouchoir ? 

t II l'afait laver. 

t II ne l'a pas fait laver. 

t J'ai fait raccommoder mes souliers. 

t Je les ai fait raccommoder. 

Essuyer, 1, essuye. ($144, R. 3.) 



178 



THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



I wipe, thou wipest, he wipes. 
Have you not seen my book ? 
Yes, I have put it away for you. 
When did you see my brother? 
I saw him last evening at the bridge. 
Where did you see my cousins ? 
I saw them at the museum. 



J'essuie, tu essuies, il essuie. 
N'avez-vous pas vu mon livre ? 
Si fait, je l'ai serre pour vous. 
Quand avez-vous vu mon frere ? 
Je l'ai vu hier soir au pont. 
Ou avez-vous vu mes cousins ? 
Je les ai vus au musee. 



Trente-quatrieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Ou est le chale de velours de Mile. Clara ? II est sur le sofa, 
n'est-ce pas? Ne Py voyez-vous pas] Ses gants de fil sont-ils des- 
sus aussi? Non, ils sont sous le banc. Dessous ! avez-vous dit? 
Oui, c'est-ce que j'ai dit. Qui les a mis dessous? Je ne sais pas 
en verite. Ramassez-les done vite, et mettez les sur le sofa avec 
son chale. — Comme son chape au de satin est sur le grand fauteuil 
de cuir, je vais mettre ses gants de fil dedans et son chale sur le 
dos du fauteuil. Tres-bien, faites-le. Mes souliers sont-ils sur le 
banc ? Non, ils sont dessous. Je les ai mis dessus : Qui les a mis 
dessous ? Moi. C'est moi qui les ai mis dessous. Je vous remercie. 
De rien. (26.) — Le charbon est-il dans le coin ou sous le banc'? II 
est dans le poele. — Avez-vous mis du bois dedans? Oui, d'abord, 
j ; ai mis du bois dedans, en suite j'y ai mis du feu pour Pallumer, et 
apres cela du charbon. Brule-t-il ? Oui, le bois et le charbon bru- 
lent bien. Nous avons bon feu. Si vous avez froid, mettez-vous 
pres du poele. Je n'ai pas grand froid. J'ai vu un peu de bois dans 
un coin, est-il tout dans le poele ? II est dedans et brule. Ou sont 
mes journaux ? Je les ai otes de dessus le poele. parce que je n'ai pas 
voulu les bruler. Les avez-vous mis sur le secretaire ? Non, ils sont 
dessous. Avez-vous envoye votre petit garcon au marche ? Je n'ai 
pas voulu Py envoyer. — Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas voulu Py envoyer? 
Je n'ai pas voulu Py envoyer, parce qu'il a ete un peu malade. 
Qu'a-t-il eu ? II a eu un violent mal de tete. Avez-vous ecrit a votre 
oncle, Papothicaire? Je lui ai deja ecrit. — Vous a-t-il repondu ? II 
ne m'a pas repondu. — Vous a-t-il envoye Pargent que vous voulez? 
II ne me Pa pas encore envoye. — Avez-vous deja fait faire un habit? 
Je n'en ai pas encore fait faire. — Avez-vous fait faire un gilet? Je 
n'en ai pas fait faire. N'avez-vous rien fait faire ? Non, rien, parce 
que je veux avoir mon argent avant de faire faire quelque chose. 

Are you getting your floor swept? I am. — Have you had your 
office swept? I have not yet had it swept, but I intend to have it 
swept to-day. — Have you the same servant? The same! No, in- 
deed, we have not the same. We have changed several times, (en, 
§ 50.) — But you have the same cook: have you not? Yes. we have 
the same yet. — Have you wiped your feet ? I have. — Where did 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 179 

you wipe them ? I wiped them on the old carpet. — Have you had 
your benches, your sofas, and arm-chairs wiped 1 I have (had them 
wiped). — What does your little valet wipe ? He wipes the big and 
small knives. — Have you ever seen a Syrian ? I have already seen 
two or three. — Have you ever shown one to your cousin? I have 
already shown him one at the museum. — Has he ever seen a Turk ? 
He saw one before I did, (moi.) — Have you ever lent anything to 
anybody ? Yes, indeed, I have many times lent something to a 
great many persons, (beaucoup de monde.) — Does the joiner's son 
know how to read ? He does. — Is he learning how to write ? No, 
he does not ; he is too young yet to learn how to write. 

When is the great caucus going to take place ? It has already 
taken place. — Did you go ! I did not. — Miss Charlotte wishes to 

know if Mrs. B ; s concert has taken place % It took place last 

Tuesday. — Did the gentlemen go to it ? They did. — Have we yet 
the same milkman ? Yes, we have the same. We have not 
changed, (en,) because his milk is good, and he is punctual ; but 
we have neither the same baker, nor the same butcher, nor the 
same grocer. — Does the lawyer get his office w T ashed? Yes, he 
gets it washed every Saturday. — Get yours washed to-day; will 
you ? No, I cannot get it washed to-day ; I am too busy, I have too 
much to write. — Hast thou ever had thy shoes mended? I have 
sometimes had them mended. — Has the little Dutchman had his 
vessel sold ? He had it sold last Wednesday. — W T hy has he had it 
sold ? He had it sold because he is going to California. — Have his 
cousins gone there ? Yes, they have. 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON, 35th.— Trente-cinquieme Legon, 35me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



To promise, promised. 

(Promettre est comme son primitif, 

mettre.) 
To promise some one to come. 
To compose, to compound, composed. 
Compound Tenses. Thus, so. 



Promettre,* 4, promts, (prend. a 
avant le nom ; de, avant 1'inO 

Promettre a quelqu'un de venir. 
Composer, 1, compose. 

Les Temps composes. Ainsi. 



Obs. 81. Les verbes composes sont conjugues comme les primitif s. Ainsi, 
Promettre est comme mettre ; Apprendre, comme prendre. (24 3 , 25 1 , 
S3 1 , 34 2 .) 

To forget, forgotten, forget, (impera.) Oublier, 1. Oublie. Oubliez, (imper.) 

de avant l'inf. 
C forgot, to take that, to the dentist. J'ai oublie de porter tela au dentiste. 



180 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



How ? So, so. 

In this manner, (way.) Like that. 

Do you promise me to come ? 

I do promise you. 

What have you promised the man ? 

I have not promised him anything. 

Have you ever learned French ? 

I learned it formerly. 

To wear out. To spell. 

To refuse. 

How has your brother written his 

exercise ? He has written it well. 
To put to dry, put to dry. 

Do you put your vest to dry ? 
I have already put it to dry. 
How old are you ? 
I am twelve years old. 
How old is your brother ? 
He is thirteen years old. 
Almost, hardly ever. 

He is almost fourteen years old. 
About, about sixteen years and £. 
I am about fifteen years old. 
Nearly, -before numbers.) 
He is nearly fifteen years old. 
Hardly. Scarcely. Scarcely nine. 
You are hardly seventeen years old. 
Not quite eleven years and two 

months. 
I am not quite sixteen years old. 
Art thou older than thy brother ? 
I am younger than he. 
I cannot tell you how old I am. 
There is, there are. 
How many francs are there in a 

crown ? Three. 

There are five centimes in a sou. 
There are twenty sous or a hundred 

centimes in one franc. 
A, or one hundred. 
The centime. 
How many francs are there in a 

dollar ? 
There are 5 francs and 7 sous. 



| Comment ? t Comme cela. 

t De cette maniere. Comme cela, 
Me promettez-vous de venir ? 
Je vous le promets. 
Qu'avez-vous promis a l'homme ? 
Je ne lui ai rien promis. 
Avez- vous jamais appris le Francais t 
Je l'ai appris autrefois. 
User, 1. Epeler, 1. (Obs. 78.) 

Refuser, 1, (de, avant l'inf.) 
Comment votre frere a-t-il ecrit son 

theme ? II T a bien ecrit. 

Mettre a secher, mis a secher. 
Mettez-vous votre gilet a secher ? 
Je l'ai deja mis a secher. 
t Quel age avez-vous ? 
t J'ai douze ans. 
t Quel age votre frere a-t-il ? 
t II a treize ans. 

Presque, presqut jamais. 

t II a presque quatorze ais.s. 
Environ, environ seize ans et demi. 
t J'ai environ quinze ans. 
Pres de, (avant les nombres.) 
t II a pres de quinze ans. 
A peine. A peine neuf. 

t Vous avez a peine dix-sept ans. 
Pas tout-a-fait onze ans et deux 

mois. 
t Je n'ai pas tout-a-fait seize ans. 
Es-tu plus age que ton frere ? 
Je suis plus jeune que lui. 
Je ne puis pas vous dire quel age j'ai. 
11 y a. 
Combien de francs y a-t-il dans un 

ecu ? Trois. 

II y a cinq centimes dans un sou. 
II y a vingt sous ou cent centimes 

dans un franc. 
Cent. 

Le centime. 
Combien de francs y a-t-il dans un 

dollar ? 



II y a 5 francs et 7 sous. 
Trente-cinquieme Th£me. Ire Sec. 

Si vous oubliez de mettre le quantieme an commencement du theme, vous 
pouvez le mettre a la fin, end fem.^ 
Bon jour, mon cher ami, j'ai recu votre billet et je vois avec plaisii 
que vous me promettez de venir a none petit concert. Je vous le 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 181 

promets, si je me porte bien. Je suis sur de vous avoir, car vous 
vous portez toujours bien. Non, je vous assure (assure you), car hier 
j'ai en mal de tete. — Vous ai-je promis quelque chose? Vous ne 
rrravez rien promis. Je croyais vous avoir promis d'aller quelque 
part avec vous. Si vous me Favez promis, je Fai oublie. Qu"est-ee 
que mon pere vous a promis? II a. promis de rrracheter un beau 
livre. Donnez-moi ce que vous m'avez promis. — Je ne peux pas 
vous le donner avant apres-demain. — Votre ami a-t-il recu beaucoup 
d'argent? II n'en a guere recu. — Combien a-t-il recu ? II n'a recu 
qu'un dollar et un ecu. — Combien avez-vous donne a mon fils ? Je 
lni ai donne six dollars, ce qui fait un peu plus de trente francs. — 
Est-ce tout ce que vous lui avez promis? Oui, c'est tout ce que 
je luiai promis. Avez-vous de Pargent Francais? J'en ai. Avez- 
vous des francs, des sous, et des centimes? Oui, j'en ai. — Combien 
de sous y a-t-il (are there) dans un franc? II y en a vingt. — Avez- 
vous quelques centimes? J'en ai quelques uns. — Combien de 
centimes y a-t-il dans un sou? II y en a cinq. — Et combien y en 
a-t-il dans un franc? Cent. — Avez-vous un habit a preter a ce 
pauvre homme? A lui preter? Ou a lui donner. J'ai un habit 
qui est un peu use, il peut Pavoir. 

Are your shoes worn out? They are almost worn out. but not 
quite. — Are you going to have them mended ? The shoemaker has 
them to mend. — Have you anything to lend to cousin Charles? I 
have. — To whom have you lent your hat ? I have not lent it; I have 
given it away, because it is almost worn out. — To whom have you 
given it away? I have given it to a pauper, (d un pauvre.) Does 
your little brother already know how to spell ? He does. — Does he 
spell well ? He does. — How old is he ? He is six years old. —Let me 
hear him. Robert, come here to spell. — How has the doctor's little 
boy spelt ? He has spelt so so. — Is he as old as Robert ? He is 
older. — How have their children written their exercises ? They have 
written them badly, as usual ; but they are young, they are only 
ten. — Has my neighbor lent you his gloves ? He has refused to lend 
them to me. — Do you know Spanish? No, I do not like it. I have 
refused to learn it. 

Does the secretary's son speak Italian ? He speaks it well. — Does 
he speak it with every Italian he sees? (§78.) He does usually, but 
yesterday he refused to speak to a stranger. — How old are you. my 
young boy? I am eleven nearly. — How do our friends speak? 
They do not speak badly. — Do they listen to what you tell them? 
They do almost always. — How hast thou learned Italian ? I have 
learned it in this manner. — As you understand it well, I suppose it 
16 



182 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



is a good way, (une bonne maniere,) is it not? I believe it is; at 
least, I like that way. — Have you called me ? I have not called 
you; but I have called your brother to tell him to prepare his clothes 
(habits) to start to-morrow for Boston. — To start so soon? Yes, I 
want to send some one to Boston, and he has time to go. — Is he 
come? No, he has not yet come. Do you know where he has 
gone? He has gone to the tailor's to bespeak a coat and a vest. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



To understand, to comprehend. 

To hear, to understand. 

To wait for, to expect. To lose. 

Do you understand me ? 

I do. 

Have you understood the man ? 

I have understood him. 

I hear you, but I do not understand 

you. 
The noise. The wind. 

The noise (roaring) of the wind. 
Do you hear the roaring of the wind ? 
I do. I do not. 

To bark. 
What (21 M barks ? Dogs bark. {% 15.) 



The barking. Have you heard the 

barking of the dogs ? 
I have. I have not. 

To wait for some one or somethin 

To expect some one or something 

Are you waiting for my brother ? 

I am waiting for him. 

Do you expect some friends ? 

1 do expect some. 

How much has your brother lost ? 

He has lost about a crown. 

I have lost more than he. 

To remain, to stay, to dwell. 



Comprendre,* 4, (conjugue comrae 

prendre. (24 3 , 25 1 , 342.) 
Entendre, 4. 

Attendre, 4. Perdre, 4. 

Me comprenez-vous ? M'entendez- 

vous ? 
Je vous comprends. Je vous entends, 
Avez-vous compris l'homme ? 
Je l'ai compris. 



mais je ne vous 
Le vent. 



Je vous entends 

comprends pas. 
Le bruit. 
Le bruit du vent. 
Entendez-vous le bruit du vent ? 
Je Pentends. Je ne l'entends pas. 
Aboyer. (§ 144, R. 3.) 
Q^est-ce qui aboie ? Les chiens 

aboient. 
L? aboiement. Avez-vous entendu 

l'aboiement des chiens? 
Je l'ai entendu. Je ne l'ai pas 

entendu. 
. > Attendre quelqu'un ou quelque 
. > chose. 

Attendez-vous mon frere ? 

Je l'attends. 

Attendez-vous des amis ? 

J'en attends quelques uns. 

Combien votre frere a-t-il perdu ? 

II a perdu environ un ecu. 

J'ai perdu plus que lui. 

Hester, 1, (prend plus souvent etre 

que avoir pour auxiliaire.) 1 



1 This verb takes avoir when it signifies to live in, and etre, when it 
Bignifies to remain. Ex. JTai reste sept mois a Colmar sans partir de ma 
chambre, (Voltaire;) I remained (lived) seven months at Colmar without 
leaving my room. Je I' at ten dais a Paris, mais il est reste a Lyon, (The 
French Academy ;) I waited for him in Paris, but he remained at Lyons. 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 183 

The nobleman. Le gentilhomme. 

Noblemen. j Les gentilshc-mmes. (§ 140—7.) 

Obs. 82. Quand un mot est compose d'un nom et d'un adjectif, Tun et 
l'autre prennent la marque (the mark) du pluriel 1 

Genteel, pretty. Genlil. 



Where has the nobleman remained ? 
He has remained at home. 
Have you remained with him ? 



Ou le gentilhomme est-il reste ? 
II est reste a la maison. 
Etes-vous reste avec lui ? 



Trente-cinquieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Si vous ne mettez pas la date ici, mettez-la a la fin du theme. 

Ou avez-vous mouille vos habits de cette maniere ? Un des gar- 
cons ra'a mouille comme cela. N ; importe. Otez vite votre habit, 
vos souliers, et vos bas, et mettez-les pres du feu ; a secher. Je ne le 
peux pas, j'ai besoin d'etre a la maison a six heures et demie. et il est 
presque six heures et quart a present, ainsl vous voyez que je n ; ai 
pas assez de temps pour faire secher mes habits. Vous avez raison. 
Alors. allez chez vous. changez-y d'habit, de bas et de souliers, aus- 
sitot que possible. Mais quel est le garcon qui vous a mouille ? 
C'est celui qui a mouille le petit Jules Pautre soir. Le meme ! Oui. 
le meme, en verite. C ; est done un mauvais garcon ! Oui, je vous 
assure. Quel age a-t-il? II a a peine dix cms. Me comprenez-vous? 
Je vous comprends. Qu J est-ce qui a fait ce bruit-la? Jepense que 
c'est le domestique dans le salon. Quel age a notre voisin ? II n 7 a 
pas tout-a-fait trente ans. — Nos amis sont-ils aussi jeunes que nous? 
lis sont plus vieux que nous. Quel age ont-ils? L 7 un a a peine dix- 
neuf ans. et Pautre en a pres de vingt. — Votre oncle est-il aussi age 
que le mien ? Quel age a le votre ? Le notre a environ cinquante- 
sept ans et demi. Combien le votre a-t-il ? II a a peu pres le meme 
age. 

How old are you 1 I am hardly eighteen years old. — How old is 
your brother? He is about twenty-one. — He is then older thai] you? 
To be sure. But as you are much taller, I thought you were older. 
No, he is 3 years older than I, (il a 3 ans de plus que moi.) — How 
old art thou? I am not going to tell you how old I am. — Do you 
understand me? I do. — Does the Frenchman understand us? He 
does. — Do you understand what (ce que) we are telling you ? We 
do understand it. — Dost thou understand French? I do not yet. but 
I am learning it. — Do we understand the English? — We do not un- 
derstand them. — Do theEnglish understand us? They do. — Do we 
understand them ? We hardly understand them. — Do you hear any 



1 Except the adjective demi, half, which does not take it. (19 2 , N. 3.) 



184 



THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 



noise ? I hear nothing. — Have you heard the roaring of the wind % 
I have heard it. 

What do you hear } I hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose (29 2 ) 
dog is this? It is the dog of the Scotchman. — Have you lost your 
stick? I have not lost it. — Has your servant lost my bank-notes? 
(billets de banque ?) He has lost them. — Did you go to the ball? 
I did not. — Where did you remain ? I remained at home. — Where 
did the noblemen remain ? They remained in the garden. — Has 
your father lost as much money as I ? He has lost more than you. 
— How much have I lost ? You have hardly lost a crown. — Did 
your friends remain at the ball? They remained there. — Do you 
know as much as the English physician? I do not know as much 
as he. — How many books have you read? I have hardly read two. 
— Do you wait for any one ? I wait for no one. — Are you waiting 
for the man whom I saw this morning ? I am waiting for him. — 
Art thou waiting for thy book ? I am waiting for it. — Do you expect 
your father this evening? I do. — Do you expect some friends? 
I do. 



THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON, 36ih.—Trente-sixicme Legon, 36me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



To heat, beaten, beat. 

To bite, bitten, bite. 

Why do you beat the dog ? 

I beat it because it has bitten me. 

To owe, owed. 

How much do you owe me ? 

I owe you fifty crowns. 

How much does the man owe you ? 

He owes me sixty francs. 

Do our neighbors owe as much as 

we? 
We owe more than they. 
How much dost thou owe ? 
Eighty francs. Two hundred crowns. 

Eighty-three francs. 

Two hundred and fifty francs. 



Battre, 4, battu, battez. 

Mordre, 4, mordu, mordez. 
Pourquoi battez-vous le chien ? 
Je le bats parce qu'il m'a mordu. 
Devoir, du. 

Combien me devez-vous ? 
Je vous dois cinquante ecus. 
Combien l'homme vous doit-il ? 
II me doit soixante francs. 
Nos voisins doivent-ils autant que 

nous? 
Nous devons plus qu'eux. 
Combien dois-tu ? 
Quatre-vingts francs. Deux cents 

ecus. 
Quatre-vingt-trois francs. 
Deux cent cinquante francs. 



Obs. 83. As seen above, quatxe-vingt and cent take s when they are fol- 
lowed ^y nouns; but they have no s when followed by another numeral. 

Are you to .... ? I am to ... . t Devez-vous . . . ? t Je dois .... 

Where are you to go this morning | t Ou devez-vous aller ce matin 
afier breakfast ? apres dejeuner! 



THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON, (l.) 185 

I am to go to the store. . t Je dois aller au magasin. 

Is your brother to come here soon ? | t Votre frere doit-il venir ici bientot ? 

He is to come here very soon. \ t II doit venir ici bientot. 

Obs. 84. Are you to . . . ? I am to . . ., &c, not being used here in their 
natural or literal sense, but expressing duty, obligation ; the French translate 
them by the verb to owe, viz. devez-vous . . . ? Je dois . . ., il doit . . ., &c. 



To return, (to come back.) 

(It is also translated by retourner, 1.J 



Revenir* 2, revenue (conjugue 

comme son primitif, venir. (24 3 

^ 25 1 , 25 2 , 34 1 .) 

A quelle heure revenez-vous du 
marche ? 

Ten reviens a midi. 

En. 

Le domestique revient-il de bonne 
heure du magasin ? 

II en revient a six heures du matin. 



t A neuf heures du matin, 
t A cinq heures du soir. 
t A onze heures du soir 



At what o'clock do you return from 

the market ? 
I return from it at twelve o'clock. 
From it, from there, thence. 
Does the servant return early from 

the warehouse ? 
He returns from it at six o'clock in 

the morning. 
At nine o'clock in the morning. 
At five o'clock in the evening. 
At eleven o'clock at night. 

Trente-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
N'oubliez pas le quantieme ou (either) ici ou a la fin du theme. 
Bon jour, mon cousin, comment va, ce matin ? Bien • et vous . 
Moi aussi. Avez-vous bien dormi. (slept.) Oui, j'ai tres-bien dor- 
mi. Savez-vous si le dejeune est pret? Pret! Avez-vous deja 
faim ? Oui, j'ai grand'faim, je vous assure. Tres-bien. Je vais 
voir si le cuisinier est revenu du marche. Allez, et revenez vite : ou, 
plutot (rather) laissez-moi aller avec vous. — Bien, allons ensemble 
voir si le cuisinier a ete au marche, et s'il en est revenu, et en (at 
the) raerae temps, savoir quand il peut nous donner a dejeuner. 
Allons, venez, (come, let us go.) Allez-y, mes enfants. — Moi, je 
vais compter les i et les i de dollars que mon vieux fermier m'a 
apportes— 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 
19, 20 — 20 quarts de dollar, font 5 dollars. C ; est bien. A present, 
comptons les i dollars. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, et 1 font 19. 
J ; ai mal compte. Comptons encore. 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, et 2 font 20. 
West juste, (that's right.) Ah ! vous voila, Messieurs, et bien, le 
cuisinier a-t-il ete au marche et en est-il revenu? Oui, il en est 
revenu, et le dejeuner va etre pret dans un instant. J'en suis 
charme. car je commence aussi a avoir faim. Tenez ! (hear!) Le 
domestique a donne le signal ; le dejeuner est pret. Allons dejeu- 
ner. — Donnez-moi mon mouchoir qui est sur le dos du fauteuil. Le 
voici. — Devez-vous diner en ville? (in town?) Oui, je dois diner 
avec Pavocat de mon oncle. A quelle heure devez-vous y aller I 
16* 



186 



THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



Mori cousin et moi, nous devons y aller a 2 heures J. Doit-il y 
aller avec vous ? Oui, il doit y venir avec moi. — Nous devons tous 
deux diner avec l'avocat. 

Why does your neighbor beat his dog? Because it has bitten his 
boy. — How many times did it bite him? It has bitten him only 
once; and that is enough, is it not? — Is your farmer returned from 
market ? He is not yet returned from it. — At what o'clock did your 
brother return from the ball ? He returned from it at one o'clock in 
the morning. — At what o'clock didst thou come back from thy 
friend's? I came back (en) at eleven o'clock in the morning. — 
Didst thou remain long with him? I remained with him about an 
hour. — How long do you intend to remain at the ball ? I intend 4 o 
remain there a few minutes. — How long did the Frenchman remain 
with you? He remained with me for two hours. — How long 
did the Prussians remain in town ? They remained there during 
three months. 

Do you intend to remain long with us ? I intend to remain with you 
8, 10, or perhaps 15 days, (a fortnight.) — How much do I owe you? 
You do not owe me much. — How much do you owe your tailor ? I 
owe him eighty francs, or about sixteen dollars. — How much dost thou 
owe thy shoemaker ? I owe him already eighty-five francs, that is, 
about seventeen dollars. — Do I owe you anything ? You owe me 
nothing. — How much does the Englishman owe you? He owes 
me more than you. — Do the English owe as much as the Spaniards ? 
Not quite so much. — Do I owe you as much as my brother? You 
owe me more than he. — Do our friends owe you as much as we? 
They owe me less than you. — How much do they owe you? They 
owe me two hundred and fifty francs. — How many dollars is that? 
How much do we owe you ? You owe me three hundred francs, 
that is, about 60 dollars. 



VOCABULAIRE 
How long ? During, for. 

Whilst. Whilst I am here. 
How long has he remained there ? 
A minute. 
An hour. 
A day. 
A month. 
A year. 
The summer. The winter. 



2de Section. 

Combien de temps ? Pendant. 1 

Pendant que. Pendant que je suis ici. 

Combien de temps y est-il reste ? 

Pendant 1 une minute. 2 

Pendant une heure. 2 

Pendant un jour. 

Pendant un mois. 

Pendant une annee. 2 

L'ete\ L'hiver. 



1 The adverb pendant, when it signifies for, may be omitted in French 
as well as in English. 

2 Minute, heure, annee, and rue, are feminine nouns, of which the in- 



THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



187 



Obs. 85. Les noms des saisons, (seasons,) des mois, et des jours, sont 
masculins, excepte Vautomne, autumn, qui est masculin et feminin. 



During the summer. Last winter. 
To dwell, to live, to reside, to remain. 
Where do you live ? 
I live in William street, number 

twenty-five. 
Where did your brother live ? 
He lived in Rivoli street, number 

forty-nine. 
Post thou live at thy brother's house ? 
I do not live at his, but at my father's 

house. 
Does your friend still live where I 

lived. 
He lives no longer where you lived. 

No longer. Number, at number. 
How long were you speaking to the 

man? 
I spoke to him for two hours. 
Did you remain long with my father ? 

I stayed there a long time. 
I remained with him an hour. 
A long time, long. 



Pendant Pete. L'hiver dernier. 

Demeurer, l. 1 

Ou demeurez-vous ? 

Je demeure (dans la) rue 2 Guillaume, 

(au) numero vingt-cinq. 2 
Ou votre frere a-t-il demeure ? 
II a demeure (dans la) rue de Rivoli, 

(au) numero quarante-neuf. 2 
Demeures-tu chez ton frere ? 
Je ne demeure pas che:- hii 5 jjnais 

chez mon pere. 
Votre ami demeure-t-il encore ou 

j'ai demeure ? 
II ne demeure plus ou vous avez 

demeure. 
Ne . . plus. Numero, au numero. 
Combien de temps avez-vous parle 

a l'homme ? 
Je lui ai parle pendant deux heures. 
Etes-vous reste long-temps chez mon 

pere ? 
J'y suis reste long-temps. 
J'y suis reste une heure. 
Long-temps, never un long-temps.) 



Trente-sixieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 
N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme ici, ou au bout du theme. 
Avez-vous dit qiril y a dans le bureau quelqu'un qui veut me 
voir? Oui. je vous Pai dit. Quand est-il verm? II y a un moment. 
Qui est-ce? Le connaissez-vous? Non, je ne le connais pas. Je 
ne Pai jamais vu. Je ne peux pas le voir a present, parce que je 
dois etre au quai ahuit heures et demie. et il est deja huit heures et 
vingt-cinq minutes. — Dites-lui de revenir ; cet apres-midi. Non, 
n'importe, je vais le lui dire moi-meme. Combien de temps avez- 
vous lu? J'ai lu environ trois quarts cPheure. — Combien de temps 

definite article is une, a, one, and the definite la, whose plural (les) is the 
same as that of le. Feminine nouns take, like masculine nouns, an s in 
the plural, as will be seen hereafter. 

1 The verb demeurer takes avoir for its auxiliary when it means to live 
in, and etre when it signifies to remain. Ex. II a demeure a Paris, he has 
lived in Paris ; il est demeure court en haranguant le roi, he stopped short 
•rfi haranguing the king. 

2 Vans la before rue, and au before numero, have been put between 
parentheses, because they are generally omitted. 



188 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 

le fermier a-t-il attendu? II n'a pas attendu long- temps. — Jean a-t-il 
etudie long-temps? Non, pas tres-long-temps. — Combien de temps 
a-t-il etudie 1 Pres d'une demi-heure, (19 2 , N. 3.) Qu'a-t-il fait pen- 
dant le reste du temps? II a dormi. Quoi ! II a dormi une heure 
et demie, et il n ; a etudie qu'une demi-heure ? C ; est comme je vous 
le dis. A-t-il fait son devoir? II dit qu'il Pa fait. — C ? est bon. Cela 
sufflt. N'avez-vous pas promis a M. P. dialler a son concert ? Si 
fait, je le lui ai promis, s ; il a lieu pendant que je suis ici. Partez- 
vous bientot ? Oui, dans quelques jours. Voyez-vous le soldat qui 
est malade? Non ; mais je vois celui qui Pa ete. Combien de 
temps Pa-t-il ete? II Pa ete pendant quinze jours, (a fortnight.) 
Votre cousin ne va-t-il pas a Charleston pendant Phiver ? Si fait, il 
y va. Y reste-t-il pendant Pete ? II n'y reste pas pendant Pete. Ou 
va-t-il alors? II en revient, pour rester avec nous. Combien de 
temps avez-vous demeure dans la rue Chestnut? Nous y avons 
demeure long-temps. Le chien est-il reste pres du feu pendant 
deux heures? II n'y est reste qu'une heure, parce qu'il a mal au 
dos. 

How much have you given for that English horse ? I gave 220 
dollars for it. — Did not your little son give something to that poor little 
boy ? Yes, he has given him 5 cents. — Do you owe anything to 
the grocer? No, I believe I owe him nothing. — Does your neighbor 
take bread from your German baker? He does. — Does he owe him 
anything? I believe he does. — Does he owe the butcher? I do 
not know if he owes him anything. — Do you see the sailor who is 
in the ship ? I do not see the one ($ 87) in the ship, but the one on 
the wire bridge. — Do you know his name? I do not. — Where are 
you to go? I am to go to the old bridge. — Is your friend's uncle to 
come here to-day ? He is. — At what o'clock is he to come ? He is 
to come very soon. — When are your sons to go to the play ? They 
are to go to-night, (ce soir.) — When are they to return from it? 
They are to return from it at half past ten. — When are you to go to 
the physician's? I am to go at ten o'clock at night. — When is 
your son to return from (de chez) the painter's ? He is to return at 
five o'clock in the evening. — Where do you live ? I live in Rivoli 
street, number forty-seven. — Where does your father live ? He lives 
at his friend's house, in Walnut street, (rue Walnut,) No. 251. — 
Where do your brothers live ? They live in William street, number 
one hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy brother's house? I 
live at his house. — Do you still live where you did? I live there 
still. — Does your friend still live where he did ? He no longer lives 
where he did. — Where does he live at present? He lives at his 
father's house 



THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 



THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 37ih.—Trente-septieme Legon, 37me 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
Till, until 



Till, until noon, (twelve o'clock.) 

Till to-morrow. Till this evening 

Till the day after to-morrow. 

Till Sunday. Till Monday. 

Till evening. Till morning. 

Until the next day. 

Until the day before yesterday. 

Till to-day. 

Until this moment — that moment. 

Till now — hitherto. 

Until then. 

How long ? Until what time ? 

What hour ? — What period ? 



Jusque, (followed by a preposition and 
its objective case.) Jusqu'a midi. 
Jusqu'a demain. Jusqu'a ce soir. 
Jusqu'apres demain. 
Jusqu'a dimanche — a lundi. 
Jusqu'au soir. Jusqu'au matin. 
Jusqu'au lendema'tz.* 
Jusqu'avant hier. 
Jusqu'a aujourd'hui. 
Jusqu'a ce moment-ci — moment-la. 
Jusqu'a present — jusqu'ici. 



Jusqu'alors. 
> Jusqu'a quand ? Jusques a quand ? 

Obs. 86. How long, meaning, until what time, what hour, or period, 
must be translated by jusqu'a quand. But when it means, How many 
hours, days, &c, or what length of time : (36 2 ) translate by Combien de 
temps ? or Combien ? For instance : How long did you stay in New York ? 
may mean : Until what o'clock did you stay in New York, or in other words, 
when did you leave or quit it ? The answer might then be : At six o'clock^ 
or on Tuesday, &c. Or else it may mean, How many hours or days, &c, 
did you stay there? The answer might then be, six hours, three days, &c. 
Hence, when How long is used, consult the answer to know exactly the 
meaning of the question. 



Until what hour do you take lessons ? 
We take them till one o'clock, (we 

quit at 1.) 
Tuesday, on Tuesday — Wednesday. 

On Thursday — Friday — Saturday. 

Till I return, (till my return.) 

Till my brother returns, (till my bro- 
ther's return.) 

Till four o'clock in the morning. 

Till midnight, (till 12 at night.) 

The return or coming back. 

How long did you remain at my fa- 
ther's house ? 

I remained at his house till eleven 
o'clock at night. 

To be able, (can,) been able, (could.) 

Has the boy been able to read it ? 

He was able to read it. He could not. 

Could you find the word ? 

Yes, I found it immediately. 



Jusqu'a quand prenez-vous lecons ? 
Nous iesprenonsjusqu'auneheure. 

Mardi. Mercredi. (On is not trans- 
lated.) 
Jeudi. Vendredi. Samedi. (32 2 , N. 1.) 
Jusqu'a mon retour. 
Jusqu'au retour de mon frere. 

Jusqu'a quatre heures du matin. 

Jusqu'a minuit. 

Le retour. 

Jusqu'a quand etes-vous reste chez 

mon pere ? 
J'y suis reste jusqu'a onze heures 

du soir. 
Pouvoir,* pu. (20 1 , 24 3 , 34*.) 
Le garcon a-t-il pu le lire ? (§ 148.) 
II a pu le lire. II n'a pas pu. 
Avez-vous pu trouver le mot ? 
Oui, je l'ai trouve tout de suite. 



190 THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 

Trente-septieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 
N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme du mois ici ou a la fin. 

Mon cher Lucien, je suis charme de vous voir. Je vous croyais 
absent. Depuis quand etes-vous revenu ? Je suis revenu samedi 
dernier. Jusqu'a quand allez-vous rester ici? (How long or until 
what time.) Je vais y rester jusqu'au retour de mon oncle, et peut- 
etre plus long-temps. L'attendez-vous bientot ? Je l'attends dans 
8 ou 10 jours. Demeurez-vous avec votre cher cousin'? Non, je ne 
demeure plus avec lui. — Avec qui demeurez-vous ? Je ne demeure 
avec personne. Je suis dans un hotel. Allez-vous y rester jusqu'au 
retour de votre oncle 1 Je pense que oui. Laissez votre hotel et 
venez demeurer avec nous. Je vous suis bien oblige. Jusqu'a 
quand le commis du marchand de livres est-il reste au musee ? II 
n'y est reste que jusqu'a midi. Pourquoi done ? (so.) Parce qu'il 
n'a pas pu. Et pourquoi n'a-t-il pas puy rester jusqu'a deux heures 
comme les autres ? II n'a pas pu, parce que son pere dine de bonne 
heure. Allez-vous a Lancastre cet ete ? Non, je n'y vais pas. Et 
vous, Jules, y allez-vous? Moi non plus. Et Charlotte et son frere, 
y vont-ils ? Eux non plus. — Le professeur y va-t-il? Lui non plus. 
Qui y va? Personne n'y va. — Combien de temps etes-vous tous 
restes a Bordeaux'? Mon oncle y a demeure pendant 6 ans, mon 
cousin pendant trois ans, moi pendant six mois; mais ces jeunes 
garcons n'y sont restes que quelques jours. 

Until what time do the carpenters work at noon ? They work till 
twelve. — When do they leave off work in the evening? (or, until 
what hour do they work?) Until 6 o'clock, or rather J to 6. — How 
long did I work? (or, until what? &c.) You worked till 4 o'clock in 
the morning. — Has the physician still long to wait? (encore pour 
long-temps ?) He has. — Am I to remain long here ? You are to 
remain here till Sunday. — Is my brother to remain long with you ? 
He is to remain with us till Monday. — How long (until what time) 
are we to work ? You are to work till the day after to-morrow. — 
Have you still long to speak ? I have still an hour to speak. — Did 
you speak long? I spoke (ai parte) till the next day. — Did you 
remain long in my counting-house ? I remained in it till this mo- 
ment. 

Have you still long to live af the Frenchman's house ? I have 
still long to live at his house. — How long (till what time) have you 
still to live at his house ? Till winter. — Has he swept the floor ? He 
has swept it. — How long did he remain here? Till noon, (midi.) — 
Does your friend still live with you ? He lives with me no longer. 
— How long did he live with you? He lived with me only a year. — - 



THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



191 



How long (till what time) did you remain at the ball? I remained 
there till midnight. — How long (what time) did you reirain in the 
ship? I remained an hour in it. — Have you remained in the garden 
till now % I have remained there till now. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



One, some or any one, people, (and they , 
we, you, in an indefinite sense.) 

Have they brought my shoes ? 

They have brought them. 

They have not brought them yet. 

What have they said ? 

They have said nothing. 

What have they done ? 

They have done nothing. 

To be willing, been willing. 

Has one wished to burn my coat ? 

No one would burn it. (§ 148 — 4.) 

Could they find the books ? 

They could not find them. 

Can they do what they wish ? 

They do what they can ; but they do 
not do what they wish. 

What do they say ? Nothing new. 

What do they say new ? 

They say nothing new. 

Something or anything new. 

New. 

My new coat. 
My new horse. 
My handsome horse. 
My new friend. 
My handsome coat. 



On, (pronom indefini, toujours singu 

lier. § 38.) 
A-t-on apporte mes souliers ? 
On les a apportes. 
On ne les a pas encore apportes. 
Qu'a-t-071 dit ? 
On n'a rien dit. 
Qu'a-t-0% fait? 
On n'a rien fait. 
Vouloir,* voulu. (18 J , 24 3 , 34 1 .) 
A-t-on voulu bruler mon habit ? 
On n'a pas voulu le bruler. 
A-t-on pu trouver les livres ? 
On n'a pu les trouver. 
Teut-on faire ce qu'on veut ? 
On fait ce qu'on peut ; mais on ne 

fait pas ce qu'ow veut. 
Que dit-on ? Rien de nouveau. 
Que &\l-on de nouveau ? (Obs. 7.) 
On ne dit rien de nouveau. 
Quelque chose de nouveau. 
Neuf, nouveau, (before a vowel or h 

mute, nouvel.) 1 
Mon habit neuf. 
Mon nouveau cheval. 
Mon beau cheval. 
Mon nouvel ami. 
Mon bel habit. 2 



1 Nouveau {nouvel before a vowel or h mute) is used for things which are 
new from nature or invention, as : du vin nouveau, new wine ; un nouveau 
commis, a new clerk ; un nouvel ami, a new friend ; un livre nouveau, a 
book just published. Neuf, on the contrary, is used of things made by 
men, as : un habit neuf, a new coat ; un livre neuf, a new book, (which ha3 
been printed long ago, but has not been used.) Thus we may say: Ce 
livre neuf est-il nouveau ? Is this new book a new publication ? Neuf 
figuratively means inexperienced. Ex. Ce valet est bien neuf, this valet is 
very inexperienced. 

2 Bel and nouvel are used only before masculine substantives beginning 
with a vowel, or h mute, as may be seen from our examples. But in the 
plural the adjectives remain beau and nouveau. Ex. Ces beaux arbres, these 
fine trees ; mes nouveaux amis, my new friends. 



192 



THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



To brush, brushed, brush. 

This fine -looking man. 

These fine-looking men. 

This fine tree. 

Those fine trees. 

My new friends. 

Do they believe that ? They do. 

They do not believe it. 

Do they speak of that ? 

They do speak of it. 

They do not speak of it. 



Brosser, 1, brosse, brossez, (impera.) 

Ce bei homme. 

Ces beaux homines. 

Ce bel arbre. 

Ces beaux arbres. 

Mes nouveaux amis. 

Croit-on cela ? On le croit. 

On ne le croit pas. 

Parle-t-on de cela ? 

On en parte. 

On ^en parle pas. 



Trente-septieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Quel est le quantieme ? Apprenez-le et mettez-le ici. 

Que faites-vous ce matin ? Je lis. Que lisez-vous ? Le journal 
d'aujourd'hui, Avez-vous deja vu quelque chose de nouveau? Je 
n 7 ai encore rien lu de nouveau. Je n ; ai lu qu'un article. Que dit-on 
du cholera? Pas grand 7 chose encore. Parle-t-on de Por de la Cali- 
fornie 1 Je crois qu'on en parle j mais laissez-moi lire, et alors jf* 
peux vous dire ce qu 7 on dit de nouveau. Eh ! bien. Lisez. — Tra 
vaillez avant de dejeuner. Non, je ne peux pas travailler avant de 
dejeuner. Je n'ai jamais pu. Moi, je peux, et j'en suis bien aise. — 
George a-t-il lu et ecrit? II n'a voulu ni lire ni ecrire. Qu'a-t-il 
fait? II n ? a rien voulu faire. C'est extraordinaire ! Est-il malade ? 
Non, il se porte tres-bien au contraire, car il a tres-bien dejeune. 
Pourquoi n'a-t-il pas voulu etudier comme a Pordinaire ? II a dit : Je 
veux jouer au lieu de travailler. A-t-il perdu son livre ? Non ; je le 
lui ai donne • mais au lieu de Pouvrir, il Pa serre dans son pupitre. 
Le voisin vous a-t-il prete son cheval ? Non, il a refuse de me le 
preter. Le fermier vous a-t-il prete le sien ? Non, il a aussi refuse, 
parce qu'il en a besoin pour aller en ville. Ah ! Mile., je suis charme 
d'avoir le plaisir de vous voir. Otez votre chale et votre bonnet, et 
asseyez-vous dans ce fauteuil. Ce fauteuil de velours est trop chaud, 
je vais prendre ce siege. Je veux voir Charlotte. Charlotte n 7 est 
pas ici. En verite. Alors, je vais partir. Adieu, M. Adieu, Mile. 

Has the shoemaker been able to mend my shoes? He has not 
been able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend them? 
Because he has had no time. — Have they (on) been able to find my 
gold buttons ? They have not been able to find them. — Why has 
the tailor not mended my coat? Because he has no good thread.— 
Why have you beaten the dog ? Because it has bitten me. — Why 
do you drink? Because I am thirsty. — What have they wished to 
say ? They have not wished to say anything. — Have they said any- 
thing new ? They have not said anything new. — What do they (on) 



THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



193 



say new in the market? They say nothing new there. — Did they 
kill any dogs this morning ? They killed more than 65. — Do they 
believe that? They do not believe it. — Do they speak of that? 
They do speak of it. — Do they speak of the man that has been 
killed? They do not speak of him. — Can people do what they 
wish ? They do what they can • but they do not what they wish. — 
What have they brought? They have brought your new coat. — Has 
my new servant brushed my fine carpets ? He has not yet brushed 
them. — Have you bought a new horse ? I have bought two new 
horses. — How many fine trees have you seen ? I have seen but one 
fine tree. — Have you seen a fine-looking man ? I have seen several 
fine-looking men. — Have you a new friend? I have several. — Do 
you like your new friends ? I do like them. 



THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 38th.—Trente-huitieme Legon, 38me, 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
To. How far ? Up to, as far as. 



To, or as far as my uncle's 
This far, as far as here, hither. 
That far, as far as there, that ; thither. 
As far as London. Paris. Rome. 
To, at, or in Paris. To, at, or in Berlin. 



Jusqu'oii ? (adv.) Jusque. 

Jusque chez mon oncle. 
Jusqu'ici. 
Jusque la. 

Jusqu'a Londres, a Paris, a Rome. 
A Paris. A Berlin. 



Obs. 87. Mettez (a) avant les noms des villes—Ze Havre, to Havre, au 
Havre, (§ 12), et mettez (en) avant ceux des pays, (countries,) — To Hungary, 
en Hongrie. 



To, at or in France — England. 

As far as England. 

As far as Spain. 

As far as France. 

As far as Italy. 

As far as my house. 

As far as the warehouse. 

As far as the corner. 

As far as the end of the road. 

As far as the middle of the road. 

Up stairs. Down stairs. 

As far as above. As far as below. 

As far as the other side of the road. 

This side, on this side. 

That side, on that side. 

Germany. In America. 

Holland. Hungary, (to.) 



En France — en Angleterre. 

Tusqu'en Angleterre. 

Jusqu'en Espagne. 

Jusqu'en France. 

Jusqu'en Italic 

Jusque chez moi. 

Jusqu'au magasin. (§ 13.) 

Jusqu'au coin. 

Jusqu'au bout du chemin. 

Jusqu'au milieu du chemin. 

En haut. En has. 

Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en bas. 

Jusqu'a l'autre cote du chemin. 

De ce cote-ci. 

De ce cote-la. 

L'Allemagne. En Amerique. 

LaHollande. 1 La Hongrie, 1 (en.) 



1 In Hollande the letter h is aspirated ; therefore we say la Hollande. 
17 



194 THIRTY-EIGHTH LE3S0N. (1.) 

Obs. 88. The names of states, empires, kingdoms, and provinces, are 
generally feminine when they end in e mute, and masculine, when they 
do not. 

The middle. The well. 

The cask. The castle 

To travel. 

Do you go to Paris ? £ Allez-vous a Paris ? 

Do you travel to Pans ? 



Le milieu. Le puits. 

Le tonneau. Le chateau. 

Voyager, 1. 



J'y vais. 

Est-il alle en Angleterre ? 

II y est alle. 

Jusqu'ou est-il alle ? 

Jusqu'ou a-t-il voyage ? 

II est aJle jusqu'en Amerique. 



I do travel (or go) thither. 
Is he gone to England ? 
He is gone thither. 
How far is he gone ? 
How far has he travelled to ? 
He is gone as far as America. 

Trente-huitieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Si vous ne savez pas le quantieme, apprenez-le et ecrivez-le ici. 
Ah ! vous voild, M. Henri. Je vous croyais a voyager. Je sisia 
revenu depuis un mois environ. — Jusqu'ou avez-vous ete ? J'ai et6 
jusqu'en Allemagne. Ainsi, vous avez voyage en Angleterre et en 
France ? Oui, j'y ai voyage, et en Italie aussi. Avez-vous ete jus- 
qu'en Hongrie? Non, je n'ai pas eu le temps d'y aller; parce que 
j'ai reste trop long-temps a Paris. Combien de temps y etes-vous 
reste? J'y suis reste un mois. Ce n'est pas grand' chose. Pardon- 
nez-moi, c'est beaucoup quand vous avez beaucoup de pays a voir. 
Vous avez raison. — Avez-vous voyage seul? Non, mon cher ami 
Francois a voyage avec moi, et nous avons ete ensemble tout le 
temps. — Le pere Matthieu est-il venu jusqu'en Amerique ? Oui ; il 
y est venu. Qui est le pere Matthieu ? Le grand champion Irian- 
dais de la temperance. — Jusqu'ou les Espagnols sont-ils alles? lis 
sont alles jusqu'a Londres. — Jusqu'ou ce pauvre homme est-il venu? 

II est venu jusqu'ici. Est-il venu jusque chez vous? II est venu 
jusque chez mon pere. — Combien a-t-il perdu? II a perdu tout 
son argent. Mon ami est-il alle de ce cdte-la? Oui. il est alle de 
ce cdte-la. Je croyais qu'il etait (§ 147) alle de ce cote-ci. Non, 
personne n'est alle de ce cote-ci. — Voila votre garcon, ou etak-Ht 
II etait avec moi. — Et ou etiez-vous? Moi? fetais en haut. — Vous 
etiez en haut, et moi fetais en bas. Qui etait en bas avec vous? 
Personne n'etait en bas avec moi, j'y etais seul. 

How far did you wish to go ? I wished to go as far as the wood. 
Have you gone as far as there ? I have not gone as far as there. — 
How far does your brother wish to go ? He wishes to go as far as 
the end of that road. — How far does the wine go? It goes to the 
middle of the cask. — Where art thou going? I am going to the 



THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



195 



bridges. — How far are we going ? We are going as far as the thea- 
tre. — Are you going as far as the well % I am going as far as the 
castle. — Has the carpenter drunk all the wine? He has drunk it. — 
Has your little boy torn all his clothes'? He has torn them all. — 
Why has he torn them ? Because he does not like them. — How 
much have you lost ? I have lost all my money. — Do you know 
where my father is? I do not know. — Have you not seen my 
book? I have not seen it. — Do you know how tnis word is written? 
It is written thus. — Do you travel sometimes? I travel often. — 
W T here do you intend to go to, this summer ? (eel ete?) I intend to 
go to Paris. — Do you not go to Italy ? I do go thither. — Hast thou 
sometimes travelled? I have never travelled. — Have your friends 
a mind to go to Holland ? They have a mind to go thither. — When 
do they intend to depart? They intend to depart the day after to- 
morrow. — Where is General Lewis going? He is going as far as 
Hungary. 

VOCABULAIRE 

To steal, to rob, commit a theft. 
To steal something from some one. 
Have they stolen your hat from you? 
They have stolen it from me. 
Has the man stolen the books from 

thee? 
He has stolen them from me. 
What have they stolen from you ? 
They have stolen gloves from me. 
Did they steal many ? 
They did. 

How do you spell this word ? 
How is this word written ? 
It is written thus. 
To dye or colour, dyed, dye. 
I dye, thou dyest, he dyes ; dyeing. 
To dye black. 
To dye red. 
To dye green. 
To dye blue. 
To dye yellow. 

Is that brown cloth French, Ame- 
rican, or English ? It is French. 
Is not that blue velvet beautiful ? 
Yes, it is superb. 
This round white hat. 
Do you dye your coat blue ? 
I dye it green. 
How does he dye his satin ? 



2de Section. 

Yoler, vole, ne volez pas, (impera.) 
t Voler quelque chose a quelqu'un, 
t Vous a-t-on vole votre chapeau ? 
t On me l'a vole. 
t L'horame t'a-t-il vole les livres ? 

t II me les a voles, 
t Que vous a-t-on vole ? 
On m'a vole des gants. 
Vous en a-t-on vole beaucoup ? 
On m'en a vole beaucoup. 
Comment e'pelle-t-on ce mot? 
Comment ecrit-on ce mot? 
On l'ecrit ainsi, (de cette maniere.) 
Teindre,* 4, teint, teignez (impera.) 
Je teins, tu teins, il teint; teignant. 
t Teindre en noir. 
t Teindre en rouge. 
t Teindre en vert, 
t Teindre en bleu, 
t Teindre en jaune. 
Ce drap brun est-il Francais, Ame- 
ricain, ou Anglais ? II est. Frangais. 
Ce velours bleu n'est-il pas beau ? 
Si fait, il est snperbe. 
Ce chapeau rond et blanc. (Obs. 61.) 
t Teignez-vous votre habit en bleu! 
t Je le teins en vert, 
t Comment teint-i son satin ? 



196 THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



He dyes it blue. 

The dyer. 

To get dyed, got dyed. 

What colour have you had your 

white hat dyed ? 
I have got it dyed black. 
Red. Brown. Gray. Pi?ik. 
Spring. In (in the) spring. 

Last spring. Next spring. 

Clear, light. Dark, deep. 

Light blue. Dark pink. 

Gray, light brown, and pink, are 
good for spring. 



t II le teint en bleu. 

Le leinturier. 

t Faire teindre, fait teindre. 

t Comment avez-vous fait teindre 
votre chapeau ? 

t Je l'ai fait teindre en noir. 

Rouge. Brun. Gris. Rose. 

Le print emps. Au printemps. 

Le printemps passe — prochain. 

Clair. Fonce. 

Bleu clair. Rose fonce. 

Le gris, le brun clair, et le rose, sont 
bons pour le printemps. 
Trente-huitieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Savez-vous le quantieme ? Oui, je le sais. Mettez-le ici. 
Achetez-vous un chapeau blanc ou noir ce printemps? Pen 
achete un blanc. Le noir est bon pour l'automne. Allez-vous 
serrer le noir? Sans doute. Votre chale est trop fonce pour le 
printemps, n ; allez-vous pas en mettre un autre ? Je n'en ai pas 
d'autre ici. — Vous a-t-on vole une partie de votre linge ? Non, on ne 
m'a hen vole ; mais on a vole quelque chose a mon frere. — Que lui 
a-t-on vole ? On lui a vole son parapluie et ses gants neufs. — Ou les 
lui a-t-on voles ? On les lui a voles dans le bureau de son cousin. 
Je suis bien fache de Fapprendre. Mais si vous n ; avez pas d'autre 
chale, Victoria peut vous en preter un plus clair. Trouvez-vous le 
mien trop fonce ? Oui, je le trouve trop fonce. Votre chapeau est 
beaucoup plus clair, n'est-ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison. — Victoria, 
pretez-moi un de vos chales. Lequel voulez-vous? J ; en veux un 
moins fonce que celui-ci; en avez-vous de moins fonce? Oui, j'en 
ai un plus clair, un peu plus clair que le votre. Laissez-moi Taller 
chercher. Allons-y ensemble. Allez-vous voyager le printemps 
prochain? Non pas le printemps prochain, mais Pautomne pro- 
chain. 

Have they stolen anything from you ? They have stolen all the 
good wine from me. — Have they stolen anything from your father? 
They have stolen all his good books from him. — Dost thou steal any- 
thing? I steal nothing. — Hast thou ever stolen ai^thing? I have 
never stolen anything. — Have they stolen your good clothes from 
you? They have stolen them from me. — What have they stolen 
from me ? They have stolen all the good books from you. — When 
did they steal the money from you? They stole it from me last 
spring. — Have your servants ever stolen anything from us? They 
have never stolen anything from us. — Does your son get his white 
vest dyed? He does get it dyed. — Does he get it dyed red? He 



THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 



197 



gets it dyed gray. — What color have your friends got their coats 
dyed ? They have got them dyed green. — What color have the 
Italians had their hats dyed ? They have had them dyed light 
brown. — Have you a white hat? I have a black one. — What hat 
has the nobleman? He has two hats: a white one and a black 
one. — What hat has the American? He has a round black hat. — - 
Have I a white hat? You have several white and black hats. — 
Has your dyer already dyed your cloth ? He has dyed it. — What 
color has he dyed it ? He has dyed it green. 



THIRTY-NINTH LESSON, 39th.— Trente-neuvume Legon, S9me. 
Vocabulaike. Ire Section. 

To be necessary — must. [ Falloir,*3 (verbe irre'gulier, defectif, 

et unxpersonnel;, p. passe fallu. 

S itn T C t M " I T l u v. J Faut-il! Ne faut-il pas? 

Must I, thou, he, she, we, you, they ? ) 

It is necessary. I, thou, he, &c, must. | II faut. II ne faut pas. 

Obs. 89. All verbs expressing necessity, obligation, or want, as, to b& 
obliged, to want, to be necessary, must, are in French generally rendered by 
falloir. 



Is it necessary to go to the market ? 
It is not necessary to go thither. 
What must be done to learn French ? 

It is necessary to study a great deal. 
What must /do? 



Faut-il aller au marche ? 

II ne faut pas y aller. 

Que faut-il faire pour apprendre le 

Francais ? 
II faut etudier beaucoup. 
Que me faut-il faire ? 

Obs. 90. Faut (as all unipersonal verbs) can have no other nominative 
but il. Hence, the English subject of must, is to be rendered in French by 
the indirect object : (§ 47,) me, te, lux, nous, vous, or leur. 

You must stay still. 
Whither must he go ? 
He must go for his book. 



What must they buy ? 
They must buy some beef. 
What must we read ? 
What must you have ? 



II vous faut rester tranquille. 

Ou lux faut-il aller ? 

II lux faut aller chercher son livre. 

Que leur faut-il acheter ? 

II leur faut acheter du bceuf. 

Que nous faut-il lire ? 

Que vous faut-il ? 



Ohs. 91. The verb have, following in English the verb must, is not ren- 
dered in French. 



/must have some money. 
Must you have a sou? 
Must you have a great deal ? 
/must have a great deal. 
17* 



II me faut de 1' argent. 
Vous faut-il un sou ? 
Vous en faut-il beaucoup ? 
II m'en faut beaucoup. 



198 THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (I.) 



II ne me faut qu'un sou. 
t Ne vous faut-il que cela ? 
t II ne me faut que cela. 



I want only one sou. 

Is that all you want ? 

That is all /want. 

How much must thou have ? ) Combien u faut . il? 

How much dost thou want ? 3 

/ want only a franc. 

How much must your brother have ? 

He wants only two francs. 

Have you what, you want ? 

I have what /want. 

He has what he wants. 

They have what they want. 

More. 



II ne me faut qu' un franc. 
Combien faut-il a votrefrere? 
II ne lux faut que deux francs. 
Avez-vous ce qu'il vous faut ? 
J'ai ce qu'il me faut. 
II a ce qu'il lui faut. 
lis ont ce qu'il leur faut. 
Davantage. 



Obs. 92. This adverb has the same signification as plus, with this differ- 
ence only, that it cannot precede a noun. 



No more (of it, them). 
Do you not want more ? 
I do not want more. 
He does not want more. 



W en pas davantage. 

Ne vous en faut-il pas davantage ? 
II ne m'en faut pas davantage. 
II ne lui en faut pas davantage. 



Tkente-nettvieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Cherchez le quantieme et mettez-le ici. 

Faut-il envoyer au marche* ? Oui, il faut y envoyer. Pourquoi 
faut-il y envoyer ? II nous faut du beurre, du baeuf, et du lait. Du 
lait? Le laitier n 7 en a-t-il pas apporte ce matin 7 ? Non, il nous a 
oublies, ou il est malade. N'importe. Comme vous dites, il nous 
faut du lait. — Le cuisinier a-t-il assez d 7 argent pour acheter tout ce 
qu ; il nous faut? Ne lui avez-vous pas donne un billet de deux dol- 
lars? II n ; a pas voulu le prendre, et je ne lui ai donne que trois 
quarts de dollar. S"il n ; a pas davantage, je crois que ce n ; est pas 
assez. Alors, il faut lui en donner davantage. Combien davantage? 
Un demi-dollar. En avez-vous un? Oui, en voici un. Donnez-le- 
lui. Qui fait ce bruit-la ? C ; est Francois. Qu'a-t-il? Que lui faut- 
il ? II a mal a Pceil. Dites-lui de rester tranquille. II ne peut pas 
rester tranquille. II lui faut rester tranquille, et dormir. Ce n ? est 
pas difficile a dire ; mais c'est plus difficile a faire. 

Is it necessary to go to the market ? — It is not necessary to go 
there. — What must they buy ? They must buy some gloves. — Must 
I go for some salt? You must go for some. — Am I to go to the ball? 
You must go. — When must I go ? You must go this evening. — - 
Must 1 go for the carpenter? You must go for him. — What must 
be done to learn Russian ? It is necessary to study a great deal. — 
Is it necessary to study a great deal to learn German ? It is. (Dir. 1.) 
— What must I do? You must buy a good book. — What is he to 
do ? He must stay still. — What are we to do ? You must not stay 



THIRTY-NINTH LESSCN. (2.) 



199 



gull, but work. — Must you work much in order to learn the Arabic % 
I must work much to learn it. — Why must I go to the wharf? You 
must go there to bring the sailors here. 

Must I go anywhere ? Thou must go into the garden. — Must I 
send for anything ? Thou must send for some wine. — What must I 
do? You must write an exercise. — To whom must I write a note? 
You must write one to your friend. — Do you not want any shoes ? 
I do not want any. — Dost thou want much money % I want much. 
— How much must thou have ? I must have five crowns. — How 
much does your brother want ? He wants but six sous. — Does he 
not want more ? He does not want more. — Does your friend want 
more? He does not want so much as I. — What do you want? I 
want money and clothes. — Have you now what you want ? I have 
what I want. — Has your father what he wants ? He has what he 
wants. 

Vocabtjlaire. 2de Section. 

Vous a-t-il fallu travailler beaucoup 
pour apprendre le Frangais ? 



Have you been obliged to work much 

to learn French ? 
I have been obliged to work much. 
What am I to do ?, 
You must work. 
Am I to go thither ? 
You may go thither. 
To be worth — been worth. 
How much may that horse be worth ? 
It may be worth a hundred crowns. 
Are you worth ? I am worth. 
Thou art worth. Pie is not w T orth. 
We are worth — they are worth. 
How much is that gun worth ? 
It is worth but one crown. 
How much is that worth? 
That is not worth much. 
That is not worth anything. 
This is worth more than that. 
The one is not worth so much as the 

other. 
To be better. 
Am I not as good as my brother ? 

You are better than he. 

1 am not so good as you. 

To give back, to restore. 

Does he restore you your book ? 

He does restore it to me. 

Has he given you back your gloves ? 

He has given them back to me. 



II m'a fallu travailler beaucoup 

Que dois-je faire ? 

Vous devez travailler. 

Faut-il y aller ? 

Vous pouvez y aller. 

Valoir* 3 — valu. 

Combien ce cheval peut-il valoir ? 

II peut valoir cent ecus. 

Valez-vous ? Je vaux. 

Tu vaux. II ne vaut pas. 

Nous valons — ils valent. 

Combien ce fusil vaut-il ? 

II ne vaut qu'un ecu. 

Combien cela vaut-il ? 

Cela ne vaut pas grand' chose. 

Cela ne vaut rien. 

Celui-ci vaut plus que celui-la. 

L'un ne vaut pas autant que 1' autre. 

Valoir mieux. 

Est-ce que je ne vaux pas autant que 

mon frere ? 
Vous valez mieux que lui. 
Je ne vaux pas autant que vous. 
Rendre, 4. Rendu. Rendez. 
Vous rend-il votre livre ? 
II me le rend. 

Vous a-t-il rendu vos gants ? 
II me les a rendus. 



200 



THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



Has your brother already commenced 
his exercises ? 

Not yet. 

He has not yet commenced them. 

The gift. The present. 

Have you received a present ? 

I have received several. 

Have you received the books ? 

I have received them. 

From whom ? 

From whom have you received pre- 
sents ? 

From my friends. 

Whence ? Where from ? 

Where do you come from ? 

I come from the garden. 

Where is he come from ? 

He is come from the theatre. 

Where did they come from ? 



Votre frere a-t-il deja commence ses 

themes ? 
Pas encore. 

II ne les a pas encore commences. 
Le don. Le present. 

Avez-vous regu un present ? 
J' en ai regu plusieurs. 
Avez-vous regu les livres ? 
Je les ai regus. 
De qui ? 
De qui avez-vous regu des presents ? 

De mes amis. 

D'ou? 

D'ou venez-vous ? 

Je viens du jardin. 

D'ou est-il venu ? 

II est venu du theatre. 

D'ou sont-ils venus ? 



Trente-neuvieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 
N'oubliez pas d'e*crire la date ici ou a la fin du theme. 

Voulez-vous sortir avec moi? Pourquoi sortez-vous? Je sors 
pour acheter quel que chose. Que vous faut-il? II me faut plu- 
sieurs articles. Allons — allons — sortez-vous sans chapeau? Je 
croyais Pavoir. — Je Pai a present. Etes-vous pret, vous-meme'! 
( § 41j.) Je crois que oui. Non, non, attendez, attendez. Je n 7 ai pas 
pris mon portefeuille. Ainsi vous n'avez pas d'argent. C'est une 
bonne maniere dialler acheter. Chez qui allons-nous'? D'abord 
chez le marchand de drap. Vous faut-il du drap pour un habit ? 
Oui, il m'en faut. Vous en faut-il du bleu, du vert, du noir, ou du 
gris? Je n 7 ai pas encore fait de choix. Nous sommes pres du 
magasin. Entrons. Bon jour, M. Bertrand. Messieurs, j'ai Phon- 
neur de vous saluer. Vous faut-il quelque chose ce matin'? Du 
drap, du velours, du satin ? Quoi ? II faut du drap a Monsieur. 
Et vous, M., ne vous faut-il rien? Non pas aujouixPhui. Vous 
savez qu'avant-hier j'ai achete plusieurs articles chez vous. C'est 
vrai : vous avez raison. 

What do you want, Sir? I want some cloth. — How much is that 
hat worth ? It is worth four crowns. — Do you want any stockings'? 
I want some. — How much are those stockings worth? They are 
worth two francs. — Is that all you want? That is all. — Has your 
little boy received a present? He has received several. — From 
whom has he received any ? He has received some from my father 
and from yours. — Have you received any presents? I have received 



FORTIETH LESSON. 



(1.) 



201 



some. — What presents have you received ? I have received fine 
presents. — How much may that horse be worth? It may be worth 
five hundred crowns. 

Is this book worth as much as that? It is worth more. — How 
much is my gun worth ? It is worth as much as that of your friend. 
— Are your horses worth as much as those of the English ? They 
are not worth so much. — How much is that knife worth? It is 
worth nothing. — Is your servant as good as mine ? He is better 
than yours. — Are you as good as your brother? He is better than 
I. — Art thou as good as thy friend? I am as good as he. — Are we 
as good as our neighbors ? We are better than they. — Is your um- 
brella worth as much as mine ? It is not worth so much. — Why is 
it not worth so much as mine ? Because it is ;iot so fine as yours. — 
How much is that gun worth? It is not worth much. — Do you wish 
to sell your horse ? I do wish to sell it. — How much is it worth ? It 
is worth two hundred crowns. 



FORTIETH LESSON, 40th.— Quarantieme Le$on, 40me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



After breakfast — dinner — supper. 

After me, him, you, them, my friend. 

After having spoken. 

After having sold (selling) his horse. 

After having been (being) there. 

I put away the knife after cutting (or 

having cut) the beef. 
We took tea after dining. 

We ate a late supper. 

To pay. ($ 144—3.) 

To pay a man for a horse. 

To pay the tailor for the coat. 

Do you pay the shoemaker for the 

shoes ? 
I pay him for them. 
Does he pay you for the knife ? 
He does pay me for it. 
I pay what I owe. 
To ask, to ask of, to ask for. Ask for. 



Apres dejeune — apres dine — soupe. 
Apres moi, lui, vous, eux, mon ami. 
t Apres avoir parle. (Rul. 1, N. 1.) 
t Apres avoir vendu son cheval. 
t Apres y avoir ete. 
t J'ai serre le couteau apres avoir 

coupe le bceuf. 
t Nous avons pris le the apres avoir 

dine, 
t Nous avons soupe tard. 
Payer, 1, paye, payez (impera.) 
t Payer un cheval a un homme. 
t Payer l'habit au tailleur. 
t Payez -vous les souliers au cor 

donnier? 
t Je les lui paie. 
t Vous paie-t-il le couteau ? 
t II me le paie. 
Je paie ce que je dois. 
Demander, 1. demandez, (impera.) 

Obs. 93. The English verbs : to pay and to ask, require the preposition 
for. before the object. In French, the object has no preposition, but the 
person takes a. When the verb payer, however, has no object, do not use 
« before the person. 



202 



FORTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



I have paid the tailor. 

I have paid him. 

Have you paid the shoemaker ? 

I have paid him. 

Ask Lewis for some money. 

I ask my father for some money. 

Ask him for some. 
Do you ask me for your hat ? 
I do ask you for it. 
To ask him for it. 
To ask him for them. 
What do you ask me for ? 
I ask you for nothing. 
Ask (of) John if he has my pencil. 
I did (ask him, or ask it of him). 
What did you ask of the clerk ? 

I asked him to copy that. 
He does not ask you to come. 



J'ai paye le tailleur. 

Je l'ai paye. 

Avez-vous paye le cordonnier ? 

Je l'ai paye. 

t Demandez de 1' argent a Louis. 

t Je demande de V argent a mon 

pere. Demandez-lui-en. 
t Me demandez-vous votre chapeau ? 
t Je vous le demande. 
t Le lui demander. 
t Les lui demander. 
t Que me demandez-vous ? 
t Je ne vous demande rien. 
t Demandez a Jean s'il a mon crayon. 
t Je le lui ai demande. 
t Qu' avez-vous demande au com- 

mis ? 
t Je lui ai demande de copier eel a. 
t II ne vous demande pas de venir. 



Quarantine Theme, Ire Sec. 

Qui est la? C'est le boulanger. — Lui avez-vous demande trois 
pains? (loaves?) Non, je ne lui en ai demande que deux, comme 
a Pordinaire. Demandez-lui-en un autre. Je vais le lui demander. 
Quel pain faut-il lui demander? Un rond ou un tortillon? (a twist 
loaf?) Demandez-lui un tortillon. et s'il n'en a pas, prenez-en un 
rond. — Faut-il lui payer cet autre pain? Oui. voici cinq sous, 
payez-le. — Le laitier est-il venu? Non, pas encore, il vient, a Pordi- 
naire, apres le boulanger. S'il a assez de lait. achetez-en pour 3 
sous de plus qu'a Pordinaire. II n'en a jamais assez. Alors dites-lui 
d'en apporter davantage, un peu plus, cet apres-diner. Faut-il le 
payer? Non, n'importe. Le marchand me demande un dollar et 
un quart pour ce parapluie, vaut-il cela? Je crois qu'il ne vaut pas 
tant. — Quel age as-tu, mon enfant? Je n'ai pas encore dix ans. — 
Et ton frere, quel age a-t-il ? II n'en a que huit. Apprenez-vous 
deja le Francais tous deux ? Je Papprends deja, mais il ne Papprend 
pas encore. Pourquoi done ? Parce que notre pere croit qu'il est 
trop jeune. N'ecrit-il pas? Non, il n'ecrit pas. — Et toi? Moi, 
j'ecris. 

Have you paid for the new gun ? I have paid for it. — Has your 
uncle paid for the satin and the velvet? He has. — Have I not paid 
the tailor for the clothes? Yes, you have (paid him for them). — 
What is he asking for, then ? He is not asking you to pay him for 
the clothes, but for the handkerchiefs and gloves. He is right. I 
have not yet paid him for them. — Have we paid for our cloaks? 



FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



203 



We have. — Has our cousin already paid for his shoes'? He has not 
yet paid for them. — Does my brother pay you what he owes you ? 
He does pay it me. — Do you pay what you owe ? I do pay what I 
owe. — Have you paid the old baker? I have. — Has your uncle 
paid the butcher for the beef? He has. — Who has broken my 
knife ? I have broken it after cutting the bread. 

Has your son broken my pencils'? He has broken them after 
writing his notes. — Have you paid the merchant for the wine after 
drinking it ? I have paid for it after drinking it. — What did you do 
after finishing your exercises'? I went to my cousin's, in order to 
conduct him to the museum. — What do you ask this man for? I 
ask him for the money he is to pay me. — What does this boy ask 
me for? He asks you for some money. — Do you ask me for any- 
thing? I ask you for a crown. — Do you ask me for the bread? I 
do. — Which man do you ask for money ? I ask it of the one who 
owes me some. (8 2 ? N. 1.) — Which merchant do you ask for gloves? 
I ask for some from those who live in William street. What do you 
ask the baker for? I ask him for some fresh bread. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



Must I try to do that ? 

Yes, try to do it and to do it well. 

You must try to do better. 

To hold, held, hold. (24 s .) 

I hold, thou holdest, he holds, (one.) 

Do you hold my dictionary ? 

I do. I do not. 

Who holds the horse ? The valet 

does. 
Do we not hold them ? We do not, 

but they do. 
They hold what ? The ladies' fans. 

06s. 94. I say ! here! stop! wait 
attract the attention of the person one 

See ! here ! see here ! Is it what you 
seek? 
No, I am looking for my thimble. 

Here ! Is that it ? No, but there, 

that is it. 
My relation. All my relations. 
My parents, (mean exclusively my 

father and mother.) 
A brother of mine. (% 107.) 
A cousin of yours. 



t Me faut-il essay er de faire cela ? 
Essayez de le faire et de le bien faire. 
t II vous faut essayer de mieux faire. 
Tenir,* 2, te?iu, tenez, (impera.) 
Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, on tient. 
Tenez-vous mon dictionnaire ? 
Je le tiens. Je ne le tiens pas. 

Qui tient le cheval? Le valet le 

tient. 
Ne les tenons-nous pas ? Nous ne 

les tenons pas, mais ils les tiennent. 
lis tiennent quoi ? Les eventails 

des dames. 

! there ! or any interjection used to 
speaks to, is . . . Tenez. 

Tenez ! Est-ce ce que vous cher- 

chez? 
Non, je cherche mon de. Tenez! 

Est-ce cela ? Non, mais tenez, le 

voila. 
Mon parent. Tous mes parents. 
Mes parents, (mean all my relations, 

including father and mother, ,) 
t Un de mes freres. 
t \Jn de vos cousins. 



204 



FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



A relation of his, (or hers.) 

A friend of ours. 

A neighbor of theirs. 

He tries to see you. 

Does he try to see me ? 

He tries to see an uncle of his. 

To try to 

To inquire after some one. 

After whom do you inquire ? 

I inquire after a friend of mine. 

They inquire after you. 

Do they inquire after me ? 

Properly. 

You write properly. 

They do their duty properly. 

Try to do your task or duty. 

We have done it properly. ($ 170.) 

A glass of wine. 

A piece of bread. 



t Un de ses parents. 

t Un de nos amis. 

t Un de leurs voisins. 

II cherche a vous voir. 

Cherche-t-il a me voir \ 

II cherche a. voir un de ses on ilea. 

Chercher d . . . . 

t Demander quelqu'un. 

t Qui demandez-vous ? 

t Je demande un de mes amis. 

t On vous demande. 

t Me demande-t-on ? 

Comme ilfaut. 

Vous ecrivez comme il faut. 

lis font leur devoir comme ii faut. 

Cherchez a faire votre devoir. 

Nous 1'avons fait comme il faut. 

Un verre de vin. 

Un morceau de pain. 



Quarantine Th&me. 2de Sec. 

Bon jour, Monsieur. Comment ai-je prononce cela? Vousn'avez 
pas prononce : bon, comme il faut. Comment faut-il le prononcer ? 
Comme ceci : bon, sans continuer le so7i de Pn 3 (sound of the n.) Je 
vais essayerde le prononcer comme il faut. — Le sondel'n Franc ais 
est difficile, n 7 est-ce pas? Non, ce son-la n 7 est pas tres-difficile. 
Comme je vous Fai dit: il ne faut pas le continuer long-temps. 
Comment est-ce que je le prononce a present ? bon : Vous le pro- 
noncez mieux, presque comme il faut. — Comment mon cousin a-t-il 
ecrit son theme ? II Pa ecrit et traduit comme il faut. — Mes enfants 
ont bien fait leurs devoirs, j'espere? Oui, ils les ont faits comme 
il faut. — Ce general ne fait-il pas son devoir'? Si fait, il le fait tou- 
jours comme il faut, et il ne peut pas faire davantage. — Ces deux 
jeunes soldats font leur devoir, n ; est-ce pas'? Ils le font aussi bien 
qu'ils le peuvent. — Faites toujours votre devoir. Je le fais aussi bien 
que je peux, c'est-a-dire, j'essaie. 

At whose house do you dine to-day ? My cousin and I (we) dine 
at the house of a friend of mine, in Walnut street. — With whom 
did you take tea yesterday, that is to say. the day before yesterday'? 
Must you know it ? If you will tell me. I will (N. 19 1 ) tell you. I 
took ea at the house of a relation of yours. The one w r ho has so 
much merit. That very one. (celui-la mime, ou lui-meme.) — Where 
are you going'? I am going to the house of a relation of mine, 
in order to breakfast with him. — Art thou willing to hold my 
gloves? I am willing to hold them. — Who holds my hat? Your 



FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 205 

son holds it. — Dost thou hold my stick? I do. — Do you hold any- 
thing? See, I hold your gun. — Who has held my book? Your 
servant has. — Will you try to speak well ? I will try. — Has your 
little brother ever tried to do exercises ? He has tried. — Have you 
ever tried to make a hat ? I have never tried to make one. — Whom 
are you looking for? I am looking for the man who has sold a 
horse to me. — Is your relation looking for any one? He is looking 
for a friend of his. — Are we looking for any one ? We are looking 
for a neighbor of ours. — Whom dost thou look for? I look for a 
friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of mine ? No, 1 am 
looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to speak Spanish to your 
uncle ? I have tried to speak Italian to him. — Have you tried to see 
my father? I have tried to see him. — Has he received you? He 
has not. — Has he received your brothers ? He has. — Have you been 
able to see your relation ? I have not. 

What did you do after writing your exercises? I wrote my note 
after writing them. — After whom do you inquire ? I inquire after 
the tailor. — Does this sailor inquire after any one? He inquires 
after you. — Do they inquire after you ? They do inquire after me. — 
Do they inquire after me ? They do not inquire after you, but after 
a friend of yours. — Do you inquire after the physician ? I do inquire 
after him and after the lawyer. — What does your little brother ask 
for? He asks for a small piece of bread. — Has he not yet breakfasted? 
He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — What does your uncle 
ask for? He asks for a glass of wine. — Has he not already drunk? 
He has already drunk, but he is still thirsty. Then give him a glass 
of wine. — Must I give a piece of old bread or of fresh bread to my 
little brother ? Give him neither a piece of old bread nor of fresh 
bread ; but give him a small piece of the cake which the cook made 
last evening. — If he wants a glass of new milk, can I give him one ? 
No, do not give him a glass of milk so soon after breakfast. — What 
has the clerk got there ? He has his thread gloves. — Has he had them 
dyed ? He has. — How has he had them dyed ? He had them dyed 
yellow. Light or dark? Neither light nor dark. — Did you ask the 
butcher for beef or mutton ? I asked him for beef. I do not like 
mutton. (Obs. 53.) 

Resume pour la 40me Lecon. 
Les chevaux n"ont-ils pas assez de foin ? Si fait, ils en ont 
assez. mais nos petits oiseaux n ; ont pas assez de grain. — N ; avons- 
nous ni poivre, ni vinaigre ? Nous avons du poivre, mais nous 
n'avons pas de vinaigre. Le jeune etranger n 7 a-t-il pas beau- 
coup d'argent? Si fait, il en a beaucoup ; mais le commis du grand 
18 



206 . FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) 

marchand n'en a pas beaucoup. N ? avons-nous pas de lait ? Si fait, 
nous eu avons un peu. En avons-nous assez? Nous iPen avons 
guere, mais assez. — Le garcon du cuisinier a-t-il le cordon de fil de 
notre vieux voisin? Non, il ne Pa pas. Que n 7 a-t-il pas'? II iPa 
pas le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin. — Le petit garcon n ; a-t-il 
pas les bas de coton ? Quels bas de coton ? Ceux du jeune avocat. 
II ne les a pas. — Avez-vous du fromage de Pepicier? Pen ai un 
peu. En avez-vous assez 1 Je n'en ai pas assez. — Avez-vous peur 
de ce jeune homme-la ? Non, je n'en ai pas peur. — Qui a soif ? 
Nous avons soif, et nous avons sommeil. — Le menuisier a-t-il peur 
du chien ? Non, le chien a peur du menuisier. — N 1 avons-nous pas 
le parapluie de coton du chapelier? Non, nous ne P avons pas, mais 
nous avons les gants de fil de son ami. 

Combien de boeufs avons-nous'? Nous en avons trois. Combien 
en a-t-il? II n"en a qu'un. Combien les Allemands en ont-ils, ou, 
Les Allemands, combien en ont-ils ? lis en ont cinq. N 7 en ont-ils 
pas six? Non, ils n'en ont que cinq. — Qui a du courage? Notre 
jeune commis en a. En a-t-il trop ? Non ; il n 7 en a pas trop, mais 
assez. — Ce petit garcon-la a-t-il du cceur? II n 7 en a guere. — Les 
peintres ont-ils beaucoup d'argent? Non, ils n 7 en ont guere. En 
avez-vous beaucoup ? Je rPen ai qu ; un peu. Qui en a beaucoup ? 
Nous en avons beaucoup. — Qu 7 avons-nous? Nous avons beaucoup 
d'or et d'argent. En avons-nous trop ? Nous n ? en avons pas trop, 
mais assez. — Les domestiques de Pepicier combien de verres ont- 
ils ? Ils en ont sept ou huit. N 7 en ont-ils pas neuf ? Si fait, ils en 
ont neuf. N'en ont-ils pas dix ? Ils n ? en ont que neuf. N'en ont- 
ils pas assez ? Pardonnez-moi, ils en ont assez. — Combien d'yeux 
cet homme-ci a-t-il ? II en a deux. Et celui-la, combien en a-t-il ? 
II n'en a qu'un. — N'avez-vous qu ; un oiseau ? Pardonnez-moi, j ? en 
ai deux. — Ces garcons ont-ils beaucoup de batons ? Quels garcons ? 
Ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? Ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la, mais ceux du menui- 
sier. Ils n ? en ont pas beaucoup. 

Avez-vous le dernier papier? Non, je ne Pai pas. — Avez-vous 
un papier ? Non, je n ; en ai pas. — Le ministre a-t-il le journal de 
hier? II en a un. — Votre frere a-t-il le parapluie du president? 
Non, mais il a le baton du gouverneur, (governor.) — Qui a le cheval 
du gouverneur? Notre vieux matelot Pa. A-t-il les gants du pre- 
sident? Non. \e president lui-meme les a. — Le lieutenant-gouver- 
neur a-t-il les billets du prefet? 11 ne les a pas. 11 n ; a pas quoi? 
II n'a pas les billets du prefet. Je les ai. — Combien de francs le 
president du Senat a-t-il? II n 7 en a pas; mais il a des dollars. 
Combien en a-t-il ? II en a beaucoup. En a-t-il trop ? II n ; en a 
pas trop. En avons-nous assez? Nous n'en avons pas assez. Les 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



207 



Americains n ? en ont-ils pas assez ? lis rr'en ont pas trop. Qui en a 
trop ? Personne n ? en a trop. — Le president et le vice-president ont- 
ils beaucoup d ; amis ? lis en ont beaucoup ; mais le prefet n'eb a 
guere. N ? en avons-nous pas beaucoup ? Si fait, nous en avons 
beaucoup. Qui en a peu ? Le Russe en a peu. 

Avez-vous quelques sous? Oui. j'en ai quelques uns. — Ai-je 
quelques ecus? Vous n J en avez pas, mais vous avez des francs, et 
des billets de ban que. Combien en ai-je ? Vous en avez dix — N'ai- 
je pas deux billets de dix dollars'? Non, vous n ; en avez qu ; un, 
mais vous avez trois billets de cinq dollars. — Jean a le premier 
volume de Pouvrage de Thiers, n J a-t-il pas le second ? Non. il n'a 
que le premier. L'Americain n'a-t-il pas le dernier volume ? Non, 
il ne Pa pas. Qui Pa? Personne ne Pa. — Quelqu'un a le journal 
du cinq de ce mois-ci, n'est-ce pas? Le Russe a celui dn six, du 
sept et du huit, mais non pas celui du cinq. — Quels papiers le jeune 
chapelier a-t-il? II a ceux que vous n'avez pas. — Les Allemands 
iP ont-ils pas froid ? Non, ils ont chaud et soif. — Le menuisier et 
Pepicier n'ont-ils pas tort? Non, ils ont raison. — Notre cordonnier 
n ; a-t-il pas les souliers de cuir du gouverneur ? II a ceux du lieu- 
tenant-gouverneur. — J ; ai le douzieme exercice, mon ami Charles a 
le treizieme, les avocats ont le quatorzieme, qui a le quinzieme? 
Personne n ; a le quinzieme, mais nous avons le seizieme et le dix- 
septieme. — Quel cahier avez-vous? Pai le mien. — Le fils de P'ami 
de votre maitre est-il ici ? Non, il est a Boston. 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON, 41st- 

VOCABULAIRE. 
Tht one who, he who, him who. 
Those who. They who. 

To perceive, perceived, perceive. 

Do you perceive the scholar who 

comes? 
I do perceive the one who is coming. 
The one on . . . Those in . . . (§ 87.) 

I do not like the one (those) coming. 

Does your uncle perceive the soldiers 
who are going to the covered bridge ? 
He does not perceive those who go. 
Whom do the children perceive ? 
They perceive r.obody. 



Quarante et unieme Lecon, 41me. 
Ire Section. 
Celui qui. f§ 40.) 
Ceux qui. 

Apercevoir, apercu, apercevez, conju- 

gue comme recevoir. (24 1 , 24 3 , 31 l .) 

Apercevez-vous l'ecolier qui vient ? 

J'aperc^ois celui qui vient. 

Celui qui est sur . . . Ceux qui sont 

dans . . . 
Je n'aime pas celui qui vient, ceux 

qui viennent. 
Votre oncle apergoit-i\ les soldats qui 

vont au pont couvert ? 
II n'apergoit pas ceux qui y vont. 
Qui les infants opergoivent-ils? 
Ils n'apfirgoivent personne. 



208 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



How was the weather yesterday ? 
What kind of weather was it yest. ? 
What weather had we yesterday ? 
Was it fine weather yesterday ? 
It was bad weather yesterday. 
It is fine weather this morning. 
It is neither cold nor warm, but plea- 
sant and dry. 
Dark, obscure. Clear, light. 

Dusky, gloomy. Dry. Wet, damp. 
Is the weather damp ? 
It is not damp, but dry. 
The weather is too dry to be pleasant. 
The moonlight, moonshine. The sun. 
Is it moonlight ? It is. 

Have we too much sun ? Is it too 

sunny ? 
It is too sunny. It is not. 

This syrup. His vinegar syrup. 

Have you tasted this vinegar syrup ? 
I have. I have not. 

How do you like it ? 



> t Quel temps a-t-il fait hier ? 

Quel temps avons-nous eu hier ? 

t A-t-il fait beau temps hier ? 

t II a fait mauvais temps hier. 

t II fait beau temps ce matin. 

t II ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mais 

agreable et sec. 
Obscur. Clair. 

Sombre. Sec. Humide. 

t Fait-il humide ? 
t II ne fait pas humide, mais sec. 
t II fait trop sec pour etre agreable. 
t Le clair de lune. Le soleil. 

t Fait-il clair de lune ? II fait clair 

de lune. 
t Fait-il trop de soleil ? 

t II en fait trop. II n'en fait pas trop. 
Ce sirop. Son sirop de vinaigre. 
Avez-vous goute" ce sirop de vinaigre ? 
Je l'ai goute. Je ne l'ai pas goute. 
t Comment le trouvez-vous ? 



Obs. 95. The French seldom use aimer in similar cases. 



What do you think of it ? 
I like it pretty well. 

I do not like it at all. 

To learn by heart. Learned by heart. 

Learn every day something by heart. 

I learn by heart. 

What have you learned by heart ? 

We learned our exercises. 

Who likes to learn by heart ? 

This fish. Do you like fish ? ( Obs. 53.) 



t Qu'en pensez-vous ? 

t Je le trouve assez bon. Je l'aime 

assez. 
t Je ne le trouve pas bon du tout. 
Apprendrepar cceur. Appris par cceur. 
Apprenez tous les jours quelque chose 

par cceur. J'apprends par cceur. 
Qu' avez-vous appris par cceur ? 
Nous avons appris nos themes par 

cceur. 
Qui aime a apprendre par cceur ? 
Ce poisson. Aimez-vous le poisson ? 



Quarante et unieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 

Comment est le temps aujourd'hui? II fait tres-beau temps. — 
A-t-il fait beau hier? U a fait mauvais hier. Quel temps a-t-il fait 
ce matin ? 11 a fait mauvais, mais a present il fait agreable. Fait-il 
chaud? II fait tres-chaud. Le thermometre est a 81 degres et i. 
II ne fait pas froid, alors. Non, en verite, il ne fait pas froid, mais 
tres-chaud, au contraire. — Avez-vous deja ete au nouveau jardin de 

M ? Non, je n'"y ai pas encore ete. Pourquoi done? Parce 

que nous avons eu mauvais temps. Avez-vous peur du mauvais 
temps? Je n'en ai pas peur quaud je suis oblige de sortir: mais je 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 209 

iPaime pas a sortir quand il pleut. Mais il n'a pas fait de pluie 
depuis plusieurs jours. Vous avez oublie ; car, il en a fait hier, 
avant-hier, et le jour avant. C'est-a-dire : jeudi ; mercredi, et mardi. 
Oui ; vous avez raison. 

Do you perceive the man who is coming? I do not perceive him. 
— Do you perceive the soldier's children ? I do perceive them. — Do 
you perceive the men who are going into the garden ? I do not per- 
ceive those who are going into the garden, but those who are going 
to the market. — Does your brother perceive the man who has lent 
him money ? He does not perceive the one who has lent him, but 
the one to whom he has lent some. — Dost thou see the children who 
are studying? I do not see those who are studying, but those who 
are playing. — Dost thou perceive anything? I perceive nothing. — 
Have you perceived my parents' warehouses ? I have perceived 
them. — Where have you perceived them? I have perceived them 
on that side of the road. 

Allez-vous manger de ce poulet ou de ce poisson? De ce poulet, 
s'il vous plait. Je n'aime pas le poisson. Quel morceau voulez- 
vous? N'importe. Donnez-moi le premier venu. N'avez-vous pas 
de choix ? Non, je n ; ai pas de choix. Tenez, voici un bon morceau; 
du moins, je Paime. L ; aimez-vous aussi? Je crois que oui, car, je 
mange de tout; j'aime tout. Voulez-vous un verre de vin ou un 
verre de sirop ? Donnez-moi un verre de sirop ; mais n ; y mettez 
pas beaucoup de sirop. Mettez-Py vous-meme. Donnez-le-moi. 
Je vais y en mettre un peu. Tenez, voila le verre. Mettez-y le 
eirop qu'il vous faut. Qui est ce petit Monsieur? C'est mon plus 
jeune frere. En verite ! Est-ce un bon enfant? Etudie-t-il comme 
il faut ? II fait assez bien son devoir. Aime-t-il a apprendre par 
cceur? Oui, il apprend tous les jours quelque chose par cceur. Les 
ecoliers n ; aiment-ils pas generalement (generally) a apprendre par 
coBur? II y en a qui aiment a le faire : mais beaucoup aiment a 
etudier. mais non pas a apprendre par cceur. 

Do you intend going to see the new vessel of Mr. Tessier? I 
do. — When? to-morrow, or the day after? The day after to-mor- 
row, if the weather is fine. Is it light enough in your counting- 
house ? It is not light in it. — Do you wish to work in mine? I do 
wish to work in it. — Is it light there ? It is very light there. — Why 
cannot your brother work in his warehouse? He cannot work there, 
because it is (il y fait) too dark. — Where is it too dark? In his 
warehouse. — Is it light in that hole? h is dark there. — Is the wea- 
ther dry? It is very dry. — Is it damp? It is not damp. It is too 
dry. — Is it moonlight? It is not moonlight; it is very damp. — Of 
18* 



210 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



what does your uncle speak? He speaks of the fine weather. — Of 
what do those men speak ? They speak of fair and bad weather. — 
Have you tasted that wine ? I have tasted it. — How do you like it ? 
I like it well. — How does your cousin like that cider? He does not 
like it. — Which wine do you wish to taste ? I wish to taste that 
which you have tasted. — Will you taste this tobacco ? I have tasted 
it already. — How do you like it? I like it well. — Why do you not 
taste that cider ? Because I am not thirsty. — Why does your friend 
not taste this beef? Because he is not hungry. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



The pupil. Once a day. 

Thrice, or three times a month. 
So much a year. So much a head. 

So much a soldier. Six times a year. 

Early in the morning. 

We go out early in the morning. 

When did your father go out ? 
To speak of some one or something. 



Of whom do you speak ? 

We speak of the man whom you 

know. 
Of what are they speaking ? 
They are speaking of the weather. 
To be pleased, content, satisfied with. 

Obs. 96. To be pleased, cannot be translated literally in French ; because 
the verb plaire is intransitive, and cannot be used in the passive form. 



L'eleve. t Une fois par jour. 

t Trois fois par mois. 

t Tant par an. t Tant par tete. 

(La tete, the head, est un nom fern.) 

Tant par soldat. Six fois par an. 

Le matin de bonne heure. 

Nous sortons le matin de bonne 

heure. 
Quand votre pere est-il sorti ? 
Parler de quelqu'un ou de quelque 

chose. 
De qui parlez-vous ? 
Nous par Ions de l'homme que vous 

connaissez. 
De quoi parlent-ils ? 
lis parlent du temps. 
Eire content de. . . . 



Are you satisfied with this man ? 

I am pleased with him. 

Are you pleased with your new coat ? 

I am pleased with it. 

What are you pleased with ? 

Displeased, discontented. 

I am displeased with him, or it. 

They speak of your friend. 

Do they ? What do they say of him ? 

Are they speaking of your book ? 

They are. They are not. 

Not. ($171, N. 2.) 

The teacher and his pupil have not 

gone out. 
Be satisfied with what you have. 



Etes-vous content de cet homme-ci ? 

J'en suis content. 

Etes-vous content de votre habit 

neuf? 
Ten suis content. 
De quoi etes-vous content ? 
Mecontent. 
J 1 en suis mecontent. 
On parle de votre ami. 
En parle-t-on ? Qu'en dit-on ? 
Parle-t-on de votre livre ? 
On en parle. On n'en parle point. 
Ne point (nearly synonymous 

to . . . pas.) 
Le maTtre et son eleve ne sont point 

sortis. 
Soyez content de ce que vous avez. 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 



(2.) 



211 



1 am not dissatisfied with it. 

Do they speak of the cholera? 

They do. 
What do they talk of? (or about ?) 
Nothing is spoken of. 
Water. The water. Some water. 
Wine and water. Syrup and water. 

A glass (or drink) of water. 
A drink of cider. 

A glass of wine and water — of mine- 
ral water. 



Je n'en suis point mecontent. 
Parle-t-on du cholera ? 

On en parle. 
De quoi parle-t-on ? 
On ne parle de rien. 
Eau, (feminin.) U eau. De V eau. 
Du vin et de l'eau. Du sirop et de 

l'eau. 
Un verre d'eau. 
Un verre de cidre. 
Un verre de vin et d'eau — d'eau 

minerale. 



QUARANTE ET UNIEME Th^ME. 2de Sec 

All ! vous avez un morceau de pain et de beurre. Allez-vous le 
manger, ou le donner a quelqu'un? Je vais le manger, car j'ai 
grand'faim. — Comment ! Vous avez deja faim ? II n ; est pas tard 
cependant. Combien de fois mangez-vous par jour? Nous man- 
geons quatre fois. — Combien de fois vos enfants boivent-ils par jour? 
lis boivent plusieurs fois. — Buvez-vous aussi souvent qu'eux? Je 
bois plus souvent. — Combien de fois par mois allez-vous au theatre ? 
Je n ; y vais qu'une fois par mois. — Les eleves y vont-ils ? lis n'y 
vont point. — De quoi parlent-ils ? lis parlent de leurs lecons. Font- 
ils trois themes par jour? lis n 7 en font que deux, mais ils les font 
comme il faut. — Avez-vous pu lire le billet qu ; on vous a ecrit? Je 
n 7 ai pas pu le lire tout. Est-ce qu"il est mal ecrit? Oui, je vous 
assure; voyez, vous-meme. C ; est vrai. Soyez le bien veuu, M. — 
Allons prendre un verre d'eau minerale. J ; y mets toujours du sirop; 
et vous ? Moi, non. 

How many times a year does your cousin go to the ball ? He 
goes two or three times during the winter.— Do you go there as 
often as he ? I am not used to go. — How oftei does your cook 
go to market? He goes generally once a day: sometimes twice. 
— Then he goes every day, except (excepte) Sunday; does he 
not? Yes, he does. — Whom are you inquiring for? I inquire 
for your English cousin. Is he at home? No, he is not. — Do 
you like a large hat ? I do not like a large hat, but a large 
umbrella. — What do you like to do? I like to write. — Do you like 
to see these little boys? I like to see them. — Do you like mineral 
water, with syrup? I do. — Does your brother like cider? He does. 
— What do the soldiers like? They like wine. — Dost thou like tea 
or coffee? I like both. — Do these children like to study? They 
like to study and to play. — Do you like to read and to write? I like 
to read and to write. How many times a day do you go out? I go 



212 



FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



out as often as I need to go out. — Do you often go to my uncle's? 1 
go there six times a year. — Do you understand the man who is 
speaking to you ? I do not. — Why do you not? Because he speaks 
too badly. — Does this man know French ? He knows it, but I do 
not know it. — Why do you not learn it? I have no time to learn it 
Of whom have they (on) spoken ? They have spoken of your 
friend. — Have they not spoken of the physicians? They have not 
spoken of them. — Do they not speak of the man of whom we have 
spoken ? They do speak of him. — Have they spoken of the noble- 
men ? They have spoken of them. — Have they spoken of those of 
whom we speak? They have not spoken of those of whom we 
speak, but they have spoken of others. — Have they spoken of our 
children or of those of our neighbors? They have spoken neither 
of ours nor of those of our neighbors. — Of which children have they 
spoken? They have spoken of our master's. — Do they speak of 
my work? They do speak of it. — Are you satisfied with your 
pupils? I am satisfied with them. — How does my brother study? 
He studies well. — How many exercises have you studied ? I have 
already studied forty-one. — Is your master satisfied with his scholar? 
He is satisfied with him ; and with the presents he has received. 



FORTY-SECOND LESSON, 42&.—Quarante-deuxieme Legon, 42me. 
Vo cab ul aire. Ire Section. 
OF PASSIVE VERBS.— Des Verbes Passifs. 
Passive verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from others 
the action expressed by the verb. In French, as in English, they are con- 
jugated by means of the auxiliary verb ttre, to be, joined to the past par- 
ticiple of the active verb. Thus any active verb may be changed into the 
passive voice. The past participle agrees with the nominative. (§ 159.) 



Active voice. 

I love. 

Thou conductest. 

He praises. 
We hear. 



Passive voice. 
I am loved. 
Thou art conduct- 
ed. 
He is praised. 
We are heard. 



You punish. 
They blame. 
To praise, 
To punish, 
To blame," 



By me, 



You are punished. 
They are blamed. 
praised, praise, 
punished, punish, 
blamed, blame no 
one. 
By. 

By us. 



Voix active. 
J'aime. 
Tu conduis. 

II loue. 

Nous entendons. 



Vouspunissez. 
lis blament. 
Loner, 1, loue, 
Punir, 2, puni, 
Blamer, 1, blame, 
sonne. 

Par or de. 
De or par moi, de or par nous. 



Voix passive. 
Je suis aime\ 
Tu es conduit. 

II est loue. 
Nous sommes 

entendus. 

Vousetespunis. 

lis sont blames. 

louez, (imperaJ 

funissez. 

Ne bldmez per- 



FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



213 



By thee, by you. 

By him, by them. 

By whom is the naughty punished 
He is punished by his father. 
By whom is the good loved ? 
He is loved by everybody. 

Obs. 97. Par is used for physical or mental actions 
affections of the heart or soul. 
Which man is praised, and which is 

blamed ? 
Naughty, wicked. The naughty. 
Skilful, clever. Diligent. 
Assiduous, industrious, studious. 
Idle, lazy. Ignorant. 

The idler, the lazy fellow. 
To reward. To esteem. To despise. 



De or par toi, de or par vous. 

De or par lui, d' or par eux. 

Par qui le mediant est-il puni ? 
II est puni par son pere. 
Be qui le bon est-il aime ? 
II est aime de tout le monde. 

De relates to the 



To hate, hating, hated. 

I hate, thou hatest, he hates. 

Good, (wise.) 

These children are loved, because 

they are studious and good. 
To travel (to go) to a ... . (to the.) 
Where has he travelled to ? 
He has travelled to Vienna. 
Is it good travelling ? 
It is good travelling. 
It is bad travelling. 
In the spring. 
It is bad travelling in the winter. 



Quel homme est loue, et lequel est 

blame ? 
Mechant. Le mechant. 
Habile. Diligent. 
Assidu, industrieux, studieux. 
Paresseux. Ignorant. 
Le paresseux. 
Recompenser, 1. Eg imer, 1. Me- 

priser, 1. 
Hair,* 2, haissant, hai. (24 1 .) 
Je hais, tu hais, il bait, (le sing, est 

irregulier.) 
Sage, (said only of children.) 
Ces enfants sont aimes, parce qu'ils 

sont studieux et sages. 
Aller,* 1, a . . . (au) (avant un nom.) 
Ou est-il alle ? 
II est alle a Vienne. 
t Fait-il bon voyager ? 
t II fait bon voyager, 
t II fait mauvais voyager. 
Dans le printemps, au printemps. 
II fait mauvais voyager dans l'hiver. 



Quaraxte-detjxieme Theme, Ire Sec. 

De qui avez-vous parle ? Nous avons parle de vous. M'avez- 
vous loue ? Nous ne vous avons pas loue, au contraire ; nous vous 
avons blame. Pourquoi m/avez-vous blame? Parce que vous 
n'etudiez pas bien. — Votre frere vous a parle de quoi? II a parle de 
ses livres, de ses chevaux et de ses chiens. — Pourquoi ses enfants 
sont-ils aimes?- Parce qu'ils sont bons, ils sont aimes. Sont-ils plus 
sages que nous? Ils ne sont pas plus sages que vous, mais ils sont 
plus studieux. Votre cousin est-il aussi assidu que le mien? II est 
aussi assidu que le votre. mais le votre est plus sage que le mien. 
Fait-il bon voyager au printemps ? II fait bon voyager au printemps 
et dans Pautomne ; mais il fait mauvais voyager dans Pete et dans 
l'hiver. — Aimez-vous a voyager? Avez-vous quelque fois voyage en 
hiver? J : aime assez a voyager, et j'ai souvent voyage en ete. mais 



214 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

pas en hiver. — Le general est souvent rnalade, vous savez qu 7 il a lt% 
goutte. Pourquoi ne voyage-t-il pas ? II dit que le printemps est trop 
humide, Pete trop chaud, et Phiver trop froid. Et que dit-il de Pau- 
tomne ? II dit qu'alors il est trop occupe pour voyager. 

Are you loved? I am loved. — By whom are you loved? I am 
loved by my uncle. — By whom am I loved ? Thou art loved by thy 
parents. — By whom are we loved ? You are loved by your friends. 
— By whom are those boys loved ? They are loved by their neigh- 
bors. — By whom is this man conducted ? He is conducted by me. — 
Where do you conduct him to? I conduct him home. — By whom 
are we blamed ? We are blamed by our enemies. — Why are we 
blamed by them ? Because they do not love us. — Are you punished 
by your master? I am not punished by him, because I am good and 
studious. — Are we heard? We are. — By whom are we heard? We 
are heard by our neighbors. — Is thy master heard by his pupils ? 
He is heard by them. — Which children are praised ? Those that are 
good. — Which are punished ? Those that are idle and naughty. — Are 
we praised or blamed ? We are neither praised nor blamed. 

Is our friend loved by his masters ? He is loved and praised by 
them, because he is studious and good; but his brother is despised 
by his, because he is naughty and idle. — Is he sometimes punished? 
He is (il Vest) every morning and every evening. — Are you some- 
times punished? I am (je ne le suis) never* I am loved and 
rewarded by my good masters. — Are these children never punished? 
They are (Us ne le sont) never, because they are studious and good; 
but those are so (le sont) very often, because they are idle and 
naughty. — Who is praised and rewarded? Skilful children are 
praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed, 
despised, and punished. — Who is loved, and who is hated ? He who 
is studious and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is 
hated. — Must one be (faut-il etre) good in order to be loved ? One 
must be so, [ilfaut Vetre.) — What must one do (que faut-il fair e) in 
order to be loved? One must be good and assiduous. — What must 
one do in order to be rewarded? One must be (ilfaut etre) skilful, 
and study much. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
To drive, to ride in a carriage. 
To ride (on horseback). 
To go on foot, to walk. 
Do you like to ride on horseback ? 
I like to drive. 



To live, lived, living. 

I live, thou livest, he .ives. 



Aller en voiture, . 

Aller a cheval, Ct aketh eaux- 



' ) take th 
C iliar) 



Aller a pied, ) illar y ilre ' 
Aimez-vous a. monter a cheval ? 
J'aime a aller en voiture. 
Vivre,* 4, ve'cu, vivant. 

Je vis, tu vis, il vit. 






FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



215 



Is it good living in Paris ? 

Is the living good in Paris ? 

It is good living there. 

The living is good there. 

Dear. 

Is the living dear in London ? 

Is it dear living in London? 

The living is dear there. 

Thunder. The thunder roars. 

This storm. This fog, mist. 

Is it windy ? Does the wind blow ? 

It is windy. The wind blows. 

It is not windy. 

It is very windy. 

Does it thunder ? 

Is it foggy ? 

It is stormy. 

It is not stormy. 

Does the sun shine ? 

It thunders very much. 

As soon as, as soon as I, as they. 

As soon as I have eaten, I drink. 

As soon as I have taken off my shoes 

I take off my stockings. 
What do you do in the evening ? 
Do I sleep ? Thou sleepest. Who 

sleeps ? 
Does the child sleep ? He still sleeps. 
Without money. Without speaking. 
Without saying anything, ;a word.) 
At last. 

To arrive. Arrived. 

Has he arrived at last ? 
He has not arrived yet. 
Is he coming at last ? To be sure, he is. 
And then. 
As soon as he has supped, he reads, 



S t Fait-il bon vivre a Paris ? 

> t II y fait bon vivre. 
| Cher. 

> t Fait-il cher vivre a Londres? 

t II y fait cher vivre. 

Le tonnerre. Le tonnerre gronde. 

Cet orage. Ce brouillard. 

t Fait-il du vent ? 

t II fait du vent. 

t II ne fait pas de vent. 

t II fait beaucoup de vent. 

t Fait-il du tonnerre ? 

t Fait-il du brouillard ? 

t II fait de l'orage. 

t II ne fait pas d'orage. 

t Fait-il du soleil ? 

t II fait beaucoup de tonnerre. 

Aussitot que, aussitot que moi, qu'eux. 

Aussitot. que j'ai mange, je bois. 

Aussitot que j'ai ote mes souliers, 

j'ote mes bas. 
Que faites-vous le soir ? 
Est-ce que je dors ? Tu dors. Qui 

dort? 
L'enfant dort-il ? II dort encore. 
Sans argent, t Sans parler. (Dir. 1.) 
t Sans rien dire, t Sans dire un mot. 
En fiji . 

Arriver, 1. Arrive e . (e^repour auxil.) 
Est-il enfin arrive' ? 
II n'est pas encore arrive. 
Vient-il enfin ? Sans doute, il vient. 
Puis, et puis. 
Aussitot qu'il a soupe, il lit, puis il 

dort. 



and then he sleeps. 

Quaeaxte-deuxieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 

Aimez-vous a monter a cheval le matin'? Non ; mais j*aime a 
monter a cheval le soir. Pourquoi? Parce que le soir. il fait plus 
frais. et vous dormez mieux apres votre retour. Je crois que vous 
iivez raison. et cependant on monte plus a cheval le matin que le 
soir. Votre frere a-t-il jamais monte a cheval? II ivy a jamais 
monte. Votre oncle monte-t-il a cheval aussi souvent que votre 
pere? lis vont souvent a cheval Pun avec Pautre. — Avez-vous ete 
en voiture au pont de fil de fer ? Oui, nous y avons ete plusieurs fois. 
Y avez-vous deja ete a cheval ? Non ; je my ai jamais ete a cheval. 



216 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

Allons-y cet apres-midi. A cheval ou en voiture ? A cheval. Non, 
mais a pied, si vous voulez. — Aimez-vous a aller a pied ? Oui, j'aime 
beaucoup a aller a pied, il fait trop de poussiere pour y aller a cheval. 

Have you been in London? I have been there. — Is the living 
good there ? The living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living 
in Paris ? It is good living there, and not dear. — Do you like travel- 
ling in France % I like travelling there, because one finds good peo- 
ple (de bonnes gens) there. — Does your friend like travelling in Hol- 
land ? He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad 
there. — Do you like travelling in Italy ? I do like travelling there, 
because the living is good there, and one (et qu'on y) finds good 
people there ; but the roads are not very good there. — Do the English 
like to travel in Spain ? They do like to travel there • but they find 
the roads there too bad. — How is the weather % The weather is very 
bad. — Is it windy ? It is very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday ? 
It was very stormy, (un grand orage.) Do you go to the market this 
morning? I do go thither, if it is not stormy. — Do you intend going 
to France this year? (cette annee?) I intend going thither, if the 
weather is not too bad. — Do you like to go on foot ? I do not like 
to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (quand) I am 
travelling. — Will you go on foot ? I cannot go on foot, because I am 
tired. 

What sort of weather is it? It thunders. — Does the sun shine? 
The sun does not shine* it is foggy. — Do you hear the thunder? it 
roars. Yes, I hear it: it roars much.-^Is it fine weather? Th.t* 
wind blows hard, and the thunder roars much. — What do you do in 
the evening ? I work as soon as I have supped. — And what do you 
do afterwards? Afterwards I sleep. — When do you drink? I drink 
as soon as I have eaten. — When do you sleep ? I sleep as soon as 
I have supped. — Have you spoken to the merchant ? I have spoken 
to him. — What has he said? He has left (parti e ) without saying 
anything. — Can you work without speaking? I can work, but not 
(non pas) study French without speaking. — Wilt thou go for some 
wine ? I cannot (point) go for wine without money. — Have you 
bought any horses ? I do not buy without money. — Has your father 
arrived at last ? He has arrived. — When did he arrive ? This morn- 
ing at four o'clock. — Has your cousin set out at last ? He has not 
set out yet. — Have you at last found a good master ? I have at last 
found one. — Are you at last learning German ? I am at last learning 
it. — Why have you not already learned it ? Because I have not been 
able to find a sood master. 



FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 



217 



To cut yourself. 
To cut myself. 
To cut ourselves. 



Vous couper. 
31 e couper. 
Nous couper. 



* se couper. 



FORTY-THIRD LESSON, 43d.— Quarante-troisieme Legon, 43m*. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

OF REFLECTIVE VERES.— Des Verbes Rejlechis ou Pronominaux. 

See ($ 180), and study it carefully. 

To cut himself. ^ 

To cut herself. 

To cut itself. 

To cut one's self. ./ 

Vous brulez-vous ? 

Je ne me brule point. 

Vous ne vous brulez pas. 

Je me vois. Je ne me vois point. 

Est-ce que je me vois ? 

II se voit. II ne se voit point. 

Nous nous voyons. 

lis se voient. lis ne se voient point. 

Voulez-vous vous chauffer ? 

Je veux me chauffer. 

Veut-il se chauffer ? 

II veut se chauffer. 

Us veulent se chauffer. 



Do you burn yourself? 

I do not burn myself. 

You do not burn yourself. 

I see myself. I do not. 

Do I see myself? 

He sees himself. He does not. 

We see ourselves. 

They see themselves. They do not. 

Do you wish to warm yourself? 

I do wish to warm myself. 

Does he wish to warm himself? 

He does wish to warm himself. 



They wish to warm themselves. 

To enjoy, to divert, to amuse myself.' ) M , amuser; j (i avant Vm fmiiii.) 

lo pass or spend my time. ) 



■ spend my 1 

Let me amuse myself. Amuse your- 
self. 

Enjoy yourself, but do not neglect 
your duty. 

How do you spend or pass your 
time ?i I pass it in reading. 

He passes his time in playing. 

Each. Each one. 

Each man. Each of those men. 

Each man amuses himself as he likes. 



Laissez-moi m' am user. Amusez- 

vous. 
Amusez-vous, mais ne negligez point 

votre devoir, 
t A quoi vous amusez-vous? 
t Je m' amuse a lire, 
t II s' amuse a jouer. 
Chaque (avec le nom.) Chacun (sans 

nom.) 
Chaque homme. Chacun de cea 

hommes. 
Chaque homme s' amuse comme il 

veut. 
Chacun s' amuse de son mieux. 



Le gout. Le bon gout. 

Chaque homme a son gout. 
Le mien est d'etudier. 



Each one amuses himself in the best 

way he can. 
The taste. The good taste. 

Each man has his taste. 
Mine is to study. 

Obs. 98. Translate is to, meaning, consists in, by est de $ ipii?id the prepos.) 

1 Vous amusez-vous ? which is much used by the French, is rendered in 
English, not by : do you amuse yourself? but by, pass or spend your time, 
as above. 
19 



218 FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 

Quarante-troisieme Th&me. Ire Sec. 

Ah ! vous voila, enfin ! Je vous ai attendu long-temps. Je sura 
fach.e de vous avoir fait attendre; mais je n'ai pas pu (§ 148) venir 
plutot. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Non, mais .... N'im- 
porte. Paiions de votre nouveau cheval. Vous plait-il? (are you 
pleased ?) II ne me plait pas beaucoup. Pourquoi done ? II est 
bon, il va bien 5 mais il est si grand ; si grand que j'ai Pair d ; un enfant 
quand je suis dessus. L'avez-vous essaye deja? Oui, deux fois. — 
Est-il difficile a monter? Non, pas du tout. — Joseph. Joseph! On 
m'appelle. Je crois que e'est mon oncle qui a besoin de moi 
Allez, alors. Adieu. Attendez. Je veux vous demanaer quelque 
chose. Quoi? Voulez-vous revenir ce soul: Ce soir? Je crois 
que non. Je suis tres-occupe. Mais vous-meme, venez me voir. 
Et pourquoi? Si vous etes si occupe, nous ne pouvons ni parler ni 
nous amuser ensemble. Vous avez raison; mais, il me faut partir. 
Adieu, au plaisir. Au plaisir. 

Who kindles your fire ? Our servant does. — Does he kindle it 
well? He burns himself sometimes. — Does he make your coffee? 
Yes, and he does it first-rate, (excellent.) Yon have been in Eng- 
land, have you not? Yes, I have. And in Ireland too? No, I 
would not (did not wish to) go there. — Were you afraid to go ? Yes, 
a little. — How is the living there? (y vit-on?) So, so; not so well 
as in England and France. — Where is the living dearer, in Paris or 
in London ? It is dearer in Paris, no, I mean in London. — Do peo- 
ple despise the lazy and the wicked ? Yes, people despise them. 
— What is esteemed? Merit is. — Do scholars love or hate their 
teachers? Some love and esteem them; others hate them. The 
studious is generally esteemed, is he not ? Yes, he is. by every- 
body. — Do parents punish their bad children ? Yes, they do, when 
these do something wrong, (mal.) 

Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass ? I see myself 
in it. — Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass ? 
They can see themselves therein. Why does your brother not light 
the fire ? He does not light it, because he is afraid of burning him- 
self. — Why do you not cut your bread ? I do not cut it, because I 
fear to cut my finger. — Have you a sore finger? I have a sore finger 
and a sore foot. — Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to warm 
myself, because I am very (grand) cold. — Why does that man not 
warm himself? Because he is not cold. — Do your neighbors warm 
themselves ? They warm themselves, because they are cold. — How 
do you pass your time ? I pass it in the best way I can. — How do 
your children pass their time ? They pass it in studying, writing, 
and playing. — How does your cousin spend his? He amuses him- 



FORTY-THIRD LESSON. 



(2.) 



219 



self in reading good books and in writing to his friends. — What do 
you do when you have nothing to do at home ? I go to the play, 
and to the concert. — I often say, " Every one amuses himself as he 
likes."' — Every man has his taste • what is yours? Mine is to study, 
to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, and the ball, 
and to ride. His, is to do nothing. Theirs, is to have fine dogs. 

Vocabxjlaire. 2de Section. 



Each of you, us, them. 

The world, (the people.) Genteel 
people. 

Every one, everybody, says and be- 
lieves so. 

Everybody speaks of it, them, you, 
&c. 

Every one (any one) is liable to make 
a mistake. 

To be subject to (plagued with) the 
toothache. 

We are all liable to make mistakes. 

To mistake, to be mistaken. 
Do not make a mistake (impera.) 
Are you mistaken ? I am. 
Is he mistaken ? He is not. 



To deceive, to cheat. 
He has cheated me. 
He has cheated me 

francs. 
You cut your finger. 



of a hundred 



Chacun de vous, de nous, d'eux. 
Le monde. Le beau monde. 

Tout le monde le dit et le croit. 

Tout le monde (chacun) en parle. 

Tout homme (chaque homme) est 

sujet a se tromper. 
Etre sujet au mal de dents. 

Nous sommes tous sujets a nous 

tromper. 
t Me, te, se, nous, vous tromper, 1. 
t Ne vous trompez pas. (§ 55.) 
t Vous trompez-vous ? Je me trompe. 
t Se trompe-t-il ? II ne se trompe 

point. 
Tromper, 1. 
II m'a trompe. 
II m'a trompe de cent francs. 

Vous vous coupez le doigt. 



Obs. 99. When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself, the verb 
is made reflective. 



I cut my nails. 

A hair. 

To pull out, pluck out, extract, snatch. 

He pulls out his hair. 

He cuts his hair. 

The dentist extracts one of his teeth. 

To go away, (tear or take one's self 

away from a place.) 

Obs. 100. Je rrien vais, is equivalent to : I take myself from here. 



Je me coupe les ongles. 

Un cheveu, (plur. x.) 

Arracher, 1. 

II s'arrache les cheveux. 

II se coupe les cheveux. 

Le dentiste arrache une de ses dents. 

t M', t', s', nous, vous en oiler * 1. 



Are you going away ? I am. 

I am not. 

Is he going away ? He is not. 

Is he not going away ? He is. 

Am I going '( You are. 



t Vous en allez-vous ? Je m'en vais. 
t Je ne m'en vais pas. 
t S'en va-t-il ? II ne s'en va point, 
t Ne s'en va-t-il point ? II s'en va. 
t M'en vais-je ? Vous vous en allez. 



220 



FORTY-THIRB LESSON. (2.) 



Are we not going away ? 

Yes, we are. 

Are these pupils going away ? 

They are not. 

To feel sleepy. 

Do you feel sleepy ? 

I do feel sleepy. 

To soil. Do not soiL 

To fear, dread, feared, fear nothing. 

Not to fear. (§ 171—7.) 

I dread. He fears he has nothing. 

He fears to soil his fingers. 

Do you dread to go out I 

I do dread to go out. 

He is afraid not to go there. 

Do you fear that man ? 

I do not fear him. 

What do you fear ? Nothing. 

Whom do you fear ? Nobody. 

I fear nobody. 



t Ne nous en allons-nous pas I 

t Si fait, nous nous en allons. 

t Ses eleves s'en vont-ils ? 

t lis ne s'en vont pas. 

t Avoir envie de dormir. 

t Avez-vous envie de dormir ? 

t J'ai envie de dormir. 

Salir, 2. Ne salissez pas. 

Craindre* 4, craint. Ne craignea 

rien. 
Ne pas craindre (de av. l'infin.) 
Je crains. II craint de ne rien avoir. 
II craint de se salir les doigts. 
Craignez-vous de sortir ? 
Je crains de sortir. 
II craint de ne pas y aller. 
Craignez-vous cet homme ? 
Je ne le crains pas. 
Que craignez-vous ? Rien. 
Qui craignez-vous ? Personne. 
Je ne crains personne. 



Quarante-troisieme ThSme. 2de Sec. 

Vous avez Pair d'avoir chaud, prenez un verre de sirop. Avez- 
vous de l'eau minerale ici ? Non, nous n'en avons point ; mais nous 
pouvons en envoyer chercher, ou plutot, allons-en boire, chacun un 
verre, chez l'apothicaire du coin. Volontiers. Allons-y. Venez 
aussi, Frederic, ne voulez-vous pas? Non, je n'aipas soif ; mais j'ai 
faim. Ainsi, a votre retour, apportez-moi un ou deux gateaux. Ou 
pouvons-nous en acheter? Vous pouvez en trouver chez le mar- 
chand de gateaux. Demeure-t-il au coin? Non ; il demeure au 
milieu de la rue. De quel cote ? De ce cote-ci. N 7 avez-vous jamais 
rien achete chez lui ? Non, je n'achete jamais de gateaux. Pour- 
quoi done ? Ne les aimez-vous pas? Si fait ; je les aime beaucoup 7 
au contraire, mais je n'ai pas souvent faim avant diner. Avant de 
vous en aller, pretez-moi votre canif. Pour faire quoi? (ou mieux: 
pourquoi faire ?) Pour me couper les ongles. Ne vous coupez- vous 
pas les ongles avec des ciseaux? Non ? je ne peux pas me couper 
les ongles avec des ciseaux. N'avez-vous pas de canif? Si fait, 
j'en ai un; le voici* mais il ne coupe pasassez, pour me couper les 
ongles. 

Do you cut your hair ? (les cheveux.) I do cut my hair. — Does 
your friend cut his hair ? He cuts his nails, but not his hair. — Why 
does that man pull out his hair? Is he crazy? Yes, he is. — Why 
does not your cousin brush his coat ? He does not brush it ; becausa 



FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 221 

he is afraid of soiling his fingers. — What does my neighbor tell 
you? He tells me that [que) you wish to buy his horse; but I know 
that (que) he is mistaken, because you have no money to buy it. — 
What do they (on) say at the market? They say that (que) the 
enemy is beaten. — Do you believe that? I believe it, because 
every one says so. — Why have you bought that book? I have 
bought it, because I want it to learn French, and because every one 
speaks of it. and praises it. — Are your friends going away? They 
are. — When are they going away? They are going away to-mor- 
row. — When are you going away? We are going away to-day. — 
Am I going away ? You are going away, if you like, (si vous vou- 
lez.) — What do our neighbors say ? They are going away without 
saying anything. — How do you like this wine ? I do not like it. 

What is the matter with you? I feel sleepy. — Does your frie jd 
feel sleepy? He does not feel sleepy, but he is cold. — Why does 
he not warm himself? He has no wood to make a fire. — W T hy does 
he not buy some wood ? He has no money to buy any. — Will you 
lend him some? If he has none I will lend him some. — Are you 
thirsty? I am not thirsty, but very hungry, (grand 1 f aim.) — Is your 
servant sleepy ? He is sleepy. — Is he hungry ? He is hungry. — 
Why does he not eat? Because he has nothing to eat. — Are your 
children hungry? They are hungry, but they have nothing to eat. 
— Have they anything to drink? They have nothing to drink. — 
Why do you not eat ? I do not eat when (quand) I am not hungry. 
— Why does the Russian not drink? He does not drink when he 
is not thirsty. — Did your brother eat anything yesterday evening? 
He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a piece of bread. 
— Did he not drink ? He also drank. — What did he drink ? He 
drank a glass of wine and water, and some syrup and water. 



FORTY-FOURTH LESSON, 44th.-— Quarante-quatrieme Legon, Ume. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 
PERFECT OF REFLECTIVE VERBS.— Parfait des Verbes Beflechis, 

Vous etes-vous coupe ? ($ 180 — 2.) 



Have you cut yourself? 
I have cut myself. 
Have i eut myself? 
You have cut yourself. 
You have not cut yourself. 
Hasi thou cut thyself? 
I have not cut myself. 
Has your brother cut himself? 
19* 



Je me suis coupe. 

Me suis-je coupe ? 

Vous vous etes coupe. 

Vous ne vous etes pas coupe. 

T'es-tu coupe? 

Je ne me suis pas coupe. 

Votre frere s'est-il coupe ? 



222 



FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



He has cut himself. 

Have we cut ourselves ? (§ 180 — 2.) 

We have not cut ourselves. 

Have these men cut themselves? 

They have not cut themselves. 

To walk, take a walk, a stroll. 

To go a walking, to stroll. 

To take an airing in a carriage. 

The coach. A new coach. 

To take a ride. 

Do you take a walk ? 

I do take a walk. 

Does he take a walk ? He does. 

We take a walk. 

Thou wish est to take an airing. 

They wish to take a ride. 

To walk a child. 

Do you take your children a walk- 
ing ? 

I take them a walking every morn- 
ing. 

To go to bed, lie down. Go to bed. 

To go to bed, to get in bed. 

Go to bed. Get in bed, (impera.) 

To get up, to rise. Get up, rise. 

Do you rise early ? 

I rise at sunrise. 

I go to bed at sunset. 

The (or at) sunrise. 

The (or at) sunset. 

Gentlemen, at what time did you go 

to bed ? 
At three o'clock in the morning. 
At what o'clock did he go to bed 

yesterday ? 
He went to bed late. 



II s'est coupe. 

Nous sommes-nous coupes ? 

Nous ne nous sommes pas coupes. 

Ces hommes se sont-ils coupes? 

II ne se sont pas coupes. 

t Me, te, se, nous, vous, promener, 

t Aller me, te, &c, promener. 

t Se promener en carrosse. 

Le carrosse. Un carrosse neuf. 

t Se promener a cheval. 

Vous promenez-vous ? 

t Je me promene. (§ 144 — 4.) 

t Se promene-t-il ? II se promene. 

Nous nous promenons. 

Tu veux te promener en carrosse. 

lis veulent se promener a cheval. 

Promener un enfant. 

Promenez-vous vos enfants ? 

Je les promene tous les matins. 

t Se coucher, 1. Couchez-vous. 

t Aller se coucher, se mettre au lit. 
t Allez-vous coucher. Mettez-vous 

au lit. 
t Se lever, 1. Levez-vous. 

Vous levez-vous de bonne heure ? 
Je me leve au lever du soleii. 
Je me couche au coucher du soleii. 
Le (ou au) lever du soleii. 
Le (ou au) coucher du soleii. 
Messieurs, a quelle heure vous etes- 

vous couches ? ($ 180 — 2.) 
A trois heures du matin. 
A quelle heure s'est-il couche hier? 



II s'est couche tard. 

Quarante-qitatrieme ThIme. Ire Sec. 

Je n'ai pas vu George, ce matin, ou est-il? II est alle chez le 
dentiste. — Pourquoi? A-t-il mal aux dents'? Oui ; il Pa eu toute la 
nuit, (all night.) Va-t-il se faire arracher une dent? (feminin.) Oui, 
si le dentiste veut P arracher. — N'arrache-t-il pas toujours les dents 
quand on le veut ? Non, je vous assure. Pourquoi done ? Parce 
que quelque fois ce n 7 est pas necessaire. — Avez-vous jamais eu une 
dent arrachee? Non. jamais encore. Que vous a dit le jardinier? 
II ma dit qvPon a arrache un de ses petits arbres. En verite ! Qui 
peut Pavoir arrache? II n'en sait rien. J ; ai oublie de vous rendre 



FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



225 



votre canif, mais le voici, tenez, prenez-le. Merci. C'est moi qui 
vous reraercie. Qu'avez-vous au doigt? Je me suis coupe. — Avec 
quoi ? Avec un des couteaux du cuisinier. Qu'avez-vous mis des- 
sus ? Rien encore. N'allez-vous rien y mettre ? Pardonnez-moi. 
Un peu d?eau de Cologne et un morceau de linge. 

Have you cut your hair ? I have not cut it (myself), but I have had 
it cut, (me les suis fait couper.) — What has this child done? He has 
cut his foot. — Why did they give him a knife ? They gave him one 
to {pour) cut his nails, and he has cut his finger and his foot. — Do 
you go to bed early ? I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep when I 
go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? 
Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. — At what o'clock 
do your children go to bed % They go to bed at sunset. — Do they 
rise early? They rise at sunrise. — At what o'clock did you rise 
to-day 1 To-day I rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday 
evening, (hier au soir.) 

Does your son rise late 1 He rises early, for he never goes to bed 
late. — What does he do when he gets up ? He studies, and then 
breakfasts. — Does he not go out before he breakfasts? No, he 
studies and breakfasts before he goes out. — What does he do after 
breakfasting ? As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to my house, 
and we take a ride. — Didst thou rise this morning as early as I ? I 
rose earlier than you, for I rose before sunrise. — Do you often go a 
walking ? I go a walking when I have nothing to do at home. — Do 
you wish to take a walk ? I cannot take a walk, for I have too 
much to do. — Has your brother taken a ride ? He has taken an 
airing in a carriage. — Do your children often go a walking ? They 
go a walking every morning, after breakfast. — Do you take a walk 
after dinner i After dinner I drink tea, and then I take a walk. 



VOCABULAIRE. 
To rejoice at something. 
I rejoice at your happiness. 
At what does your uncle rejoice ? 
I have rejoiced. 
They have rejoiced. 
You have made a mistake. 
We have made a mistake. 
To hurt somebody. 
The evil, the pain, the harm. 
Have you hurt that man % 

I have hurt that man. 

Why did you hurt that man ? 



2de Section. 

t Se rejouir 2 de quelque chose. 
Je me rejouis de votre bonheur. 
De quoi votre oncle se rejouit-ii ? 
Je me suis rejoui. 
lis se sont rejouis. 
t Vous vous etes trompe. 
t Nous nous sommes trompe's. 
t Faire du mal a quelqu'un* 
Le mal. 
t Avez-vous fait du mal a cet 

homme ? 
t J'ai fait du mal a cet homme. 
t Pourquoi avez-vous fait du mal a 

cet homme ? 



224 



FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



I have not hurt him. 

Does that hurt you ? 

That hurts me. 

To do good to anybody. 

Have I ever done you any harm ? 

No ; on the contrary, you have done 

me good. 
I have never done harm to any one. 



t Je ne lui ai pas fait de mal. 

t Cela vous fait-il du mal ? 

t Cela me fait du mal. 

t Faire du bien a quelqu J un. 

t Vous ai-je jamais fait du mal ? 

t Non ; vous m'avez au contraire 

fait du bien. 
t Je n'ai jamais fait de mal a per- 

sonne. 
t Vous ai-je fait mal ? 
t Vous ne m'avez pas fait mal. 
Cela me fait du bien. 
Faire de. 
Le domestique que fait-il de son 

balai ? 
t II balaie le plancher avec. 
t Que veut-il faire de ce bois ? 



II n'en veut rien faire. 



Have I hurt you ? 

You have not hurt me. 

That does me good. 

To do with, to dispose of. 

What does the servant do with his 

broom ? 
He sweeps the floor with it. 
What does he wish to make of this 

wood? 
He does not wish to make anything 

of it. 

Obs. 101. When a proposition has no definite subject, the English, in 
order to avoid the pronouns they, people, &lc, use the verb in the passive 
voice, and say : 1 was told, instead of, They told me ; He is flattered, 
instead of, They flatter him ; It was given to me, instead of, They gave it to 
me. This is always expressed in French by means of the indefinite pronoun 
on, one. Ex. 

He is flattered, but he is not beloved, i On le flatte, mais on ne l'aime pas. 
I am told that he is arrived. | On me dit qu'il est arrive. 

Quarante-quatrieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Qui est cet enfant que vous louez tant ? C 7 est Albert, le plus jeune 
fils de notre epicier. Ne le connaissez-vous pas? Non, je ne le 
connais pas. Ne Pavez-vous jamais vu dans le magasin de Pepicier ? 
C ; est possible. Mais pourquoi Pavez vous tant loue? On Pa loue 
parce qu ; il a bien etudie. Mais il n 7 a fait que son devoir. Faut-il 
le louer pour cela ? Sans doute. Je ne croyais pas cela necessaire. 
Quand on le loue, il etudie mieux. C'est different. Pourquoi 
cet autre enfant a-t-il ete puni ? Pourquoi punit-on les enfants gene- 
ralement? Parce qu'ils sont mechants et paresseux. C'est pour 
cela meme qu'on a puni cet autre. — Et celui-ci, Pa-t-on recom- 
pense? On Pa recompense parce qu'il a bien travaille. — Que faut-il 
faire pour ne pas etre meprise ? II faut etre studieux, diligent, et sage. 
— Ah ! Louis, vous vous etes fait couper les cheveux, vous avez mis 
un habit neuf, un joli gilet de satin noir, vous avez Pair d ? un autre 
garcon. Je vous ai a peine connu. Que pensez-vous de mon habi* 
neuf? Je le trou\e superbe. 



FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 225 

What have you done with your money ? I have bought a book 
with it. — What has the joiner done with his wood ? He has made 
a bench of it. — What has the tailor done with the cloth which you 
gave him ? He has made clothes of it for (pour) your children and 
mine. — Has that man hurt you? No, Sir, he has not hurt me. — 
What must one do in order to be loved? One must do good to 
those that have done us harm. — Have we ever done you harm? 
No ; you have on the contrary done us good. — Do you do harm to any 
one? I do no one any harm. — Why have you hurt these children? 
I have not hurt them. — Have I hurt you? You have not hurt me, 
but your boys have, (m?en ont fait.) — What have they done to you? 
They have beaten me. — Is it (est-ce) your brother who has hurt my 
son? No, Sir, it is not (ce n'est pas) my brother, for he has never 
hurt any one. 

Have you drunk that wine ? I have drunk it. — How did you like 
it? I liked it very well. — Has it done you good? It has done me 
good. — Have you hurt yourself? I have not hurt myself. — Who has 
hurt himself? My brother has hurt himself, for he has cut his 
finger. — Is he still ill. (malade ?) He is better, (mieux.) — I rejoice 
to hear that he is no longer ill. for I love him. Why does your 
cousin pull out his hair? Because he cannot pay what he owes. — 
Did your father rejoice to see you? He did rejoice to see me. — 
What did you rejoice at? I rejoiced at seeing my good friend s.- 
What was your uncle delighted with, (s'est il rejoui?) He was 
delighted with the horse which you have sent him. — What were 
your children delighted with ? They were delighted with the fine 
clothes which I have had made for them, (que je leur ai fait f aire.) 

Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 

On lui a donne un couteau pour cou- 
per son pain, et il s'est coupe le 
doigt. 

Flatter 1 quelqu'un. 

Se flatter, (takes de before the infini- 
tive.' 

t II se flatte de savoir le Fran$ais. 

Ne . . . que. 

II n'a que des ennemis. 

Devenir,* 2, p. passe devenu e , (con 

jugue com me Venir. (25 1 , 34 1 .) 
t II s'est fait soldat. 
t Vous etes-vous fait marchand ? 



A knife was given him to cut his 
bread, and he cut his finger. 

To flatter some one. 
To flatter one's self. 

He flatters himself that he knows 

French. 
Nothing but. 

He has nothing but enemies. 
To become. 

{Devenir does not take de after it.) 
He has turned a soldier. 
Have you turned a merchant ? 



I have turned become) a lawyer. t Je me suis fait avocat. 

\T7u . l u j- u *u » S t Votre frere qu'est-t'Z devenu ? 

What has become of your brother? < . _ , , H 4 r, ; 

( t Qu est devenu voire frere? 



226 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 



What has become of him ? 

I do not know what has become of 

him. 
To enlist, to enroll. 

He has enlisted. 



t Qu'est-t7 devenu ? 

t Je ne sais pas ce qu'iZ est devenu, 

S'enroler, 1, se faire soldat. 
'[ t II s'est enrole. 
( t II s' 



I cannot pay you, for I have no 

money. 
He cannot give you any bread, for 

he has none. 
To believe some one. 
Do you believe that man ? 
I do not believe him. 

Obs. 102. The verb croire governs the accusative ; we say, however 
To believe in God. I Croire en Dieu. 

I believe in God. I Je crois en Dieu. 



est fait soldat. 
Je ne puis vous payer, car je n'ai 

pas d' argent. 
II ne peut pas vous donner de pain, 

car il n'en a pas. 
Croire* 4 quelqu'un. 
Croyez-vous cet homme ? 
Je ne le crois pas. 



Mentir* 2; past part, menti, pres. 

part, mentant. Ne mentez pas. 
Je mens, tu mens, ii ment. 
Le menteur. 



To utter a falsehood, to lie. 

Do not lie, (impera.) 
I lie, thou liest, he lies. 
The story-teller, the liar. 

Qttarante-quatrieme Theme, 3me Sec. 

Promenez-vous souvent vos enfants? Je les promene tous les 
matins et tous les soirs, quand le temps le permet. C 7 est-a-dire, 
quand il fait beau temps'? Non; mais quand il ne fait pas trop 
mauvais. — Les menez- vous promener quand le temps estcouvert ou 
humide? Sans doute. Et quand il pleut? Oui, s'il ne pleut pas 
beaucoup. Quand le tonnerre gronde? Oui, meme quand le ton- 
nerre gronde, s'il ne fait pas de pluie. Allez-vous les mener prome- 
ner ce soir ? Non. il fait trop de pluie et de vent. N ; entendez-vous 
pas le bruit du vent ? Si fait, je Pentends. Et le bruit de la pluie 
sur la maison ? Oui, je Pentends aussi. On ne peut pas promener 
avec plaisir pendant un orage comme celui-la. Vous avez raison, 
je pense comme vous. — Croyez-vous ce petit garcon avec les che- 
veux noirs } Oui, c'est un bon petit garcon, mais cet autre-la est un 
grand menteur. Sait-il quand il ment ? En verite, je crois que non. 
— Pourquoi n'entrez-vous pas? Avez-vous peur d ; etre mordu par 
notre petit chien blanc ? Mord-il aussi bien qu'il aboie ? II aboie 
beaucoup, mais il ne mord pas. 

What has become of your friend ? He has become a lawyer. — 
What has become of your cousin? He has enlisted. — Has your 
neighbor enlisted? He has not enlisted. — What has become of 
him ? He has turned a merchant. — What has become of his children ? 
His children have become men. — What has become of your son ? 
He has become a great man. — Has he become learned ? He has 



FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



227 



become learned. — What has become of my book ? I do not know 
what has become of it. — Have you torn it ? I have not torn it. — 
What has become of our friend's son ? I do not know what has 
become of him. — Is he in England or Italy? I cannot tell you. — I 
believe his father does not know what has become of him. — Whom 
did he go travelling with? He went with his cousin. — Do they 
know what has become of the latter? Oh! yes; he has returned, 
and he is studying to become a doctor. It is extraordinary. — Why 
does this man rejoice so much? (tant }) Because he flatters himself 
he has good friends. — Is he not right in rejoicing ? He is wrong, for 
he has nothing but enemies. — Is he not loved ? He is flattered, but 
he is not beloved. — Do you flatter yourself that you know French? 
I do flatter myself that I know it; for I can speak, read, and write 
it. — Has the physician done any harm to your child? He has cut 
his finger, (lui a coupe le doigt,) but he has not done him any harm, 
so (et) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any 
harm. — Why do you listen to that man? I listen to him, but I do 
not believe him • for I know that he is a story-teller. — How do you 
know that he is a story-teller ? He does not believe in God ; and all 
those (tous ceux) who do not believe in God are story-tellers. 



FORTY-FIFTH LESSON, 45th.— Quarante-cinquieme Legon, 45me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.— Verbes Uniper sonnets. 

We have already seen (41 l , 42 2 ,) some idiomatical expressions with faire, 
all of which belong to the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no deter- 
minate subject, are conjugated only in the third person, by means of the 
pronoun il, it. Ex. 



To rain, 


it rains. 


Pleuvoir,* 3. 


il pleut, past part. plu. 


To snow, 


it snows. 


Neiger, 1. 


il neige. 


To hail, 


it hails. 


Greler, 1. 


il grele. 



The substantives belonging to these three verbs are feminine, as will be 
seen when we come to treat of feminine nouns. 



To lighten. 

Does it lighten ? It does. 

The lightning. It lightens. 

It does not lighten. 

It lightens much. 

Does it rain ? It rains very hard. 

Does it snow ? It snows hard. 



t Faire des eclairs, 
t Fait-il des eclairs ? II en fait. 
L' eclair, t II fait des eclairs, 

t II ne fait pas d'eclairs. (Obs. 27.) 
t II fait beaucoup d'eclairs. 
t Pleut-il ? II pleut d verse. 
t Neige-t-il ? II neige fort, (beau- 
coup.) 



228 



FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



It hails much. 

The hail. The snow. 

The sun does not shine. 

The sun is in my eyes. 

To thunder, — it thunders. 

To shine, to glitter, shining, shined. 

The shutters. It hails, shut the 

shutters quick. 
Is the walking good ? 
It is good (bad) walking. 
This country. In that country. 

He has made many friends in that 

country. 
Of which, of whom, whose. 
I see the man of whom you speak. 
I have bought the horse of which you 

spoke to me. 
I see the man whose brother has 

killed my dog. 
I see the man whose dog you have 

killed. 
Do you see the child whose father set 

out yesterday ? I see it. 

Whom have you seen ? 
I have seen the merchant whose 

warehouse you have taken. 
I have spoken to the man whose 
warehouse has been burnt. 



II fait beaucoup de grele. 

La grele. La neige. (noms feminhm 

t II ne fait point de soleil. 

t Le soleil me donne dans la vue. 

Tonner, 1, — il tonne. 

Luire,* 4, luisant, lui, (p. passe.) 

Les volets. II grele, fermez vite les 

volets, 
t Fait-il bon marcher ? 
t II fait bon (mauvais) marcher. 
Ce pays-ci. Dans ce pays-la. 

t II s'est fait beaucoup d'amis dans 

ce pays-la. 
Dont, spronom relatif. § 86^ 
Je vois l'homme dont vous parlez. 
J'ai achete le cheval dont vous m'avez 

parle. 
Je vois l'homme dont le frere a tue 

mon chien. 
Je vois l'homme dont vous avez tue 

le chien. 
Voyez-vous l'enfant dont le pere est 

parti hier ? Je le vois. 

Qui avez-vous vu ? 
J'ai vu le marchand dont vous avez 

pris le magasin. 
J'ai parle a l'homme dont le magasin 

a ete brule. 



Quarante-cinquieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Quel mauvais temps il fait aujourd'hui ! II pleut a verse ; il fait 

des eclairs, le tonnerre gronde Ne grele-t-il pas aussi ? Je le 

croyais il y a un moment, (a minute ago.) Ne vaut-il pas mieux 
faire fermer les volets ? (have .... shut 1) Je crois qu'il vaut mieux 
les faire fermer. Car s'il grele encore, la grele peut casser nos car- 
reaux de vitre. (panes of glass.) Dites a Salomon de venir fermer 
les volets. Ou est Salomon ? Appelez-le, si vous ne pouvez pas 
le trouver. Qu'est-ce que c'est que ce bruit ? N ; est-ce pas la grele 
qui vient contre les vitres? Salomon, fermez vite ces volets. N ; y 
a-t-il pas un carreau de casse? (30 1 , Obs. 71.) Non. M., je n'en 
vois pas de casse. Voici un volet de ferme. Fermez vite Pautre, 
car je crains pour nos carreaux. 

Have you seen the gentleman from whom T have received a pre- 
sent? I have not. — Have you seen the fine gun of which I spoke 
to you? I have. — Has your uncle seen the books of which you 
spoke to him ? He has. — Hast thou seen the man whose children 



FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 229 

have been punished ? I have not seen him. — To whom have yon 
been speaking in the theatre? I have been speaking to the man 
whose brother has killed my fine dog. — Have you seen the little boy 
whose father has become (s' est fait) a lawyer? I have seen him. 
— Whom have you seen at the ball ? I saw the farmer whose horses 
you bought (§88), and the men whose coach you had a mind to 
buy. — Whom do you see now ? I see the man whose servant has 
broken my looking-glass, and my two panes of glass. — Have you 
heard the man whose friend has lent me English money ? I have 
not. — Whom have you heard? I have heard the French captain 
whose son is my friend. 

Hast thou brushed the coat of which I spoke to thee ? I have 
not yet brushed it. — Have you received the money which you have 
been wanting? I have. — Have I the brown paper of which I have 
need? You have it. — Has your brother the Italian books of which 
he has need ? He has. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose 
warehouse we have taken? We have spoken to them. — Have you 
spoken to the physician whose son has studied German ? I have. 
— Hast thou seen the poor men whose warehouses have been burnt? 
I have. — Have you read the books which we have lent you? We 
have. — What do you say of them? (en?) We say that they are 
very fine. — Do you give anything to the children who are idle ? We 
give them nothing. — Did it snow yesterday ? Yes ; it did hail, lighten, 
and snow last evening and all night. I am very sorry for it. W 7 hy ? 
Because we are going to have bad walking for a few days. Aie 
we not? 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 

That of which. (No antecedent.) Ce do?it, (n'a point d' antecedent.) 

That of- which > (w i,h antecedents.) ° elui *""• \ (ont des antecedents.) 
I hose ot which. > Oeux dont. > 

1 have that of which I have need. ) J>ai cg dmty ^ begoin 
I have what I want. S 



He has what he wants. 

Have you the book of which you have 

need ? 
I have that of which I have need. 
Has the joiner the nails of which he 

has need ? 
He has those of which he has need. 
Which men do you see ? 
I see. those of whom you spoke. 



II a ce dont il a besoin. 

Avez-vous le livre dont vous avez 

besoin ? 
J'ai celui dont j'ai besoin. 
Le menuisier a-t-il les clous dont il a 

besoin ? 
II a ceux dont il a besoin. 
Quels hommes voyez-vous ? 
Je vois ceux dont vous avez parle. 



Obs. 103. The relative, dont, of which, &c, being an indirect, not a 
direct object, or regime,) has no influence on the past participle. (32 1 , 
Obs. 75, 76.) 
20 



230 



FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



Voyez-vous les Aleves dont je vous 
ai parle ? Je les vois. 

A qui, (relatif.) aux quels, (mas. plur.) 

Je vois les enfants d qui vous avez 
donne' des gateaux. 

A quels eleves parlez-vous ? ($ 79.) 

Je parle a. ceux auxquels (a qui) voua 
vous etes adresse. 

A quels chiens donnez-vous a man- 
ger? 

A ceux auxquels vous n'avez rien 
donne. 

Auxquels, for persons and things. 

>S" adresser, 1 , a . . Adressez-vous d . . . 

Adressez-vous au ministre. 

Je me suis adresse a lui. (§ 64.) 

Rencontrer, 1, (transitif.) 

J'ai rencontre les hommes a qui (aux- 
quels) vous vous etes adresse. 

De quels hommes parlez-vous ? 

Je parle de ceux dont les enfants ont 
ete studieux et obeissants. 

Obeissant, desobeissant. 

Complaisant. Desobligeant. 

De sorte que, (conjunction.) 

J'ai perdu mon argent, de sorte que 
je ne puis vous payer. 

Je suis maiade, de sorte que je ne 
puis sortir. 

Quarante-cinquieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Vous tenez votre chape au ! Mettez-le, (put it on.) Non, merci. 
Alors, donnez-le-moi, je vais le mettre sur le porte-chapeau, (hat- 
stand.) Vous etes bien complaisant. Le voila surun fauteuil. Eh! 
bien, que pensez-vous du tableau dont nous avons parle hier matin, 
et que vous avez sans doute vu hier apres-midi? (doubtless?) Je 
suis fache de vous dire que je ne Pai pas encore vu. Est-il possible % 
Hier, j'ai ete tres-occupe. de sorte que je n'ai pas pu le voir. Dites 
que vous n'avez pas voulu le voir. Non, vous vous trompez : vous 
avez tort de croire cela. Car, je vous assure que j'ai grande envie 
de le voir, fites-vous encore tres-occupe ? Oui, et tres-presse, (in a 
great hurry ,) parce que mon batiment va partir (19 2 , N. 1) dans un 
jour ou deux. Cependant, je veux essayer de voir le tableau dont 
nous avons parle. Comme vous etes presse, je vais nren aller. 
Adieu, au plaisir. J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. 

Have you at last learned French ? I was ill, so that I could not 



Do you see the pupils of whom I have 
spoken to you ? I do. 

To whom, (relative), to which. 

I see the children to whom you have 
given some cakes. 

To which pupils do you speak ? 

I speak to those to whom you have 
applied. 

Which dogs do you feed ? 

Those to which you gave nothing. 

Obs. 104. A qui, for persons only. 

To apply to Apply to ... . 

Apply to the minister. 

I did, (or, I applied to him.) 

Tb meet with. 

I have met with the men to whom 
you have applied. 

Of which men do you speak ? 

I speak of those whose children have 
been studious and obedient. 

Obedient, disobedient. 

Kind, complaisant. Unkind. 

So that. 

I have lost my money, so that I can- 
not pay you. 

I am ill, so that I cannot go out. 






FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 231 

learn it. — Has your brother learned it ? He has not learned it, be- 
cause he has not yet been able to find a good master. — Do you go 
to the ball this evening? I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it. 
— Did you understand that German'? I do not know German, so 
that I could not understand him. — Have you bought the horse of 
which you spoke to me ? I have no money, so that I could not buy 
it. — Have your children what they want? They have what they 
want. — Of which man do you speak ? I speak of the one whose 
brother has turned soldier. — Of which children have you spoken ? 
I have spoken of those whose parents are learned. — Which new 
book have you read ? I have read that of which I spoke to you 
yesterday. — Which paper has your cousin? He has that of which 
he has need. — Which fishes has he eaten? He has eaten those 
which you do not like. 

Of which books are you in want? I am in want of those of 
which you have spoken to me. — Have you need of those which I am 
reading? I have not. — Do you see the children to whom I have 
given cakes? I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, 
but those whom you have punished. — To whom have you given any 
French money ? I have given some to those who kave been skilful. 
To which children must one give presents ? One must give some to 
those who are good and obedient. — To whom do you give to eat 
and to drink? To those who are hungry and thirsty. — Have the 
captains at last listened to that man? They have refused (35 1 ) to 
listen to him ; all those to whom he applied have refused to hear 
him. — With whom have you met this morning? I have met with 
the man by whom I am esteemed. — Have you given any cakes to 
your pupils ? They have not studied well, so that I have given them 
nothing. You did right. 



FORTY-SIXTH LESSON, mh.—Quarante-sixieme Legon, 46me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

OF THE FIRST FUTURE.— Du Futur, ou Futur Simple. 

See (§ 146) and study it carefully. — Among the exceptions (of which we 
will soon treat) are the auxiliaries, and the following : — 

To have. I shall or will have. 



To be. I shall or will be. 

To go. I shall or will go. 

To send. I shall or will send. 

Shall or will he have money ? 



Avoir,* 3. J'aurai, ras, ra, rons, 

rez, ront. 

Etre,* 4. Je serai. 

Aller,* 1. J'irai. ) The only two 

. > irre?. verbs of 

Envoyer, 1. J enverrai. ) thP i stc0 nj. 
Aura-t-il de l'argent ? 



232 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 



He will have some. He will not. 
Shall you soon have done writing ? 
I shall (soon have done). 
He will soon have done his task. 
Shall we have the bird ? No, but 
they shall have it. 



II en aura. II n'en aura pas. 
t Aurez-vous bientot fini d'ecrire ? 
J'aurai bientot fini. (§ 170.) 
II aura bientot fini son devoir. 
Aurons-nous l'oiseau ? Non, mais 
ils l'auront. 

Quarante-sixieme Th&me. Ire Sec. 

Comment formez-vous le futur des verbes en Francais ? Faut-il 
vous repondre en Francais? Sans doute. Le puis-je ? Essayez. 
Est-ce que je sais tous les mots necessaires pour cela ? Je crois que 
oui. Je vais essayer. Attendez. Savez-vous le Fran pais de : final? 
Je ne suis pas sur du (about the) Francais de: final. Est-ce le 
meme que 1 ? Anglais? Oui, c 7 est le meme. Vous savez traduire: 
changing? n 7 est-ce pas? C'est: changeant. — C est cela. Com- 
mencez. Je vais repeter la question. — Je pense que : repeter est to 
repeat , n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est cela meme. Comment formez- 
vous le futur des verbes Francais? En changeant (R. 1), IV final de 
la Ire et 2de conjugaison, le oir, de la 4me ; non, je me trompe, je 
veux dire : de la 3me et le re de la 4me, en rai. C'est cela. Pou- 
vez-vous me dire le futur de : former ? Oui, c ; est : formerai. Quel 
est celui de : devoir ? C 7 est devoirai. Non, vous vous trompez. Ici, 
il faut changer oir en rai : alorsc'est: devrai. Tres-bien. Quand 
vous avez la premiere personne, pouvez-vous former les autres? Oui: 
car le futur fmit toujours en : rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. 

Shall you have any books ? I shall have some. — Who will give 
you any? My uncle will give me some. — When will your cousin 
have money ? He will have some next month. — How much money 
shall you have ? I shall have thirty-five francs. — Who will have 
good friends? The English will have some. — Will your father be 
at home this evening ? He will be at home. — Will you be there ? 
I shall also be there. — Will your uncle go out to-day? He will go 
out, if it is fine weather. — Shall you go out ? I shall go out, if it 
does not rain. — Will you love my son? I shall love him, if he is 
good. — Will you pay your shoemaker? I shall pay him, if I 
receive my money. — Will you love my children ? If they are good 
and assiduous, I shall love them ; but « if they are idle and naughty, 
I shall despise and punish them. — Am 1 right in speaking thus? 
You are not wrong. — Is your friend still writing? He is still 
writing. — Have you not done speaking? I shall soon have done. — 
Have our friends done reading? They will soon have done. — When 
will you send me the money which you owe me ? I shall send it 
to you soon. — Will your brothers send me the books which I have 
lent them ? They will send them to you. — VVhen will they send 
them to me ? They will send them to you next month. 



TORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



233 



VOCABULAIRE. 

To hold, keep. I shall or will hold. 

To come. I shall or will come. 

To sit down. I shall or will sit 
down. 

To be necessary. It will be necessary. 

To provide. I shall provide. 

To be able. I will be able. 

To foresee. I shall or will fore- 

see. 

To know. I shall or will know. 

To suspend. I shall suspend. 

To be worth. I will be worth. 

To see. I shall or will see. 

To be willing. I shall be willing. 

To do. I shall or will do. 

When shall you do your exercises ? 

I will do them soon, (ere long.) 

My brother will do his exercises to- 
morrow. 

Next Monday. Next Tuesday. 

Last Wednesday. Last Thursday. 

Next month. 

This month. That age, century. 

When will your son go to the bridge ? 

He will go next Tuesday. 

Shall you go anywhere ? 

We shall go nowhere. 

Will he send me the book ? 

He will send it you if he has done 
with it. 

Shall you be at home this evening ? 



2de Section. 
Tenir,* 2. 
Venir,* 2. 
S'asseoir,* 3. 

Falloir,* 3. 
Pourvoir,* 3. 
Pouvoir,* 3. 
Pre'voir,* 3. 

Savoir, 3. 
Surseoir,* 3. 
Valoir,* 3. 
Voir,* 3. 
Vouloir,* 3. 
Faire,* 4. 



Je tiendrai. 
Je viendrai. 
Je m'asseierai 
Je m'assierai. 
II faudra. 
Je pourvoirai. 
Je pourrai. 
Je prevoirai. 

Je saurai. 
Je surseoirai. 
Je vaudrai. 
Je verrai. 
Je voudrai. 
Je ferai. 



Quand ferez-vous vos themes ? 

Je les ferai bientot. 

Mon frere fera ses themes demain. 

Lundi prochain. Mardi prochain. 

Mercredi passe. Jeudi dernier. 

t Le mois prochain. 

Ce mois-ci. Ce siecle-ld. 

Quand votre fils ira-t-il au pont ? 

II ira mardi prochain. 

Irez-vous quelque part ? 

Nous n' irons nulle part. 

M'enverra-t-il le livre ? 

t II vous l'enverra s'il l'a fini. 

Serez-vous chez vous (a la maison) 

ce soir ? 
J'y serai. 

Votre pere sera-t-il chez lui ? 
II y sera. 
They Vos cousins y seront-ils? lis y 
seront. 

Obs. 105. (Important.) When a verb, in the future tense, is connected 
with another by the conjunction if, si, 1 the French verb following si must 
be in the indicative mood, present tense, although, in English, it may be in 
the future tense, or subjunctive mood. 

Will John go to the concert? Yes, I Jean ira-t-il au concert? Oui, si 
if you go, or will go, or should go. | vous y allez. 

1 Si. (if, meaning granting, supposing that.) But when si means whether, 
the following verb must be in the future tense : I do not know whether he 
will go or not, Je ne sais pas s'il ira ou non. 
20* 



I shall be there. 
Will your father be at home ? 
He will be there. 
Will your cousins be there ? 
will. 



234 FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 

QUARANTE-SIXIEME ExERCICE. 2de Sec. 

Allez-vous a Washington aujourd'hui ? Non, je n ; ai pas le temps 
d'y aller aujourd ; hui. Quand irez-vous? J'irai jeudi ou samedi 
prochain. Aurez-vous le temps de venir nous voir? Sans doute que 
je Paurai. (Dir. 6.) Quand viendrez-vous ? J ; irai demain. Non, 
je me trompe, apres-demain. Vraiment? Om, vraiment. — Enver- 
rez-vous du tabac en France? Oui, j 7 y en enverrai. Par quel bati- 
ment l'enverrez-vous ? Je Py enverrai par le meme que M. Lippard. 
— Y en enverra-t-il ? Oui, il y en enverra. Y en enverra-t-il beau- 
coup ? II y enverra tout ce qu ? il a. — Qui tiendra le magasin du coin ? 
Je ne sais pas qui le tiendra. N'est-ce pas le petit marchand qui le 
tiendra? Lui et ses freres le tiendront. Tiendront-ils des nou- 
veautes? lis ne tiendront que du drap. Quand Fouvriront-ils ? lis 
Fouvriront dans quinze jours. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non, 
je vous assure. — Vos cousins viendront-ils bientot? II ne viendront 
pas avant quinze jours. Votre oncle viendra-t-il avec eux? II 
viendra, si le capitaine ne vient pas. Croyez-vous que le capitaine 
viendra? II viendra s'il n'a pas la goutte. — Quand saurez-vous 
votre theme? Je le saurai dans un quart d ; heure. Croyez-vous 
que vous le saurez si-tot? Oui, je le saurai. Frederic saura-t-il le 
sien ? II le saura. Les nouveaux ecoliers sauront-ils les leurs ? lis 
les sauront. Nous les saurons tous. 

Has the tailor made my coat ? He has not made it yet ; but he 
will soon make it. — When will he make it? When he shall have 
time. — When will you do your exercises? I shall do them when I 
shall have time. — When will your brother do his? He will do 
them next Saturday. — Wilt thou come to me? I shall come. — 
When wilt thou come ? I shall come next Friday. — When have 
you seen my uncle ? I saw him last Sunday. — Will your cousins 
go to the ball, next Tuesday ? They will go. — Will you come to 
my concert ? I shall come, if I am not ill. — Will you be able to 
pay me what you owe me ? I shall not be able to pay it you, for I 
have lost all my money. — Will the American be able to pay for his 
shoes? He has lost his pocket-book, so that he will not be able to 
pay for them. — Will it be necessary to send for the physician ? No- 
body is ill, so that it will not be necessary to send for him. — Will it 
be necessary to go to the market, to-morrow? It will be necessary 
to go there, for we want some beef, some bread, and some wine. — 
Shall you see your father, to-day ? I shall see him. — Where will 
he be ? He will be at his counting-house. — Will you go to the ball 
to-night? I shall not go, for I am too ill to go to it. — Will your 
friend go ? He will go if you will. 



FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 



235 



Vocabulaire. 3me Section. 

Obs. 106. (Important.) When a verb in the future tense is connected 
with another by the word when, quand ; the French verb following quand 
must be in the future tense, although the present is then used in English. As, 



Will he go when I go ? (or I do.) 
He will go when you do. 
He will write it if you will. 
He will write it when you do. 
Will he send some white paper to 

my counting-house ? 
He will, if you will have some. 
He will, when you want some. 

Shall you be able to pay the shoe- 
maker if he send his bill ? 

I will pay him when he sends it. 

Who will hold my parasol ? 

Give it to me, Miss, I will (hold it). 

He will hold it, or they will. 

Will your cousin's friend come to 
my concert ? He will. 

Shall you come ? I will be there. 

To employ, use. I will employ. 

To try. I shall or will try. 

What will you use to do it ? 

I will use this. 

Will you try soon ? I will. 

Will he not try also ? 

Yes, he will, but they will not. 

You are mistaken, they will try also. 

To acquire. I will acquire. 

To run. I shall or will run. 

To gather, pick. Will I gather ? 
To die, dose life.) Who shall not die ? 
What will you acquire ? I will 

acquire what I can. 



Ira-t-il quand firai? 

II ira quand vous irez. 

II Vecrira si vous V ecrivez. (Obs. 105.) 

II l'ecrira quand vous l'ecrirez. 

Enverra-t-il du papier blanc a mon 

comptoir ? 
II y en enverra si vous en voulez. 
II y en enverra quand vous en vou- 

drez. 
Pourrez-vous payer le cordonnier, 

s'il envoie son memoir e ? 
Je le paierai quand il l'enverra. 
Qui veut tenir mon parapluie ? 
Donnez-le-moi, Mile., je le tiendrai. 
II le tiendra, ou ils le tiendront. 
L'ami de votre cousin viendra-t-il a 

mon concert ? II ira. 

Y viendrez-vous ? J'y serai. 

Employer. J'emploierai.) ,&-iaa ,3 \ 

Essayer. J'essaierai. y 

Qu'emploierez-vous pour le faire ? 

J'emploierai ceci. 

Essaierez-vous bientot ? J'essaierai. 

N'essaiera-t-il pas aussi ? 

Si fait, il essaiera, mais ils n'essaie- 

ront pas. Vous vous trompez, ils 

essaieront aussi. 
Acquerir,* 2. J'acquerrai. 1 
Courir,* 2. Je courrai. 

Cueillir,*2. Cueillerai-je ? 
Mourir,* 2. Qui ne mourra pas ? 

Qu'acquerrez-vous ? J'acquerrai 

ce que je pour rax. 

Obs. 107. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce que ; as soon as, 
aussitot que, des que ; after, apres que ; as, comme ; where, ou ; connect 
the English verbs, use the future tense after the 2d verb in French. 



Will you run as soon as he runs f 
We will run after he has run, and 
where he has run. 



Courrez-vous aussitot qu'iX courra ? 
Nous courrons apres qu'ilaura couru, 
et ou il aura couru. 



1 These 4 verbs, and the lists given in 1st and 2d sections, amounting 
(the auxiliaries included) to 21, are the most important exceptions. 



236 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 

Qttarante-sixieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

Si je viens samedi prochain, votre fils viendra-t-il ? II viendra 
quand vous viendrez. Fera-t-il ce que je feral? II fera ce qu'il 
pourra. Iront-ils ou vous voudrez ? Non, ils iriront pas ou je vou- 
drai, mais ou ils voudront. — Quand cueillerez-vous mon bouquet? 
Je le cueillerai quand et ou vous voudrez. En cueillerez-vous aussi 
un pour Emma'? Je lui en cueillerai un aussi, des que vous me le 
direz. — Acquerra-t-il de Phonneur s'il fait son devoir? II en ac- 
querra des qu'il fera ce qu ; il a a faire. — Courrez-vous si je cours? 
Oui, ^e courrai quand vous courrez, ou aussitot que vous aurez 
couri . — Comment est le vieux soldat? II est bien malade. Croit- 
on qu'il en mourra? Oui ; on croit qu'il en mourra. Et le matelot? 
II est mieux, on espere qu'il n ; en mourra pas. — Qu'acquerront ces 
ecoliers? Ils acquerront de Phonneur. — Ce jeune cheval vaudra-t-ii 
deux cents dollars, quand il aura quatre ans ? Je crois qiril vaudra 
plus que cela. Vraiment ! 

Will the farmer gather his corn to-day ? No, he will gather it 
only to-morrow, or the day after. — Will he be ready then ? He will 
be ready, we shall be ready, and our friends will also be ready. — 
Where will our young neighbors go ? They will go nowhere ; they 
will remain at home, for they will have a great deal to do. — What 
will they have to do ? They will have to cut their grain and to put 
it in their granary. You will lose your money, if you do not keep 
your pocket-book shut up, (ferine.) — Will your cousin keep an apo- 
thecary store ? He will keep one. — Where will he take a store ? 
He will take one near the museum. — Will he be able to get one 
there, (y en trouver un?) He hopes so. — When will he come? He 
will come when his father gives him (Obs. 106) the two thousand 
dollars which he has promised him. — Will he give them to him 
soon ? He will receive them in a few days. — Will he receive any 
money from you? Yes, I will lend him some. — Will he pay you 
back ? (repaiera-t-il ?) He will, for he is diligent, assiduous, and 
he will without doubt do his duty. I hope that you are not mis- 
taken. 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 47th.— Quarante-septieme Legon, 47me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 



To belong. (24 3 , 40 2 , 46 2 .) 
Do you belong ? I do. 

Does that horse belong to your bro- 
ther? It does (belong to him). 



Appartenir,* 2. (conj. comme tenir.) 
Appartenez-vous? J'appartiens. 
Ce cheval appartient-il a votre frere I 
II lui appartient. 



J 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 



237 



To whom do these gloves belong ? 

They belong to the captains. 

Do these horses belong to the Ame 

i ican generals ? 
They will soon belong to them. (§ 170.) 
To suit, (24 3 , 25 1 , 252, 462.) suited. 

( Used principally in the 3d person.) 
Did that cloth suit your brother ? 
It did not. 

Do these shoes suit your children ? 
They will suit them. 
Does it suit you to do that ? 
It will suit me to do it. 
Does it suit your cousin to come with 

us? 
It will not suit him to go out. 
To succeed, succeeded. 

Do you succeed in learning French ? 
I do (succeed in it). 

I do succeed in learning it. 

Do these men succeed in selling their 
horses ? If they have not yet suc- 
ceeded, they will succeed in it. 

To succeed, succeeding, succeeded. 

Do you succeed in doing that ? 

I do ; but he does not. 

Did you succeed ? I did. (§50.) 

To clean. 

Immediately, directly. 

This instant, instantly. 

I am going to clean it presently. 

I will do it immediately. 

I am going to work. 



A qui appartiennent ces gants ? 

lis appartiennent aux capitaines. 

Ces chevaux appartiennent-ils aux 
generaux Americains ? 

lis leur appartiendront bientot. 

Conve?iir,* 2.(comme venir) convenu. 
(aavantle nom ; de, avantl'infini." 

Ce drap a-t-il convenu a votre frere ? 

II ne lui a pas convenu. 

Ces souliers conviennent-ils a vos 
enfants ? lis leur conviendront. 

Vous convient-il de faire cela ? 

II me conviendra de le faire. 

Convient-il a votre cousin de venir 
avec nous ? 

II ne lui conviendra pas de sortir. 

Parvenir,* 2, d. (comme venir) par- 
venu e . 

t Parvenez-vous a apprendre le Fran- 
cais ? t J'y parviens. 

t Je parviens a l'apprendre. 

t Ces hommes parviennent-ils a ven- 
dre leurs chevaux ? S'ils n'y sont 
pas encore parvenus, ils y par- 
viendront. 

Reussir, 2, d. reussissant, reussi. 

Reussissez-vous a faire cela ? 

J'y reussis ; mais il n'y reussit pas. 

Y avez-vous reussi? J'y ai reussL 

Nettoyer, 1. 

Tout de suite. 

A l'instant, sur le champ. 

Je vais le nettoyer tout d Vheure. 

Je vais le faire tout de suite. 

Je vais travailler. 



Quarante-septieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

J'ai trouve des gants. A qui appartiennent-ils? Sont-ce des 
gants de chamois'? Oui. Ce sont des gants de chamois. Ils 
m'appartiennent alors. Donnez-les-moi. Attendez un instant, s'il 
vous plait. Sont-ilsblancs ? jaunes ; verts ; ou bleus ? Les miens sont 
plutot bruns que jaunes. Alors les voici. Ils vous appartiennent. Je 
vous remercie. De rien, (you are welcome.) Avez-vous achete 
quelque chose? Oui. Qu'est-ce qui (21 1 ) vous a convenu? Ceci 
m'a convenu, et cela conviendra a mon frere. Cela lui conviendra- 
t-ill Oui. j'en suis sur. Le cousin de Favocat a-t-il ete au musee 
avec vos amis ? II ne lui a pas convenu d 7 y aller, de sorte qu'il a 



238 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



(2.) 



refuse d ? y aller avec eux. Parvenez-vous a faire votre devoir tous 
les jours? J'y parviens souveut. — Le menuisier est-il parvenu a 
raccommoder votre pupitre ? Oui, il y est parvenu tout de suite. 
Est-il aussi parvenu a raccommoder le secretaire ? Non, il n ; a pas 
reussi a le faire. A-t-il mieux reussi avec le fauteuil ? Oui, il y a 
parfaitement reussi. — Qui a nettoye votre gilet de satin? Notre 
nouveau domestique Pa nettoye. N'a-t-il pas bien reussi ? Vrai- 
ment, oui. — Vos souliers sont-ils nettoyes? lis le sont. Je me 
trompe, on les a pris pour les nettoyer. 

To whom does that horse belong ? It belongs to the English 
captain, whose son has written a note to you. — Does this money 
belong to you? It does belong to me. — From whom h^re you 
received it? I have received it from the men whose children you 
have seen. — Whose horses are those? They are (ce sont) ours. 
(§ 39, N. 3.) — Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him 
here? I have forgotten to tell him so, (le.) — Is it (est-ce) your 
father or mine who is gone to Berlin ? It is mine. — Have you 
brought me the book which you promised me ? I have forgotten 
it. — Has your uncle brought you the pocket-books which he promised 
you? He has forgotten to bring me them. — Have you already writ- 
ten to your friend ? I have not yet had time to write to him. — Have 
you forgotten to write to your relation? I have not. — Does this 
cloth suit you ? It does not suit me ; have you no other ? — I have 
some other : but it is dearer than this. — Will you show it to me ? I 
will show it to you. — Do these shoes suit your uncle ? They do not 
suit him, because they are too dear. — Are these (sont-ce) the shoes 
of which (dont) you have spoken to us? They are (ce sont) the 
same, (les memes.) — Whose shoes are these? Thej^ belong to the 
nobleman whom you have seen this morning in my warehouse. 

Vocabulaike. 2de Section. 



Is there ? 
Are there ? 
There is not. 
There is nothing- 



There is. 
There are. 
There are not. 
-nobody. 



t Y a-t-il ? 



II y a. 



Will there be ? There will be — not be. 

What is there ? — the matter there ? 

Was there, or has there been ? There 

was. 
There has been nothing. 
Nothing has taken place. 
Is there wine ? syrup ? 
There is some. There is nc more. 
Are there men of merit ? 



tlln'yapas. II n'y a point. 

t II n'y a rien — personne. 

t Y aura-t-il ? II y aura. II n'y 

aura pas. 
t Qu'y a-t-il la ? Qu'est-ce qu'il y 

a la? 
t Y a-t-il eu ? II y a eu. 

> til n'y a rien eu. 

t Y a-t-il du vin ? du sirop ? 
t II y en a. II n'y en a plus, 
t Y a-t-il des hommes de merite ? 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



239 



Obs. 108. The interrogative : What is ? followed by a preposition, is 



The relative : What is, by: Ce qu'il 

t Qu'y a-t-il dans le bariZ ? (1 mute.) 
t Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a dedans. 
Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de monde 

au bal de Mme. Rush ? 
II doit y en avoir beaucoup. 
Le credit. A credit. Vendre a credit 

Argent comptant. En argent comp 

tant. 
Acheter comptant. 
Vendre comptant. 
Payer comptant. 
Voulez-vous acheter argent comp 

tant ? 
Vous convient-il de me vendre a 

credit ? 
t Aller bien. 

t Cet habit me va-t-il bien? 
t II vous va bien. 
t Ce chapeau ne va pas bien a votre 

frere. 
t II ne lui va pas bien. 
t Ces souliers vous vont-ils bien ? 
t lis me vont bien. 
t Cela vous va fort bien. 
Garde r, 1. 

Garderez-vous le cheval ? 
Je le garderai. 
II ne faut pas garder mon argent. 

Qttarante-septieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 
Quand vous serez en Europe, irez-vous en Allemagne ? Je crois 
que j'irai* du moins, j ; ai grande envie d'y voyager. Y voyagerez- 
vous a pied ? Non ; il ne me convient pas d'y voyager a pied : de 
sorte que j'irai en voiture. En voiture, ou en diligence? (public 
coach.) Quelque fois en voiture ; quelque fois en diligence. Croy- 
ez-vous que vous aimerez a voyager en Allemagne autant qu ; en 
Italie 1 Je n'en sais rien, en verite, (I do not know anything about 
it.) — Le marchand que vous connaissez a Amsterdam a-t-il beau- 
coup de credit ? Oui. c'est un des premiers marchands de la ville. 
Comment Pappelez-vous? On Pappelle. . . . — Vous avez un habit 
qui vous va bien; Pavez-vous fait faire ici? Non, je ne Pai pas 
fait faire ici. Ou done ? Nulle part. Je Pai achete tout fait, (ready 
made.) Pourquoi ne dites-vous pas: dejdfait? pour, already made 2 



translated by : Qu'y a-t-il ? ($ 118.) 
y a. {% 87—4.) 

What is in the barrel 1 

I do not know what is in. 

Are there to be many people at the 

ball of Mrs. Rush ? 
There are to be a great many. 
The credit. On credit. To sell on 

credit. 
Ready money. In ready money. 

To buy for cash. 

To sell for cash. 

To pay down. 

Will you buy for cash ? 

Does it suit you to sell me on credit ? 

To jit. 

Does that coat fit me ? 

It fits you. 

That hat does not fit your brother. 

It does not fit him. 

Do these shoes fit you ? 

They fit me. 

That fits you very well. 

To keep. 

Will you keep the horse ? 

I shall keep it. 

You must not keep my money. 



240 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 



Parce que les Francais ne Pemploient point. Vraiment, il vous va 
aussi bieri que possible. — Je vous ai prete mon canif, n'est-ce pas? 
L 7 avez-vous garde ? Je Pai garde, et je le garderai encore, car j'en 
aurai besoin tout a Pheure. 

Does this merchant sell on credit ? He does not sell on credit. — 
Does it suit you to buy for cash? It does not suit me. — Where did 
you buy these pretty knives? I bought them at (chez) the mer- 
chants whose warehouse you saw yesterday. — Has he sold them to 
you on credit ? He has sold them to me for cash. — Do you often 
buy for cash ? Not so often as you. — Have you forgotten anything 
here ? I have forgotten nothing. — Is there any wine in this barrel ? 
There is some in it. — Is there any vinegar in this glass ? There is 
none in it. — Is wine or cider in it ? {dedans ? ) There is neither wine 
nor cider in it. — What is there in it? There is vinegar. 

Are there any men in your warehouse ? There are some there. 
— Is there any one in the office? There is no one there. — Were 
there many people in the theatre ? There were many there. — Will 
there be many people at your ball ? There will be many there. — 
Are there many children that will not play ? There are many that 
will not study, but all will play. — Hast thou cleaned my trunk ? I 
have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. — Do you intend buy- 
ing an umbrella? I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me 
on credit. — Do you intend to keep mine ? I intend to give it you 
back, if I buy one. — Have you returned the book to my brother ? 
I have not yet returned it. 

Vocabtjlaiee. 3me Section. 



You had better . . . 

I had better . . . 

He had better . . . 

Instead of keeping your horse, you 
had better sell it. 

Instead of selling his hat, he had bet- 
ter keep it. 

To please, pleased, please. 

I please, thou pleasest, he pleases. 
To please some one, (transitive.) 



t Vous ferez mieux de . . . 

t Je ferai mieux de . . . 

t II fera mieux de . . . 

t Au lieu de garder votre cheval, vous 

ferez mieux de le vendre. 
t Au lieu de vendre son chapeau, il 

fera mieux de le garder. 
Plaire,* 4, a ; p. p. plu, imper. 

plaisez. 
Je plais, tu plais, il plait. 
Plaire d quelqu'un, (intransitif.) 



Obs. 109. Plaire, etant intransitif, ne pent pas etre employe au passif. 
Ainsi, il nefaut pas traduire : Are you pleased with this book? par, etes- 
vous plu avec ce livre ? mais par Vunipersonnel. 

Does this book please you ? Ce livre vous plait-il ? 



I am very well pleased with it, but 
he is not much pleased with it. 



II me plait beaucoup, mais il ne lui 
plait guere. 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 241 



II plait beaucoup a Charles. 
Qu'est-ce qui (21 1 ) vous plait tant ? 
Ceci. 



Charles is delighted with it. 

What are you so much delighted 

with ? This. 

I will do what you please. j t Je ferai ce qu'il vous piaira. 

You are pleased to say so. You joke. I t Cela vous plait a dire. 
What is your pleasure ? ) + r\ 1 ** -i * 

\TTU . A +>> i * ^ Ue V0US Plait-ll? 

What do you want ? ) 



What do you say ? 
To delight in, to be pleased. 
How are you pleased here ? 
I am very well pleased here. 



t Plait-il ? 
t Se plaire,* 4. (&, avant un infin.) 
t Comment vous plaieez-vous ici ? 
t Je m'y plais beaucoup. 



Obs. 110. The impersonal it is, is rendered by c' est for the singular, and 
by ce sont, when followed by a 3d pers. plur., and only then. ($ 38, N. 3.) 



Whose book is this ? It is his. 

Whose shoes are these ? 

They are ours. 

It is they who have seen him. 

It is your friends who are right. 



A qui est ce livre ? C'est le sien. 

A qui sont ces souliers ? 

Ce so7it les notres. 

Ce sont eux qui l'ont vu. 

Ce sont vos amis qui ont raison. 



Quarante-septieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

Fait-il du soleil ce matin ? Oui, il en fait. Alois je ferai bien de 
prendre mon parasol, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, vous ferez bien de le pren- 
dre. — Fait-il beaucoup de soleil en Angleterre ? Non, le temps y est 
presque toujours couvert. Y tonne-t-il souvent? Non, il n'y fait pas 
beaucoup de tonnerre. Avez-vous peur du tonnerre? Non, mais 
Le petit chien blanc en a peur. Plait-il ? Ne me comprenez-vous 
pas? Si fait; mais, je n'ai jamais vu un chien craindre le tonnerre. 
Celui-la en a peur ; je vous assure. — Vous plaisez-vous ici % Oui, 
beaucoup, beaucoup, (very much.) Cela vous plait a dire. Non, 
vraiment. Je m'y plais beaucoup. — Que pensez-vous du dernier 

o avrage de C. D 1 Je ne l'aime pas du tout. Cela vous plait 

a dire, car il plait a tout le monde. S ; il plait a tout le monde, je 
vous assure qu'il ne me plait pas. — Quel parapluie voulez-vous? 
C'est celui-ci que je veux. Et quels gants vous faut-il ? Ce sont 
ceux-la qu'il me faut. — Que faut-il a votre cousin 1 II a ce dont il 
a besoin. Alors, vous pouvez vous en aller. Nous allons nous en 
aller dans un instant. Adieu, au plaisir. Je m'en vais aussi. Au 
plaisir, done. 

What is your pleasure, Sir? I am inquiring after (40 2 ) your father. 
— Is he at home? No, Sir, he is gone out. — What do you gay*? 
(Plait-il?) I tell you that he is gone out. — Will you sit down and 
wait till he comes back ? When do you expect him ? When rfl 
he come back? I do not know exactly. He may return in a quarter 
of an hour or less; he may return only for dinner. That is, between 
(entre) 2 and 3 o'clock, I suppose, (supposer.) Not between 2 and 
21 



5J42 



FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



3, as you suppose, but between 1 and 2. — Never mind. I have no 
time to wait now, so that I had better call again. As you please. — 
What name shall I tell him? Give him this note; he will find my 
name in it. I will give it to him. Good morning. — Is it our baker 
or the doctor's, who has sold you bread on credit ? It is ours. Is 
that your son? He is not mine; he is my friend's neighbor's son, 
(le fits du voisin de mon ami. § 140 — 2.) — Where is yours? He has 
become a traveller , (voyageur ;) he is now in Paris. No, I am mis- 
taken, in Bordeaux. — Do you intend to sell your coat? I intend 
keeping it, for I want it. — Instead of keeping it, you had better sell 
it. — Do you sell your horses ? I do not sell them. — Instead of keep- 
ing them you had better sell them. — Does our friend keep his para- 
sol ? He does keep it ; but instead of keeping it he had better sell 
it, for it is worn out. — Does your son tear his book ? He does tear 
it ) but he is wrong in doing so, for instead of tearing it he had better 
read it. 



FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 48th.— Quarante-huitieme Le$on, 48me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Section. 

When will you go away ? (43 2 .) 

I will go soon. 

By and by. 

He will go away soon, (by and by.) 

We will go to-morrow. 

They will go to-morrow. 

Thou wilt go immediately. 

When, (conjonction adverbiale.) 

What will become of you if you lose 

your money ? (44 3 .) 
I know not what will become of me. 
What will become of him ? 
What will become of us ? 
What will become of them ? 
I do not know what will become of 

them. 
The turn, my turn, in his, in my turn. 
In my brother's turn. 
Each in his turn. 
When it comes to your turn. 
Our turn will come. 

To take a turn, (a walk.) 



He is gone to take a walk, 



Quand vous en irez-vous ? 

Je m'en irai bientot. 

Tout a 1'heure. 

II s'en ira tout a 1'heure. 

Nous nous en irons demain. 

lis s'en iront demain. 

Tu t'en iras sur le champ. . 

Lorsque, (never used interrogatively.) 

t Que deviendrez-vows si vous perdez 

votre argent? (Obs. 105.) 
t Je ne sais pas ce que je deviendrai. 
t Que deviendra-t-?7 ? 
t Que dexiendtons-nous ? 
t Que deviendront-i7s ? 
t Je ne sais pas ce qu'ils deviendront. 

Le tour, mon tour, a son, d mon tour, 
Au tour de mon frere. 
Chacun a son tour, 
t Quand votre tour viendra. 
t Nous aurons notre tour. 
Faire un tour. 

Faire un tour de promenade. 
II est alle faire un tour. 
II est alld faire un tour de prome 
nade. 



I 



FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, (l.) 243 



To walk round the garden. 
To run, to harry. 

I run, thou runnest, he runs. 
Do you run ? I do. I do not. 

Shall I run ? (46 3 .) You shall not. 

Behind, behind him, them, me. 

Has that man gone away ? 

He has gone away. 

Have your brothers gone away ? 

They have gone away. 

They have not gone away. 

Have they gone away ? 

They were not willing to go away. 



t Faire un tour rfejardin. 

Courir,* 2, p. passe couru. (impera.) 

courez. 
Je cours, tu cours, il court. 
Courez-vous ? Je cours. Je ne cours 
pas. 

Courrai-je ? Vous ne courrez point. 
Derriere, derriere lui, eux, moi. 
Cet homme s'en est-il alle ? 
II s'en est alle. 
Vos freres s'en sont-ils alles ? 
lis s'en sont alles. 
lis ne s'en sont pas alles. 
S'en sont-ils alles? 
lis n'ont pas voulu s'en aHer. 



Quarante-hititieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 

Comptez-vous acheter un cheval ? Je ne peux pas en acheter un, 
car je n'ai pas encore recu rnon argent. — Me faut-il aller au theatre ? 
II ne vous faut pas y aller. Ce n ; est pas votre tour d'y aller, et il 
fait mauvais temps. — Pourquoi n'allez-vous pas chez mon frere ? Ce 
n'est pas mon tour d'aller chez lui. — Est-ce que c 7 est son tour de 
venir vous voir? Oui, e'est son tour, et je n'irai chez lui qu'apres 
qu'il sera venu chez moi. Comme il vous plaira. — Le quel de ces 
deux eleves commence a parler ? Est-ce le plus grand ou le plus 
petit ? Le plus age ou le plus jeune ? Ce n ; est pas cela qui fait la 
difference, (the difference, nom fern.) Quoi done ? Celui qui est 
studieux apprend et commence a parler. Et que fait celui qui ne 
Pest pas ? II apprend a lire et a traduire un peu • mais non a parler; 
et il n'apprendra jamais, s'il ne devient pas (06s. 105) plus studieux. 
J ; espere qu'il le deviendra. Je Tespere aussi. 

Are you going away already ? I am not going yet. — When will 
that man go away? He will go presently. — Will you go away 
soon ? I shall go away next Thursday. — When will your friends go 
away ? They will go away next month. — When wilt thou go away ? 
I will go away instantly. — Why has your father gone away so soon? 
(si tot ?) He has promised his friend to be at his house at a quarter 
to nine, so that he went away early in order to keep what he has 
promised. — When shall we go away ? We shall go away to-mor- 
row. — Shall we start early? We shall start at five o'clock in the 
morning. — When will you go away? I shall go away as soon as I 
have done writing. — When will your children go away ? They will 
go as soon as they have done their exercises. 

Will you go when (lorsque) I shall go? I shall go away when 
you go, (quand vous vous en irez.) — Will our neighbors soon go 



244 



FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



away ? They will go away when they have done speaking. — Wha; 
will become of your son if he does not study ? If he does not study 
he will learn nothing. — What will become of you if you lose your 
money ? I do not know what will become of me. — What will be- 
come of your friend if he loses his pocket-book? I do not know 
what will become of him if he loses it. — What has become of your 
son ? I do not know what has become of him. — Has he enlisted ? 
He has not enlisted. — What will become of us if our friends go 
away? I do not know what will become of us if they go away. — 
What has become of your relations ? They have gone away. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 
A blow, a kick, a knock, a stab. 



A clap, a slap. 

Have you given that man a blow ? 

I have given him one. 

A blow with a stick. 

A kick, (with the foot.) 

A blow with the fist. 

A stab of a knife. 

A shot, or the report of a gun. 

The shot of a pistol. 

A glance of the eye. 

A clap of thunder. 

To give a cut with a knife. 

To give a man a blow with a stick. 

To give a man a kick, (with the 

foot.) 
To give a man a blow with the fist. 



To pull, to draw. 
To shoot, to fire. 
To fire a gun. 
To fire a pistol. 
To fire at some one. 

I have fired at that bird. 

I have fired twice. 

I have fired three times. 

I have fired several times. 

How many times have you fired ? 

How many times have you fired at 

that bird ? 
I have fired at it several times. 



> Un coup. 

Avez-vous donne un coup a cet 

homme ? 
Je lui en ai donne un. 
Un coup de baton. 
Un coup de pied. 
Un coup de poing. 
Un coup de couteau. 
Un coup de fusil. 
Un coup de pistolet. 
Un coup d'ceil. 
Un coup de tonnerre. 
Donner un coup de couteau. 
Donner un coup de baton a un 

homme. 
Donner un 

homme. 
Donner un 

homme. 



coup de pied a un 
coup de poing a un 



I Tirer, 1. 



t Tirer un coup de fusil. 

t Tirer un coup de pistolet. 

t Tirer un coup de fusil sur quel- 
qu'un. 

f J'ai tire un coup de fusil a cet 
oiseau. 

t J'ai tire deux coups de fusil. 

t J'ai tire trois coups de fusil. 

t J'ai tire quelque coups de fusil. 

t Combien de coups de fusil avez- 
vous tires ? 

Combien de fois avez-vous tire sur 
cet oiseau? 

J'ai tire plusieurs fois sur lui. 



j 



FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



245 



I have heard a shot. 

He has heard the report of a pistol. 

We have heard a clap of thunder. 

The fist. 

To cast an eye upon some one or some- 
thing. 

Have you cast an eye upon that 
book? 

I have cast an eye upon it. 



t J'ai entendu un coup de fusil, 
t II a entendu un coup de pistolet. 
t Nous avons entendu un coup de 

tonnerre. 
Le poing. 
Jeter un coup oV oeil sur quelqu'un OU 

quelque chose. 
Avez-vous jete un coup d'ceil sur ce 

livre ? 
J'y ai jete un coup d'ceil. 



Quarante-huitieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 

Combien de fois les ennemis ont-ils tire sur nous ? lis ont tire 
plusieurs fois sur nous. Ont-ils tue quelqu'un? lis n'ont tue per- 
sonne. — Qu'avez-vous fait de mon livre ? Je Pai mis derriere le 
pupitre, sur votre coffre. — Dois-je vous repondre? Vous me repon- 
drez a votre tour. — Est-ce le tour de mon frere 1 Quand son tour 
viendra, je lui demanderai ; car, chacun a son tour. — Avez-vous fait 
un tourde promenade ce matin? J'ai fait un tour de jardin. — Ou 
votre oncle est-il alle ? II est alle se promener. — De quel cote est-il 
alle ? De ce cote-la. — Vous vous trompez, il est alle du cote du 
pont, n'est-ce pas ? Oui ; ii est alle du cote ou il se promene tou- 
jours. — Pourquoi ce garcon-la court-il si vite? II a peur de cet 
etranger. L'etranger veut-il lui faire du mal ? Oui, il veut lui don- 
ner un coup de pied ou de poing. — Pourquoi done 1 Que lui a fait 
le garcon ? Le petit mechant (wicked little fellow) lui a tire les 
che veux. — Qui court derriere nous ? Notre chien court derriere nous. 
Apercevez-vous Poiseau qui est derriere Parbre? Je Papercois. 

Does not your boy listen to what you tell him 1 He does not listen 
to it, if I do not give him a beating, (de coups.) — Why do those 
children not work ? Their master has given them blows with his 
fist, so that they will not work. — Why has he given them blows 
with his fist? Because they have been disobedient. — Have you 
fired a gun ? I have fired three times. — At what did you fire ? I 
fired at a bird. — Have you fired a gun at that man ? I have fired a 
pistol at him. — Why have you fired a pistol at him ? Because he 
has given me a stab with his knife. — How many times have you 
fired at that bird ? I have fired at it twice. — Have you killed it ? I 
have killed it at the second shot, (au deuxieme coup.) 

Have you killed that bird at the first shot (du premier coup?) I 
have killed it at the fourth, (du quatrieme.) — Do you fire at the 
birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which you see in the 
gardens? I fire neither at those which I see upon the trees, nor at 
those which I see in the gardens, but at those which I perceive on 
21* 



246 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 



the castle behind the wood. — Have you a wish to fire at that bird? 
I have a desire to fire at it. — Why do you not fire at those birds ? I 
cannot, for I have a sore finger. — When did the captain fire ? He 
fired when his soldiers fired. — How many birds have you shot at ? 
I have shot at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none, 
because my gun is good for nothing. — Have you cast an eye upon 
that man 1 I have cast an eye upon him . — Has he seen you ? He 
has not seen me, for he has sore eyes. — Have you drunk of that 
wine % I have drunk of it, and it has done me good. — Why have 
your pupils gone away 1 Why did they run so ? They went away, 
and they have run so quickly, because they did not wish to be seen 
by the man whose ( § 88) dog they have killed. 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON, 49th.— Quarante-muvieme Legon, 49me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Section.^ 



To hear of . . . Heard of . . . 

Have you heard of your brother ? 



I have heard of him. 

Is it long since you breakfasted ? 

How long is it since you breakfasted ? 



It is not long since I breakfasted. 

It is a great while since. 
It is a short time since. 
How long is it since you heard of 
your brother ? 



It is a year since I heard of him. < 

It is only a year since. 

It is more than a year since. 

Obs. 112. Than, before a cardinal 
More than nine. 
More than twenty times. 
It is hardly six months since. 



Entendre parler de . . . Entendu par- 

Ier de . . . 
t Avez-vous entendu parler de votre 
frere? 

t Pen ai entendu parler. 
t Y a-t-il long-temps que vous avez 

dejeune ? 
t Combien de temps y a-t-il que 
vous avez dejeune ? 

Obs. 111. The impersonal il y a cannot be rendered into English by 
there is, there are, when it is used in reply to the question : How long is 
it since ? 

t II n'y a pas long-temps que j'ai 
dejeune. 

t II y a tres-long-temps. 

t II y a peu de temps. 

t Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous 
avez entendu parler de votre frere ? 
f " t II y a un an que j'ai entendu par- 
' ler de lui. 

i t II y a un an que j'en ai entendu 
^. parler. 

I t II n'y a qu'un an. 
I t II y a plus d'un an. 
number, is rendered by de (16 a .) 

Plus de neuf. 

Plus de vingt fois. 

t II y a a peine six mois. 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 247 



A few hours ago. These few hours. 
Half an hour ago. This half hour. 
Two years ago. These two years. 
Two hours and a half ago. (19 2 , N. 3.) 
A fortnight ago. These two weeks. 
A fortnight. 
Have you been long in France ? 



t II y a quelques heures. 
t II y a une demi-heure. 
t II y a deux ans. 
t II y a deux heures et demie. 
t II y a quinze jours. 
t Quinze jours. 1 

t Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes 
en France ? 

Obs. 113. In English the state of existence or of action, when in its 
duration, is always expressed in the perfect tense, while in French it is 
expressed by the present tense. For : Have you been long in France ? means 
that you are still there. Say, then, in French, que vous etes and not que vous 
avez ete, which would mean that you are no longer at the place. 
He has been in Paris these three 

years. 
I have been living here these two 
years. 



II y a trois ans qu'il est a Paris. 
II y a deux ans que je demeure ici. 



Quarante-neuvieme ThIsme. Ire Sec. 

Vous avez-la de jolis livres, combien y a-t-il que vous les avez? 
II n'ya que trois ou quatre jours. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous 
avez commence a les lire ? Non, il n ? y a que quelques minutes. 
Est-ce depuis que votre cousin est parti ? Oui, c'est depuis cela. 
Combien y a-t-il qu'il est parti ? II n'y a pas long-temps. — Quand 
avez-vous rencontre mon pere ? Je Pai rencontre il y a quinze 
jours. Y a-t-il autant que cela ? Je le crois. Ne vous trompez- 
vous pas % il n ? y a pas si long-temps que ca. Non 7 je ne me 
trompe pas. II y a juste quinze jours aujourd'hui, que nous nous 
sommes rencontres au pont de fer. — Y a-t-il long-temps que vous 
connaissez ce marchand suisse? Quel marchand suisse ? Je n'en 
connais aucun. II dit qu'il vous connait, lui. II se trompe. — II y a 
pre? de trois mois que votre fils est en Europe, n'est-ce pas? Trois 
mois. Laissez-moi voir. Mai, Juin. Non, il n'y a que deux mois. 
Vous a-t-il ecrit ? Oui, plusieurs fois. D'ou? De Liverpool d'abord: 
ensuite. de Londres, ou il est a present. Y a-t-il quinze jours qu'il 
y est? Oui, il y a environ 15 jours. S'y amuse-t-il ? II m'ecrit 
qu'il s'y plait beaucoup. Que pense-t-il de Liverpool ? II ne m'en 
a pas dit grand 7 chose; il n 7 y est reste que trois ou quatre jours. 

Have you heard of any one ? I have not heard of any one, for I 
have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the man 
who has killed a soldier? I have not. — Have you heard of my 
brothers ? I have not. — Of whom has your cousin heard? He has 

1 Literally 15 days. In 2 weeks there are 15 days and only 14 nights: 
hence, fortnight. 



248 FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 

heard of his friend who is gone to America. — Is it long since he 
heard of him ? It is not long since he heard of him. — How long is 
it? It is only a month. — Have you been long in Paris? These 
three years. — Has your brother been long in London ? He has been 
there these ten years. — How long is it since you dined? It is long 
since I dined, but it is not long since I supped. — How long is it since 
you supped ? It is half an hour. — How long have you had these 
books ? I have had them these three months. — How long is it since 
your cousin set out? It is more than a year since he set out. 

What is become of the man who has lent you money ? I do not 
know what is become of him, for it is a great while since {que je ne) 
I saw him. — Is it long since you heard (que vous n'avez entendu 
parler) of the soldier who gave your friend a cut with the knife % 
It is more than a year since I heard of him. — How long have you 
been learning French? I have been learning it only these five 
months. — Do you know already how to speak it? You see that I 
am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of the English noble- 
men been learning it long ? They have been learning it these three 
years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — Why do they not know 
how to speak it ? They do not know how to speak it, because they 
are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it well? They have 
not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Section. 



How long have you had that horse ? 

I have had it these five years. 

How long ? (since what time ?) 

How long has he been here ? 

These three days. 

This month. 

It is six months since I spoke to him. 

Obs. 114. The meaning of, It is 6 months since I spoke to him, is evi- 
dently : I have not spoken to him these 6 months. When a negative turn may 
be given to the English sentence, the French use ne, but suppress pas. 
(That is, they suppress only a part of the negative, instead of suppressing it 
altogether, as the English do. § 145 — 1.) 



Combien y a-t-il que vous avez ce 

cheval ? 
II y a cinq ans que je Pai. 
Depuis quand ? 
Depuis quand est-ii ici % 
Depuis trois jours. 
Depuis un mois. 
II y a six mois que je ne lui ai parle. 



Since I saw you, it has rained very 

often. 
Tt is more than a year since I heard 

of him. 
To come from. To have just. 
I come from your brother's office. 
I have just seen your brother. 



Depuis que je ne vous ai vu, il a plu 

tres-souvent. 
II y a plus d'un an que je w'en ai 

entendu parler. 
Venir,* de. (24 3 .) 

Je viens du bureau de votre frere. 
Je viens de voir voire frere. 



Obs. 115. To express an action very recently past, use the verb venir, 
mmediately followed by the preposition de, and an infinitive. ($ 145 — 3.) 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



249 



He has just done writing. 

The men havo just arrived. 

Has that man been waiting long? 

He has but just come. 

To have but just. 

To do one s best. 

I will do my best, (as well as I can.) 

He will do his best, (as well as he can.) 

To spend money. 

How much have you spent to-day ? 

He has fifty crowns a month to live 

upon. 
Nephew, plur. my nephews. 
Near by, this way, here. 
Yonder. That icay, there. 
Had you ? ^imperfect.) I had. 

Had you not ? I had not. 



t II vient d'ecrire. 

t Les hommes viennent d'arriver. 

t Y a-t-il long-temps que cet homma 

attend ? 
t II ne fait que d'arriver. 
Nefaire que de, used only negatively, 
t Faire de son mieux. 
t Je ferai de mon mieux. 
t II fera de son mieux. 
Depenser, 1. 
Combien avez-vous depense aujour- 

d'hui ? 
II a cinquante ecus par mois a de- 

penser. 
Neveu, plur. mes neveux. (9 2 .) 
Par ici. 
Par la. 

Aviez-vous ? (imparfait.) J'avais. 
N'aviez-vous pas ? Je n'avais pas. 



QUARANTE-NETJVIEME ExERCICE. 2de Sec. 

Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu le jeune homme qui a 
appris Fallemand chez le maitre avec lequel nous Favons appris? 
II y a pres d : un an que je ne l"ai vu ($ 145-1.) — Combien y a-t-il que 
cet enfant a mange ? II a mange il y a quelques minutes. — Com- 
bien y a-t-il que ces enfants out bu ? Lesquels? Ces petits-la ou 
les autres? Ces grands-ci. Ceux-la! Oh! ils ont bu il y a un 
quart d'heure. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non, je ne me 
trompe pas, je vous assure: car, j'ai vu le jeune valet donner du 
laitaux uns et de Peau aux autres. — Combien y a-t-il que votre neveu 
est en Espagne? En Espagne? II n'y est pas. Je le croyais en 
Espagne . ou est-il done? II est a Baltimore. Depuis quand y est- 
il? II y est depuis six mois. C'est done votre cousin qui est en 
Espagne. Oh ! c'est different. II y est, c'est vrai. Combien y 
a-t-il qu'il y est ? II y a un mois. Y a-t-il vu notre ministre % II 
Pa vu plus de dix fois. Je me trompe. je veux dire plus de vingt 
fois; il le voit presque tous les jours. Que venez-vous de me dire? 
Ils se voient? Oui, sans doute. Je les croyais ennemis. Ils ne le 
sont plus. J'en suis charme. N'aviez-vous pas mon journal Italien 
hier apres-midi? Je l'avais alors ; mais je ne l'ai plus. 

When did you meet the lawyer's nephew 7 I met him just now. 
— Where have you just met him? I met him close by here, (tout 
pres cl ici.) — Whom did you see with him ? I saw him alone. — Did 
he do you any harm? He did me no (33 1 ) harm, for he is a very 
good lad. iL r an;on.) — Where are my gloves? They (on) have 



250 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 



thrown them away, for they were worn out, quite. — Who is the 
man who has just spoken to you ? He is a merchant. — What has 
the shoemaker just brought? He has brought the shoes which he 
has made us. — Who are the men that have just arrived ? They are 
"Russians. — Where did your uncle dine yesterday? He dined at the 
hotel. — How much did he spend? He spent five francs. — How 
Eiuch has he a month to live upon ? He has two hundred francs a 
month to live upon. It is about forty dollars; is it not? Yes, a 
little less. — Do you throw your hat away ? I do not throw it away, 
for it fits me very well. — How much have you spent to-day ? I 
have not spent much ; I have spent only two francs. — Do you spend 
every day as much as that ? I sometimes spend more than that. — 
Has that nephew of yours (votre neveu) been waiting long? He has 
but just come. — What does he wish ? He wishes to speak to you. — 
Are you willing to do that ? I am willing to do it. — Shall you be 
able (462) to do it well ? I will do my best. — Will this man be able 
to do that ? He will be able to do it, for he will do his best. — Have 
you my yellow copy-book? I had it this morning, but I have it no 
longer. — I thought you had it yet. — You have made a mistake. (43 2 , 
44 2 .) 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



Have the horses been found ? 

They have been found. 

The men have been seen. 

Our children have been praised and 

rewarded, because they have been 

good and studious. 
By whom have they been rewarded ? 
By whom have we been blamed ? 
To pass. To go by. Before. 



Les chevaux ont-ils ete trouves ? 

lis ont ete trouves. (42 l .) 

Les hommes ont ete vus. 

Nos enfants ont ete loues et recom- 
penses, parce qu'ils ont ete sages 
et assidus. 

Par qui ont-ils ete recompenses ? 

Par qui avons-nous ete blames ? 

Passer , 1. Devant. 



Obs. 116. Before is expressed in French by avant when it denotes pri- 
ority, (l-3 r ,l and by devant, when it signifies in presence of. Ex. 



To pass before some one. 

To pass before a place. 

A place, this place, this fine place. 

I have passed before the theatre. 
He passed before J did before the 

museum. 
To spend time in something. 
What do you spend your time in ? 
I spend my time in studying. 
What has he spent his time in ? 
What shall we spend our time in ? 
To miss, to fail to. 



Passer devant quelqu'un. 

Passer devant un endroit. 

Un endroit, cet endroit, ce bel en- 
droit. 

J'ai passe devant le theatre. 

II a passe avant moi devant le 
musee. 

Passer le temps d quelque chose. 

t A quoi passez-vous le temps ? 

t Je passe le temps a etudier. 

t A quoi a-t-il passe le temps? 

t A quoi passerons-nous le temps ? 

Manquer, 1, (de av. Pinf.) 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 



251 



Do not fail to go. Do not fail to do it, 

(do not neglect it.) Mind ! (you 

hear ?) 
The merchant has failed to bring the 

money. Did he ? 

You have missed your turn. 
You have failed to come. 
Send them to me. Don't you forget 

it now, (don't you fail,) mind ! 
To be good for something. 
Of what use is that ? 
It is good for nothing. 
A good-for-nothing fellow. He is a 

good-for-nothing fellow. 
Is the gun which you have bought a 

good one ? 
No, it is good for nothing. 
Have you thrown away anything ? 
He has thrown away what* is good 

for nothing, (worth nothing.) 



Ne manquez pas d'y aller. N'y 

manquez pas. Entendez-vous ? 

Le marchand a manque d'apporter 

1' argent. Y a-t-il manque ? 

Vous avez manque votre tour. 
Vous avez manque de venir. 
Envoyez-les-moi. N'y manquez pas, 

entendez-vous ? 
t Etre bon d quelque chose. 
t A quoi cela est-il bon ? 
t Cela n'est bon a rien. 
Tin vaurien. C'est un vaurien. 

(§39, N. 3.) 
Le fusil que vous avez achete est-il 

bon? 
Non, il ne vaut rien. 
Avez-vous jete quelque chose ? 
II a jete' ce qui n'est bon a rien, (ce 

qui ne vaut rien.) 

Quarante-netjvieme Th£me. 3me Sec. 

A-t-on trouve les chales ? On les a trouves. Ou ont-ils ete trou- 
ves? lis ont ete trouves derriere le sofa, de ce cote-ci du pupitre. — 
Avez-vous ete vu par quelqu ; un? Je n'ai ete vu par personne. Je 
croyais que vous aviez ete vu par le nouveau jardinier. Je croyais 
ne pas avoir ete vu. ($ 171 — 7.) — Attendez-vous quelqu'un? Nous 
n'attendons que notre cousin, le capitaine. Est-il arrive ? Oui, il 
vient d'arriver. Combien y a-t-il qu'il est ici ? II ne fait que d'ar- 
river. Envoyez-moi chercher lorsqu'il viendra> n'y manquez pas; 
entendez-vous? Ne pouvez-vous pas Pattendre? II sera ici avant 
une demi-heure. Je ne peux pas, je suis presse dans ce moment. 
Alors, je vous enverrai chercher. S'il vous plait: n 7 y manquez pas, 
entendez-vous ? Non, non, soyez tranquille, (depend upon it.) Je 
n'y manquerai pas. — Le roi (king) a-t-il passe sur le pont de fil de 
fer? Non, il a passe devant. — Qu ? est-ce que ce vaurien attend? Je 
ne sais pas ce qu ; il attend. Dites-lui de s'en aller. II s'en va. — Ou 
est votre neveu ? Tenez ; le voila. 

Has the king passed here? (par ici?) He has not passed here, 
(par ici } ) but before the theatre. — Has he not passed before the 
castle ? He has passed there, but I have not seen him. — How do 
you spend your time? (A quoi . . . .) 1 spend my time in studying. 
— What does your brother spend his time in ? He spends his time 
in reading and playing. — Does this man spend his time in working? 
— He is a good-for-nothing fellow : he spends his time in drinking 
and playing. — What do your children spend their time in ? They 



252 



FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me what you owe me? 
— I cannot pay it you. for the merchant has failed to bring me my 
money. 

Why have you breakfasted without me ? You failed to come at 
nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. — Has the 
merchant brought you the gloves which you bought at his house, 
(chez lui?) He has failed to bring them to me. — Has he sold them 
to you on credit ? He has sold them to me, on the contrary, for 
cash. — Do you know those men ? I do not know them ; but I 
believe that they are (ce sont) good-for-nothing fellows, for they 
spend their time in playing. — Why did you fail to come to my 
father's, this morning % The tailor did not bring me the coat which 
he promised me, so that I could not do what I had promised. 



FIFTIETH LESSON, 50th.— -Cinqucnitieme Legon, 50me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

Far, very far, too far, far enough. I Loin, fort loin, trop loin, assez loin. 
How far, (meaning what distance ?) | Quelle distance ? 

Obs. 117. The impersonal il y a cannot be rendered into English by 
there is, there are, when it is used in reply to the question, How far ? Quelle 
distance ? 

How far is it from here to Paris ? 
Is it far from here to Paris ? 
Is it far ? It is not far. 

How many miles is it ? 
A mile. Is it ten miles ? 

It is more than two hundred miles 

from New York to Washington. 
It is nearly a hundred miles from 

Berlin to Vienna. 
From Venice, from Havre. 
I am from Paris. 
What countryman are you ? 
Are you from France ? 
I am. I am not. 

The Parisian. 

He is a Parisian, (from Paris.) 
The king. The philosopher. 
The preceptor, the tutor. 
The innkeeper, the landlord. 
Are you an Englishman ? 
Whence do you come ? 
I come from Paris. 



Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici a Paris 1 

Y a-t-il loin d'ici a Paris ? 

Y a-t-il loin ? II n'y a pas loin. 
Combien de milles y a-t-il ? 

Un mille. Y a-t-il dix milles ? 

II y a plus de deux cents milles de 

New York a Washington. 
II y a environ cent milles de Berlin 

a Vienne. 
De Venise, du Havre. (§ 9.) 
Je suis de Paris. 
t De quel pays etes-vous ? 
Etes-vous de France ? 
Pen suis. Je n'en suis pas. 

Le Parisieii 
t II est Parisien. 
Leroi. Le philosophe. 
Le precepteur. 
L'auhergiste, l'hote. 
Etes-vous Anglais ? 
D'oii venez-vous? 
Je viens de Paris. 



FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



253 



To flee, to fly, run away. 

Run away. Do not fly away. 

I run away, thou runnest away, he 

runs away. 
Why do you fly ? 
I fly because I am afraid. 
To assure. 

I assure you that he is arrived. 
To hear a sound, a noise. 
To hear a news. 
Have you heard nothing new 1 

I have heard nothing new. 



S'enfuir* 2, s'enfuyant, fui. 
Enfuyez-vous. Ne vous enfuyez pas. 
Je m'enfuis, tu t'enfuis, il s'enfuit. 

Pourquoi vous enfuyez-vous ? 
Je m'enfuis parce que j'ai peur. 
Assurer, 1. 

Je vous assure qu'il est arrive*. 
Entendre un son, un bruit. 
Apprendre une nouvelle mom fern.) 
t N'avez-vous rien appris de nou- 

veau ? 
t Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau. 



Cinquantieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Allez-vous quelque part? Pourquoi me demandez-vous cela? 
Parce que je vois que vous etes pret a voyager. Vous avez tout ce 
qu'il faut pour cela. Chapeau, gants, parapluie, manteau. (§140 
— 6.) Vous avez raison. Je vais partir pour Providence. Com- 
bien y a-t-il d'ici a Providence? II y a environ 250 milles. — Y a-t-il 
plus loin de New York a Washington que de Philadelphie a Provi- 
dence? II n ? y a pas tout-a-fait si loin. — Qui craignez-vous? Ce 
mechant homme qui s'enfuit. — Ne craignez-vous pas ce gros chien 
noir? Je ne le crains pas, il n ; est pas mechant; il n'a jamais 
mordu personne. N'a-t-il pas mordu Paubergiste? Non, il ne lui 
a pas fait de mal. — Qu'est-ce qui (§ 116) vous plait tant, mon jeune 
neveu ? Ce petit chien-la. II est si obeissant qu'il fait tout ce (§91) 
qu'on veut. — N'aviez-vous pas mon dictionnaire ce matin? Si fait, 
je Pavais, et je Pai encore. En avez-vous eu besoin? Non, pas 
jusqu'a present. Si vous en avez besoin, je vous le rendrai. Don- 
nez-le-moi. Le voici. 

How far is it from Paris to London ? It is nearly two hundred 
miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Berlin? It is 
far. — Is it far from there to Vienna? It is almost a hundred and 
fifty miles from there to Vienna. — Is it further from Paris to Blois 
than from Orleans to Paris? It is further from Orleans to Paris than 
from Paris to Blois. — How far is it from Paris to Berlin? It is 
almost a hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin. — Do you 
intend to go to Paris soon ? I intend to go soon. — Why do you 
wish to go this time ? (cette fois ?) In order to buy good books and 
good gloves, and to see my good friends. — Is it long since you were 
there? (n'y, 49 2 , Obs. 114.) It is nearly a year since I was there. — 
Do you not go to Italy, this year, (cette annee?) I do not go, for it 
is too far from here to Ttaly. 
22 



254 



FIFTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



Who are the men that have just arrived? They are philoso- 
phers.— Of what country are they ? They are from London. — What 
countryman are you? I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Ita- 
lian. — Are you from Tours? No, I am a Parisian. — How much 
money have your children spent to-day ? They have spent but 
little • they have spent but one crown. — Where did you dine yester- 
day ? I dined at the innkeeper's. — Did you spend much ? I spent 
a crown and a half. — Has the king passed here? (parici?) He has 
not passed here, but before the theatre. — Have you seen him ? I 
have seen him. — Is it the first time (la premiere fois que) you have 
seen him ? It is not the first time, for I have seen him more than 
twenty times. — I thought you had seen him a few times, but I did not 
think that you had seen him twenty times. — Why does your servant 
run away? He is afraid of that ox. — Why do you run away? I! 
I do not run away. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 
Ar river, 1. 



To happen. 

The happiness, fortune. 
The unhappiness, misfortune. 
A great misfortune has happened. 
He has met with a great misfortune. 

What has happened to you ? 
Nothing has happened to me. 
I have met with your brother. 
The poor man. 
I have cut his finger. 
You have broken the man's neck. 
To pity, pitying, pitied. 
I pity, thou pitiest, he pities. 
Pity that host and his nephew. 
I pity him with all my heart. 
With all my heart. 
To complain. 
Do you complain ? 
I do not complain. 
Do you complain of my friend ? 
I do complain of him. 
I do not complain of him. 
To dare, to spoil. Damage nothing. 
To serve, wait upon, served, serve. 
Dost thou wait upon, iserve ?) 
I do wait upon, (I serve.) 
He waits upon, (he serves.) 
Do you wait upon ? (do you serve ?) 
To serve some one, to wait upon 
some one. 



Le bonheur. 

Le malheur. 

II est arrive un grand malheur. 

t II lui est arrive un grand. malheur. 

Que vous est-il arrive ? 

II ne m'est rien arrive. 

J'ai rencontre votre frere. 

Le pauvre homme. 

t Je lui ai coupe le doigt. 

t Vous avez casse le cou a I' homme. 

Plaindre,* 4, plaignant, plaint. 

Je plains, tu plains, il plaint. 

Plaignez cet hote et son neveu. 

Je le plains de tout mon coeur. 

t De tout mon coeur. 

t Se plaindre,* 4. 

Vous plaignez-vous ? 

t Je ne me plains pas. 

Vous plaignez-vous de mon ami ? 

Je m'en plains. 

Je ne m'en plains pas. 

Oser, 1. Gdter, 1. Ne gatez rien. 

Servir,* 2, (25 1 ,) servi, servez. 

Sers-tu? 

Je sers. 

II sert. 

Servez-vous? 

Servir quelqu'un. 



FIFTIETH LESSON. (2.) 255 

Has he been in your service ? I A-t-il ete a votre service ? 

Has he served you ? | Vous a-t-il servi ? 

C t Combien y a-t-il qu'il vous sert ? 
How long has he been in your ser- \ + Combien y a . t _ii qu >ii est a votre 

vlce? ( service? 



The service. 

To offer, offered, offer. 

Do you offer ? I do. I offer nothing. 

Dost thou offer ? He offers. 



Le service. 

Offrir,* 2, offert, offrez. 
Offrez-vous? J'offre. Jen'offre rien. 
Offres-tu? Ilofire. 



Cinquantieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 

M'ofTrez-vous ce bouquet? Oui, Mlle.^je vous Poffre de tout 
mon caeur. — Vous plait-il? (47 3 ? Obs. 109.) II me plait beaucoup, 
et je vous remercie de votre don, (for your present.) De rien. 
(26 1 .) — En avez-vous offert un a Sophie? Non, je ne lui en ai 
pas offert. Lui en offrirez-vous un demain? Je n ; y manquerai 
pas. Ne Poubliez pas, je vous prie. Non, je vous assure que je 
n ; y manquerai pas. — Avez-vous mon eventail Hollandais? Non, je 
croyais que vous Paviez vous-meme. Je Pavais, il y a un moment, 
et je croyais que vous Paviez pris. — Non, je ne Pai pas eu. Ah! 
je le vois; il est derriere vous. Le voici. Merci. De rien. — 
Qu : est-il arrive au neveu de M. Lenoir? Oh ! pas grand' chose. II 
s ; est fait un peu mal au doigt. — Ne vous est-il rien arrive ? A moi? 
Non, il ne m'est rien arrive. — Qu"est-ce que vous apprenez? J ; ap- 
prends ceci, et ce n'est pas difficile. Qu ; est-ce que vous avez 
appris de nouveau ? Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau. On parle du 
cholera, de la Californie : mais ce irest pas nouveau. 

Of whom has your brother heard ? He has heard of a man to 
whom a misfortune has happened. — Why have your scholars not 
done their exercises? I assure you that ihey have done them, and 
you are mistaken if you believe that they have not done them. — 
What have you done with my book? I assure you that I have not 
seen it. — Has your son had my knives? He assures me that he 
has not had them. — Has your uncle arrived already? He has 
not arrived yet. — Will you wait till he returns? I cannot wait, for 
I have a good deal (beaucoup) to do. — Have you not heard anything 
new ? I have heard nothing new. — Has the king arrived ? They 
say that he has arrived. — What has happened to you? A great 
misfortune has happened to me. — What? (lequel ?) I have met with 
my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with a stick. — Then 
I pity you with all my heart. 

Why do you pity that man ? I pity him because you have broken 
his neck. — Why do you complain of my friend? [ complain of 
him because he has cut my fingej. — Does that man serve you well ? 



256 FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) 

He does serve me well, but he spends too much. — Are you willing 
to take this servant ? I am willing to take him, if he will serve 
me. — Can I take that servant? You can take him, for he has 
served me very well. — How long is it since he is out of (Jiors de) 
your service ? It is but two months since. — Has he served you 
long? He has served me for {pendant) six years. — Do you offer me 
anything? I have nothing to (a) offer you. — What does my friend 
offer you ? He offers me a book. — Have the Parisians offered you 
anything ? They have offered me wine, bread, and good beef. 



V03ABULAIRE. 3me Sec. 



To confide, intrust. Trust me with it. 
Do you trust me with your money ? 
I do trust you with it. 
I have intrusted that man with a 

secret. 
The secret. 

To keep anything secret. 
I have kept it secret. 

To take care of something. 

Do you take care of your clothes ? 

I do, I put them away. 

Will you take care of my horse ? 

I will take care of it. 

To leave, left. Leave, let me. 

To squander, to dissipate. 

He has squandered all his wealth. 

To hinder prevent, keep from. 

You hinder me from sleeping. 

Do not keep me from sleeping. 

To shop, to purchase. 

What have you purchased ? 

I have purchased two handkerchiefs 

and a bag. 
Have you purchased anything ? 
Most lovely, charming. 

Admirably. 

That hnt fits you admirably. 
That coat fits him very well. 
It is charming. 



Confier, 1, . . . a . . . Confiez-le-moi. 
Me confiez-vous votre argent ? 
Je vous le confie. 
J'ai confie un secret a cet homme. 

Le secret. 

t Garder le secret de quelque chose. 

t J' en ai garde le secret. 

Avoir* soin, ) , i , 

t» i * . } de quelque chose. 

Prendre* som, ) 

Avez-vous soin de vos habits ? 

J'en ai soin, je les serre. 

Voulez-vous prendre soin de mon 

cheval ? 
Je veux en prendre soin. 
Laisser, 1, laisse. Laissez-moi. 
Dissiper, 1. 

II a dissipe tout son bien. 
Empecher, 1. {de av. l'infini.) 
t Vous m'empechez de dormir. 
Ne m'empechez pas de dormir. 
Faire emplette, (a feminine noun ; 

takes de before the substantive.) 
Faire des emplettes. 
t De quoi avez-vous fait emplette ? 
t J'ai fait emplette de deux mou- 

choirs, et d'un sac. 
Avez-vous fait des emplettes? 
Charmant, (an adjective, i tres-bien, 

extremement bien, (adverbs.) 
A merveille, (an adverb.) 
Ce chapeau vous va a merveille. 
Cet habit lui va tres-bien. 
C'est charmant. 



FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) 257 

Cinquantieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

Quelqu'un vient de s'en aller, n'est-ce pas? Oui, quelqu'un vient 
de sortir. Qui vient de s'en aller ? C'est un Anglais qui a dissipe 
tout son bien (all his fortune, wealth) en France. Est-ce un An- 
glais? Oui, je vous assure. Je le croyais Allemand ou plutot Hoi- 
landais. Vous vous etes trompe, car il est de Bristol, en Angleterre. 
— Pourquoi cet adolescent fuit-il? II s'enfuit parce qu'il craint 
d'etre puni. Par qui craint-il d'etre puni? II craint de Petre par 
un de ses parents, parce qu'il n'a pas pu faire son devoir. — A qui 
confiez-vous votre argent ? Je le confie a la banque, ou je le garde 
moi-meme. (h 41 J.) — Ne confiez rien a ce garcon-la, car il ne peut 
pas garder un secret. Je ne lui confierai rien. — Qui a soin de vos 
oiseaux? J'en ai soin moi-meme. Qui en aura soin lorsque vous 
serez chez votre oncle? Thomas m'a promis d'en avoir soin. — 
Laissez mes gants blancs, {leave my white gloves alone.) Vous les 
salissez, vous les gatez. Tenez ! les voila, (here ! there they are.) 

Why do you pity our neighbor? I pity him because he has 
trusted a merchant of (de) Paris with his money, and the man (et 
que celui-ci) will not return it to him. — Do not trust this man with 
anything. I do not trust him with anything. — Has he already 
cheated you? I have never trusted him with anything, so that he 
has never cheated me; but it is said that he has cheated many 
people. — Will you trust my father with your money? I will trust 
him with it. — With what secret has my son intrusted you ? I can- 
not intrust you with that with which he has intrusted me, for he 
has desired me (ra'a prie de) to keep it secret. — Whom do you 
intrust with your secrets ? I intrust nobody with them, so that no- 
body knows them. — Has your brother been rewarded ? He has, on 
the contrary, been punished; but I beg you (prier) to keep it 
secret, for no one knows it. — What has happened to him? I will 
tell you what has happened to him, if you promise me to keep it 
secret. Do you promise me to keep it secret ? I do promise you, 
for I pity him with all my heart. — Will you take care of my clothes? 
I will take care of them. — Are you taking care of the book which 
I lent you? I am taking care of it; I have put it away in my 
desk. — Who will take care of my servant? The landlord will 
take care of him. — Do you throw away your hat ? I do not throw 
it away, for it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat? 
He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — Who has spoiled 
*iy book ? No one has spoiled it, because no one has dared to 
vouch it, (le toucher.) — Did not that little boy with black hair touch 
22^ 



258 FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) 

it ? No, I prevented him from touching it, (his touching it.) — Pre- 
vent his touching it : for if he does, he will soil and spoil it. 

Resume" pour la 50me Lecon. 
Theme en Fran^ais.. 

Le chien de Petranger a-t-il mal au dos? Oui, il a mal au 
dos. Le jeune cheval du boucher a-t-il mal au dos ? Non, mais 
son vieux mouton a mal au dos. Va-t-il tuer le mouton qui 
a mal au dos? Non ; il ne va pas tuer celui-la. Lequel va-t-il 
tuer ? II va tuer celui qui a mal au pied. — Qui a mal au 
dos ? Je ne sais pas qui a mal au dos. Le joli petit mouton de 
Mile. Sara est-il dans le jardin ? Non, il est dans son appartement. 
— Quel appartement allez-vous prendre ? Je vais prendre celui que 
vous n'avez plus. Aimez-vous cet appartement-la ? Non, mais 
j ; aime celui-ci. Le trouvez-vous (do you think it) joli ? Oui, assez 
joli. Ne le trouvez-vous pas trop petit? Non, je le trouve assez 
grand. Quel jour allez-vous prendre votre appartement? Nous 
allons le prendre le 10 de ce mois. N ? est-ce pas aujourd'hui le 
hurt? Si fait, c'est le huit. Alors (then) vous allez prendre votre 
appartement dans deux jours ? Oui, nous allons le prendre dans 
deux jours. — Avec qui allez-vous jouer ? Je vais jouer avec le fils 
du dentiste. Ou allez-vous jouer avec lui? Nous allons jouer dans 
Fatelier de son pere. Voulez-vous venir jouer avec nous ? Avec 
plaisir. — Qui est dans cet appartement-la ? Le petit garcon qui a 
mal au coude et au genou. Avec qui les medecins sont-ils? lis sont 
avec les enfants qui ont mal aux yeux. — Ne voulez-vous pas venir 
avec nous voir le pont de fil de fer ? Si fait, avec plaisir, (yes, 1 
will.) — Ce bois de lit-la est-il assez grand pour P appartement que 
vous prenez? Celui que nous prenons n'est pas tres-grand. Pour- 
quoi vos petits amis vont-ils chez le consul ? lis y vont pour lire 
les journaux de France. Quels papiers de France recoit-il? II en 
recoit plusieurs. En recoit-il autant que le President du conseil 
municipal? (of council.) II en recoit plus que lui. En lit-il plus 
de dix? II en lit moins de dix. II rPen lit que quatre ou cinq. 
N'est-ce pas assez? Si fait. Je crois que c ; est trop. Je ne peux 
pas en lire autant. Combien en lisez-vous ? Je n'ai le temps d'en 
lire qu'un. — Le boucher vous apporte-t-il ce que vous achetez au 
marche ? II ne me Papporte pas; mais il m'envoie ce que j'achete. 
Vous Penvoie-t-il tous les matins? Non, nous n'allons au marche 
que tous les trois jours, le mercredi et le samedi. — Avez-vous deux 
grands bois-de-lit ? Non. J ; ai un grand bois-de-lit pour moi et un 
petit pour mon fils. 

A qui est ce beau jardin? C ? est celui de . . . A qui sont ces 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 259 

beaux chevaux et ce joli carrosse, (carriage.) Je ne sais pas a qui 
ils sont. — Vous etes grand ; mais je crois que mon cousin est plus 
grand que vous. Non, il est moins grand que moi. Pai deux 
pouces de plus que lui. (Obs. 71.) — Les Americains envoient-ils 
plus de coton en France qu'en Angleterre (England) ? Non, ils en 
envoient beaucoup plus en Angleterre qu'en France. — Ou les Bos- 
toniens achetent-ils leur charbon ? Ils Pachetent presque toujours 
a Philadelphie. Combien le paient-ils a Philadelphie ? lis le 
paient S4 le tonneau (§7) et ils le vendent $7 ou $8. — Votre oncle 
lit-il beaucoup? II aime beaucoup a lire les ouvrages Francais, 
Anglais, et Americains. — Vos cousins lisent-ils les journaux tous les 
jours ? Ils commencent tous les matins a les lire. — Que lit votre 
pere ? II ne lit rien a present; il a mal aux yeux. II fait lire notre 
plus jeune frere pour lui. — Quels ouvrages les Americains lisent-ils? 
Ils lisent les ouvrages de toutes les autres nations aussi bien que les 
leurs. Ont-ils, eux-memes., beaucoup d- ouvrages? Ils en font tous 
les jours quelques-uns. 

L'ami du fils de son jardinier travaille-t-il autant que le cousin du 
menuisier ? Non, il ne travaille pas tant que lui. — Est-il plus jeune ? 
Non 7 au contraire, il est plus age. — Combien a-t-il de plus? {How 
much older?) II a 2 ans de plus. — II est done paresseux? Oui, un 
peu. — Vous avez de jolis souliers. qui vous les fait? Notre cordon- 
nier. — Les fait-il toujours aussi bien? Oui ? si vous les faites faire. — 
Combien vendez-vous ces gants. Mile.? Nous les vendons demi- 
dollar. — En avez-vous a un quart de dollar? Oui. nous en avons; 
mais ce ne sont pas les meilleurs. — Laissez-moi voir les uns et les 
autres. Void ceux que nous vendons cinquante sous: ils sont 
superbes, com me vous voyez. Voila ceux de 25 sous. — Ils sont 
bons; mais ils sont moins bons que les autres. — Votre panier est-il 
assez grand pour mettre votre marche (marketing) dedans? Je 
crois que oui. Nous y mettons. du moins beaucoup de choses. — 
Qu'a votre cheval ? II a mal au dos et a un pied. — Jules n"a-t-il pas 
mal a Pcei! ? Si fait": il y a mal. 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON, 51st.— Cinquante et unieme Legon, 51me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



Will the people come soon ? 

Soon, very soon, too soon, soon 

enough. 
A violin. A piano. 



Le monde viendra-t-il bientot ? 
Bientot, trop tot, assez tot. 

Un violon. Tin piano. 



To play upon the violin. ) + Jouer du violon . 

Tc play the violin. S 



260 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



Obs. 118. When a musical instrument is spoken of, the verb, jouer, ti 
play, takes de, but d, when a game is spoken of, As : « 



To play at cards, at chess. 

To play the (upon the) piano. 

What instrument do you play ? 

To touch. To play the piano. 

Near me, near them, near the fire. 

Near the trees, near the hotels. 

Near going. Near breaking it. 

Where do you live ? 

I live near the castle. 

What are you doing near the fire ? 

To dance. 

To fall, fallen, do not fall. 

Did you fall ? I did not. 

To drop, (meaning to let fall.) 
Has he dropped anything ? 
He has not dropped anything. 
To retain, to hold, keep back. 

To approach, to draw near. 

Draw near the fire, (approach.) 

Do you approach the fire ? 

I do approach it. 

To approach, to have access to one. 

He is a man difficult of access. 

I go away (withdraw) from the fire. 
To withdraw (or go away) from. 
I go away from it. 
Why does that man go away from 

the fire ? 
He goes away from it because he is 

not cold. 
So much, so many. 
I have written so many notes that I 

cannot write any more. 
Do you fear to go out ? 
I do fear to go out. 

Cinquante et unieme Th&me. Ire Sec. 
J'ai entendu tomber quelque chose, avez-vous rien laisse tomber? 
Non. je crois ne rien avoir laisse tomber. Voyez, eependant. — Ah! 
voici un de d'argent; est-ce vous qui Pavez laisse tomber'? C'est le 
de de Louise. Je Pai peut-etre fait tomber. Je croyais Pavoir mis 
dans son panier. Je Pai tronve pres du pied du fauteuil. Merci. 
De rien. — Qui va au musee cet apres-midi ? George y va; mais je 
crains de ne pas pouvoir y aller. Pourquoi done? Mon oncle 



Jouer aux cartes, jouer aux echecs. 

t Jouer du piano. 

t De quel instrument jouez-vous ? 

Toucher, 1. Toucher le piano. 

Pres de moi, pres d'eux, pres dufeu. 

Pres des arbres, pres des hotels. (§ 11.) 

Pres d' aller. Pres de le casser. 

Ou demeurez-vous ? 

Je demeure pres du chateau. 

Que faites-vous pres du feu ? 

Danser, 1. 

Tomber, 1, tombe e . Ne tombez point. 

Etes-vous tombe ? Je ne suis pas 
tombe. 

Laisser tomber. 

A-t-il laisse tomber quelque chose ? 

II n'a rien laisse tomber. 

Retenir* 2, (comme tenir, 24 3 , 
25 1 , 34 1 .) 

S'approcher, 1, (de av. un nom.) 

Approchez-vous du feu. 

Vous approchez-vous du feu? 

Je m'en approche. 

Approcher quelqu'un. 

C'est un homme qu'on ne peut ap- 
procher. 

Je m'eloigne du feu. 

S' eloigner, 1, {de av. le nom.) 

Je m'en eloigne. 

Pourquoi cet homme s'eloigne-t-il du 
feu? 

II s'en eloigne parce qu'il n'a pas 
froid. 

Tant. 

J'ai ecrit tant de billets que je ne 
puis plus en ecrire. 

Craignez-vous de sortir ? 

Je crains de sortir. 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



261 



vient de me dire qiril attend 100 sacs de cafe et qu 7 il faut les rece- 
voir et les faire mettre dans le magasin. N ; importe, si vous n 7 y 
allez pas cet apres-midi, vous irez une autre fois. Cela est vrai. 
Jouez-vous du violon et du piano ? Non, je ne joue que du violon. 
En jouez-vous tous les jours ? Un peu 7 pour ne pas oublier. 

Do you play the violin ? I do not play the violin, but the piano. — 
Shall we have a ball to-night ? We shall have one, in the large par- 
lor. — At what o'clock? At a quarter to eleven. — What o'clock is it 
now? It is -almost eleven, and the people will soon come. — What 
instrument will you play ? I shall play the violin. If you play the 
violin, I shall play upon the piano. — Are there to be (doit-il y avoir, 
47 2 ) a great many people at our ball ? There is to be a great many. 
Will you dance ? I shall dance. — Will your children dance ? They 
will dance if they please, (si cela leur convient, or si cela leur plait.) 
— How do you spend your time in this country ? I spend my time 
in playing on the piano, and in reading.— How does your cousin 
divert himself? He diverts himself in playing upon the violin. — 
Does any one dance when you play? A great many people dance 
when I play. They never fail to do it. (On n'y manque jamais.) — 
Who ? At first (d'abord) our children, then our cousins, at last our 
neighbors. — Do you amuse yourselves ? I assure you that we amuse 
ourselves very much. 

Whom do you pity ? I pity your friend. — Why do you pity him ? 
I pity him because he is ill. — Has anybody pitied you ? Nobody 
has pitied me, because I have not been ill. — Do you offer me any- 
thing? I offer you a fine gun. — What has my father offered you? 
He has offered me a fine book. — To whom have you offered your 
fine horses? I have offered them to the English captain. — Dost thou 
offer thy pretty little dog to these children? I offer it to them, for I 
love them with all my heart. — Why have you given that boy a blow 
with your fist? Because he hindered me from sleeping. — Has any- 
body hindered you from writing? Nobody has hindered me from 
writing, bat I have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin and 
nephew. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



To recollect, (no prep, in French.) 

Do you recollect that ? 

I do recollect it. 

Does your brother recollect that ? 

He recollects having seen it. 

Do you recollect the words ? 

I do recollect them. 

Have you recollected the words ? 



Se rappeler, 1, (33 3 ,) rappelez-vous 

cela. 
Vous rappelez-vous cela ? 
Je me le rappelle. 
Votre frere se rappelle-t-il cela ? 
II se rappelle l'avoir vu. 
Vous rappelez-vous les mots ? 
Je me les rappelle. 
Vous etes-vous rappele les mots ? 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



I have recollected them. 
I have not recollected them. 
Have you recollected them ? 
You have recollected them. 
Has he recollected them ? 
He has recollected them. 
We have recollected them. 
They have recollected them. 
I recollect (remember) coming. 

To remember, to recollect, (comme 
venir,* 24 3 , 25*, &c.) 

Do you remember that man ? 

I do remember him. 

Do you remember seeing him ? 

I do not. 

I do remember it. 

What do you remember ? 

I remember nothing. 

I do not remember falling down. 

To sit down. 

Sit down, (impera.) 

Are you sitting down ? 

I am sitting, thou art sitting down. 

Is he sitting down ? He is not. 

I shall or will sit down. 

He sits near the fire. 

He is sitting near the fire. 

To run away, to fly. 

Did you run away ? 

I did not run away. 

Why did that man run away ? 

He ran away because he was afraid. 

Who has run away ? 

He has. They have. 



/ 



Je me les suis rappeles. 

Je ne me les suis pas rappeleg. 

Vous les etes-vous rappeles ? 

Vous vous les etes rappeles. 

Se les est-il rappeles ? 

II se les est rappeles. 

Nous nous les sommes rappeles. 

lis se les sont rappeles. 

Je me rappelle etre venu. 

Se souvenir,* 2, de. Souvenez-vous 
de . . . Se ressouvenir* 2, de. 

j Ressonvenez-vous-en, (de avant 
V le nom et av. l'auxiliaire.) 

Vous souvenez-vous de cet homme ? 

Je m'en souviens. 

Vous souvenez-vous de 1' avoir vu ? 

Je ne m'en souviens pas. 

Je m'en souviens. 

De quoi vous souvenez-vous ? 

Je ne me souviens de rien. 

Je ne me souviens pas d'etre tombe. 

t S'asseoir,* pres. part, s'asseyant ; 
past part, assis. Asseyez-vous. 

Vous asseyez-vous ? 

Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds. 

S'assied-il ? II ne s'assied point. 

Je m'assierai, or je m'asseierai. (462 ) 

> II est assis pres du feu. 

Se sauver, 1, s'enfuir* 2. (50 1 .) 
Vous etes-vous sauve ? 
Je ne me suis pas sanve. 
Pourquoi cet homme s'est-il sauve ? 
II s'est sauve parce qu'il a eu peur. 
Qui s'est enfui ? 
i 1 Qui s'est sauve ? 



I II s'est enfui. lis se sont sauves. 

ClNQUANTE ET UNIEME ThI&ME. 2de See. 

Vous avez Faird'avoir froid, approchez-vous du feu. Je n'ose pas 
m'en approcher. Pourquoi n 7 osez-vous pas? Je crains de me 
Druler. Cela vous plait a dire. (47 3 .) Votre neveu s'eloigne-t-il du 
feu parce qu'il craint de se bruler? Non, mais parce qu'il n'a plus 
froid, je pense. Noil, ce n'est pas pour cela. Et pourquoi done? 
II a laisse tomber un quart de dollar, et il veut le ramasser. Tenez, 
le voila pres du sofa. Ramassez-le pour lui. De quel cote du sofa? 
De ce cdte-ci; la ; pres de votre pied. Bon, je le voisa present. Je 
1 ai, je vais le lui rendre. Tenez, voici votre quart de dollar. Merci. 
De rien. Ah ! M. Lucien, vous rappelez-vous le nom du medecin 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 263 

du general ? Non, je ne me le rappelle pas. — Qui s'assied sur ce 
fauteuil ? Parsonne ne s'assied dessus. Alors, je vais m'y asseoir. 
Comme il vdus plaira ; il est a votre service. — Pourquoi le petit 
Jules s'eloigne-t-il ? II a honte de ne pas s'etre souvenu de vc-us 
porter mon billet. 

Do you remember anything pretty ? I remember nothing at all ; 
I am too sleepy. — What does your uncle recollect ? He recollects 
what you have promised him. — What have I promised him ? You 
have promised him to go to France with him next winter. Have 
you not ? I intend to do so, if it is not too cold. — Why do you with- 
draw from the fire ? I have been sitting near the fire this hour and 
a half, (il y a,) so that I am no longer cold. — Does your friend not 
like to sit near the fire ? He likes, on the contrary, much (beaucou'p) 
to sit near the fire, but only (seulement, 1 adv.) when he is cold. — May 
one approach your uncle ? One may approach him, for he receives 
everybody. — Will you sit down ? I will not sit down ; I have to 
work. — Where does your father sit down ? He sits down near me, 

in that large red velvet arm-chair, (grand faut de v. n.) — Where 

shall I sit down ? You may sit near me. 

Do you sit down near the fire, or on the sofa ? I do not sit down 
near the fire, for I am afraid of being too warm. — Do you recollect 
my brother ? I recollect having seen him and spoken to him once. — 
Do your parents recollect their old friends ? They do recollect them. 
— Do you recollect these words ? I do not recollect them. — Have 
you recollected that ? I have recollected it. — Has your uncle recol- 
lected those words ? He has recollected them. — Have I recollected 
my exercise ? You have recollected it. — Have you recollected your 
exercises ? I have recollected them, for I have learned them by 
heart ; and my brothers have recollected theirs, because they have 
learned them by heart. — Is it long since you saw your friend from 
Paris ? I saw him a fortnight ago. (Obs. 1 14.) 

Vocabtjlaiee. 3me Sec. 

To like better, to prefer. Aimer mieux, (no prep. § 170 — 2.) 

Do you like to stay here better than Aimez-vous niieux rester ici que de 

going out? sortir ? 

I like staying here better than going J'aime mieux rester ici que de sortir, 

o ut . (mieux comes directly after the verb. ) 

He likes to play better than to study. II ahne mieux jouer que cTitudier. 

Do you like to write better than to Aimez-vous mieux ecrire que de 

speak ? parler ? 

I like to speak better than to write. . J'aime mieux parler que d'ecrire. 

Better than, ! Mieux . . . que de, (avaut un infinitif.) 

1 Only, when separated from the verb, is seulement. 



264 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 



He likes to do both. 

I like beef better than mutton. 

Do you like bread better than cheese ? 

I like neither the one nor the other. 

I like tea as much as coffee. 

Just as much, hardly so much. 

A calf, calves. Some, any veal. 

Aloud. Low, too low. 

Does your master speak aloud or low ? 

He speaks aloud and slowly. 

In order to learn French, one must 
speak aloud and quick. 

Quicker, faster. As fast as you. 

Not so quick, less quick. 

He eats quicker than I. 

Do you learn as fast as I ? 

I learn faster than you. 

I do not understand you, because you 
speak too fast. 

To sell cheap. 

To sell dear. 

Does he sell cheap ? 

He does not sell dear. 

He has sold to me very dear. 

This man sells everything so dear, 
that one cannot buy anything of 
him. 

You speak so fast that I cannot under- 
stand you. 

To buy something of some one. 

I have bought it of him. 



II aime a faire Tun et 1' autre. 
J'aime mieux le boeuf que le mouton. 
Aimez-vous mieux le pain que le 

fromage ? 
Je n'aime ni l'un ni 1' autre. 
J'aime tout autant le the que le cafe 
Tout autant, a peine tant. 
Un veau, des veaux. Du veau. 
Haut, a haute voix. Bas, trop bas 
Votre maitre parle-t-il haut ou bas \ 
II parle haut et lentement. 
Pour apprendre le Fran§ais, il faut 

parler haut et vite. 
Plus vite. Aussi vite que vous. 
Pas si vite, moins vite. 
II mange plus vite que moi. 
Apprenez-vous aussi vite que moi ? 
J'apprends plus vite que vous. 
Je ne vous comprends pas, parce que 

vous parlez trop vite. 
Vendre a bon marche. 
Vendre cher. 
Vend-il a bon marche ? 
II ne vend pas cher. 
II m'a vendu fort cher. 
Cet homme vend tout si cher, qu'on 

ne peut rien acheter chez lui. 

Vous parlez si vite que je ne puis 

vous comprendre. 
Acheter quelque chose a quelqu'un. 
Je le lui ai achete. 1 



Cinquante et UNiEME ThSme. 3me Sec. 

Ramassez le gant de chamois de Mile. Clara, qui vient de le laisser 
tomber. (Obs. 115.) Adrien Pa deja ramasse. — Votre neveu vient 
de finir son devoir, n ? est-ce pas % Non ; il ne Pa pas encore fait. 
Moi, je croyais qu'tZ Yavait (he had) fait. Vous vous etes trompe. 
(43 2 .) — Vous sortez? Passez-vous pres du musee? Non, je passe 
loin de-la. N'importe. — Charles, venez me voir ce soir, (come and 
see me. § 150 — 12) voulez-vous ? Je suis tres-occupe, cependant 
j'irai, si je m/en souviens. — Si vous avez tant a faire, vous tomberez 

1 Acheter a quelqu'un means to buy of or for some one. Ex. Tai achete 
ce cheval a votre frire, I have bought that horse of your brother; i.e. Je 
Vai achete de lui, I have bought it of him. Tai achete un gateau d mon 
enfant, I have bought a cake for my child: i. e. Je Vai achete pour lui, I 
have bought it for him. 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 265 

malade. Ne le craignez-vous pas? Moi, je ne le crains pas, mais 
moti pere le craint. Pourquoi vous etes-vous sauve corame cela 
hier soir? Petais (I was. imperfect) tres-presse. Qu ; aviez-vous a 
faire? Vousle savez bien. Javais a apprendre mes lecons. Etiez- 
vous (were you. imperf.) presse lorsque vous etiez chez le marchand 
de gateaux? Quand etais-je la? N'y etiez-vous pas a onze heures? 
Je n'y etais pas. II vend trop cher. Ses gateaux sont a peine aussi 
bons que ceux des autres marchands, et ils sont beaucoup plus petits. 

Do your scholars like to learn by heart? They do not like to 
learn by heart* they like reading and writing better than learning 
by heart. — Do you like cider better than wine ? I like wine better 
than cider. — Does your brother like to play? He likes to study 
better than to play. — Do you like veal better than mutton ? I like 
the latter better than the former for breakfast • but I like the former 
better than the latter for dinner. — Do you like to irink better than to 
eat? I like to eat better than to drink; but my uncle likes to drink 
better than to eat. — Does the Frenchman like fowl better than fish ? 
He likes fish better than fowl. — Do you like to write better than to 
speak? I like to do both. — Do you like honey (miel) better than 
sugar? I like neither. — Does your father like coffee better than tea? 
He likes neither. 

Can you understand me ? No, Sir. for you speak too fast. — Will 
you be kind enough (avoir la bonte de ne pas. § 171 — 7) not to speak 
so fast? I will not speak so fast, if you will listen to me. I am 
ready to listen. — Can you understand what my brother tells you in 
French? He speaks so fast that I cannot understand him. — Can 
your pupils understand you? They understand me when I speak 
slowly ; for in order to be understood one must speak slowly. — Is it 
necessary to speak aloud to learn French ? It is necessary to speak 
aloud. — Does your master speak aloud ? He does speak aloud and 
slow. — Why do you not buy anything of that merchant ? He sells 
so dear that I cannot buy anything of him. — Will you take me to 
another ? I will take you to the son of the one from w T hom you 
bought last year, (V'annee passee.) — Does he sell as dear as this one? 
He sells cheaper. — Do your children like learning Italian better than 
Spanish? They do not like to learn either; they only like to learn 
French. — Do you like mutton ? I like beef better than mutton. — Do 
your children like cake better than bread? They like both. — Has 
he read all the books which he bought? He bought so many (tant) 
that he cannot read them. — Do you wish to write some exercises? 
\ have written so many that I cannot write any more. — Why does 
(hat lad run away so fast ? Will any one touch him ? hurt him ? 
23 



266 



FIFTY-SECONE LESSON. (1.) 



No one will hurt him j but he will be punished by his master for not 
having (pour ne pas avoir) done his task. (§ 171 — 7.) 



FIFTY-SECOND LESSON, 52d. —Cinquante-deuxmne Legon, 52m*. 
Vocabulaiee. Ire Sec. 



A cote de. 

Passer a cote de quelqu'un. 

J'ai passe a cote de vous. 

Avez-vous passe a cote de mon frere ? 



By the side of. By. 
To pass by the side of some one. 
I have passed by the side of you. 
Have you passed by the side of my 

brother ? 
I have passed by the side of him. i * 'ai passe a cote de lui. 

Obs. 119. Prepositions formed with a, au, or aux, and a noun, require 
the preposition de after them ; almost all others require none. 



To pass by a place. 
I have passed by the theatre. 
He has passed by the castle. 
You have passed before my ware- 
house. Which way did they pass ? 
To dare, 

I dare not go thither. 
He dares not do it. 
I did not dare to tell him so. 
To make use of, to use. Used, use it 

Do you use my copy-book % 

I do use it. 

Does your father use it ? 

He does use it. 

Have you used my gun ? 

I have used it. 

They have used your books. 

They have used them. 

To instruct, instructed, instruct. 

I instruct, thou instructest, he in- 
structs. 

To teach. 

To teach some one something. 

He teaches me arithmetic. 

I teach you French, 
have taught him French. 

To teach some one (how) to do some- 
thing. 

He teaches me (how) to read. 

You teach them (how) to write. 



t Passer aupres aVun endroit. 
t J'ai passe aupres du theatre, 
t II a passe aupres du chateau. 
Vous avez passe devant mon maga- 

sin. Par ou ont-ils passe ? 
Oser, 1, (point de preposition.) 
Je n'ose pas y aller. 
II n'ose pas le faire. 
Je n'ai pas ose le lui dire. 
Se servir,* 2, de, (50 2 ) servi, servez- 

vous-en. 
Vous servez-vous de mon cahier ? 
Je m'en sers. 
Votre pere s'en sert-il ? 
II s'en sert. 

Vous etes-vous servi de mon fusil ? 
Je m'en suis servi. 
lis se sont servis de vos livres. 
lis s'en sont servis. 
Instruire,* 4, instruit, instruisez. 
J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruit. 

Enseigner, 1. Apprendre* 4. 
Enseigner quelque chose d quelqu un, 
II m'enseigne le calcul. 
Je vous enseigne le Frangais. 
Je lui ai enseigne le Francais. 
Apprendre a quelqu'un a faire quel- 
que chose, ou Enseigner a . . . . 
II m'apprend a. lire. 
Vous leur apprenez a. ecrire. 



FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 267 

Cinquante-detjxi&me Theme. Ire Sec. 

Par ou avez-vous passe pour venir chez nous? J'ai passe aupres 
du pont de fer, du quai Buena Vista, et du musee. Vous avez done 
fait un grand tour, (taken a long walk.) Oui, j'aime a me promener, 
et j'aime mieux me promener de bonne heure qu'a midi. Vous 
avez raison; il ne fait pas si chaad alors. C'est pourcela que je le 
fais. Vous servez-vous de votre parapluie ? Non, je ne m'en sers 
pas. — Prenez-le. Servez-vous en. Merci. De rien. — Avez-vous 
rencontre le neveu de Pepicier? Non, mais j'ai passe a cote de 
celui de Papothicaire. Que vous a-t-il dit? Rien. Je Pai apercu; 
mais il ne m'a pas apercu, de sorte que nous avons passe a cote 
Pun de Pautre sans nous parler. — Avez-vous dit a votre cousin ce 
qu'on a dit de lui? Je n'ai pas ose. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas ose % 
Je ne sais pas exactement pourquoi je n'ai pas ose; mais je ne le 
lui ai pas dit. Ne le lui direz-vous pas ? Pourquoi lui dire ? Cela 
ne lui fera pas plaisir. 

Have your new books been found ? They have been found. — 
Where ? Under the bed. — Is my coat on the bed? It is under it. — 
Are your brother's stockings under the bed ? They are upon it. — 
Have I been seen by anybody? You have been seen by nobody. — 
Have you passed by anybody ? I have passed by you, and you did 
not see me. — Has anybody passed by you? Nobody has passed by 
me. — Where has your son passed? He has passed by the theatre. 
Shall you pass by the castle? I shall pass there. — Why have you 
not cleaned my trunk ? I was afraid to soil my fingers. — Has my 
brother's servant cleaned his master's guns? He has cleaned them. 
Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers? He has not been afraid 
to soil them, because his fingers are never clean, (propre.)— Do you 
use the books which I have lent you? I do use them. — May I 
(vuis-je) use your knife? Thou mayest use it, but thou must not 
cut thyself, nor spoil the knife. — May my brothers use your books? 
They may use them. — May we use your gun? You may use it, 
but you must not spoil it. — What have you done with my wood? 
I have used it to warm myself. — Has your father used my horse ? 
He has used it. — Have our neighbors used our clothes? They have 
not used them, because they did not want them. — Who has used 
my hat ? Nobody has used it, for nobody has dared use it. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

Le maitre de Frangais. 



The French master, (meaning the 
master of the French language.) 

The French master, (a Frenchman, 
whatever he teaches.) 



Le maitre Frangais. 



268 



FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



To shave, to shave one's self. 

To get shaved. 

To dress, to undress. 

To dress one 1 s self. 

To undress one 1 s self. 

Have you dressed yourself? 

I have not yet dressed myself. 

Have you dressed the child? 

I have dressed it. 

To undo, undone, undo. 

To get rid of. 

Are you getting rid of your damaged 

sugar ? 
I am getting rid of it. 
Did you get rid of your old ship ? 

I did get rid of it. 

To part with. 

The design, the intention. 

To intend, to have the intention of. 

I intend to go thither. 

We have the intention to do it. 

Do you intend to part with your 

horses ? 
I have already parted with them. 
He has parted with his gun. 
Have you parted with (discharged) 

your servant ? 
I have parted with (discharged) him. 
To get rid of some one. 
I did get rid of him. 
Did your father get rid of that man ? 

He did get rid of him. 



Raser, 1, seraser, raseZ'VOUS. 

t Se faire raser. 

Habiller, 1. Deshabiller, 1. 

S'habiller, 1. 

Se deshabiller, 1. 

Vous etes-vous habille ? 

Je ne me suis pas encore habille. 

Avez-vous habille l'enfant ? 

Je l'ai habille. 

Defaire,* 4, defait, defaites,. 

(comme faire, 25 l , 27 1 .) 
Se defaire * de. 
Vous defaites-vous de votre sucre 

avarie ? 
Je m'en defais. 
Vous etes-vous defait de votre vieux 

vaisseau ? 
Je m'en suis defait. 
t Se defaire* de. 
Le dessein. 

Avoir dessein, (de avant un infini.) 
J'ai dessein d J y aller. 
Nous avons dessein de le faire. 
Avez-vous dessein de vous defaire 

de vos chevaux ? 
Je m'en suis deja defait. 
II s'est defait de son fusil. 
Vous etes-vous defait de votre do- 

mestique ? 
Je m'en suis defait. 
Se debarrasse?' de quelqu'un. 
Je me suis debarrasse de lui. 
Votre pere s'est-il debarrasse de cet 

homme ? 
II s'en est debarrasse. 



Cinquante-detixieme Theme, 2de Sec 

Vous etes seul ; vous vous etes enfin debarrasse de ce vaurien. Je 
m'en suis enfin debarrasse. — Pourquoi votre pere s'est-il defait de ses 
chevaux? S'en est-il defait? N'en savez-vous rien? Je n'en ai 
pas entendu parler. Le maitre de Francais vient ce matin, n'est-ce 
pas'? C'est son jour, du moins, et je pense qu'il viendra. Serez- 
vous pret lorsqu'il arrivera'? J'ai a me raser et a m'habiller, car 
vous voyez que je ne suis ni rase ni habille. Eh bien! rasez-vous 
et habillez-vous. Qu'est-ce qui vous en empeche % Bien ne m'en 
empeche, et je vais dans mon appartement pour cela. Appelez- 
moi, s'il vient avant mon retour. Je n'y manquerai pas. — GuillaumCj 



FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 269 

qu'avez-vous dessein de faire de votre fusil Anglais ? Le maitre 
Francais m 7 a prie de (has asked me to) le lui preter. Allez-vous 
le lui porter ? Pendant qu'il s'habille et se rase, il a envoye ce petit 
garcon, pour le chercher, (get it.) x\llez-vous le courier a ce petit 
garcon ? Croyez-vous qu'il le gatera? J'en ai peur. Alors je ferai 
mieux de le lui porter moi-meme. 

Have you shaved to-day ? I have shaved. — Has your brother 
shaved? He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved. — Do you 
shave often ? I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the 
evening. — When do you shave in the evening ? When I do not 
dine at home. — How many times a day does your father shave % 
He shaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day. — 
Does your cousin shave often? He shaves only every other day, 
(de deux jours run.) — At what o'clock do you dress in the morning? 
I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at 
eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. — Does your neighbor dress 
before he breakfasts ? He breakfasts before he dresses. — At what 
o'clock in the evening dost thou undress ? I undress as soon as I 
return from the theatre. 

Dost thou go to the theatre every evening? I do not go every 
evening, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what 
o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? 
I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten 
o'clock. — Have you already dressed the child ? I have not dressed 
it yet, for it is still asleep, (dort encore.) — Did you at last get rid of 
that man ? I did get rid of him. — Why has your father parted with 
his horses? Because he did not want them any more. — Has your 
merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar? He 
has succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on credit ? He was 
able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit. — Who has 
taught you how to read? I have learned it with (chez) a French 
master. — Has he taught you to write ? He hSs taught me to read 
and to write. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



To wake. 

To awake. 

I generally awake at six o'clock in 

the morning. 
My servant generally wakes me at 

6ix o'clock in the morning. 

23* 



fiveiller, 1. JReveiller, 1. 

5" eveiller, 1. Se reveiller. 

Je m'eveille ordinairement a six 
heures du matin. 

Mon domestique m'eveille ordinaire- 
ment a six heures du matin. 



270 



FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 



A slight noise wakes me. 

A dream has waked me. 

I do not make a noise, in order not to 
wake him. 

A dream. 

Generally. 

To come, or go down. 

To alight from one's horse, to dis- 
mount. 

To conduct one's self. Behave well. 

To behave. 

I conduct myself well. 

How does he conduct himself? 

Towards. 

He behaves ill towards that man. 

He has behaved ill towards me. 

To be worth while to. 

Is it worth while to .... ? 

It is worth while. 

Is it worth while to do it ? 

It is not worth while. 

Is it worth while to write to him ? 

It is worth nothing. 

Is it better ? It is better. 

Will it be better ? It will. 

It is better to do this than that. 

It is better to stay here than go a 
walking. 



Un bruit leger me reveille. 

Un songe m' a reveille. 

Je ne fais pas de bruit, pour ne pas le 

reveiller. $ 171 — 7.) 
Un songe, un reve. 
Ordinairement. 

Descendre, 4, descendu, descendez 
Descendre de cheval. 

Se conduire,* 4. Conduisez-vous 

bien. 
Se comport er, 1. 
Je me conduis bien. 
Comment se conduit-il ? 
Envers or vers. 

II se comporte mal envers cet homme. 
II s'est mal comporte envers moi 
t Valoir la peine de. 
t Vaut-il la peine de . . . . ? 
t Cela en vaut la peine. (§ 50.) 
■t Vaut-il la peine de le faire ? 
t Cela n'en vaut pas la peine, 
t Cela vaut-il la peine de lui ecrire ? 
t Est-ce la peine de lui ecrire ? 
t Cela ne vaut rien. (39 ? .) 
t Vaut-il mieux ? II vaut mieux. 
t Vaudra-t-il mieux ? II vaudra 

mieux. 
t II vaut mieux faire ceci que de faire 

cela. 
t II vaut mieux rester ici que de se 

promener. 



Cinquante-deuxieme Th&me. 3me Sec. 

Vous etes descen^i seul. N ? avez-vous pas dit a votre frere de 
descendre ? Non 7 je n'ai pas ose le lui dire. Pourquoi n ; avez- 
vous pas ose ? Parce qu ; il dort. Ne l'avez-vous pas reveille ? Non, 
en verite. Je n'ai pas ose. Et pourquoi done? II est temps de se 
lever ; n'est-ce pas? Oui ; sans doute ; mais il m'a dit de ne jamais 
(§ 171 — 7) Peveiller quand il dort. Et si voas Feveillez, qu'arri- 
vera-t-il ? II me battra. Est-il assez mechant pour le faire 1 II le 
fait quand cela lui convient. — Qui a appris le calcul a votre petit 
frere? Un maitre Francais le lui a enseigne. — M ; appelez-vous? 
Je vous appelle. — Que vous plait-il? Pourquoi ne vous levez-vous 
pas? Ne savez-vous pas qu'il est deja tard? Que me demandez- 
vous? (40 l .) J 7 ai perdu tout mon argent, et je viens vous frier de 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 271 

(beg) m'en preter. — Quelle heure est-il ? II est deja six heures et 
un quart, et vous avez assez dormi. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous 
etes leve ? II y a une heure et demie que je le suis. — Voulez-vous 
faire un tour avec moi ? Je ne peux pas aller faire un tour, car j ; at- 
tends mon maitre de Francais. 

Do you rise as early as I ? I do not know at what o'clock you 
rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to 
wake me to-morrow, at four o'clock'? I will tell him. — Why have 
you risen so early? My children have made such a {tant de) noise 
that they wakened me, and hindered me from sleeping. — Have you 
slept well ? I have not slept well, for the dogs have made so much 
noise, and barked so loud, that I have not been able to sleep. — At 
what o'clock did the good captain awake ? He awoke, as usual, at 
a quarter past five in the morning. 

How did my child behave ? He behaved very well. — How did 
my brother behave towards you ? He behaved very well towards 
me, for he behaves well towards everybody. — Is it worth while to 
write to that man ? It is not worth while to write to him. — Is it 
worth while to dismount from my horse to buy a cake ? It is not 
worth while, for it is not long since you ate. — Is it worth while to 
dismount from my horse to give something to that poor man ? He 
seems (parait) to want it; but you can give him something without 
dismounting from your horse. — Is it better to go to the theatre than 
to study? It is better to do the latter than the former, (ceci que 
cela.) 1 — Is it better to learn to read French than to speak it? It is 
not worth while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. — Is 
it better to go to bed than to go a walking ? It is better to do the 
latter than the former. — Is it better to go to France than to Germany? 
It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when one has 
no wish to travel. 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, 53&.—Cinquante-troisieme Legon, 53m*. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

To hope, expect. Hope ever. I Esperer. ($ 144 — 5.)2isp£reztoujours. 

I hope, thou hopest, he hopes, one hopes. \ T espere, tu esperes, il espere, on 

espere. 

1 When latter and former apply to actions, translate by : ceci and cela ; 
not by : celui-ci and celui-ld, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. 

($38, N. 5.) 



272 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON, (l.) 



Do you hope ? We no longer hope. 

To yield. To sell, (as a favor granted.) 1 
I yield, thou yieldest, he yields, one 

yields. 
Will you sell me your horse ? (or, I 

wish you would sell me, &c.) 
I will, to oblige you. 
Do you expect to find him there ? 
I do expect it. 

To change, (meaning, to exchange.) 
To change one thing for another. 

I change my hat for his, or 

We exchange seats. 

To change, (meaning, to put on other 

things.) 
Do you change your hat ? 
I do change it. 
He changes his linen. 
They change their clothes. 
To mix, among, amongst. 
I mix among the men. 
He mixes among the soldiers. 
To recognise or to acknowledge. 

Do you recognise that man ? 

It is so long since I saw him that I 

do not recollect him. 
I have more bread than I can eat. 



Esperez-vcms ? Nous n'esperone 
plus. 
; Ceder, 1. (§ 144—5.) 
Je cede, tu cedes, il cede, on cede. 

Voulez-vous me ceder votre cheval ? 

| Je vous le cedt rai pour vous obliger, 
| Esperez-vous l'y trouver ? 

Je l'espere. 

Changer, 1, {contre, pour, de.) 

Changer quelque chose contre quel- 
que chose. 

Je change mon chapeau pour le sien. 

Nous changeons de places, (fem.) 

Changer, 1, (takes de before a sub- 
stantive.) 

t Changez-vous de chapeau? 

t J' en change. 

t II change de linge. 

t lis changent <f habits. 

t Se mvler, 1, parmi. 

t Je me mele parmi les hommes. 

t II se mele parmi les soldats. 

Reconnaitre* 4. Reconnaissez, Umpe.) 
(comme Connaitre, 25 1 , 33 1 .) 

Reconnaissez-vous cet homme ? 

II y a si long-temps que je ne l'ai vu 
que je ne le reconnais plus. 

J'ai plus de pain que je n'en puis 
manger. 

Obs. 120. When there is a comparison between two sentences, the verb 
which follows plus or moins, requires the negative ne. (49 2 , Obs. 114.) 



That man has more money than he 

will spend. 
There is more wine than is necessary. 
You have more money than you 

want. 



Cet homme a plus d'argent qu'il 

yC en depensera. 
II y a plus de vin qu'il ?i'en faut. 
Vous avez plus d'argent qu'il ne vous 

en faut. 



Cinquante-troisieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Pourquoi n ; 6tez-vous pas votre chapeau lorsque vous etes dans la 
maison 1 Parce que je suis accoutume a le garder. Si vous changez 
de cheval avec Pierre, (Peter,) esperez-vous en avoir un meilleur ? Je 
ne sais pas si le sien vaut mieux que le mien ; mais je sais qu'il est 
plus jolij etc'est pour cela que je veux changer avec lui. II ne vaut 



1 To give up, (as a favor, in order to oblige.] 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 273 

pas la peine d ; en changer, car le sien ne vaut rien. — Ou est Pierre ? 
II se mele avec ces vauriens qui jouent tant aux cartes. (51 1 .) Est-il 
change ! II Test beaucoup ; de sorte que vous le reconnaitrez a 
peine quand vous le verrez. J'espere qu'il se conduira mieux lors- 
que son pere sera revenu. Je l'espere aussi. II a peur de son pere. 
Crovez-vous qu'il ne se melera plus avec ces vauriens? II n'osera 
pas tant se meler avec eux. Sivousavez plusdemiel qu'il ne vous 
en faut. j'espere que vous m ; en cederez un peu. Oui. volontiers; je 
peux vous en ceder autant que vous en voudrez. 

Do you hope to receive a note to-day? I hope to receive one. — 
From (de) whom ? From a friend of mine. — What dost thou hope? 
I hope to see my parents to-day, for my tutor has promised me to 
take me to them. — Does your friend hope to receive anything? He 
hopes to receive something, for he has worked well. — Do you hope 
to arrive early in Paris? We hope to arrive there at a quarter past 
eight, for our father is waiting for us this evening. — Do you expect 
to rind him at home? We do expect it. — For what have you ex- 
changed your (24 2 . Obs. 55.) coach, of which you have just spoken to 
me ? I have exchanged it for a fine Arabian (26 ') horse. — Do you 
wish to exchange your book for mine ? I cannot, for I want it to 
study French. — Why do you take your hat off? I take it off because 
I see my old master coming, (je vois venir.) 

Do you know why that man does not eat? I believe he is not 
hungry, for he has more bread than he can eat. — Have you given 
your son any money ? I have given him more than he will spend. 
Will you give me a glass of cider? You need not drink cider, for 
there is more wine than is necessary. — Am I to sell my gun in order 
to buy a new hat? You need not sell it, for you have more money 
than you want. — Do you wish to speak to the shoemaker? I do not 
wish to speak to him. for we have more shoes than we want. — Why 
do the French rejoice ? They rejoice because they natter them- 
selves they have many good friends. — Are they not right in rejoicing, 
(de se rejouir?) They are wrong, for they have fewer friends than 
they imagine. — Did you recognise your cousin when you met him 
at the wire bridge ? No. he has changed so much that I did not 
recognise him at all. — Did he recognise you ? Instantly. He savs 
I have not changed at all. — How long has your nephew had this 
pretty little bird ? He has had it long. It has been given to him by 
a Greek merchant. 

Vocabulaibe. 2de Sec. 

That man has fewer friends than he | Get homme a moins d'amis qu ? il ne 
imagines. pense. 



274 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



To fancy. 

To think. 

To earn, to gain, to get. 

Has your father already started ? 

He is ready to depart. 

To make one 1 s self ready. 

To keep one's self ready. 

To split. 

To break somebody 1 s heart. 

You break that man's heart. 

Whose heart do I break ? 

These fine eyes will break more than 

one heart. 
To spill, spread. To spread. 
To expatiate, to lay stress upon. 
That man is always expatiating upon 

that subject. 
The subject. 

To stretch one's self along the floor. 
To hang to, on or upon. 
The wall. The garden wall. 
I hang my coat on the wall. 
He hangs his hat upon the tree. 
We hang our shoes upon the nails. 
The thief has been hanged. 
Who hung the basket on the tree ? 
The thief. The robber. 
The highwayman. The robber. 

You are always studious, and will 
always be so. 



S'imaginer, 1. 

Penser, 1. 

Gagner, 1. 

Votre pere est-il deja parti? (19*.) 

II est pret d partir. (I*) 2 .} 

Se preparer, 1. 

Se tenir* pret. 

Fendre, 4. 

Fendre le cceur a quelqu 'un. 

Vous fendez le coeur a cet homrae, 

A qui est-ce que je fends 'e ccbut ? 

Ces beaux yeux fendront plus d'un 

cceur. 
Fepandre, 4. Etendre, 4. 
S 1 etendre sur. 
Cet homme s'etend toujours sur ce 

sujet. 
Le sujet. 

S' etendre sur le plancher. 
Fendre, 4, d ou sur. 
Le mur. Le mur du jardin. 
Je pends mon habit au mur. 
II pend son chapeau a l'arbre. 
Nous pendons nos souliers aux clous. 
Le voleur a ete pendu. 
Qui a pendu le panier a l'arbre ? 
Le voleur. 
Le brigand, le voleur de grand che- 

min. 
Vous etes toujours studieux, et vous 

le serez toujours. 

Obs. 121. The personal pronouns are almost always repeated in French 
before every verb of which they are the nominative case, whether they are 
repeated in English or not; but when they are not in the nominative case 
they must always be repeated. Ex. 



Your brother is, and will always be 
good. 

A well-educated son never causes 
his father any grief; he loves, hon- 
ors, and respects him. 

Had he ? He had. He had not got it. 

Did you know ? I did know. I did 
not. 



et. il le 



Votre frere est toujours s 

sera toujours. 
Un fils bien eleve ne cause jamais 

de chagrin a son pere ; il Z'aime, 

Z'honore, et le respecte. 
Avait-il? II avait. II ne I'avait pas. 
Saviez-vous? Je savais. Je ne 

savais pas. 

Cinquante-troisieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 
Saviez-vous que- votre oncle est ici ? Je ne le savais pas. Ne le 
Baviez-vous pas vraiment? Non. je vous assure que je ne le savais 
pas. Quand est-il arrive ? Hier soir. Je serai bien aise de le voir. 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 275 

A-t-il encore les memes habits, ou en a-t-il change ? II en a change. 
II a un bel habit bleu au lieu du vieux bran qu'il avait. — Pourquoi 
vous en allez-vous si tot ? Ne vous amusez-vous pas ici ? Vous vous 
trompez si vous pensez que je ne m'amuse pas ici ; car, je vous 
assure que je trouve beaucoup de plaisir a causer (converse) avec 
vous. Pourquoi vous en allez-vous done ? Je croyais que vous le 
saviez. Qu'est-ce ? On m'attend (I am expected) au concert d'un 
de mes parents. II doit commencer a neuf heures, et vous voyez 
qu ? il est neuf heures moins un quart. Je ne savais pas cela. Adieu. 

Are you ready to depart with me ? I am so. — Does your uncle 
depart with us? He departs with us if he pleases, (s'il le veut.) — 
Will you tell him to be ready to start to-morrow at six o'clock in the 
evening? I will tell him so. — Is this young man ready to go out? 
Not yet, but he will soon be ready. — Why have they hanged that 
man? They have hanged him because he has killed somebody. — 
Have they hanged the man who stole (38 2 ) a horse from your 
brother ? They have punished him, but they have not hanged him ; 
they hang only highwaymen in our country. — What have you done 
with my coat? I have hanged it on the wall. — Will you hang my 
hat upon the tree ? I will hang it thereon. 

Have you not seen my shoes ? I found them under your bed, and 
have hanged them upon the nails. — Has the thief who stole your 
gun been hanged? He has been punished, but he has not been 
hanged. — Why do you expatiate so much upon that subject? Be- 
cause it is necessary to speak upon all subjects. — If it is necessary 
to (sHl faut) listen to you, and to answer you when you- expatiate 
upon that subject, I will hang my hat upon the nail, (repeat the pro- 
noun je before each verb,) stretch myself along the sofa, listen to 
you, and answer you as well as I can. You will do well. — Your 
nephew learns French, does he not? To be sure. — How long has 
he been learning it? These five months. — Does he know as much 
as you ? He knows more than I. — I thought you knew more than 
he. You made a mistake. He has been learning it longer than I. 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON, 54tb..—Cinquante-quatrieme Legon, 54me. 
Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. 



To be well. 
How do you do ? 
I am well 



t Se porter bien. 

t Comment vous portez-vous ? 

t Je me porte bien. 



Obs. 122. The verbs to be and to do, are both expressed in French by the 



276 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



reflective verb se porter, when they are used in English to inquire after, or 
to speak of a person's health. 

How is your father ? I Comment se porte monsieur votre 

I pere ? 

Obs. 123. The qualifications of monsieur, Mr. ; madame, Mrs. ; made- 
moiselle, Miss ; usually precede the possessive pronouns in French, when 
we speak to a person respecting his parents, relations, or friends, and wish 
to pay them some respect. 

He is ill. 
Your brother. 
Your cousin. 



II se porte mal. 
t Monsieur votre frere. 
t Monsieur votre cousin, 
t Messieurs vos freres. 



Your brothers. 

Obs. 124. It may be seen that the plural of monsieur is messieurs, mon 
being changed into mes. 

Your uncles. 

To doubt a thing. 

To question anything. 

Do you doubt that ? I do. 

I do not doubt it. 

I make no question, have no doubt 

of it. 
What do you doubt ? 
I doubt what that man has told me. 



| t Messieurs vos oncles. 

> Douter, 1, de quelque chose. 

| Doutez-vous de cela ? Pen doute. 



I Je n' 



en doute pas. 



De quoi doutez-vous ? 

Je doute de ce que cet homme m'a 
dit. 

Le doute. Sans doute. 

Convenir* 2, de quelque chose, (con- 
jugated like its primitive, venir.*) 

Convenez-vous de cela ? 

J' en conviens. 

t Combien avez-vous paye* ce cha- 
peau? 

t Je l'ai paye trois ecus. 



The doubt. Without doubt, no doubt. 
To agree to a thing. 

Do you agree to that ? 

I do agree to it. 

How much have you paid for that 

hat ? 
I have paid three crowns for it. 

Obs. 125. When one of the prepositions, for, at, is used in English to 
express the price of a thing, it is not rendered in French. (40 1 , Obs. 93.) 

J'ai achete ce vin 6 dollars le parrier. 

(ou a 6 dollars.) 
J'en ai achete a $10 le panier. 

Cinquante-quatrieme Th£me. Ire Sec. 
Ou est M. votre oncle ? II voyage. Y a-t-il long-temps qu'il voy- 
age? II y a deja quelques mois. Se porte-t-il bien ? Oui, il se 
porte beaucoup mieux depuis qu'il voyage. Que pense-t-il de PEu- 
rope ? Quelques pays lui plaisent, d'autres ne lui plaisent pas. — 
A-t-il ete en France? Oui, il y est passe ; mais comme il ne parle 
pas le FrancaiSj il ne Faime pas beaucoup. Comment ! M. votre 



I bought this wine at 6 dollars a bas- 
ket. ($ 7.) 
I bought some at $10 a basket. 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 277 

oncle ne parle pas Francais ! Non, il ne Pa jamais appris. — Com- 
ment se porte-t-on chez vous? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Et 
chez M. votre neveu ? Le domestique dit qu ; on y est malade. Qui 
y est malade ? Je ne sais pas. Comme j'ai Pintention d'y aller, je 
n 7 ai rien demande au domestique. Je doute de ce que ce valet dit. 
Je ne le crois pas toujours. — Ou avez-vous achete ce joli baton ? Le 
trouvez-vous joli? Oui, charm ant. Combien Pavez-vous paye ? Je 
n ; en ai donne que trois quarts de gourdes, (dollars.) Ce n ; est pas 
cher. Etes vous convenu d'aller demain a Burlington ? J'en suis 
convenu. Prenez de notre vin a $12 le panier. J'en prendrai. 

How is your father? (Monsieur votre fere 1) He is (only) so so. (35 1 .) 
— How is your patient ? He is a little better to-day than yesterday- 
— Is it long since you saw your brothers ? {Messieurs vos freres ?) I 
saw them two days ago. — How art thou? I am tolerably well. — 
How long has your cousin been learning French? He has been 
learning it only eight months. — Does he already speak it? He 
already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who 
has been learning it these two years. — Is it long since you heard of 
my uncle ? It is hardly a fortnight (quinze jours) since I heard of 
him. — Where is he staying now ? He is staying at Berlin, but my 
father is in London. — Did you stay long at Vienna? I stayed there 
a fortnight. — How long did your cousin stay at Paris? He stayed 
there only a month. 

Has your uncle at last bought the garden ? He has not bought it, 
for he could not agree about the price. — Have you at last agreed 
about the price of that picture ? We have agreed about it. — How 
much have you paid for it? I have paid fifteen hundred francs for 
it. — What hast thou bought to-day ? I have bought two fine horses, 
three beautiful pictures, and a fine gun. — For how much hast thou 
bought the pictures? I have bought them for seven hundred francs. 
— Do you find them dear? I do not find them dear. — How much 
have you spent, then ? I have spent and paid nearly four thousand 
francs. — How many dollars (gourdes) is that? About 800. It is a 
good deal of money. — Have you already heard of your cousin who 
is gone to Hungary ? He had agreed to write to me, but he has not 
yet done it; however, I have written to him. 



Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

The price. 

Have you agreed about the price ? 
We have agreed about it. 
About what have you agreed ? 
About the price. 
24 



Le prix. 

Etes-vous convenus du prix ? 
Nous en sommes convenus. 
De quoi etes-vous convenus ? 
Du prix. 



278 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



To agree, to compose a difference. 
To feel, feeling. Felt , feel. 
Do you feel ? We do not. 
I feel, thou feelest, he feels. 
To consent, to agree to . . . 

I consent to go thither. 

To wear (garments.) The garment. 

What garments does he wear ? 

He wears beautiful garments. 

Against my custom. 

As customary. 

My partner. 

To observe something. 

To take notice of something. 

Do you take notice of that ? 

I do take notice of it. 

Did you observe that ? 

Did you notice what he did ? 

I did notice it. 

To expect, (to hope for.) 

What do you expect ? (hope for ?) 

Do you expect to receive a note from 

your uncle ? 
I expect it. I do not. 
He expects it. 
We expect it. 
Have we expected it. 
We have expected it ? 
To get, (meaning to procure.) 

I cannot procure any money. 

He cannot procure anything to eat. 



S'accorder, 1. 

Sentir,* 2, sentant. Senti, sen\>ez. 
Sentez-vous ? Nous ne sentons pas. 
Je sens, tu sens, il sent. 
Consentir* 2, (comme sentir,*) (a 

ou de av. l'infin., d av. un nom.) 
Je consens a (d'y) aller. 
Porter, 1, (des habits.) Le vetement. 
Quels vetements porte-t-il? 
II porte de beaux vetements. 
Contre mon ordinaire. 
Comme a Pordinaire. 
Mon associe. 

> t S'apercevoir, 3, de quelque chose. 

Vous apercevez-vous g$ cela? 

Je m'en apergois. 

Vous etes-vous apergu de cela ? 

Vous etes-vous aper§u de ce qu'il a 
fait? 

Je m'en suis apergu. 

t S'attendre, 4, (o av. l'infini.) 

A quoi vous attendez-vous ? 

Vous attendez-vous d recevoir un 
billet de votre oncle ? 

Je m'y attends. 

II s'y attend. 

Nous nous y attendons. 

Nous y sommes-nous attendus ? 

Nous nous y sommes attendus. 

t Se procurer, 1. 
i( Je ne peux pas me procurer d'argent. 
I Je ne puis me procurer de 1' argent. 
| II ne peut se procurer de quoi manger. 



Cinqtjante-qttatbjeme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Quelque chose ne vous plait pas. C'est vrai. Je m'attends a 
recevoir un present, et il ne vient pas. Ne soyez pas (41 2 ) impa- 
tient, il viendra, si on vous Pa promis. — Qui vous fait ce don 1 Le 
secretaire du general m'en a promis un. — Le cousin de Papothi- 
caire a-t-il consenti a vous ceder son dictionnaire Anglais et Francais? 
II n'y a pas encore consenti. Y consentira-t-il ? J'espere qu'il y 
consentira. — Qu 7 allez-vous porter ce printemps? Je n'ai pas encore 
fait de choix. Je ne sais pas ce que je porterai. Moi, je porterai 
des habits fonces au printemps, et quelque chose de clair en ete. 
N'aviez-vons pas un surtout clair Phiver passe ? Si fait. J'en ai 
porte un tout Phiver. Je le croyais. Moi, je ne les aime plus clairs. 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 279 

Je les ai aimes autre fois. — Avez-vous vendu votre grain a 75 cents 
le boisseau? (a bushel. § 7.) Pen ai eu 80 cents le boisseau. 

Have you agreed with your partner ? I have agreed with him. — 
Does he consent to pay you the price of the ship ? He consents to 
pay me the price agreed upon, (convenu.) — Do you consent to go 
to France? I do. — Do you too? I? No. — Have you seen your old 
friend again'? (revoir* comme voir,* 25 1 , 33 3 .) I have seen him 
again. — Did you recognise him? I could hardly recognise him ; 
for. contrary to his custom, he wears a large hat. — How is he ? He 
is very well. — What garments does he wear? He wears beautiful 
new garments. — Have you taken notice of what your boy has done ? 
I have taken notice of it. — Have you (Ven) punished him for it ? I 
have punished him for it. — Has your father already written to you ? 
Not yet; but I expect (je m' attends) to receive a note from him 
to-day. 

Of what do you complain? I complain of not being able to 

procure some money. — Why do these poor men complain ? They 

complain because they cannot procure anything to eat. — How are 

your parents? They are, as usual, (comme d V ordinaire,) very well. 

— Is your uncle well ? He is better than he usually is. — Have you 

already heard of your friend who is in Germany ? I have already 

written to him several times: however, he has not answered me 

yet. — Why have you punished your boy ? I did it because he broke 

my best glass. I had given him some syrup and water, and instead 

of drinking it, he spilt it on the new carpet, which we bought ten 

days ago: and what do you think he did afterwards? — Did he 

break the glass? Yes, he did, and then I gave him a few blows. — 

What did you pay for a yard of your new carpet ? I paid dear for 

it: Si. 60. 

Vocabulaibe. 3me Sec. 

To make fun of some one or some- \ _, , , 

i • f oe moquer de quelqu un ou de quel- 

To laugh at some one or something. ) Ciue c ose * 

He laughs at everybody. ) n ge e de ^ [e mQnde 

He criticises everybody. » 



He criticises everybody 

Do you laugh at that man ? 

I do not laugh at him. 

To stop, to stay. Stop, wait, hold on. 

Have you-stayed long at Berlin ? 

stayed there only three days. 
To sojourn. To stay. 
Where does your brother stay at 

present ? 
At present, actually. 



Vous moquez-vous de cet homme? 
Je ne m'en moque pas. 
S'arreter, 1. Arretez-vous. 
Vous etes-vous arrete long-temps a 

Berlin ? 
Je ne m'y suis arrete que trois jours. 
Sojourner, 1. 
Ou Monsieur votre frere sejourne-t-il 

actuellement ? 
Actuellement. 



280 



FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 



The residence, stay, abode. 

Paris is a fine place to live in. 

After reading. 

After cutting myself. 

After dressing yourself. 

After dressing himself. 

After shaving ourselves. 

After warming themselves. 

I returned the book after reading it. 

I threw the knife away after cutting 
myself. 

You went to the concert after dress- 
ing yourself. 

He went to the theatre after dressing 
himself. 

We breakfasted after shaving our- 
selves. 

They went out after warming them- 
selves. 

The sick person, (the patient.) 

Tolerably well. 

It is rather late. It is rather far. 



Le sejour. 

t C'est un beau sejour que Paris. 

t Apres avoir lu. (40 1 .) 

t Apres m'etre coupe. 

t Apres vous etre habille. 

t Apres s'etre habille. 

t Apres nous etre rases. 

t Apres s' etre chauffes. 

t J'ai rendu le livre apres Patron* lu. 

t J'ai jete le couteau apres m'etre 

coupe, 
t Vous etes alle au concert apres 

vous etre habille. 
t II est alle au theatre apres s'etre 

habille. 
t Nous avons dejeune apres nous 

etre rases, 
t lis sont sortis apres s'etre chauffes. 

Le malade. 

Assez bien, paasablement. 

II est bien tard- C'est bien loin. 



Cinquante-qtjatrieme Th&me. 8me Sec. 

Tu arrives tard, mon cher Armand, t ; es-tu arrete en chemin? Je 
suis parti un peu tard, et je me suis arrete en chemin, (on the way.) 
Pourquoi t ; es-tu arrete ? Je me suis arrete pour voir un voleur de 
grand chemin qu ; on a pris de bonne heure v,e matin. Je crois que 
tu as des vetements neufs? Oui, j'ai mis a\,jOurd 7 hui les vetements 
dont mon bon oncle m ; a fait present. lis s*,at beaux; mais je crois 
que Phabit est un peu trop grand : qu ; en penses-tu ? Je ne peux 
pas bien voir derriere ; devant, il va bien, n'est-ce pas ? A mer- 
veille ; mais ici et la, il est un peu trop larg*-. Comment va le gilet? 
Parfaitement bien. Et les pantalons (pauialoons) comment vont- 
ils? lis vont bien aussi. Ne sont-ils ni uop longs ni trop large s ? 
Non ; ils sont juste ce qu'il faut. 

Do you like to speak to my uncle ? I li^e much to speak to him; 
but sometimes he laughs at me, (se mo-que de.) — Why does he 
laugh at you ? He laughs at me because i speak badly. — Why has 
your brother no friends ? He has none, because he criticises every- 
body. — Why are you laughing at that man? I do not intend (je 
iv ai pas dessein) to laugh at him. I beg vou not (prier de, § 171 — 7) 
to do it; for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. — Do 
you doubt what' I am telling you? 1 do not doubt it. — Do yon doubt 
what that man has told you? I doubt it. for he has often told 
stories, (mentirJ* 44 s .) — Have you at last bought the horse which you 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



281 



wished to buy last month ? I have not bought it, for I have not 
been able to procure money. 

What have you done with the books which the English captain has 
lent you ? I have returned them to him 7 after reading them. — Why 
have you thrown away your knife ? I have thrown it away after 
cutting myself. — When did I go to the concert % You went after 
dressing yourself. — When did your brother go to the ball % He 
went after dressing himself. — When did you breakfast % We break- 
fasted after shaving ourselves. — When did our neighbors go out? 
They went out after warming themselves. — What did you do this 
morning ? I shaved, after rising, and went out after breakfasting. — 
What did your father do last night? Qiier soir?) He supped after 
going to the play, and went to bed after supping. — Did he rise early ? 
He rose at sunrise. 

A useful Hint. Some of the observations have been given in French, 
to show the pupil that it can easily be done. Let him now translate in 
French all the English he finds in the book, as a part of his daily task. 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, 55th.— Cinquante-cinquieme Legon, 55me. 

Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. 

DEFINITE ARTICLE, Feminine.— Article Defini, Feminin. 

Sing, and plur. The, of, from the, to the, for the. 

Singulier. La, 1', de la, de 1', a la, a 1', pour la, pour 1\ 

Pluriel. Les, des, aux, pour les. 

Obs. 126. It will be observed that the plural of the definite article is alike 
for both genders. (9 1 .) 

When the definite article stands before a vowel or an h mute, in the sin- 
gular, it is also alike for both genders, viz. V . 



Sing. Plur. 


Singulier. 


Pluriel. 


The woman, women. 


La femme, 


les femmes. 


The mother. 


La mere, 


les meres. 


The daughter or the girl. 


La fille, 


les filles. 


The sister. 


La sceur, 


les soeurs. 


The candle. 


La chandelle, 


les chandelles. 


The bottle. 


La bouteille, 


les bouteilles. 


The key. 


La clef, 


les clefs. 


She, it. They, (nominatives.) 


Elle. Elles, (§ 38, 1 & 2.) Nominat. 


Her, it. To her, to it. Of, from her. 


La, 1'. Lui, y. 


D'elle, en. En, 


Of, from it. 


($ 47.) 




Them. To them. To them. Of, from 


Les. Leur, (21 1 


.) Y, (21*.) D'elles, 


them. 


en. En. 




Has she ? She has. Has she not ? 


A-t-elle ? Elle 


a. N'a-t-elle pas ? 


24* 







282 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, (l.) 



Have they? They have, they have not. | Ont-elles? Ellesont, elles n'ont pas. 







Of, from. 


To. 


With. 


My, (feminin singulier.) 


Ma, 


de ma, 


a ma, 


avec ma. 


Thy. 


Ta, 


de ta, 


a ta, 


avec ta. 


His, her, its. 


Sa, 


de sa, 


a sa, 


avec sa. 


My, (plur. des deux genres.) 


Mes, 


de mes, 


a mes, 


avec mes. 



Obs. 127. In the plural, the possessive pronouns are always alike for both 
genders. (9 1 .) 



The father and his son or his daugh- 
ter. ($ 32.) 

The mother and her son or her daugh- 
ter. 

The child and its brother or its sister. 



Le pere et son fils ou sa fille. 
La mere et son fils ou sa fille. 
1/ enfant et son frere ou sa soeur. 



Sing. 
My pen, 
Thy fork, 
His or her nut, 
Our hand, 
Your mouth, 
Their door, 



Plur. 
my pens, 
thy forks, 
bis or her nuts, 
our hands, 
your mouths, 
their doors. 



Singulier. 
Ma plume, 
Ta fourchette, 
Sa noix, 
Notre main, 
Votre bouche, 
Leur porte, 



Pluriel. 
mes plumes, 
tes fourchettes. 
ses noix. 
nos mains, 
vos bouches. 
leurs portes. 



Obs. 128. The personal pronoun leur must not be mistaken for the pos- 
sessive leur. The former never takes an s, while the latter does, when the 
person or thing possessed is in the plural. Ex. Je leur parle, I speak to 
them ; je vois leurs freres et leurs soeurs, I see their brothers and their sisters. 



-4.) 



The pretty woman. (§ 200- 

The pretty women. 

The small candle, the small candles. 

The large bottle, the large bottles. 



La jolie femme. 
Les jolies femmes. 
La petite chandelle, 

La grande bouteiile, 



les petites 
chandelles. 
les grandes 
bouteilles. 

Cinquante-cinquieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 
Comment se porte Madame votre mere % Je vous remercie, elle 
se porte passablement. Et Mesdemoiselles vos scbuts'? Elles ne 
se portent pas si bien qu 7 a Pordinaire. Qu'ont-elles ? Elles n ; ont 
pas grand' chose; mais elles se plaignent un peu. Les femmes 
aiment a se plaindre, n 7 est-ce pas ? Elles ne se plaignent pas plus 
que les hommes. La fille du ministre est-elle mieux? On dit 
qu'elle est plus mal. Mange-t-elle quelque chose ? Non, elle a 
trop mal a la bouche pour manger. — Brule-t-on des chandelles ou 
du gaz chez votre seem:? On y brule du gaz. On pense que ce 
n'est pas si cher que les chandelles. — Ou Sophie a-t-elle mis la clef? 
La clef de quoi? La clef du pupitre Francais. Je ne sais pas. 
Mais voici ma clef; elle ouvre le pupitre. N'importe. Je irai pas 
besoin de Pouvrir. A-t-on apporte les bouteilles ? Les bouteilles de 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 283 

quoi ? Les bouteilles de vin. Oui, les voici, (here they are,) derriere 
la porte. Combien avez-vous paye la bouteille ? Pai paye presque 
un demi-dollar la bouteille. — Avez-vous vu la jolie femme qui a 
passe par ici ? Quand a-t-elle passe ? II y a un moment. J'etais 
alors occupe a casser mes noix, de sorte que je n'ai pas pu la voir. — 
Ma plume d'acier est dans mon grand portefeuille, prenez-la, si vous 
la voulez. Merci. De rien. 

Has your sister my gold ribbon ? She has it not. — What has she ? 
She has nothing. — Has your mother anything? She has a fine gold 
fork. — Who has my large bottle ? Your sister has it. — Do you some- 
times see my mother? I see her often. — When did you see your 
sister? I saw her a fortnight ago. — Who has my fine nuts? Your 
good sister has them. — Has she also my silver forks ? She has them 
not. — Who has them ? Your mother has them. — *Vhat fork have 
you ? I have my iron fork. — Have your sisters had my pens ? They 
have not had them, but I believe that their children have had them. — 
Why does your brother complain ? He complains because his right 
foot aches. — Why do you complain ? I complain because my left 
eye aches. 

Among you country people (parmi vous autres (§41i) gens de 
campagne) there are many fools; are there not? asked (demandd) a 
philosopher, lately, (V autre jour,) of a peasant, (dun paysan.) The 
latter answered, (repondit :) " Sir, they are to be found (on en trouve) 
in all stations, (Vetat.") " Fools sometimes tell the truth, (la verite,") 
said (dit) the philosopher. — What did the philosopher ask of the 
countryman ? He asked if there were not (n 7 y avail pas) many 
fools among country people ? — What did the countryman reply to 
the philosopher ? He answered that there were some in all stations. 
— Was the philosopher pleased with the peasant's answer? (la re- 
ponse, fern.) I think he was pleased with the answer. — What do 
you think of the peasant's answer ? I think it .... (L'ecolier peut 
flnir la reponse.) — Do you not like that young lady's face? Yes, I 
do; but not her hair, (plur.) — Has not that young woman too much 
tongue ? Yes, she has a little too much ; at least, so they say, (on 
le dit.) 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

Which woman ? Which women ? Quelle femme ? Queiles femmes ? 

Which daughter ? Which daughters ? Quelle fille ? Queiles filles ? 

Which, what one ? Which ones ? Laquelle ? Lesquelles ? 

This, that woman. ; Cette femme. 

These, those women. Ces femmes. 

This lady, these ladies. Cette dame-ci, ces dames-ci. 

That young lady, those young ladies. Cette demoiselle-la, ces demoi- 
selles-la. 



284 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



The hand, the hands. 

The right hand. 
The left hand. 
I have a sore hand. 



La main, les mains. 

La main droite. 
La main gauche. 
J'ai mal a la main. 



Obs. 129. Avoir mal is used with the preposition d, to express that a 
part of the body is affected with illness or pain. (23 1 .) 



The tooth, the teeth. 

Have you the toothache ? 

I have the headache. 

I feel a pain in my side. 

His feet are sore. 

The face. The mouth. The cheek. 

The tongue. The language. 

The door. The window. The street. 

The town. The linen. The old woman. 



La dent, les dents. 

Avez-vous mal aux dents t 

J'ai mal a la tete. 

J'ai mal au cote. 

II a mal aux pieds. 

La figure. La bouche. Lajoue. 

La langue. 

Laporte. La fenetre. Larue. 

La ville. La toile. La vieille femme. 



Remark. From what precedes, this principle may be deduced : — The 
characteristic ending of French feminine nouns and adjectives is the letter e. 
There are, however, some adjectives which also have this ending in the 
masculine, and then they are of both genders, as : 



An amiable man. 
An amiable woman. 
The room. 
The front room. 

The back room. 

The upper room. 

INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRO NOUN. —Article Partitif Feminin. 
Some, Of, from some. To some, With some. 

Sing. (II 1 ' 2 .) De la, T, de, a de la, 1', avec de la, 1'. 

Plur. Des, de, a des, avec des. 

Obs. 130. For the plural of this article, and when it stands before an 
adjective, (ll 1 * 2 .) 



Un homme aimable. 

Une femme aimable. 

La chambre. 

La chambre de devant, (ou du de 
vant, ou sur le devant.) 

La chambre de derriere, (ou du der- 
riere, ou sur le derriere.) 

La chambre d'en haut, (ou du haut.) 



Some light. Some silk. 
Some good soup. 
Some good apples. 



De la lumiere. De la soie. 
De bonne soupe. 
De bonnes pommes. 



Obs. 131. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, and et, double their 
final consonant before the e mute of the feminine. Examples: 

Une cruelle certitude. 



A cruel certitude. 
Such a promise. 
An old acquaintance. 
A good truth. 
A dumb woman. 



Une pareille promesse. 
Une ancienne connaissance. 
Une bonne ve'rite. 
Une femme muette. 



Oh?. 132. In the masculine, the above adjectives would be crutl, pareih 
ancien, bon, muet. 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 285 

INDEFINITE ARTICLE, Feminine.— Article Indejlni, Feminin. 
A ox an, of, from a, to a, with a. Une, d'une, a une, avec une, 
A virtuous woman. | Une femme vertueuse. 

Obs. 133. Adjectives ending in the masculine in x become feminine by 
changing x into se ; as, masc. vertueux ; fem. vertueuse, virtuous. 

A happy young lady. | Une demoiselle heureuse. 1 

Cinquante-cinquieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 

Sont-ce les Demoiselles Cavaignac ? Oui, ce sont elles. Voulez- 
vous me 'presenter a elles J (introduce me to them. § 64.) Volontiers. 
Venez. Attendons un moment, car vous voyez qu' elles parlent a 
ces dames en bleu. Quelles sont ces deux dames en bleu, elles 
sont jolies, n 7 est-ce pas? Je ne les connais pas. Approchons a pre- 
sent. Mesdemoiselles, voulez-vous me permettre de vous presenter 
mon ami, M. de Montcalme ? Nous sommes bien aises, M. de 
Montcalme, de faire voire connaissance, (acquaintance.) — Mesde- 
moiselles, tout le plaisir est de mon cote. Vous avez bien de la 
bonte. (literally goodness, here, politeness.) — Mile. Clara va-t-elle jouer 
du piano? Non, elle n'en toucher a pas (will not play)ce soir, parce 
qu'elle a mal a la main droite. Comment s'est-elle fait du mal? 
Elle s'est fait du mal avec ses ciseaux. — Quel bruit est cela? C'est 
la porte de la rue (street door) qu'on vient de fermer. — Pourquoi 
Mile. Sophie tient-elle son mouchoir sur sa joue? y a-t-elle mal? 
Elle n'a pas mal a la joue, mais aux dents. Cette femme muette 
est-elle heureuse ? Oui, elle est heureuse, parce qu'elle est bonne 
et vertueuse. 

Is your sister writing? No, Madam, she is not. — Why does she 
not? Her right hand is sore. — Why does not the daughter of your 
neighbor go out? She does not, because she has sore feet. — Why 
does my sister not speak ? Because she has a sore mouth. — Hast 
thou not seen my silver pen ? No, but I have seen your sister's steel 
pen. — Hast thou a front room ? I have a back one, (une de der- 
riere,) but my brother has a front one. — Is it (est-ce) an upper room? 
It is one, {e'en est une.) — Does the wife {la femme) of our shoemaker 
go out already ? No, my lady, she does not go out yet, for she is 
still very ill. — Which bottle had your little sister? She had our 
mothers, {celle de.) — Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's ? 
I have eaten neither of yours {de la voire) nor your mother's, but 
of that of my good sister. 

Have you seen the lady who was with me this morning ? No, but I 
saw her amiable daughter. — Has your mother hurt herself? She 
has not hurt herself. — Can you write with this steel pen ? Which? 

1 From the masculine heureux. 



286 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 



(la quelle?) Sophia's? Yes, Sophia's. No, but I shall write with 
the golden one, (telle d J or.) — Each (chaque) woman thinks herself 
amiable, and each (chacune) is conceited, (a de V amour propre.) 
The same as (de mime que) men, my dear friend. Many a one 
(tel) thinks himself (se croit) learned who is not so, (ne Vest pas,) 
and many men (bien des hommes) surpass (surpasser) women in 
vanity, (en vanite.) — What is the matter with you? Nothing is the 
matter with me. — Why does your sister complain ; Because she 
has a pain in her cheek. — Has your brother a sore cheek ? No, but 
he feels a pain in his side. — Where is the silk? It has fallen from 
the window in the street. — Did this old woman pick it up ? Yes, 
she did • but she did not pick up the linen. — Did the linen fall also 
from the window ? Yes, it did. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 
An active young woman. | Une jeune personne 1 active. 

06s. 134. Adjectives ending in the masculine in /, become feminine by 
changing /into ve, as, masc. actif; fern, active, active. 



A new gown. 

An ingenuous proposal. 

Have you my pen ? 

No, Madam, I have it not. 

Which bottle have you broken? 

Which door have you opened ? 



Une robe neuve. 2 

Une proposition naive. 3 

Avez-vous ma plume ? 

Non, Madame, je ne l'ai pas. 

Quelle bouteille avez-vous cassee ? 

Quelle porte avez-vous ouverte ? 



Obs. 135. The past participle agrees with its direct object, {regime direct,) 
in gender as well as in number. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) 



Which windows have you opened ? 
Which bottles has the woman broken ? 

Which young lady have you con- 
ducted to the ball ? 
Which water have you drunk ? 
Which letters have you written ? 
This, this one. These. 

That, that one. Those. 

Have you this or that pen ? 

I have neither this nor that. 

Do you see that woman ? 

I see her. 

Have you seen my sisters ? 

No, Miss, I have not seen them. 



Quelles fenetres avez-vous ouvertes ? 
Quelles bouteilles la femme a-t-elle 

cassees ? 
Quelle demoiselle avez-vous con 

duite au bal ? 
Quelle eau avez-vous bue ? 
Quelles lettres avez-vous ecrites ? 
Celle-ci. Celles-ci. 

Celle-la. Celles-la. 

Avez-vous cette plume-ci ou celle 

la? 
Je n'ai ni celle-ci ni celle-la. 
Voyez-vous cette femme ? 
Je la vois. 

Avez-vous vu mes soeurs ? 
Non, Mademoiselle, je ne les ai pas 

vues. 



1 Personne, as a pronoun, is masculine ; as a substantive, it is feminine. 

2 From the masculine neuf 
* From the masculine nafy. 



FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 



287 



Has he spoken to her ? He has. 

To her, to him, to them. 

Do you speak to my sisters ? 

I speak to them. 

Some coarse linen. 

Some good water. 

A napkin, a towel. A clean napkin. 

The following double the letter I : — 

(before a consonant, | Bean, 

< before a vowel or h ) 
V mute, i 
r before a consonant, | 

< before a vowel or ft) 
( mute, 5 



Lui a-t-il parle ? II lui a parle. 

Lui, leur. (Obs. 128.) 

Parlez-vous a mes sceurs ? 

Je leur parle. 

De grosse toile. 

De bonne eau. 

Une serviette. Une serviette propre. 



Handsome. 



New. 



Bel, 

Nouveau, 
Nouvel, 



belle. 



nouvelle. 



Old. 

Crazy, foolish. 

*)ft. 

Some fine silk stockings. 

The Christian. (06s. 132.) 

The Jew. (Obs. 134.) 

The negro. 

A companion. 

A friend. (Remark, p. 284.) 

To celebrate, to feast. 



vieille. 



folle. 



molle. 



Vieux, 

Vieil, 

Fou, 

Fol, 1 

Mou, 

Mol,2 

De beaux bas de soie. 

Le Chretien, Fern, la Chretienne. 

Le Juif. " la Juive. 

Le negre. " la negresse. 

Uncompagnon. " une compagne. 

Un ami. 

Celebrer, 1, feter, 



une amie. 
1. 



Cinquante-cinquieme Theme. 3me Sec. 
A quelle joue avez-vous mal? A la droite ou a la gauche? Je 
n 7 ai mal ni a la joue droite ni a la gauche. Vraiment ? Je croyais 
que vous aviez mal a Pune ou a P autre. A quoi cette dame s'amuse- 
t-elle ? Elle s'amuse a toucher du piano. — Guillaume, apportez de 
la lumiere, nous voulons jouer aux echecs. Voulez-vous une chan- 
dello ? ou allumerai-je le gaz? — Apportez une chandelle, allumee. 
N'avez-vous pas revu notre ancienne connaissance, Mme. Leroux? 
Non ; je n'ai pas revu cette ancienne connaissance, mais j'en ai revu 
une autre. Qui? Devinez, (guess.) — Vousa-t-elle fait une pareille 



1 Fol is used instead of fou before nouns beginning with a vowel. Fol 
always precedes, and fou always follows its substantive. Ex. Tin march* 
fou, a foolish bargain; un fol espoir, a foolish hope. Substantively, fou 
means a madman, and folle a madwoman. 

2 Formerly, mol was more in use than mou. The Academy writes : 
11 TInhomme mou et effimine^'' a weak and effeminate man. We read, 
however, in Buflbn, " Les Chinois sont des peuples mols," the Chinese are 
an effeminate people. 



288 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 

promesse ? Oui ; elle en a fait une pareille, a ma soeur, a ma cousine, 
et a moi. (§64 — 2.) Comment se portent Mesdemoiselles vos 
soeurs ? Elles se portent tres-bien depuis quelques jours. Ou demeu- 
rent-elles 1 Elles demeurent a Wilmington. — Est-ce une petite ville ? 
Oui, c'est une petite ville dans Vetat de Delaware, (the state of Dela- 
ware.) Quel jour les Turcs celebrent-ils ? lis celebrent le vendredi; 
les Juifs celebrent le samedi, et les Chretiens le dimanche. Quel 
jour est-ce que les negres celebrent? Les negres celebrent le jour 
de leur naissance, (their birth-day.) 

Is your sister as old as my mother ? She is not so old ; but she is 
taller. — Has your brother purchased anything? (fait des emplettes?) 
He has purchased something, (il en a fait.) — What has he bought % 
He has bought fine linen, good pens, old candles, and napkins. — 
Has he not bought some silk stockings'? He has bought some. — 
Have you a sore nose ? I have not a sore nose, but I have the tooth- 
ache. — Have you cut your finger? No, my lady, I have cut my 
hand. — Will you give me a pen ? I will give you one. — Will you 
have this or that? I will have neither. — Which (laquelle) one do 
you wish to have ? I wish to have that which your sister has. — Do 
you wish to have my mothers good black silk (bonne sole noire) or 
my sister's ? I wish to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, 
but that which you have. 

Do you open the back window? I open it, because it is too warm. 
—Which windows has your sister opened ? She has opened those 
of the front room. — Have you been at the ball of my old acquaint- 
ance? I have been there. — Which young ladies have you taken to 
the ball? I took my sister's friends and companions (fern.) there. — 
Did they dance ? They danced a good deal. — Did they amuse them- 
selves ? They amused themselves. — Did they remain long at the 
ball ? They remained there two hours. — Is this young lady a Turk ? 
No, she is a Greek. — Does she speak French ? She speaks it. — Does 
she not speak English? She speaks it also, but she speaks French 
better. — Has your sister a companion ? She has one. — Does she like 
her? She likes her very much, for she is very amiable. — That 
active young woman is ingenuous, is she not? Yes, she is (both) 
active and ingenuous. — What do you think of his sister's new silk 
gown? Her new silk gown? Yes, the silk one. Her new silk 
gown pleases me much. 



FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 



FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON, 5Gth.—Cinquante-sixicme Legon, 56me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



To go to the country. 

To be pleased in the country. 

To go to the 'oank. 

r 'o rtop at the bank. 
To or at the exchange. 
To or at the river. 
To or at the kitchen. 

To or at the cellar. 

To or at church. 

To or at school. 

To or at the French school. 

To or at the dancing school, singing 

school. The play. 

The opera. 
To go a hunting. 
Is he a hunting? 
To hunt. To fish. 

To go a fishing. 
To get tired of fishing. 
The whole day, all the day. 
The whole morning. 
The whole evening. 
The whole night, all the night. 
The whole year. 
The whole week. 
Tn? whole society. 



Aller a la campagne. 

S'amuser a la campagne. 

Aller a la banque. 

S'arreter a la banque. 

A la bourse. 

A la riviere. 

A la cuisine. 

A la cave. 

A 1'eglise. 

A 1'ecole. 

A 1'ecole de Fran$ais. 

A 1'ecole de danse, a 1'ecole de chant. 

La comedie. 

L' op era, (a masculine, noun.) 1 

f Aller a la chasse. 

t Est-il a la chasse ? 

Chasser, 1. Pecher, 1. 

Aller a la peche. 

S'ennuyer a la peche. 

Toute la journee. 

Toute la matinee. 

Toute la soiree. 2 

Toute la nuit. 

Toute l'annee. 3 

Toute la semaine. 

Toute la societe. 



* All nouns ending in a are of the masculine gender, except sepia, sepia ; 
and talva, a tumor, which are feminine. 

1 The words day, moaning, and evening, are expressed by jour, matin, and 
soir, when we speak of s. part of them, and by journee, matinee, and soiree, 
when their whole duration is to be expressed. Ex. Il vient me voir tous 
les jours, he comes to see me every day ; j'ai reste ckez mol, toute la journee, 
I stayed at home all the day long ; je me promene tous les matins pendant 
une heure, I take an hour's walk every morning ; il a phi toute la matinee, 
it has been raining all the morning ; j'irai vous voir demain au soir, I shall 
call upon you to-morrow evening ; ou passerez-vous la soiree ? where shall 
you spend the evening ? 

3 Year is expressed by an when we wish to express one or more units of 
a twelvemonth, and by annee when it is considered as a twelvemonth in its 
duration. Ex. Il y a six ans que mon frire ne m'a ecrit, it is six years 
since my brother wrote to me ; une annee heureuse est celle que Von passe 
ians ennui tt sans infirmite, a happy year is that which is spent without 
tediousness or infirmity. 
25 



290 TIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 

aii of «««« 5 Tout a lafois. 

All at once. < „ 

( Tout a coup. 



Suddenly, all of a sudden. 

This week. 

This year. 

Last week. 

Next week. 

Every woman. 

Once, one time, every time. 

Every week. 

A table. This mahogany table. 



Soudainement. 

Cette semaine. 

Cette annee. 

La semaine passee. 

La semaine prochaine. 

Toutes les femmes. 

Une fois, toutes les fois, chaque foia 

Toutes les semaines. 

Une table. Cette table d' acajou. 



Cinquante-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Venez-vous de la campagne pour aller a la banque ? Oui 7 j'ai 
dessein de changer un billet de banque en argent. — Trez-vous a la 
bourse avant de retourner a la campagne ? Non, mais j'irai acheter 
quelque chose pour aller a la peche. Aimez-vous la peche ? J'aime 
assez a pecher. Pechez-vous toute la journee ? Non, nous pechons 
toute la matinee ou toute la soiree. — Qui va a Pecole de chez vous? 
Jean va a Pecole d' Anglais et de Francais, Sophie a Pecole de danse 
et de chant, et Frederic ne va a aucune. — Qu'allez-vous faire cette 
semaine a la campagne? Nous allons couper notre grain. — Vos 
cousins vont-ils en Californie la semaine prochaine ? lis n ; iront que 
dans deux semaines. Leurs femmes et leurs filles iront-elles avec 
eux ? Non, elles n'iront pas. — N'avez-vous paj nettoye mes bas de 
soie, mes pantalons, mon habit bleu, et mon gilet blanc ? Non, pas 
encore, je ne peux pas faire tout a la fois. On ne peut pas faire 
tout a la fois, c'est vrai ; mais je croyais que vous aviez eu assez de 
temps pour faire chaque chose a son tour. 

I hear a noise in the cellar; who is in it ? The old dumb woman, 
I suppose. — What does she want from (dans) the cellar? She wants 
some wood or coal. — I have your steel fork; have you mine? I 
have not yours, but hers, and Henry's is on the table, in the other 
room. — Which table ? The mahogany table. — Where is your mo- 
ther 1 She is at church. — Is your sister gone to school ? She is. — 
Does your mother often go to church ? She goes every morning 
and every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to 
church? She goes as soon as she gets up. — At what o'clock does 
she get up ? She gets up at sunrise. — Dost thou go to school, to- 
day? I do. — What dost thou learn at school? I learn to read, 
write, and speak there. — Where is your good mother? She is gone 
to shop (50 3 ) with my little sister. — Do your sisters go this evening 
to the opera? No, Madam- they go to the dancing and singing 
school. — Do they not go to the French school? They go in the 



FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



291 



morning, but not {metis non) in the evening. — Is your father gone a 
hunting? He has not been able to go a hunting, for he has a cold. 
— Do you like to go a hunting? I like to go a fishing better than a 
hunting. — Is your father still in the country 1 Yes, Madam ; he is 
still there. — What does he do there ? He goes a hunting and a fish- 
ing. — Did you hunt in the country? I hunted the whole day. — How 
long did you stay with my mother? I stayed with her the whole 
evening. — Is it long since you were at the castle ? I was there last 
week. — Did you find many people there ? I found only three per- 
sons there, the French teacher, his wife, and their daughter, who 
dances so well. 



Your aunt. 

Your niece. 

Your cousins. 

Any person. 

The earache. 

The heartache. 

His sister has a violent headache. 



Vocabulaire. 2cle Sec. 

Madame votre tante. 

Mademoiselle votre niece. 

Mesdemoiselles vos cousines. 

Toute personne. (55 3 , N. 1.) 

t Le mal d'oreille. 

t Le mal de cceur. 

t Sa sceur a un violent mal de tete. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Possessifs Absolus, Feminin. 



Singular. 
Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) 

Ours, yours, theirs. 

Plural. 
Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) 

Ours, (0. 9, 4. 1 ; yours, theirs. 
Were you doing ? (.imperfect.) I was. 
What were you saying ? I was not 

saying anything. 
Have you my pen or hers ? 
I was saying that I had hers. 
What do you wish to send to your 

aunt? 
I wish to send her a tart. 
Will you send her some fruit also ? 

I will send her some. 
Have you sent the books to my sis- 
ters ? 
I have sent them to them. 



The ache, pain, 
Th3 tar;. 
The peach, 
The s'.rawberry, 
The cherry, 
The newspaper, 
the gasette, 



la douleur. 
la tourte. 
la peche. 
la fraise. 
la cerise. 

la gazette. 



Singulier. 
La mienne, la tienne, la sienne. 
Lanotre, la votre, la leur. 

Pluriel. 
Lesmiennes, lestiennes, lessiennes. 
Les notres, les votres, les leurs. 
Faisiez-vous ? (imparfait) Jefaisais. 
Que disiez-vous ? Je ne disais 

rien. ■ 
Avez-vous ma plume ou la sienne ? 
Je disais que j'avais la sienne. 
Que voulez-vous envoyer a votre 

tante ? 
Je veux lui envoyer une tourte. 
Voulez-vous lui envoyer aussi des 

fruits ? 
Je veux lui en envoyer. 
Avez-vous envoye les livres a mea 

sceurs ? 
Je les leur ai envoyes. 
The aunt, la tante. 

The female cousin, la cousine. 
The niece, la niece. 

The maid-servant, la servante. 
The female relation, la pnrente. 
The female neighbor, la voisine- 
The female cook, la cuisiniere. 



292 



FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



The merchandise, 

(goods,) la marchandise. 

What was you doing ? I was making 

a cherry tart for my niece. 
Were you telling the maid-servant to 

fasten the windows ? I was. 



The brother-in-law, le beau-frere. 

The sister-in-law. la belle-sceur. 
Que faisiez-vous ? Je faisais une 

tourte aux cerises pour ma niece. 
Disiez-vous a la servante de fermer 

les fenetres ? Je le lui disais. 



Cinqttante-sixieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Mile., votre niece est-elle a la maison? Je ne sais pas. Je vais 
envoyer la servante pour voir si elle est dans sa chambre. N'im- 
porte; je n'ai pas le temps de m'arreter a present. Voulez-vous 
avoir la bonte de lui presenter ces peches, en mon nom? Oh! 
elles sont superbes ! Je vous remercie, en son nom. Mais a pre- 
sent que j 7 y pense, comment se porte Madame votre belle-SGBur? 
J ; etais chez elle hier soir. Elle se porte bien, merci. Presentez-lui 
mes compliments quand vous la reverrez. Je n ; y manquerai, pas. 
J 7 ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Adieu, M. — La parente du general 
a-t-elle mal d'oreille ? Mai d'oreille ! Non, elle n 7 a pas mal 
d ; oreille. Pourquoi le croyiez-vous ? — La cuisiniere de notre voisine 
rPa-t-elle pas envoye une tourte aux cerises a notre petite fille, cette 
semaine ? Si fait, elle lui en a envoye une ; non pas cette semaine, 
mais la semaine passee. — Que faisiez-vous Pannee passee? J'etais 
marchand. — N ; etes-vous pas Passocie de votre beau-frere? Je rPai 
point de beau-frere, de sorte que je ne puis pas etre son associe. — 
On irPa dit que votre belle-soeur avait une excellente cuisiniere, 
est-ce vrai? On en trouve a peine une bonne, mais la sienne 
Pest. En etes-vous sure % Oui, du moins ma belle-sceur le dit. 

Are these girls as good (sage) as their brothers ? They are better 
than they. — Can your sisters speak German ? They cannot, but 
they are learning it. — Have you brought anything to your mother? 
I brought her some good fruit and a fine tart. — What has your niece 
brought you ? She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, 
and good peaches. — Do you like peaches? I like them much. — 
How many peaches has your neighbor (fem.) given you? She has 
given me more than twenty. — Have you eaten many cherries, this 
year? I have. — Did you give any to your little niece ? I gave her 
so many that she cannot eat them all. — Why have you not given 
any to your good neighbor? (fem.) I wished to give her some, but 
she would not take any, because she does not like cherries. 

Were there any pears (la poire) last year? There were not many. 
— Has your cousin (fem.) any strawberries ? She has so many that 
she cannot eat them all. — Do you expect to see your niece, to-day? 
I hope to see her, for she has promised me to dine with us. — 1 
admire (admirer) that family, (la fnmiHe,) for the father is the king, 



FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 



293 



and the mother is the queen of it. The children and the servants 
are the subjects (le sujet) of the state. (Vet at.) The tutors of the 
children are the ministers, who share ( partager) with the king and 
queen the care (le soin) of the government, (le gouvernement.) The 
good education (V education, fem.) which is given to children (Obs. 
101 — 2) is the crown, (la couronne) of monarchs, (le monarque.) 

Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. 

Obs. 136. The three substantives, auteur, author ; peintre, painter ; poete, 
poet, are of the masculine gender only, and are used for both sexes. 



Elle est poete. 

Est-elle peintre ? 

Elle est auteur. 

Louer, 1. 

Avez-vous deja loue une chambre? 

? Convenir* de quelque chose. 

Convenez-vous de cela? 
J'en conviens. 

Convenez-vous de votre faute ? 
J'en conviens. 

Je conviens que c'est une faute. 
Avouer, 1. 

Confesser, 1. 

Tant. 

Elle a tant de chandelles qu'elle ne 

peut pas les brulet toutes. 
t S'enrhumer, 1. 
t Rendre malade. 



She is a poetess. 

Is she a painter ? 

She is an author. 

To hire, to let. 

Have you already hired a room ? 

To admit or grant a thing. 

To confess a thing. 

Do you grant that ? 

I do grant it. 

Do you confess your fault ? 

I confess it. 

I confess it to be a fault. 

To confess, to avow, to own, to ac- 
knowledge. 

To confess. 

So much, so many. 

She has so many candles that she 
cannot burn them all. 

To catch a cold. 

To make sick. 

Obs. 137. To make, before an adjective, must be translated by: rendre. 

If you eat so much it will make youl Si vous mangez tant, cela vous ren- 
sick. dra malade. 

Obs. 138. When the English pronoun it relates to a preceding circum- 
stance, it is translated by cela; when to a following circumstance, by il. 



Does it suit you to lend your gun ? 
It does not suit me to lend it. 
It does not suit me. 
Where did you catch a cold ? 

caught a cold in going from the 

opera. 
To have a cold. 
1 he cold, the cough. 
I have a cold in my head. 
You have a cold on your breast. 
The brain, the chest. 
25* 



Vous convient-il de preter votre fusil? 

II ne me convient pas de le preter. 

Cela ne me convient pas. 

t Ou vous etes-vous enrhume ? 

t Je me suis enrhume en sortant de 

l'opera. 
t Etre enrhume. 
Le rhume, la toux. 
t J'ai un rhume de cerveau. 
t Vous avez un rhume de poitrine. 
Le cerveau, la poitrine. 



294 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 

Has she not a bad cough ? I N'a-t-elle pas une mauvaise toux ? 

Yes, she has (one). I Si fait, elle en a une mauvaise. 

Cinqtjante-sixieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

Avez-vous bien dormi la nuit passee ? Non, je n'ai pas bien dormi 
du tout. On a fait tant de bruit que eel a m ; a empeche de dormir. 
Ou avez-vous passe la soiree hier ? Je Pai passee chez mon beau- 
frere. Y avez-vous vu votre belle-sceur ? Je Py ai vue. Comment 
se porte-t-elle ? Elle se porte mieux qu'a Pordinaire. Avez-vous 
joue ? Nous n'avons pas joue, pas menus aux echecs: mais nous 
avons lu de bons livres; car ma belle-sceuf aime mieux lire que de 
jouer. — Avez-vous lu la gazette de ee matin ? Je Pai lue. Y a-t-il 
quelque chose de nouveau dedans ? Ilya toujours dunouveau; mais 
rien de bien interessant. Que dit-on du roi et de la reine ? Celui-la 
est occupe du soin du gouvernement, et celle-ci du soin de safamille. 
N'etait-elle pas a la campagne quand vous y etiez? Non, elle n ; y 
etait pas alors; mais elle y etait la semaine derniere. — Sa fille est 
interessante, n'est-ce pas ? C 7 est ce que je disais. Le commis di- 
sait-il ou faisait-il quelque chose % II disait quelque chose, mais, il 
ne faisait rien. Qui faisait quelque chose ? Charlotte faisait une 
couronne de cerises. 

Why do your sisters not go to the play ? They cannot go thither 
because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Where 
did they catch a cold? They caught a cold in going from the opera 
last night. — Does it suit your sister to eat some peaches ? It does 
not suit her to eat any, for she has already eaten a good many, and 
if she eats so much it will make her ill. — Have you already hired a 
room'? I have already hired one. — Where have you hired it? I 
have hired it in William-street, (dans la rue or rue Guillaume,) num- 
ber one hundred and fifty-two. — At whose house (chez qui) have you 
hired it? At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. 
— For whom has your father hired a room ? He has hired one for 
his son, who has just arrived from France. — Why have you not kept 
your promise ? (la promesse.) Which promise % I do not remember 
what I promised you. — Had you not promised us to take us to the 
concert last Thursday? I confess that I was wrong in promising 
you; the concert, however, has not taken place. 

Does your brother confess his fault ? He confesses it. — What d. es 
your uncle say to (de) that note? He says that it is written very 
well, but he admits that he has been wrong in sending it to the cap- 
tain. — Do you confess your fault now? I confess it to be a fault. — 
Where have you found my coat? I have found it in the blue room 
up stairs. The front room ort3h« lacl mm? The back room. (Obs. 



FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 



295 



61.) — Will you hang my hat on the tree ? I will hang it thereon. — 
How are you to-day ] I am not very well. — What is the matter with 
you? I have a violent headache and a cold. — Where did you catch 
a cold ? I caught it last night, in going from the play. — How old is 
your niece? She is about 10 years old. 



FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 57th.^inquante-septiemeLegon,b7me. 

Questionner, 1 (21*), la question. 
La cravate, la voiuure, la maison. 
La lettre, la famille, la promesse. 
La jambe, lajambe droite, la gauche. 
Cette gorge. Ce mal de gorge. 
Nous avons tous mal a la gorge. 
La viande. De la viande salee. 

De la viande fraiehe. 
Du bceuf frais. De l'eau fraiehe. 

De bons aliments. 

Les entremets. 

Du laitage. 



To question, the question. 

The cravat, carriage, house. 
The letter, family, promise. 

The leg, the right leg, the left. 
This throat. This sore throat. 

We have all a sore throat. 



The meat. 
Fresh meat. 
Fresh beet. 
The food. 
The dish. 
Salt meats. 



Salt meat. 



Cool water. 

Some good victuals 

The dainty dishes. 

Milk-food. 
To march, to walk, to step. 

Obs. 1381. Marcher must not be mistaken for se promener. (44 1 .) 
former means to walk, and the latter to walk for pleasure. 



L' aliment. 
Le mets. 
Des mets sales. 
Marcher, 1. 



The 



I have walked a good deal to-day. 
I have been walking in the garden 

with my mother. 
To walk or travel a mile. 
To walk or travel a league. 
To walk a step. 
To take a step, (meaning to take 

measures.) 
To go on a journey. 
To make a speech. 
A piece of business. 
An affair. 

To transact business. 
To meddle with something. 
What are you meddling with ? 
I am meddling with my own business. 
I do not attend to it any longer. 
That traveler always meddles with 

otfier people's business. 
[ do not meddle with other people's 

business. 
Others, other people. 



J'ai marche beaucoup aujourd'hui. 
Je me suis promene dans le jardin 

avec ma mere, 
t Faire un mille. 
t Faire une lieue. 
t Faire un pas. 
t Faire une demarche. 

t Faire un voyage, 
t Faire un discours. 

t Une affaire. 

Faire des affaires. 

t Se meler de quelque chose. 

De quoi vous melez-vous? 

Je me mele de mes propres affaires. 

Je ne m'en mele plus. 

Ce voyageur se mele toujours des 

affaires des autres. 
Je ne me mele pas des affaires d'au- 

trui. 
Autrui, (indefinite pronoun, without 

gender or plural.) 



296 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 

Did you wish, want ? I did, (imperf.) | Vouliez-vous ? (147) Je voulais, (imp.) 

TT ; ,. , r . . . C t II se mele de peindre. 

He employs himself in painting. | + n s , occupe de peinture . 

The art of painting. | La peinture. 

Chemistry. The chemist. | La chimie. Le chimiste. 

CiNQUANTE-SE:r-..ii<!ME Th£mf. Ire S*o. 

On m'a dit que vous vouliez me ruest.?r>r *~? « m i, s'est yrai ; j'ai 
une question a vous faire. I e qui est la lettre one vous avez recue^ 
La lettre que j ; ai recue ! Ah ! c 7 est un pecret. Que vous ne voulez 
pas me confier, n ; est-ce pas'? OuL c ; est un secret que j'aime 
mieux garder. Eh, bien ! gardez-le. — La voiture est devant la porte 
de la maison, etes-vous pret a partir ? Pret ; mais non, je ne savais 
pas que la voiture allait venir sitot. — Nous croyions que vous le 
saviez. Qu ? avez-vous encore a faire ? J'ai a mettre ma cravate. 
C'est PafTaire d ; une minute. L ; afTaire d'une minute ! pas avec moi. 
Paime a avoir une cravate bien mise ? bien arrangee. Alors ne 
parlez plus et faites-le vite. Eh, bien ! Laissez-moi; allez-vous-en, 
(go away.) Je vais en bas, je descends, pour preparer votre chapeau, 
vos gants, et votre parapluie. Non, non, laissez tout cela et melez- 
vous de vos propres affaires. Si je me mele des votres, c'est que je 
vous aime. 

Will you dine with us to-day % With much pleasure. — What have 
you for dinner? {quels mets avez-vous?) We have good soup, some 
fresh and salt meat, and some milk-food. — Do you like milk-food? 
I like it better than (prefer er a) all other food. — Are you ready to 
dine ? I am. — Do you intend to set out soon % I intend setting out 
next week. — Do you travel alone? (seul?) No, Madam, I travel 
with my uncle. — Do you travel on foot or in a carriage ? (42 2 .) We 
travel in a carriage. — Did you meet any traveler in your last journey 
(dans votre dernier voyage) to Berlin ? We met many travelers. — 
How do you intend to spend your time (49 3 ) this summer? I intend 
to take a short (petit) journey. 

Did you walk much in your last journey ? I like much to walk, 
but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. Did he not wish to walk ? 
He wished to walk at first, (tfabord,) but he wished to get into the 
coach (monter en voiture) after having taken a few steps, so that I 
did not walk much. — Does he no longer do any business? He no 
longer does any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle 
with your business? He does not generally (ordinairement) meddle 
with other people's business, but he meddles with mine because he 
loves me. — Has your master made you recite your lesson to-day ? 
He has made me recite it. — Did you know it? I knew it pretty 
well. — Have you also done some exercises? I have done some, 
but I have not quite finished my lesson. 



FITTY-SE VENTH LESSON. (2.) 



297 



Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



That art is easy. 



The art. 

It is .strange. It is a pity, 
To employ one* s self in. 
To concern some one. 



J.? art. Cet art-la est facile 

Etrange, etonnant. 

C'est etrange. C'est dommage. 

S'occuper, 1, de or d. 

Concerner, 1, or regarder, 1, quel* 

qu'un. 
Regarder, 1, quelqu'un. 
t Je n'aime pas a me meler de ce 

qui ne me regarde pas. 
Cela ne regarde personne. 
t Se soucier, 1, de. S'en soucier. 

O s. 139. Se soucier de, is not frequent Jy used affirmatively. 

Do you wish to go to Italy ? | Avez-vous envie d'aller en Italie ? 

I have no great wish to go. I do not > , T , 

care about it. I'd rather not. J t Je ne m en soueie pas. 



To look at some one. 

i do not like to meddle with things 

that do not concern me. 
That concerns nobody 
To rare about. To care about it. 



She used to like dancing, but she 

cares no more about it. 
We'd rather not sing. 
To attract. 

Loadstone attracts iron. 
Her singing attracts me. 
To charm. To enchant. 

I am charmed with it. 
The beauty. The goodness. 

Obs. 140. All nouns ending in te, and expressing properties or qualities, 
are feminine. 



Elle aimait (§ 147) la danse, mais elle 

ne s'en soueie plus. 
Nous ne nous soucionspasdecAarcter. 
Attirer, 1. 

L'aimant attire le fer. 
Son chant m'attire. 
Charmer, 1. Enchanter, 1. 

J'en suis charme, {fern, ee.) 
La beaute. La bonte. 



The harmony, the voice, the power. 

To repeat. 

The repetition, the rehearsal. 

The wisdom. Study. 

The lord. Our Lord. 

Amemorandum,abill. A nightingale. 

All beginnings are difficult. 

To create. 

The Creator, the creation. 

The fear of the Lord. 

The benefit. Heaven. The earth. 

Solitude. The meeting. 

Flour, meal. Some wheat. 

The mill. Marriage. Death. 



L'harmonie, 
Repeter, 1. 
La repetition. 
La sagesse. 
Le seigneur. 
Un memoire. 



la voix, te pouvoir. 



L'etude. 

Notre Seigneur. 

Unrossignol. 
Tous les commencements sont diffi- 

ciles. 
Creer, 1. 

Le Createur, la creation. 

La crainte du Seigneur. 
Le bienfait. Le ciel. La terre. 
La solitude. L'assemblee. 

La farine. Du froment. 

Le moulin. Le mariage. La mort. 



Cinquante-septl&me ThEme. 2de Sec. 

N ; admirez-vous pas la beaute de cette dame ? Si fait, mais j'ad- 
mire encore plus sa bonte. — Preferez-vous la bonte a la beaute' 1 



298 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 

Saris doute. Qui ne la prefere pas'? Beaucoup de personnes. — La 
farine de votre boulanger est-elle bonne? Elle est quelque fois 
bonne et quelque fois sure, (sour.) — Ou se tenaient lears asse.vahlee- ? 
Leurs assemblies se tenaient dans la solitude des bois. MadaKie 
de Beaumont va-t-elle au concert? Non, elle a cede sa place a sa 
niece. Autrefois elle aimait le chant, a present elle ne s 7 en soucie 
plus. — N 7 iront-elles pas au bal ? Non, elles n 7 iront pas, car elles ne 
se soucient plus de la danse. De quoi te soucies-tu? Je ne mt 
soucie pas de grand 7 chose, (I am indifferent to almost everything,}* 
Ou est le maitre de chant ? II est a la repetition. — Combien de repe 
titions y a-t-il par semaine? II y en a une tous les matins. L'art d<3 pem 
dre est-il facile ? Demandez a Mile. Caroline, qui s'occupe de la pei; 
ture. — Labonte est un bienfait du ciel, n 7 est-ce pas'* Oui. C 7 est un 
bienfait que le Createur a accorde a la terre. Avez-vcus appris le 
manage de votre cousin? Oui, il m 7 en a informe. C 7 est dommage, 
n 7 est-ce pas? Je ne dis rien: mais je n 7 en pense pas moins. La 
mort du capitaine est etrange, n 7 est-ce pas? Oui, elle est tres- 
etrange. 

What have you been doing (§ 145) at school, to-day? We have 
been listening to our professor. — What did he say new and interest- 
ing? He made a long {grand) speech on the goodness of God. 
After saying (40*) "Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good 
memory is a great benefit of God,' 7 he said, " God is the Creator of 
heaven and earth; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wis- 
dom. 77 — What are you doing all day in this garden ? I am walking 
in it. — What is there in it that attracts you ? {qu'est-ce qui vous y 
attire?) The singing of the birds attracts me, {m J y attire.) — Are 
there any nightingales in it ? There are some in it, and the har- 
mony of their singing enchants me. — Have those nightingales more 
power over (sur) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of 
your tender (tendre) mother, who loves you so much ? I confess 
the harmony of the singing of these little birds has more power 
over me than the most tender words {que les paroles les plus tendres) 
of my dearest friends. 

How does your niece amuse herself (or pass her time) in her 
solitude? She reads a good deal, she plays on the piano, she is 
fond of painting, and she writes letters to her absent mother. — How 
does your uncle amuse himself in his solitude? He used to find 
(§ 147) much pleasure in society, in the world; but now he does not 
care about it ; he is only fond of fishing and chemistry. Why do 
you not call on Frederick? What is that to you? (qu'est-ce que cela 
vous fait) I beg, (je vous prie?) I do not generally meddle with 
things that do not concern me ; but T love you so much that I con- 



FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



299 



cern myself much about (que je mHnteresse beaucoup a) what you are 
doing. — Does any one trouble his head about you? No one troubles 
his head about me, for I am not worth the trouble, (je rien vaux pas 
la peine.) 



FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 58th.— Cinquante-huitieme Legem, 58me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 
SECOND FUTURE.— Futur Passe ou Compose. 
The Futur passe, like the second future, is formed from the future of the 
auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. Ex. 



I shall have loved. 

Thou wilt have loved. 

He, she, or one will have loved. 

We shall have loved. 

You will have loved. 

They will have loved. 

I shall have come. 

Thou wilt have come. 

He will have come. 

She will have come. 

We shall have come. 

You will have come. 

They will have come. 

They will have come, fern. 

I shall have been praised. 

Thou wilt have been praised. 

He will have been praised. 

She will have been praised. 

We shall have been praised. 

You will have been praised. 

They will have been praised. 

They (/em.) will have been praised. 

I shall have risen. 

Thou shalt have gone to bed. 

Shall he have undressed himself? 

She will not have dressed herself. 

Will any one have praised one's self? 

We shall have made a mistake. 

Shall you have taken a walk ? 

Shall they not have sat down ? 

Shall they not have sat down ? 



X On 
s.> 



seravenu. 



J'aurai aime. 

Tu auras aime. 

II, elle, ou on au r a aime'. 

Nous aurons aime*. 

Vous aurez aime. 

lis {fern, elles) auront aime. 

Je serai venu, Fern, venue. 

Tuserasvenu, " venue. 

II sera venu. 

Elle sera venue. 

Nous serons venus, Fern, venues. 

Vous serez venus, 

lis seront venus. 

Elles seront venues. 

J'aurai etc loue, Fern, louee. 

Tu auras ete loue, " louee. 

II aura ete loue. 

Elle aura ete louee. 

Nous aurons ete loues, fern, louees. 

Vous aurez ete loues, " louees. 

lis auront ete loues. 

Elles auront ete louees. 

Je me serai leve, fern, leve'e. 

Tu te seras couche, " couchee. 

Se sera-t-il deshabille ? 

Elle ne se sera pas habillee. 

Se sera-t-on loue ? 

Nous nous serons trompes. 

Vous serez- vous promene ? Csing.) 1 

Ne se seront -ils pas assis ? 

Ne se seront-elles pas assises ? 



1 It is hardly necessary to remark, that if one person only is spoken to, 
1. e. when the second person plural, vous, is employed instead of the second 
person singular tu, no a is put to the past participle. 



300 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



To have left. 

When I have paid for the horse I shall 

have only ten crowns left. 
How much money have you left ? 
I have one franc left. 
I have only one franc left. 
How much has your brother left ? 
He has one crown left. 
How much has your sister left ? 
She has only three sous left. 
How much have your brothers left ? 
They have one louis left. 



t Hester, 1. 

Quand j'aurai paye le cheval il ne 

me restera que dix ecus. 
Combien d' argent vous reste-t-il f 
II me reste un franc. 
II ne me reste qu'un franc. 
Combien reste-t-il a votre frere ? 
II lui reste un ecu. 
Combien reste-t-il a votre sceur ? 
II ne lui reste que trois sous. 
Combien reste-t-il a vos freres ? 
II leur reste un louis. 



Obs. 141. In English the present (Obs. 106, 46 3 ) or the perfect is used 
after the conjunctions, when, as soon as, or after, when futurity is to be 
expressed ; but in French the future must in such instances always be 
employed. 

Cinqtjante-huitieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Lorsque vous serez venue nous voir, nous irons vous voir, car 
vous savez que vous nous devez une visite. Comptez-vous les 
visites de cette maniere ? Non, c'est seulement pour vous rappeler 
qu'il y a long-temps que nous n 7 avons eu le plaisir de vous voir 
chez nous. — Aussitot qu'ils auront etc apportes, envoyez-les-moi, 
entendez-vous ? Je n ; y manquerai pas. — Quand irez-vous voir les 
De Courci? (§ 140 — 5.) Nous passerons chez eux aussitot que nous 
serons informes de leur retour. — Charles ira-t-il se promener a cheval 
apres qu ; il aura dine ? Non, il ira faire une visite a son oncle 
dont la femme est morte, (is dead.) Sa femrae est morte, et de 
quoi? Elle est morte du cholera. C'est dommage. C ; etait une 
tres-bonne dame. — Le marchand a-t-il envoye le baril de farine ? 
Non, il ne Pa pas encore envoye. Quand il Paura envoye. faites du 
pain. Pen ferai aussitot que la farine sera venue. — Saviez-vous que 
Thomas est marie ? (married?) Non,je ne le savais pas; mais je 
savais que Marthe est mariee, et bien mariee. Avec qui est-elle 
mariee? Elle est mariee avec M. Dubois. Le marchand ? Non, 
Pavocat. J'en suis charmee. 

Will your parents go into the country to-morrow ? They will not 
go, for it is too dusty. — Shall we take a walk, to-day? We will not 
take a walk, for it is soon going to rain. — Will it rain before 12 
o'clock ? I believe it will. — Do you see the castle of my relation 
behind (derriere) yonder mountain ? (cette montagne-ld?) I see it. — 
Shall we go in? We will go in, if you like. — Will you go 'nto that 
room ? I shall not go into it, for it is smoky. — I wish you a good 
morning, Madam, (26 2 .) — Will you not come in ? Will you not sit 
d un? I will sit down upon that large arm-chair. — Will you teli 



FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



301 



me what has become of your brother ? I will tell you. — Where is 
your sister 1 Do you not see her ? She sits upon the bench. — Is 
your father seated upon the bench? No ; he sits upon the sofa of 
mahogany. 

Hast thou spent all th; money ? T have not spent all. — How much 
fiast thou left? I have not much left • I have but five francs left. — 
How much money have thy sisters left? They have but three 
crowns left. — Have you money enough left to pay your tailor? I 
have enough left to pay him • but if I pay him I shall have but 
little left. — How much money will your brothers have left ? They 
will have a hundred crowns left. — When will you go to Italy? I 
shall go as soon as (aussitot que) I have learned Italian. — When will 
your bi others go to France? They will go as soon as they know 
French. — When will they learn it? They will learn it when they 
have found a good master. — How much money shall we have left 
when we have paid for our horses? When we have paid for them, 
we shall have only a hundred crowns left. 

Vocabtjlaire. 2de Sec. 

Quand ils auront paye le tailleur, il 



When they have paid the tailor, they | 
will have a hundred francs left. 

When I am at my aunt's, will you ! 
come to see me ? 

After you have done writing, will you 
take a turn with me ? 



You will play when you have finished 

your exercise. 
What will you do when you have 

dined ? 
When I have spoken to your brother, 

I shall know what I have to do. 

Idioms 
It does. 



Does it rain ? 
It rains. 

Does it snow ? It does not. 

It snows. 
Is it muddy ? 
It is muddy. 

Is it muddy out of doors ? 
It is* very muddy. 
Is it dusty ? 
It is very dusty. 
Is it smoky ? 
It is too smoky. 

Out of doors. Out of the window. 
26 



leur restera cent francs. 
Quand je serai chez ma tante, vien- 

drez-vous me voir ? (Obs. 106, 46 3 .) 
Apres que vous aurez Jini d'ecrire 

viendrez-vous faire un tour avec 

moi ? 
Vous jouerez lorsque vous aurez jini 

votre theme. 
Que ferez-vous quand vous aurez 

dine? 
Quand j'aurai parle a votre frere, je 

saurai ce que j'ai a faire. 

with Faire. 

t Fait-il de la pluie ? II en fait. 

t II fait de la pluie. 

t Fait-il de la neige ? II n'en fait pas. 

t II fait de la neige. 

t Fait-il de la boue ? 

t II fait de la boue. 

t Fait-il sale dehors ? 

t II fait tres-sale. 

t Fait-il de la poussiere ? 

t II fait beaucoup de poussiere. 

t Fait-il de la fumee ? 

t II fait trop de fumee. 

Dehors. Par la fenetr*. 



302 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



To enter, to go in, to come in. 

Will you go into my room ? I will 

go in. 
Will you go in ? I shall go in. 
To sit down. 
Td sit, to be seated. 
H3 is seated upon the large chair. 
She is seated upon the bench. 
To fill . . . with, fill up . . . with. 
Fill this bottle with wine. 
What do you fill up with water ? 
What does he fill his purse with ? 
He fills his purse with money. 
The pocket. My vest pocket. 



Entrer, 1, dans. 

Voulez-vous entrer dans ma cham. 

bre ? Je veux y entrer. 
Y entrerez-vous ? J'y entrerai. 
S'asseoir,* 3. (51 2 .) 
Etre assis ; fern, assise. 
II est assis sur la grande chaise. 
Elle est assise sur le banc. 
Remplir, 2 . . . de, remplissez . . . d e. 
Remplissez cette bouteille de vin. 
Que remplissez-vous d'eau? 
De quoi remplit-il sa bourse ? 
II remplit sa bourse d'mrgent. 1 
La poche. La poche de mon gilet. 



Cinqtjante-htjitieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Ou est Mile. Emilie ? Elle est assise sur le banc sous le gros 
arbre dans le jardin. II fait tres-humide, n 7 a-t-elle pas peur de s'en- 
rhumer ? Elle craint plus la poussiere que Vhumidite, (dampness.) 
Que fera-t-il aussitot qu'il aura fini son theme ? jouera-t-il du violon ? 
Non, ii n 7 en jouera pas ; car Fhumidite a casse deux cordes (strings) 
de son violon. Quelles cordes sont-ce? Ce sont les deux plus 
petites. N ; a-t-il pas d'autres cordes? Non; mais quand il aura 
fini ? il ira en acheter. Jouerez-vous du piano quand il jouera du 
violon ? Je ne me soucie pas de jouer aujourd ? hui ; mais nous jouons 
tres-souvent ensemble. II fait de la pluie, appelez Mile. Emilie, ou 
elle sera mouillee. Vous vous trompez • ce n'est pas de la pluie, 
mais de la neige. Je crois que vous avez raison, et j'en suis bien 
fache, car il fera tres-sale dehors, il fera tres-mauvais marcher. Je 
commence a avoir froid • entrons dans mon bureau \ il y fait plus 
chaud. 

Do you gain (gagner, 53 2 ) anything by (d) that business? I do 
not gain much by it ; (3/,) but my brother gains a good deal by it. 
He fills his purse with money. — How much money have you gained 1 
I have gained only a little, but my cousin has gained much by it 
He has filled his pocket with money. — Why does that gardener not 
work ? He is a good-for-nothing fellow, for he does nothing but eat 
all the day long. He fills himself up with fresh and salt meat, so 
that he will make himself (se rendre) ill if he continues to eat so 
much. — With what (de quoi) have you filled that bottle? I -have 
filled it with wine. — Will this man take care of my horse? He will 



1 The ambiguity conveyed by: 11 remplit sa bourse a" argent, might be 
avoided by saying : Il remplit d* argent sa bourse ; but the French have not 
yet adopted the latter construction. Hence I have used the former. 






FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 



303 



take care of it. — Who will take care of my servant % The landlord 
will take care of him. 

Does your servant take care of your horses % He does take ( are 
of them, and my cousin's. — Is he taking care of your clothes % He 
takes care of them ; for he brushes them every morning. — Have you 
ever drunk French wine ? I have never drunk any. — Is it long since 
you ate French bread ? It is almost three years since I ate any. — 
Have you hurt my brother-in-law ? I have not hurt him, but he has 
cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with ! With the knife 
which you have lent him. — Is your father arrived at last? Every- 
body says that he is arrived, but I have not seen him yet.~ >-Has the 
physician hurt your son ? He has hurt him. for he has cut his finger. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



Have you come quite alone ? 

No, I have brought all my men along 

with me. 
To bring. 



Etes-vous venu tout seul ? 

Non, j'ai amene tout mon monde. 

Amener, 1. 



Obs. 142. Amener must, in French, not be mistaken for apporter. The 
former is used when the object can walk, and the latter when it cannot. Ex. 
He has brought all his men along 

with him. 
Have you brought your brother along 

with you ? 



I have brought him along with me. 
Have you told the groom to bring me 

the horse ? 
The groom, the ostler. 
Are you bringing me my books ? 
I am bringing them to you. 
To take, to carry. 



II a amene tout son monde. 
Avez-vous amene votre frere ? 



Je l'ai amene. 

Avez-vous dit au palefrenier de m'a- 

mener le cheval ? 
Le palefrenier, le valet d'ecurie. 
M'apportez-vous mes livres ? 
Je vous les apporte. 
Metier, 1. 



06s. 143. The same distinction must be observed with regard to mener 
and porter, as with amener and apporter. 



Will you take that dog to the stable ? 

I will take it thither. 

Are you carrying this gun to my 

father ? I carry it to him. 

The cane, stick. The stable. 

To come down, to go down. 
To go down into the well. 
To go or come down the hill. 
To go down the river. 



Voulez-vous mener ce chien a 1' 

curie ? 
Je veux l'y mener. 
Portez-vous ce fusil a mon pere ? 
Je le lui porte. 
La canne. L'ecurk 

Descendre, 4. 
Descendre dans le puits. 
Descendre la montagne. 
Descendre la riviere. 1 



1 The verb descendre takes the auxiliary avoir in its compound tenses 
when, as in these examples, it is construed with the accusative ; otherwise, 



304 



FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 



To alight from one's horse, to dis- 
mount. 

To alight, to get out. 

To go up, to mount, to ascend. 

To go up the mountain. 

Where is your brother gone to ? 

He has ascended the hill. 

To mount the horse. 

To get into the coach. 

To get on board the ship. 

To desire, to beg, to pray, to request. 

Ask him to do it. 

Ask your brother to come down. Do, 
(I beg you would,) pray. 

The river, (if it empties in a sea.) 

The river, (empties in another river.) 

The river Schuylkill empties in the 
Delaware. 

The beard. The stream, torrent. 



Descendre de cheval. (52 s .) 

Descendre de voiture. 

Monter, 1. 

Monter la montagne. 

Ou votre frere est-il alle ? 

II a monte la colline. 1 

Monter a cheval. 

t Monter en voiture. 

Monter sur un vaisseau. 

Trier, 1, {de av. l'infin.) 

Priez-le de le faire. 

Priez votre frere de descendre, je 

vous en prie. 
Le fleuve, (se jette dans une mer.) 
La riviere, (se jette dans un fleu\i.) 
La riviere Schuylkill se jette dans le 

fleuve Delaware. 
La barbe. Le torrent. 

Remonter la riviere. 



To go or come up the river 

Cinquante-huitieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

Le voyageur a-t-il descendu la montagne? II a descendu la mon- 
tagne, et il a remonte le fleuve. Votre neveu est-il descendu de 
cheval pour ramasser le gant de sa compagne? Non, un voyageur 
a eu la bonte de le ramasser et de le rendre a la demoiselle. — Jouez 
Hail Columbia pour nous. Je ne me soucie pas de jouer a present. 
Ah ! jouez-le, je vous en prie. (Oh ! do. play it.) Je le ferai pour 
vous obliger; mais je ne pourrai pas bien le jouer ; je vous assure, 
car je ne suis pas en train. (I do not feel like it; in the humor.) — Qui 
est ce M. a la barbe bleue? O'est le ministre de notre eglise. Le 
palefrenier a-t-il mene le nouveau cheval a la vieille ecurie ? Oui, 
il Py a mene. Voulez-vous amener votre sceur avec vous et apporter 
son cahier de chant? Je Pamenerai, mais je n'apporterai pas son 
cahierde chant. — J ; ai oublie ma canne dans Pecurie: allez-Py cher- 
cher pour moi. Attendez-moi un instant, je reviendrai de suite. 

Has the joiner's leg been cut off? (couper?) They have cut it off 
to prevent his dying. — Are you pleased (content) with your servant? 
I am much pleased with him, for he is fit for anything, (propre d 

it takes etre. Ex. Il a descendu la montagne, he has gone down the moun- 
tain ; elle est descendue d'une famille honorable, she is descended from an 
honorable family. 

1 Monter also takes avoir when, as in these examples, it is construed with 
the acciisative, and etre when otherwise. Ex. Il est monte par degres aux 
plus hautes charges militaires, he has ascended by degrees to the highest 
military employments. 



FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 



305 



tout.) — What does he know? He knows everything, (tout.) — Can 
he ride? (monter a cheval?) He can. — Has your brother returned at 
last from England ? He has returned thence, and has brought you 
a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me ? He has. — 
What do you think (que dites-vous) of that horse? I think (je dis) 
that it is a fine and good one, (quHl est beau et 6on,) and beg you to 
lead it into the stable. — How did you spend your time yesterday'? 
I went to the concert, and afterwards (ensuite) to the play. 

When did that laborer (ouvrier) go down into the well % He went 
down into it this morning. — Has he come up again already? (remon- 
ter ?) He came up an hour ago. — Where is your brother? He is in 
his room. Tell him to come down, pray, do, (je vous en prie.) I 
will tell him so, but he is not dressed (52 2 ) yet. — Is your friend still 
(toujours) on the mountain? He has already come down. — Did you 
go down or up (remonter) the river? We went down. — Did my 
cousin speak to you before he started ? He spoke to me before he 
got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother ? I saw him before 
I went on board the ship. — Is it better to get into a coach than to go 
on board the ship ? It is not worth while to get into a coach or to 
go on board the ship, when one has no wish to travel. 



FIFTY-NINTH LESSON, 59th.— Cinquante-neuvieme Lecon. 59me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

OF THE IMPERFECT.— Be VImparfait, (§ 147.) 

For its formation and use see (§ 147). That paragraph must be carefully 
■tudied. 

Quand j' etais a Berlin, yallais sou- 
vent voir mes amis. 

Quand vous etiez a Paris, vous alliez 
souvent aux Champs- Elysees. 

A la mort de Lucrece Rome etait 
gouvernee par des rois. 

Washington etait un grand homme. 

Ciceron 6tait un grand orateur. 

Nos ancetres allaient tous les jours 
a la chasse. 

Les Romains cultivaient les arts et 
les sciences, et recompensaient le 
merite. 

Vous promeniez-vous ? 

Je ne me promenais pas. 



When I was at Berlin I often went 

to see my friends. 
When you were in Paris you often 

went to the Champs- Elysees. 
At the death of Lucretia Rome was 

governed by kings. 
Washington was a great man. 
Cicero was a great orator, (used to be.) 
Our ancestors went a hunting every 

day, (used to go.) 
The Romans cultivated the arts and 

sciences, and rewarded merit. 

Were you walking ? 
I was not walking. 
26* 



FIFTY-NINTH IESSON. (1.) 



Were you in Paris when the king 
was there ? 

I was there when he was there. 

Where were you when I was in Lon- 
don ? 

A.t what time did you breakfast when 
you were in Germany ? 

[ breakfasted when my father break- 
fasted. 

Did you work when he was working ? 

I studied when he was working. 

Some fish. Some game. 

When I lived (used to live) at my 
father's, I rose (used to rise) earlier 
than I do now. (§ 145—1.) 

When we lived in that country, we 
went a fishing often. 

When I was ill, I kept in bed all day. 

Last summer, when I was in the 
country, there was a great deal of 
fruit. 



Etiez-vous a Paris lsrsque le roi y 

etait ? 
J'y etais lorsqu'il y etait. 
Ou etiez-vous lorsque j' etais a Lon- 

dres? 
Quand dejeuniez-vous lorsque vous 

etiez en Allemagne ? 
Je dejeunais lorsque mon pere de- 

jeunait. 
Travailliez-vous lorsqu'il travaillait ? 
J'etudiais lorsqu'il travaillait. 
Du poisson. Du gibier. 

Quand je demeurais chez mon pere, 

je me levais de meilleure heure 

que je ne le fais a present. (53 1 , 

Obs. 120.) 
Quand nous demeurions dans ce 

pays- la, nous allions souvent a la 

peche. 
Quand j'etais malade, je gardais ie 

lit toute la journee. 
L'ete passe, pendant que j'etais a la 

campagne, il y avait beaucoup de 

fruit. 



Cinquante-neuvieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Qui cherchiez-vous ? Je cherchais mon petit frere, que je ne peux 
trouver ni en haut ni en bas. Si vous le cherchez encore, il faut 
aller pres du fleuve. Que fait-il la? II peche, assis sur le banc que 
vous y avez fait mettre, (had or got placed.) II n'etait pas tres-bien 
hier ; Phumidite ne le rendra-t-elle pas malade ? Pespere que non. — 
II y a a la porte un garcon qui vous demande. Faites-le entrer. 
Que me voulez-vous % Je vous apporte vos habits. Pourquoi ne les 
avez- vous pas apportes avant? lis n'etaient pas faits, de sorte que 
je ne pouvais pas les apporter; mais les voici. C 7 estbon. Mettez- 
les sur cette chaise. Quand je les aurai essayes, je passerai chez le 
tailleur. Tres-bien, M. — Vous avez appris votre lecon, pourquoi 
votre sceur ne savait-elle pas la sienne? Elle a fait une longue 
(long, fern.) promenade avec notre chere mere, de sorte qu'elle n ? a 
pas pu l'etudier. Ou ont-elles ete ? Elles ont d'abord ete pres de la 
riviere qui est derriere notre jardin, ensuite elles ont passe devant la 
grande maison neuve, dont elles ont fait le tour, et enfin, elles sont 
montees sur la montagne. Et tout cela a pied? Oui; mais je vous 
assure qu'elles etaient bien fatiguees. Je le crois. 

Were you loved when you were at Dresden ? (Dresde ?) — I was 
not hated. — Was your brother esteemed when he was in London? 



FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



307 



He was loved and esteemed.— When were you in Spain ? I was 
there when you were there.— Who was loved and who was hated ? 
Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, were loved, and those 
who were naughty, (meckcmt,) idle, and disobedient, were punished, 
hated, and despised.— Were you in Berlin when the king was there ? 
I was there when he was there.— Was your uncle in London when 
I was there ? He was there when you were there.— Where were 
you when I was at Dresden? I was in Paris.— Where was your 
father when you were in Vienna ? He was in England. 

At what time did you breakfast when you were in France ? I 
breakfasted when my uncle breakfasted.— Did you work when he 
was working ? I studied when he was working.— Did your brother 
work when you were working ? He played when I was working.— 
On what (Be quoi) lived our ancestors? They lived on nothing but 
fish and game, for they went a hunting and a fishing every day.— 
Were you ascending the river (fleuve) while it rained? Yes. we 
were ascending it while it was raining very fast; and as we had no 
umbrellas, we got very wet.— Did you often go to see your friends 
when you were at Berlin ? I went to see them often : 5 or 6 times 
a week.— Were you writing to John? I was writing to him. his 
cousin Julius, and his friend Alfred. (64— 2.)— Did you sometimes 
go to the Champs-Elysees when you were at Paris ? I often went. 
Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



A thing. The same thing. 

The same violin. The same flute. 
It is all one ; it is the same ; it makes 

no difference ; no matter, &c. 
Such. 

Such a man. Such men. 

Such a woman. Such things. 
Such. 
Such men merit esteem. 

Out. 

Out of the city, (the town.) 
Without or out of doors. Who is out? 
The church stands outside the town. 
I shall wait for you before the town 

gate. 
The town or city gate. 
The barrier, the turnpike-gate. 
Seldom, ;rarely.) Some brandy. 
The life. To get one's livelihood by. 
I get my livelihood by working. 
He gets his living by writing. 



Tine chose. La meme chose. 

Le meme violon. La meme flute. 
t Cest egal; c'est la meme chose ; 

ga nefait rien ; cela ne fait rien. 
Mas. lintel; fern. Tine telle. 
Un tel homme. De tels homines. 
Une telle femme. De telles choses. 
Pareil; fern, pareille. 
De pareils hommes meritent de 

l'estime. 
Hors de. 
Hors de la ville. 

Dehors. Qui est dehors ? 

L'eglise est hors de la ville. 
Je vous attendrai devant la porte de 

la ville. 
La porte de la ville. 
La barriere. 

Rarement. De l'eau de vie. 

La vie. Gagner sa vie a. 

Je gagne ma vie a travailler. 
II gagne sa vie a e'crire. 



308 FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



I gain my money by working. 

By what does that man get his live- 
lihood ? 

To proceed, to go on, to continue. 

He continues his speech. 

A good appetite. 

The narrative, the tale. 

The edge, the border, the shore. 

The edge of the brook. 

The sea-shore. 

On the sea-shore. 

The shore, the water-side, the coast, 
the bank. 

People or folks. 

They are good folks. 



Je gagne mon argent a travailler. 
A quoi cet homme gagne-t-il sa vie f 

Continuer, 1, (de or a, av. l'inf.) 

II continue son discours. 

Un bon appetit. 

Le conte, (la narration.) 

Le bord. 

Le bord du ruisseau. 

Le bord de la mer. 

Au bord de la mer. 

Le rivage, la rive. 

Gens. 

t Ce sont de bonnes gens. 



Obs. 144. The adjectives that precede gens must be feminine, those tlaat 
follow it, masculine. 

Those people are despised. I Ces gens-la sont meprises. 

Those wicked people are despised. I Ces mechantes gens sont meprises. 

Cinqtjante-neuvieme ThJIme. 2de Sec. 

Qui est dehors? Personne n 7 est dehors. — Thomas, fermez les 
portes et les volets. — Le marchand de vin a-t-il envoye Peau-de-vie? 
Non, il n'a pas encore pu Penvoyer, parce que son garcon est ma- 
lade. A-t-il bu trop d'eau-de-vie ? C'est cela meme, (the very thing.) 
— Ou serez-vous oblige d'attendre votre neveu et votre niece? Nous 
les attendrons : elle, a la barriere, lui, a Patelier. — Les attendiez-vous 
au musee hier? Non, je les attendais au pont couvert. — Faisait-il 
de Forage alors % Oui ; il en faisait. Le tonnerre grondait, il pleuvait 
et il grelait. Sont-ils venusapresPorage? lis ont cru que je n'etais 
pas sorti. — Quel conte ce voyageur vous a-t-il fait ? (did he relate ?) — 
II m'a fait un conte auquel je n*ai riencompris; il m'aditdeschoses 
etranges et extraordinaires. — C ; est dommage que les voyageurs 
exagerent (exaggerate) comme ils le font. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de 
fruit cette annee-ci? II y en aura beaucoup, des pommes, surtout, 
(especially.) — Que faisiez-vous lorsque vous demeuriez dans ce pays- 
la? Quand nous y demeurions, nous allions souvent chasser sur le 
bord de la mer. — Quels gens aviez-vous la? Nous y avions de 
bonnes gens, mais ils ne sont pas heureux. 

Do you rise early ? Not so early as you, but when I lived at my 
uncle's I rose earlier than I do now. — Did you sometimes keep in 
bed when you lived at your uncle's? When I was ill I kept in bed 
aii day. — Is there much fruit this year? I do not know; but last 
mi miner, when I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit. 
Whal do you get your livelihood by ? I get my livelihood by work- 
ing. — Does your friend get his livelihood by writing ? He gets it by 



SIXTIETH LESSON, (l.) 



309 



speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by 
working? They get it by doing nothing, (d ne rien faire,) for they 
are too idle to work. — What has your nephew gained that money 
by ? He has gained it by working. 

What did you get your livelihood by when you were in England? 
I got it by writing. — Did your cousin get his appetite by writing ? 
He got it by working. — Have you ever seen such a person? I have 
never seen such a one, (une pareille.) — Have you already seen our 
church ? I have not seen it yet. — Where does it stand ? It stands 
outside the town. If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order 
to show it you. — What do the people live upon that live on the sea- 
shore ? They live on fish alone. — Why will you not go a hunting 
any more ? While I was hunting yesterday, I killed nothing but an 
ugly bird, so that I shall not go any more a hunting. — Why do you 
not eat ? Because I have not a good appetite. — Why did your bro- 
ther eat so much? Because he had a good appetite. — Do you make 
faults in your exercises? I do sometimes. You must not (il ne faut 
pas en) make any, for you have all (§91) you want to prevent you 
from making any. 



SIXTIETH LESSON, 60th.— Soixantieme Legon, 60me 
Vocabtjlaiee. Ire Sec. 
IMPERFECT CONTINUED.— Imparfait Continue. 
I forgot, thou forgottest, he or she 

forgot. 
We forgot, you forgot, they forgot. 



When we went to school we often 
forgot our books. 

When you went to church you often 
prayed to the Lord for your chil- 
dren. 

I paid, thou paidest, he or she paid. 

We paid, you paid, they paid. 

When we received some money we 
employed it in purchasing good 
books. 

When you bought of that merchant 
you did not always pay in cash. 

Has your sister succeeded in mend- 
ing your cravat ? 
She has succeeded in it. 



J'oubliais, tu oubliais, il ou elle ou- 

bliait. 
NousoubhVons, vous oubluez, ils ou 

elles oubliaient. (§ 147 — 5.) 
Quand nous allions a l'ecole nous 

oubliions souvent nos livres. 
Quand vous alliez a l'eglise vous 

prnez souvent le Seigneur pour vos 

enfants. 
Je payais, tu payais, il ou elle payait. 
Nous payions, vous payiez, ils ou 

elles payaient. (§ 147 — 6.) 
Quand nous recevions de 1' argent 

nous 1' employes a acheter de 

bons livres. 
Quand vous achetiez chez ce mar- 

chand vous ne payzez pas toujours 

comptant. 
Votre sceur est-elle parvenue a rac 

commoder votre cravate ? 
Elle y est parvenue. 



310 



SIXTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



Has the woman returned from the 

market ? 
She has not yet returned. 
Did the women agree to that? 

They did agree to it. 

Where is your sister gone to ? 

She is gone to the church. 



La femme est-elle revenue du mar« 

che? 
Elle n'en est pas encore revenue. 
Les femmes sont-elles convenues de 

cela? 
Elles en sont convenues. 
Oii votre sceur est-elle allee? 
Elle est allee a l'eglise. 

POTENTIAL, IMFERFECT.—Conditionnel, Simple ou Present. 
For its formation and use see (§ 148.) That paragraph must be well 
studied. 



I would go if I had time. 

If he knew what you have done he 

would scold you. 
To scold. Do not scold if you can 

prevent it. 
If there were any wood he would 

make a fire. 
Should the men come, it would be 

necessary to give them something 

to drink. 
Should we receive our letters, we 

would not read them until to-mor- 
row. 
Not until, (meaning not before.) 
Must I go ? 
You must go. 
You must not go. 
To guess. 
An acquaintance. An .... of mine. 



J'irais si j'avais le temps. 

S'il savait ce que vous avez fait il 

vous gronderait. 
Gronder, 1. Ne grondez pas s>\ vous 

pouvez l'empecher. 
S'il y avait du bois il ferait du feu. 

Si les hommes venaient, il faudrait 
leur donner quelque chose a boire. 

Si nous recevions nos lettres, nous 
ne les lirions pas avant demain. 

Pas avant, {de av. l'infini.) 

Faut-il que j'aille ? 

II faut que vous alliez. 

II ne faut pas que vous alliez. 

Deviner, 1. 

Une connaissance. Une de mes . . . s. 



Soixantieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Attendez-vous quelqu'un? A present % Non. Pattendais mi 
ouvrier (workman) a six hemes, et comme il n'est pas venu, je ne 
Pattends plus. S'il venait, l'emploieriez-vous % ($ 144 — 3.) Non, si 
cet ouvrier venait a cette heure-ci, je ne Pemploierais pas s'il 
n'avait pas une excellente raison a me donner pour avoir manque 
de venir. Vous avez raison, il n ; y a rien de tel (Obs. 7) que d'etre 
ponctuei. — Saviez-vous que M. N. D — etait mort? Oui, je Pavais 
appris avant d'arriver. — Etait-ce une de vos connaissances ? Oui ; 
c'etait une de mes plus anciennes connaissances. Combien y avait-il 
que vous le con^aissiez ? II y avait environ .... Devinez. — Deviner ! 
Je ne peux jamais deviner. — Dites-le moi. Eh ! bien, il y avait 
quinze ans. Oh faut-il que faille 7 II faut que vous alliez chez le 
marchand de bijoux. — Chez le bijoutier? Oui, chez le bijoutier. — 
Et pourquoi faut-il que yy aille? Je voulais faire faire (34 2 ) quelque 



SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.) 311 

chose ; mais comme j'ai change d'intention, il faut que vous alliez 
le lui dire, tout de suite, pour Pempecher de commencer Pouvrage. 

Did you use to forget anything when you went to school 1 We 
often forgot our books. — Where did you forget them ? We forgot 
them at the school. — Did we forget anything? You forgot nothing. — 
Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church ? She 
prayed for her children. — For whom did we pray? You prayed 
for your parents. — For whom did our parents pray? They prayed 
for their children. — When you received your money, what did you 
do with it? (qu'en faisiez-vous?) We employed it in purchasing 
some good books. Did you employ yours also in purchasing books ? 
No, we employed it in assisting the poor, (d secourir les pauvres.) — 
Did you not pay your tailor? W r e did pay him. — Did you always 
pay in cash, when you bought of that merchant? We always paid 
in cash, for we never buy on credit. 

Has your sister succeeded in mending your stockings ? She has 
succeeded in it. — Has your mother returned from church ? She has 
not yet returned. — She would return if it did not rain ; would she 
not? Yes, she would. — Where has your aunt gone? She has 
gone to church. — Where have our cousins (fern.) gone ? They have 
gone to the concert. — Have they not yet returned from it ? They 
have not yet returned, for the carriage will go for them only in a 
quarter of an hour. — Would you give me something pretty if I 
were (§ 148 — 3) good ? If you were very good, and if you worked 
well, without meddling in other people's business, I would give 
you a fine book. — Would you have money if your father were 
here ? I should have enough if he should arrive. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 
POTENTIAL, PERFECT.— Conditionnel, Passe on Compose. 
For its formation and use, see (§ 149.) That paragraph must be well 
studied. 



If they had got rid of their old horse, 
they would have procured a better 
one. 

If he had washed his hands, he would 
have wiped them. 

If I knew that, I would behave dif- 
ferently. 

If I had known that, I would have 
behaved differently. 

If thou hadst taken notice of that, 
thou wouldst not have been mis- 
taken. 



S'ils s'etaient defaits de leur vieux 

cheval, ils s'en seraient procure" un 

meilleur. 
S'il s'etait lave les mains, il se les 

serait essuyees. 
Si je savais cela, je me comporterais 

dirTeremment. 
Si j'avais su cela, je me serais com- 

porte autrement. 
Si tu t'etais aper§u de cela, tu ne te 

serais pas trompe. 



312 



SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



Would you learn French if I learned 

it? 
I would learn it if you learned it. 
Would you have learned German if 

I had learned it ? 
I would have learned it if you had 

learned it. 
Would you go to France s if I went 

thither with you ? 
I would go thither, if you went thither 

with me. 
Would you have gone to Germany, 

if I had gone thither with you ? 
Would you go out if I remained at 

home ? 
I would remain at home if you went 

out. 
Would you have written a letter if I 

had written a note ? 
There is my book. Behold my book. 
Here is my friend, my niece, my 

book. 
There he or it is. There she or it is. 
There they are, we are, you are. 
Here I am, here you are, thou art. 
Here is some. There are 2 or 3. 
That is the reason why. 
Therefore I say so. 
A pair of gloves, of chickens. 



Apprendriez-vous le Fran§ais si je 
l'apprenais? 

Je l'apprendrais si vous l'appreniez. 

Auriez-vous appris l'Allemand si je 
l'avais appris? 

Je l'aurais appris si vous l'aviez ap- 
pris. 

Iriez-vous en France, si j'y allais 
avec vous ? 

J'irais, si vous y alliez avec moi. 

Seriez-vous alle en Allemagne, si 

j'y etais alle avec vous ? 
Sortiriez-vous si je restais a la mai- 

son ? 
Je resterais a la maison si vous sor- 

tiez. 
Auriez-vous ecrit une lettre si j'avais 

ecrit un billet ? 
Voila mon livre. 
Voici mon ami, ma niece, mon livre. 

Le voila. m La voila. 

Les voila, nous voila, vous voila. 

Me voici, vous voici, te voici. 

En voici. En voila 2 ou 3. 

Voila pourquoi. 

Voila pourquoi je le dis. 

Une paire de gants, de poulets. 



Soixantieme Th&me. 2de Sec. 
Ou sont mes gants de chamois ? Les voici, derriere votre cha- 
peau. S'ils n*etaient pas ici, iriez-vous les chercher? S'ils n J a- 
vaient pas ete ici, j'aurais ete les chercher. Je ne vous croyais pas si 
complaisant. Vous vous trompiez. — Mes cousins sont-ils en haut ? 
Faut-il que j'aille voir? Non ; les voila. De qui parliez-vous? 
Devinez. Je ne puis deviner. Nous parlions de MM. Ducomb, 
(§ 140 — 5,) et les voila. — Ai-je des souliers propres? Je ne sais pas. 
II faut que vous alliez voir. Oui, en voici. Donnez-m'en une paire 
En voici deux. Si je vous en avais demande deux paires, vous 
ne nven auriez montre qu'une. En voici deux, choisissez la paire 
que vous voudrez. — Ou est Thomas? Le voici. Ou? je ne le 
vois pas. II etait ici il y a un moment; mais il s'en est alle. — Faut-il 
que j'aille le chercher? N'importe. Parle-t-il espagnol? II pour- 
rait le parler. s'il voulait. Vous voulez dire qu 7 il le parlerait s'il 
pouvait. Auriez-vous ete a Baltimore si votre pere et votre mere 
y avaient ete ? Oui ; ils m'y auraient mene avec eux. Ne seriez- 



SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 



313 



vous pas venue plus tot, si vous aviez pu ? Si fait, je serais venue 
avant eux si j'avais pu le faire. Ou faut-il que vous alliez? Nulle 
part. 

Who is there ? It is I ; (c'est moi.) — Who are those men ? They 
are foreigners, who wish to speak to you. — Of what country are 
they? TVl ^y are Americans. — Where is my book] There it is. — 
And t^j pen ? Here it is. — Where is your sister? There she is. — 
Where are our cousins? (fern.) — There they are.— Where are you, 
John? (Jean.) Here I am. — Why do your children live in France? 
They wish to learn French* that is the reason why they live in 
France. — Why do you sit near the fire ? My hands and feet are 
cold; that is the reason why I sit near the fire. — Are your sister's 
hands cold? No, but her feet are cold. — What is the matter with 
your aunt? Her arm hurts her. — Is anything the matter with you? 
My head hurts me. — What is the matter with that woman? Her 
tongue hurts her very much. 

Why do you not eat? I shall not eat before I have (avant d'avoir) 
a good appetite. — Has your sister a good appetite ? She has a very 
good appetite ; that is the reason why she eats so much. — If you 
have read the books which I lent you, why do you not return them 
to me? I intend reading them once more, (encore une fois ;) that 
is the reason why I have not yet returned them to you • but I will 
return them to you as soon as I have read them a second time, 
(pour la seconde fois.) — Why have you not brought my shoes? 
They were not made ; therefore I did not bring them • but I bring 
them you now ; here they are. — Why has your daughter not learned 
her exercises? She has taken a walk with her companion, (fern. ;) 
that is the reason why she has not learned them ; but she promises 
to learn them to-morrow, if you do not scold her. — What ails her 
horse ? It has a sore leg * that is why she did not ride. 

Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. 



I guess, 1 reckon, (so much used here.) 
I guess you have it. 
An atmosphere. A dry atmosphere. 
The temperature. A high .... 
A low temperature. A mean .... 
A plate. A soup-plate. 

The son-in-law. 

The step-son. The husband. 

The daughter-in-law. 
The step-daughter. 
The progress. 

To profit. To improve. 

27 



Je presume, Je pense, T ose dire, que . . 
Je suis presque sur que vous l'avez. 
Une atmosphere. Une .... seche. 
La temperature. Une .... elevee. 
Une temperature basse . . . moyenne. 
Une assiette. Une assiette a soupe 
Le beau-fils, le gendre. 
Le beau-fils. Le mari. 

La belle-fille, la bru. 
La belle-fille. 
Le progres. 
t Faire des progres. 



314 



SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 



To improve in learning. 

The progress of a malady. 

The father-in-law, the step-father. 
The mother-in-law, the step-mother. 
Must I be ? You must be. 

Must I not be here at 9 o'clock ? 

It is not necessary for you to be here. 

Where must you be to-morrow ? 

I must be in Boston. 

Why must you be there ? 

I must go and see Mr. Abbott. 



t Faire des progres dans les etudes, 

dans les sciences. 
Le progres or les progres d'une mala- 

die. 1 
Le beau-pere. 
La belle-mere. 
Faut-il que je sois ? II faut que vous 

soyez. 
Ne faut-il pas que je sois ici a 9 

heures ? 
II ne faut pas que vous y soyez. 
Ou faut-il que vous soyez demain ? 
II faut que je sois a Boston. 
Pourquoi faut-il que vous y soyez ? 
II faut que j'aiile voir M. Abbott. 



Soixanti^me THibiE. 3me Sec. 

Ou faut-il que vous soyez demain soir ? Pour arriver a Boston, 
apres-demain matin, il faut que je sois a New York demain soir. 
Votre gendre va-t-il avec vous ? Py vais seul ; sans compagnie que 
celle du petit Joseph, qui m'accompagne. Si votre fille rPetait pas 
malade, votre gendre, son mari, ne vous accompagnerait-il point? 
Non ) il ne le pourrait pas, parce que c'est la saison des affaires. — 
Ce petit garcon n'a-t-il pas froid aux pieds? Pourquoi le croyez- 
vous? Parce qu'il a de si mauvais souliers, [such bad.) II aurait 
froid s'il n 7 y etait pas accoutume. — Qui est parti pour le Canada? 
Le beau-pere de Pavocat et sa belle-mere, sa belle-sceur et son beau- 
frere sont tous partis. N 7 etait-il pas parti avant eux? Lui? II n 7 est 
pas encore parti. Je croyais qu 7 il Petait. N'auriez-vous point ecrit 
a votre chere petite cousine et a votre grand cousin, si vous aviez su 
que le capitaine passerait a Newark? J'aurais ecrit a Pune, mais 
non pas a Pautre. 

Would you be glad if I were to lend you an interesting book? To 
be sure I would be glad. (Dir. 6.) You know very well that I am 
fond of reading. But have you any interesting book ? What do 

you think of one of W >s works? I should like very well 

(beaucoup) to read his last work. Would you, indeed ! (translate 
merely : indeed !) Then what will you give me if I lend it to you? 
You are jesting- are you not? Why do you think so? Because I 
think you say so only to plague me, (me tracasser, 1.) To plague 
you ! You know that I do not like to plague you. You ! You do 
not like to plague me ? You plague me every day. I would like 



1 All nouns ending in ie are feminine. 
to the English termination y. 



This ending frequently answer* 



SIXTIETH LESSON. (3.) 315 

to plague you; but I cannot, you are so good. — Would the robber 
have been punished, if he had been taken 7 ? He would have been 
punished, if they had been able to prove (prouver) that he was 
culpable, (cowpable.) — Would your cousin progress so well, if she 
did not stud)' so much? She does not study so much as you think. 
She does not stud}- as much as I (do) • and, notwithstanding, she 
makes more progress, (or she improves more.) How is that ? (Com- 
ment cela se fait-il?) She learns more easily (aisernent) than I. 

Resoi:6 pour la 60me Lecon. 

Avez-vous trouve le bracelet (bracelet) que j'ai perdu ? Avez-vous 
perdu un bracelet? Oui, j'en ai perdu un d'or. comme celui-ci. Je 
suis fache de vous dire que je n 7 en ai pas trouve. Y a-t-il long- 
temps que vous Pavez perdu? Je les ai mis tous les deux, il y a a 
peu pres une heure, et a present je n ; ai que celui du bras gauche. 
Etes-vous sortie depuis que vous les avez mis? Non, j ; ai cepen- 
dant ete a la porte de devant, pour y accompagner une demoiselle 
de ma connaissance qui est venue me voir. Avez-vous } depuis, 
cherche votre bracelet-la? Oui, il n'y est pas. Si vous iretes pas 
sortie, votre bracelet n'est pas perdu, il n'est qu'egare (egarer, to 
mislay.) Egare ou perdu, c'est a peu pres la meme chose : il n'est 
plus sur mon bras. Vous le retrouverez, ayez patience. Tenez, je 
suis presque sur (I guess) que vous avez cru mettre (28 2 , Obs. 65) 
les deux bracelets, et que vous men avez mis qu'un. Vous plai- 
santez, (you jest.) n'est-ce pas? Non, je ne plaisante pas. Je suis 
presque sur que vous le trouverez en haut sur votre table ou sur 
votre toilette. Je vais voir. 

M. Saint-Cir, fait-il froid dehors? Froid ! Non, il fait un temps 
charmant; plus frais que hier, mais agreable. Agreable, pour 
ceux qui marchent ou qui se promenent, mais froid, pour ceux qui 
restent long-temps assis pour ecrire ou pour lire. Cela se peut. 
Quant a moi, je le trouve tres-agreable. Mais asseyez-vous done. 
Voici un fauteuil. Non, gardez le fauteuil, vous qui avez froid: 
moi, je vais m'asseoir ici, sur ce siege. Se porte-t-on bien chez 
vous? Nous nous portons tous bien, excepte ma petite fllle. 
Qua-t-elle ? Je ne sais ; mais elle est malade ; aujourd'hui, mal 
aux dents; demain mal de tete, une autre fois un rhume. . . .Mais 
voici Louis. Quant a celui-la. il n'est pas malade. je vous assure. 
Bon jour. Louis, comment va? Tres-bien, M., merci. Dormez-vous 
tien ? Oui, je dors bien. Mangez-vous, buvez-vous. jo:iez-vous 
bien? Oui. il fait tout cela a merveille. Etudie-t-il bien? Oui, 
e'est un bon ecoiier. Tenez, je crois qu'il est venu pour me mon- 
trer quelque chose qu'il a traduit. N'est-ce pas 5 . Louis; ! 



316 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 

C ; est me petite anecdote, papa. Voulez-vous lui permettre de la 
lire? Sans doute, je serai charme de Pentendre. — Cette traduction 
(translation) n ; a pas ete corrigee, de sorte qu'il peut y avoir des 
fautes. Que vous aurez la boute d'excuser. — Sans doute. Qui ne 
fait pas de fautes? Lis ta traduction. J ; ai peur, papa. Quoi ! Tu 
as peur. Tiens, (come.) Ne fais pas V enfant, (do not be childish; 
from : faire P enfant, to be childish.) Lis. — Traduction. Un officer 
Francais etant arrive a la cour (court) de Vienne, Pimperatrice 
Therese lui demanda, (asked, § 153 — 3,) s'il croyait que la princesse 

de N qu'il avait vue la veille, (the day before,) etait vraiment, 

comme on le disait, la plus belle femme du (in the) monde? 
Madame, repliqua Pofficier, je le croyais hier. — C ? est bien, Louis. 
Mais, dis-moi, comment as-tu epele le participe passe : vu? Je Pai 
epele, v, u, e, feminin. Pourquoi ? Parce que son regime direct, 
que, est avant. C'est la regie. Tu as raison. C'est bien. 

La reponse de Pofficier Francais etait ingenieuse, (ingenious.) 
On la regarde comme telle ; car chaque nation la raconte, et change 
le lieu. Oui, c'est vrai- les Anglais la placent a la cour d'Angle- 
terre, sous le regne de leurreine favorite, Elizabeth; les Francais 
a la cour de France ; les Espagnols a Madrid, &c. &c. Les bonnes 
anecdotes appartiennent a tout le monde. Louis, peux-tu nous 
raconter celle du vieux monsieur et du jeune homme a Peglise ? 
Je ne sais pas si je pourrai la dire, mais je pourrais la lire si je 
Pavais ici. Non, non, essaie de nous la dire. Je vais essayer; mais 
je crains de ne pas reussir. Commence, nous sommes prets a 
Pecoute'..^ — Un jeune homme etant dans une eglise, peu attentif au 
seivice, et ne sachant que faire, (restless,) demanda (§ 153 — 3) a un 
vieux monsieur qui etait dans le banc voisin, (next pew,) Connais- 
sez-vous, Monsieur, une regie sans exception % Oui, repondit-il, un 
homme bien eleve, (a gentleman,) se conduit toujours bien, et par- 
ticulierement, (especially,) a Peglise. 



SIXTY-FIRST LESSON, 61st.— Soixante et unieme Legon, 61me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



What has become of your aunt ? 
I do not know what has become of 

her. 
What has become of your sisters ? 
I cannot tell you what has become of 

them. 



Qu'est devenue votre tante ? 

Je ne sais pas ce qu'elle est devenue. 

Que sont devenues vos sceurs ? 
Je ne peux pas vous dire ce qu^lles 
sont devenues. 



SIXTY-TIRST LESSON. (1.) 



317 



To die (lose life), died, do not die. 
I die, thou diest, he or she dies. 
Shall or will you die ? I shall. 

The man died this morning, and his 

wife died also. 
The man is dead. 
The woman died this morning. 
To be alive. 
Wine sells well. 
Wine will sell well next year. 

That door shuts easily. 

That window does not open easily. 

That picture is seen far off. 

Far off, from afar. From a great dis- 
tance. 

Winter clothes are not worn in sum- 
mer. 

That is not said. 

That cannot be comprehended. 

To conceive, to comprehend. 

It is clear. 

According to circumstances. 

The circumstance. 

That is according to circumstances. 

It depends. 

Glad of 

Pleased with . . . (not plu, but 

Sorry of or for . . displeased at, with . . 

Must I have ? You must. 



Must you not have ? 
It is necessary. 



Mourir* 2, mort, ne mourez pas, 
Je meurs, tumeurs, ilouelle meurt, 
Mourrez-vous ? (46 3 .) Je mourrai. 
L'homme est mort ce matin, et sa 

femme est morte aussi. 
L'homme est mort. 
La femme est morte ce matin. 
Etre vivant-s, etre vivante-s. 
t Le vin se vend bien. 
t Le vin se vendra bien l'anne'e pro- 

chaine. 
t Cette porte se ferme facilement. 
t Cette fenetre ne s'ouvre pas facile- 
ment. 
t Ce tableau se voit de loin. 
De loin. De bien loin. 

t Les vetements d'hiver ne se por- 
tent pas en ete. 
t Cela ne se dit pas. 
t Cela ne se congoit pas. 
Concevoir, 3. 
C'est clair. 

t Selon les circonstances. 
La circonstance. 



> t C'est selon. 



Bien aise, {de, av. l'inf.) 

Content (de). (47 3 , Obs. 109.) 

Fache (de.) Me content (de.) 

t Faut-il que j'aie ? II faut que vous 

ayez. 
t Ne faut-il pas que vous ayez ? 
C'est necessaire. Ce n'est pas .... 



It is not . . . 
Soixante et unieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 

Vous souciez-vous d'aller au musee? Oui, je voudrais bien y 
aller; mais il faut que j'aille a la maison. Et pourquoi done? II 
faut que j'y sois avant 9 heures, et que j'aie fait raon devoir avant 
10 heures. Vous etes ponctuel, et vous faites bien. La femme qui 
etait si mal hier au soir, est-elle morte? Le medecin croyait qu'elle 
ne passerait pas la nuit; mais je presume qu'elle n est pas morte, 
car nous n'en avons pas entendu parler. Les medecins se trompent 
quelque fois aussi bien que les autres. Eh! pourquoi ne se trom- 
peraient-ils point? lis sont sujets a se tromper comme les autres 
person ne s. — Le coton se vend-il bien cette annee ? Oui. le prix est 
un peu plus haut a Liverpool. S ? est-il bien vendu Pannee passee I 
27* 



318 



SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



Oui, il s'est tres-bien vendu. — IJtes-vous contente de voire nouvelle 
paire de souliers? J'en suis assez contente; mais je Paurais ete 
davantage, si les souliers n'etaient pas tout-a-fait si grands. — Que 
pensez^vous de Salomon, qui est sorti ce matin avec son manleau 
d ; hiver? Cela ne se concoit pas. II faut quHl soit (he must be) 
malade. — Lui? Non ; ce n'est que pour avoir Pair singulier. 

What has become of your uncle ? I will tell you what has 
become of him. Here is the chair (la chaise) upon which he often 
sat ; (etre assis, 51 2 .) — Is he dead? He is dead. — When did he die? 
He died two years ago, (47 2 .) — I am very sorry for it. Why do 
you not sit down ? If you will stay with (aupres de) me I will sit 
down; but if you go, I shall go (along) with you. — What has 
become of your aunt? I do not know what has become of her. — 
Will you tell me what has become of your niece ? I will tell you 
what has become of her. — Is she dead? She is not dead, but alive. 
— What has become of her? I guess she is gone to Vienna. — What 
has become of your sisters? I cannot tell you what has become of 
them, for I have not seen them these two years. — Are your parents 
still alive ? They are not alive, but dead. 

How long is it since your cousin (fern.) died? I guess it is six 
months since she died. — Did wine sell well, last year? It did not 
sell very well, (pas trop bien;) but it will sell better (mieux) next 
year, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be dear. — Why 
do you open the door ? Do you not see how it smokes here ? I see 
it, but you must (il faut) open the window instead of opening the 
door. — The window does not open easily ; that is the reason why I 
open the door. — When will you shut it? I will shut it as soon as 
there is (58 2 ) no more smoke. — Did you often go a fishing when 
you were in that country ? We often went a fishing and a hunting. 
— If you will go with us into the country, you will see my father's 
castle. — You are very good, Sir; if I had not seen that castle, I 
would willingly accept, (accepter;) but I have already seen it. — 
Never mind ; you must go with us. — Can I ? You know that I 
must be at b me this evening, and that I have 20 miles to go. (57 1 .) 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



Are you rich ? I am. 

Are the women handsome ? 
They are, they are rich and hand- 
some. 
Are you from France ? I am. 
What countrywoman is she ? 
She is from France. 
Would you be sorry if you were rich ? 



Etes-vous riche ? Je le suis. 

Les femmes sont-elles bien ? 

Elles le sont, elles sont riches et 

belles. 
Etes-vous de France ? J'en suis. 
De quel pays est-elle ? 
Elle est de France. 
Seriez-vous fache si vous etiez riche ? 



SIXTY-TIRST LESSON. (2.) 



319 



I should not be sorry for it. 

To be angry with somebody. 

To be angry about something. 

What are you angry about ? 

Are you sorry for having done it ? 

I am sorry for it. 

Honest, polite. Impolite, dishonest. 

Polite, courteous. Uncivil. 

Happy, lucky. 

Unhappy, unlucky. 

Easy, not hard. Easy to do. 

Difficult, hard. Hard to say. 

Useful. Useful to know. 

Useless. It is useless to repeat it. 

Is it useful to write a great deal ? 

It is useful. 

Is it well (right) to take the property 

of others ? 
It is bad, (wrong.) 
It is not well (right) or it is wrong. 
Well, right. Bad, wrong. 
Of what use is that ? 
That is of no use. 
What is that ? 
I do not know what that is. 
What is it ? 

I do not know what it is. 
Does he wish me to come ? 
He wishes you to come alone. 
He does not. 

Must I come without her ? 
You must come without her. 



Je n'en serais pas fache. 

Etre fdche contre quelqu'un. 

Etre fdche de quelque chose. 

De quoi etes-vous fache ? 

Etes-vous fache de l'avoir fait? 

Pen suis fache. 

Honnete. Malhonnete. 

Poli. Impoli. 

Heureux, fern, heureuse. 

Malheureux, " malheureuse. 

Facile, aise. Facile a faire. 

Difficile. Difficile a dire. 

Utile. Utile a savoir. 

Inutile. II est inutile de le repeter. 

Est-il utile d'ecrire beaucoup ? 

C'est utile. 

Est-il bien de prendre le bien des 

autre s ? 
C'est mal. 
Ce n'est pas bien. 
Bien. Mal. 

t A quoi cela est-il bon ? 
t Cela n'est bon a rien. 
t Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? 
t Je ne sais pas ce que c'est que cela. 
t Qu'est-ce que c'est? 
t Je ne sais pas ce que c'est. 
Veut-il queje vienne ? (§ 151.) 
11 veut que vous veniez seul. 
II ne veut pas que vous veniez seui. 
Faut-il que je vienne sans elle ? 
II faut que vous veniez sans elle. 



Soixante et unieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 
fetes- vous du meme pays que cette dame-la? Non, je suis 
Franc aise, et elle est Suisse. — De quoi votre beau-fils se plaint-il I 
II se plaint de son beau-frere. — Comment appelez-vous cette demoi- 
selle-ci ? Ceci est Madame de Balmont. Cette jeune personne est- 
elle mariee? Sans doute. Elle semble (seem) etre si jeune ; que 
je ne le croirais pas ; si vous ne me le disiez pas. Elle n'est pas si 
jeune qu'elle semble Petre. Non! Quel age a-t-elle done ? De- 
vinez, si vous pouvez. Si je devine> je dirai seize ans. Vous n'avez 
pas reussi a deviner. — Le jeune commis n'est-il pas fache contre 
vous? Non, il n'est pas fache contre moi, car je ne lui ai rien fait. 
Contre qui est-il done fache % II est mecontent de vous qui avez 
casse sa jolie petite canne. Ne Pai-je pas payee ? Si fait ; mais le 
prix n'est pas la canne. C'est selon : quelque fois Pun vaut mieux, 



320 



SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 



quelque fois Pautre. — Dit-on : remplissez d'eau la bouteille ? Non, 
cela ne se dit pas. Que dit-on done ? On dit : remplissez la bou- 
teille d'eau. 

Where did you take this book from ? I took it out of (dans) the 
room of your friend, (fern.) — Is it right to take the books of other 
people ? It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it. and I hope tnat 
your friend will not be displeased, for I will return it to her as soon 
as I have read it. — What is your name ? My name is William, 
(Guillaume.) — What is your sister's name? Her name is Eleanor, 
(Leonore.) — Are the ladies handsomer in Paris than in London? 
Strangers say they are. — Are the women handsome here ? Yes, 
they are. — Are they rich? Some are rich, others are poor. — Are 
they industrious I They used to be. — You seem unhappy ; are you 
angry at any one ? Yes, I am angry at my husband, who has not 
been willing to (or would not) take me to Boston. He is not rich 
enough, perhaps. 

Avis aux Lecteurs. — Nous allons des aujourd'hui, (from to-day,) 
laisser une partie des questions sans reponses, pour accoutumer 
Pecolier a les faire lui-meme. 

What countrywoman is she? — Are you, too? — Would you be 
sorry if you could go travelling ? — Would you not have been pleased 
if she had not died? — What are you mad at? — That merchant is 
honest ; people can do business with him, can they not ? — Whom 
do you say is so polite ? — That man and his wife are happy, are 
they not? — This young girl is very interesting; is she not happy? — 
Are your gloves easy or difficult to put on ? — Does that foreigner 
bring good wines ? — What do they sell cheap ? — What is useless ? — 
What is impolite ? — Is the German hard (difficult) to translate ? — Is 
it, to pronounce % — Is it not, to speak ? — If this (ceci) is useful, why 
do you not do it ?- -If to get up early is useful and easy, why do 
you not get up earlier than you do? (49 2 , Obs. 114.) — Is it right to 
speak ill of the absent? — Do not fill that bottle with wine. — What 
would you fill with coffee, if you had any? — Would he have 
drunk that brandy, if I had given it to him ? — What is that good 
for? 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



What is your name ? 
My name is Charles. 
What do you call this in French ? 

How do you express this in French ? 
What is that called ? 
George the Third. 



t Comment vous appelez-vous ? 

t Je m'appelle Charles. 

t Comment cela s'appelle-t-il en 

Fran§ais ? 
t Comment dit-on cela en Francais I 
Comment appelle-t-on cela? 
George trois. 



SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 



321 



Obs. 145. After the Christian name of a sovereign, the French employ 
the cardinal numbers without an article, while the English use the ordinal. 
Lewis the Fourteenth. I Louis quatorze. 

Henry the Fourth. I Henri quatre. 

Obs. 146. First and second, however, are exceptions to this rule : for first, 
the French use premier; and for second, either deux or second. Quint 
instead of cinq is also used in speaking of the emperor Charles V., and of 
the pope Sixtus V. 



Henry the First. 

Henry the Second. 

Pope Sixtus the Fifth. 

Charles the Fifth spoke several Eu- 
ropean languages fluently. 

Europe, European. 

Fluently. 

Bather. 

Rather . . . than. 

Rather than squander my money, I 
will keep it. 

I will rather pay him than go thither. 

I will rather burn the coat than wear 
it. 

He has arrived sooner than I. 

A half- worn coat. 

To do things imperfectly, (by halves.) 

To reign. Does she reign ? 

A foolish discourse. Infernal. 

His, her majesty. Their majesties. 
(57*. Ohs 40.) 



Henri premier. 

Henri second or Henri deux. 

Le pape Sixte- Quint. 

Charles- Quint parlait couramment 

plusieurs langues europeennes. 
L'Europe, europeen. 
Couramment. 
Plutot . . . que. 
Plutot . . . que de. 
Plutot que de dissiper mon argent, je 

le garderai. 
Je le paierai plutot que d'y aller. 
Je brulerai plutot l'habit que de le 

porter. 
II est arrive plus tot que moi. 
t Un habit a demi-use. 
t Faire les choses a demi. 
Regner. 1. (28 2 .) Regne-t-elle ? 
Un sot discours. Infernal. 
Sa majeste, (nom/em.) Leurs ma- 

jestes. 



Soixante et UNIEME Theme. 3me Sec. 
Qui regne en Angleterre? La reine Victoria premiere. Quelroi 
regne en France'? Aucun roi n ? y regne. Quel en etait le dernier? 
Louis Philippe premier. Quel a ete le dernier Charles d'Espagne % 
Etait-ce Charles trois ou quatre ? C'a ete Charles quatre. Quel a 
ete son successeur, (successor?) Ca ete Ferdinand sept. Combien 
de George y a-t-il eu en Angleterre? II y en a eu quatre. Y en 
a-t-il eu en France ? Non> il n'y en a eu aucun. Y a-t-il eu un 
Henri quatre dans ce dernier pays ? Oui. il y en a eu urn qu ; on 
nomme Henri le Grand. Sans reponse. — Pouvez-vous faire des 
reponses en Francais? — Auriez-vous pu en faire a la premiere 
lecon ? — Que faut-il que j'aie'? — Veut-il que j'aille chez le bijoutier'? — 
Si vous etiez riche comme Etienne Girard l'etait, que feriez-vous? — 
Ne portait-il pas toujours un habit a demi-use ? — Qui fait les choses 
ademi 7 ? — Que feriez-vous plutot que d'etre marchand 1 — Quel roi 
de France a ete mis a mort, (put to death?) — Ou voulez-vous que 
] ? aille? 



322 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 

What did Charles V. say of European languages? Charles V. 5 
who spoke fluently several European languages, used to say 
(avait coutume de dire) that we should speak (quHl fallait parler) 
Spanish with the gods ; Italian with our (son) friend, (fern.,) French 
with our friend, (rnas.,) German with soldiers, English with geese, 
(une oie,) Hungarian (hongrois) with horses, and Bohemian (bohe- 
mien) with the devil, (le diable.) — Do you admire what Charles V. 
said of languages ? I do not, I assure you. I think, on the con- 
trary, that it is a very foolish speech. — Why do you think so ? Be- 
cause those languages must be spoken (il faut parler ces langues) to 
the people who speak them, and not to geese, horses, and the 
devil. — How did his majesty (sa majeste) the emperor, Charles V., 
know that the Bohemian suited his infernal majesty ? (sa majeste 
infernale.) — Are not all the majesties relations'? 

Questions sans reponses. — How is that called in French? — What is 
the French of: companion? — of: a female companion? — of: an 
acquaintance of mine ? — Do you know, or do you not know, that of. 
a half -worn-out hat? — Is that young lady called Eleanor? — Is her 
brother called Stephen? (Etienne.) — Where did George HI. reign i 
— Was Charles the First put to death? (mettre d mortV) — Was Six- 
tus V. a pope {pape) or a king ? — Are all kings happy ? — Have there 
been many popes ? — Is it correct to say : happy as a king or a pope ? 
— Who would not rather be a farmer than a king ? — What must I 
have? — Where must you go? — You wish me to be kind; be so 
yourself. — Does she wish me to come and play at her concert ^ 



SIXTY-SECOND LESSON, 62d.—Soixante-deuxieme Legon, 62me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

As to, as for. As to me ; to them. I Quant a ; quant a moi ; a eux, a dies. 
As to that, I know not what to say. | Quant a cela, je ne sais que dire. 

Obs. 147. Ne is used without pas with the four verbs : — 

To cease, to dare, to be able or knowhow. 
I do not know what to do. 
Do you not know where to go ? 
She does not know what to answer. 
We do not know what to purchase. 
You do not cease importuning me. 
She continually complains. 
I dare not ask you for it. 
She dares not tell you. 



Cesser, oser, pouvoir,* savoir 
Je ne sais que faire. 
Ne savez-vous oil aller ? 
Elle ne sait que repondre. 
Nous ne savons qu'acheter. 
Vous ne cessez de m? importuner . 
Elle ne eesse de se plaindre. 
Je n'ose vous le demandei. 
Elle n'ose vous le dire. 



SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



323 



I cannot go to the covered bridge. 
I cannot tell you, (would not know 

how.) 
Can you not believe it ? 
To die of a disease, {malady.) 
She died of the varioloid. 
Did he not die of apoplexy ? 
They died with the cholera. 
The, ^, fever. The yellow fever. 

A chill. The intermittent fever. 

The apoplexy. An attack of a ... . 
He has a chill. He has a fever. 
He has had a fever. 
His fever has returned. 
He was struck with apoplexy. 
To strike, knock, rap, at the door. 
What has happened to that priest ? 
What has happened to her ? 
She had a dreadful accident. 
To shed, pour out. Pour me out a 

drink. 
A tear. To shed tears. 

To pour out a drink' — some water. 
I pour out some drink for that man. 
With tears in his, her, our, or my 

eyes. 
Sweet, mild. Sour, acid. 

Some sweet wine. A mild air. 
A mild zephyr. A soft sleep. 

Nothing makes life more agreeable 

than the society of, and intercourse 

with, our friends. 



Je ne puis aller au pont couvert, 
Je ne saurais vous le dire. 

Ne sauriez-vous le croire ? 
Mourir d'une maladie. 
Elle est morte de la variole. 
N'est-il pas mort d'apoplexie ? 
lis sont morts du cholera. 
L&jievre. liQ.Jievrejaune. 

Un frisson, la^ fievre intermitlente. 
L'apoplexie. Une attaque d'a . . . . 
II a un frisson, t La fievre l'a pris. 
t II a eu la (un acces de) fievre. 
t La fievre l'a repris. 
II a ete frappe d'apoplexie. 
Frapper, 1, frapp er a la porte. 
Qu'est-il arrive a cet ecclesiastique ? 
Que lui est-il arrive ? (50 2 .) 
II lui est arrive un accident affreux. 
Verser, 1. Versez-moi a boire. 

Une larme. Verser des larmes. 
Verser a boire — de l'eau. 
t Je verse a boire a cet homme. 
Les larmes aux yeux. 

Doux ; fern, douce. Sur. 
Du vin doux. Un air doux. 

Un doux zephir. Un doux sommeil. 
Rien ne rend la vie si douce que ia 
societe et le commerce de nos 



Soixante-deuxieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Allez-vous vous verser a boire ? Moi, non ; mais quant a Henri, il 
ne cesse de se verser a boire. II faut qu ; il ait soif. C'est tres proba- 
ble. — Versez a boire au jardinier. Que lui verserai-je ? De Peaa, 
de reau-de-vie, ou du vin doux ? Comme il a eu la fievre, versez- 
lui un peu de vin doux. Est-ce bon pour la fievre? On le 
dit. — Votre cidre est-il doux ou sur ? II n'est ni doux ni sur. — Airre- 
t-il le cafe doux? Non, il le prend sans sucre. — Qirest-ce qui rend 
la vie douce ? — Mile. Clara a-t-elle encore la fievre intermittente ? 
Sa fievre est passee. Quel accident est arrive a Pecclesiastique ? 
II est tombe de cheval, et il s 7 est fait beaucoup de mal a la jambe 
gauche et au pied droit. 

Sans reponses. — Vous etes-vous assooie avec le marchand qui 
vend si bon marche ? — A-t-on pu vous dire de quelle maladie ie 



324 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

vieil ecclesiastique est mort ? — Ce vin n'est-il pas un peu sur ? — Ces 
cerises sont-elles donees'? — Mon the est trop doux, versez-y un peu 
d'eau et de lait. — Votre fils ne craint-il pas la fievre jaune a la 
Nouvelle Orleans, ou Fa-t-il deja eue ? — Que dit le medecin ? Croit-il 
que cette attaque d ; apoplexie tuera le vieil epicier ? — Ne faut-il pas 
que vous veniez ? 

Of what illness did your sister die? She died of (de la) fever, — 
How is your brother? My brother is no longer living- he died 
three months ago. — I am surprised (etonne) at it, for he was very 
well last summer, when I was in the country. — Of what did he die ? 
He died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend? She is 
not well ; she had an attack of ague, the day before yesterday, and 
this morning the fever has returned. — Has she an intermittent fever? 
I do not know, but she often has chills. — What has become of 
the woman whom I saw at your mother's ? She died this morning, 
of apoplexy. — Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart? 
They will rather tear them than learn them by heart. — What does 
this man ask me for ? He asks you for the money which you owe 
him. 

Sans reponses. — How do you like this wine ? — Shall I pour you 
out a glass of brandy and water? — Does she not prefer a glass of 
mineral water, with syrup? — Do you not know what to eat? — 
Where must you be to-night? — How many of your cousins are 
alive? — How much syrup shall I pour out for her? — Did you not 
hear a knock at the front door? — Why does she shed tears? — Has 
an accident happened ? — What has happened to them ? — Does he 
not quit (cease) speaking? — How does your mother like our food? 
— Why does she not eat any more ? 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



A case. Ten cases of cholera. 

The report. Is the report favorable ? 

To augment, increase. Diminish, 

decrease. 
To report. 

Do they report all the cases ? 
Does the cholera increase or not ? 
It seems to be diminishing now. 
How many cases have they reported ? 
Only 7 for the last 24 hours. 

To cry, to scream, to shriek. 



Un cas. Dix cas de cholera. 

Le rapport. Le rapport est-il favor- 
able ? 
Augmctnter, 1. Diminuer, 1. 

Rapport er, 1. 

Rapporte-t-on tous les cas ? 

Le chole'ra augmente-t-il ou non ? 

II semble diminuer a present. 

Combien de cas a-t-on rapporte ? 

Seulement 7 pour les dernieres 24 

heures. 
Crier, 1. 



To help, assist, some one to do a thing, j Aider, 1, quelqu'un d faire une chose 
I help him to do it. I Je l'aide a le faire. 



SIXTT-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



325 



I help you to write. 

I will help you to work. 

To cry out for help*. 

The help. 
To inquire after some one. 
Whom are you inquiring after ? 
Has he inquired after our residence ? 
Where, when you please. 
As you please, you like ; at your plea- 
sure. 
As soon as you like it. 
To trust some one. Trust no one. 

I trust nobody. 

Do you trust him ? her ? them, (fern.) ? 

I do trust him, her, them. 

He does not trust me, them, (mas.) 

We must not trust everybody. 

To distrust one, mistrust. 

Do you distrust that lawyer ? 

She distrusts her maid-servant. 

In your place, I would distrust him. 

A seat, a place. A public square. 

Make me a little room. 

To laugh at something, laughed, 

laugh. 
I laugh, thou laughest, he, she, one 

laughs. 
Do you laugh at that ? I do, with 

all my heart, and he does also. 
At what do they laugh ? 



| Je vous aide a e'crire. 

I Je veux vous aider a travailler. 

i Crier a l'aide. 
Appeler du secours. 
L'aide, 1 le secours. 
*S" informer, 1, de quelqu'un. 
De qui vous informez-vous ? 
S'est-il informe de notre demeure ? 
Ou, quand "\ 

Comme I .. , . 

(463. Obs. 107.) Mvousplaira. 

Aussitot qu' , des qu' J 

t Sefier, 1, a. quelqu'un. Ne vous 

fiez a personne. §55.) 
t Je ne me fie a personne. 
t Vous fiez-vous a lui, a elle, a elles ? 
t Je me fie a lui, a. elle, a elles. i§ 64.) 
t II ne se fie pas a moi, a eux. 
t II ne faut pas se fier a tout le monde. 
t Se defer de quelqu' 'un. 
t Vous defiez-vous de cet avocat ? 
t Elle se defie de sa domestique. 
A votre place, je me defierais de lui. 
Une place. Une place publique. 

Faites-moi un peu de place. 
Rire,* 4, de quelque chose, ri (p. p.), 

riez. 
Je ris, tu ris, il rit, elle rit, on rit. 

Riez-vous de cela ? J'en ris de tout 

mon cceur, et lui aussi. 
De quoi rient-ils ? rient-elles ? 



Soixante-detjxieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 
Quel est le rapport du cholera ? II est moms favorable que hier. — 
Combien de cas dans les 24 hemes? II y a eu 42 cas et 17 morts. 
— C'est plus que hier; car il n'y avait que 35 cas et 14 morts. — Cela 
augmente un jour et diminue l'autre. — II faut etre prudent et modere, 
(prudent and moderate.) — Combien de cas a-t-on rapporte a St. 
Louis? Seulement 12. — Ce n'est pas autant que la derniere fois. — 
Aidez-vous votre cousin a faire son devoir? Seulement lorsqu'il est 
trop difficile. Quant a mon frere et a moi. nous ne nous aidons 
jamais Tun Pautre. — Pourquoi cet enfant crie-t-il? II s'est fait du 
mal a la jambe gauche. A quoi sert de crier? A rien; mais les 
enfants crient. 



1 Aide, iii the signification of help, is feminine ; 
means an assistant. 
28 



it is masculine when it 



326 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

Sans reponses. — Rit-elle parce que ce Monsieur est tombe? — 
Riez-vous toujours quand vous voyez tomber quelqu'un % — Ne con- 
naissez-vous personne qui crie alors? — Vous fiez-vous a ce boucher 1 
— Ne se fie-t-elle pas a sa domestique 1 — Nous pouvons nous fier a 
celle-ci, n 7 est-ce pas? — Ne nous trompera-t-elle point? — Savez-vous 
le Francais de : As you please? — N 7 avez-vous pas entendu frapper? 
— Que vous verse-t-elle ? — N 7 appelle-t-on pas au secours? Sentez- 
vous le doux zephir ? — Ne faut-il pas que j ; ai un chapeau neuf ? — 
Seriez-vous fache si je m 7 en allais ? — Quel est le nom de votre nou- 
velle eonnaissance % 

Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ? I 
have; but nobody would 1 or could (personne n 7 a voulu on n 7 a pu) 
tell me what has become of him. — Never mind ) you will easily 
find another who sells as cheap. — I wish I could, 2 (Je voudrais 
pouvoir ; 2 ) for I have but little money. — Did the general's nephew 
die of a disease or of an accident ? He died of the yellow fever. 
— Has not a dreadful accident happened to the apothecary ; s old 
clerk? He fell and broke his arms or legs. (Dir. 2 — 24 2 , Obs. 55.) 
— His arms and legs, did you say ? No, only his arms or legs. — 
Would she cry for help, if I should beat her? (§ 148 — 3.) If you 
should hurt her, I guess she would cry. — Would they not laugh, if 
I was to tell them that tale ? No, I guess they would be angry. — 
Must I not go for some cigars? Yes, you must go for some. — Must 
I not have the money to pay for them ? Yes, you must have it ; 
here it is. — After you have paid for them, (46 3 , Obs. 107,) you will 
have six cents left; you may keep them. 

Sans reponses. — What dost thou ask me for? — Will you pass me 
the bottle, if you please ? — Have you not drunk enough ? — Shall I 
give you (faut-il vous verser) some wine ? — Why do you not eat ? — 
Who knocks at the door ? — Why does he cry ? — What has happened 
to you? — Where will you go to, this evening? — Where will your 
brothers go to ? — Why do you go to town ? — Will you go with me ? — 
Must I sell to that man on credit? — Has he already deceived (trom- 
per) anybody? — Must I trust those ladies? — Do those merchants 
trust you? — Whom do those gentlemen laugh at? — Why do those 

1 Translate could, by: j'ai pu, il a pu, il pouvait, &c. Would, by: j'ai 
voulu, il a voulu, je voulais, &c, when they refer to past actions instead of 
future ones. (§ 148 — 4.) 

2 I wish, in such phrases as, I wish I could, I might, I had, &c, or any 
other imperfect tense, where it means, I should like to, must be translated 
by : Je voudrai pouvoir, avoir, &e. When 1 wish, does not mean, I should 
liketo, but merely, 1 want, translate it by: Jeveux, &c, as: lwishtoseeyou t 
Je veux ou desire vous voir. 



SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 



327 



people laugh at us? — Ought we to laugh (faut-il se rnoquer) at 
persons who speak badly? — What are you laughing at? — How long 
(depuis quand) have you been wearing it so large 1 (grand.) 

Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. 

To ring. A bell, a small bell. 

To hear a ring. Heard a ring. 

He must go. 

Where must she go ? 

Do you wish him to be good or not ? 

I wish him to be good, and I wish 

her also to be good. 
Must he not have a new coat ? 
He must come with me to the tailor's, 

To laugh in a person's face. 

We laughed in his face. 

To laugh at, to deride some one. 

I laugh at (deride) you. 

Were you laughing at us ? Were 

you making fun of us ? 
We did not laugh at you. 
Full. 

A book full of errors. 
To afford. 



Can you afford to buy that horse ? 

I can afford it. 

I cannot afford it. 

Who is there ? Who is it ? is that ? 

It is I, he, she, we, you, thou. 
Is it he ? It is not he. 

Are they your brothers ? (4? 3 .) 

It is they. It is not they. 
Is it she ? It is she. 

It is not she. 

Are they your sisters ? 

It is they, (feminine.) 
It is not they. " 
It is I who speak. 

Is it they who laugh ? 

It is you who laugh. 

It is thou who hast done it. 



Sonner, 1. Une cloche. Une clochette. 

Entendre sonner. Entendu sonner. 

II faut qu'z'Z aille. 

Ou faut-il qu' eZZe aille ? 

Voulez-vous qu'i'Z soit bon ou non? 

Je veux qu'il soit bon, et je veux 
aussi qu'elle soit bonne. (§ 151.) 

Ne faut-il pas qu'?7 ait un habit neuf ? 

II faut qu^'Z vienne avec moi chez le 
tailleur. 

Eire au nez de quelqu'un. 

Nous lui avons ri au nez. 

Se rire ou se moquer de quelqu'un. 

Je me ris (me moque) de vous. (54 3 /, 

Vous riiez-vous de nous ? Vous 
moquiez vous de nous ? ($ 147 — 1.) 

Nous ne nous riions pas de vous. 

Plein, pleine. 

Un livre plein de fautes. 

t Avoir les moyens, {de before in- 
finitive.) 

t Avez-vous les moyensd'acheter ce 
cheval ? J'en ai les moyens. 

t Je n'en ai pas les moyens. 

Qui est-la ? Qui est-ce ? Qui est 
cela? 

C'est moi, lui, elle, nous, vous, toi 

Est-ce lui ? Ce n'est pas lui. 

Sont-ce vos freres ? or, 

Est-ce que ce sont vos freres ? 

Ce sont eux. Ce ne sont pas eux. 

Est-ce elle ? C'est elle. 

Ce n'est pas elle. 

Sont-ce vos soeurs? or, 

Est-ce que ce sont vos sceurs? 

Ce sont elles. 

Ce ne sont pas elles. 

C'est moi qui parle. 

Sont-ce eux (elles) qui rient ? or, 

Est-ce que ce sont eux <elies) qui 
rient ? 

C'est vous qui riez. 

C'est toi qui l'as fait. 



328 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 



It is you, gentlemen, who have said 

that. 
We learn French, my brother and I. 



C'est vous, Messieurs, qui avez dit 

cela. 
t Mon frere et moi nous apprenons 

le Francois. 

Obs. 148. The uniting pronoun nous or vous must be placed before 3 
verb, when it has two or more nominatives of different persons. (§38.) 



You and I will go into the country. 
You and he will stay at home. 



t Vous et moi nous irons a la cam- 

pagne. 
t Vous et lui vous resterez a la mai- 

son. 
Instituteur. 



Tutor, preceptor. 

Soixante-deuxieme Th^me. 3me Sec. 

N'a-t-on pas sonne ? Je crois que si, (si au lieu de owi : la ques- 
tion est negative, 10 2 , Obs. 26.) — La domestique est-elle allee a la 
porte ? Je ne Pai pas entendue. II faut qu'elle y aille plus vite. — 
Elle n ? a peut-etre pas entendu la clochette. C'est possible. Est-ce 
elle qui court? Je presume que oui. Oui, c'est elle. Qui etait-ce? 
On a apporte le bonnet de Madame. Portez-le-lui. — Qui va au 
conceit ce soir? Vous et moi nous irons si nous avons le temps. — 
Votre instituteur vous gronderait-il si vous ne faisiez pas votre 
devoir? Non, mais il serait fache. Quand faut-il que la voiture 
soit prete? II faut qu'elle le soit a 10J heures. A quelle heure 
faut-il que Charles vienne ? II faut qu'il vienne un quart d'heure 
avant. La voiture sera-t-elle pleine ? Elle sera pleine. Ne pour- 
rions-nous pas aussi prendre la petite Emilie ? Non, il ne faut pas 
quelle vienne; elle criera. — Est-ce vous qui riez comme cela? 
Rit-elle au nez dc cet etranger? De qui se moquent-ils? — Votre 
voisin ne se moque-t-il pas de vos enfants parce qu'ils se levent si 
tard ? — Cet auteur n ; a-t-il pas fait un livre plein de fautes ? — Ce verre 

de quoi est-il plein ? — On m'a dit que M. P , voulait acheter la 

grande maison de B au coin de Broadway, en a-t-il les moyens? 

Sont-ce vos amis qui viennent ? 

Is it your sister who is playing on the piano ? It must be she, 
(il faut que ce soit elle) for no other person plays. — No, it is not 
she, for here she is. — Who is it, then ? It is our cousin Elise. — Are 
they your sisters who are coming? It is they. — Are they your 
neighbors (fern.) who were laughing at you? They are not our 
neighbors. — Who are they ? They are the daughters of the countess 
whose brother has bought your house. — Are they the ladies you 
have spoken of to me ? They are. — Shall you learn German ? My 
brother and I will learn it. — Shall we go to the country, to-morrow? 
I shall go to the country, and you will remain in town. — Shall my 
sister and I go to the opera ? You and she will remain at home, 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 329 

and your brother will go to the opera. — What did you say when 
your tutor was scolding you ? I said nothing, because I had nothing 
to say ; for I had not done my task ; and he was in the right to scold 
me. 

Sans reponses. — You must come to my house, to-morrow, to bring 
me back the books which I have lent you ) do you hear ? — Who is 
to play at the concert, to-night ? — Is it thou who hast soiled my fan ? 
— Could he learn this by heart, before to-morrow ? — Could she learn 
it yesterday? (N. 2, 62 2 .) — Would she not go to Baltimore, last 
week? — Would her nieces go there next week, if they could? — 
I wish I could travel; don't you? (et vous?) 1 — We wish we were 
learned ; does she not ? — Does she not care about the piano ? 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON, 63d.— Soixante-troisieme Legon, 63me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



To get into a bad scrape. 



To get out of a bad scrape. 

I got out of the scrape. 

That man always gets into bad 

scrapes, but he always gets out of 

them again. 
Between. Between them. Among us, 

among acquaintances. Between 

friends. 
To make some one's acquaintance. 
To become acquainted with one. 
I have made his or her acquaintance 

I have become acquainted with him ^ J'ai fait sa connaissance. 
or her. 



t S'attirer, 1, (sefaire,) de mauvai- 

ses affaires. 
t Se tirer, 1, d' affaire. 
Je me suis tire d' affaire. 
Cet homme s' attire toujours de mau- 

vaises affaires, mais il s'en tire 

toujours. 
Entre. Entr'eux. Entr'elles. Entre 

nous, entre connaissances. Entr'a- 

mis. 
Faire connaissance avec quelqu'un. 
Faire la connaissance de quelqu'un. 



ti J'ai i 

Are you acquainted with him, her ? ) T „ ,i . • _ ,_ . „» 

-r* , , • , > Le (la) connaissez-vous ? z 

Do you know him, her ? 5 

1 We have seen, (18 1 , Obs. 38,) that n'est-ce pas was used to ask a negative 
interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, but now, we say, 
when the interrogation, whether negative or not, is in another person, use the 
conjunction et with any required personal pronoun. Don't you? Et vous ? 
Don't he ? Et lui ? Don't she ? we ? they ? Et elle ? nous ? eux ? I know him : 
to you ? Et vous ? — Does he ? she ? Peter, &c. : Et lui ? et elle ? et Pierre ? 
But, does any one ? must be translated by: Quelqu'un le connait-il ? 

2 The verb to know is always expressed by connaitre* when it signifies to 
be acquainted with, and by savoir* in all other cases. Ex. I know that man, 
that lady. Je connais cet homme, cette dame ; I know my lesson, Je sais ma 
lecon ; I know what you wish to say, Je sais ce que vous voulez dire. 

28* 



330 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 



I am — I do. I am not — I do not. 

He is an acquaintance of mine. 
She is my acquaintance. 
He is not a friend, he is but an ac- 
quaintance. 
To enjoy. 
Do you enjoy good health ? 

To be well. 

She is well. 

Does she enjoy a great fortune ? 

Does he enjoy a good reputation ? 

To imagine. 

Our fellow creatures. 

He has not his equal or his match. 

To resemble some one, to look like 

some one. 
That man resembles my brother. 
That beer looks like water. 
We resemble each other. 
They do not resemble each other. 
Is it time that I . . . thou ... he ... ' 

she . . . we, &c. 
Is it time for me . . . thee . . . him . . . 

her ... us, &c, to. . ? 
Is it time for us to go, come, have, be? 
It is time for us to go, come, have, 

be. 



Je le (la) connais. Je ne la connais 

point. 
II est de ma connaissance. 
Elle est de ma connaissance. 
Ce n'est pas un ami, ce n'est qu'une 

connaissance. 
Jouir, 2, de. 

Jouissez-vous d'une bonne same"? 
Etre bien portant, portante. 
Etre en bonne sante. 
t Elle est bien portante. 
t Elle se porte bien. 
t Elle est en bonne sante. 
Jouit-elle d'une grande fortune? 
Jouit-il d'une bonne reputation? 
S'imaginer, 1. 
Nos semblables. 
II n'a pas son semblable. 
t JRessembler, 1, a quelau'un. (Mind 

the ss and the a.) 
Get homme ressemble a mon frere. 
Cette biere ressemble a de l'eau. 
Nous nous ressemblons. 
lis ou elles ne se ressemblent pas. 
Est-il temps que je . . . tu . . . il . . . 

elle . . . nous . . . vous ... ils . . . 

elles . . ., (govern the subj. § 151.) 

Est-il temps que nous allions, veni- 
ons, ayons, soyons ? II est temps 
que nous allions, que nous veni- 
ons, ayons, soyons. 

Soixante-troisieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Est-il temps que nous allions a Washington pour 1'arTaire de Fre- 
deric ? Oui, il faut que nous y soyons demain ou, au plus tard, 
apres-demain. II y a une mauvaise affaire; je ne sais comment il 
s'en tirera. Lui! il se fait souvent de mauvaises affaires, mais il s'en 
tire toujours. C'est vrai, il est tres-heureux. — Ne jouit-elle pas d'une 
fortune considerable ? Si fait, son pere lui a laisse une grande for- 
tune, dont elle jouit, et dont elle fait bon usage. Jouit-elle d'une 
bonne sante ? Oui, pour une personne riche, elle jouit d'une tres- 
bonne sante. Sa sceur est-elle bien portante'? Non, il faut qu'elle 
soit souvent malade, car elle n'a pas bon air. — Ce monsieur, n'est-il 
pas une de vos connaissances % Lequel? Celui qui est entre les 
deux dames en jaune? Non, celui qui est entre la table et la fene- 
tre. — Ressemblez-vous a votre sceur? — Vous ressemble-t-elle ? — A 
qui ce commis ressemble-t-il 1 — Mon frere et moi, nous ressemblons- 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



331 



nous ? — Ces deux sceurs ne se ressemblent-elles pas corame deux 
gouttes d'eau, (2 drops of water ?) — Pourquoi cet homme s ? enfuit-il 
comme pa ? II faut qu ; il ait fait quelque chose de mal, ne le croyez- 
vous pas ? 

What is the report of the health-office, to-day? (du comite de 
sante?) The report has increased to-day. — How many cases are 
there ? 53 > and only 11 deaths. We must hope that it will diminish 
soon. — A certain (certain) good-for-nothing fellow liked brandy 
much, but he found in it (lui) two bad qualities, (une qualite :) u If 
I put water to it, 7 ' said he, " I spoil it: and if I do not put any to it, 
it spoils me." — Does your cousin resemble you? He resembles me, 
— Do your sisters resemble each other? They do not resemble 
each other; for the elder (I'ainee) is idle and naughty, and the 
younger {la cadette) assiduous and good-natured towards everybody. 
— How is your aunt % She is very well. — Does your mother enjoy 
good health? She imagines she enjoys {^imagine jouir) good 
health ; but I believe she is mistaken, for she has, these six months, 
had a cough, of which (dont) she cannot get rid. 

Is it right to laugh thus at everybody ? If I laugh at your coat, I 
do not laugh at everybody. — Does your son resemble any one ? He 
resembles no one. — Why do you not drink? I do not know what 
to drink, for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. — If you 
wish to have some other, I shall go down (descendre) into the cellar 
to fetch you some. — You are too polite, Sir; I shall drink no more 
to-day. — Have you known my father long? I have known him 
long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. We 
often worked for one another, and we loved each other like 
brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each other. — When I had 
not done my exercises, he did them for me; and when he had not 
done his, I did them for him. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



Each other, one another. Of each 
other. Without one another. 

The brother and the sister love each 
other. 

Are you pleased with each other ? 

We are. 

As, as well as ; as well as we ; they. 

The appearance, the countenance. 

To show a disposition to. 

That man whom you see shows a 
desire to approach us. 

To look pleased with some one. 



L'un 1' autre l'unel'autre. L'unde 
l'autre. L'une sans l'autre. 

Le frere et la sceur s'aiment l'un 

a Fautre. 

Etes-vous contents l'un de l'autre ? 

Nous le sommes. 

Ainsi que ; ainsi que nous ; qu'eux. 

La mine. 

Faire mine de. 

Cette homme que vous voyez fait 
mine de nous approcher. 

Faire bonne mine d quelqu'un. 



332 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



Faire mauvaise mine d quelqu'un. 

Quand je vais voir cet homrae, au lieu 
de me faire bonne mine, il me fait 
mauvaise mine. 

Un homme de bonne mine. 

Un homme de mauvaise mine. 

Des gens de mauvaise mine. 

Aller voir quelqu'un. 
< Faire uneYi S ite).,, un 
( Rendre visite > 

Frequenter un lieu, (endroit.) 

Frequenter des societes. 

t Frequenter quelqu'un. 

Avoir fair. 

Quelle mine a-t-il ? Quel air a-t-il ? 

II a l'air enjoue, (triste, content.) 

Vous avez l'air bien portant. 

Vous avez l'air d'un medecin. 

Elle a l'air de mauvaise humeur. 

lis ont l'air content. lis ont l'air 

d'etre de bonne humeur. 
Avoir l'air bon. 
t Boire a quelqu'un. 
Boire a la sante de quelqu un. 
t Je bois a votre sante. 
t C'en est fait de moi ! d'elle! 

d'elles ! 
t C'en est fait, 
t II vaut mieux que je, il, vous, elles, 

nous, tu, (must be followed by the 

subjunctive.) 
Il vaut mieux que je le fasse, nous 

le fassions, vous le fassiez. 



To Icok cross at some one. 

When I go to see that man, instead 

of receiving me with pleasure, he 

looks displeased. 
A good-looking man. 
A bad-looking man. 
Bad-looking people, or folks. 
To go to see some one. 

To pay some one a visit. 

To frequent a place. 

To frequent societies. 

To associate with some one. 

To look like, to appear. 

How does he look ? 

He looks gay, (sad, contented.) 

You appear very well. 

You look like a doctor. 

She seems angry, to be in a bad 

humor. 
They look pleased. They appear to 

be in a good humor. 
To look good, to appear to be good. 
To drink to some one. 
To drink some one's health. 
I drink your health. 
It is all over with me ! her ! them ! 

(fern.) 
It is all over. 
It is better for me, him, you, them, 

us, thee : or I, he, you, we, thou 

hadst better .... 
It is better for me to do it, for us to 

do it, for you to do it. (I had better 

do it, &c.) 

Soixante-troisieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 
Pourquoi fre quel tez- vous ces gens-la? Je les frequente parce 
qu'ils me sont utiles. — Si vous ne cessez de les frequenter, vous 
vous attirerez de mauvaises affaires, car ils ont beaucoup d 7 enne- 
mis. Vous croyez? Alors je ne continuerai plus a les voir. II 
vaut mieux que vous fassiez ce que vous dites. Ces gens font mine 
de nous approcher. Que nous veulent-ils ? Le leur demanderai-je ? 
Ouij faites-le. Que voulez-vous, mes amis? Ils ont Pair de ne pas 
m'entendre. II faut qu'ils soient etrangers. — Quels sont ces homines 
de mauvaise mine qui viennent par ici? Si ce sont des voleurs, 
c'en est fait de nous. N'avez-vous pas peur? — Le jeune docteur est 
un homme de bonne mine, n 7 est-ce pas? — Qui allez-vous voir? — Si 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 



333 



vous aviez le temps, iriez-vous rendre visite a vos cousines*? — Fre- 
quentez-vous le theatre ? — Quels endroits. quels lieux frequentent- 
ils ! — Ce marehand a toujours Pair d'etre de mauvaise humeur, est-il 
malade ? 

Why did you not come to dinner? I have been hindered. I am 
sorry I made you wait. (Je suis fdche de . . . .)* — Until what time 
did you wait ? We waited for you till a quarter past four ; and, as 
you did not come, we dined without you. — You did right. I wish 
I had (62 2 , N. 2) sent you a boy to inform you that I could not come: 
but I thought I could come. 1 — Never mind; did you drink my 
health? We drank yours (d la votre) and that of your parents. — 
How does your uncle look % [quelle mine a . . . . ?) He looks (a Voir) 
very gay, (enjoue.) for he is much pleased with his children. — Do 
his friends look (ont-ils la mine) as gay as he ? They, on the con- 
trary, look sad. because they are discontented. My uncle has no 
money, and is always contented, and his friends, who have a good 
deal of it, are scarcely ever so. 

Is that man angry with you ? I think he is angry with me, be- 
cause I (de ce que je) do not go to see him; but I do not like to go to 
his house, for when I do, instead of receiving me with pleasure, he 
looks displeased. — You must not believe that; he is not angry with 
you, for he is not so bad (mediant) as he looks, (quil en a Voir.) He 
is the best man in the (du) world; but one must know him in order 
to appreciate him, (pour pouvoir Vapprecier.) — There is a great dif- 
ference (la difference) between you and him, (lui ;) you look pleased 
with all who come to see you, and he looks cross at those who call 
on him, (go to see him.) 

Vo cab ul aire. 3me Sec. 



To please (oblige) some one. 
You oblige (please) her much. 
To hurt some one's feelings, to grieve. 
Have you h«?t that man's feelings ? 

I did not. 
You grieve me, (hurt my feelings.) 
If you know a good place to swim 

in, oblige me by showing it to me. 



t Faire plaisir a quelqu'un. 
t Vous lui faites grand plaisir. 
t Faire de la peine a quelqu'un. 
t Avez-vous fait de la peine a cet 
homme ? Je ne lui en ai pas fait, 
t Vous me faites de la peine. 
Si vous connaissez un bon endroit 

pour nager, faites-moi le plaisir de 

me le montrer. 



1 When the same nominative I, I, he, he, &c, is repeated in the second 
member of a compound sentence, as : I am sorry / have made you wait ; 
the French, instead of the second nominative, use an infinitive, (with or 
without preposition.) Thus, instead of saying : Je suis fdche que je cons 
ni fait attend re ; thev say : Je suis fdche de vous avoir fait attendre. (R. 3.) 
(28 2 , Obs. 65.) 



334 



SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 



To experience, to undergo. 

I have experienced a great many 

misfortunes. 
To suffer, to bear, suffered, suffer. 
Do not suffer it. 

Dost thou suffer ? I do. He suffers. 
To feel a pain in one's head, foot. 
I felt a pain in my eye. 
To neglect. 

Let us never neglect our duty. 
We must yield to necessity. 
To spring, dart forward. 
The cat springs upon the rat. 
To leap on horseback. 
An increase, an augmentation. 
For more bad luck. 
For more good luck. 
For more bad luck I have lost my 

purse. 
To lose one's wits. 
That man has lost his wits, and he 

does not know what to do. 
Obstinately, by all means. 
That man wishes by all means to 

lend me his money. 
To follow. 

I follow, thou followest, he or she 

follows, people follow. 
To pursue. 



Eprouver, 1. 

J'ai eprouve beaucoup de malheurs. 

Souffrir * 2, souffert, souffrez. 

Ne le souffrez pas. 

Souffres-tu ? Je souffre. II souffre. 

t Souffrir de la tete, du pied. 

t J'ai souffert de l'oeil. 

Negliger, 1, (de, av. l'mf. §144—2.) 

Ne negligeons jamais notre devoir. 

II faut c£der a la necessite. 

t S'elancer. 

Le chat s'elance sur le rat. 

S'elancer sur son cheval. 

Un surcroit. 

Pour surcroit de malheur. 

Pour surcroit de bonheur. 

Pour surcroit de malheur j'ai perdu 

ma bourse. 
Perdre la tete. 
Cet homme a perdu la tete, et il ne 

sait que faire. (62 1 , Obs. 147.) 
A tout e force. 
Cet homme veut a toute force me 

preter son argent. 
Suivre,* 4 ; pres. part, suivant ; past 

part, suivi. 
Je suis, tu suis, il ou elle suit, on 

suit. 
Pour suivre* 4. (Is conjugated like 

suivre.) 
Conserver, 1. 



To preserve, to save. 

Soixante-tr hsieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

1. faut que nous nous en allions. — Pourquoi faut-il que nous nous 
en allions? Je n'aime pas la mine de ces gens-la. lis nous suivent, 
je crois. lis viennent par ici ; tournons par-la. JSPayez pas peur 
d ? eux. — Quand irons-nous nager? Nous irions a present raeme, si 
nous pouvions trouver un bon endroit. — Qu'a-ce petit garcon % II 
souffre de la tete. N ; a-t-elle pas souffert de la gorge ? — Ne faites- 
vous pas de la peine a votre tante? — Ne font-ils pas de la peine a 
leurs parents? — A qui eherchez-vous a faire plaisir? — Si j'allais au 
theatre ; cela ferait-il plaisir a mon oncle? — N : a-t-il pas fait de la 
peine a sa belle-seem ? — Si un voleur attaquait (attacked) M. Ran- 
dolph, son gros chien ne s'elancerait-il pas sur le voleur ? — Ne crie- 
t-elle point, parce qu'il faut coder a la necessite ? 

What is the matter with you ? It is all over with me. — Why do 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 335 

you cry thus? Why do I cry? I have been robbed of my gold 
rings, (une bague d'or,) my best clothes, and all my money; that is 
the reason why I cry. — Do not make (ne faites pas) so much noise, 
for it is we who have taken them all. (tout cela,) in order to teach 
you to take better care (avoir plus de soin, 50 3 ) of your things, 
(affaires,) and to shut the door of your room when you go out. — 
Why do you look so sad % I have experienced great misfortunes. 
After having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men; 
and to my still greater ill-luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom I 
love so much, has been struck with apoplexy. — You must not afflict 
yourself (s'affliger) so much, for you know that we must yield to 
necessity. 

Do you know a good place to swim in ? I know one, but it is 
rather far. — Where is it? If you will go with me, I will tell you. — 
I will go if it is not too far. — On that side (38 1 ) of the river, behind 
the wood, (laforit,) near the high road, (le grand chemin.) — When 
shall we go to swim? This evening, if you like. — Will you wait 
for me before the city gate ? I shall wait for you there ) but I beg 
of you not to forget it. — You know that I never forget my promises. 
— Where did you become acquainted with that lady? I became 
acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Why 
does your cousin ask me for (40 1 ) money and books ? Because he 
is a fool ) of me, (car a moi 7 ) who am his nearest relation, (son plus 
proche parent,) and his best friend, he asks nothing. — Can you get 
rid of that man? (52 2 ). I cannot get rid of him, for he will abso- 
lutely (d toute force) follow me. — Has he not lost his wits? It may 
be, (cela se peut.) — What does he ask you for? He wishes to sell 
me a horse which I do not want. 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON, 64th.— Soixante-quatrieme Legon, Mme. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

Obs. 149. How, how much, how many, before an exclamation, are trans- 
lated by que. Ex. 

Tj i , S Que vous etes bon ! 

How good you are ! < Tr . _ 

( Que de bonte vous avez ! 

How foolish he is, not to go ! | Qu'il est sot, de ne pas y aller ! 

Obs. 1491. The adjective which in English follows how, stands in French 
after the verb ; and when que is followed by a substantive, de must always 
precede the latter. 



336 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



How foolish she is to believe him ! 

How rich that man is ! 

How handsome that woman is ! 

How much kindness you have for 
me ! 

How many obligations I am under to 
you ! 

To be under obligations to some one. 

I am under many obligations to him. 

How many people ! 

How happy you are ! 

How much wealth that man has ! 

How much money that man has 
spent in his life ! 

To be obliged to some one for some- 
thing. 

To be indebted to some one for some- 
thing. 

I am indebted to him for it. 

To thank. 

To thank one for something. 



Qu'elle est sotte de le croire ! 
Que cet homme est riche ! 
Que cette femme est belle ! 
Que de bonte vous avez pour moi ! 

t Que d'obligations je vous ai ! 

t Avoir des obligations a, quelqu'un. 

t Je lui ai beaucoup d'obligations. 

Que de monde ! 

Que vous etes heureux ! 

Que de richesses cet homme a ! 

Que d' argent cet homme a depense 
dans sa vie ! 

Etre oblige a quelqu'un de quelque 

A chose. 

Etre redevable a quelqu'un de quel- 
que chose. 

Je lui en suis redevable. 

Remercier, 1, (has no prepos. before 
the pers. but de before the object.) 

Remercier quelqu'un de quelque 
chose. 

Voulez-vous me passer cet eventail ? 

Ayez la bonte de me 

Faites-moi le plaisir de me 

Vous prierai-je de me 

Veuillez (imper.) me 

Obs. 150. Never use remercier before the performance of the action, but 
one of the opposite phrases, or any of similar import. 

I thank you for the trouble you have I Je vous remercie de la peine que 
taken for me. vous avez prise pour moi. 

Soixante-quatrieme TiribiE. Ire Sec. 

Que ce petit garcon est sot de crier comme cela ! Que vous etes 
impoli de Pappeler sot! Et vous 7 que vous etes impertinent de 
m'appeler impoli ! — Vous a-t-il repondu ainsi, lui qui vous a tant 
d'obligations ! II est riche, et il a oublie toutes les obligations qu'il 
m'a. — Qui n'a point d'obligations a ses semblabies! — Nous nous 
devons des secours les uns aux autres. — C'est vrai. Quel est ce 
jeune homme en habit bleu? C'est le neveu d'un de nos premiers 
marchands. Que d'argent ce neveu a depense ! Que Madame 
Lewis est belle ! n ; est-ce pas? Et qu'elle est aimable ! Quelqu'un 
vous a-t-il remercie des dons que vous nous avez faits? Cela n'en 
vaut pas la peine. Faites-moi le plaisir (I will thank you) de me 
ies montrer. — Volontiers. Montons dans la chambre de devant 



I will thank you for that fan, or 
Shall I thank you for that fan ? 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 337 

nous les y trouverons. — Veuillez ramasser ma plume d'*acier, (I'll 
thank you to. . . .) La voici. Je vous remercie. De rien. A qui 
cet officier est-il redevable de sa compagnie. (company.) II en est 
redevable a son oncle, le general. — X qui est-il redevable de sa 
place ? (situation ?) 

How many people there were at the ball ! Then you enjoyed 
yourself (s'amuser) a good deal, I presume? No. not at all. Why 
so ? There was there such a multitude, that one could hardly get 
in. How many invitations they must have sent ! Could you 
dance? (N. 62 2 .) No ; there was not room (place) enough, — I 
bring you a pretty present, with which you will be much pleased, I 
hope. How good you are! What is it? A silk cravat. How 
many obligations I owe you 1 . Where is it? I have got it in my 
coat-pocket. Here it is, in this paper. Shall I open it ? Yes, open 
it. Now I see the cravat. How beautiful it is ! Does it please 
you? It pleases me much, and I thank you for it, with all my 
heart. I hope you w T ill at last accept {accepter) something from 
me. What do you intend to give me ? I will not tell you, for if I 
did, you would have no pleasure when I should give it to you. 

Where do you wish me to go for you ? W T here do I want you to 
go for me ? It is rather far. — No matter, (n'importe,) I am so much 
indebted to you, that I" will go wherever (ow) you please. (463, 0ft s . 
107.) — How kind you are ! Not more than you, (pas plus.) — How 
foolish Clarissa is, to stay at home when she could go travelling! 
Now she is almost too old, but say how foolish she was not to go 
15 years ago, when she could have gone! With whom could she 
have gone 1 5 years ago ? With her cousin's family, from Virginia, 
(laVirginie.) — Had she lost her wits? Perhaps, or perhaps her 
heart. — Make haste ; you and I must be at home in a quarter of an 
hour. Come, then; I am ready. I am not, (pas moi:) for, before 
I go away, I must have my pencils. — Here they are. I am much 
obliged, and under many obligations to you. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



How large? Of what size is the dog ? 
How high? Of what height is the tree ? 
How deep? Of what depth is the pond? 



De quelle grandeur est le chien ? 
De quelle hauteur ... est l'arbre ? 
De quelle profondeur ... est V Hang ? 



Ohs. 150£. When speaking of dimensions, the English use the verb 
to be, while the French use avoir, with the preposition de before the noun 
or adjective of dimensions. — How thick is this ? Combien ceci a-t-il d'epais- 
seur ? l 

1 In general, the substantive is more elegantly used than the adjective 
but deep cannot be expressed by deprofond, nor thick by d'epais. 
29 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



How high is his or her house ? 

It is nearly fifty feet high. 

Our house is thirty feet broad. 

That table is six feet long. 

That river is twenty feet deep. 

The size. What is your size ? how 

tall . . . 
I am 5 feet 9 inches. 
Of what size is that man ? 
He is but 5 feet 1 inch. 
How was that child dressed ? 
It was dressed in green. 
The man with the blue coat. 
The woman with the red gown. 
Is it true that his house is burnt ? 
It is true ; it is but too true. 
Is it not, (or is it not true ?) 
I shall perhaps go there ; but not he. 



t Combien sa maison a-t-elle de 

haut ou de hauteur ? 
t Elle a environ cinquante pieds de 

haut ou de hauteur, 
t Notre maison a trente pieds de 

large ou de largeur. 
t Cette table a six pieds de long ou 

de longueur, 
t Cette riviere a vingt pieds de pro- 

fondeur. 1 
La taille. Quelle est votre taille ? 

t J'ai 5 pieds 9 pouces. 

De quelle taille cet homme est-il ? 

t II n'a que 5 pieds 1 pouce. 

Comment cet enfant etait-il habille* ? 

t II etait habille de (ou en) vert. 

t L'homme a l'habit bleu. 

t La femme a la robe rouge. 

Est-il vrai que sa maison est bruise ? 

C'est vrai, ce n'est que trop vrai. 

N'est ce pas, (n'est-il pas vrai?) 

J'irai peut-etre ; mais il n'ira pas. 



Obs. 151. 
of: aller. 



Y (there), must not be used before the future and conditional 



To share, to divide. 

Whose horse is this ? It is mine. (29 2 .) 

It is my horse. It is mine. (§ 38, N. 3.) 

It is mine, or it belongs to me. 

Whose horses are these ? 

Are these gloves yours ? 

They are mine, or they belong to 

me. 
Whose house is that ? 
It is mine, or it belongs to me. 
Whose houses are these ? 
They are mine, or they belong to 

me. 
It is not your purse : is it ? 
These are not your notes : are they ? 
No, they are not. 



Partager, 1. 

A qui est ce cheval ? II est a moi. 

C'est mon cheval. C'est le mien. 

C'est le mien, ou il est a moi. 

A qui sont ces chevaux ? 

Ces gants sont-ils a vous ? 

Ce sont les miens, «milssonta moi. 

^ (473. Obs. 110.) 

A qui est cette maison ? 

C'est la mienne, ou elle est a moi. 

A qui sont ces maisons ? 

Ce sont les miennes, ou elles sont a 

moi. 
Est -ce que c' est 2 votre bourse? 
Est-ce que ce sont 2 vos billets ? 
Non, ce ne les sont pas. (§39 — 3.) 



1 See note on page 337. 

2 When a simple interrogation is used after a negation, as : You have not 
my ring, have you ? The French merely use the interrogative form : Est-ce 
que ... as: Est-ce que vous avez ma bague ? You may use : Avez-vous ma 
bague? but the other corresponds better with the doubt which the English 
mode seems to con rey. 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 339 

SoixANTE-QUATRiiiME Theme. 2de Sec. 

Avez-vous vu la nouvelle maison de Pavocat ? Oui, je Pai vue. 
Et vous, ne P avez-vous pas encore visitee? Non ; il faut que j'aille 
la voir bientot. II vaut mieux que vous alliez en voir la grandeur. 
Combien a-t-elle de hauteur % Elle a au moins 56 pieds de hauteur. 
— Combien de largeur a-t-elle ! Elle a, laissez-moi voir, les deux 
salons ont chacun 18 pieds de largeur et le vestibule a peu pres 8, ce 
qui fait 44 pieds. et Pepaisseur (the thickness) des murs a peu pres 4 
autres pieds. Alors le tout fait de 48 a 50 pieds de largeur, n'est-ce- 
pas? C'est une grande maison pour un petit homme. Quelle est 
sa taille ? II a environ 5 pieds 3 pouces; car j'ai au moins 6 pouces 
de plus que lui. Votre fils n'est-il pas grand % Si fait, il a plus de 6 
pieds. — X qui sont ces deux beaux chevaux noirs? Ah! quails sont 
beaux ! Ce sont ceux du ministre Americain. N'est-ce pas le Mon- 
sieur a Phabit noir, au gilet blanc, et a la cravate bleu mazarin ? — 
Combien cette riviere a-t-elle de profondeur ? — Combien cette table 
d'acajou a-t-elle de hauteur? N'est-il pas temps que nous allions voir 
le pont-neuf ? 

Whose houses are those ? They are mine. — Do these pens belong 
to you ? No, they belong to my sister. — Are those (sont-ce Id) the 
pens with which she writes so well] They are the same. — Whose 
gun is this? It is my fathers. — Are these books your sister's? They 
are hers. — Whose carriage is this ? It is mine. — Which is the man 
of whom you complain ? It is he (celui) who wears a red coat. — 
How were they dressed? Some were dressed in blue, some in 
green, some in yellow, and several in red. — Who are those men ? 
The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbor, and the man with 
the black coat the physician whose son has given my neighbor a 
blow with a stick. — Who is the man with the green coat ? He is one 
of my relations. — Are there many philosophers in your country ? 
There are as many there as in yours. — How does this hat fit me ? It 
fits you very well. — How does that coat fit your brother? It fits him 
admirably.— Is your brother as tall (grand) as you ? Hej is taller 
than I, but I am older (age) than he. — Of what size (de quelle taille.) 
is that man ? He is five feet four inches (un pouce) high. — How high 
is the house of our landlord? It is sixty feet high. — Is your well 
deep ? Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep. — -'There are many learned 
men (un savant) in Rome, are there not, (n J est-ce pas ?'*') Milton asked 
a Roman. " Not so many as when you were there/'* answered 
(repondit) the Roman. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 

To run up, run up, p. p., run up i Accourir* 2, accouru e , ace our ez vi(e, 

quick. (conjugue comme Courir.) (46 3 , 4S 1 .) 



340 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 



Many men had run up ; but instead of 
extinguishing the fire, the wretches 
set to plundering. 

To run to the assistance of some one. 

To save, to deliver from danger. 

To save anybody's life. 

To plunder, ao rob.) The pillage. 

To set about something. 

Have they succeeded in extinguish- 
ing the fire ? 

They have succeeded in it. 

The watch indicates the hours. 

To indicate, to mark. 

To quarrel. 

To quarrel with one. 

To dispute {to contend) about some- 
thing. 

What are those officers disputing 
about ? 

They are disputing about who shall 
go first to the attack. 

To be ignorant of something, or 

Not to know something. 

The eve, the day before. 

The day before that day was Satur- 
day. 

The day before Sunday is Saturday. 

What day comes before Sunday ? 

Is it time for me to take ? It is time 
that you should take, we should take. 

Although 1 can, thou canst, he can. 

We can or may, you can or may, they 

may. 

For the formation of the subjunctive 
To cure, heal. To cure one's self. | 



Eeaucoup d'hommes etaient accou 
rus, mais au lieud'eteindre le feu 
les miserables s' etaient mis a piller. 

Accourir,* 2, au secours (a l'assist 
ance, a l'aide) de quelqu'un. 

Sauver, 1, du danger. 

Sauver la vie a quelqu'un. 

Piller, 1. Le pillage. 

t Se mettre* a quelque chose. 

Est-on parvenu a eteindre le feu? 

On y est parvenu. 

La montre marque les heures. 

Marauer, 1 ; indiquer, 1. 

Se quereller, 1. 

t Quereller quelqu'un. 

Disputer sur quelque chose. 

Sur quoi ces officiers disputent-ils ? 

t lis disputent a qui ira le premier a 
l'attaque. 

Ignore?-, 1, quelque chose, (no prep.) 

La veille, (de avant le nom qui suit.) 
t La veille de ce jour-la etait un 

samedi. 
t La veille de dimanche est samedi. 
Quelle est la veille de dimanche ? 
Est-il temps que je prenne ? II est 

temps que vous preniez — que nous 

prenions. 
Quoiqueje puisse, tu puisses, il 

puisse. 
Nous puissionSj vous puissiez, ils 

puis sent. 
present, see (§ 151.) 
Guerir, 2. Seguerir. Guerissez-vous. 



Soixante-quatrieme The^ie. 3me Sec. 

Est-il vrai que votre oncle soit arrive? Quoiqu'on m'ait dit qu'il 
est arrive, je ne le crois pas, je vous assure. — Le ministre vous a-t-il 
assure de son assistance ?■ Oui, je vous assure que c'est vrai. — N'est-il 
pas temps que nous prenions le the '\ Si fait, il est temps que nous 
le prenions. — Irez-vous a Passemblee 1 Quoique je puisse y aller, 
je rrirai pas, parce que m'a mere ne desire pas que j'y aille. — Com- 
ment se trouve Emma, aujourd'hui ? Quoiqu'elle soit mieux, elle 
n'est pas encore bien. Sort-elle? Oui ; quoiqu'elle ne soit pas 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 341 

guerie, elle sort. — Se querellent-ils toujours? lis se querelent, 
mais il est temps qu'ils soient amis. — Sur quoi disputez-vous ? Nous 
disputons sur le rapport du comite de sante. Disputerez-vous tou- 
jours? Pourquoi ne disputerions-nous pas? — Ne vous a-t-elle pas 
sauve d'un grand danger? — L'attaque a-t-elle eu lieu? — A-t-elle 
reussi? — Ou etiez-vous la veille de ce jour-la? — Ignoriez-vous le 
manage de M.Francois? — Quelle est la veille de lundi? — Quelle 
est la veille du douze? N ; entendez-vous pas crier au feu! (fire!) 
au feu ! — A-t-on sauve la maison ? — A-t-on pu sauver Pecurie ? — Si 
Pon avait eu plus d'eau. la maison aurait-elle brule? 

11 What is the difference (la difference) between a watch and me ? ;? 
inquired (demanda) a lady of a young officer. — "My lady," replied 
he. " a watch marks the hours, and, near (aupres de) you, one for- 
gets them." — How many obligations I am under to you, my dear 
friend ! You have saved my life ! without you I should have been 
lost. — Have those miserable men hurt you ? They have beaten and 
robbed me, and when you ran to my assistance they were about to 
(Us allaient) strip (deshabiller) and kill me. — I am happy to have 
delivered you from the (des) hands of those robbers. — How good 
you are ! I shall always be indebted to you for it ! — It is not worth 
mentioning, (speaking about it.) 

Why are those officers quarreling ? They are quarreling because 
they do not know what to do. — Have they succeeded in extinguish- 
ing the fire ? They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said (on 
dit) that several houses have been burnt. — Have they not been able 
to save anything? They have not been able to save anything; for, 
instead of extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches (les mise- 
rables) who had come up, set to plundering. — What has happened? 
A great misfortune has happened. — Why did my friends set out 
without me ? They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing 
that you did not come, they set out. — What is the day before Mon- 
day called ? The day before Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not 
run to the assistance of your neighbor whose house has been burnt? 
I was quite (entier ement) ignorant of his house being on fire, (que le 
feu fid a sa maison ;) for, had I known it, I would have run to his 
assistance. 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON, 65th.-— Soixante-cinquieme Legon, 65me. 

Vocabulaire, Ire Sec. 
To propose. I Se proposer, 1, (de before infin.) 

I propose going on that journey. | Je me propose de faire ce voyage. 

29* 



342 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



He proposes joining a hunting party. 

To play a game at chess. 

A game at billiards. 

A game at cards. 

A party, a soiree ; a musical party. 

To succeed. 

Do you succeed in doing that ? 

I do succeed in it. 

To endeavor. 

I endeavor to do it. 

I endeavor to succeed in it. 

Endeavor to do better. 

Since, seeing, considering that. 

Since you are happy, why do you 
complain ? 

To be thoroughly acquainted with a 
thing. 

To make one's self thoroughly ac- 
quainted with a thing. 

That man understands that business 
perfectly. 

I understand that well. 

Since ox from. From that time. 

From my childhood. 

From morning until evening. 

From the beginning to the end. 

From here to there. 
To blow, to blow out. Strongly, hard. 
East, the east, to the east, east wind. 
The north, to the north, the north 

wind. 
The west, to the west, the west wind. 
The south, to the south, the south 

wind. 
The north-west. The south-east. 
To encourage. To unroot, pull. 



II se propose d'aller a une partie dt 

chasse. 
t Faire une partie d'echecs. 
Une partie de billard. 
Une partie de cartes. 
Une partie, ou soiree ; une soiree 

musicale. 
Reussir, 2, (a before infin.) 
Reussissez-vous a faire cela ? 
J'y reussis. 

Tdcher, 1, {de before infin.) 
Je tache de le faire. 
Je tache d'y reussir. 
Tachez de faire mieux. 
Puisque. 
Puisque vous etes heureux, pourquoi 

vous plaignez-vous ? 
JE.tr e aufait de quelque chose. 

Se mettre au fait de quelque chose. 

Cet homme est au fait de cette af- 
faire. 

Je suis au fait de cela. 

Depuis. Depuis ce moment-la. 

Depuis ma jeunesse. 

Depuis le matin jusqu'au soir. 

Depuis le commencement jusqu' a la 
fin. 

Depuis ici jusque la. 

Souffler, 1. Fort. 

Est, Test, a Test, le vent d'est. 

Le nord, au nord, le vent de nord. 

L'ouest, a, l'ouest, le vent d'ouest. 
Le sud, au sud, le vent de sud. 



Le nord-ouest. Le sud-est. 

Encourager, 1. (§144 — 2.) Dera- 
ciner, 1. 

Soixante-cinquieme ThSme. Ire Sec. 
Vous proposez-vous de faire un petit voyage cet ete ? Je me pro- 
pose de faire un petit tour. N'est-il pas temps que vous partiez ? 
(§151.) Je me propose de le faire dans quelques jours. Si vous 
n'etes pas occupe, allons faire une partie de billard. II y a si long- 
temps que je n'ai joue au billard, que vous n'auriez aucun plaisir a 
fairo une partie avec moi; mais si vous aimez les echecs, j'en ferai 
une partie avec vous. J 7 aime les echecs le soir quand on est tran 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 343 

quille. — Mais ne faut-il pas que nous allions nous preparer pour la 
soiree de Madame Rush? Quoiqu ; elle nVait fait Fhonneur de min- 
viter. (to invite me.) je ne pourrai pas y aller. Tachez d'y venir. 
Puisque vous le desirez, je tacherai d'y aller. Y jouera-t-on aux 
cartes ? II y a toujours une partie de cartes. — Ce jeune Irlandais est- 
il au fait ? — Votre servante est-elle au fait de son devoir ? — Ce corn- 
mis est au fait ; n 7 est-ce pas? — Vous dites que votre cousine est 
toujours de bonne humeur, pourquoi done se plaint-elle du matin 
jusqu ; au soir? — Quant a la danse, il est au fait, n 7 est-ce pas? — Est- 
ce qu ; il s'est bien conduit depuis sa jeunesse? (64 2 , N. 2.) — Quel 
bruit est cela ? N 7 est-ce pas le vent qui souffle ? Oh ! Comme il 
souffle fort ! Est-ce que c ; est un vent d ; ouest ou de nord? 

The wind has been blowing (§145) from the east these (depuis) 
three or four days, are you not astonished that we have no rain ? (subj. 
§151.) Yes. I am; for when the wind blows from the east, we 
generally have rain. — Is your west wind warm or cold? The west 
wind is not very cold, but the north and the north-west winds are 
usually strong and very cold. — Are they not cool in summer ? Yes, 
they are. — I presume your south wind is warm, is it not? It is our 
warmest wind. — And the south-west ? That is pleasant. — Does the 
wind blow hard here ? It sometimes blows hard enough to unroot 
trees, (deraciner des arbres.)—li Miss Clara is at Mrs. M.'s party, 
will you present me to her ? I will, with pleasure. — Have you been 
long acquainted with her ? I have known her these 2 years. — Does 
she understand the figures of quadrilles J (Est-elle au fait des figures 
des quadrilles ?) She knows them very well, or understands them 
perfectly, do you? (64 2 , N. 2.) 

Who won the game of chess ? I endeavored to do it, but I could 
not (62 2 . N. 1.) — Your cousins frequendy play chess, do they not? 
No. they more frequently play billiards or cards. — I wish I could 
translate my exercises without mistakes ; but, although I try to do 
it, I cannot succeed. Try again. It is the only means to succeed. 
Since you encourage me, I will continue. — If she was not unhappy, 
would she complain? There are people who always complain. — 
Why are you without a light ? The wind blew it out when you 
came in. — What does your French master make you do ? He 
makes me read a lesson; afterwards he makes me translate English 
exercises into French on the lesson which he made me read; and 
from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks French to 
me, and I have to answer him (il me faut lui repondre) in the very 
language (dans la langue meme) which he is teaching me. — Have 
you already learned much in that manner? You see that I have 
already learned something. 



344 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



Reduire* 4, 
Reduis-tu ? 



reduit. Reduisez, 
Je reduis, elle reduit, 



Traduit. Traduisez. 
(as reduire.) Pre- 



To reduce, abate, reduced. Reduce. 
Dost thou reduce ? I reduce, she 

reduces. 
To translate, translated. Translate. 
To introduce, to present. 

To reduce the price. 
Reduce the price a crown. 
To translate into French. 
Shall I translate French into English ? 
Translate from one language into 
another. 

I introduce him to you. 

I introduce you to him, her. 

He will present us to them. 

He himself has told it me. 

He has told it me, to myself, (not to 

another person.) 
One does not like to flatter one's self. On n'aime pas a se flatter soi-meme. 

Obs. 152. Sometimes the word meme is an adverb, and answers to the 
English word even. 



Traduire,* 4. 
I?itroduire,* 4 

senter, 1. 
Reduire le prix. 
Reduisez le prix d'un ecu. 
Traduire en Frangais. 
Traduirai-je du Fran§ais en Anglais ? 
Traduisez d'une langue dans une 

autre. 
Je l'introduis chez vous. 
t Je vous le presente. 
t Je vous presente a lui, a elle. 
t II nous presentera a eux, a elles. 
II me l'a dit lu>meme. (41£.) 
II me l'a dit a moi-meme. 



He has not even money enough to 
buy some bread. 

We must love everybody, even our 
enemies. 

Again, (anew.) 

He speaks again. 

To fall, to lower. 

The price of the merchandise falls. 

To deduct. 

To raise, lift up, put up, rise, increase. 

Is flour higher or lower ? 

She has lowered the window ; raise 
it up. 

The provisions. Produce has risen. 

To overcharge, to ask too much. 

Not having overcharged you, I can- 
not deduct anything. 

An ell. A yard. 

A metre, {measure.) 

To produce, {to yield, to profit.) 

How much does that employment 
yield you a year ? 

An employment. 

To permit, permitted. Permit. 



II n'a pas meme assez d'argent pour 

acheter du pain. 
II faut aimer tout le monde, meme 

nos ennemis. 
De nouveau. 
II parle de nouveau. 
Baisser, 1, {tomber, 1, 51 M 
La marchandise baisse de prix. 
Rabattre, 4, (see battre, 4, 36 J .) 
Lever, 1. (§ 144 — i.) Hausser. 

La farine a-t-elle hausse ou baisse ? 
Elle a baisse la fenetre, levez-la. 

Lesdenre'es. Lesdenrdesont hausse. 

Surf aire, * (like faire.*) 

Ne vous ayant pas surfait, je ne sau- 

rais rien rabattre. 
Une aune. Une yard ou verge. 

Tin metre. 
Rapporter, 1. 
Combien cet emploi (cette charge) 

vous rapporte-t-il (elle) par an ? 
Un emploi, une charge. 
Permettre*4: [de), permis. Permettez, 

(mettre.j 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 345 

Soixante-cinqtjieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 

A-t-il reduit le prix de son velours de soie? Non. il dit qu'il ne 
rabattra rien. Ce marchand surfait trop. II assure qu'il ne surfait 
pas du tout, mais que comme ses marchandises sont de la meilleure 
qualite, il est oblige de vendre plus cher. — Voulez-vous m'introduire 
a un autre ? Je vous introduirai avec plaisir. — Qui a presente ce 
jeune avocat au president? Le ministre le lui a presente. Le roi 
a-t-il efre presente au ministre ? Non ; mais le ministre Pa ete au 
roi.— Puisque vous cormaissez M. Martin, voulez-vous me le pre- 
senter? Je vous le presenterai. II vient par ici. Dr. Prudieu, per- 
mettez moi (permit me) de vous presenter M. Martin, de Louisville. 
Dr., je suis charme d'avoir le plaisir de votre connaissance. C ; est 
avec beaucoup de plaisir, M., que je fais la votre. — Vous 1? a-t-il dit 
lui-meme ? Non, mais sa femme elle-meme me Pa dit. — Votre pere 
vous a-t-il permis (from permetlre, to permit) d'acheter 3 aunes de 
ce drap ? II me Pa permis. — Leur permet-il de se servir de son 
cheval? — Avez-vous leve la fenetre? — Le coton hausse-t-il ? 

What is the price of this cloth? I sell it at three crowns and a 
half the ell. — I think (trouver) it very dear. Has the price of cloth 
not fallen ? It has not fallen ; the price of all goods (la marchandise) 
has fallen, except that of cloth, (excepte celui du drap.) — I will give 
you three crowns for it, (en.) — I cannot let you have (donner) it for 
(a) that price, for it costs me (couter, 1) more. — Will you have the 
goodness to show me some pieces (la piece) of English cloth? With 
much pleasure. — Does this silk suit you ? It does not suit me. — 
Why does it not suit you? Because it is too dear; if you will lower 
the price, (en rdbattre quelque chose,) I shall buy twenty yards of it. 
— Not having asked too much, I cannot take off anything. — You 
learn French ; does your master let you translate ? He lets me 
read, write, and translate. 

Had cotton risen in England, by the last news? Yes, it had 
risen } of a penny. — Then it will rise here. — Probably, (proba- 
blement.) — Is it true that produce and provisions are lower? I be- 
lieve they are the same, (au merne prix;) that they have neither 
risen nor sunk, (lowered.) — What is the price of a yard of your 
silk velvet? It is 4 dollars a yard. It is high. How beautiful it 
is! See! — Is flour high? Five dollars a barrel. — Will it not be 
lower in the fall ? It may lower, fall. — Will you permit me to use 
your fan? If he would reduce the price of his house, would you 
take it for your family? — W^ould he purchase 2 barrels of flour, if it 
was 4i dollars a barrel? — How do you do, to-day? I am very 
unwell, (tres-mal.) — How do you like that soup? I think (trouver) 
it is very bad; but since I have lost my appetite, (Vappetit.) I do 



346 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. {!.) 



not like anything, (je ne trouve rien de bon.) — How much does 
that employment yield to your father ? It yields him more than 
four thousand (mille has no s in the plural) crowns. 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON, 66th.— Soixante-sixieme Legem, 66me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



A kind , sort, (a species.) 
What kind of fruit is that ? 

A stone (of a fruit). A plum stone. 
A stone of a peach, an apricot. 
Stone-fruit. Break these stones. 

One must break the stone before one 

comes at the kernel. 
A kernel. 

An almond. Kernel-fruit. 

A sweet almond. A bitter almond. 
It is a kernel-fruit. 
To gather, gathered. Gather. 
I gather, thou gatherest, he gathers. 
To gather fruit. 

To serve up the soup, the breakfast. 
To bring in the dessert. 
The fruit. An apricot. A peach. 
A plum. An anecdote. Roast meat. 
To cease, to leave off. 
I leave off reading. 
She does not leave off speaking. 
To avoid. 
To escape. 

To escape a misfortune. 
He ran away to avoid death. 

To flee, to take to flight, one 1 s heels, &c. 

To do without a thing. 

Can you do without bread 1 

I can do without it. 

There are many things which we 
must do without. 

To depend, belong to, be connected 
with. 

This employment and the duties 
connected with it. 

That lesson and the exercises be- 
longing to it. 



Une espece. 

Quelle espece de fruit est cela, (or 

est-ce la ?) 
Un noyau. Un noyau de prune. 
Un noyau de peche, d'abricot. 
Fruits a noyau. Cassez ces noyaux. 

(92.) 
II faut casser le noyau pour en avoir 

l'amande: (a proverb.) 
Une amande, un pepin. 
Une amande. Fruits a pepin. 

Une amande douce, amere. 
C'est un fruit a pepin. 
Cueillir,* 2, cueilli. Cueillez. 
Je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille. 
Cueillir du fruit. 

Servir la soupe, le dejeuner. 

Servir le dessert. 

Le fruit. Un abricot. Une peche. 
Une prune. Un© anecdote. Du roti. 
Cesser, 1, de. 
Je cesse de lire. 
Elle ne cesse de parler. (62 1 .) 
Eviter, 1, (de before infin.) 
Echapper, 1. 

t Echapper a un malheur. 
II a pris la fuite pour echapper a la 

mort. 
'Prendre la fuite. 
Se passer de quelque chose. 
Pouvez-vous vous passer de pain ? 
Je puis (je peux) m'en passer. 
II y a bien des choses dont il faut se 

passer. 
Dependre, 4, de. 

Cet emploi et les devoirs qui en de- 
pendent. 

Cette lecon et les themes qui en de- 
pendent. 






SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 347 

Soixante-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Aimez-vous les amandes? Oui, je les aime douces. — L'epicier 
du coin vend-il de bonnes peches seches ? Non, les peches seches 
qu'il vend sont sures, trop sures. C'est dommage. — N ; est-il pas 
bientot temps que nous ayons des abricots ? Des abricots ? Ce n'est 
pas encore la saison (season.) II faut que les cerises et les fraises 
viennent (subj. § 151) avant. Nousn'avons pas encore eu ces fruits-la 
Dans la saison des fruits j'aime beaucoup les desserts. — Jean, si vous 
allez dans le jardin, ne cueillez pas les fruits. Non, je n'en cueillerai 
pas; mais ne faut-il pas que je cueille un bouquet? Si fait, cueillez 
en un pour votre cousine Marie. — Quelle espece de fruit est cela? 
Ce n 7 est pas un fruit. Qu ? est-ce done ? O'est une tomate (a tomato.) 
Elle ressemble aun fruit, n ? est-ce pas ? Dans la saison des tomates, 
je ne peux pas m'en passer, et vous? (62 3 , N. 1.) — Mon fils ne peut 
pas se passer de pain, les votres s'en passent-ils ? Pourquoi eviiez- 
vous M. Charles ? — Mile. Amanda a ete bien heureuse d'echapper 
a la mort. — Elle a echappe a un accident affreux, ne le saviez-vous 
pas? 

You must speak, (subj.) you must not be afraid. — I am too bashful 
(timide) to speak. I should like to (je voudrais bien) know why I 
am so bashful. — You would not be so bashful if you studied better. 
Do you think so ? To be sure, I do. — Have they already brought in 
the dessert? They have brought it in. — Do you like fruit? I like 
fruit, but I have no more appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese? I 
will eat a little. — Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese? I 
will eat a little Dutch cheese. — What kind of fruit is that? It is 
stone-fruit. — What is it called? It is called thus. — Will you wash 
your hands? I should like to (je voudrais bien) wash them, but I 
have no towel to (pour) wipe them with. — I will let you have (faire 
donner) a towel, some soap, and some water. I shall be much 
obliged (fort oblige) to you. 

May I ask you for (oserais-je vous demander) a little water ? Here 
is some, (en void.) Can you do without soap? As for soap, 1 can 
do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands with. — Do 
you often do without soap ? There are many things which we must 
do without. — Why has that man run away? Because he had no 
other means of escaping the punishment (la punition) which he had 
deserved, (meriter.) — Why did your brothers not get (se procurer) a 
better horse ? If they had got rid of their old horse, they would 
have got a better. — Has your father arrived already ? Not yet, but 
we hope that he will arrive this very day, (aujourd'hui mane.) — Has 
your friend set out in time, (a temps?) I do not know, but I hope 
he has (quHl sera, 58 1 , Obs. 141) set out in time. 



348 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



VOOABULAIBE. 

To execute a commission. 
To acquit one's self of a commis- 
sion, to do an errand. 
I have executed your commission. 



2de Sec. 



S'acquitter, 1, oVune commission. 



Have you executed my commission ? * 

I have executed it. 

To do one's duty. 

To discharge, to do, or to fulfil one's 

duty. 
That man always does his duty. 
That man always fulfils his duty. 

To rely, to depend upon something. 
He depends upon it. 

I rely upon you. 



You may rely upon him. 

That is to say, (i. e.) Et ccstera, (etc.) 
My pen (quill) is better than yours. 
They will warm the soup. 
Dinner (or supper) is on the table, (is 

served up.) 
Do you choose any soup ? 
Shall I help you to some soup ? 
I will trouble you for a little. 
To serve up, to attend. 
Not that I know of, you know of. 



Je me suis acquitte de votre com- 
mission. 

Vous etes-vous acquitte de ma com- 
mission ? 

Avez-vous fait ma commission ? 

Je m'en suis acquitte. 

Faire son devoir. 

Remplir son devoir. 

Cet homme fait to uj ours son devoir. 
Cet homme s'aequitte toujours de 

son devoir. 
Compter, 1, sur quelque chose. 
II y compte. 

JJe compte sur vous. 
Je me fie a vous. 
f Vous pouvez vous fier a lui. 
< Vous pouvez vous y fier. 
( Vous pouvez compter sur lui. 
C est-a-dire. Savoir. Et ccetera, (etc.) 
Ma plume est meilieure que la votre. 
On fera chauffer la soupe. 
On a servi. 

> t Vous servirai-je de la soupe ? 

t Je vous en demanderai un peu. 

Servir. * 

Pas que je sache t vous sachiez, (sub. 

$ 151.) 
1 1 est impossible que je le receive a 



Je voudrais Men savoir. Je voudrais 

Men savoir pourquoi il le dit. 
Je voudrais bien savoir si . . . 



It is impossible that I should receive 

it in time, (for me to receive it.) 
I should like to know. I wonder why 

he says it. 
I wonder whether, (should like to 

know if. . .) 

Soixante-sixieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 

Que faut-il que nous fassions aujourd'hui? Je vous donne a 
etudier le vocabulaire de la soixante-sixieme lecon, seconde section ; 
et a preparer les themes Francais et Anglais qui en dependent (belong 
to it* connected with it.) Tachez de ne point faire de fautes. 
J'essaie toujours, mais je n 7 y reussis pas. Pierre (Peter) s'est-il ac- 
quitte de ma commission ? Pas que je sache. — Votre cousine parle- 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 349 

t-elle plus que votre soeur? Elle lefait; non parce qu'elle parle 
mieux, mais parce qu'elle n'est pas si timide. — Pai une commission 
importante a faire, pour laquelle je compte sur vous. — Vous pouvez 
compter sur moi. Je m'en acquitterai de mon mieux. Je voudrais 
bien savoir si Fori peut compter sur notre domestique ! — Mile. Emilie 
n'est pas encore revenue, faut-il qa'on tienne (§151) la soupe chaude 
pour elle ? — Vous servirai-je un peu de soupe ? — Pourquoi n'en 
prenez-vous pas, si vous ne pouvez pas vous en passer ? — Que vous 
servirai-je ? — Mon neveu va a Norristown, voulez-vous qu'il y fasse 
quelque commission ? 

Have you executed my commission ? I have executed it. — Has 
your brother executed the commission which I gave him ? He has 
executed it. — Would you (voudriez-vous) execute a commission for 
me ? I am under so many obligations to you that I will always 
execute your commissions, when it shall please you to give me 
any. — Will you ask the merchant whether (si) he ean let me have 
(me donner) the horse at the price (au prix) which I have offered 
him ? I am sure that he would be satisfied if you would add a few 
crowns more. — If I were sure of that I would add a few crowns 
more. — Good morning, my children! have you done your task? 
You well know that we always do it; or else (ou bien) we must be 
sick, or we must have a good excuse, (une excuse.) 

I wonder whether you could tell me an anecdote? Will you try 
to relate one to us? (nous en raconter une?) — In English or in French? 
Not in English; but in French. It is impossible for me to relate it 
without making many mistakes. We think so ; therefore we will 
excuse them, (excuser, 1.) — One of the valets de chambre (un des 
valets de chambre) of Louis XIV. (de Louis XIV.) requested that prince, 
as he was going to bed, (comme it se mettait au lit,) to recommend 
(de faire recommander) to the first president (d Monsieur le premier 
president) a law T suit (un proces) which he had against (contre) his 
father-in-law, and said, in urging him, (en le pressant :) "Alas, 
(Helas.) Sire, (Sire.) you have but to say one word." "Well," 
(Eh!) said Louis XIV., "it is not that which embarrasses me, (ce 
n J est pas de quoi je suis en peine ;) but tell me, (dis-moi.) if thou wert 
in thy father-in-law's place, (a la place de. . . . ,) and thy father-in-law 
in thine, wouldst thou be glad (bien aise) if I said that word ? 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



Ho suffice, be sufficient, answer. 
Is that bread sufficient for you ? 
It ie sufficient for me. 
1 suffice, thou dost suffice. 
30 



Suffire* 4, suffisant, suffit. 
Ce pain vous suffit-il ? 
II nie suffit. 
Je suffis, tu suffis. 



350 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 



Will that money be sufficient for that 
man ? 

It will be sufficient for him. 
Little wealth suffices for the wise. 
Has that sum been sufficient for that 

man? 
Was that man contented with that 

sum ? With those three dollars ? 
He was (satisfied with it, with them.) 
He has been contented with it. 
To be contented with something. 
It would be sufficient for him if you 

would only add a few crowns. 
He would be contented if you would 

only add a few crowns. 
To add. Add nothing to it. 

To embark, to go on board. 
A sail. 
To set sail. 
To set sail for. 
To sail for America. 

To sail. 

Under full sail. 

To sail under full sail. 

He embarked on the sixteenth of last 

month. 
He sailed on the third instant. 
The instant, the present month. 
The fourth or fifth instant. 
The letter is dated the 6th instant. 
To look at. Look at it, (him or her.) 

Soixante-sixieme Theme. 3me Sec. 
Je voudrais bien savoir quand le batiment mettra a la voile'? Le 
capitaine ne le dit-il pas dans sa lettre du quinze du courant ? Je ne 
m'en souviens pas. Regardez-la. II dit seulement : Mon batiment 
fera voile incessamment, ce qui veut dire : sans delai, bientot, dans 
quelques jours. — Quelle est la date aujourd'hui ? C ; est le 20 du 
courant. — Faut-il que vous sachiez le jour que le batiment fera voile ? 
H est important que je lesache. (§ 151.) — Ce que vous avez sur votre 
liste de provisions suffira-t-iH La regarderai-je ? Ne Pavez-vous 
pas encore regardee ? Non. Si je Pavais regardee, je saurais si 
ce que vous avez suffirait. Eh bien ! regardez-la. Du fromage. 

1 Voile, meaning a veil, a cover, is masculine. Ex. She has bought a veil 
Elle s'est, achefe un voile. 



Cet argent suffira t-il a cet homme ? 

(usually in the 3d pers. sing. ($• 

plur.) 
II lui suffira. 

Peu de bien suffit au sage. 
Cette somme a-t-elle sum* a. cet 

homme ? 
Cet homme s'est-il contente de cette 

somme ? De ces 3 gourdes ? (fem.) 
Elle lui a suffi. Elles lui ont suffi. 
II s'en est contente. 
Se contenter de quelque chose. 
Elle lui suffirait, si vous vouliezsewZe- 

ment y ajouter quelques €cus. 
II se contenterait, si vous vouliez 

seulement y ajouter quelques ecus. 
Ajouter, 1. N'y ajoutez rien. 
S 1 embarquer, 1. 
Une voile. 1 
t Mettre a la voile. 
t Faire voile pour. 
Faire voile pour PAmerique, (aller 

en Amerique.) 
Marcher. 

A pleines voiles, (a toutes voiles.) 
Marcher a pleines voiles, (cingler.) 
II s'est embarque le seize du mois 

dernier. 
II a mis a la voile le trois courant. 
Le courant. 

Le quatre ou le cinq du courant. 
La lettre est du six du courant. 
Regarder, 1. Regardez-le, (la.) 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 351 

du vin, de Peau de vie, du biscuit, du beurre, des amandes, des 
pruneaux, (prunes,) des raisins sees, (raisins,) du bceuf. Si vous 
n'avez pas de langues salees, (salt tongues,) il faut en ajouter. Com 
bien en ajouterai-je ? II faut que vous en ajoutiez au moins 5 ou 6. 
Vous passerez-vous dW/s J (eggs ?) Non, ni de poulets; car j'aime 
beaucoup les ceufs et les poulets. Ajoutez-les a la liste. 

What is that vessel coming under full sail ? It is the packet 
(paquebot) Susquehanna, from Liverpool. How fast it sails ! It sailed 
from Liverpool the 3d instant. It will soon come (arriver) to the wharf. 
Let me finish looking at your list, and then we will go and see who is 
in the packet. The last articles are chickens and eggs. — Will twelve 
pair of chickens be sufficient? I would think so. — And how many- 
eggs will you want? (vous faudra-t-il?) About twelve dozen, (dou- 
zaines.) or one hundred and fifty, will answer, (suffiront.) — Will you 
not want two hundred ? No, I guess twelve dozen will be enough. 
You will do well to put them up in salt. I wish I had everything 
arranged. I also. — On the list is there any tea, sugar, coffee, choco- 
late, pepper, and vinegar? Yes, I see all those articles. — Have you 
sent anything on board ? (d bord ?) I have already sent several chests 
full on board. We must, in going (en allant) to the Liverpool 
packet, see if they have been received, and where they have been 
put. 

Have they served up the ' soup % They have served it up some 
minutes ago. Then (alors) it must be cold : I like soup onl} T when 
it is hot. They will warm it for you. You will oblige me, (obliger.) 
— Shall I help you to some of this roast meat ? I will trouble you for 
a little. — Will you eat some of this mutton ? I thank you, I like fowl 
better, but a very small piece will suffice me. — May I offer you (vous 
offrirai-je) some wine ? I will trouble you for a little. — Is this bread 
sufficient for you 1 It would be sufficient for me if I was not very 
hungry. — When did your brother embark for America? He sailed 
on the 30th of last month. — Do you promise me to speak to your 
brother ? I promise you, you may depend upon it. I rely upon 
you. — Will you work harder (mieux) for next lesson than you have 
done for this? (53 1 , and $200.) I will work harder. — May I rely 
upon it? You may. 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 67th.— Soixante-septieme Lecon, 67me 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

To be a judge of something. I t Se connaitre en quelque chose. 

Are you a judge of Hoth ? I t Vous connaissez-vous en drap ? 



852 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 



I am a judge of it. 

I am not a judge of it. 

I am a good judge of it. 

I am not a good judge of it. 

To draw. 

To chalk, to trace, (to counterdraw.) 

To draw a landscape. 

To draw after life. 

The drawing. The drawer. 

Nature. Natural. 

To manage, or to go about a thing. 

How do you manage to make a fire 

without tongs ? 
I go about it so. 

You go about it the wrong way. 
I go about it the right way. 
How does your brother manage to do 

that ? 
Skilfully, handily, dexterously, cle- ; 

verly. 
Awkwardly, unhandily, badly. 
To forbid. 

I forbid you to do that. 
To lower. 

To cast down one's eyes. 
The curtain (of a theatre). 
The curtain rises, falls. 
The stocks have fallen — risen. 
The day falls. 

Night comes on. It grows dark. 
It grows late, it is rather late. 
To stoop. 



Je m'y connais. 

Je ne m'y connais pas. 

Je m'y connais tres-bien. 

Je ne m'y connais pas beaucoup. 

Des stiver, 1. 

Calquer, 1. 

Dessiner un paysage. 

Dessiner d'apres nature. 

Le dessin. Le dessinateur. 

La nature. Naturel, naturelle. 

S' y prendre. 

Comment vous y prenez-vous pour 

faire du feu sans pincettes I 1 
Je m'y prends comme cela. 
Vous vous y prenez mal. 
Je m'y prends bien. 
Comment votre frere s'y prend-ii 

pour faire cela ? 
Adroitement. 

Maladroitement. 

Defendre, 4, (de av. l'inf.) 

Je vous defends de faire cela. 

Baisser, 1. 

t Baisser les yeux. 

Latoile (d'un theatre), le rideau. 

t La toile (le rideau) se leve, se baisse. 

Le change a baisse — hausse. 

Le jour baisse. 

II se fait nuit. 

II se fait tard. 

Se baisser. 



Soixante-septieme Th&me. Ire Sec. 

Je voudrais bien savoir (I wonder) qui se connait bien en che- 
vaux? M. Lenoir s'y connait. Etes-vous sur qu'il s'yconnaisse 
bien? (§ 151.) Oui ; j'en suis stir; car je m'y connais moi-meme, 
mais il s ? y connait mieux que moi. — Vous dessinez, je sais. Des- 
sinex-vous d'apres nature, ou copiez-vous ? Je copie, generalement. 
— Voulez-vous que je dessine quelque chose pom vous? Je vou- 
drais avoir une copie (a copy) de ce paysage. Jean peut vous en 
ressiner une copie. Croyez-vous qu'il veuille le faire ? (§ 151".) En 

1 All nouns ending in Me are feminine, except the two following : un amu- 
lette, an amulet; un squelette, a skeleton ; and some compounds, as: un 
porte-mouchettes , asnufTer-stand ; un tire-botte, a boot-jack ; uncasse- noisette, 
rut-crackers. 






SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



353 



cas qu 7 il ne veuille pas, (In case he would not,) ne pouvez-vous pas 
le calquer? Comment voulez-vous le calquer, lorsqu'il est sous 
verre ? C'est vrai. Je n ; y pensais pas. Ne peut-on pas Poter du 
cadre? (frame.) Sans doute, on le pent. Comment vous y pren- 
driez-vous pour Poter? II faut d'abord oter les clous qui tiennent 
le dos du cadre. Mais pour cela il faut que nous ayons des pin- 
cettes. J ; ai une paire de pincettes. La voici. Voila un clou d'ote, 
(3 1 , Obs. 7.) 1 En voila deux d 7 6tes ; en voila trois. Ah 1 II n'y en 
a que trois. Alors ils sont tous otes. Mais attendez done ; ne nous 
est-il pas defendu d ; 6ter les gravures (engravings) des cadres pour 
calquer ? 

Are you a judge of cloth? I am a judge of it. — Will you buy 
some yards for me? (ra'en?) If you will give me the money, I 
will buy you some, (vous en.) — You will oblige (obliger) me. — Is that 
clerk a judge of cloth? He is not. — How do you manage to do 
that? I manage it so. — Will you show me how you manage it? I 
will, (je le veux bien.) — What must I do for my lesson of to-mor- 
row ? You will copy your exercises properly, learn the next voca- 
bulary, (vocabulaire suivant,) and write the exercises belonging to 
it. — How do you manage to get goods (des marchandises) without 
money? I buy on credit. — How does your sister manage to learn 
French without (52 1 ) a dictionary? She manages it thus. She 
manages it very dexterously. 

But how does your brother manage it? (Mais M. votre frere com- 
ment s'y prend-il ?) He manages it very awkwardly ; he reads and 
looks for the words in the dictionary. — He may (peut) learn in this 
manner twenty years without knowing how to make a single sen- 
tence, (une seule phrase.) — Why does your sister cast down her eyes ? 
Is it because she is bashful ? She casts them down because she is 
ashamed of not having done her task. — Shall we breakfast in the 
garden, to-day? The weather is so fine, that we should (quHl faut) 
take advantage of it, (en profiter.) — How do you like that coffee ? 
I like it very much, (excellent.) — I wonder why you stoop ? I stoop 
to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped, and in which I 
have put some money. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



To smell, to feel. 

He smells of garlic ; she, of musk. 

To feel some one's pulse. 



Sentir.* (54 2 .) 

II sent Vail; elle, le muse. 

t Tater le pouls a quelqu'un. 



1 After a noun, the past participle (used as an adjective, that is, without 
an auxiliary must be preceded by de or d\ (3 1 , Obs. 7. — 30 1 , Obs. 71.) 
30* 



354 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



To consent to a thing. 

I consent to it. 

To hide, to conceal. To hide one's self. 

The wit, the mind. Indeed. In fact. 

The truth. The effect. True. 

A true man. 

This is the right place for that pic- 
ture. 

To think much of one, (to esteem one.) 
To esteem some one. 

I do not think much of that man. 

I think much of him, (I esteem him 

much.) 
The flower, the bloom, the blossom. 
On a level with, even with. 
That man has his eyes on a level 

with his head, (prominent eyes.) 
To blossom, {to flourish.) 
To grow, growing, grown. 

I grow, thou growest, he or she 

grows, one grows, people grow. 
To grow rapidly, (fast.) 
To grow tall or big, grown tall. 
That child grows so fast that we 

may even see it. 
That child has grown very fast in a 

short time. 
That rain has made the corn grow. 
Corn. Indian corn. 

What a fine carnation ! What a 

good odor ! 
Has mignonette a fine scent, odor, or Le reseda sent-i! bon ? ou a-t-il une 

smell ? does it smell good, nice ? bonne odeur ? 

That heliotrope has a delightful scent. Cet heliotrope a une odeur delicieuse. 
To be witty, smart, talented. | t Avoir de l'esprit. 

Soixante-septieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Quelle belle (what a fine) fleur vous avez-la ! Sent-elle bon ? 
Sentez-la et regardez-la. Elle est belle; mais elle ne sent pas bon. 
Quelle espeee de fleur est-ce ? Ne la connaissez-vous pas ? C'est 

1 Fleurir, to blossom, is regular ; but when it means to flourish, its pre- 
sent participle is florissant, and its imperfect indicative florissait, florissaient. 
Ex. Tin empire florissant, a flourishing empire ; une armee florissante, a 
flourishing army; cet auteur florissait sous son regne, that author flourished 
under his reign ; les arts et les sciences florissaient alors, arts and sciences 
were then flourishing. 



Consentir * a quelque chose. (54 2 .) 

J'y consens. 

Cacher,!. Secacher. Cachez-vous, 

L'esprit. En verite. En effet. 

La verite. L' effet. Vrai. 

Un homme vrai. 

Voila la vraie place de ce tableau. 

Faire cas de quelqu'un. Estimer, 1, 

quelqu'un. 
Je ne fais pas grand cas de cet 

homme. 
Je fais grand cas de lui, (je Festime 

beaucoup.) 
La fleur. 
A fleur de. 
Cet homme a les yeux a fleur de 

tete. 
Fleurir, 2. 1 

Croitre* 4, croissant, cru. 
Je crois, tu crois, il ou elle croit, on 

croit. 
Croitre rapidement. 
Grandir, 2, grandi. 

t Cet enfant grandit a vue d'oeil. 

Cet enfant a bien grandi en peu de 

temps. 
Cette pluie a fait grandir les bles. 
Du ble. Du mais. 

Quel bel ozillet ! Quelle bonne 






SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 355 

nn dahlie. — Ce beurre sent Pail. L'aimez-vous quand il a le gout 
d 7 ail? Je ne Paime ni quand il sent Pail ni quand il en a le gout. 
(24 2 , Obs. 55.) — Que pensez-vous des ouvrages de W. Irving? Pen 
fais grand cas. Et de ceux de C. D. ? Je n ; en fais pas grand cas. 
II y a trop de mots dedans. — Votre cuisine est-elle a fleur de terre ? 
Oui, comme presque toutes les cuisines modernes, ou que Pon batit a 
present. Les anciennes cuisines n'etaient pas a fleur de terre : mais 
au dessous. — Que cachez-vous? Quelque chose que je ne veux 
pas que vous voyiez, (§ 151.) En verite ! Je suis fdche que vous le 
cachiez; (§151) en avez-vous honte ? N ; importe, cela me concerne, 
et ne vous concerne pas. En effet, cela ne me regarde pas; mais je 
ne croyais pas que vous en auriez fait un secret. — Votre neveu grandit 
beaucoup, iPest-ce pas? — Sa sceur ne grandit-elle pas a vue d'ceil? — 
Qui ne grandit plus ? 

Which is the most flourishing city of the United States ? (des Etats- 
Unis ?) It is New York, I think ; but there are many other flourish- 
ing cities in the U. S., (E. U.) — Which are the other flourishing 
places'? (endroits?) Philadelphie, Baltimore. Boston. Cincinnati, La 
Nouvelle-Orleans. Pittsbourg, &c. &c. — Does Indian corn grow well 
this season? Yes, it looks very well. The last rain we had (have 
had) has made it grow very fast. The mind always shows itself — 
it cannot be hidden. — That lawyer is w T itty, is he not? Yes, indeed. 
How witty (d'esprit) is that young lady ! — Truth has always a good 
effect, has it not? No, not always: truth sometimes make us ene- 
mies. — Is your portrait (portrait) in its right (true) place ? No, the 
light comes from the wrong (mauvais) side. Your portrait ought to 
be on the other side of the parlor. Then it would be in its true 
light, (jour.) — Had you not better change its place ? The family will 
not consent to it. 

That engraving would be in its true place, there : and your portrait 
in its, here : if I were you, I would change them. It is indifferent 
to me, and as the rest of the family have arranged it so, I will not 
meddle with it. — Do you like the smell of this little flower? It is 
delightful. — Is it not a piece of mignonette ? No, it is a piece of 
heliotrope. — Why do your sisters hide themselves? They would 
not hide themselves if they did not fear to be seen. — Whom are they 
afraid of? They are afraid of their governess, (une institutrice.) who 
scolded them yesterday because they had not done their tasks, (leur 
devoir.) — Have you already seen my son ? I have not seen him 
yet ; how is he ? He is very well ) you will not be able to recognise 
him, for he has grown .very tall in a short time. 



356 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 



Vocabulaire, 8me See. 
A cover. A shelter. A cottage, a hut. | Un gite. Un abri. Une chaumiere. 

> Se mettre a/?l'abr-i de quelque chose. 



To shelter one's self from something 
To take shelter from something. 
Let us shelter ourselves from the 

rain, the wind. 
Let us enter that cottage in order to 

be sheltered from the storm, (the 

tempest.) 

Everywhere, all over, throughout. 
All over (throughout) the town. 
A shade. Under the shade. 

Let us sit down under the shade of 

that tree. 
To pretend. 

That man pretends to sleep. 
That young lady pretends to know 

French. 
They pretend to come near us. 

Now. From, since. 

From morning. 

From the break of day. 

From the cradle, from a child. 

From this time forward. 

As soon as. As soon as you please. 

As soon as I see him I shall speak to 

him. 
For fear of. 
To catch a cold. 
I will not go out for fear of catching 

a cold. 
He does not wish to go to town, for 

fear of meeting with one of his 

creditors. 
He does not wish to open his purse, 

for fear of losing his money. 
To transcribe fairly. 
A grammar. A French grammar. 



Mettons-nous a l'abri de lapluie, du 

vent. 
Entrons dans cette chaumiere, pour 

etre a couvert de la tempete,"ow 

pour etre a l'abri des injures du 

temps. 
Part out. 

Par toute la ville. 
Une ombre. 1 A V ombre. 

Allons nous asseoir a 1' ombre c/e cet 

arbre. 
Faire semblant de. 
Cet homme fait semblant de dormir. 
Cette demoiselle fait semblant de 

savoir le Fran§ais. 
lis font semblant de s'approcher de 

nous. 
Maintenant. Des. 

Des le matin. 
Des le point du jour. 
Des le berceau. 
Des a present. 

Des que. Des que vous voudrez. 
Des que je le verrai je lui parlerai. 

De crainte oxx.de peur de. 

Prendre froid, s'enrhumer. 

Je ne veux pas sortir, de peur de 

m'enrhumer. 
II ne veut pas aller a la ville, de peur 

de rencontrer un de ses creanciers. 

II ne veut pas ouvrir sa bourse, de 

peur de perdre son argent. 
Mettre* au net. (33 1 .) 
Tine grammaire. Une grammaire 
Franchise. 

Soixante-septieme Th^me. 3me Sec. 

Le ciel est couvert, ne ferons-nous pas mieux de prendre chacun 
un parapluie ? Oh ! non, cela n 7 en vaut pas la peine. S'il pleut, 



1 Ombre, a shadow, is feminine ; 
game at cards, are masculine. 



but ombre, a kind of fish, and V ombre, a 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 357 

nous trouverons quelqu'abri. Sans doute ; nous trouverons quelque 
maison ou quelque chaumiere. Allons, allons. — Tenez, mainte- 
nant il fait du soleil, et un soleil bien chaud. II faut que nous pre- 
nions (§ 151) le cote de Pombre. Oui, vous avez raison, allons a 
Pombre. Lorsque nous aurons passe par toute la ville, nous senti- 
rons assez le soleil a la carnpagne. Passerons-nous a Pombre. 
Quant a moi, je ne nren soucie pas. Je n ; ai pas trop ehaud de ce 
cote-ci, mais je ne vous empeche pas d'aller a Pabri des maisons, 
si vous avez trop chaud au soleil. Jacques (James) et moi, nous 
allons a Pombre, vous autres ; (47J, 1,) faites comme vous voudrez. 
— Samuel fait semblant de ne pas ($ 171 — 7) avoir peur du chaud, 
cependant, il le sent aussi bien que nous autres. — Tenez, (06s. 94,) 
voyez done ! Thomas a sa grammaire Francaise ! Eh bien ! qu'y 
trouvez vous d'extraordinaire? Si j'ai le temps j ; etudierai. J'ai 
deja mis mes themes au net, et vous ; avez-vous mis les votres an 
net? Je les mettrai ce soir. 

Why does that man give nothing to the poor? [aux pauvres ?) He 
is too avaricious, (avare ;) he does not wish to open his purse, for 
fear of losing his money. — What sort of weather is it ? It is very 
warm ■ it is long since we had any rain ) I believe we shall have a 
storm, [un or age.) — It may be, (cela se pent bien.) The wind blows, 
it thunders already; do you hear it? Yes, I hear it, but the storm 
is still far off, [encore bien loin.) — Not so far as you think; see how 
it lightens. — It rains, it pours; what a shower! [quelle averse I) — If 
we go into some place [quelque part) we shall be sheltered from the 
storm. — Let us go into that cottage, then, [clone ;) w T e shall be shel- 
tered there from the wind and the rain. — The storm has ceased. 
We must go. 

Let us thank these good people for the shelter they have given 
us. We are much obliged to you. Adieu ! You are welcome. — 
W T here shall we go now? Which road shall we take? The 
shortest (court) will be the best. — We have too much sun, and I am 
still very tired : let us sit down under the shade of that tree. — W T ho 
is [quel est) that man who is sitting under the tree ? I do not know 
him. — It seems he [il par ait qu'il) wishes to be alone, [seul :) for 
when we offer (vouloir*) to approach him, he pretends to be 
asleep. — He is like your sister: she understands French very well, 
(fort bien;) but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to 
understand me. — Has not your uncle given the clerk (Dir. 3) some- 
thing to transcribe ? Yes, he has. — I wonder whether it is important 
that he should transcribe it (§ 151) immediately? Yes, it is, for 
fear the gentleman should go without the copy, (§151.) 



358 



SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 6Sih.—Soixante-huitieme Legon, 6Sme 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 
SECOND IMPERFECT TENSE.— Preterit. 
For its formation and use, see (§ 153,) and study it carefully. 

INFINITIVE. IMPERFECT. PRETERIT. 

To have, Avoir, I had. J'eus, tu eus, il eut, nous eumes, vous eutes, ils eurent. 
To be, Etre, I was. Je fus, fus, fut, fumes, futes, 

Had you money enough ? I had 



enough. 

Had he the pleasure of seeing her ? 

No, he was deprived of it. (To de- 
prive.) 

Had they no soup on that day ? 

They had none, but we had some. 



Had I less good luck than they ? 
You had as much as they, (fern.) 
Wast thou happy in thy choice ? 
I was not at all. Who was ? 

We were, they were ; but you were 

not. 
To go, Aller, I went. J'allai, 

To find, Trouver, I found. Je trouvai, vas, va. 

To bring-, Apporter, I brought. J'apportai, tas, ta, 



furent. 
J'er 



fumes, 
Eutes-vous asses d'argent ? 

eus assez. 
Eut-il le plaisir de la voir ? 
Non, ii en fut prive. {P river, 1.) 



N'eurent-ils pas de soupe ce jour-la ? 
Ils n'en eurent pas, mais nous en 

eumes. 
Eus-je moinsde bonheur qu'eux? 
Vous en eutes autant qu'elles. 
Fus-tu heureux dans ton choix ? 
Je ne le fus pas du tout. Qui le fut ? 
Nous le fumes, ils le furent ; mais 

vous ne le futes pas. 

alias, alia, allames, allates, allerent. 
vames, vates, verent. 
tames, tates, terent. 



Where did you go last night ? (§ 153.) 

I went nowhere, I stayed at home. 

Who went to the minister's ball ? 
None of the family went, but Sarah 

and Fanny will go to the consuV s 

ball. 
Did not the consul give one 3 weeks 

ago? 
Not the consul, but the ambassador 

and his wife gave one then. 

And it was there that his wife wore 

her beautiful wreath, was it not ? 
Did you find what you were seeking ? 

I did, but after looking long for it. 

Was the battle decisive ? 

It was completely so. 

The year before last. The week . . . 

Uiis steamboat. A steamship. 



Ou allates-vous hier soir? (time 

past.) 
Je n'allai nulle part, je restai a la 

maison. 
Qui alia au bal du ministre ? 
Personne (§ 153 — 3,) de la famille 

n'y alia, mais Sara et Fanny iront 

au bal du consul. 
Le consul n'en donna-t-il pas un il y 

a trois semaines ? 
Pas le consul, (§ 153 — 3,) maisl'am- 

bassadeur et son epouse en donne- 

rent un alors. 
Et ce fut la que son epouse porta son 

superbe bandeau, n'est-ce pas? 
Trouvates-vous ce que vous cher- 

chiez ? 
Je le trouvai, mais apres 1' avoir 

cherche long-temps. 
La bataille fut-elle decisive ? 
Elle le fut completement. 
U avant derniere annee. Semaine. 
Ce bateau d vapeur. Un natire a 

vapeur. 






SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



On board the steam packet. 
Now and then, from time to time. 
He gave it up on that account. 



A lord du paquebot a vapeur. 

De temps en temps. 

11 V abandonna a, cause de cela. 



Soixante-huitieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 

Que trouvates-vous dans le sac que vous ramassates ? Py trouvai 
un mouchoir, une jolie bourse et un morceau de gateau. Trouvates- 
vous, sur le mouchoir, le nom de la personne a qui il appartient? 
Je Py trouvai. Allates-vous le lui rendre % Je Py envoyai par la 
domestique. L ; ambassadeur eut-il beaucoup de raonde hier? II 
n'eut presque personne ; il faisait trop chaud. Restates-vous long- 
temps a Saratoga? Je n ; y restai que quelques jours; mais mes 
freres y resterent plus de 3 semaines. Eutes-vous le temps d'y voir 
le consul % Non, il n'etait pas encore arrive quand je quittai Pen- 
droit; mais mes freres eurent le temps et le plaisirde Py rencontrer 
— Jackson etait-il a la Nouvelle Orleans quand vous y arrivates? La 
bataille du 8 Janvier fut-elle decisive ? Le fut-elle aussi complete- 
ment que celle de Waterloo? Eurent-elles de bonne musique a 
leur concert? Ne fus-je pas complaisant? Ces petites filles ne 
furent-elles pas obeissantes? Elles s'en allerent, n ; est-ce pas? 

Did you not go last week to see the great panorama ? I was 
unwell, so that I did not go; but almost all the family went. — Were 
you obliged to transcribe that note more than once ? I was obliged 
to transcribe it three times. — Did not your cousin get (avoir) the 
yellow fever when he was in Mobile the year before last? No, he 
did not get it; but my nephew and my niece had it. — Had they a 
light or a violent attack ? The latter had a light attack of it, but the 
former had a violent one, and he could hardly escape death, (ce fut 
avec peine quHl.) — Did you find your father at Burlington? I was 
lucky enough to find him there, at the moment he was going on 
board the steamboat*— Did you both stay in Burlington then ? No, 
he took me on board the steamboat with him and brought me here. 

What steamboat was it? (etait-ce?) It was the John Stevens.— 
Were there many persons on board? (y avait-il?) There were not 
many. — Did the office (employment, la charge) which your uncle 
Had, produce much to him ? The office and all the functions which 
belonged to it, produced him between 1500 and 2000 dollars a year, 
(15 cents et 2 mille gourdes.) — Had he much to do ? (not past. J \ r es, 
he had a great deal to do. — Did his occupation (occupation j make 
[use to make) him sick now and then ? Yes, now and then he was 
(used to be) sick. — Had he not, once, more to do than usual ? (past.) 
Yes, once he had a great deal more to do. — Was he sick then ? (past.) 
Yes, he was very sick that time. — Was he sick a long time ? Did 
he give up his office on that account ? Where did we go on that 
account ? Did we give it up on that account ? 



360 



SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 
IMPERFECT CONTINUED.— Preterit Continue. 



INFINITIVES. 


IMPERFECT. 






PRETERIT. 






To punish, punir, 


I punished, 


Je punis, 


nis, 


nit, nimes, 


nites, 


nirent. 


To succeed, reussir, 


I succeeded, 


Je reussis, 


sis, 


sit, simes, 


sites, 


sirent. 


To restore, rendre, 


I restored, 


Je rendis, 


dis, 


dit, dimes, 


dites, 


dirent. 


To owe, devoir, 


I owed, 


Je dus, 


dus, 


dut, dumes, 


dutes, 


durent. 



J'avais fini de lire quand il descendit. 

Avais-je trouve ma bourse quand 
vous perdites la votre ? 



I had done reading when he came 

down. 
Had I found my purse when you lost 

yours ? 

These examples, and some previously given, show that 

THE PLUPERFECT.— Le Plusqueparfait. ($154.) 
is formed in French as in English, with the imperfect of the auxiliary and 
the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 



We had dined when he arrived. 
The king had named an admiral when 

he heard of you. (To name.) 
After having spoken, you went away 

with the colonel. 
After shaving, I washed and wiped 

my face. 
After having warmed themselves, 

they went into the garden. 
As soon as the bell rung, you awoke 

and you rose, (got up.) 
As soon as they called me, I got up. 
As soon as he was ready, he came to 

see me, and so did the colonel. 
As soon as we had our money, we 

agreed to that. 
As soon as he had his. horse, he came 

to show it me, and we tried it. 
After trying several times, they suc- 
ceeded in doing it. 
As soon as I saw him, I obtained 

what I wanted. 
As soon as I spoke to him, he kept 

his word, and did what I told him. 
The business was soon over. 
His word (meaning promise) of honor. 



Nous avions dine lorsquHl arriva. 
Le roi avait nomme un amiral, quand 

on luiparla de vous. {Nommer, I.) 
Apres avoir parle, vous vous en al- 

lates avec le colonel. 
Apres m'etre rase, je me lavai et 

rrC essuyai la figure. 
Apres s'etre chauffes, Us allerent au 

jar din. 
Des que la cloche sonna, vous vous 

reveilldtes, et vous vous levdtes. 
Des qu'ils m'appelerent, je me levai. 
Aussitot qu'il fut pret, il vint me 

voir, et le colonel vint aussi. 
Aussitot que nous eumes notre ar- 
gent, nous convinmes de cela. 
Aussitot qu'il eut son cheval, il vint 

me le montrer, et nous Vessaydmes. 
Apres avoir essaye plusieurs fois, ils 

parvinrent a le faire. 
Aussitot que je le vis, yobtins ce 

dont j'avais besoin. 
Aussitot que je lui parlai, il tint sa 

parole, et fit ce que je lui dis. 
L' affaire fut bientot faite. 
Sa parole (not mot) d'honneur. 



Soixante-huitieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Que faisiez-vous quand il arriva 1 Nous nous preparions a sortir. — 

Perdites-vous la partie d'echecs ? Oui ; je la perdis ; mais je gagnai 

la partie de billard. — Que demandates-vous au capitaine lorsque 

vous le rencontrates au quai? Je lui demandai si son colonel avait 



SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 361 

ete voir Pambassadeur Anglais ? Repondit-il que oui? II ne me 
repondif rien. C'etait tres poli, n 7 est-ce pas ? Je crois qu'il n ; entendit 
pas ma question. C/est different. Vous aurait-il repondu s'il vous 
avait entendu? Je n ; en doute pas, car il est extremement poli et 
affable. — Est-il important que vous passiez chez le marchand de 
soie ? — N 7 y passerent-ils pas sans vous? — Vous donna-t-elle des ceufs 
pour dejeuner? — Vous en donnera-t-elle de nouveau? — Nous en 
denneriez-vous si nous ne les aimions pas? 

Did not Mr. N. Biddle sell his beautiful black horse to his sister-in- 
law? No, she did not buy it, — Why did she not buy it? Because 
she was afraid of the price. — What did he ask her for it ? I was 
told that he had asked her 450 dollars for it. — When did Sarah finish 
her task? She finished it at J past 9. — Did you finish yours before 
that hour? I finished mine 1 hour before. Who arrived this morn- 
ing by the steamboat ? I do not know who arrived this morning, 
but Julius arrived yesterday, (past.) by the steam packet. — What 
news has the steamer brought ? It brought favorable news. 1 Cotton 
and provisions kept up (maintenir) their prices, and the continent of 
Europe was a little more quiet. 

At what time does your uncle William generally get up ? He 
rises generally early. I thought so. — Did he get up early to-day ? 
No. he did not, (not past.) — Did he get up early yesterday? (past.) 
No, he did not. — Why did he not get up to-day and yesterday (mind 
the distinction to be observed in French) as early as usual ? Because 
he was a little unwell (not has been), and is yet so. Do you not take 
your drawing lessons (legons de dessin) early every other day? Yes, 
we take them pretty early. — Did you receive the last as early as 
usual? No, we received it only after breakfast. — Why did you 
receive it only after breakfast? Because our teacher did not come 
before. — Did you buy your books at Appleton's, corner of Chestnut 
and 7th ? (de la Ime ?) Yes, I did : it is there that I always buy 
books. 

1 Although, speaking of Julius's arrival, the French may use the Preterit, 
and say : // arriva hier, because, on his landing, there was a completion of 
the action ; yet they cannot, speaking of the steamer, translate : It brought 
favorable news, by : Il apporta des ?iouvelles favorables, because we are not 
yet fully acquainted with the news it brought, and, of course, there is no 
completion of the action. This is a nice distinction, which the judicious 
pupil must treasure up. But had the steamer been in port two or three 
weeks, fl apporta des nouvelles favorables, might be used ; because the 
knowledge of the news it brought might be supposed complete, and we 
must recollect that the Preterit is used, only, when " the event or action is 
past and finished." 
31 



362 



SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 



Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 

SECOND PLUPERFECT— Pre^r^ Anterieur} 

For its formation and use see ($ 155.) That article must be carefully 
learned. 

To elucidate the two rules given in it, we here put a few examples. 

On 1st Rule. — The conjunctive adverb connected with the simple tense. 



Had we not dined when he came ? 



Had she finished when you called 
her ? ($ 155—1.) 

Had we not dined when he came, or 
used to come ? 

She had finished when you were call- 
ing her, or used to call her. 

Here, the Plusqueparfait is used, whether the simple tense is the Parfait t 
the Preterit, or the Imparfait. 
Rule 2d. The conjunctive adverb connected with the compound tense. 



N'avions-nous pas dine quand il 

vint ? 
Avait-elle fini quand vousl' appelates, 

ou l'avez appelee ? 
N'avions-nous pas dine quand il 

venait ? 
Elle avait fini quand vous l'appeliez. 



When they had done playing, they be- 
gan to sing. (§ 155 — 2.) 

When they had done playing, they 
usually began to sing. 

When I had dined, it struck 12. 

As soon as 1 had dined, it used to 
strike 12. 

He had done in a moment, (if only 
once.) 

He had done in a moment, (if more 
than once.) 



Quand Us eurent acheve de jouer, lis 
se mirent a chanter. (Pret.) 

Quand ils avaient fini de jouer, ils 
se mettaient a chanter. (Imparf.) 

Quand j'ews dint, midi sonna. 

Aussitot que ^avais dine, midi son- 
nait. (Imparf.) 

II eutfini en un moment. 

II avait fini en un moment. 



Soixante-huitieme Th£me. 3me Sec. 
Que fites-vous quand vous eutes fini votre lettre? J ; allai chez 
mon frere, qui me mena au paquebot a vapeur, ou j'eus le plaisir de 
trouver une de mes anciennes amies que je n'avais pas vue depuis 
plusieurs annees. — Que faisait-elle des qu'elie avait fini de prendre 
sa lecon de chant? Elle allait chez son amie Jeanne, et toutes 
deux se promenaient dans le jardin, oil elles cueillaient, ou des 
fleurs pour le salon, ou des fruits pour le dejeuner. — Qu ; as-tu fait 
apres t'etre leve ce matin? (not past.) — Apres avoir lu les lettres du 
comte polonais. j'ai ete voir le theatre du prince, que je n'avais pas 
encore vu. — Que fis-tu hier matin apres t'etre leve? J'allai au 
marche pour y acheter nos provisions, et quand je fus revenu a la 
maison, je lus mes lettres et j'y repondis.— Que faisaient vos amis 



1 There is another Preterit Anterieur, called the Priterit Anterieur In* 
Hejini, which is, however, seldom employed. 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 363 

tous les matins a la campagne Pete dernier ? lis prenaient leurs 
fusils et se rendaient (se r cadre, 4, to repair, to go) a Photel du 
village pour y prendre leurs papiers et leurs lettres. 

What did the colonel do when he had breakfasted, this morning ? 
He shaved and went out. (not past.) — Did he shave and go out yes- 
terday, after breakfast, also ? (past.) No, he shaved before break- 
fast, and went out after. — Had he gone out when you came in'? 
He had gone out long before. — Did he read the gazette before he 
went out? No. he read something else, (quelqa' autre chose.) — After 
reading, did he do anything else before he went out? He smoked 
a cigar. — Did he use to smoke when he was in the woods? No 
he did not, because he could not get good cigars, and rather than 
smoke bad tobacco, he would not smoke (62 2 , N. 1) at all. — What did 
your friend do after he had been walking? He went to the baron ; s 
house. — Did the baron receive him well? Yes, he received him 
as well as he had (avait) received him before. 

W 7 hen do you set out? I do not set out till (je ne pars que) to 
morrow ; for before I leave I will once more see my good friends. — 
What did your children do when they had breakfasted? They 
w r ent a walking with their dear preceptor, (precepteur.) — Where did 
your uncle go after he had warmed himself? He went nowhere. 
After he had warmed himself he undressed and went to bed. — At 
what o'clock did he get up? He got up at sunrise. — Did you wake 
him? I had no need to wake him, for he had got up before me. — 
W T hat did your cousin do when he heard of the death (la mort) of 
his best friend? He was much afflicted, (tres-afflige.) and went to 
bed without saying a word. — Did you shave before you break- 
fasted? I shaved when I had breakfasted. — Did you go to bed 
when you had eaten supper? When I had eaten supper I wrote 
my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON, 69th.—- Soixante-neuvieme Lcgon, 69me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



To get beaten, (whipped.) 

To get pnid. 

To get one's self invited to line. 

At first. 

Firstly, ($ 170.) 

Secondly. 

Thirdly, &c. 



t Se faire battre. 

t Se faire payer. 

t Se faire inviter a diner. 

D'abord. 

Premierement, en premier lieu. 

Secondement, en second lieu. 

Troisieniement,en troisieme lieu. 



Is your mother at home ? \ Votre mere est-elle chez elle ? 

C Votre mere est-elle a la maison? 



364 



SIXTY-NTNTH LESSON. (1.) 



Elle y est. Elle n'y est pas. 

Je vais chez elle. 

Un sujet, une raison, une cause. 

Un sujet de chagrin. 

Un sujet de tristesse. 

Elle a un sujet de tristesse. 

Le chagrin, la tristesse. 

Cette femme est-elle prete a sortir : 

Elle Test. Ne l'est-elle pas? 

Malgre, en depit de. 

Malgre cela. En depit de vous. 

Malgre lui, elle. En depit d'eux. 

Faire en sorte de. 

Faites-vous en sorte de finir votre 

ouvrag.e tous les samedis soir ? 
Faites-vous en sorte d' avoir fini votre 

ouvrage tous les samedis soir ? 
Faites en sorte de faire cela pour 

m'obliger. 
Je ferai tout pour vous obliger. 
Donner sur. 

La fenetre donne sur la rue. 
La fenetre donne sur la riviere. 
La porte de derriere donne sur le 

jardin. 
Attacher, 1. Attaeher ses souliers. 
On l'attacha a un arbre. 
Jusqu'd ce que vous arriviez a la 

maison. 

Soixante-nettvieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Comme M. Salomon vient tard pour nous faire visite ! II vient 
pour se faire inviter a diner. — Allates-vous chez le colonel avant- 
hier? Non, je n'y allai pas. Y etes-vous alle ce matin? Non, et 
je n'irai pas avant sa soiree musicale. Et pourquoi pas? D'abord, 
parce que je ne lui dois point de visite, et secondement, parce qu'on 
pourrait croire que je veux me faire inviter. — Ce garcon ne s'est-il 
pas fait battre ? II est si mechant qu 7 il se fit battre deux fois la 

semaine passee. — M. D vous doit-il encore? Non. je me suis 

fait payer. — Quel sujet de chagrin cette jeune dame a-t-elle ? A-t- 
elle perdu son mari? Non, elle a perdu son oiseau favori. Est-ce 
la ce qui cause son chagrin ? Je crois que oui. — lis ne veulent pas 
que vous fassiez cela. N'importe, je le ferai en depit d'eux. — Fera- 
t-elle en sorte de venir? — Lorsqiril sut qu'elle irirait pas, il fit en 
sorte de s'y rendre, n'est-ce pas? 

When had you finished your task ? I had finished it when you 
came in. (§ 155 — 1, 2.) — As soon as Cresar (Cesar) had crossed 



She is. She is not. 

I am going to her house. 

A cause, a reason. 

A cause of complaint. 

A cause of sadness. 

She has reason to be sad. 

Grief, sorrow, sadness. 

Is that woman ready to go out ? 

She is. Is she not ? 

Notwithstanding, in spite of. 

Notwithstanding that — you. 

In spite of him, her, them. 

To contrive, to manage. 

Do you manage to finish your work 

every Saturday night ? 
Do you manage to have your work 

done every Saturday night ? 
Try to do that to oblige me. 

I will do everything to oblige you. 
To command, look upon, overlook. 
The window looks into the street. 
The window looks out upon the river. 
The back-door looks into the garden. 

To fasten, to tie. To tie his shoes. 
He was fastened to a tree. 
Until you get home. (§ 151.) 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 365 

{passer) the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate, (deliberer:) he 
was obliged (devoir) to conquer (vaincre) or to die. — An emperor (un 
empereur) who was irritated at (irrite contre) an astrologer, (un astro- 
logue.) asked him : " Wretch ! what death (de quelle) dost thou believe 
thou wilt die V' Cl I shall die of a fever," replied the astrologer. 
•• Thou liest/ ; said the emperor. " thou wilt die this instant of a vio- 
lent death/"' As soon as he was seized, (saisir.) he said to the em- 
peror, Sire, (Seigneur.) order some one to feel (ordonnez qu'on me 
tdte) 1 my pulse, (24 2 , Obs. 55) and it will be found that I have a 
fever/'" This sally (cette saillie) saved his life. 

Do you perceive yonder house ? (cette maison Id-bas ?) I do. — Had 
you perceived it before 1 I had not. — Would you have perceived it 
if I had not shown it to you? May be so, (peut etre que oui,) may 
be not. But now that you have shown it to me, what kind of a 
house is it ? It is an inn, (une auberge.) — If you agree, we will go 
into it, to drink a glass of wine or cider, for I am very thirsty. Try 
(faites en sorte) to keep your thirst until you get home. It does not 
suit men like us to enter (dans) inns. I see that the inn overlooks 
the river. And as the house is high, it commands a large portion 
of the country. — You appear sad : what cause of grief have you ? 
If you were as thirsty as I am, you would also have a cause for 
grief. — Are you always thirsty when you see an inn ? I once saw 
a small black horse that managed to stop at every inn before which 
he passed. Ah! ah! I guess he was thirsty too. — Did the colonel 
pay you last week ? No, he could not. He might have done it, if 
his nephew had not spent all his money • but he will manage to pay 

me to-morrow. 

■ 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

To drown. I Noyer, 1. 

To drown a dog, a cat. I Noyer un chien, un chat. 

To be drowned, to be drowning. > 

m , % xc , & , > be noyer. 

1 o drown one s self, to get drowned. ) 



)get 

To leap through the window. 
To throw out of the window. 
I am drowning. 

He jumped out of the window. 
The cattle. 

To keep warm. To keep cool. 
To keep clean. 

To keep one's self up, straight. 
Keep yourself properly. 
To keep on one's guard against some 
one. 



Sauter par la fenetre. 

Jeter par la fenetre. 

Je me noie. (144 — 3.) 

II sauta par la fenetre. 

Le betail ; plur. les bestiaux. 

t Se tenir chaud. t Se tenir frais. 

Se tenir propre. 

Se tenir droit. 

Tenez-vous comme il faut . . . bien. 

t Se tenir en garde contre quelqu'un. 



1 Ordonner que . . (order that . . .) requires the subjunctive after it. 
SI * 



366 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



Keep on your guard against that 

man. 
To take care {to beware) of somebody 

or something. 
If you do not take care of that horse, 

it will kick you. 

Take care that you do not fall. 

To keep on one's guard against some 
one. 

To beware of somebody or some- 
thing. 

Keep on your guard against that 
man. 

Take care. 

A thought. An idea. A sally. 

To be struck with a thought. 

A thought strikes me. 

That never crossed my mind. 

To take it into one's head. 

He took it into his head lately to rob 
me. 

What is in your head ? 



t Tenez-vous en garde contre cet 

homme. 
Prendre garde d quelqu'un ou d 

quelque chose. 
Si vous ne prenez pas garde a ce 

cheval, il vous donnera un coup 

de pied, 
t Prenez garde de tomber. 
t Se tenir tetre) sur ses gardes avec 

quelqu'un. 
t Se garder de quelqu'un ou quelque 

chose, 
t Tenez-vous sur vos gardes avec 

cet homme. 
Prenez garde. 

Une pensee. Une idee. Une saillie. 
Venir en pensee, (a l'idee, a l'esprit.) 
II me vient une pensee. 
Cela ne m'est jamais venu a l'esprit. 
t S'aviser, 1. 
t II s'avisa 1' autre jour de me voler 



t De quoi vous avisez-vous ? 

Soixante-neuvieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 

Avez-vous vu ce mediant petit garcon attacher ce pauvre petit 
chien, le jeter dans la riviere, et le noyer ? Si je l'avais vu, j'aurais 
fait en sorte de Pen empecher. J*ai essaye de le faire ; mais je n'ai 
pu y reussir. — La petite fille qui tomba dans l'eau, de la fenetre du 
bateau a vapeur, se noya-t-elle ? Non, on la sauva, dans un petit 
bateau. — Le voleur fut-il pris? Non, il sauta par la fenetre et fit en 
sorte de se sauver. — Vous etes sur un banc casse j prenez garde de 
tomber. Py prendrai garde. — Voyez comme cette jeune demoiselle 
aux cheveux noirs se tient bien ! Oui, c'est un plaisir de voir comme 
elle se tient ! — Si vous vous approchez trop de ce cheval, il vous don- 
nera un coup de pied. Py prendrai garde. — Faites-vous des affaires 
avec cet homme la-bas ? Lequel ? Celui au chapeau blanc. Non, 
j'en faisais autrefois; mais a present je me tiens sur mes gardes 
contre lui. — Ne s'avisa-t-elle pas de revenir ici l'autre jour'? Ne 
craignez rien. II ne s'avisera plus de le faire. 

You appear very well satisfied ; what thought struck you ? Some- 
thing which had never crossed my mind before. — What is it 1 Should 
I tell you, (if I were,) you would be as wise as I. — Did William 
jump out of the window? Yes, he did. — What did he do after 
jumping out of the window? After he had jumped, he first ran to 
the garden gate, opened it and then ran towards the bridge. — Did he 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 



367 



go as far as the bridge ? No, there were some cattle in the road, and 
he was afraid of them, so that he stopped. Are the cattle as large here 
as there ? No, the cattle (bestiaux) are larger there than here. — How 
can I keep myself warm ? Put on a warmer coat. — Where must I 
put the butter to keep it cool ? You must put it in the cellar. — Who 
is that little boy? He is the baker's son. — I admire him ; for he 
always keeps himself so clean. — Does your cook keep her kitchen 
clean ? Why do the cattle go in the shade ? 

Did Thomas dare (s'aviser) to ask you for money'? Yes, he did. — 
Did you lend him any ? No, I was on my guard against him. — 
What was the cause of your quarrel with the gardener's boy ? He 
took it into his head (or he dared) to call me a fool. — Did you not 
beat him after he had called you so ? I did, soundly, (comm H faut.) 
— Why do you laugh at me ? I do not laugh at you, but at your 
coat. — Does it not look like (63 1 ) yours? It does not look like it, for 
mine is short (court) and yours is too long, (long ;) mine is black and 
yours is green. — Why do you associate with (63 2 ) that man? I 
would not associate with him if he had not rendered me great ser- 
vices, (le service.) Do not trust him, (ne vous y fiez pas,) for if you 
are not on your guard, he will cheat (tromper) you. 

Vocabttlaire. 3me Sec. 



In my, your, his or her place. 
We must put everything in its place. 
Around, round. All around. 

We sailed around England. 

They went about the town to look at 
all the curiosities. 

To go around the house. 

To go about the house. 
How much does that cost you ? 
How much does this book cost you ? 
It costs me three crowns and a half. 
That table costs him twenty crowns. 
Alone, by one's self. 
I was alone. One woman only. 
One God. 

God alone can do that. 
The very thought of it is criminal. 
A single reading is not sufficient to 
satisfy a mind that has a true taste. 
To kill by shooting. 
To blow out some one's brains. 



A ma, votre, sa place. 

II faut mettre chaque chose a sa place. 

Autour. Tout autour. 

Nous naviguames autour de 1' Angle- 

terre. 
t lis allerent 9a et la dans la ville, 
pour en voir toutes les curiosites. 
Aller autour de la maison. 
Faire le tour de la maison. 
Aller ^a et la dans la maison. 
Combien cela vous coute-t-il ? 
Combien ce livre vous coute-t-il? 
11 me coute trois ecus et demi. 
Cetle table lui coute vingt ecus. 
Seul ; fern, seule. 
J'etais seul. Une seule femme. 
Un seul Dieu. 
Dieu seul peut faire cela. 
La seule pense'ede cela est criminelle. 
Une seule lecture ne suffit pas pour 
contenter un homme qui a du gout. 
Tuer oVun coup oVarme a feu. 
Bruler la cervelle a quelqu'un. 



368 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 



To shoot one's self with a pistol. 

He has blown out his brains. 

He has blown out his brains with a 

pistol. 
He served for a long time, acquired 

honors, and died contented. 

Obs. 153. In narratives, when the verbs are in the same tense, the pro- 
nouns of the third person are not repeated. 

He arrived poor, grew rich in a short 
time, and lost all in a still shorter 
time. 



Se bruler la cervelle dun coup de 

pistolet. 
II s'est brule la cervelle. 
II s'est brule la cervelle d'un coup 

de pistolet. 
II servit long-temps, parvint aux 

honneurs, et mourut content. 



II arriva pauvre, devint riche en peu 
de temps, et perdit tout en moins 
de temps encore. 



Soixante-neuvieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

A votre place je ne laisserais pas mes livres et raes papiers ca et 
la, mais je mettrais chaque chose a sa place. Je tache de tenii 
chaque chose a sa place ; mais je ne puis y reussir. — Pourquoi a-t-on 
mis cela autour de ce jeune arbre 1 Pour empecher le betail de le 
mordre et de le casser. — Le capitaine navigua-t-il autour de Pen- 
droit % II navigua tout au tour dans son bateau. Ne descendit-il 
pas ? Si fait, il descendit. N'attacha-t-il pas son bateau a un arbre ? 
II Py attacha. — Lut-il le livre ? II le lut en un seul jour. — Etait-elle 
seule quand le voleur entra? Oui, elle etait seule. Voulut-il lui 
bruler la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet? Oui; mais comme elle 
allait prendre une prise de tabac, elle jeta tout son tabac dans les 
yeux du voleur, qui tira son coup sans la toucher. II lui vint une 
heureuse idee, n'est-ce pas? Oui, elle eut vraiment une heureuse 
pensee. — Combien ce parapluie vous coute-t-il? — Ce drap-la vous 
a-t-il coute 4 gourdes la verge ? — Cette maison lui coutera au moins 
15,000 gourdes, n'est-ce pas % — Dieu seul connait notre destinee. (fate,) 
n'est-ce pas % 

What is the matter with you ? Why do you look so melancholy ? 
(avoir Pair melancolique?) — I should not look so melancholy if I had 
no reason to be sad. I have heard just now (49 2 ) that one of my 
best friends has shot himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's 
best friends has drowned herself. — Where has she drowned herself? 
She drowned herself in ihe river which is behind her house. Yes- 
terday, at four o'clock in the morning, she rose without saying a 
word to any one, (d personnel leaped out of the window which 
looks into the garden, and threw herself into the river, w T h ere she 
was drowned. — I have a great mind (grar.de envie) to bathe (se 
baigner) to-day. — Where will you bathe ? In the river. — Are you 
not afraid of being drowned ? Oh, no ! I can swim. — Who taught 



SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) 369 

you % Last summer I took a few lessons in the swimming-school, 
(a Vecole de natation.) 

Were you not afraid to go into the water before you could swim ? 
A little, but I could not have learned without going into the water. 
— You did not think like the man who said : I will go into the water 
only when I know how to swim. There are many who. like that 
man. think that they will try to speak French only when they know 
how. — Do they not know that if they do not try to speak they can- 
not learn? I guess they forget it. — Why do you work so much? 
I work in order to be one day useful to my country. — Would you 
copy your exercises if I copied mine % I would copy them if you 
copied yours. — Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I had 
transcribed mine ? She would have transcribed it. — Would she have 
set out if 1 had set out? I cannot tell you what she would have 
done if you had set out. 



SEVENTIETH LESSON, 70th.— Soixante et dixieme Legt k, 70me. 

Vocabulaire, Ire Sec. 

As we began to use the verb in the Imperative mood from the 8th lesson, 
and referred to the article in the Synopsis in the (252), and a ll subsequent 
lessons, 

THE IMPERATIVE MOOD— U Imperatif 

will be nothing new to the student. However, as that mood must be found 
somewhere, we place it here. See, for its formaiion and use, (§ 150.) That 
article must be carefully studied. 



Have patience. 
•Be (you) attentive, patient, affable. 
Go ye there. Do not go there. 
Give it to me. Do not give it to me. 

Send it to him. 
Lend it to me. 
Have the goodness to hand me that 

plate. 
To borrow . ... of or from. 
I will borrow some money of you. 
T will borrow that money of you. 
Borrow it of (or from> him. 
Do not borrow it of him. 
1 borrow it from him. 
Do not tell him or her. Tell her. 
Return it to them. (§ 150 — 8.) 



Ayez patience. 

Soyez attentif, patient, affable. 
Allez-y. N'y allez pas. ($ 150—8.) 
Donnez-le-moi. Ne me le donnez 

pas. 
Envoyez-le-lui. 
Pretez-le-moi. 
Ayez la bonte de me passer ce plat. 

Emprunter, 1 ... d. 

Je veux vous emprunter de l'argent. 

Je veux vous emprunter cet argent. 

Empruntez-le-lui. 

Ne le lui empruntez pas. 

Je le lui emprunte. 

Ne le lui dites pas. Dites-le-lai. 

Rendez-le, (-la-)-leur. 



370 



SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



Do not return it to them. 

Patience, impatience. 

The neighbor. 

The snuff-box. The segar-box. 

Be ye good. Be not (so). (§ 150—8.) 

Know it. Do not. 

Obey your masters, and never give 
them any trouble. 

Pay what you owe, comfort the af- 
flicted, and do good to those that 
have offended you. 

Love God, and thy neighbor as thy- 
self. 

To obey. Obey your father. 

To comfort. Comfort them. 

To offend. Offend no one. 

Let us always love and practise vir- 
tue, and we shall be happy both in 
this life and in the next. 

To practise. 

Let us see which of us can shoot best. 

To express. 

Express your wish to your friend. 

To express one's self. Express your- 
self. 

To make one's self understood. 
Make yourself understood. 

To accustom. 

Children must early be accustomed 
to labor. 

To accustom one's self to something. 

To be accustomed to a thing. 

T am accustomed to it. 



Ne le leur rendez pas. 

La patience, l'impatience. 

Le prochain. 

La tabatiere. La boite a cigares, 

Soyez bons. Ne le soyez pas. 

Sachez-le. Ne le sachez pas. 

Obeissez a vos maitres, et ne leui 

donnez jamais de chagrin. 
Payez ce que vous devez, consolez 

les malheureux, et faites du bien a 

ceux qui vous ont offenses, 
t Aimez le bon Dieu, et le prochain 

comme vous-meme. 
Obeir, 2, d. Obeissez a votre pere. 
Consoler, 1. Consolez-les. 

Oflenser, 1. N'offensez personne. 
Aimons et pratiquons toujours la 

vertu, et nous serons heureux dans 

cette vie et dans 1' autre. 
Pratiquer, 1. 

Voyons qui tirera le mieux. 
Exprimer, 1. 

Exprimez votre souhait a votre ami. 
S'exprimer, 1. Exprimez-vous. 

Se faire comprendre. Faites-vous 

comprendre. 
Accoutumer, 1, a (av. l'inf.) 
II faut, de bonne heure, accoutumer 

les enfants au travail. 
S' accoutumer a quelque chose. 
Etre accoutume a, quelque chose. 
J'y suis accoutume. 



Soixante et DixiEME Theme. Ire Sec. 

Ayez de la patience, soyez attentif, et vous reussirez. Je ferai en 
sorte d'etre patient et attentif. — Si vous avez ma Vie de Washington, 
donnez-la-moi. Je vous Paurais deja donnee, si vous aviez ete ici. 
Hier des que je Peus finie, je la mis dans mon pupitre pour vous la 
donner, mais vous ne vintes pas. — Faites vos themes; pourquoi ne 
les faites-vous pas ? Mon frere n'est pas a la maison. II ne faut pas 
que vous les lui fassiez faire. Je ne les lui fait pas faire, mais il a 
la clef du pupitre. Non, la voici. Ouvrez-le, prenez votre livre, 
votre carrier, et tout ce qu'il vous faut, et commencez. Je vais m'y 
mettre a Pinstant. — Que fait Sara ? Elle lit le livre que vous lui 
avez prete. Elle a tort d'etre toujours a lire. Dites-lui de dessiner 
ce paysage. (67 ! .) Et lorsqn'elle Paura fini, pourra-t-elle se mettre a 



SEVENTIETH LESSON. (2.) 371 

la lecture ? (reading?) Non, alors faites-lui decliner (to decline) quel- 
ques noms avec des adjectifs. Comment? Comme ceci: La belle 
pomme ; de la belle pomrae, a la belle pomme. Les poires mures, 
(ripe pears,) des poires mures, aux poires mures. 

Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters 
(changer) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse, (empirer le 
mat.) Be not afraid of your creditors; be sure that they will do you 
no harm. They will wait, if you cannot pay them yet. — Pay me what 
you owe me, will you ? As soon as I have money, I will pay all 
that you have advanced (avancer) for me. Don ; t you forget ! you 
hear ! I shall not forget, you may depend upon it, for I think of it 
(fy pense) every day. I am your debtor, (le debiteur,) and I shall 
never deny (nier) it. — What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! 
pray lend it me. — What do you wish to do with it? I wish to show 
it to my sister. — Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. — 
Do not fear, (Ne craignez rien.) 

What do you want of my brother ? I want to borrow some money 
of him. — Borrow some of somebody else, (d un autre.) — If he will 
not lend me any, I will borrow some of somebody else. You will 
do well. — Do not wish for (souhaiter) what you cannot have, but be 
contented with what Providence (la Providence) has given you, and 
remember that there are many men who have not what you have. 
As life is short, (court,) let us endeavor (65 1 ) to make it (56 3 , 06s. 
137) as agreeable (agreable) as possible, (qu'il est possible.) But let 
us also remember that the abuse (Vabus) of pleasure (in the plural 
in French) makes it bitter, (amere, fern.) — What must we do in order 
to be happy? Always (§ 170) love and practise virtue, and you will 
be happy both in this life and in the next. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 
To have the habit of. I Avoir 1' habitude de . . 

I cannot express myself in French, Je ne puis pas bien m'exprimer en 



for I am not in the habit of speak- 
ing. 

You speak properly. 

To converse, to chatter, to prate. 

A prattler. 

A chatterer. 

To practise. I practise speaking. 

To permit, to allow. 

Permit me to go (there.) I do. 



Francois, parce que je n'ai pas l'ha- 

bitude de parler. 
Vous parlez comme il faut. 
Causer, 1. Bavarder, 1. Jaser, 1. 
Un causeur, fern, euse. 1 
Un jaseur,/m. euse. 
Exercer, 1. Je m'exerce a parler. 
Permettre* 2, de. (Comme mettre, 

25 1 , 33 l .) 
Permettez-moi d'y aller. Je vous 

le permets. 



Tine causeuse means also a small sofa for two persons. 



372 



SEVENTIETH 1 ESSON. (2.) 



I do not permit her to go. 

The permission, the permit. 

Do good to the poor, have compassion 
on the unfortunate, and God will 
take care of the rest. 

To do good to some one. 

To have compassion on some one. 

Compassion. Pity. The rest. 

If he comes, tell him I am in the gar- 
den, under the jasmin bower. 



Je ne lui permets pas d'y aller. 

La permission, le permis. 

Faites du bien aux pauvres, ayez 
compassion des malheureux, et le 
bon Dieu aura soin du reste. 

Faire du bien a quelqu'un. 

Avoir compassion de quelqu'un. 

La compassion. La pitie. Le reste. 

»S' il vient, dites-lui que je suis au jar- 
din, sous le berceau de jasmin. 



Obs. 154. The letter i suffers elision in the conjunction si, if, before the 
personal pronouns, il, he ; Us, they ; but not before elle or elles. (21 2 , Obs. 47.) 

Ask the merchant whether he can l«»t | Demandez au marchand s'il peut me 

me have the horse at the price donner le cheval au prix que je lui 

which I have offered him. ai offert. 

I read, and was told. ' j ai lu, et Von m'a raconte. 

Obs. 155. The indefinite pronoun on takes a euphonic V after the words 
et, ou, ou, si, que, and qui. 



On y rit et Von y pleure tour a tour. 
Si Von savait ce que vous avez fait. 
Le pays ou Von trouve le diamant. 

On vous a dit, ou Von vous dira 

bientot. 
Ce que Von con§oit bien s'enonce 

clairement. 
Qui aime-t-on ? On aime ceux a qui 

Ton doit son bonheur. 
Peut-on etre grand sans etre juste ? 
On ne peut etre grand qu'autant 

que Ton est juste. 



There they laugh and weep by turns. 
If they knew what you have done. 
The country where diamonds are 

found. 
You have been, or will soon be told. 

We say with precision what we un- 
derstand well. 

Whom do people love ? Those to 
whom they owe their happiness. 

Can one be great without being just ? 

One can be great only inasmuch as 
he is just. 

Obs. 156. But the euphonic V is omitted, when on is followed by le, la. 
or les. Say : Je ne veux pas qiVon le tourmente, I do not wish him to be 
molested, and not que Von le, &c, which would be harsher than qu J on le. 

Soixante et dixieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Bon jour. Mile. N Ah ! vous voila enfin. Je vous ai attendue 

avec impatience. — Vous etes une causeuse, je crois. Vous me par- 
donnerez, n'est-ce pas ; machere 1 Je n'ai pas cause, je vous assure ; 
mais je n'ai pas pu venir (N. 62 2 ) plus tot. Permettez-moi de voir 
ce que vous avez apporte. Vous permettre de le regarder ! Je Tai 
apporte expres (on purpose) pour vous le montrer. Tenez, le voila. 
prenez-le. — Je le tiens. Ah! que c'est joli ! Vous exercez-vous a 
peindre ? Je pratique quelque fois. Mais comment se porte madame 
votre mere ? On dit qu'elle se porte mieux depuis qu'elle est aux eaux 



SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 373 

(at the springs) et Pon croit qu'elle sera bientot guerie. Que je suis 
cnarmee de Papprendre ! — Votre pere vous permit-il d'aller au bal 
avant-hier ? Oui, des que je lui eus demande il m'en donna la per- 
mission. — Salomon a-t-il compassion des pauvres? Lui! II n ; a 
cornpassioa de personne. — Parlons Franc ais. Ayez la bonte de par- 
ler, vous, et moi, je vous repondrai en Anglais. Vous parlez tout 
aussi bien que moi. Vous plaisantez, (plaisanter, 1 3 to jest.) Non ; 
je ne plaisante pas. Vous me rlattez pour me faire parler. 

Since (vuisque) we wish to be happy , let us do good to the poor, 
and let us have compassion on the unfortunate ; let us obey our mas- 
ters, and never give them any trouble ; let us comfort the unfortunate 
(les infortunes,) love our neighbor as ourselves, and not hate those 
(et ne haissons pas ceux) that have offended us; in short, (enun mot,) 
let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. — My 
son, in order to be loved you must be laborious (laborieux) and good. 
Thou art accused (on f accuse) of having been idle and negligent 
(negligent) in thy affairs. Thou knowest, however, (pourtant,) that 
thy brother has been punished for having been naughty. Being 
lately (Vautre jour) in town, I received a letter from thy tutor, in 
which he strongly (fort) complained of thee. 

Do not weep, (pleurer ;) now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, 
and be a good boy, (sage,) otherwise (autrement) thou wilt get nothing 
for dinner, (d diner.) I shall be so good, my dear father, that you 
will certainly (certainement) be satisfied with me. — Has the little boy 
kept his word? (tenir* parole?) Not quite: for after having said 
that, he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table, 
(s€ mit d une table,) and fell asleep, (s'endormit.) " He is a very 
good boy when he sleeps/' said his father, seeing him some time 
(quelque temps) after. — Do you understand all I am telling you ? I 
understand (entendre) and comprehend (comprendre*) it very well; 
but I cannot express myself well in French, because I am not in the 
habit of speaking it. That will come in (avec le) time. I wish (sou- 
haiter) it with all my heart. 



SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON, 71st— Soixante-onzieme Le$on, lime. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 

To stand up. To remain up. i Etre debout. Rester debout. 

Will you permit me to go to the! Voulez-vous me permettre d'aK ■• au 

market? marche ? 

To hasten, to make haste. \ t Se depicher, 1, de. 

32 



374 



SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



(!•) 



Make haste, and return soon. 
Go and tell him that I cannot come 
to-day. 



Depechez-vous, et revenez bientot. 
Allez lui dire que je ne puis venir 
aujourd'hui. 



Obs. 157. In French the verbs aller,* to go, and venir,* to come, are 
always followed by the infinitive instead of another tense used in English, 
and the conjunction and is not rendered. (§ 150 — 12.) 



He came and told us he could not 
come. 

Go and see your friends. 

To weep, to cry. 

The least blow makes him cry. 

To frighten. 

To be frightened, to startle. 

The least thing frightens him or her. 

Be not frightened. 

To be frightened at something. 

What are you frightened at ? 

At my expense. 

At his, her, our expense. 

At other people's expense. 

That man lives at everybody's ex- 
pense. 

To depend. 

That depends upon circumstances. 

That does not depend upon me. 

It depends upon him to do that. 

! yes, it depends upon him. 
To astonish, to surprise. 

To be astonished, to wonder. 
To be surprised at something. 

1 am surprised at it. 

An extraordinary thing happened 
which surprised everybody. 

To take place, to happen. 

Many things have passed which will 
surprise you. 

To surprise. 

Many days will pass before that. 

A man came in who asked me how I 
was. 



II vint nous dire qu'il ne pouvait pas 

venir. 
Allez voir vos amis. 
Pleurer, 1. 

Le moindre coup le fait pleurer. 
Effrayer, 1. 
»S" ejfrayer, 1. 

La moindre chose 1'erTraie. 
Ne vous efTrayez pas. 
S' effrayer de quelque chose. 
De quoi vous efTrayez-vous ? 
A mes depens. 
A ses, a nos depens. 
Aux depens d'autrui. 
Cet homme vit aux de*pens de tout 

le monde. 
Dependre de. 

Cela depend des circonstances. 
Cela ne depend pas de moi. 
II de'pend de lui de faire cela. 
Oh ! oui, cela depend de lui. 
Etonner, 1. 
S' etonner, 1. 

A. 7 

Etre etonne de quelque chose. 

J'en suis etonne. 

II arriva une chose extraordinaire qui 

etonna tout le monde. 
Se passer, 1. 
II s'est passe plusieurs choses qui 

vous surprendront. 
Surprendre* (comme prendre.) 
II se passera plusieurs jours avant 

cela. 
II entra un homme qui me demanda 

comment je me portais. 



Soixante-onzieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Pleurez-vous, mon petit bon homme. (a familiar expression con- 
stantly used for: my little boy,) parce que vous etes oblige de rester 
debout ? Oni, il y a si long-temps que je suis debout que je suis 
tres-fatigue. Si Pon vous permettait de vous aaseoir, seriez-vous plus 






SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 375 

sage une autre fois? Je tacherais de Petre. Je compte sur votre 
parole. Asseyez-vous la-bas, (yonder.) — Si vous aviez touche cette 
petite fille, elle aurait pleure. car elle pleure pour la moindre chose. 
Je suis etonne qu' elle (§151) ne pleure pas. par je lui ai donne un 
coup. Alors, il est vraiment etonnant f^'elle ne pleure pas. — Aux 
depens de qui avez-vous fait ces belles emplettes? A mes propres 
depens; je n ; en fais jamais aux depens d ; autrui. — Votre ami obtien- 
dra-t-il Temploi qu ; il desire ? C ; est selon : cela dependra des circon- 
stances. Si cela dependait de votre cousin, le secretaire. Fobtien- 
drait-il ? Oui ; mais cela ne depend pas de lui. — Lorsque la chose 
fut arrivee, cela n 7 etonna-t-il pas tout le monde? Oui. chacun en 
fut etonne. — Vous surprenez tout le monde, mais votre neveu ne sur- 
prend personne. II me surprend. 

Can you stand one hour on one foot without moving? I have 
never tried, but I think I could. If you were to try (essayiez. imparf.) 
you would find out your mistake (erreur. fern.) before i an hour. — 
Is your letter written ? No, not quite. Make haste to finish it. — And 
why should I make haste to finish it ? You must make haste, ($151,) 
if you wish it to go by the steamship. I thought it went only (ne 
mettait d la voile, que) on Wednesday next. (N. p. 167.) That is true ) 
but from Boston, not New York. And my letter must go (§ 151) from 
here to Boston by the mail, (le courrier.) So that I must make haste, 
as you say. Go then and tell William to get ready, so as to carry it 
to the post office (la poste) as soon as I finish it. Do not be afraid, 
you have yet time enough. Do not speak to me, or else I shall not 
be able to finish it in time. 

Do you wonder at (de) what takes place? No* now, nothing 
astonishes me. Everything is now so astonishing, so wonderful, that 
nothing appears extraordinary. — Why does that woman weep ? Has 
her child been dead long? — This little girl weeps because she has 
lost a five cent piece; have you not one to give her? — Does that 
man live at his own expense, or at that of other people ? — Does it 
depend on him to do that? — Does not that marriage depend on his 
brother-in-law ? — On whom does it depend then ? — I wonder whethei 
(66 2 ) the general will be elected? (elire* 4, like lire.) — Shall I go 
and tell them to make less noise ? — Shall I go and buy you a bottle 
of cologne ? 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 
Done. 



Then, thus, consequently. 
Therefore. Ennui. 

The other day. Lately. 
In a short time. In. 



C'est pourquoi. Ennui, I'ennui. 
L'autrejour. Dernierement. 
Dans pea de temps. Dans. en. 



Obs. 158. When speaking of time, dans expresses the epoch, and en the 
duration. 



376 



SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



He will arrive in a week, (when a 

week is elapsed.) 
It took him a week to make this 

journey. 
He will have finished his studies in 

three months. 
He finished his studies in a year. 
He has applied himself particularly 

to geometry and mathematics. 



II arrivera dans huit jours. 

II a fait ce voyage en huit jours. 

II aura fini ses etudes dans trois 



He has a good many friends. 



mois. 
II a fini ses etudes en un an. 
II a fait une etude particuliere de la 

geometrie et des mathematiques. 
II a Men des amis. 
II a beaucoup d'amis. 

Obs. 159. The word Men is always followed by the article, and beaucoup 
by the preposition de. 

Vous avez bien de la patience. 

Vous avez beaucoup de patience. 

lis out bien de l'argent. 

Vous avez bien du courage. 

Faire present de quelque chose d 
quelqu'un. 

Monsieur Lambert m'ecrivit 1' autre 
jour que mesdemoiselles ses soeurs 
viendraient ici dans peude temps, 
et me pria de vous le dire. Vous 
pourrez done les voir, et leur donner 
les livres que vous avez achetes. 
Elles esperent que vous leur en 
ferez present. Leur frere m'a as- 
sure qu' elles vous estiment, sans 
vous connaitre personnellement. 



You have a great deal of patience. X 

They have a great deal of money. 

You have a great deal of courage. 

To make a present of something to 
some one. 

Mr. Lambert wrote to me lately, 
that his sisters would be here in a 
short time, and requested me to 
tell you so ; you will then be able 
to see them, and to give them the 
books which you have bought. 
They hope that you will make 
them a present of them. Their 
brother has assured me that they 
esteem you, without knowing you 
personally. 

To want amusement. 

To get or be tired. 

How could I get tired in your com- 
pany ? 

He gets tired everywhere. 

Agreeable, (pleasing.) Tiresome. 

To be welcome. 

You are welcome everywhere. 



> t S'ennuyer, 1. 



t Comment pourrais-je m'ennuyer 

aupres de vous ? 
II s'ennuie partout. 
Agreable. Ennuyeux — euse, fern. 
t Etre le bienvenu. 
t Vous etes partout le bienvenu. 



Soixante-onzieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Voudriez-vous n'avoir rien a faire ? Non, jc vous assure, car je 
m'ennuierais corame tous ceux qui n'ont pas d'occupations. Vous 
avez bien raison. Cependant il y a bien des jeunes gens qui vou- 
draie.it ne point avoir d'occupation. lis ne savent pas ce qu'ils desi- 
rent. Us s'ennuieraient s'ils n'en avaient point. — Que faisait-il der- 
merement'? Rien. e'est pourquoi il mourait d'ennui. — Le colonel 
n 7 arrivera-t-il pas dans pen de temps'? Au contraire. il va joindre 






SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 377 

son regiment, (to join his regiment.) — A quel regiment appartient-il? 
II appartient au cinquieme regiment. — Que dessina-t-elle l'autre 
jour? Quand je la vis, elle dessinait le nouveau paquebot. — J'en- 
tends toujours Mme. G. . . . gronder sa demoiselle parce qu'elle ne 
se tient pas droit, la voila, ne trouvez-vous pas qu'elle se tient com me 
il faut ? Elle se tient aussi droit qu ; il le faut. — Quand le capitaine 
joindra-t-il sa compagnie ? II la joindra dans 3 jours. — Combien de 
jours lui faut-il pour faire le voyage % II lui en faut 8, et comme il 
est en chemin depuis 5 jours, il lui en faut encore 3 pour le finir. 

Will you drink a cup (une tasse) of tea? I thank you; I do not 
like tea. — Do you like coffee? I like it, but I have just (49 2 , Obs. 
115) drunk some. — Do you not get tired here? How could I get 
tired in this agreeable society ? As to me, I always want amuse- 
ment. — If you did as I do, you would not want amusement, for I 
listen to all those who tell me anything. In this manner I learn 
many anecdotes, a thousand agreeable things, and I have no time 
to get tired; but you do nothing of that kind, (de tout cela,) that is 
the reason why you want amusement. I would do everything like 
(comme) you, if I had no reason to be sad. — Have you seen Mr. 
Lambert ? I have seen him ; he told me that his sisters would be 
here in a short time, and desired (prier) me to tell you so. 

When they have arrived (46 3 , Obs. 106) you may give them the 
gold rings (la bague) which you have bought to make them a present 
of. Will they receive them ? Oh ! yes, for they love you without 
knowing you personally. — Has my sister already written to you? 
She has written to me many times, and I am going to answer her, 
for her letters are always agreeable and welcome, (bienvenues.) — 
Shall I (faut-il) tell her that you are here ? Tell her; but do not tell 
her that I am waiting for her impatiently. — Why have you not 
brought (58 3 , Obs. 142) your sister along with you? Which one? 
The one you always bring, the youngest. — She did not wish to go out, 
because she has the toothache. — I am very sorry for it, for she is a 
very good girl. — How old is she ? She is nearly fifteen years old. 
She is very tall (grande) for her age, (Vdge.) — How old are you? I 
am twenty-two. Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. 



SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON, 7 2d. —Soixante-douzieme Legon, 72me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 
OF NEGATIONS ,— Des Negations. 
See ($171) for the manner of using them, and consult the article when 
necessary. 
32* 



378 



SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



Have you none of my copybooks ? 
I have none, and I have seen none. 

Have you neither seen nor heard the 
great lady singer ? {§ 171 — 4.) 

No, and I shall neither see nor hear 
her. 

I neither care about seeing nor hear- 
ing her. 

What did he do as soon as he had 
recognised his sister ? 

No sooner had he recognised her 
than he threw himself in her arms. 

Touch neither the flowers nor the 
fruits. 

I shall touch neither these nor those. 



Does that seamstress earn but two 

dollars a week ? 
That seamstress earns but two. 

Would she not gain more if she was 
a mantua-maker ? 



Moreover, besides. Besides that. 
Besides what I have just said. 
There are no means of finding money 

now. 
To push, shove, jog. Do not . . . me. 
Along the road. Along the street. 

All along . . 

All the year round. 

To enable to. 

To enable John to . . . 

That enabled me to go. 

To be able to. 

He is able to do it. 

To the right. On the right side or 

hand. Straight on. 

To the left. On the left side or hand. 
Could you not tell me which is the 

nearest way to the city gate ? — to 

the bridge ? 

Follow (or go along) this street, and 
when you are at the end of it, 



IV'avez-vous aucun de mes cahiers ? 
Je n 'en ai aucun, et je ri en ai vu 

aucun. 
IV'avez-vous ni vu ni entendu la 

grande cantatrice ? 
Non, et je ne la verrai ni ne l'en- 

tendrai. 
Je ne me soucie ni de la voir ni de 

l'entendre. 
Que fit-il aussitot qu'il eut reconnu 

sa soeur ? 
II ne l'eut pas plutot reconnue qu'il 

se jeta dans ses bras. 
Ne touchez ni les fleurs ni les fruits. 



Je ne toucherai ni ceux-ci ni celles- 

la. 
Cette couturiere ne gagne-t-elle que 

deux gourdes par semaine ? 
Cette couturiere n'en gagnc que 

deux. 
N'engagnerait-elle pas davantage si 

elle etait faiseuse de robes ? 

Ainsi nous voyons qu'avec les temps simples ne se place toujours avant, 
et le complement, toujours apres le verbe. 

En outre, d } ailleurs. Outre cela. 

Outre ce que je viens de dire. 

II n'y a pas moyen de trouver de 

1' argent a present. 
Pousser, 1. Ne me poussez pas. 
Le long du chemin. Le long de la 

rue. 
Tout le long de . . . 
t Tout le long de l'annee. 
Mettre a meme de. 
Mettre Jean a meme de . . . 
Cela me mit a meme d'y aller. 
Etre en etat ou etre a meme de. 
II est en etat (a meme) de le faire. 
A droite. Sur la droite. Tout 

droit. 
A gauche. Sur la gauche. 

Ne pourriez-vous pas me dire quel 

est le chemin le plus court pour 

arriver a la porte de la ville ? — au 

pont ? 
Suivez (allez tout le long de) cette 

rue, et quand vous serez au bout, 



SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



379 



turn to the right, and you will find 
a cross-way, which you must go 
through. 

And then, where shall I go ? 

You will then enter a broad street, 
which will bring you to a public 
square, on the right you will see a 
blind alley or court. 



tournez a droite, vous trouverez un 
carrefour, que vous traverserez. 

Et puis, ou irai-je ? 

Puis vous entrerez dans une rue as- 
sez large, qui vous menera sur une 
grande place publique, a droite 
vous verrez un cul-de-sac ou une 
impasse . 

Vous laisserez le cul-de-sac a. main 
gauche, et vous passerez sous les 
arcades qui sont a. cote. 

t Ensuite vous demanderez. 

Une arcade. Le carrefour. 

Un cul-de-sac. Une impasse. 

Traverser, 1. Traversons. 



You must leave the blind alley on 

your left, and pass under the arcade 

that is near it. 
Then you must ask again. 
An arcade. The cross- way. 

A blind alley. A court. 

To cross, to cross over. Let us cross. 

Soixante-dotjzieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Est-elle en etat d'aller a pied jusqu'a la promenade publique? 
Non, elle n ? est pas en etat de s'y rendre a pied. D ; ailleurs, le me- 
decin n ? a-t-il pas defendu qu'elle aille (§151) a pied I Oui, il Pa 
defendu ; d'ailleurs, elle ne peut plus mettre ses souliers. II faut que 
nous ayons une voiture. Par ou passerons-nous ? Nous irons tout 
le long de notre rue, jusqu'au jardin public, la nous nous arreterons 
quelques instants. Pour la laisser reposer. n'est-ce pas ? Oui, et en 
outre, pour la laisser jouir du frais, (de lafraicheur. cool, coolness.) — 
Apres cela, ne traverserons-nous pas le jardin public ? Non. Per- 
sonne n'y passe en voiture. — Ou irons-nous done ? Nous tournerons 
a gauche, et nous passerons sous Parcade du coin, ou elle pourra 
prendre le verre d'eau minerale ordonnee par le medecin. N'en 
prendrons-nous pas aussi ? Si fait : quoique le docteur ne Pait pas 
ordonnee. — De quel cote tournerons-nous ensuite \ A droite, jusqu'a 
l ; impasse du voleur. Nous laisserons cette impasse a gauche, et 
nous irons tout droit jusqu ; a la promenade publique. La, nous 
descendrons. — La couturiere est-elle venue ? — La faiseuse de robes 
a-t-elle envoye les robes neuves ?-— Qui est votre faiseuse de robes ? 

Who pushes me so? I cannot write, if you do it any more. No- 
body pushes you. No, nobody pushes me now, but somebody did 
push me a little while ago. Nobody has pushed you. You write 
badly, and you will blame us for it. — Why does that officer push that 
man all along the street? Because he is a good-for-nothing fellow, 
who will do nothing. — What is the gardener going to put all along 
this wall?- He is going to put some trees there. Fruit-trees? (Des 
arbres fruitier s?) 1 Plum-trees here, pear-trees there, further on 

1 Peche, pecker, peach-tree ; pomme, pommier, apple-tree ; abricot, abri- 
cotier, apricot-tree; hence, prunier, cerisier, amandier, rosier, (rose-bush.) 



380 



SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



peach-trees.- -Is he not going to put cherry-trees there ? No, because 
they grow too big. {Us viennent trop gros.) and so do apple-trees — 
Is it difficult to get money now ? No, it is not difficult to find, but 
as usual you must give a good security, (bonne securite.) — Can you 
procure me any? — What security have you to give? — Is not my 
name sufficient % A single name is not sufficient for capitalists, (un 
capitaliste ou rentier.) 

What did you do for him? I lent him a horse, and that has 
enabled him to join his regiment in time. — Why did he not start on 
horseback ? He did not, because he depended on the steamboats. 
— What has become of them? One has been burned, so that he 
could not have continued his journey (voyage) if I had not lent him 
a horse. — Has he sent him back? (renvoyer, 1.) I suppose the horse 
is on the way ; but as it requires four days for the journey, he will 
arrive only the day after to-morrow. — Did the colonel write to you by 
mail, or did he send a message by the electric telegraph ? We have no 
electric telegraph along our roads, so that he wrote me by mail. — In 
the forests there must be (il doit y avoir) many cross-ways, (Men des,) 
how can the mail-riders (les courriers) recognise them? They are 
used to them. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

Dans les temps composes. (§ 171 — 4, 5.) 

A-t-on appele aucun des ouvriers ? 
On rC en a appele aucun. 
On 7i'a appele personne. 
IV aurait- elle fait que cela ? 
Elle n* en aurait fait guere plus, ou 
elle rf en aurait guere plus fait. 



Were any of the workmen called ? 
Not one of them was called. 
Nobody has been called. 
Would she have done but that ? 
She would have done but little more, 

or, she would not have done much 

more. 
Has she left my book anywhere ? 



She left it nowhere. 

To get (or be) married. Do not get m. 

To marry somebody. 

To marry, (to give in marriage.) 

My cousin, having given his sister in 

marriage, married Miss Delby. 
Is your cousin married ? 
No, he is still a bachelor. 
Is your niece married 1 
No, but she is going to be married. 
To be a bachelor. An old bachelor. 
An old girl, maid. 
Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. 
An embarrassment, a puzzle. 



A-t-elle laisse mon livre quelque 

part ? 
Elle ne l'a laisse nulle part. 
t Se marier, 1. Ne vous mariez pas. 
Epouser, 1, quelqu 1 un. 
Marier, idonner en mariage.) 
Mon cousin, ayant marie sa soeur, 

epousa Mademoiselle Delby. 
M. votre cousin est-il marie ? 
Non, il est encore garcon. 
Votre niece est-elle mariee ? 
Non/mais elle va se marier. 
Etre garcon. Un vieux garcon. 
Une vieille fille. 
Embarrasse. 
Un embarras. 



SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



381 



Vous m'embarrassez. 

Vous me mettez dans l'embarras. 

II demande ma sceur en mariage. 

La mesure. 

Prendre des mesures. 

Je prendrai d'autres mesures. 

Mon Dieu ! que le temps passe vite 

dans votre societe ! (en votre com- 

pagnie.) 
Le compliment. 
Vous me faites un compliment au- 

quel je ne sais que repondre. 
Ce n'est pas ma faute. 
Ne me l'imputez pas. 
Imputer, 1, la faute a quelqu'un. 
A qui est la faute ? 
Je ne sais qu'yfaire. 
Je ne saurais qu'y faire. 
Le delai. II le fait sans delai. 
Je me sauve. Je vais me sauver. 
Sauvez-vous ! Allez-vous-en ! 
Plaisanter, 1. Ne plaisantez point. 
La plaisanterie, le badinage. 
Vous badinez. Vous vous moquez. 

Si la negation forme le nominatif, il y a un changement dans la maniere 
de i'employer. (§ 151 — 6.) 



You embarrass (puzzle) me. 
You puzzle (perplex) me. 
He asks my sister in marriage. 
The measure. 
To take measures. 
I shall take other measures. 
Goodness ! how rapidly time passes 
in your society ! 

The compliment. 

You make me a compliment which I 

do not know how to answer. 
It is not my fault. 
Do not lay it to my charge. 
To lay the fault to one's charge. 
Who can help it ? Whose fault is it ? 

I cannot help it. 

The delay. He does it without delay. 
I must go, (must be off.) I am off. 
Go away ! Begone ! 

To jest, joke, be in fun. Do not trifle. 
The jest, joke. 
You are jesting. 



Does anything please them ? 

No, since their return nothing pleases 

them. 
Nobody cares to have them. 
Neither suit me. 
Neither these nor those houses will 

sell dear. 
None of my friends is going. 
No one knows it. 



Quelque chose leur plait-il ? 

Non, depuis leur retour rien ne leur 

plait. 
Personne ne se soucie de les avoir. 
Ni 1' un ni 1' autre neme conviennent. 
Ni ces maisons-ci ni celles-la ne se 

vendront cher. 
Aucun de mes amis n'y va. 
Nul, (pas un) ne le sait. 



Soixante-douzieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Votre soeur, m'a-t-on dit, se marie bientot. — Oui ; elle se mariera 
la semaine prochaine. Ne devait-elle pas se marie r le mois passe ? 
Si fait, mais le colonel qvrelle va epouser rra pas pu quitter son 
regiment alors. Est-il ici pour long-temps'? Non, il n 7 y restera 
que quelques semaines. C'est dommage (57 2 ) qu r il soit oblige 
(§ 151) de partir si tot, n'est-ce pas? Je presume qu'il aura le temps 
de passer la lune de mid (honey-moon) ici. En outre, s'il ne reste 
pas, ce ivest pas sa faute. II prendra, peut-etre, des mesures pour 

ne pas partir si tot. Mile. S , ne va-t-elle pas se marier? Non, 

elle a tant d'admirateurs (admirers) qu'elle est embarrassee dans 



882 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 

son choix. — Qui vous blame % Mon oncle me blame, mais je ne 
saurais qu'y faire. Est-ce ma faute, si j ? ai mauvaise me moire ? II 
me faut si long-temps pour apprendre mes lecons, que je m'ennuie, 
que je m'endors, et que je n' apprends rien. — Votre oncle Jacques est 
un vieux garcon, n ; est-ce pas? Non, il est marie, mais il ira paa 
d'enfants. — Votre cousine est presque vieille fille, n'est-ce pas ? Oui. 
c'est tout-a-fait une vieille fille. 

Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in your society ! — You make 
me a compliment which I do not know how to answer. — Have you 
bought your watch in Paris'? I have not bought it; my uncle has 
made me a present of it, (en.) — What has that woman intrusted 
you with ? She has intrusted me with a secret about a (d'un) great 
count who is in great embarrassment about the (d cause du) marriage 
of one of his daughters. — Does any one ask her in marriage ? The 
man who demands her in marriage is a nobleman of the neighbor- 
hood, (le voisinage.) — Is he rich'? No, he is a poor devil, (diable.) 1 
who has not a sou, (le sow,) and who, besides, is old and disagreea- 
ble. — You say you have no friends among your schoolfellows, (le 
condisciple :) but is it not your fault? You have spoken ill (mal parte) 
of them, and they have not offended you. 

What are you astonished at ? I am astonished to find you still in 
bed. — If you knew how (combien) sick I am, you would not be 
astonished (fern.) at it. — John, (Jean!) — What is your pleasure. Sir? 
Bring some wine. Presently, Sir. — Henry ! Madam ? Make the 
fire, (du feu.) The maid-servant has made it already. — Bring me 
some paper, pens, and ink. Bring me also some sand (du sable) or 
blotting-paper, (du papier brouillard,) sealing-wax, (de la cire a 
cacketer) and a light, (de la lumiere.) — I am going for the blotting- 
paper, the sealing-wax, and the light ; but we have no sand. — Never 
mind the sand. Afterwards you will go to my sister's, to tell her 
not to wait for me. Be back again before 12 o'clock, to carry my 
letters to the post-office. Very well, Madam. — Do not fail, for you 
know that the mail closes (se ferme) at 12, and the letters must be 
(il faut que , §151) in the post office before (avant que, §151) the 
hour strikes. — I will not fail, Madam ; you may depend upon it. 

1 Those two expressions: Mon Dieu ! and Diable, are constantly used 
by the French. The first is their only interjection for a host of English 
ones, such as : Bless me ! Oh dear ! Dear me ! Gracious ! Goodness ! &c. &c. 
The second is connected with every sort of epithets ; such as : bon diable, 
(good or clever fellow) ; mauvais diable, (bad fellow,) vilain, vieux, 'petit, 
grand, gros, beau, &c. &c. Whoever wishes to speak French with French 
people, ought to become familiar with the terms, if not to use them himself, 
at least to understand those who do. Hence, however reluctantly, we fol- 
low the t«xt of Ollendorff 



SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



(3.) 



383 



Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



Avec l'infinitif. (§ 171—7.) That 

He likes to do nothing. , 

Has she ever promised not to touch j 
your watch ? No, never. 

What are they afraid of? . Not to 
have done their task in tune. 

Does your cousin expect many people 
to her soiree ? 

She is afraid she will have but few. 

He cannot take a joke, is no joker. 

To beg someone's pardon. 

To pardon. Pardon me. 

I beg your pardon. 

The pardon. The time-piece, house 

clock. 
To advance, go too fast. Is it too fast ? 
The watch goes too fast, (gains.) 
To retard, go too slow. Is it too 

slow ? 
The time-piece goes too slow, (loses.) 
My watch has stopped. 
To go right, to stop, to go wrong. 
Where did we stop ? 
We left o^T at the fortieth lesson, page 

one hundred and thirty-six. 
To wind up a {town dock,) a watch. 
To regulate a watch, a time-piece, a 

clock. 
Your watch is twenty minutes too 

fast, and mine a quarter of an hour 

too slow. 
It will soon strike twelve. 
Has it already struck twelve 1 
To strike. Make the clock strike. 
What hour is striking ? It is one. 

On condition, or provided. 

I will lend you money, provided you 
will henceforth be more economi- 
cal than you have hitherto been. 

Hereafter, for the future, henceforth. 
The future. My prospect, fate. 

Economical. 



article must be carefully studied. 

II aime a ne rien faire. 

A-t-elle jamais promis de ne pas 

toucher votre montre ? Non, 

jamais. 
De quoi ont-ils peur ? De ne pas 

avoir fait leur tdche a. temps. 
Votre cousine attend-elle beaucoup 

de monde a sa soiree ? 
Elle craint de n'en avoir que peu 

(282, 05s. 65.) 
t II n'entend pas raillerie. 
Demander pardon a quelqu'un. 
Pardonner, 1. Pardonnez-moi. 

Je vous demande pardon. 
Le pardon. Cette pendule. 

Avancer, 1. Avance-t-elle ? 

La montre avance. 

Betarder, 1. 4tetarde-t-elle ? 

La pendule retarde. 

Ma montre s'est arretee. 

Aller bien, s'arreter, 1, aller mal. 

t Ou en etions-nous ? 

t Nous etions a la lecon quarante, 
page cent-trente-six. 

Monter une Tiorloge, une montre. 

Regler une montre, une pendule, une 
horloge. 

Votre montre avance de vingt mi- 
nutes, et la mienne retarde d'un 
quart d'heure. 

II va sonner midi. 

Midi est-il deja. sonne? 

Sonner, 1. Faites sonner la pendule. 

Quelle heure sonne-t-il ? C'est une 
heure. 

A condition. 

Sous condition. 

Je vous preterai de l'argent, a con- 
dition que vous serez desormais 
plus econome que vous n'avez ete 
jusqu'ici. 

Desormais, dorenavant, a l'avenir. 

L'avenir. Mon avenir. 

ficonome, economique, menager. 



384 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 



Renoncer au jeu. Renoncez-y. 
Suivre un conseil. Suivez les bona. 



Vous avez Fair si melancolique. 
Adieu. 



To renounce gambling. Renounce it. 
To follow advice (counsel). Follow the 

good. 
You look so melancholy. 
Adieu, farewell. 
God be with you, good-by. 
Till I see you again. | Au plaisir de vous revoir. 

I hope to see you again soon. | Sans adieu, au revoir. 

Quand le verbe est omis (omettre,* 4, to omit.) (§ 151 — 8.) Study it 
carefully. 

What is he afraid of? Nothing. 



Whom is she afraid of? Nobody. 
Whom does she fear ? No one. 
Do you want five ? Not more than 
two. 



De quoi a-t-il peur ? De rien. 
De qui a-t-elle peur ? De personne. 
Qui craint-elle ? Personne. 

Vous en faut-il cinq ? Pas plus de 
deux. 



Soixante-douzieme TheJme. 3me Sec. 

Quelle heure est-il ? II est plus d'une heure et demie. — Vous 
dites qu'il est une heure et demie, et a ma montre, il n'est que midi 
et demi. En moins de vingt-cinq minutes deux heures sonneront. 
Pardonnez-moi, une heure n'est pas encore sonnee. Je vous assure 
qu'il est deux heures moins vingt-quatre minutes, car ma montre va 
tres-bien. — Va-t-elle aussi bien qu'un chronometre ? Je crois qu'elle 
va mieux que bien des chronometres. Elle va mieux que notre 
horloge, qu'on est oblige de regler toutes les semaines. — Comment 
va votre pendule ? Elle va superiearement aussi. Ni ma montre ni 
notre pendule ne varient (varier, 1, to vary) d'une minute dans six 
mois. Elles vont toujours ensemble. Votre montre doit etre arretee 
ou derangee, (out of order.) Est-elle montee? Je Fai montee hier 
soir en me couchant. — A quelle condition le feriez-vous? — Suivez 
son conseil a condition qu'il suive (§151) le votre. — Son avenir ne 
serait-il pas moins incertain s'il etait plus econome? Ne le serait-il 
pas encore moins s'il renoncait au jeu ? Donnez-lui en le conseil. 
Je n'y manquerai pas. Adieu, au plaisir. Sans adieu. 

Your schoolfellows have done you good, and nevertheless you 
have quarrelled with them; why did you? Was it my fault? I 
think it was theirs. Never mind. You must, without delay, make 
your peace with them. — Dialogue (le dialogue) between a tailor and 
his journeyman, (le gargon.) — Charles, have you taken the clothes to 
the Count Narissi ? Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did 
he say ? He said nothing but (sinon) that he had a great mind to 
give me a box on the ear, (des soufflets, plur.,) because I had not 
brought them sooner. — What did you answer him? Sir, said I, I do 
not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me j and if you do 



SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 



385 



not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely had I said 
that, when he put his hand to his sword, (porter la main a son epee,) 
and I ran away. 

Has it already struck twelve ? Yes, madam, it is already half- 
past twelve. — Is it so late? Is it possible? That is not late, it is 
still early. — Does your watch go well? (bien?) No, Miss N., it is a 
quarter of an hour too fast. And mine is half an hour too slow. 
Perhaps it has stopped. In fact, you are right. — Is it wound up ? — 
It is wound up, and yet (pourtant) it does not go. — Do you hear? it 
is striking one o'clock. Then I will regulate my watch and go 
home. — Pray (de grace) stay a little longer, (encore un peu!) I can- 
not, for we dine precisely at one o'clock, (d une heure precise.) Adieu, 
then, till I see you again. — You say you want fifty dollars; I will 
lend them to you with all my heart, but on condition that you w T ill 
renounce gambling, (renoncer au jeu,) and be more economical than 
you have hitherto been. I see now that you are my friend, and T 
love you too much not to follow your advice. 



SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON, 73d.— Soixante-treizieme Legon, l%me 



Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



To last, (to wear well,) stand. A 

short time. 
That cloth will wear well. 
How long has that coat lasted you ? 
It lasted me a year. 
That color is not a standing one. 

To my, his, her, their, our liking. 
To everybody's liking. 
Nobody can do anything to his liking. 
A boarding-house. A boarding-school. 
To keep house, (a boarding-house.) 
To board with anyone or anywhere. 

To be a boarder. 
To exclaim. 
To make uneasy. 
To get or grow uneasy. 
To be uneasy. 

Why do yo fret, (are you uneasy?) 
I do not fret, 'am* not uneasy.) 
That news makes me uneasy. 
I am uneasy at not receiving any 

news. 
33 



Durer, 1. 



Peu de temps 



Ce drap durera bien. 

Combien de temps cet habit vous 

a-t-il dure ? II m' a dure un an. 
Cette couleur n'est pas de duree. 
v (ll 1 , Obs. 27.) 
A mo?i, son, leur, notre, gre. 
Au gre de tout le monde. 
On ne peut rien faire a son gre. 
Une pension. 

Tenir maison. Tenir pension. 

Etre en pension. Se mettre en 

pension. Etre pensionnaire. 

S' eerier, 1. 
Inquieter, 1. 
SHnquieter. 

Etre inquiet, fern, inquiete. 
Pourquoi vous inquietez-vous ? 
Je ne m'inquiete pas. 
Cette nouvelle m'inquiete. 
Je suis inquiet de ne point recevoif 

de nouvelles. 



386 



SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 



She is uneasy about that affair. 

Do not be uneasy. 

The uneasiness, trouble. 

Quiet. Be quiet, just wait, stop. 

To quiet. Compose yourself. 

To change, alter, fade, pass away. 

That man has altered a great deal 

since I saw him. 
To be of use. 

Of what use is that to you ? 
That is of no use to me. 
Of what use is that to your brother ? 
It is of no use to him. 
Of what use is that stick to you ? 
I use it to beat my dogs. 
Of what use are those baskets to 

your brother? 
He uses them to carry his vegetables 

to market. 



Elle est inquiete sur cette affaire. 

Ne vous inquietez pas. 

L'inquietude. 

Tranquille. Soyez tranquille. 

Tranquilliser, 1. Tranquillisez-vous, 

Changer, 1. La couleur change. 

Cet homme a beaucoup change de« 

puis que je ne l'ai vu. 
t Servir* 2, d quelque chose. 
t A quoi cela vous sert-il ? 
t Cela ne me sert a rien. 
t A quoi cela sert-il a votre frer« 1 
t Cela ne lui sert a rien. 
t A quoi ce baton vous sert-il ? 
t II me sert a battre mes chiens. 
t A quoi ces paniers servent-ils a 

votre frere ? 
t lis lui servent a porter ses legumes 

au marche. II s'en sert pour 



porter ses legumes au msfche. 

Soixante-treizieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

De quel drap ferez-vous emplette ? Je veux du drap vert ; mais 
je veux qu 7 il dure et que la couleur tienne (§ 151), qu'elle ne passe 
pas. Si vous voulez de bon drap, il faut aller chez les Messieurs 

. Ne demeurent-ils pas au coin de cette rue-ci ? Si fait, c'est 

la qu'ils out leur magasin. Au dessus du (above the) magasin n ; y 
a-t-il pas une pension bien tenue ? Si fait, il y a ce qu'on appelle 
une pension d la mode, (a fashionable boarding-house.) — Vous con 
naissez-vous en drap ? Oui, assez bien. — Voulez-vous venir m'aider 
a en choisir? Volontiers. — Mais ne vous inquietez pas, soyez 

tranquille ; car si vous achetez le drap chez ces MM. , il sera 

bon et la couleur tiendra, elle ne changera pas, je vous assure. — 
Votre cousin a beaucoup change dernierement, a-t-il ete malade? 
Son epouse est encore plus changee. — Sont-ils dans une bonne pen- 
sion ? — Combien de pensionnaires y a-t-il 1 — Quel est le prix de la 
pension ? — Si votre associe reste dans une mauvaise pension, a quoi 
lui sert son argent? — Est-il avare % — S'il est marie, pourquoi ne tient-il 
pas maison ? — La pension leur convient-elle ? 

Sir, may (oser) I ask where General B lives? He lives near 

the arsenal, (arsenal, mas.,) on the other side of the river. — Could you 
tell me which road I must (je dois) take to go there? You must go 
(§ 151) along the shore, and at the end take a litfle street (quand 
vous serez au bout, prenez une petite rue) on the right, which will 
lead you straight to his house. It is a fine house ; you will find it 
easily. I thank you, Sir. — Does Captain N live here ? Yes, 



SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



387 



Sir; walk in ; (donnez-vous la peine d^entrer,) if you please. — Is the 
captain at home? I wish to have the honor (I'honneur) to speak 
to him. Yes. Sir. he is at home. — Whom shall I have the honor to 

announce? (annoncerJ) I am from B , and my name is F . 

— Who keeps this fashionable boarding-house? Miss P . an 

old maid. 

Last summer, when we were a hunting together, (ensemble,) 
night grew upon us (la nuitnous surprit) at ten leagues (une lieue) at 
least from our country seat, (la maison de campagne.) — Well. (Eh 
bien,) where did you pass the night ? I was very uneasy at first, 
but your brother, not in the least, (pas le moins du monde ;) on the 
contrary, in his opinion (gre) it was an agreeable incident ] he tran- 
quillized me so that I lost my uneasiness. After some time we 
found a peasant's hut, where we passed the night. Here I had an 
opportunity to see how clever your brother is. A few benches and 
a truss of straw (une botte de paille) served him to make a comforta- 
ble (commode) bed ; he used a bottle as a candlestick, another bundle 
of straw served us as a pillow, and our cravats as nightcaps. When 
we awoke in the morning, we were as fresh and healthy (bien por- 
tant) as if we had slept in our own beds. 

Vo cab ul aire. 2de Sec. 



Of what use are these bottles to your 

landlord ? 
They serve him to put his wine in. 
To stand instead, to be as. 
I use my gun as a stick. 
This hole serves him for a house. 
He used his cravat as a nightcap. 

To avail. 

What avails it to you to cry ? 

It avails me nothing. 

Opposite to. 

Opposite that house. 

Opposite the garden. 

Opposite to me. 

Right opposite. 

He lives opposite the arsenal. 

I live opposite the king's library. 

To set hold of. . . ) q •„„ , njn - + 

™ f J . r > Seize upon it. 

lo take possession of ) 

To witness. To show. 

To give evidence against some one. 



t A quoi ces bouteilles servent-elles 

a votre hote ? 
t Elles lui servent a mettre son vin. 
t Servir,* de. 

t Mon fusil me sert de baton, 
t Ce trou lui sert de maison. 
t Sa cravate lui a servi de bonnet de 

nuit. 
t Servir * {de before inf.) 
t A quoi vous sert-il de pleurer? 
t Cela ne me sert a rien. 
Vis-a-vis de. 

Vis-a-vis de cette maison. 
Vis-a-vis du jardin. 
Vis-a-vis de moi. 
Tout vis-a-vis. 

II demeure vis-a-vis de V arsenal. 
Je demeure vis-a-vis de la biblio- 
theque royale. 

S' emparer de . . . Emparez-vous-en, 

Temoigner, 1. 

Temoigner contre quelqu'un. 



388 



SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



He has shown a great deal of friend- 
ship to me. 

To turn some one into ridicule. 

To become ridiculous. 

To make one's self ridiculous. 

To he born. 

Where were you born ? 

I was born in this country. 

Where was your sister born ? 

She was born in the United States of 
North America. 

Where were your brothers born ? 

They were born in France. 

The game. The game-bag, pouch. 

A horse -hair. The feathers. 

A pillow. A cushion, down. 

A hair cushion. A down pillow. 



The boarder. 



The pensioner. 



II m'a temoigne beaucoup d'amitiel 

Tourner quelqu'un en ridicule. 

Tomber dans le ridicule. 

Se rendre ridicule. 

Etre ne. 

t Ou etes-vous ne ? 

t Je suis ne dans ce pays-ci. 

t Ou votre sceur est-elle nee ? 

t Elle est ne'e aux Etats Unis de 

l'Amerique du Nord. 
t Ou vos freres sont-ils nes ? 
t lis sont nes en France. 
Le gibier. La gibeciere. 

Un crin. Les plumes. 

Un oreiller. Un coussin, le duvet. 
Un coussin de crin. Un oreiller de 

duvet. 
Le pensionnaire . .. du gouverne- 

ment. 



Soixante-treizieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

A quoi lui sert de savoir le Franc ais, si elle ne le parle. ni ne le 
lit ; ni ne le pratique ? (§ 171 — 3.) II lui servira quand elle voyagera 
en Europe. — Se sert-il de sa gibeciere pour oreiller? Oui, lorsqu'il 
se couche sous les arbres a la campagne. — A quoi vous sert de vous 
amiger? Je ne peux m'empecher d'etre afnige du malheur arrive 
a mon ami. — Son cheval lui sert-il a quelque chose ? 11 se promene 
a cheval tous les jours. — Ou son fils est-il ne? II est ne a Philadel- 
phie. Sa fille y est-elle nee aussi? Oui, elle est nee dans la 
maison vis-a-vis. — Si vous etiez ne en Ecosse. mon petit bon homme, 
que seriez-vous ? Je serais ecossais, n 7 est-ce pas? C'est vrai. Et 
votre soeur que serait-elle, si elle y etait nee ? Elle serait ecossais 
aussi. Non pas ecossais, mais ecossaise. — De quoi le voleur s'est-il 
empare ? II s'est empare de tout ce qu 7 il a pu. — Qui a temoigne 
contre lui? Le bijoutier qui demeurait vis-a-vis de la poste, et 
I'aubergiste qui demeure au coin de la place ou se trouve la bibli- 
otheque de la ville. — Ne tournez personne en ridicule. Aimeriez- 
vous a etre tourne en ridicule ? — Ne ferai-je pas bien de le battre, s'il 
me tourne en ridicule ? 

Which is the shortest (court) way to the arsenal? (un arsenal?) 
Go down (suivez) this street, and when you come to the end (au 
bout,) turn to the left, and take the cross-way, (vous trouverez un — 
que vous traverser 'ez ;) you will then enter into a rather narrow (etroit) 
street, which will lead you to a great square, (la place,) where you 
will see a blind alley. — Through (par) which I must pass? No ; fot 



SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



389 



there is no outlet, (une issue.) You must leave it on the right, and 
pass under the arcade which is near it. — And then % And then you 
must inquire, (further.) — I am very much obliged to you. — Do not 
mention it, {il n'y a pas de quoi.) — Are you able to translate an 
English letter into French? I am. — Who has taught you? My 
French master has enabled me to do it. — Was your French teacher 
born in France ? No, he was not. 

Your mother is wrong to fret about her eldest son ; for 7 although 
he is ( s N 151) in the army, (d Varmee,) he knows how to get out of a 
bad scrape. — A candidate (un candidat) petitioned (demander a) the 
king of Prussia [de Prusse) for an employment, (un emploi.) This 
prince asked him where he was born. " I was born at Berlin/ 7 
answered he. " Begone !" said the monarch, (Je monarque^) " all 
the men of Berlin {un Berlinois) are good for nothing. 7 ' "I beg 
your majesty's pardon, ;; replied the candidate ; u there are some good 
ones, and I know two. 77 " Which are those twc V asked the king. 
1 The first," replied the candidate, "is your majesty, and I am the 
second." The king could not help laughing (ne put s'empecher de 
rive) at this answer, and granted (accorder) the request, (la de- 
mande.) 



SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON.— Soixante-quatorzieme Legon, 74me. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



To lose sight of. 

The sight. My sight is good. (I 

have good sight.) 
I wear spectacles because my sight 

is bad, (or I have a bad sight.) (24 2 , 

Obs. 55.) 
Are you near-sighted , or long-sighted ? 
I am near-sighted. 
The ship is so far off, that we shall 

soon lose sight of it. 
I have lost sight of that. 
As it is long since I was in England, 

I have lost sight of your brother. 

As it is long since I have read any | 
French, I have lost sight of it. I 



Perdre de vue. 
La vue. 



t Tai bonne vue. 



Je porte des lunettes parce que j'ai 
la vue mauvaise, (oumauvaise vue.) 

t Avez- vous la vue courte ou longue ? 

t J'ai la vue courte. 

Le batiment est si loin, que nous le 

perdrons bientot de vue. 
J'ai perdu ceia de vue. 
Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai 

ete en Angleterre, j'ai perdu votre 

frere de vue. 
Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai 

lude Frangais, je l'ai perdude vue. 



Obs. 160. Ought and should (when it means ought are rendered into 
French by the conditionnel {% 148) of the verb devoir, to owe. Ought to 
have, should have, by the conditionnel passe. (§ 149.) 
33* 



390 



SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



You ought to or should do that. 

He ought not to speak thus to his 

father. 
We ought to go thither earlier. 

They should listen to what you say. 

You should pay more attention to 
what I say. 

You ought to have done that. 

He should have managed the thing 
better than he has done. 

You should have managed the thing 
differently. 

They ought to have managed the thing 
as I did. 

We ought to have managed it differ- 
ently from what they did. 

You ought to have played on the flute 

while I was playing on the violin. 
I wished to do it, but my flute was 

out of order. 
He ought to have wished it to you. 
A stay, a sojourn. To make a stay. 
Do you intend to make a long stay in 

the town ? 
I do not intend to make a long stay 

in it. 



Vous devriez faire cela. 

II ne devrait pas parler ainsi a son 

pere. 
Nous devrions y aller de meilleure 

heure. 
lis devraient dcouter ce que vous 

dites. 
Vous devriez faire plus d'attention a 

ce que je dis. 
Vous auriez du faire cela. 
II aurait du s'y prendre mieux qu'il 

n'a fait. 
Vous auriez du vous y prendre d'une 

maniere differente. 
lis auraient du s'y prendre commo 

je m'y suis pris. 
Nous aurions du nous y prendre 

d'une autre maniere qu'ils ne s'y 

sont pris. 
Vous auriez du jouer de la flute pen- 
dant que je jouais du violon. 
Je souhaitais le faire, mais ma flute 

etait derangee. 
II aurait du vous le souhaiter. 
Un sejour. Faire un sejour. 

Comptez-vous faire un long sejour 

dans la ville ? 
Je ne compte pas y faire un long se- 
jour. 



Soixante-qttatorzieme ThiIme. Ire Sec. 

Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu Pavocat? Oui, je Pai 
perdu de vue. — Voyez cet oiseau, comme il est haut ! II est presque 
a perte de vue, (out of sight.) — Pourquoi, lui qui a la vue courte, ne 
porte-t-il pas de lunettes'? II ne s'en soucie pas. — Vous devriez 
faire ce que voire mere desire. Je Paurais fait, si j'avais pu; mais 
quoique j'aie essaye trois fois, je n'ai pas pu reussir. — Vous voila 
deja de retour ! Vous auriez du faire un plus long sejour aupres de 
votre vieille tante. J'y en ai fait un assez long, ne vous deplaise, 
(please your honor.) — Quel sejour y avez-vous fait? Vous croirez a 
peine que j'y ai fait un sejour de six semaines et demie. — Ce n'est 
pas possible ! Si fait, c'est tres-possible. J'etais aupres d'elle le 14 
Juin, et je ne Pai quittee que hier; et vous savez que c'est aujour- 
d'hui le 4 d'aout; ainsi comptez. Je ne me le serais pas imagine. 
Vous m'avez perdu de vue sans chagrin. 

A peasant, (paysan,) having seen that old men, (le vieillard,) 
whose sight was bad, used spectacles to read, went to an optician 



SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



(un opticien) and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, 
and. having opened it, said the spectacles were not good, (fern.) 
The optician put another pair of the best which he could find in his 
shop (la boutique) upon his nose; but the peasant being still unable 
to read, the merchant said to him : u My friend, perhaps you cannot 
read at all?" "If I could/' said the peasant, "I should not want 
your spectacles.' 7 — I thought that you would be thirsty; that is the 
reason I brought you to the apothecary's shop to take a glass of 
mineral water and syrup. Give us two glasses of mineral water. — 
What syrup, Miss? No matter which, (nHmporte le quel;) I like 
them all. 

I have seen six players (le joueur) to-day, who were all winning 
(gagner) at the same time, (en meme temps.) — That cannot be, for a 
player can only win when another loses. — You would be right if 1 
were speaking of people who play at cards or billiards, (Obs. 118, 
51 1 :) but I am speaking of flute and violin players, (de joueur s de 
flute et de violon.) — Do you sometimes practise (fait **) musie? (de 
la musiquel) Very often, for I like it much. — What instrument 
(Obs. 118, 51 l ) do you play? I play the violin, and my sister plays 
the piano. My brother, who plays the bass, (la basse.) accompanies 
(accompagner) us, and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds (applaudir) us. 
— Does she not also play some musical instrument % (un instrument 
de musiquel) She plays the harp, (la harpe,) but she is too proud 
(fiere) to practise music with us. 

Vocabuxaire. 2de Sec. 



To suspect, to guess. 

I suspect what he has done. 

He does not suspect what is going to 

happen to him. 
To think of some one or of something. 

Of whom do you think ? 

I think of my friend. 

Do you think often of him — her ? 

I do, very often. 

Of what do you think ? 

To turn upon. To be the question. 

It is questioned, it turns upon. 

The question is not your pleasure, 

but your improvement. 
You play, Sir, but playing is not the 

thing, but studying. 

What is going on ? 



Se douter, 1, (de, av. l'inf.) 

Je me doute de ce qu'il a fait. 

II ne se doute pas de ce qui va lui 

arriver. 
Penser a quelqu'un ou d quelque 

chose. 
A qui pensez-vous ? 
Je pense a mon ami — amie. 
Y pensez-vous souvent ? (§ 50, 2.) 
J'y pense tres-souvent. 
A quoi pensez-vous ? 
t S'agirde. 
II s'agit de. 
II ne s'agit pas de votre plaisir, mais 

de vos progres. 
Vous jouez, Monsieur, mais il ne 

s'agit pas de jouer, il s'agit d'etu- 

dier. 
De quoi s'agit-il ? 



392 



SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



The question is to know what we 
shall do to pass the time agreeably. 

On purpose. 

I beg your pardon, I have not done 

it on purpose, 
To be silent, being silent, been silent. 
Be silent, quit talking. Hush, I say. 
Are you silent? Do you cease talking? 
I am. I do. He is never silent. 
After speaking half an hour he was 

silent, he ceased speaking, &c. 

Obs. 161. Could (§ 149) is rendered by the conditionnel of pouvoir, (to 
be able.) Might, by the conditionnel modified by peut-etre, perhaps. Could 
have, might have, by the conditionnel passe. 

Pourriez-vous parler si vous es- 
sayiez ? 



II s'agit de savoir ce que nous ferons 
pour passer notre temps agreable- 
ment. 

Exp res. 

Je vous demande pardon, je ne l'ai 
pas fait expres. 

t Se taire,* 4. Se taisant — tu. 

t Taisez-vous. Taisez-vous done. 

t Vous taisez-vous? 

t Je me tais. II ne se tait jamais. 

Apres avoir parle pendant une demi- 
heure, il se tut. 



Could you speak if you tried ? 
1 might, but I am sure he could. 



Could you sing before a large audi- 
ence ? 

/ could not, but Miss B., (could,) 
might. 

Could they have danced the Polka ? 

They might, but I know she could 
{have danced it.) 

Could you have played before those 
great musicians ? 

We could not, but Henry might have 
played before them. 



Je pourrais peut-etre, mais je suis 

siir qu'il pourrait. 
Pourriez-vous chanter devant (49 s , 

Obs. 116) une grande audience? 
Je ne pourrais pas, mais Mile. B. 

(pourrait,) pourrait peut-etre. 
Auraient-ils pu danser le Polka ? 
lis auraie?it peut-etrepu, mais je sais 

qu'elle Vaurait pu. 
Auriez-vous pu jouer devant ces 

grands musiciens ? 
Nous n'aurions pas pu, mais Henri 

aurait peut-etre pu jouer devant 



Soixante-qttatorzieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Savez-vous ce qu'il aurait fait si je n'avais pas ete ici? Je me 
doute de ce qu'il aurait voulu faire. — Aurait-il pu reussir? II y serait 
peut-etre parvenu. — A qui pensez-vous quand vous ne pensez a 
rien ? Je pense a la personne qui fait cette belle question. — De 
quoi s'agit-n"? II s'agit du musicien, de Phonneur de la famille. — 
De quoi s'agissait-il % De savoir s'il avait casse le chandelier 
expres ou non. — MoL je crois qu'il 1'avait fait expres. S'il P avait 
fait expres, il ne pleurerait pas de cette maniere. Ce n'est. que pour 
nous faire croire qu'il ne Pa pas iait expres. — Taisez-vous ; vous lui 
irnpntez toujours des torts. Je ne me tairai pas pour vous. Laissons 
eela, et racontez-nous une anecdote. — Une ville assez pauvre fit une 
depense considerable en fetes et en illuminations, a l'occasion du 
passage de sou prince. Celui-ci en paraissant etonne, un courtisan 



SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



391 



(a courtier) dit, " Elle n'a fait que ce qu'elle devait a votre majeste." 
u C"est vrai.' ; reprit un autre, " mais elle doit tout ce qu'elle a fait. ;; — 
C ; est tres-bien, je ne me doutais pas que vous auriez si bien reussi. 
Je vous remercie du compliment. 

A thief having one day entered a boarding-house, stole three 
cloaks, (le manteau.) — In going away he was met by one of the 
boarders, who had a fine laced (galonne) cloak. Seeing so many 
cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief 
answered boldly (froidement) that they belonged to three gentlemen 
of the house, who had given them to be cleaned, (d degraisser ) 
u Then you must also clean (degraissez done aussi) mine, for it is 
very much in need of it, (en avoir grand besoin,") said the boarder; 
"but/' added he, "you must return it to me at three o'clock. ,; "'I 
shall not fail, (y manquer,) Sir, ;; answered the thief, as he carried 
off (emporter) the four cloaks, with which he (qu'il) is still to return, 
(n'a pas encore rapport es.) 

You. are singing, (chanter.) gentlemen, but it is not a time for (il 
ne s'agit pas de) singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what 
you are told. We are at a loss. — What are you at a loss about? I 
am going to tell you : the question is with us how we shall pass our 
time agreeably. Play a game at billiards or at chess, (51 1 .) — We 
have proposed joining a hunting-party ; do you go with us? (etes-vous 
des notres?) I cannot, for I have not done my task yet; and if I 
neglect it, my master will scold me. Every one according to his 
liking ; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting, we 

cannot hinder you. — Does Mr. B go with us? Perhaps. — I 

should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, (trop 
bavard.) excepting that, (dcela pres,) he is a clever man, a fine fellow, 
(un excellent homme.) 



SEVENTY- FIFTH LESSON, 75th.— Soixante-quinzieme Lecon, 75me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



Towards, 'physically,) (morally.) 

He comes towards me — us. 

He has behaved very well towards me. 

We must always behave well towards 
everybody. 

The behavior of others is but an 
echo of our own. If we behave 
well towards them, they will also 



Vers. Envers. 

II vient vers moi — nous. 

II s'est tres-bien comporte envers 

moi. 
II faut toujours nous bien comporter 

envers tout le monde. 
La conduite des autres n'est qu'un 

echo de la notre. Si nous nous 

comportons bien envers eux, ils so 



394 



SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON (1 ) 



behave well towards us ; but if we 
use them ill, we must not expect 
better from them. 

To treat or to use somebody well. 
To use somebody ill. 
As you have always used me well, I 
will not use you ill. 

As he has always used me well, I 

have always used him in the same 

manner. 
To delay, (to tarry.) 
Do not be long before you return. 
I shall not be long before I return. 
I long to or for. 

Obs. 162. The subject of the verb long, must be rendered in French by 
the indirect object, me, te, lux, nous, vous, or leur. (39 1 , Obs. 90.) 



comporteront bien aussi envers 
nous ; mais si nous en usons mal 
avec eux, nous ne devons pas at- 
tendre mieux de leur part. 

E?i user bien avec quelou* un. 

En user mal avec quelqu 'un. 

Comme vous en avez use toujours 
bien avec moi, je n'en userai pas 
mal avec vous. 

Comme il en a toujours bien use avec 
moi, j'en ai toujours use de la 
meme maniere avec lui. 

Tarder, 1, (takes a av. l'infj 

Ne tardez pas a revenir. 

Je ne tarderai pas d revenir. 

t ll me tarde . . . (unipersonnel.) 



I long to see my brother. 

He longs to receive his money. 

We long for dinner, because we are 

very hungry. 
They long to sleep, because they are 

tired. 
To postpone, to put off. 
Let us put that off until to-morrow. 
Let us put off that lesson until another 

time. 



t II me tarde de voir mon frere. 

t II lui tarde de recevoir son argent. 

t II nous tarde de diner, parce que 

nous avons bien faim. 
t II leur tarde de dormir, parce qu'ila 

sont fatigues. 
Remcltre,* a. 
Remettons cela a demain. 
Remettons cette lecon a une autre 
fois. 



Soixante-quinzieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Comment Jacques se conduit-il envers ses parents? U ne se con- 
duit pas bien envers eux. — A-t-il des amis ici? II n'en a pas, car 
il se comporte mal envers tout le monde. — QiPaurait-ildu faire lors- 
qu^il me vit? II aurait du s ; avancer vers moi et me souhaiter une 
bonne cninee, (a happy new year.) — Ne leur tarde -t-il pas de se baigner? 
(to bathe?) Si fait, il leur tarde beaucoup : mais l'eau de la riviere 
est encore trop froide. — Ne vous tarde-t-il pas que le courrier arrive 1 
(§ 151.) Si fait; maisil me tarderait beaucoup plus si je n'avais pas 
entendu parler de mon ami. — Ne tardez pas a revenir, entendez- 
vous? Je ne tarderai pas car il me tarde de partir. — Remettrons- 
nous PafFaire a demain'? Non, ne la remettons pas; car il nous 
tarde qu'elle soit finie. (§ 151.) — Que voudriez-vous savoir? II nous 
tarde de connaitre le resultat (the result) de Pelection. — Comment 
s'est il comporte envers sa femme ? Pendant la lune de miel, il 
s 7 est comporte comme il faut. Et ensuite ? Mal, comme il le fait 
envers toutes ses oonnaissances. 



SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



395 



As you have always used me well, I will use you in the same 
manner. I will lend you the money you want, but on condition that 
you will return it to me next week. — You may depend upon it. — 
How has my son behaved towards you? He has behaved well 
towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. His father 
told him often : The behavior of others is but an echo of our own. 
If we behave well towards them, they will also behave well towards 
us 5 but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them. — 
May I see your brothers ? You will see them to-morrow. As they 
have just arrived from a long journey, (le voyage.) they long for sleep, 
for they are very tired. — What has my sister said % She said that 
she longed for dinner, because she was very hungry. 

I have the honor to wish you a good morning. How do you do ? 
Very well, at your service. — And how are all at home ? Tderably 
well, thank God ! My sister was a little indisposed, (indisposee,) but 
she is well, (retablie ;) she told (charger de) me to give you her best 
compliments. — I am glad (char me) to hear that she is well. As for 
you, you are health itself, (la sante meme ;) you cannot look better, 
(vous avez la meillenre mine dn monde.) — I have no time to be ill : 
my business (mes affaires) would not permit me. Please (donnez- 
vous la peine) to sit down ; here is a chair. I will not detain (dis- 
traire) you from your business, (les occupations ;) I know that a mer- 
chant's time is precious, (que le temps est precieux d un negociant.) 



VOCABULAIRE 

To be at one' s ease. To be comfortable. 

To be uncomfortable. 

I am very much at my ease upon 
this chair. 

You are uncomfortable upon your 
chair. 

What can that be ? 

We are uncomfortable in that board- 
ing-house. 

That man is well off, for he has 
plenty of money. 

That man is badly off, for he is poor. 

To make one's self comfortable. 
Make yourself comfortable. 
To be uncomfortable. 
To inconvenience one's self. 
To put one's self out of the way. 
Do not put yourself out of the way. 
That man never inconveniences him- 
self; he never does it for anybody. 



2de Sec. 
Etre a son aise. 
Etre mal d son aise. 
Je suis bien a mon aise sur cette 

chaise. 
Vous etes mal a votre aise sur votre 

chaise, 
t Qu'est-ce que cela peut £tre ? 
Nous sommes mal a notre aise dans 

cette pension. 
Cet homme est a son aise, car il a 

beaucoup d' argent. 
Cet homme est mal a son aise, parco 

qu'il est pauvre. 
Se mettre d son aise. 
Mettez-vous a votre aise. 
Etre gene. 

[ Se gener, 1. 

Ne vous genez pas. 
Cet homme ne se gene jamais ; il ne 
se gene jamais pour personne. 



396 SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



Can you, without putting yourself to 

inconvenience, lend me ten dollars 

and your gun ? 
To make entreaties. 
To beg with entreaty. 
I employed every kind of entreaty 

to engage him to it. 
To solicit, to press, to sue, to entreat. 
Here and there, up and down, all 

about. 
Now and then. From time to time. 
Indifferently, (as good as bad.) 
I have done my composition tolerably 

well. 



Pouvez-vous, sans vous gtmer, me 
preter dix gourdes, et sans incon- 
venient me preter votre fusil % 

Faire des instances. 

Frier avec instances. 

Je Ten ai sollicite avectoutes les in- 
stances possibles. 

Solliciter, 1. 

Par-ci, par-la ; ici et la. 



De loin en loin. De temps en temps. 
Tant bien que mal. 
J'ai fait ma composition tant bien 
que mal. 

Soixante-qtjinzieme Th^me. 2de Sec. 

Pai perdu de vue les enfants de Madame R . Sont-ils chez 

elle ? lis sont en pension. — Comment s'y trouvent-ils ? Le fils se 
trouve mal dans sa pension, il s'en plaint, il n'y est pas a son aise. — 
Et les filles, sont-elles a leur aise dans la leur? Elles s'"en plain- 
draient si elles ne s'y trouvaient pas bien, si elles n ; y etaient pas a 
leur aise. Si vous avez chaud, levez le chassis, (the sash,) mettez-vous 
a votre aise. — Ce medecin est-il a son aise ? II n'irait pas a pied s'il 
etait a son aise. — Ou allez-vous vous promener? Je vais par-ci, par- 
la. Quelque fois je monte la rue, d'autre fois je la descends. — 
Voyez-vous M. le general ? De temps en temps, de loin en loin. 
Comment avez-vous fait votre theme? Tant bien que mal. — Le 
commis du negociant fait-il son devoir ? II le fait tant bien que mal ; 
mais le negociant n'en est pas content. — Ou sont nos messieurs 1 lis 
ne se genent pas; ils sont a fumer dans le salon. — Les avez-vous 
pries d'aller fumer dehors? Je les ai pries avec instances de le 
faire, mais ils n'ont pas envie de se gener. 

Have you made your French composition ? I have made it. — 
Was your tutor pleased with it ? He was not ; for it was difficult, and 
I made it but indifferently, (tant bien que mal.) — Are you comfortable 
in your fashionable boarding-house ? I am. — Is there not too much 
etiquette there for you ? A little etiquette is necessary. I do not like to 
be always with people who put themselves too much at their ease, 
who use no ceremony, (sont sans ceremonie.) — When the dog was 
attacking you, did you not entreat them (frier avec instances de) to 
come to your assistance? I did earnestly beg them to come, but 
.hey would not, (time expired.) — Did the dog bite and hurt you much? 
He bit me a little here and there. — At what o'clock were they to 
'36 1 , Obs. 84) play off that game of billiards, before they (28 2 , Obs. 65) 
put it off? They were to play it at 6 o'clock in the morning. — Why 



SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 



397 



did they postpone it % They did so, because one of them was obliged 
to go to New York, but he will return in a day or two. 

Who got you that situation? Cousin James did. — How do you 
like to be a clerk ? I like it pretty well. — What does it bring you ? 
Not much now, because I am not thoroughly acquainted with the 
business, but when (46 3 ) I am I shall earn more. — Why are you going 
away so soon? Stay. I have nothing pressing (de presse d) to do 
now, my courier is already despatched, (mon courrier est dejd czpedie.) 
I shall not stay any longer. I only wished in passing (en passant par 
ici) to inquire about your health. You do me much honor. — It is 
very fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the 
pleasure of seeing you again (revoir*) this afternoon, (cette apres 
dinee } ) and if you have time we will take a little turn togetl. ti\ 
With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. I will 
come for you (venir prendre) about (vers) seven o'clock. Adieu, then, 
till I see you again. I have the honor to bid you adieu. 

Vocabtjlaire. 3me Sec. 



To impart something to somebody. 

Have you imparted that to your 

father ? 
I have imparted it to him. 
To look .... to speak in vain. 

In vain I looked all around, I saw- 
neither man nor house : not the 
least sign of settlement. 

A dwelling, habitation, settlement. 

In vain I speak, for you do not listen 
to me. 

In vain I do my best, I cannot do 
anything to his liking. 

You may say what you please, no- 
body will believe you. 

It is in vain that they earn money, 
they will never be rich. 

We search in vain, for what we have 
lost we cannot find. 

To salute, bid adieu, good day, bow. 
I have the honor to bid you adieu. 
Present my compliments to him, (to ' 

her.) 
Remember me to him, (to her.) J 

34 



Faire part de auelque chose a quel- 

qu'un. 
Avez-vous fait part de cela a votre 

pere ? 
Je lui en ai fait part, 
t Avoir beau regarder . . . avoir beau 

parler. 
J'avais beau regarder tout autour de 

moi, je ne voyais ni horn me, ni 

maison : pas la moindre apparence 

d' habitation. 
Une habitation. 
J'ai beau parler, vous ne m'ecoutez 

pas. 
J'ai beau faire de mon mieux, je ne 

peux rien faire a son gre. 
Vous avez beau dire, personne ne 

vous croira. 
lis ont beau gagner de l'argent, ils 

ne seront jamais riches. 
Nous avons beau chercher, nous ne 

pourrons pas trouver ce que nous 

avons perdu. 
Saluer, 1. 
J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. 

Dites-lui bien des choses de ma part. 



398 SEVENTY- FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 



Pray present my compliments to 
your sister. 

Remember mo (present my compli- 
ments) to him, (to her.) 

I shall not fail. 

The present, (the present time or 
tense.) 

The past. The future. 

The loss of time. 

Enjoy all the pleasures that virtue 
permits. 



Je vous prie de faire mes compli- 
ments a Mademoiselle votre soeur. 

Presentez-lui mes civilites, (mes 
tres-humbles respects.) 

Je n'y manquerai pas. 

Le present. 

Le passe. L'avenir, le futur. 

La perte du temps. 
Jouissez de tous les plaisirs que la 
vertu permet. 



SoiXANTE-QuiNziiiME Theme. 3me Sec. 

Bon jour, Mile., j'espere que vous vous portez bien ! Pai Phon- 
neur de vous saluer, M. Je suis bien portante, je vous remercie. — 
En effect, vous avez tres-bonne mine. Et vous, vous etes la sante 
merae. Vous voulez-vous rnoquer de moi ! car, je suis a demi- 
mort. Non, vraiment, je trouve que vous avez tres-bonne mine. 
Vous avez beau dire. Mile., je sens que je ne suis pas la sante 
meme. Vous, M., vous avez beau dire, vous ne me ferez pas croire 
que je n'y vois pas. — Avez- vous fait part a quelqu'un de la nouvelle 
dont je vous ai fait part hier ? Oui, j'en ai fait part a mon cousin, et 
je me proposais d'en faire part a quelqu'autre personne. Etait-ce 
un secret? Non pas exactement. — M. F. est riche, est-il de la 
bonne societe ? Non, il a beau etre riche, on ne veut pas Vy 
admettre. — Le fils du consul a perdu beaucoup de temps; mais il 
peut le reparer s'il s'applique. Vous avez beau dire, la perte du 
temps est irreparable. On a dit avec verite : II n 7 est permis d'etre 
avare que du temps. 

That old woman is always scolding, (est toujours d gronder ;) in 
vain I do my best. No one can do anything to her liking. — You 
may say what you please; no one will believe you. It is true, 
nevertheless. — Can you, without putting yourself to inconvenience, 
lend me one hundred dollars ? As you have always used me well, I 
will treat you in the same manner, and will lend you that sum. — 
Have you imparted to your brother what I told you to tell him % As 
he was very tired, he longed to go to sleep ; so that I have postponed 
imparting it to him till to-morrow. — Will that do? Yes, it will. 

The loss of time is an irreparable loss. A single minute cannot 
be recovered (se recouvrer) for all the gold in the (du) world. It is, 
then, of the greatest importance to employ well the time, which 
consists (consister) only of (en) minutes, of which we must make 
good use. We have but the present ; the past is no longer anything, 
(nest plus rien,) and the future is uncertain, (incertain.) — A great 
many people ruin themselves (se miner) because they wish to 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 



399 



indulge themselves too much, (a force de vouloir se faire da bien.) 
If most men (la plupart des hommes) knew how to content them- 
selves (se content er de) with what they have, they would be happy ■ 
but their greediness (leur avidite) very often makes (rendre) them 
unhappy. — In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble 
ourselves about (ne pas s'inquieter de) the future, and enjoy the 
present. — I was very much dejected (triste) when my cousin came 
to me, (vint me trouver.) " What is the matter with you ?" he asked 
me. " Oh, (ah!) my dear cousin," replied I, "in losing that money 
I have lost everything." "Do not fret," said he to me; "'for I 
have found your money." 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 76m.—Soixante-seizieme Legem, 76me. 



Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



Do you read ? 
Are you reading ? 



I do. 
I am. 



They 



Are they making a noise ? 

are (making one). 
Is she coming ? She is. 

Were you scolding ? I was so. 

Will he not be dressing himself? 

Yes, he will. 
To mean. 

What do you mean ? 
I mean what I was saying. 
What does that man mean ? Nothing. 
He means nothing. 
What does that mean ? 

What does : " Je suis d lire,''' mean ? 
That means : I am reading. 
That does not mean anything. 
I do not know what that means. 
To be close. To be particular. 

I do not like to deal with that man, 
for he is too particular. 

To grow impatient, to fret. 

Do not fret about that. 

To sit up, to watch. I am sitting up. 

I have sat up all night. 



| Lisez-vous? Je lis. 

Etes-vous a lire ($ 144 — 6.) Je suis 

a lire. 
Sont-ils a faire du bruit ? lis sont a 

en faire. 
Est-elle a venir ? Elle est a venir. 
Etiez-vous a gronder ? J'etais a le 

faire. 
Ne sera-t-il pas a s'habiller ? Si 

fait. 
Vouloir dire. 
t Que voulez-vous dire ? 
t Je veux dire ce que j'etais a dire. 
t Que veut dire cet homme ? Rien. 
t II ne veut rien dire. 
t Que veut dire cela ? Qu'est-ce 

que cela veut dire ? 
t Que veut dire : Je suis a lire ? 
t Cela veut dire : I am reading, 
t Cela ne veut rien dire, 
t Je ne sais pas ce que cela veut dire, 
t Y regarder de pres. 
t Je n'aime pas a faire des affaires 
avec cet homme, car il y regarde 
de trop pres. 
t S 1 impatient er de. 
Ne vous impatientez pas de cela. 
Veiller, 1. Je suis a veiller. 
J'ai veille toute la nuit. 



400 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 



To advise. He is advising him to . . . 

The dress, the costume. An elegant 

dress. 
To dress one's self. 
That man always dresses well. 
To find fault with something. 
That man always finds fault with 

everything he sees. 
Do you find fault with that ? 
I do not find fault with it. 
A trick, (a turn, a round.) To play 

a trick. 
To play a trick upon some one. 
To take a turn. 

I have taken a turn round the garden. 
He has taken a couple of turns round 

the garden. 
To take a little turn. 
To travel through Europe. 
More (meaning) besides. 

You have given me three books, but 

I want three besides. 
Less. Many less. 

Three less. Three too many. 



Conseiller, 1, de . . . II est a le con- 

seiller de . . . 
La mise. Une mise elegante. 

Se mettre* 4. 

Cet homme se met toujours bien. 
t Trouver a redire a quelque chose. 
t Cet homme trouve toujours a redire 

a tout ce qu'il voit. 
t Trouvez-vous a redire a cela? 
t Je n'y trouve rien a redire. 
Tin tour. Jouer un tour. 

Jouer un tour aquelqu'un. 
t Faire un tour, 
t J'ai fait un tour de jardin. 
t II a fait deux tours de jardin. 

t Faire un petit tour. 

t Faire le tour de 1' Europe. 

Be plus. (30 1 , Obs. 71.) (Apres m 

nom ou nomhre.) 
Vous m'avez donne trois livres, mais 

j'en veux trois de plus. 
De moins. Beaucoup de moins. 
Trois de moins. Trois de trop. 



Soixante-seizieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Ah! vous voila. Oui, c'est moi-meme. Venez-vous de faire un 
petit tour ? Non, je viens du magasin de M. D., ou je voulais acheter 
des gants de peau (kid) mais je n'ai pas pu. Et pourquoi done'? 
n'en a-t-il pas? Si fait, il en a de superbes; mais il y regarde de 
trop pres. Que voulez-vous dire par cela? Ce que je veux dire? 
C'est tout simple 7 (it is plain.) Je veux dire qu'il vend cher et qu'il 
ne veut rien rabattre. Je sais qu'il n'a qu'un prix; mais je ne crois 
pas qu'il y regarde de trop pres. N'avez-vous pas trouve a redire a 
son prix % Si fait, et je lui ai dit qu'il demandait 12 sous et demi de 
plus que les autres marchands. Et vous lui avez peut-etre ofFert 25 
sous de moins que son prix ? Non, mais 12 sous et demi. Alors, 
ne vous plaignez pas: ne trouvez pas a redire a sa conduite, car 
n'y regardez-vous pasd r aussi pres que lui? Moi ! y regarder d'aussi 
pres que lui ! — Jean, qu'es-tu a faire ? Je suis a nettoyer mon fusil. — 
Que fait Anne ? Ne Pentendez-vous pas? Elle est a pratiqu.er son 
piano et a chanter. Est-ce elle qui est a pratiquer? Je croyais que 
i'etait Julie qui etait a le faire. Anne a fait beaucoup de progres 
depuis que je ne l'ai entendue. 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



401 



Did you mean to say that you and your cousin Henry are going 
(62 3 , Obs. 148) to make the tour of Europe ? No, I meant to say 
that he and I are going to make the tour of the United States of 
North America. De VAmerique du nord, are four words too many, 
United States is enough. — You like to find fault • but who is that 
young lady so elegantly dressed? (mise si elegamment?) Is it not the 
one who was drinking a glass of mineral water at the corner ? Oh I 
it is not the same. She looks like her. At any rate (apres tout) she 
has on an elegant dress. She is walking, (d marcher.) How well 
she walks ! Now she is laughing. How pretty are her teeth ! Hush ! 
hush ! you make me mad (vous m y impatient ez) with your exclama- 
tions ! Hush yourself. You have no taste. What does that mean, 
Sir? That means that although you dress (§ 151) well yourself, you 
are too particular about other people's dress. — Do not play a trick 
upon me. I will not play one upon you. 

Why have you played a trick upon that man ? Because he always 
finds fault with everything he sees. — What does that mean, Sir? 
That means that I do not like to deal with you, because you are too 
particular. — I wonder why your brother has not done his task. It 
was too difficult. He has sat up all night, and has not been able to 
do it, because it was too difficult. — Why are you so sad ? You do 
not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend, (fern.) Tell me, 
for I assure you that I share (partager) your sufferings (la peine) as 
well as your pleasures. — I am sure that you feel for me, (prendre* 
part a mes peines,) but I cannot tell you now (en ce moment) what 
makes me uneasy. I will, however, tell you when an opportunity 
offers, (d Voccasion.) 



Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



My, his, her reach. The child's reach. 

Within my reach. Out of my reach 
Those things are not within the reach 

of everybody. 
Within gun-shot. 
A gun-shot, (meaning distance.) 
Two gun-shots, ( " .) 
How many shots have you fired ? 

I wonder why that man makes such 

a noise ? 
So long as. 
So long as you behave well, people 

will love you. 
To carry off. 
34* 



A la portee de 



Ma, sa portee. 

1' enfant. 

A ma portee. Hors de ma portee. 
Ces choses ne sont pas a la portee 

de tout le monde. 
A la portee du fusil. 
Une portee de fusil. 
Deux portees de fusil. 
Combien de coups de fusil avez-vous 
tires ? (48 2 .) 
Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi cet 

homme fait un tel bruit ? 
Tant que. 
Tant que vous vous comporterez 

bien, on vous aimera. 
Enlever, 1. 



402 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 



A mouthful. A sweet mouthful. 

To overwhelm, to heap, to load. 

To overwhelm some one with joy. 

Generous. 

Charitable, beneficent. 

You have heaped benefits upon me. 

Sincere. Sincerely. 

An advantage. 

The disadvantage, prejudice. 

I shall never say anything to your 

disadvantage. 
To surrender. 

The enemies have surrendered. 
To prefer. 
I prefer the useful to the agreeable. 



Une bouchee. Une bonne bouchee. 

Combler, 1. 

Combler quelqu'un de joie. 

Genereux, genereuse, genereuses. 

Bienfaisant, charitable. 

Vous m'avez comble de bienfaits. 

Sincere. Sincerement. 

Un avantage. 

Le desavantage. 

Je ne dirai jamais rien a votre de 

savantage. 
Se rendre, 4. 

Les ennemis se sont rendus. 
Preferer. 
Je prefere Futile a l'agreable. 



Obs. 163. All adjectives and verbs used substantively are masculine. Ex. 



The drinking. 

The eating. 

To behold. 

Behold those beautiful flowers with 

their colors so fresh and bright. 
The color, the complexion. The lily. 
The violet. The forget-me-not. 
The rose. An emblem. 

Fresh verdure is salutary to our eyes. 

What was he doing when he was told 

of his cousin's arrival ? 
He was taking his music lesson. 



Le boire. 

Le manger. 

Regarder, 1. 

Regardez ces superbes fleurs au teint 

si frais et si eclatant. 
La couleur, le teint. Le lis. 

La violette. La germandree. 
La rose. Un embleme. 

La verdure fraiche fait du bien a nos 

yeux. 
Qu'etait-il a faire quand on vient lui 

annoncer Parrivee de son cousin ? 
II etait a prendre sa lecon de musique. 

Soixante-seizieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi cette petite fille fait tant de bruit % 
Elle crie de cette maniere parce qiPelle veut cette tasse verte et 
jaune, qui est hors de sa portee. Je suis presque sur que c 7 est une 
enfant tres-gatee ; car, si elle ne Fetait pas tant, elle aimerait mieux 
attendre que de crier. Mais comme la tasse est a votre portee, 
donnez-la-lui, pour combler ses souhaits, (satisfy.) Voyez, regardez, 
vous Pavez comblee de joie. Vous m'avez fait faire une action 
charitable. — Pourquoi ce petit garcon ne tire-t-il pas a Poiseau qui 
est sur Parbre ? Ne le voit-il pas ? II sait que Poiseau est hors de 
la portee de son fusil ; mais il est a le veiller, il s'approche pcudpeu, 
(little by little.) A present, regardez, il va tirer. II a touche Poiseau , 
mais il ne Pa pas tae. — L'amie de Sophie est-elle sincere'? Je la 
crois tres-charitable et tres-sincere. — Qui est genereux et bienfaisant? 
— Parle-t-il sincerement? — A-t-il trouve quelque chose a redire a la 
conduite de Favocat? — A-t-il parle a son desavantage ? — Marie vou- 



SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 40* 

drait bien savoir qui a enleve son portefeuille Francais. — Le teint de 
cette demoiselle est superbe, n ; est-ce pas? 

What do you think of the man who spoke to us at the concert ? 
He is a man of much understanding, (de beaucoup d' esprit,) and not 
at all proud (fier) of his merit. — As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me, 
he begins to speak English, in order to practise, and overwhelms 
me with politeness, (d'honnetete,) so that I often do not know what 
to answer. His brothers do the same, (en font autant.) However, 
they are very good people ; they are not only (non seulement) rich 
and amiable, but they are also generous and charitable. They love 
me sincerely, therefore I love them also, and consequendy (par 
consequent) shall never say anything to their disadvantage. I should 
love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony, 
(tant de ceremonies ;) but every one has his faults, (le defaut,) and 
mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies. 

Behold, ladies, (Mesdames,) those beautiful flowers, with their 
colors so fresh and bright j they drink nothing but water. The white 
lily has the color of innocence, (V innocence ;) the violet indicates 
gentleness, (marque la douceur ;) you may see it in Louisa's eyes. 
The forget-me-not has the color of heaven, our future dwelling, and 
the rose, the queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy. 
You see all that personified (personnifle) in seeing the beautiful Ame- 
lia, (Amelie.) How beautiful is the fresh verdure ! It is salutary to 
our eyes, and has the color of hope, (de Vesper once,) our most faith- 
ful (fidele) friend, (fem.,) who never deserts (quitter) us, not even in 
death, (d la mort.) — One word more, my dear friend. What is your 
pleasure ? I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your 
mother. I thank you for her, (de sapart ;) I shall not fail. Fare- 
wellj then. 



SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Soixante-dix-septieme Lecon^me. 
Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. 

A silk gown. j Une robe de soie. 

A kitchen table. | Une table de cuisine. 

A mahogany table. j Une table d'acajou 

A brick house. 
A stone house. 
A windmill. 
A coffee-mill. 



Une maison de brique. 
Une maison de pierre. 
Un moulin a vent. 
Un moulin a cafe. 



Obs. 163i. We have seen (2 1 ) that the preposition de is put between two 
substantives, the latter of which expresses the substance of which the former 
:s made ; but the preposition a is made use of when the latter expresses the 



404 



SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 



use of the former. In both cases the order of the two substantives is 
inverted in French when they make a compound in English. 



A velvet bonnet. 

A silver tankard. 

A water-mill. 

A steam-mill. 

Gunpowder. 

Fire-arms. 

A one-horse wagon. 

A four-horse carriage. 

A two-wheeled wagon. 

A four-wheeled carriage. 

A one-story house. 

A two-story house. 

A three-story house. 

To exaggerate, amplify, heighten. 

That man exaggerates all that he 

says and does. 
To take the 'place of, to be in stead of. 

That man is a father to me. 5 

That umbrella serves him as a stick. 2 

3n a small scale. On a large scale. 
Thereabouts, nearly. 
Alternately, turn by turn. 
To endeavor, to strive. 
To give one's self up to grief. 
To melt. To melt in tears. 

To shake. 

Shake that tree, and the fruit will 
fall down. 



Un chapeau de velours. 

Un pot d' argent. 

Un moulin a eau. 

Un moulin d vapeur. 

De la poudre a canon. 

Des armes a feu. 

Une voiture a un cheval. 

Une voiture a quatre chevaux. 

Une voiture d deux roues. 

Une voiture d quatre roues. 

Une maison d un etage. 

Une maison d deux etages. 

Une maison a trois etages. 

Outrer, 1. Exagerer, 1. 

Cet homme outre tci t ce qu'ii dit et 

tout ce qu'il fait. 
Tenir lieu de . . . . Servir de. (73 2 .) 
t Cet homme me tient lieu de pere. 
t Cet homme me sert de pere. 
t Ce parapluie lui tient lieu de canne. 
t Ce parapluie lui sert de canne. 
En petit. En grand. 

A peu pres. 
Tour a tour. 

t S'efforcer, 1, {de av. Pinf.) 
S'abandonner a la douleur. 
Fondre, 4. Fondre en larmes. 

Secouer, 1. 
Secouez cet arbre, et les fruits en 

tomberont. 



Soixante-dix-septieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Demeurez-vous dans une maison de pierre ou de bois? Nous 
occupons une maison de brique. Presque toutes les maisons se 
batissent en brique dans ce quartier-ci, (quarter, district.) — Voulez- 
vous faire emplette d'un moulin a eau ou a vent % Je prefere les 
moulins a eau, et je presume que j'en acheterai un. — Madame, le 
moulin a cafe vient de se casser. Ah! c'est un malheur ! Avez- 
vous moulu (to grind, moudre,^ 4) assez de cafe ? Non, Madame, 
pas encore. Envoyez la petite Marguerite emprunter (R. 2) le 
rnonlin du voisin. — Les voitures a deux roues ne sont plus a ia 
mode. On a partout des voitures a 4 roues. — Est-il a voyager en 
voiture? Non. il est a voyager par la route de fer, (the railroad.) — 
Comment preferez-vous voyager? Par le bateau a vapeur. Sophie 
n'est-elle pas a coudre (coudre, # to sew) sa robe de soie ? Elle etait 



SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 405 

a la coudre hier, mais maintenant elle doit etre d coudre 1 (she must 
be sewing) sa robe de satin. — Voulez-vous qu'elle couse quelque 
chose pour vous 1 

Has your sister been out to-day? She has been out to buy seve- 
ral things. — What has she bought? She has bought (s'est achete) a 
silk gown, a velvet bonnet, and a lace veil, (un voile de dentelle.) — 
What have you done with (de) my silver tankard? It is on the 
kitchen-table, together w T ith (avec) the oil-bottle, the milk-pot, the 
pitcher, the mustard-pot, and the coffee-mill. — Do you ask for a 
wine-bottle 1 No, I ask for a bottle of wine, and not for a wine- 
bottle. — If you will have the goodness to give me the key of the 
wine-cellar, (la cave au vin,) I shall go for one. — What does that 
man want of me ? He exacts nothing; but he will accept what you 
will give him, for he is in want of everything. — I will tell you that 
I am not fond of him, for his behavior raises suspicions in my mind. 
He exaggerates all that he says and does. 

You are wrong in having such a bad opinion (une opinion) of him, 
for he has been a father to you. — I know what I say. He has cheated 
me ^n a small and on a large scale, and whenever he calls he asks 
me for something. In this manner he has alternately asked me for 
all I had : my fowling-piece, my fishing-line, my repeater, and my 
golden candlesticks. — Do not give yourself up so much to grief, 
else (sinon) you will make me melt in tears. Democritus and 
Heraclitus were two philosophers of a very different character, (d'un 
caractere bien different:) the first laughed at the follies (lafolie) of 
men, and the other wept at them. — They were both right, for the 
follies of men deserve to be laughed and wept at, (meritent qu'on en 
rie et qu'on en pleure.) 2 

1 We have seen (06s. 90, 39 1 ,) that faut (must) can have no other nomi- 
native but il. If any other nominative is used, the English verb must is 
not to be translated by faut, but by some other verb, usually by devoir. 
Practice must, before this, have taught the student that: il faut, faut-il, 
que faut-il, &c, always stand at the head of the sentence, and that, of 
course, if any other nominative has been employed, the preceding direction 
is to be complied with. She must be sewing, the sentence above, might, 
beginning with il faut, have been correctly rendered by: il faut qu' elle 
soit d coudre, but, if elle is taken for subject, you are compelled to say as 
above : elle doit etre a coudre. 

2 The follies deserve to be laughed and wept at. Les folies meritent qu'on 
en rie, et qu'on en pleure. N. B. The infinitive of a passive verb coming 
after another verb, is rendered by qu'on as nominative indefinite of the fol- 
lowing verb, which must be put in its proper tense. He hopes not to be 
laughed at, II espere qu'on ne se moquera pas de lui. It is very frequently 
followed by the subjunctive, as in the exercise. 



406 



SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 



Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



To give birth to, (meaning to raise, to 
cause.) 

To raise difficulties. 

To cause quarrels. 

To cause suspicions. 

The behavior of that man raised sus- 
picions in my mind. 

To be in want of. To be short of. 

To want. 

That man is in want of everything. 

I am in want of nothing. 

To set the table, to lay the cloth. 

A cover. 

A table fo* four persons. 

A table for ten persons. 

A writing-table or desk. 

A dining-room. 

A sleeping or bed-room. 

A repeater. 

An oil-bottle. 

A mustard-pot. 

A pitcher. 

A fowling-piece. 

A fishing-line. 

To exact, to want of, to require. 
What do you want of me ? 
What do you exact of me ? 
I exact nothing of you. 
A milk-pot. 



Faire naitre. 

t Faire naitre des difficultes. 
t Faire naitre des querelles. 
t Faire naitre des soup§ons. 
t La conduite de cet homme a fait 

naitre des soup§ons dans mon 

esprit. 

S Manquer de. 

Cet homme manque de tout. 

Je ne manque de rien. 

t Mettre le couvert. 

Un couvert. 1 

Une table de quatre couverts. 

Une table de dix couverts. 

Une table a. ecrire. 

Une salle a manger. 

Une chambre a coucher. 

Une montre a repetition. 

Une bouteille a l'huile. 

Un pot a moutarde. 

Un pot a l'eau. 

Un fusil de chasse. 

Une ligne a pecher. 

Exiger, 1. 
> Qu'exigez-vous de moi? 
Je n'exige rien de vous. 



Un pot au lait. 

Obs. 163f . When the second noun is used to determine the first more pre- 
cisely, or to show that the first contains a portion of the second, it is pre- 
ceded by au or d la for the singular, and aux for the plural. 

L'homme aux lapins. 
La femme aux huitres. 
La bouteille au vinaigre. 



La bouteille de vin. 
La bouteille au vin. 
La bouteille a vin. 



The rabbit-man. 

The oyster-woman. 

The bottle with vinegar in, (not full.) 

The bottle of wine, (full of.) 

The bottle with wine in. 

The wine-bottle, (none in.) 

These last three sentences express the precise distinction to be conveyed. 

1 Couvert. Cover (Webster) means everything usually wanted to eat a 
meal with. Un couvert for dinner is not the same as un couvert for break- 
fast or tea. Cups and saucers being used at the latter, and not at the former 
meal. 



SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 407 



Dainties. 

He is fond of dainties. 
At broad daylight. 
To sit down to a meal. 



Les bons morceaux. 

II aime les bons morceaux. 

En plein jour. 

Se mettre a table. 



Soixante-dix-septieme Th£me. 2de Sec. 

Restez a diner avec nous. Nous avons quelques bons morceaux. 
Vous voulez que nous dinions (§151) avec vous, puisque vous nous 
parlez de bons morceaux. Sans doute que (Dir. 6) je le veux, 
autrement je ne vous prierais pas de rester. Mais dinerez-vous 
bientot; car ; j ; ai bien des choses a acheter cet apres-midi. Laissez- 
moi voir l'heure. II est une heure moins un quart. La fille doit 
etre a mettre (must be setting, 77 2 , N.) le couvert; ainsi vous voyez 
que vous aurez apres diner, assez de temps pour faire vos em- 
plettes. Qu 7 avez-vous a acheter ? Des bois de lit, des oreillers de 
plume, des tables, et des toilettes d ; acajou, des armoires (walnut 
wardrobes) de noyer? Non, non, je suis a faire faire tout cela. 
Mais nous sommes a chercher un poele pour la cuisine, un moulin 
a cafe, des pots aPeau de differentes grandeurs, des cuvettes, (bowls.) 
des cafetieres (coffee-pots) des tasses a cafe. Ne vous faut-il pas 
aussi des tasses a the ? Non, je crois que nous ne prendrons pas de 
the, nous ne Paimons point. JVIessieurs, le diner est servi. Allons, 
ne faites point de difficultes. Venez vous mettre a table et gouter 
nos bons morceaux. 

Have you seen your niece ? Yes ; she is a very «rood girl. w T ho 
writes well, and speaks French still better- therefore, she is loved 
and honored by everybody. — And her brother: what is he doing? 
Do not speak to me of him ; he is a naughty boy, who writes always 
badly, and speaks French still worse: he is therefore laussi n'est-il) 
loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties, but h& does not like 
books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad daylight, and pretends 
to be ill; but when we sit down to dinner he is generally well 
again, (retabli.) He is to study physic, (la medecine.) but he has not 
the slightest inclination for it, (aucune envie.) He is almost always 
talking of his dogs, which he loves passionately, (passtonnement.) 

His father is extremely sorry for it. The young simpleton (un 
imbecile) said lately to his sister, " I shall enlist as soon as a peace 
(la paix) is proclaimed, (publierP) My dear father and my dear 
mother dined yesterday with some friends at the Kin*? of Spain, 
(t'Espagne.) — Why do you always speak English and never French? 
Because I am too bashful, (timide.) You are joking : is an English- 
man ever bashful? — I have a keen appetite, (grand appilit;) &i v * 
me something good to eat. — Have you any money? No, Sir.— 



408 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



Then I have nothing to give you. — Will you not let me have some 
(ne me donnez-vous pas) on credit? I pledge (engager) my honor. 
That is too little. — What ; (comment,) Sir! What do you mean? I 
mean what I say. 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— Soixante-dix-huitieme Lego7i, 78me. 

Vocabtjlaire. Ire Sec. 

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present du Subjonctif. 

For its use and formation see (§ 151.) That article is to be carefully 
studied. 



They 


lis, elles 


11 faut qu'ils 


Je 


tu 


il 


nous 


vous 


Speak. 
Finish. 


parlewi. 
finissenZ. 


parlent. 
finissent. 


parle, 
finisse, 


paries, 
finis'ses, 


parle, 
finisse, 


parlions, 
fmissions, 


parliez. 
finissiez. 


Receive. 
Restore. 


recoiveni. 
render. 


recoivent. 
rendent. 


recoive, 
rende, 


recoives 
rendes, 


, recoive 
rende, 


recevions, 
rendions, 


receviez. 
rendiez. 



As the student is already acquainted with some of the persons of the 
irregular ones, (8 in all, by our rule, as may be seen at § 151,) we will at 
once introduce them, with some of the known antecedents. In going over 
the following, let the antecedent be repeated with every new person. As : 
II faut qu'il ait la bonte, &c. Il faut qu'ils aient la, &c. 



Yon must have the goodness to do 

that — he, they. . . . 
Must I be here early ? 

Is it necessary for him to be here ? 
You must be here early. 

It is not necessary that he should 

come. 
Is it the only one you know ? he 

knows ? they know ? 
It is the only one I know, he knows, 

they know. 
When will it be time for us to come ? 

for her ? for thee ? 

It will be time for you, for her, for me 

to come at 6 o'clock. 
Do you wish me to do that ? How 

do you wish me to do it ? 
1 wish you to do it this way ; him, 

her to do it. 



II faut que vous ayez la bonte de 
faire cela, qu'il ait, qu'ils aient. 

Faut-il que je sois ici de bonne 
heure ? 

Faut-il qu'il soit ici? 

II faut que vous soyez ici de bonne 
heure. 

II n'est pas n^cessaire qu'il vienne. 

Est-ce le seul que vous sachiez ? qu'il 

sache ? qu'ils sachent ? 
C'est le seul que je sache, qu'il 

sache, qu'ils sachent. 
Quand sera-t-il temps que nous 

venions? qu'elle vienne? tu 

viennes ? 
II sera temps que vous veniez, qu'elle 

vienne, je vienne a 6 heures. 
Voulez-vous que jefasse cela? Com- 
ment voulez-vous que je le fasse ? 
Je veux que vous le fassiez comme 

ceci, qu'il le fasse, qu'elle le fasse. 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 



409 



Although you can do it, I'd rather 
you wouii not do it. 

Is it not time for us to go to school ? 

for them ? for thee ? 
Il is high time for us, for them, for 

thee to go. 
Is he sorry I can ? we can ? she 

can ? thou canst ? 

He is not sorry you can, we can, she 
can, I can. 

Is she glad we are worth as much as 

they ? She is. 

Will he do it without our wishing it ? 

your, my wishing it ? 
He will not do it except you wish it, 

we, they wish it. 



Quoique vous puissiez le faire, je 

ne me soucie pas que vous le 

fassiez. 
N'est-il pas temps que nous allions 

a l'ecole ? qu'ils aillent ? tu ailles ? 
II est grand temps que nous y allions, 

qu'ils y aillent, que tu y ailles. 
Est-il fache que je puisse ? Nous 

puissions ? qu'elle puisse ? que 

tu puisses ? 
II n'est pas fache que vous puissiez, 

nous puissions, qu'elle puisse, je 

puisse. 
Est-elle contente ~ue nous valions 

autant qu'eux ? Elle Test. 
Le fera-t-il sans que nous le voulions ? 

vous le vouliez ? je le veuille ? 
II ne le fera pas sans que vous le 

vouliez, nous le voulions, qu'ils le 

veuillent. 

Soixante-dix-huitieme Theme, ire Sec. 

Ou voulez-vous que j'aille ? Allez chez le bijoutier.-— Ou voulez- 
vous qu'il aille? Je desire qu'il aille chez le menuisier.— Et, elle'? 
Je desire quelle aille chez la faiseuse de robes.— Ou faut-ii que je 
sois a huit heures ? II faut que vous soyez au magasin. Ou faut-ils 
qu'ils soient? II faut que Jean, Frederic, et Marie, soient a l'ecole. 
— Est-ce a dix heures ou a dix heures et demie qu'il faut que nous 
soyons au bateau a vapeur ? II faut que nous y soyons a dix heures 
et demie ; rnais il vaut mieux que nous y allions de meilleure heure. 
Sans doule.— Est-il necessaire que le cuisinier achete plus d'une 
tivre (a pound) de beurre ? Oui ; il faut qu'il en achete au moins 
trois livres. Trois livres 1 y pensez-vous 1 (are you thinking of what 
you say? are you in earnest ?)— Faut-il dire au boulanger d'apporter 
des petits-pains? (rolls?) Oui, il faut le lui dire, car il n ; en appor- 
tera pas sans que nous le lui disions.— Est-ce le seul medecin que 
vous connaissiez? — N ; est-il pas temps que je traduise, que j'ecrive, 
et que je lise mon theme?— Convient-il (is it suitable) qu'elle recoive 
ce billet, qu'elle le lise, et qu'elle y reponde ? 

Will you relate (raconter) something to me ? What do you wish 
me to relate to you? A little anecdote, if you like. A little boy 
one day at table (d table) asked for some meat: his father said that 
it was not polite to ask for any, and added : « You must wait till (jus- 
qu'd ce que, $ 151) some is given to you. ;; After a little while, the 
poor boy, seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to him, 
35 



410 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



said to his father : " My dear father, give me a little salt, if you 
please.' 7 " What will you do with it?" asked the father. " I wish 
to eat it with the meat which you will give me, 77 replied (repliquer) 
the child. Everybody admired (admirer) the little boy's wit; and 
his father, perceiving that he had forgotten him, gave him a piece 
of meat, some salt, and vegetables. 

Who was that little boy that asked for meat at table ? He was the 
son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask for some meat? He 
asked for some because he had a good appetite. — Why did his father 
not give him some immediately ? Because he had forgotten it. — 
Was the little boy wrong in asking for some ? He was wrong, for 
he ought to have waited. — If it was impolite to ask for meat, was it 
not impolite also to ask for salt, or anything else ? And to be con- 
sistent, ought not the father to have told him again : "You must wait 
until some is given to you?" That may be; but although the 
father's conduct may be called inconsistent, the child's request was 
not the less witty, (n'm etait pas moins spirituelle.) — It is a pity 
(§151) the cook did not go to market, for I am afraid that the best 
fruit is sold by this time, (ne soit vendu (§ 151 — 6) a cede heure-ci.) 1 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



Is it extraordinary that we do not 
wish it ?— they do not wish it ? 

It is (extraordinary that you do not 
wish it — that they do not wish it). 

Is it not vexing (sad) that she loses 

them ? I lose them ? You lose 

some ? 
It is very sad for her to lose them ; 

for you to lose them ; for me to 

lose some. 
Is it right that I should get up and 

that you should not ? 
It is right for us both to get up. 

Is it not wrong that we should have 
some, and 'that they should not 
have any ? 

Yes, it is wrong that you should re- 
ceive some and they none. 



Est-il extraordinaire que nous ne le 

voulions pas? — qu'ilsne le veuill- 

ent pas ? 
II est extraordinaire que vous ne le 

vouliez pas — qu'ils ne le veuillent 

pas. 
N'est-ii pas facheux qu'elle les 

perde ? que je les perde ? vous en 

perdiez ? 
U est tres-facheux qu'elle les perde ; 

que vous les perdiez; que j'en 

perde. 
Est-il juste que je me leve et que 

vous ne vous leviez pas ? 
II est juste que nous nous levions 

tous deux. 
N'est-il pas injuste que nous en 

ayons, et qu'ils n'en aient pas? 

Si fait, il est injuste que vous en 
receviez et qu'ils n'en regoivent 
pas. 



1 As the student knows the subjunctive present of the auxiliaries (avoir, 
itre), he can easily form the compound tenses. Although I have been ; 
Quaique faie ete. 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) 



411 



Is it not surprising that they go to 
bed ? we go to bed, so soon ? 

No, it is not surprising that they go 
to bed, that you go to bed so soon. 

Is it not better for her to start when 

her uncles start ? 
It is better she should not start at all. 

Will it do for us to say it, or for 

them ? 
It will not do for you to say it ; but 

for them, it will do. 
Is it possible that his horses should 

be worth more than his brother's ? 
It is not possible they should be 

worth more. 
Is it desirable that he should take 

board ? 
It is desirable that he, that you, that 

we should take board. 



N'est-il pas surprenant qu'ils se cou* 

chent ? que nous nous couchions, 

si tot ? 
Non, il n'est pas etonnant qu'ils se 

couchent, que vous vous couchiez 

si tot. 
Ne vaut-il pas mieux qu'elle parte 

quand ses oncles partiront ? 
II vaut mieux qu'elle ne parte pas du 

tout. 
Convient-il que nous le disions, ou 

qu'ils le disent ? 
II ne convient pas que vous le disiez, 

mais il convient qu'ils le disent. 
Est-il possible que ses chevaux vaill- 

ent mieux que ceux de son frere ? 
II n'est pas possible qu'ils vaillent 

mieux. 
Est-il a desirer qu'il prenne pen- 
sion ? 
II est a desirer qu'il prenne, que vous 

preniez,que nous prenions pension. 



Soixante-dix-htjitieme ThSme. 2de Sec. 

Est-il surprenant qu'il sache si bien l'allemand % Non, il n'est pas 
surprenant qu'il le sache si bien, puisque sa mere est allemaude. 
Aime-t-il qu'on le loue % II aime qu'on le loue. mais il n'aime pas 
que nous soyonsloues. Suppose-t-il que nousl'approuvions(§ 151 — 5) 
que vous l'approuviez '? II suppose que vous l'approuvez, que nous 
l'approuvons, (indicat.) — Que diriez-vous si je vous racontais une 
petite anecdote en Francais? Je dirais que vous etes aussi aimable 
qu'a l'ordinaire. Un jeune prince, de sept ans, etait admire par tout 
le monde a cause de son esprit. II entendit un jour un officier, qui 
parlait de lui, dire : cc Quand les enfants ont tant d'esprit dans leur 
enfance, ils en ont ordinairement fort peu quand ils sont avances en 
age." " S'il en est ainsi/' dit le jeune prince, " vous devez avoir eu 
infiniment d'esprit dans votre enfance!" — Y a-t-il long-temps que 
vous savez cette anecdote % II a fallu que je la tradnise hier, (I had 
to. . . . )— Desire-t-on qu'elle reussisse ou que vous reussissiez ? On 
ne desire pas que nous reussissions ; mais qu'elle reussisse. 

Do you wish me to relate to you another anecdote ? You will 
greatly (beaucoup) oblige me. — Some one purchasing some goods of 
a shopkeeper, (un marchand.) said to him: "You ask too much; 
you must (§ 151) not sell so dear to me as to another, because I am 
a friend, (puisque je suis des amis de la maison") The merchant 
replied : " Sir, we must gain something by (avee) our friends, for our 



412 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 

enemies will never come to the shop." — An Englishman, on first 
visiting France, met with a very young child in the streets of Calais, 
who spoke the French language with fluency and elegance, (cou- 
vamment et avec elegance.) " Good heaven, (Mori Dieu!) is it possi- 
ble?"' exclaimed he, "that even children here speak the French 
language with purity, (la puret'eP) 

Let us seek (rechercker) the friendship of the good, and avoid 
(fruiter) the society of the wicked (le mediant;) for bad company 
corrupts (les mauvaises societes corrompent) good manners, (les bonnes 
mceurs.) — What sort of weather is it to-day? It snows continually, 
(toujoursj) as it snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances, 
will also snow to-morrow. — Do you think it will snow (§ 151 — 5) to- 
morrow also % I hope it will, for I am always very well when it is 
very cold. And I am (et moi, je me porte) always very well when it is 
neither cold nor warm. — It is too windy to-day, and we should do 
better if we stayed at home. Whatever weather it may be, (Quel- 
que temps qu'il fasse. § 151 — 11,) I must go out* for I promised to be 
with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my word, 
(tenir^ parole.) 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 

See ($ 151) and study it carefully, and make a list of the antecedents as 
they occur. 

It seems you are angry, (you appear.) 1 II semble 1 que vous soyez fache (R. 4.) 
You appear angry, (to be angry.) [ Vous semblez fache, (etre fache.) 

The subjunctive is employed in the first sentence because il sembleis used 
unipersonally ; but not being used so in the second, the indicative is employed. 



Is it sufficient that you and I should 

complain of it ? 
Yes, it is sufficient that we complain 

of it (for us to complain.) So that 

neither she nor they must complain. 
Let him come if he wishes. 
Let them wait if they have a mind. 
Let Julius write the letter, and you 

will carry it. 



Suffit-il que vous vous en plaigniez 

et que je m'en plaigne ? 
Oui, il suffit que nous nous en plai- 

gnions. Ainsi ni lui ni eux ne 

doivent s'en plaindre. (77 1 , N.) 
Qu'il vienne s'il veut. (§ 150 — 7.) 
Qu'ils attendent s'ils en ont envie. 
Que Jules ecrive la lettre, et vous la 

porterez. 



Obs. 164. We saw ($ 150 — 7) that the 3d pers. sing, and plur. of the impera- 
tive were like the same persons of the present of the subjunctive, conse- 
quently, we can now use those persons of the imperative without difficulty. 

1 II semble, it seems, is also construed with the indicative when it has an 
indirect object, as : It seems to me that you are angry ; il me semble que vous 
ites fache. It seems to thee, il te semble, il lui semble, &c, to him or 
her, &c. 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 



413 



Let him have the goodness to hold it. 
Let Sophia receive her reward. 
Where do you prefer him to buy the 

candy ? Let him buy it at the 

grocer's. 
Watch the bird. Take care it does 

not. run or fly away. 
Let them mind it. 
Ask Betsy to tell the cook to cook 

the salt fish. 
I doubt her being able to cook it, for 

her coal fire is almost out. ($ 151-2.) 

I wish you may succeed. 

I doubt that he is arrived. (R. 2.) 

I wish to be obeyed. 

I wish him to be told so. 

He wishes me to have patience. 

I doubt his being at home. (R. 2.) 

I fear we shall have a storm. 

He denies having done it. 

He complains of your having ill- 
treated him. 

I am very sorry for your having done 
it. 

I regret that you should have been 
obliged to wait. 

You will approve of my not going 
thither. 

He disapproved of your having said it. 

What do you wish these men to buy ? 

W r hat do you wish him to answer ? 
Do you expect him to give you his 

goods for nothing ? 
Whai do you want me to drink ? 

Soixante-dix-huitieme Theme. 3me Sec. 

Suffit-il que vous le disiez pour qu'on le croie ? iNPest-il pas suffi- 

sant que je le dise pour qu'on le croie ?— Merite-t-il qu'on Pattende ? 

($ 151—2.) S'il merite qu'on Pattende ! Sansdoute qu'il le merite ! 

— S il a pe rdu le feuillet, qu'il le rctrouve : ] (find it again.) Qu'il le 

1 The syllable re prefixed to a French verb, corresponds in English to~- 

bock, again, anew, or re. Venir, revenir, to come back ; porter, reporter to 
carry back or again ; trouver, retrouver, io find again ; voir, revoir, to see 
again; renouveler, to renew; doubler, redoubler, to redouble, &c. ; con- 
sidered reconsiderer, to consider again or anew 
35* 



Qu'il ait la bonte de le tenir. 
Que Sophie reeoive sa recompense. 
Oii preferez-vous qu'il achete le 
candi ? Qu'il l'achete chez 

l'epicier. 
Veillez l'oiseau. Prenez garde qu'il 
wes'enfuie, (ne s'en aille, s'envole.) 
Qu'ils y prennent garde. 
Priez Lisette de dire a la cuisiniere 

de faire cuire le poisson sale. 
Je doute qu'elle puisse le faire cuire, 
car son feu de charbon est presque 
eteint. 
Je desire que vous reus sis siez. 
Je doute qu'il soit arrive. 
Je veux qu'on m'obeisse. 
Je souhaite qu'on le lui dise. 
II veut que j'aie patience. 
Je doute qu'il soit a la maison. 
Je crains que nous rfayons un orage. 
II nie qu'il V ait fait. 
II se plaint que vous Vayez mal- 

traite. 
Je suis au desespoir que vous Vayez 

fait. 
Je regrette que vous ayez ete oblige 

d'attendre. 
Vous trouverez bon que je n'y aille 

pas. 
II a trouve mauvais que vous Vayez 

dit. 
Que voulez-vous que ces hommes 

achetent ? 
Que voulez-vous qu'il reponde? 
Vous attendez-vous a ce qu'il vous 
donne ses marchandises pour rien ? 
Que voulez-vous que je boive ? 



414 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (4.) 

retrouve ! c'est plus aise a dire qu ? a faire. Qu'il essaie. — Tenez- 
vous bien la flute ? Prenez garde qu'elle ne tombe. Je la tiens 
bien. Je prendrai garde qu'elle ne tombe. — 11 est impossible que le 
courrier ne soit pas encore arrive ! Pourquoi Salomon reste-t-il si 
long-temps? II est possible que la neige ait empeche le courrier 
d'arriver a Fheure ordinaire. II est possible que cela soit ; mais 
j'espere qu'il n'en est pas ainsi. ($ 151 — 2.) Je Fespere aussi. mais 
ayons patience jusqu'a ce que Salomon revienne. Quelque desir 
que vous ayez d'avoir vos lettres, et quelqu'importantes que les nou- 
velles puissent etre, il faut que nous attendions avec patience. Vous 
en parlez bien a votre aise. J'attends sans m'impatienter. 

Have you corrected Louisa's exercise ? Yes, I have. — How many 
mistakes had she? She had but three or four. But three or four! 
That is a good deal for her. — The exercise must have been *'?ry 
hard, (difficult.) (77 1 , N.) It was. She is the most attentive and 
studious pupil I have. — Are you not afraid we shaH have (§ 151 — 6) 
a storm? I am afraid we shall have a violent one. See. how black 
tne sky is at the west ! — Are you glad that I did it, and that he could 
not do it? (62 2 , N. 1.) I am glad you did it; but I am sorry that he 
could not do it. Let the girl go (Obs. 164) to the apothecary's. What 
do you wish her to purchase ? I want her to buy some perfumed 
soap, and to ($ 151 — 9) put it in my desk. 

What must we bring you from the country ? Is it necessary that 
you should go? We have promised to go. — Would you not be 
astonished if we did not keep our promise? (§ 148, N. 3.) — You 
come late; you have made us wait a long time. We regret that 
you have been obliged to wait. — How long have you been waiting? 
Never mind the time we have already lost, let us lose no more ; but 
.et us finish our affair quickly, so that (afin que, § 151) we may go 
home. It seems you are a little cross, (un peu de mauvaise humeur.) 
r t does not suit you, Sir, to find fault with me, when the fault is 
yours. Come. Let us have done. 

Vocabulaire. 4me Sec. 



believe he is in the right. 
Do you believe that horse is worth a 

hundred crowns ? 
I do not believe that it is worth a 

hundred crowns. 
I hope he will come. 
Do you hope he will come ? 
I think he has done it. 
Do you think he has done it ? 
If you think it will be fine weather, 

let us set out for the country. 



Ind. Je crois qu'il a raison. 

Subj. Croyez-vous que ce cheval 

vaille cent ecus ? (§ 151 — 5.) 
Subj. Je ne crois pas qu'il vaille cent 

ecus. 
Ind. J'espere qu'il viendra. 
Subj. Esperez-vous qu'il vie?me? 
Ind. Je pense qu'il l'a fait. 
Subj. Pensez-vous qu'il Yait lait ? 
Si vous pensez qu'il fasse beau 

temps, partons pour la campagne. 



SEVENTY-JPIGHTH LESSON. (4.) 



415 



I fear that they will come. ($ 151 — 6.) 
I am afraid you will speak of me. 
Does he not fear that you might speak 

of it? 
Do you fear to offend him ? 

(282. Obs. 65.) 
If I apprehended you would do it. 
I am not afraid that the man will 

come. (§ 151—7.) 
Do not doubt my being always your 

friend. (^ 151 — 8.) 
He does not deny your having done it. 



Je crains qu'ils ne viennent. 
J'ai peur que vous ne parliez de moi. 
Ne craint-il pas que vous n'en par- 
liez ? 
Craignez-vous de 1'ofTenser ? 

Si j'apprehendais que vous le fissiez. 
Je n'ai pas peur que I'homme vienne. 

Ne doutez pas que je ne sois toujours 

votre ami. 
II ne nie pas que vous ne Payez fait. 



afflicted. 


Enchante, 


enchanted. 


glad. 


Etonne, 


astonished. 


charmed. 


Faehe, 


sorry. 


satisfied. 


Surpris, 


surprised, &c. 



Remark. The subjunctive is further governed by an adjective or parti- 
ciple preceded by one of the verbs, ttre* to be; paraitre,* to appear; 
sembler, to seem. Some of such adjectives or participles are : 

Afflige, 
Bien aise, 
Charme, 
Content, 

I am sorry that she is ill. 

I am charmed that you are here. 

I am glad that he has received his 

money. 
She is angry that you are my friend. 

I am surprised that you are not more 

attentive. 
I am extremely glad that your sister 

has recovered. 
Your father is afflicted that you miss 

your lessons. 
I am surprised that you have not done 

your task. 

06s. 165. In all these instances, if de ce should be placed before que or 
qui, the indicative follows. But the subjunctive, as above, is preferable. 



Je suis j ache qu'elle soit malade. 

Je suis charme que vous soyez ici. 

Je suis bien aise qu'il ait eu son ar- 
gent. 

Elle est fdchee que vous soyez mon 
ami. 

Je suis etonne que vous ne soyez pas 
plus attentif. 

Je suis enchante que votre sceur soit 
retablie. 

Votre pere est afflige que vous man- 
quiez vos legons. 

Je suis surpris que vous n'ayez pas 
fait votre devoir. 



I am charmed at your being here. 

He is glad that you have received 
your money. 

It is certain that you are in the wrong. 
It is not certain that you are in the 

right. (§151—4.) 
It is probable that he will do it. 
Is it probable that he will do it ? 
It is true that he is capable of it. 
If it be true that he is capable of it. 



Je suis charme de ce que vous etes 

ici. 
II est bien aise de ce que vous avez 

eu votre argent. 

Ind. II est certain que vous avez tort. 
Subj. II n'est pas certain que vous 

ayez raison. 
Ind. II est probable qu'il le fera. 
Subj. Est-il probable qu'il le fasse ? 
Ind. II est vrai qu'il en est capable. 
Subj. S'il est vrai qu'il en soit capable. 



416 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 

Soixante-dix-huitiIsme Theme. 4me Sec. 

Croyez-vous qu'il ait raison ou qu'eile ait raison ? Nous croyons 
qu'ils ont tort, tous deux. — Si le colonel est en ville, je crains bien 
qu ; il ne vienne nous voir. Et moi, je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. — Croi- 
ent-ils que leur maison vaille dix mille gourdes'? Qu'ils le croient 
ou non. ils en demandent ce prix-la. — Elle a peur que nous ne par- 
lions d'elle, n'est-ce pas ? Peu lui importe, (it is of little importance 
to her; she does not care,) que nous parlions d 7 elle ou que nous n'en 

parlions pas. — M. D a promis de venir. n'est-ce pas? Esperez- 

vous qu'il vienne malgre le mauvais temps ? J'espere qu'il viendra 
malgre le mauvais temps, car je ne doute pas qu'il ne tienne parole. 
Nous craignons beaucoup que cet homme ne revienne pendant votre 
absence. Je n'ai pas peur qu'il revienne, ainsi ne craignez rien. 

You have forbidden him to go to the wharf, (vous lui avez defendu 
de ;) do you think he went there ? (^ 151.) I do not think he went; 
but his sister thinks he did go. — Is he not afraid that you will busy 
yourself with it? I care very little whether he is afraid or not. (Peu 
mHmporte que y § 151.) — If you think that we can go to Burlington and 
come back in two hours, let us start. I do not think we can go and 
return in so short a time. ($ 200.) — As it is important that we should 
see the lawyer before Tuesday, suppose we go, (should go.) Very 
well, let us go. — Let John take care of the store during my absence. 
John or William ? No matter which, (nimporte lequel,) provided 
the store is taken (§ 151 — 2) care of. 

Are you not glad we have received the invitation we so much 
desired? I am very glad, on your account, that we have received 
it. On my account ! How ? don't you wish to go ? I care very little 
about it. That is something new. I thought that you were as anxious 
to go (vous aviez autant envie d'y aller) as I. I was as anxious to go 
as you at first; but now I think I would rather not go. It is asto- 
nishing that you change so ! — Sarah, I am glad you are here. Are 
you, indeed? I, for my part, am glad I am here. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) — 
Is not that clerk's uncle much afflicted that his nephew behaves so 
badly ? No, he cares very little now, whether he behaves well or 
not : at first, he was very much afflicted at it. I believe he was. 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.— Soixante-dix-neuvieme Legm, 79me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 
SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT.— Subjonctif Imparfait. 
For its formation see § 152. i That article is to be carefully studied. 
After the following conjunctions use the subjunctive: 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 



417 



Afin que, 

A moins que . . ne, 
Au cas que, 
Avant que, 
Bien que, 
De crainte que . ne 
T)e peur que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 
Jusqii a ce que, 
Loin que, 
Non que, ] 

IS on pas que, 
Will you stay 



that, in order that 
to the end that, 
unless, 
if. 

before. 

though. [ — 6.) 
for fear, lest. (§ 151 
lest. 

in case, if. 
though, 
till, until, 
far from. 

not that. 



here until I can go 

out with you ? . 

I will go out before he comes back. 

If you had what you have not, you 
would be rich. 

I sent you my book, that you might 
read it. 

Unless you accompany her, she will 
not go out. 

Though your children were idle, yet 
they improved. 

If a man had ever so little acquaint- 
ance with another, he was bound 
to take a part in the dispute, and 
venture his person as much as if 
he had himself been angry. 

Be it as it may, they will not go. 

Though she was little and bad-look- 
ing, she was nevertheless amiable. 

I would not have her for a wife, 
though she is rich, and has a great 
deal of wit, because she is not 
good-hearted. 

Provided you are my friend, I am 
satisfied. 

Whether you are right or wrong. 



Nonobstant que, 

Pose que, 

Pour que, 
Pour peu que, 

Pourvu que, 
Quoique, 
Sans que, 
Si peu que, 
Soit que, 
Suppose que, 



for all that, not- 
withstanding that, 
suppose that. 

that, in order that, 
if ever so little, how 

little soever, 
provided, save that, 
though . . . 
without . . . 
however little, 
whether, 
suppose that. 



Voulez-vous rester ici jusqv? a ce que 

je puisse sortir avec vous ? 
Je sortirai avant qu'il ne revienne. 
En cas que \cus eussiez ce que vous 

n'avez pas, vous seriez riche. 
Je vous envoyai mon livre, afin que 

vous le lussiez. 
A moins que vous ne Vaccompagniez, 

elle ne sortira pas. 
Bien que vos enfants fussent pares- 

seux, ils faisaient des progres. 
Pour peu qu'un horn me fut connu 

d'un autre, il fall ait qu'il entrdt 

dans la dispute, et qu'il pay at de 

sa personne, comme s'il avait ete 

lui-meme en colere. 
Quoiqu'W en soit, ils n'iront pas. 
Quoiqu 1 elle fut petite et qu'elle eut 

mauvaise mine, elle ne laissait pas 

d'etre aimable. 
Je ne la voudrais pas pour femme, 

quoiqu' elle soit riche, et qu' elle ait 

beaucoup d'esprit, parce qu'elie 

n'a pas bon coeur. 
Pourvu que vous soyez de mes amis, 

je suis content. 
Soit que vous ayez raison ou tort. 



Soixante-dix-neuvieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Preferait-il que je le fisse? Non, il ne preferait pas que vous le 
fissiez. — Ne prefererait-il pas que vous y allassiez ? Non, mais il 
pre fere rait que ses neveux y allassent. Jerome n ; etait-il pas un 
assez bon domestique ? Si, quoiqu'il oubliat quelque fois de ferraer 
les portes. — Niait-il qu ; il ne Teut fait? Non. il ne le niait pas. — 
Se plaignit-il que vous. lui, et moi, nouseussions tout mange ? Non, 



418 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



il ne se plaignit pas que nous eussions tout mange, mais il s'en 
etonna. — Ne se souciait-il pas que vous vinssiez ? II aurait, au 
contraire, beaucoup desire que je vinsse, mais il ne se souciait pas 
que ces enfants-la vinssent. — N'exigedtes-vous pas (require) que 
nous le promissions sur le champ ? Je ne m'en souviens pas. Est-ce 
que j'exigeai que vous le promissiez'? — Etait-il a ecrire quand 
vous l'appelates ? — Pourquoi votre ami ne vient-il pas a cette heure- 
ci % II faut qu 7 il soit a etudier. 

M. de Turenne would never buy any thing on credit of tradesmen, 
{le marchand,) for fear, he said, they should lose a great part of their 
money, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were 
employed about his house had orders (avait ordre) to bring in their 
bills (un memoir e) before he set out (§ 152) for the campaign, (se 
mettre* en campagne,) and they were regularly paid. — You will 
never be respected (respecter) unless you forsake (abandonner) the 
bad company you keep. — You cannot finish your work to-night, 
unless I help you. — I will explain to you (expliquer) every difficulty, 
that you may not be disheartened (decourager) in your undertaking, 
(une enterprise.) 

Suppose you should lose your friends, what would become of 
you % In case you want my assistance, call me ; I shall help you. — 
A wise and prudent man (un homme sage et prudent) lives with eco- 
nomy when yonng, in order that he may enjoy the fruit of his 
labour when he is old. — Carry this money to Mr. N., in order that 
he may be able to pay his debts, (une dette.) — Will you lend me 
that money ? I will not lend it you unless you promise to return 
(rendre) it to me as soon as you can. — Did the general arrive ? He 
arrived yesterday morning at the camp, (le camp,) weary, (las,) and 
tired, (harasse,) but very seasonably, (tres-d propos;) he immediately 
gave his orders to begin the action, though he had not yet all his 
troops. — Are your sisters happy % They are not, though they are 
rich, because they are not contented. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

The Perfect of the Subjunctive {Parfait du Subjonctif) is formed 
by the present of the auxiliary and the past participle. It requires an ante- 
cedent. 



I must have sent them there. 
She must have come early. 

Although he has not dressed himself. 
Don't you hope the thief has been 
taken ? 



II faut que je les y ai envoyes, 

II faut qu'elle soit venue de bonne 

heure. 
Quoiqu'il ne se soit pas habille. 
N'esperez-vous pas que le voleur ait 

ete pris ? 
It combines wifh the present and the future of the Indicative. ($ 151 — 12.^ 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 



419 



He will not come although I have 
invited him. 

Shall {should) we go without being 
invited ? 

She always looks (looked) well, how- 
ever little she may (might) be 
dressed. 

I do not think he rejoiced at the good 
news we have received. 



II ne viendra pas quoique je l'aie 

invite. 
Irons-nous (irions-nous) sans que 

nous soyons (fussions) invites ? 
Elle a (avait) toujours bonne mine, 

sipeu g^'elle soit (fut) habillee. 

Je ne crois pas qu'il se soit rejoui de 
la bonne nouvelle que nous avons 
re§ue. 



The Pluperfect of the Subjunctive (Plus que parf ait du Subjonctif) 
is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary and the past participle of ano- 
ther verb. (§ 151 — 12.) It combines with the past tenses and conditionnels. 

Before I had loved. 



Before she had departed. 

Before they had gone away. 

Although you had been seen. 

He deserved to have been punished. 

He was exercising the functions of 
consul, although his nomination had 
not been ratified by the senate. 



Avant que j'eussc aime. 

Avant qu'elle fut partie. 

Avant qu'ils s'en fussent alles. 

Quoique vous eussiez ete vus. 

II meritait qu'on l'eutpuni. 

II remplissait les fonctions de consul, 
quoique sa nomination n'eut pas 
ete sanctionnee par le senat. 



06s. 166. Some conjunctions govern the indicative when the sentence 
affirms positively that the thing in question is or will be, and the subjunc- 
tive when it is not certain, or only wished for. They are the following: 

Defacon que. De maniere que. 



En sorte que. 



De sorte que. 

Tellement que. 

Sinon que. 

You behave in such a manner that 

you are loved by everybody. 
Behave in such a manner that you 

may be loved. 



So that, in so much that. 



Except that. 

Ind. Vous vous conduisez de fagon 

^wevousetes aime de tout lemonde. 
Subj. Conduisez- vous de fagon que 

vous soyez aime. 

Soixantb-dix-neuvieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

Guillaume est-il a lire dans sa chambre % Non, il etait a jouer de 
la flute dans le jardin avant que vous entrassiez. — Qu'est-il a faire 
maintenanf? II faut qu'il soit a se promener dans le bosquet^ (grove.) 
— Faut-il que j'aille Pappeler? Non, qu'il s'y promene; mais en 
eas qu'il revienne bientot, vous lui direz que je desirerais qu'il 
s'habillat pour sortir avec moi. S'il eut su (had he known) que vous 
desiriez qu'il sortit avec vous, il se serait deja habille. Cela ne presse 
pas, (there is no hurry.) II aura le temps de se preparer avant que 
je sois prete moi-meme. — Pour peu que vous eussiez attendu ce 
matin, vous auriez pu voir le general, car vous etiez a peine sorti 
qu'il est rentre. Puis-je avoir le plaisir de le voir? Non, il est 



420 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 



encore sorti. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que vous attendiez ? Si fait, 
pourvu que vous soyez sur qu'il rentrera bientot. 

Although they have a good memory, that is not enough to learn 
any language whatever, (quelque langue que ce soit ;) they must make 
use of their judgment, (le jugeinent.) — Behold how amiable that lady 
is; for all that she (quoiquhlle) has no fortune, I do not love her the 
less. — Will you lend me your violin ? I will lend it you, provided 
you return it to me to-night. — Would your mother call upon me 1 
She would, provided you would promise to take her to the concert. 
I shall not cease to importune (importuner) her, till she has forgiven 
me. — Give me that penknife. I will give it you, provided you will 
not make a bad use of it. — Shall you go to London ? I will go. pro- 
vided you accompany (accompagner) me ; and I will write again 
(recrire*) to your brother, lest he should not have received my letter 

Where were you during the engagement? I was in bed to have 
my wounds (une blessure) dressed, (panser.) Would to God (Plict a 
Dieu) I had been there ! I would have conquered (vahicre) or per- 
ished, (perir.) We avoided an engagement for fear we should be 
taken, their force being superior (superieure) to ours. — God forbid (d 
Dieu ne plaise ) with the subjunctive,) I should blame your conduct, 
but your business will never be done properly unless you do it your- 
self. — Will you set out soon ? I shall not set out till I have dined. — 
Why did you tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew 
the contrary? You are so hasty, (prompt^) that however little you 
are contradicted (contrarie) you fly into a passion (s 1 emporter) in an 
instant. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 



Since you know him and are respon- 
sible for him. (§ 151—9.) 

Unless you are attentive, and do 
your task regularly, you will not 
learn. 

If your friend were here, and would 
call upon me. (§ 151 — 10.) 

If he loved me, and sincerely wished 
my welfare. 

If anybody come, and I should not 
be at home, send for me. 

If your brother writes to you, and 
you are satisfied with his letter, I 
beg of you to let me know it. 

Be industrious, that your parents 
may be satisfied. (§ 151 — 10.) 



Ind. Des que vous le connaissez et 

que vous repondez de lui. 
Subj. A moins que vous ne soyez 

attentif, et que vous nefassiez re- 

gulierement votre devoir, vous 

n'apprendrez pas. 
Si votre ami etait ici, et qu'il voulut 

venir me voir. 
5"il m'aimait, et qu'il desirdt sincere- 

ment mon bonheur. 
Si quelqu'un venait, et que je ne 
fusse pas a la maison, envoyez-moi 

chercher. 
Si votre frere vous ecrit, et que vous 

soyez content de sa lettre, je vous 

prie de m'en faire part. 
Appliquez-vous, que vos parents 

soient contents, iafin que.) 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 421 



Whether I lead or write, it is always 
found fault with. 

I can say nothing without your know- 
ing it. 

Do not begin before I give you no- 
tice. 

He is never punished unless he has 
deserved it. 

Wait till your father returns. 



Queje Use ou quefecrive, on y trouve 

toujours a redire, (soit que.) 
Je ne puis rien dire que tu ne le 

sach.es, (sans que.) 
Ne commencez pas que je ne vous 

avertisse, (avant que.) 
Jamais on ne le punit qu'il ne Vait 

merite, [d moins que.) 
Attendez que votre pere revienne, 

{jusqu'd ce que.) 

Soixante-dix-neutieme Th&me. 3me Sec. 

Puisque vous allez de ce coti-la, et que vous passez devant la 
boutique de Fapothicaire, arretez-vous-y et dites-lui de nous envoyer 
une boite de poudre minerale. Je le ferai avec plaisir. A quelle 
heure faut-il qu'il Fenvoie ? N'importe a quelle heure, pourvu que 
ce soit avant Phenre du coucher, (bed-time.) Quoiqu : il n'apprit pas 
facilement, et qu'il n ; eut guere de temps, il faisait des progres. Oui, 
parce qu'il etait attentif et studieux. Si vous eussiez ete aussi indus- 
trieux que votre cousine, et que vous vous fussiez mieux applique, 
n ; eussiez-vous pas appris davantage ? Quoiqu'il fut a faire une 
partie d : echecs, et qu'il eut presque gagne, il la quitta des qu'il apprit 
que sa soeur desirait qu'il l'accompagnat. — Ne commencez pas que 
je ne vous en avertisse, et que je ne vous envoie un autre crayon. 
Je n'y manquerai pas. 

Should your father not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will 
lend you some. I am much obliged to you. — Have you done your 
task ? Not quite ; if I had had time, and if I had not been so uneasy 
about (de) the arrival (Varrivee) of my father, I should have done 
it. — If you would study and be attentive, I assure you that you might 
learn the French language in a very short time. — He who wishes to 
teach an art, must know it thoroughly, (dfond;) he must give none 
but clear (precise) and well-digested (digerer) notions (la notion) of 
it; he must instil (faire entrer) them one by one into the minds 
(dans V esprit) of his pupils, and above all, (surtout,) he must not 
overburden (surcharger) their memory with useless or unimportant 
(insignifiant) rules. 

My dear friend, lend me a louis. Here are (en void) two instead 
of one. — How much obliged I am to you, (que oV obligations je vous 
at/) I am always glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in 
yours. — Is this house to be sold? Do you wish to buy it? — Why 
not? — Do you think it is a good house, and that it is worth 7000 
dollars? I do not think it is. — Why was not your sister studying? 
d etudier?) She would have been studying if she were not always 
36 



422 



EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



so absent, (distrait.) — I like pretty anecdotes; they season (assaison- 
ner) conversation, (la conversation,) and amuse everybody. Pray 
relate me some. Look, if you please, at page 148 of the book which 
I lent you, and you will find some. 



EIGHTIETH LESSON, SOth.— Quatre-vingtieme Legon, SOme. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 
SUBJONCTIF Continue. 
whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three ways, 



Quelque, 
($151—11.) 

However good you are or may be, 

(1st way.) 
However cross (peevish) she may 

have been. 
However rich they were, (might be.) 
However rich she might have been. 
However elegant they thought them- 
selves. 
Whatsoever courage you may have, 

he has more than you. (§ 151 — 11.) 
Whatsoever patience we may have, 

we will never have enough. 
Whatsoever riches he may have, he 

will soon see the end of them. 
Whatsoever kindness I have had for 

him, I never shall have as much 

as he merits. 
Whatsoever faults you may make, I 

will take care to correct them. 
Whatever may be the happiness 

which you enjoy, I am happier 

than you. (§ 151— -11.) 
Whatsoever may be the fortune 

which you enjoy, you may lose it 

in an instant. 
Whatsoever may be the efforts which 

you make, you never can succeed. 

Whatsoever may be the pains which 
you take, no one will be under 
obligations to you for them. 

Whatever, whatsoever, (meaning all 
things soever. 



Quelque bon que vous soyez. 

Quelqu'acariatre qu'elle ait ete. 

Quelque riches qu'ils fussent. 
Quelque riche qu'elle eut pu etre. 
Quelqu' Elegants qu'ils se crussenl. 

Quelque courage que vous ayez, il 

en a plus que vous. 
Quelque patience que nous ayons, 

nous n'en aurons jamais assez. 
Quelques richesses qu'il ait, il en 

verra bientot la fin. 
Quelque bonte que faieeue pour lui, 

je n'en aurai jamais autant qu'il le 

merite. 
Quelques fautes que vous fassiez, 

j' aurai soin de les corriger. 
Quel que soit le bonheur dont vous 

jouissiez, je suisplus heureux que 

vous. 
Quelle que soit la fortune dont vous 

jouissiez, vous pouvez la perdre en 

un instant. 
Quels que soient les efforts que vous 

fassiez, vous ne pouvez jamais 

reussir. 
Quelles que soient les peines que vous 

preniez, on ne vous en aura aucune 

obligation. 
Quelque chose que, or quoi quece soit 



EIGHTIETH LESSON. (1.) 



423 



Whatsoever you may do for my fa- 
ther, he will reward you for it. 
(t 151—13.) 

I complain of nothing whatsoever. 

Of whomsoever you may speak, avoid 
slander. ($ 151—13.) 

I know nobody who is so good as you 
are. ($ 151—5.) 

I have seen nothing that could be 
blamed in his conduct. 

Whatever his projects might be, they 
did not succeed. (§ 151 — 11.) 



Quelque chose que (or quoi que) vous 

fassiez pour mon pere, il vous re- 

compensera. 
Je ne me plains de quoi que ce soit. 
De qui que ce soit que vous parliez, 

evitez la mCdisance. 
Je ne connais personne qui soit aussi 

bon que vous. 
Je n'ai rien vu qu'on puisse blamer 

dans sa conduite. 
Quels que fussent ses projets, ils 

n'ont pas reussi. 



Qtjatre-vingtieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

Qu'est il a faire secher 1 II est a faire secher ses souliers ; mais 
quelque soin qu ; il prenne a le faire, il ne reussira pas de long-temps. — 
De combien de manieres peut-on exprimer en Francais : Whatever 
riches you possess ? De deux manieres. je crois. Quelles sont- 
elles? Quelque richesse que vous, ne faut-il pas employer le sub- 
jonctif apres quelque? Si fait, il faut Femployer. Alors on doit 
dire: Quelque richesse que vous possediez. Quelle est la seconde 
maniere ? Quelle que soit la richesse que vous possediez. N 7 y a-t-il 
pas une autre maniere ? Pas que je sache. Comment peut-on 
exprimer en Francais, However rich you may be? Oh ! mais ce n ; est 
pas la meme chose que: whatever riches you possess? Non, ce 
ne sont pas les memes mots ; mais n'"est-ce pas la meme significa- 
tion? Alors, on peut dire: Quelque riche que vous soyez, n'est-ce 
pas 1 Sans doute. Un peu de jugement est la seule chose qui soit 
necessaire. 

You must have patience, though you have no desire to have it; 
for I must also wait till I receive my money. Should I (en cas que) 
receive it to-day, 1 will pay you all that I owe you. Do not believe 
that I have forgotten it; for I think of it every day. Or did you be- 
lieve, perhaps, that 1 had already received it? — I did not believe 
that you have already received it; but I feared that your other credit- 
ors (le creancier) had already received it. — You wish you had more 
time to study, and your brothers wish they did not need to learn. — 
Would to God you had what I wish you, and that I had what I 
wish. — Though we have not had what we wish, yet we have almost 
always been contented ; and Messieurs B. have almost always been 
discontented, though they have had everything a reasonable man 
(un homme raisonnable) can be contented with. — Do not believe, 
Madam, that 1 have had your fan, (un eventail.) Who tells you that 
I believe it ? — My brother-in-law wishes he had not had what he 



424 



EIGHTIETH LESSON. (2.) 



has had. Wherefore % He has always had many creditors, and no 
money. — I w i s h you would always speak French to me; and you 
must obey, if you wish to learn, and if you do not wish to lose your 
time uselessly, (inutilement.) I wish you were more industrious 
(assidu) and more attentive when I speak to you. 

Vocabttlaire. 2de Sec. 
The superlative followed by qui or que, ($ 151 — 3.) 



You are the most amiable lady I 

know. ($ 151—3.) 
He is the most extraordinary man 

that I have ever seen. 
You are the most studious pupils I 

have ever had. 
The best guard a king can have is 

the heart of his subjects. 



Vous etes la dame la plus aimable 

que je connaisse. 
C'est rhomme le plus extraordinaire 

que faie jamais vu. 
Vous etes les eleves les plus studieux 

que faie jamais eus. 
La meilleure gcjrde qu'un roi puisse 

avoir, c'est le cceur de ses sujets. 



An ordinal number followed by qui or que. (§ 151 — 3.) 



He is the first man who has dared to 

tell me so. 
You are the second amiable lady that 

I have met with in this town. 



C'est le premier homme qui ait ose 

me le dire. 
Vous etes la deuxieme dame aimable 

que faie rencontree dans cette 

ville. 



The words le seul, V unique, the only one, &c. {% 151 — 3.) 



You are the only one upon whom I 

can rely. 
I want an office the duties of which 

may be easy to fulfil. K% 151 — 14.) 
I have an office of which it is easy to 

fulfil the duties. 
I aim at a situation that may be 

agreeable and lucrative. 
I aim at a situation that is an agree- 
able and lucrative one. 
She is the handsomest woman of 

those that were at the opera. 
I do not know any of the persons 

who called on you this morning. 

I hope you will say nothing of what 
I have intrusted you with. 

f have read the second volume of the 
work which you have lent me. 

May heaven ever preserve you from 
such a misfortune. (§ 151 — 15.1 

Would to God. 



Vous etes le seul sur qui je puisse 

compter. 
Je desire une place dont les fonctions 

soient aisees a remplir. 
J'ai un emploi dont il est aise de 

remplir les fonctions. 
J' aspire a une place qui soit agr£- 

able et lucrative. 
J' aspire a un emploi qui est agr6- 

able et lucratif. 
C'est la plus belle des femmes qui 

etaient a l'opera. (§ 151 — 14.) 
Je ne connais aucune des personnes 

qui sont venues chez vous ce 

matin. 
J'espere que vous ne direz rien de ce 

que je vous ai confie. 
J'ai hi le second volume de I'ouvrage 

que vous m'avez prete. 
Fasse le Ciel que pareil malheur ne 

vous arrive jamais. 
Pliit a Dieu. 
Pint au Ciel. 



EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) 425 

Would to God it were so ! i Plut a Dieu qu'il en fat ainsi ! 

Would to God he had done it ! J Plut a Dieu qu'il l'eut fait ! 

Qtjatre-vingtieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

M. J. B. m ? a ecrit un billet, dans lequel il me dit: Quoique Par- 
gent soit rare et qu ; on n ; en obtienne que difficile ment, je vous 
envoie un bon (check) sur la banque, pour la somme dont vous avez 
besoin. Puisqu'il en agit ainsi, il s 7 ensuit qu ; il est mon ami. 
( $ 151 — 4.) — Quel est le plus beau don que Dieu ait fait a Phomme 1 
L/Evangile est le plus beau present que Phomme ait recu de Dieu. 
Si la vie et la mort de Socrate sont d ; un sage, que peut-on dire de 
la vie et de la mort de Jesus-Christ? Que ce sont celles d'un 
dieu. — Arrive-t-il souvent qu ; on soit trompe par ses amis? II n'ar- 
rive pas souvent qu'on soit trompe par eux. On est souvent trompe 
par de faux amis* mais il est rare qu'on le soit par de vrais amis. 

If I were not your friend, and if you were not mine, I should not 
speak thus to you. — Do not trust (mefiez-vous de) Mr. N., for he 
flatters you: do you think a flatterer (un fiatteur) can be a friend? 
— You do not know him as well as I, though you see him every 
day. — Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father 
has offended me. — Oh! here he is coming, (le voild qui vient,) you 
may tell him all yourself. — What do you think of our king ? I say 
he is a great man, but I add, that though kings be ever so powerful, 
(puissant,) they die as well as the meanest (vil) of their subjects.— 
Have you been pleased with my sisters? I have; for however 
plain (laide) they may be, they are still very amiable; aud however 
learned (savant) our neighbor's daughters may be, they are still 
sometimes mistaken. — Is not their father rich? However rich he 
may be, he may lose all in an instant. — Whoever the enemy may 
be whose malice (la malice) you dread, (apprehender,) you ought to 
rely (se reposer) upon your innocence ; but the laws (la loi) condemn 
(cojidamner) all criminals, (un criminel), whatever they may be. — 
Whatever your intentions (une intention) might be, you should have 
acted differently, (differ emment.) — Whatever the reasons (la raison) 
be which you may allege, (alleguer,) they will not excuse your 
action, blameable in itself. 



Vocabulaire. 3me See, 

Would to God that all great lords 

loved peace ! ($ 151 — 15.) 
Would to God we may never be 

more unhapy ! 
May you be happy ! 
Though it cost me all I have, I shall 

36 * 



Plut a Dieu que tous les grands 
seigneurs aimasse?it la paix ! 

Plut au Ciel que nous ne fusshns 
jamais plus malheureux! 

Puissiez vous etre heureux ! 

Dut-il m'en couter tout ce que ie 



26 



EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) 



know how to preserve myself from 
such a misfortune. (§ 151. — 15.) 
Should they be a hundred leagues 
hence, I would go for them. 



possede, je saurai me preserver 
d'un semblable malheur. 1 
Fussent-ils a cent lieuesd'ici, j'irais 
les chercher. 2 



Obs. 166|. It is essential for foreigners to observe, that in the French lan- 
guage the construction with the infinitive is preferable to that with the sub- 
junctive, whenever the former may be employed without ambiguity, that 
is, when the same English subject is repeated. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) Say, there- 
fore : 

I come (in order) to see you ; not : ( Je viens pour vous voir; and not : 
I come that 1 may see you. ( Je viens pour que je vous voie. 

Je ne crois pas pouvoir sortir demain ; 



I do not think I shall be able to go 
out to-morrow. 

I shall marry a woman who will 

please me. (§ 151 — 14.) 
I shall marry a woman who must 

please me : or, the woman I shall 

marry must please me. 
Here is a book for you which you 

may consult occasionally. 
Give me a book that I may be able 

to consult occasionally. 
Lend me that book, which you do 

not want. 
Lend me a book which you may not 

be in want of. 
Do not leave a place where you are 

comfortable, and whence you hear 

well. 
Choose a place where you may be 

comfortable, and whence you may 

hear well. 

Quatre-vingtieme Theme. 3me Sec. 
L'homme, en general, peut-il lever un fardeau (burden) de 300 
livres t Quelques hommes peuvent lever des fardeaux beaucoup plus 
pesants (heavy) ; mais il y a peu d'hommes qui puissent en lever 
un de 300 livres. — Avons-nous du riz? Nous en avons un peu. mais 
je ne crois pas que nous en ayons assez. — Faut-il que j'en achete un 
sac ? Non, un boisseau (bushel) sera assez. Pensez-vous qu'un 
boisseau dure jusqu ; a ce que le riz nouveau parais'se % Je pense que 
oui. La recolte de riz (crop) peut etre mauvaise ; ne vaudrait-il pas 



and not : 

Je ne crois pas que je puisse sortir 
. demain. 

lnd. J'epouserai une femme qui me 

plaira. 
Subj. J'epouserai une femme qui me 

plaise. 

lnd. Voila un livre que vous pourrez 

consulter au besoin. 
Subj. Donnez-moi un livre que je 

puisse consulter au besoin. 
bid. Pretez-moi ce livre, dont vous 

n'avez pas besoin. 
Subj. Pretez-moi un livre dont vous 

n'ayez pas besoin. 
lnd. Ne quittez pas une place ou 

vous etes commodement, et d'ow 

vous entendez bien. 
Subj. Choisissez une place ou vous 

soyez commodement, et d'mi vous 

entendiez bien. 



1 Instead of — Quand meme il devrait m'en confer tout ce que je possede, 
&c. Si meme il devaii m'eti cbuter, &c. 

2 Quand meme Us seraient d cent lieues d'ici, <$-c. S'ils etaient. 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 427 

mieux que nous en achetassions plus d 7 un boisseau 1 — Comme la 
recolte de ble et celle de mais ont ete bonnes, la difference de prix 
ne pourrait pas etre considerable, en cas ($151) meme que la 
recolte de riz vint a manquer. Cependant, faites comme vous 
voudrez. Non, je ferai comme il vous plaira, pourvu que vous me 
le disiez. 

Whatever may happen to you in this world, never murmur (mur- 
murer) against Divine Providence, (la divine providence :) for what- 
ever we may suffer, we deserve it. — Whatever I may do, you are 
never satisfied — Whatever you may say, your sisters shall be 
punished, if they deserve it, and if they do not endeavor to amend. 
(s'amender.) — Who has taken my gold watch ? I do not know. Do 
not believe that I have had it. or that Miss C. has had your silver 
snuff-box, (la tabatiere,) for I saw both in the hands of your sister 
when we weje playing at forfeits, (au gage louche.) — To morrow I 
shall set out for Dover; but in a fortnight I shall be back again, 
(revenir^) and then I shall come and see you and your family. — 
Where is your sister at present ? She is at Paris, and my brother is 
at Berlin. — That little woman is said (on dit) to be going to marry 
General (le general) K., your friend; is it true ? I have not heard of 
it. — W-hat news is there of our great army ? It is said to be lying 
(etre) between the Weser (le Veser) and the Rhine, (le Rhin.) — All 
that the courier told me seeming (paraitre) very probable., (vraisem- 
blable.) I went home immediately, wrote some letters, and departed 
for London. 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON, 81st.— Quatre-vingt-unieme Legon, 81me. 
Vocabulaire, Ire Sec. 



Tant soit peu. 

Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de me 

donner un morceau de pain ? 
En voulez-vous beaucoup ? 



Just a little, ever so little. 

Will you do me the favor of giving 

me a piece of bread ? 
Do you wish a great deal ? 

No, just a little. Non, tant soit peu. 

To turn to account i + Fajre Mfo . f , 
lo make the best of. ) 

That man does not know how to | t Cet homme ne sait pas faire valoir 

make the most of his talents. ses talents. 

That man turns his money to account t Cet homme fait valoir son argent 

in trade. dans le commerce. 

How do you employ your money ? | t Comment faites-vous valoir votre 

argent ? 

I employ it in the stocks. > t Je le fais valoir dans les fonds pub 

I turn it to account in the stocks. ) lies. 



428 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 



Is it not proper that he should claim 
his rights ? Let him claim them. 

To boast, to brag. 

I do not like that man, because he 
boasts too much. 

Notwithstanding that. 
For all that, although. 
That man is a little bit of a rogue, 

but notwithstanding he passes for 

an honest man. 
Although that man is not very well, 

he notwithstanding works a great 

deal. 
Although that woman is not very 

pretty, still she is very amiable. 

Although that man has not the least 
talent, yet for all that he boasts a 
great deal. 

Although that tavern-keeper's wife is 
rather swarthy, yet for all that she 
turns the business to good account. 

Provided you write on the 3d, and 
put your letter in the post-office 
before 11 o'clock, I will receive it 
on the 5th. 

To go back, to return. 

The top, the upper part. 
Upper Canada. 

The bottom, the lower part. 
Lower Canada. 

Up to the top. To the very bottom. 

The eldest brother. The eldest sister. 

He is the eldest. She was the eldest. 



N'est-il pas a propos qu'iifasse valoir 
ses droits ? Qu'il les fasse valoir. 

t Sefaire valoir. 

t Je n'aime pas cet homme, parce 
qu'il se fait trop valoir. 



> Ne laisser pas de. 



Cet homme est tant soit peu fripon, 
mais il ne laisse pas de passer pour 
honnete homme. 

Quoique cet homme ne soit pas bien 
portant, il ne laisse pas de tra- 
vailler beaucoup. 

Quoique cette femme ne soit pas bien 
jolie, elle ne laisse pas d'etre fort 
aim able. 

Quoique cet homme n'ait aucun ta- 
lent, il ne laisse pas de se faire 
beaucoup valoir. 

Quoique la femme de cet aubergiste 
soit tant soit peu basanee, elle ne 
laisse pas de faire valoir le bouchon. 

Pourvu que vous £criviez le 3, et 
que vous mettiez votre lettre a la 
poste avant 11 heures, je la re- 
cevrai le 5. 

JRetourner, 1. 

Le haut. 
Le Haut Canada. 

Le bas. 
Le Bas Canada. 

Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en bas. 

Le frere aine. La sceur ainee. 

C'est l'aine. C'etait l'ainee. 



Quatre-vingt-unieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 
Mori cafe n'est pas assez sucre, veuillez me dormer tant soit peu 
plus de sucre. Avec plaisir. II faut que vous aimiez votre cafe 
bien sucre, car je crois y avoir mis deux cueillerees (spoonfuls) de 
sucre. Que vous y ayez mis (§ 151 — 10) deux cueillerees ou non, 
le cafe n'etait pas assez sucre. II est possible que je n'y en aie mis 
qirune. Serait-il etormant que vous n ; y en eussiez pas mis du tout? 
Oni, vraiment; il serait tres etormant que j'eusse oublie d'y en met- 
tre Cela ne vous arrive-t-il jamais? Pas tres-souvent, je vous 
assure. Je le crois. Je peux dire, sans me faire valoir, que je suis 
an fait de ma besogne. (business.) Ce n'est pas d'aujourd'hui que je 
m/eri apercois. — Vous connaissez Mile. Eloise, n'est-ce pas? N'est- 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



429 



elle pas aimable? Quoiqu'elle ne soit ni jolie ni spiritualle. (witty,) 
elle ne laisse pas d'etre tres-aimable. 

Where are the two Misses Vignette ? They have not yet returned 
from Europe. — You are acquainted with them, are you not? I know 
the eldest only. — Is it possible that you do not know both of them? 
When are they to return? They will not return before their com- 
pany has visited Italy and the upper and the lower Rhine. — Although 

Theodore B is younger than his brother Henry, for all that he is 

as talented (a autant de talents) as his elder brother, (son frere aim, 
or simply son aine.) — Whither shall you go next year ? I shall go 
to England, for it is a fine kingdom, (le royaume,) where I intend 
spending the summer on (a) my return from France. — Whither shall 
you go in the winter ? I shall go to Italy, and thence (de Id) to the 
West Indies, (aux Indes occidentales, ou aux colonies,) 1 but before that 
I must go to Holland to take leave of my friends. — What country do 
these people inhabit? (habiter?) They inhabit the south (le midi) 
of Europe ; their countries are called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and 
they themselves are Italians, Spaniards, or Portuguese ; but the people 
called Russians, Swedes, Poles, and Hungarians (Hongrois) inhabit 
the north and east of Europe ; and the names of their countries are 
Russia, Sweden, Poland, (la Pologne,) and Hungary. France is 
separated (separer) from Italy by (par) the Alps, (les Alpes,) and 
from Spain by the Pyrenees, (les Pyrenees.) 

Vo cab UL aire. 2de Sec. 



To appear, to seem, seeming, seemed, 

appear. Let him appear. 
I appear, thou appearest, he appears. 
To keep, to maintain. 
My keeping or maintenance. 
My keeping costs me six hundred 

francs a year. 
To drive in, to sink. 
To converse with. 
A conversation. 

To spare, save, lay up, put by lOOOf. 
Spare your money. 
To get tired. 
To be tired. 
To handle. To lean against. 



Paraitre,*4, paraissant, paru, par- 

aissez. Qu ; il paraisse. 
Je parais, tu parais, il parait. 
Entretenir,* 2. 
Mon entretien. 
Mon entretien me coute six cents 

francs par an. 
Enf oncer, 1. 
S'entretenir* avec. 
Un e-ntretien, une conversation. 
Epargner, 1. Sauver mille francs. 
Epargnez votre argent. 
Se lasser, {de bef. inf.) 
Etre las ; fern, lasse, {de bef. inf.) 
Manier, 1. S'appuyer, 1. 



1 The word Colonies, is more used by the French than, Indes Occident ales, 
(West Indies,) which is the book-word; just as in New York they say the 
North instead of the Hudson river, &c. East Indies, (book-word) bidet 
orientates ; (colloquial) Les hides ou les Grandes Indes. 



430 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 



Lean against me. 

Lean against the wall. 

To aim at. 

Short. To stop short. 

Virtue is amiable. (§ 15.) 

Vice is odious. 

Men are mortal. 

Gold is precious. 

Corn is sold at a crown a bushel. 

Beef costs four pence a pound. 

The horror of vice, and the love of 

virtue, are the delights of the wise 

man. 
England is a fine country. 



Appuyez-vous sur moi. 
Appuyez-vous contre la muraille. 
Coucher enjoue. 

Court. S'arreter tout court. 

La vertu est aimable. 
Le vice est odieux. 
Les hommes sont mortels. 
Z'or est precieux. 
Le b\6 se vend un e"cu le boisseau. 
Le boeuf coute quatre sous la livre. 
L'horreur du vice, et 1' amour de la 
vertu, sont les delices du sage. 

L'Angleterre est un beau pays. 



Obs. 167. The definite article is also used before the names of kingdoms, 
countries, and provinces. 1 (§ 15.) 



Italy is the garden of Europe. 
The dog is the friend and companion 
of man. 



L'ltalie est le jardin de TEurope. 
Le chien est Z'ami et le compagnon 
de Z'homme. 



Obs. 168. The articles are repeated in French before every substantive, 
and agree with it in gender and number. (Dir. 2.) 



Thessaly produces wine, oranges, 
lemons, olives, and all sorts of 
fruit. 

He ate the bread, meat, apples, and 
cakes ; he drank the wine, beer, 
and cider. 

Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are 
valuable endowments when heigh- 
tened by modesty. 

The longer the days the shorter the 
nights, and the longer the nights 
the shorter the days. (§ 200—12.) 



La Thessalie produit du vin, des 
oranges, des citrons, des olives, et 
toutes sortes de fruits. 

II a mange le pain, la viande, les 
pommes, et les gateaux ; il a bu le 
vin, la biere, et le cidre. 

La beaute, les graces, et V esprit, sont 
des avantages bien precieux, quand 
ils sont releves par la modestie. 

Plus les jours sont longs plus les ' 
nuits sont courtes, et plus les nuits 
sont longues plus les jours sont 
courts. 



Quatre-vingt-tjnieme Th&me. 2de Sec. 

Plus vous paraissez vous amuser, plus il parait s'amuser aussi. 
(§200 — 12.) — Le vaisseau a touche, (grounded.) n 7 est-ce pas dom- 
mage % II est dommage qu'il ait echoae, (echouer, 1 ? to ground,) 
mais je ne crois pas que nous courions aucun danger. Oh ! voyez 
comme il s'enfonce ! N'ayez aucune peur. Plus il s'enfoncera 
dans le sable moins nous courrons danger de chavirer. (upset.) C'est 
vrai ; plus il entrera dans le sable moins il y aura de danger qa'il 

1 Except when preceded by en or de. Ex. Tirai en Allemagne d mon 
retour de Fra?ice, I shall go to Germany on my return from France. 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 431 

chavire, a moins qu ; il ne s'enfonce entierement. Ne craignez pas 
cela. J'ai grand' peur. Appuyez-vous sur moi. Je vous lasserai 
je vous fatiguerai.— Qu ; est-ce qui est aimable. la vertu ou le vice ?— 
Qu ; est-ce qui estodieux? — Qirest-ce qui est precieux ?— Qu 5 est-ce 
qui se vend un ecu le boisseau ?— Vous avez visite FAngleterre ; c ; est 
un beau royaume, n ; est-ce pas ? 

Though the Mahometans (le Mahometan) are forbidden the use of 
wine, (defendre quelque chose d quelqwun.) yet for all that some of 
them drink it.— Has your brother eaten anything this morning? He 
has eaten a great deal: though he said he had no appetite, yet for 
all that he ate all the meat, bread, and vegetables, (Us legumes,) and 
drank all the wine, beer, and cider.— Are eggs (un asuf) dear at pre- 
sent? They are sold at six francs a hundred. In case they are 
cheaper to-morrow, buy § a hundred.— Do you like grapes? (le rai- 
sin?) I do not only (non settlement) like grapes, but also plums, 
(une prune.) almonds, nuts, and all sorts of fruit.— Though modesty, 
candor, and an amiable disposition (Vamabilite) are valuable endow- 
ments, yet for all that there are some ladies that are neither modest, 
nor candid, (candide,) nor amiable.— The fear of death and the love 
of life being natural to men, they ought to shun [fun*) vice, (le vice.) 
and adhere to (s'attacher a) virtue.— What does your living c-ost you 
a year?— Do you spend less than your eldest brother?— The less 
you will spend the more you will save : are vou not of my opinion % 
—■Are you taking aim at that small bird? Is it worth 'killing?— 
Was not the last scholar who recited obliged to stop several times, 
and finally to stop short?— Was it not a pity ?— Did he not appear 
very modest, although he was talented ? The more I sang the less 
embarrassed I felt, (etais. ou je me sentais.) Is it so with you ? 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. -Quatre-vingUdeuxieme Legon, 82me. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 
To give occasion. 

Do not give him cause to complain. 
To leave it to one. 
I leave it to vou. 
A good bargain. 
To stick or to abide by a thing. 
I abide by the offer you have made 



me. 



I do not doubt but you are my friend. 



Donner lieu, (de before infin.) 

Xe lui donnez pas lieu de se plaindre. 

t S , e?i rapport er a quelqu'un. 

t Je m'en rapporte a vous. 

Un bon marche. 

t S' en tenir a. 

t Je m'en tiens a 1'ofTre que vous 

m'avez faite. 
Je ne doute pas que vous ne soyez 
mon ami. 



432 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 



Obs. 169. When the verb douter is negatively used, it requires ne before 
ihe subjunctive. 



I do not doubt but he will do it. 

To suffer, to bear. 

They were exposed to the whole fire 
of the place. 

To examine one artfully, or to draw 
a secret from one. 

I examined him artfully, and by that 
means I have made myself ac- 
quainted with all his affairs. 

To bear, or to put up with. 

You will be obliged to put up with 
all he wishes. 

Thick. 

A thick cloud. A thick beard. 

A burst. A burst of laughter. 

To burst out laughing. To burst out. 

To burst out a laughing. 

Splendor, brightness. 

To make a great show. To light. 

To suffer one's self to be beaten. 

To let or to suffer one's self to fail. 

To suffer one's self to be insulted. 

To suffer one's self to die. 

To let one's self be struck. 

To send back, to send away. 

To extol, to praise up. 

To boast, to praise one's self, to brag. 



Je ne doute pas qu'il ne le fasse. 

Essuyer, 1. 

lis essuyerent tout le feu de la place, 

Tirer les vers du nez a quelqu'un. 

Je lui ai tire les vers du nez, et par 
ce moyen je me suis mis au fait de 
toutes ses affaires. 

En passer par. 

Vous serez oblige d'en passer par 
tout ce qu'il voudra. 

Epais ; fern, epaisse. 

Un nuage epais. Une barbe epaisse. 

Un eclat. Un eclat de rire. 

Faire un eclat de rire. ficlater, 1. 

ficlater de rire. 

L'eclat. 

t Faire de l'eclat. £clairer, 1. 

Se laisser battre. 

Se laisser tomber. 

Se laisser insulter. 

Se laisser mourir. 

Se laisser frapper. 

Renvoyer, 1. 

Vanter, 1. 

Se vanter. 



Quatre-vingt-deuxieme Th^me. Ire Sec. 

II se plaint que nous le grondions, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, il s'en 
plaint. II dit que quelque chose qu'il fasse, on y trouve toujours a 
redire. — Quoi que ce soit qu'il fasse mal, on y trouve a redire. Mais 
que fait-il de bien ] — Est-il possible que vous ayez fait un si bon 
marche? — Ne vous donnent-ils pas lieu de se plaindre d'eux? — A 
qui vous en rapportez-vous % — Doutez-vous encore que je sois votre 
ami? — Doutez-vous de leur arrived? — Doutent-ils que leur cousin 
soit arrive ? — Les Russes n'ont-ils pas essuye une perte considerable ? 
— S'il ne vous Pa pas prorais, vous serez oblige d 7 en passer par tout 
ce qu'il voudra, et je crains qu'il soit impossible que vous receviez 
vos fonds. — Comme les nuages sont epais ! Ne va-t-il pas neiger ? 
— Qui a fait cet eclat de rire ? Qui ? Cela peut-il etre quelqu'autre 
qu'Etienue? — Ce jeune homme se vante toujours de pouvoir tout 
faire ; il est vrai qu'il fait bien des choses. II se laisse tomber de 
sheval. II se laisse insulter, merne frapper. Enfin, l'autre jour il 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



438 



s'est laisse battre. — Les Russes ne se sont-ils pas laisse battre? — Cet 
homme n'est-il pas ivre? (drunk?) 

Will you drink a cup of coffee ? I thank you ; I do not like cof- 
fee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine ? I have just drunk some. 
— Let us take a walk. Willingly, (je le veux bien :) but where shall 
we go to ? Come with me into my aunfs garden : we shall there find 
very agreeable society. I believe it, (je le crois bien;) but the ques- 
tion is (c'est a savoir) whether this agreeable society will admit me, 
(voudra de moi.) You are welcome everywhere. — What ails you, 
(qu'avez-vous,) my friend'? How do you like that wine? I like it 
very well, (excellent ;) but I have drunk enough of it, (suffisamment.) 
- — Drink once more, (encore un coup.) No, too much is unwhole- 
some, (malsain ;) I know my constitution, (le temperament.) — Do not 
fall. What is the matter with you? I do not know; but my head 
is giddy, (fa tete me tourne ;) I think I am fainting, (tomber en de- 
f alliance.) I think so also, for you look almost like a dead person, 
(un mort.) — What countryman are you ? I am an Englishman. — You 
speak French so well that 1 took you for a Frenchman by birth, 
{Frangais de nation.) You are jesting. Pardon me; I do not jest at 
all. — How long have you been in France 1 A few days. In earnest ? 
(Serieusement?) You doubt it, perhaps, because I speak French; I 
knew it before I came to France. — How did you learn it so well 1 
I did like the prudent starling. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



Go thither. Let us go thither. 

Go thou. Go there. 

Go away. Do not go away. 

Let him go thither. 
Let them go thither. 
Go away, begone. Let us begone. 
Let him go away, let him begone. 
Give me. 
Give it to me. 
Give it to him. 
Give him some. 
Get paid. 
Let us set out. 
Let us breakfast. 
Let him give it me. 
Let. him be here at twelve o'clock. 
Let him send it me. 
He may believe it. 
Make an end of it. 
Let him take it. 
37 



Let us not. 
Let me dine. 



Let him finish. 
Let her say so. 



Allez-y. Allons-y. 

Va. Vas-y. ($ 150—5.) 

Va-t 7 en. Ne t'en va pas. 

Qu'il y ailie. 

Qu'ils y aillent. 

Allez-vous en. Allons-nous en 

Qu'il s'en aille. 

Donnez-moi. 

Donnez-le-moi. 

Donnez-le-lui. 

Donnez-lui-en. 

Faites-vous payer. 

Partons. Ne partons pas. 

Dejeunons. Laissez-moi diner. 

Qu'il me le donne. 

Qu'il soit ici amidi. 

Qu'il me l'envoie. 

Qu'il le croie. 

Finissez. Qu'il finisse. 

Qu'il le prenne. Qu'elle le disc. 



434 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) 



The starling. 

If I were to question you as I used 
to do at the beginning of our les- 
sons, what would you answer ? 



We found these questions at first 
rather ridiculous ; but full of con- 
fidence in your method, we an- 
swered as well as the small quan- 
tity of words and rules we then 
possessed allowed us. 

We were not long in finding out that 
those questions were calculated to 
ground us in the rules and to ex- 
ercise us in conversation, by the 
contradictory answers we were 
obliged to make. 

We can now almost keep up a con- 
versation in French. 

This phrase does not seem to us 
logically correct. 

We snould be ungrateful if we al- 
lowed such an opportunity to es- 
cape without expressing our live- 
liest gratitude to you. 

In all cases, at all events. 

The native. 

The insurmountable difficulty. 

Quatre-vingt-deuxieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
Jean veut s'en aller? Je croyais qu'il s'en etait deja alle. — Non, 
il est encore dans l'autre chambre. Qu'est-il a faire? II est a 
regarder les nuages. Occupation tres-instructive. vraiment ! II a 
peur qu'il pleuve, et comme il demeure loin, il voudrait savoir s'il 
peut s'en aller. — Qu'il s'en aille, s'il craint qu'il pleuve. Si vous le 
craignez aussi. pretez-lui un parapluie. Je n'en ai pas a lui preter. 
Faut-il que je prenne le votre 1 II ne faut pas que vous preniez le 
neuf. parce que vous savez que Jean est un etourdi, (giddy boy;) 
et il pourraitle perdre, mais prenez le vieux, et qu'il s'en aille bien 
vite, ou plutot qu'il attende, car la pluie a commence. Est-il 
probable que ce ne soit qu'une ondee ? (shower?) II me parait que 
ce ne sera qu'une ondee. — A quelle heure faut-il qu'il soit ici ?— - 
Ne faut-il pas que je finisse le paysage avant de m'en aller'* •* 



Le sansonnet. 

Si je vous posais maintenant dea 
questions comme je vous en ai 
pose au commencement de nos 
lecons, (comme j'avais d'abord 
l'habitude de le faire,) que repon- 
driez-vous ? 

Nous avons d'abord trouve ces ques- 
tions tant soit peu ridicules ; mais 
pleins de confiance en votre me- 
thode, nous y avons repondu aussi 
bien que la petite provision de mots 
et de principes que nous avions 
alors pouvait nous le permettre. 

Nous n' avons pas tarde a nous aper- 
cevoir que ces questions etaient 
calculees pour nous inculquer les 
principes et nous exercer a la con- 
versation, par les reponses contra- 
dictoires que nous etions forces 
d'y faire. 

Maintenant nous savons presque sou- 
tenir une conversation en Frangais. 

Cette phrase ne nous parait pas 
logiquement correcte. 

Nous serions des ingrats si nous lais- 
sions echapper une si belle occa- 
sion, sans vous temoigner la recon- 
naissance la plus vive. 

En tout cas. 

L'homme ne dans le pays. 

La difficulte insurmontable. 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 435 

Qu'elle le dise ou non, je n T en crois rien, et vous? — N ? est-il pas a 
dejeuner? — N'etaient-elles pas a coudre ? — Si vous ne venez qu'a 
cinq heures au lieu de trois, ils ne pourront pas sortir avec nous, parce 
qu'a cette heure-la ils seront a reciter leurs lecons. 

Dialogue. 

The Master. — If I were now to ask you such questions as I did in 
the beginning of our lessons, viz. (telles que :) Have you the hat 
which my brother has 1 am I hungry 1 has he the tree of my brother's 
garden ? &c. What would you answer ? 

The Pupils. — We are obliged (etre force) to confess that we found 
these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confidence in 
the method you follow, we answered as well as the small quantity 
of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were, in 
fact, not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to 
ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the 
contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we 
can almost keep up a conversation in the beautiful language which 
you teach us, we should answer: It is impossible that we should 
have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot 
have one and the same thing. To the second question we should 
answer, that it is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry 
or not. As to the last, we should say : that there is more than one 
tree in a garden : and in asking us whether he has the tree of the 
garden, the phrase does not seem to us logically correct. At all 
events we should be ungrateful (ingrat) if we allowed such an op- 
portunity to escape, without expressing (temoigner) our liveliest gra- 
titude to you for the trouble you have taken. In arranging those 
wise combinations, (la combinaison,) you have succeeded in ground- 
ing us almost imperceptibly (imperceptible-merit) in the rules, and 
exercising us in the conversation, of a language which, taught in 
any other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almost 
insurmountable difficulties. 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.--Quatre-vingt'troisieme Lecon, SSme, 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



It lacks a quarter. 

It lacks a half. 

How much does it want ? 

It does not want much. 

It wants but a trifle. 



t II s'en faut d'un'quart. 
t II s'en faut de la moitie. 
Combien s'en faut-il ! 
II ne s'en faut pas beaucoup. 
II s'en faut de peu de chose. 



436 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 



It lacks but an inch of my being as 

tall as you. 
It lacked a great deal of my being as 

rich as you. 
In a foolish manner, at random. 
He talks at random like a crazy man, 

a fool, or a drunkard. 
To resort to violence. 
A fact. It is a fact. 

Else, or else. To make fun of. 

To contradict, to give one the lie. 
Should he say so, I would give him 

the lie. 
His actions belie his words. 
To scratch. 
To escape. 
I fell from the top of the tree to the 

bottom, but I did not hurt myself 

much. 
I escaped with a scratch. 

The thief has been taken, but he 
will escape with a few months 
imprisonment. 

By dint of. 

By dint of labor. 

By too much weeping. 

You will cry your eyes out. 

I obtained of him that favor by dint 

of entreaty. 
That excepted. 
That fault excepted, he is a good 

man. 



II s'en faut d'un pouce que je sois 

aussi grand que vous. 
II s'en fallait de beaucoup que je 

fusse aussi riche que vous. 
t A tort et d travers, 
II parle a tort et a travers comme un 

fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne. 
En venir aux voies de fait. 
Un fait. C'est un fait. 

Ou hien. Se moquer de. 

Dementir quelqu'un. 
S'il disait cela, je le dementirais. 

Ses actions dementent ses paroles. 

Egratigner, 1. 

t En itre quitte pour. 

J'ai tombe du haut de l'arbre en bas, 
mais je ne me suis pas fait beau- 
coup de mal. 

J'en ai ete quitte pour une egra- 
tignure. 

Le voleur a ete pris, mais il en sera 
quitte pour quelques mois de pri- 
son. 

t A force de. 

t A force de travail. 

t A force de pleurer. 

t A force de pleurer, vous perdrez 
les yeux. 

t J'obtins de lui cette faveur a force 
de prieres. 

t A cela pres. 

t A ce defaut pres, c'est un bon 
homme. 



Quatre-vingt-troisieme Theme. Ire Sec. 
Avez-vous toute la somrne ? II s'en faut d'un quart que je ne 
l'aie. D'un quart, avez-vous dit ? — II s'en faut presque de la moitie. 
Seriez-vous satisfait de la i de ce que je possede 1 Ce que j'ai et la 
i de ce que vous possedez, me rendraient riche. — Vous ne pensez 
pas a ce que vous dites, y pensez-vous ? Est-ce que je parle 
comme un fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne'? Pour peu que vous soyez 
ivre, vous parlez comme un sot ou comme un fou. Je vous remercie 
du compliment.- Vous etes le bienvenu, car vous le meritez autant 
que qui que ce soit. — Croyiez-vous etre aussi grand que Rochamp? 
Oui, je le croyais, mais l'autre jour, quand je me tinsdebout aupres 
de lui, je vis que j'etais de beaucoup plus petit. De combien de 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 437 

pouces etes-vous plus petit ? II s'en faut de trois pouces au moins 
que je ne sois aussi grand que lui. Ne querellez plus avec lui, 
autrement vous en viendrez aux voies de fait. Si vous ne voulez pas 
que je me querelle avec lui, il faut Fempecher de se moquer de moi. 
Je tacherai de le faire. 

Do you not often contradict Henry when he relates something? 
I do only when he says incredible, (incroyable.) inconsistent, (incon- 
sistant.) or false things. ( § 200—7.) What do you think of Mrs. A— ? 
Her company, her conversation, is agreeable enough; only, she 
exaggerates too much ; that excepted, she is a pleasant lady. — Your 
uncle will not grant what you want. I hope he will, by dint of 
entreaty. — You will entreat in vain, (beau prier ;) you will not obtain 
it. Never mind, I will ask whether I obtain it or not. 

Will you be my guest? (manger avec quclqu'un.) I thank you; a 
friend of mine has invited me to dinner: he has ordered (faire pre- 
parer) my favorite dish, (un mets favor i.) — What is it? It is a dish 
of milk, (du laitage.) — As for me, I do not like milk-meat: there is 
nothing like [il ri'y a rien tel qu?) a good piece of roast beef or veal. 
— What has become of your younger brother? He has suffered 
shipwreck (faire naif rage) in going to America. — You must give me 
an account of that, (raconter quelque chose.) Very willingly, (volon- 
tiers.) Being on the open sea, (en pleine mer y ) a great storm arose. 
The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire, (le mit en feu.) The 
crew (V equipage) jumped into the sea to save themselves by swim- 
ming. My brother knew not what to do, having never learned to 
swim. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 

To vie with each other. ; t A V en vie, (Vun de V autre.) 

t Ces hommes travaillent a l'envie, 

(1'un de l'autre.) 
Propre. 

Du linge propre ou blanc. 
D' autant plus-~que. 
D' autant moins — que. 
Je suis aV autant plus mecontent de 

sa conduite, qu'ii m'a beaucoup 

d'obligations. 
Je suis oV autant morns satisfait de sa 

conduite, que j'avais plus de droits 

a son amitie. 
Je voudrais que . . . (§ 151 — 12.) 



Those men are trying to rival each 
other. 

Clean. 

Clean linen. 

The more — as. 

The less — as. 

I am the more discontented with his 
conduct, as he is under many obli- 
gations to me. 

I am the less pleased with his con- 
duct, as I had more right to his 
friendship. 

] wish that, I should like . . . 

I wish that house belonged to me. ) t Je voudrais que cette maison rut 

[ should like to own that house. > a moi. 

37* 



438 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 



To muse, to think. 

I thought a long time on that affair. 

To be naked. 

To have the head uncovered. 

To have the feet uncovered. 



Rever, 1, (a before noun.) 

J'ai reve long- temps a cette affaire. 

Etre nu — nue. 

t Avoir la tete nue. 

t Avoir les pieds nus. 



Obs. 169i. The adjective nu, like demi, (19 2 , N. 3) is indeclinable before 
the noun, but declinable after. 



To be barefooted. 

To be bareheaded. 

To ride barebacked. 

To have like to, or to think to have. 



I had like to have lost my money. \ 

I thought I had lost my life. 

We had like to have cut. our fingers. 



Etre ^w-pieds. 

Etre nu-tete. 

t Aller a poil. 

t Manquer ou penser. 

Obs. 1691. Manquer takes de before the infinitive, but penser does not. 

J'ai manque de perdre mon argent. 

J'ai pense perdre mon argent. 

Je pensai perdre la vie. 

Nous avons manque de nous couper 

les doigts. 
II a manque de tomber. 
II a manque d'etre tue. 
II a pense etre tue. 
w Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait ete tue\ 
II a pense mourir. 
A vos trousses. 
L'ennemi est a nos trousses. 
t Tomber. 

La foudre est tombee. 
La foudre tomba sur le vaisseau. 



He was very near falling. 

He was within a hair's breadth of 
being killed. 

He had liked to have died. 

At, on, or upon your heels. 

The enemy is at our heels. 

To strike, (in speaking of lightning.) 

The lightning has struck. 

The lightning struck the ship. 

Quatre-vingt-troisieme Theme. 2de Sec. 
J'ai plusieurs bons ecoliers dans cette classe. Est-ce qu'ils etudient 
a Penvie Tun de Pautre? Oui, ils etudient a Penvie. N ; avez-vous 
pas aussi des ecolieres qui etudient a Penvie Pune de Pautre ? Si 
fait, yen ai qui etudient a Penvie les unes des autres. — Etes-vous 
satisfait (are you pleased) de la maniere dont Leopold se conduit'? 
Non, yen suis d'autant moins satisfait qu'il avait promis davantage. — 
Ne sont-ils pas etonnes qu'elle ait agi de cette maniere? Si fait, 
ils en sont tres-etonnes, et ils sont d'autant plus mecontents, (so much 
the more displeased,) qu'elle connaissait parfaitement leur opinion. — 
Que pensez-vous de mon proces? Je ne nren suis pas encore 
occupe. Je voudrais que vous y revassiez un peu. Je suis a y 
rever. Mais vous voyez que je suis nu-pieds; il faut que je me 
chausse, (chausser, 1, to dress one's feet, to put on what is to go on the 
feet as a part of dress.) que je finisse de m'habiller, et j'y reverai. Je 
vous en avertis, je serai a vos trousses jusqu'a ce que vou.« vous en 
occupiez serieusement. — Savez-vous que Montcalrne a manque 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 



439 



d'etre tue 1 Non, je n ; en savais rien. Quel accident lui est-il 
arrive ? Comment a-t-il manque d'etre tue ? II est tombe de cheval. 

I wish that umbrella was mine. Have you none 1 No, I wish I 
had one. (62 2 .) Can you not afford to buy one % No, I cannot; for 
I was robbed, and was near being killed. — How so ? The robbers 
upset our carriage, and we were all very near being killed. (Peu 
s'en est fallu que nous n'ayons tous ete tues.) When were you so near 
being killed'? It was last week that we were so nearly killed. 
Were you all robbed ? Yes. but I was the only one who had much 
money. My companions had only a few dollars each. I entreated 
very hard, but it was in vain. (J'ai eu beau prier, tfa ete en vain.) 

My brother reflected in vain ; he found no means to save his life. 
He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on 
all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea. — Well, 
{eh bien,) what has become of him? I do not know, having not 
heard from him yet. — But who told you all that? My nephew, who 
was there, and who saved himself. — As you are talking of your 
nephew, d propos de — ,) where is he at present % He is in Italy. — 
Is it long since you heard from him ? I have received a letter from 
him to-day. — What does he write to you ? I will tell you by and by. 

Vocabulaire. 3me Sec. 
The half, the third, the fourth. [ La moitie, le tiers, le quart. 

Obs. 170. These are irregularly formed, but from le cinquieme, the fifth, 
all others are regular. 



What is the half of 6 ? It is 3. 

What is the i of 7 ? It is 3 and h 
What is the third of 9 ? It is 3. 
What is the I of 10 ? It is 3 and |. 



That of 11 ? 
What is is the 
That of 13 ? 
That of 14 ? 
That of 15? 



It is 3 and §. 

of 12? It is 3. 

It is 3 and h 
It is 3 and |. 

It is 3 and f . 



The | of 12 are 8. The * of 12 are 9. 

While my brother was on the open 
sea, a violent storm arose unexpect- 
edly ; the lightning struck the ship, 
which it set on fire, and the whole 
crew jumped into the sea to save 
themselves by swimming. 

He was struck with fright when he 
saw that the fire was gaining on 
all sides. 



Quelle est la moitie de 6 ? C'est 3. 

Cellede7? C'est 3 et demi. 

Quelle est le tiers de 9 ? C'est 3. 

Quel est le i de 10 ? C'est 3 et un 
tiers. 

Celuide 11 ? C'est 3 et deux tiers (|.) 

Quel est le quart de 12 ? C'est 3. 

Celuide 13? C'est 3 etun quart (£.) 

Celui de 14 ? C : est 3 et demi (£.) 

Celui de 15 ? C'est 3 et trois 

quarts ($.) 

Les | de 12 sont 8. Les I de 12 

sont 9. 

Mon frere e'tant en pleine mer, il sur- 
vint une grande tempete ; la foudre 
tomba sur le vaisseau, qu'elle mit 
en feu, et tout F equipage se jeta 
dans la mer, pour se sauver a la 
nage. 

II fut saisi de frayeur, voyant que le 
feu gagnait de tous les cotes. 



440 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 



He did not know what to do. 

He hesitated no longer. 

I have not heard of him yet. 

An angel. 

A masterpiece. 

Masterpieces. 



t II ne savait quel parti prendre. 

II ne balanga plus. 

t Je n'ai pas encore eu de ses nou- 

velles. 
Un ange. 
Un chef-d'oeuvre. 
Des chefs-d'oeuvre. 



Obs. 171. Of a word compounded by means of a preposition, expressed 
or understood, the first word only takes the mark of the plural. 



Four o'clock flowers. 
His or her physiognomy. 
His or her shape. 
Th) expression. 
Contentment. 
Admiration. 
Delightfully. 
Thin, (slender.) 



The look. 
Respect. 
Grace, charm. 
Fascinating. 
Uncommonly well. 
His or her look inspires respect and 
admiration. 



Des belles-de-nuit. 
Sa physionomie. 
Sa taille. 
L' expression. 
Le contentement. 
L' admiration. 
A ravir. 



L'aspect. 
Le respect. 
Les graces. 
Engageam. 



Svelte. Superieurement bien. 

Son aspect inspire du respect et de 
l'admiration. 



Quatre-vingt-tiloisieme Th^me. 3me Sec. 

Avez-vous eu des nou velles de votre ami, 1'avocat, depuis qu'il 
est parti pour la Calif ornie ? Oui, j'en ai eu. Sa lettre doit etre 
interessante ! que dit-il? II dit que For y est abondant; que ceux 
qui ont du bonheur, le ramassent en quantite ; que ceux qui ont du 
malheur, travaillent beacoup et ramassent peu. Du nombre des quels 
est-in De ceux des heureux ou des malheureux'? Des heureux, je 
presume, quoiqu'il se plaigne un peu. — Avez-vous vu le chef-d'oeuvre 
de Power, le sculpteur? Son esclave Grecque? Oui, cela meme. 
Oui, je Fai vu ce chef-d'oeuvre. Cette esclave ressemble a un ange. 
Cette statue moderne sera placee parmi les ehefs-d'ceuvre des sculp- 
teurs anciens. — Quand les belles-de-nuit s'ouvrent-elles ? Elles 
s'ouvrent a quatre heures, quand le soleil commence a baisser. 
Quelle odeur aimez-vous le mieux, celle des fleurs aV orange ou des 
tuber euses ? Je n'ai pas de choix. Plus je sens la fleur d 'orange plus 
j'en aime l'odeur; et plus l'odeur de la tubereuse frappe mon odorat, 
(sense of smell,) plus je voudrais la sentir. Quelle physionomie 
agreable et quelle taille admirable cette demoiselle a! 

My nephew, in his letter, which is an interesting one, writes to 
me that he is going to marry a young woman who brings him (qui 
lui apporte) a hundred thousand crowns. — Is she handsome ? Hand- 
some as an angel; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiog- 
nomy is mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in the 
(du) world, and her mouth is charming, et sa bouche est mignonne.) 
She is neither too tall nor too short; hei shape is slender; all her 



EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 



441 



actions are full of grace, and her manners are engaging. Her look 
inspires respect and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit 
she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings 
delightfully. My nephew finds in her (lui trouve) but one defect. 
{un defaut.) — And what is that defect? She is affected, (avoir des 
pretentions.) — There is nothing perfect in the world. — How happy 
you are ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine 
house, and all you wish. Not all, my friend. — What do you desire 
more ? Contentment ) for you know that he only is happy who is 
contented. 



EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.— Quatre-vingt-quatrieme Legon, 84me. 
Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



To unriddle, to disentangle. 

To find out. 

To disentangle the hair. 

To unravel difficulties. 

1 have not been able to find out the 
sense of that phrase. 

A quarrel. 

To have differences (a quarrel) with 
somebody. 

To take good care, to shun, to be- 
ware. . 

I will take good care not to do it. 

Mind you do not lend that man 
money. 

He takes good care not to answer 
the question which I asked him. 

To ask a question. 

If you take it into your head to do 
that, I will punish you. 



Demeler, 1. 

Demeler les cheveux. 

Demeler des difficultes. 

Je n'ai pas pu demeler le sens de 

cette phrase. 
Un demele. 
Avoir des demeles avec quelqu'un. 

Se garder de. 

Je me garderai bien de le faire. 
Gardez-vous bien de preter votre 

argent a cet homme. 
II se garde bien de repondre a la 

question que je lui ai faite. 
t Faire une question. 
Si vous vous avisez de le faire, je 

vous punirai. 
Seoir,* 3. Seyant or seant. 



To become, to fit well. Fitting well. 

Obs. 172. This verb is used only in the third person, singular and plural. 



Does that become me ? 

That does not become you. 

It does not become you to do that. 

That fits you wonderfully well. 

Her head-dress did not become her. 

It does not become you to reproach 

me with it ! 
To fast. To be fasting. 



Cela me sied-il ? 

Cela ne vous sied pas. 

II ne vous sied pas de faire cela. 

Cela vous sied a merveille. 

Sa coiffure lui seyait mal. 

II vous sied bien de me le reprocher ! 

{an ironical expression. \ 
Jeu??er, 1. fitre a jeun. 



442 EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) 

To give notice to. ) 

To let anybody know. > Avertir quelqu'un de quelque chose. 

To warn some one of something. ) 

Give notice to that man of his bro- I Avertissez cet homme du retour de 
ther's return. I son frere. 

QUATRE-VINGT-QTTATRIEME THEME. Ire Sec. 

Un certain roi devant, un jour, faire son entree dans une ville a 
deux heures de Papres-midi, le senat envoya quelques deputes 
(deputies) pour le complimenter. Celui qui devait porter la parole, 
n'etant pas accoutume a parler en public, commenca ainsi: " Alex- 
andre le Grand, le Grand Alexandre," et s'arreta tout court. Le 
roi, qui avait grand'faim, (32 2 ,) dit : " Ah ! mon ami, Alexandre le 
Grand avait dine, et moi, je suis encore a jeun. ?; Ayant dit ces 
paroles, il continua son chemiu vers Photel de ville, ou on lui avait 
prepare un diner magnifique. 

Savez-vous deviner les enigmes (enigmas?) Je ne les devine pas 
tres-aisement; cependant, il m'arrive quelque fois de le faire. Vou- 
lez-vous que je vous en dise une courte ? Voyons, dites-la. — La 
voici. Plus il y en a moins ga pese. — Plus il y en a moins ca pese. 
Qu'est-ce que cela peut etre ? Je ne peux m'imaginer ce que c'est. 
— Vous rendezvous ? (do you give it up ?) Oui, je me rends. Et 
moi aussi. 

The emperor Charles the Fifth (Charles-Quint) being one day out 
a hunting lost his way in the forest, and, having come to a house, 
entered it to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pre- 
tended to sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the emperor, 
told him he had dreamed he should take his watch, and took 
it. Then another rose and said he had dreamed that his sur- 
tout fitted him wonderfully, and took it. The third took his 
purse. At last the fourth came up, and said he hoped he would 
not take it ill if he searched him, and in doing it perceived around 
the emperor's neck a small gold chain to which a whistle (un 
sijflet) was attached, which he wished to rob him of. But the em- 
peror said : " My good friend, before depriving me (priver quelqu'un 
de quelque chose) of this trinket, (le bijou,) I must teach you its virtue." 
Saying this he whistled, (siffler, 1.) His attendants, (ses gens,) who 
were seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstruck 
(frappe d'etonnement) to behold his majesty in such a state. But the 
emperor, seeing himself out of danger, (hors de danger.) said: "These 
men (voici dcs hommes qui) have dreamed all that they liked. T 
wish in my turn also to dream.'' And after having mused a 
few seconds, he said : " T have dreamed that you all four deserve 



EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 



443 



to be hanged :" which was no sooner spoken than executed before 
the house. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



To follow from it. 

It follows from it that you should not 

do that. 
How is it that you have come so late ? 

1 do not know how it is. 

How is it that he had not his gun ? 

I do not know how it happened. 

To clear, to elucidate, to clear up. 

The weather is clearing up. 

To refresh. 

Refresh yourself, and return to me 

immediately. 
To whiten, to bleach. To blacken. 
To turn pale, to grow pale. 
To blush, to redden. 
To grow old. To grow young. 
To make merry. Gay, merry. Mirth. 
To make one's self merry. Cheer up. 
He makes merry at my expense. 
To feign, counterfeit, dissemble, 

pretend. Never pretend. 

I feign, thou feignest, he feigns. 
He knows the art of dissembling. 
To procrastinate, to go slow about. 
I do not like to transact business 

with that man, for he always goes 

very slow about it. 
A proof. This is a proof. 

To stray, to get lost, to lose one 

self, to lose one's way. 
Through. 
The cannon-ball went through the 

wall. 
I ran him through the body. 



S' ensuivre,* 4. 

II s'ensuit que vous ne devriez pas 

faire cela. 
t Comment se fait-il que vous soyez 

venu si tard ? 
t Je ne sais pas comment cela se fait, 
t Comment se faisait-il qu'il n'eut 

pas son fusil ? 
t Je ne sais pas comment cela se 

faisai. 
ficlaircir, 2. 
Le temps s'eclaircit. 
Rafraichir, 2. 

Rafraichissez-vous, et revenez tout 
de suite. 



Blanchir, 2. 


Noircir, 2. 


Palir, 2. 




Rougir. 




Vieillir, 2. 


Rajeunir, 2. 


figayer. Gai. 


La gaiete. 


S'egayer, 1. 


figayez-vous 



II s'egaie a mes depens. 

Feindre,* 4, feignant, feint. Ne 

feignez jamais. 

Je feins, tu feins, il feint. 

II possede Tart de feindre. 

t Trainer les choses en longueur. 

Je n'aime pas a faire des affaires avec 
cet homme, parce qu'il traine tou- 
jours les choses en longueur. 

Une preuve. C'est une preuve. 



S \ S'egarer, 1. 



A travers le, or Au travers de. 

Le boulet a passe* a travers la mu- 

raille. 
Je lui ai passe* mon epee au travers 

du corps. 

QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRIEME THEME. 2de Sec 

Un bon vieillard, etant fort malade, fit appeler son epouse, qui 
etait encore fort jeune, et lui dit: "Ma chere, vous voyez que ma 
derniere heure s'approche ; et que je suis force de vous quitter. C'est 
pourquoi, si vous voulez que je meure en paix. il fant que vous me 



444 



EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



fassiez une grace. Vous etes encore jeune, et sans doute vous vom 
remarierez, je le sais : mais je vous prie de ne pas prendre M. Louis-. 
car j'avoue que j'ai toujours ete tres-jaloux de lui, et que je le suis 
encore. Je mourrais done desespere, si vous ne me promettiez pas 
cela." La femme repondit : u Mon cceur, je vous supplie, que cela 
ne vous empeche pas de mourir en paix* car je vous assure que 
quand meme je voudrais Fepouser, je ne le pourrais pas, etant deja 
promise a un autre." 

It was customary with Frederick the Great, whenever a nevi 
soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three questions ; viz. " Hov 
old are you? How long have you been in my service? Are you 
satisfied with your pay and treatment?" It happened that a young 
soldier, born in France, who had served in his own country, desired 
to enlist in the Prussian service. His figure caused him to be im- 
mediately accepted; but he was totally ignorant of the German dia- 
lect; and his captain giving him notice that the king would question 
him in that tongue the first time he should see him, advised him 
at the same time to learn by heart the three answers that he was to 
make to the king. Accordingly he learned them by the next day : 
and as soon as he appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to inter- 
rogate him : but he happened to begin with him by the second ques- 
tion, and asked him, " How long have you been in my service V } 
"Twenty-one years," answered the soldier. The king, struck with 
his youth, which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket 
so long as that, said to him, much astonished, " How old are you ?" 
"One year, an't please your majesty, (n'en deplaise a Voire Majes- 
te") Frederick, more astonished still, cried, "You or I must cer- 
tainly be bereft of our senses." The soldier, who took this for the 
third question, replied firmly, (avec aplomb,) " Both, an't please your 
majesty." 



EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON .-^uatre-vingt-cinquieme Legon, 85?ne. 
Vocabulaibe. Ire Sec. 



To double. The double. 

Your share, your part. 

That merchant asks twice as much 

as he ought. 
You must bargain with him ; he will 

give it you for the ! 1 
You have twice your share. 



Doubler, 1. Le double. 

Votre part,' (fern.) 

t Ce marchand surfait du double. 

t II faut que vous marchandiez avec 

lui ; il vous rabattra la moitie. 
Vous avez double part. 



EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 



445 



Yon have three times your share. 

To renew. To stun. 

Wild, giddy. Open, frank, real. 

To shake somebody's hand. 

I told him yes. 

I told him no. 

To squeeze, press. 

To lay up, to put by. 

Put your money by. 

As soon as I have read my book I 

put it by. 
I do not care much about going to 

the play to-night. 
To satisfy one's self with a thing. 

I have been eating an hour, and I __ 
cannot satisfy my hunger. 

To be satisfied. 

To quench one's thirst. 

I have been drinking this half hour, 

but I cannot quench my thirst. 
To have one's thirst quenched. 
To thirst for, to be thirsty or dry. 
That is a blood-thirsty fellow. 

Qtjatre-vingt-cinquieme Th&me. Ire Sec. 

Un homme avait deux fils : Pun aimait a dormir la grasse ma- 
tinee, et Pautre etait tres-laborieux, etse levait toujours de tres-bonne 
heure. Celui-ci etant un jour sorti de grand matin, trouva une 
bourse remplie d'argent. II courut a son frere, lui faire part de sa 
bonne fortune, et lui dit: " Voyez-vous, Louis, ce qu 7 on gagne a se 
lever de bonne heure V u Ma foi," repondit son frere, " si celui a 
qui elle appartient ne s'etait pas leve de meilleure heure que moi, 
il ne laurait pas perdue. " 

On demandait a un jeune faineant, ce qui le faisait rester au lit si 
long-temps. " Je suis occupe," dit-il, "a tenir conseil tous les 
matins. Le travail me conseille de me lever, la paresse de rester 
couche ; et ils me donnent ainsi vingt raisons pour et contre. C'est 
a moi d'entendre ce qu'on dit des deux parts; et a peine la cause 
est-elle entendue qu^ le Hiner est pret." 

Tt was a beautiful turn given by a great lady, who, being (on ra- 
conte un beau trait d' — ) asked where her husband was, when he lay 
concealed (etre cache) for having been deeply concerned in a con- 
spiracy, (pour avoir trempe dans une conspiration.) resolutely (coura- 
geuscment) answered, she had hid him. This confession (un aveu) 



Vous avez triple part. 
Renouveler, 1. £tourdir, 2. 

Etourdi — e. Franc — franche. 

Serrer la main a quelqu'un. 
t Je lui dis qu'oui. 
t Je lui dis que non. 

Serrer. 

Serrez votre argent. 

Aussitot que j'ai lu mon livre, je le 

serre. 
Je ne me soucie pas beaucoup d'aller 

a la comedie ce soir. 
t Se rassasier, 1. 
t II y a une heure que je mange, et 

je ne puis me rassasier ; or, 
t Je mange depuis une heure, et je 

ne peux pas me rassasier. 
Etre rassasie. 
t Se desalt erer, 1. 

II y a une demi-heure que je bois, 
A mais je ne puis me desalterer. 
Etre desaltere. 
Etre alt ere. 
t C'est un homme altere de sang. 



446 



EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 



drew her before the king, who told her, nothing but her discovering 
where her lord was concealed could save her from the torture, 
(qu'elle ne pouvait echapper a la torture qu'en decouvrant la retraite 
de son epoux.) " And will that do?" (suffire*) said the lady. " Yes," 
says the king, "I will give you my word for it." "Then," says 
she, " I have hid him in my heart, where you will find him." 
Which surprising answer (cette reponse admirable) charmed her 
enemies. 

Vocabulaire. 2de Sec. 



On both sides, on every side. 

On all sides. 

Allow me, my lady, to introduce to 

you Mr. G., an old friend of our 

family. 
I am delighted to become acquainted 

with you. 
I shall do all in my power to deserve 

your good opinion. 

Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B., 
whose brother has rendered such 
eminent services to your cousin. 

How happy we are to see you at our 
house ! 

It is the prerogative of great men to 
conquer envy ; merit gives it birth, 
and merit destroys it. 

It is the finest country in Europe. 



De part et d' autre. 

De toutes parts. 

Permettez, Madame, que je vous pre- 
sente Monsieur de G., comme an- 
cien ami de notre famille. 

Je suis charmee, Monsieur, de faire 
votre connaissance. 

Je ferai tout ce qui seraenmonpou- 
voir, pour me rendre digne de vos 
bonnes graces. 

Mesdames, permettez que je vous 
presente M. de B., dont le frere a 
rendu de si eminents services a vo- 
tre cousin. 

Ah ! Monsieur, que nous sommes en- 
chantees de vous recevoir chez 
nous! 

C'est le privilege des grands hommes 
de vainere l'envie ; le merite la 
fait naitre, le merite la fait mou- 
rir. 

C'est le plus beau pays deV Europe. 



Obs. 173. The preposition in, connected with a relative superlative, is 
rendered in French by : de. 



Candia is one of the most agreeable 

islands in the Mediterranean. 
He lives in his retreat like a real 

philosopher. 

Obs. 174. Like is rendered by en when it means equal to. 

Vous vivez en roi. 



Candie est une des iles les plus agrea- 

bles de la Mediterranee. 
II vit dans sa retraite en vrai philo 

sophe. 

Ex. 



You live like a king. 
He acts like a madman. 
To behave like a blunderbuss. 
Who, where I am, knocks as if he 
were master ? 



II agit en furieux. 

Se conduire en etourdi. 

Qui frappe en maitre oii je suis? 



EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 447 

QuATRE-VINGT-CINQTJIEME THEME. 2de S^C. 

Quel est le pays le plus etendu, dans lequel, exactement le raeme 
langage est employe par la masse de la nation? Ce sont les Etats- 
Unis. Y parle-t-on le meme langage depuis le Nord jusqu'au sud ; 
et de Pest a Pouest? Oui, la masse de la langue est la meme. ce- 
pendant il y a des mots caracteristiques de presque toutes les locali- 
tes. Les habitants du Nord peuvent-ils comprendre sans difficulte, 
le langage de ceux du midi, qui demeurent quelque fois a 2500 
milles? Oui, ils le comprennent tout de suite * mais ils ne laissent 
pas de reconnaitre immediatement la partie des Etats-Unis ou lin- 
dividu qui leur parle, a recu son education. En est-il de meme en 
Europe? Non, pas a beaucoup pres, (far from it.) Chaque pro- 
vince, chaque comte, chaque district presque, a son langage jarti- 
culier, que les voisins n'entendent pas plus que nos indiens ameri- 
cains ne s ; entendent les uns les autres. Nos indiens ne s'entendent- 
ils pas tous ? Non, chaque tribn a sa langue exclusive, et ces tribus 
different autant par le langage que par le costume, (dress.) 

Cornelia, the illustrious (illustre) mother of the Gracchi, (des Grac- 
ques.) after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve 
children, applied herself to (se vouer d) the care of her family, with 
a wisdom (la sagesse) and prudence that acquired for (acquerir*) 
her universal esteem, (Vestime universelle.) Only three out of 
(Centre) the twelve lived to years of maturity, (Vdge mur ;) one 
daughter, Sempronia, whom she married to the second Scipio Afri- 
canus; and two sons, Tiberius and Cai'us, whom she brought up 
(elever) with so much care, that, though they were generally ac- 
knowledged (savoir generalement) to have been born with the most 
happy dispositions, (la disposition .) it was judged that they were still 
more indebted (etre redevable) to education than nature. The answer 
she gave (faire*) a Campanian lady (une dame de Campanie) con- 
cerning them (d leur sujet) is very famous, (fameux — se,) and includes 
in it (renfermer) great instruction for ladies and mothers. 

That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show, 
(etre passionne pour le faste et Veclat.) having displayed (etaler) her 
diamonds, (le diamant.) pearls, (la perle,) and richest jewels, earnestly 
desired Cornelia to let her see her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously 
(adroit ement) turned the conversation to another subject, to wait the 
return of her sons, who were gone to the public schools. When 
they returned, and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the 
Campanian lady, pointing to them, (monirer :) "These are my 
jewels, and the only ornaments (la parure) I prize, (priser. v ) And 
such ornaments, which are the strength (la force) and support (le 



448 



EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 



soutien) of society, add a brighter lustre (un plus grand lustre) to the 
fair (la beaute) than all the jewels of the East, (de V Orient.) 



EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON, 86th.— Quatre-vingt-sixieme Legon, 86me. 

PRESENT OR ACTIVE PARTICIPLE. 

Participe present. 

For its use and formation, see (§ 156£). Study it carefully. 

Vocabulaire. Ire Sec. 



The house being built, we occu- 
pied it. 

Having studied, I recited well. 

Not having studied, my cousin did 
not recite as well as I did. 

Not knowing the name of the gentle- 
man, I could not write it. 

The note becoming due on Sunday, 
it must be paid on Saturday. 

His brother-in-law's coat fitting him, 
he put it on. 

Understanding the language they 
spoke, I learned their secret. 

How did you find it out ? 

By listening to their conversation. 

"Where did you find her purse ? 

In the bushes, while looking for birds' 
eggs. 

We saw the fire while crossing. 

How is the plural of nouns and of 
adjectives formed ? 

By adding an s to the singular. 

How is the present participle formed ? 

By changing the ons of the first per- 
son plural into ant. 

How can they improve their writing ? 
By copying good copper-plate 
models. 

How does it happen that . . . ? 

How does it happen that he is so 
small, his parents being so tall ? 

Ir is one of those facts we see, but 

for which we cannot account. 
As mesmerism, I suppose. 



La maison etant batie, nous Poccu- 

pames. 
Ayant etudie, je recitai bien. 
N'ayant pas etudie, mon cousin ne 

recita pas aussi bien que moi. 
Ne sachant pas le nom du M., je ne 

pus pas l'ecrire. 
Le billet echeant dimanche, il faut 

le payer samedi. 
L'habit de son beau-frere lui seant, 

il le mit. 
Comprenant la langue qu'ils par- 

laient, j'appris leur secret. 
Comment le decouvrites-vous? 
En ecoutant leur conversation. 
Ou trouvates-vous sa bourse ? 
Dans les buissons, en cherchant des 

ceufs d'oiseaux. 
Nous vimes le feu en traversant. 
Comment forme-t-on le pluriel des 

noms et des adjectifs ? 
En ajoutant s au singulier. 
Comment forme-t-on le participe 

present ? 
En changeant le ons de la premiere 

personne du pluriel en ant. 
Comment peuvent-ils bonnifier leur 

ecriture ? En copiant de bona 

modeles graves. 
Comment se fait-il que ...?(§ 151.) 
Comment se fait-il qu'il soit si 

petit, son pere et sa mere etant si 

grands ? 
C'est un de ces faits qu'on voit, 

mais qu'on ne peut expliquer. 
Comme le mesmensme, je suppose 



The more you study the more you 
learn. 

Do not people learn by studying ? 

Yes, the more one studies the more 
one learns. 

Go up stairs and get me a silk hand- 
kerchief. 

Will you choose a good steel pen and 
write a letter to Julia ? 



EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON, (l.) 449 

Plus vous etudiezplus vous apprenez. 



N'apprend-on pas en etudiant ? 

Si fait, plus on etudie plus on ap- 

prend. 
Allez en haut me chercher un 

mouchoir de soie. 
Voulez-vous choisir une bonne plume 

d'acier pour ecrire a Julie ? 



Qtjatre-vingt-sixieme Theme. Ire Sec. 

La voiture etant cassee, que nous faut-il faire? II nous faut 
attendre qu ; elle soit raccommodee. Plus nous attendrons plus nous 
nous reposerons, et je vous assure que j'ai grand besoin de repos, 
car je suis tres-fatiguee ; ne Petes-vous pas ? Non, je ne le suis pas 
du tout. Comment se fait-il que vous ne le soyez pas ? Je ne sais 
pas comment cela se fait; mais, je ne me sens pas fatiguee, pas le 
moms du monde. II parait que plus vous voyagez, moins vous 
souffrez, et moi, au contraire, plus je voyage, plus je souftre. C 7 est 
peut-etre, parce que vous aviez peur des derniers chevaux que nous 
avons eus. C ; est vrai ; j'en ai eu peur; ils etaient vigoureux et 
fnngants, (frisky,) et je craignais qu'ils ne prissent le mors aux dents, 
(would run away.) Moi, je les ai trouves beaux, et voila tout. J'ai 
trouve qu'ils allaient vite, mais je n'ai pas eu la moindre peur. Quoi ! 
N ; avez-vous pas eu peur quand ils ont pris le galop? (began to 
gallop.) Non ; ce n'etait que le petit galop (hand-gallop or canter.) 
— Votre peur vous a plus fatiguee que le voyage. 

The more I look at her, the more I admire her, don't you 1 (62 s , 
N. 1.) No, on the contrary, the more I look at her, the less I admire 
her face, her manners and voice; but whose handsome carriage is 
this? Which one do you mean? for I see several. That dark 
green carriage, with the drivers seat (le siege du cocher) in white 
cloth.— I see it now, you are right, it is elegant; but I do not know 
whose it is.— Do you see it, Theodore? Yes. I do. Whose is it? 
I do not know. Do you, Aletta? I neither. ($171 — 9.) Does your 
cousin Eloise ? She neither.— Does any one? (62 3 , N. 1.) No, no- 
body here knows it. It looks like a new carriage, and is very tasty, 
{d'un gout exquis.)—} came down without my parasol: I must go 
back for it.— No. no. cousin, I will go up and get it for you. (monter 
le chercher.) Where shall I find it ? I had it in my hand, so that I 
must have left it either on the bed, the bureau, the toilet, or a chair; 
yon will certainly find it somewhere in the room. I shall be back 
in a minute. 

I cannot play that new polka. You will learn it by practising.— 



450 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 

Can you speak while playing on the piano % Yes, I can speak while 
playing a tune I know. Could you not speak while playing on the 
violin? No, I cannot; but I have seen a good many persons that 
could. Ladies can generally talk while playing the piano, can they 
not 1 ? Yes, as they frequently sing while playing; they do not find 
it more difficult to speak than to sing. 

Qijatre-vingt-sixieme Theme. 2de Sec. 

POLITENESS. 

When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis XIV. his man- 
ners, address, and conversation gained much on the esteem and 
friendship of that monarch. One day, in a circle of his courtiers, 
talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy manners, the 
king offered to lay a wager he would name an English nobleman 
that should excel in those particulars any Frenchman of his court. 
The wager was jocularly accepted, and his majesty was to choose 
his own time and place for the experiment. 

To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some months, 
till the courtiers thought he had forgotten it ; he then chose the fol- 
lowing stratagem : he appointed Lord Stair, and two of the most 
polished noblemen of his court, to take an airing with him after the 
breaking up of the levee ; the king accordingly came down the 
great staircase at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and com- 
ing up -to the side of the coach, instead of going in first, as usual, he 
pointed to the French lords to enter; they, upon this unusual 
ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honor; he 
then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and instantly sprang 
into the coach : the king and the French lords followed. 

When they were seated, the king exclaimed: " Well, gentlemen, 
I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager." " How 
so, sire ?" u Why," continued the king, " when I desired you both 
to go into the coach, you declined it : but this polite foreigner (point- 
ing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands of a king, though 
not his sovereign, than he instantly obeyed. 7 ' The courtiers hung 
down their heads in confusion, and acknowledged the justness of 
his majesty's claim. 

I cannot see the justness of that decision. The French lords, by 
refusing the honor proffered by the king, (que le roi leur offrait,) dis- 
played (monlrerent) less obedience, but more politeness. 

MILDNESS. 

The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the course of 
bis life, commanded admiration from all who knew him ; but in no 



EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 45a 

one instance, perhaps, more than the following. Sir Isaac had a 
favorite dog, which he called Diamond; and being one day called 
out of his study into the next room. Diamond was left behind. When 
Sir Isaac returned, having been absent but a few minutes, he had 
the mortification to find that Diamond having thrown down alighted 
candle among some papers, the nearly finished labor of many years 
was in flames, and almost consumed to ashes. This loss, as Sir 
Isaac Newton was then very far advanced in years, was irretrieva- 
ble ; yet. without once striking the dog, he only rebuked him with 
this exclamation : " ! Diamond ! Diamond ! thou little knowest the 
mischief thou hast done." 

Zeuxis entered into a contest of art with Parrhasius. The former 
painted grapes so truly, that birds came and pecked at them.. The 
latter delineated a curtain so exactly, that Zeuxis, coming in, said : 
li Take away the curtain, that we may see this piece." And finding 
his error, said : " Parrhasius, thou hast conquered : I only deceived 
birds, thou an artist. 7; 

Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes; the birds came again and 
pecked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a passion, 
and saying, " My boy must be very badly painted/''* daubed his face, 
(lui barbouilla la figure.) 

The inhabitants of a great town offered to Marshal de Turenne 
a hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take 
another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered 
them : " As your town is not on the road I intend to march, I cannot 
accept the money you offer me." 

A corporal of the life-guard of Frederick the Great, who had a 
great deal of vanity, but at the same time was a brave fellow, wore 
a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket-bullet instead of a watch, 
which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined one day to 
rally him, said : " Apropos, corporal, you must have been very frugal 
to buy a watch : it is six o'clock by mine ; tell me what it is by 
yours'?*' The soldier, who guessed the king's intention, instantly 
drew out the bullet from his fob, and said : " My watch neither 
marks five nor six o'clock; but it tells me every moment, that it is 
my duty to die for your majesty.*' " Here, my friend," said the king, 
quite affected, " take this watch, that you may be able to tell the 
hour also." And he gave him his watch, which was adorned with 
brilliants. 

AN AFFECTING NARRATIVE OF THE RECOVERY OF EYESIGHT. 

The operator. Mr. Grant, having observed the eyes of his blind 
patient, and convinced his friends and relations, among others the 



452 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 

Rev. Mr. Kerswell, that it was highly probable he should be able to 
remove the obstacle which prevented the use of his sight; all who 
knew and had any regard for the young man. or curiosity to be pre- 
sent when one of full age and understanding received a new sense, 
assembled themselves on this ocasion. Mr. Kerswell, being particu- 
larly interested, desired the whole company, in case the blindness 
should be cured, to let the patient make his own observations, with- 
out enabling him to discover his friends by their voices. Among 
several others, the mother, brother, sisters, and a, young lady for 
whom he had a passion, were present. The work was performed 
with great skill and dexterity. When the patient first received the 
dawn of light, there appeared such an ecstasy in his action, that he 
seemed ready to swoon away in the surprise of joy and wonder. 
The surgeon stood before him with his instruments in his hands. 
The young man observed him from head to foot, after which he 
su/veyed himself as carefully, and seemed to compare himself, and 
think they were exactly alike, except the instruments, which he 
took for part of his hands. When he had continued in this amaze- 
ment some time, his mother could no longer bear the agitations of 
so many passions, but fell upon his neck, crying out, u My son, my 
son." The young man knew her voice, and could speak no more 
than, a Oh! me, are you my mother?' 7 — and fainted. 

The whole room were, you will easily conceive, busily employed 
in recovering him, except the young lady who was attached to him, 
whose agitation was so great that she shrieked in the loudest man- 
ner; — that voice seemed to have had a sudden effect upon him, as he 
recovered; and he showed a double curiosity in observing her, as 
she spoke and called to him, till at last he exclaimed : " What has 
been done to me ? — Whither am T carried ? — Ts all this about me ? 
— The thing I have so often heard of, is this the light? — Is this see- 
ing ? — Were you always thus happy, when you said you were glad 
to see each other'? — Where is Tom who used to lead me? But I 
could now, methinks, go anywhere without him." He offered to 
move, but seemed afraid of everything around him. He was told 
that for some time he must suffer his eyes to be covered, and Tom 
to lead him as usual, which he consented to with great reluctance. 

He was at last prevailed on to have his eyes bound, in which 
situation they kept him in a dark room, until it was judged proper 
to let the organ receive its objects without further precaution. During 
the time of this darkness, he bewailed himself in the most distress- 
ful manner, and accused all his friends, complaining that some 
incantation had been wrought on him. and some strange magic used 
to deceive him into an opinion that he had enjoyed what they called 



EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 453 

6ight. He added j that the impression then let in upon his soul, 
would certainly distract him, if he were not so at that present time. 

After some days, it was thought proper to take the bandage from 
his eyes, and the young lady whom he loved was instructed to do it ; 
as well to endear herself to him by such a circumstance, as to 
moderate his ecstasies, by the persuasion of a voice which had so 
much power over him as hers ever had. _ 

When this beloved object began to take off the binding from his 
eyes, she spoke to him as follows : 

"My dear William, I am now taking the binding off, though, 
when I consider what I am doing, I tremble with the apprehension, 
that though I have from my very childhood loved you, dark as you 
were, and though you have conceived so strong a love for me, yet 
you will find there is such a thing as beauty , which may ensnare you 
into a thousand passions of which you are innocent, and take you 
from me for ever : but before I hazard this, tell me in what manner 
the love you always professed to me entered into your heart, for 
its usual admission is at the eyes. ;? 

The young man answered — " Dear Lydia — If I am to lose by sight 
the soft emotions which I have always felt when I have heard your 
voice : if I am no more to distinguish the step of her I love when 
she approaches me, but to change that sweet and frequent pleasure 
for such an amazement as I knew the little time I lately saw ; or, if 
I am to have anything besides which may take from me the sense 
I have, of what appeared most pleasing to me at that time, the sight 
of you, pull out these eyes, before they lead me to be ungrateful to 
you, or undo myself. I wished for sight only to behold you; pull 
them out if they are to make me forget you. ;; 

With these assurances, Lydia was well satisfied. In all his con- 
versation with her he showed but very faint ideas of anything which 
had not been received at the ears. 

INTERESTING NARRATIVE. 

The following is an extract from a letter written by a young mar- 
ried lady in India, to her mother in England, and must be consi- 
dered as a beautiful specimen of affection, fortitude, and piety. 

" About three o'clock we left Rose farm, and at half past five saw 
the ship coming towards us with many sails set; but before I pro- 
ceed to say another syllable, I must caution you strongly, and par- 
ticularly, my dear mamma, against giving way to your feelings, but 
continually bear in mind that all is past, and I am, thank God. now 
safe and well, as is my dear brother Frank. The story 1 must relate 
is certainly disastrous, and might have been dreadful ; but for the 



454 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 

mercy of Providence, who in this instance appears to have stretched 
forth his omnipotent arm to rescue us from a precipitate and shock- 
ing end (namely, a watery grave), almost miraculously. The cir- 
cumstances were nearly, as the terrible agitation I underwent would 
permit my memory its exercise, as follows : — The ship was going with 
a fine breeze at the rate of four miles an hour over (or against) a 
strong ebb tide running nearly at the same rate ; and, as it was in 
our favour, we soon came close to the ship, and the officer, keeping 
watch on deck, seeing who it was, ordered a rope to be thrown, 
which our boatman caught and fastened to a part of the boat, in 
order that the men in the ship (as is customary) might pull us to the 
side; but Frank, when they began to do so, finding the tide too 
strong, and the progress the ship was making against it, too great 
for it to be accomplished with facility, called to his chief officer, Mr. 
G., to request the pilot to let fly some particular sail, which request, 
after a little hesitation, was complied with 3 but Frank, perceiving 
the difficulty of our coming along side continuing to exist, ordered 
Mr. G. again to tell the pilot to back the topsails; Mr. G. returned 
for answer, " The pilot won't, Sir. ;? Brother then called out to the 
pilot, John, to whom he personally repeated his request, adding, " For 
God's sake comply, for there is a lady in the boat, and you will 
certainly pull us under water. ;; I, through the Venetian, saw the pilot 
shake his head, and heard Frank call out to let go the rope, which had 
been thrown from the ship to us; but the men not executing imme- 
diately their order, what he had foretold actually occurred ; we were 
dragged under water. Oh ! what a dreadful moment ; no words 
can express the feelings such a moment creates, and no one, except 
those who have been placed in a similar situation, can conceive the 
agony, the horror of it. The boat we were in is called a boleah ; it 
is a large boat with a thing like a house on the top of it; therefore, 
instead of the cabin being below, as in English pleasure yachts, it 
is on the deck. When the accident happened I was alone in the 
cabin with all the baggage, beds, &c. ; my maid was silting near 
the door, and brother was at the further extremity of the boat. He, 
when under water, let go the rope which fastened us to the ship, 
and by this means saved every soul but one from perishing, for the 
boat, instead of sinking, upset and floated with the bottom upwards. 
Poor Frank with great difficulty (he cannot swim), from the in- 
cumbrance of a great coat, got above water, and held on to the 
bottom of the b< >at. My proceedings inside were attended with more 
difficulty. I possessed during the whole time entire presence of 
mind, which, though it saved me, added trebly to the dreadfulness 



EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 455 

of my situation. I was as composed as I am at this moment. 1 
felt death to be inevitable, and resigned myself to the mercy of 
God. I saw my poor servant sink (I thought for ever), and heard 
with firmness, though with agonized despair, her last faint exclama- 
tion of Oh Ma ; Oh Ma. the funeral or death cry of the natives. The 
boxes. &c, in the cabin had fallen to the ceiling, which had of 
course, from the situation of the boat, become the undermost part; 
they fell fortunately without injuring me: and I stood on the same 
floor with them, and made an effort to open the door, but, from the 
unusual position, it resisted my attempt. The water now began to 
rush through the Venetians all round into the cabin, and I felt that 
I was consuming fast the air of which any further supply was totally 
impossible; therefore, two dreadful deaths presented themselves, — 
drowning and suffocation. Perfectly sensible and collected, I made 
another more violent attempt to open the door, in which I succeeded, 
and the prospect before me made my fate appear more certain even 
than before, and undoubtedly more dreadful ; for the ceiling the 
boat made over my head, rendered it only sufficiently light for me 
to behold the dismally dark green of the water all round. Even in 
this horrible state my recollection never failed me for an instant ; 
indeed, the effect was contrary, for my memory was almost cruelly 
retentive; and actually while I was deliberating which course to 
take, or rather which death to die, I thought of you all. of my home, 
my country, my husband: and indeed every circumstance of my 
life passed in review before me. Beginning to gasp a little, I found 
the horrors of drowning diminish, and being perfectly aware that 
either way my sufferings would soon be over, 1 again commended 
myself to the Almighty, and placing my hands close down to- my 
sides (not a drop of water had yet touched me), I resigned myself 
to that element, knowing that the tide would soon carry me from 
underneath the boat, and that there was a possibility of my being 
able to get at the top of it. From my perfect composure, even 
when immersed, I was convinced that any action of my body would 
counteract the buoyant effect of the water, therefore I remained per- 
fectly still : my eyes were open, and I soon perceived, from the color 
of the water becoming lighter, that I was rising. When my head 
came above, I saw I was only a few yards from the boat, to which 
the tide carried me ; and, with an effort so natural to a drowning 
wretch, endeavored to seize it: but the bottom was coppered, and 
so perfectly smooth that I only could hold by pressing my extended 
hands, arms, and cheek, to its slippery surface ; this was no hold, and 
the next wave carried me off again with my head the second time 



456 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 

under water. Though nearly exhausted, my presence of mind never 
forsook me ; I was buoyed up again, and reached the boat as before \ 
and as I now saw Frank ; s head above water, with some of the dan- 
dies (boatmen), I increased my efforts to hold on, for the desire of 
life was become stronger, though struggling with the water. I 
called out, u Frank, I am safe, do not be alarmed. ?; At this moment 
he got on the top of the boat, and, crawling to the place where I 
was holding on, entreated me to give him my hands that he might 
pull me up; but I knew the impossibility of his doing so, and felt 
that even to quit my precarious hold would be ruin, for my strength 
was too much exhausted to permit me to use any further exertion 
of body : my mind was as vigorous as at first. Danger levels all 
distinction. A poor dandy rose near me j and, partly to support 
myself and save him, I grasped his hand, and at the same time got 
a finger through a small hole which was bored for the purpose of 
letting the water off the deck of the boat; these holds were better, 
and I kept them for a considerable time, though up to my throat in 
water. In short, my woman was saved, and, with the boatman, 
like brother, got on the top. The ship meanwhile was going on, 
and, the tide drifting us in a contrary direction, we were soon three 
or four miles apart. Frank's officers were much concerned, as were 
his men, of whom all the best, headed by the Syrang, jumped over- 
board, and swam on shore. Shame to say, the ship was not pro- 
vided with one boat fit for use ; that which they lowered down 
sunk immediately, and the second officer, who had got into her, was 
saved by a rope thrown to him from the ship. The men who swam 
on shore had three or four miles to run before they came to the spot 
where we were, therefore imagine our situation. Brother, when I 
could hold no longer, seized my hands, and with herculean strength 
pulled me up, and seated me near him. We now began the mourn- 
ful task of numbering our people, and found only one man missing; 
all the remainder (twelve souls, including ourselves) being seated at 
the top of the boat. Night was fast approaching, and the melancholy 
cry of the poor creatures, in this perilous situation, of u Oh Ma, Oh 
Ma," uttered at regular intervals, increased the wretchedness of the 
scene. Frank, in a state of distraction on my account, hallooed 
repeatedly for assistance, but none came till quite night, and 
for more than three hours were we in this miserable condition, 
when boats came, and brother's ship's crew appeared on the shore." 



V. VALUE'S 

GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 
GRAMMAIRE SYNOPTIQUE. 



DIRECTIONS. 

Direction 1. — The pupil must be informed that, in English, to the ques- 
tion : Have you read the book ? he may answer, Yes, Sir, / have ; No, 
Miss, / have not. To the question : Would they buy the paper ? he may 
answer: Yes, they would, or No, they would not. But the same liberty is 
not allowed in French, and he must then either stop after Yes, or Yes, Sir, 
Oui, or Oui, M., or Non, or Non, Mile. ; otherwise he must give an answer 
containing the subject, the verb, and the objective. To the first question : I 
have it, or I have not got it ; to the second, They would buy it, or they would 
not buy it. 
Do you see the fans ? I do. f Voyez-vous les eventails ? Je les 

vois. 
Has he taken them ? He has not. ! Les a-t-il pris ? II ne les a pas pris. 
Would you have bought them ? I j Les auriez-vous achetes ? Je 

would. Taurais fait. 

Dir. 2. — Every attending word, whether article or pronoun, showing the 
gender and number of nouns, must be repeated before every noun in the 
same sentence. 

II re$ut un chapeau, une epee, des 

pistolets, &c. 
Nous vimes Z'homme, la femme, les 

enfants, et les domestiques. 
Cette grammaire, cet encrier, et ces 
crayons sont a raoi. 



He received a hat, a sword, pistols, &c. 

We saw the man, woman, children, 

and servants. 
This grammar, this inkstand, and 

these pencils are mine. 



And likewise the preposition governing several nouns or verbs must be 
repeated before every one of them, although it is not in English. 



He speaks of his brother, sister, and 
cousins. 

He likes to write, read, and play. 

Tell the cook to go to market, to buy 
eggs, to bring them here, and to 
make an omelet with them. 

39 



II parle de son frere, de sa soeur, et de 

ses cousins. 
II aime d ecrire, a lire, et a jouer. 
Dites au cuisinier d'aller au marche, 

d'y acheter des ceufs, de les ap- 

porter ici , et eTen faire une omelette. 

($ 4, 20, 25.) 

(457) 



*0O GRAMMATICAL S1NOPSI8. 

Dm. 3,— On Objective Pronouns. The French word lui, translating, 
sometimes, to him, to her, and sometimes merely him or her, is a source of 
constant difficulty. Should to him or to her be always used, when implied, 
in English, the difficulty would, in a great measure, be removed ; for, it 
would be easy to remember that, send an apple to him, and send an apple 
to her, are both translated by, envoy ez-ixsi une pomme. But, instead of 
using the preposition to, the Americans usually suppress it, and say : Send 
him an apple ; send her an apple. Hence arises the difficulty. As him, 
unconnected with the preposition, is translated by le, and her, by la, the 
learner is induced, whenever the preposition is omitted, (as in the last two 
Ex.) to use le or la instead of lui, and very naturally too. One way 
to overcome this difficulty, is to examine mentall* whether the preposition 
could be used in English; for instance, if, instead si send him an apple, 
it would be correct to say : send an apple to him. If so, then lui must 
be used. 

But a still better dependence is to be placed on the French verb itself, 
If it requires the preposition a to govern its indirect object, lui must be used, 
not otherwise. How is this to be ascertained ? By consulting the list of 
verbs, ($ 156—5.) 

N. B. The same direction applies to the indirect pronoun leur, which 
translates both them, and to them. 

The other objective pronouns do not present the same difficulty, because 
they are the same, whether direct or indirect, (me, te, nous, vous, $47.) 

Dir. 4. — On Objective Nouns. The preposition connected with an objec- 
tive pronoun, is sometimes suppressed, or at least connected with the pro- 
noun so as to form a single word. Ex. Me, is used for a moi, to me. Lui, 
for d lui, a elle, to him, to her, &c. — and then both in English and French 
there is an inversion or change in the position of the pronoun ; which, in 
English, is placed before the objective case ; while, in French, it is put still 
nearer the beginning of the sentence, viz : before the verb. Will you give 
a pencil to me? is the grammatical construction, which, by the suppression 
of the preposition to, and the inversion it necessitates, becomes will you 
give me a pencil ? in which me and pencil appear in an inverted order. 
Voulez-vous me donner un crayon, is the only way the French have to trans- 
late both the grammatical and inverted construction ; because the sup- 
pression of the preposition a, which necessarily takes place, (there being 
only one object, 51,) forces the pronoun me to be placed before the infinitive 
donner. But mark this carefully. The preposition connected with the 
objective noun is never suppressed in French, although it is frequently 
done in English by means of an inversion. (§5H.) The phrase : Give Mary 
an apple, in which there is an inversion, is more used than give an apple, 
to Mary, although the latter is the true grammatical construction. But in 
French it is only the last order that is to be translated, and never the former. 
Donnez une pomme a Marie ; and never: donnez Marie une pomme. 
I will send John the knife, (the knife | J'enverrai le couteau a Jean. 

to John.) 
She wrote her mother a letter, (a let- EUe gcrivit une lettre a sa mere. 

ter to her mother.) 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 459 

Show Sarah the present I made you. Montrez a Sara le present que je 

vous ai fait. 
Tell Andrew the French of : His I Dites a Andre le Fran§ais de : His 

horse. horse. 

Whenever you meet with a similarly constructed sentence, give it its full 
grammatical extent and translate it. 

Dm. 5. — When you do not know the infinitive of a verb, find it in a dic- 
tionary, and any of its persons may be formed by the rules given for the for- 
mation of the different tenses. 

Dm. 6. — A simple sentence consists of a verb and its nominative ; I ad- 
mire, is a simple sentence. You do so well, is another. A compound sentence 
consists of two or more simple sentences, connected by a conjunction or a 
relative pronoun. I admire what you do so well ; I suppose that you know it. 
He speaks and writes eloquently. In English, the conjunction that, and the 
relative pronouns whom, which, that, are usually omitted, as: 1. I believe 
you know it, {that omitted.) 2. I know the person you call, {whom left out.) 
3. I read the book he has written, {which.) 4. He learns the lesson you 
gave him, {that.) In French, neither the relative pronoun nor the conjunc- 
tion is omitted. Hence, translate the four sentences above by: 1. Je crois 
que vous le savez. 2. Je connais la personne que vous appelez. 3. Je lis 
le livre Qu'il a ecrit. 4. II apprend la lecon que vous lui avez donnee. 
Avez-vous mon couteau ? Je crois que oui; que is used because oui is 
equivalent to : j'ai votre couteau ; which, being a simple sentence, must be 
connected by que with the former, je crois, to form the compound sentence* 
Je crois que f ai votre couteau, or je crois que oui. (21 1 .) 

Dm. 7. — Much, many, enough, little, &c, are called adjectives in English, 
when connected with nouns. In French, combien, beaucoup, assez, peu, 
trop, autant, plus, moins, guere, un peu, &c, are considered as adverbs of 
quantity; and as such, having no affinity with nouns, they require a con- 
necting link, which is the preposition de. Hence, always use de after beau- 
coup, combien, &c, before the following noun, and repeat it before every 
one. When the noun is left out, the partitive pronoun en, placed before 
the verb, and repeated before every one, takes its place and that of the pre- 
position de. {% 47, N. 4. 12 1 - 2 &c.) 

Dm. 8. — In English, to form an interrogation with the verbs to be and to 
have, the pronoun nominative is placed after the verb ; for instance, I have, 
affirmation; by transposition becomes have I? interrogation. You have; 
have you ? — I am ; am I ? — You are ; are you ? &c. 

This way of forming the interrogation tallies with the general rule in 
French, which is to put the pronoun nominative after the verb, not only 
with the two verbs avoir, to have, and etre, to be ; but with every other 
verb. So : J'ai, becomes ai-je ? Je suis, suis-je ? Je dois, dois-je ? Je 
regois, recois-je ? &c. 

Should the Americans use the same mode of interrogation with other 
verbs as they do with to have and to be, students would meet with no diffi- 
culty; but instead of transposing the pronouns, they.retain the affirmative 
form and use auxiliaries, such as do, did, shall, &c. For instance : I owe, 
does not become interrogative by saying : owe I ? but by putting do before 



460 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

I owe, as, do I owe? do I receive ? &c, for the present tense. Did I owel 
did I receive? for the imperfect. Shall and will, for the future tense ; 
should, would, &c, for the potential, &c. So that when the student wishes 
to form an interrogation, in French, he naturally looks out for a word cor- 
responding to the auxiliary, do, or did, or shall, &c, and feels much disap- 
pointed when told there is none. It is for a long time with him a source of 
perplexity. When he discovers that do is sometimes translated by fait, he 
is constantly using fait wherever does occurs ; when told it is wrong, he 
naturally feels dispirited. It is hoped that the full explanation, here given, 
will convince the learner that the principal use of do, did, &c. is to form 
interrogations and negations in English, 1 and that since he can, with the 
verbs to have and to be, interrogate without using do, did, &c, so he can in 
all French verbs. If he is once convinced of this idea, a great cause of per- 
plexity will be removed. 

The French, however, have another mode of interrogating, which consists 
inputting: est-ce que (28 1 ) before the affirmative form of every person, 
which can be used interrogatively. Ex. J'ai, I have. Est-ce que fail 
have I? Tu es, thou art. Est-ce que tues? art thou? II lit, he reads. 
Est-ce qxCil lit ? does he read? Nous devons, we owe. Est-ce que nous 
devons? do we owe? Vous savez, you know. Est-ce que vous savez? 
do you know ? lis aiment, they love. Est-ce qu'ils aiment ? do they love ? 
From these examples it is evident that this mode of interrogation may be 
used in every case, but it must be employed in the first person singular of 
some verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would produce a diffi- 
cult or an unpleasant sound. 1st. When that first person is a monosyllable, 
as : je sens, je prends, je tends, jefonds. 2d. When the last syllable sounds 
like je, such as: je mange, je range, &c. ; and others, such as : funis,je 
permets, j' off re, &c. 

Dm. 9. — 'The student may easily notice that the parfait is formed by 
merely adding the past participle to the well known expressions f ai, je 
Vai, je neVaipas, je n'ai rien, f en ai, je les ai, &c. As je l'ai eu, (31 2 ) 
je ne l'ai pas eu, je n'ai rien eu, j'en ai eu, je les ai eus, -fee, and so of any 
other past participle. Je l'ai vu, je les ai don7ies,yen ai envoye, &c. 



RULES. 

Rule 1. — Every preposition governs the infinitive mood, except the pre- 
position en (in) which governs the present participle. (20 1 .) 

Note 1. Apres, (after) like every other preposition, (except en,) must be 
followed by the infinitive mood in French, but there is this peculiarity 
respecting apres, that it can be followed only by the infinitive of the auxi- 
liaries avoir or Hre ; as, Apres avoir parle, after havi?ig spoken. Apres 
etre parti, after having departed. Apres vous etre leve, after having 

l To form a neg-ative, do, did, &c, are invariably used, for instance; I go, does 
not become negative by saying : I go not ; but by : I do not go. I went is not I went 
not, but I did not go, &c, &c. As the French form their negations in a different 
way, the student must not looAi for any tiling corresponding to do, did, &c, in tho 
French negatives. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 461 

risen. Now, although in English you may omit the auxiliary having, and 
say : after speaking ; after departing ; after rising ; it cannot be done in 
French. ^O 1 .) 

R. 2. — When two verbs come together, the second is in the infinitive mood, 
voulez-vous faire, (18 1 ,) if the first is neither to have (avoir; or to be (.etre) 
used as auxiliary of a past tense. Of course, if the two verbs are connected 
by a preposition, such as : d, to, de, of, from, &c, it governs the second verb in 
the infinitive, according to R. 1., and the preposition must be repeated before 
every verb. (20 1 .) 

R. 3. — Do you speak before you listen ? There are in this sentence two 
verbs, speak and listen, connected by a preposition and having the same nomi- 
native, you. Whenever that is the case, the French dispense with the second 
nominative by using the infinitive mood after the preposition, (R. 1,) and 
say : Parlez-vous avant d' ecouter ? which corresponds to : Do you speak before 
listening ? (28 2 , Obs. 65.) 

R. 4. — When the nominatives are different, as: He writes after you hs re 
spoken, the French use the English construction, and say : 1 1 ecrit apres que 
vous avez parle. They, of course, insert the conjunction que, left out in 
English, but never omitted in French. 

Note. — After that conjunction que the verb is frequently in the subjunc- 
tive mood. ^§ 151.) 

R. 5. — When two or more nouns, two or more adjectives, or two or more 
verbs govern a noun or a verb, they must govern it without any preposition, 
or with the same. 

If they require different prepositions, see (§ 140 — 9.) 

R. 6. — Every French preposition precedes the word it governs, is never 
separated from it, and is repeated before every word. (§ 117, 163, &c.) 



ARTICLES. 

§ 1. — Articles are used in French to show the gender and number of 
nouns. Although French grammarians admit of but one article, viz : the 
definite, le, la, les, (the), two others are usually introduced in English- 
French grammars, i. e. the indefinite, un or une, a, an, 1 and the partitive, 
du. de la. des, some. 

It seems to me that the name of Article might appropriately be given to 
all the words which point out the gender or number of nouns. Accordingly, 
we might call : 

1. Man % ma, mes, my, (§29,) &c, possessive articles, (because, besides 

1 And likewise the following : 

Aucun, tout, any, &c. Indefinite Articles. Tout homme I peu t le faire. 

Toute femme ) 
Avez-vous aucun ami (aucune connaissance,) a Paris ? 
39* 



462 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



showing the gender and number, they indicate possession,) instead of naming 
them possessive adjective pronouns. 

2. Ce, cet, cette, ces, this, these, &c, demonstrative articles or adjectives, 
instead of demonstrative adjective pronouns. (§36.) 

3. Quel ? quels ? quelle ? quelles ? which ? interrogative articles, instead 
of interrogative adjective pronouns. 

4. Deux, trois, &c, numeral articles. 1 

§2. In English, articles are not, as in French, used to show the gender 
and number, but to limit the signification of the noun. From this funda- 
mental distinction arises the great difference in the use of the articles in 
the two languages. 



INDEFINITE ARTICLE.— Article Indefini. 



Singulier. — Tin, masculin. 

feminin. 
Pour un, avec une, d'un, a une. 
Pluriel. — Des. Quelques (14 1 .) 
Pour des. Pour quelques. 

Avec des. A quelques. 

De quelques. 



Une, 



§3.— Singular. A or an, (12 3 ,8i, &c.) 

For a, with a, of a, to a. 
Plural. — Some, any, a few. 
For some. For a few. 

With some. To a few. 

Of, or from some, or a few. 

And so it unites with every other preposition, both in the singular and 
plural. 

§4. — Some, any, a few, are frequently understood or left out in English, 
but never in French. Ex. 
He admires some modern authors. II admire quelques auteurs modernes. 



We have friends in town. 
Have you received letters ? 



Nous avons des amis en ville. 
Avez-vous recu quelques lettres ? 



§5. — In the singular it is generally used alike in both languages, and re- 
peated before every noun, so as to mark its gender. As : 
He has a pencil, a ruler, and a book. | II a un crayon, une regie, et un livre. 

§6. — -1st Exception. Cent, (14 2 ,) a hundred ; mille, a thousand; long-temps 
(36 2 ,) a long time ; beaucoup, (13 1 ,) a great deal, a great many, in French have 
no article. 

§7. — 2d Exception. Before a noun of weight, measure, and number, 
connected with its price, use the definite le, la, les, not the indefinite 

article. 



Butter sells at twenty cents a pound. 

This cloth is worth three dollars a 

yard ; the metre (65 2 .) 
Coal sells at five dollars a ton. 



Le beurre se vend vingt cents la 

livre. 
Ce drap vaut trois dollars la verge ; 

le metre. 
Le charbon se vend cinq dollars le 

tonneau. 



l This classification may be new in an English-French grammar, although long ago 
thought of by some of the best French grammarians. See Gram, des Gram, on 
Articles. Note 234. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 463 



ARTICLE DEFINITE. 

§8. — The. Singular masculine before a consonant: le. 

Singular feminine before a consonant : la. 

Singular mas. or fern, before a vowel or k mute: V . 
Plural mas. or fem. before vowels or consonants : les. 
For the, Pour le, pour la, pour P, pour les. 

Before the, Avant le, la, 1' or les. 

And so on with every preposition, except de, (of or from,) and a, (to, at, 
&c.) ; and every preposition ending with de and d. These two prepositions, 
in their connexion with the definite article, present an exception which is 
easily explained and understood, but which much practice alone cui enable 
the student to use with accuracy. 

Of the, from the, sing, fem., is de la, (the preposition and article remain- 
ing separated before a consonant.) 

Of, from the, sing. mas. or fem., before a vowel or h mute is: de V 
Thus far the connexion is formed regularly, as in English, that is, the pre- 
position de and the article la or V remain separate : de la, de V . But it is 
different with the masculine singular. 

Of, from the, sing, mas., regularly, would be de le, but those two words 
are, before a consonant, always contracted into du. 1 

Of, from the: plur, mas. or fem., instead of de les, is contracted into 
des. 1 
To the, fem. sing., remains in two words : (regular) a la. 

mas. or fem. before a vowel or h mute, is (regular) a V . 

mas. sing, instead of: ale in two words, contracts irregularly 'into an. 2 

plur. mas. and fem. instead of d les, contracts irregularly into aux. 2 

§ 9. — The contraction du, being the union of the preposition de and the 
article le, ought never to be used when that article is not required. Then, 
translate of my friend, by de mon ami, and never by du mon ami, which 
would be equivalent to de le mon ami, of the my friend, in which the 
article le is unnecessarily introduced. But, translate of yours, by du votre, 
because, yours without article in English, being le votre, with the article, 
in French, of yours becomes de le votre, or its contraction, du votre. And 
so it must be, whenever the article le is admitted by the French construc- 
tion, although it may be rejected from the English. 

Near being pres de, near the becomes pres de le, or, contracted, pres du. 
Near the castle, is then pres du chateau. 

The very same process applies to des, which is the contraction of de 



1 When m French you meet with : de le, de les, jfc is as a preposition and a pro- 
noun objective : II parle de le faire, he speaks of doing it il parle de les faire, he 
speaks of doing them; and not a preposition and article. In the latter case, de le, 
singular, before a consonant, de les, plural, are never used, but their contractions, 
du, des. II parle du capitaine, des capitaines. He speaks of the captain, of the 
captains. 

2 "When you meet with a le, d les, it is as a preposition and pronoun objective : II 
pense a U Oiire, a les faire; he thinks of doing it, of doing them; and not as a pre- 
position nnd article. Instead of a le, use au. Instead of a les, use aux. II parle 
iu capitaine. aux capitaines; he speaks to the captain, to the captains. 



464 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

les. Then, of my friends, (plur.,) must not be des mes amis, which would 
be equivalent to of the my friends ; but de mes am\$. 

§ 10. — Des (contraction of de les, preposition and article plural) is not, 
[and mind it carefully] the plural of de, which, being a preposition, is inva- 
riable ; but that of du (contraction of dele, preposition and article masculine 
singular.) 

§ 11. — Near the, pres du, pres de la, pris de V , pres des. Let this be the 
model for every preposition ending with de, when it is to be connected with 
the definite article, but not otherwise. (51 K] 

$ 12, — To the, for the masculine, should be a le, but it p always con- 
tracted into au, before a consonant. To the dictionary, au dictionnaire. To 
my dictionary, is not au mon dictionnaire, which would be equivalent to 
d le mon dictionnaire, to the my dictionary ; but d mon dictionnaire, 
leaving out the article. To mine, must be au mien ; because mine, is le 
mien, &c. 

§ 13, — As far as, being : jusqu'a ; as far as the, will be jusqu 1 au, jusqu'd 
la, jusqu'd V , jusqu 1 aux. As far as the castle, literally jusqu' d le chateau, 
which, contracted, becomes jusqu' au chateau. Take jusqu 7 au, &c, as the 
model of every preposition ending with d, in its connexion with the definite 
article, but not otherwise. (38 1 .) 

To the, in the plural, should be d les, but it is always contracted into aux. 
To the children ; aux enfant s. To my children, should be d mes enfant* , 
and not aux mes enfants, which would be equivalent to d les mes enfant*, 
(to the my children.) 

§ 14. — The function of the article being to show the gender and number 
of French nouns, and not merely to limit their signification, (§ 2,) we deduce 
from it these general principles. 

§ 15. — The definite article must be placed before every noun, if that noun 
is not determined by some other qualifying, determining, or limiting word. 
(14 1 , Ex.) See (§ 140 — 6) for an exception. 

§ 16. — Proper names of countries require a French gender or number ; 
hence the article that accompanies each one. Le Bresil. La France. Les 
Etats-Unis. Those ending in e mute are mostly feminine, all others mas- 
culine. (§ 140 — 8.) Exceptions among nouns. 

§ 17. — Proper names of individuals, pointing out their own gender, require 
no article. Alexandre, Jeanne, Philadelphie. 

$ 18. — When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, the article 
is not repeated before each. The old and brave soidier. Le vieux et brave 
soldat. Le vieux et le brave soldat, would indicate that there are two ; one 
old and one brave. 

PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 

Although there is in English grammars no article so called, yet, as the 
English-French grammars have it, and as it has some or any for correspond- 
ent in English, we insert it here. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 465 

§19. — First Partitive, before a noun. 

Some or any, before sing. mas. beginning with a consonant : du. 

" % " " sing. fern. '* " " de la. 

" " " sing. m. or f. " " a vowel: de V. 

" the plural " u " des. 

§20. — It has exactly the same form as the definite article connected with 
the preposition de. And it is repeated before every noun. 

§ 21. — For some or any. Pour du. I With some or any. Avec de la. 
Before some or any. Avant de V . \ To some or any. A du, a des. 

§ 22. — When connected with of or from, as : 
Of, or from some, it is (not de du, de de la, de des, but) simply de. 
Of some authors. Dictionaries. I D'auteurs. De dictionnaires. 



§23. — Some or any. 

For some. With some. 

Of, from some. To some. 



Quelque, sing. Quelques, plur. 

Pour quelque. Avec quelques. 

De quelques. A quelque. 



§24. — Near some. I Pres du (sing.) Pres de quelque. 

(Model for the prepositions with de.) I Pres de (plur.) Pres de quelques. 

§25. — Obs. Some or any, is frequently omitted in English, but never 
in French. 
We have soup and beef for dinner. 



Nous avons de la soupe et du bceuf 

pour diner. 
Nous avons de Tor de Californie. 
Avez-vous mange des chataTgnes, 

des pommes, et des noix ? 

§26. — Second Partitive Article, before an adjective, or after a negation. 



We have California gold. 
Have you eaten chestnuts, apples, and 
nuts ? 



De or d\ (not des, mind it.) 
Nous avons du pain, (1st partitive.) 
Nous avons de bon pain, de bonne 
viande, de bons poulets. (2d partit.) 
II a du pain, il n'a pas de beurre. 



Some or any : Mas. fem. sing. plur. 

We have some bread. 

We have some good bread, good 

meat, good chickens. (II 2 .) 
He has bread, he has no butter. (II 1 .) i 
He has amiable children, (some, a II a d'aimables enfants. 

few.) 

§27. — N. B. If the adjective is placed after the noun, instead of the 2d, 
use the 1st partitive article. He has amiable children, may be translated in 
French by: 

II a d'aimables enfants. 2d partitive, the adjective being before. 

II a des enfants aimables. 1st partitive, the noun being before. 

§28.— I have some more, orothers. | J'en ai d'autre, ou d'autres; 
not des autres, because the partitive comes immediately before the adjective. 

§29.— POSSESSIVE ARTICLES, OR ADJECTIVES, USUALLY 
CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, [flj 

§30. — The following words are usually classed among pronouns, but as, 
m English as well as in French, they merely refer to nouns; as they are 



466 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

always prefixed to them, and never take their place; the term Possessive 
Articles, instead of Possessive Pronouns, does not seem inappropriate. 



31. 


Before a 


consonant. 


Before a vowel 
or h mute. 


Before all. 




Sing. Mas. 


Sing. Fern. 


M.$ F. 


Plur. M. $ F. 


My 


mon 


ma 


mon 


mes. 


Thy 


ton 


ta 


ton 


tes. 


His, her, its l 


son 


sa 


son 


ses. 


Our 


notre 


notre 


notre 


nos. 


Your 


votre 


votre 


votre 


vos. 


Their 2 


leur 


leur 


leur 


leurs. 



As its function is to show the gender and number : 

§32. — Rule. The Possessive Article, in French, agrees with the object 
possessed, and not with the possessor, as it does in English. Or else : 

It agrees with the noun to which it is prefixed, not that it refers to ; and 
it must be repeated before every noun. 



The father, his son, and daughter. 
The mother, her son, her daughter, 
and friends. 



Le pere, son fils, et sa fille. 
La mere, son fils, sa fille, et ses 
amies. 



i What is its infinitive? is translated by: Quel en est Vinfinitif? because the 
words, its infinitive, can be changed to : the infinitive of it, corresponding to the 
French: en est Vinfinitif. Hence this rule. (302.) 

Its is not translated by son, sa, ses, but by le, la, ou les . . . en, when it can be 
changed to : the ... of it. 

Ex. 1. I like Philadelphia; its markets i J'aime Philadelphie; les marches en 
are excellent. sont excellents. 

When that inversion cannot be made without destroying the sense, use : son, sa, 
ses. Ex. 2. The country has its delights, must be translated by: La campagne a 
ses agrements, because the sentence does not admit of the inversion : the country has 
the delights of it. 

2 Their, is not translated by leur or leurs, but by le, la, les . . . en, when their 
can be changed to : the . . . of them. 
These languages are copious; I admire [ Ces langues sont copieuses ; j 'en admire 

their beauties (the . . . of them). ' les beautes. 

But use leur or leurs, when the inversion is inadmissible. 

Those languages have their beauties. As we cannot say : have the beauties of 
them, we must use leurs, and say : Ces langues ont letjrs beautes. 

The above rule being derived from the English construction, will be found more 
practical than the rule of French Grammarians, which is : When the possessor is 
nominative of the sentence in which its or their is used, translate by : son, sa, ses, 
or leur, leurs. If the possessor is not the nominative, translate by : le, la, les . . . 
en. (See examples above.) 

Exception. — When the thing possessed is governed by a preposition, use : son, sa, 
ses, leur, leurs. 
The Philadelphia water-works are admi- I Les machines hydrauliques de PhiladeV- 

rable ; everybody wonders at their sim- phie sont admirables; tout le monde 

plicity. s'etonne de leur simplicity. 

But if you employ a verb that requires no preposition, the rule must be used. As : 
tout le monde en admire Jar "simplicity. This formis an exception to both rules. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



467 



My cousin's brother and sister. 1 
My cousin's sister and brother. 



Le frere de mon cousin et sa sceur. 1 
La sceur de mon cousin et son frere. 



$33.— DEMONSTRATIVE. ARTICLES OR ADJECTIVES. 

§ 34. — Always prefixed to a noun, and repeated before every one. (See § 30.) 



This, that. 



These, those. 
Before a consonant. 
Before h aspirated. 
Before a vowel. 
Before a silent h. 
Before all letters. 
(4 1 , 8 1 , 9 2 , 10 l .) 



Masculine. Singular. 

Ce, before a consonant, or h aspirated. 
Cet, before a vowel or h mute. 

Ces, for the Plur. Mas. and Fem. before all letters. 



Femmine. 
Cette. 



This hat, that hat. 
This hero, that hero. 
This, that child. 
This, that man. 
This, that table. 
This, that needle. 
These, those men. 
These, those women. 



Ce chapeau. Mas. Sing. 

Ce heros. 

Cet enfant. 

Cet homme. 

Cette table. Fem. Sing. 

Cette aiguille. 

Ces hommes. Mas. Plur. 

Ces femmes. Fem. Plur. 



But when much precision is required, -ci and -la are added ; as : 



This hat. (8 1 .) 
This child. 
This table. 
These men. 



Ce chapeau-ci. 
Cet enfant-ci. 
Cette table-ci. 
Ces hommes-ci. 



That hat. 
That child. 
That table. 
Those women. 



Ce chapeau-la, 
Cet enfant-la. 
Cette table-la. 
Ces femmes-la. 



§ 35. — When one says : If you read this book, I will read that or that one, 
it is evident that the word this connected with book, takes the place of no 
other word previously expressed, and that, consequently, it is not a pronoun, 
but a mere attendant on the noun book, to limit its signification, in the same 
manner as the article does ; and that it may then be considered as a demon- 
strative article or adjective, but not a pronoun. In every similar case, it 
must be translated by : ce, or cet, cette, ces. 

It is also evident that the word that, or that one, takes the place of a 
noun previously named, viz : book, and that, of course, it is not an article or 
adjective, but a true pronoun demonstrative, (§ 36,) to be translated by : celui- 
la, &c. 



PRONOUNS. 

$36.— DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 



Masc. Sing. 
This, this one. > n , . 
The latter. \ Celul " cl - 

That, that one. 
The former. 



Celui-la. 



These. 
Those. 



Masc. Plur. 

Ceux-ci. 

Ceux-ia. 



l My cousin's brother and sister, is an ellipsis for my cousin's brother and my cou- 
sin's sister ; which in French would be : Le frere de mon cousin et la sozurde mon cou- 
sin; but instead of putting the second ftoun in the possessive case, use a possessive 
article (§ 31), and say : Le frlre de mon cousin et sa saetcr. (§ 140.) 



468 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Obs. -Ci and -la are omitted when other words (such as : de, of; qui, ou 
que, which ;) are added to complete the sense. 



Celui de Henri. 
Celui que j'ai. 



Celle-ci. 

Celle-la. 

Celle de 

Celle qui .... 



Henrietta's, those Ceux de Hem iette. 

ofH. 
Those which are . . Ceux qui sant . . . 
Fern. Plur. 



These. 

Those. 

Those of 

Those which . 



Celles-ci. 



Celles-la. 



Celles de . . . . 
Celles que . . . 



Henry's, that of H. 
The one which I 

have. 

Fern. Sing. 
This, this one. 
The latter. 
That, that one. > 
The former. ) 

That of, the one of. 
That, the one 

which .... 

§ 37. — Obs. As these are pronouns, they always come after a i antecedent 
noun to which they refer and with which they agree. And therefore when 
you have an English sentence like : this or that book, the noun, in French, 
must be put in the first part of the sentence, to serve as an antecedent to the 
pronoun (that) which follows. This book or that . . . Ce livre-ci ou celui -la. 
Celui-la referring to : book ; whilst ce, cet, cette, (this or that, same Eng- 
lish as above;, ces (these or those), are always placed before the noun of which 
they point out the gender and number, without referring to anything pre- 
viously mentioned. 

$38.— PERSONAL PRONOUNS. NOMINATIVES. 
Pronoms Personnels. Nominatifs 



1st class. Ire classe. 

Connected with the verb, in French. i 

Singular. 
I. Je,j\ 

Thou. Tu. 

He, she, it. II, elle — il, elle. 



2d class. 2de classe. 

Separated from the verb, in French. 1 

Singulier. 
I. Moi.2 

Thou. Toi. 

He, she. Lui, elle. 



One, some or any one. On. (Always connected with a verb of the 3d 
pers. sing., although the English pronoun may be plur. See below, 3d plur.) 

i The negative ne, n\ and any objective pronouns, le, me, &c, (§ 47,) may intervene 
between a nominative of the 1st class and the verb, without destroying the connex- 
ion; but no other word. As: il donne, il me donne, il ne donne pas, il ne me le 
donne pas, donne-t-il ? But to translate : he who gives, do not say : il qui donne ; 
but : lui qui donne, because who separates he, and gives : He \ Can he do it ? Lui ! 
peut-il le faire ? Can he do it ? He J Peut-il le faire ? Lui ! 

2 The separated nominative is frequently left out in English, or, if expressed, it is 
by as for me, as to me, &c. The French moi, toi, &c, is evidently an abridgment 
of as to me, and, consequently, is nothing but the objective case used as a 
nominative : 



As for me, I do not know anything about 

it. 
He ! He did not do it. (As to him ) 
Didst thou go ? 
We believe it. (As to us.) 



Quant a moi, or simply moil je n'en 
sais rien. (Je n'en sais rien, moi .') 

Lui ! il ne Pa pas fait. 

Y as-tu et6, toi ! 

'Nous! nous le croyon*. Nous le croy- 
ons, nous . 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 469 

Pluriel. 
Nous. 
Vous. 

Eux, m. Elles,/. 

People, they, we, you. On. People seek happiness. On cherche ie bonheur. 
In the 3d pers. sing, and plur. may be classed the following expressions, 
which remain the same, whether connected with, or separated from the 
verb. 





Plural. 




We. 


Nous. 1 


We. 


You or ye. 


Vous. 1 


Ye or you. 


They. 


lis, m. elles,/. 


They. 



Singulier. 
He, she, it. Ce, c'. 2 

This, that, it. 4 Ceci, cela, 5 §a, ce, 



c , 



Pluriel. 
They, (it). 4 Ce. 2 Ce. 3 

These, those, Ces choses-ci. Ces 
they. choses-la. 



1 The uniting pronoun nous or vous, must be placed before a verb, when it has 
two or more nominatives of different persons. Ex. at (171 Exercise.) 

2 Instead of: il, elle, ils, elles, use ce or c' with the verb to be, when it has a nomi- 
native predicate, as some grammarians say, or two nominatives according to others. 
As : He is an Englishman ; c'est un Anglais : because Englishman, un Anglais, is 
used as a predicate noun to he. But you must translate he is English, by il est 
Anglais, and not : c'est Anglais ; because, English is then used as an adjective, and 
not as a second nominative or a noun predicate . (261, Obs. 59.) 



Cest une Anglaise. 
Elle est Anglaise. 
Ce sont des Francais. 
lis sont Francais. 



She is an English girl. 
She is English. 
They are Frenchmen. 
They are French. 

3 $39. — It is, is translated by ce sont; is it? by sont-ce? (261, 065. 59.) only 
when followed by a 3d person plural. As : Is it they who sell those beautiful shawls ? 
Sont-ce eux qui vendent ces beaux chales ? Yes, it is they. Oui, ce sont eux. But 
it is we who have that; is rendered by Cest nous qui avons cela; not ce sont nous, 
because, we, although plural, is not a 3d person, (473, Obs. 110.) 

4 When you say : take this, pointing to an object without naming it, or without 
applying the word this to a noun previously mentioned, it is evident that, in such a case, 
the word this means this thing, or this object, or this article, and that, of course, it 
is used as the name of the object itself, or as a noun, (although usually called a 
demonstrative adjective pronoun.) In every similar case, translate as above. 
Hence, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, ceux-ld, should never be connected with nouns, although 
this, that, these, those, in English, can be used with or without a noun. This admi- 
nistration, is, Cette administration, not ceci ou cela administration. (243, 392.) 

5 When former and latter apply to actions, translate by cela and ceci, not by celui- 
la and celui-ci, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. As : Have you my book 
ani his ? I have the former, but not the latter, (here former and latter apply to the 
noun book,) then say : J'ai celui-ld, mais non pas celui-ci. Have you taken my book 
and torn his ? I did the former, but not the latter, (they here apply to actions,) then 
say : J'ai fait cela, mais non pas ceci. (N. pa. 271.) 

6 Ce, cannot be used immediately before an objective pronoun. It is not correct 
to translate it pleases me, by ce me plait, but by cela me plait, cd ou ceci me 
plait. Ce is mostly used with the verb to be, seldom with others. It is suitable, 
c">est convenable ; but, it suits, must be cela convient, not ce convient. It is suffi- 
cient, c-est sumsant, or else, cela suffit, and not ce suffit. (473, 663 ) 

This is good, that is, or it is good. Ceci est bon. cela ou c'est bon. 

That's it. it is that. C'est cela. j That's not it, 'tis not so. Ce n'est pa» 

Qd is a contraction of cela. | cela. 

36 * 



470 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Singulier. 
This one, that one. Celui-ci, celui-la.m 
The latter, the for- Celle-ci, celle-la./. 
mer. 

This one . . That one. Celui-ci . . cet autre. 
The one who, that, Celui qui, celle qui. 

which . 
Some one, any one. Quelqu'un. 
Nobody, not anyone. Personne ne. 
No one, not anyone. Nul ne, nulle ne. 
None, no one. Aucun ne, aucune 

ne. 
Each one, every one. Chacun, chacune. 
The one or the other. L'un ou 1' autre. 



Pluriel. 

These, those, some. \ 

The latter, the for- I Ceux-ci, ceux-la.m. 
mer, (some do, | Celles-ci, celles-la./, 



some do not.) 
Some . . . others. 
Those who, that, 

which. 
Some, a few. 



^All. 



J 

Ceux-ci . . d'autres. 
Ceux qui, celles qui. 

Que.ques uns. 



Tous. 



The one . . the other. L'un . . . l'autre. 



Neither. 



Ni l'un ni l'autre, 



The one and the L'un et l'autre. 
other, both. 
i Some . . . others. Les uns . . les autres. 
)Both. Tous deux, toutes 

( les deux. 

Neither of them. Ni les uns, ni les 

autres. 
Neither these nor Ni ceux-ci ni ceux- 

those. la. 

All. Tous. 

(the i of qui is never cut off.) 
A few,some .. others. Quelques uns .... 
d' autres. 



Neither this one nor Ni celui-ci ni celui- 

that one. la. 

Nothing, not any. Rien ne . . . . 
Who (pour les pers.) Qui. Qui est-ce qui ? 
What ? (pour les Qw'est-ce qui ? 

choses.) 

N. B. The nominative case and the verb are frequently left out in 
English. As: This, when followed by . . ., Those, where preceded by . . ., That, 
on the side-board ; My gloves, in my pocket, &c. In all similar sentences, 
the pronoun and verb must be expressed in French : Ceci, quand il est.,,, 

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Personnels, 

Separated from the verb. 

§ 40. NOMINATIVES. NOMINATIFS. 

I who, I that. Moi qui. 

Thou who, thou that. Toi qui. 

He who, he that. Lui qui. 1 (o 

Celui qui, 2 ! * 

She who, she that. Elle qui, 1 |° 

Celle qui, 2 1 3 



§ 41. OBJECTIVES. 

I whom, I that. 
Thou whom. 
He whom, he that, 

She whom, she that 



REGIMES. 

Moi que. 

Toi que. 

Lui que. 1 

Celui que. 2 

Elle que. 1 

( | Celle que. 2 



i Lui, elle, apply not to people in general, but to particular persons, and require 
no complement. 



Qui est appele le Pere de sa PatrieT 

Lui (montrant Washington). 
Elle (Mile. D.) qui ecrit si bien. 



Who is called the Father of his Country ? 

He (pointing to Washington). 
She (Miss D.) who writes so well. 

The plurals, eux, elles, apply to particular persons. 
They (the kings) who had promised so | Eux (les rois) qui avaient tant promis. 

much. 
They (the Misses R.) who speak French I Elles (les Demoiselles R.) qui parlent si 

so prettily. joliment le Francais. 

Lui, elle, eux, &c, apply only to persons, not to things. 

2 Celui, celle, ceux, celles, apply to nouns having a general sense, or to nouns that 
require mmplements. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



471 



Nominatives. 
The person who. La personne qui. 



Plural. 
We who, we that. 
You who, you that. 
They who, they 

that. 
Those who, that. 
They who, that. 
Those who, that. 
John and Louis 

who. 



Pluriel. 
Nous qui. 
Vous qui. 
Eux qui. 1 

Ceux qui. 2 
Elles qui. 1 
Celles qui. 2 
Jean et Louis 
qui. 



Objectives. 
The person whom. La personne 



Plural. 
We whom, that. 
You whom. 
They whom, that. 

Those whom, that. 
They whom. that. 
Those whom, that. 
J. and L., whom. 



que. 

Pluriel. 

Nous que. 

Vous que. 

Eux que. 1 

Ceux que. 2 
Elles que. 1 
Celles que. 2 
Jean et Louis 
que. 



*41*«— COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



Myself, 


moi-meme. 


Thyself, 


toi-meme^ 


Himself, 


lui-meme. 


Herself, 


elle-meme. 


Itself, 


lui, elle,soi-meme. 



nominatives and objectives. 
Oneself, 
Ourselves, 
Yourself, 
Yourselves, 
Themselves, 



soi-meme. 

nous-memes. 

vous-meme. 

vous-memes. 

eux-memes. 

elles-memes. 



Among compound pronouns may be included : 
We, (nom.,) among us, (obj.) i Nous autres. 

You, (nom.,) among you, (obj.) I Vous autres. 

When objectives, they unite with every preposition. 
The French use them frequently in familiar discourse ; but only in the 
1st and 2d per. plur. 



We citizens like country air. 

Among you merchants are there no 
rogues ? 



Nous autres citoyens nous aimons 

l'airde la campagne. 
Parmi vous autres marchands n'y 

a-t-il pas de fripons ? 



§ 42.— OB JECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

$ 43. — The French have two kinds. 1st. Those which are immediately 
governed by the verb, and called Direct Objectives, or Regimes 
Directs. They correspond to the objective case of an English verb. 

§ 44. — 2d. Those which are governed by a preposition, and called Indi- 
rect Objectives, or Regimes Indirects. These correspond to the objec- 
tive case of an English preposition. The latter are subdivided into two 
classes. 

He (any one) who practises virtue is I Celui qui pratique la vertu est heureux. 
happy. 



They (all ladies) who study French . 
have the book of him who is sick. 
i See note 1, preceding page. 
2 See note 2, preceding page. 



Celles qui etudient le Frangais . . . 
J'ai le livre de celui qui est malade. 



472 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



§ 45. — The 1st class includes those which, in a single word, express both 
the preposition and the pronoun. Ex. : To him, is expressed in French by 
the single word lui, (Dir. 2); to her, by the same word, lui; to them, by 
the single word leur ; of it, of them, by (§47; en, &c. 

§ 46. — The 2d class includes those that are attended by a preposition 
expressed. Ex. : For her, pour elle ; with them, avec eux, avec elles ; with- 
out me, sans moi ; to me, a moi ; of me, de moi. 



$47.— OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Objectifs ou Regimes. 



MONOSYLLABLES. 



Before the verb, except with the Imperative commanding. 
Direct objectives. Regimes directs. Indirect objectives. Regimes indirects. 



1. Me, 


me, m\ 


To me, 




me, m\ 


2. Thee, 


te, t\ 


To thee, 




te, t'. 


3.m.Him, 


le, P. 


To him, /. of, from him, 


771. 


lui, en. 


/. Her, 


la, 1'. 


To her, of, from her (persons), 


f. 


lui, en. 


n. It, 


le,la,P. 


To it,there,of it,from it (things) 


,n. 


3 ■ en. 


1. Us, 


nous. 


To us, 




nous. 


2. You, 


vous. 


To you, 




vous. 


3. m. Them, 


les. 


To them, of them, 


m. 


leur, en. 


/. Them, 


les. 


To them, from them, 


/■ 


leur, en. 


n. Them, 


les. 


To them, of them (things), 


n. 


y, en. 



§47i. Pronouns having, by themselves, a definite signification, ought 
never to represent a noun taken in an indefinite sense, that is, a noun used 
without article or without some limiting word. 

When, then, the question, Parlez-vous Frangais ? is answered by, je le 
parte, that le relates to a word used without any limiting article ; hence, the 
answer seems incorrect. It is correct, however ; but the question ought to 
be, Parlez-vous le Francais ? using the article after parlez-vous, in the same 
manner as it is used after etudiez-vous, apprenez-vous, lisez-vous, &c. 
Custom, nevertheless, reiects le after the verb parler. (26 1 .) 

§48. — AFTER THE VERB. APRES LE VERBE. 

A l'lmperatif commandant. 

Indirect objectives. Regimes indirects. 

To me, 
To thee, 
To him, 
To her, 
To it, 
To us, 
To you, 
To them, 
To them, 
To them, 

§49. Any objective pronoun followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, 
Ex. : 1 wish you to come, must be turned to / wish that you would come, 
requiring, in French, the subjunctive nood : Je desire que vous veniez. 



In the Imperative commanding. 
Direct objectives. Regimes directs. 
1. 





Me, 


moi. 




Thee, 


toi. 


m. 


Him, 


le. 


/• 


Her, 


la, 


n. 


It, 


le, la. 




Us, 


nous. 




You, 


vous. 


171. 


Them, 


les. 


/• 


Them, 


les. 


11 


Them, 


les 





1I1U1 . 

toi. 




of him, 


lui, 


en. 


of her, 


lui. 


en. 


of it, 


nous, 
vous. 


en. 


of them, 


leur, 


en. 


of them, 


leur, 


en. 


of them, 


y, 


en. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 473 

§ 50. When the English objective pronoun it or them, alone, or governed 
by in, with, of, or any other English preposition, is to be translated by a 
French verb requiring the preposition d, use y. II y repond ; he answers 
it : il y reussit ; he succeeds in it : il y pense ; he thinks of it. The 
verbs repondre, reussir, penser, requiring a, the English pronoun it, by 
itself, or with any English preposition, must be translated by y. (§48.) 

And by en, if the French verb requires the preposition de. II en est 
fache ; he is sorry for it: on Yen blame; he is blamed for it; on en 
doute ; they doubt it. (§ 48.) 

We have seen (l 1 , &c.) nouns connected with the definite article ; to 
replace them, when used in the objective case, they require a definite pro- 
noun ; in English it or them; in French, le, la, les. I have it; je l'ai: I 
have them ; je les ai. (§48.) 

We have seen (12 1 , 2 , §4, &c.) nouns connected with the indefinite or par- 
titive article ; to replace them, when used in the objective case, they require 
an indefinite or partitive pronoun ; in English, some, or any of it, of them, 
in French, en, meaning, of the thing or things, person or persons spoken of. 
As, in French, the article is never left out, neither is the pronoun en ever 
omitted. 

PLACE OF THE OBJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. 

The direct and indirect of a single word, or monosyllable. 

§ 51. — Rule 1st. When the verb has but one regime direct, or indirect, 
(§47,) or else one double regime, (§57,) that regime goes before the verb, 
except in one mood, (§§ 54, 64.) 

When it has several objectives, (§56.) 
I give. I give you. | Je donne. Je vous donne. 



I see my friend. I see him. 
I have given an apple away. 
I have given an apple to her. 
He is devoted to her. 



Je vois mon ami. Je le vois. 
J'ai donne une pomme. 
Je lui ai donne une pomme. 
II lui est devoue\ 



§ 5l£. — The objective noun is always placed after the verb, as in Eng- 
lish ; but not the pronoun. And the preposition which governs the noun is 
never understood in French, although it is frequently left out in English. 
As : Give John an apple ; for, Give an apple to John. Donnezune pomme 
a Jean. Follow this last construction. (Dir. 4.) 

§ 52. — When the verb to have, or to be, is used as auxiliary, the objec- 
tive pronoun is always placed before it ; never after : that is, not imme- 
diately before the past participle. Ex. : translate 7 have seen you, by : Je 
vous ai vu (1 you have seen), placing vous before ai, and not by fai vous vu, 
vous being wrongly placed after ai, and immediately before the past part, 
vu. I have had it ; Je l'ai eu ; not J'ai V eu. 



II leur parla. 

II leur a parle, (not il a leur parle\) 



He spoke to them, (he to them spoke.) 
He has spoken to them, (he to them 

has/ 

§ 53. — Hint. He spoke to them (English imperfect tense), may be trans 
40* 



474 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



lated by il leur parla, the French preterit, (§ 153,) or else by il leuraparU, 
French parfait, ($ 145,) corresponding to the perfect tense of the English con- 
jugation. The latter is the tense generally used in colloquial intercourse, 
by the French. 



Did he lend it to you ? (you it did 

he? &c.) 
He lent it to me, (he to me, &c.) 
I will not speak to them, (I not to 

them, &c.) 
If you want the book, I must not 

keep it any longer. 
He was afraid I would not lend it to 

him, (I not it to him, &c.) 
He amuses himself. 
It is impossible for me to go, (it to me v 

§ 54. — 2d. The objective pronouns are placed after the imperative mood, 
commanding or used affirmatively, except in the 3d person sing, and plur. 



Vous le preta-t-il ? ou mieux, 
Vous Z'a-t-il prete ? 
II me le preta; ou il me l'a prete. 
Je ne leur parlerai pas. 

Si vous voulez le livre, il ne faut pas 
que je le garde plus long-temps. 

II avait peur que je ne le lux pre- 
tasse pas. 

II se divertit. 

II m'est impossible d'y aller. 



Ex.: 



Give me. 
Let me speak. 



Give it to me. 
Let me see. 



Ex. : Donnez-moi. Donne z-le-moi. 
Laissez-moi parler. Laissez- 

moi voir. 
'Envoy ons-leur- en un. 
Habille-foi. Vante-^era. 



Let us send them one. 
Dress thyself. Boast of it. 

But, in the 3d person, place it before : 

Let him give it to me. Qu'il me le donne. 

Let them speak to them. I Qu'ils leur parlent. 

Exception. — When two imperatives are joined by the conjunction and, 
the objective pronoun connected with the second verb is frequently 
placed before it, although the mood is affirmative ; as : Cherchez macanne, 
et me Z'apportez, instead of: et apportez-la-moi. Look for my cane, and 
bring it to me. Both ways are correct, (§ 150 — 12.) 

§ 55. But when the imperative mood forbids or is used negatively, they 
are placed before, according to Rule 1st. 



Do not give me. Do not give it to 

me. 
Let us not send them away. 
Let me not speak. 
Do not dress thyself. Do not boast 

of it. 
Do not take them. 
Do not (thou) disturb me. 
Send her but two. 
Send them nothing. 
Do not trust to it. 
Do not boast of it. 
Do not deceive yourself. 



Ne me donnez pas. Ne me le don- 

nez pas. 
Ne les envoyons pas. 
Ne me laissez pas parler. 
Ne t'habille pas. Ne t'en vante pas. 

Ne les prenez pas. 

Ne me derange pas. 

Ne lui en envoyez que deux. 

Ne leur envoyez rien 

Ne vous y fiez pas. 

Ne vous en vantez pas. 

Ne vous trompez point. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



475 



And in the 3d person, also before. 
Let him not give it to me. : Qu'il ne me le donne pas. 

Let them not speak to her. I Qu'ils ne lui parlent pas. 

§ 56. — 3d. When the French objective pronoun is attended with a preposi- 
tion expressed, they both (that is, the preposition and the pronoun) go after 
the verb, and the preposition must be repeated before every pronoun. Ex. : 



Come with me. 

I cannot go without you. 

He speaks of him, you, and them. 

We speak of her and her sister. 

Does he not speak of them too ? 

Yes, he speaks of him, her, them, you, 

and of me also. 
Do you think of me or him ? 
Do not apply to her nor to him, but to 

me. (§64—2.) 
I will apply neither to her, nor to him, 

but to you. 



Venez (or viens) avec moi. 

Je ne peux y aller sans vous. 

II parle de lui, de vous, et d'eux. 

Nous par Ions d' elle et de sa soeur. 

Ne parle-t-il pas d'eux aussi ? 

Si fait, il parle de lui, d' elle, d'eux, 

de vous, et de moi aussi. 
Pensez-vous d moi ou d lui ? 
Ne vous adressez ni a elle, ni d lui, 

mais d moi. 
Je ne m'adresserai ni a elle, ni a lui. 

mais a vous. 



DOUBLE OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.— Doubles Regimes. 

Regimes directs et indirects. 
§ 57. — Monosyllables. Avant le Veebe. § 58. — Apk.es L'Imperatif. 



It to me, me it, them to me. jf Me le, me la, me P, me les. 
It to thee, thee it, them to f Te le, te la, te P, te les. 

thee. 
It to him, them to him. Le lui, la lui, les lui. 
It to her, them to her. Le lui, la lui, les lui. 

It to as, them to us. f Nous le, nous la, P, nous 

les. 
Ittoyou,youit,themtoyou.fVous le, vous la, P, vous 

j les. 
It to them, them to them.) Le leur, la leur, les leur. 



-le-moi, -la-moi, -les-moi 
-te-le, -te-la, -te-les. 

-le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui. 
-le-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui. 
-le-nous, -la-nous, -les- 
nous. 



-le-leur, -la-leur, -les-leur. 



BEFORE THE VERB. 


AVANT LE VBRBE 


AFTER THE VERB. 


APRES LE VERBE. 


Singular. 


Singulier. 


Singular. 


Singulier . 


Me to it, there, 


m'y. 


Me to it, there, 


y moi. 


Thee to it, there, 


t'y 






Him to it, there, 


Py. 


Him to it, there, 


Py. 


Her to it, there, 


Py. 


Her to it, there, 


Py. 


It to it, there, 


Py. 


It to it, there, 


Py. 


John there, to it, 


y . . . Jean. 


John there, to it. 


y Jean. 


Plural. 


Pluriel. 


Plural. 


Pluriel. 


Us to it, there, 


nous y. 




nous y. 


You to it, there, 


vous y. 




vous y. 


Them to it, there, 


les y. 




les y. 


My friends there, 


y . . . . mesamis. 




y mes amis. 



N. B. When the pronouns are both of the 3d person, as : It to him, them 
to him, it to them, them to them, they have the same order in French, viz : 
le lui, les lui, le leur, les leur ; but when the pronouns are of different 
persons, 1st and 3d, or 2d and 3d, reverse the English order, and instead of: 
it to me, it to you, &lc, say: to me it, to you it, &c., me le, vous le, &c. 



476 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



§ 59.— PERSONAL AND PARTITIVE.— Personnels et Partitifs. 



BEFORE AND AFTER AVANT ET APRES 
THE VERB. LE VERBE 

Singular. Singulier. 

Me, some, or any, (§ 62,) \ 
Some to me, or any to > m'en. 

me, ) 

Thee some, some to thee, t'en. 
Some to him, him some, lui en. 
Some to her, her some, 
John some, some to John 



lui en. 

en (the verb) a 
Jean. 



§60.- 

Sing. 
Me some there 
Some to me, 



-Avant § 61. — Apres 

LE VERBE. 

Sing. 



my en, 



Thee some there, t'y en. 
Him some there, lui y en, 
Her some there, lui y en, 
Some to J . there, y en . . . . 



y-en-moi. 



y en lui 
y en lui. 
a Jean. 



Pluriel. 
) nous-y-en. 



y-en- 
nous. 



Plural. Pluriel. Plural. 

Some to us, us some. nous-en. Us some tL-ere, 

some to us, 

You some, some to you, vous-en. You some there, vous-y-en. 

Them some, some to them, leur-en. Them some there, leur-y-en, y-en-leur. 

§ 62. — Some, in English, is used for the affirmation, and any for the 
interrogation and negation ; and consequently en corresponds both to some 
and any. 



Ex. : I have some, (of a thing referred 
to.) 
Have you any ? He has not 
given me any. 



Ex.: Pen ai. 



En avez-vous? 
pas donne. 



II ne m'erc a 



§ 63.— OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS ; 
With a preposition always placed after the verb, as in English. 



Singular. 
To me, from me, of me, near me. 
To thee, from or of thee, far from thee 
To him, of him, from him, without him, 
To her, of, from her, for her. 



Singulier. 
A moi,(§64i,)de moi,(§64i,)pres demo;. 
A toi, de toi, loin de toi. 

A lui, de lui, sans lui. 

A elle, d'elle, pour e le. 

A soi, de soi, envers soi 



To one's self, of one's self, towards one. 

To it, of it, from it, with it, are not translated after the verb. 

Pluriel. 
de nous, avec nous, 
avant vous 



Plural. 
To us, from or of us, with us. 
To you, of, from you, before you. 
To them, from, of them, after them. 
To them, from, of them, in the midst of 
them. 

A eux, a elles, &c, apply to persons, not to things. 

§ 64. — 1. Moi, toi, lui, elle, &c, connected with the two prepositions d 
and de, are only used after some verbs, such as : 



A nous, 

A vous, de vous, 

A eux, ($642,) d'eux, 

A elles, (§ 642,)d'elles, 



apres eux. 

au milieu d'elles. 



Presenter a, 

Penser a, (74 2 ,) 
Accourir a, (64 3 ,) 
Se ner a, <62 2 ,) 
Be souvenir de, (51 2 ,) 



To introduce to. 

He thinks of me. 
She hastened to us. 
Do you trust them ? 
He remembers you. 



Quand me presenterez 

vous a lui ? 
II pense a moi. 
Elle accourut a nous. 
Vous fiez-vous a eux ? 
II se souvient de vous. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



477 



In other instances, to me, to him, &c. : of me, of them, &c, must be trans 
Iated as directed ($ 54). 
Renoncer a . . . . 



Compter sur. 
Se souvenir de . . . . 
Se ressouvenir de . . 
Penser a . . . . 
Accourir a . . . . 
Se fier a . . . . 



S'en tenir a 

S'en rapporter a . 
Se metier de . . . 
Se defier de . . . . 
S'adresser a . . . . 
Se plaindre de . . . 



2. When there are two or more objective cases connected with the same 
verb. — Do you speak to me? Me parlez-vous ? Me is placed before, 
because there is but one objective case ; but, as in the following answer, 
there are more than one object, say : I speak to you, to him, and his brother; 
je parle d vous, d lui, et d son frere. The three objective cases coming 
after the verb, the preposition d must be used and repeated before each, 
(§56.) 

§ 65. — But when the preposition is expressed in French, whether it be a, 
de, sans, avec, &c, both the preposition and pronoun come after the verb, 

($ 56.) 

$ 66.— REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. (43 1 .) 

Fully to explain this subject, we will give it a new form. The French 
Reflective Verbs, Verbes Reflechis, may be divided into three classes. 

§ 67. — 1st Class. Those that admit of one direct, but of no indirect 
objective. Ex. : I dress myself. 

§ 68. — 2d Class. Those which, beside the direct, admit also of an indi- 
rect objective, governed by the preposition d. Ex. : I apply myself to 
study. 

§ 69. — 3d Class. Those in which the indirect objective is governed by 
the preposition de. Ex. : I blame myself for that action. 

§ 70. — Observe that when the indirect objective is a noun, it goes after 
the verb, as in English ; but, when the indirect objective is the pronoun 
it or them, that pronoun is incorporated with the French preposition d or 
de, and both are expressed by a single word, placed as directed (§ 50, § 54, 
and following.) Hence there are three classes of 



$ 71.— REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.- 

1st Class. No indirect objective. 



-Pronoms Reflechis. 



Myself, 


me, m'. 


To cure myself, 


me guerir. 


To dress mys., 


m'habiller 


Thyself, 


te, t\ 


To cure thyself, 


te guerir. 


To dress thys., 


t'habiller. 


Himself, 


se, s\ 


To cure himself, 


se gu«rir, 


To dress hims. 


s'habiller. 


Herself, 


se, s\ 


To cure herself, 


se guerir. 


To dress hersf. 


s'habiller. 


Ourselves, 


nous. 


To cure ourselves, 


nous guerir. 


To dress ours., 


nous habil 

ler. 
,vous habil- 

ler. 
, s'habiller. 


Yourselves, 


vous. 


To cure yourselves, 


vous guerir. 


To dress yours. 


Themselves 


se, s\ 


To cure themselves, 


se guerir, 


To dress thems 


One's self, 


se, s\ 


To cure one's self, 


se guerir, 


To dress one's 


s'habiller. 



478 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



§ 72.— 2d Class. With the preposition a. When the objective pronoun 
it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be trans- 
lated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition d, translate as 
follows :— * • 



Myself to it, m'y. 

(Thyself) into it, t'y. 
(Himself) to it, them, s'y. 

with them, ) s ^' 



it, 
to them, 
to it, 

to it, j 
in them. \ 



nousy 
vousy. 
nousy. 

s'y. 



I apply myself to it. 
Thou glidest into it. 
He opposes it, them. 
She understands it. 
She is acquainted with 

them. 
We expect it. 
Go to them. 
Let us submit to it. 
They retired to it. > 

They withdrew in them. > 



nth > 



Je m'y applique. 
Tu t'y glisses. 
II s'y oppose. 

Elle s'y connait. 

Nous nous y attendons. 

Rendez-vous-y. 

Soumettons-nous-y. 

lis s'y retirerent. 



§ 73. — 3d Class. With the preposition de. When the objective pro- 
noun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be 
translated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition de, trans- 
late as follows : — 



Myself of it, 
at it, 
at it, 
with them, 



m'en. 
t'en. 



> s'e 



it, them, s'en. 
upon it, nous en. 



I assured myself of it. 
Thou wilt wonder at it. 
He takes offence at it. 
He is displeased with J 

them. 
She remembers it, them. 
We can seize upon it. 



Je m'en assurai. 
Tu t'en etonneras. 

II s'en offense. 

Elle s'en souvient. 

Nous pouvons nous en 

saisir. 
Vous en moquez-vous ? 
lis ne s'en soucient pas. 
Elles s'en occupent. 



at it, vous en. Do you laugh at it ? 

about it, s'en. They do not care about it. 

to it, s'en. They attend to it. 

§ 74. — It is evident, from the examples above, that the use of the French 
pronouns m'y, Vy, &c, m? en, fen, &c, does not depend on the English pre- 
position used, but on the French one, which is incorporated with the pronoun. 
When the French verb requires d, you must use, m'y, t'y, &c. When it 
requires de, use m'en, t'en, &c. But no such incorporation takes place, if 
the French preposition is avec, pour, sans, &c, instead of de or d. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.— Pronoms Belatifs. 



§ 75. — Nominatives, Who, that, 

which, whoever. 
The man who speaks. 
The lady that smiles. 
The hat which becomes you. 
Whoever {who) studies, improves. 

§ 76. — The nominative relative pronoun is never understood in English, 
Tior in French. 



Nominatif. Qui. 

L'homme qui parle. 

La dame qui sourit. 

Le chapeau qui vous convient. 

Qui etudie, fait des progres. 



% 77. — Objective. Without a pre- 
position. 
Whom, that, which, ($81.) 



Regime. Sans preposition. 
Que, qu\ 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



479 



$ 78.— The objective relative pronoun is frequently left out in English, 
but never in French. 



The gentleman (whom) you call. 
The girl (that) he admires. 
The history (which) you relate. 

§ 79. — Objective. With a prepo- 
sition. 

of which. 



Of whom, 

whom, 

To whom, 

■ whom, 

For whom, 

From whom, 

With whom, 



to which, 
to which, 
for which. 

from which. 

with which. 



Sing. 

Plur. 

S. 

P. 

S. 

P. 

s. 
p. 
s. 
p. 



Le monsieur que vous appelez. 
La fille qu'il admire. 
L'histoire que vous racontez. 

Regime. Avec une preposition. 

De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle, 

desquels, desquelles. 
A qui, auquel, a laquelle. 

auxquels, auxquelles. 
Pour qui, pour lequel, pour laquelle. 

1 ' pour lesquels, pour lesquelles. 
De qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle. 

desquels, desquelles. 
Avec qui, avec lequel, avec laquelle. 
avec lesquels, avec lesquelles. 



§ 80.— Although the pronoun can be omitted, and the preposition trans- 
posed, in English, it cannot be in French. 



The man of whom we speak, or 
the man whom we speak of, or 
the man we speak of 

The woman we speak of. 



The employer she works for. 



L'homme de qui nous parlons, ou 
l'homme dont nous parlons, ou 
l'homme du quel nous parlons. 
La femme de qui, ou dont, ou de 

laquelle nous parlons. 
Le patron pour qui (ou lequel) elie 
travaille. 

§ 81. — When the relative whom, or that, or which, is immediately pre- 
ceded by its antecedent, it is never translated by lequel, laquelle, &c, but 
by que. In this case, it may be omitted in English, but never in French. 

The cases (which) you have men- 
tioned. 
The ideas he has suggested. 
The statesmen (whom) he employed. 

§ 82. — But, when which is separated from its antecedent, translate by 
lequel, laquelle, &c. ; not by que. 



Les cas que vous avez mentionnes. 

Les idees qu'il a suggerees. 

Les hommes d'etat qu'il employa. 



He told me which he wanted. 
I know which will suit him. 
I know whom she prefers. 
This is a plant found in America, 
which is worthy of attention. 



II me dit lequel il voulait. 
Je sais laquelle lui conviendra. 
Je sais lequel elle prefere. 
j C'est une plante trouvee en Ame- 
rique, laquelle merite attention. 

§ 83.— In this case, which means which one, and cannot be omitted, even 
In English. 

§ 84.— Except in similar sentences, the French words lequel, laqudle, 
&c, which, which one, are interrogative, and not relative pronouns, if 
employed without a preposition. 



480 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



§ 85. — Qui, nominative, relates to persons and things. 
-3. qui, de qui, pour qui, &c, (or qui, with any preposition,) relates to 
persons only. 

The man (the book) which suits him. I L'homme (le livre) qui lui convient. 
Without whom are you going ? I Sans qui allez-vous ? 



§ 86. — Dont, duquel, de laquelle 

The child (the dog) whose name you 

know. 
The grammar you spoke to me of. 

Which, meaning which one, or the 
Celui qui, (nom.) celui que, (obj.) 
Celle qui, celle que. 

I know which one he speaks of. 
I spoke to her he admires. 
He sees the one you speak to. 



&c, relate to persons and things. 

L' enfant (le chien) dont (duquel) vous 

savez le nom. 
La grammaire dont (de laquelle) vous 

avez parle. 

one which, is translated by : 
Ceux qui, (nom.) celles que, (obj.) 
Celles qui, celles que. 

Je sais celle dont il parle. 
Je parlai a celle qu'il admire. 
II voit celui auquel vous parlez. 

§ 87. — 1. The one in the garden : which is is evidently understood, but it 
must be expressed in French. Then say, Celui qui est dans le jardin, never 
Celui dans, &c. 
I know which is first, (that is, which 

one, or the one which.) 

I know which (which one, or the one) 
you will choose. 

Speaking of a house : 
Can you guess which will suit me ? 



f Je sais celui qui est premier. 
lies 



sais celle qui est premiere. 
Je sais celui que "\ 
Je sais celle que I 
Je sais ceux que C 
, Je sais celles que J 



vous choisirez. 



Can you guess which I have taken ? 



Pouvez-vous deviner celle qui me 

conviendra ? 
Pouvez-vous deviner celle que j'ai 

prise ? 

2. The one, or those, followed by a preposition or present participle, generally 
means, that which is, (sing.,) those which are, (plur.) The one on the table. 
Here, the one evidently means that which is, and must be translated by: 

celui qui est. I The one coming, celui qui vient. 
Those in the vessel, ceux qui sont . . I Those speaking, ceux qui parlent. 

3. When a nominative case is immediately followed by a preposition or par- 
ticiple, as the relative pronoun and verb are then understood in English, they 
must be supplied in French. (§ 39, N. B.) 



Le balai qui est sur le plancher. 

L'homme qui balaie. 
Le garcon qui a ete pris est innocent. 



The broom on the floor. The man 

sweeping. 
The boy caught is innocent {who has 

been,) 

4. What is, {that which is,) as relative, when followed by a prepositi >n, is 
translated by, ce qu'il y a, (47 2 , Obs. 108,) or any other tense of the same 
verb. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 481 



I know what is in that trunk. 
Where is what was in my desk f 



Je sais ce qu'il y a dans cette malle. 
Ou est ce qu'il y avail dans mon 
pupitre ? 

§ 88, — Dont. French relative, indirect object, is followed by a nomina- 
tive case in French, whether it is so in English or not. 



The country whose government 

pleases you. 
The country whose government you 

admire. 
I know her (the one) he speaks of. 
I do not trust the man whose horse 

you have borrowed. 



Le pays dont le gouvernement vous 
plait 

Le pays dont vous admirez le gou- 
vernement. 

Je connais celle dont il parle. 

Je ne me fie pas a l'homme dont vous 
avez emprunte le cheval. 



And not, dont le cheval vous avez emprunte. 
The construction would be the same, if, in English, of whom was used 
instead of whose. As : The man gf whom you have borrowed the horse. 

§89.-— The compound relative pronoun What, without a preposition. 
What is called a compound relative pronoun when it means that which, 
and is translated by, ce qui, when nominative, and ce que, when objec- 
tive. Ex. ; 

I know what will suit. 1 Je sais ce qui conviendra. 

I know what you say. I Je sais ce que vous dites. 

§ 90. — Which has sometimes a clause of a sentence for its antecedent ; in 
such a case the French consider it as equivalent to the compound relative 
what, and translate it as above, by ce qui or ce que. Ex. : 
He went away, which grieved us. I II s'en alia, ce qui nous chagrina. 
The law is such, which you know. I La loi est telle, ce que vous savez. 

§ 91. — All that, or the single word all, meaning all that which, is often used 
as a relative pronoun, and translated all that by tout ce qui, (nom.,) and 
generally all by tout ce que, (obj.) 

You know all that which is wanted. Vous savez tout cequi est necessaire. 
I know all that will suit. Je sais tout ce qui conviendra. 

I know all you say. Je sais tout ce que vous dites. 

After all, the word which, or that which, may be omitted in English, as 
shown above, but ce qui or ce que must always be expressed in French. 

$92. — What, governed by a preposition, when that preposition can be 
transposed. 

For what or what fcr. Pour quoi . . . ce pour quoi. 

Of what or what (is he speaking) ot. ■ De quoi ce dont. (§ 93.) 

To what or what to. A quoi ce a quoi. 

From what or what from. De quoi ce dont. {% 93.) 

In what or what in. Dans quoi . . . ce dans quoi. 

With what or what with. Avec quoi . . . ce avec quoi. 

§93.— When the preposition of, governing what, is rendered in French by 
de, ce dont is more generally used than de quoi. 
41 



482 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 

I know what he speaks of 



Je sais de quoi, (mieux) ce dont il 

parle. 
II sait ce dont j'ai besoin. 
Dites-moi ce a quoi vous pensez. 
Sait-il pourquoi je n'y vais pas ? 
Je vais vous dire ce avec quoi je vais 

le faire. 



He knows what I have need of. 
Tell me what you are thinking of. 
Does he know why I do not go there ? 
I will tell you what I am going to do 
it with. 

§94. — In the third example, the preposition of, connected with the parti- 
ciple thinking, is not translated by tne French preposition de, but by a ; 
because the verb penser requires a and not de, (and, as we have already 
noticed, l§ 50,) it is the French preposition that must be attended to, and not 
the English.) Accordingly, ce dont cannot be used, but ce a quoi, as in the 
example. 

It will easily be noticed that when what is governed by any other prepo- 
sition than de, that preposition is placed between ce and quoi. Ex. : 
This is what he applies to. | C'est ce a quoi il s' applique. 

We know what he is running after. J Nous savons ce apres quoi il court. 

§95. — English grammarians say that the preposition ought not to be sepa- 
rated from the pronoun it governs, and that in, I know what he speaks of, 
the preposition of ought to be placed before what, instead of being placed at 
the end of the sentence, and that the correct expression is, I know of what 
he speaks. 

Yet general custom disregards that rule, and the preposition usually ends 
the sentence as exemplified here. In French, however, the preposition 
cannot be transposed : it must always precede the pronoun, as shown in the 
above examples. 

§ 96. — What, connected with the preposition of or to, changes its meaning 
according to the place of the preposition. 

§97. — Of what, meaning of that which, de ce qui, (nominatif,) de ce que f 
(reg.) (The English preposition cannot be transposed.) 
He speaks of what was found. \ II parle de ce qui fut trouve. 

It would not be correct to say, what was found of. 
He speaks of what I know. | II parle de ce que je sais. 

§98. — To what, meaning, to that which, a ce qui, (nom.,) a ce que, (reg.' 
No transposition in English. 

You apply to what is useful. | Vous vous appliquez d ce qui est utile. 

Attend to what I tell you. | Faites attention d ce que}e vous dis. 

§ 99. — What ...of, meaning that of which, ce dont ... ce de quoi. 



What you speak of is not just. 



You do not know what I informed 
him of. 
§ 100. — What . . . to, meaning that to which, ce d quoi, a quoi. 



Ce dont vous parlez n'est pas juste, 
(ce de quoi.) 

Vous ne savez pas ce dont je Tin- 
form ai. 



I see what he pretends to. 

Who knows wJiat he applies himself 
to. 



Je vois ce a quoi il pretend, (ou, a 

quoi.) 
Qui sait d quoi (ou ce a quoi) il s'ap^ 

plique. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 483 

$101.. — What of it? is an irregular expression, translated by Qu'en 
resulte-t-il ? 
What of his opinion ! Qu 1 importe son opinion ! 

$102 — PERSONAL PRONOUNS CONNECTED WITH THE 
RELATIVES, governed by prepositions. 



I to whom, I whose. 

Thou of whom, thou whose. 

He of whom, he whose. 

She from whom. 

He or the one without whom. 

She or the one without whom. 

The person of whom, (from whom.) 

The thing of which. 

The object for which. 

Julius after whom. 

Clara after whom. 

We to whom. 

You of whom, or whose. 

They from whom, (m.) 

They from whom. (/.) 

They for whom, (m.) 

They near whom. (/.) 

Those in the midst of which, (m.) 

Those, far from which. (/.) 



Moi a qui, moi auquel, moi a. laquelle. 
Toi de qui, toi dont, toi duquel, toi de 

laquelle. 
Lui de qui, lui dont, lui duquel. 
Elle de qui, elle dont, elle de laquelle. 
Celui sans qui, celui sans lequel. 
Celle sans qui, celle sans laquelle. 
La personne de qui, dont, de laquelle. 
La chose de laquelle. 
L'objet pour lequel. 
Jules apres qui, apres lequel. 
Clara apres qui, apres laquelle. 
Nous a qui, nous auxquels, auxquelles. 
Vous de qui, vous dont, desquels, &c. 
Eux de qui, eux dont, eux desquels. 
Elles de qui, elles dont, elles desquelles. 
Ceux pour qui, ceux pour lesquels. 
Celles pres de qui, pres desquelles. 
Ceux au milieu de qui, desquels. 
Celles loin de qui, loin desquelles. 



Whose thimble is this ? 



§103.— POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

They are generally divided into two classes : 1st. Those which are always 
connected with nouns, viz : my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their. As these 
never take the place of nouns, they will be found under the head of Posses- 
sive Articles. ($30, 31, 32.) 

$104. — 2d. Those which, taking the place of nouns, are properly called 
pronouns. 

It is mine. A qui est ce de ? C'est le mien, 

la mienne, les miens, les miennes. 

la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes. 

la sienne, les siens, les siennes. 

la sienne, les siens, les siennes. 

la sienne, les siens, les siennes. ' 

la notre, les notres, les notres. 

la votre, les votres, les votres. 

la leur, les leurs, les leurs. 

The priest's, celui du pretre, celle du pretre, ceux du pretre, celles du p. 
The friend's, celui de 1'ami, celle de l'ami, ceux de l'ami, celles de l'ami, 
Mr. Petit's, celui de M. P., celle de M. P., ceux de M. P., celles de M. P. 
To mine, au mien, a la mienne, aux miens, aux miennes. 



Mine, 


le mien, 


Thine, 


le tien, 


His, 


le sien, 


Hers, 


le sien, 


Its, 


le sien, 


Ours, 


le notre, 


Yours, 


le votre, 


Theirs, 


le leur, 



4b* 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Of,frommine,du mien, de la mienrie, des miens, des miennes. 

With mine, avec le mien, avec la mienne,avec les miens, avecles miennes. 
Near mine, pres du mien, pres de la m., pres des miens, pres des m. 
As to mine, quant au mien, quant a la m., aux miens, aux miennes. 

§ 105. The above pronouns are used as objectives and nominatives with 
every verb, and even after the verb itre, to be, when the personal pronoun 
ce is nominative before. 



Give me mine. 

Yours looks well. 

Where is his, theirs, ours ? 

Ours are here, and his also. 

It is theirs, (ce being nom. before.) 

It was not mine, but thine. 

Is it hers, yours, mine, or theirs? 



Donnez-moi le mien. 

Le votre a bonne mine. 

Oii est le sien, le leur, le notre ? 

Le notre est ici, et le sien aussi. 

C'est le leur. ($39.) 

Ce n'etait pas le mien, mais le tien. 

Est-ce le sien, le votre, le mien, le 

leur? 
Sont-ce les votres ou les notres ? 



Are they yours or ours ? (§ 39.) 

§ 106. — But when etre, to be, has for its nominative either a noun or the 
pronoun il, elle, Us, elles, the French do not use the above pronouns, but 

the following : 

Plural. 
Ours, a nous. Yours, a vous. 

Theirs, a eux. (m.) Theirs, a elles. (/.) 
My brothers'. A mes freres. 

A qui est ce livre ? 



Singular. 
Mine, a moi. Thine, a toi. 

His, a lui. Hers, a elle. 

John's, a Jean. Whose, a qui 
Whose book is this ? 
It is mine. 
Whose pen is that? 
It is thine. 

Whose gloves are these ? 
They are hers. 
Whose boots are those ? 
They are his. 
Are they Mr. Lebon's ? 
No, they are not his. 
Whose are they? 
I do not know whose they are. 
Is this yours ? 
That is mine. 



II est a moi. 

A qui est cette plume-la ? 

Elle est a toi. 

A qui sont ces gants? 

Us sont a elle. 

A qui sont ces bottes-la ? 

Elles sont a lui. 

Sont-elles a M. Lebon ? 

Elles ne sont pas a lui. 

A qui sont-elles ? 

Je ne sais pas a qui elles sont. 

Ceci est-il a vous ? Est-ce a vous ? 

Cela est a moi. C'est a moi. 



$ 107. — The expression a book of mine, a friend of hers, &c, is frequently 
used in English. The French do not use this phraseology, but say, 

One of her friends. TJnede ses amies. 
A pen of ours. Une de nos plumes. 

A ... of yours. Une de ros 

I A ... of theirs. Une de leurs 

Un des amis de Jean, or 
Une des amies de Jean. 
$108. — When, instead of a book of mine, the English use, this, that: 



One of my books. Tin de mes livres. 
A book of mine. Un de mes livres 
A book of thine. Un de tes livres. 
A book of his, hers. Un de ses livres. 
A friend of John's, is expressed by 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



485 



these, or those, saying, this book of mine, those gloves of hers, &c, no 
regular French can be given of them, except using the possessive article. $ 31.) 

This book of mine is spoiled. \ ™ on r Iivre est ** . 

( Le livre, qui m appartient, est gate. 

f Ces pilules, de son invention, gueris- 
Thase pills of his cure the headache. < sent le mal de tete. 

( Ses pilules guerissent le mal de tete. 

§ 109. — Whose, possessive pronoun, requires a particular explanation. 
It is used in English in two different ways. 1st. When it means to whom, 
translate by d qui. 



1. I, whose horse this is, means, I, to 
whom this horse belongs. 

Whose book is this ? or, to whom does 
this book belong ? 

2. I, whose horse you have. 

Here, whose means not I, to whom, but 

I, of whom you have the horse. 
Whose opinion do you adopt ? 



Moi, d qui ce cheval est ou appar- 

tient. 
A qui est ce livre ? ou A qui ce livre 

appartient-il ? 
Moi, dont vous avez le cheval. 

Moi, de qui vous avez le cheval. 
De qui adoptez-vous Topinion ? 



§ 110. — 2d. Whose, governed by a preposition. 

Du titre de qui, duquel, de la- 

quelle, &c. 
Au nom de qui, duquel, desqueb, 



Of whose title, or the title of whom, 
to the name of 



To whose name 

whom. 
From whose race, from the race of 

whom. 
In whose states. 
For whose daughter. 
Through whose hands. 
Under whose protection. 



&.C. 



des- 



De la race de qui, duquel 

quelles. 
Dans les etats de qui, de laquelle, &c 
Pour la fille de qui, &c. 
Par la main de qui. 
Sous la protection duquel, de la 

quelle, &c. 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 111.— Who ? (nom.) Whom ? (obj.) I Qui ? (nom.) Qui ? (regime.) (91*.) 
Who is good ? Whom do you see ? I Qui est bon ? Qui voyez-vous ? 

Qui never loses its i, say then, qui y va ? not Qu'y va ? Who goes there? 
Qui aimez-vous ? Whom do you like ? and not Qu'aimez-vous, which means 
What do you like ? 

§ 112. — What or Which ? 1st. When connected with a noun ex- 
pressed, is translated by the interrogative articles or adjectives, (§ 1,) quel, 
quels, quelle, quelles. 



What government do you prefer ? 
What is the authority of the mayor ? 
What or which articles has he sent? 
What or which plants do you prefer ? 



Quel gouvernement preferez-vous ? 
Quelle est I'autorite du maire ? 
Quels articles a-t-il envoyes ? 
Quelles plantes preferez-vous? 



$113. — 2d. What, interrogative, meaning what thing, when not con 
41* 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



nected with a noun, but with a verb, (2i,) is translated by que, qu\ ou quelle 
chose. ($ 114.) It is then objective to the verb, and placed before it. ($ 115.) 



Que preferez-vous ? 
Que fait le maire ? 
Qu'a-t-il envoye ? 



What (what thing) do you prefer ? 

What does the mayor ? 

What (what things) has he sent ? 

§ 114.— Or else by qu'est-ce que ? (28 1 .) 
What do you prefer ? i Qu'est-ce que vous preferez ? 

What does the mayor ? Qu'est-ce que le maire fait ? 

What has he sent ? ' Qu'est-ce qu'il a envoye ? 

Then the verb retains the affirmative form, because the interrogation is 
found in Qu'est-ce que . . . ? 

§ 115. — When placed after the verb, it is translated, not by que, but 
by quoi, (21 1 ,) and the verb retains, as in English, the affirmative form. 



What does the mayor ? 
The mayor does what ? 
What does he say ? He says what ? 
What has he sent ? He has sent 

what? 



Que fait le maire ? 
Le maire fait quoi ? 
Que dit-il ? II dit quoi ? 

Qu'a.-t-il envoye ? II a envoye 

quoi? 



§ 116. — 3d. What, when nominative to a verb, is translated by: 
Qu'est-ce qui? 



What pleases you ? 
What is agreeable ? 
What makes you laugh ? 
What grieves that child ? 



Qu'est-ce qui vous plait ? 
Qu'est-ce qui est agreable ? 
Qu'est-ce qui vous fait rire ? 
Qu'est-ce qui chagrine cet enfant? 



§ 117. — 4th. What, unconnected with a noun, and governed by a prepo- 
sition, is expressed by quoi. (R. 6.) 



What is he speaking of? That is : 

Of what is he speaking ? (21 1.) 
What is she going to draw with ? 
What does the child cry for ? (for 

what ?) 
What is she thinking of? (of what ?j 
To what does he apply ? He applies 

to reading, writing, and arithmetic. 
There is in it something pleasing. 
I have enough {wherewith) to live upon, 
It is sufficient (enough) to frighten 

him. 

§ 118. — 5th. What, in the collocations, (47®, ) what is, what was, what 
will be, &lc, followed by in, on, or any other preposition, is expressed by : 
Qu'y a-t-il dans . . . . ? Qu'y avait-il dans . . . . ? Qu'y aura-t-il dans . . . . ? 

What is on the table ? I Qu'y a-t-il sur la table ? 

What may be (may there be) for mo ? Quepeut-il y avoir pour moi ? 
What was under it ? I Qu'y avait-il dessous ? 



Be quoi parle-t-il ? 

Avec quoi va-t-elle dessiner ? 
Pourquoi l'enfant crie-t-il ? 

A quoi pense-t-elle ? 
A quoi s'applique-t-il ? U s' applique 
a la lecture, a l'ecriture et au calcul. 
II y a unje ne sais quoi qui plait. 
J'ai de quoi vivre. 
11 y a de quoi 1'enrayer. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 



487 



§ 119. — What, expressing admiration ; as : What can be more agreeable ! 
What can there be more agreeable ! or, What more agreeable ! is trans- 
lated by que, with the verb; as: Que peut-il y avoir de plus agreable! 
by quoi de ! without the verb ; as : Quoi de plus agreable ! 

What can be (there be) sweeter ! (64 1 .) I Que peut-il y avoir de plus doux ! 
What sweeter ! | Quoi de plus doux ! 

§ 120. — 6th. What, when a compound relative pronoun, is translated by 
ce qui, (nom.,) ce que, (obj.) 

131. — What, interjection, is: Quoi! Comment! 
What ! he is not here ! | Quoi ! (Comment !) il n'est pas ici ! 

§ 122. — Which, in the same manner as what, when connected with a 
noun, is used as an adjective, or an article, and translated by quel, quelle, 
quels, quelles. 

Which dictionary "^ 
Which grammar I , _ . 

Which dictionaries f do 5™ P refer ? 
Which grammars J 



Quel dictionnaire -^ 

Quelle grammaire I ,-. 

/i 7 j • • > preferez-vous? 

Quels dictionnaires f r 



Quelles grammairesj 
And likewise when it is governed by a preposition. (R. 6.) 



A quel dictionnaire donnez-vous la 
preference ? 
Pour quelle grammaire avez-vous 

donne un dollar ? 
Avec quel crayon avez-vous ecrit ? 
De quelles montagnes venez-vous ? 
Pres de quelle rue demeurez-vous ? 
Pour quel candidat voterez-vous ? 

$ 123. — When which becomes a pronoun, and takes the place of the noun, 
or, in other words, when which means which one, which of them, it must be 
translated not by quel, &c, alone, but by lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- 
quelles, the article le, la, les, being used, in French, before the pronoun, to 
translate the word one, or of them, placed after, in English, or understood. 
So, in French, the expression is, the which, instead of which one, which of 
them. 



To which dictionary do you give the 

preference ? 
For which grammar did you give a 

dollar ? 
Which pencil did you write with? 
Which mountains do you come from ? 
Near which street do you live ? 
Which candidate will you vote for ? 



There are several candidates ; which 
(or which one, or which of them,) do 
you prefer ? 

Which of these ladies is your cousin ? 

Among these young men, which learn 

French ? (which ones f) 
Among these young ladies, which 

learn French? (which ones ?) 



II y a plusieurs candidats ; lequet 
(not quel un) preferez-vous ? 

Laquelle de ces dames est votre cou- 

sine ? 
Parmi ces jeunes gens, lesquels ap- 

prennent le Frangais ? 
Parmi ces demoiselles, lesquelles ap- 

prennent le Francois ? 



$ 124. — N. B. Although one, or of them, may not be expressed aftet 
which, as is usually the case, translate as above, whenever it is implied. 



488 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS* 



Lequel est pren ier ? (6*.) 



Which is the first? (that is, which 

one ?) 
Which is the last ? 
Which are the best? (speaking of 

boys.) 
Which are the best? (speaking of 

girls.) ' 

§ 125. — To which, meaning to which one, to which of them, is expressed by 
auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles. 



Laquelle est derniere ? 
Lesquels sont les meilleurs ? 

Lesquelles sont les meilleures ? 



De ces trois hotels, auquel irez- 
vous? 



Of these three hotels, to which (one) 

will you go ? (or which will you go 

to?) 
Of the four seasons, to which (one) 

does he give the preference ? (or 

which .... to ?) 
Of all those gentlemen, to which 

(ones) shall we send invitations? 
To which of them (ladies) will you 

send presents ? (or which .... to ?) 

% 126. — Of which one, or ones, of which of them, duquel, de laquelle, 
desquels, desquelles. 



Des quatre saisons, d laquelle don- 
ne-t-il la preference? 

De tous ces messieurs, auxquels en- 
verrons-nous des invitations ? 

Auxquelles enverrez-vous des pre- 
sents ? 



Which do you speak of? (which 

one ?> 

Which do you speak of? (one lady?) 
Which do you speak of? (boys.) 
Which ones do you speak of? (girls.) 



Duquel parlez-vous ? 

De laquelle parlez-vous ? 
Desquels parlez-vous ? 
Desquelles parlez-vous ? 



$ 127. — With which of them, is avec lequel, avec laquelle, &c. 
Which of these young ladies are you I Avec laquelle de ces demoiselles al- 

going to sing with ? j lez-vous chanter ? 

And so, of every other preposition. 

$ 129. — N. B. Forget not that the preposition, in French, must always 
precede the word it governs, although it may be separated from it in Eng- 
lish. ($95.) 

Which are you going to apply to ? I Auquel allez-vous vous adresser ? 
Which did you come through ? (road.) I Par laquelle etes-vous venu ? (route.) 

§ 130. — When which is a relative, not an interrogative pronoun, it is 
Bometimes translated by lequel, laquelle, &c, ($82,) when anything inter- 
venes between the antecedent and pronoun. 

I can see which (one) you prefer. I Je peux voir lequel vous preTerez. 
This is the history of W. S., which I • "est l'histoire de W. S., laquelle 
contains so many fictions. contient tant de fictions. 

OF THE FRENCH PRONOUN ON. 

§ 131. — The pronoun On (37^) invariably governs the 3d person singular, 
whatever may be the English by which it is represented (§ 38 ) 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 48& 

§132. — 1. That pronoun corresponds to any English pronoun taken in an 
indefinite sense, as one, any one, some one, we, they, people, men, &c, 

whether singular or plural. (442.) 

§ 133. — 2. It corresponds also to the passive verb, expressing an idea i% 
an indefinite manner. (44 2 .) 

Silver is found everywhere, is general in its acceptation, and translated by 
n trouve V argent partout, for it means one finds, or people find, or men 
find silver everywhere. But when we say : Silver is found by the Peruvians, 
there is evidently a restriction, which causes the rejection of on, and the 
French is, L' argent est trouve par les Peruviens, or still better, Les Peru- 
viens trouvent 1' argent. A naval asylum is to be established. As it is not 
said by whom, on becomes the nominative of the active phrase. People 
will establish, &c, translated by on etablira un hopital de marine. But 
if the sentence is, A naval asylum is to be established by government, then, 
government becoming nominative of the active phrase Government will 
establish, &c, on is rejected, and the translation is: Le gouvurxement 
etablira un hopital de marine. 

% 134. — By the above examples, it will be seen that whenever on is used, 
the sentence must assume the active form. It is said that a comet is seen. 
Now, instead of translating literally, by il est dit qu'une comite est vue, the 
French change the construction, and say: 



On dit qu'on voit un comete. 
On trouve l'or. 
On lui a dit de venir. 
Que dit-on ? 



People say they see a comet. 

Gold is found ; turn, one finds gold. 

He was told to come : One told him . . 

What is said ? What do people say ? 

A bridge is to be made over the river. ) r\ j ■•* e ■ * i 

m & i ' , • j > On doit faire un pont sur la riviere. 

I hey are to make a bridge .... > 

§ 135. — Von is used instead of on for the sake of euphony, after the 

words ce que, si, ou, ou, et, que, qui. That I has no particular meaning, 
and is not to be translated. 

What you were told is not true. Ceque Von vous a dit, n'est pas vrai. 

If I am wanted, call me. (70 2 .) Si Von me veut, appelez-moi. 

It is a place where everybody is seen, j C'est un lieu ou Von voit tout le 

i monde. 

We do not like to see those to whom On n'aime pas a voir ceux a qui Von 

we owe so much. doit tant. 

Y"ou are seen and heard. On vous voit et Von vous entend. 

§136. — The student should be exercised to turning the English passive 
phrase into the active before he translates. 



ADJECTIVES. 

§137. — 1. Adjectives have a plural like nouns, (9 1 , 2 ,) and form it in the 
same manner. 

The fine horse. The fine horses. I Le beau cheval. Les beaux chevaux. 
My new; friend. My new friends. I Mon nouvel ami. Mesnouveaux amis. 



490 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



2. Much, many, more, less, little, too much, how much, how many, &c, 
considered as adjectives in English, are adverbs in French, and require a 
connecting link when they are united to a noun ; that connecting link is the 
preposition de. (13 1 .) 

More than, not separated by a noun, is expressed by plus que, except before 
a number, it is then plus de. More than you, plus que vous ; More than 
two, plus de deux. (16 2 .) 

3. Cardinal numbers are used for dates and the designation of sovereigns : 
Charles quatre ; Le 31 Mai. 

4. Adjectives agree in number with the noun or pronoun they qualify. 
(18 2 , 22 2 ,) and also in genders. (55 2 .) 

5. All adjectives, without exception, end in e mute in the feminine sin- 
gular, and in es in the feminine plural. Young, sing, jeune, plur. jeunes. 
Small, petit, petite, petites. 

6. Two or more masculine nouns, require the adjective to be masculine 
plural. 

The father and son are polite. | Le pere et le fils sont polls. 

7. Two or more feminine nouns require the adjective to be feminine plural. 
The mother and daughter are polite. | La mere et la fille sont polies. 

8. Two or more nouns of different genders, require the adjective to be 
masculine plural. 

The preceding lessons and exercises. I Lesle§onsetlesexercices;>recedett<s. 
His mouth and eyes open. | Sa bouche et ses yeux ouverts. 

As the adjective must be masculine, the ear requires the substantive 
masculine to be put last, as above, instead of: Ses yeux et sa bouche ouverts. 

9. The adjective cannot be separated by an article from the noun it quali- 
fies ; therefore the article placed after the adjective in English, comes before it 
in French. Except tout, which admits the article after it. 

Such a man, (59 2 ,) such men. I Tin tel homme (not tel un), de tels 

hommes. 
Such a woman, such women. line telle femme, de telles femmes. 

All his time, all the day (a day.) I Tout son temps, tout Zejour (imjour.) 

10. If with such there is another adjective, as, such a good book, the French 
do not use tel, but say, un si bon livre, the same as so good a book. So kind 
a friend, such a kind friend. Un si bon ami {never un tel bon ami.) 

Remark 1. Adjectives form their feminine in various ways, viz : 
1. The following double the last consonant: 





Masculin. 


Feminin. 


Low. 


Bas, 


basse. 


Thick. 


^Ipais, 


epaisse. 


Express. 


Expres, 


expresse 


Genteel, gentle, pretty. 


Gentil, 


gentille. 


Fat. 


Gras, 


grasse. 


Big. 


Gros, 


grosse. 


Weary. 


Las, 


lasse. 


No, none. 


Nul, 


nu lie. 


Initiated. 


Profes, 


professe. 


Silly, foolish. 


Sot, 


sotte. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



491 







Masculin. 


Feminm. 


Deceitful, 


(eur — euse.) 


Trompeur, 


trompeuse. 


Lying, 


a u 


Menteur, 


menteuse. 


Talkative, 


u n 


Parleur, 


parleuse. 


Executing, 


(eur — rice.) 


Ex£cuteur, 


executrice. 


Persecuting, 


it CI 


Persecuteur, 


persecutrice. 


Enchanting, 


(eur—'eresse.) 


Enchanteur, 


enchanteresse 


Sinning, 


it t* 


Pecheur, 


pecheresse. 


Avenging, 


m 


Vengeur. 


vengeresse. 


The following form their feminine quite irregularly : 




Absolved. 




Absous, 


absoute. 


Benign. 




Benin, 


benigne. 


Declining. 




Caduc, 


caduque. 


Dry. 




Sec, 


seche. 


False. 




Faux, 


fausse. 


Favorite. 




Favori, 


favorite. 


Free. 




Franc, 


franche. 


Fresh. 




Frais, 


fraiche. 


Greek. 




Grec, 


grecque. 


Long. 




Long, 


longue. 


Public. 




Public, 


publique. 


Red. 




Roux, 


rousse. 


Sweet. 




Doux, 


douce. 


Third. 




Tiers, 


tierce. 


Traitorous. 




Traitre, 


traitresse. 


Turkish. 




Turc, 


Turque. 


White. 




Blanc, 


blanche. 


Wicked. 




Malin, 


maligne. 



2. The plural of adjectives is formed like that of the substantives, (9*, 10.) 
Of the following twenty-eight adjectives, the first eighteen have no plural 
for the masculine, the last ten may form it by adding an s, but it is better 
to avoid using them in the plural for the masculine gender. 



Austral, 


southern. 


Sentimental, 


sentimental 


Beneficial, 


beneficiary. 


Vocal, 


vocal. 


Boreal, 


northern. 


Zodiacal, 


zodiacal. 


Brumal, 


brumal, 
canonical. 






Canonial, 




Diametral, 


diametrical. 


Amical, 


friendly. 


Experimental, 


experimental. 


Fatal, 


fatal. 


Labial, 


labial. 


Filial, 


filial. 


Lingual, 


lingual. 


Final, 


final. 


Lustral, 


lustral. 


Frugal, 


frugal. 


Matinal, 


early. 


Glacial, 


frozen. 


Me'dical, 


medical. 


Jovial, 


jovial. 


Mental, 


mental. 


Naval, 


naval. 


Natal, 


natal. 


Pascal, 


pascal. 


Patronal, 


patronal. 


Virginal, 


virginal. 



492 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



$138. — 1. The comparative of equality is formed by autant de. . . . que 
. . . , as much ... as ... , with nouns ; aussi . . . que . . . , as . . . as . . . , with adjec- 
tives and adverbs, (16 1 , 27 2 .) That of inequality, by plus . . . que, more . . . 
than ; moins . . . que . . , less . . . than . . . , with adjectives and adverbs, ^29 1 , 2 ,) 
and plus de . . . que de . . . , moins de . . . que . . . de . . . , with nouns. Not so 
much ... as, with nouns, is expressed by ne . . . pas tant de . . . que de ; not 
so ... as ... ; with adjectives and adverbs, by ne . . . pas si. . . que. 

I have not so much pride as he. I Je rc'ai pas tant d'orgueil que lui. 

I am not so proud as he. I Je ne suis pas si orgueilleux que lui. 

2. TAe more ... the less is expressed by : plus . . . moins without the 
article, although it is used in English; because the addition of the article 
le to plus, would make it a superlative, while more remains a comparative, 
even when it is preceded by the. 



The more you study, the more you 

learn. 
The more he plays, the less he learns. 
The greener the fruit, the less healthy 

it is. 



Plus vous etudiez, plus vous appre- 

nez. 
Plus il joue, moins il apprend. 
Plus le fruit est vert, moins il est 
sain. 

The nominative, in French, follows plus or moins. Then you must not 
say : Plus vert est le fruit moins sain il est ; but as it is above. 

3. In comparisons of inequality, formed by plus, more ; moms, less ; 
autre, autrement, otherwise, differently, &c, if the part of the sentence 
which precedes que (than) is affirmative, ne must be used before the verb 
coming after que. (§ 53 1 , 06s. 120.) 



I have more bread than I can eat. 

He studies less than I do. (492 ) 
Louis writes better than he speaks. 
They behave otherwise than you 
think. 

4. But do not use ne after que, than, if the first part of the sentence is 
negative or interrogative. 



J'ai plus de pain que je n'en peux 

manger. 
II etudie moins que je ne le fais. 
Louis ecrit mieux qu'il ne parle. 
lis se comportent autrement que 

vous ne pensez. 



He does not study less than I do. 
Louis does not write better than he 

speaks. 
They do not behave otherwise than 

you think. 
Can I eat more bread than I have ? 



II ri Ctudie pas moins que)' etudie. 
Louis w' ecrit pas mieux qu'il parle. 



lis ne se comportent pas autrement 

que vous croyez. 
Puis-je manger plus de pain que j'en 
ai? 
In comparisons of equality, expressed by autant, as much; tant, so 
much ; aussi, as ; si, so, &c. : ne is never used after que, (as.) 



I have as much bread as I can eat. 

He does not study so much as I do. 
Louis writes as well as he speaks. 
They do not behave so well as you 
think. 



J'ai autant de pain que je peux en 

manger. 
II n'etudie pas tant o^ej'etudie. 
Louis ecrit aussi Men qu"\\ parle. 
lis ne se comportent pas si Men que 

vous croyez. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



493 



U39.— PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

1. The following are placed before the noun. Note that when the posi- 
tive goes before, so do the comparative and superlative. Premier, first: 
second, second ; and other adjectives of number. 



Beau, bel, m. 


> fine. 

> handsome. 


Meilleur, 


better. 


Belle,/. 


Meme, 


same. 


Bon, bonne, 


good. 


Moindre, 


less. 


Grand, 


great, tall. 


Petit, 


little, small 


Gros, grosse, 


big^ulky. 


Plusieurs, 


several. 


Jeune 


young. 


Saint, 


holy. 


Joli, 


pretty. 


Tout, 


all. 


Mauvais, 


bad. 


Vieux, vieil, 


m '|okU 


Mechant, 


wicked. 


Vieille,/. 


A pretty little 


dog. 


Un jo.'i petit 


chien, 



2. But if any of these adjectives is connect with another that cannot 
be placed before the noun, both go after, joined by a conjunction. 

A handsome, amiable woman. 2 Une femme aimable et belle. 



A good, complaisant husband. 

A young, rich, and virtuous woman. 



Un mari bon et complaisant. 
Une demoiselle, j eune, riche, et ver- 
tueuse. 



3. Adjectives of nations, color, and shape, follow the noun. (26 2 , Obs. 61.) 



NOUNS. 

§ 140. — 1. Nouns in French not being, as in English, used as an adjective 
to another noun, as, a cloth coat, a preposition is used to show the relation 
between the two nouns, the second of which in English becomes the first 
in French. 

Be is used between the name of the thing and that of the substance of 
which it is made: Tin habit de drap ; un chandelier a" argent. If several 
nouns are used as adjectives, the French construction is the same; the last 
in English becomes first in French. Silver, gold, and steel jewels ; des 
bijoux d 1 argent, d' or, et deader. 

2. De shows also the possession marked in English by 's. John's book. 
The French construction remains the same : Le livre de Jean. 
The boy has a stick : is it the gene- i Le garcon a un baton : est-ce celui du 

raVs, the lawyer's, or the doctor's ? | general, de Vavocat, ou du docteur ? 



i The adjective cher, dear, also stands before the noun, except when it denotes the 
price of a thing. Ex. Mon cher ami, my dear friend ; ma chere sozur, ray dear sis- 
ter ; but un fusil cher, a dear gun; une table chere, a dear table. 

2 In the following examples, the peculiarity with respect to the place of the adjec- 
tive should be observed : Un grand homme means a great man, and un homme grand, 
a tall man ; une grosse femme, a fat woman, and une femme grosse, a woman with 
child; une sage-femme, a midwife, and une femme sage, a wise or modest woman 
un galant homme, a man of honor, and un homme galant, a courtier. 

42 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



The child's and the laker's dog. 

The grocer's butter, biscuits, and cof- 
fee. 

The grocer's butter, his biscuits and 
coffee. 



Le chien du garcon et du boulanger. 
Lt beurre, les biscuits, et le cafe de 

V epicier. 
Le beurre de 1' epicier, ses biscuits, 

et son cafe, (§ 32, N., at page 467.) 



To translate a double possessive case, take the last noun in English for 
the first in French, and then retrograde regularly. 



My brother's friend's book. 

The grocer's clerk's father's horse. 



Le livre de Vami de mon frere. 
Le cheval du pere du commis de 
1' epicier. 

3. De is also used in French to translate of, placed in a like situation in 
English. 

A barrel of flour. i Un baril de farine. 

A bag of rice. I Un sac de riz. 

4. A is used when the last French noun expresses the use of the first. 
A coffee-mill. Un mouiin a cafe. (77 1 .) 



Gunpowder. 
A flour-barrel. 



De la poudre a canon. 
Un baril a farine. 



A la, a V , au, aux, are used, when the first French noun contains a por- 
tion of the second. 



Le baril a la farine. (77 2 .) 
La bouteille au vinaigre. 
Le sac aux pommes. 



The barrel with flour in (but not full.) 
The bottle with vinegar in. 
The bag with apples. 

5. Proper names, used as such, have no plural. 

Your friends, the Clintons, are here. | Vos amis, les Clinton, sont ici. 

But if used as common nouns, they take an s. 
Washingtons are rare. | Les Washingtons sont rares. 

6. In an enumeration, nouns are frequently used without articles. 

You have what you want to eat with, | Vous avez ce qu'il vous faut pour 
a knife, fork, plate, napkin, &c. manger, couteau, fourchette, &c. 

You may likewise say, un couteau, une fourchette, une assiette, &c, 

repeating the article before every noun, if placed before the first; but it is 

better not to use it. 

Men, women, children, were out. | Hommes, femmes, enfants, etaient 

I dehors. 

7. Compound nouns are formed by connecting: 

A noun with a noun : as, un chou-fleur, a cauliflower ; des choux-fleurs. 

A noun with an adjective : as, une basse-taille, a bass-voice ; des basses- 
tailles. 

In such nouns, both the substantive and adjective become plural. 

A noun with a verb : as, un port e- crayon, a pencil-case ; des port e- crayons. 

In such nouns, the substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits 
of plurality. The case may have one or two -pencils in. 

A noun with a noun by a preposition : as, un chef-d'oeuvre, a master-piece ; 
des chefs-d'oeuvre. 

Here, the first substantive alone becomes plural, if the idea admits of 
plurality. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



A compound noun, formed from a verb, preposition, or adverb, is invariable, 
because its component parts are themselves invariable. Tin passe-partout, 
a dead-latch key ; des passe-partout. 

8. The feminine of substantives ending in er is regularly formed, by add- 
ing an e to the masculine, and changing the e mute into e grave. As : 



A milkman. 
A baker. 
A merchant. 



A milkwoman. 
A bakerwoman. 
A female merchant. 



Un laitier. 
Un boulanger. 
Un marchand. 



Une laitiere. 
Une boulangere. 
Une marchande. 



As there are many nouns and adjectives, (§200,) which, although incor- 
porated in the Vocabularies, are not used in the Exercises, contrary to our 
fundamental principle, viz: to make an immediate and continued use of 
expressions introduced, I place in the Synopsis an English alphabetical list 
of them, which may be consulted when necessary. 

The following substantives have a distinct form for individuals of the 
female sex : — 

Masculine. 
un abbe, 
un accusateur, 
un acteur, 
un ambassadeur, 
un apprenti, 
un baron, 
un berger, 
un biCnfaiteur, 
un chanoine, 
un chanteur, 
un chasseur, 
un chasseur, 
un comte, 
un danseur, 
un dieu, 
un due, 
un electeur, 
un empereur, 
un fondateur, 
un jouvenceau, 
un lion, 
un p alien, 
un paon, 
un paysan, 
un prieur, 
un prince, 
un protecteur, 
un roi, 



An abbot, 
An accuser, 
An actor, 
An ambassador, 
An apprentice, 
A baron, 
A shepherd, 
A benefactor, 
A canon, 
A singer, 
A hunter, 

-, (in poetry,) 



A count, 
A dancer, 
A god, 
A duke, 
An elector, 
An emperor, 
A founder, 
A lad, 
A lion, 
A heathen, 
A peacock, 
A peasant, 
A prior, 
A prince, 
A protector, 
A king, 

9. When a noun is the object of two or more verbs, those verbs mual 
govern that noun, without preposition, or with the same preposition. 



Feminine. 
une abbesse. 
une accusatrice. 
une actrice. 
une ambassadrice. 
une apprentie. 
une baronne. 
une bergere. 
une bienfaitrice. 
une chanoinesse. 
une chanteuse. 
une chasseuse. 
une chasseresse. 
une comtesse. 
une danseuse. 
une deesse. 
une duchesse. 
une electrice. 
une imperatrice. 
une fondatrice. 
une jouvencelle. 
une lionne. 
une paienne. 
une paonne. 
une paysanne. 
une prieure. 
une princesse. 
une protectrice. 
une reine. 



496 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



He buys and sells cloth, {no prep.) 
We promise and give to the people, {&.) 



II achete et vend du drap. 
Nous promettons et donnons aux 
gens. 
She speaks and boasts of her beauty. | Elle parle et se vante de sa beaute. 

But in French the sense cannot be suspended after a preposition as in 
English ; for instance, you must not say, Rien n'est plus agreable que de 
converser avec et que de jouir de la societe de nos amis, Nothing is more 
agreeable than to converse with and to enjoy the company of our friends. 
The sense cannot be suspended after the French preposition avec, as it can 
be after the English preposition with. Hence we have this rule : When the 
two verbs require different prepositions, do not suspend the sense, but make 
the noun the regime (§ 44) of the first preposition (or regime indirect of the 
first verb), and place an objective pronoun (§ 48) with the second verb. 
The above sentence is translated thus : Rien n'est plus agreable que de 
converser avec nos amis et que de jouir de leur societe. 

10. The nouns of multitude, in French, noms collectifs, are divided by 
them into two classes. 1st Class. Collectif general, when it represents the 
entire collection. La foule des hommes est vouee au malheur, the bulk 
of mankind is doomed to misfortune. The following verb is in the singular, 
and agrees with the collective. 2d Class. Collectif partitif when it repre- 
sents only a part of the collection. Tine foule de pauvres recoivent nos 
secours, a crowd of poor receive our assistance. A crowd of poor, contains 
but a portion of all the poor. The verb is in the plural, and agrees with the 
noun that follows the collective. 



1st cl. The army of the Americans. 

The multitude of the stars. 
2d cl. A troop of robbers. 

A multitude of stars. 



L'armee des Americains est . 
La multitude des etoiles est . . 
Une troupe de voleurs sont . . 
Une multitude d'etoiles sont . 



11. Of the farmer's hay, cabbages, I Du foin du fermier, de ses choux, de 
butter, and cheese. I son beurre, et de son fromage. 

This is an elliptical expression for the hay of the farmer, the cabbage of the 
farmer, the butter of the farmer, &c. ; but instead of using the noun in the 
possessive case a second time, the French use a possessive pronoun. (§ 32, N. 
page 367.) 

12. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS, 
TAKEN FROM THE LATIN AND GREEK. 

1. Proper names of men ending in English in a are the same in both lan- 
guages ; but those of women and goddesses having that ending become 
French by changing the final a into e mute. 

Caligula. Dolabella. I Caligula. Dolabella. 

Cleopatra. Diana. Julia. | Cleopatre. Diane. Julie. 

2. Most proper names ending in English in as or es become French by 
changing these finals into e mute. 

Eneas. Pythagoras. f iSnee. Pythagore. 

Ulysses. Socrates. [ Ulysse. Socrate. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



497 



3. Proper names ending in o change it in French into on. 
Cicero. Dido. | Ciceron. Didon. 

4. Most proper names ending in us are the same in both languages when 
they have but two syllables ; but when they are composed of three or more 
syllables, they become French by changing it into e mute. 

Cyrus. Venus. I Cyrus. Venus. 

Camillus. Orpheus. I Camille^ Orphee. 

5. Most of those ending in al or is are the same in both languages. 
Juvenal. Sesostris. ] Juvenal. Sesostris. 

6. Those ending in English in ander change it in French into andre. 

Alexander. Lysander. | Alexandre. Lysandre. 

Remark. — The proper names of kingdoms, provinces, and towns, ending 
in English in a, become French by changing the ending a into e mute, and 
those of towns ending in burg, change it into bourg. 1 

Arabia. Asia. I 1/ Arabic L'Asie. 

Friburg. Hamburg. I Fribourg. Hambourg. 

$ 141.— CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. 



Nombres Cardinal 

Cardinaux. Numbers. 

Un. m. une j /*.-.. — .--.-. .- .-.-.- 1. 

Deux (2) ^ .- 2. 

Trois 3. 

Quatre ~~ — . — — 4. 

Cinq . .^ ~ ~ 5. 

Six -. ~ ~ 6. 

Sept -. 7. 

Huit ~ .- - . . - 8. 

Neuf 9. 

Dix 



10. 

Onze 11. 

Douze — 12. 

Treize 13. 

Quatorze 14. 

Quinze 15 . 



Nombres Ordinal 

Ordinaux. Numbers. 

Premier, m. premiere, f. L . — . . .. 1st. 

Deuxieme, second, seconder.-.-. 2d. 

Troisieme « . 3d. 

Quatrieme ~«-. 4th. 

Cinquieme.., - . .- 5th. 

Sixieme - . . ► 6th. 

Septieme -. ... .-, -. ., 7th. 

Huitieme _...-. 8th. 

Neuvieme ~. 9th. 

Dixieme .. ~. - - 10th. 

Onzieme — 11th. 

Douzieme .. 12th. 

Treizieme . , 13th . 

Quatorzieme ... — 14 th . 

Quinzieme 15th 



i Such proper names as deviate from this rule are either separately noted, or are 
the same in both languages. 

2 From 2 to 10 there is an irregularity in the pronunciation of the numbers, whick 
it is well to notice. 







At the end of a sentence. 


Before a consonant. 


Before a vowel. 


Deux is 


pronounced 


deu, x silent. 




deu. 


deu-z amis. 


Trois 


" 


troi, 5 silent. 




troi. 


troi-z amis. 


Cinq 


u 


cinq, q sounded. 




cin. 


cin-q amis. 


Six 


<< 


sis, x like s. 




si. 


si-z arms. 


Sept 


( 


sept, t sounded. 




se. 


se-t amis. 


Huit 


u 


huit, t sounded. 




hui. 


hui-t amis. 


Neuf 


(( 


neuf,/ sounded. 




neu. 


neu-v amis. 


Dix 


<; 


dis, x like s. 




di. 


di-z amis. 


And in th 


e same manner wherever they 


occur. 






42 


* 











GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Nombrat Cardinal 

Cardinaux. Numbers. 

Seize ~ — 16. 

Dix-sept 17. 

Dix-huit -. -. • 18. 

Dix-neuf 19. 

Vingt(i) 20. 

Vingt etun 21. 

Vingt-deux 22. 

Vingt-trois 23. 

Vingt-quatre 24. 

Vingt-cinq • 25. 

Vingt-six - • 26. 

Vingt-sept ..!...;.... 27. 

Vingt-huit .- 28. 

Vingt-neuf - 29. 

Trente . ~ 30. 

Trente et un . . . . -••-'. 31. 

Trente-deux - . 32. 

Trente-trois -.....-.. 33. 

Quarante 40. 

Quarante et un. . ... — • 41. 

Quarante-deux. ..-..« 42. 

Quarante-trois 43. 

Cinquante 50. 

Cinquante et un 51. 

Cinquante-deux -.-. ~ 52. 

Soixante -. 60. 

Soixante et un 61. 

Soixante-deux - 62. 

Soixante et dix 70. 

Soixante-onze - -....-. 71. 

Soixante-douze 72. 

Soixante-treize - . . . 73. 

Soixante-quatorze . . 74 . 

Soixante-quinze „ 75. 

Soixante-seize ....... 76. 

Soixante-dix-sept 77. 

Soixante-dix-huit 78. 

Soixante-dix-neuf 79. 

Quatre-vingts( 2 ) - 80. 

Quatre-vingt-un 81. 

Quatre-vingt-deux -...-. 82. 

Quatre-vingt-dix 90. 

Quatre-vingt-onze 91. 

Quatre-vingt-douze 92. 

Quatre-vingt-treize 93. 

Quatre-vingt-quatorze 94. 

Quatre-vingt-quinze 95. 

Quatre-vingt-seize 96. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-sept 97. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-huit 98. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-neuf 99. 



Nombrea Ordinal 

Ordinaux. Numbers. 

Seizieme 16th. 

Dix-septieme - 17th. 

Dix-huitieme 18th. 

Dix-neuvieme ++.-. .- 19th. 

Vingtieme 20th. 

Vingt et unieme 21st. 

Vingt-deuxieme - . . 22d. 

Vingt-troisieme 23d. 

Vingt-quatrieme 24th. 

Vingt -cinquie me h. .- .^ 25th. 

Vmgt-sixieme .- .^ 26th. 

Vingt-septieme 27th. 

Vingt-huitieme — - 28th. 

Vingt-neuvieme — .-. — — 29th. 

Trentieme -. • 30th. 

Trente et unieme 31st. 

Trente-deuxieme -. -. .-. 32d. 

Trente-troisieme 33d. 

Quarantieme 40th. 

Quarante et unieme — 41st. 

Quarante-deuxieme 42d. 

Quarante-troisieme 43d. 

Cinquantieme . . .-^.- .- 50th 

Cinquante et unieme - 51st 

Cinquante-deuxieme - 52d. 

Soixantieme 60th 

Soixante et unieme 61st. 

Soixante-deuxieme 62d. 

Soixante et dixieme 70th . 

Soixante-onzieme 71st. 

Soixante-douzieme . . -. 72d. 

Soixante-treizieme 73d. 

Soixante-quatorzieme 74th. 

Soixante-quinzieme — 75th. 

Soixante-seizieme 76th. 

Soixante-dix-septieme 77th. 

Soixante-dix-huitieme 78th. 

Soixante-dix-neuvieme 79th. 

Quatre-vingtieme 80th. 

Quatre-vingt-unieme 81st. 

Quatre-vingt-deuxieme 82d. 

Quatre-vingt-dixieme 90th. 

Quatre-vingt-onzieme 91st. 

Quatre-vingt-douzieme 92d. 

Quatre-vingt-treizieme 93d. 

Quatro-vingt-quatorzieme 94th. 

Quatre-vingt-quinzieme 95th. 

Quatre-vingt-seizieme ^ ... .. 96th. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-septieme 97th. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-huitieme 98th. 

Quatre-vingt-dix-neuvieme 99th. 



i In vingt the t is silent, but sounded in vingt et un, vingt-deux, &c. 
2 In uatre-vingts the t is never sounded. 






GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



499 



Nombres Ordinal 

Ordinaux. Numbers. 

Centieme 100th. 

Cent-unieme 101st. 

Cent-deuxieme 102d. 

Cent-troisieme 103d. 

Cent-dixieme 110th. 

Cent-onzieme 111th. 

Cent-vingtieme 120th. 

Cent vingt et unieme 121st. 

Deux centieme 200th . 

Deux cent-unieme 201st. 

Millieme 1000th. 

Mille-unieme 1001st. 

Mille-deuxieme, &c 1002d. 

Mille-centieme, (onze-centieme 1100th. 
Mille-neuf-centieme, (dix-neuf- 

centieme ... .. 1900th. 

After which the French do not count any more by hundreds, as the English 
do. They do not say : Vingt, vingt et un, vingt-deux, &c, cents ; twenty, 
twenty-one, twenty-two, &c, hundred, but : 

Deux mille - 2000. i Deux millieme 2000th. 

Deux mille cinq cents 2500. Deux mille cinq-centieme 2500th. 

Un million .. .- ~ 1,000,000. | Millionieme millionth. 

In dates, Mille is spelt Mil. Mil sept cent soixante-seize, 1776. 
Mil huit cent quarante-neuf, ou Dix-huit cent quarante-neuf, 1849. 



Nombrei Cardinal 

Oardinaux. Numbers. 

Cent - ~ ~ . . 100. 

Cent un (not cent et un) — 101. 

Cent deux 102. 

Cent trois ^.. 103. 

Cent dix - -.*. . 110. 

Cent onze 111. 

Cent vingt . « - 120. 

Cent vingt et un ...-..- 121. 

Deux cents 200. 

Deux cent un 201. 

Mille (not dix cents) .. 1000. 

Mille un 1001. 

Miile deux, &c 1002. 

Mille cent (onze cents) 1100. 

Mille neuf cents (dix-neuf cents) 1900. 



The whole. A part. 

The half. The third, h 

The two-thirds, |. The three-thirds. 
The fourth part, the £. The |. 
The fifth part, the 1-5. The 4-5. 

The sixth part, the 1-6, and so forth, 
' by adding iime to the cardinal. 
What is the half of 4 ? It is 2. 
What is that of 5 ? It is 2 and a half. 

What is the f of 8 ? It is 5 and 

Which is the fourth of 11? It is 2*. 

The * are 8i. 

$142. — The seasons of the year are : 
The spring. The summer. 

The autumn, or fall. The winter. 

§143. — Names of the months of the 

year. 
The first month is January. 
Is not the second month February? 
The third is March. 



Le tout, 1' unite. Une partie. 

La moitie, la demie. Le tiers, i. 
Les deux-tiers, f. Les trois-tiers. 
Le quart, le £. Les trois quarts, f. 
Le cinquieme, le 1-5. Les 4 cin- 

quiemes. 
Le sixieme, le 1-6, et ainsi de suite, 

en ajoutant ieme au cardinal. 
Quelle est la moitie de 4? C'est 2. 
Quelle est celle de 5? C'est 2 et 

demi. 
Quels sont les f de 8 ? C'est 5 et 

un tiers, 5i. 
Quel est le quart de 11 ? C'est 2 et 

£. Les $ sont 8£. 

Les saisons de l'annee, sont : 

Le printemps, (382.) L'ete, (36*.) 

L'automne. L'hiver. 

Noms des mois de l'annee. 
Le premier mois est Janvier. 

Le second n'est-il pas Fevrier? 
Le troisieme est Mars. 



500 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



April. May. June. 

Jub August. September. 

October. November. December. 
Next January. Last January. 

The coming February. Last March. 
In April. On the first of May. 

On the 4th of July, 1776. 
New Year's day. On New Year. 
I wish you a happy New Year. 
Christmas day. On Christmas. 

Is not June the 6th month ? 
Yes, it is ; arid September is the 9th. 
How many days are there in July ? 

There are 31. 
How many are there in August ? 
Are there as many in October ? 
There are just as many. 
Has September as many ? 
No, it has but 30, the same as April, 

June, and November. 
The shortest month is February, 

which, in common years, has but 

28 days, and 29 in leap (bissextile) 

years. 



Avril. Mai. Jain. 

Juillet. Aout. Septembre. 

Octobre. Novembre. Decembre. 
Janvier prochain. Janvier dernier. 
Fevrier qui vient. Mars dernier. 
En Avril. Le premier de Mai. 

Le quatre de Juillet, 1776. 
Lejourdel'an. Le premier de l'an. 
Je vous souhaite une bonne annee. 
Le jour de Noel. 

Juin n'est-il pas le 6me mois ? [9me. 
Si fait, ce Test ; et Septembre est le 
Combien de jours y a-t-il dans 

Juillet ? II y en a 31. 
Combien y en a-t-il en Aoul t 
Y en a-t-il autant en Octobre ? 
II y en a tout autant. 
Septembre en a-t-il autant ? 
Non, il n'en a que 30, de meme que 

Avril, Juin, et Novembre. 
Le mois le plus court est Fevrier, qui, 

dans les annees communes, n'a 

que 28 jours, et 29 dans les annees 

bissextiles. 



VERBS. 



$ 144.— INDICATIVE PRESENT.— lndicatif Present. 

To find the present tense of a verb, its present participle must be known, 
as it serves to form the three persons plural. It always ends in ant : and, 
as all grammars and dictionaries give it, it is easily learned. 1 The first, 
second, and third persons plural, of the present tense, are formed by 
changing the termination ant, of the present participle, into ons, for the 
first person ; into ez, for the second, and into ent, for the third. 2 Ex. : — 

1 The formation of the indicative present from the infinitive, although it would be 
preferable, presents too many exceptions, and is consequently too difficult for 
beginners. 

2 The second person singular always ends in 5.* In the first conjugation, the 
third person singular ends in e, and is the same as the first person ; in the second and 
third conjugations, it ends in t ; first and second have s. In the fourth conjugation, 
it adds nothing to the root.f 

* Except in the imperative of the first conjugation, and of some verbs of the 
ser ri'l. where the s is dropped. Ex. : Parle, speak, (thou.) When the imperative, 
however, is followed by one of the pronouns, en, y, the letter 5 is not dropped; as: 
ilanihs-en a ton frere, give some to thy brother; portes-y tes livres, take thy books 
thitber. 

f By root we understand that part of the verb which precedes the terminations «r, 
ir, otr, r«, of the infinitive : for example, in the verb finir, to finish, fin is the root 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



501 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive. Present 'participle. 

To speak. Speaking. 

Present tense. 
We speak, you speak, thej speak. 
I speak, thou speakest, he speaks. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

To finish. Finishing. 

We finish, you finish, they finish. 

I finish, thou finishest, he finishes. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 

To receive. Receiving. 

We receive, you receive, they receive. 

I receive, thou receivest, he receives. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

To sell. Selling. 

We sell, you sell, they sell. 
I sell, thou sellest, he sells. 



PREMIERE CONJUGAISON. 

Infinitif. Participe present. 



Parler. 



Parlant. 



Present. 
Nous parlons, vous parlez, ils parlent, 
Je parle, tu paries, il parle. 

SECONDE CONJUGAISON. 

Finir. Finissant. 

Nous finissons, vous finissez, ils fi- 
le finis, tu finis, il finit. [nissent. 



TROISIEME CONJUGAISON. 

Pecevoir. Pecevant. 

Nous recevons, vous recevez, ils re- 

Je recois, tu recois, il regoit. fcoivent. 

QUATRIEME CONJUGAISON. 

Vendre. Vendant. 

Nous vendons, vous vendez, ils ven- 

Je vends, tu vends, il vend. [ dent. 

Hint. — From the third person plural, the scholar can easily learn the 
singular. 

For the first conjugation, change the pronouns, but pronounce the verb 
just like the third person plural: Ils parle?it, je parle, tu parle, il parle. 

For the second, third, and fourth conjugations, drop the last mute sylla- 
ble of the third person plural ; then the remainder will be the sound of the 
singular. 

lis finissent, jejini, tu fini, il fini. 

lis recoivent, je recoi, tu regoi, il regoi. 

Ils vendent, jeven, tu ven, il ven. 

The scholar has only the sounds here ; the correct spelling is to be 
learned by the written directions in {% 144, N. 2), and by translating the 
exercises. This answers for the regular conjugations, and many of the irre- 
gular ones. 

Exceptions to the general rule at (§ 144.) 



Etre,* ttant. 

Nous sommes, vous etes, ils sont. 

Avoir,* ayant. 

Nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. 



S a voir,* 



sachant. 



Nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. 



To be, being. 

We are, you are, they are. 

To have, having. 

We have, you have, they have. 

To know, knowing. 

We know, you know, they know. 

To do, make, doing. 
You do, they do. 

To say, tell, saying, telling. 
You say, tell. 

1 The third person plural of the third conjugation offers, as may be seen, an excep 
tion ; as the present participle is changed to recoivent. 



Faire,* 


faisant. 




Ire rtg. 


vous faites, 


ils font. 


Dire,* 


disant. 




Ire rtg. 


vous dites. 


%me rsg 



602 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



In (§ 144, N. 1,) it was observed, that the third person plural of the 3d 
conjugation was irregularly formed ; so it is with the following conjugations : 



1st. Aller, 

2d. Venir, 
Tenir, 
Acquerir, 
Mourir, 

3d. JRecevoir, 1 
Devoir, 
Mouvoir, 
Pouvoir, 
Vouloir, 

4th. Boire, 
Prendre, 



to go ; allant : Us vont, they go. 

to come ; venant : Us viennent, they come, 

to keep, hold; tenant : Us tiennent, they hold, 

to acquire ; acquerant : Us acquierent, they acquire. 



to die (lose life) ; mourant , 
to receive ; recevant : 

to owe ; 
to move ; 
to be able ; 
to be willing ; 
to drink ; 
to take ; 



Us meurent, 
lot, regoivent, 
Us doivtnt, 
Us meuvent, 
Us peuvent, 
Us veulent, 
Us boivent, 
Us prennent, 



they die. 
they receive, 
they owe. 
+ hey move, 
they can. 
they will, 
they drink, 
they take. 



devant : 
mouvant : 
pouvant : 
voulant : 
buvant : 
prenant : 

1. In recevoir, or any other verb in which the c is soft in the infinitive, the 
c must remain so throughout, hence, it takes a cedilla (§), when followed 
by a, o, u. Ex. Je regois, I receive ; regu, received ; forcer, to force ; 
forgant, forcing, &c. (24 1 .) 

2. In verbs ending in ger, the letter e, for the softening of the sound, is 
retained in all those persons where g is followed by a or o. (24 2 .) 

3. In verbs ending in ayer, oyer, uyer, the letter y is changed into i, in 
all persons where it is followed by e mute. (24*.) 

4. In verbs having e(mute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, 
the letter e has the grave accent (e) in all persons, where the consonant 
immediately after it, is followed by e mute, as in mener, to guide, to take ; 
promener, to walk ; acliever, to finish, &c. As : 



I buy, thou buyest, he buys. 
I lead, thou leadest, he leads. 
Do you take him to the play ? 
I do take him thither. 



J'achete, tu achetes, il achete. 
Je mene, tu menes, il mene. 
Le menez-vous au spectacle ? 
Je l'y mene. (25 1 .) 



N. B. Except with the terminations eler, eter, in which the consonant 
is doubled. (333.) 

5. In verbs having e (acute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, 
that e becomes i (grave) when followed by a mute syllable. As, seeker, to 
dry ; je seche, I dry ; lis sechent, they dry. Ceder, to yield ; il Me, he 
yields, &c. (28 2 .) 

6. The English present tense, expressed (24 1 ) in three ways, Hove, I do 
love, I am loving, is translated by only one French expression : faime. 
Hence, Je lis, corresponds to, I read, I do read, I am reading. The French 
have, however, another way much used by them, although unnoticed in 
grammars. The true, the real present in English is 1 am readi?ig ; the 
corresponding French is je suis d lire. It consists of two parts. The 1st, 
as in English, is the verb to be v (etre,) in all its persons ; the 2d is, not the pre- 



1 And all in evoir, as apercevoir, to perceive; concevoir, to conceive, &c. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 503 

§ent participle, (reading,) but the preposition a, followed, of course, by the 
infinitive, (lire;) for recollect — Rule 1st. Every preposition, except en, 
governs the infinitive. Then je suis d lire corresponds exactly to / am 
reading, although, if translated literally, it would mean, I am to read, which 
signifies a very different thing. But never mind the literal sense, take only 
the common acceptation attached to the expression, (76 *,) viz : — 
I am reading. I read. I Je suis a lire. Je lis. 

We are reading. We read. | Nous sommes a lire. N. lisons. 

The component parts of this expression are quite familiar to the student, 
and but little practice will enable him to use them with ease. This mode 
of forming the present applies to every other tense. 

Etiez-vous a lire ? J'etais a lire. 

Etait-il a ecrire ? II etait a ecrire. 

Quand ils seront a manger. 

Appelez-nous quand meme nous 
serions a prendre le the. 

Ne seront-ils pas a jouer ? Si fait, 
ils seront a jouer. 

Elle est a voyager, n'est-ce pas ? 

Est-ce qu'ils sont a voyager ? 
(64 2 , N. 2.) 

Tu es a ecouter, n'est-ce pas ? 



Were you reading ? I was. 

Was he writing ? He was. 

When they will be eating. 
Call us, even if we were taking tea, 

(even should we be, &c.) 
Will they not be playing ? Yes, they 

will. 
She is travelling, is she not ? 
They are not travelling, are they ? 



Thou art listening, art thou not ? 

PARFAIT 1 ou PRESENT COMPOS^. 

Study carefully the article, and the example at (33 1 , §53.) 

§145. — The English Perfect invariably conveys an allusion to the present ; 
the Parfait not only conveys an allusion to the present, but also refers to 
actions past at a time wholly expired, or to actions expressed by the English 
imperfect. Hence, it corresponds to the English perfect and imperfect tenses. 
The French use it to express the daily occurrences of life. 

1. How long is it since you tasted coffee? It is three mo7iths sincel tasted 
any. Since I wrote to him, France has become a republic. (§ 49 2 .) In 
these sentences, and all similarly formed, although no negative is used, one 
is evidently implied, or, at least, a negative turn may be given to them, for 
the first means, You have not tasted coffee for how long a time ? The second 
means, I have not tasted any these three months. And the third, 1 have not 
written to him for some time, during which France has become a republic 
It is evident that the same negative turn cannot be given to, How long 
is it since your cousin set out ? since you dined ? you cannot say, has not set 
\fut, you did not dine. Consequently, as no negative is implied, say, without 
the ne, Combien y a-t-il que votre cousin est parti ? que vous avez dine ? 

In translating the sentences in which a negative is implied, but not ex- 

* Frequently called PrHtrit Indifini. But as the word is foreign to the English 
conjugation, it has no definite sense for the American pupil, while the word Parfait, 
corresponding to his own Perfect, offers at once a clear idea. 



504 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



pressed, the French use ne, but suppress pas (that is, they suppress only a 
part of the negative, instead of suppressing it altogether as the English do. 
Hence, the first is translated by Combien y a-t-il que vous N'avez goute de 
cafe ? The second, by II y a trois mois queje N'en ai goute. The third, by 
Depuis que je ne lux ai ecrit, la France est devenue republique. This con- 
struction takes place only after il y a and depuis que, followed by a definite 
period of time, and when the French verb is in the parfait, (English perfect 
tense.) In the present tense, pas is used : as, II y a trois mois que je ne 
goute pas de cafe, It is three months since I taste no coffee, or, I have tasted 
no coffee these three months. Depuis que je ne lui ecris pas, la France est, 
&c. Since I do not write to him, France has, &c. (49 2 , Obs. 114.) 

2. The English perfect, formed from the present of the auxiliary and the 
past participle, as, I have spoken; We have written letters; He has exa- 
mined your cloth ; is the only one usually given in grammars; but there is 
another, formed by the verbs to have and to be, prefixed to the present par- 
ticiple ; as, I have been speaking ; we have been writing letters ; he has been 
examining your cloth ; which, although not commonly found in grammars, 
and not quite synonymous with the other perfect, is, nevertheless, constantly 
used in conversation. Some grammarians have introduced it, and call it 
the compound form of the perfect. As the French have no tense similarly 
constructed, they use the parfait, and say: Taiparle; nous avons ecrit des 
lettres ; il a examine votre drap. 

3. The English say, I come from my store, to express that the action of 
coming- has just taken place. But, when any other verb is used, such as, 
to speak, to write, &c, instead of saying, I come from speaking, from 
writing, &c, they change it to, 1 have just spoken, written, &c. The French 
say : Je viens de mon magasin, to signify that the action of coming has just 
been performed, and they apply the same mode of expression for any other 
action. Hence, they say: Je viens deparler, oV ecrire, &c. (49 2 , Obs. 115.) 

It is hoped that this brief explanation will remove a difficulty, which, in 
this case, the great difference of construction presents to many pupils. 



FIRST FUTURE.— Futur. 

§ 146. — 1. The Future Tense, in all French verbs, ends as follows : rax, 
ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Therefore, as soon as we know one person, we also 
know the others. (46 1 .) 

2. The first person singular is formed from the infinitive by changing the 
final r of the first and second conjugations ; the oir, of the third, and the 
re of the fourth, into rai. Ex. : — 



Infinitive. 
To love, 
To finish, 
To receive, 
To restore, 



Future. 
I shall or will love. 
I shall or will finish. 
I shall or will receive. 
I shall or will restore. 



Infinitif 
1st Conj. Aimer, 
2d " Finir, 

3d " Recevoir, 

4th " Rendre, 



Futur. 
j'aimerai. 
je finirai. 
je recevrai. 
je rendrai. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



505 



Tu aimeras. 
II aimero. 
Nous aime rons, 
Vous aimer ez. 
lis aime rout. 
Tu recevnzs. 
II reeevra. 
Nous recewrons. 
Vous recevrez. 



JFVlttrs. 

Tu finiras. 



II finir«. 
Nous Qnirons. 
Vous finirez. 
lis finiraraJ. 
Tu rendras. 
II rendra, 
Nous rendrons. 
Vous rendrez. 



lis iecevro7it. (46 1 .) lis rendraTtf. 



Tfaou shalt or wilt love, thou shalt or 

wilt finish. 
He shall or will love, he shall or will 

finish. 
We shall or will love, we shall or will 

finish. 
You shall or will love, you shall or 

will finish. 
They shall or will love, they shall or 

will finish. 
Thou shalt or wilt receive, thou shalt 

or wilt restore. 
He shall or will receive, he shall or 

will restore. 
We shall or will receive, we shall or 

will restore. 
You shall or will receive, you shall 

or will restore. 
They shall or will receive, they shall 

or will restore. 

The future tense is sometimes connected with if; sometimes with when. 

3. In English, you may say: I will go, if he lends me his horse; or, If he 
will lend me his horse. In the first: if he lends me, &c, lends is in the 
present. In the second : If he will lend me, &c, will lend, appears to be 
in the first future tense, although it is actually in the present ; for, will lend, 
in that case, does not mean shall lend, but is willing to lend, or agrees to 
lend. Scholars are very apt, in similar sentences, to take the word will as 
a sign of the future, and to use that tense in French, while they should use 
the present. I will go if he lends me his horse, is readily and correctly 
translated by: J'irai s'il me prete son cheval. But, I will go if he will 
lend me his horse, is as readily but incorrectly translated by: Tirai s'z'Z me 
pretera son cheval. It ought to be: T irai s' il veut me preter son cheval; 
using the present tense of vouloir. Si, in all similar phrases, must be fol- 
lowed in French by the present tense, never by the future. (46 2 , Obs. 105, 
and N.) 

N. B. Translate if he, if they, by s'il and s'ils. In no other case is the 
i of si cut off by an apostroph'3. 

4. On the contrary, the verb following quand, when, must be in the future 
tense, although the English present is then used; as, I will go when you 
do, (or when you go.) J'irai quand vous irez, (not vousallez.) 



He will write it if you do. 
He will write it when you do, 
I will tell you of it, if you are here. 
I will tell you of it, when you are 
here. 



II l'ecrira si vous Vecrivez. 
II l'ecrira quand vous Ttcrirez. 
Je vous le dirai, si vous etes ici. 
Je vous le dirai, quand vous serez 
ici. (46 2 , Obs. 106.) 

5. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce qui, ce que, as soon as, 
43 



506 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



aussitot que, des que, after apres que ; as, comme, where, ou, are used, the 
French future must be employed. 



She will sing what you please. (463, 

Obs. 107.) 
He will return as soon as you start. 

We will do it after you have done it. 

He will put it where you please. 
He will do it as you wish. 

§147.— OF THE IMPERFECT.— Be VImparfait. 

1. The Imperfect of the Indicative, in all French verbs, ends as follows: 

ais, ais, ait, io?is, iez, aient. (59 1 .) 

Hence, as soon as one person is known, all the others may be formed. 

2. The first person singular is formed from the present indicative by 
changing the final ons of the first person plural to ais. As : 



Elle chantera ce qui vous plaira. 
Elle chantera ce que vous voudrez. 
II reviendra aussitot que vous par- 

tirez. 
Nous le ferons apres que vous l'au 

rez fait. 
II le mettra ou vous voudrez. 
II le fera comme vous le souhaiterez. 



Nous 


J', je 


tu 


il, elle, on 


nous 


VOUS 


ils, elles 


Avows, 


avais, 


avais, 


avait, 


avions. 


aviez, 


avaient^ 1 ) 


Croy ons, 


croyais, 


croyais, 


croyait, 


croyions, 


croyiez, 


croyaient. 


Disons, 


disais, 


disais, 


disait, 


disions, 


disiez, 


disaient. 


Fais<ms 5 (2) 


faisais, (2) 


faisais, 


faisait, 


faisions, 


faisiez, 


faisaient. 



from : 
Fesons,(2) fesais, (2) 



fesais, 



fesions, fesiez, 



fesaient. 



fesait, 

We have begun with those verbs, because the scholar already knows some 
of their persons ; the four regular conjugations are as follows : — 



PRESENTS. 



We 

speak, 

finish, 



nous 
parlons 

finissons 



IMPERFECTS. 
\ I was speaking, 
[ used to speak. 
( I was finishing, 



\ Je parlais, 
) pariions, 
) Je finissais, 



recer*3, recevons 



vendons 



I used to finish. 

\ I was receiving, 

[ used to receive. 

\ I was selling, 

[ used to sell. 
3 The only exception to this rule is : 
We are. I was, or ) Thais 

Nous sommes. used to be. 5 etions, 



cell, 



) finissions, 
) Je recevais, 
$ recevions, 
) Je vendais, 
> vendions, 



IMPARFAITS. 

parlais, 

parliez, 

finissais, 

finissiez, 

recevais, 

receviez, 

vendais, 

vendiez, 



etais, 
etiez, 



parlait. 

parlaient, 

finissait. 

finissaient. 

recevait. 

recevaient. 

vendait. 

vendaient. 

etait. 
etaient. 



i The orthography of the first and second persons singular, and of the third person 
singular and plural, of the imperfect, was formerly je parlois, tu parlois, il parlolt, 
ils parloient. Some authors still persist in this way of spelling, but they ought not 
to be imitated. The orthography we follow was first proposed in 1675, by a lawyer 
of the name of Berain, and has since been adopted by the generality of French au- 
thors. According to the ancient orthography, the conditionals, and other words, as 
j^aimerais, paraztre, disparaitre, faible, monnaie, Anglais, Francais, Hollandais, 
Irlandais, Sec, were written: j'aimerois, paroztre, disparottre, foible, monnoie, 
Anglois, Francois, Hollandois, Irlandois, &c. 

2 Faisais, fesais, whether spelt fai or fe, the first syllable in the plural of tha 
present, in all the imperfect future, and conditionnel , is pronounced fe, the e bei^ 
mute. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 507 

4. The imperfect expresses an action begun, but not ended at the past 
time spoken of— or else as yet going on. 1 was writing at noon, means, 1 
had begun to write, but I had not finished at noon. I used to ride when I was 
in the country, means, i continued to ride, &c. The English given above, 
corresponds to the French imperfect, and if it were always employed, there 
would be no difficulty in the use of the French tense ; but the other form 
of the English imperfect, viz : 1 spoke, I finished, I received, 1 sold, is fre- 
quently used ; and thence the difficulty arises ; for, 1 spoke, I finished, &c, 
must be translated by the French imperfect, only when they mean I was 
speaking, or used to speak; was finishing , or used to finish, &c. (59 1 , &c.) 

5. When the first person plural of the present indicative ends in ions, as 
nous oublions, we forget ; nous rions, we laugh ; nous prions, we pray ; 
the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, have 
double i. (60 1 .) Ex. Nous oubliions, nous riions, &c. 

6. When the same person plural ends in yons, put an i after the y. As, 
Nous croyons, we think ; nous croyions, we were thinking ; nous employ ons, 
use ; nous employions, were using. And likewise, nous nous asseyions, 
nous envoyions, essayions, and fuyions, voyions, &c. (60 l .) 

§ 148.— POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT.— Conditional. 

1. In every French verb it ends in : rais, rais, rait, rions, riez, raient. 

2. Its first person singular is formed by adding s to the first person singular 
of the French futur. (See 46 1 , 2 , &c. — § 146.) Futur, rai ; conditionnel, rais, 
J'aurai, j'aurais. Consequently the conditionnel is irregular when the 
future is. ($ 146.) 

I should have, thou wouldst have, lie 

or she would have. 
We should have, you would have, 

they would have. 
I should be, thou wouldst be, he or 

she would be. 
We should be, you would be, they 

would be. 
I should speak, thou wouldst speak, 

he or she would speak. 
We should speak, you would speak, 

they would speak. 



J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait. 

Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou 
elles auraient. 

Je serais, tu serais, il ou elle serait. 

Nous serions, vous seriez, ils ou elles 

seraient. 
Je parlerais, tu parlerais, il ou elle 

parlerait. 
Nous parlerions, vous parleriez, ils 

ou elles parleraient. 



3. As its name implies, the conditionnel is always connected with a con- 
dition either expressed or understood. When si (if) accompanies it, that 
si must be followed by the French imperfect, 1 regardless of the English 
tense. 

1 We have already seen (46X Obs. 105) that 5«, (if, meaning granting, that, &c.) 
connects the futur and present. Now, we add, that si connects the conditionnel 
and imparfait. When si, however, means whether, it is followed by the condi- 
tionnel. I do not know if (whether) I would go, even if (supposing that) I were 
invited. Je ne sais pas si j'iraig (cond.) meme si j'etais (imparf.) invite. 



508 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



If I had money I would have a new 

coat. 
If thou couldst do this thou wouldst 

do that. 
If he could he would. 
If he would he could. 



Si j'avais de P argent j'aurais un 

habit neuf. 
Si tu savais faire ceci tu voudraia 

faire cela. 
S'il pouvait il voudrait. 
S'il voulait il pourrait. 

4. Could and would, connected with the potential, always allude to a 
future action, and are then translated by the conditionnel or by the imper- 
fect after si. But could and would, alluding to a past, instead of a future 
action, are not to be rendered by the conditionnel, but by a past tense. I 
could, by fax pu—je pouvais, &c. I would, by fai voulu—je vou- 
lais, &c. 

I would go if I could. J'irais, (cond.) si je pouvais. (impa.) 

Did John and his sister go to the Jean et sa sceur sont-ils alles a la 

party last night ? No ; John could partie hier soir ? Non ; Jean ne 

not go, consequently she would pouvait pas y aller, consequem- 

not go. (62 2 , N. at page 326.) ment elle n'a pas voulu y aller. 

5. When I wish is followed by the English imperfect, it usually means: 
I should like to, and must be translated by je voudrais, (62 2 , N. 2.) 

I wish I knew it — I had it. Je voudrais le savoir — 1* avoir. (R. 3.) 

(28 2 , 06s. 65.) 
I wish he knew it. (§ 151—12.) 



Je voudrais qu'ii le sut. 



§ 149.— POTENTIAL MOOD, PERFECT TENSE.— Conditionnel 

Compose. 

1. This is formed from the present of the conditional of the auxiliary, and 
the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. (60 2 .) 

I should, thou wouldst, he or she 



would have spoken 
We should, you would, they would 
have spoken. 

X should, thou wouldst, \ 

he or she would > departed. 

have ) 

We should, you) 

would, they would S departed. 

have ) 

If I had received my money, I would 

have bought new shoes. 
If you had risen early, you would 

not have caught a cold. 



If she had come, >» 

gone ? 
Had he been seen, 

been taken. 



rould you have 
he would have 



J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait 

parle. 
Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou 

elies auraient parle. 

Je serais, tu serais, 
il ou elle serait 



, > parti ; 
) fern, partie. 



Nous serions, vous ) pi. mas. partis ; 
seriez, ilsou ellesS pi. fern, par- 
seraient ) ties. 

Si j'avais recu mon argent, j'aurais 

achete des souliers neufs. 
Si vous vous etiez leve de bonne 

heure, vous ne vous seriez pas en- 

rhume. 
Si elle etait venue, seriez-vous parti ? 

S'il avait ete vu, il aurait ete pris. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



509 



2. With the conditionnel compose, si, (if,) is generally followed by the 
pluperfect, as seen above. 

3. Although grammarians usually give the imperfect of the potential 
with its four signs, would, could, should, might, as a translation of the con- 
dition?^, students must not infer that the single French expression corre- 
sponds accurately to the four English ones. Would usualljfcstands for the 
conditionnel, and so does should, when it does not mean ought to; but 
could and might ought always to be expressed by the French verb pouvoir. 



I would or should go, if I could. 

I should or ought to go, if I could. 

I could go, if I would. 

I might go, if I would. 

I ought to write, if I could. (§ 146.) 



J'irais si je pouvais. 
Je devrais y aller si je pouvais. 
Je pourrais y aller si je voulais. 
Je pourrais peut-etre y aller, &c. 
Je devrais ecrire si je pouvais. 



Let these be models of those different acceptations, and for the compose i 

J'y serais alle si favais pu. 



I would or should have gone, if I had 

been able. 
I should (ought to) have gone, had I 

been able. 
I could have gone, if I had wished. 
I might have gone, if I had wished. 



J'aurais du y aller si favais pu. 

Vaurait pu y aller si j'avais voulu. 
Taurais peut-etre pu y aller si j'avais 
voulu. 

4. When I wish is followed by the English pluperfect, it means I should 
have liked, and must be translated by faurais voulu . . . 

I wish I had been able to go. 

I wish I had known it. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) 

We wish she had been able to go. 



Yom \i sh we had known it sooner. 



Taurais voulu pouvoir y aller. 
J'aurais voulu le savoir. (R. 3.) 
Nous aurions voulu qu'elle peut y 

aller. 
Vous auriez voulu que nous le 

sussions plus tot (que nous V eus- 

sions su.) 



$150.— OF THE IMPERATIVE.--!^ VImperatif 

1. In English, by omitting the nominative you of the second person 
of the indicative mood, present tense, you obtain the second person plural 
of the Imperative. As: Indicative present, you come, imperative, come ; 
you go, go; you write, write, &c. It is the same in BVench. Hence, 
from vous venez, by omitting the nominative, vous, you obtain venez for the 
imperative, second person plural. From vous allez, allez ; from vous 
e'crivez, ecrivez, &c. 

How do you obtain the 2d person plu- 
ral of the imperative ? 

By omitting, as in English, the nomi- 
native, you, of the present indi- 
cative. 

Are there any exceptions to this rule ? 
43* 



Comment obtenez-vous la 2de per- 
sonne plur. de l'iinperatif ? 

En omettant, comme en Anglais, 
le nominatif vous de 1'indicatif 
present. 

Y a-t-il des exceptions a cette regie t 



510 GRAMMATICAL S1NOPSIS. 

Yes, there are four in French, viz: 



Indicatif. Imperatif. 

Vous avez, you have. Ayez, have. 
Vous savez, you know. Sachez, know. 



Oui, il y en a quatre en Frangais, 
savoir : 
Indicatif. Imperatif. 

Vous etes, you are. Soyez, be. 

Vous voulez, you will. Veuillez, be 
willing. 

N. B. In reflective verbs there are two pronouns, vous, of the same per- 
son, a nominative and objective one ; Vous vous habillez, you dress your- 
self. When, to form the imperative, you omit the nominative vows, you, 
the objective vous, yourself, remains with the verb, viz : habillez-wws, 
dress yourself ; amusez-wms, enjoy yourself. (43 1 .) 

Hint. — We have in this article put a few questions and answers in 
French, to show the teacher and student how easily it can be done, and to 
induce them to attempt it. 

2. The first person plural is in French obtained by dropping the nomi- 
native nous, we. Hence, nous venons, we come, becomes venons, let us 
come ; nous allons, we go : allons, let us go ; nous ecrivons, we write ; 
ecrivons, let us write, &c. 

Comment obtenez-vous la Ire per- j En omettant le nominatif nous du 
sonne plurielde 1' imperatif? | present de P indicatif. 

3. Ayons, let us have ; soyons, let us be ; sachons, let us know ; veuillons, 
let us be willing, are the four exceptions to this rule. 

4. Let me, laissez-moi, followed both in English and French by an infini- 
tive, as, Let me see, laissez-moi voir ; let me go, laissez-moi aller ; let me 
be, laissez-moi etre ; let me have, laissez-moi avoir ; let me read, laissez- 
moi lire, &c, may be considered as the first person singular of the impera- 
tive. This is an innovation, I know, therefore I merely suggest its adoption. 
If introduced in the imperative of every verb, the expression, let me, laissez- 
moi, so frequently used in both languages, will soon become perfectly 
familiar. But if not placed there, as it has no other appropriate situation, 
it is usually overlooked and not learned. 



What can be considered as the first 
person singular of the imperative ? 

Let me, followed by the infinitive of 
the verb to be conjugated. 

Let me do it — tell it to them. 



Que peut-on considerer comme la 
Ire pers. sing, de P imperatif ? 

Laissez-moi, suivi par Pinfinitif du 
verbe qu'on conjugue. 

Laissez-moi le faire — le leur dire. 



5. The second person singular is obtained, in all French verbs, from the 
first person singular of the indicative, by omitting the pronoun je, I. 

Present. Imperative. I Present. Imperat. 2d pers. sing. 

I speak, speak thou. I Je parle, parle. 1 



i When the second person singular of the imperative ends in e, it takes 5 after it, 
before the relative pronouns en, y. Ex. Offr-es en a ta sceur, offer some to thy sister, 
portes-y tes livres, carry thy books thither. But when en is a preposition, the impe- 
rative takes no 5. Ex. Donne, en cette occasion, des preuves de ton zele ; Give, on 
this occasion, proofs of thy zeal. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 



511 



Present 
I come, 
I perceive, 
I take, 



Imperative. 
come thou, 
perceive thou, 
take thou. 



Present. 
Je viens, 
J'apercois, 
Je prends, 



Imperat. 2d per s. sing. 

viens. 

apercois. 

prends. 



The five following verbs must be excepted from this rule : fat, I have , 
imperat. aie, have thou ; je suis, I am ; sois, be thou ; je vais, I go ; va, go 
thou; je sais, I know; sache, know thou ; je veux, I am willing; veuille, 
be thou willing. 

The imperative va takes s, when it is followed by the relative pronoun y. 
Ex. Yas-y, go thou thither ; but when there is another verb after the pro- 
noun y, va must be written without an s. Ex. Va y donner Vordre, go 
thither to give the order ; va y /aire un tour, go thither to take a turn. In 
the expression va-fen, go away, an apostrophe must be placed after the 
letter t, and not a hyphen, as it is not here the euphonic t, but te, an apos- 
trophe supplying the place of e before a vowel. 

6. The third persons singular and plural are like the same persons of the 
subjunctive present, (§ 151 — 1,) omitting the antecedent which governs that 
mood, but retaining the que, and the pronouns il, Us, elle, elles, on. The 
other persons admit of no pronouns before them. Let him go, qu'il aille ; 
let them come, qu'ils viennent ; let anyone speak, qu J on parle ; come, 
viens ; let us see, voyons ; know, sachez. 

7. Imperative of the five irregular verbs : — 

Let me have, have (thou), let him have, j Laissez-moi avoir, aie, 

Ayons, ayez, 

Laissez-moi etre, sois, 
Soyons, soyez, 

Laissez-moi aller, va, 



Let us have, have (ye) 
Let me be, be (thou), 



be (ye), 
go (thou), 
go (ye), 



Let us be, 
Let me go 
Let us go, 
Let me 

know, 
Let us k., 
Let me be 

willing, 
Let us be w.,be willing 



let them h. 
let him be. 
let them be. 
let her go. 
let them go. 



know(thou) , let one know. 



know (ye), 
be willing, 



let all know, 
let him will. 



You 



let them will 

8. Examples for the regular verbs : — 

Present. 

Let me 

Laissez-n> i parler, 



Allons, 
L.-moi savoir, 

Sachons, 
Laissez-moi 

vouloir, 
Veuillons, 



allez, 
sache, 



qu'il ait. 
qu'ils aient. 
qu'il soit. 
qu'ils soient. 
qu'elle aille. 
qu'elles aillent. 
qu'on sache. 



sachez, que tous sachent. 
veuille, qu'il veuille. 

veuillez,qu'ils veuillent. 



vous 
parlez, 
finish, finissez, 
receive, recevez, 
lose, perdez, 



finir, 

recevoir, 

perdre, 



Imperative. 

thou Let us you 

parle, parlons, parlez. 

finis, finissons, finissez. 

recois, recevons, recevez. 

perds, perdons, perdez. 



NEGATIVELY. 

Let me not Nemelaissezpas Do (thou) not. . 
break, casser, ne casse pas, 

build, batir, nebatispas, 

owe, devoir, ne dois pas, 

restore, rendre, ne rends pas, 



NEGATIVEMENT. 

Let us not Do (you) not.... 

ne cassons pas, ne cassez pas. 
nebatissons pas, ne batissezpas 
ne devons pas, ne devez pas. 
ne rendons pas, ne rendez pas. 



512 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Affirmatively, the objective pronouns are placed after : (§§ 54, 55, &c.) 



Let me 

look for it, 
punish them, 
perceive some, 
sefl it to yon, 
go there, to it, 



take him there, Py mener, 



Laissez-moi Do (thou)... 

le chercher, cherche-le, 
les punir, punis-moi, 

en apercevoir, apercois-en, 
vous le vendre, vends-le-lui 
y aller. 



Let us 

cherchons-le, 
punissons-les, 
apercevons-en, 



Bo.... 
cherehez-1'y. 
punissez-nous, 
apercevez-en-un 



vendons-la-leur, vendez-nous-en. 
vas-y, (0&.at5 .) allons-y, allez-y. 

menes-y-moi, rnenons-y-en, menez-nous-y. 



Negatively 
Let me not 
bring it, 

go there, to it, 
lend him any, 

owe them, to 
them, 

Let me 
dress myself, 
cure myself, 
sit down, 
put myself, 
go away, 



the objective pronouns are placed before. 

Ne me laissez pas Do not Let us not 

I'apporter, ne les apporte ne leur appor- 

tons rien, 
n'y allons pas, 
ne le lui pretons 

plus, 
ne leur en de- 



y aller, 

lui en preter, 



pas, 
n'y va pas, 
ne m'en prete 
pas, 
les leur devoir, ne lui dois rien, 

vons pas 

Imperatif des Verbes Re'flechis. 



Laissez-moi 
m r habiller, 
me guerir, 
m'asseoir, 
me mettre, 
m'en aller, 



thyself, 
habille-toi, 
gueris-toi, 
assieds-toi, 
mets-toi, 



ourselves, 
habiMons-nous, 
guerissons-nous, 
asseyons-nous, 
mettons-nous, 



va-t'en,(N.B. at l.) allons-nous-en, 



Do not 

n'en apportez 

plus, 
n'y allezplus. 
ne *a leur pretez 

pas. 
ne la lui devez 

pas. 

yourself-ves, 
habillez-vous. 
guerissez-vous. 
asseyez-vous. 
mettez-vous. 
allez-vous-en. 



Let me not 
go to bed, 

run away, 

laugh at, 
go away, 



NEGATIVEMENT. 

Ne me laissez pas Do not Let us not Do not.... 

me coucher, ne te couche ne nous cou- ne v. couchezp. 

pas, chons pas, 

m'enfuir. ne fenfuis pas, ne nous enfuyons ne v. enfuyez p. 



me rire de. . . ne te ris pas de, ne n. rions p. de, ne v. riez p. de 
m ? en aller, ne t'en va pas, ne n. en allons p. ne v. en allez pas. 

9. Let him kave r qu*il ait, Let us have, ayons, having always been used in 
English- French grammars, is it not strange, that let me have, should not 
have been introdu red ? 

10. Let me may also be translated by the second person singular, viz : 
laisse-moi aller, let uhou) me go ; laisse-moi prendre, let (thou) me 
take, &c. 

11. Let him have it, may be translated in two ways: first, by qu'il Vait, 
as it is generally in grammars, or, secondly, by laissez-le V avoir. Let us 
write them ; may be rendered, first, by ecrivons-les y or laissezmous les ecrire. 
These expressions, however, are not synonymous. The first, meaning, 
we must set about writing them, the second, requesting leave to do it. 

12. Come and see me, do. Take your pencil and write, are expressions 
frequently used in English. The French sometimes translate them literally, 
and say: prenez votre crayon et ecrivez ; but they more frequently put the 
second verb in the infinitive mood instead of the imperative, as : Prene2 
votre crayon pour ecrire ; ventz me voir, je vous en prie, &c. (§ 54, Except. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



513 



$ 151.— SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.— Mode Subjonctif. 
Present Tense. — Present. 

1. In all French verbs, it ends in e, es, e, ions, iez, ent. 

To form it, attend to this Rule : — 1. 

1st part. — The thied person plural is exactly like that of the present 
indicative ; from which, by dropping the nt, you obtain the first and third 
persons singular. An 5 added to either, gives the second. 

2d part. — The first and second persons plural are exactly like those of the 
imperfect. 

The following are regularly formed : — 



They ils quoiqu' 


lis je 


tu 


il 


nous 


vous 


come, viennent, viennent, vienne 


vienne s, 


vienne, 


venions, 


veniez. 


drink, boivent, boivent 


, boive, 


boives, 


boive, 


buvions, 


buviez. 


Exceptions, eight in all 


— 










1. It is time for them to go ; 


me to go, 


thee to go, 


him to go 


us to go, 


you to go. 


II est temps quails aillent; 


j'aille, 


tu ailles, 


il ailles, 


n. allions, 


v. alliez. 


2. Although they can ; 


I can, 


thou canst 


, he, 


we, 


you can. 


Quoiqu' Us puissent; 


puisse, 


puisses. 


puisse, 


puissions 


puissiez. 


3. In case they are worth; 


I am, 


thou art, 


he is, 


we are, 


you are. 


En cas c^w'ils vaillent ;J 


vaille, 


vailles. 


vaille, 


valions, 


valiez.i 


4 . He ivishes them to have ; 


me to, 


thee to. 


her to, 


us to, 


you to. 


II veut gw'ils aient ; 


aie, 


aies, 


ait, 


ayons, 


ayez. 


5. On condition they will ; 


I, 


thou, 


he, her. 


we, 


you. 


A co?idition qu'ilsveuillent ; 


veuille, 


veuilles, 


veuille, 


voulions, 


vouliez. 


6. Not that they know of; 


I know of, 


thou, 


he, she, 


we, 


you. 


Pas qu y i\s sachent ; 


sache, 


saches, 


sache, 


sachions, 


sachiez. 


7. Without their b&ing so ; 


my, 


thy, 


his, her, 


our. 


your. 


Sans quHls le soient ; 


le sois, 


le sois, 


le soit. 


le soyons 


le soyez. 


8. They had better do it ; 


I had, 


thou, 


he, 


we, 


you. 


II vaut mieux gw'ils le fassent 


le fasse, 


le fasses, 


le fasse, 


fassions, 


fassiez. 



2. The use of the subjunctive mood as its name implies) depends in 
French, on some antecedent, ending with que or qui, which antecedent 
governs that mood. The antecedent may be a verb or a conjunction. 2 As 
the indicative is the mood of affirmation, the subjunctive is the mood of 
indecision, of doubt. If then the verbal antecedent affirms with precision, with 
positive7iess, the indicative must be used after que or qui ; but if the verbal 
antecedent expresses indecision, doubt, then the subjunctive is to be used 
after the connecting word que or qui. For instance, when we say : I know 
he ts here, I am certain that he is here, a positive affirmation is expressed, by 
the antecedent, and on that account no other turn could be given to the 
second verb, is ; it would be coniradictory to say : J am certain he may be 
here. Hence, the indicative is used after; and we must say: Je sais, je 

• Prevaloir* to prevail, is regular in the present of the subjunctive, and formed 
from prevalent, they prevail. 

2 The conjunction if (si) is the most frequent attendant of the English subjunc- 
tive ; but in French that mood is seldom governed by si, which is, we know, usually 
connected with the present find imperfect indicative, {462, Obs. 105 — § 148, N. I.) 



514 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

suis certain qu'il est id. But when you say : It is possible, it is doubtful 
that he is here, indecision, doubt, is expressed by the antecedent, and another 
turn may be given to the second verb, such as: It is possible he may be 
here, for him to be here — It is doubtful whether he is here or not ; his being 
here is doubtful, and consequently the subjunctive must be used after it. 
ll est possible, il est douteux, qu'il soit id. Certainty or uncertainty is then 
the great theoretical criterion by which the use of the subjunctive is deter- 
mined or ascertained. This, however, does not apply to the antecedents 
that always require the subjunctive, but merely to some particular cases 
that will be further explained. 

Grammarians have given rules based on the signification of verbs, saying 
that the subjunctive is to be used if the antecedent expresses surprise, de- 
spair, complaint, admiration, will, wish, consent, forbidding, hindrance, 
doubt, fear, ignorance, apprehension, order, command, and they generally 
wind up this comprehensive enumeration by the very definite expression, or 
any affection of the mind. To find the true sense of a verb, requires a gram- 
matical acumen, not generally possessed by pupils; therefore, as something 
more practical is desirable, let pupils attend to the following Rule, as calcu- 
lated, in most cases, to direct them accurately. 

Rule 2. When the verb in the second part is connected with 
1. May, 2. should, 3. whether, \ or, if not connected, can 

4. forme to be, thee to be, or any other infinitive, \ be turned to any of them, 

5. my being, thy being, or any other present par- C as shown above, then 

ticiple or noun ; ) that second part must be 

in the subjunctive mood in French ; but in the indicative, if no such alteration 
can be made. As a further illustration, let us examine the following sen- 
tences. 

„ T . . , _ T ( The second part, to be laughed at, 

1. I deserve to be laughed at. 1 b(j ahered but mark ^ differ . 

2. I hope to be laughed at. [ ence - m ^ aUemion 

1. I deserve that people should laugh at me. 

2. I hope that people will (not should) laugh at me. 

The word will gives to the second sentence a decisive, a precise meaning, 
which is not conveyed by the word should in the first. Hence the second 
is translated in French by the future of the indicative, the first by the sub- 
junctive present. 

1. Je merite qu'on se moque de moi. (sub.)) Do the two verbs, I deserve 

2. J'espere qu'on se moquerade moi. (ind.) ) and I hope, express affections 
of the soul or not ? How inadequate are those wholesale rules ! And how 
perplexed must the student be when he has no other guide ! 

As a first corollary to Rule 2, we say that, after a French verb, followed 
by que or qui, if the fourth or fifth English form above is to be translated, it 
must be by the French subjunctive. He wishes me to laugh, il veut que Je 
He. He is pleased at our speaking, il est content que nous parlions. 

As a second corollary, that, after a French verb followed by que or qui, 
the infinitive of a passive verb, that can be changed to should, must be trans- 
lated by the French subjunctive, with the indefinite pronoun on as a nomi- 
native, as in the example*, / deserve to be laughed at. (77 1 , Note.) 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



515 



3. When the antecedent is a superlative, or a word having a superlative 
meaning; such as le seul, V unique, the only one ; le premier, the first; 
le dernier, the last, and any ordinal number, deuxieme, &c, the subjunctive 
follows. 

The gospel is the finest present that L'fivangile est le plus beau present 



God has made to man 

It is the first, the last 

volume that we have. 



que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. 
the only C'est le premier, le dernier, le seul 
volume que nous ayons. 

4. When the antecedent is a unipersonal verb, or used unipersonally : — 



He must come. 

It is suitable he should do it. 

It is right for him to know it. 



II faut qu'il vienne. 

II convient qu'il le fasse. 

II est juste qu'il le sache. 



Except: II s'ensuit, it follows; il resulte, it results; il arrive, there 
happens, and il est, accompanied by an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, 
probability ; such as ; clair, clear : certain, certain ; evident, evident ; vrai, 
true ; probable, probable, &c, which govern the indicative, when affirma- 
tively used, but follow, when interrogative, negative, or conditional. 



It follows from it that you are my 

friend. 
It often happens that one is deceived. 



II s'ensuit, il resulte, que vous etes 

mon ami. 
II arrive souvent qu*on est trompe. 



5. When the antecedent is interrogative, negative, or conditional. (The 
words peu, little ; a peine, hardly, having a negative meaning, come under 
this rule.) 



I believe we have some. 

Do you believe we have any? 

I do not think that we have any. 

We have but few men who can 

do it. 
He has hardly a scholar who can 

translate it. 
If it be true that you have it, is : 

If it is true that you have it, is : 



Je crois que nous en avons. 
Croyez-vous que nous en ayons ? 
Je ne crois pas que nous en ayons. 
Nous avons peu d' hommes qui puis- 

sent le faire. 
II a a peine un e'colier qui puisse le 

traduire. 
•S'il est vrai que vous Vayez ; while 
S'il est vrai que vous i'avez; the in- 



dicative is used because there is no supposition, no condition implied, the 
meaning being positive, Since you have it, and not conditional, as in the 
first sentence, which means: Should you have it. 

It is not certain, true, sure, that you II rc'est pas certain, vrai, sur que 

be my friend. vous soyez mon ami. 

One is not frequently deceived by I II n' arrive pas souvent qu'on soit 
one's friends. trompe par ses amis. 

6. Any verb expressing fear, such as craindre, to fear ; avoir peur, to 
be afraid ; when used affirmatively, governs the subjunctive with ne before 
it. But ne is not used if the phrase is interrogative, negative, or condi- 
tional. (78 1 .) 

7. When the verbs mentioned at 6 are used negatively, they govern th« 
subjunctive without ne. (78 4 .) 



516 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

8. The verbs douter, to doubt, and nier. to deny, when negative, require 
ne before the subjunctive. (78 4 .) 

9. The conjunction que employed in the second member of a sentence* 
to avoid the repetition of a conjunction used in the first, governs the same 
mood as the word it stands for. ^78 3 .) 

10. The word que, used to avoid the repetition of si and of other con- 
junctions, such as afin que, soit que, sans que, avant que, &c, governs the 
subjunctive. (78 3 .) 

11. Quelque, whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in three ways, 
and always governs the subjunctive. 

1st way. Quelque (before an adjective, used without a noun) is indecli- 
nable. (80 1 .) 

2d way. Quelque before a noun (accompanied or not by an adjective) 
agrees with that noun. (80 1 .) 

3d way. Immediately before a verb, whatever, whatsoever, is rendered, in 
French, by two words, quel and que. And then, quel, alone, agrees with 
the subject of the verb — que is invariable. (80 1 .) 

12. As the antecedent belongs to the indicative mood, it is necessary to 
give rules for the correspondence of the tenses of the indicative and sub- 
junctive. 

1. If the antecedent is present or future, it governs the present or perfect 
of the subjunctive. 



You must come. 

You will have to come, (be necessary 

for you.) 
You must have come when I was out. 



Ilfaut que vous veniez. 
llfaudra que vous veniez. 



11 faut (ilfaudra) que vous soyez, 
venu quand f etais dehors. 

If a condition is annexed, then use the imperfect and pluperfect. 



I do not think you would do it if you 

were not compelled. 
I do not think you would have done it 

had you not been compelled. 



Je ne crois pas que vous le fissiez 
si Von ne vous y contraignait . 

Je ne crois pas que vous l'eussiez 
fait si Ton ne vous y exit contraint. 



2. The imperfect, the past tenses,) rr, u . r . , , x . , w ,. 
, . ,-T . ' *7 > 1 ne imperfect and pluperfect. (79 z .) 

d the conditionnels require S 



and 

I was not certain you would come. 
I was not sure you would have come. 

I wish you had more fortitude. 

(62 2 , N. 2.) 



Je n'etais pas sur que vous vinssiez. 
Je ri etais pas sur que vous fussiez 

venu. 
Je voudrais que vous eussiez plus de 

fermete. 



13. Whatever or whatsoever (meaning all things soever) is generally ex- 
pressed by quelque chose que ou quoi que, quoi que ce soit que, when at the 
beginning of a sentence, and only by quoi que ce soit oufut, after a verb. 
The subjunctive follows that French antecedent. (80 1 .) 

Whoever, whomsoever, qui que ce soit, qui que ce fut, also governs th« 
subjunctive. (80 l .) 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 51? 

14. If the verb which follows qui, que, dont, de ce, ou ; expresses doubt, 
uncertainty, &c, use the subjunctive. If not, the indicative. (80 2 .) 

15. The subjunctive is employed at the beginning of a sentence, to 
express surprise, a desire, or an imprecation ; and also instead of quand 
meme, though, or si, if, suppressed. (80 2 .) 

Imperfect. — lmparfait. (79 1 .) 

§152. — The Imperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the preterit, 
(68 1 , § 153,) by changing the final ai into asse, for the verbs of the first con- 
jugation, and by adding se to those of the other three conjugations. As 
the preterit has four sets of terminations: 1st, ai; 2d, is ; 3d, us ; 4th, 
ins ; this imperfect has also four. The first set, as with the preterit, 
belongs exclusively to the first conjugation. Those sets are : — 



1st set, 


asse, 


asses, 


at. 


assions, 


assiez, 


assent. 


2d " 


isse, 


isses, 


it, 


issions, 


issiez, 


issent. 


3d " 


usse, 


usses, 


(it, 


ussions, 


ussiez, 


ussent. 


4th « 


insse, 


insses, 


int, 


inssions, 


inssiez, 


inssent. 



Connecting them with verbs, we will have 

1st. Although I spoke, quoique je parlasse, (from parlai.) 

Tu parlasses, il parlat, nous parlassions, vous parlassiez, Us parlassent. 

2d. I had to say, to tell, il fallait que je disse, (from dis.) 

Tu disses, il dit, nous dissions, vous dissiez, Us dissent. 

3d. Whether I had, soit que ]'eusse, (from peus.) 

Tu eusses, il eut, nous eusssions, vous eussiez, Us eussent. 

4th. Provided I held, I kept, pourvu que je tinsse, (from tins.) 

Tu tinsses, il tint, nous tinssions, vous tinssiez, Us tinssent. 

No exception. Attend to your list of antecedents. 

This imperfect is used after the indicative imperfect, all past tenses, and 
the conditionnels. (§ 151 — 2.) 
Perfect, page 418.) I Parfait. 

Pluperfect, ip. 419.) j Plusqueparfait. 

$ 153.— INDICATIVE, SECOND IMPERFECT. 1 — Preterit. 2 
The Preterit of the indicative mood has, for regular verbs, three sets of 



1 Lindley Murray defines it thus : " The imperfect tense represents the action or 
event, either as past and finished, or as remaining unfinished at a certain time past: 
as, " I loved her for her modesty and virtue," " They were travelling post -when he 
met them." The French Preterit corresponds only to the first clause, viz: to the 
action or event past and finished, or to R. C. Smith's definition, which is: The im- 
perfect tense expresses what took place in time past, however distant: as, "John 
died." 

2 I merely use the word PritSrit without the adjective d&fini (usually added) be- 
cause the pupil will more easily distinguish the two tenses; one being the Preterit, 
another the Preterit antSrieur, (68 3 ). If those terms, definite and indefinite, were 
applied to the English tenses, it would be advisable, perhaps necessary to retain 
them in French, but as they ;ire new to the.American student, they are more per- 
plexing than useful. The French themselves, in speaking of that tense, call it more 
frequently Preterit, than Pretirit difini. After all, as the adjective dSfini would 
tonvey but an indefinite idea to the pupil, its use may be indefinitely postponed. 

44 



518 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



terminations, formed from their past participles. By changing, for the first 
conjugation, e to 

ai, as, a, dmes, dtes, event, you have the first set. 
For the second and fourth conjugations, i and u to 

is, is, it, imes, ites, irent, you have the second set. 
For the third conjugation, u to 

us, us, ut, times, utes, urent, you have the third set. 

The preterit of all regular verbs, without exception, may be formed by 
the rules given above. The first set belongs exclusively to the first conju- 
gation. There is a fourth set, viz : ins, ins, bit, inmes, intes, invent, 
which belongs exclusively to the irregular verbs tenir, venir, and their 
compounds. 

EXAMPLES FOR THE REGULAR VERBS. 



Infin. 


Part. 
Passis. 


Je 


tu 


il, on 


Preterits. 
nous 


vous 


ils, elles 


Parler, 


parU. 


parlat, 


parlas, 


parla, 


parlames, 


parlates, 


pari erentj 


Finir, 


fini. 


finis, 


finis, 


finii, 


finmesj 


Unites, 


%xdrent, 


Recevoir, 


iecu. 


TBQUSj 


recus. 


recut, 


recumes, 


reciites, 


recurent, 


Vendre, 


vendu. 


vendis, 


vendis, 


vendit, 


vendtmes, 


vendues. 


vendirent. 



that their past participles in i, is, it, take the second set, viz : is, is, it, &c, 
while those ending in u take the third set, viz: us, us, ut, &c, if not 
found in the list we will give of irregular formations. 



EXAMPLES FOR IRREGULAR VERBS FORMED BY THE RULES. 



Infin. 

Sentir,* 
Mettre,* 
Prendre, 
Dire,* 



Part. 
Passes 
senti. 
mis. 
pris. 
dit. 



Courir,* couru. 
Connaitre,* connu. 
Vivre,* vecu. 



tenu. 
venu. 



Priterits of the second set, (de la 2de s£rie.) 
Je tu il, on nous vous ils, elles 

sentis, sentis, sentit, sentimes, sentites, sentirent. 
mis, mis, mit, &c. 

pris, pris, prit, &c. 

dis, dis, dit, &c. 

Priterits de laSme sSrie. 
courus, courus, courut, courumes, courutes, coururent. 
connus, connus, connut, &c. 
vecus, &c. 

Fourth set, exclusively for tenir, venir, and their compounds. 

tins, tins, tint, tinmes, tintes, tinrent. 

vins, vins, vint, vinmes, vintes, vinrent. 



Tenir,* 
Venir,* 

The following irregular verbs are exceptions to the rules : 



Infinitive . 

Couvrir,* 

Offrir,* 

Ouvrir,* 

Souffrir,* 

Mourir,* 

Vetir,* 

Voir,* 

Pre voir,* 

Ceindre,* 

Astreindre,* 

Craindve,* 



to cover, 
to offer, 
to open, 
to suffer, 
to die, 
to clothe, 
to see, 
to foresee, 
to gird, 
to restrain, 
to fear, 



Past Part. 
couv ^rt. 
offert. 
ouvert. 
souffert. 
mort. 
vetu . 
vu 

prevu 
ceint. 
astreint. 
craint. 



Je couvris, 
J'offris, 
J'ouvris, 
Je souffris, 
Je mourus, 
Je vetis, 
Je vis, 
Je previs, 
Je ceignis, 
J'astreignis, 
Je oraignis, 



Preterit Definite. 
is, it, imes, ites, 



us, ut, 

is, it, 



ilraes, utes, urent 
imes, ites, irent 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



519 



Infinitive . 


Past Part. 


Preterit 


Defini 


te. 




Empreindre,* 


to imprint, 


empreint. 


J'empreignis, is 


, it, 


imes, 


ites, 


irent 


Enfriendre,* 


to infringe, 


enfreint. 


J'enfreignis, ' 


c 

5 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Epreindre,* 


to squeeze, 


epreint. 


J'epreignis, ' 


CC 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Feindre,* 


to feign, 


feint. 


Je feignis, ' 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Joindre,* 


to join, 


joint. 


Je joignis, * 


n 


11 


cc 


cc 


Oindre,* 


to anoint. 


oint. 


J'oignis, l 


cc 


(I 


cc 


cc 


Feindre,* 


to paint, 


peint. 


Je peignis, * 


cc 


cc 


cc 


(C 


Plaindre,* 


to lament, 


plaint. 


Je plaignis, ' 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Restreindre,* 


to restrain, 


restreint. 


Je restreignis, f 


n 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Teindre,* 


to dye, 


teint. 


Je teignis, * 


<( 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Cuirs,* 


to cook, 


cuit. 


Je cuisis, ' 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Conduire,* 


to conduct, 


conduit. 


Je conduisis, ' 


( a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Construire,* 


to construct 


construit. 


Je construisis, { 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Detruire,* 


to destroy, 


detruit. 


Je detruisis, ' 


(( 


cc 


cc 


'.t 


Enduire,* 


to lay over, 


enduit. 


J'enduisis, l 


u 


re 


a 


re 


Induire,* 


to induce, 


induit. 


J'induisis, ' 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Instruire,* 


to instruct, 


instruit. 


J'instruisis, ' 


a 


Cf 


cc 


cc 


Introduire,* 


to introduce 


introduit. 


J'introduisis, " 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Reduire,* 


to reduce, 


reduit. 


Je reduisis, ( 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Seduire,* 


to seduce, 


seduit. 


Je seduisis, ' 


a 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Traduire,* 


to translate, 


traduit. 


Je traduisis, ' 


EC 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Luire,* 


to shine, 


lui. 


Je luisis, ' 


u 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Nuire,* 


to hurt, 


nui. 


Je nuisis, ' 


(( 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Coudre,* 


to sew, 


cousu. 


Je cousis, ' 


cc 


cc 


cc 


cc 


Ecrire,* 


to write, 


6crit. 


J'ecrivis, l 


a 


cc 


" 


cc 


Etre,* 


to be, 


ete. 


Je fus, fu 


3, fat, 


umes, 


utes, 


urent 


Faire,* 


to do, 


fait. 


Je fis, fis 


, fit, 


fimes 


fites 


firent 


Naitre,* 


to be born, 


ne. 


Je naquis, is 


it, 


imes, 


ites, 


irent 


Vaincre,* 


to vanquish, 


vaincu. 


Je vainquis, ' 


cc 


c-c 


cc 


cc 



REMARK. 

The learner will remark, that in the above list some irregular vierbs follow 
the conjugation of others ; thus we see three verbs conjugated exactly like 
couvrir, to cover, viz : offrir, to offer ; ouvrir, to open ; souffrir, to suffer : 
venir, f o come, we see conjugated like tenir, to hold; twelve verbs after 
cei?idre, to gird ; ten after cuire, to bake, to cook ; and one after luire, to 
shine, viz : nuire, to hurt. Now this is not only the case with respect to the 
preterit defini of these verbs, but for all the other tenses. It would therefore 
be of essential importance to the learner to commit them to memory in the 
order we have given them, as by their help the greatest difficulties of the 
irregular verbs are almost overcome. 

USE OF THE PR£T£RIT. 

2. We saw (33 1 ) that the parfait not only conveys an allusion to the pre- 
sent, but also refers to actions past at a time wholly expired. Now the 
student must be informed that the preterit has no connexion with the 
present, but only refers to " actions and events past and finished :" (Murray.) 
It cannot be used in connexion with this century, this year, this month, this 
day or to-day. i/iis morning, because the time is not wholly expired ; but it 
may be used in connexion with last century, last year, &c. and with yester- 
day, because the time is then wholly past. Hence, yesterday, limits its 
approach to the present. Accordingly we may say: Je le vis V annie der- 



520 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

niere, I saw him last year ; le mois dernier, last month ; il y a quinze jours, 
a fortnight ago ; hier, yesterday ; and there stops the use of the 'preterit. 
To express I saw him to-day, this morning, this week, &c., say : Je V ax 
vu aujourd'hui, ce matin, cette semaine, &c, and not je le vis ; because 
the time is not fully past. 

In colloquial intercourse, when the time is wholly past, the 'preterit and 
par/ait may be used the one for the other, that is : I saw him last week — 
Caesar conquered Gaul ; may be translated either by : Je le vis ou je Vai 
vu la semaine passee — Cesar conquit ou a conquis la Gaule. But when the 
time is unexpired, the preterit cannot replace the parfait. So, 1 sold my 
house this year, must be rendered by j'ai vendu (§145) ma maison cette 
annee-ci, itime unexpired,) and not by je vendis (§153) ma maison cette 
annee-ci. 

3. On the other hand, in narrating events long past, or historical facts, 
the preterit is the tense to be used, to the exclusion of the parfait. As 
soon as he saw his enemy, he drew his sword and began with him, &c. 
Des qu'il vit (not a vu) son ennemi, il tira son epee et commenca avec lui, 
&c. $ 153.) 

N. B. The French, to give more animation to the narration, frequently 
use the present tense instead of the preterit, and say: Dis qu'il voit son 
ennemi, il tire son epee et commence avec lui, &c. It is in English usually 
translated by the imperfect, although they, themselves, use the present 
tense for the same purpose. 

§ 154.— PLUPERFECT m*)— Plusqueparfait. 

is formed from the imperfect of the auxiliary with the past participle, and 

used pretty much like the English pluperfect. 

Had you not spent your money when ; N'aviez-vous pas depense votre ar- 

you asked me for some ? gentquandvous m'endemandates? 

Besides the plusqueparfait (68 2 ) formed by the French imparfait and past 
participle, there is another tense formed by the preterit and past participle, 
called Preterit A nterieur, (anterior,) viz : J'eus fini, I had finished ; Nous 
eumes dine, we had dined. As the English have no tense corresponding to 
it, they have to translate both this tense and the plusqueparfait exactly 
in the same way ; consequently, the American student is frequently at a 
loss, to know which of the French tenses he is to select. We will try, by 
explanations and examples, to lessen the difficulty. 

The imparfait (59 1 ) expresses an action begun but not ended, or, as going 
on at the past time spoken of. The preterit, (68 1 , on the contrary, refers 
to an action or event past and finished, or of which the time is fully expired 
ft is this distinction of the simple tenses, which, passing into the compound, 
must be kept in view, and which, in many instances, will enable the learnei 
to choose the proper French tense. 

As there is no English tense corresponding to the French, I offer 

§ 155.— The 2d PLUPERFECT.— Preterit Anterieur. 

The Preterit Ante'rieur (68 3 ) is formed by the preterit of the auxiliary and 
the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 521 

It expresses an action quickly or instantaneously done, and is seldom 
used, except after the adverbial conjunctions, 



Aussitot, or sitot que, des que, 

d'abord que. 
Apres que. Lorsque, quand. 

Pas plutot. A peine. 

EXAMPLES. 

II eut fini en un moment (instanter.) 
Aussitot que feus fini mon ouvrage, 

je le lui portai. 
Quand je me fus habille, je sortis. 



As soon as, 

After. When. 

No sooner. Scarcely. 

He has done in a moment. 

As soon as 1 had done my work, I 

carried it to him. 
When I had dressed myself, I went out. 

For its practical use, the student may be governed by the following plain 
directions. In similar sentences, there are usually two tenses, one simple, 
and one compound. 

Rule 1. — If the adverbial conjunction, when, as soon as, &c, is before 
the simple tense, the compound tense is necessarily the plusqueparfait. (68 2 .) 

Rule 2. — If the conjunctive adverb is before the compound tense, that 
compound tense must again be the plusqueparfait, provided the simple tense 
is an imparfait, but should the simple tense be a preterit, then the compound 
tense must be the preterit anterieur. (68 3 .) 

$ 156.— INFINITIVE.— lnfinitif 

1. Prepositions, in English, govern the present participle, except to, 
which governs the infinitive. On the contrary, the infinitive is governed by 
every French preposition, except the preposition en, which governs the 
present participle. 



He speaks of coming. 

We like to walk, after we have done 

our duty. 
After coming, he rested. 
After dressing, we went out. 



II parle de venir. 

Nous aimons d promener, apres avoir 

fait notre devoir. 
Apres etre arrive, il se reposa. 
Apres nous etre habilles, nous sor- 
times. 

Remark that the French preposition apres is always followed by the infi- 
nitive of the auxiliary avoir or etre ; while in English the present participle 
of those auxiliaries having and being, are usually left out and replaced by 
the present participle of the following verb. For instance, instead of 
After having drunk his tea, he felt I Apres .avoir bu son the, il se trouva 

better ; I mieux ; (40 1 ), (R. 1, N. 1.) 

You may say : After drinking his tea, &c. ; but the French cannot be con- 
tracted. 

2. When two verbs come together, without being joined by a conjunction, 
the latter is governed by the former in the infinitive, sometimes with and 
sometimes without a. preposition. 

Important Remark. — If the verb has no preposition, it may receive any 
one the sense requires ; but, if it has a particular one, that particular one 
rejects every other, and must invariably attend the verb. It is so in English 
44* 



522 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



as well as in French. For instance, as the ^erbs will, dare, let, &c, have 
no preposition, we must say without preposition, / will say, 1 dare say, 1 
iet go ; and not with the preposition to, or any other, 1 will to say, &c. On 
the contrary, to like, to have, &c, requiring the preposition to, we must 
say, / like to see, 1 have to write, &c, and not, without any, Hike see, I 
have write, &c. It is the same in French. The verbs vouloir, oser, laisser, 
&c, requiring no preposition, we must say, je veux dire, fose dire, je 
laisse alter ; and not je veux a dire, fose pour dire, &c. On the contrary, 
aimer, avoir, &c, taking a, we must say, faime d voir, fai a ecrire, &c, 
and not faime voir, fai ecrire, &c. 

3. Sometimes the English verb requires no preposition, while the French 
has one — To answer, repondre a, (21 1 .) Sometimes the English has one, and 
the French none-^To listen to, ecouter, (25 3 .) At other times the English 
has of, and the French a — To think of, penser d, (532.) Then the English 
has to, and the French de — To permit to, permettre de, (65 2 .) But in every 
case each English and each French verb retains its own particular struc- 
ture. ($50.) 

4. French Verbs that govern others without a preposition: — 



Aimer mieux ; 
Aller ; 
Apercevoir ; 
Assurer ; 
Croire ; 
Compter ; 
Daigner ; 
Declarer ; 
Devoir ; 
Entendre ; 
Envoyer ; 
Esperer ; 
Faillir ; 
Faire ; 
Falloir ; 
s^Imaginer ; 
Laisser ; 
Nier; 
Oser ; 
Paraitre ; 
Penser ; 
Pr&tendre; 
Pouvoir ; 
Reconnaitre ; 
Regarder ; 
Retourner ; 
Savoir ; 
Sembler ; 
Souhaiter : 



J'aime mieux lefaire.i 
Allons nous promener. 
Je l'apercois mouvoir. 
II assure V avoir fait. 
II croit me tromper. 
II compte partir sous peu. 
Daignez me dire quand. 
II declare le savoir. 
II doit me Venvoyer. 
Je 1'entends parler. 
Envoyez-le chercher. 
J'espere le rencontrer. 
II a failli me voir. 
Qu'avez-vous fait venir ? 
II faut lui aider. 
Je m'imagine y etre. 
Laissez-le dire et faire. 
II nie Vavoir. 
II n'ose Vavouer. 
II parait V entendre. 
II a pense tomber. 
Pretend-il le faire ? 
II n'a pas pu me le dire. 
Je reconnais Vavoir dit. 
Je vous regarde faire. 
Elle retourna la voir. 
II sait ou la trouver. 
Elle semble avoir peur. 
Je souhaite la voir? 



I would rather do it. 

Let us go to take a walk. 

I perceive it move. 

He asserts to have .done it. 

He thinks to deceive me. 

He purposes to go soon. 

Deign to tell me when. 

He declares he knoivs it. 

He is to send it to me. 

I hear him speak. 

Send for it, or to fetch it. 

I expect to meet him. 

He missed seeing me. 

What did you send for ? 

It is necessary to help him. 

I fancy myself to be there. 

Let him say and do. 

He denies having it. 

He dares not confess it. 

He seems to understand it. 

He had like to have fallen. 

Does he pretend to do it? 

He could not tell it me. 

I acknowledge to have said it. 

I am looking at you doing it. 

She returned to see him. 

He knows where to find her. 

She seems to be afraid. 

I wish to see her. 



l Aimer mieux. valcf'r mieux, followed by another verb in the infinitive, require de 
before the second infinitive ; as, 

1 would rather stay than go. I J'aimerais mieux rester que d'y aller. 
It is better to go than stay alone. I II vaut mieux y aller que de rester seul. 

2 Souhaiter may also be used with de ; as, Je souhaite de voir, or de le voir, I 
wish to see him. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



523 



Soutenir ; 
Valoir mieux ; 
Venir ; 
Voir; 
Vouloir ; 



II soutient V avoir vu. 
II vaut mieux lui icrireA 
Viendrez-vous me voir . ? 2 
Je vois venir votre sceur. 
Elle ne veut pas rester. 



He maintains he kas seen it. 
It is better to write to her. 
Will you come to see*me ? 
I see your sister coming. 
She will not stay. 



5. French Verbs and Adjectives that govern the following infinitive 
by means of the preposition a. 

N. B. This usually takes place after nouns, used in a partitive sense ; as : 



He has pleasure in seeing her. 
Is there vanity in thinking so ? 



s'Abaisser d, 

Accoutumer a, 

Admettre d, 

Admirable d, de,3 

Affreux d, de,3 

Agreable d, d*e,3 

Aider d, 

Aimer d, 

Aise a, 

Amuser a. 

Animer d, 
s'Appliquer d, 

Apprendre a, 
s'Appreter a,' 

Aspirer d, 

Assidu d, 
s'Attacher a, 

Autoriser d, 

Avoir d, 

Beau d, de,3 

Bon d, de,3 

Charmant d, 

Chercher d, 

Condamner d, 

Condescendre d, 

Consister d, 

Contraindre d, de,4 Compel to, 

(X^.tribuer d,4 Contribute to 

Demander d, .4sfc to. 

Depenser d, Spend to, in. 

Dernier d, Las* to. 



Stoop to. 
Accustom to. 
Admit to . 
Wonderful to. 
Dreadful to. 
Agreeable to. 
iJeJp to. 
Z,ifce to. 
_Z?as7/ to. 
Amuse to, with. 
Animate to. 
Apply to. 
Learn to. 
CreJ rea<2y to. 
Aspire to. 
Assiduous to. 
SJicfc to. 
Authorise to. 
Have to. 
Fine to. 
Good* to. 
Charming to. 
Seefc to. 
Condemn to. 
Condescend to, 
Consist to, in. 



II a du plaisir a la yoir. (21 2 , 25 2 .) 
Y a-t-il de la vanite a le penser ? 

Desagreable d, d*e, 3 Disagreeable to. 

Destiner d, 

Determiner d, 

Difficile d, d*e,3 

Diligent d, 

Disposer d, 

Donner d, 
s'Echauffer d, 
s'Efforcer d, 

Effroyable d, d*e,3 

Employer d, 

Encourager d, 

Enclin d, 

Engager d, 

Enhardir d, 

Enseigner d, 
s'Etudier d, 

Etre d, 

Exact d, 

Exercer d, 

Exciter d, 

Exposer d, 

Facile, d, d*e,3 
seFatiguer d, 

Forcer d, d*e,4 

Gagner d, 

Habile d, 

Habituer d, 

Hesiter d, 

Horrible d, de,3 

Inciter d, 



Destine to. 

Resolve upon. 

Difficult to. 

Diligent to. 

Dispose to. 

Give to. 

JTeaJ to. 

Spend one's self to, in. 

Frightful to. 

Employ to, Z7se to. 

Encourage to. 

Inclined to. 

Induce to. 

Embolden to. 

Teach to. 

Study to. 

.Be to. 

Exact to. 

Exercise to. 

Excite to. 

Expose to. 

.Easy to. 

Cre£ fired with. 

Force to. 

Gain to. 

Clever to. 

jiccwsJom to. 

Hesitate to. 

Horrid to. 

Incite to. 



1 See Note 2, page 522. 

2 FewtV used for Jo 6e ./wsJ, Jo Aave ./wsJ, requires de before the following infinitive ; 
and in the sense of Jo happen, it requires d; as : 

I have just seen her. I Je views de Za voir. 

If she should happen to know it. I Si elle venait a le savoir. 

3 These adjectives require d, when the verb which precedes them has a personal 
nominative; they require de, when the nominative is impersonal • Ex. 

Cela est agreeable, bon, beau, a voir, a. dire, afaire. That is agreeable, fine to see, &c 
II est agreeable, bon, beau, de voir, de dire, defaire. It is agreeable, fine to see, &c 

4 De or d, as it sounds best, in the active sense ; always de in the passive ; as, 
Dn m'a oblige" de or a lefaire. I They have obliged me to do it. 

Vai 6t& obligt de le faire. I have been obliged to do it. 



524 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Ingenieux d, 

Inviter d, 

Laid d, 

Lent d, 

Manquer d, 
seMettre d, 

Montrer d, 

Obliger a, de,\ 
s'Obstiner a, 

Occupe d, 
s'Opiniatrer d, 

Parvenir d, 

Passer d, 

Penser d, 

Perdre d, 

Persister d, 
sePlaire d, 

Porter d, 

Premier d, 



Ingenious to. 
Invite to. 
tfgtfy to. 
SZow to. 
Omi* to. 
£e£ a&ow£ to. 
Show to. 
Oblige to. 
Obstinate to. 
iJwsy to. 
Obstinate to. 
Arrive to. 
Spend in. 
Think of. 
£ ose in. 
Persist in. 
Delight in. 
Induce to. 
FirsJ to. 



Preparer d, 
Pret d, 
Prompt d, 
Propre d, 
Recommencer d, 
Renoncer d, 
Resoudre d, 
Rester d, 
Reussir d, 
Servir d, 
Soigneux d, 
Songer d, 
Sujet d, 
Tacher d, 
Tarder d, 
Tendre d, 
Terrible d, de,2 
Travailler d, 
Venir d, 



Prepare to. 
Ready to. 

Quick to. 
Fi* to. 

'Begin again to. 
Renounce to. 
Resolve to. 
Stay to. 
Succeed to, in. 
Serve to. 
Careful to. 
Think of. 

Subject to, Jj?£ to. 
.Aim at. 
Belay to. 
Tend to. 
Terrible to. 
WorA; to. 
Come to. 



6. French Verbs and Adjectives which govern the following infinitive 
by means of the preposition de. 

N. B. This usually happens after nouns used in a definite sense. 



He has the pleasure of seeing her. 
She has the vanity to think so. 



II a le plaisir de la voir. 
Elle a ia vanite de le croire. 



s'Abstenir de, 

Accuser de, 

Achever de, 

Affecter de, 

Afflige de, 

Aise de, 

Apprehender de, 
s'Attendre, de, d,3 

Avertir de, 
s'Aviser de, 

Blamer de, 

Capable de, 

Cesser de, 

Chare >r de, 



Abstain from. 
Accuse of. 
Finish to. 
Affect to. 
Afflicted to. 
Glad to. 
Fear to. 
Expect to. 
Warn to. 
Bethink to. 
Blame to. 
Capable of, to. 
Cease to. 
Charge to. 



Charme de, Ravi de, Delighted with. 
Commander de, Command to. 

Commence r de, d,3 Begin to. 



Conjurer de, 
Conseiller de, 
Consoler de, 
Content de, 
Continuer de, d,3 
Convaincre de, 
Convenir de, 
Craindre de, 
Curieux de. 



Entreat to. 
Advise to. 
Console for. 
Content to. 
Continue to. 
Convince of. 
Agree to. 
Fear to. 
Curious to. 



Decourager de, 
Defendre de, 

seDepecher de, 
Desesperer de, 
Desirer de, 
Determiner de, 
Detourner de, 
Differer de, 
Dire de, 

Discontinuer de, 
Disconvenir de, 
Dispenser de, 
Dissuader de, 
Doux de, 
Ecrire de, 

s'Efforcer de, 
Enjoindre de, 
Empecher de, 

s'Empresser de t 
Ennuye de 
Enrage de, 
Entreprendre de, 
Essayer de, d,3 
E tonne de, 
Eviter de, 
Excuser de, 



Discourage with. 
Forbid to. 
ikfafce ^as^e to. 
Despair to. 
TFts/i, to. 
Determine to. 
Divert from. 
De/er to, Delay to. 
TeM to. 

Discontinue to. 
Disown to. 
Dispense with. 
Dissuade from. 
Pleasant to. 
Write to. 
Endeavor to. 
Enjoin to. 
Prevent to. 
Eager to. 
Tzred of. 
Enraged at. 
Undertake to. 
Try to. 

Astonished at. 
Avoid to. 
Excuse to. 



i See Note 4, page 523. 2 See Note 3, page 5S3. 

3 As it sounds best, i. e., d' to avoid the sound of several d, and d to avoid th« 
gound of several de 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



525 



Exempter de, 

Exhorter de, d,l 

Fache de, 

Feindre de, 

Finir de, 
Be Flatter de, 
seGarder de, 

Gronder de, 
se Hater de, 

Heureux de, 

Impossible de, 

Incapable de, 

Inspirer de, 

Juger a propos de, 

Jurer de, 

Juste de, 

Lasse de, 

Libre de, 

Mander de, 

Manquer de, 

Menacer de, 

Meriter de, 

Necessaire de, 

Negliger de, 

Offrir de, 

Omettre de, 

Ordonner de, 

Oublier de, 

Pardonner de, 

Permettre de, 

Persuader de, 
sePiquer de, 



Exempt from. 
Exhort to , 
Sorry to. 
Feign to. 
Finish to. 
Flatter to. 
Take care to. 
Scold for. 
Haste to. 
Happy to. 
Impossible to. 
Incapable of. 
Inspire to. 
Think proper to. 
Swear to. 
Just to. 
Tired of, with. 
At liberty to. 
Send word to. 
Fail to. 
Threaten to. 
Deserve to. 
Necessary to. 
Neglect to. 
Offer to. 
0?m£ to. 
Order to. 
Forget to. 
Forgive for. 
Permit to. 
Persuade to. 
Pretend to. 



Plaindre de. 

Possible de, 

Prescrire ete, 

Presser rfe, 

Prier <2e, 

Promettre <2e. 

Proposer rfe, 

Recommandei tfe, 

Refuser dte, 

Regretter de, 
seRejouir de, 

Remercier de, 
seRepentir de, 

Reprocher de, 

Resoudre de, 

Risquer de, 

Rougir de, 

Satisfait de, 

Solliciter de, 

Sommer de, 
se Soucier de, 

Souhaiter de, 

Soup conner de, 
se Souvenir de, 

Suffire de, 

Suggerer de, 

Supplier de, 

Sur de, 

Surpris de, 

Tacher de, 

Tarder de, 
seVanter de, 



Pity to, for. 
Possible to. 
Prescribe to. 
Press to. 
Request to. 
Promise to. 
Propose to. 
Recommend to. 
Refuse to. 
Regret to. 
Rejoice to 
Thank for. 
Repent of, to. 
Reproach for. 
Resolve to. 
jRis& to. 
Blush to. 
Satisfied to, with. 
Solicit to. 
Summon to. 
Care to. 
Wm/i to. 
Suspect to. 
Remember to. 
Sufficient to. 
Suggest to. 
Entreat to. 
jSwre to. 
Surprised to. 
Endeavor to. 
iowg- to. 
Boast of. 



7. The French infinitive preceded 
present participle after the verb £o fce. 
Am I writing ? You were reading. 
Wilt thou be working ? 
We would be walking. 
Who can be ringing ? 
They may be sleeping. 
People might be fishing. 
Let her be cfoi^g- no matter what, 

she must come. 
She must be practising. 



by a, is used to translate the English 
(76 1 , § 144—6.) 
Suis-je a e'crire ? Vous etiez a ZiVe. 
Seras-tu a travailler ? 
Nous serions a nous promener. 
Qui peut etre a sonner ? 
lis peuvent etre a dormir. 
On pourrait etre a pecher. 
Qu'elle soit d faire n'importe quoi, 

il faut qu'elle vienne. 
II faut qu'elle soit d pratiquer. 



$ 157.— PAST PARTICIPLE.— Participe Passe. 

1. At (31 1 ) we saw that the Past Participle, (Participe Passe,) was usually 
placed after the auxiliaries avoir, to have, etre, to be, to form the past 
or compound tenses. [Young pupils, attend carefully to this direction.] 

I have seen. Hadst thou given ? [ J'ai vu. As-tu donne ? 
He shall have written. (58 1 .) II aura ecrit. 



i See Note 3, page 524. 



526 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



<44\ 



ap- 



She may have left. 
We would have gone out. (60 2 .) 
They would have arrived sooner. 
Would you have dressed yourselves I 

Those young ladies would have ap- 
plied themselves to music. 

Although she made a mistake. 

Thou must have been afraid. 

He did not think you would have 
spoken so well and so long. 

2. Since the past participle is connected sometimes with etre, sometimes 
with avoir, we must give rules on the subject. 

When connected with etre, the participe passe is considered as an adjec- 
tive, and agrees with the nominative or subject of the verb etre, to be. That 
takes place in passive verbs, (42 1 ,) and in the neuter verbs that take etre for 
an auxiliary, (34 1 .) In passive verbs, 

A gentleman must translate I am known, by 

A lady must translate I am known, by 

Boys must translate We are praised, by 

Girls must translate We are praised, by 



Elle pent avoir laisse. 
Nous serions sortis. 
lis seraient arrives plus toi. 
Vous seriez-vous habilles ? 

§ 160—2.) 
Ces demoiselles se seraient 

pliquees a la musique. 
Quoiqu'elle se soit trompee. 
II faut que tu aies eu peur. (792.) 
II ne croyait pas que vous eussiez 

parle si bien et si long-temps. (79 2 .) 



Je suis connu. 
Je suis connue. 
Nous sommes loues. 
Nous sommes louees. 



With neuter verbs having etre for auxiliary, say : 



Elle est nee. 

Ces dames sont nees. 



Jean, seras-tu revenu a 9 heures? 



He was born. She was born. II est ne. 

They were born, (m.) These ladies lis sont nes. 

were born. 
John, wilt thou have returned by 9 

o'clock ? 
She would not have died so soon. Elle ne serait pas morte si tot. 

3. Connected with avoir, the participe passe agrees, not with the nomi- 
native or subject, but with the direct object (regime direct, $43) of the par- 
ticipe, when that regime precedes the participe, but not when it comes after. 

The regime indirect (§ 44) has no influence on the participe. 

Have you received my letters ? | Avez-vous recu mes lettres ? The 

regime, mes lettres, coming after regu, the participe does not change. But, 
in: The letters which you have received, the regime, which, preceding the 
participe, the latter must agree with the former, and be feminine plural. 
Hence the French phrase is : Les lettres que vous avez regues. 



Nous avons corrige les themes que 

vous avez ecrits et envoy es. 
Combien de coups avez-vous tires ? 



We have corrected the exercises 

that you have written and sent. 
How many shots did you fire? 

Combien de coups, the regime, being before, the participe is declinable. 
I have fired six. | J' en ai tire six. 

Here the regime is six ; and as it comes after the participe, the latter is 
indeclinable. (31 1 .) 

4; The objective pronoun en may be regime direct ($43) or indirect, 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 527 

(J 44,) but the participe is never declinable after it ; because en has neither 
gender nor number, and consequently, when regime direct, it cannot 
change the participe. As regime indirect, it has no influence on it. 



Have you gathered any flowers? 

I have gathered some. 

He has not answered the two letters 



Avez-vous cueilli des fleurs ? 

yen ai cueilli. (§43.) 

II n'a pas repondu aux deux lettres 



he has received from them. qu' il en a recues. (§ 44.) 

Here the participe is recues, fern, plur., not on account of en, regime indi- 
rect, but of que, its regime direct, which precedes, and with which it must 
agree, independently of en. 

5. The rule given at 3 is easily observed in plain and ordinary cases in 
which the regime direct is easily distinguished ; but there are sentences, in 
which even grammarians can hardly decide. Without presenting those 
knotty points to the student, I will give him the principle by which he is to 
be guided, and leave the rest to his judgment. 

Sometimes after the participle, preceded by an object^ there is a verb in 
the infinitive ; then it is necessary to consider whether the object is governed 
by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows it. 

If the object is governed by the participle, the participle must be of the 
same gender and number as that object. Ex. : 
The letter I have given him to copy. ] La lettre que je lui ai donnee a copier. 

If the object is governed by the injinitive which follows the participle, the 
participle has no agreement with the object. As : 
The letter I have told him to copy. | La lettre que je lui ai dit de copier. 1 

The participles plu, pleased ; du, owed, ought ; pu, been able, and voulu, 
been willing ; do not agree with the object that precedes them, because the 
infinitive of the foregoing verb is understood after them. Ex. : 
I have done him all the services that 1 Je lui ai rendu tous les services que 

I have been able, {to do understood.) I que j'ai^w, (lui rendre understood.) 

§157| .—PRESENT PARTICIPLE.— Participe Present. 

The Present Participle in English is used after every preposition except 
the preposition to, and it enters in the formation of every tense of almost 
every verb, as : I am speaking, I was, have been, had been, shall be, shall 
have been, &c. &c, speaking ; while in French, it is excluded from those 
tenses, and is much used only in connexion with the preposition en, the 

i If you are uncertain whether the object is governed by the participle, or by the 
infinitive which follows it, transpose the words, and see after which the object may 
more properly be placed. 

If the object can be placed after the participle, as in the first instance, The letter 
I have given him to copy, which may be turned, J have given him the letter to copy ; 
the participle given governs the object letter, and it must agree with it. 

If the object comes more properly after the infinitive, as in the second instance, 
The letter I have told him to copy, which might be turned, I have told him to copy 
the letter, (not, the letter to copy,) the object letter is governed by the infinitive to 
cepy, and the participle has no agreement with it. 



528 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



only one which in that language governs the present participle. In conse 
quence of that radical difference, it was thought inexpedient to direct the 
attention of the pupil to that part of the verb, for fear that its knowledge 
should lead him into constant errors, whilst a want of it could not be felt, 
since the French construction does not require it. But now that he has gone 
through the various portions of the verb, and that the same danger is not to 
be apprehended, we proceed to its introduction. As the present participle 
always ends in ant, and is invariable, it is attended with no difficulty. 

1. It is formed from the first person plural of the present indicative, by 
changing its termination ons into ant. 

Ire Conj. We speak, Nous parlons. Speaking, Parlant. 

2de Conj. We finish, Nous finissons. Finishing, Finissant. 

3me Conj. We receive, Nous recevons. Receiving, Recevant. 

4me Conj. We sell, Nous vendons. Selling, Vendant. 

2. The five following verbs form exceptions to this rule : — 
To have, having. Avoir, ayant. 
To be, being. Etre, etant. 
To become due, 1 becoming due. £choir, echeant. 
To know, knowing. Savoir, sachant. 
To become, becoming. Seoir, seant. 

3. It is used when an agent performs two actions at the same time, as in 
the following examples : 



The man eats while running. 

I correct while reading. 

I question while speaking. 

You speak while answering me. 

I improve by reading. 

Take exercise by walking, (walk for 

exercise.) 
Let us go leisurely to the store. 
When must he do it ? In going, (as 

he goes.) 
Call there as you come. 
Do they sing while dancing ? 
People ruin themselves by gambling. 



L'homme mange en courant. 

Je corrige en lisant. 

Je questionne en parlant. 

Vous parlez en me repondant. 

Je m'instruis en lisant. 

Prends de l'exercice en marchant. 

Allons au magasin en promenant. 
Quand faut-il qu'il le fasse ? En 

s'en allant. 
Passez-y en venant. 
Chantent-ils en dansant ? 
On se ruine en jouant. 



4. En being the only French preposition which governs the present par- 
ticiple, as we have said, (R. 1,) it follows that, whatever may be the Eng- 
lish preposition connected with the present participle, it can be translated 
only by en, if the French participle is used. 



While digging the foundation, they 

found a skeleton. 
The house being built, we occupied 

it. 
Having studied, I recited well. 



En creusant les fondements, on trouva 

un squelette. (67 1 , N. 1.) 
La maison etant batie, nous l'occu- 

pames. 
Ayant etudie, je recitai bien. 



1 In speaking of a lease, or a given portion of time. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 529 

5. The present participle qualifying a noun, is considered as an adjective, 
(English, participial adjective; French, adjectif verbal,) and agrees with the 
noun in gender and number. 



A charming man. 
A charming woman. 
Charming men. 
Charming women. 



Un homme charmant. 
Une femme charmante. 
Des hommes charmants. 
Des femmes charmantes. 



6. The English present participle, showing the action of a nominative 
case, is translated in French by the present participle, which is of course 
invariable. 



This actor, dancing gracefully, is 

much admired. 
Those actresses, dancing gracefully, 

are much admired. 



Cet acteur, dansant avec graces, est 

tres-admire. 
Ces actrices, dansant avec graces, 

sont tres-admirees. 



7. The English present participle, relating to an objective case, may be 
translated by the French present participle, but the indicative is preferable. 



I found her coming here. 
See those children playing in the 
shade. 



Je la trouvai qui venait ici. 
Vois ces enfants se jouant (ou qui 
jouent) sous Tombrage. 

8. The English present participle, governed by a verb or a preposition, {en 
excepted,) is translated by a French infinitive. 

I see her reading, and I am tired of I Je la vois lire, et je suis fatigue de 
waiting for her. Vattendre. 

9. The English present participle, used as a nominative in a general sense, 
is never translated by the French present participle, but by an infinitive, or 
a noun, if there is one synonymous to the verb. 

Playing is the delight of children. I Jouer est le delice des enfants ; or, 

I Le jeu est le delice des enfants. 

10. If not taken in a general sense, use a noun; or, if no synonymous 
noun can be found, give the sentence another turn. 



II donne tout son temps a V etude. 
Leur chant fut fort admire". 
Est-ce la cause de sa pauvrete t 
Pourquoi venez-vous si tard ? 



He gives all his time to studying. 
Their singing was much admired. 
Is that the cause of his being poor ? 
What is the reason of your coming so 
late? 

11. The present participle, after to be, is translated by the infinitive. (See 
* 156—7.) 

* 158.— NEUTER VERBS.— Verbes Neutres. 
1. In neuter verbs the action is intransitive, that is, it remains in the 
agent. They are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always 
form their past tenses with the auxiliary avoir* to have ; on the contrary, 
some neuter verbs take etre* to be, and others avoir,* for their auxiliary, 
others again take sometimes avoir * and sometimes it re* according as action 
•r state is more particularly meant. 
45 



530 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



2. When conjugated with etre, their past participles agree with the nomi 
native of that verb. But, when conjugated with avoir, their past participles 
are invariable, for they have no regime direct with which they can agree. 

3. Verbs which without being reflective, take itre, to be, as auxili- 
ary. (34 1 .) 



To 




To 




arrive, happen, 


arriver. 


die, 


deceder. 


attain, 


parvenir. 


disagree, 


disconvenir. 


be born, 


naitre. 


fall, 


tomber. 


become, 


devenir. 


g°> 


aller. 


come, 


venir. 


go out, 


sortir. 


come back, 


revenir. 


happen, come to 




come in, 


entrer. 


pass, 


survenir. 


decay, 


dechoir. 


intervene, 


intervenir. 


die, 


mourir. 


set out, 


partir. 



$159. PASSIVE VERBS.— Verbes Passifs. 

1. Those verbs, although extensively used in English, are not so in 
French. In both languages they are formed, as taught (42 1 ), by means of 
the auxiliary verb to be, etre, joined to the past participle of any active verb. 

2. The past participle being then used as an adjective, agrees with the 
nominative or subject of the verb to be. 



The boy is praised by his friends. 
The girl is praised by them. 
The boys are all blamed. 
Are not these girls admired ? 



Le garcon est loui par ses amis. 
Lajille est louee par eux. 
Les gargons sont tous blames. 
Ces jilles ne sont-elles pas admirees ? 



3. The French, instead of the passive voice, use the active form with on 
for nominative, or else the reflective verb. The student should then be able 
to change any one form to another with ease. 



Active voice. J shut the door. 
Passive voice. The door is shut by 

me. J 



Jeferme la porte. 
Laporte est fermee par mot. 



The preposition by and the pronoun it governs are frequently left out ; for 
example, the passive voice of, people say, is, it is said, without adding by 
the people. — People know, it is Known. — They believe, it is believed. 

It is advisable to exercise the scholar on these alterations, principally from 
the English passive to the French active form with the pronoun on; as : 
Is it expected ? Is it believed ? I Le croit-on ? 

We are told. On nous dit. \ It will be seen. On verra. 

And to the reflective form. As : 



The church will be opened soon. 
Their house was sold yesterday. 
Water is carried everywhere. 



I/eglise s'ouvrira bientot. 
Leur maison se vendit hier. 
L'eau se conduit partout. 



4. The infinitive of a passive verb coming after another verb, is rendered 
by on, as nominative indefinite of the following verb, which must be put in 
its proper tense. (77 J , N. B.) 

I fear to be laughed at. (Subj.) I Je crains qu' on ne se moque de moi. 

He is certain to be laughed at. (Ind.) I II est certain qu'ora se moquera de lui. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



531 



($ 71, &c.) 




I . . . myself, 


Je me . 


Thou . . . thyself, 


Tu*e. 


He . . . himself, 


11 


She . . . herself, 


Elle 


It . . . itself, 


11, elle 


One . . . one* s self, 


On 



$160.— REFLECTED VERBS.— Verbes Mflechis. 

1. When the action falls upon the agent, and the objective case refers to 
the same person as the nominative, the verb is called Reflective. The 
French use nearly all their active verbs under a reflective form. They are 
as fond of that kind of verbs as the English are of the passive form, (% 159,) 
and frequently translate the latter by it. 

2. In reflective verbs, the pronoun of the object is of the same person as 
that of the subject. Each person is therefore conjugated with a double 
personal pronoun. One is nominative ; the other objective, or reflective. 

We . . . ourselves. Nous nous. 

You . . . yourselves. Vous vous. 

They . . . themselves. lis se . . . 
They . . . themselves. Elles se. [se. 
The men . . themselves. Leshommes 
The girls . . themselves. Les filles se. 
N. B. The third person reflective is always sefor both genders and numbers. 

3. In the imperative there is but one pronoun, the reflective or objective 
one. (§ 150, N. B.) Habillez- vous, dress yourself. Ne te trompe pas, do 
not make a mistake. Allons-wows-en, let us go away. {En, there, means 
from here, from there.) 

4. In French, all reflective verbs form their compound tenses with the 
auxiliary verb etre, while, in English, they take to have. As, in this case, 
the verb to be is used in place of to have, the past participle of a reflective 
verb does not, as in neuter verbs, (34 l , § 158,) and passive verbs, (42 1 , § 159,) 
agree with the subject, but with the direct object, when that object is before, 
in the same manner as when to have (avoir) is the auxiliary. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) 
Hence the French write, Nous nous sommes coupes ; the past participle 
taking an s, because nous, its direct object, is before ; but in Nous nous 
sommes coupe les doigts, the participle coupe has no s, because its object (les 
doigts) comes after. 

5. Most passive verbs having an inanimate object for their nominatives 
are reflected in French ; as, Les mauvaises nouvelles se repandent plus 
promptement que les bonnes, Bad news is sooner spread than good. On 
s' etonne de l'accroissement rapide des Etats-Unis, People are astonished at 
the rapid increase of the United States. (§ 159 — 3.) 



ADVEKBS. 

§ 161. — 1. Adverbs qualifying verbs, are on that account placed as near the 
verb as possible. The French say: V aime mieux le boeuf que le mouton ; not, 
yaime le bceuf mieux, because the adverb mieux qualifies the verb j'aime, 
and not the noun, boeuf. (51 3 .) 

2. Adverbs, expressed in a single word, are usually placed after the verb, 
in a simple tense, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in a com 
pound one ; as : 



532 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

He writes well. II ecrit bien. 

He has written well II a bien ecrit. 

He has written badly. 11 a mal ecrit. 

3. If the adverb is expressed in two or more words, it goes after the 
verb, whether the tense is simple or compound. 



He writes properly. 

He will write tolerably well. 

She sang well, as usual. 



II ecrit comme ilfaut. 
II ecrira passablement bien. 
Elle a bien chante, comme a V ordi- 
naire. 



4. Combien, how much, many ? ne . . . que, only, but ; trop, too much, &c. ; 
beaucoup, much, many; assez, enough; ne . . . guere, but little, are called 
by the French adverbs of quantity. (Dir. 7 — 13 1 .) 

In English, to form adverbs from adjectives, the final ly is added ; as, 
wise, wisely. In French, that final is ment. 

5. Adjectives which end in a vowel, become adverbs by adding ment to 
it ; as, sage, poli, ingenu, adjectives ; sagement, poliment, ingenument, 
adverbs. 

6. Adjectives ending in nt, change that final to mment ; as, constant, pru- 
dent, patient, adjectives ; constamment, prudemment, patiemment, adverbs. 

7. Adjectives which end neither in a vowel, nor in nt, become abverbs 
by adding ment to their feminine termination ; as, grand, doux, heureux, 
adjectives masculine ; grande, douce, heureuse, adjectives feminine ; grande- 
ment, greatly ; doucement, softly, slowly y sweetly; heureusement, happily, 
luckily, adverbs. 



NEGATIONS. 

§ 162. — La connaissance que nous avons deja de la negation nous met a 
meme de deduire les neuf articles suivants : — 

Art. 1. La negation est generalement en deux mots, dont Tun est inva- 
riablement neon n 1 , et 1' autre un complement, qui change selon les circon- 
stances. 1 

2. Ne se place toujours avant le verbe, et avant les pronoms objectife, 
s'il y en a. 

3. Dans les temps simples, ne est avant, et le complement apres le verbe. 

4. Dans les temps composes, le complement se place quelque fois avant le 
participe passe : Je ne l'ai pas vu. 

5. Quelque fois apres. Je ra'ai vu personne. 

6. Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans les 
temps simples et avant l'auxiliaire dans les composes, quand la negation 
forme le nominatif. Rien ne le d^courage, nothing discourages him. 

l The word complement means here completing the sense. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



7. Avant rinfinitif ne et son complement sont joints, et se placent gen6- 
ralement avant : Ne rien avoir. 

8. Quand le verbe est omis, le complement seul exprime la negation : Fas 
lui, not he. 

9. Neither, non plus. 

Art. 3. Ne, avant, le complement apres. — Liste alphabetique des nega- 
tions avec les temps simples : 

Ne que . . . 

Ne guere, pas beaucoup, qu'un 

peu. 

Ne ni ni. 

Ne .... ni ne .... ni ne. 

Je Ti'ecris, ne lis, ni ne traduis 

l'Allemand. 

Ne jamais. 

Ne .... jamais plus, or plus jamais. 
Ne .... jamais rien. 



But, only. (13 1 .) 

But little, only a little. (13i.) 

Neither . . . nor . . (before nouns. (5 1 .) 
Neither . . . nor . . (before verbs, sim- 
ple tenses.) 

Never. (3R) 
Never any more. 
Never anything. 



No, not . 



any. (2 1 .) 



Nobody, no one, no person, not any- 
body. 

No longer, no more, not any longer, 
more. 

No longer, anything, nothing more, 
&c. 

None, not any. 

In no manner, no wise, by no means. 

No sooner. (682, § 155.) 

Not. 

Not anything, nothing. (3 1 .) 

Not anywhere, nowhere. (46 2 .) 

Not at all, not in the least. 

Not in the least. 

Not much more, not many more, only 
a little more. 

Nothing but. 

Only a little, not much. (13 1 .) 

Only a little more, a few more. 



Ne... 


. pas de, point de. 1 


Ne... 


. pas un, pas une. 


Ne... 


. aucun, aucune. 


Ne.. 


. nul, nulle. 


Ne.. 


. personne. (72.) 


Ne... 


. plus. (36 2 .) 


Ne.. 


. plus rien. 


N'en. 


. pas, point — aucun, ne, 


Ne... 


. d' aucune maniere. 


Ne.. 


. pas plutot. 


Ne.. 


. pas ou point. 1 


Ne... 


. rien. 


Ne.. 


. nulle part. 


Ne... 


. pas du tout, point du tout 


Ne... 


. pas le moins du monde. 


Ne.. 


. guere plus — plus guere. 



Ne que — rien que. 

Ne .... qu'un peu, guere, pas beau- 
coup. 

Ne guere, pas beaucoup, qu'un 

peu, plus. 



l Purists find out some difference between pas and point. There is some, but it ia 
only one well acquainted with the language that could find use for the distinction 
Use at pleasure, the one or the other, merely consulting euphony. (412 ) 
45* 



534 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



NEGATIONS AVEC LES TEMPS COMPOSES. 

4. Liste des negations, dont le complement est place avant le participe 



Je rf en ai guere vu. (31 l .) 

Je w'en ai pas beaucoup vu. 

Je w'en ai pas vu beaucoup. 

Je ne Pai ni vu, ni entendu. 

Je ne Vm jamais vu. 

Je ne l'ai jamais plus (ou plus jamais) 

vu. 
Je ne lui ai jamais rien dit. 
Je ne lui ai pas donne d' argent. 
Je ne lui en ai plus donne. 

Je ne lui ai plus rien donne. 

Ne lui en ai-je pas donne ? 

II ne l'eut pas plutot dit qu'il . . . 

Ne le lui avez-vous pas donne ? 

Ne leur avez-vous rien dit? 

Je ne lui en ai guere plus donne. 

Je ne lui en ai pas donne beaucoup 

plus. 
Je ne lui en ai pas du tout donne. 
Je ne lui en ai point donne du tout. 

dement est place apres le participe. 
Je ra'ai vu que cela. 
Nen a-t-il pris qu'unpeu ? 
IV' a-t-il vu ni 1'un ni 1' autre ? 
IV'en avez-vous appris aucun ? 
Qui ra'a vu per sonne ? 
Je ne l'ai fait d'aucune maniere. 
Ne l'avons-nous laisse nulle part ? 
II w'a fait que chanter, {rien que.) 
Je ft'en ai apporte qu'xrn peu plus. 
II ne l'a point change le moins du 
monde. 

6. Negations employees comme nominatifs ou sujets. 
Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans les 
temps simples et avant l'auxiliaire dans les composes. 



But a little, only a little. 

Neitner . . nor . . nor . . (before verbs.) 

Never. 

Never . . . more or any more. 

Never . . . anything. 

No. 

No longer, no more, not any longer, 

&c. 
No longer, anything, &c. 
None, not any. 
No sooner. 
Not. 
Nothing, not . . . anything. 

Not much more. 

None at all, not . . . the least bit. 

5. Liste des ne'gations dont le compl 
But, only. 

But a little, only a little. 
Neither . . . nor . . . nor . . . 
No, not any. 

Nobody, no one, not . . any one, &c. 
In no manner, nowise, by no means. 
Nowhere, not . . . anywhere. 
Nothing but. 
Only a little more. 
Not ... in the least . . . not ... a bit. 



Neither: Neither suit him. 

Neither could suit her. 
(past.) 
Nobody: No one will do it. 

Nobody did it. 
None, not one: None will go. 

Not one went. 



Ni l'un ni 1' autre ne lui conviennent. 
Ni l'un ni 1' autre w'ont pu lui con- 

venir. 
Personne ne le fera. 
Per sonne ne l'a fait. 
Aucun w'ira. Nulle 7i'ira. 

Nul w'ya e^e. Aucune w'y est allee. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 



Rien ne lui deplait. 

Rien ne l'a derangee. 
Jamais rien ne lui plait. 

Rien jamais ne lui a plu. 

Jamais personne ne lui a plu. 



Nothing : Nothing displeases 

him. 

Nothing disturbed her. 

Nothing ever : Nothing ever pleases 

him. 

Nothing ever pleased 

her. 
Nobody ever pleased 
her. 

7. Avec l'infinitif. JVe et son complement son joints et places avant. 
He likes to do nothing. I II aime a ne rien faire. (43 2 .) 
He fears he shall have none. I II craint de ne pas en avoir. 

II y a quelques exceptions, que nous allons presenter. 
He has a mind to take but one. I II a envie de n 1 en prendre qu'un. 

He is afraid to have none, I II a peur de n' en avoir aucun. 

Tell him to invite nobody. I Dites-lui de %'inviter personne. 

He has a mind to go nomhere. II a envie de Waller nulle part. 

Les autres suivent la 7me regie generale. II est essentiel cependant 
d'ajouter que tres-souvent l'infinitif peut se mettre entre ne et le comple- 
ment. 

S II craint de ne jamais V avoir. 
( II craint de ne P avoir jamais. 

8. Quand le verbe est omis, (omitted or understood,) ne, se trouvant avant 
Test aussi ; consequemment le complement seul exprime la negation. 

Veut-il du pain et du fro mage ? II veut du pain, mais pas de fromage, 
(no cheese.) Le verbe veut etant omis ; il ne, qui sont avant, le sont aussi. 
Qu'a-t-il ? Rien. Quand viendra-t-il? Jamais ? Qui aimez-vous? Personne. 
Que leur faut-il 1 Rien de plus. 

9. We have seen that neither „ . . nor, was translated by ne . . . ni . . . nx, 
(5 1 , § 162 — 3, 4, 6.) When neither is unconnected with nor, translate it by 
non plus, which means no more, not any more. (Page 169.] 



He fears he can never get it. 



I neither. 
Thou neither. 
Lui non plus. 
Ceci non plus. 



Le general non plus. 



Neither do I. 
Neither do you. 
Elle non plus. 
Cela non plus. 



Moi non plus. Nous non plus. 
Toi non plus. Vous non plus. 
Eux non plus. Elles non plus. 
Ceux-ci non plus. Celles-la nonplus, 
Les generaux non plus. 



PREPOSITIONS. 

% 163.— 1. French prepositions, except en, govern the infinitive of verbs, 
while in English they govern the present participle. (Rule 1.) 



They speak of coming without wri- 
ting to you, and before sending the 
present. 

We improve by reading and medita- 
ting. 



lis parlent de venir sans vous ecrire, 
et avant d'envoyer le present. 

On s'instruit en lisant et en medi- 
tant. ($ 157£.) 



536 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

2. In French the preposition is always placed before the word it governs, 
and must be repeated before every one. In English, on the contrary, the 
preposition is placed either before or after, and need not be repeated. 



With whom were you speaking ? 
Whom were you speaking with ? 
I come from France, Italy, and 
Spain. 



Avec qui parliez-vous ? never 
Qui parliez-vous avec? 
Je viens de France, d'ltalie, et 
d'Espagne. 



3. The preposition, and the verb it governs, may be separated by any 
negation or objective pronoun. 



I am sorry I did not know it. 
Has he sold the house without telling 
you of it ? 



Je suis fache dene pas V avoir su. 
A-t-il vendu la maison sans vous en 
avertir ? 



REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 

4. Of, from ; De. We have noticed (§ 8, &c.) the contraction of de 
with the definite article le, les, into du, des ; and refer to those paragraphs. 

5. To, at, in ; A. We have seen 1&% 8, 12, &c.) how a, connected with 
le, les, contracts into au, aux, and refer to those paragraphs. 

6. As far as. Jusqu'a. (§ 13.) 

7. At, in, to, relating to a person's residence, is chez. (18 1 .) 

I must go to my sister's. I II faut que j'aille chez ma soeur. 

They live at or in our house. I lis demeurent chez nous. 

Chez, means to, in or at the house of, consequently, its complement must 
be an objective personal pronoun, instead of the English possessive, and the 
word maison, house, is not used. 
At my house, (turn, tothehouseofme.) Chez moi. 



Chez lui, nous, vous, toi, elle, eux, 

elles, soi. 
Dechez quelqu'un, de chez moi. 
Rester chez or avec quelqu'un. 



To his, our, your, thy, her, their, one's 

house. 
From a person's house , my house. 
To live, stay with somebody. 

Chez sometimes relates to the character of a person, and means in. 
This virtue is a vice in you. ] Cette vertu est chez vous un vice. 

Chez, applied to nations, is translated by among. 
Among the Greeks and Romans. | Chez les Grecs et chez les Romains. 

8. From ; De la part. From, with the verbs to go, to come, not fron^ 
the house, but from a person, is de la part, de la part de. 



Allez de ma part chez mon ami. 
De la part de qui venez-vous ? 



Go from me to my friend's. 
Whom do you come from ? Who 
sent you ? 

9. Before ; Avant, devant. Avant relates to time or order, and is th* 
opposite of apres, after, Devant relates to situation, and is the opposite ot 
derriere, behind. (49 3 .) 



If you arrive before me, I will arrive 

after you. 
Walk before, he will walk behind. 



Si vous arrivez avant moi, j'arriveraj 

apr£s vous. 
Marchez devant, i\ marchera derriere. 



GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 537 

N. B. — Without an object, before is auparavant. 
I had bought it before. | Je l'avais achete auparavant! 

10. By ; Pres de, a cote de. In the sense of near, by is pres de. By 
the, Pres de V , pres de la, pres du. ($$ 9, 11.) 

He was sitting by me. i II etait assis a cote de moi, (pres de.) 

We passed by them. | Nous passames pres d'eux, {dcdted\) 

N. B. By, joined to myself, thyself, &c, is equivalent to alone, and is 
expressed by the adjective seul. 
Was she by herself? | fitait-elle seule ? (312.) 

11. In, into ; Dans, en. Bans is usually followed by a definite noun. 
I have read that in the Bible. I J'ai lu cela dans la Bible. 

We saw that in Racine. I Nous avons vu cela dans Racine. 

En is followed by an indefinite noun. 
There are many in France. | II y en a beaucoup en France. 

12. In ; Dans, en. Speaking of time, in is expressed by dans, to denote 
the time after which an action will be performed. I will answer you in 
three days, that is, after three days, Je vous repondrai dans trois jours. (71 2 .) 

En, the time that will be employed in performing it. 
We shall be at Washington in 6 | Nous serons a Washington en 6 
hours, (shall be 6 hours going.) heures. 

13. At, in, to; a, en. Before a city, a ; before a country, en. (38 1 .) 
He goes to Madrid, in Spain. I II va a Madrid, en Espagne. 

She resides in Ireland, at Dublin. I Elle reside en Irlande, a Dublin. 

14. In, on, not translated before nouns denoting any part of the day, or 
before the names of the days, or before dates. 

In the morning. — In the evening. j Le matin. — Le soir. (22 2 .) 
On Tuesday in the evening. I Mardi soir. (32 2 .) 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

§164. — 1. We have seen that the subjunctive mood (§151 — 2) required 
an antecedent which was frequently a conjunction. See at (79 1 ) a list of 
those which govern the subjunctive mood. Of course the others govern the 
indicative. 

A moins que, de crainte que, de peur que, require ne before the verb 
which they govern. ($ 151 — 6). 

Jusqud, being a preposition, is used before a noun or pronoun, but not be- 
fore a verb. Until to morrow, jusqu' d demain, (37 1 .) 

Before a verb, jusqu'd ce que, the conjunction, is to be used. 
Until he come, (should come.) | Jusqu'd ce qu'W vienne, (79 1 .) 

2. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first 
verb only, and que is used before the other verbs, and governs the same 
mood as the conjunction does. 



538 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 

As he is diligent and takes pains. Comme il est diligent et qu'il prend 

v de la peine. 
Unless he be diligent and take pains. A moins qu'A ne soit diligent et qu 1 il 

ne prenne de la peine. 

3. When si, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating si before the 
second verb, use que, and after it the subjunctive, although the verb which 
follows si, may govern the indicative. 

You will learn if you are diligent and | Vous apprendrez si vous ites diligent 
take pains. » et que vous preniez de la peine. 

4. In (Dir. 6) we have seen that the conjunction that is frequently used 
to form two simple sentences into one, and that, although frequently omit- 
ted in English, it was always expressed in French. We here repeat it. 

I know he intends writing one. | Je sais qu'il compte en ecrire un. 

5. Whether, used in the sense of if, is translated by si with the following 
verb in the indicative. As : 

Does she know whether he will go ? ] Sait-elle s'il ira ? 

Whether, in the sense of let, is translated by que, or soit que, with the 
following verb in the subjunctive. As : 
Whether she comes or not, or let her I Soit ^w'elle vienne ou non, nous 

come or not, we will go. | irons. Quelle vienne ou non, &c. 

6. But for, were it not for, correspond to sans, and so does if it had 
not been. As : 
But for his friends. 
Had it not been for his friends, he \- Sans ses amis, il aurait et6 renvoye. 

would have been dismissed. 

§170.— See (§ 161. &c.) 
§ 171 — See (§ 162, &c.) 
§180.— See (§160, &c.) 
§ 200.— See (§ 137, &c.) 



nds, he )■* 
I. J 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 



539 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB A VOIR, TO HAVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Avoir, 



to have. | Avoir eu, 
Participles. 



to have hadi 





present. 








Ayant, 




having. 




PAST. 




past. 




Ayant eu, 


having had. 


Eu, m. ; eue, /. 




had. 










Indicative Mood. 






present. 




PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 


J'ai. 




J have. 


J'ai eu, 


I have had. 


Tuas, 




thou hast. 


Tu as eu, 


thou hast had. 


11 a, 




he has. 


11 a eu, 


he has had. 


Nous avons, 




we have. 


Nous avons eu, 


we have had. 


Vous avez, 




you have. 


Vous avez eu, 


you have had. 


lis ont, 




they have. 


Ds ont eu, 


they have had. 




imperfect. 


PLUPERFECT. 


JPavais, 




I had. 


J'avais eu, 


I had had. 


Tu avals, 




thou hadst. 


Tu avais eu, 


thou hadst had. 


11 avait, 




he had. 


11 avait eu, 


he had, had. 


Nous avions, 




we had. 


Nous avions eu, 


we had had. 


Vous aviez, 




you had. 


Vous aviez eu, 


you had had. 


lis avaient, 




they had. 


lis avaient eu, 


they had had. 


preterit definite. 


PRETERIT ANT OR. 


J'eus, 




I had. 


J'eus eu, 


I had had. 


Tu eus, 




thou hadst. 


Tu eus eu, 


thou hadst had. 


H eut, 




he had. 


n eut eu, 


he had had. 


Nous eumes, 




we had. 


Nous eumes eu, 


we had had. 


Vous eutes, 




you had. 


Vous eutes eu, 


you had had. 


lis eurent, 




they had. 


Ds eurent eu, 


they had had. 




future. 




PAST ] 


JPaurai, 




I shall have. 


J'aurai eu, 


I shall have had. 


Tu auras, 




thou ehalt have. 


Tu auras eu, 


thou shcdt have had. 


11 aura, 




he shall have. 


11 aura eu, 


he shall have had. 


Nous aurons, 




we shall have. 


Nous aurons eu, 


we shall have had. 


Vous aurez, 




you shall have. 


Vous aurez eu, 


you shall have had. 


lis auront, 




they shall have. 


lis auront eu, 


they shall have had. 


conditional present. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 


J'aurais, 




I should have. 


J'aurais eu, 


I should have had. 


Tu aurais, 


thou shouldst have. 


Tu aurais eu, 


thou shouldst have had. 


11 aurait, 




he should have. 


11 aurait eu, 


he should have had. 


Nous aurions, 




we should have. 


Nous aurions eu, 


we should have had. 


Vous auriez, 




you should have. 


Vous auriez eu, 


you should have had. 


lis auraient, 




they should have. 


lis auraient eu, 


they should have had. 



Imperative Mood. 
Aie, have {thou.) 

Ayons, let us have. 

Ayez, have (you.) 

Subjunctive Mood. 



present. 

that I may have, 
that thou mayst have, 
that he may have, 
that we may have. 
that you may have, 
that they may have. 
IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse, that I might have. 

Que tu eusses, that thou mightst have. 

Qu'il eut, that he might have. 

Que nous eussiona, that we might have. 

Que vous eussiee, that you might have. 

Qu'ils eussent, that they might have. 



Que j J aie, 
Que tu aies, 
Qu'il ait, 
Que nous ayons, 
Que vous ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 



preterit. 
Que j 'aie eu, that 1 may have 

Que tu aies eu, that thou mayst have 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may have 

Que nous ayons eu, that we may have 
Que vous ayez eu, that you may have 
Qu'ils aient eu, that they may have 

pluperfect. 
Que j'eusse eu, that I might 

Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst 
Qu'il eut eu, that he might 

Que nous eussions eu, that we might 
Que vous eussiez eu, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might 



had. 
had. 



had. 
had. 

1 . 



540 



CONJUGATION OF ETRE. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE, TO BR 



Infinitive Mood. 





PRESENT. 






PAST. 


Etre, 




to be. 


Avoir ete, 


to have been, 






Participles. 






PRESENT. 








Etant, 




being. 




PAST. 




PAST. 




Ayant ete, 


having been. 


Ete, 




been. 










Indicative Mood. 






PRESENT. 




preterit indefinite. 


Je suis, 




/ am. 


J'ai ete, 


J have been. 


Tues, 




thou art. 


Tu as ete, 


thou hast been. 


11 est, 




he is. 


11 a ete, 


he has been. 


Nous somnies, 




we are. 


Nous avons ete, 


we have been. 


Vous etes, 




you are. 


Vous avez ete, 


you have been. 


Hs sont, 




they are. 


lis ont ete, 


they have been. 




IMPERFECT 




PLUPE 


J'etais, 




I was. 


J'avais ete, 


I had been. 


Tu etais, 




thou wast. 


Tu avais ete, 


thou hadst been. 


11 etait, 




he was. 


11 avait ete, 


he had been. 


Nous etions, 




we were. 


Nous avions ete 


we had been, 


Vous etiez, 




you were. 


Vous aviez ete, 


you had been. 


lis etaient, 




they were. 


lis avaient ete, 


they had been. 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 


preterit anterior. 


Je fus, 




I was. 


J'eus ete, 


I had been. 


Tufus, 




thou wast. 


Tu eus ete, 


thou hadst been. 


Ilfut, 




he was. 


II eut ete, 


he had been. 


Nous fumes, 




we were. 


Nous eumes ete, 


we had been. 


Vous futes, 




you were. 


Vous eutes ete, 


you had been. 


lis furent, 




they were. 


lis eurent ete, 


they had been. 




FUTURE. 




PAST FUTURE. 


Je serai, 




I shall be. 


J'aurai ete, 


I shall have been. 


Tu seras, 




thou shalt be. 


Tu auras ete, 


thou shalt have been. 


11 sera, 




he shall be. 


11 aura ete, 


he shall have been, 


Nous serons, 




we shall be. 


Nous aureus ete, 


we shall have been. 


Vous serez, 




you shall be. 


Vous aurez ete, 


you shall have been. 


lis serout, 




they shall be. 


lis auront ete, 


they shall have been. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 


Je serais, 




I should be. 


J'aurais ete, 


I should have been. 


Tu serais, 




thou shouldst be. 


Tu aurais ete, 


thou shouldst have been. 


11 serait, 




he should be. 


11 aurait ete, 


he should have been. 


Nous serions, 




we should be. 


Nous aurions ete, 


we should have been. 


Vous seriez, 




you should be. 


Vous auriez ete, 


you should home been. 


lis seraient, 




they should be. 


Ds auraient ete, 


they should have been. 



Imperative Mood. 
Sois, be (thou.) 

Soyons, let us be. 

Soyez, be (you.) 

Subjunctive Mood. 



Que je sois, 
Que tu sois, 
Qu'il soit, 
Que nous soyons, 
Que vous soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 



Que je fusse, 
Que tu fusses, 
Qu'il flit, 

Que nous fussions, 
Que vous fussiez, 
Qu'ils fussent, 



present. 

that I may be. 
that thou mayst be. 
that he may be. 
that we may be. 
that you may be. 
that they may be. 
imperfect. 

that I might be. 

that thou mightst be. 

that he might be. 

that we might be. 

that you might be. 

that they might be. 



preterit. 

Que j'aie ete, that I may have been. 

Que tu aies ete, that thou mayst have been. 
Qu'il ait ete. that he may have been. 

Que nous ayonsete, that we may have been. 
Que vous ayez ete, that you may have been. 
Qu'ils aient ete, that they may have been. 

pluperfect. 
Que j'eusse ete, that I might ~\ 

Que tu eusses ete, that thou mightst § 
Qu'il eut ete, that he might { £ 

Que nous eussions ete, that we might ( g 
Que vous eussiez ete, that you might j a 
Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might) "** 



FIRST CONJUGATION ER. 



541 



FIRST CONJUGATION— in ER. 
Infinitive Mood. 



PRESENT. 


PAST. 




Parler, 


to speak. 


Avoir parle, to have spoken. 




Participles. 


PRESENT. 




Parlant, 


speaking. 


PAST. 


PAST. 


Ayant parle, having spoken* 


Parte, 


spoken. 






Indicative Mood. 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 


Je parle, 


J speak. 


J'ai parle, I have spoken. 


Tu paries, 


thou speakest. 


Tu as parle, thou hastspoken. 


D parle, 


he speaks. 


II a parle, he has spoken. 


Nous parlons, 


we speak. 


Nous avons parle, we have spoken. 


Vous parlez, 


you speak. 


Vous avez parle, you have spoken. 


lis parlent, 


they speak. 


lis ont parle, they have spoken. 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je parlais, 


I was speaking: 


J'avais parle, / had spoken. 


Tu parlais, 


thou wast speaking. 


Tu avais parle, thou hadst spoken. 


n purl ait, 


he was speaking. 


11 avait parle, he had spoken. 


Nous parlions, 


we were speaking. 


Nous avions parle, we had spoken. 


Vous parliez, 


you were speaking. 


Vous aviez parle, you had spoken. 


[Is parlaient, 


they were speaking. 


Ds avalent parle, they had spoken. 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 


Je parlai, 


I spoke. 


J'eus parle, I had spoken. 


Tu parlas, 


thou spokest. 


Tu eus parle, thou hadst spoken. 


11 parla, 


he spoke. 


11 eut parle, he had spoken. 


Nous parlames, 


we spoke. 


Nous eiimes parle, we had spoken. 


Vous parlates, 


you spoke. 


Vous elites parle, you had spoken. 


Ds parlerent, 


they spoke. 


Us eurent parle, they had spoken. 


FUTURE. 


PAST FUTURE. 


Je parlerai, 


I shall speak. 


J'aurai parle, / shall have spoken. 


Tu parleras, 


thou shalt speak. 


Tu auras parle, thou shalt have spoken. 


11 parlera, 


he shall speak. 


11 aura parle, he shall have spoken. 


Nous parlerons, 


we shall speak. 


Nous aurons parle, we shall have spoken. 


Vous parlerez, 


you shall speak. 


Vous aurez parle, you shall have spoken. 


lis parleront, 


they shall speak. 


lis auront parle, they shall have spoken. 


CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 


CONDITIONAL PAST. 


Je parlerais, 


I should speak. 


J'aurais parle, / should have spoken 


Tu parlerais, 


thou shouldst speak. 


Tu aurais parle, thou shouldst have spoken 


11 parlerait, 


he should speak. 


11 aurait parle, he should have spoken 


Nous parlerions, 


we should speak. 


Nous aurions parle, we should have spoken. 


Vous parleriez, 


you should speak. 


Vous auriez parle, you should have spoken. 


lis parleraient, 


they should speak. 
Imperati 


lis auraient parle, they should have spoken, 
ve Mood. 




Parle, sj 


)eak or do speak (thou.) 




Parlons, le 


t us speak. 




Parlez, sp 

SUBJUNC1 


eak or do speak (you.) 
^ive Mood. 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT. 


Que je parle, 


that I may speak. 


Que j'aie parle, that I may "j ^ 
Que tu aies parle, that thou mayst £ 


Que tu paries, 


that thou mayst speak. 


Qu'il parle, 


that he may speak. 


Qu'il ait parle, that he may ! ^ 


Que nous parlions, 


that we may speak. 


Que nous ayons parle, that we may f £ 


Que vous parliez, 


that you may speak. 


Que vous ayez parle, that you may J | 


Qu'ils parlent, 


that they may speak. 


Qu'ils aient parle, that they may J •< 


IMPERF ICT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Que je parlasse, 


that ri ^ 

that thou j § 

that he ! £■ 


Que j'eusse parle, that I might ' 


i 


Que tu parlasses. 


Que tu eusses parle, that thou mightst 


Qu'il pariat, 


Qu'il eut parle, that he might 


i 


Que nous parlassions, that we ( •* 


Que nous eussions parle, that we might 


Que vous parlassiez 


that you J ~t,. 


Que vous eussiez parle, that you might 


g 


Qu'ils paiiassent, 


that they 1 g 

46 


Qu'ils eussent park-, that they might 


-5 



542 



SECOND CONJUGATION— IR. 



SECOND CONJUGATION— in IR. 



Infinitive Mood. 



Finir, 


PRESENT. 


to finish. \ Avoir fini, 
Participles. 


"past. 


to have finished. 


Finissant, 
Fini, 


PRESENT. 
PAST. 


finishing. \ 

Ayantfini, 
finished. \ 

Indicative Mood. 


past. 


having finished. 



PRESENT. 

Je finis, I finish. 

Tu finis, thoufinishest. 

II finit, he finishes. 

Nous finissons, we finish. 

Vous finissez, you finish. 

Us finissent, they finish. 

IMPERFECT. 

Je finissais, I was finishing . 

Tu finissais, thou wast finishing. 

II finissait, he was finishing. 

Nous finissions, we were finishing. 

Vous finissiez, you were finishing. 

lis finissaient, they were finishing. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je finis, I finished. 

Tu finis, thou finis hedst. 

II finit, he finished. 

Nous finimes, we finished. 

Vous finites, you finished. 

lis finirent, they finished. 

FUTURE. 

Je finirai, I shall finish. 

Tu finiras, thou shalt finish. 

II finira, he shall finish. 

Nous finirons, we shall finish. 

Vous finirez, you shall finish. 

Us finiront, they shall finish. 

CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 

Je finirais, I should finish. J'aurais fini, 

Tu finirais, thou shouldst finish. Tu aurais fini, 

II finirait, he should finish. II aurait fini, 

Nous finirions, we should finish. Nous aurions fini, 

Vous finiriez, you should finish. Vous auriez fini, 

lis finiraient, they should finish. lis auraient fini, 

Imperative Mood. 
Finis, finish (thou.) 

Finissons, let us finish. 

Finissez, finish (you.) 

Subjunctive Mood. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

J'ai fini, I have finished. 

Tu as fini, thou hast finished. 

II a fini, he has finished. 

Nous avons fini, we have finished. 

Vous avez fini, you have finished. 

lis ont fini, they have finished. 

PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais fini, I had finished. 

Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished. 

II avait fini, he had finished. 

Nous avions fini, we hadfinished. 

Vous aviez fini, you hadfinished. 



lis avaient fini, they hadfinished. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

J'eus fini, I had finished. 

Tu eus fini, thou hadst finished. 

II eut fini, he hadfinished. 

Nous eiimes fini, we hadfinished. 

Vous eutes fini, you had finished. 

lis eurent fini, they hadfinished. 

PAST FUTURE. 

J'aurai fini, / shall have finished. 

Tu auras fini, thou shalt have finished. 

II aura fini, he shall have finished. 

Nous aurons fini, we shall have finished. 

Vous aurez fini, you shall have finished. 

lis auront fini, they shall have finished. 

CONDITIONAL PAST. 

I should] ^ 

thou shouldst « 

he should I g 

we should '«£ 

you should £ 

they should J j| 



PRESENT. 

Quejefinisse, that I may finish. 

Que tu finisses, that thou mayst finish. 

Qu'il finisse, that he may finish. 

Que nous finissions, that we may finish. 

Que vous finissiez, that you may finish. 

Qu'ils finissent, that they may finish. 

IMPERFECT. 

Quejefinisse, that I might finish. 

Que tu finisses, that thou mights t finish. 
Qu'il finit, that he might finish. 

Que nous finissions, that we might finish. 
Que vous finissiez, that you might finish. 
Qu'ils finissent, that they might finish. 



PRETERIT 

Que j'aie fini, that I may ' 

Que tu aies fini, that thou mayst 

Qu'il ait fini, that he may 

Que nous ayons fini, that we may 

Que vous ayez fini, that you may 

Qu'ils aient fini, that they may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse fini, that I might 

Que tu eusses fini, that thou mightst 
Qu'il eut fini, that he might 

Que nous eussions fini, that we might 
Que vous eussiez fini, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent fini, that they might 



THIRD CONJUGATION OIR. 



543 



THIRD CONJUGATION— in OIR. 
Infinitive Mood. 



Recevoir, 

Recevant, 
Recu, 



to receive. | Avoir recu, 
Participles. 



PBESENT. 
PAST. 



receiving. 

received. 
Indicative Mood. 



Ayant recu, 



to have received. 



having received. 



Fe recois, 
ru recois, 
II recoit, 
Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
JOs recoivent, 



Je recevais, 
Tu recevais, 
H recevait, 
Nous recevions, 
Vous receviez, 
lis recevaient, 



IMPERFECT. 



/ receive. 

thou receivest. 

he receives. 

we receive. 

you receive. 

they receive. 



I was receiving. 

thou wast receiving. 

he was receiving. 

we were receiving. 

you were receiving. 

they were receiving. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

J'ai recu, I have 

Tu as recu, thou hast 

II a recu, he has 

Nous avons recu, we have 

Vous avez recu, you have 

lis ont recu, * they have 

PLUPERFECT. 



J'avais recu, 
Tu avais recu, 
II avait recu, 
Nous av ions recu, 
Vous aviez recu, 
lis avaient recu, 



I had 

thou hadst 

he had 

we had 

you had 

they had 



Je recus, 
Tu recus, 
II recut, 
Nous recumes, 
Vous recu tea, 
lis recurent, 

] 
Je recevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 
Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
Us recevront, 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recevrais, 
II recevrait, 
Nous recevrions, 
Vous recevriez, 
Ite recevraient, 



/ received. J'eus recu, / had 

thou receivedst. Tu eus recu, thou hadst 

he received. II eut recu, he had 

we received. Nous eufnes recu, we had 

you received. Vous eutes recu, you had 

they received. lis eurent recu, they had 

E. PAST FUTURE. 

/ shall receive. J'aurai recu, / shall have 

thou shalt receive. Tu auras recu, thou shalt have 

he shall receive. H aura recu, he shaU have 

we shall receive. Nous aurons recu, we shall have 

you shall receive. Vous aurez recu, you shall have 

they shall receive. lis auront recu, they shall have 

CONDITIONAL PAST. 

I should receive. J'aurais recu, I should have 

thou shouldst receive. Tu aurais recu, thou shouldst have 

he should receive. rj aurait recu, he should have 

we should receive. Nous auriorls recu, tee should have 

you should receive. Vous auriez recu, you should have 

they should receive. Us auraient re^u, they should have 

Imperative Mood. 
Recois, receive (thou.) 

Recevons, let us receive. 

Rec«vez, receive {you.) 

Subjunctive Mood. 



CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 



received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 

received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 

received 
received 
received 
received 
received 
received 

received 
received 
received 
received 
received 
received 

received, 
received 
received 
received 
received, 
received. 



PRESENT. 

Que je recoive, that J may receive. 

Que tu recoives, that thou mayst receive. 
Qu'il recoive, that he may receive. 

Que nous recevions, that we may receive. 
Que vous receviez, that you may receive. 
Qu'ils recoivent, that they may receive. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je recusse, that I) c 

Que tu recusses, that thou "g 

Qu'il reCHt, that he \ 8 

Que nous recussions, that we ( t 

Que vous recusaiez, that you I "^ 



Qu'ils recussent, 



that they J 



I 



PRETERIT. 

Quej'aie recu. that I may) ">j 

Que tu aies recu, that thou mayst 

Qu'il ait recu, * that he may 

Que nous ayons recu, that we may 

Que vous ayez recu. that you may 

Qu'ils aient recu,* that they may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse recu, that I might \ "§ 

Que tu eusses recu. that thou mightst | •§ 
Qu'il eut recu, * that he might ! S 

Que nous eussionsrecu, that me. might ( *• 
Que vous eussiez recu, that you might •£ 
Qu'ils eussent recu, * that they might) % 



544 



FOURTH CONJUGATION RE. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION— in RE. 
Infinitive Mood. 



Vendre, 

Vendant, 
Vendu, 



to sell. | Avoir vendu, 
Participles. 



Je vends, 
Tu vends, 
II vend, 
Nous vendons, 
Vous vendez, 
lis vendent, 

Je vendais, 
Tu vendais, 
II vendait, 
Nous vendions, 
Vous vendiez, 
lis vendaient, 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



PRESENT. 



sold. 



Ayant vendu, 



to have sold* 



having- sold. 



Indicative Mood. 



I sell. 

thou sellest. 

he sells. 

we sell. 

you sell. 

they sell. 

imperfect. 

/ was selling-. 

thou wast selling. 

he was selling. 

we were selling. 

you were selling. 

they were selling. 



preterit definite. 



Je vendis, 
Tu vendis, 
U vendit, 
Nous vendimes, 
Vous vendites, 
lis vendirent, 

] 
Je vendrai, 
Tu vendras, 
II vendra, 
Nous vendrons, 
Vous vendrez, 
Us vendront, 



/ sold. 

thou soldest. 

he sold. 

we sold. 

you sold. 

they sold. 

I shall sell. 

thou shalt sell. 

he shall sell. 

we shall sell. 

you shall sell. 

they shall sell. 



conditional present. 



Je vendrais, 
Tu vendrais, 
II vendrait, 
Nous vendrions, 
Vous vendriez, 
lis vendraient, 



/ should sell. \ 

thou shouldst sell. 

he should sell. 

we slwuld sell. 

you should sell. 

they should sell. 

Imperativ 
Vends, 
Vendons, 
Vendez, 

SUBJUNCTI 



Que je vende, 
Que tu vendes, 
Qu'il vende, 
Que nous vendions, 
Que vous vendiez, 
Qu'il s vendent, 



PRESENT. 



that I may sell. 

that thou mayst sell. 

that he may sell. 

that we may sell. 

that you may sell. 

that they may sell. 



imperfect. 

Que je vendisse, that I might sell. 

Que tu vendisses, that thou mightst sell. 
Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. 

Que nous vendissions, that we might sell. 
Que vous vendissiez, that you might sell. 
Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell. 



preterit indefinite. 

J'ai vendu, / have sold. 

Tu as vendu, thou hast sold. 

11 a vendu, he has sold. 

Nous avons vendu, we have sold. 

Vous avez vendu, you have sold. 

lis ont vendu, they have sold. 

pluperfect. 

J'avais vendu, / had sold. 

Tu avais vendu, thou hadst sold. 

II avait vendu, he had sold. 

Nous avions vendu, we had sold. 

Vous aviez vendu, you had sold. 

lis avaient vendu, they had sold. 

preterit anterior. 

J'eus vendu, I had sold. 

Tu eus vendu, thou hadst sold. 

II eut vendu, he had sold. 

Nous eumes vendu, we had sold. 

Vous eutes vendu, you had sold. 

Us eurent vendu, they had sold. 

PAST FUTURE. 

J'aurai vendu, / shall have 

Tu auras vendu, thou shalt have 

II aura vendu, he shall have 

Nous aurons vendu, we shall have 
Vous aurez vendu. 
Us auront vendu, 

CONDITIONAL PAST. 

J'aurais vendu, / should have 

Tu aurais vendu, thou shouldst have 
II aurait vendu, he should have 

Nous aurions vendu, we should have 
Vous auriez vendu, 
lis auraient vendu, 

e Mood. 
sell {thou.) 
let us sell, 
sell (you.) 

ve Mood. 

preterit. 
Que j'aie vendu, that I may 

Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst 
Qu'il ait vendu, that he may 

Que nous ayons vendu, that we -may 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that I might 

Que tu eusses vendu, that thou mightst 
Qu'il eut vendu, that he might 

Que nouseussions vendu, that we might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might 



you shall have 
they shall have 



you should have 
they should have 



sold, 
sold, 
sold, 
sold, 
sold. 



sold, 
sold, 
sold, 
sold, 
sold, 
sold. 



u 



REFLECTED VERB. 



545 



CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTED VERB. 

Infinitive Mood. 



Se lever, 

Se levant, 
Leve, 



to rise. | S'etre leve. 
Participles. 



present, 
past. 



rising. 



S'etant leve, 



to have risen* 



having risen. 



PRESENT. 

Je me leve, 
Tu te leves, 
II se leve, 
Nous nous levons, 
Vous vous levez, 
Us se levent, 



Je me levais, 
Tu te levais, 
n se levait, 
Nous nous levions, 
Vous vous leviez, 
lis se levaient, 



MPERFECT. 

/ was rising. 

thou wast rising. 

he was rising. 

we were rising. 

you were rising. 

they were rising. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE, 



Indicative Mood. 

preterit indefinite. 

I rise, Je me suis leve, I have risen, 

thou riseet. Tu t'es leve, thou hast risen. 

he rises. II s'est leve, he has risen. 

we rise. Nous nous sommes leves, we have risen. 

you rise. Vous vous etes leves, you have risen. 

they rise, i lis se sont leves, they have risen. 

PLUPERFECT. 

i Je m'etais leve, / had risen. 

Tu t'etais leve, thou hadst risen. 

' II s'etait leve, he had risen. 

Nous nous etions leves, we had risen. 

Vous vous etiez leves, you had risen. 

j lis s'etaient leves, they had risen. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

Je me fus leve, / had risen. 

Tu te fus leve, thou hadst risen. 

II se fut leve, he had risen. 

Nous nous fumes leves, we had risen. 

Vous vous Rites leves, you had risen. 

lis se furent leves, they had risen. 

PAST FUTURE. 

Je me serai leve, / shall have risen, 

thou shalt have risen. 
II se sera leve, he shall have risen. 

Nous nous serons leves, we shall have risen. 
Vous vous serez leves, you shall have risen. 
lis se seront leves, they shall have risen, 

CONDITIONAL PAST. 

Je me leverais, I should rise, j Je me serais leve, I should) . 

Tu te leverais, thou shouldst rise, j Tu te serais leve, thou shouldst I 

II se leverait, he should rise, j II se serait leve, he should { -~ 

Nous nous leverions, we should rise, j Nous nous serions leves, we should f ^ 

Vous vous leveriez, you should rise. Vous vous seriez leves, you should § 

lis se leveraient, they should rise. I lis se seraient leves, they should J "** 

Imperative Mood. 

Leve-toi, rise (thou.) 

Levons-nous, let us rise. 

Levez-vous, rise {you.) 

Subjunctive Mood. 



Je me levai, 

Tu te levas, 

II se leva, 

Nous nous levames, 

Vous vous levates, 

lis se leve rent, 

futi 
Je me leverai, 
Tu te leveras, 
Ilselevera, 
Nous nous leverons, 
Vous vous leverez, 
lis se leveront, 



i" rose. 

thou rosest. 

he rose. 

we rose. 

you rose. 

they rose. 

I shall rise. 

thou shalt rise. \ Tu te seras leve, 

he shall rise. 

we shall rise. 

you shall rise. 

they shall rise. 



CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 



PRESENT. 

Que je me leve, that I may rise. 

Que tu te leves, that thou mayst rise. 

Qu'il se leve, that he may rise. 

Que nous nous levions, that we may rise. 
Que vous vous leviez, that you may rise. 
O^ils se levent, that they may rise. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je me levasse, that I) 

Que tu te levasses, that thou | 

Qu'il se levat, that he \ t 

Que nous nous levassions, that we (<z 

Que vous vous levassiez, that you 

Qu'ils se levassent, that theyj 



5 



PRETERIT. 

Que je me sois leve, that I) 

Que tu te sois leve, that thou 

Qu'il sesoit leve, that he 

Qi*j nous nous soyons leves, thut ice 
Que vous vous Boyez leves, that you 
Qu'ils se soient leves, that they _ 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que je me fusee leve, that J ) 

Que tu te fusses leve, that thou j 

Qu'il se fut leve, that he { 

Que nous nous fussions lev£s, that we ( 
Que vous vous fussiez leves, that you \ 
Qu'ils se fussent leves, that they J 



3-3 



46* 



546 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



PRESENT OF THE 

INFINITIVE. 



Aller, to go. 

Envoyer, to send. 



IRREGULAR 



PRIMITIVE TENSES. 



PARTICIPLE 
PRESENT. 



PARTICIFLE 
PAST 



PRESENT 

OF THE 

INDICATIVE. 



PRETERIT 
DEFINITE. 



FIRST 



Allant. 


Alle. 


Je vais. 


J'allai. 


Envoyant. 


Envoye. 


J'envoie. 


J'envoyai. 
SECOND 



Acquerir, to acquire. 



Acquerant. Acquis. 



J'acquiers J'acquis. 



Bouillir, 
Courir, 


to boil, 
to run. 


Bouillant. 
Courant. 


Bouilli. 
Couru. 


Je bous. 
Je cours. 


Je bouillis. 
Je courus. 


Cueillir, 

Dormir, 

Faillir, 

Fuir, 

Mentir, 


to gather. 
to sleep, 
to fail, 
to flee. 
to lie. 


Cueillant. 

Dormant. 

Faillant. 

Fuyant. 

Mentant. 


Cueilli. 

Dormi. 

Failli. 

Fui. 

Menti. 


Je cueille. 
Je dors. 
Je faux. 
Je fuis. 
Je mens. 


Je cueillis. 
Je dormis. 
Je faillis. 
Je fuis. 
Je mentis. 


Mourir, 


to die. 


Mourant. 


Mort. 


Je meurs. 


Je mourus. 


Offrir, 

Ouvrir, 

Partir, 

Sentii*, 

Sortir, 


to offer. 
to open, 
to set out. 
to feel, 
to go out. 


Offrant. 

Ouvrant. 

Partant. 

Sentant. 

Sortant. 


Offert. 

Ouvert. 

Parti. 

Senti. 

Sorti. 


J'offre. 
J'ouvre. 
Je pars. 
Je sens. 

Je sors. 


J'offris. 
J'ouvris, 
Je partis. 
Je sentis. 
Je sortis. 


Tenir, 


to hold. 


Tenant. 


Tenu. 


Je tiens. 


Je tins. 


Tressaillir, 


to start. 


Tressaillant. 


Tressailli. 


Je tressaille. 


Je tressaillis. 


Venir, 


to come. 


Venant. 


Venu. 


Je viers. 


Je vins. 


Vetir, 


to clothe. 


Vetant. 


Vetu. 


Je vets. 


Je vetis. 

THIRD 


Falloir, 


to be necessary. 




Faliu. 


11 faut. 


11 fallut. 


Mouvoir, 


to move. 


Mouvant. 


Mu. 


Je Meus. 


Je mus. 


PI eu voir, 
Pourvoir, 


to rain, 
to provide. 


Pleuvant. 
Pour voy ant. 


Plu. 
Pourvu. 


11 pleut. 
Je pourvois. 


11 plut. 
Je pounris 



Pouvoir, to be able. 
Prevaloir, to prevail. 
S'asseoir, to sit down. 



Pouvant. Pu. 
Prevalant. Prevalu. 
S'asseyant. Assis. 



Je peux or je Je pus. 
puis. 

Je prevaux. Je prevalua. 
Je m'assieds. Je m'assis. 



Savoir, 



to know. 



Sachant. 



Su. 



Je sais. 



Je sua. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 547 

VERBS. 

DERIVED TENSES. 

Note. — Persons regularly formed are in Italics. 

CONJUGATION. 

£ Pres. indicative. Je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, vous allez, Us vont. — Fut. J'irai, 
< tu iras, etc. — Cond. J'irais, tu irais, etc. — Imper. Va, allons, allez. — Pres. subj. Que 
( j'aille, que tu ailles, qu'il aille, que nous allions, que vous alliez, qu'ils aillent. 

Fut. J'enverrai, tu enverras, etc. — Cond. J'enverrais, tu enverrais, etc. 

CONJUGATION. 

{Pres. ind. J'acquiers, tu acquiers, il acquiert, nous acquerons, vous acquerez, ils ac- 
quierent. — Fut. J'acqueiTai, tu acquerras, etc. — Cond. J'acquerrais, tu acquerrais, etc. 
— Pres. subj. Que j'acquiere, que tu acquieres, qu'il acquiere, que nous acquerions, que 
vous acqueriez, qu'ils acquierent. 

Fut. Je courrai, tu courras, etc. — Cond. Je courrais, tu courrais, etc. 

Fut. Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, etc. — Cond. Je cueillerais, tu cueillerais, etc. 



C Fut. Je mourrai, tu mourras, etc. — Cond. Je mourrais, tu mourrais, etc. — Pres. subj. 
< Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous mourions, que vous mouriez, qu'ila 
( meurent. 



C Pres. ind. Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, nous tenons* vous tenez, ils tiennent. — Fut. Je 
< tiendrai, tu tiendras, etc. — Cond. Je tiendrais, tu tiendrais, etc. — Pres. subj. Que je 
( tieime, que .tu tiennes, qu'il tienne, que nous tenions, que vous teniez, qu'ils tiennent. 

Fut. Je tressaillerai, etc. — Cond. Je tressaillerais, etc. 
( Pres. ind. Je viens, tu viens, il vient, nous venons, vous venez, ils viennent. — Fut. 
) Je viendrai, tu vieudras, etc. — Cond. Je viendrais, tu viendrais, etc. — Pres. subj. Que 
] je vienne, que tu viennes, qu'il vienne, que nous verticils, que vous veniez, qu'ils 
I viennent. 



CONJUGATION. 

Fut. II faudra — Cond. II faudrait.— Pres. subj. Qu'il faille, (no participle present.) 

C Pres. ind. Je meus* tu mens, il meut, nous mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuvent. — 
< Pres. subj. Que je meuve, que tu meuves, qu'il meuve, que nous mouvions, que vous 
( mouvisz, qu'ils meuvent. 

C Pres. ind. Jepeux or je puis, tupeux, il veuU nous pouvons, vous pouvez, il peuvent. 
| — Fut. Je pourrai, tu pourras, etc. — Cond. Je pourrais, tu pourrais, etc. — Pres. subj. 
I Que je puisse, que tu puisses, etc. 

Like valoir, except the pres. subj., which is regular. 



C Pres. ind. Je vfassieds, tu Vassieds, il s^assied, nous nous asseyons, vous vous at 

< seyezi ils s'asseicnt. — Fut. Je m'assierai, tu t'assicras, etc. They say also : Je m'aaseie- 
( rai, tu t'asseieras, etc. — Cond. Je m'assierais, tu t'assierais, etc.; or, je m'asseieraks etc 
c Pres. ind. Je sais, tu sais,il sait, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. — Imp. ind. Je 

< savais, tu savais, etc.— Fut. Je saurai, tu sauras, etc.— Cond. Je saurais, tu saurais, etc 
( —Imp. Sache, sachons, sachez. 



548 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



IRREGULAR 



PRIMITIVE TENSES. 



PRESENT OF THE I 


PARTICIPLE PARTICIPLE 


PRESENT 


PRETERIT. 


INFINITIVE. 


PRESENT. 


PAST. 


OF THE 


DEFINITE. 










INDICATIVE. 




Valoir, 


to be worth. 


Valant. 


Valu. 


Je vaux. 


Je valus. 


Voir, 


to see. 


Voyant. 


Vn. 


Je vois. 


Je vis, 


Vouloir, 


to be willing. 


Voulant. 


Voulu. 


Je veux. 


Je voulus. 
FOURTH 


Absoudre, 


to absolve. 


Absolvant. 


Absous. 


J'absous. 




Battre, 


to strike. 


Battant. 


Battu. 


Je bats. 


Je battis. 


Boire, 


to drink. 


Buvant. 


Bu. 


Je bois. 


Je bus. 


Braire, 


to bray. 






11 brait. 




Circoncire, 


to circumcise. 


Circoncisant, 


, Circoncis. 


Je circoncis, 


. Je circoncis. 


Clore, 


to shut. 




Clos. 


Je clos. 




Conclure, 


to conclude. 


Concluant. 


Conclu. 


Je conclus. 


Je conclus. 


Coudre, 


to sew. 


Cousant. 


Cousu. 


Je couds. 


Je cousis. 


Croire, 


to believe. 


Croyant. 


Cru. 


Je crois. 


Je crus. 


Croitre, 


to grow up. 


Croissant. 


Cm. 


Je crois. 


Je crus. 


Dire, 


to say. 


Disant. 


Dit. 


Je dis. 


Je dis. 


Eclore, 


to hatch. 




Eclos. 


11 eclot. 




Ecrire, 


to write. 


Ecrivant. 


Ecrit. 


J'ecris. 


J'ecrivis. 


Exclure, 


to exclude. 


Excluant. 


Exclu. 


J'exclus. 


J'exclus. 


Faire, 


to make* to do 


. Faisant. 


Fait. 


Je fais. 


Jefis. 


Joindre, 


to join. 


Joignant. 


Joint. 


Je joins. 


Jejoignis. 


Lire, 


to read. 


Lisant. 


Lu. 


Je lis. 


Je lus. 


Luire, 


to shine. 


Luisant. 


Lui. 


Je luis. 




Mettre, 


to put. 


Mettant. 


Mis. 


Je mets. 


Je mis. 


Moudre, 


to grind. 


Moulant. 


Monlu. 


Je mouds. 


Je moulus. 


Naitre, 


to be born. 


Naissant. 


Ne. 


Je nais. 


Je naquis. 


Nuire, 


to harm. 


Nuisant. 


Nui. 


Je nuis. 


Je nuisis. 


Prendre, 


to take. 


Prenant. 


Pris. 


Je prends. 


Je pris. 


Repondre, 


to answer. 


Repondant. 


Repondu. 


Je reponds. 


Je repondis. 


Resoudre, 


to resolve. 


Resolvant. 


Re sous, resolu. Je re sous. 


Je re solus. 


Rire, 


to laugh. 


Riant, 


Ri. 


Je ris. 


Je lis. 


Rompre, 


to break. 


Rompant. 


Rompu. 


Je romps. 


Je rompis. 


Suffire, 


to suffice. 


Suffisant. 


Suffi. 


Je suffis. 


Je suffis. 


Suivre, 


to follow. 


Suivant. 


Suivi. 


Je suis. 


Je suivis. 


Se taire, 


to be silent. 


Se taisant, 


Tu. 


Je me tais. 


Je me tus. 


Traire, 


to milk. 


Trayant. 


Trait. 


Je trais. 




Vaincre, 


to vanquish. 


Vainquant. 


Vaincu. 


Je vaincs. 


Je vainquis. 


Vivre, 


to live. 


Vivant. 


Vecu. 


Je vis. 


Je vecus. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 549 

VERBS. 

DERIVED TENSES. 

Note. — Persons regularly formed are in italics. 

C Pres. ind. Je vaux, tu vaux* il vaut, nous valons, vous valez, ils valent. — Fut. Je 
< raudrai, tu vaudras, etc. — Cond. Je vaudrais, tu vaudrais, etc. — No imper.—Pres. subj, 
( Que je vaille, que tu values, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent. 

Fut. Je verrai, tu verras, etc. — Cond. je verrais, tu verrais, etc. 

C Pres. ind. Je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voidez^ ils veulent. — Fut. Je 
! voudrai, tu voudras, etc. — Cond. Je voudrais, tu Youdrais, etc. — No imper. — Pres. subj. 
\ Que je veuille, que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que nous voulions^ que vous vouliez, qu'ils 
[ veuillent. 

CONJUGATION. 



C Pres. ind. Je bois* tu bois, il boit, nous buvons, vous buvez, ils boivent. — Pres. subj. 
< Que je boive, que tu boives, qu'il boive, que nous buvions, que vous buviez, qu'ils 
( boivent. 



SPres. ind. Je dis, tudis, il dit, nous disons, vous dites, Us disent. — Dedire, contre- 
dire, interdire,medire, predire, make vous dedisez, vous contredisez, vous medisez, vous 
predisez. Other persons and tenses like dire. 



iPres. ind. Je fais, tu fais, il fait, nous faisons, vous faites, ils font. — Fut. Je ferai, 
tu feras, etc.— Cond. Je ferais, tu ferais, etc. — Pres. subj. Que je fasse, que tu fasses, 
etc. 



C Pres. ind. Jeprends^ tu prends, il prend^ nous prenons, vous prencz, ils prennent.— 
1 Pres. subj. Que je prenne, que tu prennes, qu'il prenne, que nous prenions, que vous 
(prenicz, qu'ils prennent. 



Pres. ind. Je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc, nous vainquons, vous vainquez, ils vainqutmt. 



Compound verbs are conjugated in all moods and tenses like the verbs from whuh 
they are derived. Renvoyer, repartir, convaincre, promettre, &c, are conjugated like 
envoi/fr. partir, vaincre, mettrc, &.C. 

With the aid of these tables, and the rules given in § 144 and following, there is no 
French verb which the learner will not be able to conjugate with facility. 



KECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 



Du Style Epistolaire. 

Les lettres ont pour objet de communiquer ses pense*es et ses senti 
ments a des personnes absentes ; elles sont dictees par l'amitiE, la con- 
fiance, la politesse, ou l'interet. C'est une conversation par ecrit: 
aussi le ton des lettres ne doit differer de celui de la conversation ordi- 
naire, que parun peu plus de choix dans les objets, de correction dans 
le style, et une plus grande precision. Le naturel et l'aisance forment 
done le caractere essentiel du style Epistolaire ; la pretention a 1' esprit 
et l'affeterie y sont insupportables. 

La philosophic, la politique, les arts, les anecdotes, les bons-mots, 
tout peut entrer dans les lettres ; mais avec l'air d' abandon, d'aisance, 
et de premier mouvement qui distingue la conversation des gens 
d'tesprit. 

Puisqu'une lettre et sa reponse ne sont qu'une conversation entre 
absents, ecrivez, comme vous leur parleriez s'ils Etaient la, e'est-a-dire 
avec ce naturel, cette facilite, cet agrEment meme que demande un en- 
tretien familier. Quelle doit etre une conversation ? claire et simple ; 
ce sont-la aussi les deux qualites du style Epistolaire. 

DU CEREMONIAL DES LETTRES. 

Madame, Monsieur, Mademoiselle, se placent au-dessus de la premiere 
ligne d'une lettre lorsqu'on ecrit a quelqu'un que Ton veut traiter avec 
beaucoup d'egards ou de politesse. La distance se mesure ordinaire- 
ment sur le degre de respect qu'on lui porte. Dans les lettres plus 
familieres ces qualifications viennent dans la ligne apres les premiers 
mots: J'airecu, monsieur; je suis Men reconnaissant, madame ; permet- 
tez, mademoiselle, $c. 

Lorsque la personne est de*core*e d*un titre, d'une dignite, ou remplit 
une charge honorable, &c, il estd'usage de les rEpEter une ouplusieurs 
fois suivant l'Etendue de la lettre, monseigneur (en parlant a un eVeque, 
a un ministre, &c.,) monsieur le marechal, madame la duchesse, monsieur le 
president, §c. 

Dans les lettres d'affaires, d'Egal a Egal, entre amis, la date se place 
au haut de la page. La placer au bas est une marque de deference ou 
de respect. 

689 



552 RECUEIL EPISTOI.AIRE. 

Les lettres se terminent ordinairement par 1' expression (Tun senti- 
ment de respect, de reconnaissance, d'attachement, dont voici quelques 

exemples : 

Recevez, madame, avec bonte 1' assurance de mon respectueux attache- 
ment. 

Agreez, madame, Phommage de mon respect. 

Les sentimens que vous m'avez inspires, monsieur, sont aussi sinceres 
que durables. 

Comptez a jamais, monsieur, sur la reconnaissance et Tattachement de, 
&c. 

Mon tendre et respectueux attachement ne finira qu'avec ma vie. 

Adieu, je vous embrasse comme je vous aime, et c'est de tout mon cceur. 

Agreez, monsieur, I'hommage des sentiments distingues que je vous ai 
voues et que vous meritez si bien, &c. 

J'ai l'honneur d'etre, monsieur, avec un respect infini. 

Agreez, je vous prie, mademoiselle, mes sentiments les plus respectueux. 

J'ai l'honneur d'etre, monsieur, avec des sentiments remplis de respect et 
de consideration. 

Agreez, je vous prie, les assurances de la haute consideration avec la- 
quelle j'ai l'honneur d'etre, monsieur, &c. 

Les expressions ci-dessus sont suivies de la formule d'usage : 

Votre tres-humble et tres-obeissant, ou tres-devouee, ou tres-affec- 
tionne serviteur, &c, pour un homme. 

Votre tres-humble et tres-obeissante, ou tres-devoue'e, ou tres-affec- 
tionnee servante, &c, pour une femme. — La signature se place imme- 
diatement au-dessous. 

II est bon d' observer que le choix parmi ces locutions et beaucoup 
d'autres, que nous aurions pu egalement donner, depend, en ge*n6ral, 
de la nature des liaisons et des rapports entre les personnes qui 
s'Scrivent. 



LETTRES DE COMMERCE, &c. 

Les lettres des negociants et des marchands 1 doivent etre concises 
et claires. Dans les expressions des ordres et avis, on doit plutot 
observer beaucoup de circonspection et d'exactitude, qu'un langage 
eloquent et fleuri. Les ceremonies et les complimens en doivent 
etre bannis, ou du moins on doit s'en servir tres-peu; parce que 
dans les affaires de negoce, on ne doit envisager que l'utile: et, 
d'ailleurs, le n^gociant qui a besoin de son temps le doit manager, 
et l'employer avantageusement. 

Quand on a plusieurs sujets a traiter, il est bon de commencer une 



1 On appelle, en Francais, nigociants ceux qui ne font le commerce que pour les 
pays etrangers ; et l'on nomme marchands ceux qui ne trafiquent, soit en grog ou 6D 
detail, que dans l'endroit ou ils resident. 



RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 553 

nouvelle ligne a chaque changement de matiere : car cet usage est 
tres-commode pour les personnes a qui on ecrit. 

Un negociant qui ecrit dans les pays etrangers doit etre tres-reserve* 
sur les nouvelles, et particulierement celles d'etat, dans ses lettres ; 
de peur de s'attirer de mauvaises affaires, et de faire, dans les pays 
despotiques, arreter ou ses lettres ou ses correspondants. 

Un correspondant ou facteur, qui recoit une lettre, doit etre fort 
exact a repondre clairement, article par article, a tout ce qu'elle con- 
tient, de crainte de prejudicier son commerce, en y omettant quelques 
particularites, ou en y laissant la moindre ambiguite. 

D\lti jeune Marchand a un Marchand en Gros. 
Monsieur: — Sur la recommandation d'un voisin, qui s'est beaucoup 
etendu sur votre reputation, je crois devoir, en entrant dans le commerce, 
m'adresser a. vous, pour vous prier de m'envoyer une certaine quantite de 
marchandises convenables a un jeune homme qui commence, de la pre- 
miere qualite et aux prix les plus raisonnables : ce que je me crois d^autant 
plus fonde a esperer, que mon intention est qu'a l'avenir toutes les affaire? 
que nous ferons soient au comptant. Je suis, monsieur, &c. 

Meponse du Marchand en Gros. 

Monsieur : — En reponse a l'honneur de la votre du 6 du courant, je vous 
enverrai par un roulier qui part demain une petite partie des articles que je 
tiens, que je vous commets comrae un e'chantillon de leur qualite et de la 
moderation de leur prix. S'il vous plaisait de renouveler votre commande, 
je ferais tout cequ'il dependrait de moi pour me montrer digne de votre 
bienveillance. Je suis, en fesant des vgbux sinceres pour vos succes, votre 
reconnaissant serviteur. 

Pour annoncer Varrivee de Marchandises, 
Messieurs :— Nous venons de recevoir l'avis de l'arrivee de vos deux bal- 
lots dans cette douane. Nous allons les retirer, et par le prochain courrier 
nous vous en dirons notre sentiment ; et meme, si la qualite de la marchan- 
dise est bonne, ainsi que nous l'esperons, nous pourrons vous envoyer le 
compte de vente. Nous n'avons rien autre chose a vous dire pour le 
present. 

Nous sommes vos tres-humbles et tres-obeissants serviteurs. 

Pour donner avis de la vente de Marchandises. 
Messieurs : — Votre ballot, numero cinq, est deja vendu, et nous aurions 
place l'autre qui nous reste, plus avantageusement, si nous avions voulu 
accorder trois rnois de terme pour le payement : mais nous n'avons pas 
juge a propos de le faire sans votre participation. Vous recevrez ci-inclus 
le compte de vente, montant a mUie francs, dont nous vous avons credites, 
pour vous en faire remise par nos premieres. Le prix que nous en avons 
tire est assez avantageux pour le temps : il nous donne lieu d'esperer que 
vous serez satisfaits de ce premier essai, et que vous nous continuerez 
l'honneur de vos ordres. Nous sommes tres-parfaitement vos, &c. 
46 



554 RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 

D^un Commis d son Negotiant. 

Monsieur : — Presumant que la prolongation de votre sejour a la cam- 
pagne est occasionneeparquelque afiaire imprevue, je crois de mon devoir 
de m'informer de votre sante, et en merae temps de vous assurer que Ton 
donne ici a vos affaires de commerce toute 1' attention et tout le soin qu'elles 
exigent. Si done votre absence peut vous procurer quelque avantage, 
soyez sur que vous pouvez la prolonger sans danger, quoiqu'au surplus 
votre retour soit ardemment desire par votre fidele serviteur. 

Heponse du Negotiant a son Commis. 
Monsieur : — Vous avez conjecture juste ; des evenements inattendus ont 
retarde mon depart d'ici : mais je suis convaincu de votre fidelite et de votre 
vigilance. Je suis, graces a Dieu, en bonne sante, et j'espere me mettre 
bientot en route pour revenir en ville. Votre, &c. 

Wun Negotiant a un autre pour prendre des Informations sur un Commis. 

Monsieur : — Mr. L. m'a fait la demande d'une place qui se trouve vacante 
dans ma maison. II me parait honnete ; mais l'apparence n'etant pas une 
caution suffisante, je prends la liberte de vous demander franchement votre 
opinion sur sa probite et sur ses talens. II m'a dit avoir ete employe quel- 
que temps dans votre maison, et je desirerais savoir particulierement pour- 
quoi vous vous etes quittes. Comme il doit venir la semaine prochaine, si 
vous me faites reponse avant ce temps vous obligerez infiniment votre tres- 
humble serviteur. 

Reponse. 

Monsieur : — La personne dont vous me parlez dans votre lettre est rdelle- 
ment digne et de votre confiance et de votre bienveillance. II travaillait 
sous moi lorsque j'etais associe avec Mr. F. ; mais cette societe dissoute, 
j'ai 6te oblige de reformer plusieurs commis, pour diminuer mes depenses, 
et nous avons tous deux eprouve le plus grand regret de cette separation. 

Je suis votre tres-humble serviteur. 

De Credit, 1 pour un Stranger. 

Mr. P , a Paris. 

A Boston, 10 Avril, 1849. 

Monsieur : — Vous recevrez celle-ci des mains de Monsieur T. Nelton, 
Americain, que ses parents font voyager dans divers etats do 1' Europe. Je 
vous prie de le munir de lettres de recommandation sur differences places 
de France, d'Allemagne, et d'ltalie. Son dessein etant de se rendre d'ici 
en droiture dans votre ville, j'ai cru ne pouvoir mieux faire que de vous 
le recommander, d'autant que e'est une personne aussi distinguee par sa 
naissance que par son merite personnel : ayez done la bonte de lui faire tout 
Taccueil qui dependra de vous, pendant le sejour qu'il doit faire dans votre 

l Lcs lettres qu'un banquier ou negociant donne a quelqu'un pour recevoir de 
i'argent de ses correspondants, en des lieux eloignes, s'appellent 'ustres de credit. 
Quoique ces lettres soient diffvirentes des lettres de change, elles ont a-peu-pres les 
memes privileges. 



RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 555 

ville, et de lui rendre tous les services possibles. Vous lui fournirez sur 
ses doubles recus tout 1' argent dont il pourra avoir besoin jusqu'a la concur- 
rence de dix mille francs, dont vous pourrez vous rembourser sur moi, en 
me faisant passer un de ces regus. J'ai l'honneur d'etre, avec la plus par- 
faite estime, Monsieur, votre, &c. 

Confirmation de la precedente. 

Mr. P , a Paris. 

A Boston, le 10 Avril, 1849. 

Monsieur : — Ce qui precede est la copie d'une lettre de credit qui vous 
sera remise par Monsieur T. Nelton, Americain. Comme je desire obliger 
sa famille avec qui je suis en liaison ; et pour qui j'ai accepte, avec plaisir, 
l'occasion de lui etre utile, en lui fournissant quelques lettres de cre'dit et 
de recommandation sur differentes places, je vous supplie tres-instam- 
ment d'avoir egard a celle que je lui ai donnee sur vous, et de lui procurer 
tous les amusements qui pourront lui rendre le sejour de Paris agreable. 
Vous lui fournirez, s'il vous plait, pour ses besoins, jusqu'a dix mille francs ; 
et vous en prendrez une double quittance, dont vous m'en enverrez une, et 
prendrez sur moi votre rembours des avances que vous lui aurez faites. Je 
joins ici sa signature, afin que vous puissiez la reconnaitre dans l'occasion, 
et vous guider en consequence. 1 Je me flatte que vous me saurez gre de 
vous avoir procure la connaissance d'un jeune homme d'esprit, et qui a recu 
une tres-belle education. J'ai l'honneur d'etre, 

Monsieur, votre, &c. 

Reponse. 

Mr. R , a Boston. 

A Paris, le 26 Juin, 1849. 

Monsieur : — J'ai recu l'honneur de la votre du 10 d' Avril dernier, qui 
me porte copie et confirmation d'une lettre de cre'dit et de recommandation 
que vous avez fournie a Monsieur T. Nelton, Ame'ricain, qui doit passer 
par Paris. Je me ferai un vrai plaisir de lui rendre tous les services qui de- 
pendront de moi, n'ayant rien tant a cceur que de vous temoigner par des 
preuves reelles combien je fais cas de tout ce qui me peut venir de votre 
part ; et je vous prie d'etre persuade de mon exactitude dans les debourse- 
ments que je lui ferai, et de la parfaite estime, avec laquelle j'ai l'honneur 
de me dire tres-veritablement, Monsieur, votre, &c. 

Reponse d la lettre de Credit inseree ci-dessus. 

Mr. R. , a. Boston. 

A Paris, le 4 Aoiit, 1849. 

Monsieur : — Votre lettre du 10 d' Avril me fut remise hier par Monsieur 
T. Nelton, qui etait entre le jour d'avant dans notre ville. J'eus le plaisir 
de l'avoir a diner chez moi le meme jour, et d'apprendre par moi-meme 

l II est de li prudence d'envoyer, par la poste, la signature de lapersonne qui est 
chargee de la lettre de credit, et meme de designer sa figure ; et cela pour eviter 
qu'en cas de vol ou de perte, quelqu'un ne se presente en sa place. 



556 RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 

que vous ne m'avez fait qu'une legere peinture de son merite, qui, a ce que 
j'en puis juger, va au-delade tout ce qu'on en peut dire. Soyez persuade* 
que ce sera avec le plus grand plaisir du monde que je m'empresseraide lui 
etre utile, et de lui rendre tous les service? qui seront en mon pouvoir, pen- 
dant son sejour dans cette ville. J'ai l'honneur deme dire, avec une par- 
faite affection, 

Monsieur, votre, &c. 



DES BILLETS. 

Ils supposent une sorte de familiarite entre ceux qui se les envoient. 
On en ecrit aussi a ses inferieurs; on n'en recoit point d'eux. Ils 
different d'une lettre en ce qu'ils n' exigent aucun ceremonial, qu'ils 
sont plus courts, qu'ils ne portent qu'un simple nom pour adresse, 
que, jusqu'a la maniere tortillee ou bizarre de les plier, ils bravent 
toute etiquette, qu'enfin ils ne s'emploient guere que pour faire une 
invitation, accompagner un petit present, annoncer un e^enement de 
societe, se donner meme une simple marque de souvenir, et tenir lieu 
d'une visite. 

Lorsqu'un mot agreable ou ingenieux se place naturellement dans 
un billet, il y ajoute quel que prix. 

" Les affaires et les ennuis continuent a me tourmenter. Je vous 
attends a diner aujourd'hui ; venez jeter quelques fleurs sur ma vie." 

Voltaire invita l'auteur de V 'Art d' 'Aimer a souper chez Madame du 
Chatelet par ce quatrain si connu : 

Au nom du Pinde et de Cythere 
Gentil Bernard est averti, 
Que Part d'aimer doit samedi 
Venir souper chez Part de plaire. 

On ecrit communement les billets en se servant de la troisieme per- 
sonne, et sous ce rapport, ils demandent beaucoup d' attention pour ne 
pas etre anrphibologiques. Par exemple : M. A * * * prie Mr. B * * * 
de vouloir bien diner chez lui. Chez qui ? II y a evidemment ici une 
equivoque au moins grammaticale. Madame D*** previent Madame 
#*** qiCelle a aujourd'hui sa loge a V Opera. A laquelle des deux se 
rapportent ces pronoms elle et sa? 

II est facile d'imaginer d'autres manieres de tourner sans amphibo- 
logie ces billets qu'on nomme du matin. Par exemple : Madame de 
M*** aura samedi au soir, un ou deux violons et quelques danseurs ; 
elle s'estimerait heureuse, si Madame et Mademoiselle de L~ :( " x ~*, 
venaient embellir sa petite fete ainsi qu'elle a l'honneur de les en 
prier. 



RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 557 

Madame M*** a aujourd'hui sa loge aux Frangais. J Le plaisir du spec- 
tacle sera double pour elle si elle peut avoir l'avantage d'en jouir avec Ma- 
dame le P*** ? a qui elle orTre une ou meme deux places. 

M. de *** serait bien aimable s'ilpouvait aujourd'hui venir diner chez M. 
L., qui Ten prie avec instance et lui dit mille choses honnetes. 

Madame S*** envoie savoir des nouvelles de la migraine de Mademoi- 
selle P***, a qui elle fait les plus tendres compliments. Elle espere quo 
cette indisposition n'aura pas de suites, et que la deesse de la sante ne vou- 
dra pas se brouiller avec les graces. 

Les billets suivants et leurs responses relatives aux circonstances les 
plus ordinaires de la society, peuvent servir de modeles en ce genre. 

Lu?idi, d une heure. 

Mr. de Cimar presente ses plus sinceres compliments a Mile, de Bourdic, 
et lui demande la permission de l'accompagner a l'assemblee demain soir, 

Reponse. 

Lundi, trois heures. 

Mile, de B. fait mille remerciments a Mr. de C. pour son offre obligeante. 
qu'elle est tres-fachee de ne pouvoir accepter, etant elle-meme deja enga- 



Lundi, dix heures du matin. 
Mme. Deshayes fait ses respectueux complimens a Mme. Maillard, et 
I'engage a lui faire l'honneur de venir ce soir prendre le the. 

Reponse. 

Onze heures du matin. 
Mme. M. fait ces compliments a Mme. D.; elle se fait un plaisir d'accep- 
ter son aimable invitation. 

, Mardi, a midi. 

Mille compliments de la part de Mme. de Beauharnais a Mme. de Ste. 
Amaranthe et a ses jeunes demoiselles: elle espere qu'elles sont arrivees 
sans accident a la maison, et parfaitement remises des fatigues de la der- 
niere soiree. 

Reponse. 

Mardi, a deux heures. 

Mme. et Miles, de Ste. A. sont sensibles a l'interet que leur temoigne 
Mme. de B. ; elles sont arrivees saines et sauves, et se portent toutes bien, 
a 1' exception de Josephine, qui a attrape un petit rhume. 

Mereredt. 
Mille compliments de Mme. de Segur a Mile, le Compte : elle la prie de 
lui accorder le plaisir de sa societe a diner Dimanche prochain. On se 
mettra a table a cinq heures. 

i Nom du principal theatre de Paris. 
46* 



558 RECUEIL EPISTOLAIRE. 

Seponse. 

Mille compliments de Mile, le C; elle ne manquera pas de se rendre a 
l'invitation de Mme. de S. 

Lundi, 4 Novembre, 1849. 
Devant donner une lecture, Jeudi prochain a 8 heures du soir, dans mon 
grand salon d'etude, sur la litterature Francaise, je prends la liberie de vous 
envoyer un billet d'admission pour vous et votre aimable famille. Je tache- 
rai de ne pas etre ennuyeux. 

Mar di matin , 5 Nov., 1849. 
Nous acceptons avec reconnaissance l'invitation a votre lecture sur la lit- 
terature Frangaise. C'est un sujet pour nous si attrayant que je vous defie 
d'etre ennuyeux. J'y menerai un ou deux amis. 



LETTRES DE CHANGE. 

Bon pour 1000 francs. 
A Londres, le 4 Decembre, 1849. 

Monsieur : — A vue il vous plaira payer, par cette premiere de change, a 

Monsieur R , la somme de mille francs, pour valeur regue de lui, et pas- 

serez en compte, comme par avis de 

Votre tres-humble serviteur, C . 

Monsieur D , Negociant a Bordeaux. 

Tour en donner Avis. 
A Londres, ce 4 Decembre, 1849. 

Monsieur: — Je vous ai tire ce jourd'hui mille francs, payables a vue a 

Monsieur R , pour valeur regue de lui. Je vous prie d'y faire honneur, 

et de m'en donner debit, dans mon compte ; ce qu'esperant de votre ponc- 
tualite, je suis, Monsieur, votre, &c. 

A Boston, ce 18 Nov., 1849. 

Monsieur : — A huit jours de vue, il vous plaira payer, par cette seule 

lettre de change, a Monsieur N , ou a son ordre, la somme de deux 

cents piastres, pour valeur regue de lui en marchandises, que vous passerez 
en compte, comme par avis de 

Votre tres-humble serviteur, D-— . 

Bon pour 200 piastres. 

A Monsieur E , Negociant, a Charleston. 

Bordereau. 
Mr. Frederic Douille, 

Doit a Jean Marot, 
1849. 5 Sept. — Pour une paire de bottes, cuir fin, . . f36. 
Pour acquit, Jean Marot. 



INDEX. 



A. 

A, § 12, 163—5, to, at, in, § 163, 

13; used before the name of a city, 
(338,) with, 

A cote ie, § 163—10, by, by the 
side of. 

A la, a l', au, aux, § 8, to the. 

A laquelle, § 79, to whom, 
which . 

A le, a les, § 12 ; what they mean. 
N. v 2, (p. 463.) 

A la mienne, § 104, to mine. (See 
AuMien.) 

A moins que . . . ne, § 164 — 2, un- 
less. 

A MOI, A TOI, LUI, ELLE, &C, 

§63, to me, thee, him, her, &c. ; 
possessive, § 106, mine, thine, &c. 

A qui, § 79, to whom ; for persons 
only. 

A, an, §1,3, un, une. (See Ar- 
ticles, p. 462.) Never used before 
cent, a hundred ; long-temps, a long 
time ; mille, a thousand ; beaucoup, 
a great many. 

A few, some, §3, des, quelques ; 
never omitted in French. 

A great many, §6, beaucoup. 

A hundred, §6, cent. 

A long time, § 6, long-temps. 

A thousand, §6, mille. 

Abide, (to,) by, §64, s 1 en tenir a. 

Able, (to be,) pouvoir, 92, 175; 
tire en etat, etre d mime de, 378. 

About, 189, environ. 

Above, up stairs, en haut. 

Accents : e (mute) changed to e 
grave) in certain verbs, § 144 — 4. 



Accents: e {acute) to grave in 
others, § 144 — 5. 

According to, selon ; according 
to circumstances, selon les circon- 
stances ; that is, according to circum- 
stances, it depends, c 'est selon, 317. 

Accourir, §64, to run to, up. 

Accustom, (to,) accoutumer. To 
be accustomed to a thing, etre accou- 
tume d quelque chose, 370. 

Ache, (the,) lemal ; the earache, 
le mal d'oreille; the heartache, le 
mal de cceur, &c, 291. 

Acquainted (to be) with, connai- 
tre ; been acquainted with, connu ; 
to become acquainted with some- 
body, to make some one's acquaint- 
ance, faire connaissance de, (avec,) 
quelqu'un ; I have become acquaint- 
ed with him or her, fai fait sa con- 
naissance, 329 ; to be thoroughly ac- 
quainted with a thing, ttre au fait 
d'une chose ; to make one's self 
thoroughly acquainted with a thing, 
se mettre aufait d'une chose, 342. 

Adieu, adieu, farewell, God be 
with you, good-by. Au plaisir de 
vous revoir, {au revoir,) till I see you 
again, I hope to see you again soon, 
384. 

Adjectives : agree with their noun 
in number, 107 ; in gender, 466, 284. 
Feminine adjectives, 284 ; their for- 
mation from masculine adjectives, 
286, 287. Adjectives that have no 
plural for the masculine gender, 491. 
Comparison of adjectives, 490, 491. 
Adjectives that are irregular in the 
formation of their comparatives and 



560 



INDEX. 



superlatives, 144. Adjectives sub- 
stantively used, 402. Place of the 
adjective with regard to the substan- 
tive, 132. The adjective which in 
English follows how, stands in French 
after the verb, 335. 2d partitive ar- 
ticle before adj., ,de,)§26. 1st par- 
titive, if adj. is after the noun, §27, 
28. Two adject, qualifying the same 
noun, do not take two articles, § 18 ; 
have a plur. and agree with the noun, 
§ 137 — 4 ; end in e mute in the femin. 
— 5 ; when they require a masc. plur. 
— 6 ; — 8 ; when a fern. — 7 ; such a 
man, — 9; — 10; formation of femin. 
and plur. of irreg. adj., p. 490, 491 ;) 
their place, § 129—1—2—3. 

Adresser (s') d, §64, to apply to. 

Adverbs, § 161. Adverbes; of place, 
88, 193, 200 ; quality and manner, 
26, 140, 180; of number, 165, 363; 
of time, 90, 107, 108, 110, 189; 
comparative, 66, 77, 78, 137; com- 
parison of, 145 ; irregularly formed, 
147. Their places, §161, 2, 3, 4 ; 
how much, too much, &c. ; adverb 
in French, adjective in English, 4. 
How formed from adjectives, 5. 6, 7. 

Afford (to' : , avoir les moyens, 327. 

After, (Rule 1, N. 1,) 460, apres ; 
after them (§ 63, > apres eux. 

Afterwards, ensuite, 88. 

Agree, (to\ to a thing, convenirde 
quelque chose, 276 ; consentir a, 354. 

Again, anew), de nouveau, 344. 

Aimers, to like to, &c, 114; aimer 
mieux, to like better, to prefer, 263. 

Ainsi, thus or so, 152 ; ainsi que, 
as, as well as, 331. 

Aise, bien aise de, glad, 317; etre 
a so?i aise, to be comfortable, well 
off, at one's ease ; etre mal a son 
aise, etre gene, to be uncomfortable, 
395. 

Alight, (toJ from one's horse, to 
dismount, descendre de cheval, 270; 
de voiture, 303. 

All, every, tout, tous, toute, toutes, 
110; all at once, all of a sudden, &c. ; 



tout a coup, tout a la fois, soudaine 
ment, 287; all that which, all which, 
all, § 91. Never omitted in French, 
tout ce qui, ce que. 

Aller, to go, 84 ; alle, gone, 165; 
present tense, 88 to 96; ete, past 
participle of etre, with the auxiliary 
avoir used for alle, past participle of 
aller, which is always connected 
with etre as auxiliary, 160 ; aller en 
voiture a cheval, a pied, 214 ; aller, 
to travel to a place, 213 ; aller bien, 
to fit, to go right, 239. Aller and 
venir, followed by infinitive, 374. 
S'en aller, to go away, 219, 242, 243. 

Almost, presque, 180. 

Alone, by one's self, seul, e, 367. 

Along, le long du, de la, &c, 378. 

Aloud, haut, d haute voix, 264. 

Already, dejd, 152. 

Always, toujours, 142. 

Amuse, .to,) one's self, (to enjoy, 
to divert, s'amuser a, 217. 

An, annee, year, their difference, 
289, N. 3. 

Anecdotes : Witty answer of a 
young prince, 411. The French lan- 
guage, 412. A shopkeeper's answer, 
411. The Emperor Charles V., 442. 
The entrance of a king into a town, 

442. The last request of an old man, 

443. The three questions, 444. An- 
swer of a lazy young man, 445. 
Hearing counsel, 445. Noble answer 
of a lady, 445. Cornelia, 447. Po- 
liteness, 450. Mildness, 447. The 
contest of art, 451. Zeuxis, 451. The 
corporal of Frederick the Great, 451. 
Marshal de Turenne, 451. An affect- 
ing narrative, 451. Interesting nar- 
rative, 453. 

Angry (to be) with somebody, etre 
fdche contre quelqu 'un ; about some- 
thing, de quelque chose, 319. 

Any, some, (before a noun,! du, 
de la, des, 55, 281 ; before an adjec- 
tive, de, 57, 281. See Some. § 62, en. 

Anybody, somebody, any one, 
some one, quelqu 1 un, 39. 



INDEX. 



561 



Anything, something, quelque 
chose, 28 ; good, de bon, 28. 

Appear, to,) to look like, avoir 
Vair, la mine ; she looks angry, ap- 
pears to be angry, elle a Vair fdche, 
332. 

Apply, (to,) §64, s'adresser d. 

Apres, § 63, after ; always fol- 
lowed by the infinitives avoir or etre. 

Are you hungry, 28 ; thirsty, 28 ; 
sleepy, 29. 

Articles, 461. Their distinction ; 
general obs., 463 ; difference in the 
use of the article in French and 
English, § 2, 5 ; Indefinite, from 
§ 3 to 7 ; when the definite le, la, les, 
is used for the English indefinite, § 7. 
Definite, §8; their functions, § 14; 
placed before every noun, &c, § 15 ; 
before proper names of countries, 
§ 16 ; not of individuals, § 17 ; when 
two or more adjectives qualify the 
same noun, do not repeat the article, 
§ 18 ; 1st Partitive, before nouns, 
§ 19 to 25 ; 2d Partitive, before an 
adjective or after a negation, § 26 to 
28; Possessive, my, thy, &c, §29, 
31 ; Demonstrative, this, that, 
these, those, Ce, cet, cette, ces. 

As far as, jusqu' a, a la, d V , qu'au, 
aux, § 13. 

As much ... as many ... as, § 138 
— 1, autant de . . . que de . . . 

As . . . as, § 138 — 1 ; aussi . . . que. 

Assez de, § 137—2, enough ; § 161 
—4. 

At, to, in, § 163 — 5, d, 7 ; chez ; d, 
before a city, 13 ; en, before a country. 

Au, § 8 ; aux, a la, &c, to the. 

Au mien, d la mienne, aux miens, 
aux miennes, § 104 ; to mine. 

Au milieu d'eux, §63, in the midst 
of them. 

Aucun, aucune, none, not any, 
§162. 

Auparavant, § 163 — 9 ; before. 

Autant de ..., &c. See As much. 

Auquel, §79; to whom, which, 
auxquels, auxquelles , § 125. 



Autre, d'autres, § 28. 

Auxiliary. Verbs which in Eng- 
lish generally take to have for their 
auxiliary, while in French they take 
etre, § 158—3. 

Avant, before, takes de before the 
infinitive, 142 ; pas avant, not until, 
310. 

Avec, with, § 63. 

Avoir, to have ; eu, had, 160, 162, 
Obs. 75. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. 
When speaking of dimension we use 
in French avoir when the English 
use to be, 338. 

Il y a, there is, there are, 180, 238, 
246, 247, 248, 338. 11 y a cannot be 
rendered into English by there is, 
there are, when it is used in reply to 
the question, How long is it since ? 
246 ; nor when it is used in reply to 
the question, How far ? Quelle dis- 
tance ? 252. 

AvoiE, mal, to ache, to feel a pain, 
284. 

Awake, (to,) reveiller, se reveiller, 
269. 

B. 

Be, (to,) etre ; been, ete, N. 2, 3, 
157 l Obs. 74, 160; to be at home, 
etre d la maison, 84; to be in the 
country, etre d la campagne, 289. 

To Be, is rendered by devoir, when 
it expresses obligation, 185. 

To Be, translated by avoir. Are 

you hungry? Avez-vous /aim ? I 

am thirsty, fai soif, 28: avez-vous 

sommeil ? sleepy, 29 ; chaud, froid, 

peur, warm, cold, afraid, 31. What 

is the matter? Qu' avez-vous ? 34. 

Am I afraid, ashamed? Ai-je peur ? 

i honte ? 45. Am I right, wrong ? Ai- 

\je raison? tort 1 ? 36. How old are 

I you ? Quel age avez-vous ? 180. How 

I high is his house ? Combien sa maison 

a-t-elle de haut ou de hauteur ? It is 

nearly fifty feet high , elle a environ 

cinquante pieds de haut, 338. 

i To Be under obligations to some 



562 



INDEX. 



one, avoir des obligations d quel- 
qu'un, 336. My feet are cold, fai 
froid aux pieds ; her hands are cold, 
elle a froid aux mains, 110. 

To Be in want of, avoir besoin de, 
112. 

To Be, translated by se porter, 
275. 

To Be, translated by faiee. Is it 
windy ? Fait-xl du vent ? It is 
stormy, ilfait de Vorage. Is it foggy ? 
Fait-il du brouillard? 208, 215, 301. 
(See Weather, Warm, Cold, Dark, 
&c.) Is it good travelling ? Fait-il 
bon voyager ? 213, 227, 228. 

Be, (to,) followed by a present par- 
ticiple, is translated by etre with d 
and an infinitive; I am reading, je 
suis d lire, § 156 — 7. 

Beau, bel, fine, handsome ; how 
these two words must be employed, 
192, 287. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. 

Beaucoup de, much, many, a 
good deal of, very much, 65, 147, 
376. Dir. 7—459, § 137—2. Never 
say un beaucoup, a great many. 

Because, parce que, N. 1, 80, 187. 

Become, (to,) devenir* What has 
become of him? Qu'est-il devenu? 
225. What will become of him ? 
Que deviendra-t-il ? 242. What has 
become of your aunt? Qu' est deve- 
nue votre tante? 316. To become 
ridiculous, tomber dans le ridicule, 
388. 

Before, avant de. Do you speak 
before you listen ? Parlez-vous avant 
d'ecouter ? 142. Before, devant,Obs. 
65, 250. The day before, la veille ; 
the day before Sunday, la veille de 
dimanche, 340. Avant, devant, au- 
paravant, their difference, § 163 — 9. 

Beg, (to,) prier de, 304. To beg 
some one's pardon, demander pa'-don 
a quelqu" 1 un, 383. 

Behave, (to,) se comporter, 270, 
393. 

Believe, (to,) croire,* 149 175. 
(See Crotre.*) 



Below, or down stairs, en has, 
193. 

Besides, outre; besides that, ou* 
tre cela ; besides, (moreover,) en 
outre, 378. 

Better — than, mieux~ quede,263. 
To be better, valoir mieux, 199. 13 
it better ? Vaut-il mieux ? 270. 

Between, entre, 329. 

Bien, well, 140, 147, 319. Bien, 
well, a great deal, a great many, is 
always followed by the partitive ar- 
ticle, but beaucoup is followed by the 
preposition de, 376. 

Bientot, soon, shortly, 185 ; soon, 
very soon, 259. 

Blow, (a,) un coup, 244. 

Blow, (to,) to blow out, souffler, 
342; to blowout one's brains, bru- 
ler la cervelle d quelqu'un; he has 
blown out his brains, il s 1 est brule la 
cervelle, 368. 

Board, (to,) with any one or any- 
where, etre en pension, se mettre en 
pension, 385. 

Boarding-house, (a,) a boarding- 
school, une pension; to keep a board- 
ing-house, tenir* pension, 385. 

Boast, (to,) to brag, sefaire valoir, 
428. 

Boire,* to drink ; bu, drunk, 172. 

Bon, good, 26, 284 ; etre bon a quel- 
que chose, to be good for something. 
A quoi cela est-il bon ? Of what use 
is that? Cela n' est bon d rien. it is 
good for nothing, 251. Fait-il bon 
vivre d Paris ? Is it good living in 
Paris ? 213. 

Born, (to be,) itrene, nee ; where 
were you born ? Ou etes-vous ne, 
{nee?) 388. 

Bring, apporter, amener ; differ- 
ence between these two verbs, 303. 

Burst, (a,) un eclat. A burst of 
laughter, un eclat de rire ; to burst 
out, eclat er ; to burst out laughing, 
eclater de rire, f aire un eclat de rire, 
432. 

Business, <a piece of,^ an affair 



INDEX. 



563 



une affaire. To transact business, 
faire des affaires, 295. 

But, mais, 42. But, ae — que; I 
have but one friend ; je n'ai qu'un 
ami, 65. Nothing but, ne — que. He 
has nothing but enemies, il n'a que 
des ennemis, 225. 

But for, had it not been, were it 
not for, § 164 — 6, sans. 

Buy, (to,) acheter, 82,§144— 4; 173, 
N. 1. To buy, (to purchase,) faire 
emplette de or faire des emplettes, 
256. 

By, par, 212. By rendered by de, 
in the use of the passive voice, 212, 
250. By, aupres de ; to pass by a 
place, passer aupres d'un endroit ; 
by the side of, a cote de, 266. 

By myself, thyself, &c, §163 — 10. 
N. B. Seul, seuls, seule, seules. 



Qa, contraction of cela, that, the 
former, §38, N.5,6. 

Qi et la, here and there, about, 
367. 

Call, (to,) appeler, Obs. 78, 173. 
What do you call that in French ? 
Comment cela s'appelle-t-il en Fran- 
. gais ? 320. 

Cardinal numbers, § 137 — 4, used 
for dates and sovereigns, § 141. Note 
on 2, 3, &c, to 10; 20, 80, 100, &c. 

Carry, (to,) to take, porter, me- 
ner ; their distinction, 303. 

Cash, (for,) comptant ; to buy for 
cash, acheter comptant, 239. 

Cast (to) down, baisser ; to cast 
down one's eyes, baisser les yeux, 
352. 

Ce, 30; cet, 41; ces, 44; cette, 
283 ; this, that, these, those. Ceci, 
cela, celui-ci, celui-ld, §35. When 
they must not be used, (N. 6, p. 
469 ;) celui-ci, celui-ld, ceux-ci, ceux- 
U, §36, 41, 50, 286 ; -ci, -la, when 
omitted, 468. Celle-ci, celle-ld, cel- 
les-ci, &c. Henrietta's, Celle de H. ; 
celui de, celui que, &c, § 36. Ce que, 



what, or the thing which, 124, 
C est- a- dire, (savoir,) that is to say, 
(i. e.) 348. C est pourquoi, therefore, 
375. 

Ce, §38, he, she, it; when used 
instead of ?7, elle, Us, elles. 

Ceci, this ; cela, that, § 38, N. 5 : 
use ceci, cela, to translate the latter, 
the former, when they apply not to 
nouns, but to actions. Celui-ci, cel- 
le-ci, this one ; celui-ld, celle-ld, that 
one. Cet autre, that one ; celui qui, 
celle que, he, she, the one who, 
whom, &c. ; him, her, &c. Ceux- 
ci, celles-ci, these ; ceux-ld, celles-ld, 
those; ceuxqui, &c, they who, that, 
30, 48, 286, 207, ^86. Celui, celle, 
&c, have complements; lui, elle, 
have none, 470, N. 1, 2. 

Cedilla, (cedille,) its use, p. 502 
— 1. 

Cela, that, (meaning that thing,) 
119, 168. When the English pro- 
noun it relates to a preceding cir- 
cumstance, it is rendered by cela; 
when to a following, by il, 293. 

Celui du, de la, de V , des ; celle 
du, &c, § 104, that of, or the pos- 
sessive case — 's. 

Cent, a hundred, takes an s when 
plural and not followed by another 
numeral, 184. Never preceded by 
un except when followed by de; as, 
un cent d'huitres, 100 oysters, § 6, p. 
462. 

Cependant, however, 134. 
Ce qu'il y a, §87 — 4, relat., not 
inter., what is. 

Ce que, ce qui, § 89, what ; § 90, 
which. Ce pourquoi, § 92, what for, 
for what ; ce d quoi, dans quoi, avei 
quoi, &c, §93, 94. Ce que, ce qui % 
§120, what, that which. 
Ceux. (See Celui, &c.) 
Chacun, e, each one, 217, 470. 
Change, (to,) meaning to put on 
other things, changer. Do you change 
your hat ? Changez-vous de chapeau t 
272. 



564 



INDEX. 



Chaque, each; chaquehomme, each 
man, 217. 

Chez, 84, 363, § 163—7, at, in, to. 

Cinquieme, 1-5, §141, fifth. 

Cold, froid. It is cold, il fait froid, 
52, 207. To have a cold, elre en- 
rhume, 293. To catch a cold, pren- 
dre froid, s' 'enrhumer, 356. I have a 
cold,/ai un rhume de cerveau, 293. 
(See Be, translated by avoir.) 

Collectifs, >noms,)§14:0 — 10. (See 
Nouns.* 

Combien de ? 65, § 137—2, how 
much ? how many ? § 161 — 4. 

Come, (to,) venir, 175. iSee Ve- 
nir.) 

Comment! interj., §121, what ! 

Comparatives of equality, autant 
de . . . que de . . . , aussi . . . que, 
§ 138 — 1 ; of inequality, plus de . . . 
que de . . . , moins de . . . que de . . . , 
plus . . . que . . . , moins que. 

Comparison of adj. and adv., 144 ; 
irreg., 147. 

Compassion, compassion, 372. 

Complain, (to,) seplaindrede, 254. 

Compound form of the perfect, 
§ 145—2. 

Comprendre, to understand, 182. 

Comptant, for cash ; acheter comp- 
tant, to buy for cash, 239. 

Compter, no prepos.,) to intend, 
135 ; compter sur, to depend on, § 64. 

Conditionnel, 310, §148. (See 
Potential.) Compose, §149. (See 
Potential.) 

Conduct, (to,) conduire, 136 ; con- 
ducted, conduit, 175 ; one's self, se 
conduire, 270. 

Conjugations, conjugaisons, §144, 
1st, 2d, 3d, 4th. 

Conjunctions, conjonctions. (See 
at '79 1 ) a list of those that govern the 
eubj. ; all others govern the indicat.) 
A moins que, de crainte que, &c, 
require ne. Jusqu 1 d, jusqu 1 a ce que, 
their difference, § 164 — 1. When a 
conjunct, governs several verbs, — 2 ; 
when si, if, governs two verbs, — 3 ; 



que, that, not omitted in French; 
whether, si; whether, soit que, how 
used, —4 ; but for, were it not for, 
had it not been for, sans, — 5. Conj. 
With, preterit anterieur, 521. 

CoNHAiTRE, to be acquainted with, 
(to know,) 112, 140, 172, 329. 

Consent, (to,) consentir, 278. I 
consent to it, fy consens, 354. 

Consentir, to consent, 278, 354. 

Convenir, to suit, 237; de, to 
agree to, 273. 

Converse (to) with, s' 'entretenir 
avec, 429. 

Cote, a cote de, by, by the side of, 
266. De ce cote-ci, &c, this side, 
&c, 193. 

Countryman (what) are you ? de 
quel pays etes-vous ? 252, 318. 

Coup, (un,) a blow, a kick, a 
knock, a stab, a shot, a glance, a clap, 
a slap, 244. 

Craindre, to fear, to dread, &c, 
220, 260. 

Credit, (on,) a credit, 239. 

Croire, to believe, 144, 175; en 
Dieu, in God, 226. 

CroTtre, to grow, croissant, cru, 
354. 

Cueillir, to gather; du fruit, 
fruit, 346. 

Curtain, (the,) le rideau, la toile ; 
the curtain rises, falls, la toile se 
live, se baisse, 352. 

Cut, (to,) couper, 80; one's self, 
se couper, 217, 219, 254. 

D. 

Dans, en, 63, 105, 228, in, into ; 
§ 163—11—12. 

Dark, sombre, obscur. 208. It 
grows dark, il sefaittard, nuit, 352. 

Davantage, more, never precedes 
a noun, 198. 

De, (partitive,^ some or any, 57, 
284. Of, from, §8; de, betweer 
nouns, 27, 404 ; locutions that re- 
quire de before an infinitive, 80, 112, 
228 ; de qui, of, from whom , § 79. 



INDEX. 



865 



Deceive, (to,) tromper, 219. 

Defaire, to undo ; se defaire, to 
get rid of, 268. 

Defier, to distrust, $64. 

Deja. already, 152. 

Delay, Uo,) to tarry, tarder ; re- 
turn soon, ne tardez pas a revenir, 
394. 

Demeurer, to dwell, &c, takes 
avoir and etre as auxiliaries, 187, 
Jf. 1. 

Demi, e, half, moitie, §141, inva- 
riable before the noun, 90. 

De laqcjelle, duquel, &c, of 
which, § 79. 

Depend, (to, upon, compter sur, 
s' en rapporter a, § 64. 

Depit, yen; de, notwithstanding, 
364. 

Depuis, since, from, 342; depuis 
que, since ; depuis quand ? since what 
time ? When it requires ne before 
the verb, 248, Obs. 134. 

Des, some, any, §3; is never 
omitted, § 4 ; not the plur. of de, § 10. 

Des, from, since, 356; des que, as 
soon as, governs the preterit ante- 
rieur, 521. 

Desquels, desquels, &c.,of, from 
whom, which, §79. 

Descendre, to go, to come, down ; 
it takes avoir and etre, 303. 

Detruire, to destroy. 

Devant, avant, before, their dif- 
ference, 163. 

Devenir, to become, 225, 242, 
316. 

Devoir (see Duty, 115), to owe, 
80 ; are you to ? devez-vous ? 184, 
185. 

Dialogue between a master and 
his pupils, 435. 

Dte, mourir, 317. (See Mourir. 1 ) \ 

Dire, to tell, say; dit, said, 108, 
121, 170. 

Direct, (regime,) object, of a verb, 
§47. 

Direction 1. On short English 
answers. 457. 
47 



Dir, 2. Repetition of attending 
words, articles, pronouns, &c, 457. 

Dir. 3. On the obj. pron. lui, to 
him, to her ; leur, them, to them, 
458. 

Dir. 4. On obj. nouns. The pre 
pos. never understood. 

Dir. 5. Find an infinit. in a die 
tionary, and for.n the tenses by the 
rules, 459. 

Dir. 6. On simple and compound 
sentences. Conjunct, que, never 
omitted, 459. 

Dtr. 7. Much, many, enough, &c, 
adverbs in French requiring de as a 
link. 

Dir. 8. On the formation of inter- 
rogations, 459. 

Dir. 9. Formation of the parfait, 
460. 

Distrust, (to,) se defter de, §64. 

Do, (to,) to make, faire ; done, 
made, fait, 168. To do one's best, 
faire de son mieux, 249; — one's 
duty, son devoir, 348 ; — good to 
somebody, du bien a quelqu'un, 223, 
372. Shall you soon have done 
writing ? Aurez-vous bientot fini d J e- 
crire ? He has just done writing, 
il vient d'e'erire, 229, 232, 249. To 
do without, se passer de, 346. To do, 
translated by se porter, 275. 

Dont, of which, of whom, whose ; 
ce dont, that of which, 228. The 
past participle preceded by dont does 
not agree with it, 229. Always fol- 
lowed by the nominative of the next 
verb. 

Dormir, to sleep, 121. 

Dress, (to,) habiller, to undress ; 
deshabiller, 269, 338, 400. 

Drink, (to,) boire, 86, 121, 172, 
332 ; coffee, prendre le (du) cafe, 132. 

Drive, (toj to ride. See Aller, 
214. 

Dry, sec ; il fait sec, 208. 

Du, some, any. §3: when used, 463. 

Duquel. &c., of whom, &c, §79, 
86, 87, 126. 



566 



INDEX. 



Duty, devoir, 348. 
Dye, (to,) to color, teindre, (en 
noir,) 195. 

E. 

E (mute) changed to e (grave) § 144 
— 4 ; e (acute) to grave, § 144 — 5. 

Each, chaque, each one ; chacun, 
217, § 38. 

Each other, VunVautre,&c, 331. 

Early, de bonne heure, earlier, de 
meilleure heure, plus tot, 150. 

Ecrire, to write, ecrit, written, 
ecrivez, write, 89, 111, 121, 172. 

Elle, she, § 38. When ce must 
replace elle, N. 2; elle-meme, her- 
self, §4H, &c, oV elle, of, from her, 
-n, §47, 48— § 63. Elle requires no 
complement. Possessive, d elle, &c, 
€106. 

Et sb (what), quoi encore, otherwise, 
autrement, 113. 

En, some, any of it, of them, 59, 
61, 63, § 62. Yen, 87, 88. Its place 
with personal pronouns-, 96 ; of him, 
&c, en, 113. Past participle does 
not agree with en, 162, Obs. 76 ; from 
it, them, &c, 185, §47, 48; §50. 

En, in, at, to, 375, 407, before the 
name of a country. (§ 163 — 11 to 13.) 

Encore, still, yet, &c, some, any 
more, 73. 

Encrier, inkstand, 41 ; ecritoire, 
(fern in.) 

Endeavor, (to,) tdcher, 342. S' ef- 
forcer, 404. 

Enfuir (s'), to fly, run away, 253, 
262. 

Enlist, (to,) se /aire soldat, s'en- 
rdler, 226. 

Ennuyer (s'), to want amusement, 
376. 

Ensuitk, afterwards, 88. 

Entrer, (to,) dans, to go \n, come 
in, &c, 302. 

Entretenir, to keep, s' entretenir 
avec, to converse with, 429. 

feiciER, grocer, 36. 

Et, and, 35 ; 372, 374. 



jferEiNDRE, to extinguish, 175. 

Etre, to be ; ete, been, 84, 157, 
160. Ou en etions-nous ? where did 
we stop ? 383. Verbs that take etre 
as auxiliary, 530 ; past part, agrees 
with nomin., 530. C'esi, ce sont, it 
is, &c, 241, 327, 338, 348; etre 
followed by the preposition a and an 
infinitive, corresponds to the verb to 
be followed by a present participle, 
§ 156—7. (See Is it not ?) 

Event ail, fan, eventails, 45. 

Eyer, jamais, 157. 

Every, all, tout, toute, &c, 110, 
289, 219, 356. 

Eux, § 38, they ; more than they, 
73. 

Eux-memes, themselves, §41£; a 
eux, to them, §63, oV eux, deux, theirs, 
§106. 



Faire, to make, to do ; faisant, 
fait, 83, 131, 168; you had better, 
240 ; it is all over with me, 332 ; the 
soup will be warmed, 348 ; I cannot 
help it, 381 ; it grows dark, 352; to 
think much of one, 354 ; to do one' s 
best, 249. Fait, (si,) yes, 51, 06s. 26. 

Fall, (to,) tomber, 270. Baisser. 
The day, stocks fall, lejour baisse, le 
change baisse, 352. 

Falloir, to be necessary, must. 
All verbs expressing necessity, obli- 
gation, or want, are in French trans- 
lated by falloir, 197. 

Far, loin. How far ? Quelle dis- 
tance ? 252 ; far off, de loin, 317 ; from 
thee, de toi, §63. 

Farmer, fermier, 38. 

Fault, la faute. Whose fault is 
it ? A qui est la faute ? 381 ; to find 
fault with . . . trouver d redire d . . ., 
400. 

Favor, (a,) un plaisir. Faireun . . 
110. 

Fear, (to,) craindre, 220, 260. For 
fear of, de crainte (peur de, 356 ; d§ 
crainte(peur) que . . ne, 417, § 164 — 1. 



INDEX. 



567 



Feel, (to,) sentir, 278. 1\\ feel a 
pain, souffrir de, 334 ; sleepy, avoir 
envie de dormir, 220. 

Few, (a,) books, quelques livres ; a 
few (of them,) en . . quelques uns, 69. 

Fier (se) d, to trust to, § 64. 

Fifth, 1-5, cinquieme, §141. 

Fill, (to,) remplir, 302. 

Fire, (to,) tirer ; a gun, a pistol, 
un coup de fusil, de pistol et ; to some 
one, a sur quelqu'un, 244. 

First, 1st, premier, ler, 70; 
d'abord, 88. 

Firstly, \§\\y, premier ement,\ment, 
363, §161—7. 

Fit, (to,) aller lien, 239. (See 
Aller.) 

Fleurir, to blossom, is regular ; to 
nourish, irregular, 354. 

Fluently, couramme?it, 321. 

Fly, (to,) to run away, s'enfuir, 
253, 262. 

For, car, 107; during, pendant, 
186. For and at, when used to ex- 
press the price of a thing, not ren- 
dered in French, 276 ; rendered by de, 
276 ; by pour, for more bad luck, pour 
surcroit de malheur, 334. For what, 
what for, pourquoi, ce pourquoi, § 92. 

Former, celui-ld, § 36 ; cela, when 
applied to actions, 469, N. 5. 

Formerly, autrefois, 155. 

Fortnight, (a,) quinze jours ; a 
fortnight ago, il y a quinze jours, 247. 

Frighten, (to,) effrayer, s J effrayer; 
la moindre chose V effraie, 374. 

From, de, 252, 318 ; des, 356 ; de 
temps en temps, 356. From the, du, 
§8. 

Future, (1st,) futur, §146; its 
terminations. Not used after si, if, 
but the present is, — 3 ; used after 
quand, when, § 146 — 4 ; ce qui, ce 
que, aussitot que, &c, — 5 ; 2d fut., 
its formation, 299. 



Game, a,) une partie, at chess; 
d'echecs ; at billiards, de billard ; at 



cards, de cartes ; faire une partie 
de..., 342. 

Ge^er, (se,) to inconvenience one's 
self, 395. 

Gather, (to,) cueillir, 346. 

General, general, generaux, 46. 

Get, (te,) one's livelihood by, 
gagner sa vie a, 307; made, faire 
faire ; dyed, faire teindre, 177, 1 96 ; 
beaten, (whipped,) se faire battre ; 
paid, payer ; one's self invited to 
dinner, inviter a diner, 363 ; rid of 
something, se defaire de quelque 
chose ; of somebody, se debarrasser 
de quelqu'un, 268. 

Give, (to,) donner, 94 ; rise to 
difficulties, quarrels, suspicions, faire 
naitredes difficultes, des querelles, des 
soupgons, 406 ; up, renoncer a, § 64. 

Go, (to,) aller, 84, 165; there, y 
aller, 102, 165 ; round the house, 
autour de la maison, faire le tour, 
&c, 367; down, alight, descendre, 
303 ; on foot, aller a pied, 214 ; on a 
journey, faire un voyage, 295 ; to 
bed, aller se coucher, semettre au lit, 
222 ; to the country, a la campagne, 
289 ; to some one's house, chez quel- 
qu'un, 84; to see some one, voir 
quelqu'un, 332 ; a walking, seprome- 
ner, 222; to go away, s' 'en aller; 
vous en allez-vous ? 219, 242, 243 ; to 
go for, aller chercher, 105 ; go out, 
sortir, 110, 121, 150, 175; to be 
going to, aller, see it.) Are you 
coming ? Allez-vous venir? 90, N. 1. 
Je vais, used instead of je veux, 88, 
N. 1. 

Grocer, epicier, 36. 

Grow, (to,) croitre, 354. It grows 
dark, late, il sefait nuit, tard, 352. 

H. 

Habiller, to dress, 269. 
Had it not been, § 164, sa?ts. 
Hail, (to,) greler, 228. 
Hair, to hate, 213. 
Half demi, demie. (See Demi, 
§141.i 



568 



INDEX. 



Happen, (to,) arriver, takes itre, 
254. 

Hardly, a peine, 180. 

Haut, \en,) above, up stairs ; en 
has, below, down stairs, 193. 

Have, (to,) avoir, had, eu, 160 ; a 
cold, un rhume, 293 ; sore ftnger, 
mal au doigt, aux yeux, d Vceil, d la 
main, aux dents, d la tete, 126, 234; 
d la gorge, au cote, 295, 284. To 
have just, venir de, 249, § 145 — 3. 

Health, sante, 332. 

Hear, (to . . . of,) entendre parler 
de, 246 ; apprendre, 253. 

He, il, ce, lui; who, qui, that, que, 
§38. 

Her, son, sa, ses, 38, 44, 282,$ 31 ; 
la ; to her, lui, § 47, 48 ; herself, 
elle-meme, § 41£ ; it, (them,) to her, 
le, la, les lui ; -le-lui, -la-lui, -les- 
lui, §58; her there, Vy, §57, 58; 
her some, any, lui en, § 59 ; her any 
there, lui y en, § 60. To her, d elle, 
of, from her, d? elle, &c, §63; her- 
self, ^reflective,) se, s'y, §71; hers, 
le sien, la sienne, &c, § 104 ; d elle, 
§106. 

Here, id, (y,) 110. Here and 
there, 396. Here is, void, 312. 

Heure. (See Hour.) 

Him, lui, being the masculine of 
her, see the same paragraphs. 

Home, (at,) d la maison, 84. 

Hors de, out ; out of the city ; de- 
hors, out of doors, 301, 307. 

Hour, v the,) Vheure, at what 
o'clock, at one o'clock, at half past 
one, d une heure et demie, 90. At 9 
in the morning, in the evening, d neuf 
heures du matin, du soir., 185. Early, 
earlier, sooner, 150. To ask the 
hour, 110. 

How, how much, many, before an 
exclamation, que. How good you 
are ! que vous etes bon ! &c, 335. 
How far, juxquou, 193, 252. How 
long, comhien de temps, 246 ; since 
what time, depuis quand ? 248 ; 
jusqu'd quand, 189. How much, 



many, comhien de, 65. How many 
times, how often ? comhien de fois ? 
Once, une fois, deux fois, plusieurs 
fois, 165, § 137, 2 ; § 161—4. 

However, cependant, 134 ; quel- 
que . . .que, quel que . . . , quels que . . . , 
que, &c, 422, 516. 

Hundred, cent, 184. (See Cent.) 
Hurt, Uo,) somebody, faire du mal 
dquelqu'un, 223, 224; one's feel- 
ings, faire de la peine d quelqu'un, 
333. 

I. . 

I, je, f ', 25, 469. I who, that, mot 
qui, que, 470. 

Ici, (y,) here, 110. 

Idioms, after Index. 

If, si, 107; when it losei the t, 
372, § 146—3 ; when followed by 
the present tense, 233, Ohs. 105 ; by 
the imperfect, 507, N. 1 ; when it 
governs two verbs, 538, § 164 — 3. 

II, Us, he, it, they, §38; when 
replaced by ce, 469, N. 2. 

Immediately, tout de suite, sur le 
champ, 237. 

Impart, (to,) faire part de quelque 
chose d quelqu'un, 397. 

Imperative, imperatif, 509, § 150 ; 
its formation, 1 to 6 of § 150. Five 
irregular ones, — 7; regular ones, with 
objectives and negation, — 8. How 
to translate, Come and see me, &c, 
—12. 

Imperfect (the) of the Indicative, 
506, §147. Translated by French 
parfait and preterit. Its terminations, 
— 1; how formed, — 2; regular verbs, 
exceptions, — 3; when used, — 4; 
when it ends in iions, — 5; in yions, 
—6 ; used after si, 507, § 148—4 ; of 
the Potential, Conditionnel, its ter- 
minations ; its formation, 507. Could, 
would, how to translate them, 508 — 
4. I wish, when it is, je voudrais, 
— 5. Second Imperfect, Preterit, 
its terminations. 517, 518, § 153 ; re- 
gular and irregular verbs, list of the 



INDEX. 



569 



'alter ; use of the preterit, 519, 520 : 
of the subjunctive, its formation ; its 
terminations, 416, 517. Impersonal 
verbs govern the subjunctive, 515, 
§ 151—4. 

Improve, (to,) to profit, faire des 
pr ogres, 313. 

In, dans, 63, 105 ; in, dans, en, 
their difference, 375. In, translated 
by a, 242, 367, 289 ; by de, 338 ; by 
de, after a superlative ; c' est le plus 
beau pays de V Europe, 446. In this 
manner, de cette maniere, 180. In a 
short time, dans peu de temps, 375. 
In, at, to, by a, 535, § 163 — 5 ; not 
translated, 537 — 14. In the midst 
of . . ., au milieu de . . . , 476, § 63. 

Indefinite, (article,) never omitted 
in the plural ; when not used in the 
singular ; when replaced by the defi- 
nite, 462. 

Indicative, lndicatif. Present, 
500, §144; Imperfect, 507, §147; 
Second Imperfect, Preterit, 517, 
§153; Pluperfect, 520, §154; Se- 
cond Pluperfect, Preterit anterieur, 
§ 155 ; conjunctions after which it is 
used, 521, (see those tenses;) Fu- 
ture, 504; Second Future, 299. 

Indifferently, tant bien quemal, 
396. 

Indirect (regime) objective of a 
preposition, §43. 

Infinitive, 79 ; words which re- 
quire it, with the preposition de, 80. 

Infinitive, with its 4 terminations, 
79, 80; words requiring it with the 
preposition de, 80 ; governed by every 
preposition except en, 521, § 156 — 1 ; 
remark on apres, after, — Infinitive 
governed by another verb, — 2; im- 
portant remark on it ; different prepo- 
sition in F/nglish and French ; verbs 
that govern it without a preposition, 
—4 ; adj. and verbs that take a, — 5 ; 
those that take de, — 6. After d, 
the French infinitive translates the 
present participle coming after the 
verb to be, 399, 502, § 144—6. 
47* 



Inquire (to) after some one, de- 
mander quelqu'un; qui demandez- 
vous ? 204. 

Instantly, d V instant, sur le 
champ, (this instant,) 237. 

Instead of, au lieu de, 124. 

Instruire, to instruct, instruisant, 
instruit, 266. 

Introduce, (to,) presenter d, in- 
troduire a, 476, §64. 

It, le, V, 26; it, nomin., il, elle, 
ce, §38; it is, c'est, ce sont, 469, 
N. 2, 3 ; them, les, it, (to it, to them,) 
y, 101 ; it, them, (of, from,) en, §47, 
48, 50; it to me, before the verb, 
me le, la, &c, te le, la; le lui, la 
lui, &c, §57; after the verb, -Ze- 
moi, -la-moi, &c, §58; it to it, 
there, Vy, §57, 58; to it, of it, with 
it or with them, applying to things, 
are not translated after the verb, 
§ 63 ; it, (with reflective verbs,) 
fen, s' en, nous en, vous en, m 'en, 
478, § 73. 

Its, son, sa, ses. What is its in- 
finitive ? Quel en est Vinjinitif? 466, 
§31, N. 1. 



Jamais, ever ; ne . . .jamais, never, 
157. 

Je, I, and before a vowel or h 
mute,j', 25. 

Jest, (to,) plaisanter, badiner, vous 
vous moquez, you are jesting. He is 
no joker, il rf entend pas raillerie, 
381. 

Jeter, to throw, throw away, 173, 
06s. 73. 

John some, en ... a Jean, 476, 
§59. 

Jour, day, en pleinjour, in broad 
daylight, 407. 

Jour, journee, their difference 
283, N.2. 

Jouer, to play, takes de when an 
instrument, and a when a game is 
spoken of, 259; un tour, to play a 
trick, 400. 



570 



INDEX. 



Judge (to be a) of something, se 
connaitre en quelque chose, 351. 

Jusque, up to, as far as, 189, 193 ; 
jusqu'd ce que, until, 537, § 164. 

Just, (to have,) venir de. He has 
but just come, il ne fait que oVar- 
river, 249, 504, § 145—3. 

K. 

Keep, /to,) garder, 239 ; tenir, 
274. To keep warm, cool, clean, 
se tenir chaud, frais, propre, 365 ; 
one's self ready, pret, 274; on one's 
guard against one, en garde contre 
quelqu'un, 366 ; to maintain, entre- 
te?iir, 429 ; keep a boarding-school, 
house, tenir pension, 385. 

Kill, (to,) tuer, 92; to kill by- 
shooting, tuer d'un coup oVarme d 
feu, 367. 

Know, (to,) savoir, connaitre, 112, 
140, 172; how to swim, nager, 135. 
Difference of savoir and connaitre, 
329, N. 1. 

L. 

La, (article feminine,) the, 281, 463. 
La, (objective pronoun,) her, it, 281, 
472. La, (y,) there, 110. 

Laquelle, (relative,) which, 479, 
§82; (interrogative,) § 84. 

Last, dernier, ere, 71. 

Late, tard; too late, troptard, 110. 

Lately, the other day, V autre 
jour, dernier ement, 375. 

Latter, celui-ci, 468, §36; ceci, 
when applied to actions, 469, N.5. 
Former, celui-ld ; cela. 

Laugh, (to,) rire, 325. (See Rire.) 

Lay to) to one's charge, imputer a 
auelqiCun ; ne me Vimputezpas, 381. 

Le, the, V , before a vowel or silent 
h, 25, 463. 

Le, him, it, so, 168, 472; le lui, 
les lui, it, them to him ; -le-lui, -les- 
lui, 475. Le, relating to a noun, an 
adjective, or even a whole sentence, 
is rendered by so, and frequently 
omitted in English, 171, 173. 



League, (a,) une lieue ; to walk 
or travel a league, faire une lieue, 
295. 

Learn, (to,) apprendre, 127, 179; 
leFrangais, 129; by heart, par coeur, 
208. 

Left, to, on the left side or hand, 
a gauche, sur la gauche, 378. 

Left, (to have,) rester. When I 
have paid for the horse, I shall have 
only ten dollars left, quand faurai, 
&c. They have one louis left, il leur 
reste un louis, 300. 

Le mien, la mienne, &c, 484, 
§ 104 to 109 ; mine, used even after 
etre when ce is nominative, § 105. 

Lequel ? which one ? lesquels, 
35, 44, 230, 283, 488. 

Less, moins, the least, le moins, 
147 ; less, fewer, moins, 272. (See 
Moins.) 

Lest, for fear, de peur (crainte) 
que . . . ne, 537, § 164. 

Leur, s, their, 44, 282 ; le (la) leur, 
les leurs, theirs, 49, 291. When it 
must be translated by en . . . les, 466, 
N. 2. 

Leur, them, to them, for persons, 
282, 0&s.l28,472. Leur, (le, la, les,) 
it or them, to them, 475, §57. Leur 
en, them some, 476, § 59. Leur y en, 
some to them, there, §60. 

Level (on a) with, even with, d 
fleur de, 354. 

Lieu (au) de, instead of, 124 ; tenir 
lieu de, 404. 

Lighten, (to,) faire des eclaires, 
227. 

Like, (to,) aimer; I like fish, 
f aime le poisson ; to like, trouver ; 
how do you like that wine ? comment 
trouvez-vous ce vin ? I like it well, 
je le irouve Ion, 208. As you like, 
comme il vous plaira, 325. 

Like better, (to,) prefer, aimer 
mieux, 263, 264 ; to my liking, d 
mon gre, 385. 

Lire, to read, lisant, lu, lisez, 110, 
121, 148, 172. 



INDEX. 



571 



Little, small, petit, 47; little, 
peu, 147, peu de ; a little, un peu de, 
67; but or only a little, ne . . . guere 
de, 67 ; just a little, tant soipeu, 427. 

Live, (to,) demeurer, 187, N. 3. 

Long, (to,) tarder de ; I long to 
see my brother, il me tarde de voir 
mon frere, 394. 

Long, (so,) as, tant que, 401. How 
long ? combien, combien de temps ? 
246. How long since ? (since what 
time ?) depuis quand ? 248. How 
(ong ? jusqu'd quand? 189. 

Long-temps, (never un long- 
lemps,) a long time, 462, §6. 

Look, (to,) upon, donner sur ; the 
window looks upon the street, lafe- 
%etre donne sur la rue, 364. (See 
Appear.) To look pleased with 
somebody, faire bonne mine d quel- 
fu'un ; displeased with, mauvaise 
nine d, 332; — avoir V air ; to look 
^ad, avoir V air triste, 384. 

Lorsque, quand, when, 242; used 
with the preterit anterieur, 521. 
[Lorsque is never used to ask a 
question.) 

Lose, (to,) perdre, 182; one's wits, 
perdre la tete, 334; sight of ', perdre 
de vue, 389. 

LuiRE, to shine, glitter, luisant, 
lui, 228. 

M. 

Ma, my, mon, mes, 282, 466, §31. 

Mais, but, 42. 

Maison, d la,) home ; (see it.) 

Make, (to,) do, faire, faisant, 121 ; 
faites, 134; made, fait, 168. Faire 
present de quelque chose d quelqiCun, 
376. To make sick, rendre malade, 
293; one's self understood, se faire 
comprendre. 370; comfortable, se 
mettre d son aise, 395. To make 
entreaties, faire des instances, 396. 

Mal. bad ; worse, pire, the worst, 
le pire, 147 ; badly, 140 : wrong, 
bad, 319. (See Hurt.) 

Manage, (to,) to go about a thing, 



s'y prendre, 352; faire en sorte de, 
364. 

Many, (much,) beaucoup de, 65, 
not many, ne ... : guere de, n'en. . .: 
guere, 67, 459. 

Marcher, to march, walk, step, 
go, must not be mistaken for se pro- 
mener, 295. 

Matin, matinee, morning, their 
difference, 289. 

Me, me, m\ §47; moi, §48. It or 
them to me, me le, la, les, §57. Me 
to it there, m'y, §57; -y-moi, §58. 
Me some, m? en, 59. Me some there, 
m'y en, §60. Me, (to me,) d moi ; 
from me, demoi; near me, pres de 
moi, §63; me, (reflective,) myself, 
§ 71 ; m'en, myself of it, § 73. 

Mean, (to,) vouloir dire. What do 
you mean? que voulez-vous dire? 
399. 

Meddle (to) with a thing, se me- 
ter de quelque chose. De quoi vous 
melez-vous ? what are you meddling 
with ? 295. 

Mefier, (se,) de, to mistrust, 476, 
477, §64. 

Meme, mimes, self, selves ; moi- 
mime, myself; eux-mimes, elles-me- 
mes. themselves — even, (adv.,) 344, 
471. 

Mener, to take, to lead, not to be 
used for porter, 303. 

Mentir, to utter a falsehood, to 
lie, mentant, menti, ne mentez pas, 
226. 

Mettre, to put, put on ; mettant, 
mis, mettez, 149, 168; au net, to 
transcribe fairly, 356 ; d meme de, to 
enable, 378 ; se mettre d table, to sit 
down to a meal, 407 ; d quelque chose, 
to set about a thing, 340 ; d Vabri de 
to shelter one's self from, 356. 

Midst (in the) of them, au milieu 
d'elles, 476. 

Mieux, better, 147. De mon, ton, 
son, &c, mieux, in the best way I, 
thou, he, &c, can, 217, 249. (See 
Better.) 



572 



Might, how translated, 509, § 149. 

Mile, (a,) un mille. To walk or 
travel a mile, /aire un mille, 295. 

Milieu, (Ze,) the middle; au mi- 
lieu. (See Midst.) 

Mille, a thousand ; not un mille, 
462, § 6. 

Mien, (Ze,) Za mienne, &c, mine, 
30, 49, 291. 

Mine, Ze mien, la mienne, &a, 30, 
49, 291, 483, 484, §104 to 110. A 
brother of mine, 203, 484. 

Mistake, (to,) to be mistaken, se 
tromper, vous vous trompez, 219. 

Mistrust, (to,) se mefier de, se de- 
fer de, 477. 

Moi, I, §38; me, to me, §47; 
moi-meme, myself, § 4H ; moi qui, I 
who ; moi que, I whom, 470; a moi, 
de moi, always used after certain 
verbs, 476. A moi, mine, 484, § 106. 

Moins, less, serves to form the 
comparative and superlative of in- 
equality, 146. Moins de, less, fewer, 
(before a noun,) 78, 490, 492. When 
there is a comparison between two 
sentences, the verb which follows 
plus or moins, requires the negative 
ne. Cet homme a moins oV amis qu'il 
ne pense, 272. The less . . . the less, 
moins . . . moins, 492. 

Moitie, (la,) the half, 499 ; demi. 

Mon, ma, mes, my, 25, 44, 282, 
466. 

Monter, to go up, mount, ascend ; 
takes avoir and etre as auxiliaries, 
304, N. 1. 

Moonlight, clair de lune. It is 
moonlight, il fait clair de lune, 208. 

Month, (a,) un mois ; their names, 
499, § 143. 

More, plus ; more . . . than, (be- 
fore an objective, plus de . . . que de ; 
plus de (before a number ; phis que, 
(before a nominative,) 78. One more 
book, encore un livre ; a few books 
more, encore quelques livres, 73. 
More, plus; the most, Ze plus, 146. 
More, davantage, 198. The more . . . 



the less, plus . . . moins, 492, § 138 
—2. 

Mouchoir, (Ze,) the handkerchief, 
41. 

Motjrir, to die, (lose life,) mou- 
rant, mort. L'hommeest mort, safem* 
me ri* est pas morte, 317; d'une ma- 
ladie, of a disease, 323. 

Much, many, a good deal, very 
much, beaucoup de, (before a noun.) 
Much of it, en . . . beaucoup ; not 
much, ne . . .guere de, 65, 376, 490. 
Much more, encore beaucoup, beau- 
coup plus. So much, tant, 78, 210, 
293. Dir. 7, 459. 

Multitude, (nouns of.) (See 
Nouns, 496—10.) 

Must, falloir, (see it.) 11 being 
its only nominative, see 197, Obs. 90. 

My. (See Mon.) Myself, moi- 
meme, 471. Myself, (reflective,) me, 
m\ 478, §71; myself to it, m'y, 
% 72 ; myself of it, m' en, % 73. 

N. 

Name, nom ; proper names, noms 
propres, 496, 497, Names of the 
months, noms des mois, 499. What 
is your name ? Comment vous appe- 
lez-vous ? Je m'appelle Charles, 320. 

Native, (the,) I' homme ne dans le 
pays, 423. 

Ne, part of the French negative, 
532, 3 4, 5, § 162, an important sec- 
tion. Ne is used without pas, with 
the verbs cesser, to cease ; oeer, to 
dare ; pouvoir, savoir, to be abl.\ 
322. Ne . . . guere de, n' en . . . guer » 
ne . . . pas beaucoup de, ri en . . . pc 
beaucoup ; ne . . . que peu de, but li* 
tie, only a little, not much, &^., 6? 
Ne . . . ni, neither, ni, nor ; Je n't. 
ni celui-ci ni celui-ld, 32. Ne . . 
mille part, nowhere, not anywhere 
89. Ne . . . pas, ne . . . point, not, 28 
Ne . . .pas encore, not yet, 152. IV* 
. . . plus, no longer, no more, not any 
more, 74, 187. Ne . . . plus guere 
de . . , (n'en . . . plus guere ) not 



INDEX. 



573 



much, many, more, 74. Ne . . . que, 
only, but, Je rCai qu'un ami, je rC en 
ax qu'un, 65 ; ne . . . que, nothing but, 
225. Ne . . . rien, nothing, not any- 
thing, 28, requires de before an ad- 
jective, 29, Obs. 7. When the verb 
is understood, use rien without ne, 
left out with the verb, 34. Ne, when 
used without pas, in comparison of 
inequality, 492, § 138—3 ; when not 
used, § 138 — 4; and when implied, 
503, § 145 — 1. It is used when the 
negation is implied, 503, § 145 — 1; 
248, Obs. 114. (See Negations.) 

Near, pres de ; near me, pres de 
moi, 124; near six, pres de six, 180 ; 
near going, pres dialler, 260. 

Nearly, pres de, 180 ; therea- 
bouts, a peu pres, 404. 

Negations, negations, 532, 3, 4, 
5, § 162 ; its formation, 1 ; place of 
ne and its complement, 2, 3, 4, 5 ; 
when nominative, — 6 ; with the in- 
finitive mood, — 7 ; when the verb is 
omitted, — 8. Neither, nonplus, — 9. 
List of negations and examples for, 
6 ; 4 ; 5 , 6 ; 7 ; 8 and 9. 

Neither . . . nor, ne . . . ni . . . ni 
. . . , 32. Ni Vun ni V autre ; ni les 
uns ni les autres, % 162. I, neither, 
moi non plus, § 162 — 9. 

Neuf, nouveau, nouvel, new. Their 
difference, 191, N. 1. 

Neuter Verbs, verbes neutres, 
529, § 158 ; what they are, and how 
formed, — 1 ; take etre and avoir, 
— 2. Verbs that take etre, — 3. 

Never, ne. . .jamais, 157, 533. 

New, neuf, nouveau, {nouvel, be- 
fore a vowel or h mute, 191,) N. 1. 

Nier, to deny, takes ne before 
subjunctive, § 516 — 8. 

No, not any, ne...pas de, 55. 
None, not any, ne . . . aucun, pas un. 
No one, nobody, ne . . . personne, 422. 
Nobody, not anybody, (nominative,) 
personne ne ; nul ne, &lc, 39. No 
'onger, ne . . .plus, 187. No sooner, 
pas plutof, 521. 



Not, ne . . .pas, ne . . .point, 377, 
378. Not any more, no more, ne . . . 
plus de. Not much more, ne . . . 
plus guere de, 74. Not quite, pas 
tout a fait, 180. Not until, pas 
avant, 310. Not yet, ne . . . pas en- 
core, 152. Not so much . . . as, ne . . . 
pas tant de . . . que de. Not so . . . 
as, ne . . . pas si . . . que, 492, § 138 
— 1. 

Noms, nouns, names. Les noms 
des mois, of the months, 499. (See 
Name.) 

Nominative, nominatif: 1st class, 
with the verb ; 2d, separated from 
it, 468, § 38. Nominative frequently 
left out in English ; not in French, 
470. N.B., 480, §87—1. 

Nothing, ne . . . rien, (objective,) 
422, 533; rien ne, (nominative,) 535. 
Rien de bon, 29, Obs. 7. Nothing 
but, ne . . . que, ne . . . rien . . . que, 
225. 

Notre, plural, nos, our, 44, 282. 

Notre, {le, la,) les notres, ours, 
30, 49, 291, 483. 

Notwithstanding, malgre; not- 
withstanding that, malgre cela, 364 ; 
for all that, although, ne laisser pas 
de : II ne laisse pas de passer pour 
honnete homme, 428. 

Nouns, ?ioms, substantifs, 493, 
§ 140. Not used as adjectives, and 
connected by some preposition, 
§ 140 — 1 ; functions of de, a, &c, — 
2, 3, 4 ; no plural to proper names, 
except when used as common, — 5; 
articles left out in enumerations, — 6 ; 
formation of compound nouns, — 7; 
of the feminine, — 8, 495 ; when a 
noun is the object of two or three 
verbs, — 9; nouns of multitude, — 
10; possessive case, — 11. Proper 
names from the Greek and Lalin , 
of kingdoms, provinces, &c, 496, 
497. Cardinal and ordinal numbers, 
&c, with Notes and Obs., 497 to 199. 
Names of the seasons, of months, 
499. 



574 



INDEX. 



Nous, we, us ; nous qui, we who ; 
nous que, we whom, 469, 470 ; nous- 
memes, ourselves ; nous autres, we, 
among us, 471 ; nous, us, to us, 472 ; 
nous le, la, les, it, them to us, 475 ; 
nous en, some, any to us, §59; 
nous yen, us some there, § 60 ; a 
nous, to us ; de nous, of, from us, 
§63, 476; nous, (reflective,) our- 
selves, § 71 ; nous y, ^reflective,) our- 
selves, (it,; § 72 ; nous en, ourselves 
at it, § 73, 478 ; d nous, (possessive,) 
ours, 484, § 106. 

Now, maintenant, a present, 356 ; 
now and then, de loin, en loin, 396. 

Numbers, nombres, (cardinal,) 65, 
N. 1, 497; when used, 70, Obs. 32; 
321, Obs. 146, 426 ; (ordinal,) 70, Obs. 
33. Adverbs, premierement, en pre- 
mier lieu, first, firstly, &c, 363, 426. 

O. 

Objective Pronouns, regimes, 
471, § 43 to 47. Objective pronouns 
before infinitives are turned into the 
subjunctive, 472, §49 ; their p'aces, 
§48 to 65; one exception, §51; 
double objectives, it to me, to thee, 
&c, me le, la ; te le, la, &c, always 
before auxiliaries, 473, § 52 ; when 
attended by a preposition, go after 
verbs, 475, §56 ; N. B. on their or- 
der, § 57. Personal and partitive, 
me some, thee any, &c, m 'en, fen, 
&c. ; me some there, m'y en, &c, 
§ 59 to 61. Objective pronoun, with 
a preposition, goes after the verb, 
§63 to ^66, 476; two or more ob- 
jective cases, with a verb, go after, 
§64 — 2. Reflective, me, te, se ; 
nous, vous ; m'y, fy, s'y, &c. ; ra' en, 
t J en, s'en, &c, 477, §71, 72, 73. 

Objective Nouns, their place ; 
the preposition never omitted before 
them, and it is repeated before every 
ftne, 473, §5H. 

Obliged, (to be,) or indebted to 
some one for . . . etre oblige, (redeva- 
ble,) d quelquunde . . . , 336. 



(Eil, (Z\) the eye; les yeux, the 
eyes, 47. 

Of, de ; of, from the, du, 27, 82, 
112, 204, 229, 403. A book of mine ; 
turn, one of my books, un de mes 
limes, 203, 484, §107, 108. 

Offrir, to offer ; off rant, offert, 
offrez, 255. 

Often, souvent ; as often as, aussi 
souvent que ; not so often as, moins 
souvent que ; oftener than, plus sou- 
vent que, ]37. 

Ombre, (une,) a shadow ; d V om- 
bre de . . . , under the shade of, 356. 

On, upon, sur ; upon it, dessus, 
175. On a small scale, en petit ; 
large scale, en grand, 404. Not 
translated. On, not translated before 
dates, &c, 537. 

On, one, the people, they; any 
one, 191 ; when used, 224, Obs. 101 ; 
when it takes V before et, oil, ou, si, 
que, &c, 372, 488, 489. 

Once, une fois ; once a day, une 
fois par jour, 210. 

One, (people,) they or any one, 
191, 224; one, un ; the one, celui, 
30; both, Vun et V autre, 72. Never 
translate theoneby Vun, except when 
it is connected with the other; as, 
the one and the other. 

One's self, soi-meme, 471 ; one's 
self, (reflective,) se, 531 ; to one's 
self, d soi ; from one's self, de soi, 
476. 

Only, but, ne . . . que, 65 ; seule- 
ment, 324; not only, non seulement. 

Opposite, vis-a-vis de, 387. 

Or, ou, 30; or people, ou Von, 
372, 

Ordinal, (numbers,) nombres or- 
dinaux, 497 to 499. 

Other, autre ; another dollar, un 
autre dollar; some other dollars, 
d' autres dollars. No other, ne. . 
pas d } autre. I have no other, je 
rf en ai pas d? autre, 69. Others 
other people, autrui, 295. 

Otherwise, else, autrement, 113, 



INBSX, 



575 



Ou, or, 30 ; ou V on, or people, 
372. 

Ou, where, whither, whereto, 86, 
184. D'oii, whence, where from, 200, 
252. 

Ought and Should, (I,) renderec 
by the conditionnel of devoir, je de- 
vrais, &c, 372, 509. 

Our, notre, nos, 44, 282 ; 466, 
$31, 32. 

Ours, le, la notre, les notres, 30, 
49, 291. 

Out, hors de ; out of doors, de- 
hors, 301, 307. 

Outre, besides; outre cela, be- 
sides that ; en outre, moreover, 378. 

Ouvrir, to open, ouvrant, ouvert, 
ouvrez, 117, 175. 



Pain, mal, 48, 284. 

Par, by, 210, 212, 213; par-ci, 
par-Id, here and there, 396. 

Paraitre, to appear, to seem, 
429. 

Parce que, because, 80, 187. 

Parfait, Perfect. (See the latter 
word.) 

Parfait or present compost. (See 
the latter.) 

Parlee. Fra?igais,to speak French, 
472, § 47£. 

Parmi, among, 272. 

Part, [de la. . .de,) from, 536 — 8. 
Fair e part de, to impart, 397. 

Participial Adjective, adjectif 
verbal, 529 — 5. 

Participle past, participe passe, 
its formation, 157, 257; when used, 
156, 525; when connected with ttre, 
it agrees with the nominative, 212, 
530 ; with avoir, it agrees with the 
direct object, &c, 162, Obs. 75, 212, 
286, 299, 525. It does not agree 
with the pronouns en and dont, be- 
cause they are not direct objects, 163, 
06s. 76 ; 229, Obs. 103, 526. Serves 
to form the passive voice, 212. Some 
difficulties explained, 527— -5. 



Participle, (present,; participe 
present, its foimation and excep- 
tions, 528. Difference in its use in 
English and French, 527 ; en alone 
governing it, what follows, 528 — 4; 
when it qualifies a noun, 529 — 5; 
when translated by a present parti- 
ciple, — 6 ; when by the indicative, 
— 7 ; by the infinitive, — 8, or by a 
noun, — 9, — 10; after to be, — 11. 
How the present participle is to be 
translated, 201, 280. 

Particular, i,to be,) y regarder de 
pres, 399. 

Partir, to depart, to set out, par- 
tant, parti, 142, 175. 

Partitive, (article,) article parti- 
tif : 1st, before a noun, 465, § 19 to 
25 ; 2d, before an adjective or after a 
negation, § 26 to 28. 

Parvenir, to succeed, 237. 

Pas, with ne before the verb, not, 
27 ; pas tout, not all ; pas du tout, 
not at all, 115. 

Passer, [se . . . de,) to do without, 
346. 

Passive Verbs, verbes passifs, 
how formed, 212 ; not so much used 
as in English, 530, § 159 ; past par- 
ciple agrees with nominative, — 2; 
on, as nominative, — 3 ; the infini- 
tive rendered by on, — 4. 

Pay to, for, payer ; to pay a man 
for a horse, payer un cheval a un 
liomme, 201, 06s. 293. To pay some 
one a visit, /aire une visite prendre 
visite) a Quelau 1 un, 332. 

Peine, (a,) scarcely, with preterit 
anterieur, 521. 

Pendant, during, for, 186. 

Penknife, canif, 32. 

Penser o, to think of, 476 ; y pen- 
ser. 

Pension, boarding-house, school, 
385. 

People, they, one, on, 468, § 38 ; 
488, 489. 

Perfect tense of the indicative, 
parfait or present compose, t.see the 



576 



INDEX. 



latter ;) of the subjunctive, its forma- 
tion and use, 418. 

Perfect, parfait, 503, §145 ; when 
ne is to be used, — -1 ; compound 
form of the perfect, — 2; I have 
just, Je viens de . . . , — 3. 

Permettre, to permit, to allow, 
371. 

Personal Pronouns, pronoms 
personnels, 468, § 38 : 1st class, with 
the verb, je, tu, il, &c. ; 2d class, 
separated from the verb, moi, toi, 
lui, &c. 

Personne ne, nobody, (nomina- 
tive,) 39, 468 ; ne . . . personne, (ob- 
jective,) 422. Personne as a pronoun 
is masculine ; as a substantive, it is 
feminine, 286, N. 1. Ne . . .personne 
qui, que, nobody who, that, governs 
the subjunctive, 515 — 5. 

Peu, little, 147, 490 ; peu de, (be- 
fore a noun,) 67; un peu de, a little, 
67 ; d peu pres, thereabout, nearly, 
404. 

Peur, fear, afraid. Are you afraid ? 
Avez-vous peur ? 31. De peur que . . . 
ne . . . , (governs subjunctive,) for 
fear, lest, 537, § 164. 

Place, d ma, votre, sa place, in 
my, your, his or her place, 367; of 
objective pronouns, 473 to 477 ; of 
adjectives, 493 ; of adverbs, 531, 532. 

Platndre, to pity; plaignant, 
plaint ; se plaindre, to complain, 
254, 476. 

Plaire, to please, to be pleased, 
plaisant , plu ; se plaire, 240, Obs. 109. 

Plaisanter, (badi?ier,) to jest, 381. 

Plaisir, {avec,) with pleasure, 47, 
48. 

Play, (to,) jouer, 126 ; upon an 
instrument, d'un instrument; at 
cards, aux cartes, 259 ; a trick on 
some one, un tour a quelqu'un, 400. 

Please, (to,) plaire, se plaire; 
some one, d quelqu'un. How are 
you pleased here ? Comment vous 
plaisez-vous ici? 241. If you please, 
«'z7 vous plait, 325. 



Pleased with, content de, 317. 

Pleasure, to give pleasure, faire 
plaisir, 110. 

Pleasure, (with,) avec plaisir, 47, 
88. 

Pleuvoir, to rain ; il pleut, it 
rains, 227. 

Pluperfect (the) of the indica- 
tive ; its formation and use, 360, 
520; of the subjunctive, its forma- 
tion and use, 416 to 419 : 2d pluper- 
fect, preterit anterieur, (see it,) 520, 
§155. 

Pluperfect of the subjunctive, 
plusque parfait, its formation, &c, 
419. 

Plural, its formation in nouns 
and adjectives, 44, 46, 47, 107, N. 1. 

Plus, more, serves to torm the 
comparative of inequality of adjec- 
tives and adverbs ; leplus, the most, 
forms the superlative, 144. Differ- 
ence between plus and davantage, 
198. Plus de, more, (before a noun,) 
78. When there is a comparison 
between two sentences, the verb 
which follows plus or moins requires 
ne, 272. Plus de, plus que, when 
used, 490. 

Plut a Dieu, plut au del, would to 
God, require the subjunctive, 424. 

Plutot que, rather ; plutot que de, 
rather than, 321 ; pas plus tot, no 
sooner, 521. 

Pont, bridge, 157. 

Porte-crayon, pencil-case, 37 ; 
porte-feuille, pocket-book, 41 ; their 
plural, 494, § 140—7. 

Porter, to carry, to take ; not to 
be mistaken for mener, 303, Obs. 143. 

Possessive articles or pronouns, 
my, thy, &c, mon, ton, &c, 44, 
108; ma, ta, &c, 282; 466, mine, 
thine, &c, le mien, le tien, &,c. 483. 
Possessive case of nouns, 30, 32; 
493, §140—2—11. 

Potential, (imperfect,) condition- 
nel, 507, § 148, ends in rais, rais, 
rait, rions, riez, raient, §148—1; 



INDEX. 



577 



how formed, — 2 ; after si, if, use the 
imperfect instead of the conditionnel, 
— 3. Potential, (perfect,) conditionnel 
compose, 508, § 149 ; its formation, 
— 1 ; with it si, if, is followed by 
pluperfect, — 2 ; how to translate 
would, should, could, might, — 3 ; I 
wish I knew it, je voudrais le sa- 
voir; I wish I had known it, faurais 
voulu le savoir. 

Potential. (See Imperfect.) 

Pour, to, in order to, 92, 364. 

Pour (to) out, verser ; to pour out 
some drink for, verser d boire d . . . , 
323. 

Pourquoi, why? 81, 184; for 
what, or what ... for ? 481. 

Poursuivre, to pursue, 344. 

PouvoiR,to be able, (can,) pouvant, 
pu, 92, N. 1, 175; puis-je? not 
peux-je ? can I ? 

Premier, ler, first, 1st, 70; pre- 
mierement, en premier lieu, 363, § 161 
—7. 

Prendre, to take, prenant, pris, 
prenez, 132, 175, 352, 366 ; prendre, 
to drink, 132; soin, care, 256; la 
fuite, to make one's escape, to run 
away, &c, 346 ; s'y prendre, to ma- 
nage, to go about a thing, 352. 

Propositions govern the infinitive 
in French, except en, which governs 
the prese it participle, 92, 201, 215, 
460, 535.. The English preposition 
for, with .he verbs to ask, demander, 
to pay, payer, is not rendered in 
French, 201, Obs. 93. At and for 
not translated when used to express 
the price of a thing, 276. Prepositions 
formed with d and a noun take de 
after them ; almost all others have 
no preposition, 266. Use of d, 100, 
193, 404, 406, 464 ; use of de, 27, 
403, 404; place of the preposition in 
the sentence : always before the word 
it governs, (488, § 129,) 536 ; not 
transposed in French, 482, § 95 ; pre- 
positions never omitted before objec- 
tive nouns, 458, 473, Dir. 4 ; d and 
48 



de, connected with reflected verbs, 
variously translated, 477, ($ 71 to 74;) 
not transposed in English, when of 
what means of that which, de ce qui, 
que, 482, § 97 ; to what, meaning to 
that which, d ce qui, que, § 98, may be 
separated by the negation or objec- 
tive pronoun, 536, § 163 — 3 as far as, 
jusqu'd, 464,536; at, in, to, chez 
84, 536 ; from, de la part de ; before, 
avant, devant, auparavant, 536 ; by, 
pris de, d cote de ; by myself, seul, 
e, &c. ; in, into, dans, en; at, in, to, 
d, en ; in, on, not translated before 
dates, &c. 

Pres de, near, 260, 465, 537. 

Present (the) tense, indicative ; 
its formation, 500, § 144 ; three Eng- 
lish present tenses expressed by one 
in French, 114 ; verbs that take a 
cedilla under the, (g,) 502, § 144—1 ; 
those that take e after g, — 2 ; those 
that change y into i, when it is fol- 
lowed by e mute, — 3; e mute 
changed to e grave, — 4 ; excepting 
the terminations eler, eter, N.B., 4 
(acute) into e (grave), — 5 ; true pre- 
sent tense explained : I am reading, 
je suis d lire, — 6. Do and am, &c, 
used to interrogate, may be translated 
by est-ce que. In some verbs, est-ce 
que must be used, 139, N. 1, (459, 
Dir. 8.) Present Compose or Far- 
fait, English perfect, its formation, 
167; its use, 168; 503, §145. When 
ne, without pas, is used with it, 503, 
504 ; it translates the compound form 
of the perfect, viz : I have been 
reading, fai lu. I have just written, 
is not rendered by the parfait, but 
by je viens d'ecrire. Present of 
the Subjunctive, (78 1 ,) 408, 513, 
$ 151 ; its terminations ; its formation 
and exceptions, § 151 — 1 ; its use, 
— 2, 513 to 515 ; different antece- 
dents that require the subjunctive, 
515 to 517. In English, the state of 
existence or of action, when in its 
duration, is always expressed by the 



578 



INDEX. 



compound perfect, while the French 
use the present tense. He has been 
in Paris these three years, il y a trots 
ans qu'il est d Paris, 274. Present 
used after si, in connexion with the 
future, (233, Obs. 105,) 505, $146—3. 

Presenter a, to present to, intro- 
duce, 476, $64. 

Presently, tout a Vheure, 237. 

Pretend, (to,) /aire semblant de, 
356. 

Preterit, (le,) English second im- 
perfect, 358. (See Imperfect.) 

Preterit Anterieur, second plu- 
perfect, its formation, 520, $ 155 ; its 
use ; conjunctions after which it is 
used ; practical rules, 362, 521. 

Trier de, to desire, beg, pray, re- 
quest, 304. 

Promener, (se,) to take an airing, 
a walk for pleasure ; aller se prome- 
ner, to go walking ; en carrosse, to go 
in a carriage ; d cheval, to ride on 
horseback, to take a ride, 222. 

Promettre de, to promise, 179. 

Pronouns, (possessive or articles,) 
my, thy, &c., 466, $ 31 ; rule for 
their use, $ 32 ; demonstrative, $ 33 ; 
always prefixed to a noun and repeat- 
ed, $ 34 ; true demonstrative, $ 36, 
37. Personal, 468, $ 38 to 40 ; no- 
minatives, separated from the verb, I 
who, moi qui, thou who, toi qui, &c. 
Objectives the same, followed by 
que, 470, $40, 41. Compound Per- 
sonal, myself, moi-meme, &c, 471, 
$ 41£. Objective Pronouns, $ 42 to 
50; their place, $51 to 56, Dir. 4. 
Double objective pronouns, $57 to 
63 ; examples at p. 94, &c. ; with a 
preposition, d moi, de toi, &c, $63 
to 66. Reflective, 1st class, 477, 
$ 67, 71 ; 2d class, $ 68, 72 ; 3d class, 
$ 69, 73, 74. Relative, qui, who, 
nominative, never omitted either in 
French or English, 478, $75, 76. 
Objective que, whom, that, which, 
$75 to 80; personal, connected with 
relatives, 483, $102. Possessive, i 



whose, a qui? $103, mine, thine, 
&c, le mien, le tien, &c, used with 
every verb, even etre, when ce is no- 
minative, 484, $ 104, 105 ; but when 
il, elle, Us, elles, are nominatives, use 
the following: d moi, a toi, &c, a 
ces Messieurs. A book of mine, 
turn to, one of my books, $ 107. In- 
terrogative, who? qui; whom? 
qui? 485, $111. Qui never loses 
its i. What ? quel, quelle, &c, que, 
qu'est-ce que; after the verb, by 
quoi? $112,115. What? nomina- 
tive, qu'est-ce qui? 486, $116; go- 
verned by a preposition, quoi? d 
quoi, $ 117. What is in ? &c. Qu J y 
a-t-il dans . . ,$ 118 ; see to $ 130. In- 
definite, on, one, people, &c. 488, 
489; examples at 87, 94, 281, 107, 
328, 38, 44, 108, 281, 30, 48, 276, 44, 
283, 41, 43, 100, 283, 229, 39. 

Proper Names, noms propres, 494, 
496, 497. 

Properly, comme ilfaut, 204. 

Proposer (se) de, to propose, in- 
tend ; je me propose de /aire ce voy- 
age, I propose going on that journey, 
341. 

Proverbial forms of expression, 
(at the end of Index.) 

Pull, (to,) tirer, 244 ; to pull out, 
arracher, s'arracher ; he pulls out his 
hair, il s'arrache les cheveux, 219. 

Purchase (to) anything, faire em- 
plette de quelque chose, faire des em- 
plettes, 256. 

Put, (to,) to put on, mettre, 168 ; to 
put off, postpone, remettre a, 394 ; to 
inconvenience one's self, se gtner, 
395. 

Q. 

Quand, lorsque, when, 88, 242 ; 
with the preterit anterieur, 521. 
Quand meme, though, followed by 
conditionnel, 425, 517. 

Quant d, as to, as for ; quant a 
moi, as to me, 322. 

Quatre-vingts, eighty, loses its 



INDEX. 



579 



* when followed by another numeral, 
184. 

Que, that, which, (relative pro- 
noun,) 43 ; que de, than, (before a 
noun,) 78 ; que, qui, take a euphonic 
I before on, 372 ; que, used to avoid 
the repetition of a conjunction, go- 
verns the same mood as that conjunc- 
tion; when the conjunction is si, 
&c, que governs the subjunctive, 
516. Qu'est-ce que Jest que cela? 
what is that ? Je ne sais pas ce que 
Jest que cela, 319. Qu'est-ce que 
cela peut-etre? what can that be? 
395. Que! exclamation! what! how! 
335, 487. 

Qu'est-ce que c'est ? what is it ? 
129, 171. 

Quel? what, which? (interroga- 
tive,) 25; quels, 44; quelle, &c, 
283, 286, 485, 487. 

Quel que, quelle que, whatever, 
in two words, govern the subjunc- 
tive, 422, 516, 3d way. Quelque, 1st 
way, however ; 2d way, whatever, 
govern subjunctives, 422, 516. 

Quelque, s, some, any, a few, 68. 

Quelque chose, some, anything; 
de bon, good, 88, 462, (takes de be- 
fore an adjective.) Quelque chose que, 
whatever, governs the subjunctive, 
423, 516—13. 

Quelque part, some, anywhere, 
89, Obs. 

Quelqu'-jn, sorae, anybody, 39. 

Quelques uns, (en . . . ,) a few, 
some, 68. 

Question, (to be the,) to turn 
upon, s'agirde: the question is, il 
s^agit de, 391. Qu'en resulte-t-il ? 
what of it ? 483. 

Qui, who ? 100, 470, 230. A qui, 
whose? 147, 483; to whom? 230, 
N. B. The t is never cut off. 

Qui que ce soit, whoever, governs 
the subjunctive, 422, 516 — 13. 

Quick, fast, vite, 264. 

Quite (just) as much, as many, 



tout autant, 74, 76; tant de...que, 
so much ... as, 78. 

Quoi, (after the verb or a preposi- 
tion,) que, (before,) what ? 100. Quoi! 
admirative, what ! 487. Quoi encore ? 
what else, more ? 113. 

Quoique, whatever, 422 ; though, 
417, governs the subjunctive. 

R. 

Rain, (to,) pleuvoir, 227. Does it 
rain? pleut-il? fait-il de la pluie? 
301. Il pleut d verse, it rains very 
hard, it pours, 227. 

Rappeler, (se,) to recollect. Vous 
rappelez-vous cela ? do you recollect 
that ? I do,^*e me le rappelle, 261. 

Rather than, plutot que de, 321. 

Read, (to,) lire, lu, 172. (See 
Lire.) 

Recollect, (to,) se rappeler, se 
souvenir, se ressouvenir, 262. 

Reconnaitre, to recognise, to 
acknowledge, 272. 

Reduire. to reduce, reduisant, re- 
duit, 344. 

Rejouir (se) de quelque chose, to 
rejoice at something, 223. 

Rely, (to,) sejier a; you may rely 
upon him, vous pouvez vousjier a lui, 
&c, 348. 

Remain, (to,) rester, 182, N.l; 
demeurer, 187, N. 1. 

Remettre a, to postpone, put off, 
394. 

Rendre, to return, give back, re- 
store, 80, 199; rendre visite, to pay 
a visit, 332. 

Rester, to remain, stay, 110; 
takes avoir and etre as auxiliary, 182, 
N. 1. Rester, to have left, 300. 

Restore, rendre. (See it.) 

Retenir, to hold back, retain, re- 
tenant, retewj. retenez, 260. 

Return, to give back, restore; 
rendre, 80, 199. Betourner, to go 
back, 428; revenir, to come back, 185. 

Reussir d, to succeed, 342. 



580 



INDEX. 



Revenir, to come back, to return, 

185. 

Ride (to) on horseback, aller (mon- 
ter) d cheval, 214. To take a ride, 
se promener a cheval, 222. 

Rien, (ne. . . ,) qui, que, nothing 
that, governs the subjunctive, 423. 

Right, (to be,) avoir raison, 36. 
To the right, on the right side or 
hand, d droite, sur la droite, 378. It 
is right, c'est bien, 319. 

Rire, to laugh, riant, ri, riez. Se 
rire (moquer) de quelqu'un, to laugh, 
to deride one ; rire au nez de quel- 
qu'un, to laugh in a person's face, 
325. 

Room, (the,) la chambre ; the front 
room, la chambre de devant, sur le de- 
vant ; the back room, de derriere, 
sur le derriere ; the upper room, du 
haut, oV en haut, 284. 

Rules: 1. Ail prepositions govern 
the infinitive, N. 1, on Apres, after, 
460. 

R. 2. Of two verbs, the second is 
in the infinitive, &c, 461. 

R. 3. Do you speak before you 
listen ? Parlez-vous avant d'ecouter ? 
The French dispense with the second 
nominative, when it is the same as 
the first, 461. 

R. 4. When the nominatives are 
different, use ths English construc- 
tion, 461. 

R. 5. When two or more nouns, 
&c, govern a noun or a verb, they 
must govern it without any preposi- 
tion or with the same, 461. 

R. 6. Every French preposition 
precedes the word it governs, is never 
separated from it, and is repeated be- 
fore every word, 461. 

S. 

Sa, son, ses, his, her, 282, 466, 
$32. 

Sail, (a,) une voile. To set sail, 
mettre d la voile, 350, N. 1. To set 



sail for, /aire voile pour ; under full 
sail, marcher dpleines voiles, 350. 

Salt, (to,) saler, 92. 

Salir, to soil, dirty, 220. 

Salutations, (daily,) salutations 
journalieres. At pp. 26, 29, 32, 33, 
35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 48, 50, 52, 
54, 56, 58, 63, (N. B. On composing 
an exercise on daily salutations, 70, 
71, 73,) 104, 107, 112, 114, 119, 121, 
123, 130, 134, 136, 139, 142. 

Same ; the same thing, la meme 
chose; the same man, le mime 
homme ; it is all one, (the same,) 
c'est egal, c'est la meme chose, 168, 
307. 

Sans, without, 215 ; sans doute, 
without doubt, to be sure, 108. 

Sante, (la,) the health, 332. 

Savoir, to know ; sachant, su, sa- 
chez, takes no preposition after it, 
135, 175. 

Satisfied (to be) with some one or 
something, itre content de quelqu'un 
ou de quelque chose, 210. 

Scarcely, d peine, 521. 

Seasons, (the,) les saisons, 499. 

Second, second, e, 70. Secondly, 
2d, secondement, 363, 532 — 7. 

See, (to,) voir, voyant, vu, 172. 

Seem, (to,) paraitre, sembler, 429. 

Self, selves, meme, mimes; my- 
self, moi-mime ; themselves, eux- 
mimes, elles -mimes ; one's self, soi- 
mime, 154, 471. 

Selon, according to ; selon les 
circonstances ; c'est selon, it depends, 
31\ 

Sentir, to feel ; sentant, senti, 
278 ; to smell, 353. 

Servir, to serve, wait upon, ser- 
vant, servi, 254 ; se servir de, to 
make use of, to use, 266 ; servir la 
soupe, le dessert, to serve up the 
soup, the dessert, 348. To be of 
use, d quoicela vous sert-il ? of what 
use is that to you ? Servir de, to 
stand instead, to be as ; monfusilme 



INDEX. 



581 



$ert de baton, I use my gun as a 
stick ; servir de, to avail ; a quoi 
vous sert-il de pleurer ? what avails 
you to cry ? cela ne me sort d rien, it 
avails me nothing, 386. On a servi, 
the meal is on the table, (is served 
up;* vous servirai-je de la soupe? 
shall I help you to some soup ? do 
you choose any soup ? 

Set (to) out, to depart, leave, par- 
tir, 142, 175. 

Seul, e, alone, by one's self, 137, 
159, 367 ; seuleme?it, non seulement, 
not only, 324. 

Shawl, (a,) un chdle, 34. 

Shortly, (soon.) bientot, 108, 185. 

Should or Ought. (See Ought.) 

Show, /aire voir, montrer, 134. 
To show a disposition to, faire mine 
de, 331 ; the show, (splendor, bright- 
ness,) V eclat ; to make a great show, 
faire de V eclat, 432. 

Si, if; the i is cut off before il, Us, 
but nowhere else ; after si, the pro- 
noun on takes V, 372. Si usually 
attends the conditionnel, and is fol- 
lowed by the imparfait, 310, 507. 
Que, used to avoid the repetition of 
si, governs the subjunctive, 516 — 10. 
Si, meaning granting, connects the 
future with the present, 233, Obs. 105. 

Si, so ; si Men, so well, 165. 

Sien, (le,) la sienne, &c, his or 
hers, 39, 49, 291, 483; a lui, d elle, 
484. 

Side, cote ; by the side of, a cote 
de, 266; this side, de ce cote-ci ; on 
that side, de ce cote-la, 193. 

Silent, (to be,) to stop speaking, 
se taire, 392. 

Since or From, depuis ; from that 
time, depuis ce moment ; my child- 
hood, ma jeunesse ; from here there, 
depuis ici jusque Id. Since, (consi- 
dering, puisque, 342. 

Sit (to) down, s'asseoir, 262; to 
te seated, etre assis, assise, 302. 

Sleep, (to,) dormir, 121 ; 215. Are 
48* 



you sleepy ? avez-vous sommeil ? 29. 
To feel sleepy, avoir envie de dor- 
mir, 220. 

Slow, slowly, lentement, 264. 

Snow, (to,) neiger, 227 ; it snows, 
ilfait de la neige, 301. 

So, (it,) le, 171, Obs. 77; so, thus, 
ainsi ; so, so, comme cela; so that, 
de sorte que, 230 ; so much, tant de ; 
so much as, tant que, 11, 210, 260. 

Soir, soiree, evening, their differ- 
ence, 289, N. 2. 

Some or Any, (before a noun,) du, 
de la, des ; (before an adjective or 
after a negation,) de, 55, 284. Some of 
it, of them, en, before the verb, 59 ; 
some or anymore, encore, used affir- 
matively ; encore du vin, encore des 
boutons, 75. N. B. {Encore is placed 
immediately after the verb.) Some- 
thing, quelque chose ; anything good, 
quelque chose de bon, 29, 191 ; some- 
times, quelque fois, 153 ; some, any- 
where, quelque part ; nowhere, not 
anywhere, ne . . . nullepart, 89. 

So much, many, tant, 11, 210, 260. 

Son, sa, ses, his or hers, 38, 44, 
282, 466, % 32. 

Soon, very soon, bientot, 108, 185. 
Aussitot que, as soon as, aussitot que, 
215. No sooner, pas plus tot, with 
preterit anterieur, 521. 

Sore, mal ; a sore foot, mal au 
pied, 110. 

Sortir, to go out, sortant, sorti, 
110, 121, 150, 175. 

Soudainement, suddenly, all of a 
sudden, 290. 

Souffrir, to suffer, souffrant, 
souffert, 334. 

Sous, under ; dessous, under it, 
177. 

Souvenir (se) de, se ressouvenir 
de, to remember, to recollect, 262. 

Souvent, often ; aussi souvent 
que, as often as ; plus souvent que, 
oftener than; moins souvent que, not 
so often as, 137. 



582 



INPXX. 



Speak (to) French. (See Parler.) 

Speech, (a,) un discours. To make 
a speech, /aire un discours, 295. 

Spend (to) time at something, pas- 
ser le temps a quelque chose, 250. 

Spite, (in . . . of,) en depit de, 346. 

Steel, acier, 55. 

Step, (a,) unpas. To walk a step, 
faire unpas ; to take a step, (mea- 
sures,) /aire une demarche, 295. 

Store, store -house, magasin, 63. 

Strike, (to,) J rapper, 323. To be 
struck with a thought, venir en 
pensee, d Videe, d V esprit. A thought 
strikes me, il me vient une pensee, 
366. 

Subject. (See Nominative.) 

Subjunctive, subjonctif. (See 
Present, Imperfect, &c, 408.) 
Present ; how it ends, 513, § 151 — 1 ; 
how it is formed, — 2 ; eight excep- 
tions. Its use, — 2 ; important ob- 
servation on it. When the antecedent 
is a superlative, — 3 ; when imper- 
sonal, —4; interrogative, negative, 
or conditional, — 5 ; it expresses/ear, 
&c, takes ne, — 6, — 7 ; douter, nier, 
take ne, — 8 ; what, que, governs, 
— 9, — 10; whatever, however, — 11, 
quelque que, &c. ; its connexion with 
indicative, — 12 ; whatever, whatso- 
ever, — 13 ; quelque chose que, quoi 
que, quoique ce soit ; whomsoever, 
qui que ce soit ; when it must follow 
qui, que, dont, &c, — 14; when it 
must begin the sentence, — 15. Im- 
perfect, 517; its formation. Per- 
fect, (p. 418,) parfait. Pluperfect, 
(p. 419,) plusque parfait. 

Substantives, substan'ifs, noms, 
formation of plural, 44. Exceptions, 
46, N. 1, 2, 3, 281. Feminine, 281. 
Genders, 194 ; 402, Obs. 163 ; 187, 
Obs. 85 ; 297, Obs. 140 ; 314 ; 239, 
N. 1; 284; 356. Compound sub- 
stantives, 47, N. 1, or 4S4— 7; 183, 
Obs. 82; 440, Obs. 171. De is put 
between the name of the thing and 
that of the substance of which it is 



made, 27, 403, 493; a, when the lat- 
ter expresses the use of the former, 
404, 494 ; d la, au, aux, to determine 
it more precisely, 406, 494. Sub- 
stantives having a distinct form for 
the feminine, 495 ; used for both 
sexes, 298. 

Succeed, (to,) parvenir a. Have 
you succeeded in learning it 1 etes- 
vous parvenu d V apprendre ? 237. 
reussir a ; avez-vous reussi a V ap- 
prendre ? 237, 342. 

Such, un tel, une telle, pareil, 
pareille, 307, 490 — 9, — 10 ; un si bon 
livre. 

Suffer, (to,) souffrir, 334; to suffer 
one's self to be beaten, se laisser 
battre ; to let one's self fall, se laisser 
tomber; to suffer one's self to be in- 
sulted, se laisser insulter, 432. 

Suffire a, to suffice, be suffi- 
cient, suffisant, suffi, 349. 
Suit, (to,) convenir a, 237. 
Suite, (tout de,) immediately, 237. 
Suivre, to follow; suivant, suivt, 
334. Suivre un conseil, to follow 
advice, 384. 

Sun, (the,) le soleil. We have too 
much sun, ilfait trop de soleil, 208. 

Superlative, superlatif, a new 
explanation on its formation, 144; 
followed by que or qui, requires the 
subjunctive, 515 — 3. 

Sur, on, upon, 175 ; dessus, upon 
it, 177. 

Surfaire, to overcharge, ask too 
much, 344. 

Surprendre, to surprise, 374. 
Surprise, (to,) etonner. To be 
surprised at, s 1 etonner de, 374. 
Sweet, doux, douce, 491. 
Sweeten, (to,) sucrer f adoucir, 92. 



Ta, ton, tes, thy, 282, 108, 466. 

Taire, (se,) to hold one's tongue, 
be silent, taisant ; tu ; taisez-vous, 
be silent, 392. 

Take (to) place, avoir lieu t 165 ; 



583 



care of something, prendre (avoir) 
soin de quelque chose, 256 ; of some 
one, to beware of one, prendre garde 
a quelqu'un, 366 ; an airing in a car- 
riage, se promener en carrosse, 222. 

Tant, so much ; par an, a year ; 
partite, a head, 210, 293; tant que, 
so long as, 401 ; tant soi peu, just a 
little, ever so little, 427; tant bien 
que mal, indifferently, 396 ; tant que 
vous voudrez, so, as long as you 
please, 401, 492. 

Tarder, to delay. (See the latter.) 

Taste, (to,) gouter, 129, 208; the 
taste, le gout ; each man has his 
taste, chaque homme a son gout, 217. 

Te, thee, to thee, te le, les, 108, 
472. T'' en, thee some; Vy en, thee 
some there. Te, Ven, t'y, (reflective,) 
478, $71, 72, 73. 

Teach, (to,) enseigner ; to teach 
some one something, enseigner quel- 
que chose d quelqu'un ; some one to 
do something, apprendre d quelqu'un 
a f aire quelque chose, 266. 

Tear, (a,) une larme ; to shed 
tears, verser des larmes ; with tears 
in his, her, our, &c, eyes, les larmes 
aux yeux, 323. 

Teindre, to dye, color; teignant, 
teint; en noir, en rouge, to dye black, 
red, 195. 

Tel, telle, tels, telles, such ; un tel 
homme, une telle femme, such a man, 
woman ; de tels hommes, de telles 
femmes, such men, women, 307. 
Tel is not used with another adjec- 
tive. Such a kind friend, un si bon 
ami, 490—9, —10. 

Tell, (to,) to say, dire ; told, dit, 
168. 

Tenir, to hold ; tenant, tenu ; te- 
nez. Tenez, the imperative, is used 
as an exclamation, 203, 06s. 94. Se 
tenir prit, to keep one's self ready, 
274. Tenir pension, keep a boarding- 
house, school, 385. Lieude, to take 
the place of, be instead of, 404. (See 



Keep.) S'en tenir d, to abide by, 
477. 

Tenses, (the,) les temps. Present, 
114, 500 to 503, including true pre- 
sent, je suis d lire, 502. Perfect, 
167, 503, 504. First future, 231, 
504 to 506 ; second future, 299. Im- 
perfect, 305, 506. Imperfect of the 
potential, conditionnel, 310, 507, 
508. Perfect of the potential, 311, 
508, 509. Imperative, 369, 509 to 
513. Subjunctive present, 408, 513 ; 
subjunctive imperfect, 416, 517. Per- 
fect, 418. Pluperfect, 419. Prete- 
rit or second imperfect of the indica* 
tive, 368, 517 to 520. Pluperfect of 
indicative is formed like the English 
tense, by the imperfect of the auxi- 
liary and past participle of the verb 
to be conjugated, 520. Examples 
after the 59th lesson, p. 305. Second 
pluperfect, preterit anterieur, 362, 
520, 521. Infinitive, four termina- 
tions of it, 80 ; explanations, 521 to 
525. Past participle, 156, 525 to 
527. Present participle, 114, 448, 
500. 

Than, que de, (before nouns,) 78. 
Than, before a number, is rendered 
by de, and not by que ; more than 
nine, plus de neuf, 246. 

That or Which, que, (relative,) 
43, 478. That, (meaning that thing,) 
cela, 168, 467, 469, N. 4. That, (the 
one,) celui, plural, ceux, celle, celles, 
30, 48, 286, 467. That which, the 
one which, those which, celui que, 
ceux que, &c, 43, 48, 286, 467, 468. 
That which, (the thing which,) ce 
que, (objective,) ce qui, (nomina- 
tive,) 124, 481. That book of mine, 
485. 

The, le, la, les, 25, 44, 281 ; its 
connexion with prepositions, 463. 

Their, leur, leurs, 44, 282 ; when 
it must be translated by en . . . les, 
466, N. 2. 
Theirs, le (la) leur, les leurs, 49, 



684 



INDEX. 



291, 483 ; after il, die, &c, a eux, a 
dies 484. 

Them, to them, leur. (See it.) 

Themselves, eux-memes, elles- 
memes, 471 ; (reflective,) se, s'y, s 1 en, 
477, 478. 

Then, alors ; until then, jusqu 1 - 
alors, 189. 

There, to it, at it, in it, 87, 101. 
To go, to be, there, y alter, y etre, 
87. There, Id, y, 110. There is, il 
y a, 180, 238, 246, 7, 8, 338. There 
is, (behold,) voild ; there it is, le 
voild, la voild ; they are, les voild, 
(here is, void,) 310, 312. 

Thine, lelien, latienne, &c., 108, 
291,483; after il, elle, &c, d toi, 
484. 

Think (to) of, penser d, 476. 

Third, troisieme, 70; tiers, 499. 
Thirdly, troisiemement, 363 — 7. 

This, That, these, those, ce, cet, 
cette, ces. This one, that one, these, 
those, celui-ci, celui-ld, &c, 30, 41, 
44, 50, 286. 

Thou, tu, 107. 

Though, quoique, (see it,) 417. 

Thousand, (a,) mille, does not 
take un, 462. 

Throw, (to,) jeter, 173, 502, N. B. 

Thunder, le tonnerre. It thun- 
ders very much, il fait beaucoup de 
tonnerre, 215. 

Thus, So, ainsi, 179. 

Thy, ton, ta, tes, 108, 282, 466. 

Thyself, toi-meme, 471 ; (reflec- 
tive,) te, tfy, fen, 477, 478. 

Tien, (le,) la tienne, les ttens, les 
tiennes, thine, 108, 291, 483; d toi, 
484. 

Till, until, jusque ; till noon, 
iusqu'd midi, 189; not until, pas 
avant de, 310. 

Tired, (to be,) etre las, lasse, 429 ; 
to get tired, s 'ennuyer, 376. 

Tirer, to pull, draw, shoot, fire, 
244. 

To, d, 101, 102; to the, au, d la, 
&c, 463; in order to, pour, 92. 



Toi, thou ; toi qui, que, 468, 470 ; 
d toi, to thee, 476 ; d toi, thine, 484. 

Ton, ta, tes, thy, 108, 282, 466. 

Too, trop, 150 ; too much, many, 
trop, 66, 67 ; too late, trop tard ; 
soon, early, trop tot; large, great, 
trop grand; little, trop peu ; too 
small, trop petit, 150. 

Tour a tour, alternately, by 
turns, 404. 

Tout, tous, all. Tout le vin ; 
tous les livres, 110. Tout autant, 
quite (just) as much, 76. Tout de 
suite, immediately, 108 ; pas du tout, 
not at all, 115. Tout d coup, all at 
once, 290. 

Towards, envers, vers, 270, 393. 

Travel, (to,) voyager, 194, 213; 
through Europe, faire le tour de 
V Europe, 400. 

Treat, (to ) use somebody well, 
(ill,) en user Men, (mal,) avec queU 
qu'un, 394. 

Trick, (to play a,) jouer un tour, 
400. 

Tromper, to deceive, cheat ; se 
tromper, to make a mistake, 219. 

Trop, too, too much, many, 65, 
150. 

Trust (to) one, sejier d quelqu'un; 
to distrust one, se defter de quel- 
qu'un, 325. 

Truth, (the,) la verite ; in truth, 
indeed, en verite ! 47, 105. 

Tu, thou, 107, N. 1. 

Turn, (to,) a soldier, se faire sol- 
dat, 225 ; to account, (make the best 
of,) faire valoir, 427 ; one into ridi- 
cule, tourner quelqu'un en ridicule, 
388. Turn, (the,) le tour. To take 
a turn, (a walk,) faire un tour, 242, 
400. 

T'y, thee to it there, 475 ; Vy en, 
thee some there, 476 ; t'y, (reflec- 
tive,) thyself, 478. 

U. 

Un, une, a, an, one, 63, 68, 70, 
285, 129 ; not used before cent, &c. v 



INDEX. 



585 



462. Pas un qui, que, not one that, 
governs the subjunctive, 515 — 5. 
L'un Vautre, Vune Vautre, each 
other ; etes-vous contents Vun de 
Vautre ? are you pleased with each 
other ? Nous le sommes, we are, 331. 
The one, (when not in apposition to 
the other,) not Vun, but celui, 43. 

Under, sous; under it, dessous, 
177. 

Understand, (to,) comprendre, 
compris, 182; to make one's self 
understood, sefaire comprendre, 370. 

Unipersonal Verbs govern the 
subjunctive, 515 — 4. 

Unless, d moins que . . . ne ... , 
govern the subjunctive, 537. 

Until, jusqu'd ce que, governs the 
subjunctive, 537; jusqu'alors, 189. 

Up, to get up, (to rise,) se lever, 
222. To go up, monter, 304, N. 1 ; 
to stand up, etre debout ; to remain 
up, r ester debout, 373. Up stairs, en 
haut, 193. Up to the top, jusqu 1 en 
haut, 428. 

Upon, sur ; upon it, dessus, 175. 

Us, nous, d nous. See Nous. 

User, to wear out, 180. En user 
bien (mal) avec quelqu'un. To treat 
sne well, (ill,) 394. 

V. 

Valoir, to be worth ; valant, valu, 
valoir mieux, to be better, 199 ; la 
peine, to be worth while. Cela en 
vaut-il la peine ? Is it worth while ? 
270. Faire valoir, to turn to account, 
427. 

Veille, (la,) the day before, 340. 

Venir, to come, venant, venu, 88, 
121, 175. Venir de, to have just, 
248, 504 — 3. Venir en pensee, (d 
Videe, d V esprit,) to have a thought, 
366. Venir and alter, are in French 
followed by an infinitive, and the 
conjunction cm/? is not rendered, 374, 
512—12. 

Verbs, verbes. The four conjuga- 
tions, 80. Compound and derivative 



verbs are conjugated like their primi- 
tives, 179. Auxiliaries, See Avoir, 
Etre. Verbs requiring etre, to be, as 
auxiliary, 175,530. Active verbs, 167. 
Neuter, 175, 530. Passive, 212, 530. 
Reflective, 217, 531. Always conju- 
gated with the auxiliary etre, — 4- 
They always have two pronouns of 
the same person, — 2. Impersonal, 
227. They usually govern the sub- 
junctive, 515 — 4. Do, am, &c, when 
used to interrogate, may be rendered 
by est-ce que ? With some verbs 
est-ce que must be used, 139. When 
ne is used without pas, 322; etre 
connected by d with an infinitive 
expresses the present tense, as Je 
suis a lire, I am reading, 399, 502 — 6. 
Most passive verbs may be made 
reflected, 531 — 5. 

Vers, envers, towards, 270 ; the 
former is used physically, the latter 
morally, 393. 

Vis- a- vis de, opposite to, 387. 

VrvRE, to live, vivant, vecu, 214; 
Fait-il bon vivre d Paris ? Is the 
living good in Paris ? 315. 

Voila, there is ; void, here is ; 
voild pourquoi, that is the reason 
why; voild pourquoi je ledis, there 
fore I say so, 312. 

Voile, (un,) a veil, is masculine ; 
une voile, a sail, feminine, 350, N. 1. 
| A pileines voiles, d toutes voiles,) un 
' der full sail, 350. 

Voir, to see, voyant, vu, voyez, 92, 
121, 172. 

Votre, plural vos, your, 25, 44, 
282. 466. 

Votke, de, la.) les votres, yours, 
30, 291, 483. 

Vouloir, to be willing, to wish, 
voulant, voulu, 83, 175. 

Vous, you, 25, 409. Vous qui, 
you who, vous-meme, s, yourself, 471. 
Objective vous, you, to you, 472; 
vous y, you there, 475 ; vous en, you 
some, vous y en, you some there ; d 
vous, to you, 476 ; vous (reflect.) 1st 



586 



INDEX. 



class, 477, vous y ; 2d class, vous en ; 
3d class, yourselves, 478 ; d vous, 
yours, 484, § 106. 

Voyager, (to travel,) 194, voya- 
geant, 502—2. 

W. 

Wake, (to,) eveiller, reveiller, 369. 

Walk, (to,) marcher, 295 ; to take 
a walk, se promener ; to go walking ; 
aller se promener, 222. To walk or 
travel a mile, faire un mille, 295. 

Want, (to,) to be in want of, to 
have need of, avoir besoin de, 112; 
falloir, ilfaut, 197, 06s. 89; vouloir, 
83, 175. 

Warm, chaud. Are you warm? 
avez-vous chaud ? 31. Is it warm ? 
fait-il chaud ? 53. 

Way, chemin, 105; on the way, 
en chemin, 121 ; in this way, de cette 
maniire, 180 ; about asking the way, 
378. 

We, nous, 67, 409; we, nous au- 
tres, 471. 

Weather, (the,) le temps. How 
is the weather ? what weather is it ? 
quel temps fait-il ? 53, 208. 

Welcome, (to be,) itre le bien 
venu, 376. 

Well, bien, 26, 147, ?19. To be 
well, etre bien portant, e, etre en bonne 
sante ; she is well, elle est bien por- 
tante, elle se forte bien, elle est en 
bonne sante, 330. 

Wet, damp, humide. Is the wea- 
ther damp ? Fait-il humide ? 208. 

What? que? ^before a verb,) 29; 
after verbs and prepositions, quoi? 
100; que, quoi, qu 'est -ce que? what, 
nominative, qu 1 est-ce qui? what is, 
was, &c, (interrogative,) followed by 
a preposition, qu'y a-t-il . . . ? qu'y 
avait-il? 486. What, (or the thing 
which,) ce qui, ce que, 124, 48] § 89 ; 
what is, (relative,^ followed by a pre- 
position, ce qu'il y a. 480 — 4. What? 
qu 'est-ce que c' est ? qu' est-ce que c' est 



que cela? 129, 171. What! que ! 
quoi ! 487. 

Whatever, whatsoever, quelque, 
quel que, quelle que, &c, quelque chose 
que, quoique, quoi que ce soit, 422, 
423, 516. 

When, quand, lorsque, 88, 242; 
used with the preterit anterieur, 521. 
When connects two future tenses, 
235, Obs. 106. 

Where? <m% 86. Where from? 
whence? oVou? 200, 252. Where 
did we stop ? oil en etions-nous ? 
Somewhere, anywhere, quelquepart; 
nowhere, not anywhere, nulle part, 
89. 

Which or What? quel? quels? 
&c, 25, 27, 45, 386, 485, 486. Of 
which, dont, 228, 481. Which one ? 
Lequel, laquelle ? &c, 36, 45, 386. 
Which, having a part of a sentence 
for antecedent, is translated by ce 
qui, ce que, 481, §90. (See That.) 

Who ? qui ? whose ? a qui ? dont, 
de qui, 100, 147 ; d qui, aux quels ? 
230. Whom? qui? 478; whom, 
(relative,) que, 479. 

Whoever, qui que ce soit, 422, 
516. 

Why? pourquoi? 81, 184. 

Wipe, essuyer, 184, 502 — 3. 

Wish, (to,) souhaiter, vouloir, de- 
sir er, 83, 131. I wish I had it, je 
voudrais V avoir, 508. I wish I had 
been able to go, faurais voulu pou- 
voir y aller, 509. 

With, avec, 88. With, rendered 
by de, 224, 254, 210, 303 ; by a, 338, 
Vhomme d V habit bleu. 

Withdraw, (to,) go away from, 
s 1 eloigner de. I go from the fire, je 
m'iloigne dufeu, 260. 

Without, sans ; without speak- 
ing, sans parler, 215. 

Word, (the,) le mot, 50, 172 
Words used with the preposition de 
before an infinitive, 80. When a 
word is composed of a noun and an 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 



587 



adjective, both take the mark of 
the plural, 183. Compound words, 
494. 

Worth, (to be,) valoir, 199. To 
be worth while, valoir la peine, 270. 

Would to God, plut a Dieu, au 
del, 424. How would must be trans- 
lated, 508. 

Write, (to,) ecrire, ecrit, 89, 121, 
172. 

Wrong, tort, 36. (See To Be.) 

Y. 

Y, to it, in it, 87. F, there, (stands 
before the verb.) Y aller, to go 
there ; y etre, to be there. Its place 
with the personal pronouns, and en, 
87, Obs. 102, 110. Y, (ici,) here; y, 



(Id,) there, 110. Yregarderdepres, 
to be particular, 399. Y a-t-il ? is 
there? 180. (See There is.) Y 
translates the English objective pro- 
noun it ; when by itself, or governed 
by a preposition, (in, with, &c.,) it is 
connected with a verb requiring the 
preposition a, 473, § 50. 

Yes, oui, 25. Si fait, 51, Obs. 26. 

Yesterday, Kiev ; the day before 
yesterday; avant-hier, 107. 

You, vous, 25, 409. (See Vous.) 

Your, votre, vos, 25, 44, 282, 466. 

Yours, le, (la) votre, les votres, 
30, 291, 483 ; d vous, 484. 

Yourself, yourselves, vous-meme. 
vous-memes, 471; (reflected,) vous, 
vous y, vous en, 477, 478. 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 



She does everything gracefully. 

These are very beautiful pictures. 

The German interest was contrary 

to the Russian. 
Cheer up, soldiers; the day is ours. 

To sleep very late. 

To be on the brink of ruin. 

To cast a mist before one's eyes. 

To fret and fume. 

To share the profit. 

To put somebody to the sword. 

To meet with one's match. 

What day of the month is it ? 

All blessings come from God. 

Is that your opinion ?— Do not ques- 
tion it. 

Are those your servants ? — Yes, they 
are. 

Madam, are you the mother of that 
child ? — Y"es, I am. 

Ladies, are you the strangers that 



Elle a de la grace dans tout ce qu'elle 

fait. 
Voila des tableaux d'une grande 

beaute. 
L'interet de VAlhmagne etait op 

pose a celui de la Russie. 
Courage, soldats ; la victoire est a 

nous. 
Dormir la grasse matinee. 
Etre a deux doigts de sa perte. 
Jeter de la poudre aux yeux. 
Jeter feu et fiamme. 
Partager le gateau. 
Passer quelqu'un aujil de l'epee. 
Trouver son maitre. 
Quel quantiime du mois avons-nous ? 
Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu. 
Est-ce la votre opinion ? — Ne doutez 

point que ce ne la soit. 
Sont-ce la vos domastiques ? — Oui, 

ce les sont. 
Madame, etes-vous la mere de cet 

enfant ? — Oui, je la suis. 
Mesdames, etes-vous les etrangeres 



588 



IDIOMATieAL XXPftBSSIOKS. 



have been announced to me ? — 
Yes, we are. 
Ladies, are you pleased with that 
music ? — Yes, we are. 

Madam, are you a mother ?— Yes, \ 

am. 
Madam, are you ill ? — Yes, I am. 

Madam, how long have you been 
married ? — A year. 

Is it long since you arrived ? — A fort- 
night. 

Although that woman shows more 
resolution than the others, she is 
nevertheless not the least afflicted. 

That woman has the art of shedding 
tears, even when she is least 
afflicted. 

That woman proposed herself as a 
model for her children. 

He (or she) has not succeeded in that 
stratagem. 

To be free and open. 

To be full of business. 

To take fire presently. 

The dry weather we had in the spring 
has destroyed all the fruit. 

To put to the vote. 

Life is at stake. 

My honor is concerned in it. 

That is understood. 

To act deliberately. 

To go full speed. 

Shall you go to the opera this even- 
ing ? — Yes, I shall. 

Would you cheerfully go to Rome ? 
— Yes, I would. 



qu'on m'a annoncees ? — Oui, nous 

les sommes. 
Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de 

cette musique? — Oui, nous It 

sommes. 
Madame, etes-vous mire ?— -Oui, je 

le suis. 
Madame, etes-vous malade? — Oui, 

je le suis. 
Madame, depuis quel temps etes- 
vous mariee ? — Je le suis depuis 

un an. 
Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes 

arrivee ? — Je le suis depuis quinze 

jours. 
Quoique cette femme montre plus de 

fermete que les autres, elle n'est 

pas pour cela la moins affligee. 
Cette femme a Tart de repandre des 

larmes dans le temps meme qu'elle 

est le moins affligee. 
Cette femme s'est proposee pour 

modele d ses enfants. 
Cette ruse ne lui a pas reussi. 

Avoir le cceur sur les levres. 
Avoir des affaires par-dessus les 

yeux. 
Avoir la tete pres du bonnet. 
La secheresse qu'il y a eu au prin- 

temps a fait perir tous les fruits. 
Aller aux voix. 
U y va de la vie. 
II y va de mon honneur. 
Cela va sans dire. 
Aller pas a pas. 
Aller a bride abattue. 
Irez-vous ce soir a l'opera? — Oui, 

j'irai. 
Iriez-vous avec plaisi/ a Rome ?— 

Oui, firais. 



THE END. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF . 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, 

With an Appendix, containing the Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and full Paradigms of the 
Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and Impersonal Verbs 

By J. L. Jewett. One volume, I2mo. $1. 

New Method of Learning the French Language. — This grammar must supersede 
ill c:hers now used for instruction in the French language. Its conception and arrangement are 
admirable, — the work evidently of a mind familiar with the deficiencies of the systems, the 
place of which it is designed to supply. In all the works of the kind that have fallen under nur 
notice, there has been so much left unexplained or obscure, and so many things have been 
amitted — trifles, perhaps, in the estimation of the author, but the cause of great embarrassment 
to the learner — that they have been comparatively valueless as self-instructors. The student, 
deceived by their specious pretensions, has not proceeded far before he has felt himself in a 
condition similar to that of a mariner who should 7 at out to sea without a compass to direct 
him. He has encountered difficulty after difficulty, to which his grammar afforded no clue ; 
when, disappointed and discouraged, he has either abandoned the study in disgust, or if hia 
mean? permitted, has resorted to a teacher to accomplish what it was not in his povsor to effect 
by the aid of his 'self-instructor.' 

' l Ollendorff has passed his roller over the whole field of French instruction, and the rugged 
inequalities formerly to be encountered, no longer discourage the learner. What were the 
difficulties of the language, are here mastered in succession ; and the oniy surprise of the 
student, as he passes from lesson to lesson, is, that he meets none of these ' lions in the way.' 

" The value of the work has been greatly enhanced by a careful revision, and the addition of 
an appendix containing matter essential to its compeleteness either as a book foi the use of 
teachers or for self- instruction. " — New- York Commercial Advertiser. 



VALUE'S IMPROVED EDITION OF 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 

With the Lessons divided into Sections of a Proper Length for Daily Tasks, and numerous Cor- 
rections, Additions, and Improvements, suitable for this country, by V. Value ; to which 
is added Value's System of French Pronunciation ; his Grammatical Synopsis ; a 
New Index, and Short Models of Commercial Correspondence. 
One volume, 12mo. Price $1. 

" Mr. Value has taught practically Ollendorff's system for many years, and has bestowet 
much thought and labor on the improvement of this edition. The longer lessons have been judi- 
ciously subdivided; much attention has been bestowed upon the arrangement of the exercise** 
relating to the subjunctive mood: besides the system of pronunciation, we have an excellent 
grammatical synopsis, which appears to us, on a brief examination, very happily constructed, 
and of great value. In his preface the author mentions several minute corrections made in this 
edition, which r-how the care and accuracy bestowed upon it."— Churchman. 



Messrs. I) Appleton & Co. 
Gentlemen, 

I have carefully perused your new edition of Ollendorff by Mr. Value, and find it con- 
tains a 1 ! the improvement? the original work so much required. It is evidently the result of long 
research, time and labor, founded upon experience and a thorough knowledge of the system, anfl 
in my estimation far superior to any work of the kind which T have yet met with. I inten 
adopting the use of it in my classes. Yours, respectfully. 

J. ROEMER, 
Professor of the French Language in the N. Y. Free Academy. 

\* Keys to the Exercises of the above Grammars in separate vols.. 75 ctt. each 

1 Q 



ifanrji. 



COMPANION TO 
OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 

BY GEORGE W. GREENE, 

Instructor in Modem Languages in ^rown University. 
One volume, 12mo. 75 cts. 

"We commend this volume as a Vade-mecum to all young stu ents of the French tongue. 
The dialogues are simple in construction — yet they embrace a wide range of subjects. The 
idiomatic hinis supply a desideratum that has been long needed by the student, as those who 
have attempted to render French colloquy according to grammatical rules, know too well. The 
vocabulary preceding each conversation is a convenience, if not a novelty ; it precludes the neces« 
sity of frequent reference to a more ponderous work." — Literary Union. 

" Mr. Greene is Instructor in Modern languages in Brown University, R. I. He has success- 
fully pn -secuted the system of teaching practised by Ollendorff; and is the author of Ollendorff's 
First Lessons in French. The 'Companion' consists of Dialogues and a Vocabulary. The 
study of it is begun as soon as the scholar has learned enough about French verbs to enable ' : -n 
to translate. The dialogues have each prefixed to them a special vocabulary of the new words 
which occur ir? the lesson. These special vocabularies are to be committed to memory, as also 
the general vocabulary at the end of the series of lessons. When this is learned, the student will 
know all the words which are needed to enable him to speak with propriety on any subject, and 
may read the French of any author with but an occasional resort to a larger Lexicon. Mr. Greene 
is right in enforcing the committing of words to memory : a language cannot be learned without 
such" study. He truthfully remarks : * Learning words by heart is very dull work, and yet it is 
the price every body who wishes to learn a language, must sooner or later pay. Do it in the 
beginning, and the rest of your progress will be easy and pleasant. Put it off— and you will 
never do it at all.' " — & W. Baptist Chronicle. 

" The present work, as its name imports, forms a very appropriate companion to the new 
edition of Ollendorff by M. Value, noticed by us a few days since. It comprises a series of 
ninety-two dialogues, carefully selected, so as to familiarize the student with an extensive range 
of subjects, and to enable him to converse upon them with ease and fluency. 

" The dialogues are followed by a valuable chapter on differences of idioms, in which those 
peculiarities of the language, which cannot be classified under general rules, are clearly exhib- 
ited, accompanied by grammatical hints and useful suggestions. 

" Nearly one-half of the book is taken up with a vocabulary of words arranged according to 
subjects, presenting at a single glance all the principal terms relating to any particular art, pro- 
fession, or branch of science. Among other improvements, we notice the French names of all 
the principal countries, cities, towns, islands, seas, rivers, mountains, <fec, in the world — names 
of the principal nations and races of men, and the proper names of men and women. These 
tables are indispensable to the French student, and alone are worth the price of the book. 

"L Mr. Greene's reputation as Professor of Modern Languages in Brown University, wt 
have » sufficient guaranty of the accuracy of the work."— Buffalo Genl. Adv. 



OLLENDORFF'S 
FIRST LESSONS IN FRENCH, 

OR 

ELEMENTARY FRENCH GRAMMAR, 

INTRODUCTORY TO OLLENDORFF'S LARGER GRAMMAR. 

BY GEORGE W. GREENE, 

Instructor of Modern Languages in Brown U?iiversity. 

One volume. IGmo. 38 els. ; with a Key, 50 cts. 

This volume is intended as an introduction to " Ollendorff's complete French Method," 
and is published in accordance with a very general demand made for a more elementary work 
than the larger Grammar. 

" It is hcUerad that the student who ^hall take the pains to go carefully through this volume, 
in the manner suggested in the Directions for studying it, will come to the study of the ' Com- 
plete M**.hod' with a degree of preparation which will render his gubsequent progress easy and 
agreeable .'• 

19 



/tontjj. 



MEZZOFANTI'S 
SYSTEM OF LEARNING LANGUAGES 

APPLIED TO THE 

STUDY OF FRENCH. 

With a Treatise on French Versification, and a Dictionary of Idioms. Peculiar 

Expressions, etc. 

By J. RoEMERj 

Professor of the. French Language and Literature in the New- York Free Academy. 

One volume, 12mo. $1. 

With the exception of our own tongue, French is undoubtedly the most impor. int language 
of the modern world. Commerce, literature, science, and the fine arts, all demand its -id. It 
therefore is justly classed with the numerous branches of knowledge essential to a good education. 

The work now before us is an amplification of the system pursued by the late Cardinal Mez- 
zofanti, applied to the French language. Professor Roemer, who is favorably known in cc sec- 
tion with the Free Academy of this city, was personally acquainted with this extraordinary lin- 
guist, and received from him the detailsof his successful mode of study. The following prefatory 
passage describes the system : — 

" This eminent man. so remarkable and renowned for the ease and certainty with which he 
acquired a host of languages, proceeded mainly in their study by the observation of their analogy, 
which he regarded as the" key to the various forms of speech existing among divers nations. He 
attached little importance to grammatical rules, except those belonging to general grammar, and 
those comiected with the vernacular ; but insisted largely on close attention to the verbs, and 
considered it of importance to possess a copious and accurate dictionary. His method was to 
make himself well acquainted with the pronunciation, and to this end he would begin by repeat- 
ing as faithfully as possible in sound, a number of phrases, with the sense of which, in" his own 
language, he was thoroughly familiar. Reading aloud, and copying, after careful analysis ol 
the "words and phrases, constituted the residue of his method. He" aimed in his reading and 
copying to select passages which conveyed useful and specific instruction, for the sake of the 
greater" facility they afford in making an' impression on the mind and memory, and also for the 
sake of association between the words and the ideas. He labored hard to enter fully into the 
spirit and sense of the idioms, and gave the finishing stroke to his process by committing to 
memory passages of verse in which the diction was especially elegant and easy. By these 
means be obtained a practical knowledge of the language, which he then sought to perfect, by 
referring to its grammar. It will readily be perceived what efficacy there must be in a system 
which, aiming first to impart a complete knowledge of what may be called the mechanical por- 
tion of a foreign tongue, goes on to bestow upon it an intelligent study of its elements and prL* 
ciples, the effects of which must be to make a deeper and more lasting impression of what has 
already been acquired." 

We approve highly of the method so ably advocated by Professor Roemer : it is simple, en- 
couragw in its nature, and more likely to conduct the student to a sound knowledge of the 
structure of the language than any other with which we are acquainted. The introductory re- 
marks on the history and analogie's of the French language are practical and suggestive. * An 
admi^.ble treatise oh Frerch versification (generally neglecred in tuition), and a copious diction- 
ary Oi .dioms. &c, are very important features in the work. The progressive reading exercises, 
in*pro*e an' verse, have been selected with great taste, and justly chum for the vo'ume the 
additional merit of being highly interesting even to those who have mastered the language-, and 
now cultivate its literature. We cannot close our notice of this excellent work more appropri- 
ately, than by recommending it as being well worthy of the attention of all those who are interested 
in educational progress and the simplification of valuable knowledge —Journal of Commerce. 

NEW POET ICAL FRENC H READER. 
CHOIX DE POESIES 

POTTR LES JEUNES PERSONNES. 

Par Mme. A. COUTAN. 
One volume, 12mo. $1. 
Choix des Poesies pour les Jeunes Personnes, is the title ol a selection of poems in 
the French language, designed for the perusal of the young, by Madame A. Coutan, just pub- 
lished by Appleton & Company, of this city. It is a Very charming collection of some of the 
3weetet-t and most graceful verses in the French language We were hardly aware, till we 
looked over this book, that so many distinguished French authors had contributed \~ a class ol 
productions, so peculiarlv suited to readers of an earlv age. — Evening Post. 

20 



/imjj. 



STANDARD PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. 

IN TWO PARTS. 
Part I. TRENCH AND ENGLISH. | Part II. ENGLISH AND FRENCH. 

The First Part comprehending words in common use — Terms connected with Science— 
t. urnis belonging to the Fine Arts— 4000 Historical Names — 4000 Geographical Names — HOC 
V.. ins lately published, with the pronunciation of every word, according to the French 
Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians; together with 7b0 Critical 
Remarks, in which the various methods of pronouncing employed by different authors are inves- 
tigated and compared with each other. 

The Second Part containing a copious vocabulary of English words and exr.iessions, witb 
«he pronunciation according to Walker. 

THE WHOLE PRECEDED BY 

A Practical and Comprehensive System of French Pronunciation. 
By Gabriel Surenne, P. A. S. E. ? 

French Teacher in Edinburgh ; Corresponding Membt?- of the French Grammatical Society 

of Paris, Src, 6fc. 

Reprinted from a duplicate cast of the stereotype plates of the last Edinburgh edition. 

One stout volume, 12mo., of nearly 900 pages. Price $1,50. 



a few criticisms on its merits. 

Kinderhook Academy. 

Sur file's French Dictionary is in many respects superior to those of " Meadow" and " Boyer.*' 
The Proper Names at the bottom of each page, and the method of explaining the pronunciation, 
(by the French sounds of the vowels, with which the pupil has become familiar,) are in my opin- 
ion distinguishing excellencies. SILAS METCALF. 

Princeton, N. J. 

We use habitually the admirable Dictionary of Surenne. LYMAN COLEMAN. 

National Magazine. 

" This work must have been one of very great labor, as it is evidently of deep research. We 
have given it a careful examination, and are perfectly safe in saying, we have never before seen 
any thing of the kind at all to compare with it. Our space will not permit us to give more than 
this general testimony to its value. Long as the title is, and much as it promises, our examina- 
tion of the work proves that all the promises are fulfilled, and we think that no student of the 
French language should, for a moment, hesitate to possess himself of it. Nor, indeed, will it be 
found less useful to the accomplished French scholar, who will find in it. a fund ot information 
which can no where be met with in any one book. Such a work has for a long time been greatly 
needed, and Mr. Surenne has supplied the deficiency in a masterly style. We repeat, therefore, 
our well digested opinion, that no one in search of a knowledge of the niceties of the French lan- 
guage should be without it." 

New- York Observer. 

" Every student of the French language, and every person of taste who is fond of reading 
French, and wishes to become proficient in that tongue, snould possess this comprehensive but 
complete dictionary. It embraces all the words in common use, and those in science and the 
fine arts, historical and geographical names, etc., with the pronunciation of every word according 
to the French Academy, together with such critical remarks as will be useful to every learner. 
It is published in a form of extreme condensation, and yet contains so full a compilation of words, 
definitions, etc., as scarcely to lea *e any thing to be desired." 

Boston Courier. 

" This is, we believe, the first French pronouncing dictionary that has appeared m the English 
field of French education, and the compiler, Mr. Surenne, maywell felicitate himself on the de- 
cided success which has attended his efforts to furnish us with this long expected desideratum. 
Mr S. baa rendered precise what was before uncertain, clear what had hitherto been obscure, in 
short, put into the hands of both teachers and scholars, an authority in philology and pronuncia- 
tion, is rood, as correct^ U authoritative as Johnson, Walker, or Webster, in the English tongue. 
The method adopted for representing the sounds or words, is tor the English ov American eye 
and ear, so that faultless pronunciation may be depended upon. The phraseology is often thai of 
the French Academy, consequently of the highest authority, and is both copious and practical. 
The English pronunciation is precisely after ihe plan of Webster, imitated or followed with the 
mo cnipulous accuracy, thus giving two extraordinary advantages in one work, vaa.^ a dic- 
tionary of French pronunciation, with words and meanings, and a standard of English pronunci- 
ation. We exhoii. we entreat teachers, parents, guardians, all interested m the education of 
youih, to look at this splendid work of industry and ingenuity, and they will see and rscogni/u ita 
superiority hi a glance 



fimty. 



NEW DRAMATIC FRENCH READER. 



ICHEFS-D'CEUVRES DRAMATICtUES 

DE LA 

LANGUE PKANCAISE. 

Mis en Ordre Progressif, et Annotes, pour en faciliter L' Intelligence. 

PAR A. G. COLLOTp 

Professor de Langues et de Litterature 
jne Volume. 12mo. of 520 pages. Price $1. 

We hare examined this book with great interest, and can confidently recomnend it to sc- 
lents and teachers of the French language, as better adapted to the purposes of a reading book 
han any other with which we are acquainted. It is made up of fourteen complete dramas, 
aken from the works of the best and purest writers, among which are the great names of Cor- 
leille. Racine, Moliere, and Piron. The pieces are systematically arranged in progressive order, 
md the idiomatical difficulties of the language are fully and clearly explained in the notes. Tc 
;hose who are desirous of speaking French this book is invaluable, as the conversational and 
idiomatic phrases, so indispensable to this accomplishment, are met with on every page ; and to 
hose who wish to cultivate their taste, and to obtain a knowledge, not only of the French lan- 
guage, but of the writings of its most eminent dramatists, this volume will supply the place of 
voluminous collections not easy to be obtained. Its typographical accuracy and appearance has 
seldom been equalled in any French book that has heretofore issued from the press of this coun- 
;ry. — Courier and Enquirer. 

This book is made up of pieces of progressive difficulty-, as exercises in the study of French. 
We have first a Proverb or two in the simplest style, with foot-notes explanatory of idiomatic 
phrases; then a couple of Berquin's pieces, intended for learners; then some half dozen of 
Scribe's popular dramas, full of action, and exhibiting many peculiarities of French manners 
and language ; Moliere's Misanthrope • Voltaire's Merope ; Racine's Athalie ; and, lastly, the 
Cinna of Corneille — all entire ; which is, certainly, an improvement on all other French reading 
X)oks, the fragmentary style of which has often vexed us. The whole appears to us admirably 
adapted for its purpose. — Christian Examiner. 



NEW MODERN FRENCH READER. 

MORCEAUX CHOISIES DES AUTEURS MODEMES, 

A LA USAGE DE LA JEUNESSE. 

With a Vocabulary of the New and Difficult Words and Idiomatic Phrases 

adopted in Modern French Literature. 

By F. ROWAN. 

Edited by J. L. Jewett, Editor of Ollendorff 's French Method. 

One volume, 12mo. 75 cents. 

The chief object of the present volume is vo offer the means of making the youth acquainted 
with the French Language, as it is spoken in the present day, and as it is presented in the works 
of '.he modern authors of France, without the risk of sullying the mind of the young reader, by 
an introduction to such scenes and principles, as but too often disgrace the pages of writers who 
would be an honor to humanity, were their moral qualities but equal to their genius. 

The second is to fa. litate the task of the teacher, by endeavoring to render the work attrac- 
tive in the eyes of the pupil ; and such selections have therefore been made, as will, it is hoped, 
be interesting and entertaining to the young reader, while, at the same time, they will prove 
worthy specimens of the peculiar style of their respective authors, and sufficit ntly demonstrate 
the great idiomatic rcMution which has taken place in the French Language within the last 
quarter of a century. 

The American edition of the work is rendered still more valuable and interesting by 'ne addi- 
tion of extracts from the writings of Sismondi and Mignet. modern historians of distirguished 
merit. The vocabulary of new and difficult words and idiomatic phrases is also more conveni- 
ently arran^eil for reference, and considerably enlarged ; while the whole has undergone (borough 
revision, with a view to accuracy in nvery particular; and the orthography has been made to 
conform to th^t if the Dictionary of the Academy and the usage of modern writers. 

List of Auit,ors - Alex. Dumas, Alex, de Tocqueville. Alfred de Vigney, Alph. Karr. Aug 
Thierry. Btenon. Capetigue, De Balzac, De Lamartine, E. Souvestre, Eug'ene Sue, F. So-ilie, 
Guizot, Gust, de Beaumont. Jules Janin, Leon Goslan, D'Aubigne, Merimee, M'chelet, Sal 
vandy. Lavallee. Thiers, Victor Hugo, Villemain, Sismondi, Mignet. 

22 



itolj. 



THE CLASSIC FRENCH READER, 

FOR ADVANCED STUDENTS; 

OR, 

BEAUTIES OF THE FRENCH WRITERS, ANCIENT AND MODERN 

BY ALAIN DE FIVAS. 

With a \ ocabulary, French and English, of all the Words and Idioms 

contained in the Work. By J. L. Jewett. 

One Volume, 12mo. of 390 pages. Price $J. 

*■ This work embraces selections from the writings of all the literary periods, and speciro 
of tne various styles of the most distinguished writers. It is a well-digested book, convenien 
a manual for students, since it unites the advantages of a reading book, lexicon, and gramma ' 

" The ' Classic French Reader' consists of selections from the standard prose and poeti *1 
writers of France. Each selection forms a complete subject, and is of sufficient length fo« a 
single lesson. The choice of pieces is made from every period of the French literary history ; 
so that the student has an opportunity of forming an acquaintance with every species of French 
composition. The selections are suitable for a reading book,— from Moliere, Saint Pierre, Mon- 
tesquieu, Chateaubriand, Madame de Stael, Rousseau, Fenelon, Voltaire, Bossuet, and others, in 
prose ; in poetry, from La Fontaine, Florian, Be ranger, J. B. Rousseau, Racine, and other 
eminent writers. Short sketches of the life of each are given, which are not without their use. 
The vocabulary ' embraces and defines every word used in the book, not only in its particular 
acceptation, but in its primary significance [signification].' The idiomatic phrases are noticed. 
Occasionally foot-notes are added by way of explanation. Any one who will make himself 
familiar with all the pieces in the book, will be prepared to read works in every department of 
French literature." 



INTRODUCTION TO THE FRENCH LANGUAGE: 

CONTAINING 

Fables, Select Tales, Remarkable Facts, Amusing Aneedotes, etc. 

WITH 

A DICTIONARY 

OF ALL THE WORDS TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH. 
By ALAIN DE FIVAS, Member of several Literary Societies. 
One neat volume, 12mo. Price 50 cents. 
This work has passed through several editions in England, and rapidly found its way as a 
class-book into the most eminent public and private seminaries. 

The pieces contained in this volume comprehend a great variety of subjects, and are generally 
of a lively and familiar style, the phrases will serve as elements of conversation, and enable ihe 
6tudent to read witn facility other French books. 

In the Dictionary at the end, is given the meaning of every word contained in the book. 
The explanatory words are placed at the end of the book, instead of at the foot of the page; 
by this method learners will derive considerable benefit. 

Though this work is designedly f>r the use of schools, the author has borne in mind, that 
many of the learners of French are adults, therefore, while it is adapted for youthful students, 
in endeavor has also been made to make it acceptable to those of more advanced age. 



IN PREPARATION. 

A NEW DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. 

Part I. FRENCH AND ENGLISH | Part II. ENGLISH AND FRENCH. 

Based on the recent Dictionary of A. Spikrs with many valuable Addition* 

and Improvements. 

On* volume, large 8vo. Uniform with " Adler's German Lexicon." 

23 



<0?rrara. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 
OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 

Reprinted from the Frankfort edition, to which is added a Systematic Outline of the differeri 

Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with full Paradigms, and a 

complete List of the Irregular Verbs. 

BY GEORGE J. ADLER, A. B., 

Professor of German in the University of the City of New- York. One volume, 12mo. 81 50. 

(Cr A KEY TO THE EXERCISES, in a separate volume. 75 cts. 

** Ollendorff's new method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the German Lan- 
guage, with a systematic outline ofGerman Grammar, by George J. Adler, is one of those rare 
works which leave nothing to be desired on the subjects of which they treat. The learner's dif- 
ficulties are so fully and exactly provided for, that a constant sense of satisfaction and progress 
is felt from the beginning to the end of the book. A bare inspection of one of the lessees will 
satisfy any one acquainted with the elements ofGerman grammar, that it adapts itself perfectly 
to his wants. With the systematic outline of grammar by Prof. Adler, the new method is sub- 
stantially perfect, and it is probably second in its advantages only to residence and intercourse 
with educated Germans." 

" The study of the German is becoming so essential a part of an ordinary education, that 
every work tending to facilitate the acquisition of the language should be welcomed. An Ameri- 
can edirion of Ollendorff has been much wanted. His system is bayed upon natural principles. 
He teaches by leading the student to the acquisition of phrases, from which he deduces the rules 
of the language. The idioms are also carefully taught, and the entire construction of the system 
is such that, if adhered to with fidelity and perseverance, it will secure such a practical know- 
ledge of the German as can be acquired by no other mode, so rapidly and thoroughly. We 
heartily commend the book to all who really wish to understand a tongue which contains so 
many treasures. 



NEW GRAMMAR FOR GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 

THROUGH THE MEDIUM OF THE GERMAN \ 

Arranged and adapted for Schools and Private Instruction, 

BY P. G ANDS. 

One volume, 12mo. 

Key to the same, uniform with the above. Price 75 cts. 

u My compilation of the French Grammar after the method of Ollendorff; has made the Ger 
man public so thoroughly acquainted with this highly practical system of instruction, that it will 
net be necessary to add any further recommendation in this place. It was so universally ac- 
knowledged and adopted, that I was induced to compile a similar Grammar for Germans to 
Learn English, and I did this the more willingly because I was urged to do so by many from all 
quarters. 

u In carrying out the plan, I endeavored to introduce exe- rises in questions and answers 
suited to familiar and social conversation, so as to do away with lhe antiquated Phrase-books 
still in use. The frequent application and repetition of the* rules set forth in this book. I have 
sought to make as lree from dull monotony as possible, by giving the sentences a new turn, and 
by arranging them in different order, so as not to repeat the same over and over again. 

" A practical routine of instruction carried on for many years, has taught me the wants o/ 
the student ; I feel therefore perfectly confident in bringing this book before the public. 

"P. GANDS." 

24 



tak auii Mb. 



ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES. 

OPINIONS OF SCHOLARS 

From A. B. Atkins, Baltimore. 

" I have introduced Arnold's First and Second Latin Book as a Text-book in ray institution, 

my classes have already made great proficiency ; indeed I cannot express in too high terms my 

admiration of ihe Series ; it is the only method of teaching the classics, and no books have evei 

been published which seem to be so admirably adapted to teach Latin and Greek as they." 



From E. S. Dixwell, Public Latin School, Boston. 
" I have caused both ' Arnold's Greek and Latin Prose Composition,' as well as ' Arnold's 
First and Second Latin Book,' to be introduced into this School, which is the best proof of 
the estimation in which I hold them." 

From William A. Ely, University of Michigan. 
"I have made considerable use of 'Arnold's Latin Book/ ' Cornelius Nepos,' and 'Greek 
Reader,' &c, in my Classes, and can from experience say that they are the best Text-books of 
the kind with which I am acquainted.' 

Gentlemen,— In reply to your letter, I have to say that I can, from the most satisfactory 
experience, bear testimony to the excellence of your series of Text-Books for Schools. I am in 
the daily use of Arnold's Latin and Greek Exercises, and consider them decidedly superior to any 
other Elementary Works in those Languages. 

LYMAN COLEMAN, D. D., 
Prof, of the German, Greek, and Latin Languages, Princeton. 



Dear Sir, — I am much pleased with Arnold's Latin Books. A class of my older boys have 
just finished the first and second books. They had studied Latin for a long time before but never 
understood it, they say, as they do now. CHAS. M. BLAKE, 

Classical Teacher in Brown's Prince-street Academy, Philadelphia. 



After having in constant use since their first appearance Arnold's Series of both Latin and 
Greek Books, my experience enables me confidently to pronounce upon their unrivalled merits. 
I state, without fear of contradiction, that, even with greater labor and pains on the part of the 
teacher, equal progress cannot be made without as can be with them. And they succeed admirably 
in awakening an interest in the pupil, and in making a lasting impression upon his memory. It is 
an application of Bacon's principle for forming an accurate man. 

R. B. TSCHUDE, 
Prof, of Ancient Languages, Norfolk, Va. 

Arnold's Latin and Greek Composition. In the skill with which he sets forth the 
idiomatic peculiarities, as well as in the directness and simplicity with which he states the facts 
of tne Ancient Languages, Mr. Arnold has no superior. I know of no books so admirably adapted 
to awaken an interest in the study of language, or so well fitted to lay the foundation of a correct 
scholarship and refined taste. N. WHEELER, 

Principal Worcester County High School 

From N. W. Benedict, A. M., Prof, of Languages in the Rochester Collegiate Institute 
Gentlemen, — I am under obligations to you by D. Hoyt for a copy of Arnold's First and 
Second Latin Book, and for a copy of Arnold's Greek Reading Book. Other volumes of Arnold's 
Serit^ have been forwarded to me; and after a careful examination of the works, directed more 
particularly to their plan, I am convinced of their superior merits and have introduced them into 
the Institute. I am specially pleased with the kind of help afforded in his Cornelius Nepos, 
which is such as to give the student a critical and accurate understanding of the text, and at 
the same time to stimulate his mind to greater exertion to apprehend the beauties of the lan- 
guage. The plan is designed and well adapted to make the knowledge obtained the property of 
the scholar. 

Extract ft am a Report of an Examination of the Male Department of the Parochial School of 
St. Paul's Church, Rome. N. Y. 

* * * * " But were we to single out any part of the examination as worthy of special notice. 
it would be i h;ii upon ' Arnold's First Book in Latin.' Many an Academician, who has studied 
Latin in trie ordinary way for two years, could not sustain an examination as did the lads of thi0 
claw, who have studied Arnold's First Lessons only about six months. Arnold's method is ad- 
mirable for making thorough scholars and accurate grammarians." 

31 



^Trunin 
' A DICTIONARY 

GERMAN AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, 

INDICATING THE ACCENTUATION OF EVERY GERMAN WORD, CONTAINING SEVERAL 
HUNDRED GERMAN SYNONYMS, TOGETHER. WITH A CLASSIFICATION AND 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE IRREGULAR VERB6, AND A DICTION- 
ARY OF GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS. 

COMPILED FROM THE WORKS OF HILPERT, FLUGEL, GREIB, HEYSB, 
AND OTHERS. 

I N TWO P A RTS : 

I GERMAN AND ENGLISH — II. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 

BY G. J. ADLER, A. M., 

Professor of the German Language and Literature in the University of ike 
City of New- York. 

Oas large volume, 8vo , of 1100 pages. Price $5. Strongly and neatly bonni 

Extract from the Preface. 

In preparing this volume, our principal aim was to offer to the American student ol 
tted German a work whicn would embody all the valuable results of the most recent 
fat, instigations in German Lexicography, and which might thus become not only a relia- 
ble guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one which would not iorsake 
him in the higher walks of his pursuit, to which its literary and scientific treasures 
would naturally invite him. The conviction that such a work was a desideratum, and one 
which claimed immediate attention, was first occasioned by the steadily increasing inter- 
est manifested in the study of the German by such among us as covet a higher intellect- 
ual culture, as well as those who are ambitious to be abreast with the times in all that 
concerns the interests of Learning, Science, Art, and Philosophy. 

in comparing the different German-English Dictionaries, it was found that all of them 
were deficient in their vocabulary of foreign words, which now act so important a pari 
net only in scientific works, but also in the best classics in the reviews, journals, news- 
papers, and even in conversational language of ordinary life. Hence we have endeav- 
oured to supply the desired words required in Chemistry, Mineralogy, Practical Art, 
Commerce, Navigation, Rhetoric, Grammar, Mythology, both ancient and modern. The 
ta^entuation of the German words, first introduced by Hernsius, and not a little improved 
by flilpert and his coadjutors, has also been adopted, and will be regarded as a most de- 
sirable and invaluable aid to the student. Another, and it is hcped not the least, valu- 
able addition to the volume, are the synonyms, which we have generally given in an 
abridged and not unfrequently in a new form, from Hilpert, who was the first that offered 
to the English student a selection from the rich store of Eberhard, Maas, and Gruber. 
Nearly all the Dictionaries published in Germany having been prepared with special 
reference to the German student of the English, and being on that account incomplete in 
the German-English part, it was evidently our vocation to reverse the order for this side 
of the Atlantic, and to give the utmost possible completeness and perfection to the Ger- 
man pari. This was the proper sphere of our labor. 

Morning Courier and New- York Enquirer. 

The Applstons have just published a Dictionary of the German Language, containing 
Eng!br names of German words, and German translations of English words, by Mr. 
Adlk.r, Professor of Gerrsao in the University of the City of New-York. 

In view of the present and rapidly increasing disposition of American students to make 
themselves familiar with the Language and Literature of Germany, the publication ol 
this work seems <. specially timely and important. It is in form a large, substantial octavo 
volume of 1400 pages, beautifully printed in clear and distinct type, and adapted in every 
way to the constant services for which a lexicon is made. The purpose aimed at by the 
editor cannot be more distinctly stated than in his own words, quoted from the preface, 
in which he Mates that he sought u to embody all the valuable results of the most recent 
investigations in German Lexicography, so that his work might thu? become not only a 
reliable guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one which would not 
forsake him m the higher walks of his pursuits, to which its literary treasures would 
naturally invite him." All who are in any degree familiar with German, can bear wttr 
uess to the necessity mat has long been felt for such a work. It is needed by students ol 
the language at every stage of their progress. None of those hitherto in use have been 
satisfactory — the best of them, that published in Philadelphia, in 1845, lacking verv many 
of the essentials of a reliable and servicable lexicon. From a somewhat close examina- 
tion of its contents, we are satisfied that Mr. Adler's Dictionary will be universally re- 
garded as the best extant. Its great superiority lies in it» completeness, no word in any 
department of science or literature being omitted. We cannot doubt that it will beooma 
at once the only German lexicon in use throughout the country. 



3tali(tB. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 

With Additions and Corrections by Felix Foresti, Prof, of the Italian Language in Columbia 
College, New-York City. One volume. 12mo. $1 50. 

KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 

One vol. 12mo. 75 cts. 

"Ollbndorff's Italian Grammar. — The system of learning arxl teaching the living lan- 

fuages by Ollendorff is so superior to all other modes, that in England and on the continent oJ 
Jurope, scarcely any other is in use, in well-directed academies and other institutions of learning. 
To those who feel disposed to cultivate an acquaintance with Italian literature, this work will 
prove invaluable, abridging, by an immense deal, the period commonly employed in studying 
the language." 



ACCOMPANIMENT TO OLLENDORFF'S ITALIAN GRAMMaR. 

CRESTOMAZIA ITALIANAI 

A COLLECTION OF 

SELECTED PIECES IN ITALIAN PROSE, 

DESIGNED AS A 

CLASS READING BOOK FOR BEGINNERS 

IN THE STUDY OF 

THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 

BY E. FELIX FORESTI, LL. D., 

PROFESSOR OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN COLUMBIA COLLFSE 

AND IN THE UNIVERSITY OF THE CITY OF NEW- YORK. 

One volume, 12mo. Price $1. 

" The Italian Reader is compiled by Mr. Foresti, Professor of the Italian Language in the 
Columbia College and the University of New- York. It appears to be designed to follow the study 
of Ollendorff's Italian Grammar, on which work many correct judges have pronounced thai no 
important improvement can well be made. In making selections for the book before us, Mr. 
Foresti has preferred modern Italian writers to the old school of novelists, historians, and poets. 
In this he has done a good thing ; for the Italian Reader contains the modern language. True, 
there are some innovations, some changes which many would deem a departure from original 
purity, but nevertheless it is the language which one finds and hears spoken in Italy. These 
chaag *3 have gone on under the eye and against the stern authority of the Academy delta Crusca. 
vrA in their magnificent new dictionary, new in process of publication, they have found them- 
wives compelled to insert many words which are the growth not only of modern necessity, but 
if caprice. 

" The selections in the Italiau Reader are from popular authors, such as Botta, Manzoni 
Wachiavelli, Villani, and others. They are so made as not to constitute mere exercises, but con- 
am distinct relations so complete as to gratify the reader and engage his attention while they 
instruct. This is a marked improvement on that old system which exacted much labor without 
enlisting the sympathies of the student. The selections from Manzoni, for example, are from 
the " Prutntssi Sj)osi" one of the noblest works of fiction ever issued from the press— a work 
BO popular as to have gone through an incredible number of editions in Italy, while it has been 
translated into every language of Europe. There have been, we believe, no less than three die* 
tinct English translations made, two ol which were done in this country. The Reader contains 
six extracts from this novel, among which are the beautiful episodes of Father Cristoforo and 
the Nun of Monza, and a description of the famine and plague of Milan in the year 1630, The 
account of the plague rivals the celebrated one of Boccacio in his Decameron. The idioms 
that occur in the selections are explained by a glossary appended to each. The Italian Reader 
can with confidence be recommended to students in the language as a safe anil sure guide. After 
mastering it, the Italian poets and other classicists may be approached with confidence. v — Savant 
tta/i Republican. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
THE SPANISH LANGUAGE, 

UTith an Appendix, containing a brief, but comprehensive Recapitulation of the Rules as well a* 

of all the Verbs, both Regular and Irregular, so as to render theii use ea&y 

and familiar to the most ordinary capacity. 

TOGETHER WITH 

PRACTICAL RULES FOR SPANISH PRONUNCIATION, AND MODELS OF 
SOCIAL AND COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 

The whole designed for young learners and persons who are their own instructors. 

8y M. VELAZQUEZ and T. SIMON NE, Professors of the Spanish and French Language* 

One volume, 12mo. of 560 pages. Price SI 50. 

^ KEY TO THE SAME IN A SEPARATE VOLUME, 75 cts. 

"Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar. — This is another number cf the admirable ser.es of 
elementary books of instruction in the language of Modern Europe, for tfhich the public is in- 
debted to the Appletons. Ollendorff's method of teaching languages, especially living languages 
H now in universal use, and enjoys a very decided pre-eminence over any other now in use, in 
•emuch as it combines the merits, and avoids the faults of all others, and has, besides, many very 
marked and admirable peculiarities. No other books are now in general use, and his elementary 
treatises have won a unanimous favor not often accorded to any work in any department of hu 
man knowledge. Their chief peculiarity consists in this, that they lead the learner, by gradual 
■teps, each perfectly simple and easy, from the first elements even to the nicest idioms of the 
Tarious languages, comprehending, in the process, a complete mastery of Grammatical rules and 
colloquial phrases. They are in common use, not only in this country, but throughout Europe, 
and are likely to supersede, every where, all similar books. 

"This method of learning Spanish, which has just been issued, is likely to be even more 
widely useful, especially in this country, than those which have preceded it, since recent events 
have rendered a knowledge of Spanish more than usually important to all classes of our people. 
The editors of the work are widely known as accomplished scholars and distinguished teachers, 
and the book derives still higher authority from their connection with it. We commend it with 
great confidence to all who desire to become acquainted with the Castilian tongue." — New- Yjrk 
Courier and Enquirer. 

%m Grammar far Ipaittartis to tan (Knglistt. 

IN PREPARATION. 

GRAMMATICA 1NGLESA 

SEGUN 

EL SISTEMA DE OLLENDORFF, 

Iccompafiado de un Appendice que comprende en compendio las reglas contenidas en el cuerpc 
Hincipal de la obra: un Tratado sobre la pronunciacion, division y formacion de las palabraa 
ngWsas ; una lista de los verbos regulares e irregulares, consus conjugaciones y las distintaa 
preposiciones que ngen : model :s de correspondencia, &c, &c, todo al alcance de la capacidad 
us mediana. 

POR 

RAMON PALENZUELA, 

AbagadQ) Boctor en Derecho Civil de la Universidad de Car&cas ( Venezuela} y Pro/war 

de lenguas en Neuva- York. 

One vol. 12mo. 



A NEW SPANISH READER. 

CONSISTING OF 

PASSAGES FROM THE MOST APPROVED AUTHORS, IN PROSE AND VERSE 

ARRANGED IN PROGRESSIVE ORDER J 

For the vse of those who wish to obtain easily, a Practical Knowledge of 
tne Castilian Language ; with Plain Rules, for its Pronun- 
ciation, Notes Explanatory of the Idioms and difficult 
Constructions, and a Copious Vocabulary. 

BEING A SEQUEL TO OLLENDORFF'S METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND 
SPEAK THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 

BY MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, 

Editor of Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar. One volume. 12mo. Price $1.25. 

This book being particularly intended for the use of beginners, has been prepared with three 
objects in view, namely ; to furnish the learner with pleasing and easy lessons, progressively 
developing the beauties and difficulties of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their 
minds »vith select instruction ; and thirdly, to form their character, by ins: lling correoi 

Erineiples into their hearts. Tn order, therefore, to obtain the desired effect, the extract* 
ave been carefully selected from such classic Spanish writers, both ancient and modern 
whose style is generally admitted to be a pattern of elegance, combined with idiomatir 
purity and sound morality. — Extract from Preface. 

A NEW SPANISH PHRASE BOOK. 
AN EASY INTRODUCTION 

TO 

SPANISH CONVERSATION. 

Containing all that is necessary to make a rapid progress in it. 

PARTICULARLY DESIGNED FOR PERSONS WHO HAVE LITTLE TIME TO 

STUDY OR ARE THEIR OWN INSTRUCTORS. 

BY MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 

One volume. 18mo. 100 pages. 38 cents. 

" The author of this little volume has long been favorably known as a teacher of the 
Spanish language. He has supplied, in this volume, one of the best and must useful booki 
for learners of Spanish we have yet seen. It will prove a very efficient help to conversation 
in Spanish ; and there is much more information in it than the size of the book wonld 
«oad one to expect." — Commercial Advertiser. 

In preparation, 

A DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

SPANISH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. 

IN TWO PARTS! I. SPANISH AND ENGLISH. II. ENGLISH AND SPANISH 



B\ MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, 

Editor of Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar, and 
M. SEOANE, M. D. 
In one large 8vo. volume, uniform with " Adler's German Lexicon.' 






-^ 









^ ,< 



I 



\^- *K- 



^ 



t • -P 



,/v 















^r < 



-p. 






^ 



^ ** 






^ 






^ 












Deacidified using the Bookkeeper p 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxij 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnolcfl 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESER 

1 1 1 Thomson Parte Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 1601 
(724)779-2111 



Hi 

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 117 625 6 



